JP7470396B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel gaming machines (commonly referred to as "slot machines").

Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, for example, gaming machines are known that offer special games in which a large amount of prize can be won when a winning jackpot is won.

In other words, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has entered the starting hole. Then, when a gaming ball has entered the starting hole, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not a winning prize has been won. At this time, a special symbol is displayed variably on a specified display for a specified variable time. Then, when the specified variable time has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed stationary in a display mode indicating that a winning prize has been won, and the opening and closing member of the large prize opening is operated, thereby providing the player with a special game in which many prizes can be won.

JP 2017-006393 A

With such conventional gaming machines , there is a concern that interest in gaming may decline.

This invention was made in light of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Means 1: A determination means for making a determination;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judging means;
a replica image display means for displaying a replica image of an object to be operated when the acceptance of the operation by the player is permitted,
A gaming machine that, when an operation by a player is accepted, displays a post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance,
The post-acceptance display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of post-acceptance displays including a first post-acceptance display and a second post-acceptance display,
the first post-reception display and the second post-reception display are displayed as images different from each other,
When the post-reception display is displayed as the second post-reception display, if a specific condition is satisfied while the second post-reception display is displayed, the second post-reception display can be made to be in a hidden state based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, but when the post-reception display is displayed as the first post-reception display, even if the specific condition is satisfied while the first post-reception display is displayed, the first post-reception display is not made to be in a hidden state based on the satisfaction of the specific condition,
When the first post-reception display is not made to be in a non-display state based on the establishment of the specific condition, a specific type of effect sound will not be newly output when the specific condition is established. However, when the second post-reception display is made to be in a non-display state based on the establishment of the specific condition, there are cases where the specific type of effect sound will be newly output when the specific condition is established, and cases where the specific type of effect sound will not be newly output.
the specific condition is set as one condition that may be established when an operation or action other than an operation for displaying either the first post-reception display or the second post-reception display is performed,
moreover,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific condition is satisfied, a special sound different from the specific type of performance sound can be output based on the specific condition being satisfied, regardless of whether the first post-acceptance display is not made invisible based on the specific condition being satisfied or the second post-acceptance display is made invisible as a result of the specific condition being satisfied.

This invention can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 1A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 1A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame has been removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of a locking member in the outer frame. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from the front. An explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit of Figure 37. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame of the operation button, etc., in a view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame, etc., in a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the appearance of the performance operation unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). 1A is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in Figure 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in Figure 56. FIG. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the rear. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine; FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of a game panel of a different configuration from that of Figure 63, seen from the front, along with its front components, board holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from behind. This is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. This is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board, which relays the electrical connection between the payout control board that constitutes the main board and the CR unit and degree display board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. 2 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; This is a block diagram of the liquid crystal and sound control unit and the surroundings of the VDP with built-in sound source. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 75. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between a main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of a dispensing control unit. FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing control input circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Figure 81. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing motor drive circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board. This is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws on the display area of the upper tray liquid crystal display device. A table showing examples of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the dispensing control board. 11 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. A table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in Figure 89 to the peripheral control board. This is a table showing examples of various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a LOCKN signal history creation process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection malfunction determination process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection recovery process. 11 is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper tray side liquid crystal transmitter IC. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing (step S5232). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing processing (step S5234). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern process processing (step S5238). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S5280). A flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). 1A is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a pattern determination table. A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop pattern setting process (step S5281). A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). A flowchart showing the steps for the first special pattern change processing (step S5283). A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop processing (step S5284). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403). This is a diagram showing a judgment table T1 of the presentation pattern (variable presentation) referenced in the above-mentioned presentation pattern variation start process when in the normal game state. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table. This figure shows the notification content, notification mode, and notification time for each type of notification sound exemplified in Figure 119, as well as the conditions for terminating the notification (cancellation conditions). FIG. 2 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit. 1 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit. FIG. This figure shows an example of a selection table for presentation patterns in a presentation mode in which the sword-drawing presentation can be executed, where (A) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to display the sword-drawing preparation transition presentation depending on the type of variation pattern, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to display the actual sword-drawing presentation. This is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing action of a sword decoration when an aura member is attached to the sword portion (blade portion) itself, showing (A) a sheathed state, (B) a first unsheathing state, and (C) a second unsheathing state. 4A to 4C are vertical cross-sectional views illustrating the operation of the aura member. 11 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing action of a sword decoration when an aura member is attached to the sheath, showing (A) a sheathed state, (B) a first unsheathing state, and (C) a second unsheathing state. 4A to 4C are vertical cross-sectional views illustrating the operation of the aura member. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the operation transitions of the sword decorations during the princess reach performance. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the operation transitions of the sword decorations during the princess reach performance. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the operation transitions of the sword decorations during the princess reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes the operation performance of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the motion transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes the operation performance of the operation buttons that are used in a variety of ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes the operation performance of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. A diagram explaining the shape of the sword decoration used in the pseudo-consecutive performance. This figure shows an example of a transition of a reach presentation in which a pre-operation suggestion presentation of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined by lottery by the peripheral control board that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during a reach presentation based on the change presentation (reach presentation) of the change pattern selected by the main control board. This figure shows an example of a transition of a reach presentation in which a pre-operation suggestion presentation of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined by lottery by the peripheral control board that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during a reach presentation based on the change presentation (reach presentation) of the change pattern selected by the main control board. This figure shows an example of a transition of a reach performance in which a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during the reach performance, as with the first suggestion pattern described above. This figure shows a step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion performance in which, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion performance, the sword decoration does not become operable, but the operation button becomes operable at first, and then the sword decoration becomes operable. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated mock-up image from the start to the end of a valid period. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated mock-up image from the start to the end of a valid period. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation when a second valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a modified example of a presentation that indicates the degree of expectation regarding an integrated model image in stages. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation during the effective period in which the integrated model image is displayed. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation during the effective period in which the integrated model image is displayed. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation during the effective period in which the integrated model image is displayed. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the effect when a second reception permissible state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when a first reception permissible state occurs. A figure showing an example of the presentation content when a second reception permissible state occurs. A figure showing an example of the presentation content when a first reception permissive state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fourth reception permissible state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fifth reception allowable state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of a presentation when a first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of a presentation when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of a presentation when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a third reception period (third reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a fifth reception period (fifth reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a sixth reception period (sixth reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the judgment and a seventh acceptance period (seventh acceptance presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period B (reception presentation B) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. 11 is a table showing an example of settings related to occurrence conditions of reception periods A to D. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a fluctuation pattern in which reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period B (reception presentation B) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the reception period D. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the reception period D. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the reception period D. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a reception period E (reception presentation E) occurs. A diagram showing an example of a presentation during the acceptance period E. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first B reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first B reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second B reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third B reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third B reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first B reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a third B reception period occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first C reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first C reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third C reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first C reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first C reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second C reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third C acceptance period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third C acceptance period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third C acceptance period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first C reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a third C reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a third C reception period occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second D reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first E reception period. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a reception period-related periodicity display in a first E reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first E reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first E reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first E reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second E reception period. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a reception period-related periodicity display in a second E reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second E reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second E reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second E reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third E reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 3E reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 3E reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a fourth E reception period. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a reception period-related periodicity display in a fourth E reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 4E acceptance period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 4E acceptance period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 5E reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth E reception period. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of a special image display with periodic changes. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of a special image display with periodic changes. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of a special image display with periodic changes. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a basic example of a presentation when a period during which multiple operations are permitted occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a basic example of a presentation when a period during which multiple operations are permitted occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a basic example of a presentation when a period during which multiple operations are permitted occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first F reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first F reception period. 13 is a diagram illustrating a periodicity display in a first F reception period. FIG. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 1st F reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second F reception period. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a periodicity display in a second F reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second F reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second F reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third F reception period. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a periodicity display in a 3F reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 3rd F reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 3rd F reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a fourth F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a fourth F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 5F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a seventh F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a seventh F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of an 8F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of an 8F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 9th F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 9th F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 10F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 10F reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 10th floor reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 10th floor reception period occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of an 11F reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of an 11F reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which an 11th F reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which an 11th F reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 12F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 12F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 13F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 13F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 14F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 14F reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 14th F reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 14th F reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 15F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 15F reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 15th floor reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 15F reception period according to a first modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 15F reception period according to a first modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 15F reception period according to a first modified example. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 15F reception period occurs in the first modified example. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 15F reception period occurs in the first modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 15F reception period according to a second modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 15F reception period according to a second modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 15F reception period according to a second modified example. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 15F reception period occurs in the second modified example. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 15F reception period occurs in the second modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 16F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 16F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 16F reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 16th F reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 16th F reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 17F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 17F reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 17F reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 17thF reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a 17thF reception period occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 12F reception period according to a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 12F reception period according to a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 13F reception period according to a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 13F reception period according to a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 16F reception period according to a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 16F reception period according to a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 16F reception period according to a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 17F reception period according to a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 17F reception period according to a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 17F reception period according to a modified example. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first G reception permission state. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first G reception-permitting state occurs. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first G reception permission state according to a modified example. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first G reception permission state according to a modified example. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first G reception permission state according to a modified example. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first G reception allowance state occurs in a modified example. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first G reception allowance state occurs in a modified example. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second G reception permission state. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a second G reception-permitting state occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a 3G reception permission state. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a 3G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a 3G reception-permitting state occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a 4G reception permission state. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a 4G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a 4G reception-permitting state occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a 5G reception permission state. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a 5G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a 5G reception allowance state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth G reception permission state. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 6th G reception allowance state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth G reception permission state according to a modified example. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a sixth G reception allowance state occurs in a modified example. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a sixth G reception allowance state occurs in a modified example. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a seventh G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 7th G reception allowance state occurs. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 7th G reception allowance state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of an 8G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 8th G reception allowance state occurs. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 8th G reception allowance state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a 9th G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 9th G reception allowance state occurs. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 9th G reception allowance state occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a 10th G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a 10th G reception allowance state occurs. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a 10th G reception allowance state occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of an 11th G reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 11th G reception allowance state occurs. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 11th G reception allowance state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of an 11th G reception permission state according to a modified example.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 10. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Fig. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots game balls.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a panel member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, an upper outer frame hinge member 60 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 that is attached to the upper left end side of the panel member 50 when viewed from the front and to the left frame member 30. The upper outer frame hinge member 60 and the lower outer frame hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be operated by the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plate unit 320 that is attached to the lower front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100, and a participatory type display unit 320 that is attached to the center of the plate unit 320 and allows the player to select a participatory type display depending on the game state that changes as game balls are shot into the game area 5a. It is equipped with a performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting performances, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left of the front side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the top of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the door frame top unit 570.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a portion of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; a main body frame upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame lower hinge member 640 which are attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and which are rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and to which the door frame upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 are rotatably attached, respectively; a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front; and a reinforcing frame 670 attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base 600. The game machine includes a ball launcher 680 for shooting game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a locking unit 700 attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and locking the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, an inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 attached to the rear side along the upper and left sides of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and pays out game balls to the player, a base unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a back cover 980 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable, covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600.

The payout unit 800 of the main frame 4 comprises an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600, a ball tank 802 attached to the top of the payout unit base 801, which is a box-shaped tank that is open upward and extends to the left and right, and which stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), a tank rail 803 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and extends to the left and right to guide the game balls in the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and guides the game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine shape, and a ball guide unit 820 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball guide unit 820, and which stores the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 in a payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 pays out balls one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951; an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and releasing the game balls from either the normal release port 850d or the full release port 850e depending on the storage state of the game balls in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320; and a lower full ball path unit 860 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and having a normal guide path 861 that guides the game balls released from the normal release port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a full guide path 862 that guides the game balls released from the full release port 850e forward and guides them from the front end to the full ball receiving port 274 of the door frame 3.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600, a speaker unit 920 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a lower low-pitched speaker 921 inside, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and housing a power supply board inside, an interface control board box 940 attached to the rear of the speaker unit 920 and housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board box 950 attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and housing a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls inside.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that define the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which game balls are shot and guides game balls launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5a, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are stored in the upper tray 321 and the player rotates the handle 302, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302. When the game balls shot into the game area 5a are received by a winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the winning hole into which the game ball was received. This payout of game balls can increase the player's interest, so that the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be shot into the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 16. Figure 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and Figure 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and Figure 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. Figure 16(a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and Figure 16(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 16(a). The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall or the like.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend left and right, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend up and down. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Furthermore, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces facing outward in the horizontal direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other.

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the underside of the outer frame upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the front view of the apron member 50 and to the left frame member 30. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The outer frame 2 also includes a fascia member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, a fascia reinforcement member 80 that is attached to the rear side of the fascia member 50 and has both ends attached to the left and right frame members 30 and 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position to the left of the center, and a flat right sliding member 82 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position near the right end. The fascia reinforcement member 80 is made of a solid member (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

The outer frame 2 further includes connecting members 85 that respectively connect the upper frame member 10 to the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 to the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 to the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 to the right frame member 40. The outer frame 2 also includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage with an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described below.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 that penetrates from top to bottom and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper horizontal fixing parts 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of a connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached within this engagement notch 11. In addition, the upper frame member 10 has an attachment step 12 that is recessed from the general surface on the top surface and front surface of the left end when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions in left-right length and top-bottom thickness as the upper frame member 10, and is formed to have a longer front-to-back width than the upper frame member 10. The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the left-to-right center at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-to-back direction at both left and right ends. Lower lateral fixing portions 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a right lower connecting member 85D (described later) of the connecting member 85 are attached within the engagement cutouts 21.

The lower frame member 20 also has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. The width of the lower frame member 20 in the front-to-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notches 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same dimension as the front-to-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the area between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the fascia board member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and are formed of extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When assembled into the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have, on the side surfaces that are on the outside in the left-right direction, recesses 31, 41 recessed inwardly between a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end, and protrusions 32, 42 that bulge out from the side surfaces opposite the recesses 31, 41 and are formed with a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32, 42. In addition, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32, 42 and attached.

The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 also have multiple grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These multiple grooves allow the operator to easily hold the pachinko machine 1 by providing finger rests when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility such as an amusement hall, and also enhance the design quality of the pachinko machine 1's exterior.

[2-4. Skirting panel members]
The fascia board member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The fascia board member 50 includes a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front, a left discharge hole 52 cut out in a U-shape from the left end of the rear extension portion 51 to a size that allows game balls to pass through and penetrating vertically, a right discharge hole 53 penetrating vertically to the right of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 to the right of the left discharge hole 52 to a size that allows game balls to pass through, a standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the top surface of the fascia board member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51, and a return portion 55 bulging forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 and inclining rearward as the front surface moves upward.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (described later) is attached to the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on it. The left discharge hole 52 of the front panel member 50 is formed in a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74 (described later) of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed in a position that is to the right of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

The top surface of the fascia board member 50 to the right of the rear extension 51 is inclined so that the front end is lower. The fascia board member 50 also has a left attachment portion 56 for attaching a left sliding member 81 to a portion of the top surface to the right of the rear extension 51, and a right attachment portion 57 for attaching a right sliding member 82 near the right end of the top surface. The bottom surface of the main frame 4 is placed on the top surface of the fascia board member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the front of the fascia board member 50 is decorated with a shallow relief. Although not shown in the figure, the box-shaped interior of the fascia board member 50 is divided into a lattice pattern by multiple ribs, which increases its strength and rigidity. The fascia board member 50 is also formed so that the front half of the fascia board reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 comprises a horizontally extending, flat, rectangular upper fixing portion 61, a flat forward extension portion 62 extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61, a bearing groove 63 extending forward from the right end of the forward extension portion 62 to the center of the left and right sides of the forward extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, a flat lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 61 in a planar view, and a flat hanging portion 65 extending downward from the edge from the left end of the forward extension portion 62, around the front end to the position where the bearing groove 63 opens, and which is continuous with the lateral fixing portion 64 (see Figure 16 (b) etc.).

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 has its upper fixing portion 61 placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed with screws (not shown). The forward extension portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

By inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, the outer frame upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame lower hinge member 70 to support the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Locking member]
As shown in Fig. 16, the locking member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped locking body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, an operating portion 66b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 66a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 66a and then extending diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 66d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 66a. The locking member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the underside of the forward extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by mounting screws 67.

The rear end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is attached through the mounting hole 66d at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. Furthermore, when the locking member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the locking body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so as to be able to abut against a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 abuts against the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in the portion of the bearing groove 63 forward of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking member 66 can rotate the locking body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking body 66a can be rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the locking body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 into the bearing groove 63 or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from within the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 comprises a flat horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 72 rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a discharge hole 74 that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 from top to bottom and is large enough to allow only one game ball to pass through. This lower outer frame side hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the central part of the rising portion 72 in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. This discharge hole 74 is formed to be approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the fascia board member 50.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has a horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the fascia board member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the fascia board reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) that penetrates the upper surface of the fascia board member 50. Also, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached by a screw (not shown) to a portion forward of the protruding portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30. This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can cooperate with the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the skirting board member 50. This allows game balls on the horizontal portion 71 to fall (discharge) to the rear side of the skirting board member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 roll to the rear side where the gap is wider, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74, because the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed. In this case, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged through the discharge hole 74, and game balls can be made less likely to become stuck in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side of the horizontal fixing portion 86 as the part from which the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, an upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-to-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. In other words, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of abutting against the underside of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left-to-right ends of the upper frame member 10. Additionally, the front lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces forward of the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, by screws that are inserted into the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed in from the outer side surfaces.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the lower end of the part of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 that protrudes further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 86. In addition, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of abutting against the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface forward of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end faces of the lower frame member 20, respectively.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for outer frame upper hinge member]
Next, the locking mechanism for the main body frame 4 upper hinge member 620 by the locking member 66 in the outer frame upper hinge member 60 in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member in the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65, and the locking body 66a closes a part of the L-shaped bent bearing groove 63. At the same time, the tip of the locking body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and a space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism for the main frame hinge pin 622 using the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that in the normal support state, in which the main frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a is close to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a small gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65, and they are not in contact), the centers of the main frame hinge pin 622 located in the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are offset diagonally and face each other.

In this normal support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame, which supports the heavy main frame 4, is in contact with the front end of the bearing groove 63, so there is almost no load from the hinge pin 622 on the front end of the lock body 66a. In other words, there is no load on the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. In the figure, the center of the arc on the front end of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the action force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is pulled out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a L-shape and abuts against the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, when the action force F is divided into a component force F1 (normal to the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and a component force F2 acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66), so no moment is applied to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in a direction away from the right hanging portion 65, and the state in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is sandwiched between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63 is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal support state or when the force of the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is applied to the locking member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66 is not constantly loaded, preventing plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c which is integrally formed from synthetic resin, and preventing the hinge pin 622 on the main frame from falling off the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is rotated in a direction moving to the right, the front right side of the locking body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65 and does not rotate any further, so that the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension 62.

In addition, even if the shape of the front end surface of the locking body 66a is not arc-shaped, by positioning the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or at a position where a rotational moment is generated that rotates the front end of the locking member 66 toward the outside of the forward extension portion 62, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66, and even if the locking member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the locking body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension portion 62.

When the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is supported in the bearing groove 63 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. When the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 ...

When the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves to the right due to the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is housed in the space in front of the front end of the lock body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is held (locked) in a rotatable state in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63.

When removing the main frame hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to rotate the locking member 66 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the left, and the locking body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. This places the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 in communication with the opening, and the main frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Anti-theft mechanism and ball-trapping prevention mechanism at the outer frame lower hinge member]
The following describes the anti-theft mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and the ball trap prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. This fascia board member 50 has a vertical wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640, the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50, so that the illegal tool cannot be inserted any further to the rear side, and illegal acts can be prevented from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

In addition, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 that extends forward. If an unauthorized tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 and bends upward, the return portion 55 can bend the tip of the unauthorized tool further forward, preventing unauthorized tools from being inserted into the rear of the main body frame 4 and reliably preventing unauthorized acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

When the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 is provided with a vertical wall portion 54 extending upward, if a game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so there is a risk of it being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. In contrast, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the fascia board member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74, a left discharge hole 52, and a right discharge hole 53 through which the game ball can pass, so that the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74, etc., and the game ball can be reduced from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

This prevents a game ball from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could cause damage around the outer frame lower hinge member 70, or the main frame 4 not closing normally and creating a gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could then be used to commit fraud.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 30. Figure 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 20 is a right side view of the door frame, Figure 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 22 is a rear view of the door frame. Figure 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front, Figure 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and Figure 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in Figure 19, Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in Figure 19, and Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along line C-C in Figure 19. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the rear.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 that is a rectangular frame-shaped unit that extends vertically when viewed from the front, a handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular (quadrilateral) outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left end side when viewed from the front of the reinforcement unit 130 and hingedly attached to the main frame 4, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, and a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the glass unit 190. The door frame 3 and main frame 4 are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, and can be opened and closed. An opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is used to lock the gap between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2. A ball sending unit 250 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 110 and sends game balls to the ball launcher 680. A foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 110 and receives game balls that have been launched by the ball launcher 680 but have not reached the play area 5a and discharges them into the lower tray 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to shoot the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the lower part of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, with the front side bulging forward and the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 comprises an upper tray 321 for storing game balls to be shot into the game area 5a, a lower tray 322 arranged below the upper tray 321 and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 or the foul cover unit 270, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, a ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player within the amount of cash inserted into the ball lending machine or the remaining balance on a prepaid card, and It is equipped with a return button 329 for returning cash or prepaid cards minus the amount of game balls loaned from the ball loan machine, a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball loan machine, a left effect selection button 331 and a right effect selection button 332 that can be operated by the player when an effect is presented, and a lower tray ball removal button 333 for ejecting game balls in the lower tray 322 below the tray unit 320.

The performance operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the center of the left and right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can present performance images to the player. This performance operation unit 400, which will be described in detail later, is equipped with a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is positioned within the operation button 410 so that it can be seen from the player side and can display performance images.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and serves to decorate the left outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 is equipped with a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be illuminated for decoration.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, to the right of the through hole 111, and decorates the right outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is equipped with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 at the front end. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and decorates the upper part of the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 570, the details of which will be described later, is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center of the front surface, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the back.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front of the main frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 attached to the lower front corner of the front, a tray unit 320 to which the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left outer front surface of the through hole 111, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 with a through hole 111 that is a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and penetrates from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and rotatably attached to the main body frame upper hinge member 620 and main body frame lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, a door frame left side decorative board 160 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 to the left of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front side, and a glass unit mounting member 170 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 is equipped with various decorative boards, ball sending solenoid 255, handle rotation detection sensor 307, handle touch sensor 310, single button operation sensor 312, ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending/returning display unit 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461), upper speaker 573, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has an outer shape in a front view that is a square (rectangle) extending vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape in a front view that is approximately a square extending vertically. The through hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and a lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 110. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is provided with a handle mounting surface 112 formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder mounting section 113 recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end when viewed from the front between the handle mounting surface 112 and the through hole 111 and to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached, a cylinder insertion hole 114 that penetrates from the front to the back in the cylinder mounting section 113 and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, and a ball feed opening 115 that penetrates from the front to the front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting surface 112 when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance 251a and ball removal opening 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 110 also has a lower tray passage hole 116 that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and exposes the ball discharge hole 276 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, an upper tray passage hole 117 that penetrates from front to back near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, adjacent to the lower edge of the through hole 111, and exposes the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, a glass unit mounting section 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and a speaker insertion hole 119 that penetrates from front to back at both upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110 and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 and 33. The reinforcement unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement metal plate 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a middle reinforcement metal plate 132 extending left and right and attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a left reinforcement metal plate 133 extending up and down and attached along the left edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, a right reinforcement metal plate 134 extending up and down and attached along the right edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcement metal plate 134 and engaging with the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing metal plate 133 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the left reinforcing metal plate 133 with screws. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, etc.

The upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, the right reinforcing metal plate 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing metal plate 132 has a notch 132a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions in the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 that are each bent in the front-to-rear direction, and these portions increase the strength and rigidity of the reinforcing unit and also prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wire or flathead screwdrivers from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33 etc. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 comprises: a door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 attached to the door-frame base 110 and having a pair of protruding pieces 141a spaced apart vertically; a cylindrical door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 which passes through the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 and has an upper end which is inserted into the door-frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main-frame-side upper hinge member 620; a disk-shaped flange member 143 attached to a position between the pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142; and a lock spring 144 which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, through which the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 is inserted, and which urges the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 upward.

The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of a pair of protruding pieces 141a (not shown), and is U-shaped in side view with an open front. The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the mounting piece is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which protrudes above the upper protruding piece 141a, is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the upper door frame hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a that is bent horizontally. This bent portion abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring that can be inserted through the door frame upper hinge pin 142, with its upper end abutting the flange member 143 and its lower end abutting the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143.

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the upper hinge member 140 of the door frame side upper hinge member 620 can be inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, or removed downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the upper hinge axis bracket 141 on the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame, and is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 of the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, which will be described later. This allows the upper hinge member 140 and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame-side lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extension piece 151a attached to the door-frame base 110 and extending forward, and a cylindrical door-frame-side lower hinge pin 152 (see Figures 21 and 22) protruding downward from near the front end of the extension piece 151a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape that is roughly L-shaped when viewed from the side. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows toward the bottom. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described below. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 can support the door frame 3 so that it can rotate relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative board 160 includes a door frame left side upper decorative board 161 that extends vertically from a height position lower than the speaker insertion hole 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction, and a door frame left side lower decorative board 162 that extends vertically from a height position lower than the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to a height approximately the same as the lower end of the upper tray passage hole 117.

The upper left side decorative board 161 and the lower left side decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 each have a number of LEDs 161a, 162a on their front surfaces that can radiate light forward. These LEDs 161a, 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 (described later) when the door frame 3 is assembled, and by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 161a, 162a provided (mounted) on the front, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 31(b) etc. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a protruding portion 172 that protrudes in a rod shape from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below a pair of speaker insertion holes 119, at a location outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

By rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is positioned outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from behind, allowing the glass unit 190 to be inserted into or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 while the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, restricting the rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted to the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 has a protruding portion 172 protruding from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so that the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. For this reason, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which it can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state in which it protrudes downward from the base 171. In addition, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a rotation position in which the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 170, the entire member does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is moved outward beyond the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, allowing the upper side of the glass unit 190 to be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle attachment member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 182 extending from the rear end of the tube portion 181 outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181, a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 183 protruding into the tube portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the tube portion 181 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer circumferential surface of the tube portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181.

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 abutting against the front surface of the handle mounting surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side of the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed in positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned, and the rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated relative to the door frame base 110.

In addition, since the axis of the tube portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, by mounting it on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110, the axis of the tube portion 181 is inclined to extend forward to the right, and the handle unit 300 can be mounted to the door frame base 110 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and two transparent glass plates 192 that close the inside of the frame of the glass frame 191 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear directions so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 191b that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 191a of the glass frame 191 are capable of abutting the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b is capable of being inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame base 110 by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110, abutting the front end of the glass frame 191 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, and rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 to abut the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 against the rear surface of the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191.

To remove the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the above steps can be reversed. This allows the glass unit 190 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Anti-theft cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 202 projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the body 201, and a pair of locking pieces 203 spaced apart on the left and right, projecting forward beyond the body 201, and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion 202 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 201. This rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 202 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game balls (game balls launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 do not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and do not impede the shooting of game balls into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. This allows the security cover 200 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the rear projection 202, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201, is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the component 1000 described below. Also, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projection 202 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 located near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view and between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112, and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 in cooperation with a locking unit 700 (described later).

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is equipped with a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends forward and backward, a rotation transmission member 212 that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and transmits the rotation operation of the key inserted into the keyhole 211a to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and if the key is a corresponding one, it can be rotated a specified angle in either the clockwise or counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and has a pair of notches 212a cut from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other across the central axis. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and by inserting the protrusions of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 into the pair of notches 212a, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In detail, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular, flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view, a pair of side plate portions 213b extending flatly backward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a, and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending flatly from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in a direction away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 from the rear at a position approximately in the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is such that the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side as viewed from the front is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side as viewed from the front is attached to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130. As a result, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 connects the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 114 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed within the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open to the rear.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 34 to 41. Fig. 34(a) is a front view of the performance operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the performance operation unit. Also, Fig. 35(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. Fig. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Fig. 37 is a cross-sectional view cut along line D-D in Fig. 34(a), and Fig. 38 is a cross-sectional view cut along line E-E in Fig. 34(b). Fig. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along line F-F in Fig. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). Fig. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Fig. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can present performance images to the player.

The performance operation unit 400 is equipped with an operation button 410 that has a circular outer shape and is transparent at the center except for the outer edge, which can be pressed by the player, a frame unit 415 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326, a decorative board unit 420 that is positioned behind the operation button 410 and can illuminate and decorate the outer edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, a base unit 430 that is attached to the rear of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and decorative board unit 420 attached to the front, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is attached to the base unit 430 so that it can be seen from the player side through the operation button 410 and can display performance images.

[3-4a. Operation buttons]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 42. Fig. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side except for the outer periphery is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is equipped with a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical shape) with a circular periphery and a central side bulging forward, an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a material that is difficult to transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially uniform thickness throughout. The front side of the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without any irregularities. The button lens 411 includes a first button decoration part 411a that extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) at a position on the inner periphery of the button frame 412, recessed from the back surface into a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b that extend on an axis toward the center at a position on the outer periphery side of the first button decoration part 411a, recessed from the back surface into an arc-shaped cross section, and are arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction.

As shown in the figure, when assembled to the operating button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 toward the center, with the groups on the left and right sides extending further toward the center than the groups on the top and bottom sides.

The multiple second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, with three formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that their front sides are approximately flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 has a lens effect that refracts light due to the unevenness of the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, making it difficult to see clearly from behind.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and has multiple (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an arc shape for a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a main body 413a that is approximately cylindrical and extends in the front-rear direction, a ring-shaped flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, a plurality of guide bosses 413c (four in number) that protrude cylindrically from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, a plurality of detection pieces 413d (three in number) that protrude in a strip-like shape from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged in the circumferential direction, a base opening 413e that penetrates the flange 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body 413a, extends a predetermined length along the outer periphery, and is formed in the circumferential direction in a plurality of (six) base openings 413e, and an inner extension 413f that extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape and narrows inward (toward the center) so that the front end side fits along the inner surface of the button lens 411.

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the main body 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide bosses 413c are each slidably inserted into the retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, with two on the upper side and one on the lower side, in the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided three on each side, and correspond to the second button decorative part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e in the button base 413, the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer periphery. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension 413f, which tapers inward, is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface) and is formed transparent, so that the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and is biased forward by the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the front side of the outer periphery abutting against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and moves backward until the rear end abuts against the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. When the pressure detection sensor 440 detects the detection piece 413d, it means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the first button decoration 411a is formed around the entire circumference of the operation button 410, extending from the inner edge of the button frame 412 of the transparent button lens 411 toward the center, making it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

The front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 of the operation button 410 is closed by the button lens 411 and button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 makes the transparent portion through which the rear can be seen narrow inward from the outer periphery relative to the outer diameter of the operation button 410. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner periphery of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413a) protrudes rearward from the front surface of the decorative board unit 420 through the inner periphery of the decorative board unit 420. This prevents light irradiated forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420 from leaking from the outside to the inside of the button base 413, and prevents light irradiated forward from the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, operation button right inner decorative board 434, operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and operation button lower inner decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the LEDs mounted on the first LED 422a, 423a and second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, and the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 can prevent areas other than those intended for illumination decoration from being illuminated, allowing for attractive illumination decoration.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 41. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed into a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a.

The frame unit 415 comprises a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a and attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates from front to back, a plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that penetrate from front to back on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a and extend in an arc along the periphery of the central opening 416a and are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a cutout portion 416c that is cut out to a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The central opening 416a is formed to be approximately the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 to abut against the outer periphery rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, three on each side, and are closed from the rear by frame side lenses 417. The cutouts 416c also penetrate in the front-to-rear direction, and a frame top lens 418 is fitted into them from the front.

The frame body 416 also has a generally cylindrical inner tube portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner tube portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tube portion 416d is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, and separates the first LEDs 422a, 423a from the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting parts 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame body 416 (performance operation unit 400) is attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of mounting parts 416e and the cutout part 416c.

The frame body 416 has a plated layer with a metallic luster formed on almost the entire surface, except for a region of the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite the central opening 416a from the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached).

The frame side lens 417 closes the peripheral openings 416b, three of which are formed on each side of the frame body 416 from the rear. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed as a smooth surface without any irregularities, and the rear side has multiple irregularities formed along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see Figures 39 and 46). These multiple irregularities refract light, making it impossible to see behind the frame side lens 417.

The frame top lens 418 has a generally rectangular outer shape so that it fits into the cutout 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In addition, the rear side of the frame top lens 418 has multiple rows of irregularities that extend in a zigzag pattern along the periphery of the central opening 416a in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see Figures 37 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple irregularities, making it impossible to see the rear side of the frame top lens 418.

When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 are positioned in front of the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be illuminated and decorated by the second LEDs 422b, 423b etc. mounted thereon.

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 43. Fig. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit when viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415, and can impart vibration to the performance operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 comprises a C-shaped board base 421 that is open on the upper side, a left outer decorative board for operation buttons 422 and a right outer decorative board for operation buttons 423 that are respectively attached to the front of both the left and right sides of the board base 421, a vibration motor 424 that is attached to the lower front of the board base 421, and a motor cover 425 that is attached to the front of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The inner circumference of the substrate base 421 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer circumference is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 and smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left operation button outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The left operation button outer decorative board 422 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 422a. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 423a. Both the front and rear surfaces of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and vibrations can be generated by rotating this weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame unit 415 is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 can illuminate and decorate only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, and can illuminate and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b.

In addition, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, causing the entire performance operation unit 400 to vibrate.

[3-4f. Effects of the Production Operation Unit]
The effect of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 44 to 46. Fig. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in Fig. 37. Fig. 45(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the view of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and Fig. 45(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. Fig. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and Fig. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends.

The presentation operation unit 400 of this embodiment can show the player presentation images according to the game state that changes as the game ball is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and can have the player operate the operation button 410 to participate in the presented presentation, allowing the player to enjoy it.

The performance operation unit 400 is formed so that its overall height is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The performance operation unit 400 is also formed so that its overall width is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. When viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 is positioned below the play area 5a (through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the center in the left-right direction.

The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. When the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which forms the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In other words, only the upper portion of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, and it is attached in a suspended state.

The performance operation unit 400 is attached so that the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 is inclined so that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface), moves upward as it moves forward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. As a result, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1 to play a game using this pachinko machine 1, the player's head is located in front of the center of the play area 5a on the game board 5 located above the plate unit 320 (performance operation unit 400), so that the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the play area 5a to the performance operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 will be seen as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL), allowing the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 inside the operation button 410 to be clearly visible.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four retaining holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are biased forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not being pressed), the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 400, the center side (the side of the central axis CL) from near the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a roughly spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the part that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

In this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) protrudes approximately 4 cm forward from the front surface of the frame unit 415 in the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

Under normal conditions, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts against the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 stops. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for effects provided on conventional pachinko machines, so there is a high possibility that the peripheral area away from the center of the button lens 411 will be pressed. In more detail, the operation buttons for effects on conventional pachinko machines are attached so that their central axes extend approximately parallel to the vertical, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached so that its central axis CL is inclined relative to the vertical. Therefore, when a player presses the operation button 410 from above as in conventional pachinko machines, the player will press a part of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL, as shown by the hollow arrow in FIG. 44.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, the operation buttons for effects are formed on a flat surface that is pressed by the player. If the operation button is made larger while keeping the part that is pressed on a flat surface, when a part of the operation button that is not in the center is pressed, the surface that is pressed will tilt so that the part that is pressed will move back first, and the operation button will not be able to move back in a straight line, which could make it impossible to press the operation button.

In contrast, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface (a part of a roughly spherical surface) that bulges forward at the part (button lens 411) that the player presses, so when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 can move straight backward. Therefore, no matter where on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can move back smoothly without tilting, so the pressing operation can be detected reliably, and the effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be fully enjoyed.

In addition, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 so that the performance operation unit 400 can be suspended. Therefore, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration occurs at the part farthest from the part where it is attached, so the entire performance operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the performance operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is located directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press (the position of the white arrow in Figure 44), a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, surprising the player and allowing him to enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, so that when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., can bend downward to absorb the impact until the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and excessive force is prevented from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and damage to the performance operation unit 400, etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a lot of force when a performance is presented to the player in which the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the performance operation unit 400 will not be damaged, and interruption of the game due to damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented, and by making it less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the game hall can be prevented.

As mentioned above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses is formed into a curved surface (the shape of a part of a roughly spherical surface) that protrudes forward, making it stronger and more rigid than if it were flat. Even if it is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the entire button lens 411, making it less likely to break.

As shown in FIG. 46, the button lens 411, frame side lens 417, frame top lens 418, and operation button inner decorative member 432 of the performance operation unit 400 are made of transparent materials, so that the uneven decorations formed on the back side of the first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button inner decoration part 432f, and second button inner decoration part 432g can be seen from the front side (player side). In addition, in the areas where the uneven decorations are formed, the plate thickness changes and light refracts in a complex manner, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where the uneven decorations are formed.

The performance operation unit 400 is provided with a first button decoration 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, and the uneven decoration of this first button decoration 411a makes it difficult to see behind at the outer edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration 411a is formed (behind the direction of the central axis CL), there is a gap between the inner peripheral surface of the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 432a of the operation button inner decoration member 432, but the first button decoration 411a located in front of the gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side). This prevents the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 is provided with an internal decorative member 432 that is fixed in position, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable when they see the operation button 410, and also allows the internal decorative member 432 to be positioned without problems inside the transparent operation button 410, improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In more detail, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 are formed so that the unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420, which are located outside the outer circumference of the operation button interior decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 and on the rear side (back side), are not visible from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is not visible from the player side. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412, etc., the outside and back side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 can be hidden and made difficult to see, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400 can be improved.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, while the second button interior decoration 432g formed on the front plate 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 located on the inside rear of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL and is arranged in a row in concentric circles, so that, as shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button interior decoration 432g intersect, allowing the player to see a geometric decoration.

In addition, because the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the performance operation unit 400 are separated in the front-to-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g can present the player with a geometric pattern that gives a three-dimensional feeling with depth, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g are separated in the front-to-rear direction, so that when the player's eye position moves, the overlapping degree between the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration 432g changes, allowing the player to see a moving decoration and entertaining the player.

In this way, the performance operation unit 400 can present a dynamic, three-dimensional decoration to the player through the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, the operation unit 400 has a left operation button interior decorative board 433, a right operation button interior decorative board 434, an upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and a lower operation button interior decorative board 436 arranged behind the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the front of these, the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. In other words, the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 can illuminate and decorate the inside of the operation button 410. The LEDs mounted on the front of the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are positioned inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, as shown in Figure 38, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a first LED 422a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and a first LED 423a on the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the second button decorative part 411b facing through the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and by illuminating these first LEDs 422a, 423a, the six second button decorative parts 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a on the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the first LED 423a on the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are positioned between the cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the cylindrical inner tube 416d in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415, so that light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body 413a or to the outside of the inner tube 416d, and only the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating these second LEDs 422b, 423b. The second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are located between the cylindrical inner tube portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416, and the light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner tube portion 416d or to the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating a number of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 is attached, up to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418, so that light from the LEDs of the frame top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. Figure 47(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the rear. Figure 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view cut along line L-L in Figure 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the front left side so as to cover the front sides of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 comprises a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front of the left unit base 531; a translucent left unit decorative lens member (not shown) disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at its front end; and a cylindrical frame-shaped member attached to the upper front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. a left unit upper decorative base 534 that extends vertically along with the left unit upper decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 that is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member; and a plurality of decorative members 537 that are attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has multiple openings 531a penetrating the front from front to back. As shown in the figure, the multiple openings 531a include circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is attached to the left side of the front of the door frame base 110 so that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) face forward from the multiple openings 531a. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is located approximately in the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. This left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque material.

The left unit base 531 also has a left reflective standing wall 538 (see Figs. 5 and 23) that stands toward the front side from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. The left reflective standing wall 538 has a flat inner surface that faces the through hole 111 and is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. The reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the left reflective standing wall 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall 33.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is made of a transparent material and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular when viewed from the front, which corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion 532b that is rectangular when viewed from the front, which corresponds to the rectangular opening 531a. The door frame left side unit 530 is formed so that the LEDs 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b when assembled to the door frame 3.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a, 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward as a point. The light irradiated forward from this circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated.

The rectangular lens section 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 comprises a central diffusion reflection section 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, a front diffusion lens section 532d that is formed outside the central diffusion reflection section 532c on the front surface, an input lens section 532e that bulges backward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection section 532c), and a front reflection section 532f that is outside the input lens section 532e on the rear surface and is generally inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e.

The front diffuse lens section 532d of the rectangular lens section 532b is formed by a number of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection section 532c. More specifically, the cross-sectional shape of the front diffuse lens section 532d when cut in the radial direction has grooves recessed in an arc shape toward the rear, and the peaks between the grooves bulging in an arc shape toward the front, forming a smooth wavy front surface. The front diffuse lens section 532d is also formed so that the grooves and peaks are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing it in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are V-shaped from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape, with the mountain parts between the grooves being triangular and pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and mountain parts move forward as they move away from the center. The front reflecting portion 532f is also formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines dividing the front reflecting portion 532f ...

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a on the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the rectangular lens section 532b, the light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens section 532e into the rectangular lens section 532b. Since the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it can refract the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front, and guide almost all of the input light to the cone-shaped central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is reflected by the inclined cone surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c so as to be diffused in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (a direction parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160), and travels from the center to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b. Furthermore, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels from the center to the outside (away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) throughout the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b approximately parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. At this time, the forward reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, so that the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center (see FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction at the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c can be sequentially reflected forward by the forward reflecting portion 532f as it moves from the center to the outside.

The light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffuser lens section 532d has a wavy cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f in various directions, and can irradiate the light forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) approximately uniformly from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b.

In the front diffusion lens section 532d and the front reflection section 532f of this rectangular lens section 532b, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple lines extending radially, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b from becoming light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and to irradiate light with a more uniform shade forward. This allows the multifaceted decorative section in front of the rectangular lens section 532b in the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed to fit the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and a polyhedral decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion that is recessed in the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. The circular decorative portion and the polyhedral decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the polyhedral decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube that extends from front to back. The part that forms the underside of the outer periphery of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that it protrudes downward as it moves from the front end to the rear end, and the lower part of this part is perforated from front to rear. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, which is open upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it moves upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the vertical middle part is concave backwards, and is composed of an L-shaped part whose lower part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, an L-shaped part whose upper part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit lower decorative base 535, and a straight part connecting the lower end of the upper L-shaped part and the upper end of the lower L-shaped part.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both the top and bottom ends to the front of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front of the left unit lower decorative base 535. This left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent material, so that the left unit decorative lens member located at the rear can be seen from the front.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative members 537 are made of an opaque material.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in Figure 51(a). Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line N-N in Figure 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in Figure 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in a front view on the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side decorative board 552 that is attached to the front side of the right unit base 551, a transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553 that is attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, to the left of the center in a front view on the front side of the right unit base 551, and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 that is attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit left cover 555 that is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit left decorative member 554.

The door frame right side unit 550 also includes a transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the right side of the center in front view on the front surface of the right unit base 551 and to the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in a front view, extending in the up-down and front-to-back directions, a sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit right cover 558 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557 and is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The door frame right side unit 550 further comprises a right unit left light shielding member 559, which is a shallow box-like opaque member that is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions with the front and right sides open, and a right unit right light shielding member 560, which is a flat, opaque member that is attached to the left of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559.

The door frame right side unit 550 is provided with a right unit decorative lens member 561 having translucency and a polyhedral decoration at the front end, which is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a right unit decorative base 562 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a plurality of decorative members 564 that are attached to the front side of the right unit cover 563. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right unit base 551 so as to penetrate vertically, and is provided with a connection cable for connecting the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame top unit relay board 589 of the door frame top unit 570.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, extending vertically and horizontally, and a short rectangular cylindrical shape extending front to back, with the center in the front to back direction closed off in a box shape. This right unit base 551 is made of an opaque material.

The right unit base 551 also has a right reflective wall portion 568 (see Figs. 6 and 24) that stands toward the front side from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. In this right reflective wall portion 568, the inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. In addition, like the inner surface of the left reflective wall portion 538, this reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the right reflective wall portion 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, this right reflective wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective wall portion 33.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is equipped with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of middle LEDs 552c mounted in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating and decorating the right unit left decorative member 554 through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for illuminating and decorating the right unit right decorative member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in white on both the front and back. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comprises a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 553a to the right as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 553c cut from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left as viewed from the front and formed in multiple places at regular intervals in the vertical direction, a shallow storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body portion 553a as viewed from the front so that the right unit left decorative member 554 can be stored in it, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in multiple vertical directions, and side reflecting portions 553f arranged in multiple vertical directions on the right side of the main body portion 553a as viewed from the front so that each input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the main body 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right end of the rear wall 553b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 553b abuts against the left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The multiple cutouts 553c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be effectively illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The storage recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 553e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 553a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 553e has a rectangular part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 553e are each located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the left LED 552a to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 553a.

Six side reflectors 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, the side reflector 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain part between the grooves facing the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 553f is formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 553a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 553e as the center.

The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 553a moves to the right as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens section 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body 553a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflector 553f.

The light incident forward from the input lens section 553e into the main body section 553a is reflected to the left as viewed from the front by hitting the sawtooth side reflecting section 553f, and is irradiated outward from the left surface of the main body section 553a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right as viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 553f) of the main body section 553a, but since the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body section 553a is a white material, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body section 553a and is irradiated to the left. Therefore, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f inside the main body 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflector 553f, reflected to the left by the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559, and passed through the main body 553a are irradiated to the left from the left surface of the main body 553a, allowing the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 553f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines to alternately arrange the concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a does not become light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and light with a more uniform shade can be irradiated to the left. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is made of a transparent material, so that from the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 553d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 553f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflector 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be decorated with the side reflector 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape and is decorated with translucent decorations such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. In detail, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 556b protruding in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 556a to the left as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 556c cut from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b as viewed from the front to the right and formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, a storage recess 556d that is shallowly recessed on the right side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front so that the right unit right decorative member 557 can be stored, input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and side reflecting portions 556f that are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front.

The body 556a of the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corners on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the body 553a of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the body 556a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves leftward as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. The front end of the body 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of this rear wall 556b abuts against the right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553.

The multiple cutouts 556c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutouts 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening that penetrates from front to back, and the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from this opening, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 to be well illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The storage recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 556e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 556a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 556e are each located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the right LED 552b to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 556a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 556f is formed of multiple concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens 556e. In each of these multiple concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens 556e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens 556e, the side reflector 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain part between the grooves facing the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 556f is formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial lines dividing the multiple concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 556a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 556e as the center.

The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 556a moves to the left as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens section 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body 556a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflector 556f.

The light incident forward from the input lens section 556e into the main body section 556a hits the sawtooth side reflecting section 556f and is reflected to the right when viewed from the front, and is irradiated outward from the right surface of the main body section 556a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (leftward when viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 556f) of the main body section 556a, but since the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body section 556a is a white member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body section 556a and is irradiated to the right side. Therefore, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f inside the main body 556a and the light irradiated to the left from the side reflector 556f, reflected to the right by the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560, and passed through the main body 556a are irradiated to the right from the right surface of the main body 556a, allowing the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a to be illuminated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 556f, the concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the concentric grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines so that the concentric grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the light irradiated outward (to the right) from the right surface of the main body 556a from becoming a concentric striped light and shade, and to irradiate light of a more uniform shade to the right. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent material, so that from the right side of the main body 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 556d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 556f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflector 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be decorated with the side reflector 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with translucent material, such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same or different.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape in a side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is provided with a flat body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b that protrudes in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 559a to the right when viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 559c that is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall portion 559b when viewed from the front to the left and is formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a plurality of flat reinforcing portions 559d that extend to the right from the right surface of the body portion 559a and extend from the rear wall portion 559b to the front end of the body portion 559a.

The body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in side view that is vertically extending rectangular with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed to have approximately the same external shape as the body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right of approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 559b abuts against the left surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560.

The multiple cutouts 559c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The multiple reinforcing parts 559d are provided in three sets spaced a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction, with each set consisting of a pair of reinforcing parts 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction at approximately the same height as the left-right width. Each set of reinforcing parts 559d is formed in a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These multiple reinforcing parts 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is slanted so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right side opening that opens to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white material. As shown in FIG. 55, when the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the respective main body parts 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged in close proximity to the main body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body parts 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart in the left-right direction, forming a space that extends up-down and front-back by a predetermined width in the left-right direction. Light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is irradiated to the rear side of the right unit decorative lens member 561 through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed from opaque materials, preventing the light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552 from interfering with each other, and the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated only by the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and middle LED 552c, respectively.

Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 have their internal spaces vertically divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, so that the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552, which are located at the rear of each divided space, can prevent light interference between the spaces, and the parts located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided vertically into multiple (four) areas, and each can be illuminated and decorated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 has a circular decorative part 561a that is circular when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative part 561b that extends vertically and has multiple polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative part 561a is formed in a shape with multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical part that is concave on the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative part 561b is formed in a shape in which multiple rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of multiple triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part.

In more detail, the right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed such that, in the areas located in front of each of the spaces divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left shading member 559, in the top three areas, one multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged on both the top and bottom sides of the circular decorative part 561a located in the vertical center, and in the lowest area, only the multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 located at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so that it can cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward beyond the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decorative base 562 is formed from an opaque material.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that it can close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit cover 563 is formed from a transparent material, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 located on the rear side can be seen from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically and are attached to the front of the right unit cover 563 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 564 are made of an opaque material. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward in a plate shape farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The door frame right side unit 550 can independently illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 and right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the protruding left and right sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end.

The door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward, so when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. This gives players playing with this pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

In addition, because the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in amusement halls where pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can be seen from the side along the island equipment, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out in amusement halls where many pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a malfunction such as ball jamming or an error occurs in this pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 on both the left and right sides are illuminated and decorated in a unique manner, so that the occurrence of the malfunction can be immediately notified to the game hall staff and they can quickly respond to the malfunction, which can quickly resolve the interruption of the player's play and prevent the player from becoming frustrated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 56 to 59. Figure 56(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and Figure 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 59 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line P-P in Figure 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 comprises a central base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, a pair of side bases 572 attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571 and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and a box-shaped base 573 extending left and right with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward and open at the rear, which penetrates forward and backward at the front positions of the pair of upper speakers 573. The unit body 271 has a pair of openings 574a and multiple slits 574b (three on each side) that extend from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center, penetrate in the front-rear direction, and are spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572; and speaker covers 575 made of punching metal that are disposed in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a.

Although not shown in the figures, each of the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) has an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided, and in these internal spaces, the outer peripheral external light emitter 34 (left outer peripheral external light emitter 34a, right outer peripheral external light emitter 34b) is provided to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and the outer peripheral external light detector 35 (left outer peripheral external light detector 35a, right outer peripheral external light detector 35b) detects light from inside the outer periphery of the opening window outside the outer periphery.

The door frame top unit 570 is made up of a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front of the unit body 271 in the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, a door frame top middle decorative board 577 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a plurality of transparent flat light guide members (three on each side) that are attached to the front of the unit body 271, close the plurality of slits 574b, and extend from near the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 across the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 271. 578, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271 and cover the front surfaces of the multiple (three) light guide members 578, and a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 further includes a door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584, which are attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, respectively, and have LEDs mounted on the portions facing the left and right outer ends of the multiple (three) light-guiding members 578, a pair of board bases 585 attached to the portions through which the multiple (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585, respectively, and have multiple LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271, and a pair of light-shielding members 588 attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 in front of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, a relay board cover 590 attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front of the door frame top unit relay board 589, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and a lower cover 592 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed into a rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has multiple projections and recesses on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached at an angle so that when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of each of the pair of upper speakers 573 moves backward on the side closer to the left-right center of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers that can output sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the lower portions near both the left and right ends of a rectangle extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the shape seen from the front combines a rectangle extending left and right, a trapezoid that protrudes forward with a base that is about 1/2 the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the left and right center of the front edge of the rectangle, and a rectangle that protrudes forward a short distance with the front edge of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, both sides of the part that protrudes forward at the left and right center on the front surface of the unit body 271 are located behind (recessed) the line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 271 and the left and right ends of the front end of the part that protrudes forward.

The unit body 271 has openings 574a that penetrate from the front to the rear in areas from both left and right ends of the front surface to positions outside the area protruding forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits 574b that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front and rear direction in areas that extend diagonally from the area protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of the area that extends diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit body 271 to near the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed in groups of three on each side of the center of the unit body 271 in the horizontal direction, spaced apart vertically.

The unit body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut into a square shape from the rear end to the front in the center of the left-right direction on the top surface, and a lower opening 574d cut into the bottom surface from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit body 271 also has a top left decorative part 574e and a top right decorative part 574f that extend vertically on both the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative part 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative part 574f is formed so that its front surface is located further forward than the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. This unit body 271 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a shape that, when viewed from the front, combines a roughly square irregular pentagon bent so that the center in the left-right direction of the bottom side is located downward, and a roughly right-angled triangle that connects the tips of the sides that extend outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the irregular pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it moves downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape overall and is translucent.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the rear of the top middle decorative member 576 in a tilted state, with its front surface aligned with the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576, and moving rearward as it moves downward. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface, and by illuminating these LEDs, the top middle decorative member 576 can be illuminated and decorated.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent material. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shape of both the left and right outer sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit body 271. If the side closer to both left and right ends of the unit body 271 is the end side, and the side closer to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is composed of a straight portion 578a that extends straight from the end side to the center side, and an arc portion 578b that extends in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward as it moves from the end side of the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b. In addition, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the up-down direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b decreases as it moves toward the center side. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection section 578c consisting of sawtooth projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the straight section 578a, and a diffuse input section 578d consisting of multiple projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the arc section 578b.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends in the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584, and the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the outer ends in the left and right directions, the light travels toward the center inside the straight portion 578a and is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffusion reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light-guiding member 578, and the portion of each of these in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated and decorated.

When light from the LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is incident on the light guide member 578 through the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. This allows the area located in front of the arc portion 578b on the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated.

In this way, the light-guiding member 578 guides the light from the LEDs 583a, 586a on the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the LEDs 584a, 587a on the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, allowing the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 located in front to be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guiding members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 are formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding members 578, and cover the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding members 578. The front of each decorative lens portion 579a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. In other words, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates almost the entire area to the left of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens sections 580a that accommodate the three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens section 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding member 578, and covers the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding member 578. The front of each decorative lens section 580a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative part 574f of the unit body 271. In other words, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates almost the entire area to the right of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a, 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271, between the left opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576, from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the gap between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579, with the center of the front surface protruding further forward than the front surface of the top left decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580, between the right opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side protrudes forward further than the front side of the top right decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is formed from an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative part 574e) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has the LED 583a mounted in a position facing the left end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front side to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative part 574f) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has the LED 584a mounted in a position facing the right end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall that is approximately square in side view with sides extending up and down and front and rear, a rear wall that is rectangular in front view extending from the rear side of the side wall at a right angle to the left and right direction outward, an upper wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the upper sides of the side wall and the rear wall with a line connecting the front end of the upper side of the side wall to the middle of the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and a lower wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the lower sides of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with the upper and lower hypotenuses open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. This board base 585 is fitted with a door frame top center left decorative board 586 or a door frame top center right decorative board 587 so that the open areas are closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the left side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the left of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 has multiple LEDs 586a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b to the left of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 586a, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 can illuminate and decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the right side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the right of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has multiple LEDs 587a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b to the right of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 587a, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can illuminate and decorate the area of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other by opaque materials. The light-shielding members 588 separate the upper and lower portions of the multiple LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. This light-shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light-guiding members 578 only by the LEDs 586a, 587a located immediately behind each light-guiding member 578, and the decorative lens parts 579a, 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated well in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 relays the connections between the pair of upper speakers 573, the door frame top middle decorative board 577, the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of this door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 is equipped with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction, and the front sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on both the left and right sides are curved as if carved out backwards, giving the player the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes significantly forward, strongly drawing the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 located in the center, and are formed to extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on both the left and right ends of the unit body 271. This allows the door frame top unit 570 to decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3.

In this case, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal, located behind each of the left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are located, and the speaker covers 575 face forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a, 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the player to hear the sounds output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition and enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

The door frame top unit 570 can also guide light from the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 through a plurality of light-guiding members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front of the upper part of the door frame 3, including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Function and effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines, and the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. As a result, the front of the game board 5 (play area 5a) attached to the main frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190), and this corresponds to the game board 5 with a wide play area 5a.

The door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the left-right center of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111, and the front (front of the dish front lower decorative part 326c) of the lower half (part below the upper dish 321) on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape that is carved out backwards (a concave curved shape so that the front of both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located further back than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the dish unit 320 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front of the left and right center of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude forward, so that the performance operation unit 400 can be made to stand out and be emphasized to the player, and the performance operation unit 400 can be strongly drawn to the attention of the player.

The door frame 3 is attached with the performance operation unit 400, which is located on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through hole 111, tilted so that the large, semi-spherical, transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upwards and forward. Therefore, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face). When the player lowers his or her eyes to look at the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 appears almost directly ahead, allowing the large, round operation button 410 to be strongly visible, heightening anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410. At the same time, the performance image displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, which is located inside the transparent operation button 410, can be clearly seen, allowing the player to fully enjoy the performance image.

The door frame 3 is also provided with a large operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape and has a diameter roughly the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320, so that when operating the operation button 410, any part of the operation button 410 can be touched by moving the hand a short distance, making it relatively easy to "quickly press" the operation button 410. In addition, the large-diameter operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape is attached in an inclined state, so not only can it be pressed from above like the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, but it can also be easily operated from the left, right, or front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 makes the performance using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

The door frame 3 also has the effect of attaching the operation unit 400 in a suspended state using the tray unit 320, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations according to the game status, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and making the effect using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 in the center of the front of the tray unit 320, making the lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 less noticeable compared to conventional pachinko machines, making it easier for players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400 with respect to the lower dish opening 326d that opens to the left of the performance operation unit 400 on the front of the dish unit 320. This allows the volume of the lower dish 322 to be large relative to the size of the lower dish opening 326d, and ensures a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower dish 322. In addition, since the rear of the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400, when a player puts his/her left hand inside the lower dish 322 or places his/her fingers on the lower dish opening 326d, it is difficult for the player's fingertips to touch the rear wall of the lower dish 322, making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and allowing the player to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower dish 322 is larger than the size of the lower dish opening 326d.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c, through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are released into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a, through which game balls on the lower tray 322 are removed into a money box or the like below the tray unit 320, arranged in a straight line from front to back, and are located on the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d when viewed from the front (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400). In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located at the rear of the performance operation unit 400, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d) on the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, etc., so that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, which makes the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) neater and improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a located below (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322. Therefore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the upper tray 321, etc. to the lower tray 322 are immediately ejected from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a to the dollar box, etc. below as soon as they enter the lower tray 322. At this time, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a are not visible from the player's side, so the flow of game balls ejected from the upper tray 321, etc. through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box cannot be seen. This gives the player the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 or the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being discharged directly into the coin box, making it less annoying for the game balls to pass through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of shooting the game balls, the presentation images, etc.) and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball removal hole 322a located in a position on the lower tray 322, forward and to the left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the raised wall portion of the lower tray 322 to the right of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is curved diagonally toward the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, so that game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by being reflected off the right wall portion. As a result, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a remains open, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322 (lower tray first area A1). This means that the game balls can be discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the cash box) without the player being able to see the game balls circulating inside the lower tray 322, achieving the same effect as described above.

The door frame 3 also has a lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326, through which the lower dish 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if a player places his/her hand on the lower dish opening 326d or places his/her hand in the lower dish 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. Therefore, the sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 can be output forward well, allowing the player to enjoy the sound from this pachinko machine 1. In addition, when a player places his/her hand in or approaches the lower dish 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

The door frame 3 is also equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that protrudes forward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the through hole 111. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 acts as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, giving players playing with the pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

Furthermore, the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-like and protrudes significantly forward, can be decorated with illuminating light, so that even if you are not located in front of this pachinko machine 1 in an amusement hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, the presence of this pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it possible to make this pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

The door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the left-right center in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are formed in a concave shape that carves out the front rearward (a concave curved shape such that the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 are positioned further rearward than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576). This makes it appear as if only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes forward significantly, making the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized to the player, drawing strong attention to the top middle decorative member 576.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the upper part of the door frame is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. In contrast, the door frame 3 of this embodiment is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, and also with a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576, passing in front of the speaker covers 575, to both left and right ends, so that the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated. This allows the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 to be decorated, making the pair of upper speakers 573 less noticeable at the top of the door frame 3, and allowing players to immediately recognize that the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing to players, and allowing players to enjoy high-quality stereo sound from the pair of upper speakers 573.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the performance operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protruding forward significantly at the center in the left-right direction below and above the through hole 111, so that the player can see a unified decoration from top to bottom, with a prominent imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and the sophisticated decoration makes the machine stand out more than other pachinko machines, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the performance operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward. Therefore, when the top middle decorative member 576 and the performance operation unit 400 are illuminated, the player can see an illuminated line extending vertically in the center in the left-right direction on the front of the door frame 3, and the player's gaze can be guided to the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, which is arranged in the center in the left-right direction.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall structure of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 60 to 66. Fig. 60 is a front view of the game board. Fig. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and Fig. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as viewed from the back. Fig. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, Fig. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front, and Fig. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled and viewed from the back. Fig. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the function display unit portion enlarged from the front when the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are shot by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The game board 5 also includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 that controls the game content that is played by shooting game balls into the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 further includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is equipped with a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, with the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached.

The rear unit 3000 further includes a rear left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Previous constituent members]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of a substantially square in front view, an inner shape of a substantially circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in a clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the component 1000 has security recesses 1008 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas extending approximately vertically from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the security recesses 1008 are inserted into the rear protruding pieces 202 of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has multiple positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 can be inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 to position and fix the inner rail 1002 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has a number of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100 to determine the position relative to the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has a notch 1011 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full ball guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

[5-2. Game Panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 61, 62, 64, 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel board 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and has a rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold obstacle nails planted on the front and the front unit 2000 attached. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the bottom end at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The panel board 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The panel plate 1110 also has a number of fitting holes 1113, which are round holes that are arranged near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 that is arranged near the outer periphery in the lower left corner and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. These fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 are arranged outside the play area 5a and are used to position the panel plate 1110 with respect to the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 also has step-shaped engagement steps 1115 with a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the play area 5a, just like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, to engage and fix the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 also has multiple inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed in a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusions 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1121 that detachably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction inside the holding step 1121 and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step 1121 is approximately flush with the front surface of the panel holder 1120. The holding step 1121 is also sized so that its front inner peripheral surface forms a predetermined amount of clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the panel plate 1110 to absorb any expansion or contraction that occurs relative to the panel plate 1110 due to temperature changes or changes over time.

The panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and has a number of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into and into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. In detail, the engagement claw 1124 is disposed at the top of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and elastically engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed at the bottom of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 extends a predetermined distance upward (towards the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120, with a gap formed between the front surface of the holding step 1121 and the engagement piece 1125 large enough to insert the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. By engaging the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws 1124 and engagement piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is removably held relative to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has an outlet 1126 that penetrates from front to back at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The lower rear surface of the panel holder 1120 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

The panel holder 1120 further includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a number of mounting holes 1128 that penetrate from front to back at positions corresponding to the multiple mounting bosses 1010 on the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned between the previous component 1000 and the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the functional display unit 1400 is inserted into this insertion hole 1129.

When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1126 of the panel holder 1120 opens to the rear side of the out-guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, gaming balls that flow down to the bottom end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out-guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1126, and are discharged through the outlet 1126 to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of the gaming panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 67 and 68. Fig. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel of a different form from that shown in Fig. 63, together with a front component, a board holder, and a main control unit. Fig. 68 is an exploded perspective view of Fig. 67, seen from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape formed to be approximately the same as that of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 has an outlet 1151 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the previous component 1000 at the lower portion approximately in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower rear side of the outlet 1151 of the gaming panel 1150 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

The game panel 1150 also has a notch 1152 that penetrates horizontally in the front-to-back direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is open downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and a square insertion hole 1153 that penetrates in the vertical direction above the notch 1152 and through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1154 penetrating from the front to the rear, into which the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted, at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating from the front to the rear, at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the gaming panel 1150 can be positioned between the previous component 1000.

Furthermore, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with multiple openings that run through it from front to back for mounting the front unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 described above.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1151 opens to the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, game balls that flow down to the bottom end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1151, and are discharged through the outlet 1151 to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom. This allows the board holder 1200 to receive all game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and to discharge them downward from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 65. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, and traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board box 1320 and the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, 3042 are all made of transparent materials so that they can be visually inspected from the outside. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are provided with surface mounting areas that are inferior in terms of fraud prevention performance, and therefore it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain the various effects related to the fraud prevention measures described below.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 64 to Fig. 66. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the play board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see Fig. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (play situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 comprises a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, a normal pattern indicator 1402 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003, a first special pattern indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002, and a second special pattern indicator 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002. It mainly comprises a first special reserved number display 1404 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number; a second special pattern display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; a second special reserved number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; and a round display 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the big winning port 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Although not shown in the figure, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, moving performance, etc., and a performance display control unit for controlling performance images.

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side performance display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figs. 61 and 62. The game board side performance display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. In detail, the game board side performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the approximate center of the rear wall of the rear box 3010. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side performance display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and videos.

The game board side performance display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side as viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side as viewed from the front. With the LCD screen facing forward, the game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixed grooves 3010c opening on the left inner peripheral surface as viewed from the front in the frame-shaped LCD mounting part 3010b of the rear box 3010 described later, and then moving the right fixed piece 1602 side forward to insert the right fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020 and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, with the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and the rear end penetrating the opening 1112 and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The front unit 2000 of this embodiment is equipped with a plurality of regular winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive game balls shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the regular winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the regular lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery that is drawn when the game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

Multiple general winning openings 2001 are located at the bottom of the play area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 is located directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a. The gate section 2003 is located in the upper right corner of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and approximately directly below the collision stop section 1006. The second starting opening 2004 is located directly below the gate section 2003 and to the right when viewed from the front. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the first starting opening 2002 and the outlet 1126.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located directly above the outlet 1126 near the bottom end of the left-right center in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward and is large enough to accept only one game ball at a time, and a large winning port 2005 that extends left and right and is large enough to accept multiple game balls at a time (e.g., 4 to 6 balls), and is formed so that it can be opened and closed depending on the game status.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has multiple general winning holes 2001 that can always receive game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly below the vertical center, at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, within the play area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf portion is close to the inner rail 1002, and game balls that flow down along the inner rail 1002 can be guided to the right (the left-right center of the play area 5a).

The center role 2500 is located in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and the performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front. The center role 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center device 2500, except for the bottom edge, protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball shot into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center device 2500 is provided with a warp entrance 2520 on the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front, which opens to allow game balls in the game area 5a to enter, a warp exit 2522 which opens into the frame and allows game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2520 to be released, and a stage 2530 which releases game balls released from the warp exit 2522 into the game area 5a after rolling them left and right. A start opening unit 2100 is located directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will be received by the first start opening 2002.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board side performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a box-shaped performance drive board box 3042, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the bottom edge of the opening 3010a and which houses the performance drive board.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear left center decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the outside of the frame on the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the vertical center of the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting portion 3010b is formed to be large enough to fit the game board side performance display device 1600 into the frame. The rear box 3010 has a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind, so that the locking mechanism 3020 can slide up and down.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface abutting against the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit, etc.

The back unit 3000 can provide light-emitting effects, movement effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the back-down rear movable performance unit 3100, the back-upper left movable performance unit 3200, the back-left movable performance unit 3300, the back-upper middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back-down front movable performance unit 3500, etc., and can entertain players with various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game Contents]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through the gap between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the front right lower corner of the door frame 3, and the game with the game balls is started. The game balls shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flow down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 302, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the balls can be shot, and up to 100 game balls can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). When the game ball hits the obstacle nails, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails, within the game area 5a, there is also provided at an appropriate position a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball hits it.

When a game ball is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails (not shown) and flow down the area to the left of the center device 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area to the left of the center device 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 that opens into the outer periphery of the center device 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll back and forth on the stage 2530 before being released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is highly likely to be received by the first starting hole 2002, since it is located directly above the first starting hole 2002. When a game ball is received by the first starting hole 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from anywhere other than the center, it flows down toward the start opening unit 2100. A game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 or an open big prize opening 2005.

If a game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it may be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300 and accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the lower side unit 2200. Then, when a game ball is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when a game ball is hit into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the game area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (i.e., hits to the right), the game ball flows down through an area downstream where the gate section 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 are provided.

When the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the result of the normal lottery is a "normal win," the second starting hole 2004 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing the game ball to be received by the second starting hole 2004. When the game ball is received by the second starting hole 2004, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., four balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is conducted when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal fluctuation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 opens after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 between the time the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is reserved until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has ended. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., "big win", "medium win", "small win", "probability-changing win", "time-saving win", etc.) that is favorable to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "miss", "small win", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win", "probability-changing (probability-changing) win", "time-saving (time-saving) win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", and "no time-saving win".

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state, the large prize opening 2005 becomes capable of receiving game balls in a predetermined opening and closing pattern after the special variable time has elapsed. When the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state and a game ball is received into the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 or 13 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by having the large prize opening 2005 receive game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, which can entertain the player.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the large prize opening 2005 repeats an opening and closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it is open for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) to receive game balls, and then closes. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big win", when either a predetermined time (e.g., about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the large prize opening 2005 has been open to receive game balls, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been received by the large prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) in which it is closed and cannot receive game balls is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if there is a "2R big win", it repeats two rounds, if there is a "5R big win", it repeats five rounds, if there is a "15R big win", it repeats fifteen rounds, and creates an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "hits" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn ("probability hit"), or that change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving hit").

In this embodiment, if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the indication of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 displays three pattern rows consisting of multiple patterns lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each pattern row, sequentially stops and displays the pattern rows that are displayed in a variable manner, and each pattern row that is stopped and displayed is displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows are a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss," after the three pattern rows have stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a small win game, a big win game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image to suggest the result of the special lottery by the game board side performance display device 1600, it is possible to perform light-emitting performances, movable performances, display performances, etc. by appropriately using the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3, the door frame side performance display device 460, various decorations of the center role 2500, various decorations of the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable performance unit 3100, the back top left movable performance unit 3200, the back left movable performance unit 3300, the back top middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable performance unit 3500, etc., depending on the special lottery result that has been drawn. This allows the player to be entertained by various performances, and prevents the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment corresponds to the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in this embodiment corresponds to the main body unit of the present invention, the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the window portion of the present invention, the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the bulge portion of the present invention, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 in the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A of this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, and the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second performance display device 460A on the door frame side correspond to the second decorative body of the present invention, and the second button decorative part 432g of the decorative member inside the operation button 432 in this embodiment, the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative part of the present invention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the LEDs mounted on the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436, and the LED 477a on the sub-screen decorative board 477 correspond to the light-emitting bodies of the present invention, the door frame side performance display device 460 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative means of the present invention, and the frame unit 415, unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 in this embodiment correspond to the base parts of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (or the second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 is viewed from the outside, the player can see a decoration that is full of unprecedented perspective, such as a decoration in which the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second performance display device 460A, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) overlap, and a decoration in which the first button decorative portion 411a and the door frame side performance display device 460 overlap, etc., and therefore it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of differentiating itself from other pachinko machines.

In addition, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A (screen unit 470)) and the door frame side performance display device 460, etc. are arranged in the direction of movement of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the player's operation. Therefore, when the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) move closer to or farther away from each other, and the first button decorative portion By changing the distance between 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), it is possible to change the perspective of the decoration in which the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) appear to overlap, and the player can change the decoration (intersection pattern) of the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) by himself, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side to the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A), a space is formed between the first decorative body and the second decorative body. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the distance between the first button decorative part 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button interior decorative part 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member This makes the distance to the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) more different, and even when the button lens 411 is not being moved by operation, when the player's eye position moves, the intersection (degree of overlap) between the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) changes, allowing the player to see a moving decoration, which strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, so that the rear operation button internal decoration part 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be clearly seen through the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided, and the radial decoration of the first button decoration part 411a can direct the player's gaze toward the center of the button lens 411, so that the player's attention can be strongly directed to the operation button internal decoration part 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411.

In addition, the operation button interior decorative member 432 is equipped with a second button interior decorative portion 432g having multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered at the center. When viewed from the outside, the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 intersect with each other, ensuring a sense of perspective for the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g. This makes the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g stand out, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

In addition, the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 has multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered on the center, so that the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g can direct the player's gaze and attention to the door frame side performance display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the operation button interior decorative member 432, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration (performance image) of the door frame side performance display device.

Furthermore, when each LED mounted on the left operation button inner decorative board 433, the right operation button inner decorative board 434, the upper operation button inner decorative board 435, and the lower operation button inner decorative board 436 (or the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative board 477) is illuminated, the light can be used to illuminate and decorate the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), and further, the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated, so that in addition to the decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), the player can be entertained by the illuminated decoration. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) can diffuse the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436. Therefore, the second button interior decoration part 432g is illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436, whereas the first button decoration part 411a is illuminated and decorated by direct light from the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). The second button decorative part 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is illuminated and decorated with indirect light diffused by the light source, and the first button decorative part 411a is illuminated and decorated with a weak light, so that when the LEDs (or LEDs 477a) of the left operation button decorative board 433, the right operation button decorative board 434, the upper operation button decorative board 435, and the lower operation button decorative board 436 are illuminated, when the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside, the player can see decorations with a more emphasized sense of perspective, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with a strong appeal that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, there is no need to secure space for the button lens 411 to move in the area outside the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A), and it is possible to expand the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) outward and make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made more noticeable. Also, as described above, since there is no need to secure space outside the button lens 411 to move it, by arranging the frame unit 415 in the area outside the button lens 411, the decorativeness of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and have a high appeal that strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when a player strikes the button lens 411 or applies impact to part of its surface, the applied impact force is more likely to be dispersed over the entire button lens 411 than if the button lens 411 had a flat shape, making the button lens 411 less likely to break (be damaged). Therefore, damage to the button lens 411 during play can be prevented, which can cause the game to be interrupted and can lead to frustration for some players and a loss of interest, and because the button lens 411 is less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 arranged in the main frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, the operation button 410, which is a circular shape of about 15 cm in outer diameter within the range of 10 cm to 30 cm and can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player, and the transparent button lens of the operation button 410 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111. Since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which can be seen from the front through the lens 411, and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen in a position where the game ball storage tray would be prominent in a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. First LEDs 422a, 423a are provided for illuminating and decorating the second button decorative part 411b, and second LEDs 422b, 423b are provided for illuminating and decorating the frame side lens 417. The frame body 416 has an inner cylinder 416d that separates the frame side lens 417 from the second button decoration 411b, and a main body 413a and an inner extension 413f that separate the second button decoration 411b from the center of the button lens 411. The inner cylinder 416d, the main body 413a, and the inner extension 413f prevent the light from the first LED 422a, 423a from illuminating the center of the frame side lens 417 or the button lens 411, and prevent the light from the second LED 422b, 423b from illuminating the second button decoration 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b, which are adjacent to each other, can be illuminated and decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b can be illuminated and decorated clearly, and a good-looking illumination can be produced. In addition, by appropriately combining the off, on, blinking, brightness, color, etc. of the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration 411b, a variety of light-emitting patterns can be produced, preventing the player from becoming bored and entertaining the player, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a, 423a that illuminate and decorate the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b that illuminate and decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided on a single operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423, and the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450). Therefore, compared to the case where a board is provided on the second button decorative part 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be placed as far away as possible from the second button decorative part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be irradiated to the second button decorative part 411b in a sufficiently diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration 411b can be uniformly illuminated, the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which can strongly attract the player's attention and entertain the player, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, because the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the wiring connected to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 does not bend or extend as the operation button 410 moves back and forth, eliminating the risk of the wiring breaking due to fatigue. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decorative part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not break, so the player can enjoy the movement (operation) of the operation button 410 and the illuminated decoration of the frame side lens 417 and second button decorative part 411b without any problems, and a decline in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since a second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, when the rear operation button internal decorative part 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) are viewed through the transparent button lens 411, the second button decorative part 411b decorates the outer edges of the operation button internal decorative part 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. By appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411, from which the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen to the rear, can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns as described above, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), and the player can enjoy the illumination effects, the operation of the operation button 410, and the performance images by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the button lens 411 (operation button 410) with the second button decoration 411b on its outer edge can be operated by the player, so that by having the player operate the operation button 410 while a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Furthermore, by illuminating and decorating the second button decoration 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 when a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the operation button 410, so that the player can be encouraged to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player-participation type performance and enjoy it.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is provided with an opaque main body portion 413a and an inward extension portion 413f which enable only the second button decorative portion 411b to be illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the portion of the operation button 410 which is closer to the center than the second button decorative portion 411b is not illuminated (decorated) by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, and the central portion of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, which prevents the operation button internal decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) located at the rear from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration 411b can be illuminated and decorated in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be viewed in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner tube portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 which is equipped with the frame side lens 417, at the rear side of the frame unit 415, the inner tube portion 416d can completely separate the frame side lens 417 from the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tube 416d closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the rear end of the inner tube 416d is located closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range of the light from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, so even if a gap is formed between the front of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a will not illuminate the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b will not illuminate the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner tube 416d, and a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f can completely separate the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the operation button 410. On the other hand, the end (rear end) of the main body 413a close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends further rearward than the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, so that the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, and the intrusion of light into the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration 411b in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be viewed in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decorative part 411b is located in front of the outer part of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which is arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Therefore, the second button decorative part 411b makes it difficult to see the outer parts and rear side (rear side) of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), thereby preventing the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. In addition, when the second button decoration 411b is illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the outside and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) become relatively dark compared to the brightness of the second button decoration member 411b, making it difficult to see the components on the outside and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). This can further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, frame unit 415, operation button interior decoration member 432, door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), etc., and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame side lens 417 adjacent to the second button decoration 411b are formed in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light goes around the outer edge of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., so that the player is less likely to get bored with the various light-emitting effects, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper tray 321, in which the stored game balls are shot into the game area 5a and used for playing, is attached to the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and below the upper tray 321 to form the remaining space of the mounting space 326j of a predetermined width behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is A portion corresponding to the lower tray first area A1 in the lower tray main body 325 is disposed on the left side of the space, and a portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is extended from that portion into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j to mount the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls. This makes the lower tray 322 appear smaller when viewed from the front, making the lower tray 322 less noticeable, and relatively making the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, when the present pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were seen lined up and down in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided which extend upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b which extends upward from the outer periphery and restrict the movement of game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby preventing the game balls in the lower tray 322 from contacting the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) and preventing the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 or the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from abutting or pressing against the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game ball, which prevents the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to damage to the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and also prevents an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 is equipped with the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the lower tray cover 340, 340A that restricts the movement of the game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that the game balls can be prevented from entering (spill) from the lower tray body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like he or she has lost money or is uncomfortable if the game ball enters the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325 in the lower tray 322, even if the game ball supplied into the lower tray 322 bounces up inside the lower tray 322, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325, when a player inserts his/her hand into the lower tray second area A2 from the lower tray first area A1 side (lower tray opening 326d) of the lower tray body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A can restrict the fingertips, etc. from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that it is possible to prevent the fingertips, etc. from touching the underside of the upper tray 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and causing injury, and the player can play in a safe environment.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower tray cover 340, 340A and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), even if an impact or pressure is applied to the lower tray cover 340, 340A due to a game ball hitting it, the impact or pressure is not transmitted from the lower tray cover 340, 340A to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be reliably prevented.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322, a lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, so that when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game ball released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a directly and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), making it difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, as described above, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided, the game ball can be prevented from abutting against the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), so that damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be prevented, and the interruption of the game can be reduced, suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher as it moves forward, the game ball moving toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 climbs the inclined bottom surface, and the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, the speed of the game ball that abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A can be slowed down, so that the lower tray cover 340, 340A can reliably restrict the game ball from moving toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the impact when the game ball abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A or the main body vertical wall portion 325b can be reduced, thereby preventing them from being damaged.

In addition, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate components, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, which reduces the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is played in which game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, etc., a dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 is provided, which bulges furthest forward from the center of the left and right direction of the front, and the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forward bulging portion, and the dish unit cover 326 is provided with a storage dish consisting of an upper dish 321 and a lower dish 322 capable of storing game balls, and the storage dish (upper dish 321 and lower dish 322) In addition, the lower tray first area A1 is located outside the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, and the lower tray second area A2 is located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, so that the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) can be made to look smaller and less noticeable. Therefore, since the conspicuous performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in the area where the upper tray and lower tray were visible in conventional pachinko machines, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that this is a gaming machine different from conventional pachinko machines, and it can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the left and right direction of the front of the dish unit cover 326, the area where the lower dish 322 is open on the surface of the dish unit cover 326 is small, but since the first extension part 325B, second extension part 325C, and lower dish cover 340, 340A of the lower dish main body 325 having the lower dish second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j, which is behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, it is possible to store game balls in the area (lower dish second area A2) that cannot be seen from the front of the lower dish 322. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, so that the player can concentrate on playing without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower dish 322, and the player can enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is formed by attaching (combining) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C having the lower tray second area A2 to the lower tray main body 325 and main body part 325A having the lower tray first area A1.By preparing multiple lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of different sizes in advance and attaching the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of sizes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the width of the mounting space 326j within the tray unit cover 326, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be optimized. Also, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C, it is possible to accommodate the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j, and since the size of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), it is possible to make the lower tray 322 compatible with various performance operation units 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) with different amounts of rearward protrusion, thereby increasing the versatility of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the lower tray 322 has a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body vertical wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, so that the lower tray 322 is in the shape of a container recessed downward, and game balls can be stored reliably. In addition, the lower tray cover 340, 340A has a cover vertical wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325, so by preparing lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes in advance and combining (attaching) lower tray covers 340, 340A of shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, it is possible to accommodate various forms and achieve the same effects as described above.

In addition, in the lower dish 322, which is composed of the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A, the lower dish covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325, so the part on the lower dish 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower dish main body 325, and the boundary (seam, dividing line PL) between the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A is not located in the part where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower dish main body 325, no force is applied that pulls the lower dish covers 340, 340A away from the lower dish main body 325 even if many game balls are stored, and it is possible to prevent the lower dish covers 340, 340A from coming off the lower dish main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls are provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001, etc., and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322, difficult to see (makes it difficult to see) from the front (player), so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and it can be made into a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players. In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls moving from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls inside the lower tray 322, preventing the player from becoming distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls guided by the guidance means such as the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, which are located between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 that guides the game balls from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a. Therefore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guidance means and smoothly (instantly) ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front, it is likely that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower tray 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray 322 as it appears from the front, so that the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be secured sufficiently compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the guide means such as the area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322, the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, and discharged to the bottom of the lower tray 322 (dollar box). This prevents the game balls from circulating inside the lower tray 322, and makes it possible to reliably make the game balls circulating inside the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls inside the lower tray 322, preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be instantly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the ball guide section 322c etc. without the player noticing, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely for the player to feel annoyed by the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) of the lower tray 322 in a plan view difficult to see from the front, so the actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size that appears from the front, so a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, just like the lower trays of conventional pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a for mounting a large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) of the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 is provided at the left-right center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which bulges forward when viewed from the front below the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 where games such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001 are played. In addition, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on both the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, which is lower than the approximate center in the up-down direction, is shaped to be concave so as to be carved out toward the rear. This makes it possible for the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) attached to the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a to appear to protrude significantly forward, making the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) stand out. Therefore, in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are lined up in a vertical direction in the conventional pachinko machine, the large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. And, from the tray front lower decoration part 326c which is recessed backward on both the left and right outer sides of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, the lower tray 322 is recessed backward and a part of it is wrapped around the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), so that the storage amount of game balls in the lower tray 322 (the volume of the lower tray 322) can be sufficiently secured, so that the player does not have to worry about the lower tray 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and can concentrate on playing, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, because a portion of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), when a player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, the player's fingertips are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 (the front surface of the tray unit base 323) or the lower tray cover 340. This allows the player to recognize by touch that there is a sufficient amount of game balls stored, and when game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the player can recognize that many game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, which gives the player a sense of satisfaction and allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, because the fingertips of the hand placed on the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 or the lower tray cover 340, the player is given the same sensation as with the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, putting the player at ease and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the lower tray 322 is formed so that it becomes wider toward the back (rear), even if the front side is small, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of storage for game balls. In other words, because the front end portion of the lower tray 322 is small, it is possible to make the lower tray 322 less noticeable on the front surface (lower tray front decorative portion 326c) of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 opens, and relatively, it is possible to make the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to provide the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) while securing a sufficient amount of storage for game balls in the lower tray 322, which can increase the appeal to players and entertain the players and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, the sides and top of the part of the lower tray 322 that wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) are covered with the lower tray cover 340, so that when a player puts his or her hand inside the lower tray 322, the player's fingertips are prevented from touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and getting injured, allowing the player to play in a safe environment. The lower tray cover 340 also prevents game balls from entering (spill) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is positioned in the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the tray unit cover 326, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made more noticeable to the player, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing and able to strongly attract the player's attention. In addition, the decorations made by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made more visible, allowing the player to enjoy the decorations and presentations of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) and preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321, and a lower tray ball ejection hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates vertically, so that it has the same function as the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, when a player who is accustomed to conventional pachinko machines plays this pachinko machine 1, he or she will not be confused by the function of the lower tray 322, and can play in the same way as before, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front, which makes the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and good-looking, and makes it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the play area 5a in the door frame 3. The operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 that can present a performance to the player is attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). The operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) has an outer diameter of about 15 cm and a center that is in a direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), and the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412, and a cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided. Therefore, the first button decoration part 411a and the button base 413 can reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the inner side (rear side) of the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration part 432 provided inside, the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decorative part 411a, the second button decorative part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can make it difficult to see the outer edge or the back side of the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470). Therefore, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) becomes relatively large by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative part 411a, etc., so that a large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm can be realized without any problems while preventing a deterioration in appearance. Therefore, the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be enlarged, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out and strongly attracting the player's attention, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, when the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and make invisible anything outside the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), thereby further improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 is made to have a three-dimensional shape (semispherical) that bulges outward (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the surface near the outer edge of the button lens 411 is inclined with respect to the plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, a plane perpendicular to the forward and backward direction of the operation button 410), so light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, by combining the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413, it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved.

In addition, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 is increased, so the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) placed inside the operation button 410 can be made larger and easier to move, making it easier to provide the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) that entertains the player inside the operation button 410, and realizing a pachinko machine 1 that provides even more entertainment for players.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative) quality, which makes the operation button 410 stand out on this pachinko machine 1 and attracts the player's attention, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine as the machine to play.

In addition, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412, which are provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, are opaque, so that the button frame 412 can reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button internal decoration part 432 (screen unit 470) from being seen through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), thereby reducing deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410, etc., and improving its appearance.

The button lens 411 is also provided with an opaque button frame 412 that extends from the outer edge of the button to the inside at a specified width all around, and in cooperation with the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 411b, makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 and the decorative member inside the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). This makes it possible to enlarge the gap between the main body 413a and the decorative member inside the operation button 432 (screen unit 470), which makes it easier to secure space for the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A to move, allowing them to move smoothly.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, there is no directionality to the outer periphery compared to when it is polygonal, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made large, it can be pressed without any problems, allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation presentation using the operation button 410 without losing interest.

In addition, because the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player-participation type presentation is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the player can easily touch and press the operation button 410 without having to check the position of the operation button 410 while operating it. This makes it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation type presentation using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is equipped with the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), by presenting a performance image according to the game state, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410, and the player can enjoy the performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). At the same time, the performance image and light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can encourage the player to operate the operation button 410, and by having the player actively participate in the player participation type performance and enjoying it, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Also, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, because the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (the area inside the first button decorative part 411a) of the large operation button 410, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of this pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players and increasing the player's anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) inside the operation button 410, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case too, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is shown to have the first button decoration part 411a formed on the inner circumference side of the button frame 412, but this is not limited to this, and the button lens 411 may have no first button decoration part 411a formed thereon.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. Instead of attaching the button frame 412, a decorative part for hiding the rear side over the entire circumference may be formed at the part of the button lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button 410 is shown to have a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the outer periphery of the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second performance display device 460A, but this is not limited to this, and at least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second performance display device 460A. The shape of this button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration (flat decoration by pasting a sticker or printing, three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) at least on the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. If the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to apply light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, etc. to at least one of the inner wall side or the outer wall side.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the outer left portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, but this is not limited to this, and the lower tray 322 may be recessed rearward from both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and connected to each other behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), or may be recessed rearward only from the outer right portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), with a portion of it wrapping around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A).

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the shape (shape of the front end of the lower dish 322) of the portion (lower dish front decorative portion 326c) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 where the lower dish 322 is recessed rearward is shown as a curved surface recessed rearward, but this is not limited to this, and the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal column or polyhedron.

In the above embodiment, the example of attaching the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) to the front of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to attach a unit or panel or other member that includes "one with an operation device such as an operation dial or touch panel," "one with a rotating body with a decoration on its surface," "one with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body," "one with a decorative body that three-dimensionally imitates characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) that match the concept of the gaming machine," "one with characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns, etc., that are decorated by stickers or printing, etc., that match the concept of the gaming machine." Also, the member attached to the mounting space 326j (performance operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and multiple (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

In the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is shown to have a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), but this is not limited to this. The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) may not have an opening (presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and a space equivalent to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. It is preferable to decorate the front of such a plate unit cover with characters, items, logos, specific patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine by means of stickers, printing, mounting decorative members, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an area slightly larger than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in a planar view of the lower tray 322 is covered by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) as a covering part to make it difficult to see from the front, but this is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the game ball storage area in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as being arc-shaped and partially arranged in the circumferential direction, but this is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be annular and extend around the entire circumference.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button interior decorative part 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the performance operation unit 400 is shown as a decoration having multiple polygonal shapes in a concentric circle centered on the center, but this is not limited to this, and the second button interior decorative part 432g may also be a decoration having multiple circular shapes (including ovals) in a concentric circle centered on the center.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the rear members such as the operation button interior decorative member 432, the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side second performance display device 460A, which are arranged on the rear side, are always visible through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this, and at least one of the front and rear members arranged in the front and back (or up and down) may have a variable light transmission means that makes the rear side visible when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, examples of the variable light transmission means include "a magic mirror, which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front and rear sides," and "a liquid crystal film, which becomes transparent or opaque by turning the power on and off, making the rear side visible." The front and rear members may be movable relative to each other, or may not be movable relative to each other.

By providing a variable light transmission means in at least one of the front and rear members, in the normal state, only the front member, or both the front and rear members, are visible, and the decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in the special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, the rear member (the rear member, or the member arranged behind the rear member) that was not visible in the normal state becomes visible, and the decoration of the front and rear members, or the front member, rear member, and the member behind the rear member, which are overlapping, can be shown. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front and rear members, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and can entertain the player, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

To go into more detail, for example, if the front member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, the rear side of the front member is darkened, allowing the player to see only the decoration of the front member. Then, by brightening the area between the front and rear members, or the rear side of the rear member with light from a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the conditions for the variable light transmission means in the front member are met, making the rear member visible through the front member, and allowing the player to see the overlapping decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions the surface of the rear member is visible through the front member, allowing the player to see the decoration of the front member and the surface of the rear member. Then, if the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmission means in the rear member is satisfied, making the rear side visible through the rear member, allowing the player to see the components behind the rear member (e.g., display devices, decorations such as characters, etc.) through the front and rear members.

Furthermore, if both the front and rear members have a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, and when the area between the front and rear members is brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is met, the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member, and the decoration of the front and rear members can be seen by the player. On the other hand, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED (or the area between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED), the fulfillment conditions of the variable light transmission means in the front and rear members are respectively met, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a character, or other decoration) can be seen by the player through the front and rear members. As a result, by appropriately selecting the area to be brightened by the light of the light-emitting unit, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmission means is something like a magic mirror, so when the back side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, allowing the player to see the sparkling decorations on the surfaces of the front and back members.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means was described as something like a magic mirror, but the same effect can be achieved if it is something like a liquid crystal film. In addition, if something like a liquid crystal film is used as the variable light transmitting means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so if the area between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member can be made brighter (or decorated with light) with the light of light-emitting elements such as LEDs, the player can be shown a wider variety of light-emitting effects, decorative effects, and other effects.

[7. Main control board, dispensing control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 69 to Fig. 74. Fig. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, Fig. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board and the CR unit and the degree display board, Fig. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 73 is a block diagram showing the outline of the peripheral control MPU, and Fig. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that generates a control power source (e.g., +5V, etc.) and controls the game, including the payout of prize balls, and a second control unit SCG that performs presentations related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing multiple boards, and includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931 as the first control unit MCG, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. In explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit MCG will first be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510).

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the above-mentioned first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is mainly composed of a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and has various control programs such as a main control program that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, as shown in FIG. 69, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a as a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the individual unit. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an") that uses hardware to update random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on a clock signal (a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator, described later) input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as a random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit 1310b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset described below. In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type circuit with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, which has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input to various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to external boards, etc. is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that no signal based on that information is output from its various output terminals. In contrast, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is not input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, the first start port sensor 4002 that detects game balls that have entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 that detects game balls that have entered the second start port 2004, and the general winning port sensor 4020 that detects game balls that have entered the general winning port 2001, as well as the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Also, the detection signals from the gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003, the count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the large winning port 2005, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraudulent acts using magnets are input to the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on the detection signals from each of these switches, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, which outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacca solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of a specific output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407 via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of a specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, so that the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 951, and outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e by outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020 use contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switches. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004 and frequently pass through the gate section 2003, so the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 frequently detect game balls. For this reason, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 use long-life proximity switches. In addition, when a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long lifespan is also used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 does not occur frequently at the general winning openings 2001, 2201, where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to dispensing as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the dispensing control board 951. When the dispensing control board 951 has successfully received the various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a also receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and receives various commands from the main control input circuit 1310b as serial data at the input terminal of its specified serial input port. When the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) indicating this from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, we will briefly explain the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, is circuit-connected via the bus 1310ah (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and is mainly configured of the transmission shift register 1310aea, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb, the serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa sets multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, thereby continuously transmitting multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") BC0 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 of the dispensing control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is output from the dispensing control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., is equipped with a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that performs various functions, and an error LED indicator 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 70. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase information stored in the RAM (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a, based on a detection signal output by being operated.

[7-2-1. Dispense control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has built-in a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, including a payout control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and controls the payout operation of the gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, a payout control input circuit 952b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as the ``payout control built-in RAM'') and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as the ``payout control built-in ROM''), as well as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control program receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 as serial data in a serial manner as a main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game balls, and creates a 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 as an error release unit, and outputs these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands as serial data in a serial manner as a payout main serial data transmission signal to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, if an error occurs with respect to the payout operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and payout control is started, this payout control program releases the error based on a detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954 and stops the output of warning information corresponding to the error (error release control means).

In addition, this dispensing control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame open command (first main frame open command) when a detection signal (main frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame open switch 619. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also outputs a door frame close command (first door frame close command) when a detection signal (door frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame close command (first main frame close command) when a detection signal (main frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main frame open switch 619.

The dispensing control input circuit 952b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the dispensing control system reset described below. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted to various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is inputted. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals inputted to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is reset by a payout control system reset described later, and a signal based on that information is not outputted from its various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not inputted. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The detection signals from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 827, which detects the exhaustion of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guide unit 820 of the payout unit 800, the payout detection sensor 842, which detects game balls released from the payout outlets 831b, 832b of the payout device 830, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840, which detects the rotation of the payout blade 839, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. For the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch 619, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full of stored game balls, is first input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the handle relay terminal board 315, the power supply board 931, and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 in serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port via the payout control input circuit 952b, and outputs the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a has successfully received various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb from the output terminal of its serial output port, and thereby transmits various commands as serial data from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands as serial data from the dispensing control board 951, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to inform the dispensing control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d from the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the error LED display 860b to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is "connection abnormal" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball out" (specifically, that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball stuck" (specifically, that at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotor and the game ball are engaged near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotor to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 840 detects ... 2, a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842; when the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of payout retry attempts has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, a "full" has occurred (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279); when the number "7" is displayed, a "CR not connected" has occurred (electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6); and when the number "9" is displayed, a "stocked (there are prize balls in stock (unpaid))" has occurred (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., from the output terminal of a specified output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, which then outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor not shown.

Furthermore, the payout control board 951 outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 via resistors (not shown) to the external terminal board 784. The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (configured with built-in infrared LEDs and photo ICs), and is configured to transmit the number of game balls and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of game balls or a notice that an error has occurred) to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall) via these multiple photocouplers.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by multiple photocouplers to prevent the hall computer from malfunctioning or breaking down due to an abnormal voltage being applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, and also to prevent the hall computer from malfunctioning or breaking down due to an abnormal voltage being applied from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 which proceeds with the game or the payout control board 951 which controls the payout, etc. The hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball loan request signal from the ball loan button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first input to the CR unit 6 via the degree display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the CR unit input/output circuit 952e. The CR unit 6 also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the degree display board 365 to display the remaining balance on the ball lending and return display unit 330, and this signal is input to the ball lending and return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending and return display unit 330 is also input with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 951, is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC1 allows the dispensing control MPU 952a to store various information in the dispensing control built-in RAM (dispensing memory unit) during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and the dispensing control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and the information is completely erased (cleared) from the dispensing control built-in RAM by the dispensing control MPU 952a using this as a trigger. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game ball lending device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and between the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. As shown in Fig. 71, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 (to be precise, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the point display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880, the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 880 and the point display board 365 are electrically connected). The CR unit 6 and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the degree display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). In addition, AC 24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, direct current +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using an internal voltage generation circuit (not shown) and supplies this voltage, together with the ground LG, to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, while also supplying it to the degree display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The degree display board 365 has a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on its component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the ball lending unit 360, a return button 329, which is a push button switch, mounted on a position corresponding to the return button 329 on the ball lending unit 360, and a ball lending/return display unit 330, which is a segment display, mounted on a position corresponding to the remaining loaned amount display unit 363 on the ball lending unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the switch of the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

The ball lending/return display unit 330 has three segment displays arranged in a row, and the lighting of these three-digit segment displays is controlled by a so-called dynamic lighting method, which sequentially drives each digit of the three-digit segment displays. By controlling the lighting in this way, the ball lending/return display unit 330 can display the remaining balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6, or display errors in the CR unit 6. When the ball lending/return display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0-DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one of the three-digit segment displays, and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up the specified one-digit segment display from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, the one-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and the content displayed by the illumination of these three-digit segment displays can be viewed through the remaining loan display unit 363.

The CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the degree display board 365 adjacent to the ball lending/return display unit 330. This CR unit lamp 365d receives a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending possible signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using an internal voltage generation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are active and ball lending is possible, the logic of the ball lending possible signal TDL is controlled to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be seen through the remaining loan display unit 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/return display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor implemented on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

When the ball loan button 328 is pressed and the ball loan operation signal TDS from the ball loan button 328 is input from the degree display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 outputs a ball loan request signal BRDY to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 then outputs a BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, equivalent to 100 yen) in one payout operation, to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input outputs an EXS signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that one payout operation has started or ended, and outputs a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible or impossible. For example, if the hall staff or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out next, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen.

When the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the point display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects and returns the prepaid card from an insertion port (not shown). This returned prepaid card stores the remaining balance obtained by subtracting the amount equivalent to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931
Next, a brief description will be given of the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG. The power supply board 931 electrically connects and disconnects the 24 volt AC (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment. 5. A power switch 934 for switching on and off the power supply, a power supply control unit 935 for generating various power supplies, and a control unit for controlling the launching of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 by the launching solenoid 682 and the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG. It is equipped with a launch control unit 953 that controls ball delivery using the delivery solenoid 255.

[7-3-1. Power supply control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, a power factor correction circuit 935b that improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and a power supply creation circuit 935d that creates various DC power supplies from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to supply to various boards.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control section 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball sending control by the ball sending solenoid 255, is mainly composed of a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 302, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will, via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal that notifies the player is input to the launch control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for shooting (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682, while at the same time controlling the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 to receive one of the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and send the received game ball to the ball launching device 650 by outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal board 315.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
In contrast to this first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG, as shown in FIG. 72, is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the performance display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 shown in FIG. 19, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, while controlling the sound of music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that adjusts the volume of the music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the presentation includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and that controls the presentation operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and various information (e.g., game board, It is equipped with a peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores various information (such as information for managing schedule data that specifies the screen to be drawn on the side performance display device 1600 and schedule data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.), a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state has occurred and information for managing special performance flags, etc.), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as ``peripheral control external WDT 1511e'') for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents for the time it takes for power to be restored after a momentary power outage, and loses its contents if power is cut off for a long period of time (if a long-term power outage occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as the "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"), allowing it to retain its stored contents for approximately 50 hours. By providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is no longer able to retain its stored contents and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is out of control, and when this timer expires, a hardware reset is applied. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer expires), a reset is applied. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within the certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so a reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), and transmits game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 to the motor drive board via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board and the peripheral control output circuit. The motor drive board 4180 is sent to the motor drive board 4180, door side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the performance operation unit 400 and the detection signal from the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 are serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided in the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized performance operation unit detection data is input from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit via the serial I/O port for performance operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

The detection signals from various detection switches (e.g., photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit via a peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input and output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as the "peripheral control built-in WDT") and uses the peripheral control built-in WDT in conjunction with the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to diagnose whether the system itself is out of control.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in Fig. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is composed of a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa at the center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, a peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac communicates, via the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, between the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently, data is read from and written to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac independently transfers data between storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that are external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak that are built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To transfer data, data is read from and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad is a dedicated controller that controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to exchange various data between the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for the motor drive board, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for acquiring information from the performance operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer times out), it will be reset. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within the certain period, it can restart the timer count, so it will not be reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and serializes detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 using a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving this serialized movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-brightness white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that a jackpot game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly to each other, shortening the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag, thereby taking measures against noise in the lighting control of the LED, which is important in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the other LEDs, etc., except for this LED, are executed in the peripheral control unit regular process described later.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source described later) is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, the notification sounds and notification sounds are played completely independent of volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the board volume divided into seven levels described above. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from being difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be low so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be high to make the screen unfolding on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral Control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, etc., and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen being arranged in chronological order, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is specified. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by light emission data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs being arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by sound command data that is arranged in chronological order, and the order in which the music and sound effects are played is specified. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for specifying which of a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is to be used, and a track number for specifying which of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is to be incorporated with sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to various control program copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read and executed. Also, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are copied to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of the various control programs that control the RTC control unit 4165, a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness that occurs with aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, and obtains the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and corrects the obtained brightness setting information based on the correction information. This correction information is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. The brightness setting information, as described below, includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600. For example, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information obtained for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is an additional 5% of the positive information, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information obtained for this 75%.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral Control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management subject work area 1511ca for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, a first backup area 1511cb and a second backup area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of the various information stored in the backup management subject work area 1511ca, a various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, a various control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing copies of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and a non-backup management subject work area 1511cf for exclusively storing information not to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored after a momentary or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf to clear it to zero, whereas the backup managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc are cleared to zero when the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on).

The backup management target work area 1511ca is composed of Bank0 (1fr), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and Bank0 (1ms), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs described later. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Furthermore, "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4", which are provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc described below, have the same memory area size as "Bank 0". As described below, when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform the peripheral control MPU 1511a that it is in a state where it can accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, each time a V blank signal is input, in other words, every frame (1 frame), the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and therefore "(1fr)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" respectively (the same meaning is also used for performance information (1fr) and performance backup information (1fr) described below). "(1 ms)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because, as described below, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs (the same meaning is also used for the performance information (1 ms) and the performance backup information (1 ms) described below).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, a received command memory area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad, and a schedule data memory area 1511cae. The lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa is a memory area in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab is a memory area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The received command memory area 1511cac is a memory area in which the main control The RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad is a memory area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data memory area 1511cae is a memory area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is set based on the commands received. In the schedule data memory area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce is read and set, and in some cases, various schedule data is read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a motor transmission data memory area 1511caf on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, and a drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak, etc. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf is a memory area in which door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is set. The motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag is a memory area in which game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is set. The movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah is a memory area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set. The performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai is a memory area in which various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400 are set. It is a storage area in which various information (for example, rotation (direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the press operation unit 405, etc., created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400) is set, which is obtained by acquiring the rotation (direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the press operation unit 405 based on detection signals from the switches. The drawing status information acquisition storage area 1511cak is a storage area in which various information is set, which is obtained by acquiring the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 based on a LOCKN signal (described later) that is output by the performance display drive board 4450 when it receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data.

The lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab in Bank0 (1fr), and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data memory area 1511caf and the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag in Bank0 (1ms) are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described below is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and for example, when game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit routine processing, processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT that was set in the first area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa when the previous peripheral control unit routine processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, processing proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT that was set in the first area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the previous peripheral control unit regular processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the process proceeds based on the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT that was set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

Next, we will explain the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information, which is the various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs, each consisting of two banks, are managed as one page. The performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb manages two pairs as one page: Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, the backup second area 1511cc has Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair, with a total of two pairs being managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and the backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, and the program that executes these high-speed copies by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is common. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral Control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup targets among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, and a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are not cleared to zero even when a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 instructs the start of a RAM clear performance and a game state when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored after a momentary stop or blackout) (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power). This is completely different from the above-mentioned backup management target work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c being cleared to zero. In addition, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of when a jackpot game state occurred) can be cleared, while the content (item) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management work area 1511da is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) which stores various information (SRAM) that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a big win game state has occurred, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name of Bank0 (SRAM), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, as described above, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. And, "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc described later have the same memory area size as "Bank0". "(SRAM)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is the target for backup (the same meaning is also used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) described below).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. The performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area, is quickly copied as performance backup information (SRAM) to the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the first backup area 1511db is managed as a page, with Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The second backup area 1511dc also consists of a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), which are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the second backup area 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 and controls the sound of the music and sound effects etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, has a built-in sound source for controlling the sound of music and sound effects etc. (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in sound source") as shown in FIG. 72, and also has a built-in sound source VDP (Video Display a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data for the screens displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460; an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194; and a door frame side performance transmitter 1512b for transmitting serialized drawing data to the door frame side performance display device 460 to a performance display drive board 4450 located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates, into a positive signal and a negative signal, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; and a forced switching circuit 1512f that receives a signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, connects the circuit to transmit this signal, but when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, connects the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), operation menu background image data used for displaying an operation menu background image described later, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume setting icon image data used for displaying a volume adjustment icon described later, and the like, are stored. In addition, main body frame back image data used for displaying a main body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 is visible from the player's perspective, service mode screen image data used for displaying a service mode screen, break timer setting screen image data used for displaying a break timer setting screen, and break screen image data used for displaying a break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying suggestion display objects for encouraging the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and copies the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting the screen data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next screen data following the first screen data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a when the V blank signal described later is input. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one starting from the first screen data according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and transfers the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control R After extracting the sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the OM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next sound command data following the first sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a when a V blank signal is input. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one starting from the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source mentioned above, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in VRAM") which, when screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts game board side character data and upper tray side character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. 74, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data generated on its built-in VRAM, which is for the game board side performance display device 1600, from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) drawing data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, thereby synchronizing the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, while the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 which is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. In this way, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side performance display device 1600 are each attached to the game board 5, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short. However, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5, while the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the performance display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to channel CH1, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is significantly longer than that for channel CH1, the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc., making it less susceptible to the effects of noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, namely red, green, and blue video signals, and three synchronous signals, namely horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal, and is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and transmitted to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. These serialized signals are then restored to parallel signals in the performance display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen (one frame) of screen data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side performance display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 is output (transmitted) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In other words, "one screen (one frame) of screen data" refers to data for generating one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 on the built-in VRAM.

In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When this is done, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives this V blank signal, it executes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described below. The interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

The sound source built-in VDP 1512a uses a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a system in which one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is stored in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) stored in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source as shown in FIG. 74, and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects into tracks according to the track number specified in the sound command data, sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, and serializes the music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and in addition to the sound data of the performance sounds such as music and sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a incorporate sound data of the notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof. Specifically, for the performance sounds, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending at all on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the performance sounds can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to switch to a setting mode described later.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that is actually the volume played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the performance sound, the sound data of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks and the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized performance sound is amplified to the master volume value that is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and transmitted as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, a brief explanation of the control to play an alarm sound to notify parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 when the effect sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be given. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the alarm sound volume is set to maximum volume are mixed, and the volume of this mixed effect sound and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified effect sound and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the only sound that actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is the notification sound at the maximum volume. At this time, since the performance sound is muted, it is not played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the performance sound proceeds according to the schedule data for sound generation described above. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound that has been proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is set again as the sub-volume value to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, if the volume has been adjusted by switching to the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted performance sound), and is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, since this muted sound effects progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not resume from the point where the alarm sound started, but rather resume from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined period of time had elapsed since the alarm sound started.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b pre-stores game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and upper tray side character data for drawing in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, and also pre-stores various sound data such as music, sound effects, alert sounds, and notification sounds.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and transmits the left-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music and sound effects according to various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data for the left and right sides between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This means that even if the positive and negative signals of the left audio data are affected by noise, when the noise components on the positive and negative signals are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to form a single left audio data, the noise components cancel each other out, eliminating the noise components, and thus providing a noise countermeasure.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side performance transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, namely, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronous signals, namely, a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal, and the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, totaling 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are each composed of 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, so the lower 2 bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

When the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, which are the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d serializes the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, into differential type serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and transmits these various signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 using only a differential one-pair cable.

As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, so the length of the wiring required for the path (first path) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 to the door frame side performance display device 460, so the length of the wiring required for the path (second path) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in Fig. 1, various wirings must be passed along the open side of the main body frame 4 on the closed side opposite the locking unit 700 shown in Fig. 5 to electrically connect various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to various boards provided on the door frame 3 side, such as the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. However, in addition to the payout device 830, a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged on the closed side of the main body frame 4, which can guide the game balls paid out by this payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and can branch and guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the upper tray 321 is full of game balls.
5, which is a unit made up of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 and other boards supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment, is disposed below the main body frame 4. In this way, the various wirings electrically connecting the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, etc., and are in an environment subject to noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided on the payout device 830, as well as noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls and noise that has invaded the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Corporation is adopted for the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, making it less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, as described above, a differential one pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential one pair cable is not a parallel line in which two wires are simply arranged in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair cable.

Here, we will briefly explain the case where parallel wires are used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. For channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise. However, with only this hardware configuration, the serial data in the parallel wires may be corrupted by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. If affected, the noise is not cancelled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 mounted on the performance display drive board 4450 housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, so the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data different from the normal data, causing a problem that an image resembling a snow storm is displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, making it impossible to discern what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. is adopted in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to make it less susceptible to the effects of noise. In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver, which is capable of canceling (removing) noise on the receiving side even if the differential method serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring. As a result, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the noise is cancelled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is reliably received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460, so that the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460. By cancelling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent images such as sandstorms that make it impossible to recognize what the image is, from being displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. This helps prevent players from losing motivation to play due to noise.

In this embodiment, between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, there are a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, so that the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side can be electrically connected to the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main frame 4 and removing the various wiring, the door frame 3 can be removed from the main frame 4 to perform maintenance on the main frame 4 and the door frame 3. If a problem with the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' can be attached to the main frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the various wiring from the various boards on the door frame 3' side can be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 on the main frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards on the main frame 4 side to the various boards on the door frame 3' side.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, the boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the boards between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power wiring and wiring that transmits various other signals are each electrically connected by a harness. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, a power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are each formed with the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver crosses multiple relay terminal boards, namely the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, a problem occurs in that a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise or the output level of the signal decreases between the input and output of the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and the wiring that transmits various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses, with one of the twisted pair cables being red and the other being gray, and the wiring that supplies power in the harness being red and the other multiple wirings being gray. Note that the wiring that supplies power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differentiating circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f receives the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the pachinko machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. The forced switching circuit 1512f is configured to connect the circuit to transmit two signals when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, and to connect the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so that the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the performance display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600.

The performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V, which receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 via the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described below, restores the various serialized signals to parallel signals, and outputs them to the door frame side performance display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to inform the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is met based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image to inform the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs the image to the game board side performance display device 1600, thereby displaying it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user.

When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a store clerk.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, thereby playing the alert sound from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for decorative illumination provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is configured with the RTC 4165a at its core, as shown in Fig. 72. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as the "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") in which calendar information and time information are held. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). This allows the RTC 4165a to update and retain calendar information and time information using power supplied from the battery 4165b even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and is able to display effects based on the acquired calendar information and time information on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. Examples of such effects include, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a screen performing a New Year countdown is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. When the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

In addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores input date and time information, which is the date and hour, minute, and second when the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information were first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa.

When the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are cold cathode fluorescent tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the backlight ON/OFF or only turns it ON.

The various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the production line, in order to perform various tests, such as display tests of the gaming board side performance display device 1600, the input date and time information is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second input on the production line as the date and time when the gaming board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on.

In this way, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa can store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (such as the probability of a low or high probability jackpot game state occurring), such as brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of the LED type, and input date and time information.

In addition, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dark for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 set at the time of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is possible to switch to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for setting the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, it is possible to reset the calendar information and time information, and adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 to the desired brightness. This adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above to correct the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is an LED type. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 to identify the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, acquires calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second to identify the current date and time, and acquires brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information previously stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if it has already been six months since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, corresponding correction information (e.g., 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness becomes 80%, which is 5% higher than this 75%, which is the obtained correction information. The brightness of the backlight is adjusted and turned on, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is 75% plus the obtained correction information of 10%.

The current date and time may be determined by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the year, month, and date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the current date and time may be determined by acquiring the current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the peripheral control unit power-on process described below.

[834. Volume Control]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume control volume 1510a has a resistance value that can be changed by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, and converts it into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sounds and notification sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven stages as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the sound effects such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is cheating, a warning sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is low, it is possible to prevent hall staff and the like from having difficulty noticing malfunctions or player cheating due to the warning sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to switch to the setting mode. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a customer waiting state, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is converted from an analog value to a digital value by the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and a predetermined value is added or subtracted from this converted value in response to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, thereby increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume. This adjusted volume is updated as a sub-volume value for the tracks in which sound data for performance sounds such as music and sound effects are incorporated among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the performance sounds, but is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned alert sounds and notification sounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, there are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects: by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, or by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to always keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In that case, the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a can be rotated by the hall staff. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may be too low for the player to hear the music and sound effects, or may be too high for the player to hear the music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a specified time, or if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the machine is in a waiting state for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for entering the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 in accordance with this setting mode screen. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too low and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the player can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to increase the volume to the desired volume, or if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too high and the music and sound effects are too loud, the player can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to decrease the volume to the desired volume.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played for a predetermined period of time and is in a waiting state for customers and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is cancelled and the volume is initialized. This volume initialization is set to the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was low and that the music and sound effects were difficult to hear, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, and if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was high and that the music and sound effects were loud, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can decrease the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400.

[8. Power Supply System]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 75 and 76. Figure 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a block diagram continuing from Figure 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, followed by the power supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is turned on. is supplied to the power supply board 931, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be powered on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 is equipped with a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts AC (24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and the launch control unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes ripples from the +37V supplied, smoothing the +37V and supplying it to the launch control circuit 953a and power supply circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispense control MPU 952a of the dispense control unit 952 in the dispense control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as the driving power source to adjust the drive current to be output to the launch solenoid 682 in order to launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 5a shown in FIG. 1 with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302, while outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250, so that the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and sends the received game ball to the ball launching device 650.

The power supply generating circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC +5V, hereafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC +24V, hereafter referred to as "+24V") from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and supplies these to the dispensing control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power supply line, the power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power supply line.

The +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the dispensing control board 951, as described below. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. This +5V generating circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from the +12V from the dispensing control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control board 951 and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the dispensing control board 951. In other words, the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the current flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode PD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. In this way, the capacitor BC1 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows to the dispensing control board 951 and then returns from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as the dispensing VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a due to the diode PD0, and the dispensing control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory contents are retained by supplying the dispensing VBB to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. In this way, the capacitor BC0 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and then from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing through the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the above diode MD0 and the above capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an overview of the voltages supplied to each control board, etc. will be provided, followed by an explanation of the voltages supplied primarily to the dispensing control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board.

The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and of these three voltages, the two voltages, +12V and +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are also supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals, and gradation lighting signals to the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the game board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates direct current 3.3V (DC +3.3V, hereafter referred to as "+3.3V") from the +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, the +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side performance display device 1600.

In response to this, the three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is equipped with a +9V generation circuit 194a that creates direct current +9V (DC +9V, hereafter referred to as "+9V") from the +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V created by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards, etc. of the door frame 3.

The +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is also supplied to the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x creates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V created by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components that make up the LCD module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, as well as to the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side performance display device 460. The voltage created by the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side performance display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a and the like of the payout control unit 952. The +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b and the like of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall). The hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used by the payout control board 951 at all, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Fig. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 931 via the output control board 951, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +12V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control input circuit 1310b, etc., and the +24V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control board 951. The power failure warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b), and is also input to the door frame decoration board, etc. via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, and is therefore able to more accurately detect signs of a power failure or momentary interruption, etc., compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 will be described with reference to Figs. 77 to 79. Fig. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, Fig. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and Fig. 79 is a circuit diagram showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Fig. 75 will be described, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, various input/output signals to the main control MPU, and the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control board 1310 is mainly composed of the main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, +5V creation circuit 1310g, and main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figs. 69 and 75, as well as peripheral circuits, as shown in Fig. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in Fig. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has a first terminal to which +5V generated by a +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied, a second terminal to which is grounded (GND), and a third terminal to which +5V with noise components removed is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC0, the other end of which is grounded (GND), so that ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed and the voltage is smoothed.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are grounded to ground (GND), to further remove ripple and smooth the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through a resistor MR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. As a result, as described above, when the +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, since the current is prevented from flowing through the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0, the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM, thereby retaining the memory contents.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in Fig. 77. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC5, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 reaches a threshold value (e.g., 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, with one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor MC6 removes ripples and smoothes them out. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in Fig. 77. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. With +5V applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, the main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input to it. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is a circuit to which detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69 are input, as well as operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 70. The circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each switch are input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is operated when clearing the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or when an error is notified after power-on, it is operated to cancel the error, and has a function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on and a function of canceling the error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the dispensing control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, it is judged to be a RAM clear signal for clearing the main control built-in RAM and performs a process of clearing the main control built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal with a logic LOW is input from the dispensing control board 951 to the main control board 1310, whereas when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal with a logic HI is input from the dispensing control board 951 (a detailed explanation of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the dispensing control board 951 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is electrically connected to one end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3, as shown in Fig. 77. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4, which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR5, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC10A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the dispensing control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and input with a logic LOW, whereas when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and input with a logic HI.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, a logically LOW operation signal is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a logically HI operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is not an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which has been pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic HI, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954, which has a logic LOW, is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the dispensing control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may invade the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V, is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first starting hole sensor 4002, and the second starting hole sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are pulled up to the +5V side by pull-up resistors, while the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning hole sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 that are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are not directly input to the main control board 1310, and are therefore pulled up to the +12V side by pull-up resistors, just like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +24V, the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR20, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and +5V is applied to the REF terminal, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment) that serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 2, which is the negative terminal of MIC21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 6, which is the negative terminal of MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC21, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is smoothed by the capacitor MC21 to remove ripples, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 compares the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +24V power supply. The 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that when the +24V power supply experiences a power outage or momentary interruption and the voltage starts to drop from +24V to a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment), the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal of comparator MIC21A, terminal 1, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 compares the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +12V power supply. The 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and to the other end of the resistor MR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and to the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power fails or is momentarily interrupted and the voltage starts to drop from +12V to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

Terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A described above. Therefore, one end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As described above, capacitor MC24 serves as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, in response to a change in edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and outputs this stored value (logic) from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and also outputs the inverted value of the stored value (logic) from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. When a signal with a logic LOW is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal with the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted, that is, a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. In addition, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latched state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with a logic LOW is input to the preset terminal PR terminal, so that the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a signal with a logic HI from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with the logic of the inverted signal output from 1Q is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured so that the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, are grounded to ground (GND), so that there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +24V, and a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V, at the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, and outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The power supply terminal Vcc terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC22, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the power supply terminal Vcc terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has ripples removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC22, the ground terminal GND terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later, and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic becoming LOW at the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the output control board 951 as a power outage warning signal, and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

As shown in Fig. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and to the other end of a resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC23A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and a power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a power failure warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in Fig. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor MR30 and is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and to the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via a wiring (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 70.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30, MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33, MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage and the preceding switch circuit also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage, is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage and the succeeding switch circuit also turns ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF and the succeeding switch circuit OFF.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the dispensing control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 in the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in FIG. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35 and the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to a +12V power line in a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning the transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 are While the logic is the same, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the rear stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverted logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the rear stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310, and between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a, dispensing control MPU 952a, and peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the master control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to Fig. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the master control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 69 as a dispensing master serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, transmit serial data to be sent to the dispensing control board 951 from the TXA terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb as a main payment serial data transmission signal, and transmit a main payment serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the dispensing control board 951, and transmit serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 69 as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the TXB terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and transmit a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal), each input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives, for example, a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951, which indicates that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main pay ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the drive signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310 d to the start port solenoid 2107, and outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs drive signals to the various displays, and outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, etc.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75 via the output control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 has the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit is mainly composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 has a communication interface circuit mainly composed of a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (composed of a built-in infrared LED and photo IC).

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacity: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose negative terminal is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
As a result, if, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the discharge control board 951, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 can continue to be applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V for the main control MPU 1310a, in order to reduce the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. This increases the reliability of the signal.

In this embodiment, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when the main control serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb via the serial management unit 1310aec to the transmission shift register 41aea and transmits it as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 can transmit a main serial data transmission signal with a logic HI due to +12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and since one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data, a maximum of 10 packets of data can be stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19,200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). Resistor AR10 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal, which outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR50, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR50 via a resistor MR51. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR52, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, transistor MTR50 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR50, transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

The anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the negative terminal of which is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, as well as to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 changes, and that signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of peripheral control MPU 1511a as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal.

As a result, as described above, if the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can continue to be applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, the +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 can complete transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main serial data, is reliably received by the peripheral control board 1510 without being cut off or missing.

When the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR50 OFF and turning the photocoupler AIC10 OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main loop serial data transmission signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same logic as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this embodiment, measures are taken when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs on the +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied, causing the control reference voltage and communication voltage to drop. In other words, the +5V power line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, which uses the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel to the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, so that even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power line drops, the control reference voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power source, so that the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the control reference voltage is configured to be connected to the +5V power line by the resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is electrically connected in parallel with the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the communication voltage applied from the +12V power line through the diode MD50 drops, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, so that the communication voltage can be maintained. This makes it possible to prevent commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and also prevents them from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive commands being sent. This makes it possible to eliminate the risk of missing commands immediately after a power outage or during a momentary interruption.

In addition, the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF so that all of the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can be completely transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which is composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50 and functions as a communications interface circuit. As a result, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb can be completely transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as an interface circuit, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without interruption or loss.

[10. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
Next, the circuit of the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 70 will be described with reference to Figs. 80 to 85. Fig. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control unit, Fig. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing control input circuit, Fig. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 81, Fig. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing motor drive circuit, Fig. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and Fig. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. First, the dispensing control filter circuit will be described, followed by the circuit of the dispensing control unit, and then the various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board.

[10-1. Dispense control filter circuit]
The payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 as shown in Fig. 80. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC0, which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by first removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with noise components removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the capacitor PC1, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacity: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), so that the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. Note that, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption occurs to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by the capacitor PC3 to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of this dispensing control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through the resistor PR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing the noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 through the diode PD0. As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the payout VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of the dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 is mainly composed of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) as peripheral circuits, in addition to a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as shown in Fig. 80. Here, we will first explain the payout control system reset, and then explain the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 as shown in FIG. 80. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor PC6 acts as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispatch control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in Figure 80. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to the OE terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is the output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b is a circuit to which a dispensing power failure notice signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the main frame opening switch 619, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 75, the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 70, and the full tank detection sensor 279 via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954, etc. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the dispensing power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input, and the circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, and rotation detection sensor 840 shown in Figure 70 have output terminals of the open collector output type, so the circuit configurations to which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input are almost identical, and therefore here we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and is turned ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR23, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) of which one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line on the external terminal board 784. When transistor PTR21 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 changes, and that signal is input to external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through resistor PR21, and is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through resistor PR24. It is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to resistor PR26 and to the other end of resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR22 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR20 and capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the door frame opening switch 618 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, the circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame opening signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR21 OFF and the switch circuit OFF.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic HI is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR22 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20, turning the transistor PTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a door frame opening signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor PTR21 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor PTR22 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which detection signal from main body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (NC), and is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR28, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR30, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC21, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR21, and is also electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29, and is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to resistor PR31 and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR24 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR28 and capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the main frame opening switch 619 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

When the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR24 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR24 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, even if the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, or if both of these states occur, a main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the main frame door open signal, but it can be used to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open during normal play. Since an outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal board 784, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and although the hall computer cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, it can determine that a state that does not occur during normal play by the player, that the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open, has occurred.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even if the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the door frame 3 will be opened from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main frame 4 will be opened from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even in the event of a short circuit, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

When the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame opening switch 618' and main frame opening switch 619'), the door frame opening switch 618' turns ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main frame 4. The main frame opening switch 619' turns ON (conductive) when the main frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 will be released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' and the main frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, even in the event of a disconnection, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c) Circuit to which the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR40 that is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR42 that is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR43, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a dispensing power failure warning signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR41 and PR42 and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the power supply control board 951 as a power failure warning via the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages, and when both conditions, that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply control board 951 via the wiring (harness) and the logic of the power failure warning signal becomes LOW. When a signal is input to the dispensing control board 951, and either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, that is, when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR40 OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the dispensing power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, turning the transistor PTR40 ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the dispensing power failure warning signal with the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 being LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, whereas when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, while when there is no sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, the power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the logic of the payout power outage warning signal input to the payout control MPU 952a due to a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fall cover unit 270 shown in Fig. 1 is input to the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 6. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type circuit in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR44a, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line, and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor in the dispensing control board 951. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor through resistor PR44b, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 through resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and to the other end of the capacitor PC40, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND). The capacitor PC40 plays the role of a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR47, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC40B) shapes the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it and outputs it). When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR45 and PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic HI is input to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic LOW is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes HI, which is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning the transistor PTR41 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a full tank signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR47, and a full tank signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit consisting of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are input directly to each switch circuit without passing through a T-type filter circuit such as the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the fault cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise compared to the bulb out detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main frame 4.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and when the payout control MPU 952a determines that the storage space is full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, it performs control to forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a may forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor even if the storage space is not full of stored game balls, or if the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled to rotate the payout rotor to continue paying out game balls even though the storage space is full of stored game balls, and the upstream side of the prize ball passage is filled with game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and an abnormal load is applied to the payout motor 834, the payout motor 834 becomes overloaded and abnormally heats up, or the mechanism that transmits the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational motion of the payout rotor may break down. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such problems from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered out by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor to remove noise components.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which operation signals from operation switches are input]
The first and second terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to ground (GND), and the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49 and to the other end of a resistor PR50, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48 and to the other end of a capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR54, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 changes when the front and rear transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON/OFF, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a RWMCLR signal.

In addition, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via resistor PR49, and are also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR44 via resistor PR55. The base terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to resistor PR55 and is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77. When transistor PTR44 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 changes, and this signal is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR48 and capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the operation switch 954 is pressed.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is the front-stage switch circuit, the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is the rear-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 is the switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to cancel an error when an error is notified after power-on. It has a function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and a function to cancel an error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, while it becomes an error cancellation signal in the function of clearing the error after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on).

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, turning the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage ON and the switch circuit in the previous stage ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR43 in the next stage OFF and the switch circuit in the next stage OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI during a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, it does not indicate that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from when the power is turned on), it determines that it does not indicate that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning the transistor PTR44 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as described above, the RAM clear signal with a logic LOW shown in FIG. 77 is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a determines that this does not indicate an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, turning off the transistor PTR42 in the front stage and turning off the switch circuit in the front stage, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage, is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, turning on the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage and turning on the switch circuit in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on, this indicates that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), this indicates that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to ground (GND) by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as described above, inputs the RAM clear signal with a logic HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 shown in FIG. 77, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive IC PIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded to the ground (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via a Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing motor 834.Based on a voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 has four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, terminals 6 and 7, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are each grounded to ground (GND), and terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, receive the dispensing motor drive signal via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 2, terminal 4, terminal 9, and terminal 11, correspond to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, and when a dispensing motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, a drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This dispensing motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, via resistors PR60 to PR63. These drive pulses are generated by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, causing the dispensing motor 834 to rotate. When the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged, so as a protection measure, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected in front of terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in Fig. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball loan request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 as described above, and is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 71. The payout control board 951 outputs an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is possible or impossible, via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The input/output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in) as shown in Fig. 84.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 through a resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 through a resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 through a resistor PR72. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71, and also to one end of a pull-up resistor PR73, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 80 via the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a as the CR connection signal 1.

Meanwhile, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR76, the other end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the power supply board 931, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR71 and PR74 and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR70 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1, whose logic is now HI, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic LOW is input to the power supply board 931.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR71 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic HI is input to the power supply board 931.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 as well as to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 receives the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR78, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 receives the BRQ from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR80, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to an input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC80C) shapes the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it and outputs it). When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from CR unit 6.

The EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is output to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb via resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR82, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, whereas when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the EXS with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same logic as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

The PRDY signal, which indicates whether or not a payout operation for dispensing loaned balls is possible from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU 952a, is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR84. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR85, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, whereas when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the PRDY with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same logic as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU]
Next, we will explain the various input/output signals that are input/output from the input/output terminals of the various input/output ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data reception signal via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. On the other hand, the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, transmits the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and transmits the main dispensing serial data transmission signal from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

In addition to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), each input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives, for example, a main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the above-mentioned main dispensing serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and detection signals from the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and the EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da, and the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function In addition to outputting a dispensing motor drive signal from the circuit 952ca to the dispensing motor 834 via the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, for example, a payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the main control board 1310, and a drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the dispensing control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the dispensing control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board]
The dispensing control board 951 exchanges various input and output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 85(a), the dispensing control board 951 outputs the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 receives game information signals related to the game, such as the main prize ball number information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, and 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output signal, and starting hole winning information output signal, as well as payout power outage warning signals, from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the outer end frame door opening information output signal described above, the payout motor 834 outputs a prize ball number information output signal every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, and the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal, a jackpot information output signal of a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a starting hole winning information output signal, and other game information signals to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784 from the payout control board 951: an outer end frame door opening information output signal, and a prize ball number information output signal, and eight signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310: a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, information output signal during time reduction, and a starting port winning information output signal.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall), not shown, and the hall computer monitors the player's play, etc. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer calculates the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 by adding up the number of jackpots with two rounds (the number of 2-round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (the number of 15-round jackpots). Therefore, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots from the total number of jackpots, and therefore cannot determine whether the number of jackpots that have actually occurred on the pachinko machine 1 is 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is placed above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred, which is displayed on the data counter, when deciding whether or not to play.

However, the number of times the jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter may actually be biased towards the number of times a 2-round jackpot has occurred, so that even when a player starts playing, there may be only 2-round jackpots occurring and no 15-round jackpots occurring for a while. In this way, although the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of hope, it may also stimulate the player's gambling spirit more than necessary.

In this embodiment, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are output separately to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer can accurately grasp the number of 2-round jackpots and the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the jackpots that have actually occurred more frequently in the pachinko machine 1 are 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots, and the data counter can display the number of 15-round jackpots and the number of 2-round jackpots separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpots, as the number of jackpot game states, so that the player's gambling spirit is not unnecessarily stimulated.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from when the 2-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 2-round jackpot, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also output to the hall computer during the period from when the 15-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 15-round jackpot. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. Such a method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to a hall computer installed in an amusement facility (hall) will be described with reference to Fig. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of a prize ball base that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the jackpot information output signal of the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special pattern display information output signal, the normal pattern display information output signal, the time-saving information output signal, and the starting port winning information output signal when they are input from the payout control board 951.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a state that does not occur during normal play has occurred, in which the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open; the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10; the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports, such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, 2201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. 8, reaches 10; the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred; The information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot has occurred, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, the special pattern display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variable display of the special pattern, the normal pattern display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal pattern display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variable display of the normal pattern, the time-saving information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and the start hole winning information output signal is a signal that indicates that each time a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 8.

As shown in FIG. 86, the external terminal board 784 has output terminals PT1 to PT10 arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the user that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can know that the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 has paid out 10 game balls as prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of paid game balls to know the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open, a state that does not occur during normal play, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 are open. When the outer frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can grasp that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 are open while the outer frame door open information output signal is being input.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT3 for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 has ended (stopped). When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times this has happened to determine the total number of times the special symbol has been displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start port winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT4 for 0.128 seconds each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the start port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the start port winning information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to determine the total number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT5 while a 15-round jackpot is occurring. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 15-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT6 while a two-round jackpot is occurring. When the two-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a two-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the two-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variable display of the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT7 is output for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 has finished (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can know that the variable display of the normal symbol has finished (stopped) in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times that this has happened to know the total number of times the normal symbol has been displayed variable in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time-saving information output signal. As described above, the time-saving information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is occurring. When the time-saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is able to determine that a time-saving state is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the time-saving information output signal is input, and is able to count the number of times the time-saving information output signal is input and determine the total number of times the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, 2201, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can know that the pachinko machine 1 is planning to pay out 10 game balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of game balls to be paid out and know the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. For example, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports, such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2201, and the large winning port 2005, reaches 20 or more, and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds so that it does not become one continuous signal for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2) seconds.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the dispensing control board 951 side, while output terminals PT3 to PT10 are arranged so that various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are output via (passing through) the dispensing control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting wiring having connectors colored the same to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection of other wiring. In order to prevent the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side from being mixed with the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row from the left center of the external terminal board 784 to the right side. In this respect, it is possible to prevent the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer from being mistakenly electrically connected.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are each configured to be transmitted to the hall computer from the external terminal board 784. For example, in a state where game balls are no longer being supplied from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some kind of trouble in the pachinko island equipment, if a 15-round jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 1 at the point when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to pay out as prize balls will be insufficient, and therefore payout will not be possible (also, for example, if a ball jam or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). In this case, as described above, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side is a signal that notifies the fact that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Therefore, when the game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 cannot output the prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls the hall staff. The hall staff, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the location of the ball jam (and also identifies the location of the ball jam or ball jam that occurred in the payout device 830, for example) and resolves it, thereby returning to the state where the game balls are paid out.

However, even when the hall staff is working, the game is still in progress using the main control board 1310. When the hall staff returns to a state where game balls are being paid out after the 15-round jackpot has ended, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid game balls one after another. Even though the 15-round jackpot has ended and no 15-round jackpots have occurred, the payout control board 951 will output a prize ball number information output signal that notifies the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10. As a result, even though no 15-round jackpots have occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, which creates a problem in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out prize balls, that is, as a signal separate from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal as a signal to inform the hall computer of the fact that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 reaches 10 balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging or ball clogging in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in this game state can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out during that game state.

[12. Circuit of the performance display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the performance display drive board 4450 which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 will be described with reference to Fig. 87. As described above, the performance display drive board 4450 is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored within the tray unit 320, and is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 450V which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460. Fig. 87 is a circuit diagram showing the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
The liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, as shown in Figure 87.

When serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. are transmitted as positive and negative signals from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V inputs these signals to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 is able to separate noise from the positive and negative signals. The positive and negative signals from which noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) that prevents the positive and negative signals from reflecting at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, and prevents distortion of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and three synchronization signals, horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively (i.e., restores the parallel signals before being serialized). As mentioned above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are each 8 bits, but the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the red, green, and blue video signals are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

In addition to the signal from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V is also configured to receive two signals, which are serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and which are differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to connect the circuit to transmit these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, as described above, while connecting the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f transmits the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and are then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that this is a request to output a LOCKN signal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers. The LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e, but has a structure whose data format is completely different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned differential type serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the signal is not that output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and determines that the data is abnormal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the function of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 to output a LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal is used to forcibly output a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described below, and LOCKN signal output request data having a data format structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby making it possible to check whether the device called the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x shown in Figure 76, and the GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND terminal, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuitry, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the digital circuitry, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the VDD terminal.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the TTL output, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the VDDO terminal.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between this terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the LVDS input, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between this terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the PLL circuit, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the PLLVDD terminal.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation, but when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power down. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to one end of varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage on the +3.3V power line supplied via resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal is a terminal for specifying whether the transmission of various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal (described later) is a rising edge (logic transition from LOW to HIGH) or a falling edge (logic transition from HIGH to LOW). In this embodiment, as described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described below. In this embodiment, as described above, the OE terminal is grounded to enable output at all times. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, output is not permitted.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting the operating mode, and the operating mode can be selected by grounding both. There are two operating modes: normal mode and handshake mode. In normal mode, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores a parallel signal consisting of three video signals (18-bit video signals) - a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal - and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) - a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal - based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is the normal operating mode. In handshake mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver. This handshake mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, if the parallel signals that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, which are three video signals (18-bit video signals) of red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) of horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, are abnormal data for some reason and are difficult to display on the door frame side performance display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the handshake mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the satisfaction. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the connection between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 may be electrically connected directly via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are terminals that output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, that are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that indicates whether the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, as described below. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built into the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals are data output terminals that output three video signals (18-bit video signals): a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. The D0 to D5 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0, which is a damping resistor. The D6 to D11 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1, which is a damping resistor. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA2, which is a damping resistor.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the performance display drive board 4450, and the door frame side performance display device 460 are electrically connected and share the same ground.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 91. Figure 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, Figure 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, Figure 90 is a table showing a continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in Figure 89, and Figure 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by a description of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and a description of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board]
When detection signals are input from various winning switches such as the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in Fig. 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine 1 and drives the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to pay out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are the storage trays) are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "CR machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(a), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents hexadecimal), with command 10H specifying one prize ball, command 11H specifying two prize balls, ..., and command 1EH specifying fifteen prize balls. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays) are installed adjacent to each other in an amusement hall (hall) and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "general machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(b), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 20H to 2EH, with command 20H specifying one prize ball, command 21H specifying two prize balls, ... and command 2EH specifying 15 prize balls. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88(c), command 30H is provided as a common command for both CR machines and general machines, and this command 30H specifies a self-check. If an ACK signal output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after sending the command, the sending side sends command 30H and checks whether an ACK signal has been input to confirm the connection status. In the case of a CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection status with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 89 and 90, are composed of a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode indicating a variation of the presentation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in Figures 89 and 90, the various commands are categorized into those related to special chart 1 synchronization effects, those related to special chart 2 synchronization effects, those related to big wins, power-on, those related to regular chart synchronization effects, those related to regular electric role effects, notification displays, status displays, and others.

[13-2-1. Special Chart 1 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 1 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 1 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special symbol 1 synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 1 designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the special pattern 1 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 1 synchronization performance, and the variable time state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. The probability and time-saving state are composed of a low probability time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a time-saving state, a high probability time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a time-saving state, a low probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set higher than that of the low probability state (normal game state), and the time-saving state is, for example, a state in which the time for variably displaying the normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. 10 is shortened compared to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the number of times the normal lottery result is stopped and displayed by the normal lottery described later in a predetermined time is increased compared to the non-time-saving state, and further, a pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. This state allows players to get a chance to win a special pattern without losing balls by lengthening the period during which the game balls are opened and closed in comparison to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 (in other words, compared to the non-time-saving state, there are more decisions to make as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and when the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed, the period for which the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed is longer, thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game balls into the second starting opening 2004).

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the special pattern 1 synchronization start command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation starts, the special pattern 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 1 synchronization start, the special pattern 1 synchronization end command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when special pattern 1 is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Chart 2 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 2 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 2 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 2", and "End special symbol 2 synchronization performance" related to the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "B*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 2 synchronization performance.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command is sent when the special pattern 2 starts to change, the special pattern 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization performance starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command is sent when the special pattern 2 change time has elapsed (when special pattern 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
The "jackpot-related" category, as shown in Figure 89, is made up of commands named "jackpot opening", "Nth large prize slot 1 open display", "large prize slot 1 closed display", "large prize slot 1 count display", "jackpot ending", "jackpot pattern display", "small prize opening", "small prize open display", "small prize count display", and "small prize ending". These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, the display command for displaying the Nth opening of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 2nd ...

The small win opening command instructs the start of a small win opening, the small win opening display command instructs the start of a small win opening (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 is open or has started to open during a small win), the small win count display command instructs the large winning port winning presentation during a small win (the presentation when a game ball that has entered the large winning port 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during a small win), and the small win ending command instructs the start of a small win ending.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, the large prize opening 1 open Nth display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened in the Nth round), the large prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is closed (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 starts to close), the large prize opening 1 count display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large prize opening 1 (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the large prize opening is opened (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened).

The small win opening command is sent when the small win opening starts, the small win opening display command is sent when the small win opens (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 opens during a small win), the small win count display command is sent when the ball enters the large winning port during a small win (when the game ball that entered the large winning port 2005 during a small win is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small win ending command is sent when the small win ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power On]
The power-on category consists of commands named "power-on state" and "power-on main control return destination," as shown in FIG. 89. These various commands include the status "D*H " and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1). (This was done).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clearing effect and the game state. The power-on state command is composed of information that indicates when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to perform RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), information that indicates which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), among the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type, specifies which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it is (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (so-called ST machine)). In other words, the information of the model code of a pachinko machine is mainly composed of a series code that specifies which type it is, among the max type, middle type, and sweet type that indicate the model type, a copyright code that specifies the copyright of the work, and a game specification code that specifies the game specification (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (ST machine)).

The main control return destination command at power on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69.

The power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent when the main control board is powered on (including when the power is turned on and when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, the main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-5. General-purpose synchronous performance related]
The normal symbol synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start normal symbol synchronization performance", "Specify normal symbol", "End normal symbol synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization start command instructs the start of the normal pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified by the mode, the normal pattern designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the normal pattern synchronization end command instructs the end of the normal pattern synchronization performance, and the variable state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. As described above, the probability and time-saving state consists of a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal pattern synchronization start command is sent when normal pattern 1 starts to change, the normal pattern designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern synchronization start, the normal pattern synchronization end command is sent when the normal pattern change time has elapsed (when the normal pattern is confirmed), and the change time state designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern win/lose information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Electric Role Performance Related]
The normal electric role performance-related relates to a pair of movable pieces shown in Fig. 8 that are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in Fig. 69, and this section is composed of commands named "normal winning opening", "normal power opening display", and "normal winning ending" as shown in Fig. 89. These various commands are assigned "F*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map opening command instructs the start of normal map opening, the normal power release display command instructs the start of normal power release (when the pair of movable pieces are in a state where they have been opened to the left and right by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107, or when they are about to open), and the normal map ending command instructs the start of normal map ending.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal map opening command is sent when the normal map opening starts, the normal power release display command is sent when the normal power is released (when the pair of movable pieces open left and right due to the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107), and the normal map ending command is sent when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the notification display categories are made up of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command instructs the start of a winning abnormality notification when a winning ball is entered into the large winning port other than during a jackpot (when a game ball enters the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 and the count sensor 4005 detects the game ball even when there is no jackpot). The connection abnormality display command instructs the start of a connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command instructs the start of a disconnection/short circuit abnormality display when there is a disconnection/short circuit in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc., for example. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of a magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

The door open command instructs a door open notification when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the door frame close command instructs the end of the door open notification when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. On the other hand, the main frame open command instructs a main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the main frame close command instructs the end of the main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a big prize is won in the big prize winning port other than during a big win (when the condition device is operating), the connection abnormality display command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951, the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is sent when any of the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. is disconnected or shorted, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. In addition, the door open command is sent when the door is opened (when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door frame close command is sent when the door is closed (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main frame open command is sent when the main frame is detected as open (when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619), and the main frame close command is sent when the main frame is detected as closed (when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the status display is made up of commands named Frame Status 1 Command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error Clear Navigation Command (corresponding to the error clear command), and Frame Status 2 Command. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command are each commands with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) sent from the dispensing control board 951, and a detailed description of these will be given later. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it sets "7*H" as the status as shown in FIG. 90, and sets the received command as the mode as is. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it adds the additional information "7*H" to these received commands, thereby forming them into commands with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted Frame State 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when error clear navigation is performed, the Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clear navigation is performed, and the Frame State 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted Frame State 1 command, Error Clear Navigation command, and Frame State 2 command are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test-related]
The test-related section is made up of various commands named "test" as shown in Fig. 90. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" represents a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, tests of various boards such as the peripheral control unit 1511, LCD display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72).

The test command is sent when the main control board is powered on, the RAM is cleared, and at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, and the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the test command is sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
Other categories, as shown in Fig. 90, are made up of commands named "Starting hole winning", "Variation shortening operation end designation", "High probability end designation", "Special symbol 1 memory", "Special symbol 2 memory", "Normal symbol memory", "Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance", and "Special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance". These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start hole entry command instructs the start of the start hole entry presentation, and instructs the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, and the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, respectively. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state, and is a high probability end designation. The set command instructs a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state, the special symbol 1 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 1 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the first start hole 2002 shown in FIG. 8), and the special symbol 2 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 2 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The normal symbol memory command conveys 0 to 4 normal symbol 1 reserved (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8), and the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance command conveys the number of reserved special symbol 1 reserved balls (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400). This command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the first special pattern display 1403 based on the reserved special pattern 1 before it is used to display the changing patterns, and the special pattern 2 storage look-ahead performance command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special pattern display 1405 based on the reserved special pattern 2 before the reserved special pattern 2 is used to display the changing special patterns on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400.

Regarding the timing of sending these various commands, the start hole entry command is sent from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 when the game ball enters the start hole (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) to notify the fact mainly by voice, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation that the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation that the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed). The fixed command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability count in the case of "high probability N times" is consumed and the fluctuation is confirmed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 activation changes (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the reserved number decreases). The pattern 2 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation changes (when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). The normal pattern memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for normal pattern 1 activation changes (when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special pattern variation on the normal pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). When there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used to display the normal pattern variation in 402, and the reserved number increases when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, or when the reserved number is used to display the normal pattern variation in the normal pattern display 1402 and the reserved number decreases), the special pattern 1 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 activation increases (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and the reserved number increases), and the special pattern 2 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation increases (when a game ball enters the second start hole 2004 and the reserved number increases). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

As described above, the start hole entry command is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the player of the start hole entry (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) by voice, but how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the start hole entry command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to notifying the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the command is also used to monitor for the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. In contrast, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start hole entry command, and does not notify the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board]
Next, we will explain the various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the dispensing control board 951.

As shown in Figure 91, the classification of various commands from the dispensing control board 951 consists of commands named Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2, and the priority is set in the order of Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2.

The Frame Status 1 command (corresponding to the error command) has the following statuses: out of bulb, full, 50 or more bulbs in stock, connection abnormality, and CR not connected; for out of bulb, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to value 1, for full, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1, for 50 or more bulbs in stock, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, for connection abnormality, bit 3 (B3) is set to value 1, and for CR not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to value 1. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame Status 1 command have B5 set to value 1, B6 set to value 0, and B7 set to value 0.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) is prepared for ball detection, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. For ball detection, a value of 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), for payout detection sensor error, a value of 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and for retry error, a value of 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. "Retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been performed repeatedly by the retry operation. Bits (B0), (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command are set to 0 for B0, 0 for B1, 0 for B5, 1 for B6, and 0 for B7.

The Frame State 2 command has a "ball removed" status, during which a value of 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have the following settings: B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and B7 has a value of 0.

These various commands are sent with the following timing: Slot Status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the slot status changes, and when error clearance navigation is performed; Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clearance navigation is performed; and Slot Status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the slot status changes. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the command sending process of step S558 in the dispensing control unit main processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 according to the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 92 to 94. Fig. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92, and Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
The various random numbers used for game control include a jackpot determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, a reach determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (reach miss) when a jackpot game state is not generated, a variable display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display 1403 and the second special pattern display 1405 shown in FIG. 69, and a random number used to determine the first special pattern display when a jackpot game state is generated. The following random numbers are provided: a jackpot pattern random number for use in determining the jackpot pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405; a jackpot pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this jackpot pattern random number; a small win pattern random number for use in determining the small win pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405 when a small win game state is generated; and a small win pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this small win pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece shown in Figure 8, random numbers for determining an initial value for determining whether or not to win a normal pattern, which are used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining whether or not to win a normal pattern, and random numbers for a normal pattern variable display pattern, which are used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402 shown in Figure 69.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, the random numbers used to determine jackpots are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number for determining a jackpot is updated directly by hardware using the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Fig. 69. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in Fig. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting all values within the predetermined numerical range, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. This type of high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as the random number for determining a jackpot.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum to the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 in the main control side power-on processing described later does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), etc., the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is set by executing an initial value derivation process in which the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the retrieved ID code, the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit executes an ID code derivation process to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a, and the second security measure is that the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit judgment will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' equipped with other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1'. Therefore, even if a momentary interruption is generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at the predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 to generate a game state in which game balls can be received by the second starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when ending a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a new item is added to the stack.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in Fig. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started to start timing until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts timing, and if a timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT 1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and starts timing, if a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timed time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af will be cleared and timing will be started again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af before the time set by the timer setting value is reached and then restarting the timekeeping, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clear process (step S14). In this power outage clear process, first, the power outage clear signal is output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. This power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between +24V and a reference voltage, or between +12V and a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. When no power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic of this comparison result becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power outage clear process, the power outage clear signal is first output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, which starts outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Next, in the electric power clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, and a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage after power is turned on and stabilizes, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above, as the power outage warning signal.

If, after power-on, the voltage becomes greater than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes, but no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program stops outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Here, the power outage clear signal is input, with its logic set to HI from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to a latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and input to its preset terminal, the PR terminal, the D-type flip-flop outputs the power outage warning signal from the output terminal, the 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (game side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program performs this determination based on whether an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 is not operated, judging that it does not instruct to perform RAM clearing, whereas when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, the program determines that the operation switch 954 is operated, judging that it instructs to perform RAM clearing.

In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program makes the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit)) executable for a predetermined time from the time of power-on (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) of the main control MPU 1310a, and is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the program waits until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 starts up (boots up). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. When the power outage warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af cannot be cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs the main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be provided later.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when game information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when game information is not to be erased. If the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 in step S26, that is, when game information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S28, the main control program judges whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S30). If they match, the main control program judges whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and held in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process has been normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process has not been normally completed. Note that the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after production for inspection in the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310 will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cut processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency from fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of the fraudster's arm) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. to change as various subsequent processes are performed. Therefore, unless the main control power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared, as described below.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control program clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing in response to the input of a detection signal accompanying the operation of the above-mentioned operation switch 954 (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program does this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clearing and game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol win, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 951 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is present, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and allow transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control program performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in Fig. 69 (step S48). Here, the main control program performs settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to the game, by hardware, and sets the startup of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is started by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when this latch signal is input from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this acquired random number as the random number for determining a jackpot.

Following step S48, the main control program reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information may be stored in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. A detailed explanation of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, when a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, that is, when the main control side main processing has begun, the main control program will regulate the execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt of an error clear navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to handle the detection signal input in association with the operation of the operation switch 954, and executes the RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the error clear navigation command for a predetermined time from power-on as described above (game control side power-on operation control means), and regulates the execution of the RAM clear processing even if the error clear navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (game control side normal operation control means), treating it as a release switch for releasing an error notification associated with an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error clearing section), which would normally be used to clear an error that occurs during the payout operation, can instead function as an operation section for executing a RAM clear process to start the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as the payout memory section, described later) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on, or as an operation section for clearing an error that occurs during the payout operation of the game balls after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

The main control program then determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot pattern, and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small jackpot pattern, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (jackpot determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern hit determination, the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the program returns to step S54, where the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the program performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main control side main process."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects game information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as the process in which the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S14. This allows the main control program to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program stops the drive signals output to the start port solenoid 2107, the attacca solenoid 2108, the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the normal pattern memory display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc., as shown in FIG. 69 (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control internal RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets a prohibition on access to the RAM (step S68). This prohibition on access to the RAM makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit), thereby making it possible to prevent updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. The main control program then performs this main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and performs main control power-on processing when power is subsequently restored.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, in an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, the wait time standby process of step S22 starts timing the standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, set to 2.5 seconds) until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the LCD display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72 starts (boots), and if an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before reaching that standby time, a charge of +5 V stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing. As a result, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control's power-on processing will begin again when power is restored.

If this is the case, when power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28 is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred, the checksum values will not match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38. In other words, there is a problem that when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall staff member or the like, and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the hall staff member or the like to clear the RAM.

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a as described above, so even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, so that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed and the game information can be prevented from being updated, and the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 are consistent, so the game information immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step 24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77, and the game information due to the progress of this game is maintained. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power failure process consisting of the process of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup process for storing information, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (i.e., the value calculated and stored for the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT 1310af, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms determined by hardware, as before. That is, in this embodiment, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control side power-on process upon power recovery, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, and the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, then the process in step S24 immediately follows the wait time standby process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and when a power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, and a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using such software, it is possible to prevent the progress to the step after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), thereby avoiding the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the system is divided into two parts: a software part that ensures that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all, and a hardware part that ensures that the main control's power cut processing is completed reliably and that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. By configuring the system in two ways, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored), a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (e.g., a jackpot game presentation screen) in the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, and the main control board 1310 drives the attacca solenoid 2108 to open the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 by the opening/closing member 2107, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and thus when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can restore based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state, but cannot display at all which round of the large prize game state (i.e., which round).

In this situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Also, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable pieces are being opened) on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game ball can be received in the second starting hole 2004 and that the game is in a favorable game state, and the main control board 1310 is driving the starting hole solenoid 2107 to open the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 to the left and right, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and the driving of the starting hole solenoid 2107 is started, and the pair of movable pieces transition from a state in which they are approximately vertically standing to a state in which they are opened to the left and right.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become advantageous to the player, in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. For this reason, a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which a game ball could be received into the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which a game ball can be received into the second starting hole 2004, a screen instructing the game to be played (i.e., a screen instructing the game to put a game ball into the second starting hole 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, and the player may not know what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the peripheral control board 1510 that, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 will return to the destination by initiating the drive of the attacca solenoid 2108 and transitioning the jackpot opening 2005 from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to a state in which it is open. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big win game state (i.e., a screen showing which round it is) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but can display a screen informing that it is a big win game state, that the attacca solenoid 2108 has started to be driven, and that the big win opening 2005 has been opened by the opening and closing member 2107 (for example, a screen saying "It's a big win. The big win opening is open. Please enter the game ball into the big win opening"). Please play your game.") can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball will enter the large prize opening 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a game state in which game balls can be received by the second start opening 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the return destination of the main control board 1310 can be Then, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen informing the player that the start port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces have been opened to the left and right (for example, a screen informing the player of the message "The movable pieces are being opened. Please play so that the game ball enters the lower start port.") on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to play a game in which the game ball enters the second start port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored. Therefore, after power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout can be quickly restored. In other words, it is possible to prevent a player seated in front of the pachinko machine from mistaking the system of the pachinko machine for a malfunction, as appearing to be frozen when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the above-mentioned backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will necessarily be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

As described above, the power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the user to clear the RAM when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that instructs which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), among the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, there is also a game specification in which the number of times the special pattern can fluctuate is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and a probability fluctuation occurs (so-called ST machine)).

In the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, when the main control boards 1310 are manufactured, main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may be mixed together.
As a result, workers on the production line may not know which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyrights of Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture for which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), or they may mistakenly believe or believe that even though the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for one of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), it is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). For this reason, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, the workers on the manufacturing line cannot confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the manufacturing line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they cannot confirm which model type (max type, middle type, sweet type) and what game specifications (game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, or ST machine) are. As a result, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, and it will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, there were cases where workers on the game board assembly line attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that did not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in order to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on status command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are created in step S50 and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the manufacturing line, an operator on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed (such as an ST machine), in addition to the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the copyright of the same work, it is possible to determine which model type (one of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) and what kind of game specification it is (such as a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine). As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, and can send the main control boards 1310 for each copyright of the work to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control program in the main control board 1310 switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the above-mentioned main control side power-on processing, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control processing described later, the time during which the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control processing described later, as well as the time of the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs the payout control board 951 that various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) have been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program, for example, detects a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001, 2201 shown in FIG. 8, detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, detects a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, detects a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8, detects a game ball that has entered the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, which detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8, the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69, which detects fraudulent acts using a magnet, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69, which informs that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later, are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, when the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, which detects the game ball that has entered the first start hole 2002, and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, which detects the game ball that has entered the second start hole 2004, are read, the corresponding start hole winning command classified as others shown in FIG. 90 is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020 that detects the game ball that entered the general winning opening 2001, 2201, the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that passed through the gate section 2003 are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read the second time is compared with the result read the first time. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the result read the third time is compared with the result read the second time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the result read the fourth time is compared with the result read the third time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the game.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program performs a total of two double readings of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, by performing a double reading that compares the detection signals from the first to third times and a double reading that compares the detection signals from the second to fourth times, thereby making it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and thus improving the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a random number update process (step S106). In this random number update process, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the small win symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol, which are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the random numbers for the small win symbol are random numbers related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), so the respective counters are counted up only each time this random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination and the random numbers for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a jackpot has been determined is updated by this random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 is created for paying out game balls based on this input information. If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a self-check command shown in FIG. 88 is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the player of this, and stored as output information in the output information memory area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951.If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a specified period of time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls, the excess number is added to the number of game balls that will be paid out as prize balls based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area in the next prize ball control process, and when the added number of game balls is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the user of this fact, and the information is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). In the dispensing control board 951, the dispensing control program transmits various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in Fig. 91 (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command). On the other hand, as described later, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, and outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, it stores information to that effect to the payout control board 951 as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The main control program also formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status displays in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the winning ball is confirmed. For example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), etc., a winning abnormality display command classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created as an abnormal state, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the random number for jackpot determination. Then, it is judged whether the random number for jackpot judgment (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a jackpot game state is generated (called a "special lottery").), or it is judged whether the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot symbols matches the probability hit judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of winning a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability fluctuation) that is set higher than normal (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) described above, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set for low probability and is read from the normal judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value 32767 is set for high probability and is read from the probability fluctuation judgment table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric device control process in step S114, when determining whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, this is done based on whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are due to the first start hole sensor 4002, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created, whereas if the lottery result is due to the second start hole sensor 4004, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related commands shown in FIG. 89 (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth opening of jackpot opening 1, command to display closing of jackpot opening 1, command to display count of jackpot opening 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in a transmission information storage area as transmission information, the output of a drive signal to an attacca solenoid 2108 to open and close the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is set, and stored in an output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the jackpot opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is set to 2. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a shown in FIG. 10 is set to light up the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b shown in FIG. 10 is set to light up the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set to light up a specified color to indicate the occurrence or absence of a probability fluctuation, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric role control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric role control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal, the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol has been hit is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd sections (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. For example, if gate information is stored in 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 3rd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 3rd section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 2nd section of the gate information storage and the 3rd section of the gate information storage become an empty area. Here, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 3rd section of the gate information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is set based on the above-mentioned gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the RAM built into the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been hit is extracted from the gate information read out to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable pieces. If this decision is made to open or close the movable pieces are opened in the left and right directions, creating a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting hole 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. The normal pattern variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal pattern variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal pattern synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area as transmission information.In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the normal pattern display device 1402 is set so as to light up the normal pattern display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set to open and close the movable piece, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a light signal to the normal symbol display device 1402 is set to light up the normal symbol display device 1402 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2005 when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece, and also outputs various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal, to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out the transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a large prize opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize opening count command based on a detection signal from a count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering a large prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as shown in FIG. 90, various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command), various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other are stored. The main circuit serial data is configured with 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 can at least transfer the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data. When power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, so that the power-on state command is transmitted as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Note that in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is first completed, and then the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a slot status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a slot status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the slot status 1 command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91 and which it has received from the payout control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a slot status 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error clear navigation command (first error clear command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits an error clear navigation command (second error clear command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame open command (first main frame open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame open command (second main frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame close command (first main frame close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame close command (second main frame close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 90.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door open command (second door frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door close command (first door close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door close command (second door close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output to the peripheral control board 1510 the main control return destination command at power on of Figure 89 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 93, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on in Figure 89 and a power-on main control return destination command, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the same processing, to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.In the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, or in other words, in a frozen state, which prevents the player from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. As a result, when the reservation setting for the command to be sent when the power is turned on is made in step S50 of the same process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on status command is transmitted as main peripheral serial data to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control units]
[16-1-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on process starts, the performance control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the performance control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, and a process of setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is able to receive various commands, such as commands regarding the control of game presentations and commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command receiving interrupt processing described below, as shown in Figures 89 and 90.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1ms) and Bank 2 (1ms) is compared. In the backup second area 1511cc, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms) and Bank 4 (1ms) is compared. The performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank0 (1fr) and Bank1 (1fr) is compared, and if the compared contents match, the performance backup information (1fr) stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) for Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to perform a hot start, whereas if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used memory areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is compared with the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in its backup first area 1511db, and the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in its backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73, to perform a hot start, whereas when the compared contents do not match (i.e., when they are inconsistent), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1000, the performance control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and are set in the calendar information storage unit as the current calendar information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are set in the time information storage unit as the current time information. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and performs a process of adjusting and lighting the brightness of the backlight of the performance display device 1600 on the game board side so that it becomes the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 80% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Note that in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, no correction similar to the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600 described above is performed. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this LCD display device, preventing the LED brightness from being corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the LCD display device is executed.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the performance control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it is possible to accept screen data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0. In addition, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1006, the performance control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to the value 1 (it is equal to the value 0), the program returns to step S1008 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1. By repeating such determinations, the program enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1009, the performance control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer is started to execute the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has been started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed, thereby initializing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the presentation control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the presentation control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is started, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is created and set in the lamp data creation processing described later in the lamp data creation processing described later.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining game board side light-emitting data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers and writes the data SL-DAT one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board then transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the one byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In addition, in the lamp data output process, the performance control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created and set in the lamp data creation process described below in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it transfers the remaining door side light emission data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STL-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

Following step S1012, the presentation control program performs a presentation operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a process to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410. In this process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below monitors whether the operation of the operation button 410 is performed and appropriately determines whether the operation of the operation button 410 is reflected in the game presentation.

Following step S1014, the performance control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described below to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, this allows for a mechanism that prioritizes synchronization between the effects of the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 and the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3, as performed by the lamp data output process in step S1012, and the effects of music and sound effects, etc., that are in sync with the various effects, as performed by the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2, as performed by the sound data output process described below.

Following step S1016, the performance control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described below as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and outputs sound data of notification sounds and announcement sounds in addition to music and sound effects as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and transmits the left audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This allows music and sound effects to be played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 in accordance with various performances, as well as notification sounds and announcement sounds to be played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the performance control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be used as the light emission mode for each type of LED.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the sound command data that indicates sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data such as alarm sounds and notification sounds, arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is updated in the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time the process itself is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process forces it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the performance control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the performance control program extracts screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The performance control program analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of a start port winning performance, a normal pattern memory command for identifying the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a pattern synchronization performance start command for instructing the start of a pattern synchronization performance, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, a large prize port 1 count display command (large prize port count command) output every time a game ball is received in the large prize port 2005, or a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) showing the content of full tank shown in Fig. 90 (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state is currently in. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the performance control program analyzes whether the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and in the reception command analysis processing, the performance control program analyzes the various commands stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac. The various commands include the various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89, the various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to big wins, the various commands classified as power-on, the various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, the various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, the above-mentioned door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, and main body frame close command, as well as the various commands classified as status display such as the error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error release command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), the various commands classified as test-related, and the various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the performance control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above include various commands classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90, the performance control program extracts the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and automatically transitions to other remaining abnormality notifications after the abnormality is resolved. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred because another anomaly occurs after the first anomaly has occurred but before the first anomaly has been resolved.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, if the command analyzed by the performance control program in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) is one of the various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 90, such as the error reset navigation command (second error reset command), the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from the normal performance manner associated with the performance operation, for example, a visual warning is given to the outside using the game board side performance display device 1600 (performance device), the door frame side performance display device 460 (performance device), or a lamp (performance device), or an auditory warning is given to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error reset navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the game is in progress, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, which prevents fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the performance control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information stored in the time information storage unit that were acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. This RCT acquisition information update process updates the time information stored in the time information storage unit, which is the hour, minute, and second, and updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which is the year, month, and day, based on the updated time information.

Following step S1026, the performance control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the performance control program extracts game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer, which is arranged in chronological order and constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The data is extracted and created, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the performance control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the screen data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Following step S1030, the performance control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the sound command data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is started each time the sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, with board volume 0 being set to mute and board volume 6 being set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above, so that music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by a program. Unlike the board volume divided into seven stages described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall staff member or the like from being difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous game state.

Following step S1032, the performance control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, the received command memory area 1511cac, and the RTC information acquisition record included in Bank 0 (1fr) that is the backup target are backed up for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the memory area 1511cad and the schedule data memory area 1511cae, to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as performance backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies it to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) from the first address to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

In the backup process, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the backup target, to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as performance backup information (SRAM) for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and then the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM) to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the rear 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Following step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006, initializes the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting it to a value of 0, and repeats the judgment of step S1008 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, in step S1008, the program waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038, and returns to step S1006 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

This peripheral control unit routine processing starts with the performance control program first setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing is being executed, then in step S1010, it executes the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, and in step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036, it finally completes in step S1038 when it sets the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit routine processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed in response to the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it can accept screen data. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, as shown in Fig. 72. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 judges whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 as shown in Fig. 96 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 95 is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is a value of 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S1050. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is determined to be executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, In step S1009 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) of FIG. 95, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and in step S1045 of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 95, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95, will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in Fig. 97 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed every approximately 33.3 ms, so after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts occur in sequence.

When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the routine is terminated. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process as the interrupt process priority, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by a value of 1 (step S1102). By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, has been executed, is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive process, DMA serial continuous transmission process is performed to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and starts transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining door side motor drive data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor.

In addition, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing is performed to the motor drive board 4180. Here too, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the motors and solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a then specifies transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining game board side motor drive data stored in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. The data SM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the motor drive board then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5 (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches, and set in the movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, a production operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are being input from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation history information of the operation button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, a drawing status information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing status information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The drawing status of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be obtained by obtaining the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition memory The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the area 1511cah and the performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, as performance backup information (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb, and then the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies it to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1 ms) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in succession, starting from the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, in a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the last address of Bank0 (1 ms) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are implemented. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a takes this as a trigger to capture 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a into a reception buffer, and when this capture is completed, an interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. The main serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 98. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a retrieves the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1202), and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been retrieved from the reception buffer, and when the first byte of the main serial data, the status, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 1, when the second byte of the main serial data, the mode, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the main serial data, the sum value, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3 in step S1206, that is, if the status, which is the first byte of the main loop serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, a 1-byte receive period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the receive counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, the receive counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control MPU 1511a to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

In step S1214, if the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already taken out of the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command memory area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer of the receive command memory area 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning and stores it. When storing the received main loop serial data in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status assigned as the first byte of the main loop serial data in association with the mode assigned as the second byte, and discards the sum value assigned as the third byte.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if, in step S1214, the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is terminated.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process shown in Fig. 75 will be described, which is executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1302). If it is determined that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has not been input, the routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, the timer started in step S1320 determines whether 2 microseconds have passed. If 2 microseconds have not passed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has not been input, the routine ends. However, if a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

When the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving process is performed (step S1306). This power saving process reduces the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 by sequentially turning off the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, turning off the excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, etc., thereby ensuring stable operation for the period of 20 milliseconds during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby processing, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the processing waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and then copies the contents at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the received command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb is copied in order from the top address, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the top address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the top address of the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in sequence, starting from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, in succession of a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in order from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. In other words, the process continues to determine indefinitely whether the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a cannot output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal is interrupted to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process of step S1314 is not executed so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, so that it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, a description will be given of the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 97. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 is abnormal data.Specifically, this signal is output to request the transmission of a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 reads out LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. 100 (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, where "B" represents a bit), and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 is stored as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data and determines that a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) is being requested to be sent to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (it is normal data) and determines that there is no request to send a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 1 (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 0 (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0 is set to a value of 1 or 0, making it possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection malfunction determination process]
Next, a connection failure determination process will be described which is executed as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87, it is determined whether or not a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 reads out the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing state information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Fig. 73 as shown in Fig. 101 (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data; specifically, it is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)," with the upper four bits B7 to B4 having a value of 0 and the lower four bits B3 to B0 having a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is determined that there is no malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, and this routine is then terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is judged that there is a problem between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times it has been judged that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in the judgment of step S1522 each time this routine is executed. In addition, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage, and is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power outage when power is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, whereas when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and whether a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is set to a value of 1 when a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. Note that the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage and is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process will be described as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure judgment process shown in Fig. 101, and outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while notifying the fact that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 judges whether the screen generation schedule data is being started among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 (step S1540). In this judgment, in the scheduler update process, it is judged whether the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is being started, whereas when the performance is completed according to the screen generation schedule data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is not started. In addition, this judgment can be made based on the screen generation schedule data to determine whether or not the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, and if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, whereas if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600 (when the game machine is simply waiting for customers), the routine is ended as is.

When the performance is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation in step S1540, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is running, this routine is terminated as it is, whereas when the performance is completed according to the schedule data for screen generation in step S1540 and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is not running, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, this communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times that it is determined that a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. In this determination, it is determined whether the number of times that it has been determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred at least once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the flag is set to 1, and when the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the flag is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546) and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, restoring the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a communication error display process is performed (step S1548) and this routine is terminated. In this communication error display process, in order to inform the user that there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a process of drawing is performed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8. For example, a message saying "There is a malfunction in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store attendant" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers, in order to check whether or not a problem has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation check request for the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is output. CSDIC0 outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, and performs processing to display an alert image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a store clerk.") in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to that effect, and performs processing to repeatedly play an alert sound (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device.") from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to light up all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be explained using the timing chart in FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the variable display of the decorative patterns is executed by the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, and the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 shown in FIG. 8, or the first special lottery result shown in FIG. 8, is executed by the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69, or the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 94, etc. If the result of the second special lottery drawn by the reception of a game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is a "jackpot," the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing operation of the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is repeated will be 15 rounds in total, from round 1 to round 15. In each round, when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), the round is completed, and each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

Based on a command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LCD display control unit 1512 to start the varying display of the left decorative pattern on the left side of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the central decorative pattern in the center, and the right decorative pattern on the right side, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern is stopped, allowing the player to recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. At this time, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed from the first special pattern or the second special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66. When the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern become semi-transparent to an extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed in a variably manner from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the central decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right side decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area, as if a reel is spinning, and when the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern become opaque so that the background image at the positions corresponding to the stopped and displayed left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is difficult to see. In this way, the first special pattern or the second special pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops being displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 is synchronized with the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops being displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control board 1310 conveying the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the first starting port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, and as shown in FIG. 103, when the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern (timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in a column is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, so the schedule data for screen generation is running, and while the schedule data for screen generation is running, that is, during the time from when the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts to when they are stopped, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is by the judgment of step S1540 in this connection recovery process.

As a result, during the period from when the varying display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts to be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 until it stops, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection between the transmitter and receiver is The process to recover the connection is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the upper tray LCD display device. Please call a store attendant" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

When the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in a variable manner and stops (timing K1), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the performance is completed according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and all pointer updates are completed. In other words, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation is not yet started. While the schedule data for screen generation is not yet started, in the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter If it has not been determined even once that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, if it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the routine proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. If the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, if the accumulated number of times it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the routine proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, where the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1), that is, if a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, where the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, if there is a malfunction occurring even once between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and the accumulated number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, then the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to ensure that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. While processing to restore the connection is performed, if the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (i.e., there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed, for example, a message such as "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray LCD display. Please call a store attendant" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user, and the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is enabled.

During the interval period in which the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts and stops displaying the varying left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern, and then starts displaying the varying left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern again, the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is activated, and if there has been a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a connection malfunction has occurred does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is always performed to restore the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a connection malfunction has occurred between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), a communication error display process is always performed to, for example, display a message in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 saying, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store staff member." to notify the user.

When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, since the schedule data for screen generation is running, during the period until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output of step S1546 in the connection recovery process No power processing is performed, no processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection restoration processing is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store attendant" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, during the interval period when the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts and then stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and until the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts again, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is enabled, whereas during the interval period when the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts and then stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is disabled. This is because the combination results of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 are the information of most interest to the player, and the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state that will give the player a profit will occur. Therefore, when the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, even if the image of the performance displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 becomes distorted due to the influence of noise and cannot be displayed correctly until the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner, the performance is not interrupted midway and a process is performed to restore it to a state where it can be displayed correctly, but rather the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, completing the display of the information that the player is most interested in.

In this respect, it is significantly different from the case where the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while waiting for customers. This LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the game machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. It is sent as a request to check the operation of the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the performance display drive board 4450 determines that the two signals it receives are LOCKN signal output request data, it determines that the LOCKN signal output request data is abnormal data because, as described above, the data format of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is different, and outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it can determine that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450, and control the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a store staff member.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and control the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, thereby playing the alert sound from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 sends the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so that the LOCKN signal output request data can be received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCK terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.Therefore, when a LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the door frame side performance display device 460, whereas when a LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the door frame side performance display device 460. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can notify the hall staff, etc., of the malfunction by executing the notification process, so that the hall staff, etc. can check very easily whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460 before the player plays, and the check is not time-consuming. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be detected without much effort.

As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Since the LOCKN signal is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, when the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 can output a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the received drawing data is abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input can eliminate the communication failure between the image communications by outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) will be started to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication failure during image communication at an early stage and instructing the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the malfunction. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side performance display device 460, is unable to properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, it is capable of outputting a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, which is the performance control microprocessor.The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the LCD display control unit 1512 to generate a message saying "A failure has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store staff member," which is an image that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage and notifying the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 so that the player can inform a hall staff member or directly notify a hall staff member who happens to be passing by the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall staff member can begin work to resolve the malfunction at an early stage after it occurs. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 at an early stage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, and the accumulated number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is capable of repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, which indicates that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications will begin to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can continue to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is not executing the progress of the game by starting and stopping the first special pattern or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405, thereby helping to resolve the communication problem.

Then, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 activates the LOCKN signal and sends a connection confirmation signal to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to start transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 for eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to vary the first special pattern or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 and starts the game progress again, the connection confirmation signal is stopped from being output, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d stops transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and is able to output an image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can move in the direction of resolving the communication malfunction by repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal, which is a malfunction resolution signal, only during the period in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying and stops the first special symbol or second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and is not executing the game progress. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the display is stopped and the game is not being played, even if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying the first or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 and starts the game again, the distortion of the performance (image distortion) progressing on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be eliminated each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (each time the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2 occurs).

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control board 1310 in FIG. 69 and a payout control board 951 in FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 is equipped with a main control MPU 1310a in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the game ball launched by the ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a, which is defined on the game board 5, enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, which are start areas provided in the game area 5a. The payout control board 951 is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a in FIG. 70, which is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball command in FIG. 88(a) and (b), which is a payout command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is equipped with at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM is designed to store information related to the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, is equipped with at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM is capable of storing information related to payouts even after a power outage.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 in Fig. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92 is performed, it outputs a RAM clear signal in Fig. 77 for erasing information related to the game stored in the main control built-in RAM to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within a period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs a RWMCLR signal in Fig. 82 to the payout control microprocessor It also has a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, which is the game control microprocessor, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830, when it is operated after the period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 has elapsed (or the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed), without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when it is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, as a RAM clear signal to erase the information regarding the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; When operated after the period from power-on to when the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed (or the period from power-on to when the payout control unit power-on process is performed), the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is output to the payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred in the payout device 830, without being output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating a single operation switch 954, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, can be provided in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 4161 is a circuit to which detection signals from various detection sensors arranged on the game board, such as the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, etc., are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each detection sensor are input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given here as an example of a detection sensor, and a circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described.

In gaming machines, there has been a continuous stream of fraudulent gaming tactics in which players try to gain unfair advantages by manipulating the flow of gaming balls at will by bringing magnets (e.g. permanent magnets or electromagnets) close to the gaming balls that have been shot into the playing area.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and prevent fraudulent behavior by using light emitting means or audio warnings, etc., a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the gaming area.

The following provides an overview of the control over game progress and presentation in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. Based on the control signals (control commands) output by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the performance display device 1600 (display images such as designs, various background images, letters, characters, etc.) and the display mode and operation mode of various components that contribute to the performance (performance operation unit 400, movable components, etc.).

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start port winning process is performed. In this first and second start port winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball has won a start port, and when it is determined that a winning has occurred, a process is performed to increase the number of reserved balls on the corresponding special symbol side by 1.

When the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 0, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, the pending jackpot judgment is consumed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (whether it was a win or a loss, its type, etc.) is stored, and then the processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 1, a variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (such as the variation time from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops) and the stop pattern (such as a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) of the special pattern (identification pattern) displayed on the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device are determined and set based on the stored jackpot determination result and the current game state, and then the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 2, the during-fluctuation processing is executed. In this during-fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and the variable display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device is stopped when the timer times out. After this, if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the processing selection flag is updated to "3", and if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (miss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the fluctuation start processing.

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game mode (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, and the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2106 is controlled based on this. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the operation of the condition device is stopped, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, the game state flag is updated to indicate that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a special state, and then the processing flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the variable start processing.

Note that, as the variation pattern, multiple types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the pattern variation of the special pattern, and the type of the performance pattern that appears in the performance display device 1600 can be determined by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, the multiple types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for a jackpot variation, a variation pattern for a miss-reach variation, and a variation pattern for a miss variation. The jackpot variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is finally developed to display the jackpot pattern in a fixed stop after the reach performance. The miss-reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss and it is determined that a reach will be performed by the reach judgment based on the reach random number, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is finally developed to display the miss pattern in a fixed stop after the reach performance. The miss variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss and the reach judgment based on the reach random number does not determine that a reach should be made, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the decorative pattern variation display is ultimately developed to display the miss pattern as a confirmed stop without going through the reach performance. Also, the variation pattern is specified so that it is possible to identify whether it is a variation pattern on the first special pattern side or the second special pattern side.

In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the results of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to this information to make it possible for such decorative pattern variation patterns to appear. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 not only makes the decorative pattern variation patterns appear on the performance display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, but also executes control to change the performance display (background and reserved image) related to the expectation level, change the state (display and movement) in the performance operation unit 400, and operate movable members such as the rear-down movable performance unit 3100.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 104 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control process (Figure 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has transitioned to the special symbol and special electric device control processing (Figure 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start hole passing processing such as obtaining a first jackpot determination random number from the random number counter and storing this in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5232), provided that the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the on state (ball has entered the first start hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), as shown in Figure 104. In addition, if the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball has entered the second start hole 2004) (YES in step S5233), a second special random number for the second special symbol (random number for determining a second big win) is obtained from the random number counter and a second start hole passing process is executed, such as storing this in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised in a jackpot gaming state, is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the big win control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops indicates either an "8R sure jackpot A" or an "8R normal jackpot", control is made to an 8R jackpot game state in which the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and an opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times,
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates a state suggesting a "16R guaranteed jackpot", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to enter a 16R jackpot game state.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates an "8R sure-win B", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and then the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to enter an 8R big win game state.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops indicates a mode suggesting a "2R normal jackpot", the game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a short period of time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) and then closed, repeating an opening and closing pattern (round play) twice.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in a situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hits are more advantageous for the player than left-handed hits, as described above, and in a situation where the time-saving control is not executed, left-handed hits are more advantageous for the player than right-handed hits. In this regard, in the left-handed hit state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special pattern in response to the reception of the game ball in the first starting port 2002, only a maximum of eight rounds of long-term open jackpot game state (approximately 1,000 game balls can be won) will occur.

In contrast, in the right-hand hitting state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in response to the reception of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, there is an approximately 50% probability (allocation rate of the winning type) of entering a long-open jackpot game state of 16 rounds (approximately 2000 game balls can be won). Since the expected number of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is won is high, when the machine is controlled to transition to the right-hand hitting state, it is expected that a larger number of prize balls will be won than when it is in the left-hand hitting state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, when starting the opening control of the jackpot opening 2005, first, a process is performed to start the operation of the condition device, a process to reset the fluctuation count counter described below, and so on.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, the process of setting the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is executed according to the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating that a high probability state is being entered, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109 described below. It is set when the jackpot game state based on a jackpot controlled by a special probability (8R special probability jackpot A, 16R special probability jackpot, 8R special probability jackpot B) ends after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special pattern stop process shown in FIG. 114 described below or the second special pattern stop process not shown.

The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is being executed (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, it is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R special jackpot A, 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) that is time-saving controlled (high probability time-saving state) after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown. Alternatively, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are consumed 100 times without winning a jackpot after the low probability time-saving state occurs.

The change count counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed since the change count counter was reset, and is used in the first change pattern setting process (second change pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later. It is updated (e.g., counted up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes, and is reset when a jackpot game state based on at least a specific type of jackpot (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) is started.

If the big win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5235), the next step S5236 is to determine whether the small win in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised to a small win gaming state, is set. If the small win in progress flag is set, a small win control process (step S5240b) is executed to control the small win gaming state. Note that in the small win control process, a process is performed to open the big win opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small win control process (step S5240b), unlike the big win control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big win opening 2005 is performed, the various set processes such as the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and time-saving count counter are not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), a small win is not won in the big win determination.

In addition, if the small win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5236), on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second big win stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area, is "0" (step S5237), a first special pattern process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S5238).

In contrast, if the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area, is not "0" (step S5237), a second special symbol process is executed (step S5239), including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops. As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the reserved second special symbol does not run out (as long as the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0"), only the lottery for the random numbers for determining a second jackpot will be performed continuously without interruption, regardless of the reserved status of the lottery for the first special symbol (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can perform the lottery (determination process) for the second jackpot determination random number continuously and uninterruptedly by simply maintaining hitting the game ball to the right side of the center device 2500 (right hit) in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state).

Note that the special symbol game (symbol change) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol), and for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol from the stored data.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the processing of step S5231, if it is determined that the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the reserved number of the first special symbol is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S5242). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5243 to S5245 is performed to set the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) to a new reserved state.

That is, first, in the process of step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in a first special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

Next, the first special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the first special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the first special pattern. In this first special pattern pre-reading process, information required for the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content, etc. (information on winning or losing for pre-reading judgment, information on the pattern type for pre-reading judgment, information on the variable pattern number for pre-reading judgment, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the first special pattern itself, information on the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of jackpot game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group of the variable pattern, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the display of the variable first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the display of the variable first special symbol is not newly reserved.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the processing of step S5233, if it is determined that the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol, random number for second variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value of "4" based on this counter value (step S5252). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5253 to S5255 is performed to set the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) to a new reserved state.

That is, first, in the process of step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

Next, the second special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the second special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the second special pattern. In this second special pattern pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (win/lose information, pattern type, variable pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content, and stores it in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the second special pattern itself, information regarding the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of big win game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group of the pattern type, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

When the reserved number of first special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the reserved number of first special symbols (first reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when the reserved number of second special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the reserved number of second special symbols (second reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280) in which a random number for determining a jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and a lottery process is performed for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read random number for determining a jackpot.

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped is determined based on the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped.

3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special pattern on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600.

4. First special symbol change process (step S5283) that waits until the display of the first special symbol change on the first special symbol display 1403 stops.

5. First special pattern stop processing (step S5284) that stops the display of the first special pattern so that the display mode of the first special pattern when the control of the first special pattern is stopped is displayed on the first special pattern display 1403 in the mode determined based on the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the control of the first special pattern is stopped.

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S5301. If it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for first jackpot symbol, the random number for first variable display pattern) is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot pattern, and the random number for the first variable display pattern), are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (first special symbol reserved memory area a to first special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the first start port 2002 are stored in the first (first) memory area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the reservation of the variable display of the first special symbol occurred is stored in a specific order, and the reservation of the variable display is released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first). Similarly, the second special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (second special symbol reserved memory area a to second special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the second start port 2004 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved is identifiable and the reservation of the variable display is released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot has been won, based on the first jackpot determination random number that has been read out. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the high probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5312), and if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), it selects the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313), and compares the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the ROM built into the main control, and for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number), there is a low probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is low probability (low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state). In the low probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the first jackpot determination random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately "1 in 321"). In contrast, in the low probability jackpot determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special pattern jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special pattern process executed in step S5239 of the special pattern and special electric device control process, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 321).

In addition, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value, and the 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In contrast, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process, the 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In addition, the jackpot determination values (the number of jackpot determination values may be the same but the jackpot determination values are different (same jackpot probability), or the number of jackpot determination values may be different (different jackpot probability)) set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number may be different, in which case it is sufficient to make the jackpot determination values of at least one of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table different (both may be different).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination processing.

Also, if it is determined in step S5315 that the player has not won the jackpot, a determination is made based on the selected jackpot determination table as to whether the read random number for jackpot determination matches the small jackpot determination value indicating that the player has won a small jackpot (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) in this example, a random number for jackpot determination that matches the small jackpot determination value is not read out (small jackpot probability: 0 in 65,536), so in this step S5317, it is determined that the player has not won a small jackpot (determined to have missed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the result is a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach judgment table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and includes a reach judgment table for a high probability non-time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability non-time-saving state, a reach judgment table for a high probability time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability time-saving state, and a reach judgment table for a low probability state used when the game state is in a low probability state (low probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, the above-mentioned reach judgment random numbers are associated so that one type of reach judgment random number matches a reach judgment value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach judgment random numbers match reach judgment values indicating no reach. However, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers may match reach judgment values indicating no reach, and may not match reach judgment values indicating a reach.

In addition, in the reach judgment table for the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers, including the same reach judgment random numbers as those set in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, are associated with the reach judgment values indicating that a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach judgment random numbers are associated with reach judgment values indicating that a reach will not occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach judgment value indicating a reach will occur is higher than in the high probability time-saving state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the high probability non-time-saving state, five types of reach determination random numbers, including the same reach determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination tables for the high probability time-saving state and the low probability state, are associated with the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating no reach will occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating a reach will occur is the same as in the low probability non-time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is missed (YES in step S5120) based on the comparison between the selected reach judgment table and the random number for reach judgment read in step S5302 (step S5319), it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and ends the process (step S5121).

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the pattern determination table shown in FIG. 110(B) and compares the random number for the first jackpot pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the selected pattern determination table to determine the jackpot pattern as the state when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the pattern determination table for the first special symbol stores random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) associated with each of the judgment results (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). As shown in FIG. 110(C), the pattern determination table for the second special symbol stores random numbers for the second jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second jackpot symbol) associated with each of the judgment results (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the judgment result associated with the acquired random number for the jackpot pattern. In the pattern determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern are set to be different. More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the special jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is the same, but the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern is greater than the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern.

The specific gameplay and presentation content for each type of jackpot is briefly summarized as follows.
1. After the big win symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the state to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state, the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins is performed, and the performance display device 1600 shows that the high probability time-saving state is a relatively advantageous state. 8R certainty big win A

2. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the state to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state, the state is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variation display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively unfavorable state is indicated. 8R normal big win

3. After the big win symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to control the state to a 16R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 16R big win game state, the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (success performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since the control to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to one in which a relatively advantageous state is indicated on the performance display device 1600. 16R sure-win

4. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the state to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state, the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (failure performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since the control to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to a relatively advantageous state as indicated by the performance display device 1600. 8R sure-win B

5. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated twice to control the game state to a 2R big win game state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 2R big win game state, the game state is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variable display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until 100 times are consumed), and during the execution period of the 2R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the game state is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the performance display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable. 2R normal big win

In addition, in the above-mentioned left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting hole 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and only the variable display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display 1403 is executed except when there is a reserved ball with the second special pattern, and a jackpot related to the first special pattern (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) occurs. Similarly, in the above-mentioned right-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 2002. Therefore, in the right-hand hitting state, only the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 occurs, and unless there is a reserved ball with the first special pattern, only the variable display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display 1186 is executed, and a jackpot related to the second special pattern (16R sure-win jackpot, 8R sure-win jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occurs.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot associated with the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 8 times, and approximately 1000 game balls are paid out, whereas in the case of a jackpot associated with the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 16 times, and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, if the first special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R special jackpot A, the jackpot symbol is determined to be an 8R regular jackpot, and if the first special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R regular jackpot. Also, although not shown, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is a 16R special jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be a 16R special jackpot, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R special jackpot B, the jackpot symbol is determined to be an 8R special jackpot B, and if the second special symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is a 2R regular jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be a 2R regular jackpot.

If the big win flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether the small win flag is set in step S5333. If the small win flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small win symbol (unique symbol stop mode) is determined as the mode when the second special symbol stops changing (step S5334), and then the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small win flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the pattern when the special pattern stops changing to a losing pattern (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337.

After the determination process for the stopping symbols has been performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the lottery results (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of the stopping symbol of the first special symbol)) are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S5337. Then, as the process of step S5338, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), at which point this process ends.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, center, and right decorative patterns and stops and displays them in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and stopped and displayed simultaneously)). For example, when a type other than a 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, center, and right decorative patterns. In contrast, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, center, and right decorative patterns is not the same as the other patterns) is determined. In addition, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns from "0" to "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different). The stopped pattern thus determined is displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the change time specified by the change pattern command has elapsed (when the game performance ends).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a display showing the winning effect (special display mode) before the jackpot game starts, and displays a display showing the jackpot game after the jackpot game starts.

Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, if the big win flag is set (step S5341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big win corresponding to the type of big win determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5342); if the small win flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small win is selected (step S5344); if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of the reach is selected (step S5346); if none of the big win flag, small win flag, and reach flag are set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach performance is not executed), the variation pattern table at the time of the miss (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S5348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 is started (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this process is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol variation display device 1403 performs the variation display control of the first special symbol for only the variation time determined in this way, and the performance control is performed in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In this example, multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the random numbers for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and the random numbers for jackpot patterns (first jackpot pattern random number, second jackpot pattern random number). In addition, the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table are stored in a form associated with each of the random numbers for the first fluctuation display pattern, with multiple fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (fluctuation time) required for controlling the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table from among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment results based on the random number for jackpot judgment and the random number for jackpot pattern with the random number for the variable display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, and obtains from this table the variation time information associated with the random number for the variable display pattern read out, thereby determining the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). This allows the judgment process to be performed on the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, since a small win will not be won, the variation pattern table for a small win will not be used. In this example, a small win will not be won, but it may be possible to win a small win.

In addition, in the variable display pattern table during reach in this example, the type of reach performance to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with the random number for the variable display pattern. For example, in the non-time-saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of the 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach performances will be executed, 59 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach performances with low jackpot expectation will be executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach performances with high jackpot expectation will be executed.

The Super Reach effect (SP effect) has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal Reach effect, and for players hoping for a jackpot game state, the player's expectation of a jackpot game state increases when the Super Reach effect is executed. In other words, such a Super Reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table during a jackpot, which makes it possible to increase the player's expectation of a jackpot game state even if a miss is ultimately displayed. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation of a jackpot game state, it is necessary for a highly anticipated preview effect, which is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern, to appear (combined) during the period in which the Super Reach effect is being executed.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special pattern, a variation time of 12 seconds is set in common to the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the second jackpot determination random number and the second pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special pattern, a variation time of 0.1 to 12 seconds can be set for the time-saving state, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set for the non-time-saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special pattern is set to be the same during the time-saving state and during the non-time-saving state, and during the variation of the first special pattern in the time-saving state, the game ball is encouraged to enter the second start hole 2004 and time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second start hole 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected as the variable time when the second special symbol is a miss, it is possible to prevent each game ball that is shot into the game area 5a at 0.6 second intervals in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state) from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when the game ball is received from this area by the gate section 2003 during a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state), a win as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, the probability of winning is 100%), and the movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting hole 2004 is maintained in an open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, even in a situation where balls can be continuously received by the second starting hole 2004 one after another (a time-saving state in which almost all game balls hit to the right of the center device 2500 can be received by the second starting hole 2004), control can be executed so that the lottery on the second special pattern side can be consumed one after another with a high probability of winning (probability in a high-probability state) of approximately "1 in 32" each time the game ball is received.

In this example, since the game balls are launched at 0.6 second intervals while the player is operating the handle 302, in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state), the second starting port 2004 often receives game balls at 0.6 second intervals. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table for the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state) can be set to an extremely short variation time of 0.1 seconds when the second special pattern is not obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004. In other words, in this case, when a miss is obtained, the pattern variation ends in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the game ball launch interval (0.6 seconds), so that even in a situation where game balls launched at 0.6 second intervals are received one after another by the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S5282) is set as the process of step S5371. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process ends.

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 despite having been decremented by 1 (step S5371), the above steps S5371 and S5372 will be executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time to stop the pattern is reached).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stopping process (step S5284).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display device 1403 as the process of step S5381, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is to start (step S5387), and sets the waiting time until the jackpot game state starts (the time to display the jackpot game state to start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed, and resets the high probability flag if the high probability flag is set, and resets the time-saving flag if the time-saving flag is set (step S5389), and further resets the fluctuation counter, and updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), at which point this processing ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the processing in step S5235 above will determine that the jackpot execution flag has been set, and the jackpot game state will be executed in the jackpot control processing described above (step S5240a).

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S5386 that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in a low-probability time-saving state (step S5390). Then, when the game is in a low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) (step S5391). In other words, when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state has been met, and the time-saving function is stopped and the game is switched to a normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time-saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether the small win flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command indicating that the small win game state is started is set (step S5394), and the waiting time until the start of the small win game state (the time to display the fact that the small win game state is started, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that the small win game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing, which is the initial value (step S5394), this processing is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small win execution flag is set in the processing of the above step S5236, and the small win game state is executed in the above-mentioned small win control processing (step S5240b). By the way, unlike when a big win is won, the game state does not change when this type of small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is determined to be a miss, and no processing related to the big win or small win is performed. The first special symbol process flag is updated to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), and this processing ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big win in progress flag or the small win in progress flag is not set (steps S5235, S236), and processing related to the progress of a new game (lottery or symbol control) is performed according to the pending status (steps S5237 to S5239).

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric device control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs gate section passing processing as the processing of step S5402, such as first obtaining the normal random number of the normal pattern from the random number counter and storing it in the normal pattern reserved memory area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal pattern process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal pattern process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Regular symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the regular symbol variation display on the regular symbol display device 1402 is stopped
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S5406) for stopping the variable display of the normal pattern so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402.
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped indicates a state that suggests a "normal symbol win", the above-mentioned movable piece is opened to execute a process for controlling the second starting hole 2004 to be able to receive a game ball (step S5407).

The normal symbol process flag is manipulated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passing process (step S5402).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the processing of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the reserved number of normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

If it is determined in step S5411 that the reserved number of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to set the variable display control of the normal symbols to a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S5412, the normal reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are obtained from the random number counter. Next, in step S5414, the random numbers thus obtained are stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a that corresponds to the counter value of the normal reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S5411 that the reserved number of the normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. In other words, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly placed on hold.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the normal symbols (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter as the processing of step S5421. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5422, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the normal symbol (e.g., normal random number, normal variable random number) stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern variable random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the normal reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the variable display control of the normal symbols was reserved to be specified, and the reservations of the variable display control are released in order starting from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Next, if the current game state is a time-saving state (high probability time-saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during time-saving (step S5426), and if the current game state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), it selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during non-time-saving (step S5427), and compares the selected normal winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal processing of the normal pattern (step S5428).

The normal winning judgment table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and includes a time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is in time-saving (high probability time-saving state), and a non-time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is not in time-saving (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state). In the time-saving normal winning judgment table, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random number, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal winning judgment value indicating that a normal winning has been won, and do not match the normal losing judgment value indicating that a normal losing has been won. In this way, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 during time-saving, a normal winning is always won, and the movable piece is opened to allow the second starting port 2004 to receive the game ball. Instead of all 255 types, more normal random numbers than in non-time-saving mode may match the normal win determination value, which indicates that a normal win has been won.

In addition, in the normal winning judgment table during non-time-saving, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all of the 255 types of normal random numbers are associated with the normal winning judgment value indicating that a normal winning has occurred, and the normal random numbers are associated with the normal losing judgment value indicating that a normal losing has occurred. In this way, during non-time-saving, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal winning will not occur, and therefore the movable piece 2106 will not be in the open state and will not be able to control the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004. However, as mentioned above, it may be possible to make it possible to win with a normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the probability of winning may be set to be lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and when the lottery result for a normal symbol is a winning one, the movable piece of the second starting hole 2004 may be opened for a shorter period of time than in the time-saving state, for example, 2 seconds, to allow the second starting hole 2004 to receive a game ball, and then moved forward again to prevent the second starting hole 2004 from receiving a game ball.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the normal symbol is a winning symbol as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429), it sets a normal symbol winning flag indicating that the corresponding variation has won a normal symbol (step S5430), and then determines the normal symbol winning symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S5431). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the normal symbol is a losing symbol as a mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing, it determines the normal symbol losing symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process ends.

While this control is being performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the various commands sent from the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the game situation at each stage within the peripheral control unit routine processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022)) and execute presentations according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether a start winning situation has occurred, and if so, controls the pending display and pre-reading effects according to the start winning situation. Then, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, it executes one of the following: waiting for a change pattern designation command to be received, effect pattern change start processing, effect pattern change in progress processing, effect pattern change stop processing, jackpot display processing, jackpot game in progress processing, and jackpot end effect processing.

Waiting for reception of a fluctuation pattern specification command: Until a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, control is performed regarding the presentation (demo presentation, etc.) when the pattern is not in a fluctuation state and control regarding a jackpot is not being performed, and when a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the presentation pattern fluctuation start processing.

Performance pattern change start processing: Various performance contents (performance patterns, preview performances, etc.) during the pattern change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decorative pattern change is controlled to start based on the determined performance contents. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during performance pattern change. Among the variation patterns (performance patterns), many of the "variation patterns (performance patterns) that stop at a jackpot pattern" are provided in pairs with "variation patterns (performance patterns) that stop at a losing pattern," and by functioning as the same variation pattern (performance pattern), a performance is provided regarding whether a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern will appear. Therefore, when describing the fluctuation pattern (presentation pattern) below, "predetermined fluctuation pattern" or "specific fluctuation pattern" means both a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that stops at a winning symbol" and a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that stops at a losing symbol" unless otherwise noted, and the presentation content progresses in the same manner, resulting in a branching point where either a winning symbol or a losing symbol appears.

Processing during performance pattern change: This performs control to start the various performance contents determined in the performance pattern change start processing at the respective timing during the pattern change period, and when the change time ends, updates the value of the process flag to a value corresponding to the performance pattern change stop processing.
Performance pattern change stop processing: Controls the change of the decorative pattern to stop and the display result (stopped pattern) to be derived and displayed based on the reception of a command (pattern determination command) to stop all patterns. If the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing, and if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a losing pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the change pattern designation command reception waiting processing.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the effects (such as display effects that notify the occurrence of a jackpot on the effect display device 1600) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops on the jackpot pattern to when the jackpot game starts. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game processing.

Processing during jackpot play: Controls various effects during the jackpot play state. When the jackpot play state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

End of jackpot performance processing: In the performance display device 1600, the performance (such as a display performance that notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended) during the period from the end of the jackpot gaming state to the transition to the fluctuation-permitting state is controlled. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing for waiting for reception of a fluctuation pattern specification command.

FIG. 118 shows a judgment table T1 of the presentation pattern (variable presentation) referenced in the above-mentioned presentation symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the judgment table T1, each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command is associated with a presentation pattern (variation presentation). Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the presentation pattern (variation presentation) associated with the variation pattern command based on the judgment table T1, and controls the start of the variation of the decorative pattern based on the determined presentation pattern (variation presentation).

Note that the presentation pattern (variable presentation) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variable number indicated by the above-mentioned variable pattern command. For example, multiple presentation patterns (variable presentations) may be associated with one variable number indicated by the variable pattern command, and one of these presentation patterns (variable presentations) may be determined based on a presentation lottery or the game situation. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment is also configured to associate multiple presentation patterns with some of the variable numbers 1 to 22.

Also, as will be described later, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a has determined the presentation pattern (variable presentation) in this manner, it performs a preview lottery (preview presentation determination process) based on the results of the jackpot determination, the pattern type, and the variation pattern, and also performs control (presentation pattern variation processing) to cause the preview presentation selected in the preview lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the presentation pattern (variable presentation) determined above is being performed, thereby making it possible to combine multiple presentation contents and to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot pattern appearing based on the appearance mode of these presentation contents, etc.

In the past, among such composite effects, multiple occurrences of the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) would be displayed while one effect pattern (variable effect) was being executed, which was expected to maintain interest in the game. However, because advance notice effects can only be combined when there is a high probability of a winning symbol appearing, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed naturally decreases, making it difficult to sufficiently increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of an effect pattern (variable effect), and is executed as a count effect display that displays a count from a first predetermined value (e.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (e.g., "0 seconds") until the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed, or as a standby display (preparation, etc.) before the count display begins. In other words, in this case, when the count display (e.g., countdown) from the first predetermined value begins as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Or, when an effect (e.g., a conversation preview or cut-in A, B, etc.) that produces either a relatively unfavorable effect mode (a performance mode with low expectations) or a favorable effect mode (a performance mode with high expectations) for the player is the subject of the timer effect, it is guaranteed that a favorable effect result will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially the preview side timer effect executed as a result of a preview lottery), it is desirable to keep secret at least at the time when the count display begins which effect is the target of the effect. Additionally, the "target of the timer effect" refers to the effect that appears when the countdown display (e.g., countdown) from a first predetermined value in the timer effect reaches a second predetermined value (e.g., "0 seconds"); in the timer effect, the countdown display is performed toward the timing at which the target of the effect occurs.

In addition, the "timer effect" according to this embodiment displays the time elapsed since the count started to two decimal places, accurately displaying the number of seconds, etc. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as a timer effect like this, and as long as it is executed as a count effect in which a count is displayed by counting up or down, etc., it does not have to accurately show the time elapsed (number of seconds, etc.) since the count started.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (pre-notification timer effect) that appears only when the pre-notification lottery is won, the timer effect (variable timer effect) that is pre-installed as the effect content of the above-mentioned effect pattern (variable effect) determined based on the judgment table T1 can be executed. In other words, in this case, the count effect display is executed not only as the pre-notification timer effect that functions to increase the jackpot expectation rate for the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command, but also as the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variable pattern command, so that it is possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessarily increasing the jackpot expectation rate indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command (increasing the expectation rate by satisfying the condition of "winning the pre-notification lottery"). For example, if the expected probability of a jackpot is "20%" when a specific presentation pattern determined based on a fluctuation pattern command appears, if the advance notice timer presentation is further executed, the expected probability of a jackpot will be increased by the composite presentation function to, for example, "40%," and the frequency of appearance will have to be lowered accordingly. However, if the variable side timer presentation is executed as the presentation content of the specific presentation pattern itself, it is possible to execute the timer presentation while keeping the expected probability of a jackpot at "20%" (it can appear simply by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), and the frequency of appearance can be maintained at an appropriate level.

In addition, the probability of winning when a performance pattern (variable performance) appears in the judgment table T1 varies depending on the variable number (and furthermore, the performance pattern), and basically, the probability of winning increases as the variable number increases. For example, in the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), a variable side timer performance is executed in which the performance content is "conversation notice", but the appearance ratio is variable number 5 (6) > variable number 9 (10) > variable number 17 (18), while the probability of winning when it appears is set to variable number 5 (6) < variable number 9 (10) < variable number 17 (18). For ease of explanation, only the judgment table referenced in the normal game state will be described in detail here, but even in the judgment tables referenced in the low probability time-saving state and the high probability time-saving state, the performance pattern itself contains a performance pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable timer performance can be executed as the performance content, and it can appear with a different probability than when in the normal game state.

In addition, in judgment table T1, variable numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but variable numbers 5 and 6 differ from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that a variable side timer effect with a conversation preview as the effect target may be executed. Also, variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variable numbers 9 and 10 are different in that a variable side timer effect with a conversation preview as the effect target is executed, variable numbers 11 and 12 are different in that a variable side timer effect with a cut-in A as the effect target is executed, and variable numbers 13 and 14 are different in that a conversation preview and cut-in A are executed and a variable side timer effect with them as the effect target may be executed. In addition, variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach performance is performed, but variable numbers 17 and 18 execute a variable side timer performance with the conversation announcement as the performance target, variable numbers 19 and 20 execute a variable side timer performance with the cut-in B as the performance target, and variable numbers 21 and 22 are different in that conversation announcement and cut-in B are executed and a variable side timer performance with them as the performance target may be executed. Note that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a variable side timer performance with cut-ins A and B as the performance target is executed than when a variable side timer performance with conversation announcement as the performance target is executed, and furthermore, it is set so that the expectation of a jackpot tends to be higher when a variable side timer performance with both conversation announcement and cut-ins A and B as the performance target is executed.

Note that a "conversation preview" is a presentation that can appear relatively early after the presentation pattern (decorative pattern variation presentation) is executed, and often has a relatively low expected level, whereas cut-ins A and B are presentations that can appear relatively late after the presentation pattern (decorative pattern variation presentation) is executed, and often has a relatively high expected level (or always has a relatively high expected level). Therefore, a "conversation preview" is set to have a higher appearance rate (probability of execution) than other presentations with higher expected levels (cut-ins A and B, and the role A and B actions described below). Also, in character reach, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variation presentation is executed so as to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the preview presentation, whereas in SP reach, it is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B, not cut-in A, that appears as the content of the preview presentation.

Moreover, in the judgment table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the performance contents (performance patterns) are assigned as the variable side timer performance for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type such as shortened fluctuation or low expectation normal reach performance (e.g., fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.)," the count performance display as the advance notice timer performance is prevented from winning the performance (increasing the degree of premium) to appropriately ensure an increase in expectation when the advance notice timer performance appears. When the fluctuation pattern is a "fluctuation pattern that executes the variable side timer performance (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.)," the proportion of the fluctuation pattern that corresponds to the above-mentioned predetermined type (e.g., fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.) is lower than when it is not such a count fluctuation pattern.

Here, 14 count fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are prepared as the count fluctuation patterns for which the timer performance on the fluctuation side is executed, but only two of these (fluctuation numbers 5 and 6) (which may be set to 0) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the corresponding ratio is "2/14". In contrast, eight fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 1-4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as the fluctuation patterns for which the timer performance on the fluctuation side is not executed, and four of these (fluctuation numbers 1-4) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In this configuration, when the performance content of the fluctuation pattern is one in which a count performance display (fluctuation side timer performance) can be performed (count fluctuation pattern), the percentage of times it is determined that the count performance display (pre-notification side timer performance) cannot be executed as the performance content of the preview performance is lower than in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation side timer performance is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of multiple count displays within one performance pattern (fluctuation performance) without unnecessarily increasing the expectation level and lowering the frequency of appearance.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the presentation pattern (variation presentation) determined in the presentation pattern variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the rate at which the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation appears varies depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the presentation pattern corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation does not appear at all, when the presentation pattern corresponding to variation numbers 9-14 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation can appear with a medium probability of selection, and when the presentation pattern corresponding to variation numbers 17-22 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation can appear with a high probability of selection.

The above-mentioned advance notice timer effect may be made to appear with a low probability even when the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 5 and 6 are executed. Also, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 15 to 22, which have a high probability of making the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect appear, are executed, the advance notice timer effect is actually made to appear with a higher probability in a performance pattern that results in a jackpot win than in a miss, and the advance notice timer effect is made to appear with an even higher probability in variable number 22 than in variable number 16.

In this configuration, the rate at which the count display is executed as the performance content of the preview performance (preview timer performance) differs depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is the first count fluctuation pattern (e.g., fluctuation number 10) or the second count fluctuation pattern (e.g., fluctuation number 22). Therefore, even among the above count fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the rate at which multiple count displays appear within one performance pattern (fluctuation performance) is high, the rate at which multiple count displays appear can be made even higher depending on the type, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even in a presentation pattern in which the same reach type presentation content appears (e.g., character reach, SP reach), in a presentation pattern in which a variable side timer presentation is included as a presentation content (e.g., variable numbers 17 to 22), the rate at which the advance notice timer presentation appears within the execution period of the presentation pattern (the rate at which the advance notice timer presentation is decided to be executed in the advance notice drawing) is higher than in a presentation pattern in which a variable side timer presentation is not included as a presentation content (e.g., variable numbers 15, 16). In other words, in this case, it is only necessary to have a jackpot expectation rate sufficient to win one advance notice timer presentation in the advance notice drawing, and two timer presentations (variable side timer presentation, advance notice timer presentation) can be made to appear within one presentation pattern, and thus it is possible to realize a double timer presentation opportunity without needlessly increasing the jackpot expectation rate.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the presentation pattern (variation presentation) determined in the presentation pattern change start process is a count change pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the count display mode (such as the shape and color of the count numbers) is different between the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display) in which the "conversation announcement" is the presentation target and the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display) in which the "cut-in" is the presentation target. In other words, in this case, even if a presentation pattern with the same reach presentation as the presentation content (for example, variable numbers 9 and 11) is executed, by checking the count display mode of the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display), coupled with the fact that "the rate at which the above-mentioned announcement side timer presentation appears is different depending on which count change pattern it is," it becomes possible to recognize and expect the likelihood of the announcement side timer presentation appearing.

The mode of the count display that appears in the preview side timer performance (preview side count display) may be different from (or at least different from) the mode of the count display that appears in the variable side timer performance (variable side count display) (conversation preview, cut-in) regardless of whether the performance target is the same (conversation preview, cut-in) or not, or it may be the same as (or at least the same as) that mode.

However, for the count display executed as the preview side timer effect (preview side count effect display), it is beneficial to execute it in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the effect, in order to make the player aware that a preview side timer effect with a relatively high expectation level is appearing, thereby increasing the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable for the preview side timer effect to be different from any of the count display modes (conversation preview, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). For the above common mode as the preview side timer effect (preview side count effect display), multiple modes with different expectation levels (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and any of these may be executed.

In addition, to make it easier to recognize that the advance notice timer performance is being performed, it is desirable to have a different count speed (for example, the speed at which the numbers change when counting up or down) between the count display when the advance notice timer performance is being performed and the count display when the variable timer performance is being performed. With this configuration, even during the period in which the count display is progressing after the timer performance has started, the player can pay attention to the count speed of the timer performance, which can arouse interest in whether the relatively low expectation variable timer performance or the relatively high expectation advance notice timer performance is being performed, and this makes it possible to maintain interest in playing during the timer consumption period.

In this case, in the variable side timer performance, depending on the performance target (conversation preview, cut-in), the count can be displayed in a manner in which the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the preview side timer performance (cut-in), and in a manner in which the count is displayed at a speed relatively not close to the count speed of the preview side timer performance (conversation preview), which makes it more interesting by varying the difficulty of determining whether the preview side timer performance is being performed or not. Also, while in the variable side timer performance (or preview side timer performance), the count is displayed by repeatedly appearing and disappearing the count numbers, in the preview side timer performance (or variable side timer performance), the count can be displayed by continuously displaying the count numbers.

With this configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the advance notice timer effect are executed simultaneously, it becomes easy to know whether the advance notice timer effect is being executed or not, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, for the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer performance (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.), multiple performance patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display (total number of counts, or time required to consume all counts) are set as selectable performance patterns. When a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer performance is acquired, one of the multiple performance patterns is determined based on a random number for performance, etc., and the ease of simultaneous execution of the count display of the variable side timer performance and the count display of the notice side timer performance (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap) is differentiated, and the ease of determining whether the notice side timer performance is being executed is differentiated, adding interest.

In this embodiment, multiple presentation patterns (the target of the timer presentation and the content of the reach presentation are the same) with different start or end timings of the count display (total number of counts or the time required to complete all counts) are prepared for one fluctuation pattern, but multiple different fluctuation patterns may be prepared for multiple presentation patterns (the type of presentation that is the target of the timer presentation and the type of reach presentation executed as the content of the fluctuation pattern are the same for each presentation pattern) with different start or end timings of the count display (total number of counts or the time required to complete all counts) and be matched one-to-one.

In addition, by making the count display number (total count number) different when it appears in the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, or by making the selection rate of the specific count display number different between the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect even if the same specific count display number is selectable, it becomes possible to vary the difficulty of determining whether the preview side timer effect is being executed or not, thereby adding to the excitement.

In addition, if the preview side timer performance is executed with a countdown display, while the variable side timer performance is executed with a countup display, it will be possible to determine with certainty whether the preview side timer performance is being executed, which is expected to significantly increase interest in the game.In addition, if the preview side timer performance is executed with a countdown display, while the variable side timer performance targeted at a specific performance (e.g., a conversation preview) is executed with a countup display, and the variable side timer performance targeted at a performance different from the specific performance (e.g., a cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, it will be possible to vary the difficulty of determining whether the preview side timer performance is being executed depending on the performance target, adding to the excitement.

As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment controls the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect so that there are cases where the same effect is the target of the effect, and cases where different effects are the target of the effect. When the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the target of the effect (for example, a conversation notice), the probability of the expectation of a jackpot being lower is set to be higher than when the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the target of different effects, and even when the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the target of the effect (for example, a conversation notice), the end timing of each count display is made different.

In other words, in this case, even if the same effect (e.g., a conversation announcement) is the target of the variable side timer effect and the announcement side timer effect, one of the variable side timer effect and the announcement side timer effect will reach a predetermined value first and end, while the count display of the other will continue, so at this point it looks as if a different effect is the target of the effect (the timer effect is being executed in a relatively high expectation mode). Then, after this, the other count display that was continued will also reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (e.g., a conversation announcement) is the target of the effect, so even if it is clear that a conversation announcement with a relatively low expectation is the target of the effect by the timer effect that ended first, it is expected that the expectation that a different effect that can appear later is the target of the effect (the timer effect is being executed in a relatively high expectation mode) will be maintained, and interest in the game will be increased.

In addition, when the same effect (e.g., a conversation announcement) is the target of the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, it is desirable to have separate count end corresponding displays (e.g., "Count successful!", "Chance UP!", etc.) appear when the variable side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and when the preview side timer effect reaches a predetermined value.

More specifically, the variable side timer performance and the notice side timer performance, which are targeted at the "conversation notice" executed as the variable side or notice side performance, are each made to appear within a single performance pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer performance and the count display of the notice side timer performance progress simultaneously, but in the variable side timer performance, the count display progresses in accordance with the variable side specific performance that occurs as a variable side performance in relation to the "conversation notice" (such as "Count successful!" or an effect that coincides with the appearance of the conversation notice), whereas in the notice side timer performance, the count display progresses in accordance with the notice side specific performance that occurs as a notice side performance in relation to the "conversation notice" (such as "Chance UP!" or a timer end display that appears in accordance with the start timing of the conversation notice (or a specified number of seconds before the performance starts)), so that separate count end corresponding displays appear at different times.

The conversation preview and cut-in effects are required to be executed without fail if they are the target of the variable timer effect (if the count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation preview and cut-in are effects that can be executed in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation, when they are the target of the variable timer effect, they are required to appear in a relatively highly expected manner when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is desirable to incorporate the effects that are the target of the variable timer effect as the performance content of the above-mentioned performance pattern (variable performance) in advance, so that the variable timer effect and the performance that is the target of the effect (the aspect with a relatively high expectation) can each appear simply by executing the performance pattern. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable timer effect is executed, the performance that is the target of the effect (the aspect with a relatively high expectation) is always selected in the preview lottery.

In addition, if the conversation preview and cut-in effects are not targeted for effect in the variable timer effect, not only is a determination made as to whether or not they will be made to appear as part of the preview side effect content in the preview lottery described below, but a determination is also made as to the manner in which they will be made to appear as part of the preview side effect content (a manner with a relatively high or low expectation), and the appearance is controlled based on the results of this determination.

The process of determining the presentation pattern using FIG. 118 will be summarized below.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains a variable pattern command or a symbol type command from the main control MPU 1310a, it first refers to a judgment table according to the current game state based on the variable number indicated by the variable pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. For example, if the presentation pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it becomes possible to give a bias (expectation) to the probability of a certain presentation pattern appearing or the number of rounds in a big win game state.

Next, if multiple presentation patterns (such as multiple presentation patterns with different start or end timings for the count display that appears in the variable timer presentation) are available for selection as presentation patterns associated with the variable number, one of the multiple presentation patterns with different start or end timings for the count display is selected based on whether the jackpot judgment is successful. In this case, the presentation pattern is set so that if the jackpot judgment is successful, the probability that the start or end timing of the count display will be delayed is high, so that the later the start or end timing of the count display is, the more likely the jackpot pattern will appear.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a special performance condition is met, even if a count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) is acquired, a performance pattern that is set so that the variable timer performance does not appear is selected from among the multiple performance patterns.

Then, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a has selected the presentation pattern that will appear during the pattern change (the presentation from when the decorative pattern starts to change until it stops changing), it will decide what kind of preview presentation will be additionally executed (combined) and in what form during the execution period of that presentation pattern (preview lottery).

Figure 119 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing a process in which various notification sounds (dispense notification sounds and abnormality notification sounds) excluding special sounds are output only on a specific channel (hereafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control using a fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of the playback priority, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound name. Note that for the sake of convenience, only the definitions for notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown here, and explanations of the definitions of other notification sounds and special sounds are omitted. Note that for special sounds, in addition to the definitions using the fixed channel method, it is also possible to use the definitions using the automatic channel method for each channel other than channel X to which the notification sound is assigned.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of multiple alarm sounds should be assigned to channel X for output when each of the alarm sounds satisfies the output condition, and an alarm sound with a higher priority value will be assigned to channel X for output regardless of the assignment status of an alarm sound with a lower priority value to channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the alarm sound that was assigned to channel X first will be given priority, and will be assigned to channel X for output after the output of the alarm sound has been completed.

The left/right pan initial value represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left/right pan setting value during sound playback, a difference in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and when set to "0x80", the difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates that the sound will be output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the up/down pan represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the upper and lower speakers, such as the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). By dynamically changing the setting value of the up/down pan during sound playback, a difference is created in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to "0x80", the difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. When set to "0xFF", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value indicates the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set within the range of "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the sounds mentioned above. The playback type setting indicates whether the target sound is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure), in which the target sound is played repeatedly, or 1 SHOT playback (corresponding to "1 SHOT" in the figure), in which the target sound is played once. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is played in mono or stereo.

Figure 120 is a table showing the notification content, notification mode, and notification time for each type of notification sound shown in Figure 119, as well as the conditions for terminating the notification (cancellation conditions). Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound, but this is a measure to make effective use of the single channel X by keeping it as free as possible and refraining from outputting subsequent notification sounds.

120, the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is for notifying that the magnetic sensor 4024 has detected a magnetic field (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity using a magnet). The alarm mode is a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as "beep, magnetic field has been detected," a display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic field has been detected"), and lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. As for the alarm time, the loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as "beep, magnetic field has been detected" is terminated 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the alarm sound) from the time of detection by the magnetic sensor 4024, while the display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the release condition "power re-on" is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) which notifies that the vibration sensor 2405 has detected a vibration (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity through banging is occurring), and the alarm sound 3 (big prize abnormality) which notifies that the count sensor 4005 (first big prize opening sensor or second big prize opening sensor) has detected a big prize even though the machine is not in a big prize game state (a state in which the big prize opening is open) (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is occurring by forcibly opening the big prize opening that is in a closed state to allow a game ball to enter) are regarded as belonging to a first alarm group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has occurred, and the alarm sounds belonging to the first alarm group are all set to have the same alarm mode, alarm time, and release conditions.

For example, for alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality), the alarm mode involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Buzz buzz vibration has been detected," a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Vibration has been detected"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5, and the loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 60 seconds (equivalent to six repetitions of the alarm sound) from the time of detection by the vibration sensor 2405, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of the various lamps continue to be executed until the release condition of "power re-applying" is met. In addition, for the alarm sound 3 (big prize abnormality), the alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "big prize abnormality detected," a display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 (for example, "big prize abnormality detected"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5. The loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 60 seconds (equivalent to six repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the count sensor 4005, while the display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue until the release condition of "power re-applying" is met.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group are displayed in different display modes within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group are illuminated in the same manner (not necessarily all of the various lamps are illuminated) by the various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. In addition, the notification sounds to be subject to the loop processing are a combination of a warning sound used in all of the notification sounds 1 to 3, such as "buzzing" that serves to notify that the notification belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity), and a message sound (unique sound) that serves to notify the individual identification of the content of the notification. The warning sound is composed of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a tense fraud situation, and it is desirable that the message sound is composed of a variety of sounds to clearly distinguish it from other notification sounds.

In other words, when reporting something that belongs to the first notification group (a state where there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity), it is more important to speed up the initial response of the hall to the fraudulent activity than to identify which notification type it is. In this regard, with the above configuration, it is possible to recognize that something belongs to the first notification group (a state where there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity) simply by outputting the "buzzing" notification sound or the lighting pattern unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices), so it is expected that the initial response of the hall to the fraudulent activity will be quicker. Furthermore, since a message sound notifying which notification type it is is output following the "buzzing" notification sound, and a display is made within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is expected that the hall's initial response will also be handled smoothly.

Meanwhile, the alarm sound 4 (door open) is to notify that the door frame 3 has been detected as open relative to the main frame 4 by the door frame open switch 618 (a state in which, although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed by opening the door, there is also a possibility that the door has been opened as a result of abnormality response measures taken by the hall). The alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Door is open, ping pong ping pong," a display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Door is open"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5. In addition, in terms of the alarm time, the loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Door is open, ping pong ping pong" ends 30 seconds (equivalent to three repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the door frame opening switch 618, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue until the release condition "door closed detection (detection that the door frame 3 has been closed against the main frame 4 by the door frame opening switch 618)" is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 4 (door open), alarm sound 5 (frame open), which notifies that the body frame 4 has been detected as open relative to the outer frame 2 by the body frame open switch 619 (a state in which there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed by opening the body frame, but it is also possible that the body frame has been opened as a result of abnormality response measures taken by the hall), is considered to belong to a second alarm group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been committed and this cannot be denied, and the alarm modes, alarm times, and release conditions for the alarm sounds belonging to this second alarm group are all set to be the same.

For example, for the alarm sound 5 (frame opening), the alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "The frame is open, ping pong ping pong," a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "The frame is open"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. The loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 30 seconds (equivalent to three repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the main frame opening switch 619, while the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue to be executed until the release condition of "frame closing detection (detection that the main frame 4 has been closed against the outer frame 2 by the main frame opening switch 619)" is met.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group are displayed in different display modes within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group are illuminated in the same manner (not necessarily all of the various lamps are illuminated) by the various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. However, the illumination mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when they belong to the second notification group is different from the illumination mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when they belong to the first notification group. In addition, for the notification sounds that are the subject of the loop processing, a combination of a message sound (unique sound) that serves to inform the individual identification of the content of the notification and an alarm sound that is used in both notification sounds 4 and 5, such as "ping pong ping pong," that serves to inform the user that the notification belongs to the second notification group (a state in which there is a medium possibility of fraudulent activity), is used by sequentially outputting the message sound.

That is, when reporting something belonging to the second notification group (a state where there is a moderate possibility of cheating), it is important to be able to take measures to deal with the abnormality on the part of the hall relatively quickly while not making people who are playing properly feel disgusted. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as with the case of something belonging to the third notification group described below, a message sound is output as the notification sound to inform people of which notification type it is, so that people who are playing properly are expected to feel less disgusted. On the other hand, in order to make it less disgusting for people who are playing properly, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" is output following the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of the first notification group, or various lamps are output in a different lighting mode from the case of the first notification group, but are not output in the case of the third notification group, in order to make it less disgusting for people who are playing properly, and it is expected that the hall's measures to deal with the abnormality will be relatively quickly taken.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-hand hit guide) notifies the player that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 2003 provided in the area of the game area 5a to the right of the center device 2500 even though the game is not in a time-saving state (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player and should be corrected to an appropriate manner (left-hand hit)). The notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-hand hit" and a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-hand hit"). The notification time is set to end 20 seconds (equivalent to two repetitions of the notification sound) from the time the gate sensor 4003 detects the game in a time-saving state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 6 (left hit guide), the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guide) that notifies when the full tray detection sensor 279 detects that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls (a state in which the game balls in the lower tray 322 should be removed) is regarded as belonging to a third alarm group for when the possibility of fraud is low but game guidance should be given to ensure the game progresses properly, and the alarm sounds belonging to the third alarm group are all set to have the same alarm mode, alarm time, and release conditions.

For example, in the case of the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guide), the alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Please remove the balls from the lower tray" and a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Please remove the balls from the lower tray"), and the alarm time is set to end 20 seconds (equivalent to two repeated alarm sounds) after detection by the full tank detection sensor 279, both of which are repeated to output an alarm sound such as "Please remove the balls from the lower tray" and the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

However, for notification sound 6 (left hand hit guide) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guide), if the gate sensor 4003 and full tank detection sensor 279 are still in a detection state when the process is terminated 20 seconds after their detection, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left hand hit guide) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guide)) will be executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sound 6, 7, but more precisely, after the output of the message sound of, for example, 5 seconds of silent data is assigned to channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silent output), and a loop process is performed in which the message sound and the silent data are set to a 10-second notification sound that is repeated. Since the notification sounds 6, 7 are both configured to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from the first and second notification groups, and the hall side can properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group just by checking the silent data portion rather than the message sound portion, which is difficult to hear in a noisy hall. It is preferable to prepare the silent data in advance as a single sound data (10 seconds of sound data) including the message sound, and to perform the loop process while keeping this assigned to channel X.

Incidentally, there may be silent parts within the alarm sounds used in the first and second alarm groups (such as between the warning sound and the message sound), but these are only for a very short period of time to create a "gap," and are clearly fundamentally different from the relatively long silent parts (third alarm group) mentioned above that have a group identification function.

With this configuration, warning sounds such as "beep beep" or "ping pong ping pong" are not output, and only the message sound is output repeatedly with a predetermined silent period in between, making it possible to notify the player of game information without making them feel uncomfortable.

In the examples shown in Figs. 119 and 120, the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group are set to the same priority, but the priority may be different between notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. In addition, the playback type setting is set to loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played back, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and one-shot playback in which the target sound is played back once may be used. In addition, the "buzzing" sound commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and the "ping pong ping pong" sound commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group may be prepared separately for each notification sound as a single sound data linked to the message sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and sound data combining the message sound and the alarm sound may be created when outputting and then assigned to a channel.

[Gaming machine equipped with multiple performance operation units]
In the above, a gaming machine is described in which the game machine is provided with the game machine operation unit 400 that can be operated by the player and can present the game machine operation image to the player, but in the following, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's motivation to operate the game machine is described with reference to Figs. 121 to 143. The game machine is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 121 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Figure 122 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above is described, and the same reference numerals are used for components similar to those described above, and descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword performance operation unit 5000 is installed on the front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword performance operation unit 5000 constitutes a sword ornament 5001 consisting of a sword section 5010 having a blade section 5011, a handle section 5012, and a tsuba section 5013 sandwiched between the blade section 5011 and the handle section 5012, and a sheath section 5020 capable of housing the blade section 5011 of the sword section 5010.

The sword ornament 5001 is mounted on the door frame 3 so that the sheath 5020 can move left and right when viewed from the front. The sword 5010 is also mounted so that it can move in the unsheathing direction and the sheathing direction. The sword 5010 is normally in a sheathed state with the blade 5011 sheathed in the sheath 5020, and in the unsheathing performance, the blade 5010 is in an unsheathed state where the blade 5011 is visible to the player through the unsheathing action. The unsheathed sword 5010 can then function as an operating means that accepts a sheathing operation by the player and returns to the sheathed state.

Now, referring to FIG. 123, we will explain the opportunity to execute the unsheathing effect involving the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001). FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table for effect patterns in an effect mode in which the unsheathing effect can be executed, showing (A) an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to execute the sword preparation transition effect according to the type of movement pattern, and (B) an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to execute the actual unsheathing effect.

The performance patterns described here include a pattern in which the actual unsheathing performance is performed after the execution of the transition to preparing to draw the sword, a pattern in which the actual unsheathing performance is performed without a transition to preparing to draw the sword being performed beforehand, a pattern in which the actual unsheathing performance is not performed even though a transition to preparing to draw the sword has been performed beforehand, and a pattern in which neither the transition to preparing to draw the sword nor the actual unsheathing performance is performed. Furthermore, there are two patterns for the shape of the sword decoration 5001 in the actual unsheathing performance: a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 123(A), the main control board 1310 determines whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect depending on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the multiple types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for a big win when a big win occurs, a variation pattern for a small win when a small win occurs, and a variation pattern for a miss when a miss occurs, and the more advantageous the variation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect being executed is set. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% when the variation pattern for a big win occurs, with a probability of 30% when the variation pattern for a small win occurs, and with a probability of 20% when the variation pattern for a miss occurs. Note that the probability of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect being executed may be changed depending on the presence or absence of a reach effect so that the probability of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect being executed is higher when a reach effect is performed than when it is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), whether or not the main unsheathing effect will be executed is selected by lottery depending on the type of fluctuation pattern and the presence or absence of the unsheathing preparation transition effect. Even if the type of fluctuation pattern is the same, if the unsheathing preparation transition effect is executed, the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed is set to be higher than when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is not executed. Also, the more advantageous the fluctuation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed. Here, even if the fluctuation pattern is less advantageous, the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed is set to be higher when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern for miss fluctuation, the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed is higher than when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is not executed in the fluctuation pattern for small win fluctuation. Note that in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big win fluctuation, the main unsheathing effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the unsheathing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the main sword unsheathing effect is executed, a sword preparation transition effect is executed beforehand, and the more advantageous the variation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability that the main sword unsheathing effect with an aura component will be executed. Note that in this case, the main sword unsheathing effect with an aura component will not be selected in the case of a variation pattern for a small win.

(State transitions and aura component movements caused by the unsheathing of the sword decoration)
Next, the unsheathing action of the sword decoration 5001 in the unsheathing performance (the sword preparation transition performance and the actual unsheathing performance) will be described with reference to Figures 124 to 127. In addition, the action of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described for the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword section 5010 (sword blade section 5011) itself that can accept the player's sword sheathing operation, and the sword section 5010 is transformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (Figures 124 and 125), and the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath section 5020 of the door frame 3 that stores the sword section 5010 (sword blade section 5011), and the sword section 5010 is combined with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side to become an integrated decoration (Figures 126 and 127).

Figure 124 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword accessory 5001 when the aura member 5030 is attached to the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) itself, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. Figure 125 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that Figure 125 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the blade section 5011 extracted from the sheath section 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easier to understand.

In the normal state, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sheathed state with the blade 5011 sheathed in the sheath 5020, as shown in FIG. 124(A). After the unsheathing action in the preparation-to-unsheathe transition performance, the sword decoration 5001 is in a first unsheathed state, as shown in FIG. 124(B), in which only the habaki 5011a part of the blade 5011 that is fitted to the hand is unsheathed from the sheath 5020 and visible to the player. Then, after the unsheathing action in the main unsheathing performance, the sword decoration 5001 is in a second unsheathed state, as shown in FIG. 124(C), in which the blade 5011 is further unsheathed from the sheath 5020 and most of it is visible to the player. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state can function as an operating means capable of accepting a sheathing action by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the unsheathing action of the blade 5011. When the sword ornament 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5030 moves the range of motion as much as possible (maximum movement) from a closed state (FIG. 125(A)) to an open state (FIG. 125(B)) inside the sheath 5020 when the blade 5011 changes from the sheathed state (FIG. 124(A)) to the first unsheathing state (FIG. 124(B)), and deforms the blade 5011. Therefore, the player can see the aura member 5030 even during the change process when the blade 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first unsheathing state to the second unsheathing state (FIG. 124(C)). As will be described later, the aura member 5030 is positioned below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011 even when fully extended, so the player cannot see the aura member 5030 in the first unsheathing state.

In the normal state (closed state), the aura member 5030 is enclosed in the blade 5011 as shown in FIG. 125(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011, and has a right aura member 5031, a left aura member 5032, and a pinion 5033 that meshes with the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031 and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. When the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force of the aura member 5030 is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a, and as shown in FIG. 125(B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade 5011.

In addition, an LED board 5011c having multiple LEDs is contained in the blade shaft 5011b below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, an example has been shown in which the timing of the movement of the aura member 5030 changes from a closed state to an open state when the sword decoration 5001 (sword section 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first unsheathed state, and the movement of the aura member 5030 causes the sword body section 5011 to deform, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first unsheathed state to the second unsheathed state, but this is not limiting. The aura member 5030 may start moving (deforming) after the sword decoration 5001 reaches the second unsheathed state. It is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state reaches the final state (not limited to the state in which it moves to the maximum, but including a state in which it stops moving midway) based on the performance pattern set before it functions as an operating means.

Figure 126 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword accessory 5001 when the aura member 5035 is attached to the sheath 5020, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. Figure 127 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that Figure 127 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the state in which the blade 5011 has been extracted from the sheath 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, the same symbols are used for the same components as those in the above-mentioned Figures 125 and 126, and explanations will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in Figures 126 (A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) can move up and down, whereas the aura member 5030 provided on the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) itself can move left and right. The aura member 5035 is provided to surround the outer periphery of the sword section 5011. When the sword accessory 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 operates in accordance with the change in state of the sword section 5011 (sheathed state ⇔ first unsheathing state ⇔ second unsheathing state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the sword section 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state. This allows the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) to be combined with the frame side member (aura member 5035) to appear as a unified decorative piece.

In the normal state (fully housed state), the aura member 5035 is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in Fig. 127 (A). The aura member 5035 is arranged so that its upper end is below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011 in the fully housed state, and has a hollow cylindrical surrounding aura member 5036 arranged to surround the outer periphery of the blade 5011, a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b arranged below the hollow portion of the surrounding aura member 5036, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The right pinion 5037a of the surrounding aura member 5036 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. Both pinions are also engaged, and the rotational force is converted into linear upward motion of the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 127(B), the surrounding aura member 5036 stops at a position where it combines with the blade 5011 to form the second unsworded state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a fully-appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 has moved to the upper limit of its range of motion (maximum movement).

Although not shown in the figure, the blade portion 5011 contains an LED board having multiple LEDs, making it possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035.

Here, an example is shown in which the timing of the movement of the aura member 5035 combines with the blade part 5011 while maintaining a relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decoration 5001 (sword part 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first drawn state ⇔ second drawn state), but this is not limiting. The aura member 5035 may start moving (combining) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second drawn state. It is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state can reach the final state (not limited to the fully appeared state formed by maximum movement, but including the aura member-attached form in the halfway appeared state formed by stopping the movement midway) based on the performance pattern set before it functions as an operating means. In addition, the aura member 5035 may combine with the blade part 5011 so as not to be visible to the player when changing from the sheathed state to the first drawn state.

(Another presentation pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, referring to Fig. 128 to Fig. 130, another reach performance using the sword decoration 5001 described above will be described. Fig. 128 to Fig. 130 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 in the princess reach performance. Here, the following points are the main differences from the sword decoration 5001 described above. First, the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword unsheathing operation by the player. Second, the sheath part 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathing state can move up to the center of the front of the performance display device 1600.

When the changing pattern reaches a reach state, the changing display of the three decorative patterns reaches a reach state in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 128 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (Fig. 128 (A2)). Here, a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) that can be moved up and down is provided above the display area of the performance display device 1600. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is stationary above the display area in a state where part of the blind is visible to the player (initial state). Also, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sheathed state.

In the princess reach performance, an image of the princess moving towards the back of the blinds is displayed (Fig. 128 (A3)), and then an operation performance suggestion image suggesting an operation performance is displayed (Fig. 128 (B1)). Then, the operation performance of the sword decoration 5001 starts, and the effective operation period during which the sword decoration 5001 can be operated begins. At the same time, an operation prompting image encouraging the player to unsheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 129 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 and/or the specific decorative member SDY may be moved up and down in small increments from the time the operation performance suggestion image is displayed until the time the operation prompting image and the gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed. Then, when the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, a performance is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The unsheathing operation by the player refers to the action of the player grabbing the handle 5012 of the sheathed sword decoration 5001 and lifting the sword 5010 upward to unsheathe the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. When the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second unsheathing state, the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification action is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification action may be any action that allows the player to sense an action other than the unsheathing operation through the handle 5012 that the player is holding, such as the movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) moving up and down. In addition, the detection notification action is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the action can be visually confirmed even if the player releases his or her hand from the handle 5012. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, which reduces unnecessary contact with the sword decoration 5001 (such as grabbing it again to confirm the detection) and prevents malfunction or damage to the movable body.

When the player draws the sword here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) may appear so that it is visible to the player when the player draws the sword.

When the end pattern is performed, when the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the performance display device 1600, but remains stationary (initial state) above the display area, and a screen indicating the end of the operation performance by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (Fig. 129 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in the losing state "767" (Fig. 129 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sheathed state when the stopping result of Fig. 129 (C2) is notified, but it may be returned to the sheathed state when the detection and notification operation ends.

On the other hand, when a development pattern is performed, when the player's unsheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved down to the front center where it overlaps with the display area of the performance display device 1600 (where only the reserved display area below the display area is visible (fully fallen state) (Fig. 129 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the second unsheathing state (Fig. 129 (D2)). Note that there may be multiple patterns of the princess's shadow projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at this time, and for example, the color or size of the shadow, or the comment displayed afterwards may be changed to suggest the expected degree of the lottery result due to the princess reach (such as the expected degree of winning, or the gaming profit if a win occurs).

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the player has drawn the sword decoration 5001 into the second drawn state, i.e., since the shadow of the princess has been projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state moves to the center of the front left-right direction of the display area of the performance display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 attached to the door frame 3 (Fig. 129 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the center of the front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully fallen state to its initial state, and an image of the princess being surprised that the blinds have been removed is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, which now has good visibility (Fig. 130 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword-drawing operation was performed, and in the display area of the performance display device 1600, if the result of this changing display is a hit, an image of the smiling princess is displayed to notify the winner (Fig. 130 (E1) (E2)), and if it is a miss, an image of the sad princess is displayed to notify the miss (Fig. 130 (F1) (F2)).

When the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed as described above, but if the player is unable to move the sword decoration 5001 when executing a moving performance in which the sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the performance display device 1600 because the player is holding it, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The performance itself will proceed even if the player does not stop holding the sword decoration 5001, but if the sword decoration 5001 is held in the position where the player performed the operation at the timing of the left and right moving performance of the sword decoration 5001 (Fig. 129 (D3)), a delay will be caused in the left and right moving performance. However, regardless of whether the left and right moving performance of the sword decoration 5001 is executed, the performance executed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the falling moving performance of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role object) are configured to proceed, so the progress of the game will not stagnate. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a left-right movement effect when the player releases the sword decoration 5001, or it may be configured not to perform a movement effect.

In this way, in the princess reach performance, the specific decorative member SDY that suggested the operation performance (operation validity) of the sword decoration 5001 is dropped and moved by the unsheathing operation (up and down movement) of the sword decoration 5001 by the player, and the sword decoration 5001 itself, which was operated outside the display area of the performance display device 1600, can be moved forward (to the left of the operation position) of the performance display device 1600 by moving the sheath part 5020 provided on the door frame 3. In other words, based on the unsheathing operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the unsheathing operation was performed, which increases the operation value of the player and suppresses the decrease in the player's motivation to operate. In addition, since one operation means is configured to be able to operate in gradually different modes (up and down during operation, left and right after operation) by the operation by the player, a performance using multiple movable modes can be provided, and the operation value of the operation means can be increased compared to conventional operation means that have only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

The left-right movement of the sword decoration 5001 is performed by displacing it from an operating position outside the display area of the performance display device 1600 to an operating position in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 for the purpose of performing an integrated performance with the performance image performed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role), but this is not limited to this. For example, after performing the unsheathing operation with the sword decoration 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, a left-right movement performance may be performed in which the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the left (left end of the frame) so that it is outside the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player in this example is an up-and-down movement (the unsheathing movement of pulling the sword part 5011 up from the bottom), it is desirable that the movement of the sword decoration 5001 that is performed after the operation based on the operation be in a direction (such as left-right as in this example) different from the direction of the movement when the player operates it (up-and-down in this case).

When the player's unsheathing operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the timing of the operation end. The detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, so unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again to confirm the detection can be suppressed. This prevents the player from continuing the operation, which could delay the movement performance of the sword decoration 5001 thereafter, or damage the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the movement performance cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to remove his/her hand, and even contact with the operation means that was required to be operated during the operation valid period is prohibited after the detection notification operation ends, so the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another presentation pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to Fig. 131 to Fig. 133, other reach effects using the sword decoration 5001 described above will be described. Fig. 131 to Fig. 133 are diagrams for explaining the screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, the state transitions of the operation button 410, and the motion transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in reach effects including the operation effects of the operation button 410 that are used in various ways. Here, a pattern ((A)(B)→N in the figures) in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed as the operation effect of the operation button 410, suggesting the expectation that the fluctuation during execution will result in a jackpot, and a pattern ((A)(B)→M in the figures) in which an operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed as the operation effect of the operation button 410 will be described.

In this reach effect, when the variable display of the three decorative patterns reaches the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 131 (A)), first, the effective operation period during which pressing of the operation button 410 is accepted is started, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to press the operation button 410 (Fig. 131 (B)). An image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410) and the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains its sheathed state. Then, when pressing of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in a pattern in which the expectation indication effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 131 (N1)), and then an image suggesting the expectation of a jackpot is displayed (Fig. 132 (N2)). After that, the result of the current variable display (jackpot, miss) is notified (Fig. 132 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of an expectation indication effect for the variable display being executed. For example, instead of an image showing the expectation (Fig. 132 (N2)), a character that changes the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed.

In addition, in a pattern in which the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed by pressing the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 suggesting that an operation performance requesting the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be performed (Fig. 131 (M1)). Next, an image of the start of the operation performance of the sword decoration 5001 (here, the title "Chance to draw the sword" and the operation explanation message "Please sheathe your sword") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (Fig. 133 (M2)). Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the second unsheathing state and the effective operation period of the sword decoration 5001 has begun, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved up and down in small increments from its initial state, and an operation prompting image encouraging the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 133 (M3)). Then, when the sheathing operation by the player is detected, a performance based on the results of this variable display is performed.

If the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 133 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to the initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777", the message "Well done") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is released (Fig. 133 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is a miss, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) only stops moving in small increments in the initial state, and an image announcing a miss (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "767") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 133 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, a variety of effects are possible, such as suggesting the degree of expectation or developing an operation effect using another operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the player cannot determine the subsequent development at the time of operating the operation button 410. This increases the player's interest in operating the operation button 410, and prevents a decrease in motivation to operate and a decline in interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotony of the effects after operation.

In addition, in a series of reach performances, the player is required to perform different operation modes (pressing operation and sheathing operation) between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001) based on the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). This can increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and can prevent a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to the operation becoming monotonous and unchanging.

In this example, the operation button 410 is the valid operation means for the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (the operation of sheathing the sword decoration 5001) is given based on the pressing of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. The operation of sheathing the sword decoration 5001 may be the valid operation for the first operation opportunity. In this case, it is preferable that the operation means valid for the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration 5001, rather than targeting the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001.

(Another presentation pattern 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, referring to Fig. 134 to Fig. 138, other reach effects using the sword decoration 5001 described above will be described. Fig. 134 to Fig. 138 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) in which a big win occurs when the specific decoration member SDY (blind role) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given/R when the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) will be described.

In this reach performance, when the three decorative patterns are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 in a reach state (Fig. 134 (A)), first, the start image of the operation performance of the operation button 410 (here, the message "One push of the button will move the movable body") is displayed (Fig. 134 (B)), and then the operation effective period during which the operation button 410 is pressed is started, and an operation promotion performance that encourages the operation of pressing the operation button 410 is performed (Fig. 134 (C)). In the display area of the performance display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation effective period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, a performance is performed according to a preset performance pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). Also, to make it easier for the player to understand the object (movable object) that moves when operated, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) may be made to move in small increments up and down in the initial state during the effective operation period of the operation button 410. Also, if the sword decoration 5001 becomes the object of operation later, the state of the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state at this point.

In a pattern where the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) moves to cause a jackpot, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Fig. 135 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been released (Fig. 135 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be made to vibrate.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) does not move, when the pressing of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) only stops its small movement but does not fall. Then, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, a decorative pattern in a miss mode ("767") is displayed swinging in the center of the screen (Figure 136 (P1)). After that, depending on the performance pattern that is set, the pattern develops into either one in which the decorative pattern is displayed as it is in a miss mode ("767") (Figure 136 (P2)), or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the revival pattern, a revival start image (a samurai image saying "Not yet") is inserted into the display area of the performance display device 1600, indicating that the display is not yet finished, from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the losing state of FIG. 136 (P1) (FIG. 136 (P3)), and the decorative pattern is again in a reach state and is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen, while an operation valid indication image (the face of an ally samurai with his eyes closed) in which either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is valid is displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 136 (P4)). Then, as time passes, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved up and down in small increments from its initial state (FIG. 136 (P5)). This increases the player's sense of anticipation for the performance that will use the specific decorative member SDY (blind role). At this time, the operation button 410 may be illuminated in a high-speed flashing manner, or the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the first unsheathing state and moved up and down. Depending on the set performance pattern, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operating means, and a specific decorative element SDY (blind device) is performed based on the pressing of the operation button 410 or the sheathing of the sword decoration 5001. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image of sweat trickling from the samurai's forehead in the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (operation button confirmation image) is displayed, and the operation button 410 is illuminated (Fig. 137 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind mechanism) continues to move in small increments and the operation button 410 is illuminated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 begins, and an operation promotion performance is performed to encourage pressing the operation button 410 (Fig. 137 (R2)). The image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410), the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. Here, the operation button 410 is no longer illuminated when it has been operated the required number of times.

When the result of the variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved from the initial state to a fully fallen state when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected (Fig. 137 (R3)). At this time, the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the performance display device 1600 is displayed in a stopped state in the lower right corner of the screen so that it can be seen by the player. As described above (Fig. 133 (M4)), it is also possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the decorative pattern at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is returned from the fully fallen state to the initial state again, and an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the center of the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) has been released (Fig. 137 (R4)).

On the other hand, if the result of the varying display is a miss, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is stopped, and the decorative pattern in the miss state ("767") is displayed frozen in the center of the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 137 (R5)).

When the sword decoration 5001 is used as the operating means, an image (sword decoration confirmation image) is displayed in which the samurai, who had his eyes closed in the operation indication image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, opens his eyes and his gaze becomes sharp, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from a sheathed state to a second drawn state with an aura component (Fig. 138 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be decorated with light. The player can tell from the image in the display area that the sword decoration 5001, not the operation button 410, is effective for operation, but at this point, the form of the sword decoration 5001, such as whether it is in a form with an aura component, can be determined by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved in small increments, a predetermined period of time passes in the second unsheathing state, and the effective operation period of the sword decoration 5001 begins. In the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation prompting image that encourages the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed (Fig. 138 (Q2)).

If the result of the current display is a jackpot, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same presentation transition as in Figure 137 (R3) and (R4) described above will occur (Figure 138 (Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the result of the display is a miss, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same presentation transition as in Figure 137 (R5) described above will occur (Figure 138 (Q5)).

In this way, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the state of the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) which is executed based on the pressing of the operation button 410, so it is possible to provide a more powerful indication of the degree of expectation than an indication of the degree of expectation based on an image, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Also, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is not moved to fall based on the pressing of the operation button 410, the player is given another opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means which is given the opportunity to operate, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to the sameness and monotony of the operation presentation.

Note that although three examples of reach effects using the sword ornament 5001 are given in the above-mentioned Figures 128 to 138, various types of effects may be combined. This allows a wide variety of effects to be provided, further increasing the interest in the game.

(Shapes of sword ornaments)
The form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to Fig. 139. The sword ornament 5001 up to now has two forms, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, but here, two more forms are provided in which the sword part 5010 is transformed by operating the handle part 5012.

Figure 139 is a diagram explaining the form of the sword decoration 5001 used in the pseudo-repeat performance. The sword decoration 5001 here is characterized in that it is capable of changing its form in two stages by the deformation of the handle 5012, and has an aura member 5040 that is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 and appears visible to the player from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operating mode is movable in the left and right directions like the aura member 5030 described above. Figures 139 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the types of forms (stage changes) of the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state, and show, in order, stage 0 form to stage 3 form. The sword decoration 5001 takes one of the forms of stage 0 form to stage 3 form depending on the performance.

As shown in Fig. 139(A), the stage 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to Fig. 124(A) and Fig. 126(A) described above, and shows the initial form in which no movement is required for any of the components. As shown in Fig. 139(B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side of the sheath 5012 by the movement of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in Fig. 139(C), the stage 2 form shows a form in which the handle 5012 spreads out from the center and moves so as to be divided into two parts to the left and right from the center from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from the inside. As shown in Fig. 139(D), the stage 3 form shows a form in which the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle 5012 in the stage 2 form to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. Here, the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form allow the form change without putting the sword decoration body 5001 into the second drawn state. Furthermore, the sword section 5010, which can be operated by the player as the operating part of the operating means, and the sheath section 5020, which does not move, move together to form an integrated decorative body, providing a more impressive operating means.

(Pre-operation suggestion using specific decorative material SDY)
Next, referring to Figs. 140 to 143, a pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach performance will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective among the multiple operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role). Specifically, as suggestion patterns by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind role), there are a first suggestion pattern in which the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is positioned at the initial position, and a second suggestion pattern in which the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved from the initial position to the suggested position, and when the sword decoration 5001 (set to have a higher hit expectation than the operation button 410) becomes effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, when a pre-operation suggestion performance of a first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) that generates a valid operation period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) positioned at the initial position even during the valid operation period is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 70%. In contrast, when a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern (FIG. 142(AA1)) that generates a valid operation period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) moved to the suggested position is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 30%. Below, an example of a performance transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion performance will be described.

(First suggested pattern)
140 and 141 are diagrams showing an example of a reach effect transition in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed when the peripheral control board 1510 determines by lottery that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation during the reach effect based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. In this reach effect, when the three decoration patterns reach the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 140(A)), a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the effective operation period for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, which has been determined by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 to be enabled for operation, is generated. As a specific example of the first suggestion pattern, an operation suggestion image (aura rotation) is displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 before the operation effective period occurs, suggesting that the operation means will be effective (Fig. 140(B)). At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) maintained in its initial position, an effective operation period is generated for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) that has been determined in advance to be effective for operation. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is effective for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as a pre-operation suggestion performance. In other words, when the effective operation period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in its initial position, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation button 410 is more likely to be effective for operation than the sword decoration 5001.

When the operation button 410 becomes operable, as shown in FIG. 140(C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) maintaining its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. In addition, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. In addition, even when the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable, the pre-operation suggestion performance may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the rate is lower than that of the operation button 410. In that case, as shown in FIG. 140(D), an operation effective period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) maintaining its initial position. In addition, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 changes state from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state (with aura member), allowing the player to sheathe the sword.

When an operation to a valid operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned Figure 140 (C) or (D), if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Figure 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been released (Figure 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the current result of the variable display is a miss, the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) will remain in its initial state and will not move, and an image announcing a miss (decorative pattern stop state "767") will be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 141 (CC3)).

(Second suggested pattern)
Fig. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a transition of a reach performance in which a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation during the reach performance, as in the first suggestion pattern described above. Note that Fig. 143 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion performance of a step-up pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 does not become enabled for operation, but the operation button 410 becomes enabled for operation at one time, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes enabled for operation, even though the second suggestion pattern is executed as a pre-operation suggestion performance.

As shown in FIG. 142 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is executed before the operation effective period for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, which has been determined in advance to be effective by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510, occurs. As a specific performance content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation performance suggestion image (aura rotation) suggesting that the operation means will be effective is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 before the operation effective period occurs. The operation performance suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, along with the display of the operation performance suggestion image, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) moves from the initial position to a small drop state (suggested position) where it overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in the suggested position, an effective operation period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that has been determined in advance to be effective for operation. In this example, when the sword decoration 5001 is effective for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as a pre-operation suggestion performance. In other words, when the effective operation period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in the suggested position, it is possible to suggest to the player that the sword decoration 5001 is more likely to be effective for operation than the operation button 410.

When the sword decoration 5001 becomes available for operation, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA3), a valid operation period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) operating in the suggested position. At the same time, an operation promotion effect is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the valid operation period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second unsheathing state (aura-attached form), allowing the player to sheathe the sword. Also, even when the operation button 410 becomes available for operation, there is a low chance that the pre-operation suggestion effect will be executed in the second suggestion pattern. In that case, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA2), a valid operation period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is operating in the suggested position, and at the same time, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the valid operation period are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved from the state in which it is operating in the suggested position to its initial state. Also, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) may be moved from the state in which it is operating in the suggested position to its full drop state or to its initial state without being returned to its initial state.

Then, when an operation to a valid operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 142 (AA2) or (AA3), similar to the above-mentioned FIG. 140 (C) or (D), if the result of this variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from its initial state to a fully fallen state (FIG. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been released (FIG. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this variable display is a miss, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and an image announcing a miss (decorative pattern stop state "767") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 141 (CC3)). The performance transition after the operation prompt performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation prompt performance in the first suggestion pattern.

The movement pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) in the second suggestion pattern may not only be a pattern in which it is moved to a suggested position, but may also include multiple movement patterns. For example, if multiple types of movement patterns are provided so that the proportion of times the sword decorative body 5001 is effective for operation differs, the player's interest in the movement can be heightened, thereby increasing the interest of the pre-operation suggestion performance and operation promotion performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind role).

(Step-up pattern)
When a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is operated to a suggested position and a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern is performed in which an effective operation period occurs, and the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation, in addition to the basic pattern that follows the performance transition of (AA1)->(AA3) in FIG. 142 described above until the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation, a step-up pattern is provided in which the operation button 410 becomes effective for operation at one time and then the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation.

As shown in Figures 143 (BB1) to (BB4), the step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion performance is executed before the operation effective period for the sword decoration 5001 that has been determined in advance to be operable by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510 occurs, that is, before the operation promotion performance for the sword decoration 5001 shown in Figure 142 (AA3) described above is executed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the operation performance suggestion image (aura rotation) similar to that of FIG. 142 (AA1) is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved in small increments (FIG. 143 (BB1)). Next, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) operated to the suggested position, an effective operation period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (FIG. 143 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the effective operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 141 above is not performed, and a switching suggestion image (mostly blacked-out image) that suggests switching the effective operation means is displayed (FIG. 143 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the operation effective period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state (aura-attached form), and a switching notification image (messages such as "Chance to draw sword" and "Please sheathe your sword") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the operation effective means will be switched from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001 (Fig. 143 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is in a state of operating in the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion performance of the sword decoration 5001 shown in Fig. 142 (AA3) is performed. The performance transition after the operation promotion performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation promotion performance in the second suggestion pattern described above (Fig. 141).

Note that in the above-mentioned FIG. 143 (BB2), the button operation 410 may not be enabled (no operation promotion effect) and only an image of the button operation 410 may be displayed. It is sufficient to first direct the player's attention to the button operation 410 and then have the player operate the sword ornament 5001. Also, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when the second suggestion pattern is reached, but also when the first suggestion pattern is reached.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggestion performance of this example, the position of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) can be changed before the effective operation period of one of the multiple operating means is generated, and the position suggests the operating means that is to be effective. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (Fig. 140 (B)) in which the effective operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is in the initial position, there is a high expectation that the operation button 410 will be effective, and in the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 142 (AA1) in which the effective operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is in the suggested position, there is a high expectation that the sword decoration 5001 will be effective. For this reason, the player focuses on the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) to understand which operating means will be effective, which can increase the interest of the pre-operation suggestion performance.

In the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) moves up and down in small movements in the pre-operation suggestion performance. The movement performance (falling performance) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is also used in the result notification after the operation of the operation means (Fig. 141), so the falling performance can be made to look like a series of performances from the small up and down movements of the pre-operation suggestion performance, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. Note that, in the above, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is enabled for operation by the movable body will be enabled for operation, is shown, but this is not limited to this, and the expectation may be suggested by displaying a character during the pre-operation suggestion performance. In addition, when the operation means that is enabled for operation is decided, not only the operation button 410 is lit up or the sword decoration 5001 is changed to the second unsword state, but the operation means that is enabled for operation may be moved by vibration or the like.

The second suggestion pattern also includes a step-up pattern in which the operation button 410 becomes operable once (or appears to become operable) when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is in the suggested position, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable. This allows the player to become interested in both operation means. Even if the operation button 410 becomes operable immediately after the pre-operation suggestion performance, the player can have hope that the sword decoration 5001 may become operable afterwards, which prevents a decline in willingness to operate and a decline in interest in the game.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion performance, at the timing when an operation performance suggestion image is displayed before the operation effective period in which any of the multiple operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is enabled for operation (Fig. 140 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 142 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) may be moved from the initial position to a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and may be moved slightly up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. In addition, when the operation effective period is generated after that, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that even when the operation performance suggestion image according to the first suggestion pattern is displayed to the player, it is possible to make the player believe that the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when a pre-operation suggestion performance based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the sword decoration 5001 will be effective for operation. And since the player strongly desires that the effective operation period occur with the specific decoration member SDY (blind role), which is operated at the timing when the operation performance suggestion image is displayed, being operated to the suggested position, the interest of the pre-operation suggestion performance can be increased.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the performance judgment according to the result of the jackpot judgment, the performance display device 1600 on the game board side executes a performance with a specific performance pattern. In the performance period in which the specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance acceptance period (valid period) can be generated in which a specific performance execution condition is established by an operation by the player, and when an operation is performed within the specific performance acceptance period, a specific operation-time performance (such as a performance that suggests the expectation of the award of a special bonus) can be executed based on the establishment of the specific performance execution condition. The expectation of the award suggested as a result of the specific operation-time performance may be 100% or 0%.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the operation button 410, another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) can be provided as an operation means for such an operation-time performance (such as a performance in which the expectation of the bonus is suggested when the operation is performed). In this regard, in a specific performance pattern, based on the result of the performance judgment, there are cases where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (when a specific performance execution condition is established when the operation button 410 is operated) and cases where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is established when the other operation means is operated). When an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), the player is made to recognize that the expectation of the bonus (expectation of a big win) is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, simply by the occurrence of the pre-operation performance in which the operation opportunity is given even if no operation is performed at that operation opportunity. When an opportunity to operate another operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) is given, the expected probability of receiving a bonus may be 100% or 0%.

With this configuration, when an opportunity to operate another operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) is given, it is possible to increase interest in the game when the operation-time presentation corresponding to the operation of the other operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. In other words, in this case, even if the desired presentation result (such as a presentation result suggesting a high expectation of a bonus being awarded) does not appear in the operation-time presentation corresponding to the operation of the other operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) or if the operation of the operating means cannot be performed within the specific presentation acceptance period (validity period), it is possible to increase interest in the game through such operation-related presentation.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation opportunity is given to any of the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) having such presentation properties, a common operation-related presentation (for example, see FIG. 142 (AA1)) can be executed when the operation opportunity is given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least the following are modes of effect modes that generate a valid period (effect reception period) during which operation of the operation button 410 is enabled (effect reception is possible):
Multiple presentation modes are provided, such as: a first presentation mode which generates an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (performance acceptance possible) after a "specific operation-related performance" which can also appear when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is enabled (performance acceptance possible), is started; and a second presentation mode which generates an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (performance acceptance possible) without a "specific operation-related performance" being started. By executing any of these presentation modes, an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (performance acceptance possible) is generated.

With this configuration, whether a period occurs during which an operation on a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410) is eligible for effect acceptance, or a period occurs during which an operation means other than the specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) is eligible for effect acceptance, a common (specific) operation-related effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of such a period, so that it is possible to add interest in which of the specific operation means and the other operation means is eligible for effect acceptance, and by having the player perform operations while such effects are being performed, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related performance, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the performance, a performance acceptance period corresponding to one of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will occur, but it is desirable to keep secret which of the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will have a performance acceptance period at least at the time the performance starts. In addition, for each operation-related performance exemplified below, it may be possible to indicate (make a performance result display appear) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will have an operation opportunity before the performance acceptance period occurs, or to indicate (make a performance result display appear) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will have an operation opportunity during the period after the performance acceptance period occurs, including at the same time as the performance acceptance period occurs, and it is possible to change the timing until which the operation-related performance is executed as appropriate.

[Automatic button effect status]
In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to an automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state) can be executed, and when the automatic button presentation state is controlled, if a presentation acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined presentation pattern in which the presentation acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the big win determination, even if the operation by the player is not accepted during the presentation acceptance period, a process (automatic presentation function) can be executed to cause the same change in the presentation as when the operation by the player is accepted during the presentation acceptance period. According to such an automatic button presentation state, even if the player does not operate each time the presentation acceptance period occurs, a post-operation presentation occurs when the player operates, so that a decrease in the interest in the game due to forgetting to operate can be suppressed. Note that the automatic presentation function may cause the same presentation acceptance as when the operation actually occurred when it functions, so that a process according to the presentation acceptance is performed, or the same process as when the presentation acceptance occurs may be performed without causing the presentation acceptance.

In the embodiments of the "automatic performance function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, performances, settings, etc. may be used in appropriate combinations or substitutions.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during the period when the demo screen in which the pattern change is not yet executed is displayed, the operation means is operated multiple times to set the automatic button performance state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the "various settings" displayed in the menu screen is selected by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means other than the operation button 410) to display the "various settings" screen, and when the "automatic button performance state setting" displayed in the "various settings" screen is selected by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means other than the operation button 410), the automatic button performance state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times, or the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of the operation means other than the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times in combination.

In contrast, during the period when the pattern change is in the execution state, the automatic button presentation state can be set by simply operating the operation button 410 once, and such a simplified operation makes it possible to set the automatic button presentation state while maintaining a close eye on the progress of the presentation during the pattern change. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether the valid period has occurred or not, and for such players, if the automatic button presentation state is set by simply operating the operation button 410, their interest in playing may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button presentation state during the period when the pattern change is in the execution state, it is required to operate the operation button 410 once in a state in which the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) (the so-called "long press state"). This makes it possible to make it difficult to erroneously set the automatic button presentation state even if the operation button 410 is actively operated regardless of whether the valid period has occurred during the period when the pattern change is in the execution state. In addition, it is desirable to prevent the automatic button effect state from being set even if a long press is performed at least when the effect acceptance period occurs during the period when the pattern change is in progress.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button performance state is set, a different operation mode is required for the period when a demo screen is displayed in which the pattern change is not yet performed and the period when the pattern change is being performed, even in the method of canceling this setting.

In other words, while the demo screen in which the pattern change has not yet been performed is displayed, the automatic button presentation state can be cancelled by operating the operation means multiple times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by operating the operation button 410 a first time, the "Various Settings" displayed in the menu screen is selected by operating the operation button 410 a second time (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) to display the "Various Settings" screen, and when the operation button 410 is operated a third time (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) to select "Cancel Automatic Button Presentation State" displayed in the "Various Settings" screen, the automatic button presentation state is cancelled.

In contrast, during the period when the pattern change is in an execution state, the automatic button presentation state can be cancelled by simply operating the operation button 410 once. This simplification of the operation makes it possible to cancel the automatic button presentation state while maintaining attention on the progress of the presentation during the pattern change. However, unlike when the automatic button presentation state is set, the automatic button presentation state is cancelled by simply detecting that the operation button 410 has been placed in an operation state (by simply operating in a single operation mode) without maintaining the operation state of the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if it is not a long press operation mode). In other words, the fact that some operation has been performed on the operation button 410 means that there is a desire to operate the operation button 410, and therefore it is expected that the interest in playing the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner by cancelling the automatic button presentation state at the time of the operation and quickly returning to the normal presentation state.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operating means including the operating button 410. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in an automatic button performance state set by the operation of the operating button 410, a performance acceptance period (more precisely, a predetermined performance pattern in which the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001, etc. is set) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operating means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001, etc.) different from the operating button 410 based on the result of the big win determination, and even if the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration 5001) is not accepted during the performance acceptance period, a process (automatic performance function) can be executed to cause the same change to the performance as when the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration 5001) is accepted during the performance acceptance period. With this configuration, when the above-mentioned performance (specific operation-related performance (see FIG. 164 (AA1) etc.)) is executed regarding whether a period occurs during which operations on the operation button 410 out of multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) are acceptable for performance, or whether a period occurs during which operations on another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) are acceptable for performance, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 as a result of the performance, so that such specific operation-related performance can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first-side performance reception period occurs in which a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among a plurality of operation means is set as an operation target while being controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if no operation is performed on the first operation means during the first-side performance reception period, an automatic process can be executed to cause the same change in the performance as when an operation is performed on the first operation means (first automatic performance means),
When a second side performance acceptance period occurs in which a second operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) among the multiple operation means is set as the operation target while being controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if no operation is performed on the second operation means during the second side performance acceptance period, an automatic process can be executed to bring about the same change in the performance as when an operation is performed on the second operation means (second automatic performance means).
With such a configuration, regardless of whether a first side performance reception period or a second side performance reception period occurs, automatic processing by the first automatic performance means or automatic processing by the second automatic performance means can be executed when the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period.

With this configuration, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), even if either the first side presentation acceptance period in which the first operating means is set as the operation target or the second side presentation acceptance period in which the second operating means is set as the operation target occurs within the execution period of the pattern change, the automatic presentation function will be able to function when the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of these periods, allowing you to enjoy the presentation with peace of mind.

However, when a first side performance acceptance period occurs in which the first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) is set as the operation target, the performance may progress within the pattern change so that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, and automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period. With this configuration, while it is assumed that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, the performance acceptance is performed at a different timing and a post-operation performance is automatically generated, making it possible to function as a surprise performance.

When the game is controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the occurrence rate of the presentation acceptance period during which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means during the pattern change period may be higher than when the game is not controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). In other words, in this case, it is expected that the frequency of the presentation acceptance period occurring will be higher, and the frequency of operation forgetting during the presentation acceptance period will also be higher. However, even if an operation forgetting occurs, the automatic presentation function will function to execute the post-operation presentation, so that the presentation acceptance period can be generated more frequently while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game due to frequent forgetting to operate. Incidentally, when the game is controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), it is desirable to increase the occurrence rate of both the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means, but it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the occurrence rate different between the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment (peripheral control MPU 1511a),
When the performance acceptance condition is satisfied within the performance acceptance period, a post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means);
A process for satisfying the effect reception condition based on an operation performed by a player within the effect reception period (player operation reception means) can be executed.
When no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period, a process can be executed to establish the effect reception conditions at a specific timing within the effect reception period without receiving an operation by the player (automatic effect reception means).
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so as not to arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. This allows the player ample time to operate the game himself before the automatic effect function starts, and leaves the player with the option of causing the effect reception to occur through operation by the player, thereby making it possible to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, when the performance progresses within the pattern change so that there are cases where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, and cases where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, both the above "specific time" and the above "time different from the specific time" will be set to a time value that is at least longer than half the time set as the first side performance acceptance period.

Here, during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled in the automatic button performance state, a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and if an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted during the performance acceptance period, a process is executed to generate a post-operation performance according to the performance acceptance. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating a post-operation performance according to the performance acceptance, a process of canceling the automatic button performance state may also be executed.

Similarly, if a performance acceptance period occurs for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (such as the sword decoration 5001) during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled to the automatic button performance state, and an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during that performance acceptance period, it is desirable to execute a process for generating a post-operation performance according to that performance acceptance and a process for canceling the automatic button performance state. Even in this case, the "post-operation performance according to performance acceptance" will be executed as a performance with the same content as the post-operation performance executed when a performance acceptance period occurs for the sword decoration 5001 during a period when control is not performed in the automatic button performance state, and an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during that performance acceptance period.

That is, after control has been made into an automatic button presentation state (a specific presentation state), the player may have a desire to return to a presentation state (normal presentation mode) in which the presentation can progress depending on the player's own operation (a desire to end the specific presentation state). This desire often arises when a presentation acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but it is difficult to perform both an operation to end the specific presentation state and an operation to allow operation acceptance within the limited time from the start to the end of the presentation acceptance period, and if the opportunity to operate is lost as a result, interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, when a performance acceptance period for a specific performance occurs while controlled in the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), a single operation of the operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001 that is given an operation opportunity during the performance acceptance period (simply operating in a single operation mode) is sufficient to perform both a process to end the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and a process that may cause a change in the performance (a process to execute a post-operation performance). Therefore, even if a desire to end the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and progress the performance depending on the player's own operation arises during the performance acceptance period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the performance state.

However, when it comes to changing the settings for the automatic button presentation state (changing the setting to the automatic button presentation state or canceling the automatic button presentation state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (when the pattern change is not being executed), the setting can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword decoration 5001. In other words, the sword decoration 5001 is given operation opportunities less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the pattern change, and when an operation opportunity is given, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of the operation button 410. Therefore, it is more desirable to prevent operations on the sword decoration 5001 for the sole purpose of changing the settings for the automatic button presentation state (a specific presentation state), thereby increasing the sense of premium when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 and maintaining interest in the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while a demo screen in which no pattern change has been performed is being displayed, the automatic button performance state can be set or released by operating any of the multiple operating means other than the sword ornament 5001 (such as the operating button 410 or another operating means) multiple times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the pattern change when the machine is not controlled to the automatic button presentation state, the setting can be changed to the automatic button presentation state without the need to operate the sword decoration 5001. In other words, as described above, the machine is controlled to the automatic button presentation state by operating the operation button 410 once in the "long press mode," but operations on the sword decoration 5001 are not permitted solely for the purpose of changing the setting to the automatic button presentation state.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting for the automatic button performance state can be changed by an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is limited to a case where a performance acceptance period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled in the automatic button performance state, and an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted during the performance acceptance period, and a corresponding post-operation performance appears. With this configuration, it becomes possible to change the setting to the automatic button performance state by an operation on the sword decorative body 5001, without compromising the premium feeling when an opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is given.

The multiple operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment may include operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "automatic performance function that generates an operation-time performance without operation during the performance acceptance period" when in the automatic button performance state, as well as special operation means that are not the target of the "automatic performance function that generates an operation-time performance without operation during the performance acceptance period". In other words, in this case, when the pattern variation is in an execution state, a performance acceptance period occurs in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given, and when an operation for the special operation means is accepted during the performance acceptance period, the expectation of a jackpot is suggested by the post-operation performance according to the performance acceptance. However, even if the machine is in a state controlled to the automatic button performance state, if an operation for the special operation means is not accepted during the performance acceptance period, the same post-operation performance as when the performance was accepted will not appear. However, in this case, the same post-operation performance as when the performance was accepted will not appear, but if it is a performance different from the performance accepted, it may be made to appear.

In addition, it is desirable that the setting of the automatic button performance state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode) should not be permitted not only when a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the pattern change is in progress, but also when a performance acceptance period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 occurs (such as a performance acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, or a performance acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when a special operation means is operated). In other words, if an automatic button effect state were to be generated by operating the operation button 410 (by pressing and holding it) during a period in which effects are accepted for an operation means other than the operation button 410, the "automatic effect function that generates an effect upon operation without any operation during the effect acceptance period" would be enabled partway through the effect acceptance period, and the original effect acceptance (effect acceptance when an operation means other than the operation button 410 is operated) could occur without any operation. This would confuse players who are unfamiliar with such automatic button effect states as to whether the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 had occurred, which could lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the premonition effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, but it may be possible to execute the premonition effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) in a different display mode from the premonition effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether the automatic effect function is in a function state within the specific effect acceptance period, and to enjoy the effects with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image (e.g., a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) indicating the remaining time is displayed during the effect reception period, but when the effect reception period occurs, an effect image different from the specific image (e.g., an image of lightning striking the specific area) may be displayed (premonition effect) outside the specific area in which the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (e.g., the "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by checking the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, it is possible to encourage attention to the location where the hidden "specific image indicating the remaining time" will appear, so that it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the specific effect reception period ends without the player being able to operate in time, and furthermore, even if the player is unable to operate in time, the automatic effect function will function to execute the post-operation effect, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state setting and the setting cancellation of the automatic button presentation state can be executed by the operation of the player, but the state may be set to the automatic button presentation state or the setting cancellation of the automatic button presentation state may be executed according to the progress of the game or presentation based on the result of the jackpot determination, including the following examples. Examples of the state setting and the setting cancellation according to the progress of the game or presentation include a control mode such as "the automatic button presentation state is controlled while being controlled in the normal game state, but the automatic button presentation state is cancelled when it is transferred to the jackpot game state or the high probability time-saving state", a control mode such as "the automatic button presentation state is generated during the execution period of the pattern change, and a presentation pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence before the pattern change in the execution state is ended", and a control mode such as "the automatic button presentation state is generated over the period during which multiple pattern changes are executed", and so on. It is also possible for the pachinko machine 1 to be constantly controlled in the automatic button presentation state, in which case the automatic button presentation state will never be released, and there will be no processing such as setting or releasing the "automatic button presentation state."

The timing at which the automatic performance function described above functions may be when the remaining time of the performance acceptance period has been consumed, or at a specified timing thereafter, or it may be an intermediate timing (specific timing) while there is remaining time in the performance acceptance period. If the automatic performance function described above functions when the remaining time of the performance acceptance period has been consumed, or at a specified timing thereafter, the post-operation performance will be executed as if the performance acceptance had been made after the performance acceptance period had ended. In contrast, if the automatic performance function described above functions at an intermediate timing (specific timing) while there is remaining time in the performance acceptance period, the performance acceptance period will end at the time when the automatic performance function described above functions (specific timing) and the post-operation performance will be executed, just as if an operation had actually been performed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that a post-operation effect will occur without operation when the automatic button effect state is in effect, it is important to activate the automatic effect function and start the corresponding post-operation effect until the end of the effect acceptance period (at a specific timing within the effect acceptance period). In other words, in this case, if the automatic effect function does not function even though a specific timing within the effect acceptance period has arrived, the player can operate the game himself after the specific timing has arrived to cause a post-operation effect to occur, which makes it possible to suitably suppress feelings of anxiety when the game is in the automatic button effect state (for example, "I may mistakenly believe that I am in the automatic button effect state even though I am not in the automatic button effect state, and I may not be able to see the post-operation effect," or "Some kind of trouble may cause the automatic effect function to not work, and I may not be able to see the post-operation effect," etc.).

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has characteristic technologies related to this automatic button presentation state. Below, the characteristic technologies related to the automatic button presentation state will be explained in order, but these characteristic technologies may be applied to each of the presentation examples described above, or the following characteristic technologies may be used in appropriate combination.

In addition, in explaining each of the characteristic technologies below, the premise is that in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), when a presentation acceptance period occurs that can occur even when not controlled to the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a post-operation presentation is generated that is the same as when an operation is performed, even if no operation is performed during the presentation acceptance period. However, instead of this, a specific display presentation (a display presentation that can be selected based on the result of a jackpot determination) that can only be executed when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) may be prepared, and when a specific effective period related to this occurs while the specific display presentation is being performed, a post-operation presentation that is the same as when the operation is performed may be generated, even if no operation is performed during the specific effective period. According to such a configuration, not only is the performance enhanced when the game is controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (the performance is improved by allowing the occurrence of a specific display performance), but also, even if a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) occurs, the automatic performance function may not function during another performance acceptance period that is set when a specific display performance is not being performed, whereas in a specific effective period when a specific display performance is being performed, the automatic performance function functions, thereby saving the trouble of operating the game, and allowing the player to feel like a VIP, which is expected to favorably increase the interest in the game. Note that the automatic performance function does not necessarily have to be disabled during all of the other performance acceptance periods that are set when a specific display performance is not being performed, and if the automatic performance function is disabled during at least some of the performance acceptance periods, it is possible to expect the above-mentioned action and effect when a specific effective period occurs when a specific display performance is being performed (when a performance acceptance period in which the automatic performance function always works occurs). Furthermore, even if such a specific valid period occurs, if the player does not perform any operation until a specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, it is desirable to activate the above-mentioned automatic performance function at that specific timing to start a corresponding post-operation performance.

In addition, at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect are prepared as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
When a first specific effective period occurs while a first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first specific effective period, and ends the first specific effective period and generates a corresponding post-operation effect.
When a second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a timing when a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the second specific effective period, thereby ending the second specific effective period and generating a corresponding post-operation effect; and
- When the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, each process may be performed while in the specific effect state, such that if no operation is performed before the end of the third specific effective period despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed will not appear. With this configuration, even if the effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurs while controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the effect acceptance period occurred, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function will not function at all even if the effect acceptance period ends. Therefore, even when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), it is possible to have the necessity to confirm which type of specific display presentation has been performed when a presentation acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs, and for example, when the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function even though a first predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to progress the presentation with a sense of tension, such as whether the above-mentioned automatic presentation function will function when a second predetermined time has elapsed, or whether the above-mentioned automatic presentation function will not function at all. Note that the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are all ones that are accepted for presentation and generate a post-operation presentation when the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operating state (when a so-called single operation is performed).

The first, second, and third specific display effects may be executable only when the game is controlled to a specific display state (automatic button display state). In this way, when the game is controlled to a specific display state (automatic button display state), if a display mode that cannot appear when the game is not controlled to the specific display state (automatic button display state) can be displayed, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in playing the game when the game is in the specific display state (automatic button display state). In addition, the first specific display effect (first specific valid period) and the second specific display effect (second specific valid period) are prepared, but the third specific display effect (third specific valid period) does not necessarily have to be prepared. In addition, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different effects.

In addition, when the automatic performance function described above functions to generate a post-operation performance, the bar display (a display whose image changes (here, the area changes) over time) indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period may be displayed rather than hidden when the automatic performance function functions, so that it is possible to recognize when the automatic performance function functions (how much time was left in the performance reception period when the performance was accepted) and generate a post-operation performance. With this configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that continues to be displayed when the automatic performance function functions, it becomes possible to recognize whether the performance reception period was a first specific effective period (a period during which the automatic performance function functions when a first specified time has elapsed, which is a relatively early stage after the performance reception period has occurred) or a second specific effective period (a period during which the automatic performance function functions when a second specified time has elapsed, which is a relatively late stage after the performance reception period has occurred).

In this sense, it is desirable to make the jackpot expectation different (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous) when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic performance function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the performance reception period has occurred) occurs and when the second specific effective period (the period during which the automatic performance function functions when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the performance reception period has occurred). In this case, the first specific display performance and the second specific display performance may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display performance and the second specific display performance are executed, the jackpot expectation will function to be different (for example, the second specific display performance is more advantageous) when the first specific display performance appears and when the second specific display performance appears. In addition, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player during the performance reception period, the "bar display" may be made non-displayed when the post-operation performance occurs, or, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic performance function has functioned, the "bar display" may not be made non-displayed and may be displayed to generate the post-operation performance. The post-operation performance does not have to be executed as a display change on the performance display device 1600, but may be executed, for example, as illumination by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative object.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic performance function functioning, the post-operation effect is automatically generated without the player having any involvement in the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) that is the operation target, so there is a concern that the player will not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is operated to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display an operation target suggestion image (e.g., an image display imitating the operation means to be operated) that suggests the operation target operation means during the performance reception period, and to generate the post-operation effect with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden, even if the above-mentioned automatic performance function has functioned. In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect occurs does not necessarily have to be the same, and it is sufficient that it is possible to recognize which operation means was the operation target even in the state in which the post-operation effect occurs. In contrast, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by a player during the effect acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be made invisible when the post-operation effect occurs, or, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned, the post-operation effect may be generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned, such as when the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned within the above-mentioned first specific effective period or when the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, the post-operation effect may always be generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden.

In this case, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of several modes with different odds of winning, it becomes possible to simultaneously check both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed, for example, as illumination by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body.

For example, even in a pachinko machine 1 that does not have the automatic performance function described above, multiple modes of operation target suggestion images (such as images that imitate the operating means) with different jackpot expectations (for example, the rate at which the post-operation performance is executed in a mode that appears only when a jackpot has been obtained) can be prepared, and when an operation is accepted by the player, the operation target suggestion image (such as an image that imitates the operating means) can be left displayed in one of the multiple modes with different expectations at the time the post-operation performance begins to be executed based on the operation acceptance. This allows the player to simultaneously check both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation performance, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

When a valid period (performance reception period) during which a mock image is displayed is generated, it is desirable to have a display in which the display area is reduced over time (a first valid period generated by the establishment of a first condition) and a display in which the display area is not reduced over time (a second valid period generated by the establishment of a second condition) based on the type of the valid period (performance reception period) (such as the condition for the valid period to occur or the type of post-operation performance that occurs when an operation is accepted). In other words, during a valid period in which the display area is not reduced over time, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left for operation acceptance, and the sense of tension during the valid period can be appropriately maintained. Note that "not displaying a specific image with a reduced display over time" can be realized by, for example, adopting a method in which a gauge image is displayed in a manner in which the display area is reduced over time during a normal period (first valid period) but the gauge image itself is not displayed during a second valid period, or a method in which the gauge image is displayed but its display area is not reduced over time.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the second valid period (when the display area is not reduced over time), it is desirable that the imitation image be displayed rather than hidden when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This allows the user to know that the operation has been accepted while the imitation image is displayed (before the valid period ends), and eliminates any anxiety that the user may have "missed the operation acceptance in time."

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) occurs, and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target of the operation even in a state in which a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) occurs. However, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, it is desirable to maintain the display state of the imitation image in the mode displayed before the operation was accepted, at least at the time when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) begins to be executed, and to prevent the imitation image from being made difficult to see by other images. Therefore, if the replica image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation reception is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light) is started. In contrast, if a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light) occurs due to an operation by the player during the first valid period, the replica image may be hidden when the change (display change, lamp light, etc.) occurs, or, as in the case of the second valid period described above, the replica image may be displayed instead of hidden, and a change in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp light, etc.) may occur while the replica image is displayed.

However, even during this effective period when "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time," a dummy image that mimics the operating means to be operated should be displayed, and it is desirable to display this dummy image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. With this configuration, although the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image, it is possible, though difficult, to grasp the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted based on how far the moving image of the dummy image has progressed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is equipped with a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) and a second operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) as operation means, and there are cases where an effective period (effect reception period) during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted is generated, and cases where an effective period (effect reception period) during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted is generated, and of these effective periods, a first imitation image of the first operation means is displayed during the effective period during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted, and a second imitation image of the second operation means is displayed during the effective period during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted. Also, the effective period during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted and the effective period during which operation reception for the second operation means are permitted have different jackpot expectancies (probability of execution of a mode that only appears at the time of a jackpot as a post-operation performance) suggested when an operation is received. In addition to the valid period during which operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted (performance acceptance period) and the valid period during which operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted (performance acceptance period), other valid periods may be possible. In this regard, when an operation is accepted during a valid period with a high probability of winning (for example, a valid period during which operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted), it is desirable that the model image (second model image) is not hidden but is displayed at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed.

As a result, in addition to cases where an operation is accepted in a situation such as that shown in FIG. 183(f) above, even if, for example, an operation is mistakenly performed on the first operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) despite the opportunity to operate the second operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) being given, and an operation is performed on the second operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) while the first operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is still in an operating state (while operating), and this operation is accepted, the player can be made to recognize that this has been properly accepted.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs, and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target of the operation even in a state in which a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable to maintain the display state of the imitation image in the same manner as it was displayed before the operation was accepted, at least at the time when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, and to prevent the gauge image from being made difficult to see by other images. Therefore, if the imitation image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. Also, in order to allow the player to recognize that the performance has been accepted properly, even if a change in response to the operation acceptance (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs due to the player's operation during the first valid period, it is desirable to display the imitation image (first imitation image) rather than hiding it when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, and to cause the change in response to the operation acceptance (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) to occur while it is displayed.

According to this configuration, "the game includes a determination means for making a determination, a performance means for performing a performance based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means, a specific operation receiving portion (operation button 410 that can be displaced between a normal position and a pressed position) that is displaceable between a first position and a second position, a first detection unit that can detect a specific action (a press operation) by a player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving portion to the second position, and a second detection unit that can detect a special action (e.g., a sheathing operation) by a player to a special operation receiving portion (e.g., sword decoration 5001) different from the specific operation receiving portion, and a plurality of performance reception periods (different types of post-operation performances that occur when performance reception is made) including a first performance reception period and a second performance reception period. a performance acceptance period is provided, during the first performance acceptance period, a specific model image simulating the specific operation receiving portion is displayed, and performance acceptance is made by detection by the first detection unit, during the second performance acceptance period, a special model image simulating the special operation receiving portion is displayed, and performance acceptance is made by detection by the second detection unit, and even if the special model image simulating the special operation receiving portion is displayed during the second performance acceptance period and the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position by a specific action by the player, even if the special action by the player is performed while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion at the second position, performance acceptance is made by detection by the second detection unit, and a post-operation performance can be executed based on the performance acceptance."

And in this configuration, "even if the special action is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving part is maintained in the second position, the effect is accepted upon detection by the second detection part, and at the point in time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed based on the effect acceptance, the special image imitating the special operation receiving part is not hidden but remains displayed, thereby enabling the player to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an operation by the correct side, and not as an operation by the side that performed the operation erroneously.

When the special Momo image is displayed in one of a number of different modes with different odds of winning, the post-operation performance will start to be executed in that displayed mode. When the performance is accepted without such an erroneous operation, the Momo image may be left displayed rather than hidden when the post-operation performance starts to be executed, or the Momo image may be hidden when the post-operation performance starts to be executed.

The second performance acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a special operation receiving part often occurs less frequently than the first performance acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation receiving part, and this is thought to be one of the factors that cause operation errors. Therefore, when the second performance acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a special operation receiving part occurs, it is desirable to output an acceptance permission sound that indicates that the performance acceptance has been permitted or that the performance acceptance will be permitted. This allows the player to recognize that the second performance acceptance period has occurred, and is expected to make it difficult for operation errors to occur. The "acceptance permission sound" is a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, always occurs during the time that this sound is output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state in which the acceptance permission state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output has started within the set time during which the performance reception is permitted and that the performance reception is permitted, or that the output has started before the set time during which the performance reception is permitted begins and that the performance reception is permitted; for example, it is output as a performance sound such as a "ping-pong."

However, even when the first performance reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit, a reception permission sound may be output to indicate that the performance reception has been permitted or to indicate that the performance reception will be permitted. In this case, however, it is preferable to make the manner (tone, etc.) of the reception permission sound different between the first performance reception period and the second performance reception period. Alternatively, in the first performance reception period, even if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is not terminated but is continued, but in the second performance reception period, if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is preferably terminated midway. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to grasp whether the first performance reception period or the second performance reception period will occur, and it becomes possible to properly grasp whether an operation to the specific operation receiving unit or an operation to the special operation receiving unit has been accepted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a small gauge effective period (performance acceptance period) is generated by displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) with a relatively small display area, and then displaying the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) to be smaller over time (for example, displaying the display area to be "0"), which indicates the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted, or a large gauge effective period (performance acceptance period) is generated by displaying a gauge image (large gauge image) with a relatively large display area, and then displaying the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) to be smaller over time (for example, displaying the display area to be "0"), which indicates the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted. The small gauge effective period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge effective period in which the large gauge image is displayed are different in the jackpot expectation level (the rate at which a mode that appears only at the time of a jackpot is executed as a post-operation performance) indicated when operation acceptance is performed (for example, the large gauge effective period has a higher jackpot expectation level). In addition to the small gauge effective period and the large gauge effective period, other effective periods may be generated. The small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period may provide operation opportunities for the same operation target, or may provide operation opportunities for different operation targets.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge valid period, it is desirable that the large gauge image is not hidden but remains displayed at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes resulting from the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. It is also desirable that the display of the large gauge image getting smaller over time continues without ending even at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes in response to the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This provides a sense of security that there appears to be a lot of time remaining because the large gauge image is displayed, but after the operation is accepted, it is possible to create a sense of anxiety as to whether the operation was accepted properly, and it is possible to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after a change occurs in response to operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination), and the gauge image may be made difficult to see by other images. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable to maintain the display state of the gauge image in the mode it was displayed in before the operation was accepted, at least at the point in time when the change in response to operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, and to prevent the gauge image from being made difficult to see by other images. On the other hand, if a change occurs during the small gauge validity period due to an operation by the player in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination), the gauge image (small gauge image) may be made invisible when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, or, as in the case of the large gauge validity period described above, the gauge image (large gauge image) may not be hidden, but may be displayed while a change occurs in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp illumination, etc.).

In addition, when the large gauge valid period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception permission sound that indicates that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception will be permitted. This allows the player to recognize that the large gauge valid period has occurred, and further emphasizes the sense of security until the operation reception is performed. The "reception permission sound" is a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, always generates a reception permission state (valid period) while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where the reception permission state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it is a sound that starts to be output within the set time during which the performance reception is permitted and indicates that the performance reception is permitted, or starts to be output before the set time during which the performance reception is permitted begins and indicates that the performance reception is permitted, and is output as a performance sound such as a "beep".

However, even when a small gauge valid period occurs, a reception permission sound may be output that indicates that a performance reception is permitted or that a performance reception is permitted. In this case, however, it is desirable to make the manner (tone, etc.) of the reception permission sound different between when a small gauge valid period occurs and when a large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during a small gauge valid period, even if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is not terminated but is continued, but during a large gauge valid period, if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, it is desirable to terminate the reception permission sound in the middle of it. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to grasp whether a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period will occur, and it becomes possible to properly grasp whether an operation reception has been made during a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period.

The large gauge image and the small gauge image may not only differ in size, but may also differ in shape (e.g., images that are not similar to each other).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or later), during the period in which operation acceptance is permitted, the replica image is dynamically displayed to depict the operation receiving portion being displaced. In this regard, if the replica image is not hidden but is left displayed at the time when a change in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, the dynamic display of the replica image may also be continued without being terminated.

The model image and gauge image may also be displayed as an integrated model image, which will be described later.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and each of the following examples, "operation reception" may be detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button, or may be reception of an operation by detecting contact with a specific operation receiving portion with a touch sensor, or reception of an operation by non-contact detection of the player's movement in a specific area.

In addition, when an effect that generates an effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of multiple operation means) is defined as an "operation-based effect", the operation-based effect may be executed in parallel with another specific effect that is unrelated to it (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.). In this case, however, when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effect that is unrelated to it" is not executed in a performance situation, it is desirable to make the automatic performance function described above function more frequently than when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effect that is unrelated to it" are executed in parallel. That is, when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effect unrelated to this" are in a parallel performance situation, even if the "operation-based effect" does not receive a performance reception and the post-operation effect is not executed, the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is in an execution state, so that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed, whereas when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, if the "operation-based effect" does not receive a performance reception and the post-operation effect is not executed, the situation will be such that no performance is executed, and therefore the decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable. Therefore, when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the automatic effect function is set to function at a higher rate than when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effect unrelated to this" are in a parallel performance situation, so that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained when the operation-based effect occurs. The rate may be 100%. Incidentally, the premonition effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect in which the operation means to be operated is operated, can be said to be executed as an "operation-related effect" or an effect related thereto. In addition, if the "other specific effect" is generated, for example, before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the premonition effect), it is possible to suggest in advance that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function will be high. In this case, it is desirable to execute it as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). In contrast, if the "other specific effect" is generated, for example, after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the premonition effect) and executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, it becomes possible to recognize whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function at a high rate only immediately before, and it becomes possible to provide an effect with a sense of tension. In this regard, if the "another specific effect" is to be generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably the premonition effect), then if the "another specific effect" is performed multiple times within one pattern change, it will be executed even when the effect acceptance period does not occur, so that it is possible to create tension as to whether the effect acceptance period will occur while the automatic effect function is functioning at a high rate when the "another specific effect" is executed.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), until the number of executions of missing variations according to the result of the jackpot determination reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive missing variations are executed and the 1000th missing variation), a presentation acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of multiple operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability, and even if the presentation acceptance period occurs, if there is no operation by the player, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function may or may not be activated. In contrast, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), if the number of times the failure variations according to the result of the big win determination are consumed in sequence and reach a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive failure variations are executed, resulting in the 1000th failure variation), the pattern variation (presentation pattern) that has reached the specific value will always generate a presentation acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the multiple operation means) regardless of the result of the big win determination, and even if there is no operation by the player during the presentation acceptance period, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function may be activated to always generate the same post-operation presentation as when there is an operation by the player during the presentation acceptance period. According to this configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the failure variations reaches a specific value, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a presentation that always activates the automatic presentation function even if there is no operation by the player, as if it felt responsible for the past "having urged the player to operate every time a presentation acceptance period occurred while the failure variations were being executed consecutively, but no results were achieved." This makes it possible to maintain the interest in the game in a good condition. In this case, during the performance acceptance period that occurs when the losing variations are sequentially consumed and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing variation), it is desirable to display a special display image (for example, "If it is too much trouble, I will operate it for you") different from the display image (for example, "Operate it") that appeared during the performance acceptance period until the losing variations are sequentially consumed and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value (for example, up to 999 losing variations). Furthermore, even after a pattern change (presentation pattern) that has reached a specific value has been consumed, each time a pattern change is consumed until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is met, a presentation acceptance period is always generated within the pattern change (presentation pattern) during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of multiple operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, and a special display image (for example, "If it's too much trouble, I'll operate it for you") appears, and it is desirable to execute a process that causes the above-mentioned automatic presentation function to function and always generates a post-operation presentation according to the presentation acceptance even if the player does not operate the game during the presentation acceptance period.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the number of remaining variations may be displayed until the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive executions of missing variations and the 1000th missing variation) as the missing variations corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination are consumed in sequence.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), during the pattern change, until the number of executions of the miss variations corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially consumed and reaches a specific value, both the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means can occur, but in the pattern change when the miss variations are sequentially consumed and the number of executions reaches a specific value, only one of the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs, and the presentation can be advanced so that the other cannot occur. With such a configuration, since an operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of expectations regarding the occurrence of a presentation acceptance period itself. However, considering that this example of presentation is realized as a presentation in which the pachinko machine 1 itself ensures that the automatic presentation function will function even if there is no operation by the player, as if the manufacturer felt responsible for the fact that "the player was prompted to operate each time a presentation acceptance period occurred while the losing variations were being executed continuously, but no results were achieved," it is preferable to generate a presentation acceptance period for the first operating means (e.g., operation button 410), which has a relatively low level of expectation when it occurs, and not generate a presentation acceptance period for the second operating means (e.g., sword decoration 5001), so as not to create excessive expectations any further.

The first effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among the multiple operation means can occur either when the operation means is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) or when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to a second operation means (e.g., sword ornament 5001) among the multiple operation means may not occur when the operation means is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but may occur when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). With this configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and to maintain the interest in the game when the game means is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a performance acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
Displaying a mock image of an operating means (an operation target suggesting image suggesting an operating means to be operated) (a mock image display means);
After the effect reception period has occurred, when a player performs an operation while the model image is being displayed, a post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
After the performance reception period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without the player performing any operation while the model image is being displayed, the post-operation performance can be executed without the player performing any operation (automatic performance reception means).
However, it is desirable that the mock image can be displayed in one of a number of modes with different rates (expectations) of execution of the post-operation effect in a "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. With this configuration, in either case of the post-operation effect being generated by the player operation accepting means or the post-operation effect being generated by the automatic effect accepting means, it becomes possible to generate the post-operation effect while the expectation is recognizable.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect function, the post-operation effect is automatically generated without the player having any involvement in the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) that is the operation target, so there is a concern that the player will not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the automatic effect function is operated to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a mock image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation means to be operated) during the effect acceptance period, and to generate the post-operation effect with the mock image displayed, rather than hiding it, even if the automatic effect function has functioned. In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect occurs does not necessarily have to be the same, as long as it is possible to recognize which operation means was the operation target even in the state in which the post-operation effect occurs. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden when the post-operation effect occurs, or, as in the case where the automatic effect function described above has functioned, the operation target suggestion image may not be hidden but may be displayed when the post-operation effect occurs. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the mock image is displayed, or may be performed by lighting a lamp provided on the game board 5 or by operating a movable decoration.

In this case, if the model image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different expectation levels, it will be possible to check the expectation level (model image display mode) that was suggested during the performance acceptance period even when the post-operation performance has occurred.

The imitation image that continues to be displayed in this way will be hidden after the post-operation performance occurs. However, it is desirable that the time from when the post-operation performance is performed until the imitation image is hidden be different between the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is performed when a specific time has elapsed since the first-side performance reception period has occurred and the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is performed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first-side performance reception period has occurred. With this configuration, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the post-operation performance occurred by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed or when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, it is possible to recognize at what time the post-operation performance occurred by checking the time from when the post-operation performance was performed until the imitation image was hidden.

The likelihood of a jackpot being obtained in the jackpot determination may be different when a post-operation effect occurs through automatic processing after a specific time has elapsed and when a post-operation effect occurs through automatic processing after a time other than the specific time has elapsed.

In addition, when a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) is controlled and a presentation acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, one of two display modes (e.g., a low expectation display mode with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot, and a high expectation display mode with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot) can appear during the presentation acceptance period, and when a high expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) appears, even if no operation is performed within the presentation acceptance period, the presentation is always accepted (the automatic presentation function always functions) and a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed, but when a low expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, if no operation is performed within the presentation acceptance period, the presentation may progress in such a way that there are cases where the presentation is accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed, and cases where the presentation is not accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and a post-operation presentation is not executed. That is, if an operation is forgotten when a high-expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) appears, a decrease in interest in the game is inevitable due to the inability to confirm the post-operation performance, but it is assumed that an operation is forgotten when a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, even if an operation is forgotten, the automatic performance function is always activated within the performance reception period to avoid a decrease in interest in the game due to an operation forgetting, while the automatic performance function is not always activated within the performance reception period to prevent an operation forgetting when a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, so that a sense of tension is created in the game and a sense of participation of the player is increased so that an operation forgetting does not occur. Note that when not controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, but a high-expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) may not appear. Also, during the performance reception period, any of three or more display modes may appear.

[More possibilities for displaying mock-images]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

When such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using decorative patterns according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using decorative patterns is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of obtaining a jackpot." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, then no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a notice determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, as will be described later, the mode of the acceptance permission sound output when the operation acceptance performance occurs is set to differ depending on the result of the performance determination, thereby suggesting the percentage of times that the post-operation performance will be executed in a highly expected mode and the percentage of times that the jackpot pattern will be stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) will not be generated. Also, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a performance different from the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

Note that, with regard to the variation patterns that generate an operation acceptance presentation (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview presentation judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation patterns" may be provided. However, with regard to the variation patterns that generate an operation acceptance presentation (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the preview presentation judgment, it is preferable that they are not included in the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns), or that their selection rate is made low.

However, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., simply executes a post-operation performance that generates a predetermined change to the performance component that is the target of the performance (at least one of a display change on the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change on the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the performance quality of the operation acceptance performance (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease until the post-operation performance is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception performance,
As mentioned above, various ingenuity is provided, such as at least being able to generate a low-expectation non-suppressed acceptance performance in which, during the execution period of a pattern performance (performance pattern) based on a low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a non-suppressed mode, providing an opportunity for operation; and, during the execution period of a pattern performance (performance pattern) based on a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), at least being able to generate a high-expectation suppressed acceptance performance in which, during the execution period of a pattern performance (performance pattern) based on a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state (the playback period in which audible sounds are recorded among the sound data has ended, or channel allocation has ended, etc.).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further displays the Momo image displayed in the operation reception performance as an integrated Momo image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the Momo image, thereby improving the interest in playing when the operation reception performance (valid period) occurs. It is desirable to display such an integrated Momo image in both the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs in the above-mentioned specified variation pattern, and it is also desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. In addition, in order to improve the interest in playing, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the exemplified Momo image in each of the performance examples described above with one of the integrated Momo images described below.

The case where the mock-up image is displayed as an "integrated mock-up image" will be described below.
First, to explain the "imitation image" once again, the operation means to which an operation opportunity is given in the operation reception performance has an "operation receiving portion" that receives the operation by the player and a "peripheral decoration portion" that decorates the periphery of the operation receiving portion. In this regard, the "imitation image" means an image that imitates the "operation receiving portion" of such an operation means. The "operation receiving portion" is usually provided so as to be displaced by the operation by the player, and the "peripheral decoration portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (performance operation unit 400) illustrated in Figures 39 and 40, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the frame unit 415. Also, in the case of the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) illustrated in Figures 124 and 139, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020.

Figure 144 shows an example of an "integrated model image" that is displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) occurs for an operation means that has an "operation receiving portion" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player.

In this explanatory example, for ease of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving part" on the top surface of the handle part 5012 of the sword decoration 5001. In other words, when the handle button 5014 is "pushed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle part 5012 and detected by a specified sensor (detection means), and the detection information is provided to the performance (such as the trigger for executing a post-operation performance). With this configuration, the sword decoration 5001 as an operation unit is provided with two operation receiving parts: the "handle button 5014" that can move (move up and down) relative to the handle part 5012, and the "handle part 5012" that can move (move up and down) relative to the sheath part 5020.

In FIG. 144, the "integrated imitation image" will be described when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. However, in the examples described below, including FIG. 144, the "integrated imitation image" when an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 may be applied as the "integrated imitation image" when an operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, not the pattern button 5014. In other words, in this case, the "imitation image of the operation button 410" illustrated in each of the above-mentioned performance examples can be replaced with the "integrated imitation image" described below, and in this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a component.

As shown in FIG. 144(a)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is generated, the effect display device 1600 displays the button model image BMG, which is modeled after the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), as integrated model images IGa-IGd integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates the border. In the example shown in FIG. 144(a)-(d), the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are not prepared separately as image data, and are displayed only as one integrated image data (integrated model images IGa-IGd). In addition, when the integrated model images IGa-IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but for convenience of explanation, they are omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple presentation modes including a "first presentation mode with relatively low expectation" and a "second presentation mode with relatively high expectation" are prepared as post-operation presentations to be executed when an operation is accepted during a specific operation acceptance presentation (valid period), and one of these presentation modes is executed based on the result of the big win judgment (presentation judgment). In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 144(a) to (d),
During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image IGa) appears.
During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 144(c) (integrated model image IGc) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears.
In order to establish a relationship in which the appearance rate of the "second performance mode with a relatively high expectation" as a post-operation performance is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 144(d) (integrated model image IGd) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(c) (integrated model image IGc) appears during a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period), one of the integrated model images IGa to IGd is displayed based on the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination).

It is not necessary to prepare all four of the integrated model images IGa to IGd. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the post-operation performance during the valid period by preparing at least two of the models. In addition, it is also possible to prepare a model different from the above four models (integrated model images IGa to IGd) and display any one of the prepared models.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operation means (sword decoration 5001, performance operation unit 400) having an operation receiving part (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by the operation of the player and a peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof;
an integrated model image display means for displaying a model image representing an operation receiving portion as integrated model images IGa to IGd integrated with a border decoration image that decorates the border of the model image;
- It is equipped with an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation performance) when a player performs an operation while the integrated model image is displayed, causing a predetermined displacement in the operation receiving section, and the integrated model image can be displayed in any of a number of forms (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details about the "integrated model images" shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d) will be explained separately for each of these aspects (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 144(a) is composed of a normal button model image BMGa and a normal border decoration image SSGa that decorates its periphery. However, in the "integrated model image IGa", the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as an image that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given, whereas the normal border decoration image SSGa does not imitate the border decoration part (pattern part 5012 or frame unit 415) that is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given, but decorates the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa as a virtual decoration in the display performance of the performance display device 1600.

According to this configuration, firstly, even if a plurality of operating means are provided, it is possible to easily recognize which of the operating means is given an opportunity to operate by visually checking the normal button imitation image BMGa which imitates (a part of) the operating means to be operated. Moreover, since the normal button imitation image BMGa itself is not displayed as an actual peripheral decoration part, but as a gorgeous and large image (integrated imitation image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image which is preferable for improving decorativeness and presentation, it is expected that the presentation impact when the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed will be large and the interest in the game will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space required to make the actual peripheral decoration part gorgeous, and it is possible to realize a presentation with a high degree of freedom that is not limited by the shape of the actual peripheral decoration part.

In the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 144(a), the normal border decoration image SSGa is expressed as a base for placing a button (normal button model image BMGa), and the top surface of the base is decorated with a specified decoration to warn that the button is highly dangerous. As mentioned above, this "base" and "specified decoration" have a different shape from the actual border decoration and are expressed as a different decoration.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal border decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases over time. More specifically, when no operation is accepted within the valid period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area decreases over time from a predetermined maximum value to a predetermined minimum value (including "0"). That is, in this case, the normal border decoration image SSGa not only has the function of suggesting the operation means that is the object of operation, but also has the remaining time suggesting function of suggesting the remaining time until the state in which operation acceptance is permitted (valid period) ends.

In the normal border decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 144(a), a partition image KG is provided which separates the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas within the normal border decoration image SSGa. The area surrounded by this partition image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG." However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal border decoration image SSGa may be the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

In the example shown in FIG. 144(a), a predetermined decoration (here, a "black and white striped pattern") is applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is displayed so as to overlap the display target area with the predetermined decoration. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but is visible even in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that interest in the game can be maintained throughout the entire period from when the gauge image GG changes from full to empty.

When realizing such a display mode within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, in addition to a method of displaying a gauge image GG with a predetermined transmittance by superimposing it on the display target area with the predetermined decoration, a method of displaying the display target area with the predetermined decoration by changing the color of the display target area itself between the part with the gauge and the part without the gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as standalone image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by changing the color of the predetermined decoration within the display target area.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 144(a), the specified decoration (here, a "black and white striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is applied in a manner that spans other areas within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa, which further enhances the integrated decorativeness of the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself, and is expected to more favorably increase interest in playing when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the object of operation is illuminated in the same color (e.g., "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGa". That is, as will be described later, the button model image BMG has multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. By adopting such an illumination mode, it becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG by simply checking the pattern button 5014 that is the object of operation, without visually checking the normal button model image BMGa.

The "button imitation image BMGa (Fig. 144(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact imitation of the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is to be operated; the point is that it should be displayed with a level of imitation (deformation, etc.) that allows the user to recognize which operation tool is the object of operation.

In contrast, the "integrated model image IGb" shown in FIG. 144(b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated model image IGa," and is configured as an image in which a button model image BMG representing the object to be operated and a peripheral decoration image SSG decorating its periphery are integrated. However, in this "integrated model image IGb," the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa," but the button model image BMG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "button model image BMGa," but as a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated model image IGb" shown in FIG. 144(b), the special button model image BMGb does not model the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of operation, and is displayed as an image having a different shape from the "button model image BMGa (FIG. 144(a))" that models the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it will be difficult to recognize which of multiple operation means is the object of operation when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the "integrated model image IGa", the "button model image BMGa" modeled after the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of operation is displayed integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa", so the "normal border decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has the function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object of operation. In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGb", the "special button model image BMGb" is displayed integrated with such a "normal border decoration image SSGa", so even if the "special button model image BMGb" does not properly model the object of operation, the "integrated model image IGb" as a whole can suggest that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object of operation. To obtain this effect (the function of suggesting the operation target by the normal border decoration image SSGa), it is important that the "normal border decoration image SSGa" is not displayed when the operation target is an operation means (such as the handle portion 5012) other than the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410).

With this configuration, the button model image BMG, which represents the operation receiving portion, and the peripheral decoration image SSG, which decorates the peripheral portion, are displayed as an integrated model image. This makes it possible to display the button model image BMG, which is only a part of the integrated model image, in a more flexible manner that is not necessarily bound by the shape of the operating means to be operated, and is expected to increase interest in the game through more distinctive presentation and decorativeness.

The "special button image BMGb" shown in FIG. 144(b) is depicted as a button with a streamlined shape in a more stylish design than the "button image BMGa," and has the word "DANGER" written on the top. The appearance of this "special button image BMGb," which does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1, makes it easier for players to feel a sense of premium, and is expected to make them instinctively sense that expectations are higher than when the "button image BMGa" appears.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGb". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG", so that the appearance (expectation) of the button model image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated, without visually checking the button model image BMG.

On the other hand, the "integrated model image IGc" shown in FIG. 144(c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated model image IGa," and is configured as an image in which a button model image BMG representing the object to be operated and a peripheral decoration image SSG decorating its periphery are integrated. However, in the "integrated model image IGc," the button model image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa," but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa," but as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in the following respects.
"The actual peripheral decorative portion (the handle portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided on the periphery of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, but the periphery of the button-imitated image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration for the display performance on the performance display device 1600.
A display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

With this "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))", it is possible to significantly change the overall shape of the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" without causing any change in the shape of the "button model image BMG" which suggests which operating means will be given an operating opportunity when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" is used as a reference. This makes it possible to realize decorativeness and presentation with a high degree of freedom by causing shape changes without sacrificing the suggestive function of the operation target.

In addition, in this embodiment, at least a portion of the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))" is displayed as an image having the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))". Therefore, when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" appears and when the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" appears, it is possible to suggest that this is a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period) targeting the same post-operation performance.

In particular, in the "special border decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))" according to this embodiment, a separate component with special decoration is added to the "normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))" and the whole is displayed as a larger image in an expanded form. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the "special border decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal border decoration image SSGa", and it is expected that the user will instinctively sense that there is a higher level of anticipation than when the "button pattern image BMGa" appears.

In addition, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Figure 144 (c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Figure 144 (a))", but no changes are made to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself.

In other words, if a portion of such an integrated model image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the display target area or the gauge image is merely "part of the decoration" or "a part that has the function of indicating the remaining time." In this regard, between the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))," the display target area of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG, which has the important function of "indicating the remaining time," is not changed in shape, but the other parts are changed in shape, making it possible to realize highly flexible decorativeness and presentation by causing shape changes without sacrificing the function of indicating the remaining time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(c), when a specific operation reception performance (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGc". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG", so that the appearance (expectation level) of the button model image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated without visually checking the button model image BMG. However, the normal button model image BMGa when the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed may be displayed in a color (e.g., "green") different from that when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated model image IGd" shown in FIG. 144(d) is basically the same as the "integrated model image IGa" described above, and is configured as an image in which a button model image BMG representing the object to be operated and a border decoration image SSG decorating its border are integrated. However, in the "integrated model image IGd", the button model image BMG is not displayed as the "normal button model image BMGa" described above, but as a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape, and the border decoration image SSG is not displayed as the "normal border decoration image SSGa" described above, but as a "special border decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

That is, in the "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 144(d))," the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" used in the "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))" are displayed as an integrated image. With this configuration, not only can the effects of the "special button model image BMGb" described above for the "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" and the effects of the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" described above for the "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))" be obtained, but also, when the "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" is used as a reference, the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, so that it is expected that the user will instinctively feel that there is a high level of expectation.

On the other hand, while both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are modified in appearance, the same decoration and shape appear in some areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG, so that when an "integrated model image IGa (Figure 144(a))" appears and when an "integrated model image IGd (Figure 144(d))" appears, it can be suggested that a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period) is targeted at the same post-operation performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(d), when a specific operation reception performance (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGd". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG", so that the appearance (expectation level) of the button model image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated without visually checking the button model image BMG. However, the special button model image BMGb when the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed may be displayed in a color (e.g., "rainbow color") different from that when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit light in rainbow colors.

As shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the pattern presentation based on a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing and a predetermined operation acceptance presentation (valid period) occurs, an integrated button model image IG in which the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed, and when one side of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in one manner, the other side can be displayed in any of a number of manners. For example, when the button model image BMG is displayed as a "normal button model image BMGa", the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" (Figures 144 (a) and (c)). Also, when the button model image BMG is displayed as a "special button model image BMGb", the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal border decoration image SSGa" or a "special border decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 144 (b) and (d)). Also, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "normal border decoration image SSGa", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either a "normal button model image BMGa" or a "special button model image BMGb" (Fig. 144 (a) and (b)). Also, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "special border decoration image SSGb", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either a "normal button model image BMGa" or a "special button model image BMGb" (Fig. 144 (a) and (b)).

With this configuration, even though the button-like image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed as one, when the appearance changes, only one side of them is displayed. Therefore, by looking at one side where the appearance has not changed, it is easy to recognize that a predetermined operation reception performance (valid period) is occurring, regardless of the appearance of the other side, and by looking at the other side where the appearance has changed, the degree of expectation can also be appropriately recognized. Note that it is also possible to have one side of the button-like image BMG and the border decoration image SSG not change in appearance, and only the other side change in appearance.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Fig. 144 (a) to (d), the border decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated model image IG is displayed during the operation reception performance (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that its display area within the display target area decreases with time. In other words, in this case, the "border decoration image SSG" has a remaining time indication function that indicates the remaining time until the operation reception-permitted state ends, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the "button model image BMG" that has a function of indicating which operation means is the operation target. This allows the player to grasp the remaining time and the operation target, and further recognize which of the multiple modes has appeared, and is expected to maintain the interest in playing when the operation reception performance (valid period) is occurring.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Fig. 144 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (there are both a portion with a remaining time indication function and a portion without a remaining time indication function). In other words, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not intended only to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception performance (validity period), and since it is possible to actively adopt a display mode aimed at "enhancing the decorativeness of the button model image BMG" in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, it is possible to significantly improve the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs while indicating the remaining time. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more desirable to display the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode, the button model image BMG can be displayed in one of multiple modes, but in reality, when the "pattern portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration is in one mode, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), which is the operation receiving portion, changes to one of multiple modes (multiple light-emitting colors). Therefore, when the button model image BMG changes, it can be confirmed by simply checking the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the object to be copied.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), when the button model image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of multiple modes, but in reality, the peripheral decoration part "handle part 5012" does not change to one of multiple modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the periphery of the button model image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to match the mode of the peripheral decoration part "handle part 5012", and can be depicted in a variety of ways that are preferable for livening up the performance. Note that the peripheral decoration part "handle part 5012" may be provided as something that cannot be changed into multiple modes in the first place, such as being non-luminous.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), there are cases where the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG changes (Figure 144(d)), but in reality, it is desirable to have the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change when the peripheral decoration part, the "handle part 5012", is in one aspect.

The "pattern portion 5012" of the peripheral decoration may have different appearances when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". However, while the peripheral decoration image SSG at least changes in shape when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", it is preferable that the "pattern portion 5012" of the peripheral decoration only changes in appearance (such as a change in the light emission mode) without changing the shape. It can be said that it is preferable to provide the peripheral decoration as something that cannot change its shape in the first place, in order to highlight the virtual presentation function of the peripheral decoration image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as imitation images, in addition to a button imitation image BMG simulating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), a pattern imitation image TMG simulating the handle portion 5012 is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made to differ depending on which of these imitation images is displayed. In other words, in this case, the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b that decorate the periphery of the button imitation image BMG cannot be displayed when a imitation image other than the button imitation image BMG is displayed, so that the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b themselves can be expected to have the "function of suggesting which operation means is the object of operation."

When the form of the border decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the model image (button model image BMG, pattern model image TMG), it is preferable to make the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the border decoration image different as well. The operation reception effect in which the button model image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern model image TMG is displayed may be effects that occur at the same timing within the same change pattern (one of them is selected according to the performance judgment), or may be effects that occur in different change patterns or at different timing. The border decoration image SSG that appears when the button model image BMG is displayed may not be an image of the border decoration part, and the border decoration image SSG that appears when the pattern model image TMG is displayed may be an image of the border decoration part. However, it is preferable that the set time of the operation reception effect (validity period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and other areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG are decorated with a predetermined decoration (here, a "striped pattern") that spans these areas, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed overlapping the predetermined decoration. In other words, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is displayed by being superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration has been applied. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but is visible even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that interest in the game can be maintained in an optimal manner throughout the entire period from when the gauge image GG goes from full to empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Also, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (serve as) the predetermined decoration, in which case the display area of the predetermined decoration will decrease as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, encouraging players who dislike the reduction in the predetermined decoration to perform an operation early.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG does not model the peripheral decoration (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided on the periphery of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is the object of operation, but is an image that represents an object that does not have substance as a gaming machine part. Therefore, it is possible to realize decorativeness and presentation with a higher degree of freedom that is not bound by the substance of a gaming machine part.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. In other words, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG, which represents an insubstantial object, without changing the shape of the button model image BMG, so that it is possible to realize a display with higher presentation and decorativeness by varying the shape of the integrated model image IG while properly indicating which of the multiple operating means is being operated.

The border decoration image SSG may be designed so that when the button-like image BMG is in one state, the shape does not necessarily change, but only the color is changed. However, the reason that shape change is permitted is because the border decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object, and the border decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button-like image BMG, and in this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the border decoration image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Fig. 144(a)-(d), the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed to be larger. As will be described later, methods of changing the shape can include increasing the number of objects represented as images (such as the number of decorations), displaying them in one of a number of different shapes with different contour shapes (such as a rectangular parallelepiped or a sphere), or expanding the range of objects displayed among the objects represented as images. As will be described later, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG can be changed in stages from a low expectation shape to a high expectation shape as a premonition effect, and then operation acceptance in the operation acceptance effect can be allowed while the final changed shape is maintained.

In addition, in the integrated image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), no matter what form the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image SSG is not changed (at least the shape is not changed) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the indication function of how much time is remaining, and while maintaining this important function, it becomes possible to also indicate the degree of expectation by changing the shape of other areas different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned effects is to be achieved, the border decoration image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an insubstantial object, but may be displayed as an image that imitates a border decoration provided on the periphery of the operation receiving portion.

The integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted" such as a specific operation acceptance presentation, thereby encouraging the player to perform an operation.

However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, although the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as an integrated image, only one side of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed dynamically, while the other side is displayed as if it is stationary. With this configuration, one side contributes to improving the presentation when an important button presentation occurs through dynamic expression, while the other side is displayed as if it is stationary, so that it does not move when the integrated model image IG is viewed as a whole, ensuring good visibility.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d), the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict the state in which the operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is assigned is displaced within its movable range, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decoration image SSG), a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that its display area within the display target area decreases over time.

In this way, by including the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG on the side of the integrated mock-up image IG that has the best visibility (the side that is not dynamically displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG), it is possible to improve the presentation quality when an important operation acceptance presentation occurs by dynamically displaying the button mock-up image BMG, while also making it easy to recognize how much time is left in which the presentation acceptance is permitted.

The side of the integrated model image IG that has good visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG that is not dynamically displayed) includes not only the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but also an area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. In other words, in this case, when performing a presentation that suggests the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated model image IG that has good visibility, the presentation is performed in an area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, thereby making it possible to avoid adverse effects on the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The area of the border decoration image SSG that is different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the border decoration image SSG itself, and the button pattern image BMG are provided with multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and one of these modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination). However, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may also be provided with multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and one of these modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination).

However, as shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d), when the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, and the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, there is a concern that it will be difficult to grasp whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is merely a decoration or pattern within the peripheral decoration image SSG, or whether it has a function to indicate the remaining time. There is also a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease because it will be difficult to grasp how far the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to its being mixed with the decoration and pattern applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511), at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, can be displayed in the display target area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display position of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed so as to displace in the same manner.

According to this configuration, the valid period ends when the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position, so even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely decorative or indicates the remaining time, it is possible to recognize the remaining time by checking the position of the "specific image." In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image," it can be said that it is not necessarily necessary to display the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Figure 145 shows an example of the display of the integrated model image IG from the start of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted to the end of the period.

As shown in FIG. 145, if the timing A0 arrives at which a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted (a specified operation acceptance presentation) begins within a specified variation pattern, the presentation display device 1600 displays an integrated model image IG and operation promotion images such as "Press!" and "Downward arrow."

In this example, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image IGa), but it may be displayed in any of the forms shown in FIG. 144(b)-(d) based on the results of the performance determination. Regardless of which form the integrated model image IG is displayed in, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period and the display of a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" will change in the form described below over time.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), first, in the integrated image IG at timing A0 (start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in this full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 145(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. With this configuration, simply by checking whether "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether a specific time has already passed since operation acceptance was permitted (a situation in which the remaining crotch is decreasing).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is first displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a manner that "the display area increases by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time" from timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period) until a predetermined time (the time required for the entire specific image to finish appearing) has elapsed.

For example, in the integrated image IG at time A1, a short time after time A0 (the start of the valid period), as shown in FIG. 145(b), a "specific image TG" that is "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has appeared to the point where about half of the image is visible, indicating that the display area is increasing with the passage of time.

As shown in Figures 145(c) and (d), in the integrated image IG at timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has passed, the "specific image TG" as "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has already appeared in its entirety and is displaced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG without increasing the display area.

That is, as described above, the "specific image TG" is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that displaces when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and is displayed so that its display position displaces in accordance with (following) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The "specific image TG" in this embodiment is an image with a star-shaped mark in a white square space, which is displayed at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and may be displayed in a manner in which the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually fades from the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG over a predetermined length. Or, it may be displayed as an effect image that appears at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which indicates that there is no time left when its display area reaches a minimum value (here, "0"), so even when there is no time left (when the valid period ends), at least a part of it (or it could be all of it) will not be hidden and will remain displayed.

As shown in FIG. 145(e), in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, in the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and the display area of the "specific image TG" remains at about half. Then, if no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is made invisible.

However, as mentioned above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, in the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, it is most desirable to display the "specific image TG" so that its entire display area remains, and such a configuration may be adopted.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" when the valid period ends. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced in accordance with (continuously with) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so that when viewed from the player's side, it becomes unclear which part of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In other words, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period ends, and most (more than half, or all) of its display area remains, from the player's perspective it also appears to be part of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG, whose display area is set to the minimum (hidden in this case) when the valid period ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (prescribed image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, and therefore it is possible to make it appear as if more time remains than it actually is, making it possible to maintain interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being carried out.

On the other hand, since the effective period of the operation reception presentation ends with at least a portion of the "specific image TG" remaining, even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area thereof is reduced, thereby making it less likely that a sense of discomfort will arise due to a discrepancy between the timing at which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden and the timing at which the effective period ends. In other words, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to act as a buffer that can absorb such a time discrepancy.

In the example shown in FIG. 145, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" may be displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

This configuration makes it possible to make a "specific image that is different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" appear as if it were part of the gauge image GG, so that it appears as if the valid period is set to a longer period than it appears, which is expected to increase interest in the game when the valid period occurs.

Figure 146 shows another example of the display of the integrated model image IG from the start to the end of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted.

Now, assuming that within a specified variation pattern, timing A0 arrives at which a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted (specified operation acceptance presentation) begins, even in the example shown in FIG. 146, the presentation display device 1600 displays an integrated model image IG and operation promotion images such as "Press!" and "Downward arrow."

In this example, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image IGa), but it may be displayed in any of the forms shown in FIG. 144(b)-(d) based on the results of the performance determination. Regardless of which form the integrated model image IG is displayed in, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period and the display of "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" will change in the form shown in FIG. 146(a)-(d) over time.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 146(a), in the integrated image IG at time A0 (start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed in the entire display target area, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed separately. At time A0 (start timing of the valid period), the "specific image TG" may be in a state where only a portion of it is displayed, but here it is displayed in its entirety. With this configuration, it is possible to make the "specific image TG" appear to function as part of the "gauge image GG", making it possible to give the impression that more time remains than appears.

The "specific image TG" in this example is an image that represents an "eraser" and is displayed with a size that does not fit within the area surrounded by the partition image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) and extends into other areas (such as the area of the border decoration image SSG whose appearance may change depending on the degree of expectation). This configuration makes it possible to make the "specific image TG" more noticeable than the "gauge image GG", and is expected to prevent situations from occurring in which it is not possible to recognize how much time is remaining.

In this example, when time passes from timing A0 to timings A2 and A3, and the "specific image TG" is displaced, the part through which the "specific image TG" has passed changes to a "white area" as if it had been erased with an eraser, as shown in Fig. 146 (b) and (c). With this configuration, when the display area of the "gauge image GG" that was expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and glossy expressions) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the displacement of the "specific image TG", the reduced area is expressed in only one color, so that the contrast with the "specific image TG" as the boundary stands out, making it easier for the player to recognize that the depiction suggests how much time is left. It is preferable that the color that appears in the reduced area is a color not used in the "gauge image GG".

Even in the example shown in FIG. 146, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which indicates that there is no time left by its display area reaching a minimum value (here, "0"), so even when there is no time left (when the valid period ends), at least a part of it (or it could be all of it) will not be hidden and will remain displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146(d), at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, in the integrated model image IG, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and the display area of the "specific image TG" is entirely left. Then, if no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is made invisible.

However, even in this example, in the integrated image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the validity period, a part of the display area of the "specific image TG" may be hidden and a part may be left remaining.

Even in this example, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced in accordance with (continuously with) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so that when viewed from the player's side, it becomes unclear to what extent of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In other words, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period ends, and most (more than half, or all) of its display area remains, from the player's perspective it also appears to be part of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG, whose display area is set to the minimum (hidden in this case) when the valid period ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (prescribed image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, and therefore it is possible to make it appear as if more time remains than it actually is, making it possible to maintain interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being carried out.

On the other hand, when the effective period of the operation reception presentation ends, at least a portion of the "specific image TG" remains and ends. Therefore, even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area thereof is reduced, which makes it less likely that a sense of discomfort will arise due to a discrepancy between the timing at which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden and the timing at which the effective period ends. In other words, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to act as a buffer that can absorb such a time discrepancy.

In the example shown in FIG. 146, the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are different from those in the example shown in FIG. 145, but the same images may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 145, the same images may be used as in the example shown in FIG. 146. Also, the effective period during which the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 145 and the effective period during which the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 146 may occur under different conditions. In this case, it is desirable to make the shape of the integrated model image IG itself, or at least the display target area of the gauge image GG, different from each other in the effective period during which the mode shown in FIG. 145 appears and the effective period during which the mode shown in FIG. 146 appears.

As mentioned above, the integrated model image IG can be dynamically displayed during the valid period of a specified operation reception presentation, as shown in Figs. 145(a)-(e) and 146(a)-(d), thereby encouraging the player to operate. However, as also mentioned above, while the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict the state in which the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range, the border decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. In addition, in the border decoration image SSG, which is not dynamically displayed, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and the specific image TG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are changed in the display target area, so that even with the dynamically displayed integrated model image IG, it is possible to easily recognize how much time is left until the valid period ends.

The "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" may be displayed as a single image data, or may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configuration shown in Figures 145 and 146, the "specific image TG" is displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" which displaces when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is reduced within the display target area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", and is displayed so that its display position displaces in accordance with the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, it becomes possible to make it unclear to what extent of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 145 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is at its maximum value, and during the period from when operation acceptance is permitted until a predetermined time has elapsed (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is increased to compensate for the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". With this configuration, during the initial period from when the valid period begins until the predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to have the impression that the remaining time indicated by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is not decreasing, which makes it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

In the examples shown in Figures 145 and 146, the integrated model image IG may be displayed in one of a number of modes (Figures 144 (a) to (e)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination), but regardless of which mode it is displayed in, it is desirable that the display shapes of the "gauge image (prescribed image) GG" and "specific image TG" be the same. The modes (patterns, colors, etc.) of the "gauge image (prescribed image) GG" and "specific image TG" may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but in order to favorably maintain the function of indicating the remaining time, it is desirable that even if the mode of one of the "gauge image (prescribed image) GG" and "specific image TG" changes, the mode of the other does not change. For example, if the mark on the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 145 is a double circle rather than a star, which indicates a high level of expectation, the expectation level (double circle) will gradually become visible as the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" decreases, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In the examples shown in Figs. 145 and 146, the "specific image TG" is not hidden at least in part (or may be entirely) and is maintained in a displayed state even when the valid period ends without the player performing any operation. However, it is desirable that the operation reception effect shown in Figs. 145 and 146 functions as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect" in which, when timing A4 arrives without the player performing any operation, an operation is internally received and a post-operation display or post-operation sound output (including, for example, only sound output in response to the operation reception) is performed. In this case, timing A4 may be the timing at which the valid period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after that timing. In any case, it is desirable to set timing A4 as a timing after the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is hidden (the timing at which it is hidden or a timing after that), and arrives with at least a part of the "specific image TG" being displayed.

With this configuration, even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after operation acceptance is no longer permitted, the "specific image TG" will be displayed even immediately before the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed, making it appear as if the player performed the operation in time and the associated operation acceptance occurred, resulting in the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starting. The "specific image TG" may also be displayed at the time the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starts (for example, it may be gradually made invisible by fading out after the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starts).

If the valid period during which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a second valid period during which automatic reception is not performed when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Even during the second valid period, the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, and the border decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, during the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG" is not displayed. Except for the fact that the "specific image TG" is not displayed, the integrated model image IG displayed during the first valid period and the integrated model image IG displayed during the second valid period can be displayed as the same image.

In other words, in the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is met, unlike the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is met, if the set time elapses without any operation by the player, the automatic reception does not function and the second valid period ends without generating a post-operation display or post-operation sound output (or both). Therefore, if the "specific image TG" remains displayed at the time when reception of operations by the player is no longer permitted, it may give the wrong impression that the valid period has ended even though the remaining time has not been consumed, which may ultimately reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable to prevent the "specific image TG" from being displayed for the entire period from start to finish.

In this case, it is desirable to make the length of the set time (the time from when operation acceptance is permitted to when it is terminated) different between the first valid period and the second valid period. It is also desirable to make the display change (post-operation display) and sound output (post-operation sound output) that occurs when an operation is accepted different from each other.

In addition, in addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is met, a third valid period in which automatic acceptance is performed may be generated (e.g., generated when the third condition is met), and in addition to the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is met, a fourth valid period in which automatic acceptance is not performed may be generated (e.g., generated when the fourth condition is met). In short, it is sufficient that the valid periods in which automatic acceptance is performed (valid periods each having different conditions for generation) include at least the first valid period in which display and sound processing is performed in the manner described above, and the valid periods in which automatic acceptance is not performed (valid periods each having different conditions for generation) include at least the second valid period in which display and sound processing is performed in the manner described above.

In addition, the "first effective period" here means
・It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound is output only when the device is set to a special performance state (automatic reception mode), regardless of whether or not the device is operated during the valid period.
- It means that a post-operation display or post-operation sound is output regardless of the presentation state, regardless of whether or not an operation is performed during the valid period. In the first place, it is not necessary to prepare a "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" or "multiple presentation states" as the presentation state. In addition, when a "second valid period" occurs while the "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" is set, either one may be adopted as to whether or not automatic reception is enabled (for example, it may be possible that "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the presentation state"), and it is not related to the configuration related to the technical features described here.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a specific non-linear shape. More specifically, when the valid period of the operation reception performance occurs, an integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed, and in a portion of the non-linear area of the area forming the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced as time passes. With this configuration, the depiction of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reducing its display area as time passes becomes decorative, and this in itself makes it possible to maintain interest in the game as the remaining time of the valid period is consumed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a specific pattern is applied to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and a gauge image (predetermined image) GG having a specific transmittance is displayed superimposed thereon, or a specific pattern is applied to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself, which makes it possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself, which reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG over time. Moreover, in this embodiment, the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which makes it possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself, which reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG over time.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when the display target area of the non-linear specific shape shown in FIG. 145 or FIG. 146 is set as the "first display target area", an operation reception effect (valid period) in which a second display target area is displayed that has a different shape (non-similar shape) from the non-linear specific shape and has a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce the display area to when it ends can be generated under different conditions. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed is at least terminated when the first set time has elapsed without the player performing an operation, and terminated when the second set time has elapsed without the player performing an operation, whereas the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed may end when the first set time has elapsed without the player performing an operation, but is not terminated when the second set time has elapsed without the player performing an operation.

In this regard, if the operation target (operation receiving part) to which the operation opportunity is given is different between the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the set time is the same when the operation targets are different, and coupled with the fact that the operation targets are different, it is possible to encourage the enjoyment of the operation reception performance with a more fresh feeling. In this case, in the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, a model image modeling a different operation receiving part is displayed in a form integrated with the peripheral decoration image. The peripheral decoration image may also be displayed as an image depicting a different decoration between the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, but in either case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part of it. The gauge images (predetermined images) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes.

In order to obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable to make the rate at which the "appearance suggesting a jackpot" appears as a post-operation display or post-operation sound output different between the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a display target area of a "non-linear specific shape" and the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a display target area of a "different shape (non-similar shape)" even if the same time (first set time) is set for both. The rate may be "0%" or "100%".

It is desirable that when the same set time (first set time) is set in the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, the same opportunity for operation reception regarding post-operation display and post-operation sound output is provided. It is desirable that when the set time is different, the opportunity for operation reception regarding different post-operation display and post-operation sound output is provided.

In the examples shown in Figures 145 and 146, operation-related displays such as "Press!" or "Down arrow" are displayed superimposed on the integrated model image IG, so that when viewed together with the integrated model image IG, it is more strongly indicated that an operation is required. However, in this case, operation-related displays such as "Press!" or "Down arrow" are not displayed superimposed on the button model image BMG (at any time when it is dynamically displayed) that indicates the object to be operated, and are not displayed superimposed on the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or specific image TG that indicate the remaining time.

In this configuration, important information such as the button model image BMG, gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and specific image TG is avoided from the integrated model image IG, and operation-related displays such as "Press!" or "Down arrow" are displayed superimposed on the integrated model image IG, making it possible to properly convey important information to the player while strongly urging him or her to perform an operation. Needless to say, this is because the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment provides multiple (types) of valid periods during which operation acceptance is permitted, with different post-operation displays and post-operation sounds that are output when an operation is accepted within the valid periods. The conditions for generating these valid periods are different, and when any of the conditions is met, the corresponding type of valid period is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the multiple types of valid periods include at least one valid period during which the "specific image TG" is displayed (first valid period), and one valid period during which the "specific image TG" is not displayed (second valid period). In the following example, these "first valid period" and "second valid period" are described as being the same as the above-mentioned "first valid period" in which automatic reception is performed and the above-mentioned "second valid period" in which automatic reception is not performed, respectively, but they may also be applied as valid periods different from these.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when performing a premonition effect (specific display) that suggests that operation acceptance is permitted, the premonition effect (specific display) may be executed in a manner that straddles the timing before and after the occurrence of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted. With such a premonition effect (specific display), the valid period occurs while a flashy effect is being performed, which can increase interest in playing the game when the valid period occurs.

However, when the premonition effect (specific display) is executed in this manner, the premonition effect (specific display) is displayed with priority over the integrated model image IG, so even if the integrated model image IG is displayed (internal layer display) when the valid period begins, the part that overlaps with the premonition effect (specific display) will not appear on the screen (will not be made visible). Or, even if a specified transparency is set for the premonition effect (specific display), the part of the integrated model image IG that overlaps with the premonition effect (specific display) will be made difficult to see. In any case, the display area of the gauge image (specified image) GG will begin to decrease under such circumstances where visibility is poor.

In this case, by the time the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden or the overlapping portion with the premonition effect (specific display) disappears and the visibility of the entire integrated model image IG (or the entire display target area of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG) improves, the display area of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG has already been reduced, which may give the player the impression that the effective period (set time) has effectively been shortened.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" is expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, among the multiple types of valid periods, in the "second valid period in which the premonition effect (specific display) is not executed, or the premonition effect (specific display) is executed but the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time the premonition effect (specific display) is ended", the "specific image TG" is not displayed at all from the occurrence to the end of the second valid period. On the other hand, among the multiple (types) valid periods, in the "first valid period in which the premonition effect (specific display) is executed during the execution and the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased by the time the entire integrated model image IG becomes visible (or easily visible)", the "specific image TG" is displayed within the first valid period.

According to this configuration, during the first effective period when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden, the "specific image TG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so that when the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible, it is possible to make it appear as if the display area of the gauge image GG has not been reduced significantly, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In contrast, if the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced when the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden, or if a "specific image TG" is displayed during the second valid period in which the premonition effect (specific display) is not performed, for example, in the case of the display mode of FIG. 145, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the valid period occurs, and when the "specific image TG" gradually appears over time after the valid period occurs, it may be possible to tell that this does not function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease due to the exaggerated representation of the remaining time, so it is desirable to not display the "specific image TG" during such a second valid period in order to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game.

...

In the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG may be replaced with the manner shown in FIG. 146.

Figure 147 shows an example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs out of the first and second valid periods.

Figure 147 (a) shows a performance situation in which, in a normal game state, with the number of reserved symbols being 0, the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is being changed in a specific performance pattern (changing pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 147 (b) shows a performance situation in which a premonition performance (specific display TH) is started on the performance display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 147 (a) is being performed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 147(b), it can be seen that at least in the performance display device 1600, the integrated model image IG has not yet appeared. However, it is also possible to have the integrated model image IG displayed internally from the start of the premonition performance (specific display TH), and have the premonition performance (specific display TH) displayed with priority, so that the entire integrated model image IG cannot be seen (or is made difficult to see due to a predetermined transmittance). In other words, in this case, operation acceptance is permitted (the valid period begins) from the start of the premonition performance (specific display).

Figure 147 (c) shows a situation in which the premonition effect (specific display TH) shown in Figure 147 (b) progresses and the area in which the premonition effect (specific display TH) is displayed shrinks, resulting in the appearance of a part of the integrated model image IG that does not overlap with the premonition effect (specific display), and this part is displayed with good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is displayed (displayed in layer processing) at least internally when the "specific timing (the timing when the effective period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 147(b) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 147(b)) and the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 147(c) appears. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 147(c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) because they overlap with the premonition effect (specific display TH) that is displayed with priority, but the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the specific image TG is made to overlap in its entirety with the premonition effect (specific display TH).

With this configuration, the premonition effect (specific display TH) is performed across the timing (specific timing) of the occurrence of the valid period, and for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the valid period, the premonition effect (specific display TH) makes at least a part of the integrated model image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, the entirety of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, so that the excitement of knowing what the expectation (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (the aspect of the button model image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG are is maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the valid period.

In the example shown in FIG. 147(c), the button-like image that imitates the object of operation is in a state where it is difficult to see, but the border decoration image that decorates the border is in a state where it is possible to recognize that it is not a "special border decoration image SSGb" but a "normal border decoration image SSGa". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 147(c), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to see, it is difficult to distinguish whether the "specific image TG" is a type that is displayed at the time the valid period starts (see FIG. 146), or a type that is not displayed at the time the valid period starts and gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 145). In other words, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 146, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so when the type shown in FIG. 146 is adopted, it can be said that executing the premonition performance in the above-mentioned manner is particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Figure 147 (d) shows a situation where the premonition effect (specific display TH) shown in Figure 147 (b) has progressed further, resulting in no overlapping portion with the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) (here, the premonition effect has been hidden).

As shown in FIG. 147(d), when the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes easily visible, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already been reduced, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already begun (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). In other words, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", it is possible to give the impression that more display area remains than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and that the display area has not been reduced that much. This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already been reduced when the premonition effect (specific display TH) ends.

Figure 147 (e) shows an example of an image that appears on the performance display device 1600 when the valid period ends (or immediately before the valid period ends) when no operation is accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches its minimum value (here, "0").

As shown in FIG. 147(e), at least a portion (or all) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even when the valid period ends. In this regard, during the first valid period, as described above, even if the player does not perform any operation during that period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound are output as when the operation is performed (see FIG. 147(f)).

According to this configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the "specific image TG" is displayed even just before the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed, so that it can be made to look as if the player performed the operation in time and the associated operation reception occurred, and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output was started. In particular, when the premonition effect (pre-display) is performed in this manner, by the time the entire picture of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is clearly visible, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already begun. In other words, in this case, it is considered that there is a high possibility that a situation will occur in which the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, so it can be said that it is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in interest in the game to perform the post-operation display or post-operation sound output with the "specific image TG" displayed even if the player does not perform an operation during the valid period.

The performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 147 may be applied to either the case where a "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, or the case where a "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 146.

In the example shown in FIG. 147, the premonition effect (specific display TH) and the integrated model image IG are displayed on separate layers, and the premonition effect (specific display TH) is displayed with priority, thereby realizing the performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 147. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 147 may be stored as a single piece of video data, and this may be realized by playing back the video data. This method can also be applied to each of the examples described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 147, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image IGa). However, as mentioned above, the integrated model image IG may be displayed in one of a number of forms (forms shown in FIG. 144(a)-(d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination). If such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to execute the premonition presentation in the form shown in FIG. 148-FIG. 150 in order to increase interest in the game.

Figures 148 to 150 are diagrams showing modified examples of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs out of the first and second valid periods described above.

Figure 148 (a) shows the performance status in which, in normal game mode, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in the first performance pattern (changing pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 148 (b) shows a performance situation in which the first premonition performance (first specific display TH1) is started on the performance display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 148 (a) is being performed.

This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and functions as an effect that suggests that an operation-related effect will occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first premonition effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, either the "image shown in FIG. 149(c)" or the "image shown in FIG. 150(j)" is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), thereby suggesting whether the "normal button model image BMGa" or the "special button model image BMGb" is more likely to appear as the button model image BMG.

Here, if the "image shown in FIG. 149(c)" is displayed, it is suggested that there is a high probability (here, "100%) that the "normal button model image BMGa" will be displayed as the button model image BMG.

In this example, the "image shown in FIG. 149(c)" is displayed as an image IGa' in which the "integrated model image IGa" is expressed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent) from the normal state (the manner shown in FIG. 144(a)). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the "image shown in FIG. 149(c)" may display the "integrated model image IGa" in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a) as it is, or the "normal button model image BMGa" may be displayed as a standalone image without being integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa". When the "normal button model image BMGa" is displayed as a standalone image, it may be displayed in the normal state (the manner shown in FIG. 144(a)), or it may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent) from the normal state (the manner shown in FIG. 144(a)).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 149(c), either the "normal button imitation image BMGa" itself shown in FIG. 144(a) or at least an image BMGa' with an outline similar to (imitated from) the "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed. This makes it possible to suggest the occurrence of an effective period during which the "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed as an "integrated imitation image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa", or an effective period during which it is displayed as an "integrated imitation image IGc (FIG. 144(a))" integrated with the "special border decoration image SSGb".

After the image IGa' (image BMGa') shown in FIG. 149(c) is displayed, a presentation is executed that suggests (evokes) that the image IGa' (image BMGa') may be displayed as an "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))" rather than an "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))."

In the example shown in FIG. 149(d), the effect is depicted as gradually bringing the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" closer to the "image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)." As a result of this effect, when the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is added to and integrated with the "image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)," an effective period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))" appears. In contrast, when the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is not added to and integrated with the "image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)," a valid period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGa (Figure 144 (a))" appears.

Figure 149 (e) shows a performance situation in which the second premonition performance (second specific display TH2) is started on the performance display device 1600 after the performance shown in Figure 149 (d) is performed.

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and is executed as an effect suggesting that operation acceptance is permitted. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) in this example is started while the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is gradually approaching the "image IGa' representing the integrated imitation image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button imitation image BMGa)". At the time of the start, it is unclear whether the "image IGa' representing the integrated imitation image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button imitation image BMGa)" and the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" have been integrated.

When the presentation shown in FIG. 149(e) progresses, either the image shown in FIG. 149(f) or the image shown in FIG. 149(h) will be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination).

The situation and image content shown in Figures 149(f) and 149(h) are basically the same as the "situation and image content shown in Figure 147(c)" described above, and as a result of the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) shown in Figure 149(e) progressing and the area in which the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed shrinking, a part of the integrated model image IG that does not overlap with the premonition effect (specific display) appears, indicating a situation and image content in which this part is displayed with good visibility.

That is, the integrated model image IG is displayed at least internally (displayed in layer processing) when the "specific timing (the timing when the effective period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 149(e) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 149(e)) and the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 149(f) or FIG. 149(h) appears. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 149(f) or FIG. 149(h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) because they overlap with the second premonition effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed, but the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed) and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the specific image TG is made to overlap in its entirety with the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2).

With this configuration, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is performed across the timing (specific timing) of the occurrence of the valid period, and for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the valid period, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) makes at least a part of the integrated imitation image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, the entirety of the integrated imitation image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, so that the excitement of knowing what the expectation level (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (the aspect of the button imitation image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated imitation image IG are is maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the valid period.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 149(f) appears, it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is not the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" but the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and therefore it is possible to recognize that the "image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)" has failed to link with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" as a result of the effects shown in FIG. 149(d) and (e). In other words, in this case, when the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the entire picture of the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 144(a)) appears as shown in FIG. 149(g). The subsequent performance progress is as described above with reference to FIG. 147(d) to (f), and therefore will be omitted.

In contrast, when the situation shown in Fig. 149(h) appears, it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mosaic image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", and therefore it is possible to recognize that the "image IGa' representing the integrated mosaic image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button mosaic image BMGa)" has successfully linked with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" as a result of the performance shown in Fig. 149(d). In other words, in this case, when the second precursor performance (second specific display TH2) is made non-display, the entirety of the integrated mosaic image IGc (see Fig. 144(c)) appears, as shown in Fig. 149(i). The subsequent progression of the presentation is simply a replacement of the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 144(a)) with the integrated model image IGc (see FIG. 144(c)), as described above with reference to FIGS. 147(d)-(f), and so will not be detailed here.

On the other hand, if the "image shown in FIG. 150(j)" is displayed, it is suggested that there is a high probability (here, "100%) that the "special button model image BMGb" will be displayed as the button model image BMG.

In this example, the "image shown in FIG. 150(j)" is displayed as an image IGb' in which the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent) from the normal manner (the manner shown in FIG. 144(b)). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the "image shown in FIG. 150(j)" may display the "integrated model image IGb" in the manner shown in FIG. 144(b), or the "special button model image BMGb" may be displayed as a standalone image without being integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa". When the "special button model image BMGb" is displayed as a standalone image, it may be displayed in the normal manner (the manner shown in FIG. 144(b)), or it may be displayed as an image displayed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent) from the normal manner (the manner shown in FIG. 144(b)).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 150(j), either the "special button mockup image BMGb" itself shown in FIG. 144(b) or at least an image BMGb' with an outline similar to (mocked) the "special button mockup image BMGb" will be displayed. This makes it possible to suggest the occurrence of an effective period during which the "special button mockup image BMGb" will be displayed as an "integrated mockup image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa", or an effective period during which the "integrated mockup image IGd (FIG. 144(d))" integrated with the "special border decoration image SSGb".

After the image IGb' (image BMGb') shown in FIG. 150(j) is displayed, a presentation is executed that suggests (evokes) that the image IGb' (image BMGb') may be displayed as an "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 144(d))" rather than an "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))."

In the example shown in FIG. 149(k), the effect is depicted as gradually bringing the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" closer to the "image IGb' representing the integrated mosaic image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button mosaic image BMGb)." As a result of this effect, when the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is added to and integrated with the "image IGb' representing the integrated mosaic image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button mosaic image BMGb)," an effective period occurs during which the "integrated mosaic image IGd (FIG. 144(d))" appears. In contrast, when the "image IGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is not added to and integrated with the "image IGb' representing the integrated model image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button model image BMGb)," a valid period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGb (Figure 144 (b))" appears.

Figure 150 (l) shows a performance situation in which a second premonition performance (second specific display TH2) is started by the performance display device 1600 after the performance shown in Figure 150 (k) is performed. Instead of the second premonition performance (second specific display TH2), it may be performed as a different third premonition performance (third specific display).

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and is executed as an effect suggesting that operation acceptance is permitted. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) in this example is started while the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is gradually approaching the "image IGb' representing the integrated imitation image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button imitation image BMGb)." At the time of the start, it is unclear whether the "image IGb' representing the integrated imitation image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button imitation image BMGb)" and the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" have been integrated.

When the presentation shown in FIG. 150(l) progresses, either the "image shown in FIG. 150(m)" or the "image shown in FIG. 150(o)" will be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination).

The situation and image content shown in Figure 150 (m) and Figure 150 (o) are basically the same as the "situation and image content shown in Figure 147 (c)" described above, and as a result of the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) shown in Figure 150 (l) progressing and the area in which the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed shrinking, a part of the integrated model image IG that does not overlap with the premonition effect (specific display) appears, indicating a situation and image content in which the part is displayed with good visibility.

That is, the integrated model image IG is displayed (displayed in layer processing) at least internally when the "specific timing (the timing when the effective period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 150(l) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 150(l)) and the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 150(m) or FIG. 150(o) appears. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 150(m) or FIG. 150(o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) because they overlap with the second premonition effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed, but the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed) and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the specific image TG is made to overlap in its entirety with the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2).

According to this configuration, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is performed across the timing (specific timing) of the occurrence of the valid period, and for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the valid period, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) makes at least a part of the integrated imitation image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, the entire picture of the integrated imitation image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, so that the excitement of knowing what the expectation level (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (the aspect of the button imitation image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated imitation image IG are is maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the valid period.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 150(m) appears, it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mosaic image IG is not the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" but the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and therefore it is possible to recognize that the "image IGb' representing the integrated mosaic image IGb (or the image BMGb' representing the special button mosaic image BMGb)" has failed to link with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" as a result of the effects shown in FIG. 150(k) and (l). In other words, in this case, when the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the entire integrated mosaic image IGb (see FIG. 144(b)) appears as shown in FIG. 150(n). The subsequent progression of the presentation is simply a replacement of the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 144(a)) with the integrated model image IGb (see FIG. 144(b)), as described above with reference to FIGS. 147(d)-(f), and will not be detailed here.

In contrast, when the situation shown in Fig. 150(o) appears, it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mosaic image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", and therefore it is possible to recognize that the "image IGb' representing the integrated mosaic image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button mosaic image BMGb)" has successfully linked with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" as a result of the performance shown in Fig. 150(k). In other words, in this case, when the second precursor performance (second specific display TH2) is made non-display, the entirety of the integrated mosaic image IGd (see Fig. 144(d)) appears, as shown in Fig. 150(p). The subsequent progression of the presentation is simply a replacement of the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 144(a)) with the integrated model image IGd (see FIG. 144(d)), as described above with reference to FIGS. 147(d)-(f), and so will not be detailed here.

In the example shown in Figures 148 to 150, when Figure 149(c) appears, the probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears as the button image BMG is set to "0%", but it is also possible to set a small probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears as the button image BMG. In other words, in this case, after the performance shown in Figure 149(e) is performed, in addition to Figure 149(f)→(g), (h)→(i), there is also a possibility that the performance will progress in the form of Figure 150(m)→(n), (o)→(p).

According to this configuration, when Fig. 149(f), (h) or Fig. 150(m), (o) appears, it is possible to recognize in which form the border decoration image SSG is displayed, but it is not possible to recognize in which form the button-like image BMG is displayed. In other words, in this case, the expectation level is gradually suggested according to the situation regarding the progress of the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2), and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In particular, if the button-like image BMG can suggest one of multiple operation means with different operation objects depending on its display mode, a state occurs in which it is not possible to recognize which operation object is present, even though the valid period has started and the expectation level related to the operation is also suggested, and this significantly increases the attention to the effect.

However, even in situations where Figures 149(f) and (h) or 150(m) and (o) appear, it is desirable to have the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the object of operation by the player emit light in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the button replica image BMG (e.g., emit light from the occurrence of the valid period). With this configuration, players with a strong desire to operate who tend to look directly at the operation means (operation receiving portion) will be able to quickly recognize the "type displayed as the button replica image BMG", thereby encouraging the player to operate.

In the examples shown in Figures 148 to 150, the first premonition effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in Figure 148(a) may be transitioned to the situation shown in Figure 149(c) or Figure 150(j).

In the examples shown in Figs. 148 to 150, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in Fig. 149(d) or Fig. 150(k) may be transitioned to the situation shown in Fig. 149(g), (i) or Fig. 150(n), (p). That is, in this case, the effect shown in Fig. 149(d) or Fig. 150(k) functions as the premonition effect. At the time of transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may already have been reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not have been reduced. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of transition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will start to reduce its display area when in the situation shown in Fig. 149(d) or Fig. 150(k).

Furthermore, some of the effects in Figures 148 to 150 may be omitted depending on the form prepared as the integrated model image IG. For example, if the forms shown in Figures 144(b) and (d) are not prepared as the integrated model image IG, it is possible to omit all of them from the series of effects shown in Figure 150. In this case, Figure 149(c) may also be omitted.

In the presentation of Figures 148 to 150, an image BMG' representing a button imitation image BMG (or the button imitation image BMG itself) is displayed (Figures 149 (d) and 150 (k)) before operation acceptance is permitted (before the valid period occurs), but in this situation (before the valid period occurs), the image BMG' representing the button imitation image BMG (or the button imitation image BMG) is not dynamically displayed to depict the state of displacement within the movable range of the operation receiving part. With this configuration, even if the button imitation image BMG or the image BMG' representing it is displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, it is possible to implicitly suggest that the valid period has not yet occurred, and the player can concentrate on the presentation without worrying about the remaining time of the valid period. In addition, since reception of the performance is permitted when the second premonition performance (second specific display TH2) is being performed, the button-like image BMG is dynamically displayed while being invisible or difficult to see due to the second premonition performance (second specific display TH2).

Figures 151 to 155 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

In other words, Figs. 147 to 150 explain an example of the progression of a performance when an effective period (first effective period) occurs in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased when the premonition performance (specific display) is made non-displayable. In contrast, Figs. 151 to 155 explain an example of the progression of a performance when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased when the premonition performance (specific display) is made non-displayable, or an effective period (second effective period) occurs without the premonition performance (specific display) being performed.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, basically, a predetermined premonition effect (premonition display) is performed when a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" during the valid period can be executed, and when such an effect is performed, in order to highlight the distinctive feature, the predetermined premonition effect (premonition display) itself is not performed when the valid period occurs, or even if the predetermined premonition effect (premonition display) is performed, a situation appears in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not yet been reduced and is at its maximum value when the entire display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is well visible.

Here, an example of a "display mode with a characteristic movement of the gauge image GG" is one in which, normally (see, for example, Figures 145 to 150), if no operation is performed within the valid period, the valid period ends when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), whereas a "first display mode in which, even if no operation is performed within the valid period and no post-operation display or post-operation sound is output, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area at the time the valid period ends" can be mentioned. With this configuration, even if there appears to be a lot of time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches the predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player becomes aware of the possibility that the valid period may suddenly end, and therefore it becomes possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension during the valid period.

Also, as a "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG", while normally (see Figures 145 to 150, etc.) the display area of the gauge image GG decreases every unit time during the valid period, it is possible to cite a "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased despite being within the valid period". With this configuration, even when it seems like there is only a short time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player becomes aware of the possibility that the display area of the gauge image GG will no longer be decreased, and a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

In other words, the example described below shows a display example in which a "display mode that provides distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" is executed by using at least one of the "first display mode" and "second display mode."

First, FIG. 151(a) shows the performance status in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in the second performance pattern (changing pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 151 (b) shows a performance situation in which, during the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 151 (a), a valid period occurs during which operation reception to the operating means (operation receiving unit) is permitted, and an integrated model image IG is displayed on the performance display device 1600. As shown in Figure 151 (b), at the point in time when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value and has not yet been reduced.

In addition, when the "display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG" is executed during the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is longer than the time (set time) set for the valid period (first valid period) during which the "display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed. This means that when a display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG is executed during the valid period, it takes time to execute the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, even though the set time until the valid period ends is different between the first valid period during which the "display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed and the second valid period during which the "display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG" is executed, the integrated model image IG itself is displayed in the same or in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated model image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). With this configuration, it is difficult to recognize at first glance that the set time is different between the first effective period in which the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed and the second effective period in which the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" is executed; however, when a situation arises in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time during which this situation of no reduction is added, making it possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it appears.

When the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(b) occurs, a premonition effect may be displayed to suggest the occurrence. However, at the point when the entire integrated model image IG (at least the "display target area of the gauge image GG" included in the integrated model image IG) is displayed without overlapping with the premonition effect, the display area of the gauge image GG is at its maximum value and has not yet decreased.

In other words, as described above, in this example, in a state where acceptance of operations regarding a specified post-operation display or a specified post-operation sound output is permitted (within a valid period), a situation can occur in which the display area of the gauge image (specified image) GG does not decrease, and when the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(c) appears after a specified time has passed since the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(b), the gauge image GG maintains its display area with the display area reduced by an amount corresponding to the time that has passed up to that point (specified time), and a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" begins.

As shown in Fig. 151(c) and (d), such a "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the period. However, even during the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the state in which operation acceptance is permitted is maintained, and when an operation is performed on the operating means to which an operation opportunity has been granted, the valid period is terminated, and accordingly the integrated model image IG is made invisible, and a post-operation display and post-operation sound are output based on the operation acceptance (see Fig. 151(g)).

With this configuration, a "state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the valid period, which suggests that there is ample time remaining until the end of the valid period, compared to a case in which the display area of the gauge image GG continues to reduce at a constant rate.

In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as permitted, which gives the impression that the valid period has been extended, which is expected to increase interest in the game when the valid period is in progress.

In the example shown in Figures 151 (c) and (d), during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced," the decorative pattern SZ that had been displayed up until that point is made invisible or difficult to see, thereby encouraging attention to the "display mode that gives distinctive movement to the gauge image GG."

However, if a state occurs in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the player may mistakenly believe that a so-called "freeze effect" has occurred, in which the image on the display screen suddenly becomes still. In other words, a "freeze effect" is a commonly known display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined period of time and the state cannot be released, which may encourage the player to mistakenly believe that operations are no longer permitted, causing the player to lose motivation to operate and resulting in a decline in interest in the game. In particular, in this example, the decorative pattern SZ is made invisible or difficult to see, which may also encourage the player to mistakenly believe that operations are no longer permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the integrated model image IG itself is not made static, but the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image IG is made static, while the button model image BMG included in the integrated model image IG continues to be dynamically displayed (a display depicting the button model image BMG being displaced within the movable range of the operation receiving portion).

With this configuration, while the dynamic display of the button image BMG continues, the display area of the gauge image GG will not be reduced, which will reduce the possibility of the player mistakingly believing that operations are no longer being accepted (a freeze effect has occurred), and is expected to maintain the player's motivation to operate the machine.

Here, the dynamic display by the button-like image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined action (such as a reciprocating action within the movable range of the operation receiving part). In this regard, during the effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden (first effective period shown in Figs. 147 to 150, etc.), the predetermined action by the button-like image BMG is executed as a display that repeats n times before the set time ends, whereas during the effective period in which the premonition effect (specific display) is not executed or the premonition effect (specific display) is executed but the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when it is hidden (second effective period shown in Figs. 151 to 155, etc.), it is desirable to be able to execute the predetermined action by the button-like image BMG as a display that repeats m (>n) times even during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" of the set time.

According to this configuration, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced continues for a longer time than the first effective period shown in Figs. 147 to 150, etc., so that even if the player is surprised by the occurrence of the state and has difficulty in understanding the situation, there is enough time to operate, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. In addition, if an effective period (one in which a different post-operation display or post-operation sound output is generated) other than the first effective period shown in Figs. 147 to 150, etc. is prepared as the effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time when the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden, it is desirable to make the number of predetermined operations by the button-shaped image BMG greater during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" of the second effective period shown in Figs. 151 to 155, etc., than the longest of the times (set times) set for those effective periods.

As described above, when such a second valid period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well ensured, and its display area is displayed as a predetermined maximum value (Fig. 151(b)). However, at this time, as shown in Fig. 146, if a specific image TG is displayed in a state where it is well visible within the display target area of the gauge image GG, the display area of the gauge image GG may appear to be reduced by the amount of the specific image TG displayed, which may reduce interest in the game. Also, as shown in Fig. 145, if a specific image TG is made to appear in a state where it is well visible in response to the display area of the gauge image GG being reduced from its maximum value, it becomes clear that the specific image TG does not function as part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease due to the exaggeration of the remaining time of the valid period.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second effective period. Therefore, even if the display area of the gauge image GG starts to decrease from the situation shown in FIG. 151(b), the specific image TG will not appear, and when the display area of the gauge image GG is decreased to a predetermined value while the specific image TG is not displayed, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased" occurs for a predetermined time (FIG. 151(c) and (d)).

In this example, when the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without any operation being accepted by the player, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced again. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easier to see. After this, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 151(e)), the time (set time) set for the second effective period is up, the second effective period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden (FIG. 151(f)). Note that here, when the display area of the gauge image GG becomes "0", that is, hidden (FIG. 151(e)), the time (set time) set for the second effective period is up, the second effective period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden (FIG. 151(f)).

In this way, during the second valid period, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (Figure 151 (f)), the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when an operation is accepted during the second valid period will not be executed (automatic acceptance performance will function), and in this respect it also differs from the first valid period. However, instead, during the second valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a period longer than the set time for the first valid period, and as described above, operation acceptance is permitted even during the display period in this stopped state, so it can be said that it is less likely that an incident will occur in which operations are not completed in time to make the gauge image GG reach a predetermined value (minimum value).

In the example shown in Fig. 151, a case was described in which, as a "display mode with a characteristic movement of the gauge image GG", the display area of the gauge image GG is normally (see Figs. 145 to 150, etc.) reduced at a predetermined constant speed during the valid period, whereas a "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the valid period" is applied. However, as described above, as a "display mode with a characteristic movement of the gauge image GG", normally (see Figs. 145 to 150, etc.) when no operation is performed during the valid period, the valid period ends when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), whereas a "first display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach a predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area at the time when the valid period ends, despite no operation being performed during the valid period and no post-operation display or post-operation sound being output" may also be applied. If such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to implement it in either the manner shown in Figures 152 and 153 or the manner shown in Figures 154 and 155 in order to increase interest in the game.

Figures 152 and 153 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situations shown in Fig. 152(a)-(d) are the same as those described above with reference to Fig. 151(a)-(d) and other examples thereof. Therefore, in this example as well, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs midway through the second effective period, and if an operation is accepted during the second effective period, including this period, a post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed (see Fig. 153(g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without any operation being accepted by the player, the gauge image GG will not be displayed to reduce its display area again. In this example, the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues until the time set for the second valid period (set time) has elapsed. Therefore, when the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, as shown in Figures 152(d) and 153(e), the display area of the gauge image GG remains the same (predetermined value) and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easier to see.

In this way, in the second validity period of this example, if the set time has elapsed without any operation being accepted (Figure 153 (e)), the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when an operation is accepted within the second validity period will not be executed (automatic acceptance performance will function). However, instead, as described above, in the second validity period of this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a period longer than the set time for the first validity period, and operation acceptance is permitted even during the display period in the stopped state.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced to a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second valid period ends with the display area of the predetermined value remaining. This may cause a situation where the second valid period ends without the player being able to operate despite the player's intention to do so, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, after the second valid period ends without the player performing an operation, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which an operation opportunity was given during the second valid period, while a specific condition (for example, the pattern has stopped, or it has not been reached 10 seconds before the pattern stops) is not met, and when an operation is received for the operation means, the second valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second valid period ends without the player performing an operation, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period is generated from the time of the end.

With this configuration, even if the second valid period ends as a result of the passage of a predetermined set time without any operation by the player, it is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. 153(g) by the operation by the player. More specifically, when the player operates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 153(e), the second valid period is started from the beginning based on the operation reception (FIG. 153(f)). Then, the above-mentioned contents are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 152(b)-(d), 153(e) and (g). Therefore, even if an operation is received during the second valid period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 153(g)).

When an operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 153(e), the image shown in FIG. 153(f) (the same as the image shown in FIG. 152(b)) appears as the post-operation display. This image is different from the post-operation display executed based on the operation being accepted during the second valid period (such as FIG. 152(b)-(d) and FIG. 153(f)). Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation being accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 153(e) is also different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation being accepted during the second valid period (such as FIG. 152(b)-(d) and FIG. 153(f)).

Figures 154 and 155 are diagrams showing modified examples of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 154(a) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 151(a) and FIG. 152(a) and other examples thereof. However, in this example, when the second effective period occurs and the integrated model image IG is displayed on the performance display device 1600 during the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 154(a), a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs for a predetermined time from the time the integrated model image IG is displayed (FIG. 154(b) and (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value at the time the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is maintained at its maximum value.

The configuration and progress during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" are the same as those described above with reference to Figures 151 to 153 and other examples thereof, including the fact that the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, that operations are permitted to be accepted even during the period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and that post-operation display and post-operation sound are output when the operation is accepted.

Also, in this example, similar to the examples shown in Figures 152 and 153, the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues until the time (set time) set for the second valid period has elapsed. Therefore, when the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, as shown in Figures 154(c) and 155(d), the display area of the gauge image GG remains the same (maximum value) and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easily visible.

In this way, in the second validity period of this example, if the set time has elapsed without any operation being accepted (FIG. 155(d)), the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when an operation is accepted within the second validity period will not be executed (automatic acceptance performance will function). However, instead, as described above, in the second validity period of this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a period longer than the set time for the first validity period, and operation acceptance is permitted even during the display period in the stopped state.

However, even in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced to a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second valid period ends with the maximum display area remaining. This may cause a situation where the second valid period ends without the player being able to operate despite the player's intention to do so, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, even in this example, after the second valid period ends without the player performing an operation, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which an operation opportunity was given during the second valid period, while a specific condition (for example, the pattern has stopped, or the time has not yet reached 10 seconds before the pattern stops) is not met, and when an operation is performed on the operation means, the second valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without the player performing an operation, a special valid period is generated to regenerate the second valid period.

With this configuration, even if the second valid period ends as a result of the passage of a predetermined set time without the player performing any operation, it is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. 155(f) by the player's operation. More specifically, when the player operates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 155(d), the second valid period is started from the beginning based on the operation reception (FIG. 155(e)). Then, the above-mentioned contents are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 154(b), (c), 155(d), and (f). Therefore, even if an operation is received during the second valid period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 155(f)).

However, in this example, even if the second effective period reoccurs in this manner, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" will occur from the point of reoccurrence, and therefore in the situation shown in Figure 155 (e), the decorative pattern SZ will be hidden or made difficult to see.

That is, the "image shown in FIG. 155(e)" that appears as the post-operation display when an operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 155(d) is the same as the "image shown in FIG. 154(b)". Such an image is different from the post-operation display (FIG. 155(f)) that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the second valid period (FIGS. 154(b), (c) and 155(d) etc.). Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 155(d) is also different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 155(f)) that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the second valid period (FIGS. 154(b), (c) and 155(d) etc.).

In this way, in the example shown in Figures 154 and 155, the entire period from the start to the end of the second validity period functions as a "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced," and the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced under any circumstances.

In the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. 153(e) or FIG. 155(d), the integrated model image IG may be displayed as in the second valid period. However, it is preferable that at least one of the display position and size of the integrated model image IG is different between the second valid period and the special valid period so that it is easy to recognize that the post-operation display and post-operation sound output generated according to the operation are different valid periods (second valid period, special valid period). That is, in this case, at the end of the second valid period, the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the second valid period is hidden, and the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the special valid period is newly displayed. When the integrated model image IG is displayed in the special valid period, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated during the valid period, or a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may not be generated.

The "display mode with distinctive features in the movement of the gauge image GG" shown in Figures 151 to 155 is executable when the integrated model image IGa is displayed among the integrated model images IGa to IGd, and is desirably not executed when the integrated model images IGb to IGd are displayed among the integrated model images IGa to IGd. In other words, the integrated model image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest expectation, but when the integrated model image IGa is displayed, there is a possibility that the "display mode with distinctive features in the movement of the gauge image GG" shown in Figures 151 to 155 will appear, which can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

According to the examples shown in Figures 152 to 155, when an operation-related image (such as an integrated model image IG) is displayed in a "display mode that provides a distinctive movement of the gauge image GG," even if a situation arises in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of a predetermined set period (second effective period) having elapsed without an operation by the player, it is possible for an operation to occur and for a display change (or for a post-operation sound output) to occur. More specifically, even if the predetermined set period (second effective period) has ended, it is possible for the predetermined set period (second effective period) to be re-occurred by operating the operation receiving portion (operation means) whose operation had been prompted by the integrated model image IG, and operation acceptance is permitted during the re-occurred predetermined set period (second effective period) (Figures 153(e) and (f) and Figures 155(d) and (e)). With this configuration, even if the specified set period (second valid period) ends without the player being able to understand the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG," the specified set period (second valid period) can be triggered again, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In contrast, during a specified set period (first effective period) during which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is not displayed in a "display mode that gives distinctive movement to the gauge image GG," even if the operation receiving section (operation means) that had been prompted to be operated by the integrated model image IG is operated after the specified set period (first effective period) has ended without any operation being accepted, the specified set period (second effective period) will not be re-occurred (Figs. 147 to 150).

The specified set period (second effective period) during which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is displayed in a "display mode that features the movement of the gauge image GG" does not necessarily have to occur during the period during which the pattern change is being performed. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of whether the pattern change is occurring or not, or it may occur during a "period during which the pattern change is not being performed," such as during the execution of a jackpot game or the period before the start of a jackpot game.

Furthermore, according to the example shown in Figures 147 to 155, even though the second effective period (Figures 151 to 155) is set to a longer time than the first effective period (Figures 147 to 150), the integrated model image IG itself is displayed the same or in a similar manner between the first and second effective periods (in the above example, the integrated model image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated model image IG is displayed in a similar manner, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button model image will be the same, and it is expected that the length of the set time (set time) will appear to be the same. With this configuration, it is difficult to recognize at first glance that the set time is different between the first effective period in which the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed and the second effective period in which the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" is executed; however, when a situation arises in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time during which this situation of no reduction is added, making it possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it appears.

When the integrated model image IG is displayed in a similar manner during the first effective period (Figs. 147 to 150) and the second effective period (Figs. 151 to 155), it is desirable to display an integrated model image IG that is smaller than that during the first effective period during the second effective period, in which a "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" appears.

In addition, according to the example shown in Figs. 147 to 155, in the first valid period (Figs. 147 to 150), if no operation is received, the period ends when the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) reaches a specific value (here, "0"), but in the second valid period (Figs. 151 to 155), if no operation is received, the period ends with the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) displayed at a value greater than the specific value. In other words, if the time (set time) set for the valid period is long, the sense of tension during the valid period tends to decrease, but by allowing the possibility that the valid period may end even if the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) does not reach a specific value (here, "0"), it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Also, according to the above example, the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image GG is different between the case where the integrated model image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the premonition effect is being performed (first effective period) and the case where the integrated model image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the premonition effect is being performed (second effective period). In this case, the aspect of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. "The premonition effect is performed but the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the premonition effect is being performed" means that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced throughout the entire effective period, as illustrated in FIG. 154 and FIG. 155.

In this regard, according to the above example, in the first valid period (Figs. 147 to 150), the specific image TG is displayed and the specific image TG is displayed when the set time elapses without any operation, but in the second valid period (Figs. 152 to 155), the specific image TG is not displayed and the gauge image GG (display target area) is displayed when the set time elapses without any operation. With this configuration, in the first valid period, it is possible to make the valid period appear longer by the amount of the specific image TG displayed at the end of the valid period, and in the second valid period, the gauge image GG (display target area) is left at the end of the valid period, making it appear as if the valid period has ended earlier than expected by the player, thereby maintaining a sense of tension. To obtain such an effect, it is desirable to leave a large amount of the display area of the gauge image GG (display target area) (at least an area greater than half the maximum value) at the end of the valid period in the second valid period.

In addition, according to the above example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a way that the display area is reduced for each unit time over the entire first effective period (Figs. 147 to 150), but is displayed in such a way that the display area is not reduced over the second effective period (Figs. 151 to 155). This makes it difficult to determine the remaining time just from the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, according to the above example, the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed to depict the operation receiving portion being displaced in both the first and second effective periods, but the gauge image GG is displayed in a first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first effective period, whereas it is displayed in a second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced) different from the first mode in the second effective period. That is, in the above example, although the button model image BMG is displayed as a single image (integrated model image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG), when the button model image BMG of the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, there are times when the gauge image GG is reduced and times when the gauge image GG is not reduced. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, the dynamic display of the button model image BMG makes it possible for the integrated model image IG to suitably suggest that the operation reception is permitted.

Also, according to the above example, the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" can be displayed only when the normal button image BMGa is displayed out of the normal button image BMGa and the special button image BMGb. Also, when the normal button image BMGa is displayed, not only may the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" be displayed, but there may also be cases where the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is not displayed, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the mode (normal mode) that appears even when the special button image BMGb is displayed. This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the normal button image BMGa, which has a lower expectation level than the special button image BMGb, is displayed.

In particular, in the second effective period shown in FIG. 154 and FIG. 155, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display mode (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in only one mode. That is, in this case, the gauge image GG itself loses its remaining time indication function and expectation indication function, and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG. However, the integrated model image IG in which the display target area of the gauge image GG is formed is displayed, and the gauge image GG is displayed statically (in a mode in which the area is unchanged) in the integrated model image IG. With this configuration, the gauge image GG displayed in the second effective period does not function as an image indicating the remaining time or expectation, but functions only as a simple decorative image in the integrated model image IG. Therefore, its function can be greatly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed in the first effective period, and it is expected that the diversity of expression as the gauge image GG will increase the interest in playing.

The first valid period and the second valid period may have different occurrence conditions. For example, they may occur at different times within one pattern change period. The first valid period means a period during which operation acceptance is permitted for the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output, and the second valid period means a period during which operation acceptance is permitted for the second post-operation display different from the first post-operation display and the second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output, and the reactions (display change, sound output) that appear when an operation is accepted within each of these periods are different from each other.

Regarding the integrated image IG,
After the premonition effect (specific display TH) starts to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced per unit time from when the premonition effect in the display state overlaps with the "integrated model image IG" (Figures 147 to 150);
A mode in which the premonition effect is not displayed, or even if the premonition effect starts to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the premonition effect in the displayed state overlaps with the "integrated model image IG" (FIGS. 151 to 155).
According to such a configuration, as a result of the premonition effect being performed, there are cases where the display area of the gauge image GG has already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is ensured, and cases where the display area of the gauge image GG has not been reduced by the time the entire gauge image GG becomes visible regardless of whether the premonition effect has been performed or not, making it possible to provide an entertainment effect by utilizing the visibility of the gauge image GG.

In particular, only when a mode (Figures 151 to 155) is adopted in which the display area of the gauge image GG has not decreased at the point when the entire gauge image GG is visible regardless of whether a premonition performance has been performed, a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased even within the valid period can further appear, thereby further increasing attention to the gauge image GG.

When adopting a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the premonition effect is not displayed or when the premonition effect starts to be displayed but at least the displayed premonition effect overlaps with the "integrated model image IG" (Figs. 151 to 155), in addition to the case in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced during the effective period (Figs. 151 to 155), there may be cases in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced does not appear. However, in this case, when the occurrence condition of the second effective period (Figs. 151 to 155) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears is set as the second condition, the occurrence condition of a specific effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above example, during the period during which the button image BMG is displayed, there are cases where the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced over time, and cases where this display is not performed. When this display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed during the valid period, and may be hidden. Nevertheless, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed not only during the first valid period during which the display area is reduced over time, but also during the second valid period during which the display area is not reduced over time, which is expected to appropriately suggest that the reception of performances is permitted.

In the above example, the gauge image GG does not display a display area that decreases with time, and when the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) has elapsed and the valid period ends, the automatic reception function is not enabled. In other words, if the automatic reception function were to be enabled, the sense of tension would be completely lost because the gauge image GG does not indicate the remaining time, so it is desirable not to enable the automatic reception function for the valid period (second valid period) (regardless of the presentation mode). In contrast, it is desirable to enable the automatic reception function for the above-mentioned first valid period (regardless of the presentation mode).

In addition, when a display method is adopted in which the button model image BMG and the gauge GG are displayed separately and the gauge function (remaining time indication function) is pursued exclusively, if a method is adopted in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, a great sense of incongruity will be felt when the remaining time indication function is not performed despite the gauge image GG. In this regard, in the above configuration, the button model image BMG is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that includes the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, a pattern can be seen on the back side of the gauge image GG even when it is displayed, or the gauge image GG itself can have multiple colors, and the gauge image GG itself becomes decorative within the integrated model image IG, which is expected to suppress the sense of incongruity when a situation occurs in which the remaining time indication function of the gauge image GG is not performed.

In the example shown in Figures 148 to 150, prior to the occurrence of the first valid period, the presentation of whether the "button model image BMG" will have a low expectation level (normal button model image BMGa) or a high expectation level (special button model image BMGb) and the presentation of whether the "border decoration image SSG" will have a low expectation level (normal border decoration image SSGa) or a high expectation level (special border decoration image SSGb) are gradually presented. However, such presentation can also be presented by the method described below.

Figure 156 is a diagram explaining a modified example of a presentation that gradually indicates the degree of expectation regarding the integrated model image IG.

First, FIG. 156(a) shows the presentation status in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in the first presentation pattern (changing pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination on the presentation display device 1600.

Figure 156 (b) shows a performance situation in which, during the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 156 (a), a valid period occurs during which operation reception to the operating means (operation receiving unit) is permitted, and a button-like image BMG is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b), the button model image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "peripheral decoration image SGG", but remains displayed by itself. In other words, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(b), the button model image BMG provides a performance of whether it is displayed in a low expectation mode (normal button model image BMGa) or a high expectation mode (special button model image BMGb), and the figure shows an example of a case where a high expectation mode (special button model image BMGb) appears. The selection of which of these modes to display is based on the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination).

Figure 156 (c) shows a presentation situation in which the special button image BMGb shown in Figure 156 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, the performance may not necessarily progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(c). For example, if a mode is prepared in which the button model image BMG (normal button model image BMGa, special button model image BMGb) shown in FIG. 156(b) occurs without being integrated with the border decoration image SSG, it becomes possible to provide an interesting experience of whether the performance progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) and the effective period (first effective period) occurs after the integrated model image IG is formed, or whether the performance progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) and the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the integrated model image IG being formed. If the validity period (first validity period) occurs without becoming an integrated model image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as an image separate from the button model image BMG, and for example, the display area of the gauge image GG will be reduced within a bar-shaped (straight-line) partitioned area. In this case, it is preferable that the specific image TG not be displayed.

When the button pattern image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG and the valid period occurs, it is desirable to make the expectation (proportion) of stopping on a jackpot pattern higher than when the valid period occurs without the button pattern BMG being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. Also, when the special button pattern image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b), it is desirable to make the rate of progression to the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) and integration with the peripheral decoration image SSG higher than when the normal button pattern image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b). These percentages may include "100%" or "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(c), the button pattern image BMG provides a performance by integrating it with either a peripheral decoration image with a low expectation (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) or a peripheral decoration image with a high expectation (special peripheral decoration image BMGb), and the figure shows an example in which a high expectation (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears. Which of these images is displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination).

For ease of explanation, the peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) in this example is a different image type from those shown in the above examples (Figs. 144 to 156), but is displayed as having the same basic function. The peripheral decoration image BMG in this example has a box shape for housing the button-shaped image BMG, and the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa has a heart pattern (not shown), whereas the special peripheral decoration image BMGb has a checkered pattern. Of the areas with these patterns, the "area from the upper right to the lower left" is displayed as the display target area for the gauge image GG.

The image shown in FIG. 156(c) functions as an image (integrated image) IGd in which the special button image BMGb and the special border decoration image BMGb are integrated, and in terms of presentation, it is the same as FIG. 144(d).

Figure 156 (d) shows the presentation situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 has been added to the integrated model image IGd shown in Figure 156 (c).

However, the progression from the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) may not necessarily take place. For example, if a mode is provided in which the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated model image IG (integrated model images IGa-IGd) shown in FIG. 156(c), it becomes possible to provide an interesting experience of whether the effective period (first effective period) occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added by progressing from the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d), or whether the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d).

In addition, when the effective period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated mosaic image IG, it is desirable to make the expectation (proportion) of stopping at the big win pattern higher than when the effective period occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated mosaic image IG. In addition, when the special button mosaic image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(c), it is desirable to make the rate at which the first additional decoration HS1 is added by progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) higher than when the normal button mosaic image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) or the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(c). The percentages may include "100%" or "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(d), it may be possible to provide a dramatic effect as to whether the first additional decoration HS1 is added in a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode.

Figure 156 (e) shows the presentation situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in Figure 156 (d).

However, the progression from the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) may not necessarily take place. For example, if a mode is provided in which the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added to the integrated model image IG (integrated model images IGa-IGd) shown in FIG. 156(d), it becomes possible to provide an interesting experience of whether the effective period (first effective period) occurs after the performance progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added, or whether the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the performance progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) and the second additional decoration HS2 is not added.

In addition, when the effective period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated Mog image IG, it is desirable to make the expectation (proportion) of stopping at the big win pattern higher than when the effective period occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added to the integrated Mog image IG. In addition, when the special button Mog image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(c), it is desirable to make the rate at which the second additional decoration HS2 is added by progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) higher than when the normal button Mog image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) or the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(c). The percentages may include "100%" or "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(e), the second additional decoration HS2 may be added in either a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode to provide a dramatic effect.

Figure 156 (f) shows a performance situation in which an effective period (first effective period) occurs while the integrated model image IGd shown in Figure 156 (e) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 156(f), when the valid period (first valid period) occurs, an operation instruction image such as "press" or "down arrow" is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and by checking the specific image TG, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the specific image TG in this example is a different image type from those shown in the above examples (FIGS. 144 to 156), but they are basically displayed as having the same function. The specific image TG in this example depicts a frog character, and the character displaces in accordance with the "end of the gauge image GG", which displaces when the display area of the gauge image GG decreases.

The specific image TG in this example may be displayed in a manner similar to the example shown in FIG. 145 (wherein the image is not displayed at the start of the validity period and is gradually displayed as time passes), or in a manner similar to the example shown in FIG. 146 (wherein the entire image is displayed at the start of the validity period).

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low expectation mode (snail character) (not shown) or a high expectation mode (frog character), and the figure shows an example of a high expectation mode. The specific image TG is displayed more frequently in a high expectation mode when a valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) than when a valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156(c), and it is desirable to display the specific image TG more frequently in a high expectation mode when a valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) than when a valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156(d). The percentages may include "100%" or "0%".

This configuration makes it possible to provide a dramatic effect showing how much the operation-related image can progress to a state with high expectations before the valid period occurs, thereby increasing interest in the operation before the valid period has yet to occur. Furthermore, while the operation-related images (button-shaped image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) suggest the degree of expectation before the valid period occurs, after the valid period occurs, a different image (specific image TG) further suggests the degree of expectation, thereby ideally increasing interest throughout the period from before the valid period occurs to after it has occurred.

In the example shown in FIG. 156, the operation-related images (button model images, border decoration images, additional decorations, etc.) may be temporarily hidden at the timing when the performance progresses from FIG. 156(b) to FIG. 156(c), when the performance progresses from FIG. 156(c) to FIG. 156(d), when the performance progresses from FIG. 156(d) to FIG. 156(e), etc. In other words, in this case, when the operation-related images (button model images, border decoration images, additional decorations, etc.) are displayed again, it is possible to provide the fun of knowing whether the performance has progressed or whether the valid period has expired.

In the example shown in FIG. 156, before the validity period has elapsed, the button image, border decoration image, additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the validity period, but they may be displayed in a different manner (such as blinking or semi-transparent).

In the example shown in FIG. 156, it is desirable to set the time required for the operation-related image to gradually indicate the degree of expectation before the validity period occurs to be longer than the set time for the validity period.

As mentioned above, the sword ornament 5001 according to this embodiment has two operation receiving parts: the "handle 5012" which can move (up and down) relative to the sheath 5020, and the "handle button 5014" which can move (up and down) relative to the handle 5012. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment displays both a "handle model image TMG" modeled after the handle 5012 and a "button model image BMG" modeled after the handle button 5014 during the effective period (operation reception performance) when a predetermined condition is met to generate an effective period (operation reception performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. During the effective period (operation reception performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, operation reception to the handle button 5014 is not permitted, and during the effective period (operation reception performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014, operation reception to the handle 5012 is not permitted.

In this configuration, when an effective period (operation reception effect) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, it becomes difficult to recognize whether operation reception to the handle portion 5012 or operation reception to the handle button 5014 is permitted. In other words, when an operation is received during the effective period during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the rate at which a mode suggesting that a jackpot pattern will be stopped as a post-operation display (or a mode suggesting that a jackpot pattern will be stopped as a post-operation sound output) appears is higher than when an operation is received during the effective period during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. The rate may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, when it is difficult to recognize whether operation reception to the handle portion 5012 or operation reception to the handle button 5014 is permitted, when the player recognizes that operation reception to the handle portion 5012 is permitted, the player will operate the handle portion 5012 in a state of elation, which can significantly increase the player's interest in the game.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether operation acceptance is permitted for the handle portion 5012 or for the handle button 5014. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the effective period (operation acceptance performance) during which an operation opportunity is granted for the handle portion 5012, not only is the handle portion 5012 (its light-emitting portion) illuminated, but also the handle button 5014 (its light-emitting portion) on the side to which no operation opportunity is granted is illuminated. That is, in this case, during the effective period (operation acceptance performance) during which both the "handle-modeled image TMG" modeled after the handle portion 5012 and the "button-modeled image BMG" modeled after the handle button 5014 are displayed, even if the handle portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014 is directly viewed, it remains difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014 is given an operation opportunity. In this situation, the player will become aware that operations on the handle 5012 are permitted, and will operate the handle 5012 in a state of euphoria, significantly increasing the player's interest in the game.

In other words, during the valid period (operation reception performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, it is difficult to determine whether an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014 by directly looking at the handle portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014, or by simply glancing at the performance display device 1600. At least for someone playing the pachinko machine 1 for the first time (beginners) or someone unfamiliar with the complex performance specifications (elderly people, etc.), it can be said to be difficult to determine whether an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a "valid period during which it is difficult to recognize whether the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014 has been given an operation opportunity" is generated, and the button model image BMG and the pattern model image TMG are displayed in such a way that, although it is difficult to instantly recognize during the valid period whether the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014 has been given an operation opportunity, it can be recognized after a certain amount of time.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the valid period (operation acceptance performance) during which an opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is given, both a "handle-modeled image TMG" modeled after the handle 5012 and a "button-modeled image BMG" modeled after the handle button 5014 are displayed, and of these model images, the "handle-modeled image TMG" on the side where operation acceptance is permitted is dynamically displayed, but the "button-modeled image BMG" on the side where operation acceptance is not permitted is not dynamically displayed. Here, "dynamic display" refers to, for example, a display depicting the state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced within its movable range (in the case of the handle 5012, this corresponds to a display depicting the state in which it moves (moves up and down) relative to the sheath 5020, and in the case of the handle button 5014, this corresponds to a display depicting the state in which it moves (moves up and down) relative to the handle 5012).

Even with this configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize whether the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014 has been given an operation opportunity during the valid period. However, once a predetermined time has elapsed that allows recognition as a dynamic display (moving image), the player will notice that the behavior during operation appears as a dynamic display in the handle model image TMG, but does not appear as a dynamic display in the button model image BMG, and will be able to recognize whether the operation opportunity has been given to the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014. Then, when the player recognizes that the operation reception portion (handle portion 5012) with the higher expectation is allowed to receive an operation, he or she will operate the handle portion 5012 in a state of elation, which can significantly increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the "handle model image TMG" and the "button model image BMG" are displayed during the valid period (operation acceptance performance) during which an opportunity to operate the handle portion 5012 is given, these model images are displayed as "integrated model images" integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the model images, thereby increasing the interest in playing when the operation acceptance performance (valid period) occurs. The functions and variations of such integrated model images are basically as described above. For example, the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144 to 156 may be displayed to further display (include) the "handle model image TMG" in addition to the "button model image BMG".

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "button model image BMG" and the "handle model image TMG" are displayed as a "composite model image HMG" that models at least a portion of the sword decoration 5001, and the "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the "composite model image HMG."

Figure 157 shows an example of the "integrated model image IG" that is displayed when an operation reception display (validity period) occurs for the handle portion 5012.

As shown in Fig. 157(a)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 is generated, the effect display device 1600 converts the "handle model image TMG" that models the handle portion 5012 into a "composite model image HMG" that is integrated with the "button model image BMG", and displays the "composite model image HMG" as integrated model images IGe-IGh with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. In the example shown in Fig. 157(a)-(d), the "handle model image TMG", "button model image BMG", and "peripheral decoration image SSG" are not prepared individually as image data, but are displayed as a single integrated image data (integrated model images IGe-IGh). Additionally, when the integrated model images IGe to IGh are displayed, operation prompts such as "push" and "down-left arrow" are also displayed, but for ease of explanation, they will not be described here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple presentation modes including a "first presentation mode with relatively low expectation" and a "second presentation mode with relatively high expectation" are prepared as post-operation presentations to be executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation acceptance presentation (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, and one of these presentation modes is executed based on the result of the big win judgment (presentation judgment). In this regard, in the examples shown in Figs. 157(a) to (d),
During a specific operation reception performance (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second performance mode" as a post-operation performance is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 157(b) (integrated model image IGf) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 157(a) (integrated model image IGe) appears.
During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 157(c) (integrated model image IGg) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 157(b) (integrated model image IGf) appears.
In order to establish a relationship in which the appearance rate of the "second performance mode with a relatively high expectation" as a post-operation performance is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 157(d) (integrated model image IGh) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 157(c) (integrated model image IGg) appears during a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period), one of the integrated model images IGe to IGf is displayed based on the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination).

It is not necessary to prepare all four of the integrated model images IGe to IGh. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the post-operation performance during the valid period by preparing at least two of the models. In addition, it is also possible to prepare a model different from the above four models (integrated model images IGe to IGh) and display any one of the prepared models.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operation means (sword decoration 5001) having an operation receiving part (handle part 5012) that is displaced by the operation of the player and a peripheral decoration part (scabbard part 5020, etc.) provided on the periphery of the operation receiving part,
an integrated model image display means for displaying a model image (pattern model image TMG) modeled on the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) as an integrated model image IGe to IGh integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral portion of the model image;
- It is equipped with an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation performance) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) due to an operation by the player while the integrated model image is displayed, and the integrated model image can be displayed in any of a number of forms (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

Details about the "integrated model images" shown in Figures 157(a) to (d) will be explained separately for each of these aspects (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

First, the "integrated model image IGe" shown in Figure 157 (a) is composed of a pattern model image TMGe and a button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe), and a normal border decoration image SSGe that decorates the borders. However, in the "integrated model image IGe," the pattern model image TMGe and the button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe) are displayed as an integrated image of "an image modeling the pattern part 5012, which is the object to which an operation opportunity is given," and "an image modeling the pattern button 5014, which is not the object to which an operation opportunity is given," whereas the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe does not model the peripheral decoration part (such as the sheath part 5020) that is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern part 5012, which is the object to which an operation opportunity is given. In this example, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe only models a part of the peripheral decoration part (such as the sheath part 5020), and most of the image SSGe decorates the periphery of the pattern model image TMGe (composite model image HMGe) as a virtual decoration in the display performance of the performance display device 1600.

In the "integrated model image IGe" shown in FIG. 157(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is represented as a treasure chest containing several treasures including the pattern model image TMGe (composite model image HMGe), and as described above, these "treasures" and "treasure chests" have a different shape from the actual peripheral decoration and are represented as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGe" according to this embodiment, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal border decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG in this example can also be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases over time. More specifically, when no operation is accepted within the valid period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area decreases over time from a predetermined maximum value to a predetermined minimum value (including "0").

In the normal border decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 157(a), a partition image KG is provided which separates the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas within the normal border decoration image SSGe. The area surrounded by this partition image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG." In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as the partition image KG, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed within the necklace. However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal border decoration image SSGa may be used as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

Also, as shown in FIG. 157(a), when a specific operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGe" is displayed occurs on the performance display device 1600, the handle portion 5012 that is the object of operation is made to emit light in the first mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the handle model image TMGe in the "integrated model image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 157(a))). Also, the handle button 5014 that is not the object of operation is made to emit light in the fifth mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the button model image BMGe in the "integrated model image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 157(a)). Here, the same color is used, but the first and fifth modes may be different colors.

In contrast, the "integrated mosaic image IGf" shown in FIG. 157(b) is basically the same as the "integrated mosaic image IGe" described above, and is configured as an image in which the pattern mosaic image TMGf and button mosaic image BMGf (composite mosaic image HMGf) are integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates the border. In the "integrated mosaic image IGf", there is no change in the shape of the pattern mosaic image TMGf and button mosaic image BMGf (composite mosaic image HMGf). However, with regard to the border decoration image SSG, although the treasure chest itself is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGe", it is displayed as a "first special border decoration image SSGf" in which the amount and type of treasure contained therein has been increased. The amount and variety of treasures has increased, and necklaces, swords, and cups are also displayed in the "normal border decoration image SSGe," so they are common.

In addition, in the "integrated model image IGf" shown in FIG. 157(b), the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes as the amount and type of treasure increases, thereby causing the display mode of the gauge image GG to differ. With this configuration, the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG differs (it is not similar) depending on which of multiple modes with different expectation levels it is displayed in, so as the display area decreases it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Also, as shown in FIG. 157(b), when a specific operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGf" is displayed occurs on the performance display device 1600, the handle portion 5012 that is the object of operation is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the handle model image TMGf in the "integrated model image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 157(b))). Also, the handle button 5014 that is not the object of operation is made to emit light in the sixth mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the button model image BMGf in the "integrated model image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 157(b)). Although the same color is used here, the second and sixth modes may be different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated mosaic image IGg" shown in FIG. 157(c) is basically the same as the "integrated mosaic image IGe" described above, and is configured as an image in which the pattern mosaic image TMGg and button mosaic image BMGg (composite mosaic image HMGg) are integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates the border. In the "integrated mosaic image IGg", there is no change in the shape of the pattern mosaic image TMGg and button mosaic image BMGg (composite mosaic image HMGg). However, with regard to the border decoration image SSG, although the treasure itself is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGe", the treasure chest that stores them (the shape of the treasure chest) is different, and it is displayed as a "second special border decoration image SSGg".

However, the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" is similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGf" in the following points.
"The actual peripheral decorative portion (such as the sheath portion 5020) provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, but the periphery of the handle-modeled image TMGg (composite modeled image HMGg) is decorated as a virtual decoration for the display performance on the performance display device 1600.

Also, as shown in FIG. 157(c), when a specific operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGg" is displayed occurs on the performance display device 1600, the handle portion 5012 that is the object of operation is illuminated in the third state (in FIG. 157(c), for example, illuminates in the same color (e.g., "red") as the handle model image TMGg in the "integrated model image IGg"). Also, the handle button 5014 that is not the object of operation is illuminated in the seventh state (for example, illuminates in the same color (e.g., "red") as the button model image BMGg in the "integrated model image IGg"). Here, they are the same color, but the third and seventh states may be different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated mosaic image IGh" shown in FIG. 157(d) is basically the same as the "integrated mosaic image IGe" described above, and is configured as an image in which the pattern mosaic image TMGh and button mosaic image BMGh (composite mosaic image HMGh) are integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates the border. In the "integrated mosaic image IGh", there is no change in the shape of the pattern mosaic image TMGh and button mosaic image BMGh (composite mosaic image HMGh). However, the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "third special border decoration image SSGh" in which the amount and types of treasures are increased compared to the "normal border decoration image SSGe" described above, and the treasure chest that stores them (the shape of the treasure chest) is also different.

In addition, in the "integrated model image IGh" in this example, the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes as the amount and type of treasure increases, which causes the display mode of the gauge image GG to differ.

However, the "third special peripheral decoration image SSGh" is similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" in the following respects.
"The actual peripheral decorative portion (such as the sheath portion 5020) provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, but the periphery of the handle-modeled image TMGh (composite modeled image HMGh) is decorated as a virtual decoration for the display performance on the performance display device 1600.

In other words, the "integrated model image IGh (Fig. 157(d))" is displayed as an image that combines a portion (treasure) of the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated model image IGf (Fig. 157(b))" and a portion (treasure chest) of the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated model image IGg (Fig. 157(c))."

On the other hand, since the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the appearance of the "integrated model image IGe (Figure 157(a))" and the appearance of the "integrated model image IGh (Figure 157(d))" can suggest that they are a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period) targeting the same post-operation performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 157(d), when a specific operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGh" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 occurs, the handle portion 5012 that is the object of operation is made to emit light in the fourth mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the handle model image TMGh in the "integrated model image IGh" (for example, "rainbow color" in FIG. 157(d))). Also, the handle button 5014 that is not the object of operation is made to emit light in the eighth mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the button model image BMGh in the "integrated model image IGh" (for example, "rainbow color" in FIG. 157(d)). Although the same color is used here, the fourth mode and the eighth mode may be different colors.

In the examples shown in Figs. 157(a)-(d), the pattern image TMG and button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in the same shape in all cases, but the shapes of the pattern image TMG and button image BMG (composite image HMG) may be changed according to changes in the amount or type of treasure (Figs. 157(b) and (d)), or according to changes in the treasure chest (Figs. 157(c) and (d)).

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 157(a) to (d), the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in different colors in each aspect, but they may be displayed in the same color.

When displaying a button-like image BMG modeled after the pattern button 5014, in the examples shown in Figs. 144(a)-(d), the button-like image BMG is displayed with the peripheral decoration images SSGa,b integrated. In this regard, in the examples shown in Figs. 157(a)-(d), the button-like image BMG modeled after the pattern button 5014 is also displayed, but the peripheral decoration images SSGa,b are not displayed. In other words, because the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration in the display performance of the performance display device 1600, it is possible to display completely different images in the examples shown in Figs. 144(a)-(d) and the examples shown in Figs. 157(a)-(d), which allows for a wide variety of performances to be provided.

Needless to say, in the configuration of the example shown in Figures 157(a)-(d), the parts having the same functions as the example shown in Figures 144(a)-(d) have the same effects as the various effects described above with reference to Figures 144(a)-(d). Also, in the example shown in Figures 157(a)-(d), the above-mentioned modified examples and performance examples of the example shown in Figures 144(a)-(d) can be appropriately adopted.

Furthermore, during the effective period during which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" is displayed during that effective period, just as during the effective period during which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144.

However, during the valid period (multiple valid periods) in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144, the "specific image TG" may or may not be displayed depending on the type of valid period (type of post-operation display or post-operation sound output, type of premonition effect, etc.), whereas during the valid period (multiple valid periods) in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157, the "specific image TG" is always displayed regardless of the type of valid period (type of post-operation display or post-operation sound output, type of premonition effect, etc.).

In other words, the effective period (multiple effective periods) during which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157 does not include an effective period during which the "state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 occurs as an effect. Therefore, it is desirable to display a "specific image TG" to clarify how much time is left. When displaying a "specific image TG", it is not necessary to display the gauge image GG.

When the integrated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157, the "specific image TG" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145 or in the manner shown in FIG. 146.

In the example shown in FIG. 157, an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 in a state in which the handle portion 5012 has been moved from the original position to a specific position, thereby allowing a movement operation from the specific position to the original position (sheathing operation). However, when an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the handle portion 5012 does not necessarily have to be moved from the original position to the specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle portion 5012 in a state in which the handle portion 5012 is in the original position, thereby allowing a movement operation from the original position to the specific position (unsheathing operation).

Figure 158 shows an example of the presentation (operation reception presentation) when the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 157.

Figure 158 (a) shows a display situation in which the display device 1600 starts displaying a premonition effect (specific display TH3) in a display situation in which the number of reserved balls is 0 and the display device 1600 is performing a variable display of the decorative pattern SZ (special pattern) in a specific display pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big win determination in a normal game state. This display pattern may be the same as the display pattern shown in Figures 147 to 150, or it may be different. When it is the same display pattern, the effective period (operation acceptance display) shown in Figures 147 to 150 and the effective period shown in Figure 158 may be generated at the first timing and the second timing in the display pattern, respectively, or only one of the effective periods (operation acceptance display) may be generated at a predetermined timing in the display pattern based on the result of the display determination.

The premonition effect (specific display TH3) in this example is also executed across the timing of the occurrence of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted, and at this point, operation acceptance (effect acceptance) for the handle portion 5012 is not permitted and the valid period has not yet occurred.

In this regard, the premonition effect (specific display TH3) in this example is performed by displaying the integrated mosaic image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid of the treasure chest). At the time shown in FIG. 148(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated mosaic image IG is displayed in a "closed state", which means that some of the treasures including the pattern mosaic image TMGe (composite mosaic image HMGe) are not displayed as images (by the specific display TH3, which is the lid of the treasure chest), and are therefore not visible (or difficult to see).

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 158(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is provided with the performance of being displayed in either the relatively low expectation mode shown in FIG. 157(a) and (b) or the relatively high expectation mode shown in FIG. 157(c) and (d), and the figure shows an example of a case where it is displayed in a low expectation mode (FIG. 157(a) and (b)). The selection of which of these modes is displayed is based on the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination). Note that, although an explanation of the case where the treasure chest is displayed in a high expectation mode will be omitted, the subsequent performance progresses in the same manner as "when the treasure chest is displayed in a low expectation mode" described below.

Figure 158 (b) shows a situation in which, as the premonition effect shown in Figure 158 (a) progresses (as the lid of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) is opened and the area displayed overlapping with the "treasure" shrinks over time), the part of the "treasure" that does not overlap with the lid of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and this part is displayed in a manner that is easy to see.

That is, as the premonition performance shown in FIG. 158(a) progresses, a specific timing arrives and an effective period for the handle portion 5012 occurs. When this effective period occurs, as shown in FIG. 158(b), the handle portion 5012, which is the object of operation, begins to move to a "specific position" by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Also, as described above, both the "handle portion 5012", which is the object of operation, and the "handle button 5014", which is not the object of operation, begin to emit light in a specific manner (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

However, at the time when such light emission starts, the premonition effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 158(a) is in the middle of being executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 158(b), the integrated model image IG depicts the lid part (specific display TH3) of the treasure chest changing from a "closed state (fully closed)" to an "open state (fully open)". Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 158(b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) due to the "premonition effect (specific display TH3) depicted (expressed) as being in front of it", but the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed) and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the entirety of the specific image TG overlaps with the premonition effect (specific display TH) and is not displayed as an image.

With this configuration, the premonition effect (display on the specific display TH3) is performed across the timing (specific timing) of the occurrence of the valid period, and for a specified time after the occurrence of the valid period, the premonition effect (specific display TH3) makes at least a part of the integrated mosaic image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, the whole picture of the integrated mosaic image IG (pattern mosaic image TMG and button mosaic image BMG (composite mosaic image HMG), border decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually revealed during the valid period, so that the expectation level (border decoration image aspect) and the excitement of which the operation target (pattern mosaic image aspect) is suggested by the aspect of the integrated mosaic image IG can be maintained for a specified time after the start of the valid period.

That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 158(b), the "treasure" that is the contents of the treasure box is at least displayed in a mode in which the amount or type is small (a mode with relatively low expectations shown in FIG. 157(a)) and in a mode in which the amount or type is large (a mode with relatively high expectations shown in FIG. 157(b)), providing a dramatic effect in which it is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 158(b), it is possible to recognize that the "treasure" that is the contents of the treasure box is displayed in a mode in which the amount or type is large (a mode with high expectations). Also, in the example shown in FIG. 158(b), the "specific image TG" is in a state in which it is difficult to see, making it difficult to distinguish whether the "specific image TG" is the type that is displayed in the first place at the start of the valid period (see FIG. 146) or the type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the valid period and gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 145). That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 146, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so when the type shown in FIG. 146 is adopted, executing the premonition effect in the manner described above is particularly effective in preventing a decline in interest in the game. Note that, although we will not go into the details of when "treasure" is displayed in a manner with low expectations, the subsequent performance will progress in the same manner as "when "treasure" is displayed in a manner with high expectations" described below.

Figure 158(c) shows a situation where the premonition effect (display relating to specific display TH3) shown in Figure 158(b) has progressed further, resulting in the overlapping portion with the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) (the portion where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being in front of the "treasure") disappearing. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, but remains displayed while the integrated model image IG is displayed, which makes it possible to provide a consistent presentation from before the valid period begins until it ends, thereby improving interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 158(c), when the entire treasure of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already begun (in this case, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). In other words, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", it is possible to make it seem as if more display area remains than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and the display area has not decreased that much. This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the premonition effect (the effect of opening the lid part, which is the specific display TH) ends. The "specific image TG" in this example is displayed as an image expressing a "light" that displaces at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the handle model image TMG of the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed (a display depicting the handle portion 5012 displacing within its movable range), but the button model image BMG is not dynamically displayed (a display depicting the handle button 5014 displacing within its movable range), as described above.

Figure 158 (d) shows an example of an image that appears on the performance display device 1600 when the effective period (set time) ends (or just before the effective period ends) and no operation is accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes the minimum value (here, "0"). At the time when the image shown in the same Figure 158 (d) appears, it is assumed that the operation acceptance is barely permitted in terms of time, but it is also possible to make it so that the operation acceptance is already not permitted when the screen appears. However, in this case, the handle part 5012 and the handle button 5014 are in a state where they have already stopped emitting light at that time. Also, in this case, images such as "Push!" and "Down-left arrow" may be hidden. In any case, at least a part (or all) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even at the time when the effective period ends.

When the valid period ends, the illumination of the handle portion 5012 and the illumination of the handle button 5014 both cease. In this regard, during the valid period during which an opportunity to operate the handle portion 5012 is given, even if the player does not perform any operation during that period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound are output as when the operation is performed (see FIG. 158(e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (e.g., FIG. 147(e) and (f)) that functions during the first valid period described above.

According to this configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the "specific image TG" is displayed even just before the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed, so that it can be made to look as if the player performed the operation in time and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output was started in response to the operation reception associated with the operation. In particular, when the premonition effect (pre-display) is performed in this manner, by the time the entire picture of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is clearly visible, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already begun. In other words, in this case, it is considered that there is a high possibility that a situation will occur in which the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, so it can be said that it is effective in suppressing a decline in interest in the game to perform the post-operation display or post-operation sound output with the "specific image TG" displayed even if the player does not perform the operation during the valid period. In this example, the pattern button 5014 on the side that is not given an operation opportunity is illuminated when the valid period begins, making it difficult to recognize whether the operation opportunity has been given to the pattern part 5012 or the pattern button 5014. In other words, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the operation will not be completed in time within the valid period, this is said to be effective in preventing a decrease in interest in the game when the operation is not completed in time.

The performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 158 may be applied to either the case where a "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, or the case where a "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 146.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, the premonition effect (specific display TH) and the integrated model image IG are displayed on separate layers, and the premonition effect (specific display TH) is displayed with priority, thereby realizing the performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 147. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 158 may be stored as a single piece of video data, and this may be realized by playing back the video data.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 157(b) (integrated model image IGa). However, as described above, the integrated model image IG may be displayed in one of multiple forms (forms shown in FIG. 157(a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination).

According to the example shown in FIG. 158, first, prior to the occurrence of the valid period, when a treasure chest that is part of the integrated model image IG is displayed, a first presentation is provided as to whether the treasure chest will be displayed in a "high expectation mode" or a "low expectation mode". After the valid period has occurred, a second presentation is provided as to whether the "treasure" will be displayed in a "high expectation mode" or a "low expectation mode" as the treasure chest of the integrated model image IG is depicted gradually opening. In other words, in this case, the expectations are suggested by the gradual presentation (first presentation, second presentation) that spans the occurrence of the valid period, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably increased in the period from before the occurrence of the valid period to after it has occurred.

In addition, because this type of gradual presentation is realized by the depiction of the integrated model image IG itself (the depiction covering the lid of the treasure chest), it causes less stress than when the visibility of the integrated model image IG is obstructed by other images (such as the specific display TH shown in FIG. 147), and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. However, in the example shown in FIG. 158, premonition presentation may also be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 149.In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 149, premonition presentation may also be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 158.

In FIG. 158, when the first performance condition is satisfied, an example of the performance progress (first operation acceptance period) is described for the case where an imitation image of the operation target is displayed as an integrated imitation image integrated with the "peripheral decoration image (first decoration image)" including the display target area of the gauge image. In contrast, in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160, when the second performance condition is satisfied, an example of the performance progress (second operation acceptance period) is described for the case where an imitation image of the operation target is displayed as an "image not integrated with the peripheral decoration image (first decoration image) including the display target area of the gauge image". The example shown in FIG. 158 and the examples shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160 do not necessarily need to provide an operation opportunity for the same operation target, but if an operation opportunity is provided for the same operation target, it is desirable to display the imitation image of the operation target itself as the same image (including a similar shape).

Here, examples of the manner in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the border decoration image that includes the display target area of the gauge image" include a manner in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the border decoration image at all and is a standalone image," and a manner in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as "an image that is integrated with the border decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image." With this configuration, when the valid period occurs, there are cases in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as one image and a gauge image is displayed within that image, and cases in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as one image and a gauge image is not displayed within that image, so that the sense of tension during the valid period can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

The example described below shows a display example in which a model image of an operation target is displayed as "an image integrated with a border decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image."

First, FIG. 159(a) shows a presentation situation in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is being performed by the presentation display device 1600 in a specific presentation pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination, and the presentation display device 1600 starts displaying a premonition presentation (specific display TH3). This presentation pattern may be the same as the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 147 to FIG. 150 and FIG. 158, or it may be different. When it is the same presentation pattern, it may be made to occur at the first and second timings within one presentation pattern, or only one of the valid periods (operation acceptance presentations) may be made to occur at a predetermined timing within the presentation pattern based on the result of the presentation determination.

In this example, the situation shown in Figs. 159(a) and (b) is basically the same as the situation shown in Figs. 158(a) and (b), and the description of the same configuration will be omitted. However, the "treasure (second decorative image)" partially visible in the situation shown in Fig. 159(b) has different contents from the "treasure (first decorative image)" partially visible in the situation shown in Fig. 158(b). That is, as described above, the "image simulating the operation target" in this example is displayed as an "image integrated with the peripheral decorative image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image", but the "peripheral decorative image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image" has a part that is displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "peripheral decorative image that includes the display target area of the gauge image" and a part that is displayed as a different image.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the "treasure (second decorative image)" of the peripheral decorative image SSG in this example is similar to the "treasure (first decorative image)" shown in FIG. 158 in that it includes a "Holy Grail". However, the "treasure" of the peripheral decorative image SSG in this example does not display the "gold bar" and "necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)" shown in FIG. 158, and instead displays an image of gold coins stuffed inside. The treasure chest shown in FIG. 159(c) is the same as the treasure chest shown in FIG. 158(c), and is also the same in that the treasure chest is displayed in one of the multiple forms shown in FIG. 157.

With this configuration, even if the specific display TH3 is no longer depicted as being in front of the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" (Figure 159 (c)), the gauge image GG will no longer be displayed within the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)". In other words, in this case, while the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" is gradually made more visible by the specific display TH3, even if you try to find the gauge image GG, you will not be able to find it, so it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension about how much time is left.

In particular, in this example, the border decoration image SSG (treasure) does not display the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, but is displayed as if it contains the same image (such as a chalice) as when the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed (Figure 157 (c)). In other words, in this case, it is possible to make the player believe that the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is also displayed somewhere, and as a result, when the player searches for the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG and realizes that it is not displayed anywhere, it will appear as if a certain amount of time has already passed since the valid period began, making it possible to maintain a sense of tension during the valid period in an optimal manner.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 159(b) to (d), the integrated model image IG, in which the pattern model image TMG representing the operation target is integrated with the border decoration image SSG, does not have a display target area for the gauge image, nor is the display target area for the gauge image displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image IG. In other words, in this case, the gauge image is not displayed, making it difficult to know how much time is left in the valid period, which makes it possible to maintain a good sense of tension during the valid period. Note that the display target area for the gauge image does not necessarily have to be hidden; for example, the gauge image may be displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image IG, with the display area reduced over time.

Figure 159(d) shows an example of an image that appears on the performance display device 1600 when the set time for the valid period has elapsed and the valid period is about to end. As mentioned above, in this example, no gauge image is displayed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 159(d), there is no indication that the valid period is about to end, and the player cannot recognize that this is the case even if he or she sees the image.

However, even during the valid period in this example, the pattern image TMG being operated displays (dynamic display) a picture of the pattern portion 5012 reciprocating within its movable range (reciprocating from the original position to a specific position). In this regard, since the valid period in this example is set to end when the reciprocating motion has been repeated N times (N does not have to be an integer) since the period began, it is possible to know how much time (reciprocating motions) is left in the valid period by continuing to gaze at the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG.

Even during the valid period in this example, as shown in Figs. 159(c) and (d), the button model image BMG does not display (dynamic display) a picture of the pattern button 5014 reciprocating within its movable range. In this regard, during the valid period in which the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed, even if the operation receiving part (here, the pattern button 5014) corresponding to the model image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated, a post-operation display or post-operation sound may be output in response to the operation reception.

That is, in the valid period according to this example, since the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, it is assumed that the player will operate in a hurry, and as a result, the possibility of operating the operation receiving part on the side that is not dynamically displayed is high. Therefore, even if the operation receiving part on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated, it is desirable to perform a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output, unlike the case shown in FIG. 158, in order to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In this case, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output can be, for example, a display or sound output such as "Push the handle part, not the handle button!". Therefore, even if the operation receiving part on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated and a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output corresponding to this is performed, it is desirable not to end the valid period or reset the set time, but to continue the dynamic display of the handle model image TMG. When the handle part 5012 is operated during the valid period thus continued, a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output corresponding to this is performed (see FIG. 160 (h)). In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are obviously different from the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiving part on the non-dynamically displayed side is operated (for example, "Push the handle part, not the handle button!"). However, in order to improve the interest in the game, it is desirable to execute the post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, "Congratulations!") that appear when the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is operated without operating the operation receiving part (handle button 5014) corresponding to the non-dynamically displayed button image BMG during the valid period, as different from the post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, "Good thing you made it in time, congratulations!") that appear when the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is further operated after the operation receiving part (handle button 5014) corresponding to the non-dynamically displayed button image BMG is operated during the valid period.

Figure 160 (e) shows an example of an image that appears on the performance display device 1600 when no operation is accepted within the time (set time) set for the validity period for this example.

In other words, in the valid period in this example, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIGS. 159(d) and (e)), the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when an operation is accepted on the handle portion 5012 during the valid period will not be executed (automatic reception performance will function).

However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed within the integrated model image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as a separate image, so that the player may be concerned that the valid period may end without being able to operate despite his intention to do so, which may reduce his interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, after the valid period ends without the player performing an operation, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (here, the handle portion 5012) as the operation means to which an operation opportunity was given during the valid period, while a specific condition (for example, the pattern has stopped, or it has not yet reached 10 seconds before the pattern stops) is not met, and when an operation is received for that operation means, the above-mentioned valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the valid period ends without the player performing an operation, a special valid period for regenerating the valid period is generated from the time of the end.

With this configuration, even if the valid period ends as a result of the passage of a predetermined set time without the player performing any operation, it is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. 160(h) by the player's operation. More specifically, when the player performs an operation on the handle 5012 in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e) (special valid period), the valid period is started from the beginning based on the operation reception (FIG. 160(f) and (g)). After that, the above-mentioned contents are repeated with reference to FIG. 159(b)-(d), FIG. 160(e) and (g). Therefore, even if an operation is received during the valid period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed in the above-mentioned manner (see FIG. 160(h)).

When an operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e) (special valid period), the images shown in FIG. 160(f) and (g) (the same as the images shown in FIG. 159(b) and (c)) will appear in sequence as post-operation displays. These images are different from the post-operation displays executed based on the operation being accepted in the valid period (FIG. 159(b)-(d) and FIG. 159(f) and (g)). Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation being accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e) (special valid period) is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation being accepted in the valid period (FIG. 159(b)-(d) and FIG. 160(f) and (g)).

During the valid period (operation acceptance presentation) shown in Fig. 159 and Fig. 160, since the specific image TG is not displayed, it is not necessary to perform a premonition presentation (dynamic display by specific display TH3) to generate the valid period. For example, when a specific condition for allowing operation acceptance regarding a specific post-operation display (specific post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when a specific timing arrives), the situation shown in Fig. 159(c) may be made to appear, and thereafter the display may progress in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example.

In the example shown in Figs. 158 to 160, the pattern model image TMG and the button model image BMG are displayed as one image (composite model image HMG), but these model images may be displayed as separate images. In the example shown in Figs. 158 to 160, the "button model image BMG" and the "pattern model image TMG" are displayed as one image (composite model image HMG) that includes both of these model images, and the "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, the "button model image BMG" and the "pattern model image TMG" may be displayed as separate images, with at least one of these model images being displayed as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates its periphery. For example, if the "pattern-model image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the border decoration image, and the "button-model image BMG" is displayed as a separate image, the "pattern-model image TMG" can be made to stand out even though both the "pattern-model image TMG" and the "button-model image BMG" are displayed simultaneously, and it can be implied that the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) corresponding to the "pattern-model image TMG" should be operated. In this case, other configurations and examples can be similarly applied, such as the fact that the "pattern-model image TMG" in the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, while the "button-model image BMG" displayed as a standalone image is not dynamically displayed.

In addition, during the validity period (operation reception presentation) shown in FIG. 158, both the button model image BMG and the pattern model image TMG are displayed, but it is also possible to display only the model image that provides the operation opportunity (here, the pattern model image TMG).

In addition, it is desirable to generate the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160 as a setting time longer than the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 158. In this case, it is desirable to make the manner in which the model image (here, the pattern model image TMG) is dynamically displayed (such as the speed of reciprocating movement) within the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 158 the same as the manner in which the model image (here, the pattern model image TMG) is dynamically displayed (such as the speed of reciprocating movement) within the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160. With this configuration, even if the gauge image GG is not displayed, the user is encouraged to operate with ample time by checking the "state of the dynamic display of the model image" based on the case in which the gauge image GG is displayed.

In the examples shown in Figures 158 to 160, the border decoration image SSG may be an image of "treasure," and a treasure chest may not necessarily be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, when the operation receiving portion corresponding to the non-dynamically displayed model image is the "first operation receiving portion," the operation receiving portion corresponding to the dynamically displayed model image may be the "first operation receiving portion" in the examples shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160. However, in this case, when the dynamically displayed operation receiving portion is the "second operation receiving portion" in the example shown in FIG. 158, it is preferable that the operation receiving portion corresponding to the non-dynamically displayed model image be the "third operation receiving portion" different from the "second operation receiving portion" in the examples shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160. With this configuration, it becomes possible to generate two types of operation reception effects in which the display relationship of the three operation targets (operation receiving portions) slides, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160 does not necessarily have to occur during the period during which the pattern change is being performed. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of whether the pattern change is occurring or not, or it may occur during a "period during which the pattern change is not being performed," such as during the execution of a jackpot game or the period before the start of a jackpot game.

In addition, during the valid period (operation reception presentation) shown in Figures 159 and 160, the decorative pattern SZ that had been displayed up until that point may be made invisible or difficult to see, as during the valid period in the examples shown in Figures 152 to 155, making it easier to notice that a special presentation state in which the gauge image is not displayed is in progress.

As the valid period during which the image shown in FIG. 158(c) is displayed, multiple valid periods each having different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progression shown in FIG. 158 does not have to be made during all of those valid periods, but it is sufficient that the display progression shown in FIG. 158 is made during at least one of the valid periods.

A number of valid periods, each with different occurrence conditions, may be prepared as the valid period during which the image shown in FIG. 159(c) is displayed. In this case, the display progression shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160 does not have to occur during all of those valid periods, but it is sufficient that the display progression shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160 occurs during at least one of the valid periods.

In the validity period (operation reception presentation) shown in Figures 159 and 160, unlike the validity period shown in Figure 158, multiple forms (colors, etc.) of the mock image may not be displayed, and it may be displayed in only one form.

The effective period (operation acceptance effect) during which the gauge image is not displayed may occur only when an operation opportunity is given for either the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014, and the effective period (operation acceptance effect) during which the gauge image is displayed may occur whenever an operation opportunity is given for the other.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the valid period during which the integrated model image is displayed without reducing the display area of the gauge image GG (valid period shown in Figs. 151 to 153), the valid period during which the integrated model image is displayed without providing a display target area for the gauge image GG (valid period shown in Figs. 159 and 160), and the like can occur as one of multiple types of valid periods. In this regard, in these valid periods (Figs. 151 to 153, 159, and 160), in order to maintain a suitable sense of tension, when an operation by the player is not accepted, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is accepted is not performed (no automatic button function), and in the valid period during which the gauge image GG is displayed in a smaller size over time (Figs. 147 to 150, and 158), in order to maintain a suitable sense of tension, when an operation by the player is not accepted, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is accepted is performed (with automatic button function).

In this regard, during the effective period in which the integrated model image is displayed without reducing the display area of the gauge image GG (effective period shown in Figs. 151 to 153) or during the effective period in which the integrated model image is displayed without providing a display target area for the gauge image GG in the first place (effective period shown in Figs. 159 and 160), when an operation is accepted for an operation means to which an operation opportunity is provided, it is desirable that the integrated model image is not hidden but is in a displayed state at the time when a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) is started to be executed. It is also desirable that the dynamic display of the integrated model image is continued. This makes it possible to create a sense of anxiety about whether the performance acceptance was properly carried out when the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image, and is expected to more appropriately maintain the sense of tension.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after a change occurs in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp lighting up), and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target of operation even in a state in which a change occurs in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp lighting up). In contrast, during the effective period (Figs. 147-150, 158) during which the gauge image GG is displayed to become smaller over time, if a change occurs in response to the operation received due to the player's operation (at least one of the changes caused by post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination), the integrated model image (both the model image and the gauge image) may be hidden when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, or, as in the above case, the integrated model image may not be hidden, but may be displayed and a change in response to the operation received (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) may occur.

However, even during this effective period when "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time," a dummy image that mimics the operating means to be operated should be displayed, and it is desirable to display this dummy image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. With this configuration, although the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image, it is possible, though difficult, to grasp the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted based on how far the moving image of the dummy image has progressed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

[Integrated mock image, performance before validity period, mock image disappearance performance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a presentation judgment (presentation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the presentation content according to the result of the presentation judgment is controlled to be displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and a variable presentation using decorative patterns according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected presentation (advance notice presentation) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick presentation). As a result, when the variable presentation using decorative patterns is executed together with the expected presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) does not occur even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Also, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

Note that, as for the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. However, as for the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, it is preferable that they are not included in the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) or that their selection rate is made low.

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-operation performance that generates a predetermined change in the performance component that is the target of the performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease until the post-operation performance is executed.

Therefore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given occurs, a model image imitating the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed as an integrated model image (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image decorating the periphery of the model image, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in playing until the post-operation performance is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image in both the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that occurs when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach and the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that occurs in the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance. In addition, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the illustrated model image in each of the above-mentioned performance examples with one of the integrated model images described below in order to improve interest in playing.

The "integrated model image" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as another example or modified example thereof, and for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different expectation levels are prepared as the "integrated model image", and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance-permitted state occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) has already occurred.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described later, a plurality of reception allowance states including a first reception allowance state and a second reception allowance state are prepared as reception allowance states (valid periods). Here, the first reception allowance state is a valid period (a valid period generated based on the first condition being established in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be generated when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from among the high expectation fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns), but cannot be generated in a predetermined fluctuation pattern from among the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) (or in any of the fluctuation patterns from among the low expectation fluctuation patterns). In addition, the second reception allowance state is a valid period (a valid period generated based on the second condition different from the first condition being established in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be generated when a specific fluctuation pattern from among the high expectation fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) is selected or when a predetermined fluctuation pattern from among the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) is selected (or in at least one of those fluctuation patterns).

The "integrated imitation image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either the first reception-permitting state or the second reception-permitting state. Here, since it is assumed that the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state both occur as reception-permitting states in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operation means (operation button 410), the "integrated imitation image" displayed in the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state is an image simulating the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated model image", the special mode with a high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) can only be displayed in the first reception allowance state out of the first reception allowance state and the second reception allowance state, and in the second reception allowance state, it can only be displayed in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(a)-(c)). In the first reception allowance state, a determination is made based on the result of the jackpot determination as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIG. 144(a)-(d)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in, and the "integrated model image" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. In the second reception allowance state, a determination is also made based on the result of the jackpot determination as to which of the multiple modes not including the special mode (for example, FIG. 144(a)-(c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in, and the "integrated model image" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

In this configuration, in the first acceptance allowable state, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first and second acceptance allowable sounds) are output, and in the second acceptance allowable state, one type of acceptance allowable sound (third acceptance allowable sound) is output. Here, the first and third acceptance allowable sounds are output as sound effects such as "beep!", and may be output as the same sound or different sounds. In contrast, the second acceptance allowable sound is output as a message sound such as "push!". However, the second acceptance sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound, and as long as it is a sound different from the first acceptance sound and is output for a different output time, the player can easily recognize that the state in which two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first and second acceptance allowable sounds) are being output is possible.

As mentioned above, in the first acceptance state, the "integrated model image" can be displayed in a mode different from the special mode (a mode with a relatively low expectation), but even in this case, two types of acceptance sound (first and second acceptance sound) are output. That is, in this case, if only one type of acceptance sound is output when the acceptance state occurs (the integrated model image is displayed), the special mode will not be displayed as the "integrated model image" but a mode different from the special mode, but when two types of acceptance sound are output, there are cases where the special mode is displayed as the "integrated model image" and cases where a mode different from the special mode is displayed.

With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated model image" will be displayed in a special manner based on the manner in which the acceptance permission sound is output, thereby increasing the interest in the game when an acceptance permission state occurs.

When the "integrated model image" is displayed in the first reception-permitting state or the second reception-permitting state, a pre-show (premonition) is executed prior to this, and the integrated model image is displayed (displayed in a state where it is difficult to see) in such a pre-show execution state that at least a part of it overlaps with the "image related to the pre-show". The integrated model image is then gradually reduced in size by gradually reducing the overlapping part with the "image related to the pre-show", or the transparency of the "image related to the pre-show" gradually increases, and finally becomes invisible, so that its form (entirely) is revealed (displayed in a state where it is easy to see) after the reception-permitting state occurs. Such a pre-show (premonition) is, for example, the performance shown in Figures 147(b), (c) and 149(c) to (f), and may be executed in the same manner.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start to be output at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but starts to be output in a delayed manner. However, when the first permissible sound starts to be output in advance, not only "the integrated model image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, its appearance is difficult to recognize," but also when the second permissible sound starts to be output in a delayed manner, at least a part of the integrated model image is displayed in a state in which an image related to the pre-effect (premonition effect) is overlapped in front of it, making it difficult to see. The acceptance permissible state (valid period) is generated when the pre-effect (premonition effect) starts to be executed or during its execution period, and is already in a state in which it is generated at least when the output of the second permissible sound starts, or is generated in conjunction with the start of its output.

With this configuration, at least when the situation is such that "the first permissible sound is being output and the second permissible sound is not being output," it is difficult to recognize whether the first acceptance permissible state in which two types of acceptance permissible sounds (the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) are output will occur (or is occurring), or the second acceptance permissible state in which only one type of acceptance permissible sound (the first permissible sound) is output will occur (or is occurring). However, when a situation such as "the output of the second permissible sound begins after the output of the first permissible sound" occurs, it is possible to recognize that the first acceptance permissible state in which two types of acceptance permissible sounds (the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) are output has occurred, and further, that there is a possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special manner.

In other words, in this case, it is difficult to recognize in what form the integrated image is displayed (or if it is displayed at all),
A transition from a "state in which only the first tolerable sound of the first and second tolerable sounds is output" to a "state in which at least the second tolerable sound is output" (first reception permissible state),
- A case where "a state in which only the first allowable sound of the first and second allowable sounds is output" does not transition to "a state in which at least the second allowable sound is output" (second reception allowable state) can occur, and this type of "transition regarding the output of the reception allowable sound" can suggest "the possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special manner". Therefore, while in the "state in which only the first allowable sound of the first and second allowable sounds is output", it is possible to make the player interested in whether the output of the second allowable sound will start before the image related to the pre-effect (premonition effect) is hidden, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. As a result, if the second allowable sound is output while the image related to the pre-effect (premonition effect) is displayed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the integrated image with a special mode will be displayed (displayed), and it is possible to provide a performance in which the integrated model image is gradually revealed in such a sense of expectation.

As mentioned above, even at the time when the second permissible sound starts to be output, at least a part of the integrated model image is difficult to see due to the "image related to the pre-performance". Therefore, it goes without saying that while it is possible to recognize that the integrated model image may be displayed in a special manner, it is at least not easy to recognize in what manner the integrated model image is being displayed. Furthermore, at the time when the second permissible sound starts to be output, the first permissible sound may be maintained in an output state, or the first permissible sound may be terminated from an output state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a third condition (third acceptance allowance state) different from either the first condition (first acceptance allowance state) or the second condition (second acceptance allowance state) is satisfied, the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any acceptance allowance sound (first acceptance allowance sound or second acceptance allowance sound), and when an operation is accepted on the operation means (here, the operation button 410) while the integrated model image is displayed, a display change or a post-operation output sound may be generated, as when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance allowance state or the second acceptance allowance state. In this case, the content of the display change or post-operation output sound may differ depending on the type of acceptance allowance state (first acceptance allowance state, second acceptance allowance state, third acceptance allowance state).

That is, by displaying the integrated model image without outputting any acceptance permission sound, it becomes difficult to know when the acceptance of operations became acceptable, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the operations. Therefore, when adopting such a configuration, it is desirable to display the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image in one of the modes shown in Figures 151 to 155 after displaying the integrated model image. With such a configuration, a "gauge stop period" occurs during which the gauge image GG is not reduced, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined value (0) and the integrated model image is hidden while remaining this area. This makes it possible to preferably maintain the tension when the acceptance permission state occurs, and it is possible to more preferably improve the interest in the game related to the operations.

Or, when the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any reception permission sound, the gauge image may not be displayed within the integrated model image, and the display target area may not even be provided. Such a display method is as described above with reference to Figures 159 and 160, although the operation target is different. For example, "the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the same image (peripheral decoration image) as when the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed is intentionally displayed, or the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image," and the technical idea can be applied in the same way. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension regarding how much time is left, and it is possible to more preferably increase the interest in the game related to the operation.

Also, even in the acceptance state in this example, there are cases where operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, and cases where operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. In this example, "outputting a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) in a suppressed mode" includes cases where a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output at a volume of "0" (silent output). "Non-output state" includes, for example, a case where no allocation to a channel has even been made.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of reception allowance states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, and a plurality of reception allowance states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. The above-mentioned "first reception allowance state" and "third reception allowance state" are included as one of the reception allowance states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, and the above-mentioned "second reception allowance state" is included as one of the reception allowance states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode.

With this configuration, when the BGM playback sound (a specific type of sound effect) is suppressed or not output, the viewer can be aware of the possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special manner, which makes it possible to avoid a situation that lacks dramatic effect and allows the viewer to enjoy the performance with greater concentration even when the BGM playback sound is suppressed or not output.

Note that "an acceptance-permitting state in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state" may be a state in which a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) that is being output in a non-suppressed mode is output in a suppressed mode or is put in a non-output state, and then an acceptance-permitting state is generated, or it may be a state in which a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed mode and then an acceptance-permitting state is generated while the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, and while the acceptance-permitting state is generated (or at the same time), the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or is put in a non-output state. In short, it is sufficient that operation acceptance can be performed while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state.

Also, even in the reception-permitted state in this example, if no operation is detected within the set time during which operation reception is permitted, the system may be executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display changes as when the operation is detected, or in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display changes as when the operation is detected.

Here, the reception permission state in which the “automatic reception mode” is executed among the reception permission states is as described above.
・It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound is output only when the device is set to a special performance state (automatic reception mode), regardless of whether or not the device is operated during the valid period.
- It means that regardless of the presentation state (presentation setting state), post-operation display and post-operation sound are output regardless of whether or not an operation is performed during the valid period. In the first place, it is not necessary to prepare a "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" or "multiple presentation states" as the presentation state. In addition, when a reception allowance state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed among the reception allowance states occurs when the reception allowance state is set to a special presentation state (automatic reception mode), either one may be adopted as to whether or not automatic reception is enabled (for example, it may be "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the presentation state" or "automatic reception is enabled only when the special presentation state (automatic reception mode) is set"), and it is not related to the configuration related to the technical features described here.

More specifically, when game settings are possible during the demo screen (period when the pattern change is not being performed), automatic reception is always enabled in the reception allowance state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed, regardless of which of the settings is selected. And, when at least certain setting conditions are met among those settings, the reception allowance state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed and the reception allowance state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed can occur under different occurrence conditions. The game settings include settings for the special presentation state (automatic reception mode), as well as settings for volume, brightness, and the probability of presentation appearance, and the settings for the special presentation state (automatic reception mode) do not necessarily have to be installed. When a setting for the special presentation state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the special presentation state (automatic reception mode) is not set under "certain setting conditions".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, at least when certain set conditions are met, there are multiple reception permission states in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed, and multiple reception permission states in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed, and the above-mentioned "first reception permission state" is included as one of the reception permission states in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed, and the above-mentioned "second reception permission state" and "third reception permission state" are included as one of the reception permission states in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed.

According to this configuration, in the first reception permission state where there is a possibility that the integrated mochi image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (there is a possibility that interest in playing will drop significantly if operation is forgotten), the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Therefore, even if operation is forgotten when the integrated mochi image is displayed in a special mode with high expectation (a mode in which the probability of stopping at a jackpot pattern is higher than other modes), it is possible to generate a post-operation performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decoration), and it is possible to suppress a drop in interest in playing. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state and the third reception permission state where there is no possibility that the integrated mochi image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (there is a possibility that interest in playing will drop significantly if operation is forgotten), the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed, so it is possible to suppress a drop in interest in playing when operation is forgotten, while appropriately maintaining the sense of tension when operation acceptance is permitted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a portion of the period during which the reception permissible sound is output overlaps with the reception permissible state, and if an operation is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception permissible sound can be terminated midway (made inaudible) based on the acceptance of the operation.

This configuration makes it easy to recognize that the timing when the reception permission sound ends midway is the timing when an operation by the player has been detected (operation reception), reducing anxiety about whether "the operation has been received or not yet."

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, at least a portion of the period during which the reception allowable sound is output overlaps with the reception allowable state, but even if an operation is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception allowable sound may be maintained without being terminated midway (to an inaudible state) based on the acceptance of the operation. As will be described later, there are multiple reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is terminated midway and multiple reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated midway, and the above-mentioned "first reception allowable state" is included as one of the reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is terminated midway, and the above-mentioned "second reception allowable state" is included as one of the reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated midway.

According to this configuration, in the first reception permission state in which there is a possibility that the integrated mochi image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (there is a possibility that interest in playing will decrease significantly if an operation is forgotten), if an operation is accepted when the reception permission sound is output, this will be terminated midway. Therefore, when the integrated mochi image is displayed in a special mode with a high expectation (a mode in which the probability of stopping at a jackpot pattern is higher than other modes), the player will not feel anxious about whether "the operation has been accepted or not yet," and will be able to concentrate on the post-operation performance such as the post-operation display, post-operation output sound, changes in the light emitted by the lamp, and the performance action of the movable decoration, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in playing. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state in which there is no possibility that the integrated mochi image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (there is a possibility that interest in playing will decrease significantly if an operation is forgotten), this will not be terminated midway even if an operation is accepted when the reception permission sound is output, so that the tension when operating can be appropriately maintained while suppressing a decrease in interest in playing.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or when operation acceptance is permitted in a non-output state, the integrated model image is sometimes displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) and sometimes displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIG. 144(a)-(c)).

More specifically, the acceptance acceptance state in which acceptance of operations is permitted when a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state includes at least the first acceptance acceptance state which occurs when the first condition is satisfied, as well as a fourth acceptance acceptance state which occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. In the first acceptance acceptance state, there are times when the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) and times when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIG. 144(a) to (c)). However, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state, the integrated model image is never displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)), but is only displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIG. 144(a) to (c)). In the first reception permissible state, if an operation is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in an output state, the output state of the reception permissible sound is terminated midway (made inaudible) based on the acceptance of the operation, whereas in the fourth reception permissible state, if an operation is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in an output state, the output state of the reception permissible sound is not terminated midway (made inaudible) based on the acceptance of the operation.

According to this configuration, when a reception permissible state occurs in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output, and the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode in the reception permissible state, the reception permissible sound is terminated midway based on the operation reception. In contrast, when a reception permissible state occurs in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output, and the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode in the reception permissible state, the reception permissible sound may be terminated midway based on the operation reception, or the reception permissible sound may be maintained without being terminated midway.

In this case, when a specific type of sound effect (background music playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, in an operation acceptance acceptance state in which operation acceptance is accepted, if the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (a mode in which interest in playing is unlikely to decrease significantly if an operation is forgotten), even if an operation is accepted, the acceptance acceptance sound may end midway based on the operation acceptance, or the acceptance acceptance sound may be continued without being ended midway. Therefore, when the acceptance acceptance sound does not end midway, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether this is because an operation has not been accepted, or because an operation has been accepted but the fourth acceptance acceptance state has occurred, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension while suppressing a decrease in interest in playing.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first reception allowable state occurs, a wide-area pre-performance using at least half of the specified display area (e.g., the performance display device 1600) is started beforehand, and when the second reception allowable state occurs, a narrow-area pre-performance using less than half of the specified display area is started beforehand. A mock image (here, an integrated mock image) that mimics the operation receiving section is displayed both during the period when the wide-area pre-performance is being executed and during the period when the first reception allowable state occurs, but is displayed in a different manner during the period when the wide-area pre-performance is being executed and during the period when the first reception allowable state occurs.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated model image (model image) displayed during the period when the wide-area pre-performance is being executed and the integrated model image (model image) displayed during the period when the first reception allowance state is occurring are modeled after the same operation receiving section (operation button 410), but are displayed based on different image data, and as a result, not only are the color schemes different, but the outline shapes themselves are displayed as being different.

With this configuration, when performing a wide-area pre-show, it is possible to display the integrated mock-up image (mock image) in a more independent expression with a higher degree of freedom, without being bound by the form (image data) of the integrated mock-up image (mock image) displayed in the first reception-allowed state, which makes it possible to greatly improve the presentation when performing a pre-show over a wider area (wide-area pre-show). It is clear that this effect cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on a single image data.

In addition, in a state where wide-area pre-effects are executed, the probability that a performance mode that appears only when a jackpot has been obtained will appear as a post-operation effect is higher than in a state where narrow-area pre-effects are executed. This probability may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 in this example, multiple reception allowance states are prepared as reception allowance states corresponding to wide-area pre-performance (where wide-area pre-performance is executed), with the first reception allowance state and the third reception allowance state being prepared as one of these reception allowance states. Also, multiple reception allowance states are prepared as reception allowance states corresponding to narrow-area pre-performance (where narrow-area pre-performance is executed), with the second reception allowance state and the fourth reception allowance state being prepared as one of these reception allowance states.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception permission state, operation reception can be performed while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, and in the second reception permission state, operation reception can be performed while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is in a non-suppressed mode. In other words, when a narrow-area pre-performance with relatively poor performance is performed, operation reception can be performed while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is not in a suppressed mode but in a non-suppressed mode (second reception permission state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that a wide-area pre-performance with relatively excellent performance was not performed can be suppressed. In contrast, when a specific type of sound effect (background music playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or an operation can be accepted while the sound effect is not being output, a wide-area pre-effect that has relatively superior performance quality is performed (first acceptance-permitted state), and this can prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the failure to accept an operation while a specific type of sound effect (background music playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least when in a specific setting condition (one performance state), in the first reception allowance state, when an operation is not detected within the set time in which operation reception is allowed, the machine is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception allowance state, when an operation is not detected within the set time in which operation reception is allowed, the machine is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. In other words, in the first reception allowance state in which a wide-area pre-performance is performed, there is a concern that a decrease in interest in the game will occur when an operation is forgotten due to its high performance, but since the machine is executed in the automatic reception mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten. In contrast, in the second acceptance state where a narrow-area pre-show is performed, the fact that operation acceptance is permitted is indicated in a relatively unnoticeable manner. In this case, only those who pay close attention to the show and realize that operation acceptance is permitted can enjoy the post-operation effects such as the post-operation display and post-operation output sound, so the sense of tension can be maintained in an optimal manner.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the acceptance acceptance state in which the operation acceptance is accepted while the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state includes at least the first acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. In this regard, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state, the operation acceptance is allowed while the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in the fourth suppressed mode, but in the first acceptance acceptance state, the operation acceptance is allowed while the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in the first suppressed mode, which is more suppressed than the fourth suppressed mode, or is in a non-output state. In addition, when the fourth acceptance acceptance state occurs, a narrow-area pre-performance using less than half of the specified display area is started prior to this. That is, when a narrow-area pre-effect with relatively poor performance is performed, even if a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is in a suppression mode, the degree of suppression is low (fourth reception-permitted state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a wide-area pre-effect with relatively superior performance is not performed can be suppressed. On the other hand, when a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a first suppression mode with a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while in a non-output state (first reception-permitted state), a wide-area pre-effect with relatively superior performance is performed, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) not being suppressed to a low degree can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first reception-permitting state occurs and a player performs an operation while the model image (integrated model image) is displayed, a post-operation performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable ornament) corresponding to the operation reception is started to be executed, and a wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance performance) using at least half of a specified display area (e.g., the performance display device 1600, etc.) is executed when the model image (integrated model image) is made invisible. When the second acceptance permission state occurs and the player accepts an operation while the model image (integrated model image) is displayed, a post-operation performance (at least one of a display change on the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change on the speaker, a change in light emitted by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) corresponding to the operation acceptance is started, and a narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance performance) is executed that uses less than half of a specified display area (e.g., the performance display device 1600) when the model image (integrated model image) is made invisible.

Here, the term "disappearance effect" (wide-area disappearance effect, narrow-area disappearance effect) refers to an "image other than the Mosaic image" or a "display effect for the Mosaic image" that is displayed in such a way that a part or the whole of the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) in the displayed state is made difficult to see or cannot be seen. Such a disappearance effect (disappearance performance) may be, for example, an image displayed in a different layer before the layer in which the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) is displayed, or the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed in the video to show a state in which a part or the whole of the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) becomes difficult to see due to the image (disappearance effect), or it may be executed by changing the display mode of the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) itself (display effect). However, in order to suggest the degree of expectation as a disappearance effect and to increase interest in the game, it goes without saying that it is more desirable to display a separate image when the model image (integrated model image) is hidden.

Furthermore, "when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible, a disappearance effect is executed" may mean "as the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible, a disappearance effect is executed", or "as the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible (such as the transmittance of the Momo image (integrated Momo image) itself increasing) a disappearance effect is executed", or "after the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible, a disappearance effect is executed", and all of these aspects are included. Furthermore, the increase in the transmittance of the Momo image (integrated Momo image) itself as it is made invisible may be realized as "when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible, a disappearance effect is executed".

With this configuration, when the post-operation performance in response to the operation received by the player starts to be executed and the imitation image is hidden, a wide-area disappearance effect may be executed while the post-operation performance is being executed, or a narrow-area disappearance effect may be executed, thereby improving the performance up until the time when the imitation image (integrated imitation image) disappears.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when such a disappearance effect (disappearance image) is executed, in the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image), the background image displayed before the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed is displayed (maintained) without change until the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is hidden or while the post-operation performance (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed. In contrast, in the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image), the background image displayed before the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is displayed is changed to a different background image based on the operation acceptance by the player until the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is hidden or while the post-operation performance (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed.

That is, when the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is executed, not only the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) but also at least a part of the background image is made difficult to see by the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image). Therefore, by changing (replacing) the background image with a different background image at the timing when such a wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is executed, a smooth transition of the presentation (transition to a new presentation situation) using the button presentation can be realized. For example, the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) may be an image displayed in a different layer that is located before the layer in which the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) is displayed and the layer in which the background image is displayed, or the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and a state in which a part or the whole of the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) and a part or the whole of the background image become difficult to see by the image (disappearance effect) may be expressed in the video.

In contrast, when a narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is executed, the background image does not change while the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is hidden or while the post-operation performance (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed, so a performance transition (transition to a new performance situation) is not realized. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the post-operation performance, as well as whether the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) or the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed, and the game interest related to the model image can be appropriately maintained from the time the model image (integrated model image) is displayed until it is hidden.

In addition, when a wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is displayed, the probability of a jackpot presentation mode that only appears when a jackpot has been obtained appears as a post-operation presentation is higher than when a narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed. This probability may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, multiple acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states corresponding to the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) (where the wide-area disappearance effect is executed), with the first acceptance allowance state and the third acceptance allowance state being prepared as one of these acceptance allowance states. Also, multiple acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states corresponding to the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) (where the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed), with the second acceptance allowance state and the fourth acceptance allowance state being prepared as one of these acceptance allowance states.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception-permitting state, the player's operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, and in the second reception-permitting state, the player's operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is in a non-suppressed mode, as described above. In other words, when a narrow-area type disappearance effect with relatively poor performance is performed, the player's operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is not in a suppressed mode but in a non-suppressed mode (second reception-permitting state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that a wide-area type disappearance effect with relatively excellent performance was not performed can be suppressed. In contrast, when a player's operation can be accepted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, a wide-area vanishing effect, which has a relatively superior dramatic effect, is performed (first acceptance-permitted state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a player's operation not being accepted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least when it is in a specific setting condition (one performance state), in the first reception-permitting state, when an operation by the player is not detected within a set time in which the reception of the operation by the player is permitted, it is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception-permitting state, when an operation by the player is not detected within a set time in which the reception of the operation by the player is permitted, it is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected, as described above. That is, in the first reception-permitting state in which the wide-area type disappearance effect is performed, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease when an operation is forgotten due to its high performance, but since it is executed in the above-mentioned automatic reception mode, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten. That is, in this case, even if the automatic reception works without the operation being received by the player, the wide-area type disappearance effect will be executed in the same mode as when the operation is received by the player. In contrast, in the second reception allowing state in which the narrow-range disappearance effect is performed, the above-mentioned non-automatic reception mode is executed, so that if the set time elapses without the player performing any operation (the second reception allowing state ends), the imitation image is hidden without performing any post-operation performance (at least one of the display change in the performance display device 1600, the performance sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the performance action by the movable ornament). In this regard, in the second reception allowing state, the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed even when the imitation image is hidden without performing the post-operation performance, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game when the post-operation performance is not performed as a result of forgetting to perform an operation. In this case, the narrow-range disappearance effect may be executed in the same mode (same image) as when the operation is accepted and the post-operation performance is performed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception allowing state according to this example, the narrow-range disappearance effect that appears when the operation is accepted and the post-operation performance is performed and the narrow-range disappearance effect that appears when the operation is not accepted and the post-operation performance is not performed are different modes (images) from each other.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the acceptance acceptance state in which the acceptance of the operation by the player is accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state includes at least the first acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. In the fourth acceptance acceptance state, the acceptance of the operation by the player is accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the fourth suppressed mode, but in the first acceptance acceptance state, the acceptance of the operation by the player is accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppressed mode, which is more suppressed than the fourth suppressed mode, or in a non-output state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance of the operation by the player is accepted in the fourth acceptance acceptance state, a narrow-area type disappearance effect is executed instead of a wide-area type disappearance effect. That is, when a narrow-range extinction effect with relatively poor performance is performed, the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is suppressed beforehand, but the degree of suppression is low (fourth reception-permitting state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that a wide-range extinction effect with relatively superior performance was not performed can be suppressed. On the other hand, when a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode with a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while in a non-output state (first reception-permitting state), a wide-range extinction effect with relatively superior performance is performed, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) was not low can be suppressed.

Figure 161 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the second condition is satisfied and the second reception permissible state occurs under the specific setting condition (presentation setting). Figure 163 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a fluctuation pattern in which the second reception permissible state occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved time consumed) in the normal game state (non-variable/non-time-saving), and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ variation performance (performance depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "second variation pattern" itself.

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) corresponding to the second variation pattern (when the second condition is met), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the second acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which operation acceptance regarding the second post-operation performance is allowed when timing tB3 arrives, which is the second predetermined time after the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in Figure 161 (b) (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 163 (d)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second reception permission state (valid period) is a "non-suppression reception permission state (see FIG. 161(a) and (b))" in which the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" according to the second fluctuation pattern, for example, the BGM playback sound during normal fluctuation is maintained in an output state in a non-suppression mode, and if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which the operation reception is permitted, a "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 161(h))" in which a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) corresponding to the second reception permission state is not generated.
This is done as a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" executed by the above.

With this configuration, the set time (valid period) during which operation acceptance is permitted is suddenly set without any dramatic effect such as the "BGM playback sound" being switched to a suppressed mode to suggest the occurrence of an acceptance-permitted state (non-suppressed acceptance effect), which takes the player by surprise and makes it easier for delays to occur when starting to move when attempting to operate. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time ends without the post-operation effect occurring (non-automatic acceptance mode), which makes it possible to maintain a good sense of tension by making the player aware of the risk of missing an opportunity for the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) to occur.

However, although such a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" has a lower rate (which may be 0% or 100%) of post-operation effects (here, the second post-operation effect) being performed in a manner that only appears at the time of a jackpot than the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" described below, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease if the post-operation effect does not occur frequently against the player's will. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 161(b), (e), and (i), when timing tB2 arrives, which is slightly before the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) at which operation reception is permitted, the "reception permission sound (here, the first permission sound)" is output (corresponding to the "situation shown in Fig. 163(c)"), and even if an operation is accepted at timing tB3a within the set time, the output state is maintained across this. This allows the player to recognize that operation acceptance is permitted at timing tB2, slightly before timing tB3 when the second acceptance acceptance state setting time (timing tB3-tB4) is set, and is expected to reduce the frequency of "the player noticing that acceptance of operation is permitted too late, and the player is unable to operate in time, resulting in the post-operation performance (here, the second post-operation performance) not occurring." However, the "acceptance acceptance sound (here, the first acceptance sound)" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tB3-tB4) occurs; for example, it may be generated in time with the occurrence of timing tB3, the occurrence of the set time.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptable sound", a first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as "Peek!", and a second allowable sound that is output as a message sound such as "Push!" are prepared. However, as shown in Figures 161(f) and (j), in the second acceptable state, the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output, so that the output restriction on such "acceptable sound" also makes it easier for delays to occur in the start of movement when the player tries to operate the machine.

Incidentally, in the second operation acceptance state, as a countermeasure against the set time being suddenly set or being executed in a non-automatic operation acceptance mode, some players may try not to miss the opportunity for the post-operation effect to occur by repeatedly tapping the operation means (here, operation button 410) from a state in which operation acceptance is not permitted. However, in this case, since the post-operation effect starts immediately after operation acceptance is permitted, it becomes difficult to know whether the effect that has started is "performed in response to operation acceptance (post-operation effect)" or "automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect unrelated to operation acceptance," and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 161 (particularly FIG. 161(e)), in the second acceptance state, if an effect is accepted at timing tB3a when the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is in an output state after the set time (validity period) has occurred, the set time itself is terminated, but the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated midway, and its output state is maintained until it has finished being output as the first acceptable sound (timing tB3c (FIGS. 161(e) and (i)), which is the same as when no operation has been performed). This makes it possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether the started effect is "one that is performed in response to operation acceptance (post-operation effect)" or "one that has automatically occurred as an effect unrelated to operation acceptance".

In addition, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 161, when the performance is accepted within the set time of the second acceptance allowance state (timing tB3a in the figure), at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are generated as a post-operation performance corresponding to the operation acceptance (see FIG. 161(d)). In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker are maintained in an execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is made invisible at a predetermined timing that arrives after timing tB4 regardless of when the performance is accepted within the set time (validity period), whereas the post-operation output sound (performance sound) may be made to maintain an output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the performance is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, if timing tB4 has not yet elapsed, it is required that both the post-operation display effect (LCD display) and the post-operation output sound (sound effect) remain in their output state.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 161, when the timing tB2 arrives before the timing tB3 at which the set time of the second reception allowance state is set, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means to be operated, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is also performed (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(c)"). This allows the player to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at timing tB2, which is slightly before timing tB3 at which the set time of the second reception allowance state (timings tB3 to tB4) is set, and it is expected that the frequent occurrence of "the player being late in noticing that the operation reception is permitted, and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation performance (here, the second post-operation performance) does not occur and ends without occurring" is less likely to occur. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the reception allowance sound (first allowance sound) starts to be output, but this is not limited to this, and either one may start earlier. Alternatively, only one of the mock image and the acceptable sound (for example, only the mock image) may be started before timing tB3.

As described above, the mock image (an image modeled after the operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is given) displayed when the second reception permissible state occurs is displayed as an integrated mock image IG integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the mock image. This "integrated mock image IG" is as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as described as another example or modified example thereof, and for example, a display target area (section image KG) for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated mock image IG", and similarly, one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, in this second reception allowance state, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated model images," a special mode with a high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is not included as a subject of the lottery (selection), and only modes different from the special mode (for example, the normal mode shown in FIG. 144(a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 163, the integrated model image IGa, which has the lowest expectation, is displayed as the integrated model image IG.

In the example shown in Figures 161(c) to (f), it is assumed that timing tB3a arrives while such an integrated model image is being displayed, and an operation is accepted. When an operation is accepted under such circumstances, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, output related to the liquid crystal display and output related to the performance sound are started as post-operation performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable ornament) (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 163(f)").

However, as shown in Fig. 161(c), (d) and Fig. 163(f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the post-operation performance starts, the integrated model image IG is not hidden, but remains displayed. More specifically, even if an operation is accepted, at that time (timing tB3a), no change is caused by the operation in the integrated model image IG (specific layer), and until timing tB3b arrives, which is a short time (predetermined time), the "display of the integrated model image IG" continues in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also allowed to decrease in the same manner as before. In the example shown in Fig. 163, a conversation announcement by the princess character (this might be your chance) is displayed as the post-operation performance (output on the liquid crystal display).

Then, when timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearance effect) is displayed to make all or part of the displayed integrated model image difficult to see or impossible to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(g)"). As described above, such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer prior to the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image in which the integrated model image IG and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and in which the video shows the integrated model image IG becoming difficult to see in part or in whole due to the image KSE (disappearance effect).

As shown in FIG. 161(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, the integrated model image IG is not hidden even when the image KSE (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed, but remains displayed. More specifically, even when the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), no change is caused to the integrated model image IG in the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, and the display area of the gauge image GG continues to decrease in the same manner as before. However, because the disappearance effect is displayed in a layer ahead of that, the model image and gauge image GG become difficult to see or cannot be seen at all.

That is, in this case, even though the disappearance effect image KSE (the same applies to the wide-area disappearance effect image HSE described later) is displayed on a specified layer with the aim of making the model image (integrated model image IG) difficult to view or impossible to view, the model image (integrated model image IG) itself displayed on a specific layer (behind the specified layer (lower priority side)) is maintained in the same state as when operation acceptance was permitted, and no changes are made. Also, the display of the gauge image GG, which continues to reduce its display area, continues across operation acceptance. As a result, even while the model image (integrated model image IG) is in the process of being difficult to view or impossible to view, it becomes possible to view (at least a part of) the state when operation acceptance was permitted, and it becomes possible to shorten the time for which the state shown in FIG. 163(f) should be maintained.

Then, during the period in which the image KSE of the disappearance effect is displayed (timings tB3b to tB3d), the display output (display on the layer) of the integrated model image IG is terminated (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(i)"). From this point on, the image KSE of the disappearance effect (here, a narrow-area disappearance effect using less than half of the specified display area) is displayed in a situation in which the integrated model image IG is not displayed on the layer either. The image KSE of such a disappearance effect is made invisible when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tB3d) since its display began (timing tB3b) (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(j)"). In this regard, it is desirable to set the timing tB3d at which it is made invisible so that it arrives within the period in which the display change (here, the liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 is being executed, particularly in the post-operation performance, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted. That is, as will be described later, the disappearance effect image KSE and integrated model image IG are displayed on a layer in front of the image related to the display change in the performance display device 1600 (the conversation announcement by the princess character), and are displayed overlapping this. Therefore, as shown in Figures 163 (g) to (i), while the disappearance effect image KSE is displayed, the image related to the display change in the performance display device 1600 (the conversation announcement by the princess character) is made difficult to see. The same applies to the wide-area disappearance effect.

According to this configuration, when an operation is accepted, not only does the post-operation performance begin, but the state in which the integrated model image IG was displayed at the time the operation was accepted (which of Figures 144(a) to (d) was it, and how much time is remaining as indicated by the gauge image GG, etc.) is maintained in a state in which it is possible to grasp this (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 163(f)"). After this, the display of the disappearance effect image KSE, which makes the "image relating to the display change in the performance display device 1600" and the integrated model image IG difficult to see, begins (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 163(g)"). As described above, there are two types of disappearance effects: a narrow-area disappearance effect with low dramatic effect and a wide-area disappearance effect with low dramatic effect, and in this case, the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed. While this type of disappearance effect image KSE is displayed, the integrated model image IG becomes hidden (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 163 (i)"). After that, when the disappearance effect image KSE is hidden, the "image relating to the display change on the performance display device 1600 (conversation announcement by the princess character)" from the post-operation performance finally becomes visible in a clear state (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 163 (j)").

In this case, when an operation is accepted, first you can enjoy what state the integrated model image IG was in, then you can enjoy what state will appear as the disappearance effect, and after that you can enjoy what state will appear as the post-operation performance (here, one of multiple conversation preview modes with different expectations), so this variety of performances can increase your interest in the game when an operation is accepted.

In order to optimally obtain such an effect, it would be more desirable to change the timing at which the image (post-operation performance) related to the display change on the performance display device 1600 starts to be displayed not at timing tB3a, but at timing tB3b, or within the period during which the disappearance effect is being executed (timings tB3b to tB3d). However, even in this case, the post-operation performance using sound effects and lamps will start to be executed at timing tB3a, so the start timing of the post-operation performance itself will remain at timing tB3a.

In contrast to this, the examples shown in Figures 161(g) to (j) assume that the set time has passed (the second reception permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As described above, the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, so if the set time has passed without any operation by the player, the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) will be hidden without any post-operation performance being performed.

However, as described above, as shown in FIG. 161(b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the state in which operation reception is permitted (second reception permitted state) is ended, the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) on the specific layer is not hidden, but maintains the display state that was displayed when the reception was permitted. More specifically, even if the operation reception is no longer permitted, at that time (timing tB4), no change is caused to the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) due to this, and the "display related to the model image" is continued in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted until timing tB4a arrives, which is a short time (predetermined time) after that. Also, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area even when the state in which operation reception is permitted (second reception permitted state) is ended, and the display area is reduced so that the display area becomes "0" after timing tB4.

With this configuration, even if the valid period (second acceptance state) ends without any operation, it is possible to check in which state (among multiple states with different degrees of expectation) the model image was displayed. In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to "0" after the valid period ends, it is possible to encourage the player to think "that was close" when they were unable to accept the operation at the last minute, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In this example, the time from time tB4 when the valid period (second reception-permitted state) ends without any operation being accepted until the model image is made invisible (invisible) is set shorter than the time from time tB3a when an operation is accepted until the model image is made invisible (invisible).

As described above, in the second reception allowance state, if the set time has elapsed without the player's operation being detected, the post-operation performance is not executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 161(g), a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed when the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is made invisible, and the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is made invisible while the narrow-area disappearance effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, the narrow-area disappearance effect (FIG. 161(g)) when the post-operation performance is not executed is executed in a different manner (image) from the narrow-area disappearance effect (FIG. 161(c)) when the post-operation performance is executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the player is unable to understand whether the operation has been accepted (whether the player made it in time), the player can properly understand the situation by checking the state of the narrow-area disappearance effect, and thus the player is able to avoid a decline in interest in the game due to the player being unable to grasp whether the post-operation performance is being performed. In order to obtain such an effect, it is desirable that the state of the narrow-area disappearance effect (Fig. 161(c)) when the post-operation performance is performed does not appear when the post-operation performance is not performed (Fig. 161(g)). However, for example, if the narrow-area disappearance effect (Fig. 161(c)) when the post-operation performance is performed is a combination of two modes, "A (e.g., a change in the model image itself)" and "B (e.g., an image other than the model image)," the narrow-area disappearance effect (Fig. 161(g)) when the post-operation performance is not performed may be performed in "A." Even with this configuration, it is possible to know that no operation has been accepted when the "B" pattern does not appear in the narrow-area disappearance effect, and this avoids a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to know whether a post-operation performance is being performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 161, when timing tB1 arrives before timing tB3 when the second reception allowable state occurs, a narrow-area pre-effect using less than half of the specified display area is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(b)"). Then, during the period when the image KTH related to such a narrow-area pre-effect is displayed, the display of a mock image (here, the integrated mock image IGa) that imitates the operation receiving part and the output of the first allowable sound are started (timing tB2, corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(c)"). At the time when the display of the mock image (here, the integrated mock image IGa) starts, a part or the whole of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is difficult to see due to the image KTH related to the narrow-area pre-effect. That is, as time passes, the range in which the image related to the narrow-area pre-effect is displayed is reduced, and its transparency is increased, thereby providing a performance in which the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG) is gradually increased (FIGS. 163(b)-(d)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, while the narrow-area pre-effect is being executed and the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is being displayed, the timing tB3 at which the second acceptance allowable state occurs arrives, and operation acceptance is permitted (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(d)"). That is, in this case, since operation acceptance is permitted at an intermediate stage in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is being increased, it becomes possible to provide strategic presentations, such as whether to make the operation acceptance (post-operation presentation) take place without checking the appearance (expectation) of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) and hide it, or to make the operation acceptance (post-operation presentation) take place after checking the appearance (expectation) of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) and hide it.

The image KTH used in such a narrow-area pre-performance may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer before the layer in which the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is displayed, or may be an image in which the mock image (integrated mock image) and the image (narrow-area pre-performance) are displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and the video shows the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) gradually increasing.

In addition, in the narrow-area pre-performance, not only the image display on the performance display device 1600 but also the output of related performance sounds may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permissible state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and is intended to maintain tension regarding operations, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the narrow-area pre-performance as an image display on the performance display device 1600 without outputting related performance sounds, in order to increase concentration on the performance.

In addition, multiple modes with different degrees of expectation may be prepared as the narrow-area pre-effect, and one of these modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the effect judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment. However, considering that the second reception-permitting state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, and if an operation is forgotten, the post-operation effect will not be executed, it is desirable to prepare only one mode for the narrow-area pre-effect and have it displayed only in that one mode, in order to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten.

Figure 162 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the first condition is satisfied and the first reception permissible state occurs under the specific setting condition (presentation setting). Figure 164 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which the first reception permissible state occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved time consumed) in the normal game state (non-variable/non-time-saving), and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "first variation pattern" itself.

As described above, in the performance according to the "first variation pattern", regardless of the result of the performance judgment (preview judgment), when the timing tC4 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ as shown in FIG. 162(b), the above-mentioned first reception allowable state (valid period) in which operation reception for the first post-operation performance is permitted is generated (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(g)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception allowable state (valid period) is generated as follows:
- In a "suppression acceptance permission state (see FIG. 162(a) and (b))" in which the "sound of BGM playback" according to the first variation pattern is output in a suppressed mode or is not output, and even if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the object of operation within a set time (timing tC4 to tC5) in which operation acceptance is permitted, when timing tC4f within the set time arrives, a post-operation performance is started in an "automatic acceptance mode (see FIG. 162(h))."
As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also called a "strong suppression mode."

According to this configuration, since operation reception is permitted while the "BGM playback sound" is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output (suppressed reception effect), it becomes easier for the player to operate as soon as the set time (valid period) occurs. In addition, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is automatically generated at the latest when timing tC4f within the set time arrives (automatic reception mode), so that the player can enjoy operating with a sense of security that he will not miss the highly anticipated post-operation effect. In other words, as described above, in such a "suppressed/automatic reception effect", the rate at which the post-operation effect is performed in a mode that only appears at the time of a jackpot (which may be 0% or 100%) is higher than in the above-mentioned "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect".

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", as in the above-mentioned "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect", as shown in Figs. 162(b), (e), and (i), the "reception permitted sound (here, the first permitted sound)" starts to be output when timing tC3 arrives, which is slightly before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) at which the effect reception is permitted, and the output state is maintained across timing tC4 (corresponding to the "situation shown in Fig. 164(f)"). This allows the player to recognize that the state in which operation reception is permitted will soon occur at timing tC3, even if the player does not recognize that the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, and it is expected to make it less likely that "the effect reception is performed against the player's will by the activation of the automatic button function, not by the player's operation." However, as mentioned above, the "acceptance sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) occurs; for example, it may be generated to coincide with timing tC4, which is when the set time occurs.

In order to more effectively obtain the above-mentioned effect (suppressed reception performance), the timing tC2a at which the "BGM playback sound" transitions from "a state in which it is output in a non-suppressed mode" to "a state in which it is output in a suppressed mode or a state in which it is not output" will be different from that shown in the figure, but it is desirable to set it well before the "output start timing tC4 of the above-mentioned reception-permitted sound that occurs prior to the set time" so that there is a relationship such as "length of timing tC2a to tC3 > length of timing tC3 to tC4". For example, timing tC2a may arrive before the start of the wide-area pre-performance.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 162(f) and (j), in the "suppressed/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance," not only the first permissible sound output as a sound effect such as "Peek!" but also the second permissible sound, which is a message sound such as "Push!", is output as the "reception permitted sound." Moreover, in this example, the output of the second permissible sound is delayed by a predetermined time from the timing tC3 at which the first permissible sound starts to be output, and starts at timing tC4a which arrives while the operation reception is already permitted (valid period).

That is, in this case, in the second acceptance permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated model image IG (model image) cannot be displayed in a specific highly expected manner (special manner), the first permissible sound begins to be output without delay from the occurrence of the set time (valid period), and the second permissible sound is not output. In contrast, in the first acceptance permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated model image IG (model image) can be displayed in a specific highly expected manner (special manner), the first permissible sound begins to be output without delay from the occurrence of the set time (valid period), and the second permissible sound begins to be output with a delay from the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

According to this configuration, the first allowable sound (sound effect) starts to be output when the state of the integrated model image IG (model image) is difficult or impossible to see due to the previous performance, and then, when the first acceptance allowable state (valid period) occurs, the state can be transitioned to one in which both the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output, so that the possibility that the integrated model image IG (model image) will be displayed in a specific highly expected state (special state) can be suggested by whether or not the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output. In other words, if the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output while the first allowable sound (sound effect) is in an output state, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that the integrated model image IG (model image) with a specific highly expected state (special state) will be displayed, and in such an environment, a performance in which the integrated model image IG (model image) is gradually revealed (clarified) is provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in Figures 162 (c) and (f), the second permissible sound begins to be output while the "second wide-area pre-effect" of the wide-area pre-effects is being executed (while the image of the pre-effect is being displayed).

As will be described later, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, there are two cases based on the result of the advance performance judgment: "the operation button 410 is selected as the operation object" and "the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation object." When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation object, a message sound such as "Press it!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation object, a message sound such as "Sheathe your sword!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 162(e), (f), (i), and (j), the "second permissible sound" is used as a sound that is output for a relatively short period of time, and the "first permissible sound" is used as a sound that is output for a relatively long period of time, but the length relationship of these permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, as shown in Fig. 162 (e), (f), (i), and (j), it is preferable that the output states of the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" are maintained for different times, and that the times at which these output states are terminated (the times at which they are made inaudible) occur at different times prior to the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is enabled. With this configuration, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptance allowable sound" is in, it is possible to estimate how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is enabled, and it is expected to make it less likely that "the performance acceptance is performed against the will of the player, not by the player's own operation, but by the activation of the automatic button function."
- A first situation in which only the "first tolerable sound" of the "first tolerable sound" and the "second tolerable sound" maintains its output state - A second situation in which both the "first tolerable sound" and the "second tolerable sound" maintain their output state - A third situation in which the "first tolerable sound" maintains its output state, but the "second tolerable sound" has ceased its output state (made inaudible) - A fourth situation in which both the "first tolerable sound" and the "second tolerable sound" have ceased their output state (made inaudible)

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" in the performance example shown in FIG. 161 and the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" in the performance example shown in FIG. 162 output the same effect sound (for example, "Piki-kin!") as the "first allowable sound". In other words, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the reception allowable sounds is output as an effect sound that is not output in the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect", while the sound effect (first allowable sound) among the reception allowable sounds can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect". This makes it easier to recognize that the reception of effects is allowed (first allowable sound) while maintaining the effect when the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is suppressed (second allowable sound). However, different reception allowable sounds may be output as the first allowable sound for the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" in the example shown in FIG. 161 and the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" in the example shown in FIG. 162.

The length of time between any timings shown in the figures described above and the figures described below may be the minimum time in the control (processing) unit (e.g., one frame) or may be two or more frames. For example, if the acceptance permission sound (first acceptance sound) can be output even slightly ahead of the set time (validity period), the player will be able to recognize that the state in which acceptance of operations is permitted (or has been permitted) that much earlier, which is expected to prevent players from forgetting to perform operations during the period until the end of the set time or the period until the automatic button function is enabled.

In addition, in the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 162, unlike the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 161, when an operation is accepted while the acceptable sound (at least one of the first and second acceptable sounds) is in an output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. That is, in this case, when the player performs an operation, the output of the acceptable sound (first and second acceptable sounds) is interrupted at that point, so that the player can recognize that the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted (valid period) has ended. This makes it difficult to mistakenly recognize that an operation has been accepted even when no operation has been accepted, and it is possible to prevent the automatic acceptance function from being activated against the player's intention. Note that, if an operation is performed and an operation is accepted at a timing prior to the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period), the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted ends at the time the operation is accepted, so it goes without saying that the automatic button function will not be activated even if the timing tC4f arrives.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 162(e) and (f), the first allowable sound starts to be output immediately after the set time (valid period) occurs, and the second allowable sound starts to be output after the set time (valid period) occurs. With this configuration, the first allowable sound starts to be output no matter how early the player's operation is accepted, but depending on the timing of the operation acceptance (when the operation is accepted between timings tC3 and tC4a), the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted ends without the second allowable sound starting to be output, and the post-operation performance (here, the first post-operation performance) is executed. Note that if an operation is performed between timings tC3 and tC4, no operation is accepted, and the first allowable sound is not terminated as a result of this. Also, if the operation is accepted before timing tC4a arrives, the second allowable sound does not start to be output.

With this configuration, it is up to the player to choose whether to start the post-operation performance after confirming that the second permissible sound will be output (after confirming that the game is in the first acceptance permissible state), or to start the post-operation performance without confirming that the second permissible sound will be output (without recognizing whether the game is in the first acceptance permissible state or the second acceptance permissible state). This is expected to broaden the scope of play and increase interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in Figures 162(c) and (f), during the period from timing tC3 to tC4a, the image (at least a part of it) relating to the pre-effect (here, the wide-area pre-effect) is not hidden, but is maintained in a displayed state. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the second permissible sound has not yet been output (timing tC3 to tC4a), the pre-effect also prevents the appearance (expectation) of the integrated model image (model image) from being clearly visible, making the above-mentioned gameplay characteristic of "leaving it up to the player's choice" even more interesting.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 162(d), when an operation is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tC4b in the figure), at least a post-operation display (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are generated as a post-operation performance corresponding to the operation acceptance (here, the first post-operation performance) (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(i)"). Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 161, the post-operation display (liquid crystal display) is made invisible (invisible) at a specific timing (same timing) that arrives after timing tC5, regardless of when the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period), whereas the post-operation output sound (performance sound) is maintained in an output state for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the timing of the operation acceptance. In the example shown in FIG. 164, a background preview by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation performance (output on the liquid crystal display).

However, as shown in FIG. 162, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period), it is desirable to set the post-operation output sound (effect sound) so that it maintains its output state at the point in time tC6 at which the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" goes from a suppressed state (non-output state) to being output in a non-suppressed manner.

In contrast, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is ended at timing tC6 when the "BGM playback sound" is output in a non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at timing tC6, the "BGM playback sound" is output in a non-suppressed mode, and the content of the display effect is switched, which is expected to significantly change the presentation and increase interest in the game. However, instead of this, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may also be maintained when timing tC6 arrives. In addition, when returning to output in a non-suppressed mode, the "BGM playback sound" may be gradually returned by a technique such as fading in.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 162, when the timing tC3 arrives before the timing tC4 at which the set time of the first reception allowance state is set, the performance display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means to be operated, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is performed (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"). This allows the player to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at timing tC3, which is slightly before timing tC4 at which the set time of the first reception allowance state (timings tC4 to tC5) is set, and it is expected that the frequent occurrence of "the player being late in noticing that the operation reception is permitted, and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation performance (here, the first post-operation performance) does not occur and ends without occurring" is less likely to occur. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the reception allowance sound (first allowance sound) starts to be output, but this is not limited to this, and either one may start earlier. Alternatively, only one of the mock image and the acceptable sound (for example, only the mock image) may be started before timing tC4.

As described above, the mock image (an image modeled after the operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is given) displayed when the first reception permissible state occurs is also displayed as an integrated mock image IG integrated with the border decoration image that decorates the border of the mock image. This "integrated mock image IG" is as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as described as another example or modified example thereof, and for example, a display target area (partition area KG) for a gauge image GG (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated mock image IG," and similarly, one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, unlike the second reception permission state, in the first reception permission state, a special form with a high expectation among the multiple forms prepared as the "integrated model image IG" (for example, the form shown in FIG. 144(d) (integrated model image IGd)) is included as a subject for the lottery (selection) and can be displayed, as described above.

In the first reception permission state (FIG. 162) executed in the automatic reception mode, it is conceivable to dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge image GG) based on the time until the timing tc4f arrives, at which the automatic button function is enabled when there is no operation. In this regard, in the first reception permission state (FIG. 162) according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the timing tC5 at which the set time has elapsed, rather than the time until the timing tc4f arrives. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time has elapsed decreases, and when the set time reaches "0", the gauge amount is also dynamically displayed to "0".

With this configuration, when the automatic button function is enabled and the post-operation performance begins, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left, suggesting that there is a risk of "losing an opportunity to operate" against the player's will, and thus encouraging the player to perform an operation at an early stage during the set time (validity period) from the next time onwards, regardless of the remaining amount of the gauge.

However, for the first reception permission state (Figure 162) executed in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation performance as when an operation is received does not necessarily have to be started within the set time, but may be started when or after the set time ends.

The integrated model image IG (model image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 162 does not necessarily have to be the same as the integrated model image IG (model image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 161. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the operating means (operation receiving portion) that is the object of operation is depicted in a deformed manner, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 162, the operating means (operation receiving portion) that is the object of operation may be depicted realistically.

In the example shown in FIG. 161, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG (model image), whereas in the example shown in FIG. 162, the handle 5012 (sword ornament 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated, and may be displayed as an integrated model image IG (model image) (see FIG. 157(a)-(d)). These "integrated model images IGe-IGh" are as described with reference to FIG. 157-FIG. 160, or as described as other examples or modified examples thereof, and for example, a display target area (section image KG) for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. In addition, multiple modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectation levels are prepared as the "integrated model image IG", and one of these modes is selectively displayed in the same manner.

As mentioned above, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 162, there are two cases: "the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. In other words, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) during which the performance reception is allowed occurs, it is desirable to set the set time to a relatively long time such as 5 seconds. In contrast, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tB3 in FIG. 161, there is no "case of selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target", and since the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target, it is desirable to set the set time to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. In this case, it is desirable to set the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is enabled after the timing 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) occurs in order to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses the operation opportunity against his will.

In addition, in the operation acceptance presentation that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 162, if an operating means that is not the operation target is operated, it is desirable that the presentation be accepted and a post-operation presentation be executed even if the operating means that is the operation target is operated while maintaining the erroneous operation state. In other words, if a situation arises in which the presentation is not accepted despite the operation of the operating means, the player may become confused, and in such a situation it would be cruel to interrupt the erroneous operation state and then further request operation of the correct operating means, so it is desirable that the presentation be accepted when the operating means that is the operation target is operated, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained.

As mentioned above, in a suppressed operation acceptance performance, a specific type of performance sound is output in a suppressed mode or is not output before an operation opportunity is given, so there is a concern that the performance will be poorer than in a non-suppressed operation acceptance performance. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) output when a suppressed operation acceptance performance occurs can be output as a sound that maintains an output state for a longer period of time than the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) output when a non-suppressed operation acceptance performance occurs.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple modes (e.g., multiple modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) in which the time for which the output state is maintained is different are prepared as the first permissible sound, and one of the multiple modes is selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. Here, the "first mode" as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIG. 162(e), and is set as the mode in which the "time for which the output state is maintained" is the shortest among the multiple modes. Also, it is desirable to make the probability (expectation) of the appearance of the jackpot pattern when the pattern variation is stopped different depending on which of the multiple modes the first permissible sound is output in.

The "Which of the multiple modes to output as the first allowable sound" and "Which of the multiple operating means to use as the operation object" may be obtained as separate judgment results within the above-mentioned preview performance judgment, or may be obtained as a single judgment result within the above-mentioned preview performance judgment. However, it is desirable that at least the above-mentioned first mode among the multiple modes be selectable as the first allowable sound in both cases where the "operation button 410" is the operation object and where the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation object. In addition, the second and third modes may also be selectable in both cases where the "operation button 410" is the operation object and where the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation object, but it is desirable to prepare a mode that can be output only when the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation object. And, in any of these modes, when the first allowable sound is output, the output state is maintained for a length of time equal to or longer than the time value required for the mode shown in FIG. 161.

In the example shown in Figures 162 (c) to (f), it is assumed that timing tC4 arrives while the integrated model image IG (here, integrated image IGd) is being displayed, and an operation is accepted. When an operation is accepted under such circumstances, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, an output related to the liquid crystal display and an output related to the performance sound are each started as post-operation performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable ornament).

However, as described above and shown in Figs. 162(c) and (d), even in this example, when the post-operation performance starts, the integrated model image IG on the specific layer is not hidden, but maintains the display state from when it was in the operation acceptance state. More specifically, even if an operation is accepted, at that point (timing tC4b, which corresponds to the "situation shown in Fig. 164(i)"), no change is caused to the integrated model image IG due to the operation acceptance, and until timing tC4c arrives, which is a short time (a specified time) after that, the "display of the integrated model image IG" continues in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is accepted, and the display area of the gauge image GG also continues to decrease in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearance effect) is displayed to make all or part of the displayed integrated model image IG difficult to see or impossible to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(j)"). As described above, such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer (predetermined layer) that is located before the specific layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image in which the integrated model image and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and in which the video shows the integrated model image becoming difficult to see in part or in whole due to the image (disappearance effect).

As shown in FIG. 162(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of the performance, the integrated model image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and is not hidden even when the image HSE (disappearance effect) displayed on the specified layer starts to be displayed, but maintains the display state as it was when it was in the reception-permitted state. More specifically, even when the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), no change is caused to the integrated model image IG in the specific layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, and the display area of the gauge image GG continues to decrease in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the disappearance effect on a specified layer further forward, the model image and gauge image GG will gradually become difficult to see or will not be visible at all.

Then, during the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) during which the image HSE of the disappearance effect is displayed, the display output (display on the layer) of the integrated model image IG is terminated, and thereafter, the image HSE of the disappearance effect (here, a wide-area disappearance effect using more than half of the specified display area) is displayed under the circumstances where the integrated model image IG is not displayed on a specific layer. The image HSE of such a disappearance effect is made invisible when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4g) since its display was started (timing tC4c). In this regard, it is desirable to set the timing tC4g at which the image is made invisible so that it arrives within the period during which the display change (here, the liquid crystal display) of the performance display device 1600 is being executed, particularly in the post-operation performance, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted. That is, as will be described later, the image HSE of the disappearance effect and the model image (integrated model image) are displayed on a specified layer in front of the image (post-operation performance) related to the display change in the performance display device 1600, and are displayed in a form that overlaps this. Therefore, while the disappearance effect image HSE is displayed (FIG. 164 (j) and (k)), the image (post-operation performance) related to the display change on the performance display device 1600 is made difficult to see.

With this configuration, when an operation is accepted, not only does the post-operation performance begin, but it also maintains a state in which it is possible to grasp in what form the integrated model image IG was displayed at the time the operation was accepted (which of Figures 144 (a) to (d) it was in, and how much time is remaining as indicated by the gauge image GG, etc.). Then, of the post-operation performance, the display of the disappearance effect image HSE begins in a manner that makes it difficult to see the "image relating to the display change in the performance display device 1600 (background preview by the princess character)" and the integrated model image IG. As described above, there are two types of disappearance effects: a narrow-area disappearance effect with low dramatic effect and a wide-area disappearance effect with low dramatic effect, and here, the wide-area disappearance effect is executed. While this type of disappearance effect image HSE is displayed, the integrated model image IG becomes hidden, and when the disappearance effect image HSE is subsequently made hidden, the "image relating to the display change on the performance display device 1600 (background preview by the princess character)" from the post-operation performance finally becomes visible in a clear state (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 164 (l)").

In this case, when an operation is accepted, first you can enjoy what the integrated model image IG looks like, then you can enjoy what appearance appears as the disappearance effect, and after that you can enjoy what appearance appears as the post-operation presentation, so this variety of presentations can increase your interest in the game when an operation is accepted.

In order to optimally obtain such an effect, it would be more desirable to change the timing at which the image (post-operation performance) related to the display change on the performance display device 1600 starts to be displayed not at timing tC4b, but at timing tC4c, or within the period during which the disappearance effect is being executed (timings tC4c to tC4g). However, even in this case, the post-operation performance using sound effects and lamps will start to be executed at timing tC4b, so the start timing of the post-operation performance itself will remain at timing tC4b.

In contrast to this, the examples shown in Figures 162(g) to (j) assume that the set time has passed (the first reception permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the first reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, even if the set time has passed without any operation by the player, the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) will be hidden while the post-operation performance is being performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162(b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled, the Mogu image (here, the integrated Mogu image) is not hidden, but maintains its display state, as in the case where an operation by the player is accepted. More specifically, even when the automatic button function is enabled, at that time (timing tC4f), no change is caused to the Mogu image (here, the integrated Mogu image) due to the automatic button function being enabled, and the "display related to the Mogu image" continues in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted until timing tC4fa arrives, which is a short time (predetermined time) after that. Also, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area even when the operation acceptance is permitted (second acceptance permitting state) is terminated, and the display area is reduced to "0" after timing tC4f.

With this configuration, even if the post-operation performance is started by activating the automatic button function, it is possible to check in which state (among multiple states with different expectations) the mock image was displayed.

In addition, in this example, the time from time tC4c when the operation is accepted until the model image is hidden (not visible) is set to be the same as the time from time tC4f when the automatic button function is enabled until the model image is hidden (not visible).

In this example, even if the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), as shown in FIG. 162(g), when the Mogu image (here, the integrated Mogu image IG) is hidden, a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, and the Mogu image (here, the integrated Mogu image) is hidden while the wide-area disappearance effect is being executed. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, the image in the wide-area disappearance effect (FIG. 162(c)) when the operation by the player is accepted and the image in the wide-area disappearance effect (FIG. 162(g)) when the automatic button function is enabled are executed in the same manner (both images are "image HSE"). This is different from the example shown in FIG. 161 (where the narrow-area disappearance effect when the Mogu image is hidden in the non-automatic acceptance mode is different from the narrow-area disappearance effect when the operation is performed).

With this configuration, even if the operation is not accepted at the last minute, the same behavior as when the operation is accepted on time will be displayed, which will encourage the player to think that "the operation was accepted on time and the post-operation performance has started," and is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 162, when timing tC1 arrives before timing tC3 when the first reception permissible state occurs, a wide-area pre-performance using more than half of the specified display area is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(b)"). Then, during the period when the wide-area pre-performance is being executed, the display of a mock image (here, the integrated mock image IG) that mimics the operation receiving part and the output of the first permissible sound are started (timing tC3, corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"). At the time when the display of the mock image (here, the integrated mock image IG) starts, part or all of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is difficult to see due to the image related to the wide-area pre-performance. That is, as time passes, the range in which the image related to the wide-area pre-effect is displayed is reduced, and its transparency is increased, thereby providing a performance in which the visibility of the model image (integrated model image) is gradually increased (FIG. 164(f)-(h)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, while the wide-area pre-effect is being executed and the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) is being displayed, the timing tC4 at which the first reception allowable state occurs arrives, and operation reception is permitted. That is, in this case, since operation acceptance is permitted at an intermediate stage in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is being increased, it becomes possible to provide strategic presentations, such as whether to make the operation acceptance (post-operation presentation) take place without checking the appearance (expectation) of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) and hide it, or to make the operation acceptance (post-operation presentation) take place after checking the appearance (expectation) of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) and hide it.

The image used in such a wide-area pre-show may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer before the layer in which the Mosaic Image (integrated Mosaic Image IG) is displayed, or the Mosaic Image (integrated Mosaic Image) and the image (wide-area pre-show) may be displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and the video may express the gradually increasing visibility of the Mosaic Image (integrated Mosaic Image).

In light of the fact that the wide-area pre-performance suggests the occurrence of the relatively highly anticipated first reception permissible state, it is desirable to have the performance display device 1600 not only display an image, but also output a related performance sound, unlike the second reception permissible state. Furthermore, it may be possible to execute the wide-area pre-performance so that a portion of the performance sound functions as the first permissible sound.

In addition, in order to increase interest in the game, it is desirable to provide multiple modes with different degrees of expectation as wide-area pre-shows, and selectively display one of these modes based on the results of a show judgement that is based on the results of a jackpot judgement.

Also, as shown in FIG. 162(c), the wide-area pre-performance in this example is started when timing tC1 in the "first variation pattern" arrives, is executed across timing tC4 when the first reception permissible state occurs, and is terminated within the set time of the first reception permissible state. However, between the start and end of such a wide-area pre-performance, the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance are executed sequentially as the wide-area pre-performance. These two wide-area pre-performances may be displayed as a single video data, or may be displayed as different video data.

Here, the first wide-area pre-performance begins to be displayed when timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164(b)"), and the second wide-area pre-performance begins to be displayed in place of the first wide-area pre-performance when timing tC2 arrives (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164(e)"). However, regardless of which of these pre-performances is being displayed, "an imitation image of the operating means to be operated" is displayed during the period in which the pre-performance is being displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 162(c), a mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed when timing tC1a arrives during the period in which the first wide-area pre-performance is being executed, making it possible to recognize at a relatively early stage which of the multiple operating means the opportunity to operate will be given (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 164(c)"). Figure 164(c) depicts the image HTH1 from the first wide-area pre-performance producing "an image in which the entire mock image (here, the integrated mock image) is whitened", but this is merely a whitened state and is not at the stage where it can be said to be an image that mimics the performance button that is the target of operation. After this, "image A1, which is the entire imitation image (here, the integrated imitation image) in white," is displayed as "image A2, which uses at least one of decoration and pattern to form at least the outline of the imitation image (here, the integrated imitation image)" (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164(d)"), suggesting that the object of operation is an effect button. From this, it can be said that such "image A2" is an imitation image that imitates the operating means that is the object of operation. In other words, this is executed as an effect that makes such image A2 look as if it was created by "image HTH1 by the first wide-area front effect." "The outline of the imitation image (here, the integrated imitation image)" means the outline of the operation receiving portion (here, the outline of the operation receiving portion and the outline of the peripheral decoration image).

However, when timing tC2 arrives, the "second wide-area pre-performance" is started by hiding or making difficult to see the "image A2 as a mock image (integrated mock image)" and the "image HTH1 relating to the first wide-area pre-performance" that were in the displayed state until then (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(e)"). Then, when timing tC3 arrives within the period during which the second wide-area pre-performance is being executed, the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is displayed again (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"), and in this displayed state, timing tC4 arrives at which the first reception-permitting state occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(g)"). In other words, the second mock-up image (FIG. 164 (f)-(k)) continues to be displayed from the time when the operation acceptance is permitted until at least the time when it is no longer permitted, and the operation is accepted while the second mock-up image is displayed, and the post-operation performance (here, the first post-operation performance) begins to be executed.

In this case, the pre-effect is executed twice before the first acceptance state occurs, and in these pre-effects, the "first mock image that is hidden before the acceptance of the operation is permitted (Fig. 164 (c) and (d))" and the "second mock image that continues to be displayed after the acceptance of the operation is permitted (Fig. 164 (f) to (k))" are displayed separately. With this configuration, it is possible to display the mock image (the mock image (first time) that is hidden before the acceptance of the operation is permitted) under a more flexible presentation design without considering the mode in which it should be displayed when the acceptance state occurs (such as the result of the presentation judgment), thereby widening the range of presentations. In this sense, it is desirable to display the "mock image (first time) that is hidden before the acceptance of the operation is permitted" in a mode that cannot be displayed during the period in which the acceptance of the operation is permitted (a mode different from any of the modes shown in Fig. 144).

Here, the mock image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area pre-performance is being performed continues to be displayed in the same manner as the mock image displayed while the narrow-area pre-performance described above, even after the state in which operation reception is permitted occurs, and is therefore displayed in one of the multiple modes shown in FIG. 144 (the special mode, integrated mock image IGd, is used in the example shown in FIG. 162). In contrast, it is desirable to display the mock image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area pre-performance is being performed as an image (here, image A2) having at least one of a shape or pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 144. For example, the shape can be such that the contour of the mock image is rounded, or that curves are used more than straight lines, and a method of displaying the image as an image that represents the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the object of operation in a deformed manner can be adopted. Note that in the narrow-area pre-performance described above, an image having at least one of a shape or pattern (decoration) different from the state in which reception is permitted does not appear.

In addition, when the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, it is desirable to make it possible to display the imitation image (first time) displayed during the first wide-area pre-performance in one mode (the same mode) even if the imitation image (second time) displayed during the second wide-area pre-performance is displayed in any of the multiple modes shown in FIG. 144. In other words, in this case, the first wide-area pre-performance can be used solely to "indicate which type of operation means will soon be given an operation opportunity." Such a first wide-area pre-performance allows the player to recognize the operation object without reducing the player's interest in the game, and after the player recognizes the operation object, the game moves to the second wide-area pre-performance, which suggests the degree of expectation.

In order to obtain such an advantageous effect, it is more desirable to execute the first wide-area pre-effect only when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (sword decoration 5001) with the higher expectation among the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). In other words, in this case, whether an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 occurs or an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the wide-area pre-effect is executable prior to this, but the first wide-area pre-effect is executable only when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 among the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. In this case, the first acceptance permission state may be generated as an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity can be given only to the sword decoration 5001. In contrast, the second wide-area type front performance can be executed when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. In this case, the second wide-area type front performance may be executed in the same manner when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, or may be executed in different manners.

In addition, if the Momo image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area pre-performance is being performed is displayed as an integrated Momo image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG will be formed within that peripheral decoration image, but even in this case, the Momo image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area pre-performance is being performed may be displayed as an image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG. In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the Momo image (integrated Momo image) will be different. In addition, in this case, the Momo image may be displayed as an integrated Momo image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or it may be displayed as an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place.

According to the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the second reception allowable state shown in FIG. 161, the model image (integrated model image IG) is not displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound is output as the reception allowable sound, but the second allowable sound is not output. In contrast, in the first reception allowable state shown in FIG. 162, the model image (integrated model image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can each be output as the reception allowable sound. However, in the first reception allowable state shown in FIG. 162, even if a mode other than the special mode (the low expectation mode used in FIG. 161) is displayed as the model image (integrated model image IG), the reception allowable sound is processed as described with reference to FIG. 162, and it goes without saying that the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can each be output as the reception allowable sound.

When the second permissible sound (message sound) starts to be output, the image related to the wide-area pre-performance remains, making it difficult to visually recognize the appearance of the mock image (integrated mock image IG). With the appearance of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) difficult to visually recognize, a transition can occur from a state in which only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output to a state in which the second permissible sound (message sound) is also output, so the reception permissible sound can suggest the possibility that the mock image (integrated mock image IG) will be displayed in a special manner. In other words, when the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, a sense of anticipation can be created for the mock image (integrated mock image IGd) with a special appearance to be revealed, and in this environment, the mock image (integrated mock image IG) will gradually be revealed.

The integrated model image IG includes the display target area (section image KG) of the gauge image GG, but whether the integrated model image IG is displayed in the low expectation mode (IGa) or the high expectation mode (IGd), the display target area of the gauge image GG (the target portion on which the gauge image GG is displayed, which increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize how much time is left regardless of the mode of the model image.

As mentioned above with reference to FIG. 144, not only the model image but also the appearance of the peripheral decoration image are different between the low expectation mode (IGa) and the high expectation mode (IGd). Also, the operating means (such as the performance button) that is the target of the player's operation can emit light in the same manner as the model image, but the peripheral decoration member is not designed to emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

According to the above-mentioned example of the performance, in a predetermined game state, there are prepared a plurality of suppressed reception allowance states in which operation reception is allowed while a specific performance sound is suppressed, and a plurality of non-suppressed reception allowance states in which operation reception is allowed while a specific performance sound is not suppressed. In the first reception allowance state of the suppressed reception allowance state, the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special mode, whereas in the second reception allowance state of the non-suppressed reception allowance state, the integrated model image IG is not displayed in the special mode (IGd) but can be displayed in a mode different from the special mode. In the second reception allowance state, the integrated model image IG may be displayed only in one mode (IGa) rather than being selectively displayed from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) with different expectancies excluding the special mode (IGd). According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the performance is poor when a specific performance sound is suppressed compared to when the specific performance sound is not suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a third condition (third acceptance state) different from either the first condition (first acceptance state) or the second condition (second acceptance state) is satisfied, after displaying the integrated model image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image is displayed in one of the modes shown in Figs. 151 to 155 (for example, the modes shown in Figs. 154 and 155), as described above. However, when generating such a third acceptance state (a valid period during which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease), it is desirable to change the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" from a non-suppressed state to a suppressed state (or non-output state) prior to this, as in the first acceptance state, so that a post-operation display (post-operation performance) or a post-operation output sound that does not appear in other acceptance states including the first acceptance state and the second acceptance state is executed. That is, if the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed (or not output) when the reception-permitting state occurs, it is expected that a highly anticipated mode (special mode) will be displayed as the integrated model image IG, but if the special mode is not displayed, the inferior presentation compared to when the "BGM playback sound" is not suppressed and output stands out, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease. In this regard, in the third reception-permitting state, a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can be made to appear, and a post-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suitably suppressed even if a special mode does not appear as the integrated model image IG.

However, whether in the first reception permission state or the third reception permission state, it is preferable that the "BGM playback sound (specific type of sound effect)" in the suppressed state (or non-output state) is not restarted in a non-suppressed mode in response to the reception of an operation, but rather that the display change or post-operation output sound be executed while maintaining the suppressed state (or non-output state).

In addition, even if the acceptance allowance state occurs after the "BGM playback sound (specific type of sound effects)" is suppressed (or not output), when the third acceptance allowance state occurs, it is desirable that, unlike the first acceptance allowance state, the integrated model image IG is not displayed in a special mode, but can only be displayed in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). With this configuration, it is possible to add interest in whether the first or third acceptance allowance state occurs when the "BGM playback sound (specific type of sound effects)" is suppressed (or not output).

In addition, the third reception permission state is executed as an effective period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but instead, it may be executed as an effective period during which a mock image (which may or may not be an integrated mock image) is displayed in a form that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG (the form shown in Figures 159 and 160). Even with such a configuration, it can be said that a similar effect can be achieved. It goes without saying that in this case, the gauge image GG itself will not be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple types of acceptance allowance states with different occurrence conditions are prepared, but even if an acceptance allowance state different from the first acceptance allowance state occurs, if this is a specific type of acceptance allowance state, it is desirable to make it possible for the integrated model image IG to be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, it is desirable to have the acceptance allowance state in which the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd) be executed in an automatic acceptance mode in order to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten.

In the presentation example shown in FIG. 162, the automatic button function is enabled at a specific timing within the set time (valid period), but the automatic button function may also be enabled when or after the set time (valid period) ends, to start executing "the same post-operation presentation as when an operation by a player is accepted within the valid period." In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is enabled is the same as the "processing from timing tC4f" shown in FIG. 162 (g) and (h).

For the images involved in the vanishing effect shown in Figures 163 and 164, a certain transparency may be set for the image itself, making it possible to see the image behind it, although with some difficulty.

According to the presentation examples shown in Figures 161 to 164, when the post-operation presentation starts after the player's operation is accepted or the automatic button function is enabled, both the appearance of the model image (integrated model image IG) and the appearance of the gauge image GG are displayed in a highly visible state without being made difficult to see by the disappearance effect (see Figures 163(f) and 164(i)). This allows the player to enjoy the post-operation presentation while knowing in which appearance the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed and how much time is left, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 163, even if an operation is accepted in the second reception permission state and a post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the post-operation performance starts, but is maintained. In contrast, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 164, when an operation is accepted in the first reception permission state and a post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) is executed, the background image is switched before and after the post-operation performance starts (a space background after the operation).

This configuration makes it possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and even if an operation is forgotten, the background image can be switched appropriately, allowing the performance to proceed smoothly. On the other hand, in the reception-permitted state in which the automatic reception function is not enabled, no changes are made to the background image, so it is possible to avoid inconvenient events such as the background image not being able to be switched when an operation is forgotten, or the background image suddenly changing.

In addition, in the second reception allowance state, after the operation reception (or the automatic button function is enabled), most of the display area becomes invisible because it overlaps with the image HSE for the wide-area disappearance effect. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a small part that does not overlap with the image HSE for the wide-area disappearance effect, the state after the operation can be recognized by checking the image in that part, and the disadvantage of the wide-area disappearance effect being executed can be eliminated. In order to obtain such an effect, when the operation reception (or the automatic button function is enabled) is performed in the second reception allowance state, it is more desirable to make the background image when the post-operation performance is executed different from the background image when the post-operation performance is executed in a state in which the rate at which the jackpot pattern appears is relatively high and the post-operation performance is executed in a state in which the rate at which the jackpot pattern appears is relatively low. These percentages may be 0% or 100%. In this case, the background image itself may be changed when the post-operation performance is executed in a state where the probability of the big win symbol appearing is relatively high, whereas the background image may be left unchanged when the post-operation performance is executed in a state where the probability of the big win symbol appearing is relatively low.

In the above-mentioned presentation example, when an operation opportunity is granted, a specific type of presentation sound is output in a non-suppressed mode (second reception-permitted state), or a specific type of presentation sound is output in a suppressed mode or is not output (first reception-permitted state), and the rate (expectation level) of a post-operation presentation being executed in a mode that only appears when a jackpot is won varies depending on the type, thereby improving the presentation when an operation opportunity is granted. This rate may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the first reception permissible state, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed manner or is not output, so that when a post-operation effect occurs, the corresponding effect sound is audible in a prominent manner. In this regard, in the above configuration, with regard to the reception permissible sound output when the first reception permissible state occurs, if an effect is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in an output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the effect has been accepted, so that the effect sound corresponding to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the reception permissible sound.

Multiple types of reception allowable states are prepared in which the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special manner (IGd), and in any of these reception allowable states, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound be terminated midway if an operation is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in an output state. In contrast, multiple types of reception allowable states in which the integrated model image IG cannot be displayed in a special manner (IGd) are also prepared, and it is desirable that these reception allowable states include both a reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound is terminated midway if an operation is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in an output state, and a reception allowable state (such as a second reception allowable state) in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated midway if an operation is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in an output state (which can occur under different conditions).

As mentioned above, there are two types of reception allowable sounds: sound effects and message sounds. In this regard, the message sounds are always interrupted when a performance is accepted while the integrated model image is in the normal mode (IGa) and in that output state, even if the integrated model image is displayed in that state. In contrast, it is desirable that the sound effects be interrupted when a performance is accepted while the integrated model image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa) and when they are displayed in that output state (first reception allowable state) and not interrupted (second reception allowable state). It is desirable that multiple types of reception allowable states, including the first reception allowable state, be prepared as reception allowable states in which message sounds are output.

The wide-area pre-performance shown in Figures 162 and 164 is realized by sequentially executing the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance. In this regard, in both the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance, a mock image (integrated mock image) that mimics the operating means (operation receiving portion) that is the object of operation is displayed, but the mock image A2 displayed during the execution period of the first wide-area pre-performance is different from the mock image (integrated mock image IG) displayed during the set time of the reception permissible state (first reception permissible state), and does not gradually change to the mock image (integrated mock image IG).

That is, the mock image A2 (Fig. 164(d)) displayed in the first wide-area pre-performance is made invisible (not visible) when the second wide-area pre-performance is executed, prior to the occurrence of the first reception-permitting state. Then, after a predetermined time has passed during which no mock image of the operation target is displayed (maintained as not visible) (Fig. 164(e)), an image different from the mock image A2 displayed in the first wide-area pre-performance is displayed as the mock image during the execution period of the second wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 164(f)). This "mozu image during the execution period of the second wide-area pre-performance" is the mozu image (integrated mozu image IG) itself that is displayed within the set time of the reception permissible state (first reception permissible state), and is displayed together with the image HSE related to the second wide-area pre-performance in a manner that spans the occurrence of the reception permissible state (first reception permissible state), thereby allowing the reception of operations while the mozu image (integrated mozu image IG) is displayed. The mozu image (integrated mozu image IG) is also displayed at the time when the operation is accepted and the post-operation performance begins (FIG. 164(i)), and as a result, it is displayed over the period from before the first reception permissible state occurs to after it ends.

Here, when the model image A2 is displayed in the wide-area pre-performance (first wide-area pre-performance), an opportunity to operate the operating means (operation receiving section) that the model image A2 is modeling will be given without fail (without any other performance). In other words, while it would be sufficient to generate a state in which the model image A2 is displayed and the acceptance is permitted, in the above-mentioned performance example, the model image A2 is made invisible, and a state in which "no model image of the operation target is displayed" is once generated in the wide-area pre-performance, and then the model image that is modeling the operating means (operation receiving section) is displayed as an image (integrated model image IG) that is depicted differently from the first time (A2).

According to this configuration, even if a model image is displayed for a long time as a pre-performance to suggest that a highly anticipated acceptance-permitted state will occur, it is expected that the player will be prompted to perform an operation without delaying the timing at which operation acceptance is permitted. In other words, if a model image is displayed for a long time as a pre-performance and the acceptance-permitted state occurs while the model image is being displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance is permitted may arrive suddenly, and operation delays may occur frequently even when the pre-performance is being performed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only is a model image having a different depiction from the model image displayed during the set time of the acceptance-permitted state displayed in advance before the first acceptance-permitted state occurs, but the model image displayed during the set time of the acceptance-permitted state is displayed after a period of time during which no model image is displayed. In other words, since it is possible to make the player aware that the first acceptance-permitted state can only occur during the period after the model image displayed during the set time of the acceptance-permitted state is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for operation delays to occur while displaying a model image for a long time as a pre-performance.

To optimally obtain such an effect, it is clear that it is more desirable to set the "time from when the second wide-area pre-performance is executed until the first reception permissible state occurs" and the "time from when the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is displayed until the first reception permissible state occurs" to be shorter than the "time required for the first wide-area pre-performance" and the "time for the mock image A2 to be displayed." The mock image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide-area pre-performance.

In order to obtain such an advantageous effect, the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) displayed in the second wide-area front performance is dynamically displayed in a form expressing the "movement in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as an operating means (operation receiving unit) (see FIG. 145, etc.), whereas it is more desirable to display the mosaic image A2 displayed in the first wide-area front performance without such dynamic display. Note that the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) displayed in the second wide-area front performance will continue to be dynamically displayed even after the first reception allowable state occurs. Also, the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) displayed in the narrow-area front performance is dynamically displayed in a form expressing the "movement in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as an operating means (operation receiving unit), and will continue to be dynamically displayed even after the second reception allowable state occurs.

The mock-up image (integrated mock-up image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 164(f) and the mock-up image (integrated mock-up image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 164(g) are the same image, but the transmittance may be different.

As for the image KTH for the narrow-area front performance shown in FIG. 163, it is more desirable to display it as an image large enough to cover the entire mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) from the front. It is also desirable to at least either reduce the display area of the image KTH or increase its transmittance, so that the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) is displayed in such a way that it is gradually revealed over time from the location where the image KTH was displayed.

Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 relating to the wide-area front performance shown in FIG. 164, image HTH1 is displayed behind the model image A2 (without adversely affecting the visibility of the model image A2), whereas image HTH2 is displayed in front of the model image (integrated model image IG) (without adversely affecting the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG)). In other words, like image KTH relating to the narrow-area front performance, image HTH2 is displayed as an image large enough to cover the entire model image (integrated model image IG) from the front (FIG. 164(e)), and then either its display area is reduced or its transmittance is increased, so that the model image (integrated model image IG) is gradually revealed over time from the location where image HTH2 was displayed. In contrast, image HTH1 is displayed in such a way as to highlight the depiction of model image A2, which makes it possible to eliminate the disadvantage of making the model image difficult to see when an operation opportunity is given (making it difficult to recognize which operation means the operation opportunity is given for, resulting in operation delays).

The wide-area pre-performance is achieved by sequentially executing the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance, but it is desirable that the performance sounds output in the wide-area pre-performance be output by playing one sound data (one sound effect/music).

In addition, in the narrow-area pre-performance shown in FIG. 163, the background image that has been displayed prior to this is maintained without being changed in the narrow-area pre-performance, but in the wide-area pre-performance shown in FIG. 164, the background image that has been displayed prior to this is changed in the wide-area pre-performance (here, changed at the start of the wide-area pre-performance). In this configuration, the background change can be executed as part of the wide-area pre-performance, so that it is executed as a pre-performance with higher dramatic effect compared to narrow-area pre-performances that are limited to partial performance changes. Note that the background image that was displayed prior to the narrow-area pre-performance (FIG. 163(a)) and the background image that was displayed prior to the wide-area pre-performance (FIG. 164(a)) may be different background images.

In the second wide-area pre-performance shown in FIG. 164(f), the mosaic image is displayed as an integrated mosaic image IG integrated with a "peripheral decorative image in which the partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)", but in the first wide-area pre-performance shown in FIG. 164(d), a mosaic image in which such a partition image KG is not decorated (depicted) is displayed. This allows the player to enjoy the pre-performance in the first wide-area pre-performance at least without having to worry about the remaining time. Note that a mosaic image in which the partition image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be one in which the partition image KG that is decorated (depicted) in the integrated mosaic image IG is not displayed, and may be one in which at least a portion of the decoration (gauge area) of the integrated mosaic image IG is not displayed, or one in which the shape itself is different from the integrated mosaic image IG.

As described above, "the acceptance permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state and is executed in an automatic acceptance mode" is prepared in multiple forms with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the "first acceptance permission state" is prepared as one of these acceptance permission states. However, it is desirable that these acceptance permission states include a specific acceptance permission state in which "the first wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 164 (c) to (e)) in which a model image is displayed and then hidden, and the second wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 164 (e) to (g)) in which a model image is displayed across the occurrence timing of the acceptance permission state are performed" as well as "the first wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 164 (e) to (g)) in which a model image is displayed across the occurrence timing of the acceptance permission state is not performed, and the second wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 164 (e) to (g)) in which a model image is displayed across the occurrence timing of the acceptance permission state is not performed." That is, in this case, by making the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a manner that only appears at the time of a jackpot higher in the first reception-permitting state than in the specific reception-permitting state, it becomes possible to increase interest in the game from the time when the timing (the timing at which the first wide-area pre-effect appears) arrives significantly before the timing at which operation reception is permitted. In this case, the second wide-area pre-effect that is performed when the first reception-permitting state occurs and the second wide-area pre-effect that is performed when the specific reception-permitting state occurs do not necessarily have to have the same content, and may be executed as different presentation contents (images). Also, the operation means that provide the operation opportunity may be different between the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state.

As mentioned above, there are multiple "acceptance states in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode and which are executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode" with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the "second acceptance state" is provided as one of these acceptance states.

The wide-area pre-effect performed in the first reception-permitting state is executed under the condition that the "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is suppressed or not output, but is executed for a longer time than the narrow-area pre-effect (second reception-permitting state) executed while the "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is not suppressed and output, so that the interest in playing can be favorably maintained. In particular, by executing only the first wide-area pre-effect among the wide-area pre-effects for a longer time than the narrow-area pre-effect, it is possible to favorably increase the interest in playing significantly before the reception-permitting state occurs. The timing at which the "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is suppressed or not output may arrive while the first wide-area pre-effect is being executed, or may arrive before the first wide-area pre-effect starts to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned performance example, when a wide-area pre-performance (FIG. 164) is performed upon occurrence of the first reception-permitting state, a performance change including the background image is generated, whereas when a narrow-area pre-performance (FIG. 163) is performed upon occurrence of the second reception-permitting state, the background image is not changed and the performance change is generated while maintaining it. Furthermore, in the first reception-permitting state that occurs while such a wide-area pre-performance is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation performance (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether an operation is performed, whereas in the second reception-permitting state that occurs while a narrow-area pre-performance is being performed, the post-operation performance does not change the background image and the performance progresses while maintaining it. According to this configuration, in the first reception-permitting state, the background image is changed twice before and after its occurrence in relation to the occurrence of the first reception-permitting state, so that the performance can be significantly improved compared to the second reception-permitting state, and it is possible to encourage greater concentration on the operation-related performance.

In the wide-area disappearance effect according to the above-mentioned performance example, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 164(j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may be set to come later than the timing at which the wide-area disappearance effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 164(i), the post-operation performance (background announcement by the princess character) is started while the background image is not changed. Then, after the post-operation performance is started in this way, the wide-area disappearance effect first makes the background image displayed in the reception-permitted state difficult to see or cannot be seen (the background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 164(j)), and then changes the background image by displaying another background image (the background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 164(k) or the situation shown in FIG. 164(l)). The other background image may be displayed in a manner that is gradually revealed while the wide-area disappearance effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide-area disappearance effect has ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 164, the post-operation performance is first initiated by a display change on the LCD display (background announcement by the princess character); however, instead, the post-operation performance may be initiated first by lighting up a lamp or by outputting a post-operation sound, and the display change on the LCD display may be initiated later (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

As described above, multiple "acceptance allowance states in which the automatic acceptance mode and the wide-area disappearance effect are executed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the "first acceptance allowance state" is prepared as one of these acceptance allowance states. However, it is desirable that these acceptance allowance states include, in addition to the "first acceptance allowance state", a "special acceptance allowance state in which the same post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) as the first acceptance allowance state can be executed, but the wide-area disappearance effect is executed as a different image (the timing of display may be the same). In other words, in this case, even if the same post-operation performance is executed, the disappearance effect will be different, so that it is possible to improve the performance and it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed. The special acceptance allowance state may be the specific acceptance allowance state described above. The specific acceptance allowance state and the special acceptance allowance state are executed in the same manner as the first acceptance allowance state in terms of the display timing of the model image, the processing related to the output of the acceptance allowance sound, the processing related to the disappearance effect, etc.

As described above, multiple "acceptance allowance states in which the non-automatic acceptance mode and the narrow-range disappearance effect are executed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the "second acceptance allowance state" is prepared as one of these acceptance allowance states. However, it is desirable that these acceptance allowance states include, in addition to the "second acceptance allowance state", a "special acceptance allowance state in which a post-operation performance (third post-operation performance) of a type different from that of the second acceptance allowance state (for example, a conversation announcement and a movable body operation) can be executed, but the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed as the same image (the timing of display may also be the same)". In other words, in this case, even if a different post-operation performance is executed, the disappearance effect itself will be displayed as the same image, so it is easy to recognize that the operation has been accepted regardless of the type of post-operation performance. The special acceptance allowance state is executed in the same manner as the second acceptance allowance state in terms of the display timing of the mock image, the processing related to the output of the acceptance allowance sound, the processing related to the disappearance effect, etc.

In the narrow-area disappearance effect, even when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden after the post-operation performance is started, the image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect is not hidden but maintained in a displayed state (see FIG. 163(i)). In this regard, it is desirable to set the time from when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden to when the image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect is hidden to be longer than the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation performance is started) to when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden. With this configuration, the display state of the model image (integrated model image IG) is maintained even after the post-operation performance is started so that its appearance can be confirmed, but the fact that the post-operation performance is not clearly revealed is due to the "model image whose display state is maintained" but is due to the performance of the "image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect", so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow-area disappearance effect will not be a fade-out that ends relatively quickly, but will be performed by a dynamic display of an image other than the mock image. It is more desirable to prepare multiple types of "dynamic display of a different image" as this narrow-area disappearance effect with different expectations, and have them selectively appear depending on the type of acceptance permission state that has different occurrence conditions.

The wide-area disappearance effect according to the above-mentioned performance example can be expected to have a function that suggests that the first reception-permitting state has been executed in the automatic reception mode. In contrast, in the second reception-permitting state, operations are only accepted by the player's operation and the post-operation performance is not executed, so it is easy to recognize that the post-operation performance will be executed without affecting the entire screen, and it can be said that executing it by a narrow-area disappearance effect, which has a small image for the disappearance effect, is advantageous in that the post-operation performance can be executed immediately with good visibility. With this configuration, in the case of a wide-area disappearance effect, it is necessary to change it from the background image to ensure its visibility, but in the case of a narrow-area disappearance effect, it is possible to ensure visibility by simply executing the post-operation performance without changing the background image and maintaining it.

As described above, in the second reception allowance state, the post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed in one of a plurality of modes (including the first mode and the second mode) with different ratios (which may be 0% or 100%) at which the jackpot pattern is stopped, based on the result of the performance judgment according to the result of the jackpot judgment. In this regard, when the first mode (relatively high ratio mode) appears as the post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) and the second mode (relatively low ratio mode) appears, the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed in the same mode (image). In contrast, in the first reception allowance state, the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) is executed in one of a plurality of modes (including the third mode and the fourth mode) with different ratios (which may be 0% or 100%) at which the jackpot pattern is stopped, based on the result of the performance judgment according to the result of the jackpot judgment. In this regard, it is desirable that when the third mode (relatively high ratio mode) appears as the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance), a wide-area disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the fourth mode (relatively low ratio mode) appears, or that when the third mode (relatively high ratio mode) appears, a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, and when the fourth mode (relatively low ratio mode) appears, a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed. The narrow-area disappearance effect in this case may be the same as the narrow-area disappearance effect executed in response to the second reception permission state, or it may be different.

According to this configuration, in the first acceptance allowance state and the second acceptance allowance state, in the first acceptance allowance state in which a wide-area disappearance effect may occur, the disappearance effect itself is expected, so that the decrease in interest in the game caused by the low visibility of the post-operation performance due to the wide-area disappearance effect can be suppressed. It should be noted that the first acceptance allowance state and the second acceptance allowance state, as well as the fourth acceptance allowance state and the fifth acceptance allowance state described below, can occur in both the variation pattern in which the jackpot is lost and the variation pattern in which the jackpot is won, and it goes without saying that the first and second variation patterns described above, as well as the fourth and fifth variation patterns described below, are "variation patterns for when a jackpot is won and variation patterns for when a miss is lost, which are provided as a pair."

The second acceptance state may be made to occur not only in the second fluctuation pattern, but also in the first fluctuation pattern. For example, the second acceptance state may be generated at a relatively early timing within the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance state may be generated at a relatively late timing.

The timing at which the display output (display on the layer) for the mock image (integrated mock image IG) ends during the period in which the disappearance effect image is displayed (the timing from when an operation is accepted until it is hidden) may be different between the first allowable acceptance state and the second allowable acceptance state.

When an operation is accepted in the "situation in which image KTH relating to a narrow-area pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. 163(d), it is desirable not to use this as a trigger to hide the image KTH, but to have the post-operation performance begin while the image KTH continues to be displayed. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 163(f). Then, when the narrow-area disappearance effect begins to be executed after this, it is desirable to progress the performance so that the "image KTH relating to a narrow-area pre-effect" is made difficult to see or cannot be seen by the "image KSE relating to a narrow-area disappearance effect."

Also, even if an operation is accepted in the "situation in which image HTH2 relating to a wide-area pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. 164(g), it is preferable not to use this as a trigger to make image HTH2 invisible, but to have the post-operation performance begin while image HTH2 continues to be displayed. That is, in this case, image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 164(i). Then, when the wide-area disappearance effect begins to be executed after this, it is preferable to progress the performance so that "image HSE relating to a wide-area disappearance effect" makes "image HTH2 relating to a wide-area pre-effect" difficult to see or makes it impossible to see.

In the example shown in FIG. 162, if operation acceptance is permitted while the "specific type of sound effect (BGM playback)" is in a non-output state, the "specific type of sound effect (BGM playback)" does not necessarily have to be re-output before the pattern is stopped. For example, at timing tC6, a special sound effect different from both the "specific type of sound effect (BGM playback)" that is already in a non-output state and the "sound effect related to post-operation performance" that starts to be output in response to operation acceptance may be newly output. The special sound effect is not output in response to operation acceptance, but is output based on the arrival of a predetermined timing within the variation pattern.

Images related to wide-area pre-performance and images related to narrow-area pre-performance may be displayed until the set time for the reception permissible state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated). The first permissible sound may also be maintained in an output state until the set time for the reception permissible state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated).

In the above-mentioned performance example, the imitation image of the operation receiving part is displayed in both the wide-area pre-performance and the narrow-area pre-performance, but in the wide-area pre-performance (first wide-area pre-performance), it is displayed in a different form (image data) from the form (image data) that appears during the period when operation reception is permitted (first reception permitted state). As a result, in the wide-area pre-performance (first wide-area pre-performance), even if the imitation image is displayed when operation reception is not yet permitted, it is possible to appeal to the occurrence of the operation reception performance (reception permitted state) while making it difficult to cause a mistaken recognition that the operation reception is permitted, and this makes it possible to perform a large-scale pre-performance that requires a relatively long time. Note that in the second wide-area pre-performance and the narrow-area pre-performance, the imitation image (integrated imitation image) is displayed in the form (image data) that appears during the period when operation reception is permitted (reception permitted state), and this is gradually revealed as the pre-performance is hidden (the display area decreases). In other words, in this case, the mock image displayed on the specific layer when the reception permissible state occurs will continue to be displayed from before the reception permissible state occurs to after it occurs. This is also the case with the fourth reception permissible state described below.

In the presentation examples shown in Fig. 161 (Fig. 163) and Fig. 162 (Fig. 164), in either case, when the change in response to the operation reception (the post-operation performance, which is at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) starts to be executed, the model image (gauge image) is not hidden but is kept displayed (and even dynamically displayed) (see Fig. 163(f), Fig. 164(i), etc.). Then, the disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance effect or wide-area disappearance effect) starts to be executed (see Fig. 163(g), Fig. 164(j), etc.). However, the wide-area disappearance effect executed over a relatively large range makes it difficult to see most of the change (post-operation performance) that was once clearly visible, which is a concern as it may reduce interest in the game. Therefore, when a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) is started before the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, and at this point, the model image (gauge image) is not hidden and is not made difficult to see by the narrow-area disappearance effect, but is in a displayed state. On the other hand, when a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) may not be started before the wide-area disappearance effect is executed. In other words, in this case, at the time when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) is started, the model image (gauge image) is not hidden but is in a displayed state, but is made difficult to see by the wide-area disappearance effect (FIG. 164(j)).

In other words, when a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, the display state of the mock image (gauge image) is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the operation was accepted at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. In this case, the mock image (gauge image) is not made difficult to see by the narrow-area disappearance effect at the time when the post-operation performance begins to be executed. In contrast, when a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, FIG. 162(j) may appear after passing through FIG. 162(i), or FIG. 162(j) may appear at the time when the post-operation performance begins to be executed without passing through FIG. 162(i).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in regard to the acceptance allowance state executed in the "suppression operation acceptance effect" in which a specific type of effect sound can be suppressed, multiple types are prepared, including at least a first acceptance allowance state executed in the "strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 162)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or non-output, and a fourth acceptance allowance state executed in the "weak suppression mode (second mode shown in FIG. 161)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low. Note that in this case, the specific type of effect sound that is the target of suppression may be a different effect sound, and may be output as an effect sound that performs the same function, such as a BGM playback effect sound, for example.

This configuration allows for creative control over how much the specific type of sound effect is suppressed when the set time (valid period) during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs.

Here, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable to make the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) different depending on whether the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" or the "strong suppression mode (first reception-permitting state)" occurs. Here, the probability (expectation level) of the "post-operation performance in response to operation reception" being executed in a manner that appears only when a jackpot is won when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" occurs is lower than the probability (expectation level) of the "post-operation performance in response to operation reception" being executed in a manner that appears only when a jackpot is won when the "strong suppression mode (first reception-permitting state)" occurs. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitting state)" can appear in both a performance according to a high-expectation fluctuation pattern that develops into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) and a performance according to a low-expectation fluctuation pattern in which the reach state is not even formed (or the reach state may be formed but does not develop into an SP reach), whereas the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitting state)" does not occur in a low-expectation performance pattern, but may occur as a performance according to a high-expectation fluctuation pattern. Even with this configuration, it can be said that the expectation of a jackpot when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitting state)" occurs is lower than when the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitting state)" occurs.

In order to obtain the above-mentioned effect more favorably, it is desirable to make it possible to generate a "special presentation state" to which a transition can be made based on the satisfaction of a special presentation condition, and in the "special presentation state," each time an operation is accepted during a set time (valid period) during which an operation prompting image (such as a model image or gauge display) that encourages the player to operate is displayed, a post-operation presentation corresponding to the operation acceptance is executed (started) while a specific type of presentation sound (for example, a presentation sound for playing background music) is suppressed. According to such a "special presentation state," each time a set time (valid period) occurs during which operation acceptance is permitted, it is possible to provide a presentation regarding how much a specific type of presentation sound (for example, a presentation sound for playing background music) is suppressed (whether one of multiple modes, including a weakly suppressed mode or a strongly suppressed mode, appears), and since the degree of expectation is suggested by such presentation (the degree of suppression) in addition to the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation presentation, it is expected that the interest in the game will be further increased when the presentation acceptance is permitted. In this case, the second reception permission state described above does not occur in the "special presentation state," but can occur in a different presentation state (normal presentation state).

It is also possible to provide a variation pattern (e.g., a presentation corresponding to a specific variation pattern among high expectation variation patterns) in which a "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitted state)" and a "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitted state)" can be executed sequentially within the pattern variation. In other words, in this case, even if a "weak suppression mode (first acceptance-permitted state)" with a relatively low expectation occurs, there remains the possibility that a "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitted state)" with a relatively high expectation will occur, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for a specific type of presentation sound is small (weak suppression mode).

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the decline in interest in the game when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permission state)" is as follows:
・When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from among the high expectation fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the performance of the specific fluctuation pattern will occur when it progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach. In contrast, for the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)",
Even if the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.), the performance of the specific variation pattern will not occur even if it progresses to a predetermined timing, and if a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.), the performance of the specific variation pattern will occur when it progresses to a predetermined timing. And, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowance state)" occurs in the performance according to the specific variation pattern, it is desirable to make the rate at which the post-operation performance is executed in a highly expected mode (the rate at which it is executed in a mode that appears only at the time of a jackpot) higher when the performance acceptance is made in the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowance state)" than when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowance state)" does not occur in the performance according to the specific variation pattern.

In this configuration, in the presentation according to a specific fluctuation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (first reception-permitting state)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" does not necessarily occur. Furthermore, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" occurs, the probability that a post-operation presentation with high expectations will be executed in the "strong suppression mode (first reception-permitting state)" increases. This makes it possible to draw attention to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" occurs, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" occurs.

However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitting state)" does not necessarily have to occur in the same fluctuation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitting state)." For example, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitting state)" may occur within the first fluctuation pattern, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitting state)" may occur within the fourth fluctuation pattern.

Figure 165 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception permissible state occurs under the specific setting condition (presentation setting). Figure 165 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which the fourth reception permissible state occurs.

Now, for example, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) in the "special presentation state" and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a presentation determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ variation presentation (presentation of a presentation according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation presentation, a presentation (preview presentation) according to the result of the preview presentation determination is additionally executed to the presentation of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself.

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a notice judgment) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is met), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the fourth reception permission state (valid period) in which operation reception regarding the fourth post-operation performance is permitted when the timing tD3 arrives at which the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 165(b). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fourth reception permission state (valid period) is as follows:
A set time (valid period) during which operation reception is permitted while the "sound of BGM playback" according to the fourth variation pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode is set, and if an operation is received within the set time (valid period), the "sound of BGM playback" is changed from the non-suppressed mode to the weakly suppressed mode (mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) in response to the operation reception, which is a "conditional suppression reception effect (see FIGS. 165(a) and 165(b))," and if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tD3 to tD4) during which operation reception is permitted, a "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 165(h))" in which a post-operation effect (fourth post-operation effect) corresponding to the fourth reception permitted state is not generated.
In addition, as a method for outputting the "BGM playback sound" in the weak suppression mode, a method of changing the volume value (maximum "100") for the channel to which the "BGM playback sound" is assigned to a weak suppression value (for example, a volume value (audible volume) of "10") that is less suppressed than the strong suppression mode (for example, a volume value (audible volume) of "0") can be adopted.

According to this "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (fourth reception allowable state)", unless an operation is accepted by the player, the state will not change to "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode", so it is possible to make it appear as if the "non-suppressed reception effect (first reception allowable state)" shown in FIG. 161 is occurring. In other words, in this case, when the player operates the state, it changes to "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode", and it becomes possible for the player to recognize for the first time that it is not a "suppressed reception effect", so that the surprise effect can increase interest in the game.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is desirable to make the fourth variation pattern, which allows the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 165)" to occur depending on the result of the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.), selectable only when in a special performance state (for example, a pre-reading performance zone, etc.), and when in the special performance state, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot pattern appearing when the pattern variation is stopped higher than when in a normal performance state in which a variation pattern in which the "non-suppression non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)" can occur depending on the result of the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.) can be selected. With this configuration, when the "conditional suppression non-automatic reception effect" appears, the expectation level is higher than when the "non-suppression non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)" appears, and this, combined with the above-mentioned surprise performance element, can increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effect more suitably, it is desirable that the "strong suppression mode (first reception permission state)" can occur in both the "normal presentation state" and the "special presentation state", and that in the "normal presentation state", within a presentation corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern paired with winning or losing), a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception presentation (Fig. 161)" and a "suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception presentation (Fig. 162)" can occur sequentially, and in the "special presentation state", within a presentation corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern paired with winning or losing), a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception presentation (Fig. 165)" and a "suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception presentation (Fig. 162)" can occur sequentially.

Moreover, in the "conditionally suppressed (weakly suppressed mode) non-automatic reception effect", if the set time (valid period) has elapsed without any operation being accepted, the effect will proceed to the subsequent effect without transitioning to a "state in which a specific type of effect sound (background music playback sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode". In other words, in this case, it is difficult to know whether a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" or a "conditionally suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" has occurred, and furthermore whether the state is a "normal presentation state" or a "special presentation state". As a result, even if an "operation acceptance effect (valid period) while outputting in a non-suppressed mode", which is considered to have a relatively low expectation level, occurs, the player can be more actively encouraged to operate.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception effect (Figure 165)" occurs and when a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect (Figure 161)" occurs, the same effect sound is output as the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) for the same period of time, which also makes it difficult to recognize whether a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception effect (Figure 165)" or a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect (Figure 161)" is occurring.

In addition, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception performance (FIG. 165)", as in the case where the "non-suppression non-automatic reception performance (FIG. 161)" occurs,
a. A narrow-area pre-show is performed at timing tD1 before operation acceptance is permitted;
b. The "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" starts to be output when the timing tD2 slightly before the set time occurs, and the output state is maintained across the timing tD2.
c. The second allowable sound (e.g., a message sound) is not output, and the first allowable sound (e.g., a sound effect) is output;
d. When the timing tD2 arrives, which is slightly before the set time occurs, the performance display device 1600 displays a model image (integrated model image) of the operation means to be operated in the operation reception performance, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is displayed;
e. Even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being output, the acceptance allowance sound being output is not terminated.
f. When an operation is accepted, the model image (integrated model image) and the gauge image are not hidden, but are kept displayed, g. A narrow-range disappearance effect is executed while the model image (integrated model image) and the gauge image are displayed, and h. Even if an operation is not accepted, a narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the operation is accepted. Each of these configurations is also adopted, which also makes it difficult to recognize whether a "conditionally suppressed (weakly suppressed mode) non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 165)" or a "non-suppressed non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 161)" is occurring. With this configuration, it becomes necessary to distinguish whether a transition has been made to a "state in which a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode" while the output state (non-suppressed mode) of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, so that it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained appropriately each time a performance is accepted.

Therefore, as with the case where a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)" occurs, it is desirable to adopt, for example, the method shown in Fig. 163 as a display method for the mock image, gauge image, narrow-area pre-effect, and narrow-area disappearance effect, and it is also desirable to adopt the same mode as the example of the effect shown in Fig. 161 for the timing at which these images are hidden. However, it is not necessary to adopt the same mode.

Also, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 165)", when an operation is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tD3a in the figure), at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are generated as post-operation performances corresponding to the operation acceptance. In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker are maintained in an execution state for the same period of time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is made invisible at a predetermined timing that arrives after timing tD4 regardless of when the performance acceptance is made within the set time (valid period), whereas the post-operation output sound (performance sound) may be made to maintain an output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing of the operation acceptance. However, regardless of the timing at which the performance request is received, if timing tD4 has not yet elapsed, it is required that both the post-operation display performance (LCD display) and the post-operation output sound (sound performance) be set to maintain their output state.

In addition, for the reception permission sound, operation-related display, pre-effects, disappearance effects, and post-operation effects that appear in the "conditionally suppressed, non-automatic reception effects (Figure 165)", it is possible to appropriately adopt other examples or modifications of the performance examples shown in Figures 161 and 163, and it is preferable to use the same methods for both.

In this example, the length of time (a predetermined fixed time) during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weakly suppressed mode is set so that the timing for ending the weakly suppressed mode is the same as or later than the timing for ending the sound effect for the post-operation performance, even if an operation is accepted at the latest timing tD4 among the set times (validity period) for the "conditionally suppressed, non-automatic reception performance (fourth reception permissible state)." However, the timing for ending the weakly suppressed mode for the "BGM playback sound" may also be set to always be the same as the timing for ending the sound effect for the post-operation performance. With any of these configurations, it is possible to highlight the post-operation performance when a performance is accepted.

As mentioned above, when an operation reception effect occurs that can suppress a specific type of sound effect (e.g., a sound effect of playing BGM), the expectation level differs depending on whether the degree of suppression is high (first acceptance allowance state of strong suppression mode or no output) or low (fourth acceptance allowance state of weak suppression mode). However, even if one tries to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode or no output, or weak suppression mode) when a specific type of sound effect (e.g., a sound effect of playing BGM) is suppressed, it is actually difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or no output) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison. This is especially true when the volume value when suppressed is not so different between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, which makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension when an operation reception effect occurs and attract the player to the effect.

However, in reality, there is a concern that interest in playing the game may decrease if it is impossible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, presentation elements that are useful for guessing whether the mode is strong or weak suppression are prepared as follows, scattered chronologically within the period from when the operation reception presentation starts to when it ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound output upon occurrence of the fourth reception permissible state is output for a predetermined time period, without terminating the output midway, even if a performance reception is made while in the output state, whereas the first permissible sound output upon occurrence of the first reception permissible state is output midway, based on the performance reception, if a performance reception is made while in the output state. In this configuration, the first permissible sound itself has a function that helps infer whether the mode is strong or weak suppression, and this makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to an inability to make such a prediction.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first acceptance permissible state occurs, the second acceptance permissible sound is output in addition to the first acceptance permissible sound, so that by checking whether the second acceptance permissible sound is output, it is possible to infer whether the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is being used. However, the second acceptance permissible sound does not necessarily have to be provided, and it may be possible to have only the first acceptance permissible sound being output in both the first acceptance permissible state and the fourth acceptance permissible state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display encouraging an operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) during which performance reception is permitted is displayed in one of a number of modes including the special mode (Fig. 144 (a) to (d)) in the first reception-permitting state, whereas in the fourth reception-permitting state it is displayed in one of a number of modes excluding the special mode (Fig. 144 (a) to (c)). Therefore, by checking the operation-related display, it is possible to guess whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if it is not possible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the reception permission sound or the operation-related display is terminated, it is possible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression mode by checking the execution mode of the post-operation performance. That is, in the post-operation performance according to the fourth reception permission state (fourth post-operation performance), both the "performance by the liquid crystal display" and the "performance by the performance sound" are "performed for a certain period of time from the time when the performance is accepted", whereas in the post-operation performance according to the first reception permission state (first post-operation performance), the "performance by the performance sound" is "performed for a certain period of time from the time when the performance is accepted", but the "performance by the liquid crystal display" is "ended when a predetermined timing arrives". In other words, in this case, in the post-operation performance corresponding to the first reception permission state, the time from when the "performance by the liquid crystal display" ends to when the "performance by the performance sound" ends is variable depending on the timing of the operation reception, and since a large discrepancy occurs, by checking this discrepancy it is possible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by checking the execution mode of the pre-performance and the disappearance effect for the acceptance permission state, it is also possible to guess whether the mode is strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode. That is, in the pre-performance and the disappearance effect according to the fourth acceptance permission state, an image related to the pre-performance and the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively narrow area, and at the same time, the background image is not changed, whereas in the pre-performance and the disappearance effect according to the first acceptance permission state, an image related to the pre-performance and the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively wide area, and at the same time, the background image is changed. By checking such modes, it is also possible to guess whether the mode is strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode.

However, even if presentation elements that aid in guessing are scattered chronologically in this way, some players may not notice them, and as a result may not be able to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression, which could ultimately reduce interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception-permitting state (weak suppression mode), the BGM playback effect sound is set to the weak suppression mode based on the fact that the effect reception is made within the set time (valid period). In contrast, in the first reception-permitting state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the BGM playback effect sound is set to the strong suppression mode from a situation in which the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the set time (valid period) occurs while in the strong suppression mode, so that the effect reception can be made. With this configuration, the timing for suppressing a specific type of effect sound (for example, the BGM playback effect sound) differs between the fourth reception-permitting state (weak suppression mode) and the first reception-permitting state (strong suppression mode), so that it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

Moreover, in the fourth acceptance permission state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the first acceptance permission state (strong suppression mode or non-output), if no operation is detected within a set time (valid period), the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 165(h)). In other words, in this case, if no operation is detected within a set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) triggered by the acceptance of an operation for a specific type of sound effect (for example, sound effect for playing background music) is not performed, so although there is a cost in that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode was weak suppression mode and not strong suppression mode.

In addition, in the first acceptance permission state (strong suppression mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback sound effects" to a strong suppression mode ends is set to be the same as or earlier than the end timing of the post-operation performance. Therefore, in the fourth acceptance permission state (weak suppression mode), if the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback sound effects" to a weak suppression mode ends can arrive after the end timing of the post-operation performance, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is strong or weak suppression by checking the timing at which the "BGM playback sound effects" are returned to a non-suppression mode.

As described above, in the fourth reception permission state according to the above performance example, the length of the period during which the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance component) are performed in parallel remains unchanged, regardless of when the performance reception is made within the set time (valid period). In contrast, in the first reception permission state, the length of the period during which the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance component) are performed in parallel changes depending on when the performance reception is made within the set time (valid period).

This configuration adds drama to "when the performance acceptance (operation) is performed," making it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner until the performance acceptance (operation) is performed.

The weak suppression mode, which outputs the "BGM playback sound effects" at a lower degree of suppression than the strong suppression mode, may be made to appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the fourth reception allowance state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM playback sound effects" are in the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, they are returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without being given an operation opportunity. Then, the more times the weak suppression mode appears, including the fourth reception allowance state, within the performance corresponding to one variation pattern, the higher the rate at which the degree of suppression is further increased (the rate at which the first reception allowance state is further executed), and this will allow for further improvement in the performance through the suppression state for the "BGM playback sound effects".

The strong suppression mode for the "BGM playback sound effects" may also be made to appear when no operation opportunity is given (when the first reception permissible state does not occur). In other words, in this case, after the "BGM playback sound effects" are in the strong suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, they are returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without any operation opportunity being given. With this configuration, it becomes possible to provide a performance regarding whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 165, when the fourth reception allowable state occurs, the "BGM playback performance sound" is set to the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period). However, instead of this, even if the fourth reception allowable state occurs, the "BGM playback performance sound" may be set to the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) before the set time occurs, as in the case of the first reception allowable state, and a set time (valid period) during which the performance acceptance is allowed while in the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) may be generated. In this case, depending on whether a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), the "BGM playback performance sound" may or may not be set to the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) when a predetermined timing arrives, so that the range of performance can be expanded. In the fourth reception allowable state, it is desirable that the timing at which the "BGM playback performance sound" is returned from the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) to the non-suppressed mode arrives at the same time as or later than the timing at which the post-operation performance ends.

The weak suppression mode may be to set the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of performance sound" to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) that is lower than in the non-suppression mode, and output the sound in an audible state, while the strong suppression mode may be to make the "specific type of performance sound" inaudible (output silently (audible volume is 0) or not output (channel allocation is terminated)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "fourth reception allowance state", only the operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first reception allowance state", as described above, there are "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)" based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is easy to recognize that it is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. Note that the post-operation performance in response to the performance reception is the same in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)".

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated are:
The operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes, including a first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part that the player touches when operating) is not moved when the set time (valid period) occurs, and a second operation mode in which the operation receiving part is moved to a specific position by a driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. Note that the "first operation mode" here assumes a case in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the "second operation mode" assumes a case in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, and the sword decoration 5001 "can give an operation opportunity to the player in a state in which it has moved to a specific position". However, one operation means (one operation receiving part) may have a "first operation mode" and a "second operation mode", respectively, and an operation opportunity may be given in any of these modes. Also, as described above, in the first reception permission state, an operation opportunity may always be given to the sword decoration 5001.

According to the above-mentioned performance example, in a reception permissible state (suppressed reception performance) in which the post-operation performance is set to be executed while the "BGM playback performance sound" is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in a special mode (Fig. 144 (d)), this means that the reception permissible state is the "first reception permissible state (strong suppressed mode)," and when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in a special mode (Fig. 144 (a)), this means that the reception permissible state is the "first reception permissible state (strong suppressed mode or non-output)" or the "fourth reception permissible state (weakly suppressed mode)."

In this case, when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is displayed in the special mode (Fig. 144(d)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptance-permitted sound is in the middle of being output, this will be terminated midway (first acceptance-permitted state). In contrast, when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 144(a)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptance-permitted sound is in the middle of being output, this will either be terminated midway or not (first acceptance-permitted state, fourth acceptance-permitted state). With this configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in playing when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 144(a)).

Furthermore, when the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) is displayed in the special mode (Fig. 144(d)), the reception permission state will be executed in the automatic reception mode (first reception permission state). In contrast, when the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 144(a)), the reception permission state will be executed in either the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode (first reception permission state, fourth reception permission state). With this configuration, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 144(a)).

In this regard, when the mock-up image (integrated mock-up image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)), the size of the display may be made different when the first reception permission state occurs and when the fourth reception permission state occurs. With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the reception permission sound will end midway and whether it will be executed in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned example of performance, by checking whether the pre-performance is executed as a "wide-area pre-performance" or a "narrow-area pre-performance", it becomes easier to check whether a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback) is in a "weakly suppressed mode" or a "strongly suppressed mode or non-output" mode when it is in a suppressed mode. Then, by checking whether an operation is terminated midway when an acceptance permission sound is outputted, it becomes possible to reconfirm while the post-operation performance is being performed whether it is in a "weakly suppressed mode (not terminated midway)" or a "strongly suppressed mode or non-output (terminated midway)".

In addition, according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the wide-area pre-performance is executed with the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) in the strong suppression mode or non-output, whereas when the weak suppression mode is adopted, the narrow-area pre-performance is executed with the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) not in the weak suppression mode. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to maintain the performance quality when the narrow-area pre-performance is performed.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first acceptance allowance state has a higher probability of executing a mode that only appears at the time of a jackpot as a post-operation performance (higher expectation) than the second acceptance allowance state. This percentage may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, different performance contents (acceptance allowance sound, mock image, pre-performance, etc.) appear when the first acceptance allowance state (special acceptance allowance state) occurs and when the second acceptance allowance state (predetermined acceptance allowance state) occurs, even before the operation is accepted. Therefore, if the player is made aware in advance that the second acceptance allowance state will occur (or has occurred) due to such performance contents, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 further provides a fifth acceptance allowance state (specific acceptance allowance state) that is generated based on the establishment of a fifth condition in a performance determination based on the result of a jackpot determination as one of the multiple acceptance allowance states, and while the fifth acceptance allowance state is difficult to distinguish from the second acceptance allowance state until an operation is accepted, after the operation is accepted, a performance progress that is reminiscent of the first acceptance allowance state is realized, so that a decrease in interest in the game is unlikely to occur at least until an operation is accepted. In order to preferably obtain such an effect, it is desirable to set the rate at which the first acceptance allowance state occurs after the fifth acceptance allowance state occurs to be higher than when the second acceptance allowance state occurs until the pattern is stopped. It is also desirable to set the rate at which the jackpot pattern is stopped when the second acceptance allowance state occurs and when the fifth acceptance allowance state occurs to be different from each other. These rates may be 0% or 100%.

A method for realizing a performance progression that is reminiscent of the first acceptance allowable state after an operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance allowable state while making it difficult to distinguish between the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state is, for example, to first output the same type of acceptance allowable sound when the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state occur, but when the first acceptance allowable state occurs, output is an acceptance allowable sound that cannot be output in either the second acceptance allowable state or the fifth acceptance allowable state (for example, a different type of sound as the first acceptance allowable state, or an additional type that outputs the second acceptance allowable sound). When an operation is accepted in the second acceptance state, the post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed while the sound that was in the output state at the time of the operation acceptance is continuously output, whereas in the first acceptance state or the fifth acceptance state, when an operation is accepted, the sound (all of the sounds) that were in the output state at the time of the operation acceptance are output in a suppressed mode or are not output, and the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance or fifth post-operation performance) is executed in this state. In this regard, if a specific performance movable body is used as an object that causes a change in both the first post-operation performance and the fifth post-operation performance, it is possible to realize a performance progress that reminds the first acceptance state after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance state, while making it difficult to distinguish between the second acceptance state and the fifth acceptance state. This makes the player aware of the possibility that the first acceptance state has occurred (the possibility that the acceptance acceptance sound has been misheard), and is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In this case, in the first reception-permitting state, at least a performance using a specific performance movable body will be executed as a post-operation performance (first post-operation performance), and as such a performance, for example, it is possible to perform a movable performance in which the specific performance movable body is moved to the front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 (such as the performances shown in Figures 140 (C) and (D) and Figures 141 (CC1) to (CC3)).

In contrast, even in the fifth reception allowance state, at least a performance using a specific performance movable body is executed as a post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance), but it is desirable to execute this performance with a performance content significantly different from that of the first post-operation performance. In other words, the fifth reception allowance state is prepared solely for the purpose of "maintaining interest in playing at least until the operation is accepted, even if a situation arises in which the pre-operation performance or the state of the reception allowance sound suggests the possibility of the occurrence of the second reception allowance state with low expectations." If the player is given the mistaken belief that the first reception allowance state has occurred at the time the post-operation performance is executed, a decrease in interest in playing will be unavoidable when the player realizes the mistake.

Therefore, for this type of post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance), it is desirable to perform a performance that tends to be more restrained than the first post-operation performance, and it is possible to perform this as a performance that produces a performance change such as reducing the light-emitting range of a specific performance movable body that was in an emitting state at the time the operation was accepted, or making it non-emitting, without operating it (without generating a driving force). Note that in the second post-operation performance, there is no performance change that tends to be restrained, such as reducing the light-emitting range of a specific performance movable body or making it non-emitting. Note that in this case, the specific movable decorative body will have a specified light-emitting section.

With this configuration, a change in presentation is caused using a specific presentation movable body to remind the player of the first reception-permitted state (first operation post-presentation), which allows the player to recognize that the player is not in the second reception-permitted state (second operation post-presentation). However, as the suppressed presentation content is gradually revealed, the player is able to calmly determine that the player is not in the first reception-permitted state (first operation post-presentation), which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In order to more suitably execute the fifth post-operation performance as a performance that tends to be more restrained than the first post-operation performance, in the first post-operation performance, the operation means (operation receiving part such as an operation button) that is the object of operation is made to emit light (or cause a change in the emitted light) when an operation is accepted, and a drive means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means is driven to cause it to make a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, it is desirable to turn off the operation means (operation receiving part such as an operation button) that is the object of operation (operation receiving part such as an operation button) (which may be turned off gradually) when an operation is accepted, and not drive the drive means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means so as not to cause the predetermined movement (vibration, etc.). In this way, while the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance, fifth post-operation performance) is executed for the same movable ornament in the first reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state, the first post-operation performance and the fifth post-operation performance are made to have completely opposite performance contents, thereby enabling the above-mentioned action and effect to be optimally achieved.

Figure 166 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth reception permissible state occurs under the specific setting condition (presentation setting). Figure 166 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a fluctuation pattern in which the fifth reception permissible state occurs. This fluctuation pattern is described as the fifth fluctuation pattern, but as mentioned above, it may be the first fluctuation pattern.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved time consumed) in the normal game state (no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "5th fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the 5th fluctuation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 5th fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 5th fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "5th fluctuation pattern" itself.

As described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 166(b), when the fifth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, the fifth reception permission state (valid period) in which operation reception regarding the fifth post-operation performance is permitted is generated at the timing tE3. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fifth reception permission state (valid period) is generated as follows:
- "Non-suppression acceptance permission state (see FIG. 166(a) and (b))" in which operation acceptance is permitted while the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" according to the fifth variation pattern is maintained in an output state in a non-suppression mode, and - "automatic acceptance mode (see FIG. 166(i))" in which a post-operation performance is started when timing tE3c within the set time period in which operation acceptance is permitted arrives, even if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the object of operation within the set time period (timing tE3 to tE4).
The timing tE3c does not necessarily have to arrive within the set time, and may arrive when or after the set time ends.

With this configuration, until the post-operation performance starts, a situation appears as if the second reception permission state is occurring, but once the post-operation performance starts due to the automatic reception mode, a performance progression is realized that is reminiscent of the first reception permission state, so that interest in the game can be maintained in an optimal manner until the post-operation performance starts.

Also, in the fifth acceptance allowable state, as shown in Figs. 166(b), (e), and (j), similar to the second acceptance allowable state, the "acceptance allowable sound (here, the first acceptable sound)" starts to be output when timing tE2 arrives, which is slightly before the set time (timings tE3 to tE4) at which operation acceptance is allowed occurs, and the output state is maintained across timing tE3 at which the set time occurs. The length of time from when the first acceptable sound starts to be output until operation acceptance is allowed is also the same. Not only is the sound itself output as the first acceptable sound the same, but the second acceptable sound (message sound) is not output, which is similar to the second acceptance allowable state. As a result, the acceptance allowable sound has the same appearance in the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state until operation acceptance is performed, and it is expected that interest in playing will be maintained in a good condition.

However, as described above, in the second acceptance state, if an operation is accepted at timing tB3a (Fig. 161 (e)) when the "acceptance permitted sound (first acceptable sound)" is in an output state after the set time (valid period) has occurred, the set time itself is terminated, but the "acceptance permitted sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated midway, and its output state is maintained until it has finished being output as the first acceptable sound (timing tB3c (Fig. 161 (e)) which is the same as when no operation has been performed. In contrast, in the fifth acceptance state, if an operation is accepted at timing tB3a (Fig. 161 (e)) when the "acceptance permitted sound (first acceptable sound)" is in an output state after the set time (valid period) has occurred, If an operation is accepted at timing tE3a (FIG. 166(e)), not only will the set time itself end, but the "acceptance permitted sound (first acceptable sound)" will also be terminated. In other words, with regard to the "acceptance permitted sound (first acceptable sound)," this behavior (termination midway) appears when an operation is accepted in the first acceptable state (FIG. 162(e)), so even though the fifth acceptable state is occurring, a performance progression reminiscent of the first acceptable state is realized, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In the example performance shown in FIG. 166, when an operation is accepted within the set time of the fifth acceptance state (timing tE3a in the figure), a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance component) are generated as post-operation performances in response to the operation acceptance (see FIG. 166(d)). In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) maintains an execution state until timing tE5 regardless of when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) maintains an execution state for a predetermined period of time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be executed.

Although not shown in the figure, in this performance example, in both the post-operation performance corresponding to the fifth reception allowable state (fifth post-operation performance) and the post-operation performance corresponding to the first reception allowable state (first post-operation performance), at least a "performance using a specific performance movable body" is executed. The performance contents of the "performance using a specific performance movable body" corresponding to the first reception allowable state and the "performance using a specific performance movable body" corresponding to the fifth reception allowable state are as described above. For example, as the first post-operation performance, it is possible to perform a moving performance (such as the performance shown in Figures 140 (C), (D), and Figures 141 (CC1) to (CC3)) in which the specific performance movable body is moved to the front of the display area of the performance display device 1600. As the fifth post-operation performance, it is possible to perform a performance change such as reducing the light-emitting range of the specific performance movable body that was in a light-emitting state at the time of the operation reception or changing it to a non-light-emitting state.

With this configuration, a change in presentation is caused using a specific presentation movable body to remind the player of the first reception-permitted state (first operation post-presentation), which allows the player to recognize that the player is not in the second reception-permitted state (second operation post-presentation). However, as the suppressed presentation content is gradually revealed, the player is able to calmly determine that the player is not in the first reception-permitted state (first operation post-presentation), which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Also, in the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 166 (fifth reception-permitting state), similarly to the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 161 (second reception-permitting state), when the timing tE2 arrives before the timing tE3 at which the set time for the reception-permitting state is set, the presentation display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means to be operated, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. The display mode of these model images and gauge images is also the same as that of the second reception-permitting state, and for example, they are displayed as an integrated model image IG. The same is also true in that the special mode shown in FIG. 144(d) is not displayed as the integrated model image IG. As a result, the same mode appears for the model image and gauge image in the second reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state until the operation is accepted, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained.

In this example, the timing at which the imitation image is displayed is the same as the time at which the reception-permitted sound (first reception-permitted sound) starts to be output, but this is not limited to the above, and either one may start earlier. Alternatively, only one of the imitation image or the reception-permitted sound (for example, only the imitation image) may start before timing tE3. However, even when adopting such an alternative example or the other alternative examples described above, it is desirable to match the configuration until operation reception is performed between the second reception-permitted state and the fifth reception-permitted state.

In the example shown in Figures 166(c) to (f), it is assumed that timing tE3a arrives while such an integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is being displayed, and an operation is accepted. When an operation is accepted under such circumstances, the pachinko machine 1 in this example will start a fifth post-operation performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable ornament), but in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, when the fifth post-operation performance starts, the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is not hidden, but remains displayed. More specifically, even if an operation is accepted, at that point (timing tE3a) no changes are made to the integrated model image (specific layer) due to the operation, and until timing tE3b arrives, which is a short time (predetermined time), the "display of the integrated model image (model image, gauge image)" continues in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted, and the display area of the gauge image also continues to decrease in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearance effect) is displayed in such a way that a part or the whole of the integrated Momo image (Momo image, gauge image) in the displayed state is made difficult to see or cannot be seen. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, the integrated Momo image (Momo image, gauge image) is not hidden even at the time when such an image (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed, and maintains its displayed state. More specifically, even when the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer in which the integrated Momo image (Momo image, gauge image) is displayed, no change is caused by the disappearance effect, and the display area of the gauge image is allowed to decrease in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the disappearance effect in a layer ahead of it, the Momo image and the gauge image are made difficult to see or cannot be seen.

In other words, in this case, even though the disappearance effect image is displayed on a specified layer with the aim of making the mosaic image and gauge image (integrated mosaic image) difficult to view or impossible to view, the mosaic image and gauge image (integrated mosaic image) displayed on a specific layer (behind the specified layer (lower priority side)) are maintained in the same state as when operation acceptance was permitted, and no changes are made. Also, the gauge image will continue to be displayed with its display area continually reduced across operation acceptance. This makes it possible to view (at least a part of) the state when operation acceptance was permitted, even while the mosaic image and gauge image (integrated mosaic image) are in the process of being difficult to view or impossible to view.

In addition, during the period in which the disappearance effect image is displayed (timing tE3b to tE3e), the display output (display on the layer) for the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is terminated, and from this point onwards, the disappearance effect image is displayed in a situation in which the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer either.

The display method for the model images and gauge images after an operation has been accepted is the same for both the first and fifth acceptance allowing states, so this will not decrease interest in the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 166, as in the example shown in FIG. 161, when timing tE1 arrives before timing tE3 at which the fifth reception allowable state occurs, a narrow-area pre-performance using less than half of the specified display area is started. Then, during the period in which an image related to such a narrow-area pre-performance is displayed, first, the display of a mock image (here, an integrated mock image) that imitates the operation receiving part and the output of the first allowable sound are started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the mock image (here, an integrated mock image) starts, a part or the whole of the mock image (integrated mock image) is difficult to see due to the image related to the narrow-area pre-performance. In other words, as time passes, the range in which the image related to the narrow-area pre-performance is displayed is reduced or its transmittance is increased, thereby providing a performance in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image) is gradually increased. In this regard, even in the fifth reception-permitting state, the narrow-area pre-show is being executed, and the mock image (here, the integrated mock image) is being displayed, and the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception-permitting state occurs arrives, allowing operation reception, and the narrow-area pre-show is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception-permitting state occurs.

The image used in such a narrow-area pre-performance may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer before the layer in which the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) is displayed, or the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) and the image (narrow-area pre-performance) may be displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and the video may express the gradually increasing visibility of the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG). However, it is preferable to use the same image for the narrow-area pre-performance corresponding to the fifth reception allowance state as the image for the narrow-area pre-performance corresponding to the second reception allowance state.

In addition, in the narrow-area pre-performance, not only the image display on the performance display device 1600 but also the output of related performance sounds may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permissible state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and is intended to maintain tension regarding operations, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the narrow-area pre-performance as an image display on the performance display device 1600 without outputting related performance sounds, in order to increase concentration on the performance.

In this way, the same behavior appears in the narrow-area pre-effect that occurs before operation acceptance is permitted in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, so it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an optimal manner.

With this configuration, until an operation is accepted, the presentation will progress in the same manner as the presentation content shown in Figures 163 (a) to (e). Therefore, even if the player knows in advance that the relatively highly anticipated first acceptance allowance state has not occurred, it will be interesting to wonder whether the second or fifth acceptance allowance state will occur, and this is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

However, as mentioned above, once a player's operation is detected in the fifth reception-permitting state and the post-operation presentation (fifth post-operation presentation) begins, the presentation will progress in a manner reminiscent of the first reception-permitting state, rather than the second reception-permitting state.

That is, in the presentation example shown in FIG. 166, when an operation by the player is detected (operation acceptance) in the fifth acceptance state, (all of) the sounds that were in the non-suppressed output state at the time the operation was accepted are switched to the output state in the strongly suppressed mode or to the non-output state, and this is terminated midway. In the example shown in FIG. 162 (first acceptance state), when an operation is accepted, the "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" that were in the non-suppressed output state are switched to the output state in the strongly suppressed mode or to the non-output state, and these are terminated midway, but in the example shown in FIG. 166 (fifth acceptance state), when an operation is accepted, the "BGM playback sound" and "first permissible sound" that were in the non-suppressed output state are switched to the output state in the strongly suppressed mode or to the non-output state, and these are terminated midway. As a result, in both the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, sounds (all sounds) that were in an unsuppressed output state before the operation was accepted will be switched to a strongly suppressed output state or to a non-output state upon acceptance of the operation, which will evoke the first acceptance acceptance state at timing tE3a shown in FIG. 166, and is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In this case, it is not important whether the sound output state is changed to a strongly suppressed state or a non-output state in response to the reception of an operation, but it is desirable to perform the same processing in the second reception allowing state and the fifth reception allowing state. For example, if in the second reception allowing state, the sound that was previously in an output state in a non-suppressed state is changed to a non-output state in response to the reception of an operation, then in the fifth reception allowing state, the sound that was previously in an output state in a non-suppressed state is also changed to a non-output state in response to the reception of an operation.

In contrast to this, the example shown in Figures 166(g)-(k) assumes that the set time has passed (the second reception permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As described above, the fifth reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, so when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without any operation by the player, the same processing as when an operation is received is executed.

Therefore, at timing tE3c, not only does the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) begin to be executed, but the sound that was previously in an unsuppressed mode (here, the sound of BGM playback) is switched to an output state in a strongly suppressed mode or to a non-output state, and these are terminated midway. Even in the first reception permissible state (FIG. 162), a specified sound (for example, the first permissible sound) may be output in an unsuppressed mode until timing tC4f arrives at which the automatic button function is enabled, and at that timing tC4f, the sound may be switched to an output state in a strongly suppressed mode or to a non-output state, and terminated midway.

At timing tE3d, while the fifth post-operation performance is already in the execution state, the "wide-area type extinction effect" is started to be executed as the extinction effect described above. The image of the "wide-area type extinction effect" does not necessarily have to be the same as that in the first reception-permitting state, but it is desirable to execute it as an extinction effect accompanied by a change from the background image displayed until the operation is accepted. In other words, in this case, it goes without saying that it will be executed using at least half of the display area. As a result, the extinction effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation performance is executed) will be executed in the same manner (wide-area type extinction effect) in both the second reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state, so that the first reception-permitting state can be recalled after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation performance is executed), and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. The manner of such an extinction effect is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tE3c), and this point is also the same as in the first reception-permitting state.

In the example shown in FIG. 166, the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is again output in a non-suppressed mode in the fifth reception-permitting state is set to be the timing tE5 at which the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) ends, but it may be a timing that arrives while the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) is being executed, or a timing that arrives after the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) has ended.

In addition, in the first acceptance state, as in the fifth acceptance state, the timing for putting the "BGM playback sound" into a suppressed output state or into a non-output state may be when an operation is accepted.

In the first acceptance state or the fifth acceptance state, the process of changing the sound that was previously in a non-suppressed output state to "output in suppressed mode" or "non-output state" and the process of outputting the output sound after an operation do not necessarily need to be started at the same time, as long as both processes are started based on the acceptance of an operation.

As described above, when an operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance state, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to turn off the specific performance movable body that was previously in a light-emitting state for a predetermined time (fifth post-operation performance), whereas when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance state, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to apply a driving force to the specific performance movable body so that a predetermined performance action appears (first post-operation performance). In addition, in the first post-operation performance, a driving force is generated for the driving means corresponding to the operation means that is the operation target, so that a predetermined movement (such as vibration) appears in the operation means, whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, it is desirable not to perform such processing. In addition, in the first post-operation performance, it is desirable to change the light-emitting state of the operation means that is the operation target, whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, it is desirable to turn off the light-emitting state of the operation means that is the operation target. It is desirable that these processing in the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state are in a state that can appear when the same result (for example, a jackpot win) is obtained as a result of the jackpot determination.

In addition, if a moving performance is performed by a specific performance movable object in the first post-operation performance, it is desirable to make it possible to emit light in a manner that does not appear when the specific performance movable object is not in operation.

In addition, in the first post-operation performance, the sound effect corresponding to the operation reception is output continuously after it starts, whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, it is desirable that after the sound effect corresponding to the operation reception has been output for a predetermined period of time, a state in which no sound effect is output in a non-suppressed mode (a state in which sound effect is output in a strongly suppressed mode, or a state in which no sound effect is output) appears. With this configuration, in the fifth post-operation performance, the sound effect corresponding to the operation reception is properly executed, but it can be made to have a tendency to be suppressed compared to the first post-operation performance, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game in an appropriate manner.

It is also desirable to make the reception permissible sound output when the first reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state occur differently. That is, as described above, in the first reception permissible state, the first permissible sound (sound effect) and the second permissible sound (message sound) are output, whereas in the fifth reception permissible state, the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable to output the first permissible sound (sound effect) itself as a different sound.

As described above, the same aspect (the aspect shown in FIG. 144 (a) to (c)) of the model image (integrated model image) can be displayed in the first reception allowing state and the fifth reception allowing state (second reception allowing state). However, even if the same aspect is displayed as the model image (integrated model image) in the first reception allowing state and the fifth reception allowing state (second reception allowing state), it is preferable to make the size of the display different (similar shape), and to display it in a smaller aspect in the fifth reception allowing state (second reception allowing state) than in the first reception allowing state. However, the size will be the same in the second reception allowing state and the fifth reception allowing state. Note that, as described above, in the first reception allowing state, a special aspect can be displayed as the model image (integrated model image), but in the fifth reception allowing state (second reception allowing state), a special aspect is not displayed as the model image (integrated model image).

In addition, in the first post-operation performance corresponding to the first reception-permitting state, it is desirable to start outputting a performance sound not triggered by operation reception (a performance sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) in a non-suppressed mode while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode (for example, returning BGM). In contrast, in the fifth post-operation performance corresponding to the fifth reception-permitting state, it is desirable to prevent outputting a performance sound not triggered by operation reception (a performance sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) in a non-suppressed mode while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode. In other words, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is set to a non-output state, outputting a performance sound not triggered by operation reception (a performance sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) in a non-suppressed mode starts. Therefore, by adopting such a suppressed mode compared to the first reception-permitting state, it is possible to preferably maintain interest in the game.

As described above, the second acceptance allowable state may be allowed to occur in both a variation pattern in which the first acceptance allowable state occurs and a variation pattern in which the first acceptance allowable state does not occur, so that when the second acceptance allowable state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance allowable state will occur within the period until the pattern variation in the execution state is stopped. Also, the fifth acceptance allowable state may be allowed to occur in both a variation pattern in which the first acceptance allowable state occurs and a variation pattern in which the first acceptance allowable state does not occur, so that when the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance allowable state will occur within the period until the pattern variation in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, it is desirable to set the rate at which the first acceptance allowable state will occur within the period until the pattern variation is stopped to be higher than when the second acceptance allowable state occurs when the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs. This rate may include 0% or 100%. According to this configuration, even if the player notices in advance that the first acceptance allowable state has not occurred before the operation acceptance is performed, the player can expect the possibility that the fifth acceptance allowable state will occur, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

According to the above-mentioned example of the performance, if an operation is accepted when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) and the accepted sound is not terminated midway based on the operation acceptance, not only the accepted sound but also other sounds (such as "BGM playback sound") that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode will be maintained in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (see FIG. 161). In contrast, if an operation is accepted when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) and the accepted sound is terminated midway based on the operation acceptance, not only the accepted sound but also other sounds (such as "BGM playback sound") that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode can be output in the strong suppression mode or not output (see FIG. 166).

According to the above-mentioned example of the performance, when a jackpot is obtained by the jackpot judgment and the model image (integrated model image) is displayed, if an operation is accepted and the acceptance permission sound is terminated based on the operation acceptance, there are two cases based on the operation acceptance: "the specific performance movable body is made to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific performance action is generated (Fig. 162)" and "the light-emitting area of the specific performance movable body that was in the light-emitting state is reduced or turned off, and no performance action is generated (Fig. 166)". Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game in a suitable manner when the acceptance permission sound is terminated in the middle of the game. In addition, in the case of "the specific performance movable body is made to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific performance action is generated by the process of reducing or turning off the light-emitting area of the specific performance movable body" (Fig. 162), it is desirable to make the non-light-emitting part illuminated by the "process of reducing or turning off the light-emitting area of the specific performance movable body" also illuminate.

In each of the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the integrated model image may be displayed using multiple layers. Also, if the model image and gauge image are displayed separately as separate images rather than as an integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

In the examples described above and below, the first and second permissible sounds are output so that there is a period when they overlap with each other, but the second permissible sound may start to be output after the first permissible sound has finished being output.

In addition, in the acceptance acceptance state in each of the examples described above and below, the model image is displayed as an integrated model image IG including the gauge image GG, but it does not necessarily have to be displayed as an image including the gauge image GG.

The acceptable state described above and below can occur in both the fluctuation pattern when there is a jackpot and the fluctuation pattern when there is a miss.

In each of the reception permission states described above and each of the reception permission states described below, when the post-operation performance is executed, a disappearance effect is executed as an image separate from the mock image, but only when the post-operation performance is not executed as a result of execution in a non-automatic reception mode, it is desirable to execute the disappearance effect by fading out the mock image itself, in order to prevent the degree of expectation from being recognized. In this case, a process is executed in which the mock image itself displayed in a specific layer is changed from the state it was in when the reception permission state was in effect.

In each of the above-mentioned acceptance permission states and each of the acceptance permission states described below, even if the acceptance permission state is the same, the type of extinction effect may be changed depending on whether a jackpot has been won or not, or on the degree of expectation as a mode of post-operation performance.

The wide-area vanishing effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area vanishing effect is set to less than half of the display screen, but it does not necessarily have to meet the condition of more than half or less than half as long as "the display area of the wide-area vanishing effect > the display area of the narrow-area vanishing effect". Similarly, the front performance is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area front performance is set to less than half of the display screen, but it does not necessarily have to meet the condition of more than half or less than half as long as "the display area of the wide-area front performance > the display area of the narrow-area front performance".

The post-operation performance may be performed only by the LCD display, sound output, or light emitted by a lamp on the game board 5. In short, it is sufficient that some kind of change occurs in the display, sound, light emission, etc. in response to the acceptance of an operation.

In addition, the "specific type of sound effect" may be the sound of background music being played during normal fluctuations, or the sound of background music being played across multiple fluctuations.

In addition, the fourth reception permission state does not necessarily have to be executed in a non-automatic reception mode, but may be executed in an automatic reception mode.

It is also desirable to make the post-operation performance when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance state (first post-operation performance) different from the post-operation performance when an operation is accepted in the fourth acceptance state (fourth post-operation performance).

In each of the examples above and below, when the vanishing effect (specified layer) is displayed, processing may also be performed to reduce the visibility of the integrated model image IG (specific layer) itself (such as increasing the transparency).

In the above and below examples, the image associated with the vanishing effect (wide-area vanishing effect, narrow-area vanishing effect) may be displayed with a specified transparency, and in this case, even if it is displayed so as to overlap the entire mock image (integrated mock image), it is possible to confirm the appearance of the mock image (integrated mock image).

In each of the performance examples described above and below, a "narrow-area pre-performance" may mean a "pre-performance that does not involve a background change (a performance in which the previously displayed background image is made invisible and a performance is performed with a new background image being displayed)." In this case, a "wide-area pre-performance" means a "pre-performance that involves a background change (a performance in which the previously displayed background image is made invisible and a performance is performed with a new background image being displayed)." The background image may be a solid black or white image, for example.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and each of the examples described below, the form of the integrated imitation image shown in FIG. 144(d) may be omitted. In this case, the "special form" is used as a form in which the shape of the operation means (the imitation image that imitates the operation receiving portion itself is the same, and the shape of the peripheral decoration image is different (the form shown in FIG. 144(c)).

In the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples of performance, when a mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed, as described above, the mock image is dynamically displayed in a form that expresses the "movement in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as an operating means (operation receiving portion). In this regard, it is desirable that such dynamic display continue on a specific layer until it is hidden, even after the operation is accepted.

In each of the above-mentioned and later-mentioned performance examples, the display method for the model image may be appropriately changed or added to the contents described in FIG. 144 to FIG. 160, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and other examples. In addition, the model image, gauge image, acceptance permission sound, and post-operation performance when the first acceptance permission state occurs may be appropriately changed or added to the contents applied to the explanatory text and other examples described in FIG. 232 to FIG. 160, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and other examples related to the "effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a strongly suppressed mode." In addition, the model image, gauge image, acceptance permission sound, and post-operation performance when the second acceptance permission state occurs may be appropriately changed or added to the contents applied to the explanatory text and other examples described in FIG. 232 to FIG. 160, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and other examples related to the "effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a non-suppressed mode."

[More detailed effects such as disappearance of images]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the moving body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (if a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) will not be generated even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Also, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

Note that, with regard to the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. However, it is preferable that the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment are not included in the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), or that the selection rate for these patterns is low.

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-acceptance performance (post-operation performance) that generates a predetermined change to the performance component that is the target of the performance (at least one of the following: a display change on the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change on the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that the interest in playing the game may decrease due to the acceptance period.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the "operation by the player" to be detected is not limited to operations that are directly performed by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact actions by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more acceptance means (operation means) that accept actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing, touching, non-contact, etc.) to be used in the presentation.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is designed to have, for example, the following special presentation characteristics. It is not necessary to have all of the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below; for example, even if the machine has at least one of the presentation characteristics (any configuration), it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in playing, or it may selectively have several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it may adopt a configuration that is described as applicable to another configuration as appropriate. Furthermore, the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that the machine has some configuration that can suppress a decline in interest in playing related to the acceptance period.

[Configuration 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the replica image display, which is displayed using a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action (after the performance change based on the acceptance has begun), so that the player can understand in what form (for example, Figures 144 (a) to (d)) the replica image display was displayed during the acceptance period, even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment provides multiple acceptance periods (valid periods) with different presentation contents (post-acceptance presentations such as conversation preview, cut-in preview, and moving object preview, which are types of preview presentations (expectation level suggestion presentations)) that are carried out when the ball is accepted, and it is possible to generate an acceptance period (valid period) of a different type according to the result of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later, if an action by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period, a specific post-acceptance performance image can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the acceptance, and a specific mode can appear separately from the specific post-acceptance performance image, and when the specific mode appears, the replica image display becomes difficult to see. In other words, in this case, not only is it possible to check which mode appeared as the replica image display even after the acceptance has been made, but by reducing the visibility of the replica image display by the specific mode until it is made invisible, it is expected that the player's focus will naturally be shifted from the "replica image display" to the "specific post-acceptance performance image."

However, since the replica image display is originally displayed during the reception period before the reception has been made, if the replica image display is displayed after the reception has been made, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the specific post-reception performance image corresponding to the reception has already been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the replica image display is made invisible (invisible) while the specific mode is displayed, while the specific post-reception performance image is displayed while the specific mode is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, while the specific mode is displayed, the transition in the display performance from the pre-reception display (replica image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception performance image) is realized, so that it becomes easy to recognize whether or not the transition in the display performance from the pre-reception display (replica image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception performance image) has been completed simply by checking whether the state is before the specific mode appears or after the specific mode has finished appearing.

As will be described later, in pachinko machine 1, the specific mode and the specific post-acceptance performance image both appear based on the fact that the reception has been made, but the specific mode appears before the specific post-acceptance performance image is displayed, in a situation where the specific post-acceptance performance image has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, the imitation image display is made difficult to see by the specific mode in a situation where the specific post-acceptance performance image has not yet been displayed, so while the imitation image display is visible, the specific post-acceptance performance image may soon appear, and the player can be encouraged in advance to prepare himself or herself to change his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see imitation image display."

[Configuration 2]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted during a first acceptance period (valid period) among the above-mentioned multiple acceptance periods (valid periods), a first post-acceptance performance image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and a mode (first performance mode) in which the model image display is difficult to see can be displayed separately from the first post-acceptance performance image. Also, when an action by a player is accepted during a second acceptance period among the above-mentioned multiple acceptance periods (valid periods), a second post-acceptance performance image different from the first post-acceptance performance image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and a mode (second performance mode) in which the model image display is difficult to see can be displayed separately from the second post-acceptance performance image. The above-mentioned "specific mode" may correspond to either the first performance mode or the second performance mode, or may not correspond to either one.

With this configuration, it becomes possible to infer the type of post-reception performance image (first post-reception performance image, second post-reception performance image) simply by checking the manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see, without checking whether the "first post-reception performance image" or the "second post-reception performance image" is displayed as the post-reception performance image. In other words, it goes without saying that the manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (first performance manner, second performance manner) is realized as an image displayed in a specific area that at least partially overlaps with a predetermined area in which the imitation image display is displayed in the "display screen of the performance display device 1600" (if it overlaps with the entire area from the start of appearance, a predetermined transparency is set), or as a performance that uses a predetermined performance object (for example, a movable object performance, etc.) that is located in a position that overlaps with the imitation image display when viewed from the front. Therefore, even if a player does not change his/her gaze from the model image display after the reception, it is possible to confirm the type of appearance (first presentation mode, second presentation mode) that appears at the gaze point (so as to overlap with the model image display), and this makes it possible to guess the type of post-reception presentation (first post-reception presentation image, second post-reception presentation image) without changing the gaze point.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the third acceptance period (valid period) among the multiple acceptance periods (valid periods), a third post-acceptance performance image different from both the first post-acceptance performance image and the second post-acceptance performance image can be displayed based on the fact that the action (operation) is accepted. However, in addition to the third post-acceptance performance image, the first performance mode that also corresponds to the first acceptance period can be displayed as a performance mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mock image display.

According to this configuration, when the first performance mode appears as a mode that makes it difficult to view the imitation image display, it is unclear which of the first and third post-reception performance images will appear, but when the second performance mode appears as a mode that makes it difficult to view the imitation image display, it is possible to guess that the second post-reception performance image will appear. That is, in this case, for example, when the first performance mode appears, it is possible to recognize that the possibility of the second post-reception performance image being output has been denied, but it is unclear which of the first and third post-reception performance images will appear, which makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in which one will appear, and therefore it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to shift their gaze to the location where the post-reception performance is being executed while maintaining the performance and tension when a mode that makes it difficult to view the imitation image display appears.

Here, the "post-acceptance performance image" has been described as an example of the post-acceptance performance, but if, for example, "lamp illumination" or "moving body operation" is executed in a different manner between the first and second acceptance periods as the post-acceptance performance (or if it is executed when the reception is made during one acceptance period, but not executed when the reception is made during the other acceptance period), the above-described "post-acceptance performance image" can be replaced with "lamp illumination" or "moving body operation". In any case, in consideration of the above-mentioned effect of "allowing the player to guess the type of post-acceptance performance without changing the gaze", the post-acceptance performance is realized as being executed at a position that is offset from the position where the model image display is displayed in front view and does not overlap (a position that the player cannot confirm unless he changes his gaze from the position where the model image display is displayed). In addition, if multiple post-acceptance performances such as "post-acceptance performance image", "lamp illumination", and "moving body operation" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, the above-mentioned effect can be achieved as long as at least one of those post-acceptance performances corresponds to the above-mentioned "post-acceptance performance".

When multiple post-reception effects (multiple post-reception modes) such as "post-reception performance image," "lamp illumination," and "moving body operation" are performed in parallel based on the fact that the reception is confirmed, it is possible to make at least one of these post-reception effects (post-reception modes) equivalent to a "post-reception performance." This can be applied to the performance examples described above as well as the performance examples described below.

[Configuration 3]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by a player is accepted within a reception period (a specific reception period), a special presentation mode can be executed as a post-acceptance presentation (one aspect) based on that acceptance, and during the execution period of the special presentation mode, there are states in which the imitation image display is relatively easy to see and states in which the imitation image display is relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the special performance mode (post-reception performance) has begun based on the fact that the reception has been made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the replica image display. Also, by making the replica image display relatively difficult to see during the execution of the special performance mode (post-reception performance), it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift their focus of attention from the "replica image display" to the "special performance mode (post-reception performance)."

In the pachinko machine 1, the special performance mode (post-reception performance) is started so as not to affect the visibility of the replica image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the replica image display is displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the special performance mode (post-reception performance) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the specified area when viewed from the front. As a result, by making the replica image display relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the special performance mode (post-reception performance), it is expected that the player's focus will be naturally shifted from the "replica image display" to the "special performance mode (post-reception performance)".

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when acceptance is made within a specific acceptance period, a state in which at least the special presentation mode and the predetermined presentation mode are performed in parallel appears based on the acceptance. However, the predetermined presentation mode is started to be executed after the special presentation mode has started to be executed (later than the special presentation mode) so as to adversely affect the visibility of the replica image display (making the replica image display difficult to see). This makes it relatively difficult to see the replica image display during the execution period of the special presentation mode (post-acceptance presentation), which is expected to encourage the player to naturally shift his or her focus from the "replica image display" to the "special presentation mode (post-acceptance presentation)".

The process of making the specified performance mode appear also begins to be executed based on the fact that the reception has been made. Therefore, the post-reception performance may be realized as a combination of multiple post-reception performances (multiple post-reception modes) including at least a special performance mode and a specified performance mode, and the specified performance mode may be realized as one mode of the post-reception performance. In any case, the specified performance mode described in this configuration example is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area where the mock image display is displayed, or as a performance that is executed using a performance body that is positioned so as to overlap at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

[Configuration 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when an action by a player is accepted within a reception period (specific reception period), while the replica image display is being displayed, a "specific disappearing performance display" can be displayed as a form of making the replica image display difficult to view, using a specific area including at least a part of the above-mentioned specified area which is the display target area of the replica image display, and the replica image display is made non-displayable while the specific disappearing performance display is being displayed after the specific disappearing performance display has started to be displayed.

In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the model image display was appearing. Also, before the model image display is hidden, the visibility of the model image display is reduced by a specific disappearance effect display, and since the model image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced, it can be suggested that there is little time left until the model image display is hidden, and it can be suppressed that the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed when the model image display is hidden.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific disappearance performance display can be displayed even during the period after the model image display is hidden, and the post-acceptance performance is started to be executed while at least the specific disappearance performance display is displayed. The post-acceptance performance is displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific disappearance performance display, or is realized as being executed using a performance body that is located in a position that overlaps with (at least a part of) the specific disappearance performance display when viewed from the front.

With this configuration, among the post-reception performances, the specific post-reception performance that is executed at a position that overlaps with the specific disappearance performance display when viewed from the front can be recognized without shifting the gaze from the position where the specific disappearance performance display is displayed. In other words, in this case, when the specific disappearance performance display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that there is no need to change the gaze in order to grasp the aspect of the specific post-reception performance, so that interest in the game can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 5]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the action of the player is accepted during the acceptance period (specific acceptance period) until the model image display is made invisible, a specific mode may appear, and when the specific mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the winning/losing judgment is a special result (for example, a big win or a guaranteed big win), the premonition effect display is executed in a specific premonition mode and the action of the player is accepted during the acceptance period corresponding to the premonition effect display, the specific mode is made to appear during the period from when the action is accepted until the model image display is made invisible.

In other words, in this case, when the premonition effect display is executed in a specific premonition mode, the player will be able to recognize that a specific mode will appear before the model image display is made invisible, making the model image display difficult to see, and it will be possible to encourage the player to pay attention to the mode in which the model image display appears before making an action by the player. Note that the "specific mode" in configuration 5 and the "specific mode" in configuration 1 may be the same mode, or may be different modes, or may occur in response to different acceptance periods.

As will be described later, in pachinko machine 1, when the result of the win/loss judgment is a special result (e.g., a jackpot, a guaranteed jackpot, etc.), the premonition display is executed in a manner different from the specific premonition mode, and an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the premonition display (an acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period), the specific mode may or may not appear within the period from the acceptance until the model image display is switched off, or may not appear within that period.

With this configuration, if the premonition performance display is executed in a manner different from the specific premonition mode, it becomes unclear whether the specific mode will appear during the period from the time of acceptance until the model image display is hidden. This improves the performance during the period from the time of acceptance until the model image display is hidden, and makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

Note that the above configuration 5 may be replaced with the following configuration, or may be provided as a configuration (acceptance period) different from the above configuration 5. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the action of the player is accepted during the acceptance period (a specific acceptance period, or an acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period) until the model image display is made invisible, a specific mode may appear, and when the specific mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the winning/losing judgment is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a guaranteed jackpot, etc.), the premonition display is executed in a special premonition mode (which may be the same as the specific premonition mode) and the action of the player is accepted during the acceptance period corresponding to the premonition display, the specific mode is not made to appear during the period from when the action is accepted until the model image display is made invisible. In other words, in this case, when the premonition performance display is executed in a special premonition mode, it becomes possible to recognize that a specific mode will not appear before the model image display is hidden, and that the model image display will not be difficult to see in relation to the specific mode.

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, if the result of the winning/losing judgment is a special result (for example, a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot), and the premonition display is executed in a manner different from the special premonition mode, and an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the premonition display (an acceptance period different from the acceptance period), the specific mode may or may not appear during the period from the time of acceptance to the time the model image display is made invisible. Even with this configuration, if the premonition display is executed in a manner different from the special premonition mode, it is unclear whether the specific mode will appear during the period from the time of acceptance to the time the model image display is made invisible, so that the performance from the time of acceptance to the time the model image display is made invisible is improved, and the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

For the configurations of these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply the configurations described above or below that are applicable to configuration 5 above.

[Configuration 6]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple types of premonition display effects are provided to indicate that an acceptance period during which the player's actions are accepted will occur soon. A specific premonition display among the multiple types of premonition display effects can be executed across the timing of the corresponding acceptance period, and the player's actions can be accepted while the specific premonition display effect is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's actions can be accepted while still being able to confirm which type (mode) of premonition display is being displayed, which can prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type (mode) of the premonition display.

In addition, in pachinko machine 1, when a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition effect display is being displayed, a post-acceptance effect (e.g., a special post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the acceptance is started, but even when the post-acceptance effect starts to be executed, the specific premonition effect display is not hidden but remains displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's action is accepted while still being able to confirm which type (mode) of premonition display is being displayed, and furthermore, the post-acceptance performance corresponding to that acceptance is started to be executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game caused by forgetting to check the type (mode) of the premonition display can be suppressed.

[Configuration 7]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) occurs, it is possible to execute a process to make an audible reception permission sound, which indicates that the reception means is in a state where reception is permitted, or that the reception means will (soon) be in a state where reception is permitted, thereby preventing the player from forgetting to take action for reception.

Even if the reception-permitted sound is realized as something that is audible before the occurrence of the corresponding reception period (indicating that the reception period will occur soon), it is made audible across the timing of the occurrence of the reception period, and can be made audible at least partway through the reception period. In the case of a pachinko machine 1 in which the tone setting value can be set to "0", when the volume setting value is set to "0", the reception-permitted sound will be output but will not be made audible.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audible (in an output state) during a reception period (such as a specific reception period), processing is started to be executed to make the acceptance permission sound inaudible before the appearance of the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (such as a disappearing effect display)" and before the appearance of the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (such as a disappearing effect display)."

In other words, in this case, even if the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" has not yet appeared after the reception, the fact that the reception period has already ended can be appropriately indicated to the player. As a result, even if the timing in which the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" appears is delayed after the reception, inconvenience is unlikely to occur, and the model image display can be displayed in a mode that is easy to see.

[Configuration 8]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period (a plurality of reception periods with different post-reception effects). Then, during the period from when an action by a player is accepted while the model image display is displayed until the model image display is made invisible, a state in which the model image display is difficult to see appears. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in both cases where an action by a player is accepted while the model image display is displayed during the first reception period and where an action by a player is accepted while the model image display is displayed during the second reception period, a "state in which the model image display is difficult to see" appears during the period until the model image display is made invisible.

In other words, in this case, regardless of whether it is the first reception period or the second reception period, it is possible to indicate that the reception period has ended while being able to confirm which state has appeared as the mock image display since reception was made. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in configuration 8 may be reception periods of the same type as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in configuration 2 above, or may be reception periods of different types.

As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 provides multiple modes, including a first mode and a second mode, as the "mode in which the replica image display becomes difficult to see," and the first mode appears during the first reception period, and the second mode appears during the second reception period, so that the "mode in which the replica image display becomes difficult to see" can be given a dramatic effect related to the type of reception period.

As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 also provides a third mode as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," and during the first acceptance period, the first mode can appear regardless of whether or not the request is accepted within that period, but during the second acceptance period, the second mode appears if the request is accepted within that period, and the third mode appears if the request is not accepted within that period.

With this configuration, during the second reception period, it is possible to determine whether or not the player's action has been accepted within the reception period based on the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see" that appears, but during the first reception period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the player's action has been accepted within the reception period based on the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see" that appears, and it is expected that this type of presentation will increase interest in the game.

In each of the above-mentioned examples or each of the examples described below, "a manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" may mean a manner in which a disappearance display is displayed in a specific area that includes at least a portion of the specified area in which the imitation image display is displayed, a manner in which a performance is executed that utilizes a performance object that is positioned so as to overlap at least a portion of the specified area in which the imitation image display is displayed when viewed from the front, or a manner in which the imitation image display itself is changed (modified) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transparency settings, etc.).

[Configuration 9]
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) occurs, it is possible to execute a process to make an audible reception permission sound, which indicates that the reception means is in a state where reception is permitted, or that the reception means will (soon) be in a state where reception is permitted, thereby preventing the player from forgetting to take action for reception.

As also mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 provides multiple types of premonition display effects that indicate that an acceptance period for accepting player actions will occur soon. A specific premonition display among the multiple types of premonition display effects can be executed across the timing of the occurrence of the corresponding acceptance period, and the player's actions can be accepted while the specific premonition display is displayed. In other words, in this case, the player's actions can be accepted while remaining able to confirm which type of premonition display is being displayed, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type of premonition display can be suppressed. The "specific premonition display" in configuration 9 may be the same as the "specific premonition display" in configuration 6, or may be a different type (type) of premonition display.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific premonition display continues to be displayed even after the performance corresponding to the acceptance of the player's action (post-acceptance performance) has progressed, so that the player can check which type of premonition display has appeared even after the acceptance has been made.

However, because premonition display effects are originally displayed in a state where acceptance is not permitted (before the start of the acceptance period), even if a player performs an action while the premonition display effect is displayed, the player may feel uneasy about whether or not the action has been accepted. Despite this, if the premonition display were to simply be displayed even after acceptance has been made, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease as it will be difficult to tell whether or not the action has been accepted.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, as described below, when a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition display is being displayed, the specific premonition display continues to be displayed after the action is accepted, but a mode is created in which the specific premonition display is difficult to see while it is being displayed. Then, after this mode is created, the specific premonition display is made invisible while it is difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after acceptance has been made, it is possible to check which aspect of the premonition display has been displayed, and by reducing the visibility of the premonition display until it is hidden, it is possible to appropriately indicate that acceptance has already been made.

[Configuration 10]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur, a predetermined image display can be displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600), and the model image display can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action. When the player's action is accepted during the acceptance period, a mode that makes the model image display difficult to see is made to appear while the model image display is being displayed, and the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that can be displayed even in a pattern change in which a reception period does not occur.

In other words, in this case, a specific disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of a specific image display that is not related to the acceptance period, allowing the game to proceed without adversely affecting the effects that are not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first image display (predetermined image display) and the second image display can be displayed within the reception period as image displays that have no presentation-related relationship to the reception period (current reception period), and the specific disappearance presentation display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but is displayed in such a way that it does affect the visibility of the second image display (pending).

With this configuration, even if an image display is not directly related to the acceptance period, depending on the type of image, visibility may be affected or not affected when a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" occurs. Therefore, when a player performs an action, it is possible to provide a performance that allows the player to decide whether or not to check an image display that is not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, in this case, it is desirable to display the first image display as an image (multiple forms) related to (suggesting) the outcome (expectations) of the pattern change, and the second image display as an image that is not related to (does not suggest) the outcome (expectations) of the pattern change, in order to avoid a decrease in interest in the game when the visibility of the second image display is affected.

When a "specific disappearing performance display" displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600) is used as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," if an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the specific disappearing performance display will be displayed using a specific area that includes at least a part of a specified area on the display screen (performance display device 1600), which is the display target area for the model image display, while the model image display is being displayed.

[Configuration 11]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, in both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur, a predetermined image display can be displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600), and the model image display can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action. The "predetermined image display" in the configuration 11 may be the same as the "predetermined image display" in the above configuration 10, or may be a different image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the player's action is accepted during the acceptance period, a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see can appear while the model image display is being displayed, and a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode are prepared as modes in which the model image display is difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, one of a number of modes, including the first mode and the second mode, will appear as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," and it is expected that this will increase interest in the game when the model image display becomes difficult to see.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "first mode" as the "mode in which the replica image display becomes difficult to view" is executed, the "first mode" makes both the replica image display and the predetermined image display difficult to view, but when the "second mode" as the "mode in which the replica image display becomes difficult to view" is executed, the "second mode" is executed so as to make only the replica image display difficult to view out of the replica image display and the predetermined image display.

This configuration creates a dramatic effect in terms of whether the "first mode" or the "second mode" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in order to increase interest in the game, it is desirable that the mock image display and the specified image display can be displayed when either the reception period for the type corresponding to the above-mentioned "first mode" or the reception period for the type corresponding to the above-mentioned "second mode" is occurring.

[Configuration 12]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1,
A first reception performance execution means is provided, which can generate a first reception period during which reception by the reception means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, and when an action by the player is accepted during the first reception period, a first post-reception performance display can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (the rate at which the jackpot pattern is stopped) based on the fact that the action is accepted; and a second reception performance execution means is provided, which can generate a second reception period during which reception by the reception means (e.g., the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 different from the operation button 410) is permitted, and when an action by the player is accepted during the second reception period, a second post-reception performance display can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (the rate at which the jackpot pattern is stopped) based on the fact that the action is accepted. The expectation level (the rate at which the jackpot pattern is stopped) may be 0% or 100%. The first post-reception performance display and the second post-reception performance display are executed as displays of different types as advance notice performances. Furthermore, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in configuration 12 may be reception periods of the same type as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in configurations 2 and 8 above, or may be reception periods of different types.

Also, as mentioned above, in pachinko machine 1, in both cases where an action by the player is accepted during the first acceptance period and where an action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, it is possible for the replica image display to appear in a state in which the replica image display becomes difficult to see after the acceptance is made while the replica image display is still displayed.

In other words, in this case, regardless of the type of reception period, it is possible to check which aspect of the model image display was displayed even after reception was made. Also, since the visibility of the model image display is reduced until the model image display is hidden, it can be suggested that there is little time left until the model image display is hidden, and it can be possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing the game when the model image display is hidden.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first reception period, whether the first mode is executed as the first reception post-performance display or the second mode with a higher expectation than the first mode is executed as the first reception post-performance display, the same mode appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". In contrast, in the second reception period, if the second mode with a higher expectation than the first mode (or the first mode with a lower expectation than the second mode) is executed as the second reception post-performance display, a specific mode appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", but if the first mode (or the second mode) is executed as the second reception post-performance display, the specific mode does not appear as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" and a mode different from the specific mode appears, or the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" itself does not appear. As described above, the expectation (the rate at which the jackpot pattern stops) may be 0% or 100%.

With this configuration, depending on the type of reception period, there will be cases where the expectation level of the post-reception performance display can be inferred simply by checking the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see," and cases where the expectation level cannot be inferred. This is expected to increase interest in the game through the performance related to the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see."

If the "specific mode" that may occur in response to the second reception period as the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" is set to one that cannot appear as the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the first reception period, it will be possible to infer the type of reception period based on the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see," thereby improving interest in the game. In order to achieve such an effect, it is more desirable to set the "mode" that may occur in response to the first reception period as the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" to one that cannot appear as the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the second reception period.

However, the "mode in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see" may be the same in the "mode" that may occur in response to the first reception period and the "mode" that may occur in response to the second reception period.

[Configuration 13]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or a gauge image) can be displayed at least during the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, and a reception-related performance sound (such as a reception permission sound) can be output at least during the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted during the reception period, a post-reception output sound (which itself can be seen as one aspect of the post-reception performance) related to the post-reception performance can be output based on the acceptance, and when the reception-related performance display is displayed during the reception period and an action by a player is accepted, the reception-related performance display is made invisible based on the acceptance. Similarly, when an action by a player is accepted during the reception period when the reception-related performance sound is in an audible state, the reception-related performance sound is made inaudible based on the acceptance.

In the above configuration, when a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance performance sound related to the post-acceptance performance is output, the reception-related performance display is made invisible, and the reception-related performance sound is made inaudible, making it easy for the player to recognize that the action has been accepted.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception-related performance display is not terminated and is displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance corresponding to the reception is started, but the reception-related performance sound is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the specific post-reception performance sound corresponding to the reception is started.

With this configuration, the reception-related performance display that is displayed during the reception period will continue to be displayed until after the specific post-reception performance has started, while the reception-related performance sound that is audible (output) during the reception period will no longer be audible at the time the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to confirm the appearance of the reception-related performance display that was displayed during the reception period even after the specific post-reception performance has started to be executed, while making the reception-related performance sound inaudible, making it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception period has already ended.

In addition, in the above-mentioned and below-mentioned examples, the inaudible state may be a state in which the output process of the reception-related sound production itself has ended, or a state in which the output process of the reception-related sound production itself continues but is not made audible by adjusting the volume to "0." Also, in the above-mentioned and below-mentioned examples, when the post-reception performance in response to reception is executed as a complex performance using multiple performance elements (displays, light-emitting lamps, movable objects, etc.), the specific post-reception performance may correspond to a "performance using a specific performance element" among those performance elements.

[Configuration 14]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple modes are prepared as the premonition effect display, and a specific premonition effect display can be displayed before the reception period occurs, and an audible output of a reception-related effect sound (such as a reception permission sound) can be started. The specific premonition effect display and the reception-related effect sound can be executed across the timing of the reception period, and an action by the player can be accepted while the specific premonition effect display is displayed and the reception-related effect sound is in an audible state (output). In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by the player is accepted during the reception period while a specific premonition effect display is displayed, the specific premonition effect display is made invisible based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Also, when an action by the player is accepted during the reception period while the reception-related effect sound is in an audible state, the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible based on the fact that the action has been accepted.

In the above configuration, the specific premonition display is hidden based on the acceptance of the player's action during the acceptance period, and the reception-related sound is made inaudible. Therefore, even if the player's action is accepted while the specific premonition display and reception-related sound are being executed before the acceptance period, the player can easily recognize that the action has been accepted. The "specific premonition display" in configuration 14 may be the same as the "specific premonition display" in configurations 6 and 9, or may be a premonition display of a different type (mode). The "reception-related sound" in configuration 14 may be the same as the "reception-related sound" in configuration 13, or may be different.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned specific premonition effect display is not terminated and is displayed at the time when the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance within the corresponding acceptance period is started. In contrast, the above-mentioned reception-related effect sound is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the execution of the specific post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the acceptance is started.

According to this configuration, the specific premonition display that is displayed before the start of the reception period will continue to be displayed until after the specific post-reception performance has started, while the reception-related performance sound that is audible (output) before the start of the reception period will no longer be audible at the time the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to confirm the premonition display that is displayed before the start of the reception period even after the specific post-reception performance has started to be executed, while making it possible to appropriately suggest that the reception period has already ended by making the reception-related performance sound that is output before the start of the reception period inaudible. Note that the "specific post-reception performance" and "specific post-reception output sound" of configuration 14 may be the same as or different from the "specific post-reception performance" and "specific post-reception output sound" of configuration 13, respectively.

[Configuration 15]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of reception periods with different "effect contents (types of post-reception effects) that proceed based on the acceptance of the player's action." The mock image display can be displayed even after the effect has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the player's action is accepted during a specific reception period among the plurality of reception periods, one of the plurality of effects is made to appear based on the acceptance, but even if any of the effects appears, a specific mode can be made to appear.

In the above configuration, multiple acceptance periods are prepared with different types of presentation modes that appear based on the acceptance of the player's actions (types of preview presentations, such as a "conversation preview" indicating which conversation will appear and a "moving body action preview" indicating whether a moving body will move or not). In this regard, if the player's action is accepted during a specific acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, one of the multiple presentations will appear based on the acceptance, but a specific presentation can appear regardless of which of the presentations appears. In other words, in this case, since a specific presentation will also appear regardless of which of the multiple presentations appears, it can be suggested that they are a common presentation "caused by the acceptance of the player's action during a specific acceptance period."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by a player is accepted during a special acceptance period that is different from the specific acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, one of multiple modes can appear, including a special mode whose appearance rate (which may be 0% or 100%) varies depending on whether or not special conditions (such as winning conditions for a jackpot or conditions for entering a special bonus mode) are met, and when the special mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see.

With this configuration, a special feature that indicates the degree of expectation appears before the model image display is hidden, and the special feature makes the model image display difficult to see, so the player can enjoy the progression from the model image display to the post-reception performance (special feature) without having to change his or her focus of gaze, without missing it.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "specific mode" appears based on the acceptance of an action by the player during the specific acceptance period, the "specific mode" makes the replica image display difficult to see. With this configuration, there are cases where the replica image display is made difficult to see by the special mode that suggests the expectation of a bonus being awarded (special acceptance period), and cases where the replica image display is made difficult to see by the specific mode that does not suggest the expectation of a bonus being awarded (specific acceptance period), so that the "mode that makes the replica image display difficult to see (specific mode, special mode)" has a dramatic effect, which can increase interest in the game.

The "specific reception period" in configuration 15 may be the same as the "specific reception period" in configurations 1, 7, and 9, or may correspond to a different reception period.

[Configuration 16]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time indication display that reduces the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) as time passes during the acceptance period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the remaining time indication display can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, and since the display area of the specific image can be reduced even while the performance is progressing, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the "acceptance has been completed" state even after the acceptance has been completed.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific partitioned area is displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600) as a remaining time indication display, and a depiction is made in which the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced within the specific partitioned area. Then, after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, not only the specific image (such as a gauge image) but also the specific partitioned area continues to be displayed. With this configuration, the specific partitioned area continues to be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, making it easier to determine whether the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) has been reduced.

Note that "after the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of an action by the player, the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced" also means that, for example, a specified display area remains as a gauge image at the time the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of an action by the player, but at a later point in time, the display area is set to 0 (not displayed). In this case, however, the specific partitioned area is required to still be displayed at the time the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, and the specific partitioned area will be made hidden after the timing when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0.

For example, configuration 16 can be implemented such that, when an action by a player is accepted, the remaining time indication display (such as a specific image or a specific partitioned area) is hidden based on the acceptance, but prior to hiding the remaining time indication display, a specific image with a display area set to a specific value (a predetermined value) within the specific partitioned area is displayed regardless of how much display area of the specific image was remaining at the time of acceptance, or, of the specific partitioned area and the specific image, only the specific partitioned area is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the action of the player is accepted (when the progress of the presentation corresponding to the acceptance starts), the "depiction of the reduction in the display area of the specific image" that has been executed before the action was accepted is not terminated but continues. Then, when a specified timing arrives, a specific image with a display area set to a specific value in a specific partitioned area is displayed, or only the specific partitioned area of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

In other words, in this case, when the performance corresponding to the reception starts, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is not significantly reduced and the drawing continues up to that point, which is expected to make it difficult to know whether the reception has been completed or not even after the reception has been completed, and to maintain a good sense of tension. Also, since the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is significantly reduced at a timing after the performance corresponding to the reception starts, it is possible to make it appear as if the reception has been completed just in time within the valid period (reception period), which is expected to increase interest in the game.

[Configuration 17]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 provides multiple premonition display displays as premonition display displays that suggest the occurrence of a reception period. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific premonition display display is performed among the multiple premonition display displays, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the premonition period before the reception period occurs and during the reception period. The model image display displayed during the premonition period is in a different form from the model image display displayed during the reception period, and is hidden before the reception period occurs, so that it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the period before the reception period occurs.

As described above, when a request is accepted within the acceptance period, the pachinko machine 1 hides the model image display based on that acceptance, but it is possible for a "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to see" to appear before the model image display is made invisible. However, as will be described later, this "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to see" is designed not to appear when the model image display that is displayed within the premonition period (specific premonition performance display) is made invisible until the display is made invisible.

With this configuration, during the premonition period (specific premonition effect display), the model image display is hidden without the "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to see" that appears in response to the reception period appearing. Therefore, even if the model image display is displayed during the premonition period (specific premonition effect display) but is hidden before the reception period occurs, it is possible to make it less likely for the player to mistakenly believe that the reception period has ended without their knowledge.

When multiple "modes that make the model image display difficult to see" that can appear in response to reception are prepared, including the above-mentioned "specific mode that makes the model image display difficult to see," it is preferable that none of these modes appear when the model image display displayed during the premonition period is hidden. However, if the mode is different from any of the multiple modes prepared as "modes that make the model image display difficult to see" in response to reception, the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see" may be made to appear during the premonition period until the model image display is hidden. In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as a "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see" that is exclusive to the premonition period, even if a "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see" appears during the premonition period, it is difficult for the player to misunderstand that the acceptance period has ended without his knowledge.

The "specific premonition display" in configuration 17 may be the same as the "specific premonition display" in configurations 6, 9, and 14, or may correspond to a different premonition display.

[Configuration 18]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the first performance condition is satisfied, the first reception period can be generated as a reception period during the execution period of the pattern change, and when the second performance condition is satisfied, the second reception period can be generated as a reception period during the execution period of the pattern change. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period can be continued even after the pattern change that caused the first reception period is ended and the next pattern change is started, but the second reception period does not continue until the pattern change that caused the second reception period is ended, but ends before the pattern change is ended. Furthermore, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period, and in both cases where the action by the player is accepted during the first reception period and where the action by the player is accepted during the second reception period, a disappearance performance mode in which the model image display is difficult to see appears based on the acceptance.

In other words, in this case, the effect of "being able to check which aspect of the mock image display was displayed even after acceptance was made, while being able to indicate that the acceptance period has ended" can be preferably achieved regardless of whether it is the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the disappearance performance mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see is executed in a different manner when it is accepted in the first acceptance period and when it is accepted in the second acceptance period. In other words, in this case, based on the type of "disappearance performance mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," it becomes possible to know whether the acceptance period will end within the ongoing pattern change, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The "first and second reception periods" in configuration 18 may be the same as the "first and second reception periods" in configurations 2, 8, and 12, or may correspond to different reception periods.

[Configuration 19]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of game states (first game state and second game state) with different game conditions (such as the ease of obtaining a prize ball when a game ball is shot into the game area) can be generated, and the above-mentioned acceptance period can be generated in either the first game state or the second game state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by a player is accepted during the acceptance period, a "mode in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see (disappearing performance mode)" can be made to appear while the Momo image display is being displayed, based on the acceptance, and then the Momo image display is made non-display.

In other words, in this case, the effect of "allowing the user to check which state was displayed as the mock image even after the acceptance was made, while indicating that the acceptance period has ended" can be obtained regardless of whether the acceptance is made during the acceptance period that occurs in the first game state or the second game state.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period of the multiple reception periods can occur only in the first game state of the first and second game states, and the second reception period of the multiple reception periods can occur only in the second game state (jackpot game) of the first and second game states. In this regard, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first and second reception periods. However, in the first game state (when accepted in the first reception period), a specific "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance performance mode)" that cannot appear in the second game state (when accepted in the second reception period) can appear.

With this configuration, even without checking the post-acceptance performance, it is possible to know whether the game is being controlled to the first game state or the second game state by simply checking which mode appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance performance mode)," thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even in the second game state (when accepted during the second acceptance period), a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearing performance mode)" different from a specific "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearing performance mode)" may appear.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permission state (acceptance period) in which an acceptance opportunity is granted occurs, a model image related to the acceptance target (such as a model image modeled on an operation receiving section) is displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in playing until the post-acceptance performance (post-operation performance) is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern performance progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of a notice judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance. In addition, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the model image illustrated in each of the above-mentioned performance examples with one of the integrated model images described below in order to improve interest in playing.

The "integrated model image display" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as another example or modified example thereof, and for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image display", and it is similarly arranged to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance-permitted sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) is being performed.

In addition, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, an acceptance permission state classified into the first type is a valid period that can occur when a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but cannot occur in a low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (a valid period that occurs based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high expectation fluctuation pattern) in a performance judgment based on the result of a jackpot judgment). In addition, an acceptance permission state of the second type is a valid period that can occur in either a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expectation fluctuation pattern (such as a valid period that occurs as a result of a notice judgment).

The "integrated imitation image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first type and second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). Here, it is assumed that the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) occur as acceptance permission states (acceptance periods) in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operating means (e.g., operation button 410), and therefore the "integrated imitation image display" displayed in those acceptance periods is an image imitation of the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated Moji image display", the special mode with the highest expectation (for example, the mode shown in Figure 144 (d)) can only be displayed in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), and in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), it can only be displayed in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in Figures 144 (a) to (c)). In the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination is made based on the result of the jackpot determination as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, Figures 144 (a) to (d)) the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in, and the "integrated Moji image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination may be made as to which of multiple modes not including a special mode (e.g., Figures 144 (a) to (c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the "integrated model image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The following describes in detail the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the above components 1 to 19, with reference to the drawings.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when a reception is made (conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level indication performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first reception period (reception performance) to the seventh reception period (reception performance) are prepared as multiple reception periods (reception performances).

Here, the "conversation announcement" as a post-reception effect indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear) based on which of multiple conversation contents will appear, the "cut-in announcement" as a post-reception effect indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear) based on which of multiple cut-in images will appear, and the "moving object announcement" as a post-reception effect indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear) based on whether or not a moving object moves.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be described with reference to Figures 167 to 178. Note that each reception period described above with reference to Figures 166 through 167 may be prepared as a reception period separate from the first reception period to the seventh reception period, or may be realized as one of the first reception period to the seventh reception period.

Figure 167 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the judgment and the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. Figures 174 and 175 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the start condition is established (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win/time-saving state), and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 174(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "first variation pattern" itself. In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 174(a), for ease of explanation, it is assumed that the first presentation display TE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer presentation") indicating the expected probability of a jackpot (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear when the decorative pattern SZ stops in the presentation) and the second presentation display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the pattern change. These displays may be displayed not only at the start of the change, but also during the change, or may be displayed at different times. The second presentation display FE itself may indicate the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear when the decorative pattern SZ stops in the presentation, or it may not indicate the rate.

In other words, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a notice judgment) corresponding to the first variation pattern (when the first condition is met), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the first acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the first post-acceptance performance" is permitted when timing tF3 arrives, which is the first predetermined time since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 167(a) ("the situation shown in FIG. 174(d)"). As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the first acceptance period, the first post-acceptance performance is carried out based on that acceptance.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) displays, in relation to the occurrence of such a first acceptance period, a premonition performance display suggesting that the acceptance period (valid period) will occur soon, a Momo image display suggesting the acceptance target (such as an operation receiving part), a gauge image display suggesting the remaining time of the acceptance period, a disappearance-related display (a state in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see) that makes it difficult to see the Momo image display, and a post-acceptance performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) depending on the acceptance. As described above, the Momo image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also the case for other acceptance periods.

More specifically, first, when the timing tF1 arrives before the first acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIG. 174(b), the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the premonition effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600) as shown in FIG. 167(b). The "first premonition effect display ZEH1" in the example shown in FIG. 167(b) is made to be hidden in accordance with the timing tF3 when the corresponding acceptance period (first acceptance period) occurs (the timing when acceptance for the first post-acceptance effect is permitted), but it may be made to be hidden before the timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 174(d), the first acceptance period in this example is such that the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is not displayed in a state in which acceptance of the player's action is permitted.

However, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, as shown in Figures 167 (b) and 174 (c), when timing tF2 arrives before the first reception period occurs, the "integrated Mo-image display IG (Mo-image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first premonition performance display ZEH1" is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the "integrated Mo-image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first premonition performance display ZEH1" is displayed. In other words, in this case, during the period in which both the "integrated Mo-image display IG" and the "first premonition performance display ZEH1" are displayed in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) (timing tF2 to tF3), at least a part of the "integrated Mo-image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "first premonition performance display ZEH1". This makes it possible to arouse interest in which targets (operation receiving parts) the player's actions will be permitted for during the period before the first acceptance period (timing tF2 to tF3), and is expected to make it less likely that the player will forget to operate or make an operation mistake after the first acceptance period has occurred.

In addition, during the period when both the "integrated Mogu image display IG" and the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" are displayed (timing tF2 to tF3), it is more desirable to display the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" so that the visibility of the "integrated Mogu image display IG" tends to gradually improve toward the start of the acceptance period, in order to increase interest in the game. For example, this can be achieved by gradually decreasing the display range of the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" (the range that overlaps with the integrated Mogu image display IG) or gradually increasing its transparency.

That is, as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIG. 174(c) and (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in this example, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed so as to span the timing tF3 when the first reception period occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible when an action is accepted within the first reception period, or when the first reception period ends without the action being accepted. Note that the first reception period in this example ends when timing tF4 arrives if no action by the player is accepted (see FIG. 167(b)).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 167 and the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A1 (FIG. 175(e1)-(i1))" or "A2 (FIG. 175(e2)-(i2))" assume that the player's action is accepted at timing tF3a within the first acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 167(a), the first acceptance period ends based on the player's action being accepted at timing tF3a, and the post-acceptance presentation corresponding to the first acceptance period (first post-acceptance presentation) begins to be executed.

The example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A1 (FIG. 175(e1)-(i1))" corresponds to a case in which the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, is executed as the post-reception presentation corresponding to the first reception period, and the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A2 (FIG. 175(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to a case in which the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation, is executed as the post-reception presentation corresponding to the first reception period.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIG. 175(e1) or (e2), at timing tF3a when the action by the player is accepted (when the first post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG is not only not hidden, but is also not made difficult to see.

In other words, the first post-acceptance performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that combines at least the "first post-acceptance performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "first post-acceptance specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the first post-acceptance output sound using the third performance device (speaker). Among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display) is displayed is configured to delay the time at which the first post-acceptance performance display starts to be executed as the first post-acceptance performance compared to the other performance devices, thereby maintaining the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after acceptance has been made.

As shown in FIG. 175(e1) or (e2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 144(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIGS. 144(a)-(d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible mode" after reception to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same mode as it was during the reception period (the mode shown in FIG. 175(e1) and (e2)) even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIG. 175(f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing tF3a when the first acceptance period ends as a result of the acceptance of an action by the player (when timing tF3b arrives), the display of the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (the first aspect of the first disappearance related display SK1 corresponding to the first acceptance period) is started as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see".

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tF3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period. Furthermore, even after the first post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has begun, the appearance of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility until it becomes difficult to see (timing tF3a to tF3b), which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, during the first reception period, regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception performance is executed in a low expectation mode (Fig. 175 (e1) to (i1)) or a high expectation mode (Fig. 175 (e2) to (i2)), the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance related display SK1. Therefore, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started to be executed, the expectation can be kept secret in the first performance device (performance display device 1600).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 167 (b) and Figure 175 (g1) or (g2), when timing tf3c arrives during the period during which the display related to the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (in a form in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, execution of a "first post-acceptance performance display UG1" is initiated in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) as a post-acceptance performance in response to the acceptance of an action by the player within the first acceptance period. However, in this example, in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A1 (FIG. 175(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 175(g1), the first mode (first post-reception presentation display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception presentation display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A2 (FIG. 175(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 175(g2), the second mode (first post-reception presentation display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception presentation display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" are displayed, the "first post-acceptance performance display UG1 (first post-acceptance performance display UG1-1 or first post-acceptance performance display UG1-2)" begins to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is made to continue to be displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the first acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (first post-acceptance performance display) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, because the first post-reception performance display begins while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" (from timing tF3c onwards), suggesting that the first reception period has already ended.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 167 (b) and Figure 175 (h1) or (h2), while the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "first disappearance-related display SK-1" is hidden as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIG. 175(i1) or (i2), which allows good visibility and causes the display related to the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" to be displayed.

In this regard, the "first post-reception performance display UG1" is displayed in one of a number of modes (here, first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 167(b), the "first post-reception performance display UG1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK-1" are hidden.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, various displays are performed within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 167) and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600) as the first reception period occurs, thereby preventing a decline in interest in playing the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tF3c) of the first post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tF3a of the reception.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a second performance device is prepared in addition to the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and when an action by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period, as shown in Figures 167 (b) and (c) together, based on the acceptance, the first post-acceptance performance (first post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the first post-acceptance performance (first post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tF3a when the reception is made during the first reception period is limited to a part of the first post-reception performance (the display of the first post-reception performance), and the first post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the timing tF3a.

Such a second performance device may be provided, for example, as a sub-LCD when the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a performance movable body capable of performing performance actions, or a performance lamp capable of emitting light for performance, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform performances (display performance, movable performance, light-emitting performance, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 175, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A1 (FIG. 175(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 175(e1), the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the first post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display UG1-1) using the first performance device as the first post-reception specific performance UGT1 (first post-reception specific performance UGT1-1, which is a low expectation mode of the first post-reception specific performance UGT1) corresponding to the first reception period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A2 (FIG. 175(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 175(e2), the mode in which "吉" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is started to be executed prior to the first post-reception presentation (first post-reception presentation display UG1-1) using the first presentation device as the first post-reception specific presentation UGT1 (first post-reception specific presentation UGT1-2, which is a high expectation mode of the first post-reception specific presentation UGT1) corresponding to the first reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 174, in addition to the first premonition performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a premonition performance (first premonition specific performance) corresponding to the first reception period is also executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) (FIGS. 174(b)-(d)). Unlike the first premonition performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the first premonition specific performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed even at the time when the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs arrives, and is executed across the timing tF3.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the first acceptance period occurs, the acceptance permission sound starts to be output at timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167(d) (corresponding to "the situation in which ♪ starts to be output in FIG. 174(c)"). In other words, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the first acceptance period is audibly output across timing tF3 when the first acceptance period occurs (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 174(d)"), and the player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output.

Here, in the first acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 167(d), FIG. 175(e1)-(g1), or FIG. 175(e2)-(g2), even if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated midway, but is output for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, the above-mentioned multiple acceptance periods include an acceptance period in which, when an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway based on the acceptance. Therefore, when an action is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output during the first acceptance period, and a state in which the audible output of the acceptance permission sound continues appears, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the action is accepted, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

However, in the first acceptance period, even if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the acceptance permission sound will not be terminated midway (terminating the audible output state midway), but when the acceptance is made, the audible output of the first post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to the "♪♪" output in FIG. 175 (e1) or (e2)) will be started based on this. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 167 (d), both the "acceptance permission sound" which is the sound audibly output during the first acceptance period and the "first post-acceptance output sound" which is the sound audibly output as a result of acceptance during the first acceptance period can be audibly output, making it even more difficult to recognize whether the acceptance period is in progress or has ended.

As shown in FIG. 167(d), this first post-acceptance output sound, like the "first post-acceptance performance display UG1", will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance-related display SK-1" are hidden (corresponding to the "situation where ♪♪ is output in FIG. 175(e1)-(i1) or (e2)-(e1)"). Also, for the first post-acceptance output sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A1 (FIG. 175(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A2 (FIG. 175(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance).

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 167, the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 174(d) to "A3 (Figure 175(e3) to (h3))" assumes a case in which no action by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period.

In other words, in this case, after the first acceptance period occurs, the timing tF4 arrives without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tF4 (the point at which the first acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, as shown in FIG. 175 (e3), just as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tF3a (the point at which an action by the player is accepted during the first acceptance period), does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the first acceptance period ends before the player's action is accepted in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the first acceptance period after the end of the first acceptance period, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 175 (f3), the display of the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (the second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first acceptance period) will begin as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the first reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the first reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the first reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the above-mentioned "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" that appears when an action by the player is not accepted within the first acceptance period is executed in a manner different from the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" that appears based on an action by the player being accepted within the first acceptance period. This makes it possible to suggest that an action by the player has not been accepted when the "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" appears, and thus makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 175 (g3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-2", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, the "first disappearance related display SK-2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 175 (h3).

Figure 168 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the judgment and a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. Figures 176 and 177 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the start condition is established (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win or time-saving state), and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ variation performance (performance depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 176(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second variation pattern" itself. Note that in the performance examples shown in FIG. 176 and FIG. 177, the first performance display TE is displayed, but the second performance display FE is not displayed.

However, in the presentation related to the "second variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (preview judgment), as shown in FIG. 168(a), when the timing tG3 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ variation, the above-mentioned second acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the second post-operation presentation" is permitted is generated ("the situation shown in FIG. 176(d)"). As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, the second post-acceptance presentation is carried out based on that acceptance.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second reception period occurs, similarly to the case where the above-mentioned first reception period occurs (FIG. 167), in relation to this, a premonition performance display suggesting that the reception period (valid period) will occur soon, a Momo image display suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a gauge image display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display (a mode in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see) that makes it difficult to see the Momo image display, and a post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation degree (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) according to the acceptance are each performed. The expectation degree (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the Momo image display is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also the case for other reception periods.

More specifically, in this example as well, when timing tG1 arrives before the second reception period occurs, the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" is started to be executed as the premonition effect display, as shown in Figures 168(b) and 176(b). Also, as in the example shown in Figure 167, the "integrated Mogu image display IG (Mogu image display, gauge image display)" is displayed within the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" when timing tG2 arrives before the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs (see Figures 168(b) and 176(c)). As shown in FIG. 176(c), at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" is displayed, and the "integrated model image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second premonition effect display ZEH2", which is similar to the example shown in FIG. 174(c) (the premonition effect display corresponding to the first reception period).

The "integrated model image display IG" is also similar to the example shown in FIG. 167 (first acceptance period) in that it is displayed across timing tG3 (the situation shown in FIG. 176(d)) when the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) occurs, and is made invisible when an acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) or when the second acceptance period ends without said acceptance being made. Note that the second acceptance period in this example ends when timing tG4 arrives if no action by the player is accepted.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 168(b) (second reception period), the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" is not only in a different form (image display) than the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" in the example shown in FIG. 167(b) (first reception period), but is not made invisible when the timing tG3 arrives (the timing at which reception is permitted for the second post-reception effect) when the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs, but is displayed across the timing tG3.

In other words, in this case, during the second acceptance period, not only the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" but also the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" that makes the "integrated Moji image display IG" difficult to see is displayed, and the player's actions can be accepted while this is being displayed. With this configuration, even after the second acceptance period has occurred, at least a portion of the "integrated Moji image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second premonition effect display ZEH2", making it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension that exists during the acceptance period.

Here, the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" may be displayed until timing tG4 when the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) ends, or may be made non-displayable at a predetermined timing within the reception period (here, the second reception period). Also, as shown in Figures 176 and 177, it is desirable to display the premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) in a manner that gradually reduces its display range so that the area overlapping with the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" tends to gradually reduce during the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), in order to gradually improve the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" during the reception period. Furthermore, the area in which the second premonition effect display is displayed and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated model image display" is displayed do not necessarily have to overlap with each other during the entire period in which the second premonition effect display is displayed. For example, after a specified timing within the reception period during that entire period has arrived, the second premonition effect display may be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed.

The second premonition effect display ZEH2 in this example is made invisible when it is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) or when no action by the player is accepted until a predetermined timing within the acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 168 and the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIG. 177(e1)-(i1))" or "B2 (FIG. 177(e2)-(i2))" assume that the player's action is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 168(a), the second acceptance period ends based on the player's action being accepted at timing tG3a, and the post-acceptance presentation corresponding to the second acceptance period (second post-acceptance presentation) begins to be executed.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIG. 177(e1)-(i1))" corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period, and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 176(d) to "B2 (FIG. 177(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period. The expectation (probability of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

And in the example shown in FIG. 168, at timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted (when the second post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), not only is the "integrated model image display IG" not hidden, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see either. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 168, not only the integrated model image display IG but also the second precursor performance display ZEH2 is not made hidden or difficult to see at timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted (when the second post-acceptance performance is started).

In other words, the second post-acceptance performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that combines at least the "second post-acceptance performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "second post-acceptance specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the second post-acceptance output sound using the third performance device (speaker). Among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display) is displayed is configured to delay the time at which the second post-acceptance performance display as the second post-acceptance performance begins to be executed compared to the other performance devices, thereby maintaining the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second precursor performance display ZEH2" even after acceptance has been made.

With this configuration, as in the case of the first reception period described above, as shown in FIG. 177 (e1) or (e2), even after reception has been made, the player can easily recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIG. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed in during the ended reception period, and in which mode the premonition effect display was displayed (first premonition effect display ZEH1, second premonition effect display ZEH2, etc.), which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize how the integrated model image display IG and the premonition effect display ZEH were displayed during the acceptance period after the acceptance period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG and the premonition effect display ZEH are displayed in an easily visible manner" after acceptance has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG and the premonition effect display ZEH continue to be displayed in the same manner as they were during the acceptance period even though acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-acceptance effect that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 168 (b) and Figure 177 (f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tG3a when the second acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tG3b arrives), a display of a "second disappearance related display SK2" different from the first disappearance related display SK1 is started as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see".

That is, in this example, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) displays the "second disappearance related display SK2" while displaying the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)," and at least a portion of the area in which the "second disappearance related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tG3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period. In addition, even after the second post-acceptance performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started, the state of the second premonition performance display ZEH2 can be confirmed with good visibility until the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed (timing tG3a to tG3b), and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see except by the second premonition performance display ZEH2, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. It goes without saying that, when the second premonition performance display ZEH2 is hidden during the second acceptance period and then acceptance is performed, the second premonition performance display ZEH2 will not be displayed until the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed, and the state of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility.

In addition, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "second disappearance-related display SK2" is displayed while the "premonition performance display (here, the second premonition performance display ZEH2)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "second disappearance-related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "second premonition performance display ZEH2" is displayed.

With this configuration, by making the second premonition effect display ZEH2 difficult to see, it is possible to suggest that the post-acceptance effect (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed, and it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the second premonition effect display ZEH2 to the post-acceptance effect (from timing tG3b onwards). This makes it possible to continue displaying the second premonition effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation where the post-acceptance effect (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in what form the premonition effect display was displayed during the acceptance period. Furthermore, even after the post-acceptance performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started, the appearance of the premonition performance display (here, the second premonition performance display ZEH2) can be confirmed with good visibility until the premonition performance display becomes difficult to see (timing tG3a to tG3b), which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the second reception period, the second disappearance-related display SK2 appears in different modes (second disappearance-related display SK2-1, SK2-2) depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance has a low expectation mode (Fig. 177 (e1) to (i1)) or a high expectation mode (Fig. 177 (e2) to (i2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 177 (f1) and (f2), even if the "second post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the second disappearance-related display SK2 that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) appears in the first mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-1) or the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2), it becomes possible to guess whether the "second post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high expectation mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 168 (b) and Figure 177 (g1) or (g2), when timing tG3c arrives during the period during which the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2 (in a form in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, execution of a "second post-acceptance performance display UG2" is initiated in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) as a post-acceptance performance in response to the acceptance of an action by the player within the second acceptance period. However, in this example, in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIG. 177(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 177(g1), the first mode (second post-reception presentation display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception presentation display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period, and in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B2 (FIG. 177(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 177(g2), the second mode (second post-reception presentation display UG2-2) is displayed as the second post-reception presentation display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG," "second precursor effect display ZEH2," and "second disappearance-related display SK2 (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" are displayed, the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2 (second post-acceptance effect display UG2-1 or second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2)" is started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the second acceptance period, the post-acceptance effect (second post-acceptance effect display UG2) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other effect devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, because the second post-acceptance performance display UG2 begins while the integrated model image display IG and second premonition performance display ZEH2 are difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" to the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2 (second post-acceptance performance display UG2-1 or second post-acceptance performance display UG2-2)" (after timing tG3c), suggesting that the second acceptance period has already ended.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 168 (b) and Figure 177 (h1) or (h2), while the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated Moji image display IG," "second premonition performance display ZEH2," and "second disappearance related display SK2," the "integrated Moji image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are each made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are hidden in this manner, as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIG. 177(i1) or (i2), the "second disappearance related display SK2 (second disappearance related display SK2-1 or second disappearance related display SK2-2)" is hidden, and the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" is displayed with good visibility.

In this regard, the "second post-reception performance display UG2" is displayed in one of multiple modes (here, second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "second post-reception performance display UG2" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG", "second premonition performance display ZEH2", and "second disappearance-related display SK2" are hidden.

Incidentally, in the example presentation (Figs. 174 and 175) corresponding to the first reception period described above, even if reception is made during the first reception period and the "first post-reception performance display UG1" is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the start of the "first post-reception performance display UG1" and is maintained. In contrast, in the example presentation (Figs. 176 and 177) corresponding to the second reception period, if reception is made during the second reception period and the "second post-reception performance display UG2" is executed, the background image is switched before and after the start of the "second post-reception performance display UG2".

With this configuration, in the situation shown in Figures 177(e) and (f) where no change in the background image has occurred (timings tG3a to tG3b shown in Figure 168), even if there has been a change in the performance on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it is possible to indicate that the "second post-reception performance display UG2" has not yet started.

In the example shown in FIG. 177, the post-reception performance is configured so that the same background image is switched when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, but it may also be configured so that different background images are switched when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, it may be configured so that the background image is switched when a high expectation mode appears, but the background image is not switched when a low expectation mode appears.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, even when a second reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 168) and various displays are performed within a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tG3c) of the second post-reception performance (second post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tG3a of the reception.

Therefore, in this example as well, when an action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in Figures 168(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, a second post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the second post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tG3a when the reception is made during the second reception period is limited to only a part of the second post-reception performance (display of the second post-reception performance), and the second post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tG3a.

As mentioned above, such a second performance device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a performance movable body capable of performing performance operations, or a performance lamp capable of emitting light for performance, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform performances (display performance, movable performance, light-emitting performance, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIG. 177(e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance), as shown in FIG. 177(e1), the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the second post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance performance display UG2-1) using the first performance device as the second post-acceptance specific performance UGT2 (second post-acceptance specific performance UGT2-1, which is a low expectation level mode of the second post-acceptance specific performance UGT2) corresponding to the second acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B2 (FIG. 177(e2)-(i2))" (a case in which the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 177(e2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second presentation device) is started to be executed prior to the second post-reception presentation (second post-reception presentation display UG2-2) using the first presentation device as the second post-reception specific presentation UGT2 (second post-reception specific presentation UGT2-2, which is a high expectation mode of the second post-reception specific presentation UGT2) corresponding to the second reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 176, in addition to the second premonition performance display ZEH2 in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a premonition performance (second premonition specific performance) corresponding to the second acceptance period is also executed in the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) (FIGS. 176(b)-(d)). Unlike the second premonition performance display ZEH2 in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the second premonition specific performance in the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed even at the time when the timing tG3 at which the second acceptance period occurs arrives, and is executed across the timing tG3.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the second acceptance period occurs, the acceptance permission sound (corresponding to the "♪" output in Figs. 176(c) and (d)) starts to be output at timing tG2 shown in Fig. 168(d). In other words, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the second acceptance period is audibly output across timing tG3 when the second acceptance period occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in Fig. 176(d)"), and the player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the second acceptance period, a long-term acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-term acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time are output as the acceptance acceptable sound. In the example shown in FIG. 168(d), the long-term acceptable sound and the short-term acceptable sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the long-term acceptable sound and the short-term acceptable sound may be started to be output at timing tG3 when the second acceptance period occurs or after that.

In the second acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are being audibly output, the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are terminated (the audible output state is terminated) based on the acceptance.

In addition, during the second acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while an acceptance permissible sound (long-term acceptance sound, short-term acceptance sound) is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permissible sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, a second post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to the "♪♪" output in FIG. 177 (e1) or (e2), etc.) different from the first post-acceptance output sound is started audibly. In other words, during the second acceptance period, unlike the case of the presentation (display presentation) made by the first presentation device, there is no longer any competition (overlapping) between the presentation made during the acceptance period (acceptance permissible sound) and the presentation made in response to the acceptance being made (second post-acceptance output sound).

As shown in FIG. 168(d), this second post-acceptance output sound, like the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2", will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "second disappearance-related display SK2" are hidden (corresponding to the "situation where ♪♪ is output in FIG. 177(e1)-(i1) or (e2)-(e1)"). Also, for the second post-acceptance output sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIG. 177(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B2 (FIG. 177(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance).

Note that during the second reception period, a long-term acceptable sound and a short-term acceptable sound are output as the reception acceptable sound, but it is not necessary to output these two acceptable sounds, and only one reception acceptable sound may be output, as in the first reception period.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 168, the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 176 (d) to "B3 (Figure 177 (e3) to (h3))" assumes a case in which no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period.

That is, in this case, after the second acceptance period occurs, the timing tG4 arrives without the player's action being accepted. In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tG4 (the point at which the second acceptance period ends and the acceptance of the player's action is no longer permitted), as in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tG3a (the point at which the player's action is accepted during the second acceptance period), as shown in FIG. 177 (e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. Note that in this performance example, since the second premonition performance display ZEH2 is hidden at the timing tG4, the second premonition performance display ZEH2 is not displayed after the timing tG4.

With this configuration, even if the second acceptance period ends before the player's action is accepted in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the second acceptance period after the second acceptance period has ended, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 177 (f3), the display of the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display of the second disappearance related display SK2-1) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "second disappearance related display SK2-1 or second disappearance related display SK2-2" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "second disappearance related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the second reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the second reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the second reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action by the player is not accepted during the second acceptance period, the case where "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2 corresponds to the case where, if the action by the player had been accepted during the second acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIG. 177(e1) to (i1))" (if a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively low expectation had been executed). On the other hand, when the action by the player is not accepted during the second acceptance period, the case where "second disappearance related display SK2-2" is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2 corresponds to the case where, if the action by the player had been accepted during the second acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from FIG. 176(d) to "B2 (FIG. 177(e2) to (i2))" (if a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively high expectation had been executed).

In this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, after the end of the second acceptance period, simply by checking the appearance of the "second disappearance-related display SK2" that appears in conjunction with the integrated model image display IG being hidden (second disappearance-related display SK2-1, second disappearance-related display SK2-2), it becomes possible to recognize whether the second post-acceptance performance was performed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode, and therefore it is possible to suitably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 177 (g3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second disappearance related display SK2", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, the "second disappearance related display SK2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 177 (h3).

Figure 169 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a third reception period (third reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "third variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the third variation pattern. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the third variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the third variation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "third variation pattern" itself.

However, in the presentation related to the "third variation pattern," regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (preview judgment), the third acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the third post-operation presentation" is permitted is generated when timing tH3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ variation has begun. As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the third acceptance period, the third post-acceptance presentation is carried out based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the third acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the preview presentation judgment.

In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the third post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "third post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "third post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "third post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from the first post-reception performance described above with reference to FIG. 167 (or FIG. 174, FIG. 175) (the "first post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "first post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "first post-reception output sound" in the third performance device), but the rest of the configuration is basically the same.

For example, the timing tH1 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the premonition effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600) as shown in FIG. 169(b). The "first premonition effect display ZEH1" in the example shown in FIG. 169(b) is also made to be hidden in accordance with the arrival of the timing tH3 when the corresponding reception period (third reception period) occurs (the timing when the reception for the third post-reception effect is permitted). However, as in the case of the first reception period described above, it may be made to be hidden before the timing tH3. In any case, the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is not displayed during the first reception period in this example when the reception of the player's action is permitted.

The timing tH2 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 174(c), the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is displayed. Note that the configuration of the "integrated Moji image display IG" and "first premonition effect display ZEH1" displayed in relation to the third reception period, and other examples related thereto, have been described above with reference to FIG. 167, FIG. 174, and FIG. 175, and therefore will not be described here.

Furthermore, timing tH3 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tH3 arrives, the above-mentioned third acceptance period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 174(d). Similarly, the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden when an action is accepted within the third acceptance period, or when the third acceptance period ends without such acceptance. Note that the third acceptance period in this example ends when timing tH4 arrives if no action by the player is accepted.

Also, the timing tH3a shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third reception period ends based on the acceptance of the player's action, and the post-reception performance (third post-reception performance) corresponding to the third reception period starts to be executed. As for the third post-reception performance, at least the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed and the second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed, and the performance contents (the contents of the post-reception performance display, the post-reception specific performance, and the post-reception output sound) are different from the first post-reception performance, but the expectation level is suggested depending on which of the multiple modes is executed, which is the same as the first post-reception performance. The expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) may include "0%" or "100%". Also, at timing tH3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the third post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG is not made invisible, and is not made difficult to see either, which is the same as in the first post-acceptance performance described above.

Furthermore, timing tH3b shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tH3b arrives, display of the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (the first mode of the first disappearance related display SK1 commonly corresponding to the first reception period and the third reception period) will begin as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to view." Note that the configuration of the "first disappearance related display SK1" displayed in relation to the third reception period and other related examples have been described above with reference to FIG. 167 and FIG. 175, and therefore will not be described here.

This configuration of the first performance device (performance display device 1600) for the "period from when the first premonition performance display ZEH1 is displayed to when the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed" makes it difficult to recognize whether the first or third reception period is occurring (has occurred), which encourages interest in the second and third performance devices, and increases interest in which form of post-reception performance display (first post-reception performance display, third post-reception performance display) will appear.

In addition, even during the third reception period, regardless of whether a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode is executed as the corresponding post-reception performance, the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance related display SK1, so that even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started to be executed, the expectation level can be kept secret in the first performance device (performance display device 1600). However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and different disappearance related displays may appear depending on the expectation level. The expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

Furthermore, timing tH3c shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tH3c arrives, the "third post-reception performance display (different in type as a preview performance from the first post-reception performance display)" will be executed as a post-reception performance in the third performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the player's action within the third reception period. As for this "third post-reception performance display", multiple modes with different expectations are prepared, and as described above, different modes of the "third post-reception performance display" will appear depending on whether a mode with low expectations is executed as the third post-reception performance or a mode with high expectations is executed.

In other words, in this case, the "third post-acceptance performance display" begins to be executed while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" are both displayed. This creates a tricky situation in which it is unclear whether the first or third acceptance period has occurred, and it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "post-acceptance performance display" (after timing tH3c).

In this example, when the display related to the "third post-reception performance display" is started in this way, regardless of the mode, while the "third post-reception performance display" is being displayed, first, the "integrated model image display IG" out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance related display SK-1" is hidden, and the "third post-reception performance display" is displayed with good visibility.

As mentioned above, the "third post-reception performance display" is also displayed in one of a number of different modes with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the "third post-reception performance display" will also be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK-1" are hidden.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, even if a third reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 169), and various displays are performed within a limited display screen (performance display device 1600). However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tH3c) of the third post-reception performance (third post-reception performance display) in response to reception from the timing tH3a of reception.

Therefore, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the third acceptance period, as shown in Figures 169(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the third post-acceptance performance (third post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the third post-acceptance performance (third post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device. The content of the third post-acceptance specific performance is different from the first post-acceptance specific performance, but it is basically performed in the same way as the first post-acceptance specific performance.

For example, multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared for the third post-reception specific performance, and different modes appear on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) as the third post-reception specific performance when a mode with low expectation is executed as the third post-reception specific performance and when a mode with high expectation is executed as the third post-reception specific performance. Also, as shown in Figures 169 (b) and (c), the third post-reception specific performance using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the display of the third post-reception specific performance using the first performance device, which is the same as the first post-reception specific performance described above.

When the third reception period occurs, it is desirable to have the premonition effect (first premonition specific effect that corresponds commonly to the first reception period and the third reception period) executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) in the same way as in the first reception period. In this case, unlike the first premonition effect display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the premonition specific effect (first premonition specific effect) on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed even at the time when the timing tH3 at which the third reception period occurs arrives, and it is more desirable to have it executed across the timing tH3.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the third acceptance period occurs, the acceptance allowance sound starts to be output at timing tH2 shown in FIG. 169(d). In other words, the acceptance allowance sound corresponding to the third acceptance period is audibly output across timing tH3 when the third acceptance period occurs, and actions by the player can be accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output. It is desirable that this acceptance allowance sound be the same sound as the acceptance allowance sound output when the first acceptance period occurs.

However, during the third acceptance period, if an action is accepted by the player while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance permission sound is terminated based on the fact that an action has been accepted.

In addition, during the third acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permission sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, based on this, audible output of a third post-acceptance output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound and the second post-acceptance output sound is started. In other words, in this case, during the third acceptance period, unlike the case of the presentation (display presentation) performed by the first presentation device, there is no competition (overlapping) between the presentation performed during the acceptance period (acceptance permission sound) and the presentation performed in response to the acceptance (third post-acceptance output sound).

Similar to the "third post-reception performance display", this third post-reception output sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are hidden, as shown in FIG. 169(d). In addition, it is desirable to prepare multiple modes with different expectations for the third post-reception output sound as well, so that different output sounds (modes) are output when a mode with low expectations is executed as the third post-reception performance and when a mode with high expectations is executed.

With this configuration, by just looking at the first performance device (performance display device 1600), it is difficult to tell which type of reception period has occurred until timing tH3c arrives, but by checking the second and third performance devices, it becomes possible to tell which type of reception period has occurred at the earlier timing tH3a. This makes it possible to encourage players who tend to focus only on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) to enjoy performances with more performance devices.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 169, if the player's action is not accepted within the third acceptance period, the process is basically the same as if the player's action was not accepted within the first acceptance period.

In other words, in this case, after the third acceptance period occurs, the timing tH4 arrives without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tH4 (the point at which the third acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, just like the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tH3a (the point at which an action by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period), and does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, the display of the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (the second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1, which corresponds commonly to the first and third acceptance periods) will begin as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, if an action by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to know which type of acceptance period occurred, and therefore the player can be strongly urged to make an operation. Note that in the third acceptance period, as in the first acceptance period, when an action by the player is not accepted, the "first disappearance-related display SK1" does not appear in a different form according to the degree of expectation, and instead appears in a form (first disappearance-related display SK1-2) different from the form that appears when an action is accepted (first disappearance-related display SK1-1).

After this, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-2", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance related display SK-2" is hidden.

Figure 170 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the judgment and a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. Figures 178 and 179 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the start condition is established (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win/time-saving state), and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 178(a)), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself. In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 178(a), for ease of explanation, it is assumed that the first presentation display TE (corresponding to the "timer presentation" described above) indicating the probability of a jackpot (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear when the decorative pattern SZ stops during the presentation) and the second presentation display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the pattern change. These displays may be displayed during the change rather than at the start of the change, or may be displayed at different times.

However, in the performance related to the "fourth variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 170, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment), when the timing tI3 arrives at which a fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative pattern SZ variation performance (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state), the fourth acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the fourth post-operation performance" is permitted is generated (the situation shown in FIG. 178(d)). As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the fourth post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fourth acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the pre-notice performance judgment.

In this respect, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fourth post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "fourth post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "fourth post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "fourth post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from the first post-reception performance described above with reference to FIG. 167 (or FIG. 174, FIG. 175) (the "first post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "first post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "first post-reception output sound" in the third performance device). Also, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 appears as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see", which is different from the first reception period, but the other configurations are basically the same.

Below, we will explain the effects that are performed in relation to the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect), but we will not go into details about the same things as in the first reception period (first reception effect). In other words, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effects will be performed in the same way as explained in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tI1 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 170(b) and FIG. 178(b), on the display screen (performance display device 1600), "first premonition performance display ZEH1" begins to be executed as the above premonition performance display.

Furthermore, timing tI2 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 178(c), the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is being displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tI3 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tI3 arrives, the fourth reception period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 178(d).

The timing tI3a shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 170 and the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C1 (FIG. 179(e1)-(i1))" or "C2 (FIG. 179(e2)-(i2))", it is assumed that the action of the player is accepted at timing tI3a during the fourth acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 170(a), the fourth acceptance period ends based on the action of the player being accepted at timing tI3a, and the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the fourth acceptance period (fourth post-acceptance performance) is started to be executed.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 178(d) to "C1 (FIG. 179(e1)-(i1))" corresponds to the case where the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period, and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 178(d) to "C2 (FIG. 179(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period. However, it is not necessary to prepare multiple modes with different expectation levels as the post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period, and a specific mode (for example, C1 (FIG. 179(e1)-(i1))) may always appear when the reception is made. In this case, even if it is a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" corresponding to the fourth reception period, multiple modes are not prepared according to the expectation level, and the same mode will always appear when the reception is made.

Similarly, during this fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 170(b) and FIG. 179(e1) or (e2), at timing tI3a when the player's action is accepted (when the fourth post-reception performance starts in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG is not made invisible, nor is it made difficult to see.

Furthermore, timing tI3b shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tI3b arrives, "a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" will occur. However, as described above, when an acceptance is made during the fourth acceptance period, the display of the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, which is different from the first disappearance-related display SK1, will start (timing tI3b).

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (from timing tI3b onwards). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being unable to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the fourth reception period, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 appears in different modes (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1, SK4-2) depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance has a low expectation mode (Fig. 179 (e1) to (i1)) or a high expectation mode (Fig. 179 (e2) to (i2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 179 (f1) and (f2), even if the "fourth post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) appears in the first mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1) or the second mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2), it becomes possible to guess whether the "fourth post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high expectation mode.

Furthermore, timing tI3c shown in Fig. 170 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in Fig. 167. Therefore, when timing tI3c arrives, while the display related to the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (in a state in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see) is appearing, execution of the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted within the fourth acceptance period will begin. However, in this example, in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C1 (FIG. 179(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 179(g1), the first mode (fourth post-reception presentation display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception presentation display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period, and in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C2 (FIG. 179(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 179(g2), the second mode (fourth post-reception presentation display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-reception presentation display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2)" are displayed, the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4 (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2)" is started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is made to continue to be displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the fourth acceptance period, the post-reception performance (fourth post-reception performance display UG4) in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, because the fourth post-reception performance display UG4 begins while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4 (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2)" (after timing tI3c), suggesting that the fourth reception period has already ended.

And also in the performance related to the fourth reception period, when the display of the "4th post-reception performance display UG4 (4th post-reception performance display UG4-1 or 4th post-reception performance display UG4-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 170 (b) and Figure 179 (h1) or (h2), while the "4th post-reception performance display UG4 (4th post-reception performance display UG4-1 or 4th post-reception performance display UG4-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second disappearance related display SK2", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, as shown in FIG. 170(b) and FIG. 179(i1) or (i2), the "fourth disappearance related display SK4 (fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance related display SK4-2)" is hidden, and the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4 (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2)" is displayed with good visibility.

With this configuration, by just looking at the first performance device (performance display device 1600), it is difficult to tell which type of reception period has occurred until timing tI3b arrives, but by checking the second and third performance devices, it becomes possible to tell which type of reception period has occurred at the earlier timing tI3a. This makes it possible to encourage players who tend to focus only on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) to enjoy performances with more performance devices.

In addition, even if the player only looks at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), when timing tI3b arrives, a fourth disappearance-related display SK4, which is different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 described above, will appear as "a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." Therefore, by checking this state, it becomes possible to recognize at an earlier stage which type of reception period has occurred, before the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4" is performed.

In this regard, the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" is displayed in one of a number of ways (here, the fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1 or the fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" are hidden.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, even when a fourth reception period occurs, various displays are made within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 170) and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-reception performance (fourth post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tI3a of the reception.

Therefore, even if an action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in Figures 170(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the fourth post-acceptance performance (fourth post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the fourth post-acceptance performance (fourth post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tI3a when the acceptance is made during the fourth acceptance period is limited to only a part of the fourth post-acceptance performance (display of the fourth post-acceptance performance), and the fourth post-acceptance performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tI3a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C1 (FIG. 179(e1) to (i1))" (when the post-acceptance performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 179(e1), the mode in which "one sword" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the fourth post-acceptance performance (fourth post-acceptance performance display UG4-1) using the first performance device as the fourth post-acceptance specific performance UGT4 (fourth post-acceptance specific performance UGT4-1, which is a low expectation mode of the fourth post-acceptance specific performance UGT4) corresponding to the fourth acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C2 (FIG. 179(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 179(e2), the mode in which "two swords" are displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is started to be executed prior to the fourth post-reception presentation (fourth post-reception presentation display UG4-2) using the first presentation device as the fourth post-reception specific presentation UGT4 (fourth post-reception specific presentation UGT4-2, which is a high expectation mode of the fourth post-reception specific presentation UGT4) corresponding to the fourth reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 178, in addition to the first premonition performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a premonition performance (fourth premonition specific performance) corresponding to the fourth reception period is also executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) (FIGS. 178(b)-(d)). Unlike the first premonition performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the fourth premonition specific performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed even at the time when the timing tI3 when the first reception period occurs arrives, and is executed across the timing tI3.

In this embodiment, the premonition effect corresponding to the fourth reception period is executed as an effect (fourth premonition specific effect) different from the first premonition specific effect shown in FIG. 174, but it may be executed as the same effect as the first premonition specific effect shown in FIG. 174. In this case, even when the second effect device is checked, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the first reception period or the fourth reception period is occurring.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the fourth acceptance period occurs, the acceptance allowance sound (corresponding to the "♪" output in Figs. 178(b)-(d)) starts to be output at timing tI2 shown in Fig. 170(d). In other words, the acceptance allowance sound corresponding to the fourth acceptance period is audibly output across timing tI3 when the fourth acceptance period occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in Fig. 178(d)"), and the player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output.

In this regard, in the fourth acceptance period, if an action is accepted by the player while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway (the audible output state is terminated midway) based on the acceptance.

In addition, during the fourth acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permission sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, based on this, a fourth post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to the "♪♪" output in FIG. 179 (e1) or (e2), etc.) different from the first post-acceptance output sound is started to be audibly output. In other words, in this case, during the fourth acceptance period, unlike the case of the presentation (display presentation) performed by the first presentation device, there is no competition (overlapping) between the presentation performed during the acceptance period (acceptance permission sound) and the presentation performed in response to the acceptance being made (fourth post-acceptance output sound).

As shown in FIG. 170(d), this fourth post-acceptance output sound, like the "fourth post-acceptance performance display UG4", will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" are hidden (corresponding to the "situation where ♪♪ is output in FIG. 179(e1)-(i1) or (e2)-(e1)"). Also, for the fourth post-acceptance output sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C1 (FIG. 179(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C2 (FIG. 179(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance).

The reception allowance sound output in response to the fourth reception period is preferably the same as the reception allowance sound output in response to the first reception period, in order to make it difficult to recognize whether the first reception period or the fourth reception period is occurring. However, it does not necessarily have to be the same.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 170, the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 178(d) to "C3 (Figure 179(e3) to (h3))" assumes a case in which no action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period.

In other words, in this case, after the fourth acceptance period occurs, the timing tI4 arrives without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tI4 (the point at which the fourth acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, as shown in FIG. 179 (e3), just as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tI3a (the point at which an action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period), does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the fourth acceptance period ends before the player's action is accepted in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the fourth acceptance period after the fourth acceptance period has ended, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 179 (f3), the display of the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display of the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or the second disappearance related display SK4-2" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the fourth reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the fourth reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the fourth reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1 is displayed as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 when the action by the player is not accepted during the fourth acceptance period, this corresponds to the case where the performance would have progressed from FIG. 178(d) to "C1 (FIG. 179(e1)-(i1))" if the action by the player had been accepted during the fourth acceptance period (when a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation would have been executed). On the other hand, when the fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2 is displayed as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 when the player's action is not accepted during the fourth acceptance period, this corresponds to the case where the performance would have progressed from FIG. 178(d) to "C2 (FIG. 179(e2)-(i2))" if the action by the player had been accepted during the fourth acceptance period (when a post-acceptance performance with a relatively high expectation would have been executed).

In this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the fourth acceptance period, after the end of the fourth acceptance period, simply by checking the appearance of the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1, fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2) that appears in conjunction with the integrated model image display IG being hidden, it becomes possible to recognize whether the fourth post-acceptance performance was performed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode, and therefore it is possible to suitably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 179 (g3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance related display SK4", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is hidden as shown in FIG. 179 (h3).

In the fourth reception period, as in the first reception period, the same specific pattern may appear as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 regardless of whether a low expectation pattern (Fig. 179 (e1)-(i1)) or a high expectation pattern (Fig. 179 (e2)-(i2)) is executed as the corresponding post-reception performance. However, in this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the fourth reception period, unlike the first reception period described above, the same specific pattern will appear as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4.

As mentioned above, in both the first and fourth reception periods, the first effect display TE (here, this corresponds to the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed during the period from when the premonition effect is displayed until when the post-reception effect is displayed.

In this regard, when the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 174(b) and (c), in a situation where the "first premonition display ZEH1" is displayed, the first display TE and the second display FE are not made difficult to see by the "first premonition display ZEH1". Also, after the first reception period ends, as shown in FIG. 175(f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (when accepted) and the first disappearance related display SK1-2 (when not accepted) appear, but the first display TE and the second display FE are not made difficult to see by the first disappearance related display SK1 (the first disappearance related display SK1-1 or the first disappearance related display SK1-2).

In contrast, even when the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 178(b) and (c), in a situation where the "first premonition display ZEH1" is displayed, the first display TE and the second display FE are not made difficult to see by the "first premonition display ZEH1". Also, after the fourth reception period ends, as shown in FIG. 179(f1)-(f3), (g1), and (g2), the fourth disappearance related display SK4 (fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance related display SK4-2) appears, but the first display TE is not made difficult to see by the fourth disappearance related display SK4. However, the second display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth disappearance related display SK4.

With this configuration, even if the type of disappearance-related display SK corresponds to which type of reception period, it is possible to guess which type of reception period has occurred simply by checking whether the second performance display FE is made difficult to see when the disappearance-related display SK is displayed. In addition, regardless of whether the disappearance-related display SK makes the second performance display FE difficult to see, the first performance display TE is not made difficult to see by the disappearance-related display SK, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

On the other hand, when a second reception period occurs, as shown in Figures 176 and 177, during the period from when the "second premonition display ZEH2" is displayed to when the "second post-reception display UG2" is displayed, of the first performance display TE and the second performance display FE, the first performance display TE can be displayed, but the second performance display FE cannot be displayed.

In other words, in this case, simply by checking whether a "premonition display" or "acceptance period" has occurred while the second performance display FE is being displayed, it becomes possible to guess the type of acceptance period (at least guess that it is neither the first acceptance period nor the fourth acceptance period), and therefore, even if the second performance display FE itself does not indicate the degree of expectation associated with the changing pattern performance, it becomes possible to provide an interesting performance that utilizes the second performance display FE.

Even if the second reception period occurs, the first performance display TE is not made difficult to see by the premonition performance display or disappearance-related display, as in the case of the first reception period and the fourth reception period.

Figure 171 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a fifth reception period (fifth reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "fifth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth fluctuation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the fifth fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fifth fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "fifth fluctuation pattern" itself.

However, in the presentation related to the "fifth variation pattern," regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (preview judgment), the fifth acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the fifth post-operation presentation" is permitted is generated when timing tJ3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a fifth predetermined time has elapsed since the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ variation has begun. As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the fifth acceptance period, the fifth post-acceptance presentation is carried out based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fifth acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the preview presentation judgment.

In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fifth post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "fifth post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "fifth post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "fifth post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from each post-reception performance corresponding to the other reception periods (the "post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third performance device). In addition, the "fifth premonition performance display" corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) is also different from each premonition performance display corresponding to the other reception periods. However, the methods for displaying the "Fifth post-reception performance display" and "Fifth premonition performance display" themselves (such as the start and end times of the display, and how they relate to other image displays before being hidden, etc.) are the same as those explained for the display performance performed in connection with the first reception period and the display performance performed in connection with the second reception period (Figures 167, 168, 174-177), and the other configurations are basically the same.

Below, we will explain the effects that are performed in connection with the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect). However, for configurations that are the same as those in the first reception period (first reception effect) or second reception period (second reception effect), we may mention that they are the same, but will not explain them further here. In other words, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effects will be performed in the same way as described in the first reception period (first reception effect) or second reception period (second reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG1 shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when timing tJ1 arrives, the "fifth premonition effect display" begins to be executed as the premonition effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

In this regard, the "fifth premonition effect display", as shown in FIG. 171(b), is a type that is displayed across the timing tJ3 when the fifth reception period occurs. In other words, although the "fifth premonition effect display" differs in performance content (display image) from the above-mentioned "second premonition effect display ZEH2" that is displayed in response to the second reception period, the "start and end times of the display, and how it interacts with other image displays until it is hidden" are displayed in the same manner as explained for the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" with reference to FIG. 168, FIG. 176, and FIG. 177. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

Furthermore, timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG2 shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "5th premonition effect display" is being displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "5th premonition effect display" is displayed.

In addition, timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG3 shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when timing tJ3 arrives, the above-mentioned fifth reception period will occur while the "fifth premonition effect display" and "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" are displayed.

Furthermore, timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG3a shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tI3a, the fifth acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the fifth acceptance period (fifth post-acceptance performance) begins to be executed. Note that the fifth post-acceptance performance, like the first post-acceptance performance (FIG. 175) and the second post-acceptance performance (FIG. 177), may either execute the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, or execute the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

Furthermore, timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG3b shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when timing tJ3b arrives, "a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to view" will appear.

In this regard, when an application is received during the fifth reception period, the display of the above-mentioned "first disappearance-related display SK1" that corresponds to the first reception period in common is started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see." Regarding the "first disappearance-related display SK1," "the start and end times of the display, and how it relates to other image displays until it is hidden," etc., are as described with reference to Figures 167 and 175. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

However, with regard to the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the fifth reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, different modes may appear when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed as the performance after the fifth reception and when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed.

For example, when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception performance, the "first disappearance related display SK1 (here, the first mode, the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (FIG. 175))" is displayed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." In contrast, when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception performance, a mode different from the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." This makes it possible to raise awareness of the possibility that the "second mode with relatively high expectations" will be executed as the fifth post-reception performance when the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed in response to the first reception period, thereby improving interest in the game.

In this case, when the "second mode with relatively high expectation" is executed as the fifth post-reception performance, it is desirable to set the expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) to be higher than when the "second mode with relatively high expectation" is executed as the first post-reception performance. This probability may be 100%.

In addition, when the "first mode with relatively low expectation" is executed as the fifth post-reception performance, if a mode different from the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is to appear as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," the "first disappearance related display SK1-2, which is the second mode of the first disappearance related display SK1" may appear as the different mode. In other words, in this case, when the first disappearance related display SK1-2 appears, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the first disappearance related display SK1-2 has appeared as a result of acceptance during the fifth reception period, or as a result of not being able to make the acceptance within the first reception period, which can increase interest in the game.

In order to more appropriately raise awareness of the possibility that the "second mode with relatively high expectations" will be executed as the fifth post-reception performance when the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" is displayed in response to the first reception period, and to more appropriately raise awareness of the possibility that the "second mode with relatively low expectations" will be executed as the fifth post-reception performance when the "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" is displayed in response to the first reception period, it is preferable that the "first premonition performance display ZEH1" similar to the first reception period be executed as the premonition performance display corresponding to the fifth reception period, rather than the "fifth premonition performance display."

In addition, in the case where the fifth reception period is accepted, as in the case of the first reception period and the second reception period, as shown in FIG. 171, the fifth reception post-performance (fifth reception post-specific performance) using the second performance device (here, the sub-LCD 1610) is started to be executed prior to the fifth reception post-performance (fifth reception post-performance display) using the first performance device based on the acceptance. The fifth reception post-specific performance is also executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) may also be configured to execute a premonition performance (fifth premonition specific performance) corresponding to the fifth reception period. In addition, the premonition specific performance using the second performance device (here, the sub-LCD 1610) may be executed as the same performance as the first premonition specific performance shown in FIG. 174, instead of the fifth premonition specific performance.

Also, when the fifth reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound starts to be output at timing tJ2. As shown in FIG. 171(d), this reception allowable sound is of a type that is terminated midway when reception is made. In the example shown in FIG. 171(d), like the reception allowable sound that is audibly output when the second reception period occurs, a "long-term allowable sound" and a "short-term allowable sound" are audibly output as reception allowable sounds, and the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "reception allowable sound" with reference to FIG. 168, FIG. 176, and FIG. 177 with regard to "the start and end times of the audible output, and how it is related to other performances until the audible output is ended." The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

However, with regard to the reception permission sound output when the fifth reception period occurs, just like the reception permission sounds output when the third reception period and the fourth reception period occur, only one reception permission sound may be output, and the sound may be output as if it was terminated midway when it was accepted.

In any case, in the fifth acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permissible sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permissible sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, the audible output of a fifth post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output in response to the other acceptance periods, is started based on this. In other words, in this case, in the fifth acceptance period, as in the second acceptance period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the effect performed within the acceptance period (acceptance permissible sound) and the effect performed in response to the acceptance being made (fifth post-acceptance output sound).

The fifth post-acceptance output sound, like the first post-acceptance output sound and the second post-acceptance output sound, is audibly output as a different output sound when the post-acceptance performance is performed in the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, and when it is performed in the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 171, if no action by the player is accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the above timing tJ4 will arrive after the fifth acceptance period has occurred without any action by the player being accepted.

In this regard, even during the fifth reception period, at timing tJ4 (the point at which the fifth reception period ends and the acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) not only does not hide the integrated model image display IG, but also does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, the display of the fifth disappearance-related display SK5 will begin as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

When the application is not accepted during the fifth acceptance period, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" is the same as in the second acceptance period, in which the mode that would have appeared if the application had been accepted during the fifth acceptance period (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) is made to appear. However, as in the first acceptance period, it is also possible to make the mode appear in which it would not have appeared if the application was accepted during the fifth acceptance period.

Figure 172 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a sixth reception period (sixth reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "sixth variable pattern" is selected as a result of the variable pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the sixth variable pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ variable performance (performance depiction according to the sixth variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the sixth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "sixth variable pattern" itself.

However, in the presentation related to the "sixth variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (pre-notice judgment), the sixth acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the sixth post-operation presentation" is permitted is generated when timing tK3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a sixth predetermined time has elapsed since the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ variation has begun. As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the sixth acceptance period, the sixth post-acceptance presentation is carried out based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the sixth acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the pre-notice presentation judgment.

In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the sixth post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "sixth post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "sixth post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "sixth post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from each post-reception performance corresponding to the other reception periods (the "post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third performance device). In addition, when the player's action (operation) is accepted in the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance), the model image display (here, the integrated model image display) is made invisible without causing the appearance of a "mode in which the model image display is difficult to see." However, the methods for displaying the "6th post-reception performance display" and "mock image display" themselves (such as the start and end times of the display, and how they relate to other image displays before being hidden, etc.) are the same as those described in the display performance carried out in connection with the first reception period (Figures 167, 174, and 175), and the other configurations are also basically the same as any of the methods described above.

Below, we will explain the effects that are performed in relation to the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect). However, for configurations that are the same as those in the first reception period (first reception effect), we may mention that they are the same, but will not explain them further here. In other words, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effects will be performed in the same way as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tK1 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tK1 arrives, the display screen (performance display device 1600) starts to execute the "first premonition performance display" as the above premonition performance display.

Furthermore, timing tK2 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tK2 arrives, the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first premonition effect display" is being displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first premonition effect display" is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tK3 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tK3 arrives, the sixth reception period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Furthermore, timing tK3a shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tK3a, the sixth acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the sixth acceptance period (sixth post-acceptance performance) begins to be executed. Note that, like the first post-acceptance performance (FIG. 175), the sixth post-acceptance performance may either execute a first mode with a relatively low expectation or execute a second mode with a relatively high expectation.

However, as shown in FIG. 172, the processing related to the effects associated with the sixth reception period does not have anything equivalent to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167, meaning that no state will occur in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" becomes difficult to see before it is hidden. This is true whether a "low expectation state" or a "high expectation state" appears as the sixth post-reception effect (timing tF3b does not exist), and it is also true in the case where the sixth reception period ends without any action by the player being accepted during that period (timing tF3b does not exist).

With this configuration, in other reception periods, when the reception period ends, there is a feature that makes it difficult to see the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" until it is hidden. However, in the sixth reception period, even if the reception period ends, there is no feature (disappearance-related display SK) that makes it difficult to see the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" until it is hidden. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the sixth reception period has ended (whether the player's action has been canceled), and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the case where the sixth reception period is accepted, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 172, the sixth reception post-performance (sixth reception post-specific performance) using the second performance device (here, the sub-LCD 1610) is started to be executed prior to the sixth reception post-performance (sixth reception post-performance display) using the first performance device based on the acceptance. The sixth reception post-specific performance is also executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) may also be configured to execute a premonition performance (sixth premonition specific performance) corresponding to the sixth reception period. In addition, the premonition specific performance using the second performance device (here, the sub-LCD 1610) may be executed as the same performance as the first premonition specific performance shown in FIG. 174, instead of the sixth premonition specific performance.

When the sixth acceptance period occurs, an acceptance permissible sound starts to be output at timing tK2. This acceptance permissible sound is of a type that is terminated midway when acceptance is made, as shown in FIG. 172(d). Regarding the "start and end times of the audible output, and how the audible output is related to other performances until it is terminated," etc., related to this acceptance permissible sound, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptance permissible sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period with reference to FIGS. 170, 178, and 179. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

However, with regard to the reception permission sound output when the sixth reception period occurs, two reception permission sounds may be output, similar to the reception permission sound output when the second reception period occurs, and the two reception permission sounds may be output and terminated when the call is accepted.

In any case, in the sixth acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permission sound terminated, but when the acceptance is made, the audible output of a sixth post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output in response to other acceptance periods, is started based on this. In other words, in this case, in the sixth acceptance period, as in the fourth acceptance period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed within the acceptance period (acceptance permission sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance being made (sixth post-acceptance output sound).

The sixth post-acceptance output sound, like the first post-acceptance output sound and the fourth post-acceptance output sound, is audibly output as a different output sound when the post-acceptance performance is performed in the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, and when it is performed in the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 172, if no action by the player is accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the above timing tK4 will arrive after the sixth acceptance period has occurred without any action by the player being accepted.

In this regard, even during the sixth acceptance period, at timing tK4 (the point at which the sixth acceptance period ends and the acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) not only does not hide the integrated model image display IG, but also does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see. However, as described above, during the sixth acceptance period, after the timing tK4 arrives without any actions by the player being accepted, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" does not occur.

Figure 173 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a seventh reception period (seventh reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "seventh variable pattern" is selected as a result of the variable pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the seventh variable pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ variable performance (performance depiction according to the seventh variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the seventh variable pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "seventh variable pattern" itself.

However, in the performance related to the "seventh variation pattern", regardless of the result of the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment), the seventh acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the seventh post-operation performance" is permitted is generated when timing tL3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when the seventh predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ. As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the seventh acceptance period, the seventh post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the seventh acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the pre-notice performance judgment.

In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the seventh post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "seventh post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "seventh post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "seventh post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from each post-reception performance corresponding to the other reception periods (the "post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third performance device). In addition, the "seventh premonition performance display" corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) is also different from each premonition performance display corresponding to the other reception periods. In addition, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) according to this embodiment, even in the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see", a "seventh disappearance-related display" different from each disappearance-related display corresponding to the other reception periods appears. However, the methods for displaying the "7th post-reception performance display", "7th premonition performance display", and "7th disappearance-related display" themselves (such as the start and end times of the display, and how it interacts with other image displays before being hidden, etc.) are the same as those explained for any of the display performances carried out in connection with each of the above-mentioned reception periods, and the other configurations are basically the same.

Below, we will explain the effects that are performed in connection with the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect). However, for configurations that are the same as those in other reception periods (other reception effects), we will mention that they are the same, but will not explain them further here. Furthermore, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effects will be performed in the same way as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tL1 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tL1 arrives, the premonition display starts to be executed on the display screen (performance display device 1600).

However, as described above, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect), the corresponding premonition effect display is the "seventh premonition effect display" that does not correspond to other reception periods. As shown in FIG. 173(b), the "seventh premonition effect display" is not displayed at the time the seventh reception period occurs, and is hidden before this. In other words, although the "seventh premonition effect display" differs in performance content (display image) from the above-mentioned "first premonition effect display ZEH1" that is displayed in response to the first reception period, the "start and end times of display, and how it is related to other image displays until it is hidden" are displayed in the same manner as described for the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" with reference to FIG. 168 and FIG. 174. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

Furthermore, timing tL2 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "7th premonition effect display" is being displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "7th premonition effect display" is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tL3 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Furthermore, timing tL3a shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when an action by the player is accepted at timing tL3a, the seventh acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the seventh acceptance period (seventh post-acceptance performance) begins to be executed. Note that, like the first post-acceptance performance (FIG. 175), the seventh post-acceptance performance may either execute the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, or execute the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

Furthermore, timing tL3b shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tL3b arrives, a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" will appear. However, as described above, when an acceptance is made during the seventh acceptance period, a display related to the "seventh disappearance-related display" that does not correspond to other acceptance periods will start to appear as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" (timing tL3b).

Here, the "7th disappearance-related display" is different from the above-mentioned "1st disappearance-related display SK1" that is displayed in response to the first reception period in terms of the performance content (display image), but the "start and end times of the display, and how it relates to other image displays until it is hidden" are displayed in the same manner as described for the "1st disappearance-related display SK1" with reference to Figures 167, 168, 175, 177, etc. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples. Also, in both cases where the 7th post-reception performance is "executed in a relatively low expectation mode" and "executed in a relatively high expectation mode," the "7th disappearance-related display" is displayed in the same manner, as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception period.

However, with regard to the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (seventh disappearance-related display)" corresponding to the seventh reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, different modes may appear when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed as the seventh post-reception performance and when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed.

Furthermore, timing tL3c shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tL3c arrives, while a display related to the "seventh disappearance-related display" (in a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) is appearing, the "seventh post-acceptance performance display" will begin to be executed as a post-acceptance performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted within the seventh acceptance period.

In addition, in the case where the reception is made during the seventh reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 173, the seventh reception-after performance (seventh reception-after specific performance) using the second performance device (here, the sub-liquid crystal display 1610) is started to be executed prior to the seventh reception-after performance (seventh reception-after performance display) using the first performance device based on the reception. The seventh reception-after specific performance is also executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) may also be configured to execute a premonition performance (seventh premonition specific performance) corresponding to the seventh reception period. In addition, the premonition specific performance using the second performance device (here, the sub-liquid crystal display 1610) may be executed as the same performance as the first premonition specific performance shown in FIG. 174, instead of the seventh premonition specific performance.

When the seventh acceptance period occurs, an acceptance permissible sound starts to be output at timing tL2. This acceptance permissible sound is of a type that is terminated midway when acceptance is made, as shown in FIG. 173(d). Regarding the "start and end times of the audible output, and how the audible output is related to other performances until it is terminated," etc., related to this acceptance permissible sound, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptance permissible sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period with reference to FIG. 170, FIG. 178, and FIG. 179. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

However, with regard to the reception permission sound output when the seventh reception period occurs, two reception permission sounds may be output, similar to the reception permission sound output when the second reception period occurs, and the output may be terminated when the call is accepted.

In any case, in the seventh acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permissible sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permissible sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, the audible output of a seventh post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output in response to the other acceptance periods, is started based on this. In other words, in this case, in the seventh acceptance period, as in the fourth acceptance period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed within the acceptance period (acceptance permissible sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance being made (seventh post-acceptance output sound).

The seventh post-acceptance output sound, like the first post-acceptance output sound and the fourth post-acceptance output sound, is audibly output as a different output sound when the post-acceptance performance is performed in the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, and when it is performed in the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

On the other hand, although this is not shown in Figure 173, if no action by the player is accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the timing tL4 will arrive after the seventh acceptance period has occurred without any action by the player being accepted.

In this regard, even during the seventh reception period, at timing tL4 (the point at which the seventh reception period ends and the acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) not only does not hide the integrated model image display IG, but also does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, the seventh disappearance-related display will begin to be displayed as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

When the application is not accepted during the seventh acceptance period, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" is the same as in the first acceptance period, and a mode that would not appear if the application was accepted during the seventh acceptance period is displayed. However, the mode that would have appeared if the application had been accepted during the seventh acceptance period (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) may be displayed, as in the second acceptance period.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present application, which provides the first through seventh reception periods, provides the following excellent effects:

That is, first, regardless of whether the first acceptance period through the seventh acceptance period occurs, the imitation image display displayed using a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600) can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action (after the performance change based on the acceptance has started). This allows the player to know in what form (e.g., Figures 144 (a) to (d)) the imitation image display was displayed during the acceptance period, even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment provides multiple acceptance periods (first acceptance period to seventh acceptance period) with different presentation contents (post-acceptance presentations such as conversation preview, cut-in preview, and moving object preview, which are types of preview presentations (expectation indication presentations)) that are carried out when the ball is accepted, and it is possible to generate an acceptance period (valid period) of a different type according to the result of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the first reception period to the seventh reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, the post-acceptance performance display (first post-acceptance performance display to seventh post-acceptance performance display) can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Among these, in the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, not only is the post-acceptance performance display displayed based on the fact that the action has been accepted, but the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is also made to appear. In other words, in this case, not only is it possible to check which mode has appeared as the imitation image display even after the acceptance has been made, but by reducing the visibility of the imitation image display by the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" until the imitation image display is made invisible, it is expected that the player's focus will naturally shift from the "imitation image display" to the "post-acceptance performance display".

However, since the replica image display is originally displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, if the replica image display is displayed after the acceptance has been made, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the post-acceptance performance display corresponding to the acceptance has already been displayed or not, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, when the acceptance is made during any of the first to fifth acceptance periods, or the seventh acceptance period, the replica image display is made invisible (invisible) while the "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, while the post-acceptance performance display is displayed while the "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the acceptance of the action by the player, while the "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, the transition in the display performance from the pre-acceptance display (replica image display) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance performance display) is realized.

Note that the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-reception performance display" have in common that they are both displayed based on reception. However, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance-related display)" is, for example, a display that appears to make the model image display difficult to view when the model image display is displayed, as shown in Figures 175 (f1), 177 (f1), 179 (f1), etc. In contrast, the "post-reception performance display" is, for example, a display that appears to not make the model image display difficult to view even if it is displayed when the model image display is displayed, as shown in Figures 175 (g1), 177 (g1), 179 (g1), etc. Also, in each of the above examples, the "post-reception performance display" is started to be displayed when the model image display is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" does not necessarily have to be started to be displayed when the model image display is displayed, and may be started to be displayed after the model image display is made non-display.

As for the "manner in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", methods of "appearing so as to make the mock image display difficult to see" can be adopted, such as a method of realizing this by preferentially displaying (displaying in a front layer) an image display other than the mock image display in at least a part of the area in which the mock image display is displayed, or a method of realizing this by displaying an image (video) that is made so that part of the mock image display appears missing (unseen) by using an image display other than the mock image display. Also, instead of displaying an image other than the mock image display, it is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the mock image display itself. In response to this, methods for making the "post-reception performance display" appear so as not to make the replica image display difficult to see include a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area in which the replica image display is displayed, but displaying the "post-reception performance display" in a manner that gives the replica image display priority (displaying it in the rear layer), as well as a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in areas excluding the area in which the replica image display is displayed, at least while the replica image display is displayed.

In addition, as a "mode in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)," it is possible to adopt both a method of displaying an image display other than the mock image display in at least a part of the area in which the mock image display is displayed, and a method of changing a numerical value (such as transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the mock image display itself.

The "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears before the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed, the imitation image display becomes difficult to see due to the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". Therefore, while the imitation image display is visible, the "post-acceptance performance display" may soon appear, and the player can be prompted in advance to prepare himself or herself to change his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see imitation image display".

In addition, if a game is accepted during the first acceptance period through the fifth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period, etc., the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can remain displayed even after the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a wider range of performance related to the "post-acceptance performance display" during the period in which the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game by changing the performance during such a display period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of effects relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, as shown in Fig. 175 (g1), (h1), Fig. 177 (g1), (h1), Fig. 179 (g1), (h1), the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed not only in the area in which the imitation image display is displayed, but also in the area in which the imitation image display is not displayed. And, in this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of it, but the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed so that at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is difficult to see (for example, displayed in the rear layer).

With this configuration, the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears to make it difficult to see not only the imitation image display, but also the "post-reception performance display", which is expected to improve both the presentation until the imitation image display is hidden and the presentation when the "post-reception performance display" begins to be displayed.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" is not displayed after reception and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, a specific post-reception performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) that does not make the imitation image display difficult to see can be displayed in a manner according to the degree of expectation, separate from the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance prior to the first performance device without interfering with its performance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to appear before the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, in a situation in which the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared. Also, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to continue until after the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has ended.

With this configuration, players who dislike the complex presentation of the first presentation device can enjoy the post-reception presentation with the second presentation device, which has a more simplified presentation, thereby increasing the interest of various types of players.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the premonition performance display is executed across the timing when the imitation image display is displayed. In addition, in some of the above-mentioned performance examples, as shown in Figures 176 and 177, etc., it is possible for acceptance to occur while the premonition performance display is displayed, and when such acceptance occurs, the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" makes both the imitation image display and the premonition performance display difficult to see (such as the priority display described above).

However, at least at the point when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, it does not overlap with either the imitation image display or the premonition effect display in its entirety, and visibility is not hindered at least in part. In other words, the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is executed in a way that gradually worsens the visibility of the imitation image display and the premonition effect display (increasing the overlapping area).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of performances relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the imitation image display will be displayed by dynamic display, as described above with reference to Figures 145 and 146. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the imitation image display is not terminated but continues even when "a state in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears after reception.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of the performance for the first through fifth reception periods and the seventh reception period, the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is not only to make the imitation image display difficult to see, but also to make the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period difficult to see. This prevents the appearance of remaining time being seen even if the gauge image is displayed after reception.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, if the action (operation) of the player is accepted during the first acceptance period of the multiple acceptance periods, the first post-acceptance performance display UG1 can be displayed based on the acceptance, and a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1) can be displayed separately from the first post-acceptance performance display UG1. In addition, if the action of the player is accepted during the second acceptance period of the multiple acceptance periods, the second post-acceptance performance display UG2 different from the first post-acceptance performance display UG1 can be displayed based on the acceptance, and a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see (second disappearance-related display SK2) different from the first acceptance period can be displayed separately from the second post-acceptance performance display UG2.

With this configuration, it becomes possible to guess the type of post-reception performance display without checking whether the "first post-reception performance display UG1" or the "second post-reception performance display UG2" was displayed as the post-reception performance display, simply by checking in what manner (first disappearance-related display SK1, second disappearance-related display SK2) the mock image display became difficult to see.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during a third acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, a third post-acceptance performance display different from both the "first post-acceptance performance display UG1" and the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2" can be displayed based on the acceptance. However, in addition to the third post-acceptance performance display, the above-mentioned mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) that also corresponds to the first acceptance period can be made to appear as a performance mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display.

According to this configuration, when the first disappearance-related display SK1 appears as a mode for making the imitation image display difficult to see, it is unclear whether the first or third post-acceptance performance display will appear, but when the second disappearance-related display SK2 appears as a mode for making the imitation image display difficult to see, it becomes possible to guess that the second post-acceptance performance display will appear.

In the above-mentioned example of the effect, the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" is realized as a "disappearance-related display" that is displayed (priority display) in an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the imitation image display is displayed. However, it can also be realized by executing a performance using a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the imitation image display when viewed from the front.

Even if the same pattern (first disappearance related display SK1) appears as a "pattern that makes it difficult to see the pattern image display," if the type of acceptance period is different, it is desirable to make the rate (expectation) at which the jackpot pattern stops due to the pattern change different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the premonition performance display is the same (first premonition performance display), but there are cases where the "first disappearance-related display SK1" appears as a "mode in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see" (first reception period, third reception period), cases where a mode different from the "first disappearance-related display SK1" appears (fourth reception period), or cases where the mode does not appear (sixth reception period).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples, although the premonition performance displays (first premonition performance display, fourth premonition performance display) are different, there are cases (first reception period, fifth reception period) where the same pattern (first disappearance-related display SK1) appears as a "pattern in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see."

This configuration makes it difficult to guess the type of reception period until it is known which type of post-reception performance is being performed, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) can be executed using the second performance device, and during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the first performance device is in a state where the mock image display is relatively easy to see and a state where the mock image display is relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to check which aspect of the replica image display appeared even after the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device has begun based on the fact that the reception has been made. Also, by making the replica image display relatively difficult to see during the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his or her focus of attention from the "first performance device" to the "second performance device."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started so as not to affect the visibility of the imitation image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the imitation image display is displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is not an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, the post-reception performance display is started to be displayed after the timing when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears, but it may be started to be displayed at the timing when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area in which the imitation image display is displayed." However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image display so that the area displayed in the "area in which the imitation image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

As mentioned above, the model image display can be displayed in one of several different modes with different expectations. According to each of the above-mentioned examples, the display mode is maintained and continued even after acceptance, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., so it is possible to recognize in what mode the model image display was displayed during the acceptance period, even after acceptance.

However, in this case, if it is during the period immediately after acceptance, the post-acceptance performance must be performed under such conditions (maintaining the display related to the imitation image display). In other words, the range of performance is narrow, and only limited performances (post-acceptance performances using only performance devices different from the first performance device) can be performed. However, as time passes and a "mode that makes the imitation image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, it becomes possible to perform the post-acceptance performance under the condition that "the visibility of the imitation image display may be worsened," and therefore it becomes possible to perform the "post-acceptance performance display in the first performance device" under such conditions. By gradually performing these two post-operation performances of different natures (post-acceptance specific performance in the second performance device, post-acceptance performance display in the first performance device), it becomes possible to easily confirm the mode of the imitation image display even after acceptance, while also favorably fulfilling the role of the post-operation performance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second premonition performance display is displayed as the premonition performance display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the second disappearance-related display SK1 (Fig. 177) appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". In addition, when the seventh premonition performance display is displayed as the premonition performance display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the seventh disappearance-related display appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". In contrast, when the "first premonition performance display" different from the above "second premonition performance display" or the above "seventh premonition performance display" is displayed as the premonition performance display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the first disappearance-related display may appear (first reception period, third reception period) or the fourth disappearance-related display may appear (fourth reception period) as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see".

In other words, in this case, when the second or seventh premonition display is displayed as the premonition display, it becomes possible to recognize at that point what type of appearance will appear as the "appearance in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see."

Moreover, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the "first premonition performance display" that is different from a specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second premonition performance display" or the above-mentioned "seventh premonition performance display") is displayed as the premonition performance display, even if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, there are cases in which the "mode in which the model image display is difficult to see" itself does not appear (sixth reception period).

According to this configuration, when the premonition effect display is executed in a mode (here, the first premonition effect display) different from a specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second premonition effect display" or the above-mentioned "seventh premonition effect display"), it becomes unclear whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the replica image display becomes difficult to see" itself will appear during the period from the time of acceptance until the replica image display is made invisible. This improves the performance during the period from the time of acceptance until the replica image display is made invisible, and makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

The above-mentioned examples of effects may be modified to the following configurations, or the following configurations (acceptance periods) may be further provided as separate acceptance periods (separate premonition display). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the player's action is accepted during the acceptance period until the model image display is switched off, a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" may appear. In this regard, in this modified example, when a specific mode (for example, the second premonition display, the seventh premonition display, or another premonition display not described above) is displayed as the premonition display, the above-mentioned "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" itself is prevented from appearing even if acceptance is performed during the corresponding acceptance period. In other words, in this case, when the premonition effect display is executed in a specific manner, the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" does not occur until the imitation image display is made invisible, and it becomes possible to recognize that the imitation image display will not be made difficult to see in relation to the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see."

In this case, even in this modified example, when the premonition display is executed as the "first premonition display" and is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, there are cases where the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" appears when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (first acceptance period, third acceptance period, fourth acceptance period), and cases where the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" does not appear (sixth acceptance period). Even in this configuration, when the premonition display is executed in a mode (here, the first premonition display) different from a specific mode (for example, the second premonition display, the seventh premonition display, or another premonition display not mentioned above), it is unclear whether the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" appears, so that the performance from acceptance to the time when the model image display is made invisible is improved, and the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

For the configurations of these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply each configuration that is applicable to the above configuration before modification.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, when a specific mode (here, the "second premonition display") is displayed as a premonition display, even if no action by the player is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" is made to appear in the same manner as if the action had been accepted.

In contrast, when a mode (here, the "first premonition display") different from a specific mode (here, the "second premonition display") is displayed as the premonition display, there are cases where the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears in a different mode depending on whether or not an action by the player is accepted during the corresponding acceptance period (such as the first acceptance period), and cases where the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears in the same mode as when the action was hypothetically accepted, even if no action by the player is accepted during the corresponding acceptance period (such as the fourth acceptance period).

With this configuration, it is possible to use effects (premonition effects) that are executed before the acceptance period begins to improve the presentation after the acceptance period ends, or when a request is not accepted.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound is terminated during the reception period in which a specific mode (here, the second disappearance-related display, the fourth disappearance-related display, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc.) can appear as a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see", but in the reception period in which a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first disappearance-related display) can appear as a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see", the audible output state of the reception allowable sound may or may not be terminated. With this configuration, by checking the output state of the reception allowable sound at the time of acceptance, a mode that is easy to guess what mode will appear as a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" or a mode that is difficult to guess will appear, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of presentation, the reception permissible sound that can be used as a basis for such judgment is audibly output as a sound that ends before the end of the reception period (within the reception period), so that the player can choose whether the reception is to be made while the reception permissible sound is in an audible output state, or whether the reception is to be made after the audible output state of the reception permissible sound has ended.

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that during the reception period in which the premonition performance display is executed in a specific mode (for example, the second premonition performance display), multiple modes (for example, the four modes shown in Figures 144(a) to (d)) can be displayed as the model image display, and during the reception period in which the premonition performance display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first premonition performance display), there are modes that cannot be displayed as the model image display (for example, the three modes shown in Figures 144(b) to (d) are not displayed, and only Figure 144(a) is displayed).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, multiple types of premonition display effects are prepared during a specific type of acceptance period, which indicate that an acceptance period in which the player's actions are eligible for acceptance will occur soon. Among the multiple types of premonition display effects, specific premonition display effects (second premonition display effect, fifth premonition display effect) can be executed across the timing of the occurrence of the corresponding acceptance period, and actions by the player can be accepted while the specific premonition display effect is displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's actions can be accepted while still being able to confirm which type (mode) of premonition display is being displayed, which can prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type (mode) of the premonition display.

In addition, in pachinko machine 1, when a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition effect display is being displayed, a post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed, but even at the point when the post-acceptance effect starts to be executed, the specific premonition effect display is not hidden but remains displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's action is accepted while still being able to confirm which type (mode) of premonition display is being displayed, and furthermore, the post-acceptance performance corresponding to that acceptance is started to be executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game caused by forgetting to check the type (mode) of the premonition display can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, among the post-reception performances, the post-reception performances (post-reception specific performances) using the second performance device are executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the specific premonition performance displays (second premonition performance display, fifth premonition performance display).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, among the post-reception performances, the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display) using the first performance device is executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of specific premonition performance displays (second premonition performance display, fifth premonition performance display) (for example, the specific premonition performance display is displayed with priority over the post-reception performance display (displayed in front on the layer)).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the acceptance period in which the premonition performance display is executed in a specific manner (e.g., the second premonition performance display, the fifth premonition performance display), acceptance can be made while the premonition performance display is displayed, but when the player's action is not accepted, the premonition performance display can be made invisible before the timing at which the corresponding acceptance period ends. In other words, in this case, the player can choose whether to start the post-acceptance performance with the premonition performance display still displayed, or to start the post-acceptance performance with the premonition performance display hidden.

However, the execution state of a specific premonition effect display does not necessarily have to end within the acceptance period, and may continue to be displayed until the acceptance period ends without ending its execution state. In this case, the specific premonition effect display is displayed (priority display) using at least a part of the area where the model image display is displayed until the corresponding midway point in the acceptance period, but it is desirable that, in the period after the midway point, the display is not displayed in the area where the model image display is displayed, but only in an area different from that area.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, when the reception period occurs, it is possible to execute a process to make a reception permission sound audible, indicating that reception is permitted or will be permitted (soon). This prevents the player from forgetting to take action to receive.

In addition, among the above-mentioned examples of effects, in the examples shown in Figures 168 to 171 and 173, if an action by the player is accepted during the acceptance period while the acceptance permission sound is audible (output state), processing is started to be executed to make the acceptance permission sound inaudible before the appearance of the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" and before the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has yet to appear.

In other words, in this case, even if the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared after the reception, the fact that the reception period has already ended can be appropriately indicated to the player. As a result, even if the timing of the appearance of the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is delayed after the reception, inconvenience is unlikely to occur, and the model image display can be displayed in a highly visible manner.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, even if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audible, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated midway, and an acceptance period (such as a first acceptance period) is further provided in which the disappearance effect display is displayed while the acceptance permission sound continues to be audible. This makes it difficult to tell whether the action has been accepted or not, and makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

In this regard, the types of "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" that occurs corresponding to the reception period (Fig. 168, Fig. 170, Fig. 173) in which the reception permission sound is made audible and an action by the player is accepted and the reception permission sound is made inaudible, even if an action by the player is accepted, is different from the reception period (Fig. 167) in which the reception permission sound is made audible and the reception permission sound is not made inaudible even if an action by the player is accepted. Therefore, by checking the output status of the reception permission sound, it is possible to infer the subsequent progress of the presentation.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, multiple types of reception-permitted sounds are prepared. In this regard, it is desirable to output the same sound as the reception-permitted sound during the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of these reception periods is occurring.

In contrast, the reception allowable sound that is audible in response to the first reception period is audibly output as a sound different from the reception allowable sounds that are audible in response to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. With this configuration, when the reception allowable sound starts to be output, it is possible to narrow down to some extent the candidates for which type of reception period is occurring by checking the sound. Also, when a reception is made while the reception allowable sound is audible, it is possible to further narrow down the candidates by checking whether the reception allowable sound is terminated midway, making it possible to provide an interesting performance using the reception allowable sound.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the premonition performance display is executed in a specific manner (here, the second premonition performance display, the fifth premonition performance display, and the seventh premonition performance display), if an acceptance is made while the corresponding reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound is terminated midway. However, when the premonition performance display is executed in a manner different from the specific manner (here, the first premonition performance display), when an acceptance is made while the corresponding reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound is terminated midway (third reception period, fourth reception period, sixth reception period) or is not terminated midway (first reception period). This configuration also makes it possible to provide an interesting performance using the reception permission sound.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, there is a reception period in which two sounds (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) are output as the reception acceptable sound, and a reception period in which only one sound is output as the reception acceptable sound. In a reception period in which two sounds (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) are output as the reception acceptable sound, the reception period is terminated midway if the reception is made while the reception acceptable sound is audible, but in a reception period in which only one sound is output as the reception acceptable sound, the reception period may or may not be terminated midway if the reception is made while the reception acceptable sound is audible. This configuration also makes it possible to provide an interesting performance using the reception acceptable sound.

In addition, with regard to the acceptance period during which two sounds with different sound data (long-term acceptance sound, short-term acceptance sound) are output as the acceptance acceptance sound, if an acceptance is made while an acceptance acceptance sound is being output, only one of the two acceptance acceptance sounds (long-term acceptance sound, short-term acceptance sound) may be terminated midway, and the other may be allowed to continue without being terminated midway.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, there are reception periods (such as the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the fifth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc.) in which the same "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears when an acceptance is made and when the acceptance is not made within the reception period, and there are reception periods (such as the first reception period and the third reception period) in which different "modes in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appear when an acceptance is made and when the acceptance is not made within the reception period, thereby improving the presentation when an acceptance is not made.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when acceptance is made during a specific acceptance period (such as the first acceptance period or the third acceptance period), the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" is realized as a disappearance-related display different from the imitation image display, but when acceptance is not made, it is desirable to realize the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" by changing the imitation image display itself (changing the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics). With this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize whether the situation is one in which acceptance has been made or not when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of displaying the first performance display TE (corresponding here to the above-mentioned "timer performance"), which has no performance relationship with the reception period, and the above-mentioned second performance display FE, on the display screen (performance display device 1600), in both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 175, if an action by the player is accepted during the first or third acceptance period, a "mode in which the replica image display is made difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1)" is made to appear while the replica image display is being displayed, but this "mode in which the replica image display is made difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1)" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the first performance display TE or the second performance display FE, which may be displayed even during a pattern change in which no acceptance period occurs (the first performance display TE or the second performance display FE is given priority display, or the disappearance-related display is not displayed in the position where the first performance display TE or the second performance display FE is displayed).

In other words, in this case, the disappearing effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the specified image display (the first effect display TE and the above-mentioned second effect display FE) that is not related to the acceptance period, so that the game can proceed without adversely affecting the effects that are not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, if an action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 179, a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (fourth disappearance related display SK4)" is made to appear while the imitation image display is being displayed. This "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (fourth disappearance related display SK4)" is displayed in such a way that it does not affect the visibility of the first performance display TE (does not make it difficult to see), but does affect the visibility of the second performance display FE (makes it difficult to see).

With this configuration, even if an image display is not directly related to the acceptance period, depending on the type of image, visibility may be affected or not affected when a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" occurs. Therefore, when a player performs an action, it is possible to provide a performance that allows the player to decide whether or not to check an image display that is not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, in this case, it is desirable to display the first performance display TE as an image (multiple forms) related to (suggesting) the outcome (expectations) of the pattern change, and the second performance display FE as an image that is not related to (does not suggest) the outcome (expectations) of the pattern change, in order to avoid a decrease in interest in the game when the visibility of the second performance display FE is affected.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the second reception period can occur while the first performance display TE is displayed, but cannot occur while the second performance display FE is displayed; it only occurs when the second performance display FE is not displayed. In other words, the second performance display FE can only be displayed at a relatively early stage after the pattern change has begun and is then hidden, and is used to enhance the performance or decorativeness of the early stages of the change. In this regard, by making the second reception period possible only when it is at a relatively late stage after the pattern change has begun, it becomes possible to create such a relationship even though there is no performance-related relationship between the two.

As shown in FIG. 179, even if the second performance display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, it is thereafter displayed again in an easily visible state. In other words, in this case, it will be made invisible when a predetermined timing arrives thereafter. When the second performance display FE is made invisible, unlike the case of the mock image display, no aspect that makes it difficult to see will appear.

The first performance display TE displays a predetermined performance result (expectation level) at a predetermined timing within the pattern change, but if a disappearance-related display is displayed during the execution period of the first performance display TE, the disappearance-related display is made invisible before the arrival of the predetermined timing.

As shown in FIG. 179, the area in which the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a portion of the area in which the second performance display FE is displayed, and is displayed in that area in a manner that gives it a higher display priority than the second performance display FE. However, in this case, a predetermined transparency is set for the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, and the second performance display FE may be difficult to see through the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, but may still be visible.

As shown in FIG. 179, the area in which the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a portion of the area in which the first performance display TE is displayed, and in that area, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed in a manner that has a lower display priority than the first performance display TE. In this case, it is desirable to ensure that the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 behind the first performance display TE is not visible through it.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 175, the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed in such a way that it does not affect the visibility of both the first performance display TE and the second performance display FE.

When the first disappearing performance display SK1 is displayed, which does not affect the visibility of the second performance display FE, the reception permission sound continues without being terminated midway, and when the fourth disappearing performance display SK4 is displayed, which affects the visibility of the second performance display FE, the reception permission sound can be terminated midway. This makes it possible to improve the presentation quality using the reception permission sound.

The first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are both dynamically displayed, and it is desirable that these dynamic displays continue even in situations where either disappearing effect display is displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, it is possible for a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" to appear while the model image display is being displayed, and multiple modes are provided for this "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)."

In other words, in this case, one of a number of different modes will appear as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)," which is expected to increase interest in the game when the model image display becomes difficult to see.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (fourth disappearance related display SK4)" corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (Figure 179), the fourth disappearance related display SK4 makes both the imitation image display and the second performance display FE difficult to see, but when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (first disappearance related display SK1)" corresponding to the first reception period appears (Figure 175), the first disappearance related display SK1 is executed to make only the imitation image display difficult to see out of the imitation image display and the second performance display FE.

This configuration creates a dramatic effect in which either the "first disappearance related display SK1" or the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this case, it is desirable that the "mock image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed during the first reception period and the "mock image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed during the fourth reception period are displayed in the same manner.

The mock image display is hidden while the disappearance-related display is appearing, but it is preferable that the second performance display FE is not hidden while the disappearance-related display is appearing, but is hidden at a predetermined timing after the disappearance-related display has ended (before the pattern change stops).

The fourth disappearance-related display SK4 may not be an image, but may be an effect produced by an effect device that is performed in front of the mock image display and the second effect display FE when viewed from the front. However, it is preferable that the first disappearance-related display SK1 be realized as an image display.

In each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, the second reception period can occur even when the second effect display FE is in a non-display state, and a special mode (second disappearance related display SK2) that appears only during the second reception period is prepared as a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see. In such a second reception period, as shown in FIG. 177, as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (second disappearance related display SK2)," there are a case in which a special mode appears (second disappearance related display SK2-2) and a case in which it does not appear (second disappearance related display SK2-1), and when the special mode appears, it is desirable to make the expectation level (proportion of stopping at a jackpot pattern) higher than when the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed in any mode. The proportion may be 100%. In this case, it is desirable to make it possible to execute a premonition effect of a special mode (second premonition effect display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second effect display FE is in a display state during the second reception period.

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the first reception period, whether the first mode (first post-reception performance display UG1-1) is executed as the first post-reception performance display UG1 (Fig. 175 (e1) to (i1)), or the second mode (first post-reception performance display UG1-2) which is more promising than the first mode is executed as the first post-reception performance display UG1 (Fig. 175 (e2) to (i2)), the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears as the "mode in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see."

In contrast, during the second reception period, if the second mode (second post-reception performance display UG2-2), which has a higher expectation than the first mode (second post-reception performance display UG2-1), is executed as the second post-reception performance display UG2, a specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", but if the first mode (second post-reception performance display UG2-1) is executed as the second post-reception performance display UG, the specific mode does not appear as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", and a mode different from the specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears.

With this configuration, depending on the type of reception period, there will be cases where the expectation level of the post-reception performance display can be inferred simply by checking the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see," and cases where the expectation level cannot be inferred. This is expected to increase interest in the game through the performance related to the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see."

The "specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2-1 or second disappearance related display SK2-2)" that may occur in response to the second reception period as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" is not capable of appearing as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the first reception period. With this configuration, it becomes possible to infer the type of reception period based on the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", thereby improving interest in the game.

However, the "manner in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see" may be the same in the first reception period and the second reception period.

As shown in FIG. 175, if no acceptance is made during the first acceptance period, a mode (first disappearance related display SK-2) that would not appear when acceptance is made is displayed as a "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see." However, if no acceptance is made during the first acceptance period, the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see" itself may not appear.

During the second acceptance period, it is desirable that one of multiple modes with different expectation levels (probability of the jackpot symbol being stopped) can be selectively audibly output as the acceptance acceptable sound, and during the first acceptance period, only one mode can be audibly output as the acceptance acceptable sound. In this case, it is also desirable that all of the acceptance acceptable sounds (multiple modes) that can be audibly output in response to the second acceptance period be prepared as sounds different from the acceptance acceptable sounds audibly output in response to the first acceptance period.

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the first reception period through the seventh reception period are each generated in a different variation pattern, but the first reception period through the seventh reception period may include reception periods that are related to each other and can occur sequentially within the same variation pattern. In other words, in this case, at least some of the first reception period through the seventh reception period can occur in multiple variation patterns.

For example, for a reception period (such as the second reception period or the fourth reception period) in which the "manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, it is desirable to make it possible for this to occur within the same pattern change after the occurrence of a reception period (such as the first reception period or the third reception period) in which the "manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" does not change according to the degree of expectation.

In addition, it is desirable to make it possible for a reception period during which reception can be made while the premonition display is being displayed (such as the second reception period or the fifth reception period) to occur within the same pattern change after the occurrence of a reception period during which reception cannot be made while the premonition display is being displayed (such as the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, etc.).

During a reception period in which the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, it is desirable to selectively output a plurality of reception permissible sounds, including a specific reception permissible sound that cannot be audibly output during a reception period in which the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" does not change according to the degree of expectation, and when a specific reception permissible sound is audibly output, a manner with a high degree of expectation appears as the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

In addition, during reception periods (such as the second reception period and the fifth reception period) in which the "manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the degree of expectation, a premonition effect display exclusive to that reception period can be executed, but at a stage even earlier than the execution of the premonition effect display, a special preview effect can be executed, and when that special preview effect is executed, it is desirable that when reception is made during the reception period, the "manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is always executed in a manner with high expectation.

During the acceptance period in which the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance related display)" may be a mode that can only appear when a jackpot has been obtained (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2, etc.). Also, a mode that cannot appear when a jackpot has been obtained (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-1, etc.) may be prepared.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, reception-related performance displays (such as model image displays and gauge images) can be displayed at least during the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, and reception-related performance sounds (such as reception permission sounds) can be output at least during the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. Furthermore, when an action by a player is accepted during the reception period, a post-reception output sound related to the post-reception performance can be output based on the fact that the action has been accepted, and when the reception-related performance displays (such as model image displays and gauge images) are displayed during the reception period, the reception-related performance displays (such as model image displays and gauge images) are made invisible based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Similarly, when a reception-related performance sound (such as reception permission sounds) is in an audible state during the reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, the reception-related performance sound (such as reception permission sounds) may be made inaudible based on the fact that the action has been accepted.

In this configuration, based on the fact that an action by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance effect is audibly output, the reception-related effect display (such as a model image display or gauge image) is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible (such as an acceptance-permitted sound), making it easy for the player to recognize that the action has been accepted.

In this regard, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or gauge image) is not terminated and is still displayed when the post-reception performance in response to the reception being made starts to be executed, but the reception-related performance sound (such as a reception permissible sound) is terminated and may be made inaudible when the reception output sound in response to the reception starts to be executed.

With this configuration, the reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or gauge image) that is displayed during the reception period will continue to be displayed even after the post-reception performance has started, while the reception-related performance sound (such as the reception allowable sound) that is audible (output) during the reception period will no longer be audible at the time the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to confirm the appearance of the reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or gauge image) that was displayed during the reception period even after the post-reception performance has started to be executed, while making the reception-related performance sound (such as the reception allowable sound) inaudible, making it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception period has already ended.

As mentioned above, the reception-related performance display (such as the model image display or gauge image) is executed as a performance display that indicates the probability of winning the jackpot (expectation level). In this case, it is also desirable for the reception-related performance sound (reception acceptable sound) to be a different sound that is output according to the expectation level (aspect as a reception-related performance display) indicated by the reception-related performance display (such as the model image display or gauge image).

However, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the first reception period, the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is not terminated but continues even when the post-reception output sound begins to be executed, making it difficult to recognize whether or not a reception has been made, and thus maintaining a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the first reception period, only one type of reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or a gauge image) can be displayed, and no performance display indicating the rate (expectation level) of a jackpot is executed. Also, during the first reception period, only one type of reception-related performance sound (acceptable reception sound) can be displayed, so that it is possible to appropriately increase interest in the game when a different type appears during another reception period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, multiple modes including a specific mode are prepared as the premonition performance display, and a premonition performance display of a specific mode (e.g., the second premonition performance display: FIG. 168) can be displayed prior to the occurrence of a specific reception period (e.g., the second reception period), and an audible output of a reception-related performance sound (such as a reception permissible sound) can be started. The premonition performance display of a specific mode (e.g., the second premonition performance display: FIG. 168) and the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) can be executed across the timing of the occurrence of the reception period, and an action by the player can be accepted while the premonition performance display of a specific mode (e.g., the second premonition performance display: FIG. 168) is displayed and the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is in an audible state (output). In this regard, if an action by a player is accepted during a reception period when a specific type of premonition display (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 168) is displayed, the specific type of premonition display (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 168) is made invisible based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Also, if an action by a player is accepted during a reception period when a reception-related performance sound (reception-permitted sound) is in an audible state, the reception-related performance sound (reception-permitted sound) is made inaudible based on the fact that the action has been accepted.

In the above configuration, a specific type of premonition display (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 168) is hidden based on the acceptance of a player's action within the acceptance period, and the acceptance-related performance sound (acceptance sound) is made inaudible. This makes it easy to recognize that an action has been accepted even if a player's action is accepted while a specific type of premonition display (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 168) and a reception-related performance sound that have been in an execution state since before the acceptance period occurs are both being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 168, the premonition effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second premonition effect display: FIG. 168) is not terminated and is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance within the corresponding acceptance period starts to be executed. In contrast, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance-permitted sound) is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the acceptance starts to be executed.

According to this configuration, the premonition display of the specific aspect (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 168) that is displayed before the start of the reception period will continue to be displayed even after the post-reception performance has started, while the reception-related performance sound (reception-permissible sound) that is audible (output) before the start of the reception period will no longer be audible at the time the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to confirm the premonition display aspect that is displayed before the start of the reception period even after the start of the specific post-reception performance, while making the reception-related performance sound (reception-permissible sound) that is output before the start of the reception period in an inaudible state, making it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception period has already ended.

It is desirable that the premonition display of the specific mode (second premonition display ZEH2) be displayed as a different display image depending on the degree of expectation, and executed as a display indicating the rate at which a jackpot is obtained (degree of expectation). In this case, it is also desirable that the reception-related sound (acceptance sound) be output as a different sound depending on the degree of expectation indicated by the premonition display of the specific mode (the mode as a premonition display of the specific mode).

However, in each of the above-mentioned examples, during the acceptance period in which the first premonition display is executed, the first premonition display can be executed in only one manner, and is not executed as a display that indicates the probability (expectation) of a jackpot being obtained.

Note that in a reception period (such as the second reception period or the fifth reception period) in which multiple reception permissible sounds (long-term permissible sounds, short-term permissible sounds) are output simultaneously, the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception output sound do not overlap; however, in a reception period in which only one reception permissible sound is output, there are cases in which the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception performance sound overlap (the first reception period) and cases in which the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception output sound do not overlap (the third reception period, the fourth reception period, etc.).

A long-term allowable sound is, for example, a sound that is output as a sound effect, and a short-term allowable sound is, for example, a sound that is output as a message sound. A case in which only one reception allowable sound is output is, for example, a case in which no message sound is output and only a sound effect is output. Note that a short-term allowable sound may be defined as "a sound that is output as a sound effect" and a long-term allowable sound may be defined as "a sound that is output as a message sound."

When one of the two reception-permitted sounds is output as a "message sound," it is desirable to display a message image (a reception-related performance display such as "press") corresponding to the message sound while the message sound (for example, a "push" sound) is being audibly output. In this case, the output period of the message sound does not overlap with the period during which the post-reception performance (such as the post-reception output sound) is executed, but the period during which the message image (reception-related performance display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed overlaps with the period during which the post-reception performance is executed.

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the Moji image display is displayed as an integrated Moji image display that includes a gauge image within a peripheral decoration image. The integrated Moji image display is as described above with reference to FIG. 144 and other figures, and other examples of the configuration can be adopted as appropriate. In other words, in the past, the Moji image display was displayed at a distance from the gauge image, so it was difficult to make both difficult to see by using premonition display or disappearance-related display. The gauge image may change depending on the state of the Moji image display that indicates the degree of expectation, and if it can be seen, there is no point in making the Moji image display difficult to see. In this regard, by displaying it as an integrated Moji image display, it becomes easy to make both the Moji image display and the gauge image difficult to see.

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is made to appear so as to make the post-reception performance display difficult to see, but it may also be made to appear so as not to make the post-reception performance display difficult to see (for example, the post-reception performance display is displayed with priority). Also, the above-mentioned multiple reception periods may include reception periods in which the post-reception performance display is difficult to see due to the "manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and reception periods in which the post-reception performance display is not difficult to see due to the "manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

Furthermore, it is not necessary to prepare all of the first through seventh reception periods, and it is also possible to prepare only some of these reception periods in an appropriate combination.

The first reception period may also be terminated if a call is accepted while the reception permission sound is being audibly output.

The "first premonition effect display" and the "seventh premonition effect display" do not necessarily have to be "types that are not displayed at the time the reception period occurs and are hidden before this", and may be displayed, for example, as "types that are displayed across the timing of the reception period". In other words, in this case, the "first premonition effect display" and the "seventh premonition effect display" have different performance contents (display images) from the above-mentioned "second premonition effect display ZEH2" that is displayed in response to the second reception period, but the "start and end times of the display, and how it is related to other image displays until it is hidden", etc. are displayed in the same manner as described for the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" with reference to Figures 168, 176, and 177. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

Needless to say, when "at least some" is used above and below, it is intended to include "all."

Next, modified examples of each of the above-mentioned performance examples will be explained. That is, FIG. 180 is a modified example of the "performance when a second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 176, and FIG. 181 is a modified example of the "performance when a second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 177. Note that configurations that are not specifically mentioned in this modified example are as described above in the "performance examples relating to the second reception period (FIGS. 168, 176, 177)" and can be similarly applied to other examples that can be applied to the "performance examples relating to the second reception period".

As shown in FIG. 180, this pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) as a fourth performance device. For ease of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been omitted from the above-mentioned performance examples, but even in the above-mentioned performance examples, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a specific decorative member SDY (blind device). In other words, in the above-mentioned performance examples, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) does not operate in relation to the occurrence of a reception period.

Now, if the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, even in the modified example for the second acceptance period, a performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern is first performed. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (such as a performance depiction according to the second variation pattern or sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 180(a)").

The process from this point onwards is similar to that of Figures 176(b) to (d) described above. That is, first, as shown in Figure 180(b), the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" is executed (timing tG1). Next, as shown in Figure 180(c), the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" and the "integrated model image display IG" are displayed in this manner, a second reception period occurs (timing tG3), as shown in Figure 180(d).

For ease of explanation, the second performance device (sub-LCD 1610) is not shown here, but even in this modified example, the "second post-reception specific performance" and "premonition performance" using the second performance device (sub-LCD 1610) are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (Figs. 176 and 177). Also, the performances (acceptable reception sound, second post-reception output sound, etc.) using the third performance device (speaker) are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (Figs. 176 and 177).

In addition, in this modified example, if an action by the player is accepted at timing tG3a during the second acceptance period, the second acceptance period will end based on the acceptance, and the post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second acceptance period will begin to be executed, similar to the above-mentioned example (Figures 176 and 177).

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 180(d) to "D1 (FIG. 181(e1)-(i1))" corresponds to a case where the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period according to the modified example, and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 180(d) to "D2 (FIG. 181(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to a case where the second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period according to the modified example. The expectation (probability of the big win symbol appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

And in the examples shown in Figures 180 and 181, as in the examples described above (Figures 176 and 177), not only is the "integrated model image display IG" not hidden, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see at timing tG3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the second post-acceptance performance starts in response to the acceptance), but it is also not made difficult to see. Not only the integrated model image display IG, but also the second precursor performance display ZEH2 is not hidden or made difficult to see at timing tG3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the second post-acceptance performance starts), as in the examples described above (Figures 176 and 177).

In addition, when the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period in this modified example (Fig. 181 (e1)-(i1)), the same procedure is followed as in the above-mentioned example (Fig. 176, Fig. 177). That is, first, at timing tG3b, the display of the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is started as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see". Next, when timing tG3c arrives, the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2-1" is started to be executed as the post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the player's action during the second acceptance period.

After this, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (Fig. 176, Fig. 177), as shown in Fig. 181 (h1), while the "second post-reception performance display UG2-1" is displayed, first, among the "integrated Moji image display IG", "second premonition performance display ZEH2", and "second disappearance-related display SK2-1", the "integrated Moji image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are each hidden. After the "integrated Moji image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are each hidden, the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is hidden as shown in Fig. 181 (i1), and thus the "second post-reception performance display UG2-1" is displayed with good visibility.

However, when the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation, is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period in this modified example (Fig. 181 (e2) to (i2)), at timing tG3b, as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see", a disappearance-related display is not performed in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) but a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is started to operate. That is, as shown in Fig. 181 (f2), the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is positioned (operated) so as to overlap at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG when viewed from the front, thereby making the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, and this functions as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see".

With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the expectation level is higher in the case shown in FIG. 181 (f2) than in the case shown in FIG. 181 (f1), which increases the interest in the game. In addition, since the action of the specific decorative member SDY (curtain role) itself indicates the expectation level, it can also serve as a post-reception performance, and this post-reception performance itself can make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see. In this sense, it is desirable for the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY) to be used as a performance element that indicates the expectation level even in performances other than the post-reception performance (such as a preview performance that indicates the expectation level).

Next, while the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is being executed in such a way that it overlaps with at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG when viewed from the front as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," when timing tG3c arrives, the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2" begins to be executed as a post-reception effect on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted within the second acceptance period.

In other words, in this case, the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second premonition display ZEH2" are displayed, and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is being executed at a position where it overlaps at least a part of the "integrated model image display IG" when viewed from the front, while the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2" is started. With this configuration, since the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 is started while the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" makes it difficult to see the integrated model image display IG and the second premonition effect display ZEH2, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" to the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2)" while suggesting that the second acceptance period has already ended (after timing tG3c).

Furthermore, when the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation, is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period in this modified example (Figures 181 (e2) to (i2)), when the display of the "second post-reception performance display UG2-2" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 181 (h2), while the "second post-reception performance display UG2-2" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG," "second premonition performance display ZEH2," and "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see (here, a performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY))," the "integrated model image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are each made invisible and terminated. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" and "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are both hidden in this way, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is terminated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" as shown in FIG. 181 (i2). In other words, the specific decorative member SDY is moved to its original position so that the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" does not overlap with the integrated model image display IG when viewed from the front. This allows the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2)" to be displayed with good visibility.

In addition, when a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" is performed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" (a relatively high expectation mode (Fig. 181 (e2) to (i2))), it is desirable to make the time from when the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" appears to when it ends longer than when a "performance using the first performance device (disappearance-related display)" is performed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" (a relatively low expectation mode (Fig. 181 (e1) to (i1)). That is, in this case When the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see", the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" itself can increase the interest in the game, and after the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" ends, the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2" that was previously difficult to see is revealed, which is expected to further increase the interest in the game. In contrast, in the first and third acceptance periods, when a mode with low expectations is executed as the post-acceptance effect and when a mode with high expectations is executed as the post-acceptance effect, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see (such as the first disappearance-related display SK-1)" is executed for the same amount of time.

On the other hand, the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 180(d) to "D3 (Figure 181(e3) to (h3))" assumes a case in which no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period in the modified example.

As shown in FIG. 181 (e3)-(h3), in this modified example, if no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the situation is the same as in the example described above (FIG. 177 (e3)-(h3)). For example, if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 181 (f3), the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" will be the mode that would have appeared if the action by the player had been accepted within the second acceptance period.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 181 (e3) to (h3), the case where the "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is displayed when no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period corresponds to the case where, if an action by the player had been accepted within the second acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from Figure 180 (d) to "D1 (Figure 181 (e1) to (i1))" (the case where a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively low expectation would have been executed). On the other hand, although not shown in the figures, when no action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." This corresponds to the case where, if the action by the player had been accepted during the second acceptance period, the performance would have progressed from FIG. 180(d) to "D2 (FIG. 181(e2)-(i2))" (a post-acceptance performance with a relatively high expectation would have been executed).

After this, as shown in FIG. 181 (g3), out of the "integrated Momo image display IG" and the "mode in which the integrated Momo image display IG becomes difficult to see (performance using the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY))", the "integrated Momo image display IG" is first hidden. Then, after the "integrated Momo image display IG" has been hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 181 (h3), the "mode in which the integrated Momo image display IG becomes difficult to see (performance using the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY))" ends.

As mentioned above, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, there are two cases where the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" is performed as a "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" (FIG. 181 (e1) to (i1)), and as a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" (FIG. 181 (e2) to (i2)). In this regard, in the above example, the timing at which the "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" starts to be executed is the same as the timing at which the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" starts to be executed (timing tG3b), but the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" may start to be executed at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) before the timing tG3b at which the "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" starts to be executed.

With this configuration, the time from acceptance to the appearance of the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" varies depending on the type of "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" and the expectation level suggested as a post-acceptance effect (the rate at which a winning symbol appears), which adds excitement and increases interest in the game. In particular, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" also functions as a post-acceptance effect, just like the "post-acceptance specific effect using the second effect device," and so by executing this at an early timing, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

However, even in a situation where the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" is being performed in a manner in which the "integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," it is desirable to make at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) visible, as shown in FIG. 181 (f2).

In addition, in the example of the performance shown in Figures 180 and 181, when the performance progresses from Figure 180 (d) to "D2 (Figures 181 (e2) to (i2))" (when a post-reception performance with a relatively high expectation has been executed), as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see", a "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" is not performed, but a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" is performed. However, in this case, as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see", both a "display (display related to disappearance) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" may be performed.

With this configuration, after an operation has been accepted, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see by both the "display (disappearance-related display) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)," making it possible to ideally indicate that the operation has been accepted.

In this way, when both the "display (disappearance-related display) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" are executed as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see," the disappearance-related display is displayed (such as a priority display) in a manner that makes at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, and the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" is executed in a manner that makes at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG and at least a portion of the disappearance-related display difficult to see, respectively.

In this case, too, the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" which functions as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" may be started at timing tG3a, and the "display (display related to disappearance) in the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" which functions as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" may be started at timing tG3b.

In addition, when executing both the "display (disappearance-related display) in the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see," it is desirable for the disappearance-related display to be displayed as an image display different from the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display SK2-1)" that appears when the performance progresses from Figure 180 (d) to "D1 (Figure 181 (e1) to (i1))" (when a post-reception performance with a relatively low expectation is executed).

The fourth performance device does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable object (specific decorative member SDY) that can operate; it simply needs to be something that can perform a specific performance at a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) when viewed from the front (for example, a flying object that can perform a performance by flying in front of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, or a light guide plate provided in front of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front). It is also desirable that the performance using the fourth performance device be performed not only based on acceptance during the acceptance period, but also when different performance conditions are met (such as the arrival of a specific timing in a specific pattern change).

The example of the performance regarding the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to Figures 180 and 181 can also be applied to a reception period other than the second reception period. For example, even if it is applied to the fifth reception period, the performance will progress as shown in Figures 180 and 181.

In addition, the example of the effect relating to the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to Figures 180 and 181 may not be applied to any of the first through seventh reception periods, but may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) that is different from any of those reception periods.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the post-reception performance display is started while the integrated Moji image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated Moji image display IG and the premonition performance display ZEH) is displayed, but the post-reception performance display is started in a manner that makes it difficult to see due to the integrated Moji image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated Moji image display IG and the premonition performance display ZEH) (Figures 175, 177, and 179).

However, instead of this, the post-acceptance performance display may be started while the integrated Momo image display IG (or both the integrated Momo image display IG and the premonition performance display ZEH, depending on the type of acceptance period) is displayed, but the post-acceptance performance display may be started in a manner (such as priority display) that is not made difficult to see by the integrated Momo image display IG (or both the integrated Momo image display IG and the premonition performance display ZEH, depending on the type of acceptance period).

The following describes how this configuration is applied to the example of the second reception period. Configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as those in the examples above (Figures 168, 176, and 177), and can be applied to other examples as appropriate.

The presentation content until the player's action (operation) is accepted during the second acceptance period in this modified example is the same as the presentation content described above (Figs. 176(a)-(d), 177(e)). For example, in this example as well, as shown in Fig. 182(e2), at timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted, not only are the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second premonition presentation display ZEH2" not hidden, but the integrated model image display IG and the second premonition presentation display ZEH2 are not made difficult to see.

In addition, even in this modified example, there are cases where a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation is executed and cases where a post-acceptance performance with a relatively high expectation is executed. However, when a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation is executed, the performance content is the same as that described above (Figure 177 (e1) to (i1)), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In contrast, in this modified example, when a "relatively high expectation post-reception performance" is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period, the performance content shown in FIG. 182 (f2) to (i2) appears instead of the performance content described above (FIG. 177 (f2) to (i2)).

First, at timing tG3b, in a situation where the "second post-acceptance performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, as shown in FIG. 182 (f2), the second disappearance-related display SK2 that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). Next, when timing tG3c arrives during the period in which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2 (the mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2" as the post-acceptance performance on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the player's action during the second acceptance period is started to be executed in the second mode (second post-acceptance performance display UG2-2). It goes without saying that the post-acceptance performance display indicates the expectation level (the rate at which the player will be granted a bonus). The rate may be 100%.

However, as shown in FIG. 182 (g2), the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 in this modified example is not made difficult to view by the integrated model image display IG, the second precursor performance display ZEH2, the second disappearance-related display SK2, or the like. More specifically, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 in this modified example is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the areas in which the integrated model image display IG, the second precursor performance display ZEH2, and the second disappearance-related display SK2 are displayed, and is displayed (priority displayed) in a manner that makes the integrated model image display IG, the second precursor performance display ZEH2, and the second disappearance-related display SK2 difficult to view.

With this configuration, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 itself can function as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," thereby improving interest in the game. Note that even the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 in this example is not displayed with priority over the first performance display TE (here, this corresponds to the above-mentioned "timer performance"), and the portion that overlaps with the first performance display TE is made difficult to see.

After this, as shown in FIG. 182 (h2), first the integrated model image display IG and the second premonition effect display ZEH2 are hidden. Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (i2), the second disappearance-related display SK2 is hidden.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 182, if no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the situation is the same as in the example described above (FIG. 177 (e3) to (h3)). In other words, if no action by the player is accepted, the situation in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see will be the situation that would have appeared if the action by the player had been accepted within the second acceptance period.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 and the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 are displayed as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," but it is also possible to display only the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 without displaying the second disappearance-related display SK2-2.

The example of the "post-reception performance display" described with reference to FIG. 182 can also be applied to a reception period other than the second reception period. For example, even if it is applied to the fifth reception period, the performance will progress as shown in FIG. 182.

In addition, the example of the "post-reception performance display" described with reference to FIG. 182 may not be applied to any of the first through seventh reception periods, but may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance) that is different from any of those reception periods.

In the above-mentioned modified examples (Figs. 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, when an action by a player is accepted within a reception period (specific reception period), while the Moji image display (here, integrated Moji image display IG) is being displayed, a specific area including at least a part of the display target area of the Moji image display can be used to display a "specific disappearance effect display (e.g., second disappearance related display SK2-2)" as a mode of making the Moji image display difficult to see, and after the specific disappearance effect display (second disappearance related display SK2-2) starts to be displayed, the Moji image display is made non-displayable while the specific disappearance effect display (e.g., second disappearance related display SK2-2) is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the model image display was appearing. Also, before the model image display is hidden, the visibility of the model image display is reduced by a specific disappearance effect display, and since the model image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced, it can be suggested that there is little time left until the model image display is hidden, and it can be suppressed that the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed when the model image display is hidden.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, the above-mentioned "specific disappearance performance display (e.g., second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" can be displayed even during the period after the model image display (here, integrated model image display IG) is hidden, and the post-reception performance (e.g., a performance using the specific decorative material SDY, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed while at least the specific disappearance performance display (e.g., second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is displayed. The post-reception performance is displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific disappearance performance display (e.g., second disappearance-related display SK2-2) (example shown in FIG. 182), or is realized as being executed using a performance body (such as the example shown in FIG. 181 or other examples thereof) that is in a position that overlaps with the specific disappearance performance display (at least a part of it) when viewed from the front.

With this configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effect that is executed at a position that overlaps with a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) when viewed from the front can be recognized without shifting the gaze from the position where the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. In other words, in this case, when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that there is no need to change the gaze in order to grasp the aspect of the specific post-reception effect, so that interest in the game can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

When a specific post-reception effect according to the above modified example (for example, an effect using a specific decorative member SDY or the second post-reception effect display UG2-2) appears, the percentage of the player who is granted a bonus may be 100%.

The specific post-reception performance in the above modified example (e.g., a performance using the specific decorative material SDY, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) begins to be executed before the imitation image display is hidden, making the imitation image display difficult to see, and therefore can appropriately indicate that the reception has been made even while the imitation image display is displayed. However, the specific post-reception performance in the above modified example (e.g., a performance using the specific decorative material SDY, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) may begin to be executed after the imitation image display is hidden.

In addition to the reception period during which the specific post-reception performance (e.g., a performance using the specific decorative material SDY or the second post-reception performance display UG2-2) according to the above modified example can be generated, a reception period during which a post-reception performance different from the specific post-reception performance can be generated may be prepared, and the specific disappearance performance display (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) may be displayed even when the different post-reception performance is executed. The reception period during which the different post-reception performance can be generated may be any of the first reception period and the third to seventh reception periods. However, in the reception period during which the reception allowance sound is not terminated halfway (the first reception period), it is preferable that the specific disappearance performance display (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is not displayed (another disappearance performance display may be displayed).

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified examples (Figs. 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, when a reception period occurs, a process is executed to make an audible reception permission sound, which indicates that the reception is permitted for the post-reception performance corresponding to that reception period, or that the reception will be permitted (soon), thereby preventing the player from forgetting to perform the reception action.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is provided with multiple types of premonition effect displays, but in the above-mentioned modified examples (Figs. 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, if a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is being displayed, the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is displayed even after the acceptance, but a mode is created in which the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is difficult to see while the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is being displayed. Then, after the mode is created, the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is hidden while it is difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after acceptance has been made, it is possible to check which aspect of the premonition display has been displayed, and by reducing the visibility of the premonition display until it is hidden, it is possible to appropriately indicate that acceptance has already been made.

In the above-mentioned modified examples (Figures 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, the manner in which the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2) becomes difficult to see is an image display other than the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2) (for example, second disappearance-related display SK2-2 or post-reception performance display UG2-2), or a performance in a performance element that is performed in front of the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2).

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned modified examples (Figures 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, the "mode of making the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2) difficult to see" is executed so as to straddle not only the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2) but also both the specific premonition performance display and the imitation image display when viewed from the front, making both of them difficult to see. This mode may be performed in a manner that makes the entire performance display device 1600 difficult to see, but in that case, it is desirable to make the specific premonition performance display and the imitation image display visible through a specified transmittance.

The "mode of making a specific premonition display (second premonition display ZEH2) difficult to see" may be achieved by changing the display characteristics of the specific premonition display itself (such as changing the transmittance).

In the above-mentioned modified examples (Figures 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is hidden during the acceptance period. Even if the acceptance is made in this hidden state, "a mode in which the specific premonition effect display is difficult to see (second disappearance-related display SK2-2, post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, effect body, etc.)" is executed.

In addition, in the first acceptance period described above, if an action by the player is accepted, one of multiple effects (the effects shown in FIG. 175 (e1)-(i1), the effects shown in FIG. 175 (e2)-(i2)) is made to appear based on the acceptance, but regardless of which of these effects appears, a specific mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (first mode of first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first acceptance period)) can appear. In other words, in this case, regardless of which of the multiple effects appears, a specific mode will also appear along with it, suggesting that they are a common effect "resulting from the acceptance of an action by the player during the specific acceptance period."

In contrast, in the second reception period described above, the modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or the second reception period according to the other examples, when the action of the player is accepted, one of a number of modes including a special mode (for example, a second disappearance-related display SK2-2, a performance using a specific decorative member SDY, a post-acceptance performance display UG2-2, etc.) whose appearance rate (which may be 0% or 100%) varies depending on whether or not a special condition (such as a condition for winning a jackpot or a condition for entering a certain probability mode) is met can appear, and when the special mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. With this configuration, a special mode that suggests the degree of expectation appears before the model image display is hidden, and the special mode makes the model image display difficult to see, so that the player can enjoy the progression from the model image display to the post-acceptance performance (special mode) without missing it, without changing the focus of his or her gaze.

In this regard, even when the above-mentioned specific mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (first mode of first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period)) appears, the model image display is made difficult to see by the "specific mode." With this configuration, there are cases where the model image display is made difficult to see by the special mode that suggests the degree of expectation for the award (special reception period) and cases where the model image display is made difficult to see by the specific mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation for the award (specific reception period), so that the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see (specific mode, special mode)" has a dramatic effect, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, when the reception period illustrated in each of the above-mentioned performance examples and modified examples occurs, a mock image display suggesting the objects (such as the type of operating means) that are acceptable for reception during the reception period may be displayed both during the period in which the premonition performance display is executed before the reception period occurs, and during the reception period itself. However, in this case, the mock image display displayed during the period in which the premonition performance display is executed should be in a different form from the mock image display displayed during the reception period, and it is preferable that it be made non-display before the reception period occurs.

Below, we will explain a modified example of the method of displaying a mock image in this manner when it is applied to the second reception period. That is, Figs. 183(a)-(f) and 184(g) and (h) are modified examples of the "presentation when a second reception period occurs" shown in Fig. 176, and Figs. 184(i)-(l) are modified examples of the "presentation when a second reception period occurs" shown in Fig. 177. Note that configurations that are not specifically mentioned in this modified example are as described above in "Presentation examples related to the second reception period (Figs. 168, 176, 177)" and can be similarly applied to other examples that can be applied to the "Presentation examples related to the second reception period".

Now, if the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, then in this modified example for the second acceptance period, first, a performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (such as a performance depiction according to the second variation pattern or sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 183(a)").

However, in this modified example, when timing tG0 arrives, which is earlier than timing tG1 described above, a "preceding type premonition display SZE" is executed as shown in FIG. 183(b). In the example shown in FIG. 183(b), an image display that is also used in other performance examples (normal performance examples in which a mock image display is not executed and then temporarily hidden within the period in which the premonition display is executed) is executed as the "preceding type premonition display SZE", but it is preferable that the "preceding type premonition display SZE" be executed as an image display that cannot appear in other performance examples (normal performance examples in which a mock image display is not executed and then temporarily hidden within the period in which the premonition display is executed).

In this modified example, the Moh image display TMH (here, an integrated Moh image display) appears while the "preceding type premonition effect display SZE" is displayed in this way. That is, as shown in FIG. 183(c), the Moh image display TMH (here, an integrated Moh image display) in this example is started to be displayed while at least a part of it is made difficult to see by the "preceding type premonition effect display SZE". Also, although the Moh image display TMH in this example is displayed as an integrated Moh image display, it is displayed as an image in which the gauge image GG and the partition image KG, which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, etc. are not displayed (a Moh image display in a form that cannot be displayed during the reception period).

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 183(d), the model image display TMH (here, the integrated model image display) is displayed in a manner that is not made difficult to see by the "preceding type premonition effect display SZE." In this example, the display related to the "preceding type premonition effect display SZE" has ended, and the display is decorated with other effect displays (a flame effect in the figure).

However, as shown in Fig. 183(c) and (d), the Moji image display TMH (here, an integrated Moji image display) that appears while the "preceding type premonition effect display SZE" is displayed is displayed in a manner different from any of the Moji image displays that may be displayed during the reception period (Fig. 144(a)-(d)). This makes it possible to indicate that the reception period has not yet occurred while displaying the Moji image display TMH for a relatively long period of time,

As will be described later, when the Moji image display TMH (here, an integrated Moji image display) appears, during the corresponding reception period, the Moji image display is displayed in the mode with the highest expectation (for example, Fig. 144(d)) among the above multiple modes (Figs. 144(a)-(d)). This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game when the "preceding type premonition performance display SZE" is displayed. Note that the modes that can be displayed as the Moji image display do not necessarily have to be the above four modes (Figs. 144(a)-(d)), and there may be only two modes, for example.

In this modified example, when timing tG1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 183(e), the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" begins to be executed, and the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" makes part of the model image display TMH difficult to see (for example, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 183(f), the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" is displayed in a manner that makes the entire model image display TMH difficult to see, and thus the model image display TMH is hidden while the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" is displayed.

Then, after this, when timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 184(g), the Moji image display (here, the integrated Moji image display IG) starts to be displayed in the form with the highest expectation among the multiple forms (FIGS. 144(a)-(d)). At the time when the Moji image display (here, the integrated Moji image display IG) that can be displayed within the reception period starts to be displayed in this way, a part of it is made difficult to see by the "normal type premonition performance display TZE".

Then, while the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" and the "moth image display (here, integrated moth image display IG)" are displayed in this manner, a second reception period occurs (timing tG3), as shown in FIG. 184 (h).

For ease of explanation, the second performance device (sub-LCD 1610) is not shown here, but even in this modified example, the "second post-reception specific performance" and "premonition performance" using the second performance device (sub-LCD 1610) are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (Figs. 176 and 177). Also, the performances (acceptable reception sound, second post-reception output sound, etc.) using the third performance device (speaker) are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (Figs. 176 and 177).

In addition, in this modified example, if an action by the player is accepted at timing tG3a during the second acceptance period, the second acceptance period will end based on the acceptance, and the post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second acceptance period will begin to be executed, similar to the above-mentioned example (Figures 176 and 177).

In addition, even in this modified example, there are cases where a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation is executed and cases where a post-acceptance performance with a relatively high expectation is executed. However, when a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation is executed, the performance content is the same as that described above (Figure 177 (e1) to (i1)), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In contrast, in this modified example, when a "relatively high expectation post-reception performance" is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period, the performance content shown in Figures 184 (i) to (l) appears instead of the performance content described above (Figures 177 (f2) to (i2)).

First, in this example, as shown in FIG. 184(i), at timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted, the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" and the "moth image display (here, integrated moth image display IG)" are not hidden, nor are they made difficult to see.

However, in this example, even when this acceptance is made and thereafter, as long as the "model image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed, the dynamic display as a model image display will continue. Also, the display area of the gauge image GG will decrease over time.

At timing tG3b, in a situation where the "second post-acceptance performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, as shown in FIG. 184(j), the second disappearance-related display SK2 that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). However, here, no matter how much display area the gauge image GG had at the time of acceptance (FIG. 184(i)), the display area is set to "0" when timing tG3b arrives. With this configuration, the gauge image GG, which has been decreasing its display area according to a certain rule over time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases over time is proportional), suddenly decreases its display area significantly, ignoring the previous rule, which makes it possible to make the player think that "the remaining time was set to "0" by surprise, but luckily I was able to make it in time for the acceptance," and this can increase the interest in the game.

Then, when timing tG3c arrives during the period during which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 (the mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2" begins to be executed in the second mode (second post-acceptance performance display UG2-2) as a post-acceptance performance on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted during the second acceptance period. It goes without saying that this post-acceptance performance display indicates the expectation level (the proportion of times that a bonus will be awarded to the player). This proportion may be 100%.

Note that the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 in this modified example is made difficult to see by the integrated model image display IG, the second premonition performance display ZEH2, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2, etc., as shown in FIG. 184(k), but it may also be displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 182.

After this, first, the integrated model image display IG and the second premonition effect display ZEH2 are both hidden (Figure 184 (l)). Next, although not shown in the figure, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 is hidden, and as a result, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 is displayed with good visibility.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple premonition effect displays to indicate that a reception period will occur. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified example (Figs. 183 and 184), when a specific premonition effect display (Figs. 183(b)-(f) and 184(g)) among the multiple premonition effect displays is performed, a model image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the premonition period before the reception period occurs (model image display TMH) and during the reception period (model image display IG).

In particular, in this modified example, after the imitation image display (imitation image display TMH) is displayed during the premonition period, it is hidden during the premonition period. Furthermore, the imitation image display TMH that is displayed (and hidden) only during the premonition period is in a different form from the imitation image display IG that can be displayed during the reception period, so it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the period before the reception period occurs.

In this modified example, if the request is received within the reception period, the Moji image display IG is hidden based on the fact that the request is received (Fig. 184 (l)), but a "specific aspect that makes the Moji image display difficult to see (second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" can appear before the Moji image display IG is hidden (Fig. 184 (j) and (k)). However, the "specific aspect that makes the Moji image display difficult to see (second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" is not allowed to appear when the Moji image display TMH displayed within the premonition period (specific premonition performance display) is hidden until the Moji image display TMH is hidden.

With this configuration, during the premonition period (specific premonition effect display), the "specific aspect that makes the image display difficult to see (second disappearance related display SK2-2)" that appears in response to the reception period does not appear, and the image display TMH is hidden. Therefore, even if the image display TMH is displayed during the premonition period (specific premonition effect display) but is hidden before the reception period occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the reception period has ended without their knowledge.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1, multiple "modes for making the Momo image display difficult to see" that can appear in response to reception are prepared, including the above-mentioned "specific mode for making the Momo image display difficult to see (second disappearance-related display SK2-2)." In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 183 and 184), none of these modes appear in conjunction with the Momo image display TMH displayed during the premonition period being made invisible. In the above-mentioned modified example, a mode (normal premonition performance display TZE) different from any of the multiple modes prepared as "modes for making the Momo image display difficult to see" in response to reception is made to function as a "mode for making the Momo image display difficult to see" during the premonition period until the Momo image display TMH is made invisible. In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display" that is exclusive to the premonition period, even if a "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display" appears during the premonition period, it will be difficult for the player to mistakenly believe that the acceptance period has ended without their knowledge.

In addition, in the above modified example, during the premonition period until the Moji image display TMH is hidden, the "normal premonition effect display TZE" is displayed as a "mode for making the Moji image display difficult to see," and when accepted during the acceptance period, during the period until the Moji image display IG is hidden, the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed as a "mode for making the Moji image display difficult to see." In this regard, it is desirable to make the period from when the "normal premonition effect display TZE" is displayed until it is hidden longer than the period from when the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed until it is hidden, in order to increase interest in the game.

When the Moji image display TMH is displayed during the premonition period, it is desirable that during the reception period that occurs corresponding to the Moji image display TMH being hidden, reception (reception related to the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is permitted for the reception target (operation means) of the type suggested by the Moji image display TMH, and reception (reception related to the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is not permitted for the reception target (operation means) different from the reception target (operation means) of the type suggested by the Moji image display TMH. That is, in the case of the above modified example (Fig. 183, Fig. 184), since the Moji image display Moji image display TMH displayed during the premonition period suggests the operation button 410 as the reception target, reception (reception related to the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is not permitted for the reception target (sword ornament 5001) different from the operation button 410 during the corresponding reception period.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001" as the reception targets for the post-reception performance. In this regard, when a performance is executed in a manner such as "displaying a model image display and then hiding the model image display within the premonition period," it is desirable to make the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001" that have a higher probability of appearing as a jackpot pattern when they are the reception target the reception target. In other words, in this case, the reception target of the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001" that has a lower probability of appearing as a jackpot pattern when they are the reception target is prevented from being executed in a manner such as "displaying a model image display and then hiding the model image display within the premonition period" before the corresponding reception period occurs.

Of the modified examples described above with reference to Figures 183 and 184, this "presentation mode related to the premonition effect" can also be applied to a reception period other than the second reception period among the above-mentioned multiple reception periods, or to other examples thereof. Furthermore, this "presentation mode related to the premonition effect" may not be applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods, but may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) that is different from any of these reception periods.

Furthermore, among the modified examples described above with reference to Figures 183 and 184, this "presentation mode related to the premonition effect" can also be applied to the modified examples exemplified with reference to Figures 180 to 182 and other examples thereof.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time indication display (including the section image KG, etc.) that reduces the display area of a specific image (gauge image GG) as time passes during the acceptance period. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 183 and 184), the remaining time indication display can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, and since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced even while the performance is progressing, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to know whether the "acceptance has been completed" even after the acceptance has been completed.

In the modified example described above with reference to Figures 183 and 184, a specific partitioned area (partition image KG) is displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600) as a remaining time indication display, and the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is depicted as being reduced within the specific partitioned area (partition image KG). After the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, not only the specific image (gauge image GG) but also the specific partitioned area (partition image KG) continues to be displayed. With this configuration, the specific partitioned area (partition image KG) remains displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, making it easier to determine whether the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) has been reduced.

Note that "after the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of a player's action, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced" also means that, for example, a specified display area remains as the gauge image GG at the time the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of a player's action, but at a later point in time, the display area is set to 0 (not displayed) (Figure 184 (j)). In this case, however, it is required that the specific partitioned area (section image KG) is still displayed at the time the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, and the specific partitioned area (section image KG) will be made hidden after the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0.

In addition, in the modified example described above with reference to Figures 183 and 184, when an action by the player is accepted, the remaining time indication display (gauge image GG, section image KG, etc.) is hidden based on the acceptance, but prior to hiding the remaining time indication display, regardless of how much display area of the gauge image GG was remaining at the time of acceptance, a specific image having a display area of a specific value (a predetermined value) within a specific section area (section image KG) is displayed, or of the specific section area (section image KG) and the gauge image GG, only the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). In other words, in this case, the gauge image GG, which has been reducing its display area over time according to a certain rule (for example, the amount of display area that decreases over time is proportional), will suddenly ignore that rule and reduce its display area significantly, which will make the player think, "I was surprised to see the remaining time go to 0, but luckily I was able to make it in time to accept the order," which will increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the modified example described above with reference to Figures 183 and 184, when the player's action is accepted (when the performance corresponding to the acceptance starts to progress), the "depiction of the reduction in the display area of the gauge image GG" that has been executed before the action was accepted is not terminated but continues. Then, when a specified timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) with a display area set to a specific value in a specific partitioned area (partition image KG) is displayed, or, of the specific partitioned area (partition image KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG), only the specific partitioned area (partition image KG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

In other words, in this case, at the timing when the performance corresponding to the reception starts (for example, timing tG3a), the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not significantly reduced and the drawing continues up to that point, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner by making it difficult to recognize whether the reception has been completed or not even after the reception has been completed. Also, at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) after the timing when the performance corresponding to the reception starts (for example, timing tG3a), the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG, etc.) is significantly reduced, so it is possible to make it appear as if the reception has been completed just in time within the valid period (reception period), which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 184, the model image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before and after the reception. In this regard, when timing tG3b arrives, which is a predetermined time after the reception, no matter what dynamic position the model image display was in at the time of reception, the model image display is displayed in a static state at a specific dynamic position after the reception (in the example shown in FIG. 184(j), when timing tG3b arrives, the button position is depicted as being at the highest position regardless of the button position up to that point). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 184(j), after timing tG3b, the model image display is not dynamically displayed, but is statically displayed at the displayed position. This makes it possible to more suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects.

Of the modified examples described above with reference to Figures 183 and 184, the "presentation of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Figures 184(i)-(k))" and the "dynamic and static display related to model image display" can be applied to a reception period other than the second reception period among the above multiple reception periods, or to other examples thereof. In addition, the "presentation of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Figures 184(i)-(k))" may not be applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods, but may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance) that is different from any of these reception periods.

In addition, when the "depiction of the gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Fig. 184 (i) to (k))" and the "dynamic and static display related to the model image display" are applied to one of the first to seventh acceptance periods (any acceptance period will do), it is desirable not to apply them to acceptance periods other than the acceptance period to which they were applied. With this configuration, there will be cases where a depiction of a large decrease in the gauge image GG appears after acceptance (Fig. 184 (j)) and cases where this depiction does not appear, which will increase the interest in the game.

Even during the reception period when "the depiction of the gauge image GG and the section image KG after reception (Fig. 184 (i) to (k))" and "the dynamic and static display related to the model image display" are not applied, it is desirable to depict the gauge image GG display area to be reduced after reception, or to display it dynamically. In other words, in this case, the only difference is that the display area of the gauge image GG is not depicted to be greatly reduced ignoring the previous rules, and a static display is not performed.

In each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, other examples, and modified examples thereof, a plurality of reception periods (e.g., the first reception period to the seventh reception period, etc.) that may occur under different conditions are provided. In this regard, a predetermined reception period (e.g., the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) among the plurality of reception periods may be made to continue after the pattern change in which the predetermined reception period occurred has ended and the next pattern change has started (a period that may occur across multiple changes), and a specific reception period (e.g., the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc.) among the plurality of reception periods may be made to end before the pattern change in which the specific reception period occurred has ended without continuing until the pattern change in which the specific reception period occurred has ended. That is, in this case, the replica image display related to the reception object is displayed in both the predetermined reception period and the specific reception period, and in both cases where an action by the player is received during the predetermined reception period and when an action by the player is received during the specific reception period, the replica image display is not hidden at the time of the reception, and a mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see (such as a disappearance-related display) appears. This makes it possible to preferably obtain the effect of "making it possible to check which mode of the replica image display was displayed even after the reception was made, while indicating that the reception period has ended" regardless of whether it is the predetermined reception period or the specific reception period.

In addition, if the "predetermined reception period" is, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fifth reception period, and the "specific reception period" is, for example, the second reception period, the fourth reception period, and the seventh reception period, the manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display) will be executed in a different manner when the reception is made in a "predetermined reception period" that can be maintained across multiple variations, and when the reception is made in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple variations. In other words, in this case, based on the type of "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)", it will be possible to know whether the reception period will end within the pattern variation currently being performed, thereby improving interest in the game.

In addition, in both the "predetermined reception period" that may occur over multiple variations and the "specific reception period" that does not, a model image display that imitates the reception target is displayed, but the model image display may be displayed in a different manner (such as the size or position of the display) between the "predetermined reception period" and the "specific reception period". For example, when the model image display is displayed in the manner described above (displayed only at a predetermined position) in the "specific reception period" that does not span multiple variations, it is desirable to display the model image display itself so that its display position changes (moving display) in the "predetermined reception period" that may occur over multiple variations. With this configuration, even if the "predetermined reception period" occurs over multiple variations, it is possible to encourage the player to accept the game quickly.

In addition, in a "reception period" that does not span multiple changes, there are cases where the operation button 410 is used as the reception object and cases where the sword decoration 5001 is used as the reception object, whereas in a "reception period" that may occur across multiple changes, it is desirable that the operation button 410 be used as the reception object but that the sword decoration 5001 not be used as the reception object.

Even in the case of an "acceptance period" that may occur across multiple variations, it is desirable to make it possible to execute the premonition display before the occurrence of the "acceptance period." In other words, in this case, the pattern variation may end while the "acceptance display" is being executed, and the acceptance period corresponding to the "acceptance display" may occur after the pattern variation has ended, so that interest in playing can be maintained in an appropriate manner after the pattern variation has ended.

As described above, even during "acceptance periods (e.g., the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that may occur across multiple variations, after acceptance, a "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" appears. This "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" takes a predetermined time to execute, but even if the pattern variation is stopped while this is being executed, it is desirable that the "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" continue without being terminated midway.

Regarding the "premonition effect display" that is executed in response to the "acceptance period (e.g., the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that may occur across multiple changes, and the "mode of making the imitation image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)," it is desirable to end the execution period (the time from when the premonition effect display is displayed until it is hidden, the time from when the mode of making the imitation image display difficult to see appears until it is ended) in a time shorter than the time from when the pattern change that was in the execution state stops until the next pattern change starts (the time required from when the pattern change that was in the execution state stops until the reserved amount is consumed).

As described above, in the "reception period (e.g., the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur across multiple variations, the corresponding "premonition effect display" and "disappearance-related display" may be displayed. In this regard, if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed before the pattern variation in which the "premonition effect display" is displayed ends, it is desirable to display the "disappearance-related display" by using at least a part of the same area (overlapping area) as the area in which the "premonition effect display" is displayed, and if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed after the pattern variation in which the "premonition effect display" is displayed ends (e.g., after the reserved period is consumed and the next pattern variation is started), it is desirable to display the "disappearance-related display" by using only an area different from the area in which the "premonition effect display" is displayed. With this configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the post-reception performance is being performed across multiple variations while paying close attention to it.

As described above, multiple modes (Fig. 144 (a) to (d)) with different expectations are prepared for the model image display, and in a "reception period (e.g., the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the seventh reception period)" that does not span multiple variations, the model image display is displayed in one of these modes. However, in a "reception period (e.g., the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in a form spanning multiple variations, it is desirable to display only the model image display of a specific mode (e.g., Fig. 144 (a)) among the multiple modes. However, in both a "reception period (e.g., the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the seventh reception period)" that does not span multiple variations and a "reception period (e.g., the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in a form spanning multiple variations, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display of the model image display after acceptance.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 can generate a plurality of game states (first game state and second game state) with different game conditions (such as the ease of obtaining a prize ball when a game ball is shot into the game area). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "acceptance period" during which a post-acceptance performance can be executed when an action by a player is accepted can occur in either the first game state or the second game state. Furthermore, if an action by a player is accepted during such an "acceptance period", after the acceptance, regardless of whether the "acceptance period" occurs in the first game state or the second game state, a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is made to appear while the image display is being displayed, and then the image display is made invisible while the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, the effect of "allowing the user to check which state was displayed as the mock image even after the acceptance was made, while indicating that the acceptance period has ended" can be obtained regardless of whether the acceptance is made during the acceptance period that occurs in the first game state or the second game state.

The "first gaming state" corresponds to, for example, a normal gaming state (low probability, no time reduction), and the "second gaming state" corresponds to a "gaming state different from the normal gaming state" that can occur (state transition) based on the result of a jackpot determination. Any gaming state may be used as long as it is different from the normal gaming state.

To further explain this point, using the multiple reception periods (such as the first reception period to the seventh reception period) exemplified in the above-mentioned examples and other examples, and their modified examples, for example, a predetermined type of reception period among the multiple reception periods (such as the first reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period, and the seventh reception period, but it is not necessary to provide all of them) is set to be able to occur only in the first game state among the first game state and the second game state. In contrast, a third reception period among the multiple reception periods is set to be able to occur only in the second game state among the first game state and the second game state. Even with this configuration, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the predetermined type of reception period (first game state) and the third reception period (second game state). However, in the first game state (when accepted during the first acceptance period), a specific mode (such as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 and the seventh disappearance-related display, but it is not necessary that all of these are included) that cannot appear in the second game state (when accepted during the second acceptance period) can appear as a "mode in which the model image display is difficult to see."

With this configuration, even without checking the type of post-acceptance performance, simply by checking which mode appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," the player can understand whether the game is being controlled to the first game mode or the second game mode, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see" in the modified example shown in Figures 181 and 182 may also be set as a "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see" that can only appear in the first gaming state (when accepted during the first acceptance period). In other words, in this case, it is expected that the player's interest in the game will be favorably maintained when he or she is in the most unfavorable state (normal gaming state).

Furthermore, according to the above configuration, in the second game state (when accepted during the third acceptance period), the first disappearance-related display is executed as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," but the first disappearance-related display can also appear in the first game state (when accepted during the first acceptance period). That is, in this case, the player is only informed of the possibility that the game is in a state controlled to the second game state, so that the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained. Furthermore, even when the game is controlled to the first game state, when the first disappearance-related display appears, the player can be made aware of the possibility that the game is in a state controlled to the second game state, so that interest in the game can be appropriately maintained.

The second acceptance period and the fifth acceptance period may be prepared as acceptance periods that can occur in either the first game state or the second game state, or may be acceptance periods that can occur only in the first game state out of the first game state and the second game state.

As described above, during the reception period that occurs in the first gaming state, the mock image display is displayed in one of multiple modes (Fig. 144(a)-(d)). In this regard, it is desirable that during the reception period that occurs in the second gaming state, only a mock image display of a specific mode out of the multiple modes (for example, Fig. 144(a) which is a mode with low expectation) is displayed. With this configuration, even if a mock image display with low expectation (Fig. 144(a)) appears, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the game is controlled to the second gaming state, and therefore the interest in the game can be maintained in a good condition.

In the first game state, if a player's action is not accepted during the acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" may appear in the same mode as when the action is accepted (e.g., the second acceptance period, the fourth acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period, etc.) or in a different mode from when the action is accepted (e.g., the first acceptance period, etc.). However, in the second game state (third acceptance period), it is preferable that the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" always appears in the same mode as when the action is accepted, or always appears in a different mode from when the action is accepted. With this configuration, if a player's action is not accepted in the first game state, the player can be made aware of the possibility that the second game state has occurred depending on whether the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" appears in the same mode as when the action is accepted.

When the acceptance period (third acceptance period) occurring in the second game state is generated as one in which "even if not accepted within that period, the same appearance as if accepted will always be displayed as a 'appearance that makes the model image display difficult to see'", it is desirable for the effective time (set time) of the acceptance period (third acceptance period) to be longer than any of the "acceptance periods in which even if not accepted, the same appearance as if accepted will always be displayed as a 'appearance that makes the model image display difficult to see'" occurring in the first game state.

In both the first and second game states, the corresponding premonition effect display will be executed before the acceptance period occurs. In this regard, it is desirable to execute a specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display, fifth premonition effect display, seventh premonition effect display, etc.) in the first game state that cannot occur in the second game state.

[Special application period]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the moving body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (if a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) will not be generated even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Also, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate acceptance periods during which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is permitted, and when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, a display change occurs according to the type of acceptance period that has occurred. Also, during the acceptance period, it is possible to display a mock image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action is expressed as an image.

Note that, with regard to the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. However, it is preferable that the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment are not included in the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), or that the selection rate for these patterns is low.

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-acceptance display (post-operation display) such as a display change on the performance display device 1600, or generates a performance sound change on the speaker, a change in the light emitted by a lamp, or a performance action by a movable decoration, as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that it may reduce interest in the game related to the acceptance period.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the "operation by the player" to be detected is not limited to operations that are directly performed by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact actions by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation means) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is designed to have, for example, the following special presentation characteristics. It is not necessary to have all of the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below. For example, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in playing by only having one of the presentation characteristics (any configuration), or it is possible to selectively have several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it is possible to appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that they have any one configuration that can suppress a decline in interest in playing related to the acceptance period.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases where the first reception period occurs and where the second reception period occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, but the text information is displayed as different text information (for example, "Push!", "Please push", etc.) even though the same action by the player is accepted in the first reception period and the second reception period. Note that the "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after the second reception)" in the configuration 1-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" in the other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In other words, the first and second reception periods require the player to perform the same action (operation mode), but the display changes (post-reception display) that occur as a result of the detection of that action are different. In this regard, with this pachinko machine 1, even when the same action (operation mode) is required of the player, the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of a reception period is made different depending on the type of reception period (type of post-reception display). This allows the player to perform an operation (action by the player) while knowing which type of display change is likely to occur as the post-reception display, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When different actions (operation modes) are requested of the player, even if the reception periods are of the same type (generating the same post-reception display), it is more desirable to make the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period different in order to prevent operational errors by the player. In the same sense, when different actions (operation modes) are requested of the player, but the reception periods are of different types (generating different post-reception displays), it is desirable to make the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period different.

It is also possible to provide a further reception period in which the same operation (operation mode) as in the first reception period is requested and the same text information and imitation image display as in the first reception period are displayed, but when the reception is made, a post-reception display different from that in the first reception period is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to fully grasp which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information and imitation image display, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when operating.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 1-A" is adopted, the text information is not hidden during the first acceptance period until the state in which acceptance is permitted (valid state) ends, whereas during the second acceptance period, while the state in which acceptance is permitted (valid state) continues, the text information may be hidden during that period. In other words, in this case, unless an operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the second acceptance period occurs, it becomes difficult to recognize what operation (operation mode) is being requested of the player, and it becomes difficult to recognize the type of the acceptance period. This is expected to favorably avoid a situation in which different text information is displayed and the tension is completely lost.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 1-A" is adopted, the second reception period may include a period during which text information is displayed and a period during which text information is not displayed, but the display change may be the same regardless of when the reception is made. In other words, in this case, even if the text information is not displayed, as long as the player checks what type of operation is being requested while the text information is displayed, the player can still operate properly, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 2-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the model image display, and in the second reception period, any of the plurality of modes can be displayed as the model image display. Note that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after second reception)" according to the configuration 2-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, during the second reception period, a performance effect that would not be possible during the first reception period is provided, which can favorably increase the player's interest in the game until an operation (motion) by the player is detected.

In addition, for the "multiple modes of model image displays" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is more desirable to vary the expectation of a jackpot pattern appearing depending on which of those model image displays is displayed, in order to increase interest in the game. Also, any one of the "multiple modes of model image displays" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable for the "lowest expectation mode" of the "multiple modes of model image displays" to be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 2-A" is adopted, a third reception period may be further provided, and only one mode of the model image display may be displayed during the first reception period and the third reception period. Then, during the "second reception period" in which the model image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state is terminated. In contrast, of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which the model image display is displayed in only one mode, during the "first reception period" the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state (reception period) is terminated, but during the "third reception period", the model image display that had been displayed until that point may be made invisible during the valid state (reception period) until it is terminated (while the valid state is continuing). That is, in this case, even in the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one form of the model image display is displayed, the performance of whether or not the model image display will be hidden during the period is provided, so that it is possible to appropriately increase the interest in the game until the player's operation (action) is detected. Note that the model image display displayed in the first reception period and the model image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same, and the possibility of it being hidden may be suggested.

Also, as will be described later, when "Configuration 2-A" is adopted, the same display change (post-acceptance display) may be produced during the third acceptance period whether the acceptance is made during the period in which the model image display is displayed or during the period in which the model image display is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the valid state (acceptance period) itself continues unchanged even after the model image display is not displayed, so that when creating a dramatic effect (non-display of the model image display) using the "third acceptance period", it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for the configuration 2-A is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

[Configuration 3-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, after the model image display is displayed when the first reception period occurs, the model image display is not hidden until the end of the first reception period, and the player's actions can be accepted while the model image display is displayed. In the second reception period, the player's actions can be accepted while the model image display is not displayed, and the above-mentioned "acceptance sound" is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but is not audibly output when the second reception period occurs. Note that the "first reception period (first reception post-display)" and "second reception period (second reception post-display)" according to the configuration 3-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" in other configurations, it may mean reception periods that are opposite to each other, or it may mean a reception period that is different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, not only is there a "first reception period" in which the reception is made while the reception permission sound is audibly output and the imitation image display is displayed, but there is also a "second reception period" in which the reception is made without the reception permission sound being audibly output and the imitation image display being displayed. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of the possibility that a post-reception display may occur at various unintended times, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 3-A" is adopted, a third acceptance period is further provided, and during the second acceptance period, the model image display is not displayed from the start of the second acceptance period until its end, and actions by the player can be accepted while the model image display is not displayed, but during the third acceptance period, the model image display may be hidden for only a portion of the third acceptance period, and actions by the player can be accepted both during the period when the model image display is displayed and during the period when the model image display is hidden. In other words, in this case, the third acceptance period has both the aspects of the first acceptance period (acceptance while the model image display is displayed) and the second acceptance period (acceptance while the model image display is not displayed), which can increase interest in playing the game. In addition, since there is a possibility that the state in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted may continue even after the model image display is made non-displayed, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game that occurs when the model image display is made non-displayed without the player's actions (operations) being accepted will be suppressed.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for the "configuration 3-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

The reception allowable sound is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but may not be audibly output when the second reception period occurs or when the third reception period occurs. That is, during the third reception period, there is a timing when the imitation image display is displayed. In this regard, according to the above configuration for the third reception period, the reception allowable sound is not output in accordance with the timing when the imitation image display is displayed (or before or after that, etc.). As a result, during the third reception period, even at the timing when the reception period occurs, it has both the aspects of the first reception period (the imitation image display is displayed) and the aspects of the second reception period (the reception allowable sound is not output), which can increase interest in the game.

Also, as will be described later, when "Configuration 3-A" is adopted, the same display change (post-acceptance display) may be produced during the third acceptance period whether the acceptance is made during the period in which the model image display is displayed or during the period in which the model image display is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the valid state (acceptance period) itself continues unchanged even after the model image display is not displayed, so that when creating a dramatic effect (non-display of the model image display) using the "third acceptance period", it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, when a player's action is detected during the period, the first reception display is displayed and the first reception sound is output, but when a player's action is not detected during the period, the first reception display is not displayed and the first reception sound is not output, and in the second reception period, when a player's action is detected during the period, the second reception display is displayed and the second reception sound is output, and even when a player's action is not detected during the period, the same second reception display as when a player's action is detected during the period is displayed, but the second reception sound is not output. Note that the "first reception period (first reception display)" and "second reception period (second reception display)" according to the configuration 4-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" in other configurations, it may mean reception periods that are opposite to each other, or it may mean a reception period that is different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the acceptance period, a disadvantage in terms of presentation can occur, making it possible to optimally maintain the sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 4-A" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and during the third reception period, when a player's action (operation) is detected during the period, the third post-reception display is displayed and the third reception sound is output, and even if the player's action is not detected during the period, the same third post-reception display as when the player's action is detected during the period may be displayed and the third reception sound may be output. In other words, in this case, when the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the reception period, the same display change (post-reception change) as when the action is accepted may be generated in a way that causes a disadvantage in terms of presentation (second reception period) or in a way that does not cause a disadvantage in terms of presentation (third reception period), so that a decrease in interest in the game when the player's action (operation) is not accepted in time during the reception period can be suppressed.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for the "configuration 4-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

[Configuration 5-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first reception period can occur when the first variation pattern starts to be executed at a first timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first variation pattern starts to be executed, regardless of the number of judgment information stored by the reservation storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a reserved state (reserved number)) is any numerical value, and the second reception period can occur when the second variation pattern starts to be executed at a second timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern starts to be executed, when the number of judgment information stored by the reservation storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a reserved state (reserved number)) is less than a predetermined number, but when the second variation pattern starts to be executed at a number equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the second reception period does not occur even if the second timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern starts to be executed arrives. The "first acceptance period (indicated after the first acceptance)" and "second acceptance period (indicated after the second acceptance)" in the configuration 5-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-A. Therefore, they may mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" in other configurations, they may mean acceptance periods on the opposite sides of each other, or they may mean acceptance periods different from those acceptance periods.

With this configuration, when the player is about to stop playing and the number of reserved balls is decreasing, a type of reception period (second reception period) that had not occurred until then will occur, which will hopefully encourage the player not to stop playing, or, even if the game is stopped, will give the player the final impression that the game was fun.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 5-A" is adopted, even if the second variation pattern is started when the "number of judgment information stored by the reservation storage means (reserved number)" is less than a predetermined number, if the "number of judgment information stored by the reservation storage means (reserved number)" increases (becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number) at a stage before the second timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern was started, the second acceptance period may not occur when the second timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern was started. In other words, even if the pattern variation (second variation pattern) is started when the reserved number is decreasing, if the reserved number is increased within the period of the pattern variation, this suggests that the player is not planning to stop playing. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the pattern change (second change pattern) is started when the number of reserved balls is decreasing, if the number of reserved balls is increased during the execution period of the pattern change, the second acceptance period will not occur when the second timing arrives when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second change pattern was started to be executed, so that the second acceptance period can function more appropriately as "a type of acceptance period that can only appear when you are about to stop playing."

In order to more effectively obtain such an effect, even if a second reception period occurs, if the "number of determination information stored by the reservation storage means (reservation number)" increases while the second reception period is occurring, it is more desirable to terminate the second reception period at that point.

[Configuration 6-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed state regardless of the state of the performance, and the second reception period occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible regardless of the state of the performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a performance related to the type of reception period before the reception period occurs by using the specific BGM. Note that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" according to the configuration 6-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 6-A" is adopted, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period, a second reception period, and a third reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the third reception period may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible, depending on the situation of the presentation. With this configuration, whether the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible, the reception period may be the "third reception period", so that it is expected that the player's interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition until the player's action (operation) is accepted.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for the "configuration 6-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

[Configuration 7-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, if reception is made within the period, a first post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance symbols are displayed with priority over the first post-reception display at least while the first post-reception display is being displayed. In contrast, in the second reception period, if reception is made within the period, a second post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance symbols are displayed in a manner that makes them difficult to see by the second post-reception display, or are hidden, at least while the second post-reception display is being displayed. In addition, the "mode in which it is difficult to see" in the configuration 7-A means "a mode in which at least a part of the performance pattern can be seen through the second post-reception display set to a predetermined transmittance to an extent corresponding to the transmittance, or a mode in which at least a part of the performance pattern is made invisible by the second post-reception display in which it overlaps, or a mode in which at least a part of the performance pattern is hidden, etc." In addition, the "first reception period (first post-reception display)" and the "second reception period (second post-reception display)" in the configuration 7-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" in other configurations, they may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or they may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the type of reception period by checking whether the visibility of the performance symbols has been affected by the post-reception display triggered by the player's operation. Note that "performance symbols" refer to, for example, symbols that form a reach state as a performance on the performance display device 1600, and also to symbols that are used in the performance of whether or not a reach state is formed, pseudo consecutive performances, full rotation performances, etc.

However, it has been confirmed that some players feel aversion to the worsening visibility of the performance symbols as a result of the second post-acceptance display being displayed. Therefore, as will be described later, when "Configuration 7-A" is adopted, when the second post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an acceptance within the second acceptance period, an acceptance period different from the second acceptance period is generated (for example, generated in response to an acceptance within the second acceptance period). Then, when an operation by the player is accepted within the different period, the second post-acceptance display may be made invisible in response to the acceptance, thereby making the performance symbols easier to see.

For example, if the second post-acceptance display in response to an acceptance during the second acceptance period is to be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of its display, the player can hide the second post-acceptance display at that point by simply performing a predetermined operation before the predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the operation required of the player to display the second post-acceptance display during the second acceptance period and the operation required of the player to hide the second post-acceptance display during an acceptance period other than the second acceptance period (an acceptance period that occurs in response to an acceptance during the second acceptance period) may be the same operation or different operations. For example, during an acceptance period other than the second acceptance period (an acceptance period that occurs in response to an acceptance during the second acceptance period), the player may be required to perform operations on multiple operating means to hide the second post-acceptance display.

In contrast, the first post-reception display is also hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since it began to be displayed (which may be the same as the predetermined time until the second post-reception display is hidden, or it may be a different time). However, for the first post-reception display that does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance symbols, it is preferable to prevent it from being hidden as a result of any operation performed by the player before the predetermined time has elapsed, in order to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a player makes an incorrect operation contrary to his or her intention.

[Configuration 8-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first reception period can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and when reception is made while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, this triggers the specific BGM to be made inaudible, and the second reception period is permitted for reception after the specific BGM that was audibly output in a non-suppressed mode is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is not audibly output, and even if the reception is made, the specific BGM is maintained in a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is not audibly output. Note that the "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" according to the configuration 8-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" in other configurations, it may mean reception periods that are opposite to each other, or it may mean a reception period that is different from those reception periods.

This configuration adds interest in the timing at which the specific BGM is "audibly output in a suppressed manner or not audibly output" in relation to the occurrence of the reception period.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 8-A" is adopted, in the first reception period, all sounds that were audibly output at the time of acceptance are made inaudible (when only the specific BGM is audibly output, only the specific BGM is inaudible), and in the second reception period, all sounds that were audibly output at the time of acceptance are made inaudible (when only one sound is audibly output, only that one sound is inaudible). In other words, in this case, it is possible to provide a common presentation between the first reception period and the second reception period, such as making the specific BGM "in a state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a state of not being audibly output" in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, or making all sounds that were audibly output at the time of acceptance inaudible, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 8-A" is adopted, a situation may occur during the first acceptance period in which the specific BGM is made inaudible and no sound is output (partway through the valid period) while the acceptance of operations by the player is permitted, but it is desirable to make the acceptance period continue even in such a situation. In other words, in this case, during the first acceptance period, although the specific BGM is made inaudible when an operation is accepted, if no operation is accepted for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the first acceptance period, the specific BGM is made inaudible while no operation has yet been accepted, which makes the player think that the first acceptance period has ended, strongly catching the player's interest.

When the specific BGM is made inaudible when the reception is made, a "display change in response to reception (display after the first reception)" is generated accordingly. However, when the specific BGM is made inaudible before the reception is made, it is preferable not to generate a "display change in response to reception (display after the first reception)". In other words, in this case, by confirming that the specific BGM has been made inaudible but the "display change in response to reception (display after the first reception)" has not yet occurred, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the first reception period is still continuing. After the specific BGM is made inaudible, if the player's operation is accepted before the first reception period ends, this will trigger the "display change in response to reception (display after the first reception)" to occur, which will eliminate the sense of anxiety when the specific BGM is made inaudible (concern that the valid period may have ended), thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Configuration 9-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation means including a first operation means (first operation receiving unit) and a second operation means (second operation receiving unit) are prepared as operation means, and a plurality of types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the specific reception period, both the reception of an operation to the first operation means and the reception of an operation to the second operation means are permitted as receptions for causing a display change corresponding to the specific reception period, and when an operation is received to the first operation means, a specific display change can be caused, and when an operation is received to the second operation means, a display change different from the specific display change can be caused without causing a specific display change, so that it is possible to provide interest in which operation means to operate. Note that the "specific reception period (specific reception post-display (specific display change))", "first operation means", and "second operation means" according to the configuration 9-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-A. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "acceptance period" or "operation means" of other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period or operation means different from those acceptance periods.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 9-A" is adopted, when the first operating means is operated during a specific reception period, the specific reception period may be ended, but when the second operating means is operated, the specific reception period may not be ended and the remaining time may be extended. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to provide a reception period using multiple operating means with unprecedented dramatic effect, and it becomes possible to provide a variety of interesting reception periods based on such dramatic effect.

[Configuration 10-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, a model image display simulating the operation receiving portion is displayed, and in the second reception period, a plurality of model image displays simulating the operation receiving portion are displayed, and the model image displays are made executable as dynamic displays depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is moved by the operation by the player. Note that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after second reception)" according to the configuration 10-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, even if multiple operation receiving parts are provided that require different operations (e.g., pushing, pulling, etc.), the player can easily recognize what operation to perform, making it less likely that an operation will not be completed in time within the valid period.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 10-A" is adopted, the imitation image display may be executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is moved by the player's operation" or may not be executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is moved by the player's operation." In other words, in this case, even when the imitation image display is displayed, it is possible that the player can easily recognize what operation to perform, but also that it is difficult to recognize what operation to perform, and therefore it is expected that the tension until the player's operation is accepted will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 11-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation means (a plurality of operation receiving units) including a specific operation means (a specific operation receiving unit) are prepared as the operation means, and a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as the reception period. Then, in the first reception period, a model image display imitating the specific operation means and a specific image corresponding to the model image display are displayed so that "a remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time during which the reception of an operation to the specific operation means is permitted by reducing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time" is performed, and in the second reception period, a model image display imitating the specific operation means is performed, but a specific image corresponding to the model image display is displayed so that "a remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time during which the reception of an operation to the specific operation means is permitted by reducing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time" is not performed. In addition, the "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and the "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" in the configuration 11-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" in other configurations, they may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or they may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, even if an imitation image display that imitates a specific operation means is displayed, the "specific remaining time display that indicates the remaining time during which operations on the specific operation means are permitted to be accepted by reducing the display area of the specific image over time" is not necessarily displayed, so it is possible to maintain a sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 11-A" is adopted, during the second reception period, a specific image display that imitates a specific operation means and a special image display that imitates a different special operation means are displayed, but the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" may not be displayed.

In other words, in this case, even though both the acceptance of operations for the specific operation means and the acceptance of operations for other operation means are permitted during the second acceptance period, the above-mentioned "specific remaining time display" is not performed. This prevents the player from becoming complacent about the fact that both the acceptance of operations for the specific operation means and the acceptance of operations for other operation means are permitted, and makes it possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the second acceptance period is occurring.

[Configuration 12-A]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first provides, as operation means, "a first operation means having a first operation receiving portion displaced by an operation by a player and a first peripheral decoration portion provided on its periphery" and "a second operation means having a second operation receiving portion displaced by an operation by a player and a second peripheral decoration portion provided on its periphery." When the first model image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, it is possible to display a first receiving portion model image imitating the first operation receiving portion and a first peripheral decoration image decorating the periphery of the first receiving portion model image, and when the second model image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, it is possible to display a second receiving portion model image imitating the second operation receiving portion and a second peripheral decoration image decorating the periphery of the second receiving portion model image, and the first peripheral decoration image and the second peripheral decoration image are displayed as different images. The "first operating means" and "second operating means" in the configuration 12-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" and "second operating means" in other configurations, or they may mean operating means on opposite sides to each other, or they may mean operating means different from those operating means.

With this configuration, even if the operating means themselves are similar, the appearance of the first operating means can be made significantly different from that of the second operating means, which is expected to make it easier to distinguish which operating means to operate.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 12-A" is adopted, the first peripheral decorative image may be displayed as an image simulating the first peripheral decorative portion, while the second peripheral decorative image may be displayed as an image including at least a portion simulating a peripheral decorative portion different from the second peripheral decorative portion. In other words, in this case, when a "first imitation image display" having a first peripheral decorative image that is an image simulating the first peripheral decorative portion is displayed, it is possible to favorably recognize that a situation has been given in which the first operating means has been given an operation opportunity. In contrast, when a "second imitation image display" having a second peripheral decorative image that is an image that does not imitate the second peripheral decorative portion is displayed, it is possible to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the second operating means with a more dramatic effect. In this case, it is desirable to provide the "second operating means corresponding to the second simulated image display" as a member having a larger operating receiving portion (first operating receiving portion) than the "first operating means corresponding to the first simulated image display", so that even if the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not mimic the second peripheral decoration portion, is displayed, it is not difficult to know which operating means to operate.

In order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the second operating means as a "more dramatic situation," it is desirable for the second peripheral decorative image to be displayed as an image that imitates a fictitious decorative part that does not actually exist in the gaming machine. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that an operation opportunity has been given to the second operating means, a part of the second peripheral decorative image may include a part that imitates the second peripheral decorative part.

[Configuration 13-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the operation means, a plurality of operation receiving sections including a first operation receiving section, a second operation receiving section, and a third operation receiving section are prepared, and as the reception period, a plurality of types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared. Then, in the specific reception period, the first model image display imitating the first operation receiving section, the second model image display imitating the second operation receiving section, and the third model image display imitating the third operation receiving section are all displayed, and when an operation is received for the first operation receiving section among the plurality of operation receiving sections, at least the second model image display and the third model image display imitating the operation receiving section that has not been received among the first model image display, the second model image display, and the third model image display are made non-displayable. The "first operation receiving unit", "second operation receiving unit", "third operation receiving unit", and "specific reception period" in the configuration 13-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. Therefore, they may mean the same thing as the "operation receiving unit" and "reception period" in other configurations, or they may mean something different.

According to the above configuration, the imitation image display (second imitation image display, third imitation image display) that imitates an operation receiving part (second operation receiving part, third operation receiving part) different from the operation receiving part (first operation receiving part) that has accepted an operation is hidden, so that it becomes easy to recognize whether or not further operation is required for the operation receiving part (second operation receiving part, third operation receiving part) that has displayed the imitation image display but has not accepted an operation but for which the operation receiving part is not accepting an operation (second operation receiving part, third operation receiving part).

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 13-A" is adopted, during the specific reception period, even though the first, second, and third model image displays are displayed, the third operation receiving section may not be enabled (not permitted) to receive operations among the first, second, and third operation receiving sections. That is, in this case, during the specific reception period, when an operation is received by the first operation receiving section, a first display change occurs, and when an operation is received by the second operation receiving section, a second display change occurs, but no operation is received by the third operation receiving section, and no display change occurs as a result of the operation. This makes it possible to maintain the presentation and tension until the operation by the player is received during the specific reception period.

[Configuration 14-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases where the first reception period occurs and where the second reception period occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, but the text information is displayed as different text information (for example, "Push!", "Please push", etc.) even though the same action by the player is accepted in the first reception period and the second reception period. Note that the "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after the second reception)" in the configuration 14-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 14-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" in the other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In other words, the first and second reception periods require the player to perform the same action (operation mode), but the display changes (post-reception display) that occur as a result of the detection of that action are different. In this regard, with this pachinko machine 1, even when the same action (operation mode) is required of the player, the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of a reception period is made different depending on the type of reception period (type of post-reception display). This allows the player to perform an operation (action by the player) while knowing which type of display change is likely to occur as the post-reception display, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When different actions (operation modes) are requested of the player, even if the reception periods are of the same type (generating the same post-reception display), it is more desirable to make the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period different in order to prevent operational errors by the player. In the same sense, when different actions (operation modes) are requested of the player, but the reception periods are of different types (generating different post-reception displays), it is desirable to make the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period different.

It is also possible to provide a further reception period in which the same operation (operation mode) as in the first reception period is requested and the same text information and imitation image display as in the first reception period are displayed, but when the reception is made, a post-reception display different from that in the first reception period is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to fully grasp which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information and imitation image display, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when operating.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 14-A" is adopted, it is more desirable that, in the first acceptance period, the text information is not hidden until the state in which acceptance is permitted (valid state) ends, whereas, in the second acceptance period, the text information may be hidden while the state in which acceptance is permitted (valid state) continues. In other words, in this case, unless an operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the second acceptance period occurs, it becomes difficult to recognize what operation (operation mode) is being requested of the player, and it becomes difficult to recognize the type of the acceptance period. This is expected to favorably avoid a situation in which different text information is displayed and the tension is completely lost.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 14-A" is employed, the second reception period includes a period in which text information is displayed and a period in which text information is hidden, and different display changes may occur depending on which of these periods the reception was made during. In other words, in this case, a display change is provided that cannot be confirmed unless the user is in a state where it is difficult to recognize what type of operation is being requested (a state in which text information is hidden), and this type of dramatic effect effectively maintains a sense of tension.

It is desirable to make the time from when the corresponding text information is displayed when the first reception period occurs until when it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player different from the time from when the corresponding text information is displayed when the second reception period occurs until when it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player.

[Configuration 15-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the model image display, and in the second reception period, any of the plurality of modes can be displayed as the model image display. Note that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after second reception)" according to the configuration 2-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, during the second reception period, a performance effect that would not be possible during the first reception period is provided, which can favorably increase the player's interest in the game until an operation (motion) by the player is detected.

In addition, for the "multiple modes of model image displays" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is more desirable to vary the expectation of a jackpot pattern appearing depending on which of those model image displays is displayed, in order to increase interest in the game. Also, any one of the "multiple modes of model image displays" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable for the "lowest expectation mode" of the "multiple modes of model image displays" to be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 15-A" is adopted, a third reception period may be further provided, and only one mode of the model image display may be displayed during the first reception period and the third reception period. Then, during the "second reception period" in which the model image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state is terminated. In contrast, of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which the model image display is displayed in only one mode, during the "first reception period" the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state (reception period) is terminated, but during the "third reception period", the model image display that had been displayed until that point may be made invisible during the valid state (reception period) until it is terminated (while the valid state is continuing). That is, in this case, even in the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one form of the model image display is displayed, the performance of whether or not the model image display will be hidden during the period is provided, so that it is possible to appropriately increase the interest in the game until the player's operation (action) is detected. Note that the model image display displayed in the first reception period and the model image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same, and the possibility of it being hidden may be suggested.

Also, as will be described later, when "Configuration 15-A" is employed, the third reception period includes a period during which the model image display is displayed and a period during which the model image display is not displayed, and different display changes may occur depending on during which of these periods the reception is made. In other words, in this case, a display change is provided that cannot be seen unless the user is made aware that the reception period may have ended (a state in which the model image display is not displayed), and this type of dramatic effect effectively maintains a sense of tension.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for configuration 15-A is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of configuration 15-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permission state (acceptance period) in which an acceptance opportunity is granted occurs, a model image related to the acceptance target (such as a model image modeled on an operation receiving section) is displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in playing until the post-acceptance display (display change) is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance presentation (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern presentation progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance presentation (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of advance judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into the SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance presentation and the high expectation suppression acceptance presentation.

The "integrated model image display" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as another example or modified example thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image display," and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance-permitted sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) is being performed.

In addition, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, an acceptance permission state classified into the first type is a valid period that can occur when a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but cannot occur in a low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (a valid period that occurs based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high expectation fluctuation pattern) in a performance judgment based on the result of a jackpot judgment). In addition, an acceptance permission state of the second type is a valid period that can occur in either a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expectation fluctuation pattern (such as a valid period that occurs as a result of a notice judgment).

The "integrated imitation image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first type and second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). Here, it is assumed that the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) occur as acceptance permission states (acceptance periods) in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operating means (e.g., operation button 410), and therefore the "integrated imitation image display" displayed in those acceptance periods is an image imitation of the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated Moji image display", the special mode with the highest expectation (for example, the mode shown in Figure 144 (d)) can only be displayed in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), and in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), it can only be displayed in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in Figures 144 (a) to (c)). In the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination is made based on the result of the jackpot determination as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, Figures 144 (a) to (d)) the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in, and the "integrated Moji image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination may be made as to which of multiple modes not including a special mode (e.g., Figures 144 (a) to (c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the "integrated model image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the above configurations 1 to 15 are explained below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be included. In other words, when it is desired to obtain further effects, it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration corresponding to each configuration described in the specification described below.

First, an example that embodies the above configurations 2, 3, and 5 to 8 will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when the player is accepted (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level indication performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D) are provided as multiple reception periods (reception performances).

The characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be described with reference to Figures 185 to 194. Note that each reception period described above with reference to Figures 184 through 194 may be prepared as a reception period separate from reception period A (reception performance A) through reception period D (reception performance D), or may be realized as one of reception periods A (reception performance A) through D (reception performance D).

Figure 185 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when condition A is satisfied as a result of the judgment and reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. Figure 191 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no probability change or time reduction), and "variation pattern A" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (performance depiction according to variation pattern A, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 191(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern A" itself. In the performance example shown in FIG. 191(a), a landscape depicting a mountain is displayed as the background image HG1.

In other words, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a notice judgment) corresponding to the variation pattern A, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the above-mentioned acceptance period A (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding post-acceptance display A" is permitted when timing tM2 arrives (when condition A is met) after a predetermined time A has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 185(a) ("the situation shown in FIG. 191(b)"). This acceptance period A occurs when a specific BGM is being output without being suppressed. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period A, post-acceptance display A is performed based on the acceptance (the situation shown in FIG. 191(c)).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is configured to perform, in relation to the occurrence of such a reception period A, a Momo image display indicating the reception target (such as an operation receiving portion), a gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display that makes the Momo image display difficult to see (a state in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see), and a post-reception display indicating the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) depending on the reception. As described above, the Momo image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. Also, when the Momo image display is displayed instead of the "integrated Momo image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, as shown in FIG. 185(b), when timing tM1 arrives before the occurrence of the reception period A, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. In other words, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed so as to span timing tM2 when the reception period A occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible when an acceptance is made within the reception period A, or when the reception period A ends without the acceptance being made. Note that the reception period A in this example ends when timing tM3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 185(h)).

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 185(a)-(g) and 191(b) and (c) assume that a player's action (operation) is accepted at timing tM2a within acceptance period A. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figures 185(a)-(g) and 191(b and c), acceptance period A ends and post-acceptance display A (post-acceptance performance A) corresponding to acceptance period A begins to be executed based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation) at timing tM2a.

In the example shown in FIG. 191, only one mode is displayed as the post-acceptance display A corresponding to the acceptance period A. Although not shown in the figure, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period A, based on the acceptance, the first mode (e.g., "It's your chance") with a relatively low expectation may be executed as the post-acceptance display A, or the second mode (e.g., "It's super hot") with a relatively high expectation may be executed as the post-acceptance display A.

Although details will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period A shown in FIG. 185 advances the presentation in the same manner as the "first reception period" shown in FIG. 167 etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 185(b), at timing tM2a when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of the acceptance sound A in response to the acceptance starts), the integrated model image display IG is not only not made invisible, but also not made difficult to see.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIG. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the end of the reception period, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible mode" after the reception is made to be long. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same mode as it was during the reception period (in the example shown in FIG. 167, the mode shown in FIG. 175 (e1) and (e2)) even though the reception has been made and the audible output of the reception sound A has already started, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance (here, reception sound A) that is in the execution state."

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185(b), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing tM2a when the acceptance period A ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (operation) (when timing tM2b arrives), the display of a disappearance-related effect (disappearance-related display A corresponding to the acceptance period A) is started as a "mode in which the integrated Momo image display IG becomes difficult to see". The "disappearance-related effect" here refers to an image (another image different from the integrated Momo image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated Momo image display IG is made invisible. At the time when the display of the "disappearance-related effect" starts, the integrated Momo image display IG is not made invisible but is visible, and the integrated Momo image display IG is gradually made invisible as the "disappearance-related effect" is displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, the "disappearance-related display A (disappearance EF in the figure)" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display A" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the reception sound A has already been executed. As a result, even in a situation where the reception sound A has already been executed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period A. In addition, even after the process for audibly outputting the reception sound A has started, the form of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility until it is made difficult to see (timing tM2a to tM2b), so it is expected that interest in playing will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, during the reception period A, regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception display A is executed in a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode, the disappearance-related display A will appear in the same mode. This makes it possible for the performance display device 1600 to keep the expectation secret even in a situation where the reception sound A has started to be executed.

As shown in Figs. 185(b)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when timing tM2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display A (the mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the "post-acceptance display A" is started to be executed in response to the acceptance of the player's action (operation) during the acceptance period A. As described above, the post-acceptance display A may be a first mode with a relatively low expectation (e.g., "It's your chance") or a second mode with a relatively high expectation (e.g., "It's super hot").

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display A" are both displayed, "post-reception display A" begins to be executed. Also, since "post-reception display A" begins while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "post-reception display A" while suggesting that the reception period A has already ended (from timing tM2c onwards).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display of "Post-reception display A" starts in this way, as shown in Fig. 185(b)-(d), while the "Post-reception display A" is being displayed, first, the "integrated model image display IG" of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display A" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display A" is hidden, and the "Post-reception display A" is displayed with good visibility (illustration of the progress of these effects is omitted in Fig. 191).

In this regard, the "Post-Acceptance Display A" is displayed in one of a number of different modes with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185(d), the "Post-Acceptance Display A" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "Integrated Model Image Display IG" and "Disappearance-Related Display A" have been hidden.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the acceptance period A occurs, the acceptance permission sound starts to be output at the timing tM1 shown in FIG. 185(f). In other words, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the acceptance period A is audibly output across the timing tM2 at which the acceptance period A occurs, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output.

Here, in the acceptance period A, as shown in FIG. 185(f), even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output, the acceptance allowance sound is not terminated midway, but is output for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, the above-mentioned multiple acceptance periods include an acceptance period in which, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance allowance sound is terminated midway based on the acceptance. Therefore, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output during the acceptance period A, and a state in which the audible output of the acceptance allowance sound continues appears, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the action has been accepted, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

As shown in Figures 185(d) and 191(c), the post-reception display A in this example is displayed in a position where at least a portion of it overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG is given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, but the post-reception display A is not given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the decorative pattern SZ is given priority over the post-reception display A. And, as shown in Figures 185(d) and 191(d), the post-reception display A in this example is made non-displayable when a predetermined time has elapsed since its display began.

On the other hand, Figures 185(h)-(n) and "an example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 191(b) to Figure 191(d) without passing through Figure 191(c)" are intended to cover the case where no action by the player is accepted within acceptance period A.

In other words, in this case, after the acceptance period A occurs, the timing tM3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (and the automatic button function not being enabled). In this regard, the performance display device 1600 at the timing tM3 (the point at which the acceptance period A ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, as does the performance display device 1600 at the timing tM2a (the point at which actions by the player are accepted within the acceptance period A), and does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see (in the example of FIG. 167, the aspect shown in FIG. 175 (e3)).

With this configuration, even if the player's action is not received in time and acceptance period A ends, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during acceptance period A after the end of the acceptance period, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Also, in the case where no action by the player is accepted during the acceptance period A, as shown in FIG. 185(j), the display of the disappearance-related effect (disappearance-related display A corresponding to the acceptance period A) will not start as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see". At this time, if the method is to fade out the integrated model image display IG itself, this may be done. However, it is preferable not to display an image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is made invisible.

Figure 186 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when condition B is satisfied as a result of the judgment and reception period B (second reception presentation B) occurs. Figure 192 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period B (reception presentation B) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no probability change or time reduction), and "variation pattern B" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern B. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to variation pattern B, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 192(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "variation pattern B" itself. In the performance example shown in FIG. 192(a), a landscape depicting a river is displayed as the background image HG2.

However, in the performance related to "variation pattern B", regardless of the result of the performance judgment (preview judgment), when the timing tN2 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) arrives after a predetermined time B has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ as shown in FIG. 186(a), the above-mentioned acceptance period B (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the post-acceptance display B" is permitted is generated (the situation shown in FIG. 192(b)). This acceptance period B occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or is made inaudible. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period B, the post-acceptance display is performed based on the acceptance. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 192(b), the above-mentioned acceptance period B occurs when the decorative pattern SZ forms a reach state.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, even when such a reception period B occurs, similarly to the case where the above-mentioned reception period A occurs (FIG. 185), in relation to this, the following are performed: a Momo image display suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a gauge image display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display that makes the Momo image display difficult to see (a state in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see), and a post-reception display suggesting the expectation degree (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to acceptance. The expectation degree (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the Momo image display is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. In addition, when the Momo image display is displayed instead of the "integrated Momo image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other application periods.

More specifically, in the performance display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 186(b), when timing tN1 arrives before the occurrence of the reception period B, the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle timing tN2 when the reception period B occurs. The "integrated Moji image display IG" is also hidden when an acceptance is made within the corresponding reception period (here, reception period B) or when the reception period B ends without the acceptance being made, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 185 (reception period A). Note that the reception period B according to this example ends when timing tN3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 186(h)).

Here, in the above-mentioned "reception period A (see FIG. 191(b))," when the Mo-image display (integrated Mo-image display IG) is displayed, no corresponding text information is displayed, but in the "reception period B (see FIG. 192(b))," when the Mo-image display (integrated Mo-image display IG) is displayed, text information (here, "push") related to the fact that the reception is permitted is displayed. That is, in both the "reception period A" and the "reception period B," the same form (the form shown in FIG. 144(a) among the multiple forms shown in FIG. 144(a) to (d)) is used as the Mo-image display (integrated Mo-image display IG), but when the "reception period B" occurs, text information (here, "push") that does not appear when the "reception period A" occurs is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation that may be suggested as the display after reception is different. Note that in this example, the expectation (proportion) of the appearance of the jackpot pattern when the pattern stops is higher when the reception period B occurs than when the reception period A occurs. Alternatively, the post-acceptance display B corresponding to the acceptance period B may be configured to show a pattern suggesting that the probability of the jackpot pattern appearing is 100%, whereas the post-acceptance display A corresponding to the acceptance period A may not show a pattern suggesting that the probability of the jackpot pattern appearing is 100%.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 186(a) to (g) assume that a movement (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tN2a within acceptance period B. That is, in this case, as shown in Figure 186(a), acceptance period B ends based on the acceptance of a movement (operation) by the player at timing tN2a, and post-acceptance display B (post-acceptance performance B) corresponding to said acceptance period B begins to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 192, only one mode is displayed as post-acceptance display B corresponding to acceptance period B. Although not shown in the figure, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during acceptance period B, based on the acceptance, a first mode with a relatively low expectation (for example, "Defeat 10 monsters!") may be executed as post-acceptance display B, or a second mode with a relatively high expectation (for example, "Defeat 100 monsters!") may be executed as post-acceptance display B.

And, although details will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period B shown in FIG. 186 advances the presentation in the same manner as the "second reception period" shown in FIG. 168 etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 186(b), at timing tN2a when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of the acceptance sound B in response to the acceptance starts), not only is the integrated model image display IG not made invisible, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see either.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIGS. 144(a)-(d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible mode" after reception has been made longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same mode as it was during the reception period (in the example shown in FIG. 168, the mode shown in FIG. 177(e1) and (e2)), even though reception has been made and the audible output of reception sound B has already started, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance (here, reception sound B) that is in the execution state."

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186(b), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing tN2a when the acceptance period B has ended due to the acceptance of the player's action (operation) (when timing tN2b arrives), the display of "disappearance-related display B" different from the disappearance-related display A is started as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see". Here, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related effect)" refers to an image (another image different from the integrated model image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is made invisible. When the display of the "disappearance-related effect" starts, the integrated model image display IG is not made invisible but is visible, and the integrated model image display IG is gradually made invisible as the "disappearance-related effect" is displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the reception sound B has already been executed. As a result, even in a situation where the reception sound B has already been executed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period B. In addition, even after the process for audibly outputting the reception sound B has started, the form of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility until it is made difficult to see (timing tN2a to tN2b), so it is expected that interest in playing the game will be maintained in a good condition.

Although not shown in the figures, during reception period B, different patterns (disappearance-related display B1, B2) are displayed as the disappearance-related display B depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance B is a low-expectation pattern or a high-expectation pattern. In other words, in this case, even if the "post-reception display B" using the performance display device 1600 has not yet started, by checking whether the disappearance-related display B that appears on the performance display device 1600 is the first pattern or the second pattern, it becomes possible to guess whether the "post-reception display B" will be executed in a high-expectation pattern.

As shown in Figs. 186(b)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when timing tN2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display B (the mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, a "post-acceptance display B" is started to be executed in response to the acceptance of the player's action (operation) during the acceptance period B. As described above, the post-acceptance display B may be a first mode with a relatively low expectation (e.g., "Knock out 10 monsters!") or a second mode with a relatively high expectation (e.g., "Knock out 100 monsters!").

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display B (disappearance-related display B1 or disappearance-related display B2)" are displayed, "post-reception display B (first or second mode)" begins to be executed. In addition, since the post-reception display B begins while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "post-reception display B" while suggesting that the reception period B has already ended (after timing tN2c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display of "Post-Acceptance Display B" is started in this way, as shown in Fig. 186 (b) to (d), while the "Post-Acceptance Display B" is being displayed, first, the "Integrated Model Image Display IG" of the "Integrated Model Image Display IG" and the "Disappearance-related Display B" is hidden. After the "Integrated Model Image Display IG" is hidden in this way, the "Disappearance-related Display B" is hidden, and the "Post-Acceptance Display B" is displayed with good visibility (the illustration of the progress of these effects is omitted in Fig. 192).

In this regard, the "Post-Acceptance Display B" is displayed in one of a number of different modes with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186(d), the "Post-Acceptance Display B" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "Integrated Model Image Display IG" and "Disappearance-Related Display B" have been hidden.

Incidentally, in the example presentation (Fig. 191) corresponding to the reception period A described above, even if reception is made during reception period A and "post-reception display A" is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the start of "post-reception display A" and is maintained this way. In contrast, in the example presentation (Fig. 192) corresponding to reception period B, if reception is made during reception period B and "post-reception display B" is executed, the background image may be switched before and after the start of "post-reception display B".

With this configuration, during the period when no change in the background image occurs (timings tN2a to tN2b shown in FIG. 186), even if there is some kind of display change on the performance display device 1600, it is possible to indicate that "Post-reception display B" has not yet started.

In this case, the post-reception display B may be configured to switch to the same background image when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, or to switch to different background images when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, the background image may be switched when a high expectation mode appears, but may not be switched when a low expectation mode appears.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the acceptance period B occurs, the acceptance permission sound starts to be output at the timing tN1 shown in FIG. 186(f). In other words, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the acceptance period B is audibly output across the timing tN2 at which the acceptance period B occurs, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output.

Here, during reception period B, a long-term permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-term permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time are output as the reception permissible sound. In the example shown in FIG. 186(f), the long-term permissible sound and the short-term permissible sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the long-term permissible sound and the short-term permissible sound may be started to be output at timing tN2 when reception period B occurs or after that.

In addition, during reception period B, if an action by the player is received while the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are being audibly output, the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are terminated (the audible output state is terminated) based on the reception.

Also, in acceptance period B, as shown in FIG. 186(f), if an action by the player is accepted while an acceptance permissible sound (long-term permissible sound, short-term permissible sound) is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permissible sound terminated midway, but the audible output of acceptance sound B is started based on the acceptance. In other words, in this case, unlike the case of a display change, in acceptance period B, there will be no period of conflict (overlap) between the effect performed within the acceptance period (acceptance permissible sound) and the effect performed in response to the acceptance (second acceptance sound).

As shown in FIG. 186(g), this second reception sound, like the "post-reception display B," will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display B" are hidden. Also, for the second reception sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) when a high expectation mode appears as the post-reception display B and when a low expectation mode appears. In contrast, for the first reception sound, it is desirable to output the same output sound (mode) when a high expectation mode appears as the post-reception display A and when a low expectation mode appears.

Note that during reception period B, a long-term acceptable sound and a short-term acceptable sound are output as the acceptable sound, but it is not necessary to output these two acceptable sounds, and it is also possible to output only one acceptable sound, as in reception period A.

As shown in Figures 186(d) and 192(d), the post-reception display B in this example is displayed in a position where at least a portion of it overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. In this example, the integrated model image display IG is given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-reception display B is also given priority over the decorative pattern SZ. As shown in Figures 186(d) and 192(d), the post-reception display B in this example is made non-displayable when a predetermined time has elapsed since its display began, thereby improving the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ.

On the other hand, Figures 186 (h) to (n) assume that no action by the player is accepted within acceptance period B.

In other words, in this case, after the occurrence of acceptance period B, the timing tN3 described above will arrive without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, acceptance period B differs from acceptance period A in that it is set as "an acceptance period for which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled." Therefore, even if the above-mentioned timing tN3 arrives during acceptance period B without any action (operation) by the player being accepted, the same post-acceptance display B will be generated thereafter as when an action (operation) by the player has occurred during acceptance period B.

However, during the acceptance period B in this embodiment, even though the automatic button function described above is enabled, the performance display device 1600 at timing tN3, like the performance display device 1600 at timing tN2a (the point at which the player's action is accepted during acceptance period B), not only does it not hide the integrated model image display IG, but it also does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 186(i).

With this configuration, even if the player's action (operation) is not received in time and acceptance period B ends, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during acceptance period B after the end of acceptance period B, which makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 186(i), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the acceptance period B at time tN3a, the display of the disappearance-related display B will begin as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed within the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)," and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception period B ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the reception period B has ended. Also, even in a situation where the reception period B has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period B.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the appearance of the disappearance-related display B that appears when the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the acceptance period B is the same as that which would appear if the player's action (operation) had been accepted within the acceptance period B.

In this case, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during acceptance period B, after the acceptance period B ends, simply by checking the appearance of the "disappearance-related display B" that appears in conjunction with the integrated model image display IG being hidden, the player will be able to recognize whether post-acceptance display B was executed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode, and therefore it is possible to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, when timing tN3b arrives, "Post-Acceptance Display B" begins to be executed in the manner that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted during acceptance period B (after the situation shown in FIG. 192(b) appears, the situation shown in FIG. 192(c) appears regardless of whether an operation has been performed or not).

After this, as shown in FIG. 186(i)-(k), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display B" is hidden.

The timing at which the "disappearance-related display B" appears and the timing at which the "post-acceptance display B" starts to be executed do not have to be later than the timing tN3 at which the acceptance period B ends, but may be the timing tN3 at which the acceptance period B ends, or may be earlier than that.

Figure 187 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when condition C is satisfied as a result of the judgment and reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. Figure 193 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no probability change or time reduction), and "variation pattern C" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern C. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to variation pattern C, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "third variation pattern" itself. In the performance example shown in FIG. 193(a), a desert landscape is displayed as the background image HG3.

However, in the performance related to "variation pattern C", regardless of the result of the performance judgment (notice judgment), when a timing tO2 (which may be a timing before the occurrence of the SP reach state or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a predetermined time C has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, the above-mentioned acceptance period C (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the post-acceptance display C" is permitted is generated. This acceptance period C occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or is made inaudible. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period C, the post-acceptance display C is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the above-mentioned acceptance period C (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice performance judgment.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, when such a reception period C occurs, a post-reception display C is performed indicating the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) in response to the reception. However, unlike the cases where the above-mentioned reception periods A and B occur (FIGS. 185 and 186), in relation to this, no model image display indicating the reception target (such as the operation receiving portion), no gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, and no disappearance-related display (a state in which the model image display becomes difficult to see) that makes it difficult to see the model image display are performed. The expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

More specifically, in the performance display device 1600 of this example, as shown in FIG. 187(b), when the acceptance period C occurs, no model image is displayed, no gauge image is displayed, and no text information encouraging an operation is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize not only when the acceptance period C begins and when it ends, but also whether the acceptance period C even exists. Note that the acceptance period C in this example ends at timing tO3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 187(h)).

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 187(a) to (g) assume that a movement (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tO2a within acceptance period C. That is, in this case, as shown in Figure 187(a), based on the acceptance of a movement (operation) by the player at timing tO2a, acceptance period C ends and post-acceptance display C (post-acceptance performance C) corresponding to said acceptance period C begins to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 193, only one mode is displayed as the post-acceptance display C corresponding to the acceptance period C. Although not shown in the figure, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period C, based on the acceptance, a first mode with a relatively low expectation (for example, a mode with a small number of ghosts appearing in the ghost group) may be executed as the post-acceptance display C, or a second mode with a relatively high expectation (for example, a mode with a large number of ghosts appearing in the ghost group) may be executed as the post-acceptance display C.

As described above, in this acceptance period C, as shown in FIG. 187(c), no disappearance-related display is performed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted. Furthermore, when acceptance period C occurs, as shown in FIG. 187(f), no acceptance permission sound is output.

As shown in Figures 187(d) and 193(c), the post-reception display C in this example is displayed in a position where at least a portion of it overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the post-reception display C is not given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, but the decorative pattern SZ is given priority over the post-reception display C. And, as shown in Figures 187(d) and 193(d), the post-reception display C in this example is made non-displayable when a predetermined time has elapsed since its display began.

On the other hand, Figures 187(h)-(n) and "an example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 193(b) to Figure 193(d) without passing through Figure 193(c)" are intended to cover the case where no action by the player is accepted within acceptance period C.

In this case, after the acceptance period C occurs, the timing tO3 arrives without any actions (operations) by the player being accepted (and the automatic button function is not enabled). However, since no display changes occur as the acceptance period C ends, even when the timing tO3 arrives (the point at which the acceptance period C ends and actions by the player are no longer accepted), the background image HG3 is simply flowing on the performance display device 1600, making it difficult for the player to recognize this.

Figures 188 and 189 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition D is satisfied as a result of the judgment and reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. Figure 194 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is established (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win state or a time-saving state), and "variation pattern D1 (Fig. 188)" or "variation pattern D2 (Fig. 189)" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (performance depiction corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in Fig. 194 (a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) corresponding to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern D1" or "variation pattern D2" itself. In the performance example shown in Fig. 194 (a), a landscape depicting mountains and rivers is displayed as the background image HG4a.

In other words, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a notice judgment) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the above-mentioned acceptance period D (valid period) during which "acceptance of post-acceptance display D" is permitted when timing tP2 arrives (when condition D is met) at which a predetermined time D has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in Figures 188(a) and 189(a) ("the situation shown in Figure 194(b)"). As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period D, the post-acceptance display D is performed based on the acceptance (the situation shown in Figure 194(c)).

However, more precisely, when a variation pattern D1 that generates a reach effect is selected, this acceptance period D occurs when the timing tP2-D1 arrives (when condition D1 is met) at which a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 188(a) (a timing that arrives after the timing at which the reach state is formed) arrives (when condition D1 is met), but when a variation pattern D2 that does not generate a reach effect is selected, this acceptance period D occurs when the timing tP2-D2 arrives (when condition D2 is met) at which a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 189(a).

Furthermore, when the reception period D is generated at the timing tP2-D1 when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D1 that generates the reach performance, as shown in FIG. 188(e), a state is generated in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is made inaudible before the timing tP2-D1 arrives. In other words, in this case, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state.

In contrast, if the reception period D is generated when timing tP2-D2 arrives after a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance, the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode when timing tP2-D2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 189(e). In other words, in this case, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode.

In this way, the form of the presentation differs depending on whether the acceptance period D occurs when timing tP2-D1 arrives, which is when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variation presentation of variation pattern D1 that generates a reach presentation, or when timing tP2-D2 arrives, which is when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variation presentation of variation pattern D2 that does not generate a reach presentation.

First, we will describe in detail, with reference to Figures 188 and 194, an example of a performance when the acceptance period D occurs at timing tP2 (tP2-D1) when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the performance of the variation pattern D1 that generates the reach performance.

188(a) and (b), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), in relation to the occurrence of such a reception period D, a Momo image display indicating the reception target (such as the operation receiving portion), a gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, and a post-reception display indicating the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear) depending on the reception are each performed. As described above, the Momo image display in this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. Also, when the Momo image display is displayed instead of the "integrated Momo image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, as shown in FIG. 188(b), when timing tP1 arrives before the occurrence of the reception period D, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed so as to span timing tP2 (tP2-D1) when the reception period D occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible (invisible) when an acceptance is made within the reception period D, or when the reception period D ends without the acceptance being made. Note that the reception period D in this example ends when timing tP3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 188(h)).

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 188(a)-(g) and examples following the presentation path of Figure 194(b) → Figure 194(e) → Figure 194(f) → Figure 194(c) assume that a movement (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tPx within the acceptance period D. In other words, in this case, based on the acceptance of a movement (operation) by the player at timing tPx, the acceptance period D ends and the post-acceptance display D (post-acceptance presentation D) corresponding to the acceptance period D is started to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 194(c), only one aspect is displayed as the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance period D. However, although not shown, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period D, a first aspect with a relatively low expectation (for example, a cut-in by a princess character) may be executed as the post-acceptance display D based on the acceptance, or a second aspect with a relatively high expectation (for example, a cut-in by a samurai character) may be executed as the post-acceptance display D.

However, during acceptance period D, as shown in FIG. 188(b), at the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted (here, timing tPx), the integrated model image display IG is not made invisible, nor is the integrated model image display IG made difficult to see.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 188(c), during reception period D, the disappearance-related effect is not displayed even after a predetermined time has passed since the timing tPx at which reception period D ended due to the acceptance of the player's action (operation). In other words, during reception period D, no corresponding disappearance-related display (an image (a different image from the integrated model image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden) is prepared, and the integrated model image display IG is suddenly hidden.

In addition, even during the reception period D, as shown in Figures 188 (b) to (d), when timing tPx1 arrives while the integrated model image display IG is being displayed, the "post-reception display D" begins to be executed in response to the player's action (operation) being accepted during the reception period D.

However, during the reception period D, when an action (operation) by the player is received, as shown in FIG. 194(c), the "post-reception display D" begins to be displayed in a manner that overlaps with the entire displayed area of the integrated model image display IG and is given priority over the integrated model image display IG. The "post-reception display D" may be displayed on the entire screen of the performance display device 1600.

With this configuration, when the "post-acceptance display D" starts to be displayed based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player, the integrated model image display IG is suddenly hidden (even if it remains displayed on the layer), providing a different presentation from other acceptance periods that use a vanishing effect, etc. Note that the post-acceptance display D in this example is also hidden when a predetermined time has passed since its display started.

In addition, unlike other reception periods, during reception period D, even if the display of the "Post-reception display D" is started based on the fact that reception has been made, the fact that reception has been made does not cause the processing of the display of the "Integrated model image display IG" to end. In other words, during reception period D, the processing of the display of the "Integrated model image display IG" is continued until a specific predetermined condition is met (here, timing tP3), and is terminated when the specific predetermined condition is met. Note that, if the player's action (operation) has not been accepted and the reception period D is continuing until the specific predetermined condition is met, in addition to terminating the processing of the display of the "Integrated model image display IG", the processing of terminating reception period D is also performed.

In other words, during reception period D, when "post-reception display D" starts to be displayed based on reception, the period D ends based on the reception, but the process for displaying the "integrated model image display IG" does not end, and the display on the layer continues. However, since the "post-reception display D" is displayed with priority over the "integrated model image display IG", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden (made invisible) by the "post-reception display D" as described above (in Figures 188 and 189, the period covered with diagonal lines corresponds to the period during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden (made invisible) by the "post-reception display D").

In this case, the "integrated model image display IG" may not be completely hidden, but may be made difficult to see through a specified transparency set in the "post-reception display D."

In addition, during the reception period D, as shown in Fig. 188(b) and Fig. 194(b), (e), and (f), while the state in which the acceptance of the player's actions (operations) is permitted continues, the "integrated model image display IG" may change from a displayed state to a hidden state (timing tP2a shown in Fig. 188 and Fig. 189), or the "integrated model image display IG" may change from a hidden state to a displayed state (timing tP2b shown in Fig. 188 and Fig. 189). Of course, even if the "integrated model image display IG" is in a hidden state, if the player performs an action (operation), the action (operation) will be accepted, and the post-acceptance display D will be performed based on the acceptance (see an example that follows a presentation path such as Fig. 194(e) → Fig. 194(c)).

In this example, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the same form (Fig. 194(c)) is made to appear as the "post-acceptance display D" regardless of whether the action was accepted before the "integrated model image display IG" was made non-displayable (Fig. 194(b) → Fig. 194(c)), or whether the action was accepted while the "integrated model image display IG" was in a non-displayable state (Fig. 194(e) → Fig. 194(c)), or whether the action was accepted after the "integrated model image display IG" was returned to a displayable state (Fig. 194(f) → Fig. 194(c)).

With this configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 194(e), even though reception period D has occurred, it is possible to provide an atmosphere as if it has suddenly switched to reception period C (see FIG. 193(b)) in which the "integrated model image display IG" is not displayed, and this surprising presentation can increase interest in the game. On the other hand, even if a player's action (operation) is accepted in a situation that seems to have been suddenly switched to reception period C (when the integrated model image display IG is not displayed), the same form (FIG. 194(c)) is displayed as the "post-reception display D" corresponding to reception period D, so it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, during reception period D, when the "integrated model image display IG" changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the background image is changed. This configuration is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere that gives the impression of a sudden switch to another reception period when the "integrated model image display IG" changes to a hidden state.

In particular, in this example, the background image HG4a, which depicts mountains and rivers, changes to background image HG4b, which depicts a desert different from background image HG3 (Fig. 194(b) -> Fig. 194(e)). With this configuration, when the integrated model image display IG changes to a non-display state, it is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period C, which can occur when the background is a desert.

In this example, when the "integrated model image display IG" is returned from a non-display state to a display state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" back to "background image HG4a" (Fig. 194(e) -> Fig. 194(f)). This is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere of being returned to the initial reception period D from another reception period (particularly reception period C).

As shown in FIG. 194(c), the post-acceptance display D in this example is displayed at a position where at least a part of it overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ (it may be displayed on the entire screen)). In this example, the integrated model image display IG is given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-acceptance display D is also given priority over the decorative pattern SZ. As shown in FIG. 188(d) and FIG. 194(d), the post-acceptance display D in this example is made invisible when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of its display, thereby improving the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ. Note that the situation shown in FIG. 194(d) shows a situation in which the presentation due to the reach state progresses and enters the SP reach presentation.

However, if the post-reception display D is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease because the player will not be able to see the effects of the decorative pattern SZ (such as a winning state) until the display time of the post-reception display D has elapsed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period when the "post-reception display D" is displayed, the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player is permitted, and when the action is accepted, the processing related to the display of the "post-reception display D" is terminated (see an example of a presentation path such as FIG. 194(c)→FIG. 194(g)). In other words, in this case, depending on the operation of the player, the timing for the end of the display of the "post-reception display D" can be made to arrive early (before the display time as the post-reception display D has elapsed) (FIG. 194(g)), and this prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the inability to see the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (such as a reach state) due to the "post-reception display D".

In this example, the operation required to start displaying the "Post-Acceptance Display D" during the acceptance period D (pressing the operation button 410) and the operation required to end the "Post-Acceptance Display D" early during the period in which the "Post-Acceptance Display D" is displayed (pressing the operation button 410) are set to be the same operation, but these operation contents may be different from each other. For example, the operation required to start displaying the "Post-Acceptance Display D" may be "pressing the operation button 410", while the operation required to end the "Post-Acceptance Display D" may be "unsheathing the sword decoration 5001", or may be a combination of "pressing the operation button 410" and "unsheathing the sword decoration 5001".

In any case, during the period when the "post-reception display D" is displayed, it is desirable to clearly indicate what operation is required to end the "post-reception display D" by displaying "text information (cancelable in the figure)" or "model image display", as shown in FIG. 194(c). In this case, it is desirable to display the "model image display" in a position where it overlaps with the "post-reception display D" as a priority over the "post-reception display D" (in the figure, the model image display is displayed in a position where it does not overlap with the "post-reception display D"). Also, the "text information" may not be prepared as a separate image from the "post-reception display D", but may be displayed as part of the display of the "post-reception display D" itself (an image on the same layer).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when acceptance period D occurs, as shown in FIG. 188(f), the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output, and in this respect, too, a performance that is common to "acceptance period C" is provided, which also makes the player aware of "acceptance period C". The acceptance permission sound is not audibly output even when the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible or returned to a displayed state.

On the other hand, the examples shown in Figures 188(h)-(n) and examples following presentation paths such as Figures 194(b), (e), (f), (g), and (d) are intended to cover the case where the player's action (operation) is not accepted within acceptance period D.

In other words, in this case, after the acceptance period D occurs, the player's action (operation) is not accepted (and the automatic button function is not enabled), and the above-mentioned "predetermined specific condition (here, the arrival of timing tP3)" is met. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 at timing tP3 (the point at which the acceptance period D ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, just like the performance display device 1600 at timing tPx (the point at which an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D), and does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the player's action (operation) is not received in time and the acceptance period D ends, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period D after the period has ended, which makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during acceptance period D, if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 188(j), the display of the disappearance-related effects will not start, as it will be "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." At this time, if the integrated model image display IG itself is faded out, this may be done. However, it is preferable not to display an image different from the integrated model image display IG for a specified period of time until the integrated model image display IG is made invisible.

Next, a detailed description will be given with reference to Fig. 189 and Fig. 194 of an example of a performance in which the reception period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) arrives after a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the performance of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance. Note that Fig. 194 assumes a case in which the reception period D occurs after the formation of a reach state, and does not correspond to the occurrence of the reception period D shown in Fig. 189. However, even in the reception period D shown in Fig. 189, the only difference between the performance contents shown in Fig. 194 is that the reception period D occurs without the formation of a reach state, and that the SP reach performance does not start after the end of the reception period D. Since the rest of the differences are basically the same, the explanation will be given with reference to Fig. 194 for the sake of convenience.

When the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) arrives after a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance, the reception period D is the same reception period as the reception period D described above, so the processing content performed when the reception is made and the processing content performed when the reception is not made are the same as the processing content described above unless otherwise stated.

However, as described above, when the reception period D is generated at the timing tP2-D1 when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the fluctuation pattern D1 that generates the reach performance, a state is generated in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible before the arrival of the timing tP2-D1, as shown in FIG. 188(e). In contrast, when the reception period D is generated at the timing tP2-D2 when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach performance, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible is not generated before the arrival of the timing tP2-D2, as shown in FIG. 189(e).

Therefore, if the reception period D is to be generated at the timing tP2-D2 when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance, the reception period D will be generated while the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed manner, as shown in FIG. 189(e).

However, if the reception period D is generated at the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance, while the reception period D is generated, the specific BGM that was audibly output in a non-suppressed mode until then is made audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible.

With this configuration, it appears as if the above-mentioned acceptance period A (see FIG. 185) has occurred while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, but then the atmosphere changes to one as if the above-mentioned acceptance period B (see FIG. 186) has occurred, during which the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state, thereby improving interest in the game.

In order to more effectively obtain such an effect, it is desirable to make it possible for a post-acceptance display to be displayed when acceptance is made during acceptance period B in a manner that suggests a high degree of expectation (e.g., a 100% probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) that would not appear when acceptance is made during acceptance period A.

As described above, in the reception period D according to this embodiment, when the timing tP2a arrives after a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the reception period D, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden. However, the timing tPy at which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or made inaudible is set to arrive before the timing tP2a at which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden.

If such a configuration is further provided, the specific BGM will be audibly output in a suppressed manner or made inaudible while the mock image display (integrated mock image display IG) is displayed, which is expected to more suitably change the atmosphere to one as if the above-mentioned reception period B (see Figure 186) is occurring.

On the other hand, while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a suppressed manner or is inaudible, a time tP2a arrives at which the mock image display (integrated mock image display IG) is made invisible, and at this time tP2a, it becomes possible to more appropriately provide an atmosphere as if the above-mentioned reception period C (see FIG. 187) had occurred.

As described above, in the reception period D in this example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the model image display (integrated model image display IG) was hidden and timing tP2b arrives, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed again (see FIG. 194(f)). However, even after the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed again in this way, the specific BGM continues to be "in an audible state in a suppressed manner or in an inaudible state."

Figures 189 (a) to (g) assume that during the reception period D described above, an action (operation) by the player is received when the specific BGM is in a state where it is "audibly output in a suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state."

As shown in Fig. 189(a)-(g), in reception period D, as in reception period B, as shown in Fig. 189(a), (b), and (e), even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted when specific BGM is in "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state", this will not trigger the specific BGM to start being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode, but will maintain the "state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state". This also makes it possible to more appropriately provide an atmosphere as if reception period B (see Fig. 186) were occurring.

Figures 189(a')-(g') assume that during the reception period D described above, before the timing tPy arrives at which the specific BGM is "audibly output in a suppressed mode or is inaudible", that is, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode.

As shown in FIG. 189(a')-(g'), when the action (operation) of the player is accepted during the above-mentioned acceptance period D while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, the acceptance is used as a trigger to make the specific BGM "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state". In other words, in this case, when an acceptance is made while the specific BGM is "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state", the acceptance is not used as a trigger to make the specific BGM "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state", but when an acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, the acceptance is used as a trigger to make the specific BGM "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state". As a result, after the acceptance period D occurs, it is possible to encourage the player to perform an operation at an early stage when the specific BGM can be affected by the action (operation) of the player, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the acceptance period D occurs.

As mentioned above, in the reception period D in this example, the process of displaying the "model image display corresponding to reception period D (integrated model image display IG shown in FIG. 194(b))" is not terminated when reception is made. In other words, the "post-reception display D" is given priority over the model image display (integrated model image display IG) that is maintained in a displayed state on the layer, thereby making the "model image display corresponding to reception period D (integrated model image display IG)" invisible (invisible).

As mentioned above, the "post-acceptance display D" in this example allows the player to make actions (operations) during its display period, and when such an action is accepted, this triggers the early termination of the processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" (see the example that follows the presentation path of FIG. 194(c) → FIG. 194(g)). In addition, when the "model image display (integrated model image display IG shown in FIG. 194(c))" and text information (which can be cancelled) corresponding to the post-acceptance display D are accepted, this triggers the early termination of the processing related to their display (see FIG. 194(g)).

In this configuration, depending on the timing of the acceptance of the player's action (operation) during the period in which the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, a situation may occur in which the processing related to the display of the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated model image display IG)" is continuing, and the processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" is terminated early. In other words, in this case, as a result of the display of the "post-acceptance display D" that was displayed with priority over the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated model image display IG shown in FIG. 194(b))", the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D" is displayed again, but at this time, the "acceptance period D" itself may also be generated again.

In this way, if the "acceptance period D" is generated again after the processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" is ended early, it is possible to display the "post-acceptance display D" again by making it possible to accept actions (operations) by the player again within the "acceptance period D" that is thus generated again, even after the processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" has been ended early. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the "post-acceptance display D" is ended early by mistake.

As described above, the reception periods A to D shown in Figures 185 to 194 occur when the variation patterns A to C, D1, and D2 are selected as the variation pattern and a predetermined time A to D has elapsed since the pattern variation started. However, the reception periods A to D do not have to occur only when different variation patterns are selected. For example, as described below, it is also possible to set the reception periods A to D to occur when one variation pattern is selected.

As mentioned above, reception period D occurs as a reception period with special characteristics compared to the other reception periods A to C. Therefore, such reception period D may be set as a reception period that can only occur when the number of reserved balls is less than a predetermined number. In other words, in this case, reception period D occurs when the number of reserved balls falls below a predetermined number as a result of the player attempting to suspend play, and a special performance is provided as if the reception period is changing to one of A to C each time, which can be expected to encourage the player not to stop playing, or to leave the player with the final impression that the game was interesting even if the game is suspended.

Figures 190(a) and (b) are tables showing example settings for the conditions under which the above reception periods A to D occur when these effects are realized.

First, FIG. 190(a) is a table that is referenced when the reserved number is any of "2" to "4" when the reserved number is consumed. In other words, in this case, even if the pattern change starts according to the reserved number being consumed, the reserved number will not become "0", but will be any of "1" to "3", and since the risk of the game being stopped is low, the above-mentioned acceptance period D will not occur regardless of whether the "first variation pattern", "second variation pattern", or "third variation pattern" is executed as the variation pattern.

More specifically, when the number of reserved items is between "2" and "4" and the reserved items are consumed and the first variation pattern is executed, there is a 70% chance that none of the reception periods A to D will occur as a result of the performance judgment (preview judgment), and there is a 30% chance that only reception period A will occur out of reception periods A to D as a result of the performance judgment (preview judgment).

In addition, when the number of reserved items is between "2" and "4" and the reserved items are consumed and the second variation pattern is executed, as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), there is a 50% chance that only reception period C out of reception periods A to D will occur, and as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), there is a 50% chance that both reception periods A and C will occur.

In addition, when the number of reserved items is between "2" and "4" and the reserved items are consumed and the third variation pattern is executed, reception periods B and C will occur 10% of the time as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), and reception periods A, B and C will occur 90% of the time as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment).

Note that acceptance period A can occur when 5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, regardless of whether "first fluctuation pattern," "second fluctuation pattern," or "third fluctuation pattern," which have different fluctuation times, are selected; acceptance period C can occur when 15 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, regardless of whether "second fluctuation pattern" or "third fluctuation pattern" is selected; and acceptance period B can occur when 35 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation when "third fluctuation pattern" is selected.

Furthermore, acceptance periods B and C are not subject to performance judgment (advance notice judgment) and always occur when the corresponding variation pattern is selected, but acceptance period A is subject to performance judgment (advance notice judgment) and can only occur when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment. However, acceptance periods B and C may be subject to performance judgment (advance notice judgment), and acceptance period A may not be subject to performance judgment (advance notice judgment).

Next, FIG. 190(b) is a table that is referenced when the reserved number is "1" when the reserved number is consumed. In other words, in this case, when the pattern change corresponding to the reserved number consumption starts, the reserved number becomes "0", and there is a risk that the game will be stopped if no new reserved number is added within the execution period of the pattern change, so the above-mentioned acceptance period D is generated regardless of the execution of all the variation patterns including the "first variation pattern", "second variation pattern", and "third variation pattern" that are selectable as the variation pattern.

More specifically, when the number of reserved items is "1" and the reserved items are consumed and the first variation pattern is executed, as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), out of reception periods A to D, only reception period D will occur 70% of the time, and as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), both reception periods A and D will occur 30% of the time.

In addition, when the number of reserved items is "1" and the reserved items are consumed and the second variation pattern is executed, reception periods C and D will occur with a 50% probability as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), and reception periods A, C, and D will occur with a 50% probability as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment).

In addition, when the number of reserved items is "1" and the reserved items are consumed and the third variation pattern is executed, reception period B, reception period C, and reception period D will occur with a probability of 10% as a result of the performance judgment (preview judgment), and reception period A, reception period B, reception period C, and reception period D will occur with a probability of 90% as a result of the performance judgment (preview judgment).

In this embodiment, the "first fluctuation pattern" is a fluctuation pattern that does not create a reach state, and the "second fluctuation pattern" and the "third fluctuation pattern" are set as fluctuation patterns that create a reach state. Therefore, when the "first fluctuation pattern" is selected, the reception period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. 189. In contrast, when the "second fluctuation pattern" or the "third fluctuation pattern" is selected, the reception period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. 188.

In addition, acceptance period A, acceptance period B, and acceptance period C can occur when a predetermined time (5 seconds, 35 seconds, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the pattern change started, regardless of the type of change pattern or the number of reserved times, whereas acceptance period D has a different time (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 50 seconds) from the start of the pattern change until it occurs, depending on whether the first change pattern, the second change pattern, or the third change pattern is selected.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to generate the reception period D for each type of fluctuation pattern at a timing that does not interfere with the performance content, so that the reception period D can be generated appropriately for all fluctuation patterns.

In the above-mentioned performance example, a plurality of reception periods including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 2-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 2-A") are prepared as reception periods. In this regard, in reception period A, only one mode (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 144(a)) can be displayed as the model image display (here, integrated model image display IG), and in reception period B, a plurality of modes (integrated model image displays IGa to IGd shown in FIG. 144(a) to (d)) are prepared as the model image display, and among those modes, "modes according to the results of performance judgment (preview judgment)" are selectively displayed. According to such a configuration, in reception period B, a performance that cannot appear when reception period A occurs is provided, so that it is possible to appropriately increase the interest in the game until the operation (motion) by the player is detected.

In addition, for the "multiple modes of model image displays" that can be displayed during reception period B, it is more desirable to vary the expectation of a jackpot pattern appearing depending on which of those model image displays is displayed, in order to increase interest in the game. Also, any one of the "multiple modes of model image displays" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during reception period A. In this case, it is desirable for the "lowest expectation mode" of the "multiple modes of model image displays" to be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during reception period A.

In the above-mentioned performance example, further, reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 2-A") is provided, and in reception period A and reception period D, only one mode of the model image display can be displayed. Then, in "reception period B" where the model image display is displayed in one of multiple modes, the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state is terminated. In contrast, of "reception period A" and "reception period B" where the model image display is displayed in only one mode, in "reception period A", the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state (reception period) is terminated, but in "reception period B", the model image display that had been displayed until that point is made invisible during the valid state (reception period) until it is terminated (while the valid state is continuing) (see FIG. 194 (e)). In other words, in this case, even during "reception period A" and "reception period D" in which only one form of the replica image display is displayed, the presentation of whether or not the replica image display is hidden during the period is provided, so that the player's interest in the game can be appropriately increased until an operation (motion) by the player is detected.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during reception period D, the same display change (post-reception display) occurs whether the reception is made during the period when the model image display is displayed or during the period when the model image display is not displayed (presentation progress shown in FIG. 194(b)→(c), FIG. 194(e)→(c)). In other words, in this case, even after the model image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself continues unchanged, so when creating presentation features (hiding the model image display) using the "reception period D", it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, the model image display is made to disappear during reception period D, and then displayed again. In other words, in this case, even if the player mistakenly believes that reception period D has ended when it has not, the model image display will be displayed again afterwards, thereby clearing up the misunderstanding.

In the above-mentioned production example, "reception period A" and "reception period D" are common in that only one form of mock image display can be displayed, but the content of the display change that appears when the entry is accepted is different for each period. This adds to the excitement of wondering what kind of display change will occur when the entry is accepted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during "reception period D", the operation means (here, operation button 410) that is the subject of the reception may be illuminated while the model image display is displayed, thereby encouraging the player to take action (operate). In this case, during the period during "reception period D" when the model image display is not displayed, the operation means (here, operation button 410) that is the subject of the reception may be illuminated in the same manner as during the period when the model image display is displayed. In this regard, by not illuminating the operation means (here, operation button 410) that is the subject of the reception during "reception period C", it becomes possible to suggest which type of reception period is occurring.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, first, a plurality of reception periods including reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 3-A") and reception period C (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 3-A") are prepared as reception periods. Then, in reception period A or reception period B, after the model image display (here, integrated model image display IG) is displayed when the reception period A or reception period B occurs, the model image display is not hidden until the reception period A or reception period B ends, and the player's actions can be accepted while the model image display is displayed (see Figures 185, 186, 191, 192, etc.), and in reception period C, the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the model image display is not displayed (see Figures 187, 193, etc.), and the above-mentioned "reception allowable sound" is audibly output when reception period A or reception period B occurs, but is not audibly output when reception period C occurs.

With this configuration, not only is there an "acceptance period A or B" in which the acceptance is made while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output and the imitation image display is displayed, but there is also an "acceptance period C" in which the acceptance is made without the acceptance permission sound being audibly output and the imitation image display being displayed. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of the possibility that a post-acceptance display may occur at various times that the player does not intend, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned presentation example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 3-A") is further provided, and in reception period C (Figs. 187, 193), the model image display is not displayed from the time the reception period C begins until it ends, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the model image display is not displayed. However, in reception period D (Figs. 188, 189, 194), the model image display is hidden for only a part of the reception period D, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted both during the period when the model image display is displayed and during the period when the model image display is hidden. In other words, in this case, reception period D has both the aspects of reception periods A and B (acceptance while the model image display is displayed) and the aspect of reception period C (acceptance while the model image display is not displayed), which can increase the interest in playing the game. In addition, since there is a possibility that the state in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted may continue even after the model image display is made non-displayed, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game that occurs when the model image display is made non-displayed without the player's actions (operations) being accepted will be suppressed.

The acceptable reception sound is audibly output when acceptance periods A and B occur, but is not audibly output when acceptance periods C and D occur. In other words, in this case, at the timing when acceptance period D occurs, acceptance period D has both the aspects of acceptance periods A and B (the model image display is displayed) and the aspect of acceptance period C (the acceptable reception sound is not output), which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during reception period D, the same display change (post-reception display) occurs whether the reception is made during the period when the model image display is displayed or during the period when the model image display is not displayed. In other words, in this case, even after the model image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself continues unchanged, so when creating presentation features (hiding the model image display) using the "reception period D," it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Also, in the above-mentioned example presentation, the background image that appears when reception period A or reception period B occurs (Fig. 191, Fig. 192) is different from the background image that appears when reception period C occurs (Fig. 193). This makes it possible to give the impression that "the background image differs depending on the type of reception period."

In this regard, in the above-mentioned presentation example, a change occurs in the background image during reception period D, and a transition occurs from a period in which the model image display is displayed to a period in which the model image display is not displayed at the same time as the change occurs, making it possible to provide a presentation that gives the impression of a transition to a different reception period within reception period D.

Furthermore, during reception period D, the background image that has changed is returned to its original state, and at the same time as the image is returned to its original state, the period in which the mock image display is not displayed is transitioned to the period in which the mock image display is displayed, making it possible to provide a performance that gives the impression that the reception period before the transition has been resumed during reception period D.

The background image changes within the reception period D when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the period D without the player's action (operation) being accepted. If the player's action (operation) is accepted before the predetermined time has passed, the background image will not change even if the predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the period D. This makes it possible to avoid the background image changing to a different image while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception period D is being executed, and makes it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

In the above-mentioned example, in reception periods A, B, and D, if a reception is made while the model image display is displayed, the model image display is hidden. In this case, in reception periods A and B, the "disappearing EF" is displayed as an image different from the model image display in accordance with the non-display of the model image display, but in reception period D, the "disappearing EF" is not displayed as an image different from the model image display in accordance with the non-display of the model image display. In other words, in this case, if the "disappearing EF" does not appear when a reception is made, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "reception period D" has occurred. Therefore, while allowing reception period D to have the aspects of reception periods A and B, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a complete inability to understand which reception period is occurring.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 5-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 5-A"). Then, reception period A or reception period B can occur when the third fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 190 (corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern of "Configuration 5-A") starts to be executed, regardless of the number of judgment information stored by the pending storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a pending state (the number of pendings)), and a predetermined time has elapsed since the third fluctuation pattern started to be executed (in FIG. 190, in the case of reception period A, this is the time when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of reception period B, this is the time when 35 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation). And reception period D can occur when the number of judgment information stored by the pending storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a pending state (the number of pendings)) starts to be executed, regardless of the number of judgment information stored by the pending storage means. ) is less than "2" (i.e. "1"), and when this is consumed and the number of reserved items is "0", and the second fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 190 (corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern of "Configuration 5-A") is started, this can occur when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern started to be executed (in FIG. 190(b), this is the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation). However, when the number of judgment information stored by the reserved storage means is "2" or more, and the second fluctuation pattern is started to be executed, this will not occur even if the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern started to be executed arrives (see FIG. 190(a)).

With this configuration, when a player tries to stop playing and the reserved number is exhausted as a result, a type of acceptance period (acceptance period D) that had not occurred until then will occur, which can be expected to encourage the player not to stop playing, or to give the player the final impression that the game was interesting, even if the game is stopped.

In the above-mentioned performance example, even if the "number of judgment information stored by the hold storage means (hold number)" is less than "2" (i.e. "1") and this is consumed and the hold number is set to "0" when the second fluctuation pattern is started to be executed, if the "number of judgment information stored by the hold storage means (hold number)" increases (when the hold number goes from "0" to "1" or more) before the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern was started to be executed (in FIG. 190(b) the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation) has arrived, the acceptance period D may not be generated when the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern was started to be executed arrives.

In other words, even if the reserved number is "1" and is consumed to "0" when the pattern change (second change pattern) is started, if the reserved number is increased during the execution period of the pattern change, this suggests that the game is not being stopped. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the reserved number is "0" when the pattern change (second change pattern) is started, if the reserved number is increased during the execution period of the pattern change, the acceptance period D is not generated even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the second change pattern was started (in FIG. 190(b), 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change), so that the acceptance period D can function more appropriately as a "type of acceptance period that can only appear when the game is being stopped".

To more effectively obtain such an effect, even if a reception period D occurs, if the "number of determination information stored by the reservation storage means (reservation number)" increases while the reception period D is occurring, it is more desirable to end the reception period D (end the state in which reception is permitted) at that point in time.

Furthermore, even if an acceptance is made within the acceptance period D and a post-acceptance display is being executed in response to the acceptance, if the "number of judgment information stored by the pending storage means (pending number)" increases before the display time has elapsed, the post-acceptance display may be terminated (not displayed) at that point.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the acceptance period D also occurs when the first fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 190 starts to be executed, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the first fluctuation pattern started to be executed (in FIG. 190(b), this is the time when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation) (provided that the number of reserved tickets is 0).
In the case where the reception period D occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern forming the reach state) shown in FIG. 190 started to be executed (in FIG. 190(b), the timing is 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the specific BGM is made inaudible before the reception period D occurs, and the reception period D occurs while the inaudible state is maintained (see FIG. 188).
When the reception period D occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern that does not form a reach state) shown in FIG. 190 started to be executed (in FIG. 190(b), the timing is 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the specific BGM is not made inaudible, but the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is being audibly output, and the specific BGM is made inaudible during the generated reception period D (see FIG. 189).
The system is to have the following configuration.

According to this configuration, when a reception period D occurs, it appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 185) has occurred while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or as if the reception period B (see FIG. 186) has occurred while the specific BGM is in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state, which can increase interest in the game. Also, the reception period D, which appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 185) has occurred, appears to have changed to reception period B within the reception period D, which can increase interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned performance example, after the first variation pattern shown in FIG. 190 is started, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and if a reception is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output, the reception is used as a trigger to end the audible output of the specific BGM (see FIG. 189). However, the reception may not be used as a trigger to end the audible output of the specific BGM, and the specific BGM may continue to be audibly output thereafter. For example, even in the example of FIG. 189(e'), the specific BGM may not be put into a suppressed or inaudible state at the reception timing tPx, but may be put into a suppressed or inaudible state based on the arrival of timing tPy (predetermined timing) shown in FIG. 189(e). In other words, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM may be put into a suppressed or inaudible state in the middle of the display period of the post-reception display D, which makes it possible to provide an interesting performance.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 6-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 6-A"). The reception period A can be generated while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed state, regardless of the performance situation (the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the performance determination, etc.), and the reception period B can be generated after the specific BGM is in a suppressed state or in an inaudible state, regardless of the performance situation (the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the performance determination, etc.). Therefore, by using the specific BGM, it becomes possible to provide a performance related to the type of reception period before the reception period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, the reception period further includes reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 6-A"), and reception period D may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM has been suppressed or made inaudible, depending on the situation of the presentation (the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the presentation determination, etc.).

More specifically, when the reception period D occurs when a predetermined time (10 seconds in FIG. 190(b)) has elapsed since the start of the pattern change of the first change pattern (see FIG. 190(b) etc.) that does not form a reach state, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed state (see FIG. 189). On the other hand, when the reception period D occurs when a predetermined time (30 seconds in the case of the second change pattern and 50 seconds in the case of the third change pattern in FIG. 190(b)) has elapsed since the start of the pattern change of the second or third change pattern (see FIG. 190(b) etc.) that forms a reach state, the reception period D is generated after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible (see FIG. 188).

With this configuration, whether the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible, there is a possibility that the reception period is "reception period D," which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game until the player's action (operation) is accepted.

Note that even during acceptance period A, if an abnormal condition occurs and a warning sound is being output, the specific BGM may be suppressed or made inaudible before the acceptance period begins. However, the above-mentioned meaning of "acceptance period A can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode, regardless of the presentation status (the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the presentation determination, etc.)" means that "if acceptance period A occurs when no abnormality has been notified and the presentation is proceeding properly, acceptance period A will always occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode."

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 7-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 7-A"). In reception period A, if reception is made within the period, post-reception display A corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is displayed with priority over the post-reception display A at least while the post-reception display A is displayed (see FIG. 191(c)). In contrast, in reception period D, if reception is made within the period, post-reception display D corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see by the post-reception display D, or is hidden, at least while the post-reception display D is displayed (see FIG. 194(c)).

Note that "an aspect in which it is difficult to see" here means "an aspect in which at least a part of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) can be seen through the post-reception display D that is set to a predetermined transmittance, to an extent corresponding to that transmittance, or an aspect in which at least a part of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is made invisible by the post-reception display D that overlaps it, or an aspect in which at least a part of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is not displayed."

With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the type of reception period by checking whether the visibility of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) has been affected by the post-reception display triggered by the player's action (operation). Note that "performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ)" refers to, for example, a pattern that forms a reach state as a performance on the performance display device 1600, and also refers to a pattern that is used for the performance of whether or not a reach state is formed, pseudo consecutive performance, full rotation performance, etc.

However, it has been confirmed that some players feel aversion to the worsening visibility of the effect symbols (decorative symbols SZ) that accompanies the display of the post-acceptance display D. In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the post-acceptance display D is displayed in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D, a different acceptance period from the acceptance period D is generated (for example, generated in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D), and when an operation by the player is accepted within the different acceptance period, the acceptance is used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display D (terminating the process related to the display of the post-acceptance display D), thereby making the effect symbols (decorative symbols SZ) easier to see (see the performance progress shown in Figure 194 (c) → Figure 194 (g)).

According to this configuration, if the post-acceptance display D in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D is "displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since its display began," the player can hide the post-acceptance display D at that point by simply performing a predetermined operation before the predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the operation (operation) required of the player to display the post-acceptance display D within the acceptance period D and the operation (operation) required of the player to hide the post-acceptance display D in an acceptance period other than the acceptance period D (an acceptance period that occurs in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D) may be the same operation (operation) or different operations (operations). Note that the above-mentioned "acceptance period other than the acceptance period D" ends when the post-acceptance display D is hidden.

In contrast, the post-acceptance display A is also hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since it began to be displayed (this may be the same as the predetermined time until the post-acceptance display D is hidden, or it may be a different time). However, for the post-acceptance display A, which does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ), it is preferable that it is not hidden as a result of any operation performed by the player before the predetermined time has elapsed, in order to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game when a player makes an incorrect operation contrary to his or her intention.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the reception period further includes a reception period B, during which, if reception is made within the period, a post-reception display B corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see due to the post-reception display B, or is hidden, at least while the post-reception display B is displayed (see FIG. 192 (c)).

However, in the above-mentioned presentation example, although "post-reception display B" and "post-reception display D" have in common the fact that they affect the visibility of the presentation pattern (decorative pattern SZ), if post-reception display B is "displayed when a predetermined time (which may be different from the time until post-reception display D is hidden) has elapsed since it began to be displayed," then post-reception display B will not be hidden as a result of any operation performed by the player before the predetermined time has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a presentation that can improve the visibility of the presentation pattern (decorative pattern SZ) when it is affected by the post-reception display.

It is preferable that reception period B is set as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, and reception period D is set as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled.

In the above-mentioned example, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 8-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 8-A"). The reception period D can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and when an acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, this triggers the specific BGM to be made inaudible (see FIG. 189). The reception period B is permitted after the specific BGM that was audibly output in a non-suppressed mode becomes audibly output in a suppressed mode or is not audibly output, and even if the acceptance is made, the specific BGM is maintained in a state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or is not audibly output (see FIG. 186).

This configuration adds interest in the timing at which the specific BGM is "audibly output in a suppressed manner or not audibly output" in relation to the occurrence of the reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, in reception period D, when acceptance is made, all sounds that have been audibly output up until that point, including presentation sounds different from the specific BGM, are made inaudible, and in reception period B, when acceptance is made, all sounds that have been audibly output at that point (such as reception-permitted sounds) are made inaudible. In other words, in this case, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, the specific BGM is made "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a state where it is not audibly output," and when acceptance is made, all sounds that have been audibly output at that point are made inaudible, making it possible to provide a common presentation between reception period D and reception period B, thereby improving interest in the game.

As described above, during the acceptance period D, while the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is permitted, a situation may occur in which the specific BGM is made inaudible (partway through the valid period) and no sound is output (see FIG. 188(e)), but the acceptance period is made to continue even in such a situation (see FIG. 194(e)). That is, in this case, during the acceptance period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible when an action is accepted, but if no action is accepted for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the acceptance period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible while no action has yet been accepted, which makes the player think that the acceptance period D has ended, strongly catching the player's interest.

In particular, in the example presentation described above, the background image is changed in accordance with the timing at which the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception has not yet been made, providing a performance that gives the impression that a reception period different from reception period D is occurring.

In relation to the occurrence of the reception period D, when the specific BGM is made inaudible upon reception (see FIG. 189), a "display change in response to reception (post-reception display D)" is generated accordingly. However, when the specific BGM is made inaudible before reception has been made (see FIG. 189), a "display change in response to reception (post-reception display D)" is not generated accordingly. In other words, in this case, by confirming that the "display change in response to reception (post-reception display D)" has not yet occurred when the specific BGM is made inaudible, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the reception period D has not yet ended. Then, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted before the end of the reception period D, a "display change in response to reception (post-reception display D)" will occur as a result of this, which will increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during acceptance period B, a predetermined presentation sound (e.g., acceptance permission sound) is audibly output until the arrival of timing tM3 at which the period ends, and when the predetermined presentation sound is made inaudible, the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is not permitted, making it easy to recognize whether or not acceptance period B is continuing. Note that, in the above-mentioned presentation example, acceptance period B is set as the acceptance period during which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, and the automatic button function is enabled based on the arrival of timing tM3.

In the above-mentioned example of the presentation, the reception period B occurs when a predetermined time (35 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the third variation pattern shown in FIG. 190, for example, and the specific BGM is made inaudible before the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the third variation pattern, but it is desirable that the reception period D does not occur between the start of the third variation pattern and the time when the specific BGM is made inaudible. With this configuration, in the third variation pattern, the reception period B occurs first after the specific BGM is made inaudible, and it can be expected that the reception period D will occur further thereafter with the specific BGM in an inaudible state, which can increase the interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, the acceptance period D can occur only when the number of reserved balls is less than a predetermined number, and can occur when a set time has elapsed since the start of the pattern change in any of the first, second, and third change patterns shown in FIG. 190. However, in any change pattern, it is desirable to set it so that it occurs after other acceptance periods (acceptance periods A to C, etc.). In other words, in this case, the acceptance period D, which has a special performance effect, can function as the last acceptance period to occur for a player who is about to stop playing, so that it can be expected to encourage the player not to stop playing, or, even if the game is stopped, it can be expected to leave the player with the impression that the game was interesting.

During reception period D, when a reception is made, post-reception display D appears for a specific time, but when the specific time has elapsed and post-reception display D is no longer displayed, it is desirable that the specific BGM not be restarted. In this case, it is more desirable that the specific BGM not be restarted unless the next pattern change is started.

Next, we will explain in order the examples of modifications to the above-mentioned performance examples that embody the above configurations 1, 14, and 15.

In other words, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, the same post-acceptance display D is generated when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is displayed and when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is hidden. However, instead of this, different post-acceptance displays may be generated when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is displayed and when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is hidden.

In other words, in this case, more strictly speaking, the reception period D is composed of two types of reception periods: a "reception period D1", which is the period during which the model image display is displayed, and a "reception period D2", which is the period during which the model image display is not displayed; if reception is made during reception period D1, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed, and if reception is made during reception period D2, the corresponding post-reception display D2 is displayed.

Figure 195 shows an example in which the above-mentioned modification has been applied to the reception period D shown in Figure 194, etc.

The following describes the example of the performance shown in FIG. 195, but does not refer to the same configuration as the examples shown in FIG. 188 to FIG. 190 and FIG. 194. In other words, the reception period D (reception periods D1, D2) shown in FIG. 195 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIG. 188 to FIG. 190 and FIG. 194, and can be similarly applied to other examples.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 195, a reception period D1 occurs first (see FIG. 195(b)), and when reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display D1 corresponding to the reception period D1 is displayed (see FIG. 195(c)).

In contrast, after the reception period D1 has occurred (see FIG. 195(b)), if a predetermined time has passed without any reception (when timing tP2a shown in FIG. 188 and FIG. 189 arrives), the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden (see FIG. 195(e)). Even under such circumstances (when the model image display is hidden), the player's actions (operations) are permitted to be accepted, just like in the presentation examples shown in FIG. 194 and elsewhere. However, in this modified example, when the model image display is hidden (see FIG. 195(e)), the "reception period D1" ends and a different "reception period D2" is initiated.

In other words, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during "acceptance period D2" in which the model image display is hidden, a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to that "acceptance period D2" is displayed (see FIG. 195 (h)). With this configuration, it is possible to actually provide a performance in which the "acceptance period D1" is suddenly replaced by a "acceptance period D2" different from that acceptance period D1, and this surprising performance can increase interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, in the reception periods D1 and D2, when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the background image is changed. With this configuration, it is expected that when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) changes to a hidden state, it will be possible to more appropriately create an atmosphere that gives the impression of a sudden switch to another reception period.

In particular, in this example, as in the example shown in Fig. 194, the "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers is changed to "background image HG4b" depicting a desert different from "background image HG3" (Fig. 195(b) -> Fig. 195(e)). With this configuration, when the mock-up image display (integrated mock-up image display IG) changes to a non-display state, it is expected to more suitably create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period C, which can occur when the background is a desert.

In addition, the "post-reception display D2" in this example has different content from the "swarm announcement" of the "post-reception display C" shown in FIG. 193(c), but it has in common the use of ghost characters, making it somewhat reminiscent of "post-reception display C." This is also expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period C, which may occur against the background of the desert.

In addition, in this example, when an acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1, and the post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. This makes it possible to indicate that the post-acceptance display is related to the acceptance period D1 (more precisely, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the acceptance period D1 occurred (when the timing tP2a shown in Figures 188 and 189 arrives)), rather than a post-acceptance display that has no relation to the acceptance period D1 (for example, a post-acceptance display corresponding to acceptance period C).

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of acceptance period D2 without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (when timing tP2b shown in Figures 188 and 189 arrives), acceptance period D1 occurs again as shown in Figure 195(f), and the state is returned to one in which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" back to "background image HG4a" (Figure 195(e) -> Figure 195(f)). This is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere that is reverted from another acceptance period to the initial acceptance period D1.

When acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 that has occurred again in this way (Figure 195 (f)), the post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to that acceptance period D1 will be displayed (see Figure 195 (c)), just as in the case where acceptance was made within the first acceptance period D1 (Figure 195 (b)).

It goes without saying that such reception period D (reception periods D1 and D2) also applies to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 190.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. 195, during reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 15-A"), there is a period during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed and a period during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is not displayed. These periods are made to function as "reception period D1" and "reception period D2", and different display changes are made depending on whether the reception was made during "reception period D1" or "reception period D2". In other words, in this case, a display change (display change when reception is made within reception period D2) that cannot be confirmed unless the state is such that the reception period D may have ended (a state in which the model image display is not displayed) is prepared, and the sense of tension is appropriately maintained through such dramatic effects.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, reception period D includes a "period in which the model image display is displayed" and a "period in which the model image display is not displayed." However, instead of this, reception period D may include a "period in which text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is displayed" and a "period in which text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is not displayed."

Figure 196 shows an example in which the above-mentioned modifications have been made to reception period D shown in Figure 194 etc.

The following describes the example of the performance shown in FIG. 196, but does not refer to the same configuration as the examples of the performance shown in FIG. 188 to FIG. 190 and FIG. 194. In other words, the reception period D shown in FIG. 196 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIG. 188 to FIG. 190 and FIG. 194, and can be similarly applied to other examples.

However, in reception period D shown in Figure 196 (see Figure 196 (b)), first, as in reception period B (see Figure 192 (b)), text information related to the fact that reception is permitted (here, "Please press") is displayed, although the content is different.

That is, as described above, text information related to acceptance of a bet cannot be displayed during acceptance period A (see FIG. 191(b)), when expectations are relatively low, but is displayed during acceptance period B (see FIG. 192(b)), when expectations are relatively high. Therefore, by displaying such text information (here, "Please press") during acceptance period D, it is expected that interest in the game will be increased.

However, in the acceptance period D according to this modified example, as shown in Figs. 196(b), (e) and (f), while the state in which acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted continues, the text information (here, "Please press") related to the acceptance may change from a displayed state to a hidden state (timing tP2a shown in Figs. 188 and 189), or the text information may change from a hidden state to a displayed state (timing tP2b shown in Figs. 188 and 189). Of course, even if the text information (here, "Please press") is in a hidden state, if the player performs an action (operation), the action (operation) is accepted, and the post-acceptance display D is performed based on the acceptance (see an example that follows a presentation path such as Fig. 196(e) → Fig. 196(c)).

In this example, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the same display (Fig. 196(c)) is displayed as "post-acceptance display D", regardless of whether the acceptance is made before the text information (here, "Please press") related to the acceptance of the action (here, "Please press") becomes invisible (Fig. 196(b) → Fig. 196(c)), or whether the acceptance is made while the text information (here, "Please press") is in an invisible state (Fig. 196(e) → Fig. 196(c)), or whether the acceptance is made after the text information (here, "Please press") is returned to a visible state (Fig. 196(f) → Fig. 196(c)).

With this configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 196(e), even though acceptance period D is occurring, it is possible to provide an atmosphere as if it has suddenly switched to acceptance period A (see FIG. 191(b)) in which no text information related to the acceptance being permitted is displayed, and this surprising presentation can increase interest in the game. On the other hand, even if a player's action (operation) is accepted in a situation that seems to have suddenly switched to acceptance period A (when no text information is displayed), the same form (FIG. 196(c)) is displayed as the "post-acceptance display D" corresponding to acceptance period D, so it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, during reception period D, when the text information related to the fact that reception is permitted changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the background image is changed. With this configuration, it is expected that when the text information related to the fact that reception is permitted changes to a hidden state, it will be possible to more appropriately create an atmosphere that gives the impression that the reception period has suddenly switched to another period.

In particular, in this example, the background image changes from "background image HG4a," which depicts mountains and a river, to "background image HG4c," which depicts a mountain different from "background image HG1" (Fig. 196(b) -> Fig. 196(e)). With this configuration, when the text information related to the acceptance of the acceptance is changed to a hidden state, it is expected to more suitably create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to acceptance period A, which may occur when the background shows mountains.

In this example, when the text information related to the acceptance of the acceptance is returned from a hidden state to a displayed state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" back to "background image HG4a" (Fig. 196(e) -> Fig. 196(f)). This is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere of being returned from another acceptance period (particularly acceptance period A) to the initial acceptance period D.

It goes without saying that this reception period D also applies to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 190.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. 196, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 1-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 1-A"). Then, in both cases where reception period B occurs and reception period D occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, but the text information is displayed as different text information ("Press" in reception period B, and "Please press" in reception period D) even though the same action by the player (pressing the operation button 410) is accepted in reception period B and reception period D.

In other words, in reception period B and reception period D, the player is required to perform the same action (operation mode), but the display changes (post-reception displays B and D) that occur as a result of the detection of the action are different. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the same action (operation mode) is required of the player, the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of a reception period is made different depending on the type of reception period (type of post-reception display). This allows the player to perform an operation (action by the player) while recognizing which type of display change (post-reception displays B and D) is likely to occur as the post-reception display, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

It is also possible to provide an additional reception period in which the same operation (operation mode) as in reception period B is requested and the same text information and imitation image display as in reception period B are displayed, but when the reception is made, a post-reception display different from that in reception period B is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to fully understand which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information and imitation image display, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when operating.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned modified example, in reception period B, the text information is not hidden until the state in which reception is permitted (valid state) ends, whereas in reception period D, the text information can be hidden during the period while the state in which reception is permitted (valid state) continues. In other words, in this case, unless an operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the start of reception period D, it becomes difficult to recognize what operation (operation mode) is being requested of the player, and it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period. This is expected to favorably avoid a situation in which the player becomes complacent with the text information being displayed and loses all sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, during acceptance period D, there is a period during which text information is displayed (see FIG. 196(b)) and a period during which text information is not displayed (see FIG. 196(e)), but regardless of when the acceptance is made within these periods, the same display change (see FIG. 196(c)) occurs. In other words, in this case, even if the text information is not displayed, as long as the player checks what type of operation is being requested while the text information is displayed, it is possible to perform the operation appropriately, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, during acceptance period D, the text information is made invisible and then displayed again. In other words, in this case, even if the player mistakenly believes that "acceptance period D" has suddenly changed to "acceptance period A" in which no text information is displayed, the player will be able to clear up the misunderstanding by having the text information displayed again later.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, a change occurs in the background image during reception period D, and the period in which text information is displayed is transitioned to a period in which text information is not displayed in accordance with the timing of the change. This makes it possible to ideally give the impression that reception period D has transitioned to a different reception period.

In the example of presentation described with reference to FIG. 196, the same post-acceptance display D is generated when an acceptance occurs during the period of the acceptance period D during which text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is displayed, and when an acceptance occurs during the period during which text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is not displayed. However, instead of this, different post-acceptance displays may be generated when an acceptance occurs during the period of the acceptance period D during which text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is displayed, and when an acceptance occurs during the period during which text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is not displayed.

In other words, in this case, more strictly speaking, the reception period D is composed of two types of reception periods: "reception period D1", which is a period during which text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is displayed, and "reception period D2", which is a period during which text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is not displayed; when reception is made during reception period D1, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed, and when reception is made during reception period D2, the corresponding post-reception display D2 is displayed.

Figure 197 shows an example in which the above-mentioned modifications have been made to reception period D shown in Figure 196 etc.

The following describes the example of the performance shown in FIG. 197, but does not refer to the same configuration as the examples of the performance shown in FIG. 188 to FIG. 190, FIG. 194, and its modified example, FIG. 196. In other words, reception period D (reception periods D1 and D2) shown in FIG. 197 is basically the same as reception period D shown in FIG. 196, and can be similarly applied to other examples.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 197, a reception period D1 occurs first (see FIG. 197(b)), and when reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display D1 corresponding to the reception period D1 is displayed (see FIG. 197(c)).

In contrast, after the occurrence of the acceptance period D1 (see FIG. 197(b)), if a predetermined time has passed without acceptance (when timing tP2a shown in FIG. 188 and FIG. 189 arrives), the text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted (here, "Please press") is hidden (see FIG. 197(e)). Even under such circumstances (when the text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is hidden), the fact that acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted is the same as in the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 196 etc. However, in this modified example, when the text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is hidden (see FIG. 197(e)), the "acceptance period D1" ends and a different "acceptance period D2" occurs.

In other words, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during "acceptance period D2" during which text information related to the acceptance of the action is hidden, a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the "acceptance period D2" is displayed (see FIG. 197 (h)). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a performance in which the "acceptance period D1" is suddenly replaced by a "acceptance period D2" different from the acceptance period D1, and this surprising performance can increase interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, in reception periods D1 and D2, if the text information related to the fact that reception is permitted changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the background image is changed. With this configuration, when the text information related to the fact that reception is permitted changes to a hidden state, it is expected that an atmosphere will be more suitably created that suddenly switches to reception period A, in which the text information is hidden.

In particular, in this example, as in the example shown in Fig. 196, the background image changes from "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers to "background image HG4c" depicting a mountain different from "background image HG1" (Fig. 197(b) -> Fig. 197(e)). With this configuration, when the text information (here, "Please press") changes to a non-display state, it is expected to more suitably create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period A, which can occur when the background shows mountains.

In addition, although the "Post-reception display D2" in this example has different content from the "conversation preview" of the "Post-reception display A" shown in FIG. 191(c), it has in common that it uses a princess character, and so is somewhat reminiscent of "Post-reception display A", which is expected to more suitably create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period A, in which text information is not displayed.

In addition, in this example, when an acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1, and the post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. This makes it possible to indicate that the post-acceptance display is related to the acceptance period D1 (more precisely, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the acceptance period D1 occurred (when the timing tP2a shown in Figures 188 and 189 arrives)), rather than a post-acceptance display that has no relation to the acceptance period D1 (for example, a post-acceptance display corresponding to acceptance period C).

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of acceptance period D2 without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (when timing tP2b shown in Figures 188 and 189 arrives), as shown in Figure 197(f), acceptance period D1 occurs again and the state is returned to one in which "text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted" is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" back to "background image HG4a" (Figure 197(e) -> Figure 197(f)). This is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere that is reverted from another acceptance period to the initial acceptance period D1.

When acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 that has occurred again in this way (Figure 197 (f)), the post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to that acceptance period D1 will be displayed (see Figure 197 (c)), just as in the case where acceptance was made within the first acceptance period D1 (Figure 197 (b)).

It goes without saying that such reception period D (reception periods D1 and D2) also applies to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 190.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. 197, during acceptance period D (corresponding to the second acceptance period of "Configuration 14-A"), there is a period during which "text information related to acceptance being permitted" is displayed and a period during which "text information related to acceptance being permitted" is not displayed, and these periods are made to function as "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2", and different display changes are made depending on whether the acceptance was made during "acceptance period D1" or "acceptance period D2". In other words, in this case, when the "text information related to acceptance being permitted" is hidden, the acceptance period does not end, but a different acceptance period from the acceptance period that had occurred up until then occurs, so that the presentation can be maintained in an optimal manner even when the player's actions (operations) are not being accepted easily.

In the examples of effects shown in Figures 185 to 197, the "Post-reception display" is started to be displayed when the model image display is being displayed, but the "Post-reception display" does not necessarily have to be started to be displayed when the model image display is being displayed, and may be started to be displayed after the model image display is made invisible.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 185 to 197, the mock image display is displayed so as to span the timing before and after the reception period, but it may also be displayed when the reception period occurs or after that.

Also, in the examples of effects shown in Figures 185 to 197, the mock-up image display will be displayed by dynamic display, as described above with reference to Figures 145 and 146. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the mock-up image display should not end but continue even while the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" is appearing after it has been accepted.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 185 to 197, the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" makes it difficult to see not only the mock image display, but also the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the acceptance period. This prevents the impression that there is still time remaining, even if the gauge image is displayed after acceptance.

In addition, in the presentation examples shown in Figures 185 to 197, even if an acceptance is made during reception period D, the display process for the mock-up image display (in the modified example, text information) is not terminated. In other words, the post-reception display D is given priority over the mock-up image display (in the modified example, text information) that remains displayed on the layer, so that the mock-up image display (in the modified example, text information) is made invisible (invisible). However, even if an acceptance is made during reception period D, the display process for the mock-up image display (in the modified example, text information) may be terminated.

In addition, in the examples of effects shown in Figures 185 to 197, a model image display (integrated model image display IG) that mimics the operation receiving part that is to be operated is displayed during the reception period, but the model image display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be realized, for example, by replacing it with an arrow notation that encourages operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 189, if a request is accepted during acceptance period D while specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the acceptance triggers the specific BGM to be audibly output in a suppressed manner or made inaudible; however, the specific BGM may be made inaudible when a predetermined timing arrives, regardless of whether or not the request is accepted. In other words, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM may be made inaudible during the execution period of the post-acceptance display, which is expected to improve the presentation.

In addition, in the examples of effects shown in Figures 185 to 197, the background images HG1 to HG4a (HG4b, HG4c) are displayed before the start of each reception period, but they may be displayed in accordance with the timing of the reception period. Also, depending on the type of reception period, they may be displayed in advance of the reception period or in accordance with the timing of the reception period. In short, as long as reception can be performed while each of the above background images is displayed, the above-mentioned action and effect related to the background images will be achieved.

In addition, in the examples of effects shown in Figures 185 to 197, the reception period C occurs when the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state, but it may also occur when the specific BGM is output in a non-suppressed mode.

In addition, in the presentation examples shown in Figures 185 to 197, the reception period D includes a period during which the model image display (in a modified example, text information related to the fact that reception is permitted) is displayed and a period during which it is not displayed. These periods are set as a sufficient time for reception to be made in a non-displayed state even if the player begins an action (operation) after confirming that the model image display (or text information) has become non-displayed, and are set as a sufficient time for reception to be made in a displayed state even if the player begins an action (operation) after confirming that the model image display (or text information) has been returned to a displayed state, and it is clear that these periods have technical significance other than display methods such as so-called "blinking display".

For example, during reception period D, the time during which the imitation image display (or text information) is maintained in a "hidden state" after being put into a "hidden state" is preferably set to a time value that is at least half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (e.g., 3 seconds) set for reception period A or B. Also, the time during which the imitation image display (or text information) is maintained in a "hidden state" after being put back into a displayed state is preferably set to a time value that is at least half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (e.g., 3 seconds) set for reception period A or B, and the time during which the imitation image display (or text information) is displayed until it is put into a hidden state is preferably set to a time value that is at least half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (e.g., 3 seconds) set for reception period A or B.

Alternatively, the time from when the Moji image display (or text information) is displayed until it is made invisible, the time for which the Moji image display (or text information) is kept in the "hidden state" after being made invisible, and the time for which the Moji image display (or text information) is kept in the displayed state after being returned to the displayed state may be set to a time value that is equal to or greater than the shortest time for pattern change (the time required for shortened change). This is because such a time value is set as a time value that is sufficient for the player to confirm the pattern change, but also allows the pattern change to end early.

Next, an example of implementing the above configurations 4 and 9 to 13 will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when the player is accepted (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level indication performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D), reception period E is further prepared as multiple reception periods (reception performances).

The characteristics of reception period E will be described with reference to Figures 198 and 199. Note that each reception period described above with reference to Figures 184 through 199 may be prepared as a reception period separate from reception period E (reception performance E), or may be realized as reception period E (reception performance E).

Figure 198 shows an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period E (reception presentation E) occurs.

Now, if the start condition is established (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win or time-saving state), and "variation pattern E" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E. Then, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ variation performance (performance depiction according to variation pattern E, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 198(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern E" itself. In the performance example shown in FIG. 198(a), the same background image (background image HG4a) as the background image shown in FIG. 194(a) is displayed.

Here, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) corresponding to the variation pattern E, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the above-mentioned acceptance period E (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the post-acceptance display E" is permitted when a predetermined time E has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (when condition E is met) ("the situation shown in Figure 198 (e)").

In this regard, when the reception period E occurs, a premonition display corresponding to the reception period E is performed. More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 198(b), the "kunoichi" character KI appears. Next, as shown in FIG. 198(c), the character KI throws a smoke bomb to create smoke. Next, as shown in FIG. 198(d), the character KI is displayed saying, "Press the button to call that person." At this time, the "smoke" is depicted expanding and a "mock image display" is displayed, but the "smoke" and "mock image display" are made difficult to see by displaying the character KI and the lines first. Then, after such premonition displays (FIGS. 198(b)-(d)), when the reception period E occurs, the character KI and the lines are hidden, and the "mock image display" is clearly displayed.

In this example, the "character KI" and "smoke" are given priority over the background image HG4a and the decorative image SZ. The "smoke" may be displayed so as to cover the entire background image HG4a (display screen), thereby changing the background image from "background image HG4a" to "smoke." In other words, in this case, the "smoke" functions as the new "background image." The "smoke" does not necessarily have to be displayed prior to the occurrence of the acceptance period E (it does not have to be displayed as a precursor display).

Here, as shown in FIG. 198(e), in the reception period E in this example, the model image displays displayed are an "integrated model image display IG" modeled after the operation button 410, a "sword decoration image SYG" modeled after the sword decoration 5001, and a "special model image TM" modeled after the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. Note that in this example, multiple "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, but they may be displayed one at a time.

In other words, in this case, during reception period E, the player is prompted to operate the "operation button 410," the "sword decoration 5001," and the "special operation means 1410." This allows the player to determine whether to operate the "operation button 410," the "sword decoration 5001," or the "special operation means 1410."

In this regard, if an operation is accepted using the "operation button 410" during the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 198(f), an acceptance sound E1 such as a "ping pong" is audibly output based on the acceptance, and a display change (post-acceptance display E1) occurs in which an "image suggesting that the integrated model image display IG is correct" and a "samurai character" are displayed, and the background changes to a "background image HG5" depicting a streetscape. After the "post-acceptance display E1" is displayed in this way, the performance progresses with the "background image HG5" displayed.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" during the reception period E, as shown in FIG. 198(g), no reception sound is generated, no display change occurs, and the reception period E does not end (no reaction occurs, and the reception period E does not end). In other words, even though the "special operation means 1410" is not set as an object of reception during the reception period E, a "special model image TM" that imitates the "special operation means 1410" is displayed. With this configuration, during the reception period E, model image displays (integrated model image display IG, sword decoration image SYG) that imitate the operation means that are set as objects of reception during the reception period E and model image displays (special model image TM) that imitate the operation means that are not set as objects of reception during the reception period E are mixed, so that an operation opportunity can be given in a tense atmosphere where it is difficult to recognize which operation means to operate. In addition, when the "special operation means 1410" is within the reception period E, operations on the "special operation means 1410" are accepted, but this may be triggered by no reception sound, no display change, and no end of the reception period E (the same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed).

On the other hand, if an operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 198(i), an acceptance sound E2 such as "boosh" is audibly output in response to the acceptance, and a display change (post-acceptance display E2) occurs in which the character KI is depicted saying something like "I'll start over!" At this time, no change occurs to the background image.

In other words, after "post-acceptance display E2" is displayed, the presentation does not progress, but the set time (remaining time) for the acceptance period E is reset, and the remaining time for the acceptance period E is returned to the state it was in immediately after the occurrence of the acceptance period E (it can also be said that "acceptance period E occurs again"). With this configuration, even if no operation is performed to cause the post-acceptance display E1 (Samurai character) to appear, and as a result the post-acceptance display E1 (Samurai character) cannot be displayed, it is possible to restart the "acceptance period E" from the initial state where the remaining time has not been used up, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

The condition for returning to the state immediately after the occurrence of the reception period E may be not "a single operation on the sword ornament 5001 being received" but "a predetermined number of operations on the sword ornament 5001 being received."

By the way, it goes without saying that if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" during reception period E, the remaining time for that reception period E will not be reset.

If an operation is performed on the "sword decoration 5001" during reception period E, causing the remaining time of reception period E to be returned to the state it was in immediately after reception period E occurred (re-occurrence of reception period E), the same phenomenon as described above will occur depending on whether an operation on the "operation button 410", an operation on the "sword decoration 5001", or an operation on the "special operation means 1410" is accepted during reception period E (Fig. 198 (f), (g), (i)).

However, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted during a reception period E in which the set time (remaining time) has not been reset, the manner in which the post-reception display D is displayed in response to that acceptance may be different from the manner in which the post-reception display D is displayed in response to that acceptance when an action (operation) by a player is accepted during a reception period E in which the set time (remaining time) has been reset (post-reception display D1, D2, etc.). With this configuration, there is a dramatic value in making the post-reception display D appear without resetting, making it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period E is occurring.

On the other hand, the "example of progression from FIG. 198(e) or FIG. 198(g) to FIG. 198(h)" assumes a case where neither "operation of the operation button 410" nor "operation of the sword decoration 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E.

In other words, in this case, after the reception period E occurs, the remaining time is consumed without any action (operation) by the player being accepted, and the reception period E ends. In this regard, the reception period E is set as the "reception period for which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled." Therefore, even if the remaining time is consumed during the reception period E without either "operation of the operation button 410" or "operation of the sword decoration 5001" being accepted, as shown in FIG. 198(h), the same post-reception display E will be generated as when a movement (operation) by the player occurs during the reception period E.

However, if neither the "operation of the operation button 410" nor the "operation of the sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the same post-acceptance display E as when the "operation of the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E is generated, but the same acceptance sound E (ping-pong) as when the "operation of the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E is not audibly output.

This configuration allows the same post-acceptance display E to be displayed as when an "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E, but also makes it possible to suggest that the "post-acceptance display E" is not displayed as a result of the player's successful selective operation, which is expected to encourage more proactive operation when the acceptance period E occurs again.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period E, processing is performed to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left in the reception period E, and to give a hint as to what operation mode (operation type) is required to display the post-reception display E1.

Figures 199(a) to (d) are enlarged views of a portion of the display screen shown in Figure 198(e), showing the changes in the display content over time as reception period E continues.

As described above, during reception period E, an "integrated model image display IG" modeled after the operation button 410, a "sword decoration image SYG" modeled after the sword decoration 5001, and a "special model image TM" modeled after the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed.

In other words, during reception period E, even though multiple types of model image displays are displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is associated with only one of the multiple types of model image displays (integrated model image display IG). This makes it possible to suggest that the user is in a state where they should operate the operating means (operation button 410) that corresponds to the "integrated model image display IG" among the multiple types of model image displays.

Also, as time passes during reception period E, the "integrated model image display IG" dynamically displays the portion of the operation button 410 that mimics the "operation receiving portion" (button model image BMG) as if it were performing a "movement when operated by the player," as shown in Figs. 199(a)-(d). This dynamic display is the same as that described above in Figs. 145 and 146, and is also the same when the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed in the presentation examples shown in Figs. 191-197.

However, in this example, among the multiple types of model image displays, the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" are displayed statically, and the part of the sword decoration 5001 that mimics the "operation receiving part" and the part of the special operation means 1410 that mimics the "operation receiving part" are not dynamically displayed. Note that the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" may change the lighting mode, such as flashing.

With this configuration, only the "integrated model image display IG" among the multiple types of model image displays expresses "movement when operated by the player," which makes it possible to imply that the operating means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated model image display IG" among the multiple types of model image displays should be operated.

As mentioned above, during reception period E, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed to indicate the remaining time. Such gauge images GG are usually depicted as gradually decreasing in size as time passes after the reception period has begun, as shown in Figures 145 and 146, and are used to indicate how much time is left for that reception period. The use of such gauge images GG is also the same when a "gauge image GG (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed in the performance examples shown in Figures 191 to 197.

However, during reception period E, as shown in Figures 199(a)-(d), although the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is displayed, there is no "depiction of the gradual decrease in its display area as time passes since the reception period has begun." In other words, during reception period E in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner that maintains it at its maximum value from the time the period begins until it ends. With this configuration, during reception period E, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left in reception period E, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In particular, in the reception period E in this example, it is possible to reset the remaining time for the reception period E by operating the special operation means 1410, but even if such processing is performed, no depiction is performed that increases the display area of the gauge image GG, so it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize that the remaining time for the reception period E has been reset, thereby maintaining a good sense of tension.

The "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG" shown in Fig. 199 (a) to (d) is repeated until the reception period E ends. Therefore, if an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted during the reception period E, the "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG" ends upon acceptance. However, if an operation on the special operation means 1410 is performed during the reception period E, this does not end the "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG". Also, even if an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted during the reception period E, the process of generating the post-reception display D2 is performed, but the "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG" is not ended or restarted from the beginning, and the "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG" that has been performed up until that point is simply continued.

According to the above-mentioned example of presentation, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 4-A") and reception period E (second reception period of "Configuration 4-A") are prepared. Then, in reception period A (Fig. 185, Fig. 191), when a movement (operation) by the player is detected during the period, post-reception display A is displayed and reception sound A is output, but when a movement (operation) by the player is not detected during the period, post-reception display A is not displayed and reception sound A is not output, and in reception period E (Fig. 198), when a movement (operation) by the player is detected during the period, post-reception display E1 is displayed and reception sound E1 is output, and even if a movement (operation) by the player is not detected during the period, the same post-reception display E1 as when a movement (operation) by the player is detected during the period is displayed, but reception sound E1 is not output.

With this configuration, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the acceptance period E, a disadvantage in terms of presentation can occur, making it possible to optimally maintain the sense of tension when the acceptance period E occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, a reception period B (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 4-A") is further provided, and in this reception period B (Fig. 186, Fig. 192), when a movement (operation) by the player is detected within the period, a post-reception display B is displayed and a reception sound B is output, and even if a movement (operation) by the player is not detected within the period, the same post-reception display B as when a movement (operation) by the player is detected within the period is displayed and a reception sound B is output. In other words, in this case, when a movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the reception period, the same display change (post-reception change) as when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted may be generated in a way that causes a disadvantage in terms of presentation (reception period E) or in a way that does not cause a disadvantage in terms of presentation (reception period B). This makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when a reception period occurs, while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game when the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted within the period in time.

In the above-mentioned example, text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is not displayed during reception period A (Fig. 191), but text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is displayed during reception period B (Fig. 192) and reception period E (Fig. 198). In this respect, the text information displayed during reception period B and the text information displayed during reception period E are different from each other. With this configuration, first, by checking the presence or absence of "text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted" when a reception period occurs, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a reception period for which the automatic button function is enabled. Also, if "text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted" is displayed when a reception period occurs, it becomes possible to recognize the type of reception period that is occurring by checking the type of that text information.

As described above, in acceptance period B, when the automatic button function is enabled, a "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears (see FIG. 186 (j)). In this regard, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, in acceptance period E (FIG. 198), it is desirable to prevent the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" from appearing when the automatic button function is enabled (such as when progressing from FIG. 198 (e) to (h)). With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the type of acceptance period based on whether or not a "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears when the automatic button function is enabled.

In addition, during reception period E (Fig. 198), when an action (operation) by the player is received and this triggers the model image display (integrated model image display IG) to be hidden, the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" may not be displayed.

As described above, during reception period B, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed in one of a number of forms (see FIG. 144). In contrast, during reception period A and reception period E, it is desirable to display the model image display in only one form.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during reception period A, the background image is not changed based on the acceptance of the player's operation (see FIG. 191), but during reception periods B and E, the background image is changed based on the acceptance of the player's operation. With this configuration, the automatic button function is enabled, making it easier to recognize that the post-reception display has been displayed, thereby improving interest in the game.

However, during reception period E, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted, if this is due to an operation on the "sword decoration 5001", the post-reception display E2 is displayed but the background image is not changed to a different background image. With this configuration, while the post-reception display E2 is displayed in response to the acceptance, the player can recognize that the reception period E has not yet ended by checking that the background image that should have been changed has not yet been changed.

In reception period E, multiple objects (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, but may also include the special operation means 1410) are set as objects (operation means) that are the targets of the player's actions (operations), and different reception sounds are output when the player's action (operation) on the operation button 410 out of the multiple objects is accepted and when the player's action (operation) on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted. This makes it possible to ideally suggest that different performance effects will be produced depending on which of the multiple objects is operated.

In addition, during reception period B, based on the result of the performance judgment (jackpot judgment), there may be cases where a "reception sound A" corresponding to reception period A is audibly output, and cases where a "reception sound B" different from the "reception sound A" corresponding to reception period A is audibly output.

Also, in the above-mentioned example presentation, during reception period E, the player is presented with multiple options (here, operating the operation button 410, operating the sword decoration 5001, or operating the special operation means 1410), and different displays (post-reception displays E1, E2) appear as post-reception displays depending on which of these options is selected by the player's action (operation). If none of the multiple options are selected within that period (here, none of the player's actions (operations) are detected), then the post-reception display appears as a display (post-reception display E1) that appears when a specific option from the multiple options is selected (here, when the operation button 410 is operated).

With this configuration, if no operation is performed within the reception period E, only the same post-reception display will always be displayed, which encourages the player to perform selective operations within the reception period E.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, multiple operation means are provided as operation means, including operation button 410 (corresponding to the first operation means (first operation receiving section) of "Configuration 9-A") and sword ornament 5001 (corresponding to the second operation means (second operation receiving section) of "Configuration 9-A"), and multiple types of reception periods are provided as reception periods, including reception period E (corresponding to the specific reception period of "Configuration 9-A"). During reception period E, both the acceptance of operations on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of operations on the sword ornamentation 5001 are permitted as acceptances for causing a display change corresponding to that reception period E, and when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410, a post-reception display E1 (a specific display change) can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the sword ornamentation 5001, the post-reception display E1 (a specific display change) is not generated, but a display change (post-reception display E2) different from the post-reception display E1 (specific display change) can be generated, which adds to the fun of deciding which operating means to operate.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is operated during the reception period E, this triggers the end of the reception period E, but when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, this triggers the end of the reception period E, and instead extends the remaining time. More specifically, when the operation button 410 is operated during the reception period E, this triggers a state in which the remaining time of the reception period E1 is not used up. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to provide a new level of presentation for the reception period E using multiple operation means, and it becomes possible to provide a variety of interesting presentations based on this level of presentation.

However, in the reception period E in the above-mentioned performance example, the remaining time of the reception period E can be extended simply by performing an operation on the sword decoration 5001, so there is a concern that the sense of tension may not be maintained appropriately. Therefore, a reception period F different from the reception period E is further provided, and in the reception period F, as in the reception period E, an "integrated model image display IG" modeled after the operation button 410, a "sword decoration image SYG" modeled after the sword decoration 5001, and a "special model image TM" modeled after the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed. And, even if a reception is made within the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E described above (see FIG. 198),
When an operation on the "operation button 410" is accepted, a reception sound F1 is audibly output and a post-acceptance display F1 is displayed based on the acceptance.
When an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410", no reception sound is generated, no display change is caused, and the reception period E is not terminated (no reaction occurs, and it is the same as a state where no operation is performed),
When an operation for the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted, a reception sound F2 is audibly output based on the acceptance, and a display change (post-acceptance display F2) different from the post-acceptance display F1 is displayed. Furthermore, even if an operation for the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted during the acceptance period F, the remaining time for the acceptance period F may not be reset (extended), and the remaining time for the acceptance period F may continue to be consumed as is. In other words, in this case, when an operation for the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted during the acceptance period F, the post-acceptance display F2 is displayed as a trigger, but the acceptance period F is not terminated or the remaining time for the acceptance period F is not reset, and the acceptance period F will continue from this point onwards (obviously, acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is also permitted).

With this configuration, even if a reception period occurs during which the player is presented with the options of "operating the operation button 410," "operating the sword decoration 5001," or "operating the special operation means 1410," the remaining time in the reception period is not necessarily reset (extended) when an operation on the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, it is desirable that reception period F is set as a target for which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, just as in reception period E. And when the automatic button function is enabled for reception period F, it is also desirable to display the "post-reception display F1" that appears when the operation button 410 is accepted within reception period F, just as in the case where the automatic button function is enabled for reception period E. However, in this case, when the automatic button function is enabled for reception period F, unlike the case of reception period E (where reception sound E1 is not audibly output), it is more desirable to audibly output the reception sound F1.

With this configuration, when a reception period ends without any reception, it becomes possible to indicate whether the reception period was reception period E or reception period F, thereby preventing a decline in interest in playing the game.

In this case, even during reception period F, it is desirable to display the "integrated model image display IG" as a model image display that mimics the operation button 410, and to prevent the display area of the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image display IG from decreasing over time.

In addition, in reception period F, as in reception period E, although multiple types of model image displays are displayed, it is desirable that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is associated with only one of the multiple types of model image displays (integrated model image display IG).

Also, in reception period F, as in reception period E, as time passes in reception period F, the "integrated model image display IG" dynamically displays the portion of the operation button 410 that mimics the "operation receiving portion" (button model image BMG) as if it were performing a "movement when operated by the player," as shown in Figures 199 (a) to (d), and it is desirable that the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" statically display the portion of the sword decoration 5001 that mimics the "operation receiving portion" and the portion of the special operation means 1410 that mimics the "operation receiving portion," without dynamically displaying them.

In addition, during reception period E and reception period F, the imitation image display (special imitation image TM) that imitates the special operation means 1410 does not necessarily have to be displayed, and the pachinko machine 1 may not be equipped with the special operation means 1410 itself.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, multiple reception periods are prepared, including "reception period A or reception period B or reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of "configuration 10-A")" and "reception period E (corresponding to the second reception period of "configuration 10-A"). In reception period A (or reception periods B, D), a specific Moji image display (here, an integrated Moji image display IG) is displayed as a Moji image display that imitates the operation receiving portion, and in reception period E, multiple Moji image displays (here, an integrated Moji image display IG, a sword decoration image SYG, and a special Moji image TM) are displayed as a Moji image display that imitates the operation receiving portion, and the Moji image display can be executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving portion is moved by the operation by the player.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the replica image display is executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is moved by the player's operation" (e.g., reception periods A, B, E) in some cases, and not as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is moved by the player's operation" (e.g., reception period E in other words). In this case, even in a situation where the replica image display is displayed, it is possible that the player can easily recognize what operation to perform, but also that it is difficult to recognize what operation to perform, and therefore it is expected that the tension until the player's operation is accepted will be appropriately maintained.

In particular, in the above-mentioned example presentation, multiple operation receiving parts are prepared, including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, and during reception period A (or reception periods B and D), an imitation image display (sword decoration image SYG) modeled after the sword decoration 5001 is not performed, but an imitation image display (integrated imitation image display IG) modeled after the operation button 410 is performed, and at this time, the imitation image display modeled after the operation button 410 is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement of the operation button 410 when it is moved by the player's operation.

In contrast, during reception period E, at least both a model image display (integrated model image display IG) modeled after the operation button 410 and a model image display (sword decoration image SYG) modeled after the sword decoration 5001 are displayed, and one of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the integrated model image display IG) is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part of the one is moved by the operation of the player, but the other of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the sword decoration image SYG) is not executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part of the other is moved by the operation of the player.

With this configuration, when a mock image is displayed, it may be executed as a dynamic display or it may not be executed as a dynamic display, which allows for a variety of presentation possibilities and is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, during the reception period E, when an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the model image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed and this is accepted, a first display change (post-reception display E1) can be generated as a trigger, and when an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the model image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where the dynamic display is not performed and this is accepted, a second display change (post-reception display E2) can be generated as a trigger. In other words, in this case, regardless of whether the dynamic display is performed or not, the post-reception display according to the type of the side where the acceptance is made appears, so that the model image display on the side where the dynamic display is not performed can be given a "theatrical meaning". For example, even if an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the model image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where the dynamic display is not performed, it becomes possible to give a surprise by the display change that occurs as a result of this.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, multiple operation receiving sections including the operation button 410 and the special operation means 1410 are prepared, and during reception period A (or reception periods B and D), a model image display simulating the special operation means 1410 (special model image TM) is not performed, but a model image display simulating the operation button 410 (integrated model image display IG) is performed, and at this time, the model image display simulating the operation button 410 is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation button 410 is moved by the player's operation.

In contrast, during reception period E, at least both a mosaic image display (integrated mosaic image display IG) modeled after the operation button 410 and a mosaic image display (special mosaic image TM) modeled after the special operation means 1410 are displayed, and one of the integrated mosaic image display IG and the special mosaic image TM (here, the integrated mosaic image display IG) is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion of one of them is made movable by the operation by the player, but the other of the integrated mosaic image display IG and the special mosaic image TM (here, the special mosaic image TM) is not executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion of the other of them is made movable by the operation by the player.

With this configuration, when a mock image is displayed, it may be executed as a dynamic display or it may not be executed as a dynamic display, which allows for a variety of presentation possibilities and is expected to increase interest in the game.

Moreover, during the reception period E, when an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, operation button 410) corresponding to the mosaic image display on the side where dynamic display is performed (here, integrated mosaic image display IG), this can trigger a first display change (post-reception display E1), but when an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, special operation means 1410) corresponding to the mosaic image display on the side where dynamic display is not performed (here, special mosaic image TM), no display change (post-reception display) is triggered by this. In other words, in this case, even if a mosaic image display (here, special mosaic image TM) is displayed during the reception period, this will not necessarily be accepted when the corresponding operation receiving section (special operation means 1410) is operated, so it is expected that the sense of tension during the reception period will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 during reception period A (or reception periods B, D) when the special model image TM is not displayed, no display change (post-reception display) will occur as a result. However, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 during reception period A (or reception periods B, D) when the special model image TM is not displayed, a display change (post-reception display) may also be generated as a result. With this configuration, the validity of the operation cannot be determined solely based on the presence or absence of the model image display, making it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In the above-mentioned example of presentation, during reception period E, the sword decoration image SYG and the special imitation image TM are displayed as still images. However, the sword decoration image SYG and the special imitation image TM need not be executed as dynamic displays depicting the movement when the operation receiving part (the sword decoration body 5001 in the case of the sword decoration image SYG, and the special operation means 1410 in the case of the special imitation image TM) is moved by the operation by the player, and for example, if the movement (such as rotation) is different from the movement when the operation receiving part is moved by the operation by the player, they may be executed as dynamic displays.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, first, multiple operation means (multiple operation receiving units) including the operation button 410 (corresponding to the specific operation means (specific operation receiving unit) of "Configuration 11-A") are prepared, and multiple reception periods are prepared, including reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 11-A"), and reception period E (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 11-A"). Then, during reception period A (or reception period B), a model image display (button model image BMG) modeled after the operation button 410 and a specific image (gauge image GG) corresponding to the button model image BMG are displayed, and "a specific remaining time display that suggests the remaining time during which operations on the operation button 41 are permitted to be accepted by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG according to the passage of time" is performed.

In contrast, during reception period E, a button imitation image BMG (integrated imitation image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed, but the "remaining time specific display that indicates the remaining time during which operations on the operation button 41 are permitted to be accepted by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG over time" is not displayed.

With this configuration, even if a button imitation image BMG (integrated imitation image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed, the "remaining time specific display that indicates the remaining time during which operations on the operation button 41 are permitted to be accepted by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG over time" is not necessarily performed, so it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, during the reception period E, although the button-like image BMG (integrated image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that imitates a different operation means (sword decoration 5001) are displayed, the remaining time display (the above-mentioned remaining time specific display) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left in the reception period E is not performed. In other words, in this case, during the reception period E, although both the reception of operations to the operation button 410 and the reception of operations to a different operation means (sword decoration 5001) are permitted, the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" is not performed. This prevents the player from getting carried away by the fact that both the reception of operations to the operation button 410 and the reception of operations to the sword decoration 5001 are permitted, and makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period E is occurring.

It goes without saying that even in a situation where there is no remaining time display (the remaining time specific display described above) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left in the reception period E, the remaining time in the reception period E is decreasing.

Also, in the above-mentioned example presentation, during reception period E, a button-like image BMG modeled after the operating button 410 is displayed as an image integrated with a border decoration image SSG that defines the display area of the gauge image GG. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a way that its display area is maintained without decreasing over time. That is, in this case, since the remaining time of the reception period E is decreasing even though the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased at all, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained when there is a large display area of the gauge image GG remaining. The display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased until the remaining time of the reception period E becomes "0" and it is no longer displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, during reception period E, of the button-like image BMG that resembles the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that resembles the sword decoration 5001, only the button-like image BMG is displayed as an image integrated with the specific image (gauge image GG) used to display the remaining time. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the gauge image GG corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG (and thus whether or not operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 is enabled), so the sense of tension can be maintained in an optimal manner.

In this case, even during the reception period F described above, it is desirable to display only the button-modeled image BMG, which is modeled after the operation button 410, and the sword decoration image SYG, which is modeled after the sword decoration 5001, as an image integrated with the specific image (gauge image GG) used to display the remaining time.

In addition, a reception period G for the post-reception display G can be generated, during which the sword decoration image SYG modeled after the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed, and the button model image BMG modeled after the operation button 410 is displayed as the integrated model image display IG. However, unlike reception periods A and B, during reception period G, the gauge image GG in the integrated model image display IG is displayed in such a way that its display area is not reduced over time, but is maintained. With this configuration, even if a reception period occurs during which only the button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) is displayed as the model image display, the gauge image GG does not necessarily reduce its display area, so that the sense of tension during the reception period can be appropriately maintained.

In the above-mentioned performance example, during reception periods E, F, and G, the integrated model image display IG including the gauge image GG is displayed as a model image display simulating the operation button 410, and the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, making it difficult to recognize the remaining time during reception periods E, F, and G. However, instead of this, during reception periods E, F, and G, unlike reception periods A and B (integrated model image display IG), the model image display simulating the operation button 410 may be displayed as an "image not including the gauge image GG", so that the remaining time is not displayed. In other words, in this case, during reception periods E, F, and G, the gauge image GG will not be displayed anywhere in the display area.

When the mock-up image display of the operation button 410 is displayed as an "image not including the gauge image GG", it is desirable that the "image not including the gauge image GG" is displayed as an image that includes at least the "button mock-up image BMG included in the integrated mock-up image display IG". In other words, in this case, when the button mock-up image BMG is displayed, it will either be displayed as an image integrated with the gauge image GG or as an image not integrated with the gauge image GG, which makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, first, at least the following operation means are prepared as operation means.
- A sword ornament 5001 (corresponding to the first operation means of "Configuration 12-A") having a handle portion 5012 (corresponding to the first operation receiving portion of "Configuration 12-A") that is displaced when operated by a player, and a sheath portion 5020 (corresponding to the first peripheral decorative portion of "Configuration 12-A") that is provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 and does not displace even when operated by the handle portion 5012 (corresponding to the first operation means of "Configuration 12-A") (see Figure 124, etc.), and - a performance operation unit 400 (corresponding to the second operation means of "Configuration 12-A") having an operation button 410 (corresponding to the second operation receiving portion of "Configuration 12-A") that is displaced when operated by a player, and a frame unit 415 (corresponding to the second peripheral decorative portion of "Configuration 12-A") that is provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 and does not displace even when operated by the operation button 410 (corresponding to the second operation means of "Configuration 12-A") (see Figure 44, etc.).

When the sword decoration image SYG modeled after the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, it is possible to display a handle image modeled after the handle 5012 (corresponding to the first receiving part image in "Configuration 12-A") and a handle peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the handle image (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration image in "Configuration 12-A") (see FIG. 199, etc.), and when the model image display modeled after the performance operation unit 400 (here, integrated model image display IG) is displayed, it is possible to display a button model image BMG modeled after the operation button 410 (corresponding to the second receiving part image in "Configuration 12-A") and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button model image BMG (see FIG. 199, etc.), and the handle peripheral decoration image and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as different images.

With this configuration, because the border decoration images are different, even if the appearance of the operating means themselves is similar, the appearance can be made significantly different when displaying the sword decoration image SYG and when displaying the integrated model image display IG, which is expected to make it easier to distinguish which operating means to operate.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the handle peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as an image display that does not include any parts that imitate decorative parts that do not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1 and imitates the sheath 5020, while the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated imitated image display IG is displayed as an image that includes at least a part that imitates a decorative part that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1. In other words, in this case, when the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed, it is possible to favorably recognize that a situation has been given in which an operation opportunity has been given to the sword decoration 5001. In contrast, when the "integrated imitated image display IG" is displayed, it is possible to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the presentation operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a situation with a higher level of presentation. In this case, it is desirable to provide the "performance operation unit 400" as a component having an operation receiving portion (operation button 410) larger than the "sword decoration 5001", so that even if a peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed that includes at least a portion that imitates a decoration that does not actually exist within the pachinko machine 1, it is not difficult to know which operation means to operate.

In this way, in order to present the situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the performance operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a "situation with higher performance," it is desirable for the peripheral decoration image SSG to be displayed as an image that imitates a fictitious decorative part that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that a situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the performance operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is being given, a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG may include a part that imitates the frame unit 415.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, of the handle peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG and the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated model image display IG, only the peripheral decoration image SSG has a display area defined therein for displaying the remaining time, and as mentioned above, the remaining time can be displayed using this display area.

The "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed as an integrated image display of a handle image modeled after the handle 5012 and a handle border decoration image that decorates the border of the handle image, and the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed as an integrated image display of a button image BMG modeled after the operation button 410 and a border decoration image SSG that decorates the border of the button image BMG. In this regard, the "sword decoration image SYG" does not have separate "handle image" and "handle border decoration image" as image data, but is prepared as a single integrated image data. Similarly, the image data of the "integrated model image display IG" does not have separate "button image BMG" and "border decoration image SSG" but is prepared as a single integrated image data.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, first, multiple operation receiving parts are prepared as operation receiving parts, including the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (corresponding to the first operation receiving part in "configuration 13-A"), the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornament 5001 (corresponding to the second operation receiving part in "configuration 13-A"), and the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410 (corresponding to the third operation receiving part in "configuration 13-A").As reception periods, multiple types of reception periods are prepared, including reception period E (corresponding to the specific reception period in "configuration 13-A"). During reception period E (Fig. 198), the "integrated model image display IG (within button model image BMG)" modeled after the operation button 410, the "sword decoration image SYG (within handle peripheral decoration image)" modeled after the handle 5012, and the "special model image TM" modeled after the operation receiving portion of the special operation means 1410 are all displayed, and when an operation is received for the operation button 410 among the multiple operation receiving portions, at least the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" modeled after the operation receiving portion that has not been received among the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are made invisible (see Fig. 198).

With the above configuration, the model image display (sword decoration image SYG, special model image TM) that models an operation receiving part (the handle part 5012 of the sword decoration 5001, the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410) other than the operation button 410 for which an operation has been received is hidden, making it easy to recognize whether further operation is required for an operation receiving part (the handle part 5012 of the sword decoration 5001, the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410) for which an operation has not been received even though a model image display has been displayed.

In addition, during the reception period E, although the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, among the operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, and special operation means 1410, the special operation means 1410 is set so that the acceptance of operations (acceptance of post-acceptance display) is not enabled (not permitted). That is, as described above, during the reception period E, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, a first display change (post-acceptance display E1) occurs, and when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, a second display change (post-acceptance display E2) occurs, but no operation is accepted for the special operation means 1410, and no display change is triggered by this operation. This makes it possible to maintain the presentation and tension in an optimal manner until the operation by the player is accepted during the reception period E.

In addition, during reception period E, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, a second display change (post-acceptance display E2) occurs, but this acceptance does not cause the "integrated model image display IG," "sword decoration image SYG," and "special model image TM" to be hidden, and their display states continue (Figure 198 (i)). With this configuration, it is possible to cause a display change that is significantly different from when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In particular, during reception period E, when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001, this triggers an increase in the remaining time for said reception period E (progression from (i) to (e) in Fig. 198), which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game due to a lack of remaining time in order to realize a performance that calls for further operations.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, during reception period E, when an operation is accepted on operation button 410, a first display change (post-reception display E1) occurs, but while the first display change (post-reception display E1) is occurring, the "integrated imitation image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special imitation image TM" are both hidden (Fig. 198 (f)). This makes it possible to recognize that the post-reception display E1 occurred due to the acceptance of an operation on operation button 410, even after an operation is accepted while multiple imitation images are being displayed.

At this time, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed in a position different from the position in which it was displayed during reception period E (Figure 198 (f)), which makes it possible to indicate that reception period E has ended.

Also, in the above-mentioned example presentation, when the remaining time in reception period E runs out, the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, and the same display screen appears as when an operation is accepted on operation button 410 during reception period E (see FIG. 198 (h)). In this case, too, when the first display change (post-reception display E1) occurs, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, and both the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special model image TM" are hidden, making it possible to recognize that this is the post-reception display E1 that corresponds to operation button 410.

In the reception period D shown in FIG. 196, when the text information (Please press) is made invisible, the imitation image display is maintained in a displayed state (FIG. 196(e)), but the imitation image display may also be made invisible at the same time that the text information is made invisible. In this case, when the text information (Please press) is made visible again, the imitation image display is also made visible again (FIG. 196(f)).

[Operation reception presentation with distinctive image display state]
As illustrated in FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) does not occur even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. In addition, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance (post-reception performance) from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a reception period can be generated during which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is permitted, and when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the reception period, a display change (post-acceptance performance) occurs according to the type of reception period that has occurred.

During the reception period, an action target display can be displayed that indicates which is the "target of the player's action." Such an action target display can be displayed, for example, as an imitation image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action target display" in this presentation example is displayed as an imitation image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation.

During the acceptance period, a remaining time display can be displayed to indicate the time remaining during which the acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted. Such a remaining time display can be implemented, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this example presentation, multiple modes are prepared for at least one of the modes of the frame image and the gauge image (for example, the rate at which the display area of the gauge image is reduced, an indication of the degree of expectation, an indication of the type of operation means, etc.), and the display is implemented in any one of these modes.

Note that, as for the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. As for the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, it is preferable that they are not included in the low-expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), or that they may be included but that their selection rate (occurrence rate) is made low (although this is not necessarily required).

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-acceptance display (post-operation display) such as a display change on the performance display device 1600, or generates a performance sound change on the speaker, a change in the light emitted by the lamp, or a performance action by the movable decoration, as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that it may reduce interest in the game related to the acceptance period.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to operations that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact actions by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation means) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the state of the model image display when the player is given an operation opportunity (action opportunity) is given the following special presentation. Note that it is not necessary to have all of the presentations (configurations) described below. For example, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in playing by only having one of the presentations (any configuration), or it is possible to selectively have several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it is possible to appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentations (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that they have any one configuration that can suppress a decline in interest in playing related to the acceptance period.

[Configuration 1-B]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including a specific reception period in which the action target display (for example, a mock image display having a plurality of modes imitating the target of the action of the player and having different expectation levels) is not displayed and "a valid reception judgment that the action of the player is a valid action" is permitted. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 1-B is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different reception period from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration. However, in such a specific reception period, it is difficult to recognize from what timing the valid reception judgment is permitted, and further, whether the valid reception judgment is already permitted, so there is a concern that "only players who are sensitive to such productions can enjoy it."

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, when such a specific acceptance period occurs, a state in which a valid acceptance judgment is permitted has been entered, or an acceptance permission sound can be output to indicate that a valid acceptance judgment will be permitted. Therefore, although there is still a situation in which the action target display (for example, an imitation image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) is not displayed and therefore the player is unable to fully recognize which is the target of the action to be taken, the player can recognize that he or she is in a situation in which some action is required (a situation in which an opportunity to operate has been given), and it is expected that many players will enjoy the presentation.

The reception-permitted sound is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may be generated before the specific reception period and end before the specific reception period, may be output to span the timing of the specific reception period, or may be generated after the timing of the specific reception period and end within the specific reception period. The reception-permitted sound may be realized as a sound that, when output, always gives (or has been given) some kind of action opportunity (opportunity to operate) to the player. Furthermore, the "state in which the action target display (model image display) is not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may also be in other configurations as long as the "action target display (model image display)" is not visible on the display screen. For example, it also includes a state in which it is displayed on a layer but cannot be seen because an image on another layer is displayed preferentially.

In addition, it is desirable that the reception permission sound output when a specific reception period occurs is also output (as a reception permission sound) when other reception periods occur. For example, if the reception permission sound is also output when a reception period occurs in which the same action opportunity (operation opportunity) as the specific reception period is granted, it will be possible to suitably suggest to the player which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be granted (has been granted) even when the action target display (e.g., model image display) is not displayed. In addition, for example, if the reception permission sound is also output when a reception period occurs in which an action opportunity (operation opportunity) different from the specific reception period is granted, it will be difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be granted when the action target display (e.g., model image display) is not displayed, but it will be possible to suggest that some action opportunity (operation opportunity) is granted (has been granted).

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 1-B" is adopted, when the specific reception period occurs, first, a first display state in which the action target display (e.g., a model image display) is hidden (not displayed) is displayed. Then, while the specific reception period continues, a second display state in which the action target display (e.g., a model image display) is displayed may be displayed. That is, in this case, during the specific reception period, the action target display (e.g., a model image display) is initially displayed, and only players who are sensitive to such effects can enjoy it. However, by displaying the action target display (e.g., a model image display) while the specific reception period continues (before the set time (valid time) has ended), many players who are not sensitive to effects can notice this (the specific reception period) and enjoy the effects. It is also expected that such effects will help develop the ability to discern that a so-called "hidden button" has occurred.

In addition, in this case, it is desirable that the action target display can be displayed with one of a plurality of different expectation levels in the second display state. In other words, from the perspective of the player, if an action is not accepted in the first display state but is accepted in the second display state, it will be revealed to those around that the player did not realize that the specific acceptance period occurred until the action target display (e.g., the imitation image display) was displayed, and there is a concern that the player's interest in the game will decrease due to the player's insensitivity to such effects being revealed. In this regard, if the action target display is displayed with one of a plurality of different expectation levels in the second display state, even if the player accepts an action in the second display state, it will be possible to make the player appear as if "the player realized that the state was one in which action acceptance was permitted from the first display state, but deliberately did not accept the action in the first display state because he wanted to see the expectation level suggested by the action target display (e.g., the imitation image display)," which is expected to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, due to the nature of the button as a so-called "hidden button," it is difficult for the player to accurately recognize when the specific acceptance period, which allows the "valid acceptance judgment that the player's action is a valid action," has occurred. In this case, if the button is operated a little before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player may mistakenly think that the "valid acceptance judgment" is not made, and the specific acceptance period may end without the player's action (operation). Therefore, when the "configuration 1-B" is adopted, even if the player performs an action (operation) before the specific acceptance period, the action (operation) is not considered to be a "valid acceptance judgment" at that time, but it is desirable to make it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" (based on) the action (operation) performed by the player before the specific acceptance period after the specific acceptance period has started. With this configuration, even if the action (operation) is performed a little before the specific acceptance period occurs, it is possible to accept it after the specific acceptance period occurs, and it is possible to execute a post-acceptance performance triggered by this. In this case, however, the detection of whether or not a player has performed an action (operation) will be required to be performed regardless of whether or not an acceptance period has occurred during which "a valid acceptance determination that a player's action is a valid action" is permitted.

In addition, at this time, it is desirable that the action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the specific acceptance period can be accepted (valid acceptance judgment) as a valid judgment in the first display state, not in the second display state after the occurrence of the specific acceptance period. With this configuration, the action (operation) is judged as valid when a short time has passed since the player performed the action (operation) (for example, the timing when the first display state (specific acceptance period) occurs) and the action target display (for example, a model image display) is not displayed, and thus the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed. This makes it possible to suggest that the action by the player has been properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic acceptance function" when the action target display (for example, a model image display) is displayed but no action (operation) is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Configuration 2-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, regardless of the timing of the "reception validity judgment that the action by the player is a valid action," the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectation degrees) is always displayed, and in the second reception period, regardless of the timing of the above-mentioned reception validity judgment, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectation degrees) is always not displayed. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 2-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, by providing two types of acceptance periods with completely different presentation characteristics, it is possible to provide a more distinct response when requesting actions from the player (providing an opportunity to perform an action), which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-B" is adopted, a third acceptance period is further provided, and during the third acceptance period, depending on the timing of the acceptance validity determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation), the action target display (model image display) may or may not be displayed. Note that the "third acceptance period" in the configuration 2-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" in the other configurations, may mean a different acceptance period, or may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if a "first reception period" is occurring in which the action target display (imitation image display) is always displayed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made, or as if a "second reception period" is occurring in which the action target display (imitation image display) is always not displayed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. Through this production feature that creates uncertainty, it is possible to optimally maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

[Configuration 3-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the first reception period, the first post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made, and when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the second reception period, the second post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 3-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, whether a "valid reception judgment" is made during the first reception period or during the second reception period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the action target display (here, a mock image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) based on the valid reception judgment being made, so that it becomes easy to recognize that a state has been reached in which a valid reception judgment has been made properly (a state in which the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted).

The disappearance EF performance is displayed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the action target display (mock image display), but in this case, the action target display (mock image display) does not necessarily have to be displayed. Also, the disappearance EF performance includes, for example, the above-mentioned "aspect in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see." In this case, it may be a mode in which the disappearance performance display is displayed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed, a mode in which a performance is executed using a performance body that is located in a position that overlaps at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed when viewed from the front, or a mode in which the action target display (mock image display) itself is changed (modified) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transparency setting, etc.).

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 3-B" is adopted, during the first acceptance period, depending on when a valid acceptance determination is made that determines that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation), the action target display (model image display) may or may not be displayed.

In this case, first, when a valid reception determination is made in a situation where the action target display (model image display) is displayed, this is used as a trigger to execute the disappearance EF performance in a predetermined area including at least a part of the specific area where the action target display (model image display) is displayed. On the other hand, even if a valid reception determination is made in a situation where the action target display (model image display) is not displayed, it is desirable to use this as a trigger to execute the disappearance EF performance in the same manner as when a valid reception determination is made in the above-mentioned situation (a situation where the action target display is displayed). With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately suggest that a valid reception determination has been made secretly even in a situation where the action target display (model image display) is not displayed. Note that if a valid reception determination is made in a situation where the action target display (model image display) is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the action target display being displayed, and the disappearance EF performance will be executed using at least a part of the area where the action target display was scheduled to be displayed.

In addition, in this case, it is desirable that during the second acceptance period, the action target display (imitation image display) is always displayed regardless of when the acceptance validity determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation). By providing such a "second acceptance period in which the action target display (imitation image display) is always displayed" separately from the above-mentioned first acceptance period, combined with the configuration in which the disappearance EF presentation is executed, it is possible to provide a presentation that gives a sense of security and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple modes with different expectation levels) can usually be displayed using at least a specific area, and when a "valid acceptance determination" is made that the action by the player is a valid action while the model image display is displayed, the action target display (model image display) can be made invisible based on the fact that the valid acceptance determination has been made. Also, when a "valid acceptance determination" is made while the action target display (model image display) is displayed during the acceptance period, a disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the specific area until the action target display (model image display) is made invisible.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 first provides a number of reception periods, including a specific reception period. During the specific reception period, a "valid reception determination" is possible that determines a player's action as a valid action when the action target display (here, a mock image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple modes with different degrees of expectation) is not displayed, and when the valid reception determination is made, the disappearance EF performance is not executed. Note that the "specific reception period" in configuration 4-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different reception period.

This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the "valid reception determination" has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the acceptance of the player's operation), and it is expected that the tension of the specific reception period in which the player is secretly asked to act (the player is secretly given the opportunity to act) will be maintained even after the valid reception determination has been made.

Note that even when a disappearance EF effect is displayed, the action target display (mock image display) does not necessarily have to be displayed at that time. Furthermore, the disappearance EF effect includes, for example, the above-mentioned "aspect in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see." In this case, it may be a mode in which a disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area that includes at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed, a mode in which a performance is executed using a performance body that is located in a position that overlaps at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed when viewed from the front, or a mode in which the action target display (mock image display) itself is changed (modified) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transparency setting, etc.).

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 4-B" is adopted, the "specific reception period" may be the first reception period. A plurality of reception periods including the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period may be prepared as reception periods, and a valid reception determination may be made in both the first reception period and the second reception period, in which an action performed by a player in a state in which the action target display (model image display) is not displayed is considered to be a valid action. In the first reception period, if a valid reception determination is made in which an action performed by a player in a state in which the action target display (model image display) is not displayed is considered to be a valid action, the disappearance EF performance may not be executed, and in the second reception period, if a valid reception determination is made in which an action performed by a player in a state in which the action target display is not displayed is considered to be a valid action, the disappearance EF performance may be executed. In this case, the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" in other configurations, it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, while the action target display (model image display) is not displayed, it is difficult to know whether the first reception period (specific reception period) or the second reception period is occurring until the player performs an action. However, after a valid reception determination is made that determines this to be a valid action, it becomes possible to know whether the first reception period (specific reception period) or the second reception period is occurring, and it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an action.

[Configuration 5-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 5-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

If a "valid acceptance judgment that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the first acceptance period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) may not be hidden but may be in a displayed state at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) starts to be executed, and if a "valid acceptance judgment that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the second acceptance period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) may not be hidden but may be in a displayed state at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period) starts to be executed.

With this configuration, once the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" has begun, there will be cases where the action target display (here, an imitation image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) is visible, and cases where the action target display (here, an imitation image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-acceptance performance has begun.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 5-B" is adopted, it is desirable that during the first acceptance period, depending on when the "valid acceptance judgment that the action by the player is a valid action" is made, at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) begins to be executed, the action target display (model image display) will be in a displayed state rather than hidden, and the action target display (model image display) will be in a hidden state.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have it continue to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second high-expectation mode," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a low-expectation mode, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" if the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, with the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can essentially choose whether to start the post-reception performance with the replica image display displayed, or to start the post-reception performance with the replica image display hidden and not visible, depending on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made within the first reception period, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

[Configuration 6-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 6-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

When "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made during the first acceptance period, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are provided as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden at the time when the above-mentioned post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) starts to be executed, and when "valid acceptance determination determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made during the second acceptance period, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are provided as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden at the time when the above-mentioned post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period) starts to be executed.

With this configuration, once the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" has begun, there will be cases where the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple aspects with different degrees of expectation are provided for at least one of the aspects of the frame image and the gauge image) is visible, and cases where the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple aspects with different degrees of expectation are provided for at least one of the aspects of the frame image and the gauge image) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-reception performance has begun.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 6-B" is adopted, it is desirable that during the first acceptance period, depending on when the "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) begins to be executed, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will be in a displayed state rather than hidden, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will be in a hidden state.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second state with high expectations" among the multiple states, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to continue to display this even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance judgment" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has started to be executed. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first state with low expectations" among the multiple states, if this continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance judgment" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high expectation mode (and even a low expectation mode) even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in either the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the frame image and the gauge image. On the other hand, even if a post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the frame image and the gauge image rather than hiding them.

Or, even if at least one of a frame image and a gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to keep the frame image and gauge image displayed, rather than hidden, at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." Or, even if at least one of a frame image and a gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to keep the frame image and gauge image hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, with the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can essentially choose whether to start the post-reception performance with the frame image and gauge image displayed, or to start the post-reception performance with the frame image and gauge image hidden and not visible, depending on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made within the first reception period, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

[Configuration 7-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception judgment that the action by the player is a valid action" is made during the first reception period, the first post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made, and when a "valid reception judgment that the action by the player is a valid action" is made during the second reception period, the second post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "valid reception judgment" is made during the first reception period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. In contrast, when a "valid reception judgment" is made during the second reception period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) is not displayed and may not be in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) starts to be executed.

With this configuration, once the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" begins, there will be cases where the action target display (imitation image display) is visible and cases where the action target display (imitation image display) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-acceptance performance begins.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 7-B" is adopted, if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the arrival of a specified timing within the first acceptance period, the action target display (imitation image display) is in a hidden state and is not displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) begins to be executed, but if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" after the arrival of a specified timing within the first acceptance period, it is desirable to start the post-acceptance performance with the action target display (imitation image display) in a displayed state.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have it continue to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second high-expectation mode," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a low-expectation mode, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" if the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one acceptance period (first acceptance period) occurs, the player can start the post-acceptance performance in a state where the imitation image display is hidden and cannot be seen, as long as a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made before a specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives. Also, if a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made before a specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the post-acceptance performance will start when the imitation image display is not displayed at that point in time, so that players who seek this kind of performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

[Configuration 8-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the first reception period, a first post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made, and when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the second reception period, a second post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the first reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. In contrast, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) is not displayed and may not be in a hidden state.

With this configuration, once the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" begins, there will be cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible and cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-reception performance begins.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 8-B" is adopted, if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden and not displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) begins to be executed, but if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" after the specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives, it is desirable to start the post-acceptance performance with the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) displayed.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second state with high expectations" among the multiple states, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have this image continue to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance judgment" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has started to be executed. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first state with low expectations" among the multiple states, if this image continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance judgment" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high expectation mode (and even a low expectation mode) even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in either the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the frame image and the gauge image. On the other hand, even if a post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the frame image and the gauge image rather than hiding them.

Or, even if at least one of a frame image and a gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to have the frame image and gauge image not hidden but continue to be displayed when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if at least one of a frame image and a gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to have the frame image and gauge image hidden and not visible when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce frustration when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one acceptance period (first acceptance period) occurs, the player can start the post-acceptance performance in a state where the frame image and gauge image are hidden and cannot be seen, as long as a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made before a specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives. Also, if a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made before a specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the post-acceptance performance will start when the frame image and gauge image are not displayed at that point in time, so that players who seek this kind of performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

[Configuration 9-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period when the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), it is usually possible to display an action target display (here, a replica image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) using at least a specific area. During the acceptance period, when a "valid acceptance determination" is made that determines the action by the player to be a valid action, a post-acceptance performance according to the type of the acceptance period can be executed based on the valid acceptance determination. Also, even at the time when the post-acceptance performance starts to be executed, the action target display (replica image display) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 first provides a plurality of reception periods, including a first reception period and a second reception period. In either case, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the first reception period, or when a "valid reception determination" is made during the second reception period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the specific area based on the "valid reception determination". Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in the configuration 9-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

This configuration makes it easy to recognize when a valid acceptance determination has been made properly under the action acceptance conditions suggested by the mock image display (when the acceptance period has ended due to the player's action being accepted).

The disappearance EF performance includes, for example, the above-mentioned "mode in which the action target display (mock image display) becomes difficult to see." In this case, it may be a mode in which a disappearance performance display is displayed in a predetermined area that includes at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed, a mode in which a performance is executed using a performance object that is located in a position that overlaps at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed when viewed from the front, or a mode in which the action target display (mock image display) itself is changed (modified) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transparency setting, etc.).

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 9-B" is adopted, during the first acceptance period, depending on when the "valid acceptance determination" that determines that the action by the player is a valid action is made, the action target display (model image display) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden at the time when the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period begins to be executed, or the action target display (model image display) may be in an undisplayed state (unvisible state).

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have it continue to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second high-expectation mode," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a low-expectation mode, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" if the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, with the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can essentially choose whether to start the post-reception performance with the replica image display displayed, or to start the post-reception performance with the replica image display hidden and not visible, depending on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made within the first reception period, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 9-B" is adopted, during the second acceptance period, regardless of when the "valid acceptance determination" that determines that the action by the player is a valid action is made, the action target display (model image display) may be always in a displayed state at the time when the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period begins to be executed.

With this configuration, it is not always possible to choose whether or not to have the action target display (mock image display) displayed at the time the post-reception performance begins, making it possible to maintain a sense of tension during the reception period.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permission state (acceptance period) in which an acceptance opportunity is granted occurs, a model image display related to the acceptance target (such as a model image modeled on an operation receiving section) is displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in playing until the post-acceptance display (display change) is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance presentation (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern presentation progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance presentation (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of advance judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into the SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance presentation and the high expectation suppression acceptance presentation.

The "integrated model image display" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as another example or modified example thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image display," and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance-permitted sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) is being performed.

In addition, each acceptance allowance state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, an acceptance allowance state classified into the first type is a valid period that can occur when a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but cannot occur in a low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (a valid period that occurs based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high expectation fluctuation pattern) in a performance judgment based on the result of a jackpot judgment). In addition, an acceptance allowance state of the second type is a valid period that can occur in either a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expectation fluctuation pattern (such as a valid period that occurs as a result of a notice judgment).

The "integrated imitation image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first type and second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). Here, it is assumed that the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) occur as acceptance permission states (acceptance periods) in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operating means (e.g., operation button 410), and therefore the "integrated imitation image display" displayed in those acceptance periods is an image imitation of the same operating means (operation button 410).

In addition, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated Moji image display", a special mode with a high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) may be displayed only in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), and in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), only a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIG. 144(a)-(c)) may be displayed (this configuration is not essential). In this case, in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a judgment is made based on the result of the jackpot judgment as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIG. 144(a)-(d)) the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in, and the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in a mode according to the result of this judgment. Even in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination may be made as to which of multiple modes not including a special mode (e.g., Figures 144 (a) to (c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the "integrated model image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B" are explained below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be equipped. In other words, when it is desired to obtain an additional effect in addition to any one of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B", it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the corresponding configuration for each configuration described in the specification below.

First, an example that embodies the above "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 4-B" will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when the ball is accepted (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level suggestion performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). Here, at least a 1B reception period (1B post-reception performance), a 2B reception period (2B post-reception performance), and a 3B reception period (3B post-reception performance) are prepared as the multiple reception periods (reception performances).

With reference to Figs. 200 to 215, the characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be described separately. Note that, with reference to Figs. 199 and above, each reception period may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1B reception period (1B post-reception performance), the 2B reception period (2B post-reception performance), and the 3B reception period (3B post-reception performance), or may be realized as any of the 1B reception period (1B post-reception performance), the 2B reception period (2B post-reception performance), and the 3B reception period (3B post-reception performance). In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to have these for each reception period described above with reference to Figs. 199 and above.

Figures 200 to 202 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition 1B is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 1B reception period (1B reception presentation) occurs. Figures 209 and 210 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a 1B reception period (1B reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "1B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1B fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 1B fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1B fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 209(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "1B fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 200(a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the timing tQ2 arrives at which the 1B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (when condition 1B is satisfied), the 1B acceptance period (valid period) is generated in which "acceptance regarding the 1B post-acceptance presentation" is permitted ("the situation shown in FIG. 209(b) and (c)"). As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1B acceptance period (when the acceptance is judged to be valid), the 1B post-acceptance presentation is carried out based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) performs, in relation to the occurrence of such a 1B reception period, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time) suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that makes the mochi image display difficult to see, and a 1B post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to the reception (valid reception determination). As described above, the mochi image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display" integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time), but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also true for other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the 1B reception period occurs at timing tQ2, as shown in FIG. 200(b) and FIG. 209(b) and (c), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" is displayed as an integrated mochi image display IG. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tQ2, or may appear before timing tQ2 and be displayed to span timing tQ2. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) is hidden when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made within the 1B reception period, or when the 1B reception period ends without acceptance (valid acceptance determination). In this example, the 1B acceptance period ends at timing tQ3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 200(a)).

In addition, in the 1B reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes (for example, Fig. 144 (a) and (d)), and Fig. 209 (b) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 144 (a), and Fig. 209 (c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 144 (d). Note that, even in the 1B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in one of a number of modes including the modes shown in Fig. 144 (b) and (c).

Figure 200 assumes that a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" when a relatively early timing tQ2a occurs during this 1B acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 200(a), the 1B acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period starts to be executed based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tQ2a.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1) to FIG. 210(h1))" corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectation is executed as the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period, and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2) to FIG. 210(h2))" corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectation is executed as the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period. The expectation (probability of the big win pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 200, at timing tQ2a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 1B post-acceptance presentation begins in response to the acceptance), not only is the "integrated model image display IG" not hidden, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see either.

In other words, the 1B post-reception performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that is at least a combination of the "1B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "1B post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the 1B post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a combination performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed is delayed in the time at which the "1st post-reception performance display" as the 1B post-reception performance begins to be executed compared to the other performance devices, and this is intended to intentionally maintain the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 210 (d1) or (d2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period, even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as it was during the reception period even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 200 (b) and Figure 210 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tQ2a when the 1B acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tQ2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the model image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (from timing tQ2b onwards). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, different modes (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2) are displayed as the disappearance-related display depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) is a low-expectation mode (Fig. 210 (d1) to (h1)) or a high-expectation mode (Fig. 210 (d2) to (h2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 210 (e1) and (e2), even if the "1B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the disappearance-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is the "first disappearance-related display SKB1" or the "second disappearance-related display SKB2", it becomes possible to guess whether the "1B post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high-expectation mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 200 (b) and Figure 210 (f1) or (f2), when timing tQ2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 (cut-in performance)" as a post-reception performance in response to the player's action being accepted within the 1B acceptance period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 210(f1), the first mode (here, the first-B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character)) is displayed as the first-B post-reception performance display UGB1 corresponding to the first-B reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 210(f2), the second mode (here, the first-B post-reception performance display UGB1-2 as a cut-in performance by the samurai character) is displayed as the first-B post-reception performance display UGB1 corresponding to the first-B reception period.

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, the "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 ("1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-1" or "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the 1B acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented. Also, since the 1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1 (1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1-2)" while suggesting that the 1B acceptance period has already ended (after timing tQ2c).

On the other hand, when the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated Moji image display IG", and the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)". This makes it easy to recognize in which form the integrated Moji image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 200 (b) and Figure 210 (g1) or (g2), while the "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1 or second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 200(b) and FIG. 210(h1) or (h2), and this allows for good visibility and causes the display related to the "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" to be displayed.

In this regard, the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" is displayed in one of multiple modes (here, 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the example presentation (Figures 209 and 210) corresponding to the 1B reception period, when reception is made during the 1B reception period and the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" is executed, the background image is switched before and after the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" begins.

With this configuration, in the situation shown in Figures 210(d) and (e) where no change in the background image has occurred (timings tQ2a to tQ2b shown in Figure 200), even if there has been a change in the performance on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it is possible to indicate that the "first B post-reception performance display UGB1" has not yet started.

In this example, the "First B post-reception performance display UGB1" and "Background change" are displayed later (timing tQ2c) than the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is displayed (timing tQ2b), but they may be displayed at the same time (timing tQ2b) as the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is displayed (timing tQ2b).

In the example shown in FIG. 210, the post-reception performance is configured to switch to the same background image when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, but it may also be configured to switch to different background images when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, it may be configured to switch the background image when a high expectation mode appears, but not to switch the background image when a low expectation mode appears.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, when a 1B reception period occurs, various displays are performed within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 200) and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tQ2c) of the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tQ2a of the reception.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period, as shown in Figures 200(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, a 1B post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1B post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tQ2a when the reception is made during the 1B reception period is limited to a part of the 1B post-reception performance (display of the 1B post-reception performance), and the 1B post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tQ2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1) to (h1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 210(d1), the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1) using the first performance device as the 1B post-reception specific performance UTB1 (the 1B post-reception specific performance UTB1-1, which is a low expectation mode of the 1B post-reception specific performance UTB1) corresponding to the 1B reception period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2) to (h2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 210(d2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is started to be executed prior to the 1B post-reception presentation (1B post-reception presentation display UGB1-2) using the first presentation device as the 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1 (the 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1) corresponding to the 1B reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 209, in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a performance within the reception period is executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 1B reception period has occurred (FIGS. 209(b) and (c)). The performance within the reception period on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectation (see FIG. 209(b)) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectation (see FIG. 209(c)).

In other words, in this case, during the 1B reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" is made during the 1B reception period, while the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) continues to display the "integrated model image display IG" (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can increase the interest in the game.

In this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-1" or the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" appears as the 1B reception specific performance UTB1, but it is not necessary to prepare multiple forms for the 1B reception specific performance UTB1. For example, it is possible to provide only the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" as the 1B reception specific performance UTB1, and suggest the degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) depending on whether the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" appears. In other words, in this case, when the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the 1B reception period occurs, the reception permissible sound starts to be output at timing tQ1 shown in FIG. 200(d). In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 1B reception period is audibly output across timing tQ2 when the 1B reception period occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 209(b) and (c)"), and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the reception permissible sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the 1B reception period, the first long allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, and the first short allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively short time, are output as the reception allowable sound. In the example shown in FIG. 200(d), the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound may be started to be output at timing tQ2 when the 1B reception period occurs or thereafter.

In the first B reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated midway (terminating the audible output state midway) based on the acceptance.

In this regard, it is desirable that the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation (as shown in FIG. 209(b)) and in a manner with high expectation (as shown in FIG. 209(c)), as shown in FIG. 200(d). That is, in this case, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the expectation during the reception period, but unlike the "integrated mock image display IG", they are executed in such a way that once acceptance (valid reception determination) is made, it becomes impossible to confirm it, and therefore it is expected that the tension as to when during the reception period acceptance (valid reception determination) will be made will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound (first long allowable sound, first short allowable sound) is being audibly output, not only is the reception allowable sound terminated midway, but the audible output of the 1B post-reception performance sound is started based on the acceptance. The 1B post-reception performance sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation, and for example, it may be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation. In other words, in this case, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, during the 1B reception period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed during the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance (1B post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1", as shown in FIG. 200(d), this type of 1B post-reception performance sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden. Also, for the 1B post-reception performance sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1)-(h1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2)-(h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation).

Note that during the 1B reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sound, but it is not necessary to output these two permissible sounds, and only one reception permissible sound may be output.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made in the 1B acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 1B post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1)-(h1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2)-(h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made in an acceptance period other than the 1B acceptance period. With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast, FIG. 201 assumes the case where a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively late timing tQ2A occurs within such a 1B acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 201(a), the 1B acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period starts to be executed based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tQ2A.

In this regard, in the 1B reception period, even if the reception (valid reception determination) is made at a relatively late timing tQ2A in the 1B reception period (no matter what timing the reception (valid reception determination) is made), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (valid reception determination) was made at a relatively early timing tQ2a in the 1B reception period. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 201(a), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a performance after reception) and cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a performance after reception), and in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device, the performance will basically be executed as described with reference to FIG. 200, etc.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 201, because acceptance (valid acceptance determination) was made at a relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B acceptance period, the display area of the gauge image is further reduced in the situation shown in FIG. 210(d) and the like. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 201, as shown in FIG. 201(d), acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made while the first short permissible sound has already ended its audible output, so that acceptance (valid acceptance determination) does not cause the first short permissible sound to end prematurely (terminate the audible output state prematurely).

In the example shown in FIG. 201, the time for which the "1B post-reception performance display" based on the fact that the reception (valid reception judgment) has been made is displayed is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. 200. In other words, the "1B post-reception specific performance" and the "1B post-reception performance sound" are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time that the reception (valid reception judgment) has been made, whereas the "1B post-reception performance display" is terminated (not displayed) when the predetermined timing tQ4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of when the reception (valid reception judgment) was made. With this configuration, it is expected that the tension regarding when the reception (valid reception judgment) will be made during the reception period will be appropriately maintained.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 202 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 209(b) to "E3 (Figure 210(d3) to (g3))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 1B reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 202, after the 1B reception period occurs, the timing tQ3 arrives without the player's action (operation) being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tQ3 (the point at which the 1B reception period ends and the acceptance of the player's action (operation) is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, as shown in FIG. 210 (d3), nor does it make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, just like the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tQ2a or tQ2A (the point at which the player's action (operation) is accepted during the 1B reception period (or the point at which the performance starts to be executed after acceptance)).

With this configuration, even if the first B reception period ends before the player's action (operation) is received in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the first B reception period after the period has ended, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see," as shown in FIG. 210 (e3).

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1B reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the 1B reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 1B reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period, the "first extinction-related display SKB1" is displayed as the extinction-related display (extinction EF presentation). That is, in this case, it is expected that the player will sense the possibility that the post-1B acceptance presentation would have suggested low expectations if the action (operation) by the player had been accepted within the 1B acceptance period. This makes it possible to encourage the player to be glad that he or she did not make the action (operation) within the 1B acceptance period, and is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period.

However, if no action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first B acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SKB2" may be displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF presentation), or a display different from either the "first disappearance related display SKB1" or the "second disappearance related display SKB2" may be displayed.

Also, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the 1B acceptance period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) may be executed in a manner that would have appeared if the action (operation) had been accepted. That is, in this case, the appearance of the "first disappearance-related display SKB1" in the situation shown in Fig. 210(e3) means that if the action (operation) by the player had been accepted during the 1B acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from Fig. 209(b) to "E1 (Fig. 210(d1)-(h1))" (a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively low expectation would have been executed). On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 210(e3), the "second disappearance-related display SKB2" appears when the player's action (operation) was accepted during the 1B acceptance period, and the presentation would have progressed from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2)-(h2))" (when a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively high expectation was executed). In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) was not accepted during the 1B acceptance period, after the 1B acceptance period ends, the player can recognize whether the 1B post-acceptance presentation was executed in a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode simply by checking the appearance of the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation)" that appears in association with the integrated model image display IG being hidden, and therefore it is possible to suitably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 210(f3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1 in the figure)", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 210(g3), the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1 in the figure))" is hidden.

As mentioned above, in the 1B reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(d) (see FIG. 209(c)) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a) (see FIG. 209(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 209(c) occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in FIG. 209(b) above is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)," and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 209(c) to "E1'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1)-(h1))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Also, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 209(c) to "E2'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2)-(h2))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Furthermore, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 209(c) to "E3'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E3 (FIG. 210(d3)-(g3))", with only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) being changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd".

Figures 203 to 205 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition 2B is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a second B reception period (second B reception presentation) occurs. Figure 211 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a second B reception period (second B reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "second B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second B fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the second B fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second B fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 211(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second B fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 203(a), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the 2B acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the 2B post-acceptance performance" is permitted when the timing tR2 arrives (condition 2B is satisfied) after the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ, and thus when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 2B acceptance period (valid acceptance is determined), the 2B post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance determination).

However, during the second B reception period in this embodiment, unlike when the first B reception period occurs, in relation to the occurrence of the second B reception period, there is no display of an action target display (a replica image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period) (a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image decreases over time), or a disappearance-related display (a disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to see the replica image display.

More specifically, in the second B variation pattern, as shown in Fig. 203(b) and Fig. 211(a), while the presentation state in which the integrated model image display IG (the "model image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed is maintained, timing tR2 arrives and the second B reception period occurs. Then, the second B reception period ends when timing tR3 arrives if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see Fig. 203(a)).

This type of second B acceptance period is what is known as a "hidden button," and does not provide any operation-related information, such as the point in time when "a valid acceptance judgment that an action by the player is a valid action" is permitted (when the second B acceptance period has occurred), whether the state is such that a "valid acceptance judgment" is permitted (when the second B acceptance period is occurring), or when the state becomes such that a "valid acceptance judgment that an action by the player is a valid action" is no longer permitted (when the second B acceptance period ends). Therefore, it can be said that the second B acceptance period can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to such dramatic aspects.

Figure 203 assumes that, during such a second B reception period, a "valid reception determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively early timing tR2a arrives. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 203(a), the second B reception period ends and the post-reception performance (second B post-reception performance) corresponding to the second B reception period starts to be executed based on the player's action (operation) being accepted (valid reception determination being made) at timing tR2a.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 211(a) to FIG. 211(b) and (c) corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectation is executed as the second-B post-reception performance corresponding to the second-B reception period (such as "second-B post-reception performance display", "second-B post-reception specific performance", "second-B post-reception performance sound", etc.). The illustration of the case where the first mode with relatively low expectation is executed as the second-B post-reception performance (such as "second-B post-reception performance display", "second-B post-reception specific performance", "second-B post-reception performance sound", etc.) is omitted, and in fact, the performance may progress from FIG. 211(a) to a situation where the second-B post-reception performance is executed in the omitted mode (first mode with low expectation). However, for such a 2B reception period, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made, the 2B post-reception performance (such as a "2B post-reception performance display", a "2B post-reception specific performance", or a "2B post-reception performance sound") may be executed in the manner shown in Figs. 211(b) and (c) (a type in which a low expectation mode is not provided as a post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display, 1B post-reception specific performance, 1B post-reception performance sound)). The expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, even in this example of the presentation (second B reception period), as shown in FIG. 203 and FIG. 211(b), at timing tR2a when the player's action (operation) is accepted (when the second B post-reception presentation starts in response to the acceptance), the "second B post-reception presentation display UGB2 (group preview presentation)" of the second B post-reception presentation is not executed, and instead the "second B post-reception specific presentation UTB2-2" and the "second B post-reception presentation sound (high expectation mode)" are executed. With this configuration, the presentation progresses in the same manner as the first B post-reception presentation, so that the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained in the same way.

However, in this example of effect (second B reception period), as shown in FIG. 203 and FIG. 211(b), no matter when the reception (valid reception determination) is made during the second B reception period, the above-mentioned disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) will not be executed. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is accepted during the second B reception period, it will take a long time to notice this just by looking at the performance display device 1600 (first performance device). In this case, combined with the fact that the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed, it will appear as if the action (operation) was made under circumstances in which the second B reception period has not occurred, and in this respect, it can be said that this is an effect that is highly difficult to play.

As shown in FIG. 203(b) and FIG. 211(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when timing tR2c, which is later than timing tR2a, arrives, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) starts to execute the "2nd B post-reception performance display UGB2 (in the figure, the 2nd B post-reception performance display UGB2-2 as a group preview performance by ghost characters, which is a highly anticipated aspect)" as a post-reception performance in response to the acceptance of the player's action within the 2nd B reception period. Then, as shown in FIG. 203(b) and FIG. 211(d), the "2nd B post-reception performance display UGB2" thus started ends (is hidden) when a predetermined time (a certain time) has passed since the acceptance (valid acceptance determination).

Note that in the example presentation (Figure 211) corresponding to the 2nd B reception period, unlike the 1st B reception period, there is no change in the background image when the "2nd B post-reception performance display UGB2" is executed, which also makes it difficult to recognize that a reception has been made.

In addition, when an action by the player is accepted within the 2B acceptance period, as shown in Figures 203(b) and (c) and Figures 211(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the 2B post-acceptance performance (2B post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 2B post-acceptance performance (2B post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 211(a) to FIG. 211(b) (when the post-acceptance performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 211(b), the mode in which a "ghost" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance display UGB2-2) using the first performance device as the post-acceptance specific performance UTB2 (post-acceptance specific performance UTB2-2, which is a high expectation mode of the post-acceptance specific performance UTB2) corresponding to the second-B acceptance period. As mentioned above, we will not go into the details of the case where a low expectation mode is executed as the second B reception post-performance, but the "second B reception post-performance display" and "second B reception post-specific performance UTB2" are executed in a low expectation mode, and are basically the same as when they are executed in a high expectation mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 211(a), the sub LCD 1610 (second performance device) will not execute a performance within the reception period that would suggest that the second B reception period has occurred.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third performance device (speaker). However, when the second B reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 211(d), the reception permission sound is not output, making it difficult to recognize when the second B reception period occurs.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, when reception is made, the audible output of the 2B post-reception sound is started based on this. The 2B post-reception sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation, and for example, it may be executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 2B acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 2B post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. In other words, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with high or low expectations.

In contrast, Fig. 204 assumes the case where a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively late timing tR2A occurs within such a second B acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in Fig. 204(a), the second B acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (second B post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second B acceptance period is started based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tR2A.

In this regard, in the second B reception period, even if the reception (valid reception judgment) is made at a relatively late timing tR2A in the second B reception period (no matter what timing the reception (valid reception judgment) is made), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (valid reception judgment) was made at a relatively early timing tR2a in the second B reception period. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 204 (a), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 211 (a) to FIG. 211 (b) and (c) (when the expectation level is relatively high as a performance after reception) and cases where the illustration is omitted (when the expectation level is relatively low as a performance after reception), and in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device, the performance will basically be executed as described with reference to FIG. 203, etc.

In particular, during the 2B reception period, unlike the 1B reception period, the "2B post-reception performance display", like the "2B post-reception specific performance" and "2B post-reception performance sound", is executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of reception (valid reception determination), so the appearance of the post-reception performance is the same regardless of the timing of reception (valid reception determination).

Note that the "2nd B post-reception performance display", "2nd B post-reception specific performance", and "2nd B post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a set period of time, and do not have to end at the same time as each other.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 205 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 211(a) to Figure 211(d) are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the second B reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 205, after the second B acceptance period occurs, the timing tR3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, when no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the second B acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 205, no effects related to its occurrence or end will be executed.

With this configuration, the player does not know that the second B reception period has occurred or that he or she was unable to perform an action (operation), which prevents a decline in interest in the game due to the second B reception period.

Figures 206 to 208 are time charts showing examples of the presentation content when condition 3B is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 3B reception period (3B reception presentation) occurs. Figures 212 and 213 are diagrams showing presentation examples in a variation pattern in which a 3B reception period (3B reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "3B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3B fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 3B fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3B fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 212(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3B fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the 3B acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the 3B post-acceptance performance" is permitted when the timing tS2 arrives (condition 3B is satisfied) after the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ, and the 3B post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 3B acceptance period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) performs, in relation to the occurrence of such a 3B reception period, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time) suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that makes the mochi image display difficult to see, and a 1B post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to the reception (valid reception determination). As described above, the mochi image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display" integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time), but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also true for other reception periods.

However, the 3B reception period in this embodiment is realized as a special effect that combines the effects of both the above-mentioned "1B reception period (the so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception period (the so-called hidden button effect)."

More specifically, the 3B reception period occurs in a situation (timing tS2) where the integrated model image display IG (the "model image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") are not yet displayed, as shown in Figures 208(b) and 212(a). In other words, in this case, the player is secretly given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), providing a so-called "hidden button effect" presentation.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 208(b), the presentation of this "hidden button presentation" continues only until timing X, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the 3B reception period. In other words, when timing X arrives within the 3B reception period, the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) according to this example displays the "Momo image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" as the integrated Momo image display IG, and thus the state transitions to one in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate) while the integrated Momo image display IG is displayed. The integrated Momo image display IG (Momo image display, frame image, gauge image) thus displayed is hidden when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made within the 3B reception period, or when the 3B reception period ends without acceptance (valid acceptance determination). In this example, the 3B acceptance period ends at timing tS3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 208(a) etc.).

According to such a 3B reception period, from the occurrence of the 3B reception period until the arrival of timing X, a "performance as a so-called hidden button" is provided in which the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player is permitted in the "first display state" in which the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, and from the above timing X until the end of the 3B reception period, a "performance as a so-called normal button" is provided in which the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player is permitted in the "second display state" in which the integrated model image display IG is displayed. As a result, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment is realized as a special performance that combines the performance of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button performance)," which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the "second display state" during the 3B reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes (for example, Fig. 144(a) and (c)), and Fig. 212(b) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 144(a), and Fig. 212(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 144(c). Note that, during the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in one of a number of modes including the modes shown in Fig. 144(b) and (d).

Figure 206 assumes that a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made while the above-mentioned "first display state (see, for example, Figure 212(a))" is appearing during this 3B acceptance period (timing tS2a in the figure). In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 206(a), the 3B acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period starts to be executed based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation) at timing tS2a (valid acceptance determination is made).

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 212(a) to "F1 (FIG. 213(d1) to FIG. 213(h1))" corresponds to a case where a "valid reception determination" is made while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period, and a first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the "3B post-reception performance", and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 212(a) to "F2 (FIG. 213(d2) to FIG. 213(h2))" corresponds to a case where a "valid reception determination" is made while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period, and a second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the "3B post-reception performance". The expectation (probability of the big win pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, in this example of the presentation, as shown in FIG. 206, at timing tS2a when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the third B post-acceptance presentation starts in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG", which had been hidden up until that point, can be made to appear.

In other words, if a player performs an action (operation) while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period (if a "valid reception determination" is made), the player will perform the action (operation) without knowing which aspect will appear as the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image). In this regard, by making it possible for the "integrated Moji image display IG", which had been hidden until then, to be displayed when the player's action (operation) is accepted, the player will be able to know which aspect will have appeared as the "integrated Moji image display IG" when the above-mentioned "second display state" is provisionally entered during the 3B reception period.

In other words, the 3B post-reception performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that is at least a combination of the "3B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "3B post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the 3B post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a combination performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed is delayed in the time when the "3rd post-reception performance display" as the 3B post-reception performance is started compared to the other performance devices, and this is intended to intentionally maintain the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 213(d1) or (d2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIG. 144(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was intended to be displayed during the ended reception period even after reception has been made in the "first display state" described above during the 3B reception period, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as when it was in the "second display state" even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 206 (b) and Figure 213 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing tS2a when the 3B acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player (when timing tS2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the mock image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed after the reception is made in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed.

In addition, if the reception is made during the 3B reception period in the above-mentioned "first display state" which provides the effect of a "so-called hidden button," it is difficult to know whether the reception was made during the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period, but the appearance of a "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" which cannot appear during the 2B reception period makes it possible to know that the reception was made during the 3B reception period.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is executed in the same manner when a low expectation mode (Fig. 213 (d1)-(h1)) appears as the post-3B reception performance and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 213 (d2)-(h2)) appears. With this configuration, compared to the 1B reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) differs depending on the expectation), the importance of gazing at the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" after reception during the 3B reception period is lower, so even if reception is made during the 3B reception period when in the "first display state" that provides the performance of a "so-called hidden button," it becomes possible to preferably gaze at the integrated model image display IG after the reception.

In addition, in the 3B reception period according to this performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that appears when reception is made uses the "second disappearance-related display SKB2" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) corresponding to the above-mentioned 1B reception period is executed in a highly anticipated manner. In other words, in this case, in the 3B reception period, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period does not necessarily have to be the "2nd disappearance-related display SKB2". For example, even if the "1st disappearance-related display SKB1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1st B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a low expectation mode is used as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period, it will be difficult to recognize whether the reception has been made in the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 206 (b) and Figure 213 (f1) or (f2), when timing tS2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 (conversation announcement)" as a post-reception performance in response to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player within the 3rd B reception period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F1 (FIG. 213(d1) to (h1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 213(f1), the first mode (here, the post-reception performance display UGB3-1, which is a "silent" conversation announcement) is displayed as the post-reception performance display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F2 (FIG. 213(d2) to (h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 213(f2), the second mode (here, the post-reception performance display UGB3-2, which is a conversation announcement that mentions "chance") is displayed as the post-reception performance display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period.

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 ("3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1" or "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the 3B acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Also, since the 3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3 (3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3-2)" while suggesting that the 3B acceptance period has already ended (after timing tS2c).

On the other hand, when the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated Moji image display IG", and the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed preferentially over the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)". This makes it easier to recognize in which form the integrated Moji image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 206 (b) and Figure 213 (g1) or (g2), while the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related displays", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 206(b) or FIG. 213(h1) or (h2), and this allows for good visibility and causes the display related to the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" to be displayed.

In this regard, the "third-B post-reception performance display UGB3" is displayed in one of a number of modes (here, third-B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or third-B post-reception performance display UGB3-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation). Therefore, the "third-B post-reception performance display UGB3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In the example of the performance corresponding to the 3B reception period (FIGS. 212 and 213), even if the reception is made during the 3B reception period and the "3B reception post performance display UGB3" is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the start of the "3B reception post performance display UGB3". With this configuration, when compared with the 1B reception period, even if the reception is made in the "second display state", it is possible to suggest that the reception is made in the 3B reception period, which also has the performance properties of a "so-called hidden button". Also, when compared with the 2B reception period, it is possible to make it appear as if the performance is progressing as a result of the reception being made with the "so-called hidden button" even while the "3B reception post performance display UGB3" is being executed.

In this performance example, the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3" is started to be displayed at a later time (timing tS2c) than the time (timing tS2b) when the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is started to be displayed, but it may be started to be displayed at the same time (timing tS2b) as the time (timing tS2b) when the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is started to be displayed.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, when a 3B reception period occurs, various displays are performed within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 206) and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tS2c) of the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tS2a of the reception.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period, as shown in Figures 206(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the 3B post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 3B post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tS2a when the 3B reception period is made is limited to only a part of the 3B post-reception performance (display of the 3B post-reception performance), and the 3B post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tS2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F1 (FIG. 213(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance), as shown in FIG. 213(d1), the mode in which "Suekichi" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 3B post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3-1) using the first performance device as the 3B post-acceptance specific performance UTB3 (the 3B post-acceptance specific performance UTB3-1, which is a low expectation level mode of the 3B post-acceptance specific performance UTB3) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F2 (FIG. 213(d2)-(h2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 213(d2), the mode in which "吉" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is set to begin execution prior to the 3B post-reception presentation (3B post-reception presentation display UGB3-2) using the first presentation device as the 3B post-reception specific presentation UTB3 (the 3B post-reception specific presentation UTB3-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 3B post-reception specific presentation UTB3) corresponding to the 3B reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 213, in the above-mentioned "first display state" of the 3B reception period, the performance within the reception period that suggests that the 3B reception period has also occurred on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is not executed, and in the above-mentioned "second display state" of the 3B reception period, the performance within the reception period that suggests that the 3B reception period has also occurred on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is executed (FIG. 212 (b) and (c)). The performance within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectation (see FIG. 212 (b)) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectation (see FIG. 212 (c)).

In other words, in this case, during the 3B reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), in the "second display state" described above, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the "second display state" is set during the 3B reception period, if a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation," while the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) continues to display the "integrated model image display IG" (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, and this can improve the interest in the game.

In this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "special effect UTB3-1 after 3B reception" or the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" appears as the specific effect UTB3 after 3B reception. However, it is not necessary to prepare multiple forms for the specific effect UTB3 after 3B reception. For example, it is possible to provide only the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" as the specific effect UTB3 after 3B reception, and suggest the degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) depending on whether the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" appears. In other words, in this case, when the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the third B reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound starts to be output at timing tS1 shown in FIG. 206(d). The reception allowable sound corresponding to the third B reception period is audibly output across both timing tS2 when the third B reception period occurs and timing X when the "first display state" transitions to the "second display state", and while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the player's action (operation) can be accepted. However, the reception allowable sound only needs to be audibly output across timing X, and may not necessarily be audibly output across timing tS2.

In this case, during the 3B reception period, a third acceptable sound different from either the first long acceptable sound or the first short acceptable sound is audibly output as the reception acceptable sound, thereby making it possible to indicate that a 3B reception period, which also has the dramatic quality of a "so-called hidden button," will occur (or has occurred), rather than the 1B reception period. However, the reception acceptable sound corresponding to the 3B reception period may be executed as either the first long acceptable sound or the first short acceptable sound.

In the third B acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the third permissible sound) is being audibly output, the acceptance permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is not terminated midway) based on the fact that an action has been accepted. This also makes it possible to suggest that a third B acceptance period, which also has the dramatic quality of a "so-called hidden button," will occur (or is occurring), rather than the first B acceptance period. However, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the third B acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on the fact that an action has been accepted.

In this regard, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound (here, the third reception allowable sound) corresponding to the 3B reception period be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation (as shown in FIG. 212(b)) and executed (audibly output) in a manner with high expectation (as shown in FIG. 212(c)), as shown in FIG. 206(d). In other words, in this case, while the reception allowable sound suggests the expectation level during the reception period, unlike the "integrated model image display IG," it is executed in such a way that it becomes impossible to confirm once reception (valid reception determination) has been made, and therefore it is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension as to when during the reception period the reception (valid reception determination) will be made.

Also, during the 3B reception period, if the player's action is accepted while the reception permission sound is being audibly output, not only is the reception permission sound terminated, but the audible output of the 3B post-reception performance sound is started based on the acceptance. The 3B post-reception performance sound is executed to indicate the degree of expectation, and may be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation. In other words, in this case, unlike the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, during the 3B reception period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed during the reception period (reception permission sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance (3B post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3", as shown in FIG. 206(d), this type of 3B post-reception performance sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden. Also, for the 3B post-reception performance sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F1 (FIG. 213(d1)-(h1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F2 (FIG. 213(d2)-(h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation).

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 3B acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 3B post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F1 (FIG. 213(d1) to (h1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F2 (FIG. 213(d2) to (h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during an acceptance period other than the 3B acceptance period (for example, the 1B acceptance period, or a predetermined acceptance period other than each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods). With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast, FIG. 207 assumes a case where, during this 3B reception period, while the above-mentioned "second display state (see, for example, FIG. 212(b) and (c))" appears (timing tS2A in the figure), "a valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action." In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 207(a), the 3B reception period ends and the post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period starts to be executed based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid reception determination is made) at timing tS2A.

In this regard, during the 3B reception period, even if reception (valid reception determination) is made while the above-mentioned "second display state (see, for example, Figures 212(b) and 212(c))" is present during the 3B reception period, after the reception is made, the presentation will progress in the same manner as if reception (valid reception determination) was made while the above-mentioned "first display state (see, for example, Figure 212(a))" was present during the 3B reception period. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 207(a), there are cases where the presentation progresses from FIG. 212(b) to "F1 (FIG. 213(d1)-(h1))" (a case where the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception presentation), and cases where the presentation progresses from FIG. 212(b) to "F2 (FIG. 213(d2)-(h2))" (a case where the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception presentation), and in the first, second, and third presentation devices, the presentation is basically executed as described with reference to FIG. 206, etc.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 207, the display area of the gauge image is reduced in the situation shown in FIG. 213(d) etc. by the amount of reception (valid reception determination) that occurs at a relatively late timing tS2A within the 3B reception period.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, the "3B post-reception performance display", like the "3B post-reception specific performance" and "3B post-reception performance sound", is executed for a predetermined time (a fixed time) from the time of reception (valid reception determination), so the appearance of the post-reception performance is the same regardless of the timing of reception (valid reception determination).

Note that the "3B post-reception performance display", "3B post-reception specific performance", and "3B post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a set period of time, and do not have to end at the same time as each other.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 208 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 213(b) to "F3 (Figure 213(d3) to (g3))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 3B reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 208, after the 3B reception period occurs, the timing tS3 arrives without the player's action (operation) being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tS3 (the point at which the 3B reception period ends and the acceptance of the player's action (operation) is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, nor does it make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 213 (d3), in the same way as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tS2a or tS2A (the point at which the player's action (operation) is accepted during the 3B reception period (or the point at which the performance after acceptance begins)).

With this configuration, even if the 3B acceptance period ends before the player's action (operation) is accepted in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the 3B acceptance period after the end of the period, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 213 (e3), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3B reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the 3B reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 3B reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the third B acceptance period, the "third disappearance related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF presentation).

It is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the first B reception period. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the third B reception period, it will be possible to suggest that the reception period combined the presentation characteristics of the above-mentioned "first B reception period (so-called normal button presentation)" and the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button presentation)."

It is also desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the third B acceptance period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the third B acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

After this, as shown in FIG. 213(f3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (the third disappearance-related display SKB3 in the figure)", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 213(g3), the "disappearance-related display (the third disappearance-related display SKB3 in the figure))" is hidden.

As mentioned above, in the third B reception period in this example, when the "second display state" is reached, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(c) (see FIG. 212(c)) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a) (see FIG. 212(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 212(c) occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in FIG. 212(b) above is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)," and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 212(c) to "F1'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 212(b) to "F1 (FIG. 213(d1)-(h1))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Also, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 212(c) to "F2'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 212(b) to "F2 (FIG. 213(d2)-(h2))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Furthermore, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 213(c) to "F3'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 212(b) to "F3 (FIG. 210(d3)-(g3))", with only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) being changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc".

The pachinko machine 1 of the present application, which provides the 1B reception period through the 3B reception period, provides the following excellent effects.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple reception periods (1B reception period to 3B reception period) are prepared with different presentation contents (post-reception presentations such as cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc., which are types of pre-notification presentations (expectation indication presentations)) that are carried out when reception is made, and it is possible to generate reception periods (valid periods) of different types according to the results of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the 1B reception period to the 3B reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, the post-acceptance performance display (1B post-acceptance performance display to the 3B post-acceptance performance display) can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Among these, in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, not only is the post-acceptance performance display displayed based on the fact that the action has been accepted, but the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is also made to appear. In other words, in this case, not only is it possible to check which form of the model image display has appeared even after the acceptance has been made, but by reducing the visibility of the model image display by the "form in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" until the model image display is made invisible, it is expected that the player's focus will naturally shift from the "model image display" to the "post-acceptance performance display". In addition, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is a display in which the same format can be used in common for multiple reception periods in which the performance content that progresses when the application is accepted is different (see Figure 210 (e2) and Figure 213 (e2), etc.).

However, because the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the reception period when reception has not yet been made, if the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were to be displayed after reception has been made, it would be difficult to tell whether the post-reception performance display corresponding to the reception has already been displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game would decrease. In this regard, when reception is made during either the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made invisible (invisible) while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, whereas the post-reception performance display is displayed while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, a transition in display presentation from the pre-acceptance display (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance presentation display) is realized while "a display in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears.

Note that the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-acceptance performance display" are both common in that they are displayed based on acceptance. However, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" refers to, for example, as shown in FIG. 210(e1) or FIG. 210(e2), etc., which appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. In contrast, the "post-acceptance performance display" refers to, for example, as shown in FIG. 210(f1) or FIG. 210(f2), etc., which appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see even if it is displayed when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Also, in each of the above examples, the "post-reception performance display" is started to be displayed when the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" does not necessarily have to be started to be displayed when the model image display is displayed, and may be started to be displayed after the model image display is made non-display.

As for the "mode in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", methods of "appearing so as to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" include a method of realizing this by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) as a priority display (displaying in a front layer) in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, as well as a method of displaying an image (video) that is made so that a part of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appears missing (unrecognizable) by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, instead of displaying an image other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. In response to this, a method for making the "post-reception performance display" "appear so as not to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" can be adopted, such as a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, but displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displaying in a rear layer) in such a way that the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is given priority display, or a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in an area excluding the area in which the Moji image display is displayed, at least while the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed.

In addition, as a "mode in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)," it is possible to adopt both a method of displaying an image display other than the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, and a method of changing a numerical value (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears before the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to see by the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)." This means that while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are visible, the "post-acceptance performance display" may soon appear, and it is possible to encourage the player to prepare in advance by changing his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)."

In addition, if a bet is accepted during the 1B acceptance period or the 3B acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can remain displayed even after the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a wider range of performance related to the "post-acceptance performance display" during the period in which the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game by changing the performance during such a display period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples for the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, as shown in Figures 210 and 213, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed not only in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are not displayed. And, in this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of it, but it is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is difficult to see due to the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

With this configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears to make it difficult to see not only the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception performance display", which is expected to improve both the performance until the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" begins to be displayed.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" is not displayed after reception has been made and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, a post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) that does not make it difficult to see the mock-up image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) can be made to appear in addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance). This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance prior to the first performance device without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to appear before the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) appears, in a situation where the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has not yet appeared. Also, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to continue until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has ended.

With this configuration, players who dislike the complex presentation of the first presentation device can enjoy the post-reception presentation with the second presentation device, which has a more simplified presentation, thereby increasing the interest of various types of players.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of effects relating to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the model image display will be displayed by dynamic display, as described above with reference to Figures 145 and 146. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the model image display is not terminated and continues even when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears after acceptance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is designed to make it difficult to see not only the mock image display, but also the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period. This prevents the appearance of remaining time being seen even if the gauge image is displayed after reception.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the 3B acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, the "3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3" can be displayed based on the acceptance, but in addition to the 3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3, the above-mentioned mode (second disappearance-related display SKB2) that also corresponds to the 1B acceptance period can be made to appear as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance).

With this configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKB2 appears, it is unclear whether the first or third B post-reception performance display will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKB1 appears, it becomes possible to guess that the first B post-reception performance display UGB1 will appear.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is displayed (priority display) in an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. However, it is also possible to realize a performance that uses a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen, in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same pattern (second disappearance related display SKB2) appears as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance), if the type of acceptance period is different, it is desirable to make the probability (expectation level) that the jackpot pattern will stop due to the pattern change different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) can be executed using the second performance device, and during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the first performance device is configured to be in a state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and in another state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device has started based on the fact that the reception has been made, it is possible to check which aspect has appeared as the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, by making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his or her focus of attention from the "first performance device" to the "second performance device."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started so as not to affect the visibility of the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that are continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is not an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the post-reception performance display is started to be displayed after the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance), but it may be made to start to be displayed at the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed." However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image display so that the area displayed in the "area where the model image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

As mentioned above, the "moon image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" in this embodiment can be displayed as an integrated moon image display IG in one of multiple modes (integrated moon image displays IGa-IGd) with different degrees of expectation. According to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the display mode is maintained and continued even after acceptance, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., so it is possible to recognize in what mode the moon image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period, even after acceptance.

However, in this case, if it is during the period immediately after acceptance, the post-acceptance performance must be performed under such conditions (maintaining the display related to the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). In other words, the range of performance is narrow, and only limited performances (post-acceptance performances using only performance devices different from the first performance device) can be performed. However, when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) appears after time has passed, it becomes possible to perform the post-acceptance performance under the condition that "the visibility of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) may be deteriorated", and therefore it becomes possible to perform the "post-acceptance performance display in the first performance device" under such conditions. By gradually performing these two post-operation performances of different natures (post-acceptance specific performance in the second performance device, post-acceptance performance display in the first performance device), it becomes possible to easily confirm the state of the model image display even after acceptance, while also favorably fulfilling its role as a post-operation performance.

As mentioned above, the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or only one of the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed.

In addition, the target of the player's action (operation) during the first B reception period, second B reception period, and third B reception period does not necessarily have to be the same, and may be different actions. However, if different actions are requested, the action target display (model image display) will also be displayed differently.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple reception periods are prepared, including the 3B reception period (Figs. 206 to 208) having the above-mentioned "first display state" in which the model image display (or remaining time display) is not displayed and "a reception validity judgment that the player's action is a valid action" is permitted. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 3B reception period (first display state) occurs, a reception permission sound can be outputted indicating that a state in which a reception validity judgment is permitted or that a reception validity judgment is about to be permitted. Therefore, although there is still a situation in which it is not possible to fully recognize which is the target of the player's action because the model image display is not displayed, the player can recognize that he is in a situation in which some action is required (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given), and it is expected that many players will enjoy the presentation. As a result, even in the reception period in which the model image display is not displayed and "a reception validity judgment that the action by the player is a valid action" is permitted, even a player who is insensitive to the dramatic effect of so-called hidden buttons can enjoy it, unlike the case of the second B reception period. However, the reception permission sound may not be output when the third B reception period occurs. In addition, the "state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) is not displayed" may mean a state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) cannot be visually recognized on the display screen. For example, it includes a state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) is displayed on a layer but cannot be visually recognized because an image on another layer is displayed preferentially. In addition, the "model image display (or the remaining time display)" here means an image displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels shown in Figs. 144(a) to (d). Therefore, as long as it is not possible to determine which of these display modes it is in, it can be said to be in a state where the mock image display (or remaining time display) is not being displayed (conversely, if it is possible to determine which of these display modes it is in, it can be said to be in a state where the mock image display (or remaining time display) is being displayed, even if it is not displayed in a highly visible manner).

The reception permission sound output when the 3B reception period occurs is realized as the "third reception permission sound", but it is preferable that the sound be output (as the reception permission sound) when other reception periods occur. For example, if the reception permission sound is output when a reception period occurs in which the same action opportunity as the 3B reception period (for example, pressing the operation button 410) is given, it will be possible to suitably suggest to the player which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given (has been given) even when the model image display is not displayed. Also, for example, if the reception permission sound is output when a reception period occurs in which an action opportunity different from the 3B reception period (for example, sheathing the sword decoration 5001) is given, it will be difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given when the model image display is not displayed, but it will be possible to suggest that some action opportunity (operation opportunity) is given (has been given).

In addition, in the 3B reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, as shown in FIG. 208, first, a "first display state" appears in which the model image display is not displayed. Then, while the 3B reception period continues, a "second display state" appears in which the model image display is displayed. That is, in this case, in the 3B reception period, the model image display is initially generated as a so-called "hidden button", and only players who are sensitive to such performance can enjoy it. However, since the model image display is displayed while the 3B reception period continues (before the set time (valid time) has ended), many players who are not sensitive to performance can notice this (the 3B reception period) and enjoy the performance. In addition, it is expected that such performance will also develop the ability to discern that a so-called "hidden button" has occurred.

In addition, in this case, it is desirable that the model image display can be displayed with one of several different expectation levels (modes) in the "second display state", as shown in Fig. 212 (b) and (c), etc. In other words, from the player's perspective, if a player does not accept an action in the "first display state" but accepts an action in the "second display state", it will be revealed to those around that the player did not recognize that the 3B acceptance period occurred until the model image display was displayed, and there is a concern that the player's interest in the game will decrease due to the player's insensitivity to such effects being revealed. In this regard, if the model image display is displayed with one of several different expectation levels (modes) in the "second display state", the player will be able to appear as if "the player realized that the game was in a state in which acceptance of an action was permitted from the first display state, but deliberately did not accept an action in the first display state because he wanted to see the expectation level suggested by the model image display", even if the player accepts an action in the "second display state", and this is expected to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, during the 3B reception period (first display state), due to its nature as a so-called "hidden button," it is difficult for the player to accurately recognize at what point in time the 3B reception period, during which "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is permitted, has occurred. In this case, if an action (operation) is performed shortly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the player may mistakenly believe that "the 3B reception period has occurred, but was mistaken," due to the lack of a "valid reception determination," and there is a concern that the 3B reception period may end without the player performing an action (operation).

Therefore, in the 3B acceptance period, even if a player makes an action (operation) before timing tS2 when a state (3B acceptance period) occurs in which a "valid acceptance judgment that treats a player's action as a valid action" is permitted, the action (operation) will not be "validly accepted" at that time, but it is desirable to make it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" targeting (based on) an action (operation) made by the player before the 3B acceptance period at the start of the 3B acceptance period (or thereafter).

In this case, however, the detection of whether or not a player has performed an action (operation) will be required to be performed regardless of whether or not the relevant third B acceptance period, in which "a valid acceptance determination that a player's action is a valid action" is permitted, has occurred.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 206, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tS2, this will be detected. However, at the time when the player's action (operation) is detected in this way, the 3B reception period has not yet occurred, so a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made based on this detection. However, the existence of this detection information is kept as a memory (history), and after the 3B reception period occurs, a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made during the 3B reception period based on the detection information kept as the memory (history). Then, the 3B post-reception performance is executed based on the "valid reception determination" obtained in this way.

With this configuration, even if an operation (manipulation) occurs shortly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it can be accepted within the 3B reception period, and it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) triggered by this. This makes it possible to lower the difficulty of accepting the operation, even while realizing the performance of a so-called "hidden button" (first display state).

However, if an operation (operation) is performed significantly (more than a specified time) before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it is desirable to prevent this from triggering the execution of the 3B post-reception performance. This type of configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value that is stored as detection information.

Note that this configuration when operated (operated) slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period may be applied to the 1B reception period and the 2B reception period in the same manner, or may not be applied.

In addition, at this time, it is desirable to make it possible to accept (validly accept) any action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period as a valid judgment in the "first display state" described above, rather than in the "second display state" described above after the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period. With this configuration, the action (operation) is judged as valid when a short time has passed since the player performed the action (operation) (for example, when the first display state (3B acceptance period) occurs) and the model image display is not displayed, and thus the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed. This makes it possible to suggest that the action by the player has been properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic acceptance function" that occurs when the model image display is displayed but no action (operation) is performed, and it is possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples (e.g., Fig. 206, Fig. 212, Fig. 213), the same appearance is made as the 3B post-reception performance according to the reception when the reception (valid reception judgment) is made when the reception is made in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period and when the reception (valid reception judgment) is made when the reception is made in the "second display state" during the 3B reception period (see Fig. 212 and Fig. 213, etc.). However, it is more desirable to make the performance content different between the case where the reception (valid reception judgment) is made when the reception is made in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period and the case where the reception (valid reception judgment) is made when the reception is made in the "second display state" during the 3B reception period in order to improve the performance of the reception period having the "first display state" and the "second display state".

For example, in the above-mentioned presentation examples (e.g., Figures 206, 212, 213), even if acceptance (valid reception judgment) is made when in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) (which had not been displayed until then) is displayed after the acceptance (valid reception judgment) is made, just as in the case where acceptance (valid reception judgment) is made when in the "second display state" within the 3B reception period (when the presentation progresses from Figure 212(a) to "F1 (Figure 213(d1) to Figure 213(h1))" or when the presentation progresses from Figure 212(a) to "F2 (Figure 213(d2) to Figure 213(h2))"). However, instead of this, if acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, it is desirable to prevent the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) from being displayed as a trigger after the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made.

From the player's perspective, this configuration allows the player to show those around him (by the performance progressing while the model image display is not being displayed) that he has been successfully accepted in the "first display state," which is considered relatively difficult to accept due to the presentation of the "so-called hidden button," after the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) has been made, thereby increasing his interest in the game.

However, in this case, with regard to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance), even if acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made when in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, it is desirable to make it visible when the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (cannot be seen). In other words, if the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (cannot be seen) when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made when the integrated Moji image display IG is not displayed even after the acceptance, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the acceptance period has occurred as the above-mentioned 2B acceptance period or as the above-mentioned 3B acceptance period (first display state). In this regard, even if the integrated Mogu image display IG (Mogu image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) will be displayed in the same way as when it was accepted in the "second display state", suggesting that the acceptance period has occurred as the third B acceptance period (first display state) and not as the second B acceptance period.

In examples where these configurations are adopted, if acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the "first display state (see FIG. 212(a))" during the 3B acceptance period, the performance progress shown in FIG. 213(d1)-(h1) or FIG. 213(d2)-(h2) will be performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. In other words, if acceptance is determined to be valid in the first display state, the post-acceptance performance will be started without the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed in any of the multiple modes, and if acceptance is determined to be valid in the second display state, the post-acceptance performance will be started with the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed in any of the multiple modes.

Or, during the 3B reception period, in the "first display state",
A first period (first state, first timing) in which, even if the reception (valid reception determination) is made, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed after the reception, and the third B post-reception performance is executed;
When acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made, an integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed after the acceptance (after the timing of the acceptance), and a second period (second state, second timing) in which the display of the integrated model image display IG and the execution of the 3B post-acceptance performance are performed in parallel may be further included. For example, in the first display state, it is desirable that the first period (first state, first timing) occurs first, and then the second period (second state, second timing) occurs. With such a configuration, the content of the performance differs depending on the timing at which the acceptance is made in the first display state, so that it is expected to improve the performance as a reception period having the "first display state".

Note that the "first display state" during the 3B reception period may include at least one of the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

In the third B reception period in the above-mentioned performance example, if the set time elapses without the player's action being accepted (Fig. 208 (f)), the same post-reception performance as when an action is accepted within the third B reception period is not executed (the automatic reception performance is not activated). However, the third B reception period may be generated as a target for which the automatic reception performance is activated. In this case, the automatic reception is not performed in the first display state, but in the second display state. Also, the first reception period may be generated as a target for which the automatic reception performance is activated.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, the timing at which automatic reception is performed may differ depending on the state of the presentation (a state that can be set by the player). However, regardless of the timing at which automatic reception is performed, it is desirable that automatic reception is performed in the above-mentioned "second display state" and the same post-reception presentation is started as when reception is performed during the 3B reception period.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned "second display state" occurs during the 3B reception period, the 3B reception period itself has already occurred before this, but the gauge image may be displayed (the depiction of the above-mentioned area decreasing) from a state in which its display area is at its maximum value within its frame (it may start from a state in which the area has already decreased). With this configuration, even if the remaining time of the reception period is actually already decreasing, by starting to display the area of the gauge image from its maximum value, a decrease in interest in playing the game is suppressed. It is also possible to make the reception period appear as if it were the above-mentioned 1B reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first B reception period and a second B reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first B reception period, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when the "valid reception determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made (see Figures 200, 201, etc.), and in the second B reception period, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always not displayed regardless of when the above-mentioned valid reception determination is made (see Figures 203, 204, etc.).

With this configuration, by providing two types of acceptance periods with completely different presentation characteristics, it is possible to provide a more distinct response when requesting actions from the player (providing an opportunity to perform an action), which is expected to increase interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third B acceptance period, during which, depending on the timing of the acceptance validity determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation), the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may be displayed or the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may not be displayed.

This configuration makes it possible to make it appear as if a "first B reception period" is occurring in which the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made, or as if a "second B reception period" is occurring in which the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always not displayed regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made. This production element that creates uncertainty makes it possible to optimally maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, as shown in Figures 209 and 212, it is desirable to be able to display an integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) in a manner that cannot appear during the 3B reception period. In other words, during the 1B reception period in the above-mentioned performance example, the special manner (integrated model image display IGd) shown in Figure 144 (d) can be displayed, but this special manner cannot appear during the 3B reception period. With this configuration, when the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated Moji image display IGa), it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period is occurring, and when the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the special manner shown in FIG. 144(d) (integrated Moji image display IGd), it becomes possible to suggest that the 1B reception period is occurring.

In addition, during the second B reception period, the reception permission sound is not output, and during the third B reception period, reception is performed without displaying the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)), so that even if a post-reception performance is executed, it is desirable to have the reception permission sound output. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest that the reception period in question has occurred as the third B reception period (first display state) and not as the second B reception period.

In addition, the "reception sound" that is output in the same manner regardless of the manner (expectation level) of the post-reception performance may be output in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, but not output in the 2B reception period. It is desirable to output the "reception sound" in the same manner in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period. However, such a "reception sound" does not necessarily have to be output in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period.

It is also desirable to display a disappearance EF effect (for example, the first disappearance-related display SKB1) that cannot appear during the 3B reception period during the 1B reception period. With this configuration, it becomes possible to indicate that the 1B reception period, rather than the 3B reception period, is occurring through the type of disappearance EF effect.

It is also desirable to display the disappearance EF effect (e.g., second disappearance-related display SKB2) that may appear in the 3B reception period during the 1B reception period. This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period has occurred.

Note that in the first B reception period, the second B reception period, and the third B reception period, the target to which the action opportunity is given (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) may be the same or different. However, if the target to which the action opportunity is given is different, the action target display (model image display) will be displayed as different.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including a 1B reception period and a 3B reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the 1B reception period, a 1B post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the reception valid determination has been made, and when a "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the 3B reception period, a 3B post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the reception valid determination has been made.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, whether a "valid reception judgment" is made during the 1B reception period or during the 3B reception period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) based on the valid reception judgment being made, so that it becomes easy to recognize that a proper valid reception judgment has been made (a state in which the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted).

As mentioned above, during the 3B acceptance period, depending on the timing (first display state, second display state, etc.) at which a valid acceptance determination is made that determines that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation), the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may be displayed or the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may not be displayed. In this case, first, when a valid acceptance determination is made under a situation in which the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, this is used as a trigger to execute a disappearance EF performance in a predetermined area including at least a part of the specific area in which the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. In contrast, even if a valid reception determination is made when the integrated Momo image display IG (Momo image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to execute the disappearance EF performance in the same manner as when a valid reception determination is made when the integrated Momo image display IG is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately indicate that a valid reception determination has been made secretly even when the integrated Momo image display IG is not displayed. Note that if a valid reception determination is made when the integrated Momo image display IG is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the integrated Momo image display IG being displayed, and the disappearance EF performance will be executed using at least a portion of the area where the integrated Momo image display IG was scheduled to be displayed.

In addition, in this case, it is desirable that the integrated model image display IG is always displayed during the 1B reception period, regardless of when the reception validity determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). By providing a "1B reception period" in which such an integrated model image display IG is always displayed, separate from the above-mentioned 3B reception period, it is possible to provide a reassuring presentation, combined with the configuration in which the disappearance EF presentation is executed, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the 1B reception period, if the corresponding post-reception performance is executed in a high expectation mode (Fig. 210 (f2) to (h2)), a specific mode (Fig. 210 (e2) to (g2)) that is also used in the 3B reception period appears as the extinction EF performance, but if it is different from the high expectation mode, it is desirable that the specific mode (Fig. 210 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as the extinction EF performance, but a different mode (Fig. 210 (e1) to (g1)) appears instead, or that the extinction EF performance itself does not appear. With this configuration, when the extinction EF performance is executed in response to the 3B reception period, it is possible to give the impression that a high expectation performance is being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the 1B reception period, the reception permission sound is output in multiple modes with different expectations, but in the 3B reception period, the reception permission sound may be output only in "one mode". With this configuration, when the reception permission sound having the "one mode" is output, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the 3B reception period, which has the dramatic effect of a "so-called hidden button", is occurring, and therefore it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension. The "one mode" may be selectively output (by judgment) even when the 1B reception period occurs. In this case, it is desirable that the "one mode" is output as the mode with the lowest expectation. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained even in a situation where the reception permission sound is output in the mode with the lowest expectation.

When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, both the first B reception period and the third B reception period may occur sequentially within the specific fluctuation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the first B reception period occurs after the third B reception period occurs. Also in this case, the first B reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the second B reception period may occur between the occurrence of the third B reception period and the occurrence of the first B reception period.

It is also desirable that the premonition effect output when the 1st B reception period occurs and the premonition effect output when the 3rd B reception period occurs be different from each other. In other words, in this case, the premonition effect can indicate whether the 1st B reception period or the 3rd B reception period will occur.

In addition, in the 3B reception period, it is desirable that a specific mode (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SKB2) appears as the disappearance EF performance when there is an acceptance, and that a mode different from the specific mode (e.g., the third disappearance-related display SKB3) appears when there is no acceptance, or that no mode appears at all. In contrast, in the 1B reception period, it is desirable that even if there is no acceptance, the same mode as when there is an acceptance appears as the disappearance EF performance. In other words, in the 3B reception period, which combines the performance of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button performance)," it can be said that forgetting to operate (the reception period ending without acceptance) is more likely to occur than in the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)." In this regard, according to the above configuration, if an action is forgotten during the 3B reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance related display SKB2) that occurs when an action is accepted will not appear, so it is possible to appeal to the player that an action has been forgotten, and it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs thereafter. In contrast, there are no elements that are likely to cause an action to be forgotten during the 1B reception period. Nevertheless, when an action is not accepted, it is possible that the player has deliberately made a gaming choice to "not make an action," so if a player who has made such a choice is "appealed to the player that an action has been forgotten," it may actually decrease the player's interest in the game. Therefore, even if an action is not accepted during the 1B reception period, it is desirable to make the disappearance EF effect appear in the same manner as when an action is accepted.

In particular, during the 1B reception period in the above-mentioned performance example, the appearance of the extinction EF performance differs depending on the appearance (expectation) of the performance after 1B reception (see FIG. 210). Therefore, even if there is no reception during the 1B reception period, by making the same appearance as when there is reception appear as the extinction EF performance, it becomes possible to recognize the appearance (expectation) of the performance after 1B reception that appeared when there was reception, and it becomes possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, during the second B reception period in this embodiment, a "valid reception determination" is possible that determines as valid a player's action performed when the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, and when the valid reception determination is made, the disappearance EF performance is not executed.

This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the "valid reception determination" has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the acceptance of the player's operation), and it is expected that the tension of the second B reception period, in which the player is secretly asked to act (the opportunity to act is secretly given), will be maintained even after the valid reception determination has been made.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, in both the second B reception period and the third B reception period, it is possible to make a valid reception judgment that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is a valid action. In the second B reception period, if a valid reception judgment is made that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG) is not displayed is a valid action, the above-mentioned disappearance EF presentation is not executed, and in the third B reception period, if a valid reception judgment is made that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG is not displayed is a valid action, the above-mentioned disappearance EF presentation is executed.

With this configuration, it is difficult to know whether the 2nd B reception period or the 3rd B reception period is occurring until the player performs an action when the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. However, after a valid reception determination is made that determines this to be a valid action, it becomes possible to know whether the 2nd B reception period or the 3rd B reception period is occurring, and it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an action.

In addition, if the 4B condition is satisfied, the 4B reception period may be allowed to occur. Even in this 4B reception period, it is possible to make a valid reception judgment that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is a valid action. In the 4B reception period, if a valid reception judgment is made that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is a valid action, the disappearance EF performance is executed as in the case of the 3B reception period. However, in the 4B reception period, the disappearance EF performance is executed in a different manner depending on the manner (expectation level) of the corresponding 4B post-reception performance. With this configuration, while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, it is difficult to know whether the second B reception period, third B reception period, or fourth B reception period is occurring until the player performs an action. However, after a valid reception determination is made that determines this to be a valid action, it becomes possible to know whether the second B reception period, third B reception period, or fourth reception period has occurred, and in the case of the fourth reception period, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation.

During the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, it is desirable that the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is configured so that when an action by the player is accepted, a disappearance EF display is executed while the depiction of the movement appearing in the operation receiving section and the reduction in the area of the gauge image continue.

The above-mentioned examples and other examples may be modified to the following configurations, or the following configurations (acceptance periods) may be provided as other acceptance periods (other premonition display) with different types of post-acceptance effects. That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has at least the 1B acceptance period, the 2B acceptance period, and the 3B acceptance period as acceptance periods during which the acceptance of the player's actions (operations) is permitted. Of these, during the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) of the player's actions (operations), and during the 2B acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance is not executed even if the player's actions (operations) are accepted (valid acceptance determination).

In this regard, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 1B acceptance period, the extinction EF performance may be executed in the same manner when the 1B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) and when the 1B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing). When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 210, regardless of which mode (modes shown in FIG. 210 (d1) to (h1), modes shown in FIG. 210 (d2) to (h2)) appears as the 1B post-acceptance performance, and further regardless of whether the acceptance was made during the 1B acceptance period (modes shown in FIG. 210 (d3) to (g3)), a predetermined mode will always appear as the extinction EF performance. That is, the 1B reception period refers to a period in which the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) continues to be displayed regardless of when reception (valid reception determination) is made during the period (and even if reception is not made). In this case, since information such as "in what form the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided, there is a concern that if further different information is provided by the disappearance EF performance, the performance will become too complicated. In this regard, during such a 1B reception period, regardless of which mode (modes shown in Figs. 210 (d1)-(h1) or modes shown in Figs. 210 (d2)-(h2)) appears as the post-1B reception performance, and further regardless of whether or not the reception is made within the 1B reception period (modes shown in Figs. 210 (d3)-(g3)), the above-mentioned concerns can be eliminated by making it so that a predetermined mode always appears as the disappearance EF performance.

In addition, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect may be executed in different modes depending on whether the post-3B acceptance performance is executed in a mode with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) or in a mode with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing). The 3B acceptance period has a performance feature using a "so-called hidden button," and can be considered to be positioned as a "highly difficult acceptance period." Therefore, even after acceptance, it is desirable to provide different performance information from both the mode as the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the mode as the disappearance EF performance, in order to stimulate the performance of the player.

When this configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 213, it is desirable that the form of the disappearance EF effect that appears when no acceptance has been made is different from any of the multiple forms of the disappearance EF effect that can appear when acceptance has been made. This makes it possible to recognize that no acceptance has been made, and also makes it possible to suggest that the acceptance period in question was a combination of the effects of the above-mentioned "first B acceptance period (the so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "second B acceptance period (the so-called hidden button effect)."

As described above, in another example of the 3B reception period, when reception is made during the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed after reception. In other words, in this case, since no information is provided regarding "in what form the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" after reception, in this situation it is desirable to provide information through the disappearance EF performance (expectation information regarding the performance after reception) in order to increase interest in the game.

Also, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judged) during the 1B acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect may be executed in a different manner than that which appears when acceptance is made, or no manner may appear. This makes it possible to recognize that no acceptance has been made, and if that manner cannot appear during the 3B acceptance period, it can suggest that the acceptance period did not combine both the presentation characteristics of the above-mentioned "1B acceptance period (so-called normal button presentation)" and the above-mentioned "2B acceptance period (so-called hidden button presentation)."

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judged) during the 3B acceptance period, the disappearance EF presentation may be executed in the same manner as the one that appears when the action (operation) is accepted. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not an action has been accepted, which enhances the presentation as a "so-called hidden button."

It is not necessary to apply all of these configurations to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (variations) may be applied to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples.

Next, we will explain the case where some of the above-mentioned modified examples are applied to the above-mentioned performance examples. That is, FIG. 214 is a modified example of the "performance that appears when an acceptance is made or not made during the 1B reception period" shown in FIG. 210, and FIG. 215 is a modified example of the "performance that appears when an acceptance is made or not made during the 3B reception period" shown in FIG. 213. Note that in this modified example, configurations that are not specifically mentioned are as described above with reference to the "performance examples related to the 1B reception period (FIGS. 200 to 202, 209, 210)" and the "performance examples related to the 3B reception period (FIGS. 206 to 208, 212, 213)," and can be similarly applied to each of the above-mentioned other examples that can be applied to the "performance examples related to the 1B reception period" and the "performance examples related to the 3B reception period."

In the modified example shown in FIG. 214, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1B acceptance period, the extinction EF effect is executed in the same manner in both cases where the 1B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgement) (see FIG. 214 (d1)-(h1)) and where the 1B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 214 (d2)-(h2)). Here, the second extinction-related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 214, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1B acceptance period (see FIG. 214 (d3)-(g3)), the extinction EF presentation is a display that does not appear when the player's action (operation) is accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1B acceptance period. Here, the third extinction-related display SKB3 is executed as the extinction EF presentation.

In contrast, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, when a player's action (operation) is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period, the extinction EF performance is executed in different manners depending on whether the 3B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) (see FIG. 215 (d1) to (h1)) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 215 (d2 to (h2)). Here, when the performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 215 (d1) to (h1)), the first extinction-related display SKB1 is executed as the extinction EF performance, and when the performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 215 (d2 to (h2)), the second extinction-related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF performance.

In addition, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period (see FIG. 215 (d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF presentation is configured to show the appearance that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 215 (d3) to (g3), since the first extinction-related display SKB1 is displayed as the extinction EF presentation, it becomes possible to recognize that if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period, the presentation progression shown in FIG. 215 (d1) to (h1) would have occurred. In contrast, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3B reception period, when the second disappearance related display SKB2 is displayed as the disappearance EF presentation, it becomes possible to recognize that the presentation progression shown in FIG. 215 (d2) to (h2) has occurred if the player's action (operation) has been accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3B reception period.

In the 1B reception period of this modified example, the "second disappearance related display SKB2" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) corresponding to the above-mentioned 3B reception period of the modified example is executed in a highly anticipated manner is used as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance) that appears when reception is made. In other words, in this case, in the 1B reception period of the modified example, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period in the modified example does not necessarily have to be the "2nd disappearance-related display SKB2". For example, even if the "1st disappearance-related display SKB1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1st B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a low expectation mode is used as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period in the modified example, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the reception is in the 1B reception period in the modified example or in the 3B reception period in the modified example.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the first B acceptance period, the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation).

It is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the third B reception period according to the modified example. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the first B reception period, it is possible to suggest that the reception period did not combine both the presentation characteristics of the above-mentioned "first B reception period (so-called normal button presentation)" and the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button presentation)."

It is also desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the first B acceptance period according to the modified example. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the first B acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

Incidentally, if the configuration according to the above-mentioned other example is applied to the 3B reception period of this modified example, in which when reception is made in the "first display state", "the post-reception performance is executed without displaying the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image))", the performance progress shown in Figures 215 (d1) to (h1) or Figures 215 (d2) to (h2), etc., will be carried out in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. In other words, if a valid reception determination is made in the first display state, the post-reception performance will begin without the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed in any of the multiple modes, and if a valid reception determination is made in the second display state, the post-reception performance will begin with the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed in any of the multiple modes.

Even in the third B acceptance period according to this modified example, if a player makes an action (operation) before timing tS2 when a state (third B acceptance period) occurs in which a "valid acceptance judgment that treats a player's action as a valid action" is permitted, the action (operation) will not be judged as a "valid acceptance judgment" at that time. However, it is possible to apply the configuration according to the above-mentioned other example, which makes it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" targeting (based on) an action (operation) made by the player before the third B acceptance period at the start of the third B acceptance period (or thereafter), as well as the configuration according to the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

In the 3B reception period according to the above modified example, if a low expectancy pattern appears as a post-3B reception performance (Fig. 215 (d1) to (h1)), the first disappearance-related display SKB1 is executed as a disappearance EF performance, but the disappearance EF performance itself may not appear.

In addition, in the 1B reception period according to the above modified example, a specific pattern appears as the disappearance EF performance when reception is made (Fig. 214 (d1)-(h1) or Fig. 214 (d2)-(h2)), and a pattern different from the specific pattern appears when no reception is made (Fig. 214 (d3)-(g3)). However, the disappearance EF performance itself may not appear when no reception is made.

In addition, in the 1B reception period according to the above modified example, the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF performance) when reception is made, but it may be executed in a mode different from the second disappearance-related display SKB2. For example, even if it is executed as the first disappearance-related display SKB1, it can be difficult to recognize whether the reception is made in the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period.

Next, an example that embodies the above "Configuration 5-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when the ball is accepted (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level suggestion performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). Here, at least a 1C reception period (1C post-reception performance), a 2C reception period (2C post-reception performance), and a 3C reception period (3C post-reception performance) are prepared as the multiple reception periods (reception performances).

With reference to Figures 216 to 230, the characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be described separately. Note that, with reference to Figures 215 and up, each reception period described above may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1C reception period (1C post-reception performance), the 2C reception period (2C post-reception performance), and the 3C reception period (3C post-reception performance), or may be realized as any of the 1C reception period (1C post-reception performance), the 2C reception period (2C post-reception performance), and the 3C reception period (3C post-reception performance). In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is only necessary to have only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to have these for each reception period described above with reference to Figures 215 and up.

Figures 216 to 218 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition 1C is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 1C reception period (1C reception presentation) occurs. Figures 225 and 226 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a 1B reception period (1B reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "1st C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1st C fluctuation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 1st C fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1st C fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 225(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "1st C fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 216(a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the timing tT2 arrives at which the 1C predetermined time has elapsed since the decorative pattern SZ variable performance started (when condition 1C is satisfied), the 1C acceptance period (valid period) is generated in which "acceptance regarding the 1C post-acceptance performance" is permitted ("the situation shown in FIGS. 209(b) and (c)"). As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1C acceptance period (when the acceptance is judged to be valid), the 1C post-acceptance performance is carried out based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) performs, in relation to the occurrence of such a 1C reception period, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time) suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that makes the mochi image display difficult to see, and a 1C post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to the reception (valid reception determination). As described above, the mochi image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display" integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time), but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also true for other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the 1C reception period occurs at timing tT2, as shown in FIG. 216(b) and FIG. 225(b) and (c), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" is displayed as an integrated mochi image display IG. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tT2, or may appear before timing tT2 and be displayed to span timing tT2. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) is hidden when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made within the 1C reception period, or when the 1C reception period ends without acceptance (valid acceptance determination). In this example, the 1C acceptance period ends at timing tT3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 216(a)).

In addition, during the 1C reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes (for example, Fig. 144(a) and (d)), and Fig. 225(b) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 144(a), and Fig. 225(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 144(d). Note that, even during the 1C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in one of a number of modes including the modes shown in Fig. 144(b) and (c).

Figure 216 assumes that a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" when a relatively early timing tT2a occurs within this 1C acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 216(a), the 1C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (1C post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1C acceptance period starts to be executed based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tT2a.

Incidentally, an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1) to FIG. 226(h1))" corresponds to a case in which a first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the 1C reception period, and an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2) to FIG. 226(h2))" corresponds to a case in which a second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the 1C reception period. The expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, during the 1C reception period, as shown in FIG. 216, at timing tT2a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 1C post-reception performance begins in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is not made invisible, nor is the integrated model image display IG made difficult to see.

In other words, the 1C post-reception performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that is at least a combination of the "1C post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "1C post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the 1C post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a combination performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed is delayed in the time at which the "1C post-reception performance display" as the 1C post-reception performance begins to be executed compared to the other performance devices, and this is intended to intentionally maintain the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 226 (d1) or (d2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period, even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as it was during the reception period even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 216 (b) and Figure 226 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tT2a when the first C acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tT2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the mock image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tT2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being unable to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, during the 1C reception period, different modes (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2) are displayed as the disappearance-related display depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) is a low-expectation mode (Fig. 226 (d1) to (h1)) or a high-expectation mode (Fig. 226 (d2) to (h2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 226 (e1) and (e2), even if the "1C post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the disappearance-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is the "first disappearance-related display SKC1" or the "second disappearance-related display SKC2", it becomes possible to guess whether the "1C post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high-expectation mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 216 (b) and Figure 226 (f1) or (f2), when timing tT2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, a "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (cut-in performance)" is executed as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of an action by the player within the 1st C reception period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 226(f1), the first mode (here, the first C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character)) is displayed as the first C post-reception performance display UGC1 corresponding to the first C reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 226(f2), the second mode (here, the first C post-reception performance display UGC1-2 as a cut-in performance by the samurai character) is displayed as the first C post-reception performance display UGC1 corresponding to the first C reception period.

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" are displayed, the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 ("1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1" or "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the 1C acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented. In addition, since the first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1 (first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1-1 or first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1-2)" while suggesting that the first C acceptance period has already ended (after timing tT2c).

On the other hand, when the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)". This makes it easy to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 216 (b) and Figure 226 (g1) or (g2), while the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1 or second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 216(b) or FIG. 226(h1) or (h2), and this allows for good visibility and causes the display related to the "first C post-reception performance display UGC1 (first C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or first C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" to be displayed.

In this regard, the "first C post-reception performance display UGC1" is displayed in one of multiple modes (here, first C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or first C post-reception performance display UGC1-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "first C post-reception performance display UGC1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the example of the performance corresponding to the 1C reception period (Figures 225 and 226), when reception is made during the 1C reception period and "1C post-reception performance display UGC1" is executed, the background image is switched before and after the start of the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1".

With this configuration, in the situation shown in Figures 226(d) and (e) where no change in the background image has occurred (timings tT2a to tT2b shown in Figure 216), even if there has been a change in the performance on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it is possible to indicate that the "first C post-reception performance display UGC1" has not yet started.

In this example, the "first C reception post-performance display UGC1" and "background change" are displayed later (timing tT2c) than the time (timing tT2b) when the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed, but they may be displayed at the same time (timing tT2b) as the time (timing tT2b) when the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 226, the post-reception performance is configured to switch to the same background image when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, but it may also be configured to switch to different background images when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, it may be configured to switch the background image when a high expectation mode appears, but not to switch the background image when a low expectation mode appears.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, when a 1C reception period occurs, various displays are performed within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 216) and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tT2c) of the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tT2a at which it was received.

In this example, when an action by a player is accepted within the 1C acceptance period, as shown in Figures 216(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, a 1C post-acceptance performance (1C post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1C post-acceptance performance (1C post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tT2a when the 1C reception period is reached is limited to only a part of the 1C post-reception performance (display of the 1C post-reception performance), and the 1C post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tT2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of emitting light for presentation. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light-emitting presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance), as shown in FIG. 226(d1), the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1C post-acceptance performance (1C post-acceptance performance display UGC1-1) using the first performance device as the 1C post-acceptance specific performance UTC1 (the 1C post-acceptance specific performance UTB1-1, which is a low expectation level mode of the 1C post-acceptance specific performance UTC1) corresponding to the 1C acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2)-(h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 226(d2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2) using the first performance device as the 1C post-reception specific performance UTC1 (1C post-reception specific performance UTC1-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 1C post-reception specific performance UTC1) corresponding to the 1C reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 225, in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a performance within the reception period is executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 1C reception period has occurred (FIGS. 225(b) and (c)). The performance within the reception period on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectation (see FIG. 225(b)) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectation (see FIG. 225(c)).

In other words, in this case, during the 1C reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" is made during the 1C reception period, while the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) continues to display the "integrated model image display IG" (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can increase the interest in the game.

In this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "special effect UTC1-1 after 1C reception" or the "special effect UTC1-2 after 1C reception" appears as the specific effect UTC1 after 1C reception. However, it is not necessary to provide multiple forms for the specific effect UTC1 after 1C reception. For example, the specific effect UTC1 after 1C reception may be provided with only the "special effect UTC1-2 after 1C reception", and the degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) may be suggested depending on whether the specific effect UTC1 after 1C reception appears. In other words, in this case, when the "special effect UTC1-2 after 1C reception" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "special effect UTC1-2 after 1C reception" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the 1C acceptance period occurs, the acceptance allowance sound starts to be output at timing tT1 shown in FIG. 216(d). In other words, the acceptance allowance sound corresponding to the 1C acceptance period is audibly output across timing tT2 when the 1C acceptance period occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 225(b) and (c)"), and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the first C reception period, the first long allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, and the first short allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively short time, are output as the reception allowable sound. In the example shown in FIG. 216(d), the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound may be started to be output at timing tT2 when the first C reception period occurs or after that.

In the first C reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated midway (terminating the audible output state midway) based on the acceptance.

In this regard, it is desirable that the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation (as shown in FIG. 225(b)) and in a manner with high expectation (as shown in FIG. 225(c)), as shown in FIG. 216(d). That is, in this case, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the expectation during the reception period, but unlike the "integrated model image display IG", they are executed in such a way that once acceptance (valid reception determination) is made, it becomes impossible to confirm it, and therefore it is expected that the tension as to when during the reception period acceptance (valid reception determination) will be made will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the 1C reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound (first long allowable sound, first short allowable sound) is being audibly output, not only is the reception allowable sound terminated midway, but the audible output of the 1C post-reception performance sound is started based on the acceptance. The 1C post-reception performance sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation, and for example, it may be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation. In other words, in this case, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, during the 1C reception period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed during the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance (1C post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1", as shown in FIG. 216(d), this type of 1C post-reception performance sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden. Also, for the 1C post-reception performance sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1)-(h1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2)-(h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation).

Note that during the first C reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sound, but it is not necessary to output these two permissible sounds, and only one reception permissible sound may be output.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 1C acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 1C post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1)-(h1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2)-(h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during a reception period other than the 1C acceptance period. With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast, FIG. 217 assumes the case where a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively late timing tT2A occurs within such a 1C acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 217(a), the 1C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (1C post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1C acceptance period is started based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tT2A.

In this regard, in the 1C reception period, even if the reception (valid reception judgment) is made at a relatively late timing tT2A in the 1C reception period (no matter what timing the reception (valid reception judgment) is made), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (valid reception judgment) was made at a relatively early timing tT2a in the 1C reception period. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 217(a), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1)-(h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a performance after reception) and cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2)-(h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a performance after reception), and in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device, the performance will basically be executed as described with reference to FIG. 216, etc.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 217, because acceptance (valid acceptance determination) was made at a relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C acceptance period, the display area of the gauge image is further reduced in the situation shown in FIG. 226(d) and the like. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 226, as shown in FIG. 226(d), acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made while the first short permissible sound has already ended its audible output, so that acceptance (valid acceptance determination) does not cause the first short permissible sound to end midway (terminate the audible output state midway).

In the example shown in FIG. 217, the time for which the "1C post-reception performance display" based on the fact that the reception (valid reception judgment) has been made is displayed is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. 216. In other words, the "1C post-reception specific performance" and the "1C post-reception performance sound" are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time that the reception (valid reception judgment) has been made, whereas the "1C post-reception performance display" is terminated (not displayed) when the predetermined timing tT4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of when the reception (valid reception judgment) was made. With this configuration, it is expected that the tension regarding when the reception (valid reception judgment) will be made during the reception period will be appropriately maintained.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 218 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 225(b) to "G3 (Figure 226(d3) to (g3))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 1C reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 218, after the 1C reception period occurs, the timing tT3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tT3 (the point at which the 1C reception period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, nor does it make it difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 226 (d3), in the same way as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tT2a or tT2A (the point at which the action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1C reception period (or the point at which the performance after acceptance begins)).

With this configuration, even if the first C reception period ends before the player's action (operation) is received in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the first C reception period after the period has ended, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 226 (e3), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1C reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the 1C reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 1C reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C acceptance period, the "first extinction-related display SKC1" is displayed as the extinction-related display (extinction EF performance). That is, in this case, it is expected that the player will sense the possibility that the post-1C acceptance performance would have suggested low expectations if the action (operation) by the player had been accepted within the 1C acceptance period. This makes it possible to encourage the player to be glad that he or she did not make the action (operation) within the 1C acceptance period, and is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C acceptance period.

However, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the first C acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SKC2" may be displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF presentation), or a display different from either the "first disappearance related display SKC1" or the "second disappearance related display SKC2" may be displayed.

Also, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C acceptance period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) may be executed in a manner that would have appeared if the action (operation) had been accepted. That is, in this case, the appearance of the "first disappearance-related display SKC1" in the situation shown in Fig. 226 (e3) means that if the action (operation) by the player had been accepted within the 1C acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from Fig. 225 (b) to "G1 (Fig. 226 (d1) to (h1))" (the presentation after acceptance with a relatively low expectation would have been executed). On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 226(e3), the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" appears when the player's action (operation) was accepted during the 1C acceptance period, and the performance would have progressed from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2)-(h2))" (when a relatively highly anticipated post-acceptance performance was executed). In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) was not accepted during the 1C acceptance period, after the 1C acceptance period ends, the player can recognize whether the 1C post-acceptance performance was executed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode simply by checking the mode as the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" that appears in association with the integrated model image display IG being hidden, and therefore it is possible to suitably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 226(f3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the first disappearance-related display SKC1)", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 226(g3), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the first disappearance-related display SKC1))" is hidden.

As mentioned above, during the 1C reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(d) (see FIG. 209(c)) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a) (see FIG. 225(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 225(c) occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in FIG. 225(b) above is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)," and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the performance progresses from FIG. 225(c) to "G1'", the content is basically the same as when the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1)-(h1))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Also, when the performance progresses from FIG. 225(c) to "G2'", the content is basically the same as when the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2)-(h2))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Furthermore, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 225(c) to "G3'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G3 (FIG. 226(d3)-(g3))", with only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) being changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd".

For ease of explanation, during the 1C reception period in this performance example, the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display UGC, 1C post-reception specific performance UTC, 1C post-reception performance sound) is executed with the same performance content (type) as the 1B post-reception performance corresponding to the above-mentioned 1B reception period. However, it is desirable to use different performance content (type) for the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance, post-reception performance sound) between the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

In addition, for the sake of convenience, in the 1C reception period of this performance example, the disappearance-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance-related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned 1B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same in the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

Figures 219 to 221 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition 2C is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a second C reception period (second C reception presentation) occurs. Figure 227 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a second C reception period (second C reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "second C variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second C variation pattern. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the second C variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second C variation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 227(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "second C variation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 219(a), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the 2C acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the 2C post-acceptance performance" is permitted when the timing tU2 arrives (condition 2C is satisfied) after the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ, and thus when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 2C acceptance period (valid acceptance is determined), the 2C post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance determination).

However, during the second C acceptance period in this embodiment, unlike when the first C acceptance period occurs, the integrated model image display IG (the "model image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed at the time when the player's operation is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (or when the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed).

More specifically, in the second C variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 219(b) and FIG. 227(b), when timing tU2 arrives, the second C acceptance period occurs and the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)) is displayed. The second C acceptance period ends when timing tU3 arrives if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 219(a)).

Figure 219 assumes that during such a second C acceptance period, when a relatively early timing tU2a arrives, a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 219(a), the second C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (second C post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second C acceptance period starts to be executed based on the player's action (operation) being accepted (valid acceptance determination being made) at timing tU2a.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 227(b) to FIG. 227(c) corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectation is executed as the second C post-reception performance corresponding to the second C reception period (such as "second C post-reception performance display", "second C post-reception specific performance", "second B post-reception performance sound", etc.). The illustration of the case where the first mode with relatively low expectation is executed as the second C post-reception performance (such as "second C post-reception performance display", "second C post-reception specific performance", "second C post-reception performance sound", etc.) is omitted, and in fact, the performance may progress from FIG. 227(b) to a situation where the second C post-reception performance is executed in the omitted mode (first mode with low expectation). However, for such a 2C reception period, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made, the 2C post-reception performance (such as a "2C post-reception performance display", a "2C post-reception specific performance", or a "2C post-reception performance sound") may be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 227(c) (a type in which a low expectation mode is not provided as a post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display, 1C post-reception specific performance, 1C post-reception performance sound)). The expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, in this example of the performance (second C reception period), as described above, as shown in FIG. 219(b) and FIG. 227(c), at timing tU2a, which is the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted (the time when the second C post-reception performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG (the "model image display" or the "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed. Note that, more strictly speaking, FIG. 227(c) shows the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tU2c shown in FIG. 219(c). In other words, at timing tU2a, the "second C post-reception performance display UGC2 (group preview performance)" of the second C post-reception performance is not executed, and the "second C post-reception specific performance UTC2-2" and the "second C post-reception performance sound (high expectation mode)" are executed. With this configuration, the performance will progress in the same manner as in the performance after 1C reception, so the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Therefore, in this presentation example (2nd C reception period), as shown in Figures 219 and 227 (b), no matter when acceptance (valid reception determination) is made during the 2nd C reception period, the above-mentioned disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will not be executed. This is because, at the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted (the time when the 2nd C post-reception presentation starts in response to acceptance), the integrated model image display IG (the "model image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed, and there is no need to make it difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 219(b) and FIG. 227(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when timing tU2c, which is later than timing tU2a, arrives, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) starts to execute "2nd C post-reception performance display UGC2 (in the figure, 2nd C post-reception performance display UGC2-2 as a group preview performance by ghost characters, which is a highly anticipated aspect)" as a post-reception performance in response to the acceptance of the player's action within the 2nd C reception period. Then, as shown in FIG. 219(b) and FIG. 227(d), the "2nd C post-reception performance display UGC2" thus started ends (is hidden) when a predetermined time (a certain time) has passed since the acceptance (valid acceptance determination).

Note that in the example of the performance corresponding to the second C reception period (Figure 227), unlike the first C reception period, there is no switching of the background image when the "post-second C reception performance display UGC2" is executed.

In addition, when an action by the player is accepted within the second C acceptance period, as shown in Figures 219 (b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the second C post-acceptance performance (second C post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the second C post-acceptance performance (second C post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 227(b) to FIG. 227(c) (when the expectation level is relatively high as the post-reception performance), the mode in which a "ghost" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the second C post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance display UGC2-2) using the first performance device as the second C post-reception specific performance UTC2 (second C post-reception specific performance UTC2-2, which is a high expectation level mode of the second C post-reception specific performance UTC2) corresponding to the second C reception period. As described above, the explanation of the case in which a low expectation level mode is executed as the second C post-reception performance is omitted, but the "second C post-reception performance display" and the "second C post-reception specific performance UTC2" are executed in a low expectation mode, and are basically the same as when they are executed in a high expectation mode.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third performance device (speaker). However, when the second C reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 219(d), the reception permission sound is not output.

In addition, during the first C reception period, when reception is made, the audible output of the second C post-reception sound is initiated based on this. The second C post-reception sound is executed to indicate the degree of expectation, and may be executed (audible output) in a manner that indicates low expectation, or in a manner that indicates high expectation, for example.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 2C acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 2C post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. In other words, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with high or low expectations.

In contrast, the example of progression from Figure 220 and Figures 227(b) and (e) to Figure 227(c) assumes a case where a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively late timing tU2A arrives within such a second C acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in Figure 220(a), the second C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (second C post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second C acceptance period begins to be executed based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination being made) at timing tU2A.

In this regard, during the second C acceptance period, even if acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) is made at a relatively late timing tU2A within the second C acceptance period (no matter what timing acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) is made), the presentation will basically proceed in the same manner as if acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) was made at a relatively early timing tU2a within the second C acceptance period. Therefore, at the time when the player's operation is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) (or at the time when the post-acceptance presentation begins to be executed), the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed. Also, in the example where the performance progresses from Figure 220 (a) or Figure 227 (b) or (e) to Figure 227 (c), there are cases where the performance after reception has a relatively high expectation and cases where the illustration is omitted (case where the performance after reception has a relatively low expectation), and in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device will basically execute the performance as described with reference to Figure 219 etc.

In particular, during the 2nd C reception period, unlike the 1st C reception period, the "2nd C post-reception performance display", like the "2nd C post-reception specific performance" and "2nd C post-reception performance sound", is executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of reception (valid reception determination), so the appearance of the post-reception performance is the same regardless of the timing of reception (valid reception determination).

Note that the "2nd C post-reception performance display", "2nd C post-reception specific performance", and "2nd C post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a set period of time, and do not have to end at the same time as each other.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 221 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 227(b) and (e) to Figure 227(d) are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the second C reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 221, after the second C acceptance period occurs, the timing tU3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, when no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the second C acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 221, no performance related to its end will be executed.

In addition, in the second C reception period, only one mode (integrated Momo image display IGb (see FIG. 144 (b))) is displayed as the Momo image display. The integrated Momo image display IGb is a mode that is not displayed in the first C reception period or the third C reception period. However, the second C reception period is characterized in that, regardless of the timing at which the reception (valid reception determination) is made, the Momo image display (gauge image) is not displayed at the time when the reception (valid reception determination) is made (or at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed). Therefore, in the second C reception period, any mode may appear as the Momo image display, or it may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. In addition, in the second C reception period, the Momo image display may not be displayed, and a gauge image may be displayed. In addition, in the second C reception period, the gauge image may not be displayed, and the Momo image display may be displayed. Additionally, during the second C reception period, neither the mock image display nor the gauge image may be displayed.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned characteristics of the second C reception period, after reception has been made, it becomes possible to concentrate only on the aspect of the post-reception performance without worrying about the aspect of the model image display (gauge image). In this case, even if the first C reception period and the third C reception period are subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function, it is desirable to make the second C reception period not subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function. As a result, the occurrence of a post-reception performance is limited to the case where the player himself operates the device after confirming the performance aspect during the second C reception period, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the model image display or gauge image not being displayed at the end of the second C reception period or thereafter.

Figures 222 to 224 are time charts showing examples of the presentation content when condition 3C is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 3C reception period (3C reception presentation) occurs. Figures 228 to 230 are diagrams showing presentation examples in a variation pattern in which a 3C reception period (3C reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "3C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3C fluctuation pattern. Then, the fluctuation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 3C fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3C fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 228(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "3C fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 222(a), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the 3C acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the 3C post-acceptance performance" is permitted when timing tV2 arrives (condition 3C is satisfied) after the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ, and the 3C post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 3C acceptance period.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) displays, in relation to the occurrence of such a 3C reception period, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time) suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) making the mochi image display difficult to see, and a 1C post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to the reception (valid reception determination). As described above, the mochi image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display" integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time), but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also true for other reception periods.

In this regard, the 3C reception period in this embodiment is realized as a special presentation that combines the above-mentioned "presentation due to the 1C reception period (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time of reception (or at the time when post-reception performance starts))" and the above-mentioned "2C reception period" presentation (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is not displayed at the time of reception (or at the time when post-reception performance starts)).

More specifically, when a 3C reception period occurs during which acceptance of operations by the player is permitted, first, as shown in FIG. 222(b) and FIG. 228(b), an integrated Moji image display IG ("Moji image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is displayed (timing tV2). However, depending on the timing of the 3C reception period at which the operation by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination), the Moji image display and gauge image may or may not be displayed at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made (or when the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed).

As will be described later, in this presentation example, as shown in Figure 222 (a) etc., if an operation by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) within the period (first period) from the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period to timing Y at which a predetermined time has elapsed, then a model image display or gauge image will not be displayed at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) is made (or the time when the post-acceptance presentation starts to be executed), and if an operation by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) within the period (second period) from timing Y to the end of the 3C acceptance period, then a model image display or gauge image will be displayed at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) is made (or the time when the post-acceptance presentation starts to be executed). However, this is merely one example, and what is essential is that when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made at a first timing within the 3C acceptance period, the model image display and gauge image are in a hidden state (not displayed) at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made (or the time when the post-acceptance performance starts to be executed), and when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made at a second timing different from the first timing within the 3C acceptance period, the model image display and gauge image are displayed at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made (or the time when the post-acceptance performance starts to be executed).

According to this type of third C reception period, from the time the third C reception period occurs until timing Y arrives, even if an acceptance is made, the corresponding third C post-reception performance will be initiated with the integrated model image display IG not displayed (not visible), and from timing Y until timing tV3, when the third C reception period ends, the corresponding third C post-reception performance will be initiated with the integrated model image display IG displayed (it is sufficient that at least a part of the integrated model image display IG is visible). As a result, the 3C acceptance period in this embodiment is realized as a special presentation that combines the above-mentioned "presentation due to the 1C acceptance period (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time of acceptance (or when the post-acceptance performance starts))" and the above-mentioned "2C acceptance period" presentation (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is not displayed at the time of acceptance (or when the post-acceptance performance starts))," which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In other words, in this case, by adjusting the operation timing for the 3C reception period, the player can essentially select whether to start the 3C post-reception performance with the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and gauge image) displayed so that the appearance of the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and gauge image) that was displayed during the 3C reception period is visible, or to start the 3C post-reception performance with the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and gauge image) hidden in order to concentrate on the 3C post-reception performance, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In order to more effectively realize such a performance, during the 3C reception period, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes with different expectation levels (for example, in one of Figs. 144(a) and (c)), and Fig. 228(b) corresponds to the case where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 144(a), and Fig. 228(d) corresponds to the case where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 144(c), etc. It is preferable that the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes including the modes shown in Figs. 144(b) and (d) during the 3C reception period as well.

Figure 222 assumes a case where, during the above-mentioned "first period (first state) (see, for example, Figure 228(b))" of such a 3C reception period (timing tV2a in the figure), "a valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action." That is, in this case, as shown in Figure 222(a), the 3C reception period ends and the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period starts to be executed based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (a valid reception determination is made) at timing tV2a.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 228(b) to "H1 (FIG. 229(d1) to FIG. 229(h1))" corresponds to a case where a "valid reception determination" is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, and as a result, a first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the "3C reception post-performance", and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 228(b) to "H2 (FIG. 229(d2) to FIG. 229(h2))" corresponds to a case where a "valid reception determination" is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, and as a result, a second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the "3C reception post-performance". The expectation (probability of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As mentioned above, if a "valid acceptance determination" is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C acceptance period, then as shown in FIG. 222(b) and FIG. 229(d1) or (d2), at timing tV2a when the player's action (operation) is accepted (when the 3C post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is made non-displayed and is not displayed (made invisible).

According to this configuration, if the player performs an action (operation) during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period (if a "valid reception determination" is made), the player will be able to enjoy the post-reception performance (here, the 3C post-reception specific performance UTC3) in a state in which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is not displayed (is not visible).

In this regard, in the 3C reception period in this presentation example, even if the player performs an action (operation) during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)", when a predetermined time has passed since timing tV2a when the action (operation) was performed (when timing tV2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will start as shown in FIG. 229 (e1) or (e2).

In other words, in the 3C reception period in this example, when an action (operation) by the player is received during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)", even though the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is no longer displayed (is not visible) at the time when timing tV2b arrives, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" begins to be displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" was displayed.

This configuration makes it possible to ideally indicate that a post-acceptance performance is being executed in response to a player's action being properly accepted.

In addition, if the reception is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" that provides the presentation of the above-mentioned "second C reception period" during the third C reception period (presentation in which no mock image or gauge image is displayed at the time the reception is made (or at the time the post-reception presentation begins)), it is difficult to know whether the reception was made during the second C reception period or the third C reception period, but the appearance of the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation)" that cannot appear during the second C reception period makes it possible to know that the reception was made during the third C reception period.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is executed in the same manner when a low expectation mode (Fig. 229 (d1)-(h1)) appears as the 3C post-reception performance and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 229 (d2)-(h2)) appears. With this configuration, compared to the 1C reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) differs depending on the expectation), the importance of paying attention to the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display)" after reception during the 3C reception period is lower, and coupled with the fact that the model image display (gauge image) is not displayed, it becomes possible to concentrate on what appearance will appear as the 3C post-reception performance display UGC.

In addition, in the 3C reception period according to this performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that appears when reception is made uses the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) corresponding to the above-mentioned 1C reception period is executed in a highly anticipated manner. In other words, in this case, in the 3C reception period, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period does not necessarily have to be the "2nd disappearance-related display SKC2". For example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period may be the "1st disappearance-related display SKC1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1st C post-reception performance) corresponding to the above 1C reception period is executed in a low expectation mode, or a disappearance-related display that does not correspond to the 1C reception period may be used.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 222 (b) and Figure 229 (f1) or (f2), when timing tV2c arrives during the period during which a display related to the disappearance-related display (a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (conversation announcement)" as a post-reception performance in response to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player within the 3rd C reception period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H1 (FIG. 229(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 229(f1), the first mode (here, the third C post-reception performance display UGC3-1, which is a "silent" conversation announcement) is displayed as the third C post-reception performance display UGC3 corresponding to the third C reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 228(a) to "H2 (FIG. 229(d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 229(f2), the second mode (here, the third C post-reception performance display UGC3-2, which is a conversation announcement that mentions "chance") is displayed as the third C post-reception performance display UGC3 corresponding to the third C reception period.

In other words, in this case, the "integrated model image display IG" is not displayed, and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is displayed, and the "third C post-reception performance display UGC3 ("third C post-reception performance display UGC3-1" or "third C post-reception performance display UGC3-2") begins to be executed.

In this regard, when the "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 ("3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1" or "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-2") is displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)," and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is displayed with priority. In this way, by making it difficult for the player to see the object of his or her gaze (3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3), it is possible to encourage even greater concentration.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display of the "3C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is started in this way, as shown in FIG. 222(b) and FIG. 229(g1), (h1) or (g2), (h2), the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is hidden while the "3C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is displayed, and thus the display of the "3C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is performed with good visibility.

In this regard, the "third C post-reception performance display UGC3" is displayed in one of a number of modes (here, third C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or third C post-reception performance display UGC3-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation). Therefore, the "third C post-reception performance display UGC3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In this performance example, the "Third C post-reception performance display UGC3" is started to be displayed at a later time (timing tV2c) than the time (timing tV2b) when the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is started to be displayed, but it may be started to be displayed at the same time (timing tV2b) as the time (timing tV2b) when the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is started to be displayed.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period, as shown in Figures 222(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the 3C post-acceptance performance (3C post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 3B post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, even if the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is configured to display the 3C post-reception performance after displaying the disappearance-related display, the 3C post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tV2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H1 (FIG. 229(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance), as shown in FIG. 229(d1), the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 3C post-acceptance performance (3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-1) using the first performance device as the 3C post-acceptance specific performance UTC3 (3C post-acceptance specific performance UTC3-1, which is a low expectation level mode of the 3C post-acceptance specific performance UTC3) corresponding to the 3C acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 228(a) to "H2 (FIG. 229(d2)-(h2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 229(d2), the mode in which "吉" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is set to begin execution prior to the 3C post-reception presentation (3C post-reception presentation display UGC3-2) using the first presentation device as the 3C post-reception specific presentation UTC3 (3C post-reception specific presentation UTC3-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 3C post-reception specific presentation UTC3) corresponding to the 3C reception period.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 229, when the 3C reception period is in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" (FIG. 229(b)) and when the 3C reception period is in the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" (FIG. 229(c)), the reception period effect is executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 3C reception period has occurred. The reception period effect on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a low expectation mode (see FIG. 228(b)) and a high expectation mode (see FIG. 228(d)).

In other words, in this case, during the 3C reception period when the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" during the 3C reception period, the "integrated model image display IG" will be hidden on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can increase the interest in the game.

In this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "special effect UTC3-1 after 3C reception" or the "special effect UTC3-2 after 3C reception" appears as the specific effect UTC3 after 3C reception. However, it is not necessary to provide multiple forms for the specific effect UTC3 after 3C reception. For example, the specific effect UTC3 after 3C reception may be provided with only the "special effect UTC-2 after 3C reception", and the degree of expectation (the proportion of jackpots that have been obtained) may be suggested depending on whether the "special effect UTC3-2 after 3C reception" appears. In other words, in this case, when the "special effect UTC-2 after 3C reception" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "special effect UTC-2 after 3C reception" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the third C reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound starts to be output at timing tV1 shown in FIG. 222(d). The reception allowable sound corresponding to the third C reception period is audibly output across both timing tV2 when the third C reception period occurs and timing Y when the "first period" transitions to the "second period", and while the reception allowable sound is being audibly output, the player's actions (operations) can be accepted. However, the reception allowable sound only needs to be audibly output across timing Y, and it does not necessarily have to be audibly output across timing tV2.

In this case, during the third C reception period, a third permissible sound different from either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound is audibly output as the reception permissible sound, thereby making it possible to indicate that a third C reception period combining multiple performance features will occur (or is occurring) rather than the first C reception period. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the third C reception period may be executed as either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound.

In the third C acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the third permissible sound) is being audibly output, the acceptance permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is not terminated midway) based on the acceptance, which also makes it possible to suggest that a third C acceptance period combining multiple presentation aspects will occur (or is occurring) rather than the first C acceptance period. However, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the third C acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on the acceptance.

In this regard, it is desirable that the reception permissible sound (here, the third permissible sound) corresponding to the third C reception period be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectations (as shown in FIG. 228(b)) and executed (audibly output) in a manner with high expectations (as shown in FIG. 228(d)), as shown in FIG. 222(d).

As shown in FIG. 222(d), the 3C post-reception sound effect will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" are hidden, just like the "3C post-reception sound effect UGC3". In addition, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) for the 3C post-reception sound effect in an example where the effect progresses from FIG. 228(a) to "H1 (FIG. 229(d1)-(h1))" (when expectations are relatively low for the post-reception effect) and an example where the effect progresses from FIG. 228(a) to "H2 (FIG. 229(d2)-(h2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception effect).

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 3C acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 3C post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H1 (FIG. 229(d1)-(h1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H2 (FIG. 229(d2)-(h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during an acceptance period other than the 3C acceptance period (for example, the 1C acceptance period, or a predetermined acceptance period other than each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods). With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast, examples in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 223 or FIG. 228(b), (c) to "H3 (FIG. 230(d3)-(h3))" or "H4 (FIG. 230(d4)-(h4))" are based on the assumption that a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" of the 3C acceptance period (timing tV2A in the figures). That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 223(a), FIG. 230(d3)-(h3) or FIG. 230(d4)-(h4), the 3C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance presentation (3C post-acceptance presentation) corresponding to the 3C acceptance period is started based on the fact that the player's action (operation) is accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tV2A.

In this regard, during the 3C reception period, even if acceptance (valid reception determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (when acceptance is made in the state shown in Figure 228 (c)), after the acceptance is made, the presentation will basically proceed in the same manner as if acceptance (valid reception determination) was made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" within the 3B reception period (when acceptance is made in the state shown in Figure 228 (b)). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 223(a), there are cases where the presentation progresses from FIG. 228(c) in a relatively low-expectation mode as a post-reception presentation (the presentation progresses to "H3 (FIG. 230(d3)-(h3))"), and cases where the presentation progresses from FIG. 228(c) in a relatively high-expectation mode as a post-reception presentation (the presentation progresses to "H4 (FIG. 230(d4)-(h4))"), and in the first, second, and third presentation devices, the presentation is basically executed as described with reference to FIG. 222, etc.

However, as described above, the 3C reception period in this embodiment is realized as a special presentation that combines the above-mentioned "presentation due to the 1C reception period (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed)" and the above-mentioned "2C reception period" presentation (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed), and when acceptance (valid reception determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (when acceptance is made in the state shown in FIG. 228(c)), the above-mentioned "1C reception period" presentation (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed) appears.

As is clear when comparing "Fig. 230 (d3)-(h3) or (d4)-(h4)" with "Fig. 229 (d1)-(h1) or (d2)-(h2)", if acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C acceptance period (if acceptance is made in the state shown in Fig. 228(c)), the integrated model image display IG will not be hidden but will continue to be displayed when the 3C post-acceptance performance begins to be executed.

In addition, such an integrated model image display IG will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed even when the "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (conversation announcement)" begins to be executed (see Figure 223 and Figure 230 (f3) or (f4)). The integrated model image display IG is not displayed with priority over the "2nd disappearance related display SKC2" and is displayed behind it, but is displayed with priority over the "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (conversation announcement)", making it easier to recognize in which form it was displayed during the reception period.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C acceptance period, when the display related to the "3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3 (3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-2)" begins, as shown in Figure 223 (b) and Figure 230 (g3) or (g4), while the "3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3 (3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 223(b) or FIG. 230(h3) or (h4), and this allows for good visibility and causes the display related to the "third C post-reception performance display UGC3 (third C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or third C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" to be displayed.

Other presentation aspects (e.g., specific post-acceptance presentation, disappearance-related display, post-acceptance display presentation, permissible sound, post-acceptance presentation, acceptance sound, etc.) when acceptance is made during the second period (second state) within the 3C acceptance period are as explained with reference to FIG. 229 (or the same as the presentation example shown in FIG. 213), so explanations will be omitted here.

In the example of the performance corresponding to the 3C reception period (Figs. 228 to 230), even if the reception is made during the 3C reception period and the "3C reception post-performance display UGC3" is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the start of the "3C reception post-performance display UGC3". With this configuration, the case where the reception is made during the 1C reception period and the case where the reception is made during the second period within the 3C reception period are the same in that the post-reception performance starts while the integrated model image display IG is displayed, but by checking whether the background image changes in response to the reception, it becomes possible to recognize whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period has occurred. In contrast, when acceptance occurs during the second C acceptance period and when acceptance occurs during the first period within the third C acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance begins without the integrated model image display IG being displayed, but by checking whether or not a "disappearance-related display" is executed in response to acceptance, it becomes possible to recognize whether the second C acceptance period or the third C acceptance period has occurred.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the "3C post-reception performance display", like the "3C post-reception specific performance" and "3C post-reception performance sound", is executed for a predetermined time (a fixed period of time) from the time of reception (valid reception determination), so the appearance of the post-reception performance is the same regardless of the timing of reception (valid reception determination).

Note that the "3C post-reception performance display", "3C post-reception specific performance", and "3C post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a set period of time, and do not have to end at the same time as each other.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 224 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 228(c) to "H4 (Figure 230(d5) to (g5))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 3C reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 224, after the 3C reception period occurs, the timing tV3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tV3 (the point at which the 3C reception period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, as shown in FIG. 230 (d5), in the same way as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tV2A (the point at which actions (operations) by the player are accepted during the second period within the 3C reception period), does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the 3C acceptance period ends before the player's action (operation) is accepted in time, it is possible to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the 3C acceptance period after the end of the period, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 230 (e5), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3C reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the 3C reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 3C reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the third C acceptance period, the "third disappearance related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance).

It is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the first C acceptance period. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the third C acceptance period, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period had both the above-mentioned "first C acceptance period performance (performance in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the post-acceptance performance starts))" and the above-mentioned "second C acceptance period" performance (performance in which a model image display or gauge image is not displayed at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the post-acceptance performance starts)).

It is also desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the third C acceptance period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the third C acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

After this, as shown in FIG. 230(f5), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKB3)," the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 230(g5), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKB3))" is hidden.

As mentioned above, during the third C reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(c) (see FIGS. 228(d) and (e)) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a) (see FIGS. 228(b) and (c)). When the situation shown in FIGS. 228(d) and (e) occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in FIGS. 228(b) and (c) above is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)", and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 228(d) to "H1'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H1 (FIG. 229(d1)-(h1))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Also, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 228(d) to "H2'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H2 (FIG. 229(d2)-(h2))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Also, when the performance progresses from FIG. 228(e) to "H3'", the content is basically the same as the content of the performance progresses from FIG. 228(c) to "H3 (FIG. 230(d3) to (h3))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Also, when the performance progresses from FIG. 228(e) to "H4'", the content is basically the same as the content of the performance progresses from FIG. 228(c) to "H4 (FIG. 229(d4) to (h4))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Furthermore, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 228(e) to "H5'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 228(c) to "H5 (FIG. 230(d5)-(g5))", with only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) being changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc".

For ease of explanation, during the 3C reception period in this performance example, the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance display UGC, 3C post-reception specific performance UTC, 3C post-reception performance sound) is executed with the same performance content (type) as the 3B post-reception performance corresponding to the above-mentioned 3B reception period. However, it is desirable to use different performance content (type) for the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance, post-reception performance sound) between the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

In addition, for the sake of convenience, during the 3C reception period in this performance example, the disappearance-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance-related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned 3B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same during the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present application, which provides the 1B reception period through the 3B reception period, provides the following excellent effects.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple reception periods (1C reception period to 3C reception period) are prepared with different presentation contents (post-reception presentations such as cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc., which are types of pre-notification presentations (expectation indication presentations)) that are carried out when a ball is accepted, and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of a different type according to the result of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the 1C reception period to the 3C reception period, when the action of the player is accepted, the post-acceptance performance display (1C post-acceptance performance display to the 3C post-acceptance performance display) can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Among these, in the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, when the action of the player is accepted, not only is the post-acceptance performance display displayed based on the fact that the action has been accepted, but the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is also made to appear. That is, in this case, not only is it possible to check which aspect of the model image display (or gauge image) has appeared even after the action has been accepted, but the visibility of the model image display (or gauge image) is reduced by the "aspect in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" until the model image display (or gauge image) is hidden, so that the player's focus is expected to naturally shift from the model image display (or gauge image) to the "post-acceptance performance display". In addition, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is a display in which the same format can be used in common for multiple reception periods in which different performance content is carried out when the application is accepted (see Figure 226 (e2) and Figure 229 (e2), etc.).

However, because the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the reception period when reception has not yet been made, if the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were to be displayed after reception has been made, it would be difficult to tell whether the post-reception performance display corresponding to the reception has already been displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game would decrease. In this regard, when reception is made during either the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period (second period), the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made invisible (invisible) while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, whereas the post-reception performance display is displayed while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, a transition in display presentation from the pre-acceptance display (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance presentation display) is realized while "a display in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-acceptance performance display" are common in that they are both displayed based on acceptance. However, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" refers to, for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (e1) and FIG. 230 (e3), which appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. In contrast, the "post-acceptance performance display" refers to, for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (f1) and FIG. 230 (f3), which appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see even if it is displayed when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed.

In this regard, in the above example, if the operation is accepted during the first period of the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance-related display and the post-acceptance performance display are started to be displayed while the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are already in a non-display state, as shown in FIG. 229 (e1), etc., so that the player can concentrate on "what form will appear as the post-acceptance performance display." In addition, by adjusting whether the operation is accepted during the first or second period of the 3C acceptance period, it becomes possible to select whether the post-acceptance performance display is started to be executed while the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) continue to be displayed, or whether the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made non-display before the post-acceptance performance display is started, which can increase the interest in the game.

As for the "mode in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", methods of "appearing so as to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" include a method of realizing this by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) as a priority display (displaying in a front layer) in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, as well as a method of displaying an image (video) that is made so that a part of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appears missing (unrecognizable) by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, instead of displaying an image other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. In response to this, a method for making the "post-reception performance display" "appear so as not to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" can be adopted, such as a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, but displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displaying in a rear layer) in such a way that the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is given priority display, or a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in an area excluding the area in which the Moji image display is displayed, at least while the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed.

In addition, as a "mode in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)," it is possible to adopt both a method of displaying an image display other than the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, and a method of changing a numerical value (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears before the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to see by the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)." This means that while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are visible, the "post-acceptance performance display" may soon appear, and it is possible to encourage the player to prepare in advance by changing his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)."

In addition, if a win is accepted during the 1C acceptance period and the 3C acceptance period (second period), the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can remain displayed even after the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a wider range of performance related to the "post-acceptance performance display" during the period in which the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game by changing the performance during such a display period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, as shown in Figures 226 and 230, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed not only in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are not displayed. And, in this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of it, but it is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is difficult to see due to the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

With this configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears to make it difficult to see not only the replica image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception performance display", which is expected to improve both the performance until the replica image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" begins to be displayed.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" is not displayed after reception has been made and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, a post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) that does not make it difficult to see the mock-up image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) can be made to appear in addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance). This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance prior to this without interfering with the performance in the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to appear before the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) appears, in a situation where the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has not yet appeared. Also, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to continue until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has ended.

With this configuration, players who dislike the complex presentation of the first presentation device can enjoy the post-reception presentation with the second presentation device, which has a more simplified presentation, thereby increasing the interest of various types of players.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of performances related to the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, the model image display will be displayed by dynamic display, as described above with reference to Figures 145 and 146. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the model image display is not terminated after acceptance and continues (until it is made non-displayable) even while the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is appearing.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is designed to make it difficult to see not only the mock image display, but also the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period. This prevents the appearance of remaining time being seen even if the gauge image is displayed after reception.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the 3C acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, the "3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3" can be displayed based on the acceptance, but in addition to the 3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3, the above-mentioned mode (second disappearance-related display SKC2) that also corresponds to the 1C acceptance period can be made to appear as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance).

With this configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKC2 appears, it is unclear whether the first C or third C post-reception performance display will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKC1 appears, it becomes possible to guess that the first C post-reception performance display UGC1 will appear.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is displayed (priority display) in an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. However, it is also possible to realize a performance that uses a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen, in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same pattern (second disappearance related display SKC2) appears as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance), if the type of acceptance period is different, it is desirable to make the probability (expectation level) that the jackpot pattern will stop due to the pattern change different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) can be executed using the second performance device, and during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the first performance device is configured to be in a state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and in another state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device has started based on the fact that the reception has been made, it is possible to check which aspect has appeared as the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, by making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his or her focus of attention from the "first performance device" to the "second performance device."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started so as not to affect the visibility of the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that are continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is not an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the post-reception performance display is started to be displayed after the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance), but it may be made to start to be displayed at the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed." However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image display so that the area displayed in the "area where the model image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand as time passes.

As mentioned above, the "moon image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" in this embodiment can be displayed as an integrated moon image display IG in one of multiple modes (integrated moon image displays IGa-IGd) with different degrees of expectation. According to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the display mode, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance, so it is possible to recognize in what mode the moon image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period, even after acceptance.

As mentioned above, the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or only one of the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, when the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is in a hidden state, it is sufficient that it is in a state where it is not visible to the player, and this includes, for example, a state where it is displayed on a layer, but the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is not visible because another image display is given priority. However, if at least a part of the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible to the player, this means that the aspect of the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible, so it can be said that the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is not in a hidden state, but is in a state where it continues to be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the specific performance after reception may be realized as being performed on the first performance device (within the display screen of the performance display device 1600) rather than the second performance device.

In addition, the target of the player's action (operation) during the first C reception period, second C reception period, and third C reception period does not necessarily have to be the same, and they may each call for a different action. However, if different actions are called for, the action target display (model image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will also be displayed differently.

Now, if it is desired that acceptance (valid acceptance determination) be made in the first period (first state) of the 3C acceptance period, the player is required to make the valid acceptance determination before timing Y arrives. However, if the 3C acceptance period is set as a "valid period lasting for 3 seconds", then only about 1 second will be allowed for the first period (first state). In other words, in this case, it is expected that the player will act (operate) a little before the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period due to the impatience of having to act (operate) within such a short time. In this case, if the player tries to redo the action but timing Y has already arrived by that time, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease because the player will not be able to play the way he or she wants to.

Therefore, during the 3C acceptance period, even if a player makes an action (operation) before timing tV2 when a state (3C acceptance period) occurs in which a "valid acceptance judgment that treats a player's action as a valid action" is permitted, the action (operation) will not be judged as "valid acceptance" at that time, but it is desirable to make it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" targeting (based on) an action (operation) made by the player before the 3C acceptance period at the start of the 3C acceptance period (or thereafter).

In this case, however, the detection of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player will be required to be performed regardless of whether or not the relevant 3C acceptance period, in which "a valid acceptance determination that an action performed by the player is a valid action" is permitted, has occurred.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 216, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tV2, this will be detected. However, at the time when the player's action (operation) is detected in this way, the 3C reception period has not yet occurred, so a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made based on this detection. However, the existence of this detection information is kept as a memory (history), and after the 3C reception period occurs, a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made during the 3C reception period based on the detection information kept as the memory (history). Then, the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the "valid reception determination" obtained in this way.

With this configuration, even if an action (operation) occurs shortly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, it can be accepted within the 3C reception period, and it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) triggered by this. This makes it possible to lower the difficulty of accepting the action, even while the performance described above (first period) is realized.

However, if an operation (operation) is performed significantly (more than a specified time) before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, it is desirable to prevent this from triggering the execution of the 3C post-reception performance. This type of configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value that is stored as detection information.

Note that this configuration when operated (operated) shortly before the occurrence of the third C reception period may be similarly applied to the first C reception period and the second C reception period, or may not be applied.

In addition, at this time, it is desirable to make it possible to accept (validly accepted) any action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period as a valid judgment in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" rather than in the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" after the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period. With this configuration, the action (operation) is judged as validly accepted a short time after the action (operation) is performed by the player, and thus the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed. This makes it possible to suggest that the action by the player has been properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic acceptance function" that occurs when no action (operation) is made despite the occurrence of a acceptance period, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a second C reception period and a third C reception period are prepared as reception periods during which the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) of a player's action (operation) is permitted. Then, when a "valid acceptance judgment that the player's action is a valid action" is made during the third C reception period, at the time when the above-mentioned post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the first C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first C reception period) starts to be executed, the action target display (here, a mock image display that imitates the target of the player's action (operation) and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation (see Figures 144 (a) to (d))) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden (see Figure 230), and during the second C reception period, a "valid acceptance judgment that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made. When a "valid reception determination" is made, at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (the 2nd C post-reception performance corresponding to the 2nd C reception period) starts to be executed, the action target display (here, a replica image display that imitates the target of the player's action (operation) and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation (see Figures 144 (a) to (d))) is not hidden and is not in a displayed state (no matter when the reception is made, the replica image display is in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed) (see Figure 227).

With this configuration, once the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" has begun, there will be cases where the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation (see Figures 144(a)-(d))) is visible, and cases where the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation (see Figures 144(a)-(d)))) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-acceptance performance has begun.

In addition, during the 3C acceptance period in this embodiment, depending on the timing (see Figs. 222 and 223) of the "valid acceptance judgment that determines that the action by the player is a valid action," at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) begins to be executed, the action target display (see Figs. 144(a)-(d)) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden (see Fig. 230), or the action target display (see Figs. 144(a)-(d)) may be in a hidden state (see Fig. 229).

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 228(d))" among the multiple modes (see FIG. 144(a)-(d)), it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have it continue to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 1st C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1st C reception period) has started to be executed. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 228(b))" among the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3rd C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3rd C reception period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even in a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))" or the "second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(d))" during its valid period (the 3C acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 228(d))," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-reception performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when a 3C reception period occurs, the player can essentially choose between starting the post-reception performance with the model image display displayed (see FIG. 230) or starting the post-reception performance with the model image display hidden and not visible (see FIG. 229) depending on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made during the 3C reception period (see FIG. 222 and FIG. 223), which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, the action target display is not displayed in any of the modes that can be displayed in the third C reception period (the integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) and the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 228(d) (in the example shown in FIG. 227, the integrated model image display IGb), and no matter when the "valid reception determination" is made, the action target display is not displayed and is always in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (second C post-reception performance) starts to be executed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the second C reception period or the third C reception period is occurring from the time the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

During the 3C reception period, even if the player does not perform an action (operation), the same post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed may be executed (the automatic reception function described above may be enabled). In this case, however, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that the action target display (model image display) is always in a displayed state at the time the 3C post-reception performance is executed. In other words, in this case, even if the automatic reception function starts executing the 3C post-reception performance without the player realizing it, the player will be able to easily recognize in what form the action target display (model image display) was displayed during the 3C reception period.

In addition, when the "3C reception period" is the target of the automatic reception function described above, multiple different timings may be prepared for the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled depending on the performance mode, etc. However, regardless of the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that the action target display (model image display) is always in a displayed state at the time when the 3C post-reception performance is executed.

However, during the 2nd C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that if no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (2nd C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed is not executed (this is not subject to the activation of the automatic reception function described above).

In addition, during the 3C reception period in this embodiment, whether the 3C post-reception performance is started while the action target display (model image display) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 230) or the 3C post-reception performance is started while the action target display (model image display) is not displayed (see FIG. 229), the form of the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception specific performance UTC3, 3C post-reception performance display UGC3, 3C post-reception performance sound, etc.) itself is the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to play the 3C post-reception performance by selecting the performance form from the perspective of how the player wants to enjoy it.

In addition, during the 3C reception period in this embodiment, the same disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2) is displayed regardless of whether the 3C post-reception performance is started while the action target display (model image display) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 230) or the 3C post-reception performance is started while the action target display (model image display) is not displayed (see FIG. 229). This makes it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception has been properly performed during the 3C reception period regardless of the manner in which the performance progresses.

In the above presentation example, a 1C reception period is also provided in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, and in the 1C reception period, no matter when a valid reception judgment is made that determines that the action by the player is a valid action, the action target display is not hidden but always continues to be displayed when the post-reception presentation based on the valid reception judgment begins to be executed. In other words, in this case, the 3C reception period combines the presentation characteristics of both the 1C reception period and the 2C reception period, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the action target display can be displayed in a form (integrated model image display IGd in the example shown in FIG. 225(c)) different from either of the forms that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) and integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 228(d)). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period is occurring from the time the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, during the 1C reception period in this embodiment, the action target display can also be displayed in the manner that can be displayed during the 3C reception period (the integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b)). In other words, in this case, when the integrated model image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period is occurring, so that the sense of tension during the reception period is appropriately maintained.

Note that during the third C reception period, the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 228(d) may not be displayed as the action target display, and the integrated model image display IGa (one aspect) shown in FIG. 228(b) may always be displayed.

In addition, a specific premonition display may be displayed prior to the occurrence of the 3C reception period, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to operate. In this case, however, if the action target display (model image display) is not hidden but remains displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance begins, it is desirable that the specific premonition display be displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance begins, and that the specific premonition display be not displayed. In contrast, if the action target display (model image display) is not displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance begins, it is desirable that the specific premonition display be displayed without fail at the time when the 3C post-reception performance begins.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a second C reception period and a third C reception period are prepared as reception periods during which the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) of an action (operation) by a player is permitted. Then, when a "valid acceptance judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the third C reception period, at the time when the above-mentioned post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the first C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first C reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden (see FIG. 230), and during the second C reception period, a "valid acceptance judgment that an action (operation) by a player is a valid action" is made during the third C reception period. When a "validity judgment" is made, at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the validity of acceptance judgment (the second C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second C acceptance period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different expectation levels are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) is not hidden or displayed (no matter when the acceptance is made, the frame image and the gauge image are hidden at the time when the post-acceptance performance starts to be executed) (see FIG. 227). Note that the remaining time display in the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated model image display IG, and multiple modes shown in FIG. 144 (a) to (d) (multiple modes as the frame image that forms the area in which the gauge image is displayed) are prepared as the modes.

With this configuration, once the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" has begun, there will be cases where the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are provided for at least one of the modes of the frame image and the gauge image (see Figures 144(a)-(d))) is visible and cases where the remaining time display is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-reception performance has begun.

Furthermore, during the 3C acceptance period in this embodiment, depending on the timing (see Figs. 222 and 223) of the "valid acceptance judgment that determines that the action by the player is a valid action," at the time the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) begins to be executed, the remaining time display (see Figs. 144(a)-(d)) may be in a displayed state (see Fig. 230) rather than hidden, or the remaining time display (see Figs. 144(a)-(d)) may be in a hidden state (see Fig. 229).

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 228(d))" of the multiple modes (see FIG. 144(a)-(d)), it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to continue displaying this even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed. However, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 228(b))" of the multiple modes, if this continues to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is likely to be executed in a high-expectation mode (and even in a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))" or the "second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(d))" during its valid period (the 3C acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image). On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low expectation mode, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 228 (d))," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-reception performance being executed in a low expectation mode, so it is desirable to continue the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) without hiding it.

Or, even if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))", some players may want to have the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) not hidden but remain displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations". And even if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))", some players may want to have the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations".

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when a 3C reception period occurs, the player can essentially choose between starting the post-reception performance with the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) displayed (see FIG. 230) or starting the post-reception performance with the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) hidden and therefore not visible (see FIG. 229) based on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made during the 3C reception period (see FIG. 222, FIG. 223), which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In addition, during the second C reception period in this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed in any of the modes that can be displayed during the third C reception period (the integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) and the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 228(d) (integrated model image display IGb in the example shown in FIG. 227), and no matter when the "valid reception determination" is made, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed and is always in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (second C post-reception performance) starts to be executed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the second C reception period or the third C reception period is occurring from the time the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

During the 3C reception period, even if the player does not perform an action (operation), the same post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed may be executed (the automatic reception function described above may be enabled). In this case, however, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is always displayed at the time the 3C post-reception performance is executed. In other words, in this case, even if the automatic reception function starts executing the 3C post-reception performance without the player realizing it, the player will be able to easily recognize in what form the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) was displayed during the 3C reception period.

In addition, when the "3C reception period" is the target of the automatic reception function described above, multiple different timings may be prepared for the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled depending on the performance mode, etc. However, regardless of the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is always displayed at the time the 3C post-reception performance is executed.

However, during the 2nd C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that if no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (2nd C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed is not executed (this is not subject to the activation of the automatic reception function described above).

In addition, during the 3C reception period in this embodiment, whether the 3C post-reception performance starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 230) or the 3C post-reception performance starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed (see FIG. 229), the form of the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception specific performance UTC3, 3C post-reception performance display UGC3, 3C post-reception performance sound, etc.) itself is the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to play the 3C post-reception performance by selecting the performance form from the perspective of how the player wants to enjoy it.

In addition, during the 3C reception period in this embodiment, the same disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2) is displayed regardless of whether the 3C post-reception performance starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 230) or the 3C post-reception performance starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed (see FIG. 229). This makes it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception has been properly performed during the 3C reception period regardless of the manner in which the performance progresses.

In the above presentation example, a 1C reception period is also provided in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, and in the 1C reception period, no matter when a valid reception judgment is made that determines that the player's action is a valid action, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden but is always continuously displayed at the time when the post-reception presentation based on the valid reception judgment begins to be executed. In other words, in this case, the 3C reception period combines the presentation characteristics of both the 1C reception period and the 2C reception period, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, during the 1C reception period in this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can be displayed in a manner (integrated model image display IGd in the example shown in FIG. 225(c)) different from either of the manners that can be displayed during the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) and integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 228(d)). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period is occurring from the time the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, during the 1C reception period in this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can also be displayed in the manner that can be displayed during the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b)). In other words, in this case, when the integrated model image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period is occurring, so that the sense of tension during the reception period is appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 228(d) may not be displayed as the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image), and the integrated model image display IGa (one aspect) shown in FIG. 228(b) may always be displayed.

In addition, a specific premonition display may be displayed prior to the occurrence of the 3C reception period, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to operate. In this case, however, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden but continues to be displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts, it is desirable that the specific premonition display be displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts, and that the specific premonition display be not displayed. In contrast, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts, it is desirable that the specific premonition display be always displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a 1C reception period and a 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation" is made during the 3C reception period, the 3C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (low expectation modes shown in FIG. 229 (d1) to (h1), and high expectation modes shown in FIG. 229 (d2) to (h2)) based on the fact that the reception is valid, and when a "valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation" is made during the 1C reception period, the 1C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (low expectation modes shown in FIG. 226 (d1) to (h1), and high expectation modes shown in FIG. 226 (d2) to (h2)) based on the fact that the reception is valid.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the 3C reception period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple modes with different degrees of expectation) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) starts to be executed. In contrast, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the 1C reception period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple modes with different degrees of expectation) is not displayed and may not be in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) starts to be executed. Note that the model image display in the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated model image display IG, and multiple modes shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d) are prepared as its modes.

With this configuration, once the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" begins, there will be cases where the action target display (imitation image display) is visible and cases where the action target display (imitation image display) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-acceptance performance begins.

Moreover, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, if "a valid reception determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the timing Y in the third C reception period arrives (see FIG. 222), the action target display (model image display) is in a hidden state and is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (the third C post-reception performance corresponding to the third C reception period) starts to be executed, but if "a valid reception determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" after the timing Y in the third C reception period arrives (see FIG. 223), the third C post-reception performance starts to be executed with the action target display (model image display) in a displayed state.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 228(d))" of the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have it continue to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 228(b))" of the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even in a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))" or the "second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(d))" during its valid period (the 3C acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 228(d))," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-reception performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one acceptance period (third C acceptance period) occurs, the player can start the post-acceptance performance in a state where the imitation image display is hidden and cannot be seen, by making sure that a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made before timing Y arrives within the third C acceptance period. Also, if a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made before timing Y arrives within the third C acceptance period, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the post-acceptance performance will start when the imitation image display is not displayed, and therefore players who seek this type of performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

According to this configuration, the 3C reception period gives the player the "choice of whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the replica image display is still displayed," while the 1C reception period does not give the player the "choice of whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the replica image display is still displayed," and functions as a period in which the post-reception performance always starts while the replica image display is still displayed.

In this regard, in the third C acceptance period in which such a choice is granted, if the action (operation) of the player is not accepted during the third C acceptance period (if there is no valid acceptance judgment), the same post-acceptance performance as when there is a valid acceptance judgment is not executed (the automatic performance function is not activated), and in the first C acceptance period in which such a choice is not granted, if the action (operation) of the player is not accepted during the first C acceptance period (if there is no valid acceptance judgment), the same post-acceptance performance as when there is a valid acceptance judgment is executed (the automatic performance function is activated). According to such a configuration, when the third C acceptance period occurs, in exchange for granting the above-mentioned choice, relief is not performed when an operation is forgotten. As a result, when the third C acceptance period occurs, if the player does not make a decision such as "which one to select" within a limited time, the post-acceptance performance itself will not be executed, and a sense of tension can be appropriately given. In contrast, when the first C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned right of choice is not granted, but even if the reception is not completed within the first C reception period, the post-reception performance is executed properly, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. In this case, if the post-reception performance when an operation is forgotten during the first C reception period is started while the model image display is still displayed, it is possible not to grant the above-mentioned right of choice, even when an operation is forgotten.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a 1C reception period and a 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation" is made during the 3C reception period, the 3C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (low expectation modes shown in FIG. 229 (d1) to (h1), high expectation modes shown in FIG. 229 (d2) to (h2)) based on the fact that the reception is valid, and when a "valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation" is made during the 1C reception period, the 1C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (low expectation modes shown in FIG. 226 (d1) to (h1), high expectation modes shown in FIG. 226 (d2) to (h2)) based on the fact that the reception is valid.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the 3C reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. In contrast, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) is not displayed and may not be in a hidden state. The remaining time display in the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and multiple forms are available, as shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d).

With this configuration, once the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" begins, there will be cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible and cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-reception performance begins.

Moreover, in the 3C acceptance period according to this embodiment, if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the timing Y in the 3C acceptance period arrives (see FIG. 222), the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden and not displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) starts to be executed, but if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" after the timing Y in the 3C acceptance period arrives (see FIG. 223), the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image are displayed when the 3C post-acceptance performance starts to be executed.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 228(d))" of the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to continue to display this even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 228(b))" of the multiple modes, if this continues to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even in a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))" or the "second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(d))" during its valid period (the 3C acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the remaining time display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low expectation mode, if the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 228 (d))," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-reception performance being executed in a low expectation mode, so it is desirable to continue the remaining time display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))," some players may want to have the remaining time display not hidden, but continue to be displayed, at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))," some players may want to have the remaining time display hidden, so that it cannot be seen, at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one acceptance period (third C acceptance period) occurs, the player can start the post-acceptance performance in a state where the remaining time display is hidden and cannot be seen, by making sure that a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made before timing Y arrives within the third C acceptance period. If a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made before timing Y arrives within the third C acceptance period, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the post-acceptance performance will start when the remaining time display is not displayed at that point, and therefore players who seek this kind of performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

According to this configuration, the 3C reception period gives the player "the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the remaining time display is still displayed," while the 1C reception period does not give the player "the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the remaining time display is still displayed," and functions as a period in which the post-reception performance always starts while the remaining time display is still displayed.

In this regard, in the third C acceptance period in which such a choice is granted, if the action (operation) of the player is not accepted during the third C acceptance period (if there is no valid acceptance judgment), the same post-acceptance performance as when there is a valid acceptance judgment is not executed (the automatic performance function is not activated), and in the first C acceptance period in which such a choice is not granted, if the action (operation) of the player is not accepted during the first C acceptance period (if there is no valid acceptance judgment), the same post-acceptance performance as when there is a valid acceptance judgment is executed (the automatic performance function is activated). According to such a configuration, when the third C acceptance period occurs, in exchange for granting the above-mentioned choice, relief is not performed when an operation is forgotten. As a result, when the third C acceptance period occurs, if the player does not make a decision such as "which one to select" within a limited time, the post-acceptance performance itself will not be executed, and a sense of tension can be appropriately given. In contrast, when the first C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned right of choice is not granted, but even if the reception is not completed within the first C reception period, the post-reception performance is executed properly, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. In this case, if the post-reception performance when an operation is forgotten during the first C reception period is started while the remaining time display is still displayed, it is possible not to grant the above-mentioned right of choice, even when an operation is forgotten.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including a 1C reception period and a 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed using at least a specific area. Then, when a "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the 1C reception period, a 1C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the valid reception determination has been made, and when a "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the 3C reception period, a 3C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the valid reception determination has been made. Also, even when the first C post-reception performance starts to be executed, or when the third C post-reception performance starts to be executed, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may remain displayed and not hidden.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, whether a "valid reception judgment" is made during the 1C reception period or during the 3C reception period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) based on the valid reception judgment being made, so that it becomes easy to recognize that a proper valid reception judgment has been made (a state in which the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted).

As described above, in the 3C reception period, depending on the timing (first period, second period, etc.) of the "valid reception determination" that determines that the player's action is a valid action, the integrated model image display IG may be in a displayed state rather than hidden at the time when the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period begins to be executed, or the integrated model image display IG may be in a not-displayed state (not visible state). In contrast, in the 1C reception period, the integrated model image display IG is always displayed regardless of the timing of the valid reception determination that determines that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). By providing a 1C reception period in which such an integrated model image display IG is always displayed, in addition to the above-mentioned 3C reception period, it is possible to provide a reassuring performance, combined with the configuration in which the disappearance EF performance is executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

During the 1C reception period, if the corresponding post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) is executed in a high expectation mode (Fig. 226 (d2) to (h2)), a specific mode (Fig. 226 (e2) to (g2)) that is also used in the 3C reception period appears as the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display); however, if it is different from the high expectation mode, the specific mode (Fig. 226 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display), and a different mode (Fig. 226 (e1) to (g1)) appears, or it is desirable that the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display) itself does not appear. With this configuration, when the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display) is executed in response to the 3C reception period, it is possible to give the impression that a high expectation performance is being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the first C reception period, the reception allowance sound is output in multiple modes with different expectation levels, but in the third C reception period, the reception allowance sound may be output only in "one mode". With this configuration, when the reception allowance sound having the "one mode" is output, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the third C reception period having the above-mentioned two performance features is occurring, so that the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner. The "one mode" may be selectively output (by judgment) even when the first C reception period occurs. In this case, it is desirable that the "one mode" is output as the mode with the lowest expectation level. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner even in a situation where the reception allowance sound is output in the mode with the lowest expectation level.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the first C reception period and the third C reception period may occur sequentially within the specific variation pattern. In this case, it is preferable that the first C reception period occurs after the third C reception period occurs. Also in this case, the first C reception period may occur. In this case, it is preferable that the second C reception period may occur between the occurrence of the third C reception period and the occurrence of the first C reception period.

It is also desirable that the premonition effect output when the first C reception period occurs and the premonition effect output when the third C reception period occurs are different from each other. In other words, in this case, the premonition effect can suggest whether the first C reception period or the third C reception period will occur.

In addition, in the third C reception period, it is desirable that a specific mode (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SKC2) appears as the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display) when there is an acceptance, and that a mode different from the specific mode (e.g., the third disappearance-related display SKC3) appears when there is no acceptance, or that no mode appears at all. In contrast, in the first C reception period, it is desirable that even if there is no acceptance, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display) appears in the same mode as when there is an acceptance. In other words, in the third C reception period, which has both the performance due to the above-mentioned "first C reception period" (performance in which a model image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the performance after acceptance starts to be executed) and the performance due to the above-mentioned "second C reception period" (performance in which a model image display or a gauge image is not displayed at the time when the performance after acceptance starts to be executed), it can be difficult to select the performance, so it can be said that it is more likely to cause forgetting to operate (the reception period ends without acceptance) than in the above-mentioned "first C reception period". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if an action is forgotten during the 3C reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKC2) that occurs when an action is accepted will not appear, so it is possible to appeal to the player that an action has been forgotten, and it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs thereafter. In contrast, there are no elements that are likely to cause an action to be forgotten during the 1C reception period. Nevertheless, when an action is not accepted, it is possible that the player has deliberately made a gaming choice to "not make an action," so if a player who has made such a choice is "appealed to the player that an action has been forgotten," it may actually reduce the player's interest in the game. Therefore, even if an action is not accepted during the 1C reception period, it is desirable to make the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) appear in the same manner as when an action is accepted.

In particular, during the 1C reception period in the above-mentioned performance example, the appearance of the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display) differs depending on the appearance (expectation) of the performance after the 1C reception (see FIG. 226). Therefore, even if there is no reception during the 1C reception period, by making the same appearance as when there is reception appear as the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display), it becomes possible to recognize the appearance (expectation) of the performance after the 1C reception that appeared when there is reception, and it is possible to increase interest in the game.

During the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, it is desirable that the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) be configured so that when an action by the player is accepted, a disappearance EF display is executed while the depiction of the movement appearing in the operation receiving section and the reduction in the area of the gauge image continue.

The above-mentioned examples of effects and other examples may be realized by modifying them to the following configurations, or the following configurations (acceptance periods) may be further provided as other acceptance periods with different types of post-acceptance effects. That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has at least the first C acceptance period, the second C acceptance period, and the third C acceptance period as acceptance periods during which the acceptance of the player's actions (operations) is permitted. Of these, during the first C acceptance period and the third C acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display) can be executed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) of the player's actions (operations), and during the second C acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display) is not executed even if the player's actions (operations) are accepted (valid acceptance determination).

In this regard, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 1C acceptance period, the extinction EF performance (disappearance related display) may be executed in the same manner when the 1C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) and when the 1C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing). In addition, when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 226, it is desirable that a predetermined one of the extinction EF performances always appears, regardless of which of the modes (modes shown in FIG. 226 (d1) to (h1) and modes shown in FIG. 226 (d2) to (h2)) appears as the 1C post-acceptance performance, and regardless of whether the acceptance was made during the 1C acceptance period (modes shown in FIG. 226 (d3) to (g3)). In other words, the 1C reception period refers to a period in which, regardless of when reception (valid reception determination) is made during the period (or even if reception is not made at all), the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) continues to be displayed after the period ends. In this case, since information such as "in what form the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided, there is a concern that if further different information is provided by the disappearance EF performance, the performance will become too complicated. In this regard, with such a 1C reception period, regardless of which mode (modes shown in FIG. 226 (d1)-(h1), or modes shown in FIG. 226 (d2)-(h2)) appears as the post-1C reception performance, and further regardless of whether or not the reception is made within the 1C reception period (modes shown in FIG. 226 (d3)-(g3)), a predetermined mode will always appear as the disappearance EF performance, thereby eliminating the above-mentioned concerns.

In addition, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect may be executed in different modes depending on whether the 3C post-acceptance performance is executed in a mode with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) or in a mode with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing). The 3C acceptance period has the above-mentioned two types of performance, and can be said to be positioned as a "highly difficult acceptance period". Therefore, even after acceptance, it is desirable to provide different performance information from both the mode as the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the mode as the disappearance EF performance in order to stimulate the player in terms of performance.

When this configuration is applied to the examples shown in Figures 229 and 230, it is desirable that the form of the disappearance EF performance that appears when no acceptance has been made is different from any of the multiple forms of the disappearance EF performance that can appear when acceptance has been made. This makes it possible to recognize that no acceptance has been made, and also makes it possible to suggest that the acceptance period in question was a combination of both the performance characteristics of the "first C acceptance period" described above and the performance characteristics of the "second C acceptance period" described above.

As described above, in another example of the 3C reception period, when reception is made during the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed after reception. In other words, in this case, since no information is provided on "in what form the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" after reception, in this situation it is desirable to provide information through the disappearance EF performance (expectation information regarding the performance after reception) in order to increase interest in the game.

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judged) during the 1C acceptance period, the disappearance EF presentation may be executed in a manner different from the manner that appears when acceptance is made. This makes it possible to recognize that no acceptance has been made, and if this manner cannot appear during the 3C acceptance period, it can suggest that the acceptance period did not combine both the presentation characteristics of the above-mentioned "1C acceptance period" and the above-mentioned "2C acceptance period".

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance may be executed in the same manner as it appears when the action (operation) is accepted.

It is not necessary to apply all of these configurations to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (variations) may be applied to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples.

Next, we will explain the case where some of the above-mentioned modified examples are applied to the above-mentioned performance examples. That is, FIG. 231 is a modified example of the "performance that appears when acceptance is made or not made during the 1C reception period" shown in FIG. 226, and FIG. 232 and FIG. 233 are modified examples of the "performance that appears when acceptance is made or not made during the 3C reception period" shown in FIG. 229 (acceptance during the 1st period) and FIG. 230 (acceptance during the 2nd period). Note that in this modified example, the configurations that are not specifically mentioned are as described above with reference to the "performance examples related to the 1C reception period (FIG. 216 to FIG. 218, FIG. 225, FIG. 226)" and the "performance examples related to the 3C reception period (FIG. 222 to FIG. 224, FIG. 228 to FIG. 230)," and can be similarly applied to each of the above-mentioned other examples that can be applied to the "performance examples related to the 1C reception period" and the "performance examples related to the 3C reception period."

In the modified example shown in FIG. 231, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 1C acceptance period, the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same manner when the 1C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) (see FIG. 231 (d1)-(h1)) and when the 1C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 231 (d2)-(h2)). Here, the second extinction-related display SKC2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 231, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1C acceptance period (see FIG. 231 (d3)-(g3)), the extinction EF presentation is a display that does not appear when the player's action (operation) is accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1C acceptance period. Here, the third extinction-related display SKC3 is executed as the extinction EF presentation.

In contrast, in the modified example shown in Figures 232 and 233, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance is executed in different manners depending on whether the post-3C acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) (see Figures 232 (d1) to (h1) and Figures 233 (d3) to (h3)) or whether the post-3C acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see Figures 232 (d2) to (h2) and Figures 233 (d4) to (h4)). Here, when the expectation level (the rate at which a winning symbol appears) is low (see FIG. 232(d1)-(h1) and FIG. 233(d3)-(h3)), the first disappearance-related display SKC1 is executed as the disappearance EF performance, and when the expectation level (the rate at which a winning symbol appears) is high (see FIG. 232(d2)-(h2) and FIG. 233(d4)-(h4)), the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is executed as the disappearance EF performance. As described above, FIG. 232(d1)-(h1) and FIG. 232(d2)-(h2) show the progress of the performance that appears when the acceptance is made during the first period of the third C acceptance period according to the modified example, and FIG. 233(d3)-(h3) and FIG. 233(d4)-(h4) show the progress of the performance that appears when the acceptance is made during the second period of the third C acceptance period according to the modified example.

In addition, in the modified example shown in Figures 232 and 233, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period (see Figures 233 (d5) to (g5)), the extinction EF performance is configured to appear in a manner that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period. That is, in the example shown in Figures 233 (d5) to (g5), since the first extinction-related display SKC1 is displayed as the extinction EF performance, it becomes possible to recognize that if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period, the performance progression shown in Figures 233 (d3) to (h3) would have occurred (if it had been accepted during the first period, the performance progression shown in Figures 232 (d1) to (h1) would have occurred). In contrast, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3C acceptance period, when the second extinction-related display SKC2 is displayed as the extinction EF presentation, if the player's action (operation) was accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3C acceptance period, it will be possible to recognize that the presentation progression shown in FIG. 233 (d4)-(h4) has occurred (if the action (operation) was accepted during the first period, the presentation progression shown in FIG. 232 (d2)-(h2) has occurred).

In the 1C reception period of this modified example, the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) corresponding to the above-mentioned 3C reception period of the modified example is executed in a highly anticipated manner is used as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that appears when reception is made. In other words, in this case, in the 1C reception period of the modified example, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period in the modified example does not necessarily have to be the "2nd disappearance-related display SKC2". For example, even if the "1st disappearance-related display SKC1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1st C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a low expectation mode is used as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period in the modified example, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the reception is in the 1C reception period in the modified example or in the 3C reception period in the modified example.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the first C acceptance period, the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation).

It is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the third C acceptance period according to the modified example. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the first C acceptance period, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period did not combine both the presentation characteristics of the above-mentioned "first C acceptance period" and the above-mentioned "second C acceptance period".

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the first C acceptance period according to the modified example. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the first C acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

Even in the third C acceptance period according to this modified example, if a player makes an action (operation) before timing tV2 when a state (third C acceptance period) occurs in which a "valid acceptance judgment that treats a player's action as a valid action" is permitted, the action (operation) will not be judged as a "valid acceptance judgment" at that time. However, it is possible to apply the configuration according to the above-mentioned modified example, which makes it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" targeting (based on) an action (operation) made by the player before the third C acceptance period at the start of the third C acceptance period (or after that).

In the 3C reception period according to the above modified example, if a low expectancy pattern appears as a post-3C reception performance (see FIG. 232 (d1)-(h1), or FIG. 233 (d3)-(h3)), the first disappearance-related display SKC1 is executed as a disappearance EF performance, but the disappearance EF performance itself may not appear.

In addition, during the 1C reception period in the above modified example, a specific pattern appears as the disappearance EF performance when reception is made (Fig. 231 (d1)-(h1) or Fig. 231 (d2)-(h2)), and a pattern different from the specific pattern appears when no reception is made (Fig. 231 (d3)-(g3)). However, the disappearance EF performance itself may not appear when no reception is made.

In addition, in the first C reception period according to the above modified example, the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF performance) when reception occurs, but it may be executed in a mode different from the second disappearance-related display SKC2. For example, even if it is executed as the first disappearance-related display SKC1, it can be difficult to recognize whether the reception has occurred in the first C reception period or the third C reception period.

[Premonition Stock Effects]
As illustrated in FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) does not occur even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. In addition, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance (post-reception performance) from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a reception period can be generated in which the acceptance of a player's action (operation) is permitted, and when a player's action (operation) is accepted during the reception period, a display change (post-acceptance effect) occurs according to the type of the acceptance period that has occurred. More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 includes "motion detection means (sensor, etc.) for detecting a player's action (operation)", "detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, a corresponding processing step in a program, etc.) for storing information detected by the motion detection means", and "acceptance-related effect execution means (peripheral control MPU 1511a, a corresponding processing step in a program, etc.) that can generate an acceptance period, and when an acceptance validity determination is made during the acceptance period that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored in the detection information storage means, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance period can be executed."

During the reception period, an action target display can be displayed that indicates which is the "target of the player's action." Such an action target display can be displayed, for example, as an imitation image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action target display" in this presentation example is displayed as an imitation image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation.

During the acceptance period, a remaining time display can be displayed to indicate the time remaining during which the acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted. Such a remaining time display can be implemented, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this example of the presentation, multiple modes are prepared for at least one of the modes of the frame image and the gauge image (for example, the speed at which the display area of the gauge image is reduced, an indication of the degree of expectation, an indication of the type of operation means, etc.), and the game is executed in one of these modes. Depending on which mode is executed, a different degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear) may be suggested.

In addition, when a reception period occurs, a premonition effect can be executed before this, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to act (suggesting that a reception period will occur). Premonition effects are executed, for example, by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 and outputting a corresponding performance sound.

Note that, as for the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. As for the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, it is preferable that they are not included in the low-expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), or that they may be included but that their selection rate (occurrence rate) is made low (although this is not necessarily required).

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-acceptance display (post-operation display) such as a display change on the performance display device 1600, or generates a performance sound change on the speaker, a change in the light emitted by the lamp, or a performance action by the movable decoration, as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that it may reduce interest in the game related to the acceptance period.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to operations that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact actions by the player on specific parts" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation means) that accept actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special presentation is provided with respect to the acceptance of "operations (actions) by the player". It is not necessary to provide all of the presentations (configurations) described below. For example, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in playing by providing only one of the presentations (any configuration), or it is possible to selectively provide several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it is possible to appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentations (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that any one configuration capable of suppressing a decline in interest in playing associated with the acceptance period is provided.

[Configuration 1-C]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period, and a specific performance display can be displayed in the premonition performance. The "specific reception period" according to the configuration 1-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different reception period from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration. Furthermore, the "specific performance display" according to the configuration 1-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the "specific performance display" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different performance display from the "specific performance display" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action while a specific performance display is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program), and a valid acceptance determination may be made within the specific acceptance period based on the stored detection information, determining that the player's action is a valid action. With this configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) while a premonition performance (specific performance display) is being executed, it is possible to use this as an opportunity to start a post-acceptance performance, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner through such flexible performance.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 1-C" is adopted, even if a player performs an action before the specific acceptance period occurs and while a specific performance display is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. During the specific acceptance period, a valid acceptance determination may be made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the specific acceptance period occurs and while a specific performance display is being displayed, to determine that the action performed by the player is a valid action (stock acceptance performance), and when the valid acceptance determination is made, the specific performance display may be displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination is started. With this configuration, even if a player performs an action during the "execution period of the premonition performance" before the specific acceptance period occurs, the action is properly detected, and the detection information may be stored and held until the specific acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made within the specific acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the specific acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) in a rush before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance effect without having to redo the action after the specific acceptance period occurs. Also, at this time, when the post-acceptance effect is started due to an action (operation) in a rush before the specific acceptance period has occurred (when the specific performance display is displayed), the specific performance display is not hidden but is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that the post-acceptance effect has been started based on the action (detection information) made by the player when the specific performance display is displayed.

[Configuration 2-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a first performance display is displayed in a first premonition performance corresponding to the first reception period, and a second performance display is displayed in a second premonition performance corresponding to the second reception period. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to another configuration, or may mean a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to another configuration. Also, the "first performance display" and "second performance display" according to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the ``first performance display (or the inverse second performance display)'' and ``second performance display (or the inverse first performance display)'' associated with another configuration, or it may mean a performance display different from the ``first performance display'' and ``second performance display'' associated with another configuration (for example, a specific performance display, etc.).

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action (operation) while either the first or second performance display is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and a valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action may be made within the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period based on the stored detection information. Therefore, even if the player performs an action while a premonition effect (first or second performance display) is being executed, it is possible to use this as an opportunity to start a post-acceptance effect, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner through such flexible performance.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-C" is adopted, the following configurations may be adopted. That is, in both the first and second acceptance periods, if a player performs an action before the acceptance period occurs and while a premonition effect is being executed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first and second acceptance periods, a valid acceptance determination may be made that the action by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the acceptance period occurs before the premonition effect is being executed (stock acceptance effect). Then, if a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the first acceptance period before the first acceptance period occurs and while a premonition effect is being executed, at least a part of the mock image display is always displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the valid acceptance determination is started to be executed. In contrast, if during the second acceptance period, before the occurrence of the second acceptance period and while the premonition effect is being executed, a valid acceptance determination is made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means to determine that the action by the player is a valid action, at the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the valid acceptance determination is started to be executed, even a part of the mock image display is not displayed. When these configurations are adopted, whether it is the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period, a "valid acceptance determination to determine that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made during the acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the occurrence of the acceptance period, so that even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the occurrence of the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period, he or she can enjoy the post-acceptance effect after the occurrence of the acceptance period without having to redo the action. Furthermore, if an action (operation) is made too enthusiastically before the first reception period occurs, at least a portion of the imitation image display will always be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, whereas if an action (operation) is made too enthusiastically before the second reception period occurs, not even a portion of the imitation image display will be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, making it possible to appropriately indicate whether the post-reception performance is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before which reception period the player made the action).

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-C" is adopted, the following configurations may be adopted. That is, in both the first and second acceptance periods, if a player performs an action before the occurrence of the acceptance period and while a premonition effect is being executed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first and second acceptance periods, a valid acceptance determination may be made that the action performed by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the action performed before the occurrence of the acceptance period and while a premonition effect is being executed. Then, if a valid acceptance determination is made that the action performed by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the first acceptance period before the occurrence of the first acceptance period and while a premonition effect is being executed, at least a part of the remaining time display is always displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the valid acceptance determination is started to be executed. In contrast, if during the second acceptance period, before the occurrence of the second acceptance period and while the premonition effect is being executed, a valid acceptance determination is made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means to determine that the action by the player is a valid action, the remaining time display is made so that not even a part of it is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the valid acceptance determination is started to be executed. When these configurations are adopted, whether it is the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period, a "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made during the acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the acceptance period, so that even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the occurrence of the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period, he or she can enjoy the post-acceptance effect after the occurrence of the acceptance period without having to redo the action. Furthermore, if an action (operation) is made before the first reception period occurs, at least a portion of the remaining time display will always be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, whereas if an action (operation) is made before the second reception period occurs, not even a portion of the remaining time display will be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, making it possible to appropriately indicate whether the post-reception performance is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before which reception period the player made the action).

Note that "replica image display and remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the case of configuration 2-C, but may also be displayed in other configurations as long as the replica image display and remaining time display are not visible on the display screen. For example, this also includes a state in which the replica image display and remaining time display are displayed on a layer but are not visible because an image on another layer is displayed with priority.

[Configuration 3-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 3-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if no action by the player is detected during a specific reception period, the reception may be determined to be valid and a post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period may be executed, and this type of flexible performance is expected to maintain interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-C" is adopted, the following configurations may be adopted. That is, a specific display is displayed in the premonition effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and even if the player performs an action before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific display is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during the specific reception period, a valid reception determination may be made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific display is displayed" (stock reception determination), and when the valid reception determination is made, the model image display is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination starts. On the other hand, when the valid reception determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the specific reception period", the model image display may be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination starts. When these configurations are adopted, "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" may be made within the specific acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the specific acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) in a rush before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance without having to redo the action after the specific acceptance period occurs. Furthermore, depending on whether or not a mock image display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not a valid acceptance determination has been made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the specific performance display was displayed before the specific acceptance period occurred."

The "specific performance display" in configuration 3-C is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the "specific performance display" in another configuration, or it may mean a different performance display from the "specific performance display" in another configuration.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 3-C" is adopted, the following configurations may be adopted. That is, a specific display is displayed in the premonition effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and even if the player performs an action before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific display is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during the specific reception period, a valid reception determination may be made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific display is displayed" (stock reception determination), and when the valid reception determination is made, the remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. On the other hand, when the valid reception determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the specific reception period", the remaining time display may be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. When these configurations are adopted, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made within the specific acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the specific acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) in a rush before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance without having to redo the action after the specific acceptance period occurs. Furthermore, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not a valid acceptance determination has been made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the specific performance display is displayed before the specific acceptance period occurs."

Note that "replica image display and remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the case of configuration 3-C, but may also be displayed in other configurations as long as the replica image display and remaining time display are not visible on the display screen. For example, this also includes a state in which the replica image display and remaining time display are displayed on a layer but are not visible because an image on another layer is displayed preferentially.

[Configuration 4-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a first reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the first reception period, a first post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period can be executed, and when a second reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the second reception period, a second post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period can be executed. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 4-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to other configurations, or they may mean a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations.

In this regard, with the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings during the first reception period when the performance after the first reception is started without the player's action being detected by the above-mentioned action detection means, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 4-C" is adopted, at least a first timing and a second timing are prepared as timings at which the first post-reception performance is started without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the first acceptance period, and at the first timing, "the first post-reception performance is started by making the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination within the first acceptance period based on the player's action (detection information) detected before the first acceptance period occurs (stock acceptance performance)," and at the second timing, "the first post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a specified timing (second timing) without detecting any action by the player, including before the first acceptance period occurs."

As will be described later, when "Configuration 4-C" is adopted, it is possible that during the second acceptance period, "the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination is made within the second acceptance period based on an action (detection information) by the player detected before the second acceptance period occurs, thereby starting the execution of the second post-acceptance performance" (stock acceptance performance), but it is not necessary to ensure that "the second post-acceptance performance is started based on the arrival of a specified timing without detecting any action by the player, including before the second acceptance period occurs."

When both of these configurations are provided, in both the first and second reception periods, "the valid reception determination can be made within the reception period based on the player's actions (detection information) detected before the reception period occurs," making it possible to start the post-reception performance. Furthermore, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails in the first reception period, the post-reception performance is executed as a rescue based on the arrival of a specified timing, so the player can safely challenge the "stock reception performance." On the other hand, in the second reception period, if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance is not executed as a rescue, which creates an ideal sense of tension.

[Configuration 5-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a specific reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, a specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 5-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least a first timing and a second timing at which the performance after specific reception is started without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 5-C" is adopted, when the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing, the imitation image display is not displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance starts, but when the specific post-reception performance starts at the second timing, the imitation image display may be displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance starts. In other words, in this case, after the specific post-reception performance starts, it becomes possible to suggest whether the specific post-reception performance started at the first timing or the second timing.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 5-C" is adopted, when the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing, the remaining time display is not displayed at the time the specific post-reception performance starts, but when the specific post-reception performance starts at the second timing, the remaining time display may be displayed at the time the specific post-reception performance starts. In other words, in this case, after the specific post-reception performance starts, it becomes possible to indicate whether the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing or the second timing.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 5-C" is adopted, a specific performance display is displayed as a precursor performance corresponding to the specific reception period, and when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the first timing, the specific performance display is displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed, but when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the second timing, the specific performance display is not displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed. In other words, in this case, after the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed, it becomes possible to suggest whether the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the first timing or the second timing.

Note that "replica image display, remaining time display, and specific effect display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 5-C, but may also be used in other configurations as long as the replica image display, remaining time display, and specific effect display are not visible on the display screen. For example, this also includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but cannot be seen because an image on another layer is displayed first.

Furthermore, the "specific performance display" in configuration 5-C is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the "specific performance display" in another configuration, or it may mean a different performance display from the "specific performance display" in another configuration.

[Configuration 6-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a specific reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, a specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 6-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least a first timing and a second timing as timings at which the specific post-reception performance is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period. Also, if the specific post-reception performance is started at the second timing without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, a disappearing EF display can be displayed, and when the disappearing EF display is displayed, the action prompting display is made difficult to see, thereby enabling the player to easily recognize that the specific reception period has ended.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 6-C" is adopted, it is possible to display the disappearing EF display when the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, but when the disappearing EF display is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to see displays other than the action prompting display. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing or the second timing after the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed.

In this case, the disappearing EF display may be displayed as the same image display when it appears when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the first timing, and when it appears when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the second timing. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the performance is being executed at the first timing or the second timing just by looking at the disappearing EF display, and it is expected that the disappearing EF display will encourage the player to focus on the "object that is made difficult to see."

[Configuration 7-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 7-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a specific reception period occurs, there are cases where the specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period is executed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, and cases where the specific reception period ends without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, and the specific post-reception performance is not executed. This makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when a specific reception period occurs.

As will be described later, when adopting this "Configuration 7-C", it is desirable to be able to generate a predetermined acceptance period that is different from the specific acceptance period, and when this predetermined acceptance period occurs, even if the action by the player is not detected by the action detection means during the predetermined acceptance period, the corresponding predetermined post-acceptance performance is always executed. Note that the "predetermined acceptance period" in this configuration 7-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "acceptance period" in other configurations.

In other words, in this case, when a specific acceptance period occurs, a sense of tension is suitably created, such as "if the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance may not occur," and when a predetermined acceptance period occurs, the corresponding post-acceptance performance is guaranteed to occur, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

[Configuration 8-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the first reception period occurs, the first premonition effect can be executed before the first reception period occurs, and when the second reception period occurs, the second premonition effect can be executed before the second reception period occurs. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to other configurations, or may mean a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations. Also, the "first premonition effect" and "second premonition effect" according to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it may mean the same premonition effect as the ``first premonition effect (or the opposite, the second premonition effect)'' and ``second premonition effect (or the opposite, the first premonition effect)'' in other configurations, or it may mean a premonition effect different from the ``first premonition effect'' and ``second premonition effect'' in other configurations (for example, a specific premonition effect, etc.).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the period during which the first effect display (first premonition effect) is displayed includes a first period during which, when a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the detection information by the motion detection means is used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the first acceptance period, and a second period during which, even if a motion is performed by the player and detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the first acceptance period. This makes it possible to provide a tense presentation.

As will be described later, even if the first reception period ends without any new detection by the motion detection means after the motion detection means detects a motion during the second period during which the first performance display is displayed, the first post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. In other words, in this case, even if a motion by the player is detected during the second period, not during the first period, during the period during which the first precursor performance (first performance display) is being performed, it is possible to generate the post-reception performance without detecting any new motion by the player, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 8-C" is adopted, the first period and the second period during which the first effect display is displayed may both be periods before the first acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made during the first acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the first acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) before the first acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance effect without redoing the action after the first acceptance period occurs. Moreover, even if the player makes an action (operation) before the first acceptance period occurs and the player's action is detected in the second period instead of the first period as a result of making an action (operation) before the first acceptance period occurs, the post-acceptance effect can be generated without newly detecting the player's action, so that it is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[Configuration 9-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a specific performance display can be displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the specific reception period. The "specific reception period" according to the configuration 9-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration. Furthermore, the "specific performance display" according to the configuration 9-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the "specific performance display" according to another configuration, or it may mean a performance display different from the "specific performance display" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the period during which a specific presentation display is displayed includes a first period during which, if a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the detection information by the motion detection means is used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the specific acceptance period, and a second period during which, even if a motion is performed by the player and detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the specific acceptance period, thereby making it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 9-C" is adopted, the first period and the second period may be periods before the occurrence of the specific reception period and may both be included in the period during which the specific performance display is displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the player makes an action (operation) out of urgency before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the player will be able to enjoy the post-reception performance after the occurrence of the specific reception period without having to redo the action. However, if the player makes an action (operation) out of urgency before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the post-reception performance is not necessarily executed (second period), so that the sense of tension can be maintained in an optimal manner.

[Configuration 10-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a first performance display is displayed in a first premonition performance corresponding to the first reception period, and a second performance display is displayed in a second premonition performance corresponding to the second reception period. Note that the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and the "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to another configuration, or may mean a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to another configuration. Also, the "first performance display" and the "second performance display" according to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the ``first performance display (or the inverse second performance display)'' and ``second performance display (or the inverse first performance display)'' associated with another configuration, or it may mean a performance display different from the ``first performance display'' and ``second performance display'' associated with another configuration (for example, a specific performance display, etc.).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, both the period in which the first effect display (first premonition effect) is executed and the period in which the second effect display (second premonition effect) is executed include a "pre-motion permitted period during which, if a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the information detected by the motion detection means is used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the acceptance period" and a "pre-motion unpermitted period during which, even if a motion is performed by the player and detected by the motion detection means, the information detected by the motion detection means is not used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the acceptance period", thereby making it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 10-C" is adopted, the "pre-motion permitted period" and the "pre-motion non-permitted period" may both be periods before the timing when the acceptance period (first acceptance period or second acceptance period) occurs. In other words, in this case, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made within the acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the acceptance period (first acceptance period or second acceptance period) occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) before the acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance effect without having to redo the action after the acceptance period occurs. However, if the player makes an action (operation) before the acceptance period (first acceptance period or second acceptance period) occurs, the post-acceptance effect is not necessarily executed (pre-action non-permitted period), so the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 11-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a specific reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, a specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 11-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, pachinko machine 1 is designed to have at least two timings during the specific reception period when the specific post-reception performance begins without the player's action being detected by the action detection means, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 11-C" is adopted, at least a first timing and a second timing are prepared as timings at which the specific post-reception performance is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, and at the first timing, "the specific post-reception performance is started by making the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the specific reception period based on the action (detection information) of the player detected before the specific reception period occurs (stock reception performance)," and at the second timing, "the specific post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing) without detecting any action by the player, including before the specific reception period occurs." In other words, in this case, "the above-mentioned reception validity determination can be made within the reception period based on the action (detection information) of the player detected before the reception period occurs (stock reception performance)," which makes it possible to start the specific post-reception performance. Furthermore, during the specific reception period, even if you fail this "stock reception performance," the specific post-reception performance will be executed as a rescue based on the arrival of a specified timing (second timing), so you can safely try the "stock reception performance."

[Configuration 12-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a first reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the above-mentioned motion detection means during the first reception period, a corresponding first post-reception performance can be executed, and when a second reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the above-mentioned motion detection means during the second reception period, a corresponding second post-reception performance can be executed. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 12-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to other configurations, or they may mean a reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) different from the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, the first post-reception performance is performed for the same duration when the performance is performed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the first reception period, as it is performed based on the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the first reception period. This makes it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 12-C" is adopted, the detection information (detection information of the player's action) acquired before the first acceptance period occurs may be used for the acceptance validity determination within the first acceptance period, so that the first post-acceptance performance can be executed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the first acceptance period, and the detection information (detection information of the player's action) acquired before the second acceptance period occurs may be used for the acceptance validity determination within the second acceptance period, so that the second post-acceptance performance can be executed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the second acceptance period. With this configuration, even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance after the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period occurs without having to redo the action.

[Configuration 13-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the premonition performance that suggests that the player will be given an opportunity to act, there are cases where the premonition performance sound corresponding to the premonition performance is output and cases where the premonition performance sound corresponding to the premonition performance is not output. This is expected to maintain a suitable sense of tension when giving the player an opportunity to act.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 13-C" is adopted, when a specific premonition effect sound is output before the occurrence of the acceptance period during which the player is given an opportunity to act, there are at least a first timing and a second timing at which the action by the player is not detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period and the corresponding post-acceptance effect is started, whereas when no premonition effect sound is output before the occurrence of the acceptance period during which the player is given an opportunity to act, there may be at least a first timing and a second timing at which the action by the player is not detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period and the corresponding post-acceptance effect is started, or there may be at least a first timing without a second timing. In other words, in this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be more appropriately increased when the premonition effect sound corresponding to the premonition effect is not output.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) occurs in which it is permitted to perform an acceptance validity judgment that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means, a model image display related to the acceptance target (such as a model image modeled on an operation receiving section) is displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game until the post-acceptance display (display change) is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern performance progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of a notice judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance.

The "integrated model image display" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as another example or modified example thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image display," and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance-permitted sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) is being performed.

In addition, each acceptance allowance state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, an acceptance allowance state classified into the first type is a valid period that can occur when a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but cannot occur in a low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (a valid period that occurs based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high expectation fluctuation pattern) in a performance judgment based on the result of a jackpot judgment). In addition, an acceptance allowance state of the second type is a valid period that can occur in either a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expectation fluctuation pattern (such as a valid period that occurs as a result of a notice judgment).

The "integrated imitation image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first type and second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). Here, it is assumed that the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) occur as acceptance permission states (acceptance periods) in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operating means (e.g., operation button 410), and therefore the "integrated imitation image display" displayed in those acceptance periods is an image simulating the same operating means (operation button 410).

In addition, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated Moji image display", a special mode with a high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) may be displayed only in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), and in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), only a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIG. 144(a)-(c)) may be displayed. In this case, in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination is made based on the result of the jackpot determination as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIG. 144(a)-(d)) the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in, and the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination may be made as to which of multiple modes not including a special mode (e.g., Figures 144 (a) to (c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the "integrated model image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The pachinko machine 1 including the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-C" to "Configuration 13-C" will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as a best embodiment and does not necessarily have to be included. In other words, for each configuration described in the specification described below, when it is desired to obtain further effects for any one of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-C" to "Configuration 13-C", only the corresponding configuration can be selected and adopted at will. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level suggestion performances)) that proceed when the reception is made, and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). Here, at least the first D reception period (first D post-reception performance) and the second D reception period (second D post-reception performance) are provided as multiple reception periods (reception performances).

With reference to Figures 234 to 246, the characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be described separately. Note that the reception periods described above with reference to Figures 233 through 234 may be prepared as reception periods separate from the 1D reception period (1D post-reception performance) and the 2D reception period (2D post-reception performance), or may be realized as either the 1D reception period (1D post-reception performance) or the 2D reception period (2D post-reception performance). Furthermore, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to have these for each reception period described above with reference to Figures 233 through 234.

Figures 234 to 236 are time charts showing examples of the presentation content when condition 1D is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 1D reception period (1D reception presentation) occurs. Figures 240 to 243 are diagrams showing presentation examples in a variation pattern in which a 1D reception period (1D reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "1st D fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1st D fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 1st D fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1st D fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 240(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "1st D fluctuation pattern" itself.

However, in the presentation related to the "1st D variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (preview judgment), as shown in FIG. 234(a), when timing tW2 (for example, timing within the SP reach state) arrives when the 1st D time has elapsed since the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ variation started, the above-mentioned 1st D acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the presentation after 1st D acceptance" is permitted is generated ("the situation shown in FIG. 241(d)"). As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the 1st D acceptance period, the presentation after 1st D acceptance will be carried out based on that acceptance.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, when such a 1D reception period occurs, in relation to this, a premonition performance display suggesting that the reception period (valid period) will occur soon, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance related display (disappearance EF display) making it difficult to see the action target display (mochi image display) and the remaining time display, etc., and a post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation degree (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) according to the acceptance are each performed. The expectation degree (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the action target display (mochi image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also the case for other reception periods.

More specifically, when the timing tW1 arrives before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, as shown in FIG. 234(b) and FIG. 240(b) and (c), the "1D premonition display ZEC" is started to be executed as the premonition display. As will be described later, the "1D premonition display ZEC" in this example is executed by sequentially displaying the "1D premonition display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240(b))" and the "1D premonition display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 240(c))" which makes the "1D premonition display ZEC-1" difficult to see. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided. In this example, as shown in FIG. 234(d), when the "1D premonition display ZEC" is executed, a performance sound (premonition sound) corresponding to the "1D premonition display ZEC" is output.

In addition, the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" in this example is hidden at timing tW2 when the 1D reception period occurs, but it may be displayed across timing tW2.

As will be described later, during the 1D acceptance period in this embodiment, even if the player performs an action (e.g., a pressing operation) on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) before the 1D acceptance period occurs, the action (operation) is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), and the detection information is stored and held in the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program) even at the time the 1D acceptance period occurs, and may be used for the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination during the 1D acceptance period (when the stock acceptance performance is executed).

In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 234 and 235, and in the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 240(c) to "I (Figure 241(d)", it is assumed that the 1st D reception period occurs without such a stock reception presentation being performed, that is, that is, the detection information obtained before the 1st D reception period is not used for the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the 1st D reception period.

More specifically, in the case where the 1D reception period occurs at timing tW2 without a stock reception performance, as shown in FIG. 234(b) and FIG. 241(d), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, a "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" is displayed as an integrated mochi image display IG. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tW2 when the corresponding reception period (here, the 1D reception period) occurs, or may appear before timing tW2 and be displayed to span the timing tW2. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is hidden when reception (valid reception determination) is made within the 1D reception period, or when the 1D reception period ends without the reception (valid reception determination). In this example, the 1D acceptance period ends at timing tW3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 234(a)).

Furthermore, during the 1D reception period in this example, the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in one of a number of modes (for example, Fig. 144(a) and (d)). Figs. 241 to 243 correspond to the case where the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the "mode shown in Fig. 144(d)". When the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "mode shown in Fig. 144(a)", the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display, frame image, gauge image) shown in Figs. 241 to 243 is simply changed from the "mode shown in Fig. 144(d)" to the "mode shown in Fig. 144(a)", and therefore will not be illustrated. In addition, even during the 1D reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in any of a number of forms, including those shown in Figures 144 (b) and (c).

Figure 234 assumes that a player's action is detected during this 1D reception period, and a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made at timing tW2a based on the detection information. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 234(a), the 1D reception period ends based on the player's action being accepted (valid reception determination is made) at timing tW2a, and the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period begins to be executed.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIG. 242(e1) to FIG. 242(i1)) corresponds to the execution of a first mode with a relatively low expectation as the post-reception performance (post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period, and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIG. 242(e2) to FIG. 242(i2)) corresponds to the execution of a second mode with a relatively high expectation as the post-reception performance (post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period. The expectation (probability of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, during the 1D reception period, as shown in FIG. 234, at timing tW2a when the player's action is accepted (when the 1D post-reception performance begins in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is not made invisible, nor is the integrated model image display IG made difficult to see.

In other words, the 1D post-reception performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that is at least a combination of the "1D post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "1D post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the 1D post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a combination performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed is delayed in the time at which the "1st post-reception performance display" as the 1D post-reception performance begins compared to the other performance devices, and this is intended to intentionally maintain the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 242 (e1) or (e2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period, even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as it was during the reception period even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 234 (b) and Figure 242 (f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tW2a when the 1st D acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tW2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the model image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tW2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being unable to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, different modes (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) are displayed as the disappearance-related display depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) is a low-expectation mode (Fig. 242 (e1) to (i1)) or a high-expectation mode (Fig. 242 (e2) to (i2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 242 (f1) and (f2), even if the "1D post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the disappearance-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is the "first disappearance-related display SKD1" or the "second disappearance-related display SKD2", it becomes possible to guess whether the "1D post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high-expectation mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 234 (b) and Figure 242 (g1) or (g2), when timing tW2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" as a post-reception performance in response to the player's action being accepted within the 1D acceptance period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIG. 242(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 242(g1), the first mode (here, the first-D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character)) is displayed as the first-D post-reception performance display UGD1 corresponding to the first-D reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIG. 242(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 242(f2), the second mode (here, the first-D post-reception performance display UGD1-2 as a cut-in performance by the samurai character) is displayed as the first-D post-reception performance display UGD1 corresponding to the first-D reception period.

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" are displayed, the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 ("1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1" or "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the 1D acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Also, since the 1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1 (1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1-2)" while suggesting that the 1D acceptance period has already ended (after timing tW2c).

On the other hand, when the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)". This makes it easier to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 234 (b) and Figure 242 (h1) or (h2), while the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related displays", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1 or second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 234(b) and FIG. 242(i1) or (i2), and this allows for good visibility and results in the display relating to the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)."

In this regard, the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1" is displayed in one of multiple modes (here, 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the example of the performance corresponding to the 1D reception period (Figure 242), when reception is made during the 1D reception period and the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1" is executed, the background image is switched before and after the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1" starts.

With this configuration, in the situation shown in Figures 242 (e) and (f) where no change in the background image has occurred (timings tW2a to tW2b shown in Figure 234), even if there has been a change in the performance on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it is possible to indicate that the "first D post-reception performance display UGC1" has not yet started.

In this example, the "first D post-reception performance display UGD1" and "background change" are displayed later (timing tW2c) than the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is displayed (timing tW2b), but they may be displayed at the same time (timing tW2b) as the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is displayed (timing tW2b).

In the example shown in FIG. 242, the post-reception performance is configured to switch to the same background image when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, but it may also be configured to switch to different background images when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, it may be configured to switch the background image when a high expectation mode appears, but not to switch the background image when a low expectation mode appears.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, when a 1D reception period occurs, various displays are performed within a limited time and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600) in response to the 1D reception period, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tW2c) of the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tW2a of the reception.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 1D acceptance period, as shown in Figures 234(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the 1D post-acceptance performance (1D post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1D post-acceptance performance (1D post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tW2a when the 1D reception period is reached is limited to only a portion of the 1D post-reception performance (the 1D post-reception performance display), and the 1D post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tW2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of emitting light for presentation. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light-emitting presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIG. 242(e1) to (i1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 242(e1), the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) using the first performance device as the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1 (1D post-reception specific performance UTD1-1, which is a low expectation mode of the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1) corresponding to the 1D reception period. In contrast, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIG. 242(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 242(e2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2) using the first performance device as the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1 (1D post-reception specific performance UTD1-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1) corresponding to the 1D reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 241(d), in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a performance during the reception period (display of the samurai character and the princess character) is executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 1D reception period has occurred. The performance during the reception period on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectation (not shown) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectation (see FIG. 241(d)).

In other words, in this case, during the 1D reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" is made during the 1D reception period, while the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) continues to display the "integrated model image display IG" (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can increase the interest in the game.

In this example, the reception period performance (display of the samurai character and princess character) on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed continuously before the 1D reception period occurs, and also functions as a precursor performance that indicates the occurrence of the 1D reception period. However, the reception period performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) and the precursor performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) may each be executed as different performances.

In addition, in this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether "1D reception specific performance UTD1-1" or "1D reception specific performance UTD1-2" appears as the 1D reception specific performance UTD1, but it is not necessary to prepare multiple forms for the 1D reception specific performance UTD1. For example, it is possible to provide only "1D reception specific performance UTD1-2" as the 1D reception specific performance UTD1, and suggest the degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) depending on whether the 1D reception specific performance UTD1 appears. In other words, in this case, when "1D reception specific performance UTD1-2" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when "1D reception specific performance UTD1-2" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the 1D reception period occurs, the reception permissible sound starts to be output at a timing slightly before the timing tW2 shown in FIG. 234(d). In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 1D reception period is audibly output across the timing tW2 at which the 1D reception period occurs, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the reception permissible sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the first D reception period, the first long allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, and the first short allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively short time, are output as the reception allowable sound. In the example shown in FIG. 216(d), the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one (or both) of the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound may be started to be output at or after timing tW2 when the first D reception period occurs.

In the first D reception period, if an action by the player is received (valid reception determination) while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated (termination of the audible output state) based on the reception.

In this regard, it is desirable that the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation (not shown) as shown in FIG. 234(d) and executed (audibly output) in a manner with high expectation (as shown in FIG. 241(d)). That is, in this case, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the expectation during the reception period, but unlike the "integrated mock image display IG", they are executed in such a way that once acceptance (valid reception determination) is made, it becomes impossible to confirm it, and therefore it is expected that the tension as to when during the reception period acceptance (valid reception determination) will be made will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound (first long allowable sound, first short allowable sound) is being audibly output, not only is the reception allowable sound terminated midway, but the audible output of the 1D post-reception performance sound is started based on the acceptance. The 1D post-reception performance sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation, and for example, it may be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation. In other words, in this case, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, during the 1D reception period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed during the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance (1D post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1", as shown in FIG. 234(d), this type of 1D post-reception performance sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden. Also, for the 1D post-reception performance sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIG. 242(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIG. 242(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance).

Note that during the first D reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sound, but it is not necessary to output these two permissible sounds, and only one reception permissible sound may be output.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made in the 1D acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 1D post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIG. 242(e1)-(i1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIG. 242(e2)-(i2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made in a reception period other than the 1D acceptance period. With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast to this, the example shown in Figure 235, and examples in which the presentation progresses from Figure 241(d) to "i1 (Figure 242(e3)-(i3))" and from Figure 241(d) to "i2 (Figure 242(e4)-(i4))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 1D reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 235, after the first D reception period occurs, the timing tW3 arrives without the player's action (operation) being accepted (valid reception judgement). However, in this example, even if the player does not make an action (operation) and is not accepted (valid reception judgement) during the first D reception period, the same post-reception performance (here, the first D post-reception performance) as when a valid reception judgement is made during the first D reception period is generated based on the arrival of the timing tW3.

For example, if the reception validity determination had been made within the 1D reception period, the performance (low expectation) would have progressed from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIG. 242(e1)-(i1))". However, in reality, the reception validity determination is not made within the 1D reception period, and the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. In other words, in this case, the display area of the gauge image as the "remaining time display" in the integrated model image display IG is "0", which is different from the case of "I1 (FIG. 242(e1)-(i1))". However, other than that, as shown in FIG. 242(e3)-(i3), the performance will progress in basically the same manner as the case of "I1 (FIG. 242(e1)-(i1))".

In addition, the case where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "i2 (FIG. 242(e4)-(i4))" corresponds to a case where if a valid reception determination had been made within the 1D reception period, the performance (high expectations) would have progressed from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIG. 242(e2)-(i2))". However, in reality, a valid reception determination is not made within the 1D reception period, and the performance after the 1D reception is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. That is, in this case, the display area of the gauge image as the "remaining time display" in the integrated model image display IG is "0", which is different from the case of "I2 (FIG. 242(e2)-(i2))". However, other than that, as shown in FIG. 242(e4)-(i4), the performance progresses in basically the same manner as the case of "I2 (FIG. 242(e2)-(i2))".

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) is set to be different between the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity judgment being made within the 1D reception period and the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity judgment not being made within the 1D reception period and the arrival of timing tW3. In this example, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity judgment not being made within the 1D reception period and the arrival of timing tW3, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is set to be shorter than the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity judgment being made within the 1D reception period, thereby encouraging the player to play so that the reception validity judgment is made within the 1D reception period. However, if the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without a valid reception determination being made within the 1D reception period, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance may be made longer than if the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on a valid reception determination being made within the 1D reception period.

On the other hand, FIG. 236 assumes that an action (e.g., a pressing operation) is performed by the player on the operating means (e.g., the operating button 410) before the 1st D acceptance period occurs, and the action (operation) is detected by an action detection means (such as a sensor), and the detection information is stored and held in a detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in a program) until the 1st D acceptance period occurs, and is used for the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination during the 1st D acceptance period (when a stock acceptance presentation is executed during the 1st D acceptance period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 236 (a), when the timing tW1 arrives before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, a premonition effect display (here, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC) that suggests to the player that an action opportunity will be given can be executed. In this regard, during the period in which the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is executed,
a first period (stock period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and detection information by the action detection means is used for “validity of acceptance determination” within the first D acceptance period;
- A second period (non-stock period) is included in which, even if an action is performed by a player and the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information by the action detection means is not used for ``valid acceptance determination'' within the first D acceptance period.

As shown in Fig. 236 and Fig. 240(b) and (c), the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" in this example is executed by sequentially displaying the "1D premonition effect display ZEC-1 (see Fig. 240(b))" corresponding to the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" and the "1D premonition effect display ZEC-2 (see Fig. 240(c))" corresponding to the above-mentioned "second period (non-stock period)". That is, in this case, when a player's action is detected during the period during which the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is executed, this will be used for the above-mentioned validity of acceptance judgment during the 1D acceptance period, but when a player's action is detected during the period during which the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is executed, this will not be used for the above-mentioned validity of acceptance judgment during the 1D acceptance period.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 236 assumes a case in which an action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" of the period during which the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" is executed, and this is detected by the action detection means.

However, the "valid acceptance judgment that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is permitted only during the first D acceptance period. Therefore, even if the action by the player is performed during the "first period (stock period)" and detected by the action detection means, the "valid acceptance judgment" is not made at that time (the time when the first D acceptance period has not yet occurred). In other words, the detection information (detection information of the action by the player) obtained during the "first period (stock period)" is also stored and held at the timing tW2 when the first D acceptance period occurs. Then, at the timing tW2 (more precisely, the judgment timing tW2A that arrives immediately (several ms after) the occurrence of the timing tW2), it is judged based on the stored detection information whether or not the situation is such that a "valid acceptance judgment" should be made, and as a result of this judgment, a "valid acceptance judgment" is made (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained during the "first period (stock period)") (stock acceptance performance). Furthermore, based on the fact that the reception is valid, the 1D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period is started to be executed.

Therefore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and the action is detected by the action detection means, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is not terminated or the corresponding premonition effect sound is not interrupted at the time of the detection. Furthermore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection does not cause any reaction in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the acceptance permission sound is not stopped from being output after the detection. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until the timing tW2 at which the 1D acceptance period occurs arrives, the performance is progressed in the same manner whether the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and the action is detected by the action detection means or the action is not detected by the action detection means.

In addition, even if a "valid reception determination" is made (a stock reception presentation is executed) during the 1D reception period based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs, as shown in Figures 236 and 243, the presentation will basically proceed in the same manner as if a valid reception determination was made based on detection information obtained during the 1D reception period.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 240(c) to "J1 (FIG. 243(e5)-(i5))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), and cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 240(c) to "J2 (FIG. 243(e6)-(i6)" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), and in the first, second, and third performance devices, the performance is executed basically as described with reference to FIG. 234, FIG. 242(e1)-(i1), or FIG. 242(e2)-(i2), etc.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception presentation is executed during the 1D reception period), similar to the example shown in FIG. 234, at timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 1D post-reception presentation is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is in a displayed state, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), as also shown in FIG. 243 (e5) and (e6), the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is not hidden but is in a displayed state at timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 1D post-reception effect is started in response to the acceptance). In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the player's action has been accepted (a valid acceptance determination has been made) based on the detection information obtained during the period when the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is being executed, prior to the occurrence of the 1D reception period.

Also, in the examples shown in FIG. 236(b) and FIG. 243(f5) or (f6), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A) when the first D acceptance period ends by accepting the player's action (when timing tW2B arrives), a display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to see the integrated model image display IG (model image display) begins. As in the cases shown in FIG. 234 and FIG. 242, different disappearance-related display modes (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) appear depending on whether a low expectation mode (FIG. 243(e5)-(i5)) appears as the first D acceptance post-effect or a high expectation mode (FIG. 243(e6)-(i6)) appears.

However, in the example shown in Figure 236 (when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1st D reception period), as shown in Figures 243 (f5) and (f6), the disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1 or second disappearance-related display SKD2) will be displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see not only the integrated model image display IG (model image display), but also the "1st D premonition performance display ZEC."

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (an example in which a stock reception effect is executed), the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed while the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" is displayed. With this configuration, even if the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" continues to be displayed after reception has been made, the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 236 (an example in which a stock reception effect is executed), when timing tW2C arrives during the period in which the disappearance-related display appears, as shown in Figure 243 (g5) or (g6), a "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" is executed as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted within the 1st D reception period. The "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" is executed in different ways (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1, 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 240(c) to "J1 (FIG. 243(e5)-(i5))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation) and in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 240(c) to "J2 (FIG. 243(e6)-(i6))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), just like in the cases shown in FIG. 234 and FIG. 242.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (where the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), when timing tW2C arrives, the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is hidden.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 236 (an example in which a stock reception performance was executed during the 1D reception period), after the display of the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" has begun in this manner, while the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is displayed, as shown in Figure 236 (b) and Figure 243 (h5) or (h6), first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related displays", the "integrated model image display IG" is made non-displayable. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1 or second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 236(b) or FIG. 243(i5) or (i6), and this allows for good visibility and results in the display relating to the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)."

Incidentally, even in the examples shown in Figures 236 and 243 (examples in which a stock reception effect is executed), the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device and the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception sound) using the third effect device are started prior to the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception display) using the first effect device based on the player's action being accepted (valid reception determination being made), and the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated midway (midway through the audible output state) based on the player's action being accepted (valid reception determination being made) while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output.

However, as mentioned above, it is also possible to start outputting one (or both) of the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound at timing tW2 when the first D reception period occurs or thereafter. When such a configuration is adopted, in the examples shown in Figures 236 and 243 (examples in which a stock reception performance is executed), unlike the examples shown in Figures 234 and 242 (examples in which the sound is received within the reception period), it is also possible to prevent the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound from starting to be output.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) executed based on the reception validity determination being made during the 1D reception period is different between the example shown in FIG. 236 or FIG. 243 (example where the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period) and the example shown in FIG. 234 or FIG. 242 (example where the reception is based on the detection information obtained during the 1D reception period). In this example, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs (see FIG. 236 or FIG. 243), the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is shorter than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the detection information obtained during the 1D reception period (see FIG. 234 or FIG. 242), thereby encouraging the player to play so that the player's operation is detected during the 1D reception period. However, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs (see FIG. 236 or FIG. 243), the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance may be longer than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on detection information obtained within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 234 or FIG. 242).

In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 or FIG. 243 (the case where the stock reception effect was executed during the 1D reception period), the execution time of the 1D post-reception effect (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) is set to be different from the example shown in FIG. 235 (the case where the stock reception effect was not executed during the reception period)

In the examples shown in Figures 236 and 243 (examples in which the stock reception effect was executed during the 1D reception period), the timing at which the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is hidden is the same as the timing tW2C at which the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1 begins to be executed, but it does not necessarily have to be the same timing. For example, the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" may be hidden at the same timing (later than timing tW2C) as the "integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image))."

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 236 and 243 (examples in which a stock reception effect was executed during the 1D reception period), if a "valid reception determination" is made based on detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, the 1D premonition effect display SKC-2 (second period) is displayed as the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" at timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A) when the "valid reception determination" is made, but instead, the 1D premonition effect display SKC-1 that was displayed when the detection information was obtained may be displayed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest at what timing the "valid reception determination" was made based on the detection information obtained.

In the above example, the period during which the first D premonition effect display ZEC is executed is as follows:
a first period (stock period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and detection information by the action detection means is used for “validity of acceptance determination” within the first D acceptance period;
When a player performs an action, even if the action is detected by the action detection means, a second period (non-stock period) is generated in which the detection information by the action detection means is not used for ``valid acceptance determination'' within the first D acceptance period.However, instead of this, the second period (non-stock period) may be generated first and then the first period (stock period).

In the above example, the content of the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is different between the first period (stock period) and the second period (non-stock period), but the content of the effect may be the same (continued over the two periods). Also, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included in the period during which the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is executed.

As mentioned above, in the first D reception period in this example, the integrated Mo-image display IG (Mo-image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 144(a) instead of the manner shown in Fig. 144(d). Even if it has been pre-determined (pre-determined based on the result of the jackpot determination) that the integrated Mo-image display IG (Mo-image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 144(a), if a "valid reception determination" is made within the first D reception period based on detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in Fig. 243 above is the appearance of the "integrated Mo-image display IG (Mo-image display, frame image, gauge image)," and otherwise the presentation will proceed in the same manner. In other words, the situation shown in FIG. 243 above corresponds to a case where it has been pre-determined (pre-determined based on the result of the jackpot determination) that the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(d).

With this configuration, even if the above-mentioned stock reception performance is executed based on detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, it is possible to preferably indicate which aspect was intended to appear as the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image).

Figures 237 to 239 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition 2D is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a second D reception period (second D reception presentation) occurs. Figures 244 to 247 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a second D reception period (second D reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "second D fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second D fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the second D fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second D fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 244 (a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second D fluctuation pattern" itself.

In addition, in the performance related to the "second D variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment), as shown in FIG. 237(a), when the timing tX2 (for example, timing in a non-reach state) when the second D time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ arrives (when condition 2D is satisfied), the above-mentioned second D acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the second D reception post-performance" is permitted may be generated ("the situation shown in FIG. 245(d)"); or, only when a predetermined result is obtained as the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment), when the timing tX2 (for example, timing in a non-reach state) arrives (when condition 2D is satisfied), the above-mentioned second D acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the second D reception post-performance" is permitted may be generated. In any case, when the action by the player is accepted during the second D acceptance period (when the acceptance is judged to be valid), the second D reception post-performance will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, when such a second D reception period occurs, in relation to this, a premonition performance display suggesting that the reception period (valid period) will occur soon, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance related display (disappearance EF display) making it difficult to see the action target display (mochi image display) and the remaining time display, and a post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation degree (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) according to the acceptance are each performed. The expectation degree (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the action target display (mochi image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also the case for other reception periods.

More specifically, when the timing tX1 arrives before the occurrence of the second D reception period, as shown in FIG. 237(b) and FIG. 244(b) and (c), the "second D premonition effect display ZED" is executed as the premonition effect display. In this example, the "second D premonition effect display ZED" is hidden at the timing tX2 when the second D reception period occurs, but may be displayed across the timing tX2. Note that in this example, as shown in FIG. 237(d), when the "second D premonition effect display ZED" is executed, unlike when the above-mentioned "first D premonition effect display ZED" is executed, the effect sound (premonition effect sound) corresponding to the "second D premonition effect display ZED" is not output.

As will be described later, in the second D acceptance period of this embodiment, like the first D acceptance period described above, even if the player performs an action (e.g., a pressing operation) on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) before the second D acceptance period occurs, the action (operation) is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), and the detection information is stored and retained in the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program) even at the time the second D acceptance period occurs, and may be used for the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination during the second D acceptance period (when the stock acceptance performance is executed). However, if a "valid reception determination" is made within the second D reception period based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs, unlike the above-mentioned "if a "valid reception determination" is made within the first D reception period based on detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs," the post-reception performance (here, the second D post-reception performance) is started without the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed (made visible) even once. Note that the target (type of operation means) to which an action opportunity is given during the first D reception period and the target (type of operation means) to which an action opportunity is given during the second D reception period may be the same or different.

In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 237 and 238, and in the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 244(c) to "K (Figure 245(d)", it is assumed that the second D reception period occurs without such a stock reception presentation being performed, that is, that the detection information obtained before the second D reception period is not used for the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the second D reception period.

More specifically, in the case where the second D reception period occurs at timing tX2 without a stock reception performance, as shown in FIG. 237(b) and FIG. 245(d), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" is displayed as an integrated mochi image display IG. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tX2 when the corresponding reception period (here, the second D reception period) occurs, or may appear before timing tX2 and be displayed to span the timing tX2. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is hidden when reception (valid reception determination) is made within the second D reception period, or when the second D reception period ends without the reception (valid reception determination). In this example, the second D acceptance period ends at timing tX3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 237(a)).

Furthermore, in the second D reception period in this example, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in one of a number of modes (for example, Fig. 144(a) and (c)). Figs. 245 and 246 correspond to the case where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the "mode shown in Fig. 144(c)". When the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "mode shown in Fig. 144(a)", the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) shown in Figs. 245 and 246 is simply changed from the "mode shown in Fig. 144(c)" to the "mode shown in Fig. 144(a)", and therefore illustration will be omitted. In addition, even during the second D reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in any of a number of forms, including those shown in Figures 144 (b) and (d).

Figure 237 assumes that a player's action is detected during this second D reception period, and a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made at timing tX2a based on the detection information. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 237(a), the second D reception period ends based on the player's action being accepted (valid reception determination is made) at timing tX2a, and the post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) corresponding to the second D reception period begins to be executed.

Here, an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K1 (FIG. 246(e1) to FIG. 246(i1))" corresponds to a case in which a first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the second D reception period, and an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K2 (FIG. 246(e2) to FIG. 246(i2))" corresponds to a case in which a second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the second D reception period. The expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, even during the 2nd D reception period, as shown in FIG. 237, at timing tX2a when the player's action is accepted (when the 2nd D post-reception performance starts in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is not made invisible, nor is the integrated model image display IG made difficult to see.

In other words, the 2D post-reception performance according to this embodiment is realized as a performance that combines at least the "2D post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "2D post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., sub-liquid crystal display, movable body, performance lamp, etc.), and the 2D post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed is delayed in the time at which the "2nd post-reception performance display" as the 2D post-reception performance is started compared to the other performance devices, and this is intended to maintain the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 246 (e1) or (e2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 144 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period, even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as it was during the reception period even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 237 (b) and Figure 246 (f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tX2a when the second D acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tX2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the model image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tX2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

However, unlike the first D reception period described above, during the second D reception period, the same disappearance-related display (here, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears when the corresponding post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) is a low expectation mode (Fig. 246 (e1)-(i1)) and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 246 (e2)-(i2)) appears. In other words, in this case, while the disappearance-related display appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it becomes difficult to recognize in what manner the "second D post-reception performance display" will be executed.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 237 (b) and Figure 246 (g1) or (g2), when timing tX2c arrives during the period during which a display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" as a post-reception performance in response to the player's action being accepted within the 2nd D acceptance period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K1 (FIG. 246(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 246(g1), the first mode (here, the second-D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, which is a "silent" conversation announcement) is displayed as the second-D post-reception performance display UGD2 corresponding to the second-D reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K2 (FIG. 246(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 246(f2), the second mode (here, the second-D post-reception performance display UGD2-2, which is a conversation announcement that mentions "chance") is displayed as the second-D post-reception performance display UGD2 corresponding to the second-D reception period.

In other words, in this case, the second D post-reception performance display UGD2 will start to be executed in one of multiple modes (second D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, second D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) with different degrees of expectation, but no matter which of these modes starts to be executed, one mode (second disappearance-related display SKD2) is displayed (priority display) as a disappearance-related display so as to overlap with the second D post-reception performance display UGD2, making it difficult to see, so that it becomes difficult to recognize in what mode the "second D post-reception performance display" is being executed.

In this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2)" are displayed, the "second D post-reception performance display UGD2 ("second D post-reception performance display UGD2-1" or "second D post-reception performance display UGD2-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the second D acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Also, since the second D post-acceptance performance display UGD1 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2 (second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2-1 or second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2-2)" while suggesting that the second D acceptance period has already ended (after timing tX2c).

On the other hand, when the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)". This makes it easier to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 237 (b) and Figure 246 (h1) or (h2), while the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related displays", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 237(b) and FIG. 246(i1) or (i2), and this allows for good visibility and causes the display related to the "second D post-reception performance display UGD2 (second D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or second D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" to be displayed.

In this regard, the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2" is displayed in one of multiple modes (here, 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In this performance example, the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2" is started to be displayed at a later time (timing tX2c) than the time (timing tX2b) when the "disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2)" is started to be displayed, but it may be started to be displayed at the same time (timing tX2b) as the time (timing tX2b) when the "disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2)" is started to be displayed.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the second D acceptance period, as shown in Figures 227(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the second D post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the second D post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, even if the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is configured to display the second D post-reception performance after displaying the disappearance-related display, the second D post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tX2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of emitting light for presentation. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light-emitting presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K1 (FIG. 246(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 246(d1), the mode in which "Suekichi" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the second-D post-reception performance (second-D post-reception performance display UGD2-1) using the first performance device as the second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2 (second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2-1, which is a low expectation mode of the second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2) corresponding to the second-D reception period. In contrast, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K2 (FIG. 246(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 246(e2), the mode in which "吉" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the second-D post-reception performance (second-D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) using the first performance device as the second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2 (second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2-2, which is a high expectation mode of the second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2) corresponding to the second-D reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 245(d), in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a performance within the reception period (display of a fortune slip) is executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 2D reception period has occurred. The performance within the reception period on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectations (not shown) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectations (see FIG. 245(d)).

In other words, in this case, during the second D reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" is made during the second D reception period, while the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) continues to display the "integrated model image display IG" (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can increase the interest in the game.

In this example, the reception period performance (display of the fortune slip) on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed continuously from before the second D reception period occurs, and also functions as a precursor performance that indicates the occurrence of the second D reception period. However, the reception period performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) and the precursor performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) may each be executed as different performances.

In addition, in this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-1" or the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-2" appears as the 2nd D reception specific performance UTD2, but it is not necessary to provide multiple forms for the 2nd D reception specific performance UTD2. For example, it is possible to provide only the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-2" as the 2nd D reception specific performance UTD2, and suggest the degree of expectation (the proportion of jackpots that are obtained) depending on whether the 2nd D reception specific performance UTD2 appears. In other words, in this case, when the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-2" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-2" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the second D reception period occurs, the reception permission sound starts to be output at a timing slightly before the timing tX2 shown in FIG. 237(d). In other words, the reception permission sound corresponding to the second D reception period is audibly output across the timing tX2 at which the second D reception period occurs, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the reception permission sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the second D reception period, the first long permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time is not output as the reception permissible sound, and the first short permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time is output. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the second D reception period may be output as a sound different from either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound.

In the second D acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the first short acceptance sound) is being audibly output, the acceptance permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is not terminated midway) based on the acceptance, thereby indicating that the second D acceptance period will occur (or is occurring) rather than the first D acceptance period. However, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the second D acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on the acceptance.

In this regard, it is desirable that the reception permissible sound (here, the first short permissible sound) corresponding to the second D reception period be executed (audibly output) in a low expectation manner (not shown) as shown in FIG. 237(d) and executed (audibly output) in a high expectation manner (as shown in FIG. 245(d)).

When an acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 2D acceptance period, the audible output of the 2D post-acceptance performance sound is started based on this. The 2D post-acceptance performance sound, like the "2D post-acceptance performance display UGD2", will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden, as shown in FIG. 237(d). In addition, it is desirable that the 2D post-acceptance performance sound be output in a different output sound (mode) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K1 (FIG. 246(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K2 (FIG. 246(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance).

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 2D acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 2D post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K1 (FIG. 246(e1)-(i1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K2 (FIG. 246(e2)-(i2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during a reception period other than the 2D acceptance period. With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast to this, the example shown in Figure 238 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 245 (d) to "k (Figure 246 (e3) to (h3))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 2D reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 238, after the second D reception period occurs, the timing tX3 arrives without the player's action (operation) being accepted (valid reception judgement). In the second D reception period in this example, unlike the first D reception period described above, if the player does not make an action (operation) and is not accepted (valid reception judgement) during the second D reception period, the same post-reception performance (here, the second D post-reception performance) as when a valid reception judgement is made during the second D reception period will not occur.

However, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tX3 (the point at which the second D reception period ends and the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted), just like the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tX2a (the point at which the player's actions (operations) are accepted within the second D reception period (or the point at which the performance begins to be executed after acceptance)), as shown in FIG. 246 (e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, nor is the integrated model image display IG made difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the second D reception period ends before the player's action (operation) is received in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the second D reception period after the second D reception period ends, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 246 (f3), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated Moji image display IG becomes difficult to see." In other words, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" will be displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed, so that at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed will overlap with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the second D reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the second D reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the second D reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the second D acceptance period, the "third disappearance related display SKD3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF presentation).

It is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKD3" is not displayed in relation to the first D reception period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the first D reception period has not occurred. It is also preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKD3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the second D reception period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately suggest that the second D reception period has ended without any acceptance.

It is desirable that the "third disappearance related display SKD3" is always displayed in one manner, regardless of whether or not a highly anticipated manner would have appeared as the "post-second D reception performance" if a valid reception determination had been made within the second D reception period.

After this, as shown in FIG. 246 (g3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKD3)," the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 246 (h5), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKD3))" is hidden.

As mentioned above, during the second D reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 144(c). However, when such a situation arises, the only difference is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)" and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner, so we will not explain this further.

On the other hand, FIG. 239 assumes that an action (e.g., a pressing operation) is performed by the player on the operating means (e.g., the operating button 410) before the second D acceptance period occurs, and the action (operation) is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), and the detection information is stored and held in the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program) until the second D acceptance period occurs and is used for the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination during the second D acceptance period (when the stock acceptance presentation is executed during the second D acceptance period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 239(a), when the timing tX1 arrives before the occurrence of the second D reception period, a premonition effect display (here, the second D premonition effect display ZED) that suggests to the player that an action opportunity will be given can be executed. In this regard, during the period in which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed,
a first period (stock period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and detection information by the action detection means is used for “validity of acceptance determination” within the second D acceptance period;
- The second period (non-stock period) is included in which, even if an action is performed by a player and the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information by the action detection means is not used for ``valid acceptance determination'' within the second D acceptance period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 239 and FIG. 244(b) and (c), the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED" in this example is displayed in the same manner in both the "first period (stock period)" and the "second period (non-stock period)". Therefore, even if the manner of the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED" is confirmed, it is not possible to recognize whether the "first period (stock period)" or the "second period (non-stock period)" is occurring. However, the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED" may also be configured to appear in different manners depending on whether it is in the "first period (stock period)" or the "second period (non-stock period)".

In addition, in the "second D premonition effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)" according to this example, the proportion of the "first period (stock period)" to the period from when the premonition effect display is executed to when the reception period occurs is larger than in the case of the above-mentioned "first D premonition effect display ZEC (see FIG. 236)". For example, in the example shown in FIG. 236, the proportion of the "first period (stock period)" to the "period of timing tW1 to tW2" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. 239, the proportion of the "first period (stock period)" to the "period of timing tX1 to tX2" is about 70%. In other words, in this case, in the "second D premonition effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)", when a player's action is detected during the period from when the premonition effect display is started to when the reception period occurs, the expected value of this occurring during the "first period (stock period)" can be made higher than in the case of the "first D premonition effect display ZED (see FIG. 236)".

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 239 assumes a case in which an action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" of the period during which the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is executed, and this is detected by the action detection means.

However, the "valid acceptance judgment that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is permitted only during the second D acceptance period. Therefore, even if the action by the player is performed during the "first period (stock period)" and detected by the action detection means, the "valid acceptance judgment" is not made at that time (the time when the second D acceptance period has not yet occurred). In other words, the detection information (detection information of the action by the player) obtained during the "first period (stock period)" is also stored and held at the timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs. Then, at the timing tX2 (more precisely, the judgment timing tX2A that arrives immediately (several ms after) the occurrence of the timing tX2), it is judged based on the stored detection information whether or not the situation is such that a "valid acceptance judgment" should be made, and as a result of this judgment, a "valid acceptance judgment" is made (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained during the "first period (stock period)") (stock acceptance performance). Furthermore, based on the fact that the reception is valid, the second D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) corresponding to the second D reception period is started to be executed.

Therefore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the above-mentioned action detection means, the second D premonition effect display ZED will not be terminated at the time of the detection. Furthermore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the above-mentioned action detection means, no reaction will be caused in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) based on the detection, and the acceptance permission sound will not be stopped from being output after the detection. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until the timing tX2 at which the second D acceptance period occurs arrives, the performance will progress in the same manner whether the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the above-mentioned action detection means or not detected by the action detection means.

In addition, even if a "valid reception determination" is made (a stock reception presentation is executed) during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs, as shown in Figures 239 and 247, the presentation will basically proceed in the same manner as if a valid reception determination was made based on detection information obtained during the second D reception period.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception performance is executed during the second D reception period), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 244(c) to "L1 (FIG. 247(e4)-(i4))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), and cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 244(c) to "L2 (FIG. 247(e5)-(i5)" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), and in the first, second, and third performance devices, the performance is executed basically as described with reference to FIG. 237, FIG. 246(e1)-(i1), or FIG. 246(e2)-(i2), etc.

However, as mentioned above, if during the 2D reception period a "valid reception determination" is made based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs (if the stock reception performance is executed), the post-reception performance (here, the 2D post-reception performance) will begin to be executed without the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed (made visible) even once.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (where the stock reception presentation is executed during the 2D reception period), unlike the example shown in FIG. 237, the "integrated model image display IG" is not displayed (visible) at timing tX2 (or more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 2D post-reception presentation begins in response to the acceptance).

Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), as also shown in FIG. 247(e4) and (e5), the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is not hidden but is in a displayed state at timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 2D post-reception effect is started in response to the acceptance). In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the player's action has been accepted (a valid acceptance determination has been made) based on the detection information obtained during the period when the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is being executed, prior to the occurrence of the 2D reception period.

In this regard, even in the examples shown in FIG. 239(b) and FIG. 247(f4) or (f5), when a predetermined time has passed (when timing tX2B arrives) from timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A) when the second D acceptance period ends by the acceptance of the player's action, the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) begins. As in the cases shown in FIG. 237 and FIG. 246, the same disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears when a low expectation mode (FIG. 247(e4)-(i4)) appears as the second D acceptance post-presentation and when a high expectation mode (FIG. 247(e5)-(i5)) appears.

However, in the example shown in Figure 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2nd D reception period), as shown in Figures 247 (f4) and (f5), the disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2) will not be an integrated model image display IG (model image display), but will be displayed in a way that makes the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED" difficult to see.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (an example in which a stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed while the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is displayed. With this configuration, even if the "2D premonition effect display ZED" continues to be displayed after reception has been made, the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is made difficult to see, suggesting that the post-reception effect (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 239 (an example in which a stock reception effect is executed during the 2nd D reception period), when timing tX2C arrives during the period in which the disappearance-related display appears, as shown in Figure 247 (g4) or (g5), a "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" is executed as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted during the 2nd D reception period. The "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" is executed in different ways (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 244(c) to "L1 (FIG. 247(e4)-(i4))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation) and in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 244(c) to "L2 (FIG. 247(e5)-(i5))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), just like in the cases shown in FIG. 237 and FIG. 246.

In the example shown in Figure 239 (an example in which a stock reception performance is executed during the 2nd D reception period), after the display of the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" has begun in this manner, as shown in Figure 239 (b) and Figure 247 (h4) or (h5), while the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is displayed, first, of the "2nd D premonition performance display ZED" and the "disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2)," the "2nd D premonition performance display ZED" is made non-displayable. Then, after the "2nd D premonition performance display ZED" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2)" is hidden as shown in Figure 239 (b) or Figure 247 (i4) or (i5), and this allows for good visibility and causes the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" to be displayed.

Incidentally, even in the examples shown in Figures 239 and 247 (examples in which a stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), based on the player's action being accepted (valid reception determination being made), the 2D post-reception effect (2D post-reception specific effect) using the 2nd performance device and the 2D post-reception effect (2D post-reception sound effect) using the 3rd performance device are started to be executed prior to the 2D post-reception effect (2D post-reception effect display) using the 1st performance device.

However, in the examples shown in Figures 239 and 247 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the second D reception period), unlike the examples shown in Figures 236 and 243 described above (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the first D reception period), the first short permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is terminated midway) based on the acceptance of a player's action (valid reception determination) while the first short permissible sound is being audibly output.

As mentioned above, the first short allowable sound may be output at or after timing tX2 when the second D reception period occurs. Even when such a configuration is adopted, in the examples shown in Figures 239 and 247 (examples in which a stock reception performance is executed in the second D reception period), unlike the examples shown in Figures 236 and 243 (examples in which reception is performed within the reception period), it is desirable to ensure that the first short allowable sound is always output.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 or FIG. 247 (where the stock reception effect is executed during the second D reception period) and the case of the example shown in FIG. 237 or FIG. 246 (where the reception is based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period), the execution time of the second D post-reception effect (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) that is executed based on the reception validity determination being made during the second D reception period is set to be the same.

In the examples shown in Figures 239 and 247 (examples in which the stock reception effect was executed during the 2D reception period), the timing at which the "2D premonition effect display ZED" was hidden was later than the timing tX2C at which the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2 begins to be executed, but it may also be hidden at the same timing tX2C.

In the above example, the period during which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed is as follows:
a first period (stock period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and detection information by the action detection means is used for “validity of acceptance determination” within the second D acceptance period;
When a player performs an action, even if the action is detected by the action detection means, a second period (non-stock period) is generated in which the detection information by the action detection means is not used for ``valid acceptance determination'' within the second D acceptance period.However, instead of this, the second period (non-stock period) may be generated first and then the first period (stock period) may be generated.

In addition, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included within the period during which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed.

In addition, in the second D reception period in this performance example, the disappearance-related display SKD is the "second D premonition display ZED," which can also appear when reception is made in the first D reception period. However, the disappearance-related display may be executed in a manner that does not allow it to appear in relation to the first D reception period.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present application, which provides such a first D reception period and a second D reception period, achieves the excellent effects listed below.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple reception periods (first D reception period and second D reception period) are prepared that have different presentation contents (post-reception presentations such as cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc., which are types of pre-notification presentations (expectation indication presentations)) that are carried out when reception is made, and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of a different type according to the result of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the first D reception period and the second D reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, a post-acceptance performance display (first D post-acceptance performance display, second D post-acceptance performance display) can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Among these, in the first D reception period and the second D reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, not only is a post-acceptance performance display displayed based on the fact that the action has been accepted, but a "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is also made to appear. That is, in this case, not only is it possible to check which aspect of the model image display (or gauge image) has appeared even after the action has been accepted, but by reducing the visibility of the model image display (or gauge image) by the "aspect in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" until the model image display (or gauge image) is made invisible, it is expected that the player's focus will naturally shift from the model image display (or gauge image) to the "post-acceptance performance display". In addition, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is a display in which the same format can be used in common for multiple reception periods in which the performance content that progresses when the reception is made is different (which may be a reception period different from the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period (such as the reception periods described above with reference to the drawings up to Figure 233)).

However, because the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the reception period when reception has not yet been made, if the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were to be displayed after reception has been made, it would be difficult to tell whether the post-reception performance display corresponding to the reception has already been displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game would decrease. In this regard, when reception is made during either the first D reception period or the second D reception period, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made invisible (invisible) while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, whereas the post-reception performance display is displayed while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, a transition in display presentation from the pre-acceptance display (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance presentation display) is realized while "a display in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-acceptance performance display" are common in that they are both displayed based on acceptance. However, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" basically refers to a display that appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, as shown in FIG. 242(f) and FIG. 246(f), etc. In contrast, the "post-acceptance performance display" refers to a display that appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see even if it is displayed when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, as shown in FIG. 242(g) and FIG. 246(g), etc.

As for the "mode in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", methods of "appearing so as to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" include a method of realizing this by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) as a priority display (displaying in a front layer) in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, as well as a method of displaying an image (video) that is made so that a part of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appears missing (unrecognizable) by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, instead of displaying an image other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. In response to this, a method for making the "post-reception performance display" "appear so as not to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" can be adopted, such as a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, but displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displaying in a rear layer) in such a way that the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is given priority display, or a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in an area excluding the area in which the Moji image display is displayed, at least while the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed.

In addition, as a "mode in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)," it is possible to adopt both a method of displaying an image display other than the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, and a method of changing a numerical value (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears before the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to see by the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)." This means that while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are visible, the "post-acceptance performance display" may soon appear, and it is possible to encourage the player to prepare in advance by changing his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)."

In addition, if a win is accepted during the 1st D acceptance period or the 2nd D acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can remain displayed even after the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a wider range of performance related to the "post-acceptance performance display" during the period in which the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game by changing the performance during such a display period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples for the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, as shown in Figures 242 and 246, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed not only in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are not displayed. And, in this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of it, but it is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is difficult to see due to the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

With this configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears to make it difficult to see not only the replica image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception performance display", which is expected to improve both the performance until the replica image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" begins to be displayed.

In addition, the "disappearance-related display" in the example shown in FIG. 247 is displayed not only in the area where the second D premonition effect display ZED is displayed, but also in the area where the second D premonition effect display ZED is not displayed, when the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is not displayed. In addition, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed in at least a part of the area, but is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the "post-reception effect display" is difficult to see due to the "disappearance-related display". In other words, in this case, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears not as a model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but as something that makes the "second D premonition effect display ZED" and the "post-reception effect display" difficult to see, so that a different effect from the above-mentioned effect can be provided.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" is not displayed after reception has been made and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, a post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) that does not make it difficult to see the mock-up image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) can be made to appear in addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance). This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance prior to the first performance device without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to appear before the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) appears, in a situation where the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has not yet appeared. Also, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to continue until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has ended.

With this configuration, players who dislike the complex presentation of the first presentation device can enjoy the post-reception presentation with the second presentation device, which has a more simplified presentation, thereby increasing the interest of various types of players.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of performances related to the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period, the mock image display will be displayed by dynamic display, as described above with reference to Figures 145 and 146. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the mock image display is not terminated after it is accepted and continues (until it is made non-displayable), even while the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is appearing.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is designed to make it difficult to see not only the mock image display, but also the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period. This prevents the appearance of remaining time being seen even if the gauge image is displayed after reception.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the second D acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, a "second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2" can be displayed based on the acceptance, but in addition to the second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2, the above-mentioned mode (second extinction-related display SKD2) that also corresponds to the first D acceptance period can be made to appear as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) in addition to the second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2.

With this configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKD2 appears, it is unclear whether the first D or second D post-reception performance display will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKD1 appears, it becomes possible to guess that the first D post-reception performance display UGD1 will appear.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is displayed (priority display) in an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. However, it is also possible to realize a performance that uses a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen, in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same pattern (second disappearance related display SKD2) appears as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance), if the type of acceptance period is different, it is desirable to make the probability (expectation level) that the jackpot pattern will stop due to the pattern change different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) can be executed using the second performance device, and during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the first performance device is configured to be in a state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and in another state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device has started based on the fact that the reception has been made, it is possible to check which aspect has appeared as the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, by making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his or her focus of attention from the "first performance device" to the "second performance device."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started so as not to affect the visibility of the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that are continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is not an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the post-reception performance display is started to be displayed after the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance), but it may be made to start to be displayed at the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed." However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image display so that the area displayed in the "area where the model image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand as time passes.

As mentioned above, the "moon image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" in this embodiment can be displayed as an integrated moon image display IG in one of multiple modes (integrated moon image displays IGa-IGd) with different degrees of expectation. According to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the display mode, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance, so it is possible to recognize in what mode the moon image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period, even after acceptance.

As mentioned above, the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or only one of the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, when a "predetermined image display" such as a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is in a hidden state (not displayed), it means that it is in a state where it cannot be seen by the player, and includes, for example, a state where a "predetermined image display" such as a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is not visible because it is displayed on a layer but other image displays are given priority. However, if at least a part of a "predetermined image display" such as a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player's side, this means that the form of the "predetermined image display" is visible, so it can be said that the "predetermined image display" is not in a hidden state and is in a state where it continues to be displayed. The "predetermined image display" may be an image (for example, a premonition effect display) different from the "mochi image display" or the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)".

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the specific performance after reception may be realized as being performed on the first performance device (within the display screen of the performance display device 1600) rather than the second performance device.

In addition, the target of the player's action (operation) during the first D reception period and the second D reception period does not necessarily have to be the same, and they may each call for different actions. However, if different actions are called for, the action target display (model image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will also be displayed differently.

In the above-mentioned performance example, when the stock reception performance is executed in the 1D reception period (see FIG. 243), the 1D premonition performance display ZEC and the integrated Momo image display IG are displayed at the time when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period (the time when the performance after the 1D reception starts to be executed). In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed behind the integrated Momo image display IG, but instead, the integrated Momo image display IG may be displayed behind the 1D premonition performance display ZEC. In this case, however, the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed in a form that overlaps only a part of the integrated Momo image display IG, and it is required that (at least a part of) the integrated Momo image display IG is displayed (visible).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the "2D premonition performance display ZED" that can appear when a valid reception judgment is made within the 1D reception period is used as the disappearance-related display SKD that can appear when a valid reception judgment is made within the 2D reception period, but instead of this, a mode that cannot appear when a valid reception judgment is made within the 1D reception period may be used.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, first, a number of reception periods including the second D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and in the premonition performance, the "second D premonition performance display ZED (specific performance display)" shown in Figures 244 (b) and (c) can be displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 239, Fig. 244 and Fig. 247, even if the player performs an action while the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program), and a valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action based on the stored detection information is made within the 2D acceptance period (when the detection information is obtained during the first period (stock period) during which the 2D premonition effect display ZED is executed) (stock acceptance effect). With this configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) while the premonition effect (2D premonition effect display ZED) is being executed, it is possible to start the 2D post-reception effect using this as a trigger, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained through such flexible performance. This configuration and effect can be said not only when the stock reception performance is performed during the second D reception period, but also when the stock reception performance is performed during the first D reception period.

In the above-mentioned performance example, even if the player performs an action before the second D reception period occurs and while the "second D premonition performance display ZED" is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. During the second D reception period, a valid reception determination may be made to determine that the action performed by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and while the "second D premonition performance display ZED" is displayed (when detection information is obtained during the first period (stock period) of the period during which the second D premonition performance display ZED is executed), and when the valid reception determination is made, the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started, as shown in FIG. 247. According to such a configuration, even if an action is performed by the player "within the execution period of the second-D premonition effect display ZED" before the occurrence of the second-D acceptance period, the action is properly detected, and the detection information may be stored and held until the timing tX2 at which the second-D acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, "valid acceptance determination that the action performed by the player is a valid action" may be performed within the second-D acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the second-D acceptance period, so that even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the occurrence of the second-D acceptance period, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance effect after the occurrence of the second-D acceptance period without having to redo the action. In addition, at this time, when the second D post-reception performance is started based on the detection information obtained by an action (operation) with too much momentum when the second D reception period has not yet occurred (when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed), the second D premonition performance display ZED is not hidden but is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that the second D post-reception performance has been started based on the action (detection information) performed by the player when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only when the stock reception performance is executed during the second D reception period, but also when the stock reception performance is executed during the first D reception period.

In the above-mentioned performance example, if a valid acceptance determination is made based on the detection information (detection information of the player's action) obtained during the second D reception period at a specific timing (timing tX2a in FIG. 239) that determines that the player's action is a valid action, the second D premonition performance display ZED (specific performance display) is not displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance based on the valid acceptance determination starts to be executed. With this configuration, the performance state in the performance display device 1600 at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts to be executed is different between a case where a valid acceptance determination is made during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs and a case where a valid acceptance determination is made during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained during the second D reception period, and this makes it possible to suggest whether or not the situation is one in which a valid acceptance determination is made based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only for the second D reception period but also for the first D reception period.

In addition, if a valid reception determination is made during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained during that period, the premonition effect display (here, the second D premonition effect display ZED) may or may not be displayed at the time when the corresponding second D post-reception effect begins to be executed. In other words, in this case, while suggesting whether or not a situation is occurring in which a valid reception determination was made based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not such a situation is occurring, thereby making it possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. This alternative example can also be applied to the first D reception period in the same way.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, if a valid reception determination is made during the second D reception period based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period, and if the premonition display (here, the second D premonition display ZED) is not displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts based on the valid reception determination, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display) is displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 246 (e1) and (e2), the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display) maintains its display state without being made difficult to see by other image displays even after the second D post-reception performance starts, so that it is possible to suitably suggest in which form it was displayed during the second D reception period. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only for the second D reception period, but also for the first D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, if the "premonition performance display (here, the second D premonition performance display ZED)" is displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts to be executed, as shown in FIG. 247(f), the "premonition performance display (here, the second D premonition performance display ZED)" is made difficult to see by the disappearance-related display (here, the second disappearance-related display SKD2). With this configuration, while suggesting that the stock reception performance has been executed, it is possible to suppress the suspicion that "the reception validity determination has not yet been made" due to the display of the "premonition performance display (here, the second D premonition performance display ZED)" is displayed. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only in the second D reception period but also in the first D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the disappearance-related display (see FIG. 247) for making it difficult to see the "premonition performance display (here, the second D premonition performance display ZED)" when the stock reception performance is executed during the second D reception period, and the disappearance-related display (see FIG. 246) for making it difficult to see the "integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display)" when a reception validity determination is made based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period are displayed in the same manner (second disappearance-related display SKD2). This makes it possible to more appropriately indicate that the second D reception period has ended.

In the above-mentioned performance example, when the stock reception performance is executed in the second D reception period (see FIG. 247), the integrated model image display (model image display and remaining time display) is not displayed (visible) at the time when the corresponding second D post-reception performance starts, but the "premonition performance display (here, the second D premonition performance display ZED)" is displayed, and when the stock reception performance is executed in the first D reception period (see FIG. 243), the integrated model image display (model image display and remaining time display) is displayed (visible) at the time when the corresponding first D post-reception performance starts. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the stock reception performance was executed in the first D reception period or the second D reception period, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the reception period ending soon after it begins.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, first, multiple reception periods including a first D reception period and a second D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and the first D premonition performance display ZEC (first performance display) is displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the first D reception period (see FIG. 240), and the second D premonition performance display ZED (second performance display) is displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period (see FIG. 244).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action (operation) while either the first D premonition effect display ZEC or the second D premonition effect display ZED is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and a valid acceptance determination that the action performed by the player is a valid action based on the stored detection information may be made within the first D acceptance period or the second D acceptance period. Therefore, even if the player performs an action while a premonition effect (the first D premonition effect display ZEC or the second D premonition effect display ZED) is being executed, it is possible to use this as an opportunity to start a post-acceptance effect, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner through such flexible presentation.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the following configurations are adopted. That is, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, if a player performs an action before the reception period occurs and when the premonition performance is being executed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, when the reception period occurs before the premonition performance is being executed, a valid reception determination may be made for the player's action as a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means (stock reception performance). Then, in the first D reception period, when the first D reception period occurs before the premonition performance (first D premonition performance display ZEC) is executed, if a valid reception determination is made for the player's action as a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means, at least a part of the model image display is always displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. In contrast, in the second D reception period, if a valid reception determination is made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and while the premonition effect (second D premonition effect display ZED) is being executed, the mock image display is not even partially displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the valid reception determination is started to be executed. When these configurations are adopted, whether it is the first D reception period or the second D reception period, a "valid reception determination that a player's action is a valid action" may be made within the reception period based on the detection information obtained before the reception period occurs, so that even if the player performs an action (operation) out of momentum before the first D reception period or the second D reception period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-reception effect after the reception period occurs without having to redo the action. Furthermore, if a player makes an action (operation) out of vigor before the first D reception period occurs, at least a portion of the model image display will always be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, whereas if a player makes an action (operation) out of vigor before the second D reception period occurs, not even a portion of the model image display will be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, making it possible to appropriately indicate whether the post-reception performance is based on the first D reception period or the second D reception period (before which reception period the player made the action occurred).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the following configurations are adopted. That is, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, if a player performs an action before the reception period occurs and while the premonition performance is being executed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, a valid reception determination may be made to determine that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the reception period occurs before the premonition performance is being executed (stock reception performance). Then, in the first D reception period, if a valid reception determination is made to determine that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the first D reception period occurs before the premonition performance (first D premonition performance display ZEC) is being executed, at least a part of the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is always displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. In contrast, during the second D reception period, if a valid reception determination is made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and while the premonition effect (second D premonition effect display ZED) is being executed, even a part of the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the valid reception determination starts to be executed. When these configurations are adopted, whether it is the first D reception period or the second D reception period, a "valid reception determination that a player's action is a valid action" may be made during the reception period based on the detection information obtained before the reception period occurs, so that even if the player performs an action (operation) out of momentum before the first D reception period or the second D reception period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-reception effect after the reception period occurs without having to redo the action. Furthermore, if an action (operation) is made with too much momentum before the first D reception period occurs, at least a portion of the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will always be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, whereas if an action (operation) is made with too much momentum before the second D reception period occurs, not even a portion of the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, making it possible to appropriately indicate whether the post-reception performance is based on the first D reception period or the second D reception period (before which reception period the player made the action occurred).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, the opportunity to operate the same operating means is provided in the first D reception period and the second D reception period. In this regard, in the first reception period, it is possible to display a model image display or remaining time display in a form that cannot appear in the second reception period (integrated model image display IGd shown in FIG. 144(d)). With this configuration, even if the stock reception presentation is not performed, it is possible to indicate whether the first D reception period or the second D reception period is occurring.

As described above, in the second D reception period of this embodiment, if a "valid reception determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs (if a stock reception effect is performed), not even a part of the model image display or remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect starts to be executed. However, even in this case, as shown in Figures 239 and 247, a disappearance-related display (here, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) is displayed based on the fact that a valid reception determination was made during the second D reception period (the stock reception effect was performed). With this configuration, even if no model image display or remaining time display appears to prompt the player to perform an action, it is possible to suggest that the "post-reception effect" is being executed in response to the acceptance of the action by the player during the reception period.

In addition, during the first D reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is executed in different modes (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) when a low expectation mode (Fig. 243 (e5)-(i5)) appears as the performance after the first D reception and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 243 (e6)-(i6)) appears as the performance after the second D reception. In contrast, during the second D reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is executed in the same mode when a low expectation mode (Fig. 247 (e4)-(i4)) appears as the performance after the second D reception and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 247 (e5)-(i5)) appears as the performance after the second D reception. With this configuration, compared to the first D reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) differs depending on the degree of expectation), the importance of paying attention to the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is lower after reception within the second D reception period, and this, combined with the fact that the mock image display or remaining time display is not displayed, allows you to concentrate on what appearance will appear as the second D post-reception performance display UGD2C.

In addition, in the second D reception period in this performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that appears when reception is made uses the "second disappearance-related display SKD2" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (first D post-reception performance) corresponding to the first D reception period is executed in a highly anticipated manner. In other words, in this case, in the second D reception period, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the second D reception period does not necessarily have to be the "second disappearance-related display SKD2." For example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the second D reception period may be the "first disappearance-related display SKD1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (first D post-reception performance) corresponding to the above-mentioned first D reception period is executed in a low expectation mode, or a disappearance-related display that does not correspond to the first D reception period may be used.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is desirable that during the second D reception period, as the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display), if there is a reception, a specific mode (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears as the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display), and if there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode (e.g., the third disappearance-related display SKD3) appears, or no mode appears at all. With this configuration, if an action is forgotten during the second D reception period, the disappearance EF performance (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SKD2) that appears when the action is received will not appear, making it possible to appeal to the player that he or she is in a situation where an action has been forgotten, and from then on, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In addition, in the first D reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, the model image display or remaining time display (at least a part of it) is displayed at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts based on the stock reception performance, and the first D post-reception performance is executed for a different time when the reception validity judgment (stock reception performance) is made based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period and when the reception validity judgment is made based on the detection information obtained during the first D reception period (see Figs. 234 and 236). In contrast, in the second D reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, the model image display or remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts based on the stock reception performance, and the second D post-reception performance is executed for the same time when the reception validity judgment (stock reception performance) is made based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period and when the reception validity judgment is made based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period (see Figs. 237 and 239). This configuration makes it possible to provide completely different presentations during the first D reception period and the second D reception period, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The detection by the action detection means when the player performs an action and the storage of the detection information by the detection information storage means may be performed at any time, not just during the acceptance period or during the execution period of the premonition effect. In this case, however, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means will not be stored and held until the acceptance period occurs, or even if it is stored and held, it will not be used to determine whether acceptance is valid during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, first, a number of reception periods including the second D reception period are prepared as reception periods. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if no action by the player is detected during the second D reception period, the reception may be determined to be valid and a post-reception presentation (second D post-reception presentation) corresponding to the second D reception period may be executed, so that this type of flexible presentation is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the second D premonition performance display ZED (specific performance display) is displayed as a premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period, and even if the player performs an action before the second D reception period occurs and while the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during the second D reception period, a valid reception determination may be made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and while the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed" (stock reception performance), and when the valid reception determination is made, the model image display is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. In contrast, when a valid acceptance determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second D acceptance period," a model image display may be displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (second D post-acceptance performance) starts to be executed. When these configurations are adopted, a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" may be made during the second D acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the second D acceptance period occurs, so that even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the second D acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance) without having to redo the action after the second D acceptance period occurs. Moreover, depending on whether or not a model image display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance) starts to be executed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the state is one in which a valid acceptance determination has been made (a state in which a stock acceptance performance has been performed) based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the second D acceptance period occurs before the second D acceptance period occurs and the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the second D premonition performance display ZED (specific performance display) is displayed as a premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period, and even if the player performs an action before the second D reception period occurs and when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. During the second D reception period, a valid reception determination may be made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed" (stock reception performance), and when the valid reception determination is made, the remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. On the other hand, when the valid reception determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second D reception period", the remaining time display may be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (second D post-reception performance) is started. When these configurations are adopted, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made during the second D acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the second D acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) in a rush before the second D acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance) without having to redo the action after the second D acceptance period occurs. Moreover, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance) starts to be executed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the state is one in which a valid acceptance determination has been made (a state in which a stock acceptance performance has been performed) based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed before the second D acceptance period occurs."

When a valid reception determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second D reception period," the second D premonition display ZED may be displayed or may not be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) based on the valid reception determination is started. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) is started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs" or whether the post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) is started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second D reception period," and it becomes possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, during at least one of the first D reception period and the second D reception period, a special performance mode that cannot appear if the post-reception performance is started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs." In other words, the special performance mode can appear if the post-reception performance is not started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs." It is desirable to indicate the likelihood that a highly anticipated performance will appear as a post-reception performance depending on whether or not the special performance mode appears.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first D reception period and a second D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a first D reception period occurs, even if the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the first D reception period, a first D post-reception performance corresponding to the first D reception period can be executed, and when a second D reception period occurs, even if the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period, a second D post-reception performance corresponding to the second D reception period can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings during the 1D reception period when the performance after the 1D reception is started without the player's action being detected by the action detection means, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

However, if a player intends to perform an action (operation) within the "period of timing tW1 to W" before the occurrence of the first D acceptance period, but actually performs the action (operation) within the "period of timing W to tW2", it will be difficult for the player to recognize that he or she is in a situation where he or she should redo the action once the first D acceptance period has occurred, and as a result, there is a high possibility that the player will forget to perform an operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned presentation example, at least timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Figure 236 and timing tW3 shown in Figure 235 are provided as timings at which the 1D post-reception presentation is started without any action by the player being detected by the above-mentioned action detection means during the 1D reception period, and at timing tW2 (tW2A), "the above-mentioned reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period based on an action (detection information) by the player detected before the 1D reception period occurs (within the period of timings tW1 to W), thereby starting the execution of the 1D post-reception presentation (stock reception presentation)," and at timing tW3, "the 1D post-reception presentation is started based on the arrival of a specified timing (timing tW3) without detecting any action by the player, including before the occurrence of the 1D reception period." With this configuration, even if the player mistakenly believes that he or she performed an action (operation) during the "period from timing tW1 to W" before the occurrence of the 1D reception period and as a result forgets to perform the operation, the 1D post-reception performance will begin to be executed based on the arrival of timing tW3, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned performance example, in the second D reception period, it is possible to make it so that "the reception validity determination is made within the second D reception period based on the action (detection information) by the player detected before the second D reception period occurs, so that the second D post-reception performance is started" (stock reception performance), but it is not possible to make it so that "the second D post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detecting any action by the player, including before the second D reception period occurs". That is, in this case, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, "the reception validity determination can be made within the reception period based on the action (detection information) by the player detected before the reception period occurs (stock reception performance)", and this makes it possible to start the post-reception performance. Moreover, in the first D reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance (first D post-reception performance) is executed as a rescue based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3), so that the "stock reception performance" can be challenged with confidence. On the other hand, during the 2D reception period, if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) is not executed as a rescue, which creates an ideal sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the premonition performance corresponding to the 1D reception period (such as the 1D premonition performance display ZEC) and the premonition performance corresponding to the 2D reception period (such as the 2D premonition performance display ZED) are executed in different performance modes, but these premonition performances may be executed in the same performance mode (for example, the 2D premonition performance display ZED in both cases). With this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a reception period with a rescue (timing tW3) (the 1D reception period) will occur when the stock reception performance based on the actions while the premonition performance is being performed fails, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In the first D reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the first D post-reception performance is generated based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period (by the stock reception performance), the first D post-reception performance is generated by performing the same process (detection by the same action detection means → storage by the same detection information storage means → same reception validity judgment during the first D reception period) as when the first D post-reception performance is generated based on the detection information obtained during the first D reception period. In contrast, when the first D post-reception performance is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3 after the first D reception period has occurred, the first D post-reception performance is generated by performing a process different from the case of generating the first D post-reception performance based on the detection information obtained during the first D reception period (no detection by the same action detection means, no storage by the same detection information storage means, and judgment that timing tW3 has arrived). With this configuration, when the post-reception performance is automatically generated without the need for a player's action during the reception period, it is possible to provide the player with various performances, which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is different between the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated (by the stock reception performance) based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period and the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3, which makes it possible to improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance when the reception validity determination is made at a specific timing (timing tW2a) within the 1D reception period is different from both the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated (by the stock reception performance) based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period and the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3, which makes it possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In contrast, in the second D reception period where there is no rescue (automatic reception) in the event of a failed stock reception performance, the execution time of the second D post-reception performance is set to be the same in both cases: when the second D post-reception performance is generated (by the stock reception performance) based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period, and when the second D post-reception performance is generated based on a valid reception determination being made at a specific timing (timing tX2a) within the second D reception period. This means that even if the stock reception performance fails, the same performance can be enjoyed by redoing the operation within the second D reception period, and it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game due to the lack of rescue will be suppressed.

In addition, during the execution period of the premonition effect (1D premonition effect display ZEC) prior to the 1D reception period, even if an action is performed by the player, no notification is given to indicate whether or not the detection information obtained regarding the action is used for the valid reception determination within the 1D reception period. Furthermore, at least the effect display device 1600 may not give any indication that an action by the player has been detected. With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained even during the 1D reception period in which a rescue (timing tW3) is set in case the stock reception effect fails.

In addition, even during the execution period of the premonition effect (second-D premonition effect display ZED) prior to the second-D reception period, if a player makes an action, no notification may be given to indicate whether or not the detection information obtained regarding the action is used for the validity of reception determination within the second-D reception period. Furthermore, at least the effect display device 1600 may not give any indication that a player's action has been detected.

In addition, in the premonition effect corresponding to the 1D reception period, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC and the premonition effect sound associated therewith are each executed. In contrast, in the premonition effect corresponding to the 2D reception period, the 2D premonition effect display ZED is executed, but the premonition effect sound associated with the 2D premonition effect display ZED is not executed. In other words, in this case, whether or not there is a rescue when the stock reception effect fails can be indicated by whether or not the premonition effect sound is output.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, first, a number of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, even if the above-mentioned motion detection means does not detect a motion by the player during the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception presentation corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the timings at which the performance after 1D reception is started without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period are at least timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned example, the 1D premonition display ZEC is displayed as a premonition display corresponding to the 1D reception period, and when the 1D post-reception performance starts at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, the 1D premonition display ZEC is displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance starts, but when the 1D post-reception performance starts at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235, the 1D premonition display ZEC is not displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance starts. In other words, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance starts without obtaining detection information during the 1D reception period, it becomes possible to suggest whether the performance starts at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 or the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, even if the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed, the "1st disappearance related display SKD1" or the "2nd disappearance related display SKD2" is made to appear as the disappearance-related display (see FIG. 243). In this case, whether the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed as the "1st disappearance related display SKD1" or the "2nd disappearance related display SKD2", it is desirable that the disappearance-related display is executed in a manner that overlaps the 1D premonition performance display ZEC so as to make it difficult to see.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the above-mentioned model image display is displayed at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts, whether the first D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236 or the first D post-reception performance starts at timing tW3 shown in Fig. 235. However, instead of this, as shown in Fig. 248, when the first D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236, the above-mentioned model image display may not be displayed at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts, as in the case when the second D post-reception performance starts at timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in Fig. 239. In other words, in this case, even when the stock reception performance is executed in the 1D reception period, just as when the stock reception performance is executed in the 2D reception period, the mock image display (here, the integrated mock image display IG) is never displayed (made visible) and the post-reception performance (here, the 1D post-reception performance) begins to be executed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, in both cases where the 1st D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236 and where the 1st post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in Fig. 235, the above-mentioned remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed at the time when the 1st D post-reception performance is started. However, instead of this, as shown in Fig. 248, when the 1st D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236, the above-mentioned remaining time display may not be displayed at the time when the 1st D post-reception performance is started, as in the case where the 2nd D post-reception performance is started at timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in Fig. 239. In other words, in this case, even if the stock reception performance is executed in the 1D reception period, just as if the stock reception performance was executed in the 2D reception period, the remaining time display (here, the integrated mock-up image display IG) is never displayed (made visible) and the post-reception performance (here, the 1D post-reception performance) begins to be executed.

According to the configuration of these other examples, when the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (see FIG. 248), the model image display and the remaining time display are not displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance is started, whereas when the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235, the model image display and the remaining time display are displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance is started (see "i1" and "i2" in FIG. 242). In other words, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance is started without detecting the action of the player during the 1D reception period, it becomes possible to suggest whether this is the first timing (timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236) or the second timing (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235).

Even if these alternative examples are adopted, when the 1st D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, it is desirable to have the "1st extinction-related display SKD1" or the "2nd extinction-related display SKD2" appear as the extinction-related display, as shown in FIG. 248 (f5) and (f6). In other words, in this case, the "extinction-related display" appears while the mock image display or remaining time display is not being displayed, and the "extinction-related display" is displayed in such a way that it is difficult to see the "1st D premonition performance display ZEC" or the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1", etc.

The reception periods in these other examples (see FIG. 248) are provided as modified versions of the 1D reception period shown in FIGS. 234 to 236 and 240 to 243. However, instead of this, they may be provided as a 3D reception period (occurring under condition 3D) that is different from both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period. In this case, when the post-reception performance corresponding to the 3D reception period (3D post-reception performance) is executed, one mode (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) may appear as the "disappearance-related display" regardless of which of multiple modes with different expectation levels the post-reception performance is executed in.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the timings at which the 1D post-reception presentation starts without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period include at least the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. If the 1D post-reception presentation starts at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period, a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) can be displayed, and when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is made difficult to see, which allows the player to easily recognize that the 1D reception period has ended.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to display a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) when the above-mentioned 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period, but when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, it is also possible to make it difficult to see displays other than the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 or at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 after the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed.

For example, when the configuration according to the alternative example for the 1D reception period is adopted, if the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236 based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, the model image display and remaining time display will not be displayed at the time the 1D post-reception performance is started. In other words, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236 without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period, if a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, a display (such as the 1D premonition performance display ZEC) different from the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) will be difficult to see. Alternatively, if the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, an image display that would not appear if the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 may be displayed, and the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) may make the image display difficult to see.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is arranged to be displayed as the same image display when it appears when the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and when it appears when the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the situation is being executed at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 or timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 just by looking at the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display), and it is expected that the disappearance EF display will encourage the player to focus on the "object that is made difficult to see."

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, when a second D reception period occurs, there are two cases: a movement by the player is not detected by the above-mentioned movement detection means during the second D reception period and a second D post-reception presentation corresponding to the second D reception period is executed (see FIG. 239); and a movement by the player is not detected by the above-mentioned movement detection means during the second D reception period and the second D reception period ends, resulting in a second D post-reception presentation not being executed (see FIG. 238). This makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the second D reception period occurs.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, a first D reception period different from the second D reception period can be generated, and when the first D reception period occurs, the corresponding first D post-reception performance is always executed even if the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the first D reception period. In other words, in this case, when the second D reception period occurs, a sense of tension is preferably provided by "the post-reception performance may or may not occur when the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the reception period," while when the first D reception period occurs, "the post-reception performance always occurs even if the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the reception period," which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with a means for executing a performance setting (at least one of volume, brightness, performance mode, etc.) that changes the performance mode based on the operation by the player. In this regard, a case where the second D post-reception performance is executed without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period, and a case where the second reception period ends without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period and the second D post-reception performance is not executed can occur under the same performance setting. In other words, a case where the second D post-reception performance is executed without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period does not mean a case where the second D reception period occurs in a state where the automatic button performance state is set. For example, even when the automatic button presentation state is not set (under the same presentation settings), during the second D reception period, there may be cases where the second D post-reception presentation is executed without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period, and cases where the second reception period ends without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period, and the second D post-reception presentation is not executed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the second D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the second D premonition performance display ZED can be displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 239, the period in which the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed includes a stock period (first period) in which, when a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the reception validity judgment in the second D reception period, and a non-stock period (second period) in which, even if a motion is performed by the player and detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity judgment in the second D reception period, so that the sense of tension can be maintained in a suitable manner. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only in the 2D reception period (2D premonition effect display ZED) but also in the 1D reception period (1D premonition effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 236).

In the above-mentioned performance example, the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) are both included in the period before the second D reception period occurs and in the period in which the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed, as shown in FIG. 239. That is, in this case, even if the player makes an action (operation) before the second D reception period occurs, the player can enjoy the second D post-reception performance without having to redo the action after the second D reception period occurs. In addition, if the player makes an action (operation) before the second D reception period occurs, the second D post-reception performance is not necessarily executed (non-stock period), so that the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained. The same can be said about the configuration and the action and effect not only in the second D reception period (second D premonition performance display ZED) but also in the first D reception period (first D premonition performance display ZEC) (see FIG. 236).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the proportion of the stock period (first period) in the period during which the premonition performance is displayed differs between when the first D reception period occurs and when the second D reception period occurs. In the first D reception period and the second D reception period, at least one of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) is set to a different time.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the first D reception period occurs), the ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the execution period of the first D premonition performance display ZEC (the period from timing tW1 to tW2) is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the second D reception period occurs), the ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the execution period of the second D premonition performance display ZED (the period from timing tX1 to tX2) is about 70%. In other words, in this case, in the "second D premonition performance display ZED (see FIG. 239)", when a player's action is detected during the period from the start of the premonition performance display to the occurrence of the reception period, the expected value of this occurring during the "first period (stock period)" can be made higher than in the case of the "first D premonition performance display ZED (see FIG. 236)".

In this example, in the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)," the proportion of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" in the period from when the premonition effect display is executed to when the acceptance period occurs is made larger than in the case of the above-mentioned "1st D premonition effect display ZEC (see FIG. 236)," but instead, this proportion may be made smaller.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least in the performance display device 1600, when a player's action is detected during the stock period, and when a player's action is detected during the non-stock period, no reaction is shown in response to the detection. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a situation exists in which a stock reception performance can be executed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first D reception period and a second D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and the first D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the first D reception period, and the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed in the second premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 236 and FIG. 239, in both the period in which the first D premonition performance display ZEC is executed and the period in which the second D premonition performance display ZED is executed, a "stock period (pre-action permitted period) in which, when a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the information detected by the motion detection means is used for the above-mentioned reception validity judgment during the reception period" is included, and a "non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period) in which, even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means when a motion is performed by the player, the information detected by the motion detection means is not used for the above-mentioned reception validity judgment during the reception period" is included, so that a sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the stock period (pre-action permitted period) and the non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period) are both set to be periods before the timing when the acceptance period (first D acceptance period or second D acceptance period) occurs. In other words, in this case, "a valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made within the acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the acceptance period (first D acceptance period or second D acceptance period) occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) before the acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance without having to redo the action after the acceptance period occurs. Moreover, if the player makes an action (operation) before the acceptance period (first D acceptance period or second D acceptance period) occurs, the post-acceptance performance is not necessarily executed (non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period)), so the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In the above-mentioned example, no message is displayed encouraging the player to take action during either the stock period (pre-action permitted period) within the period in which the 1st D premonition display ZEC is executed, or the stock period (pre-action permitted period) within the period in which the 2nd D premonition display ZED is executed.

However, instead of this, a message display urging the player to take action may be displayed at least during the stock period (pre-action permitted period) during the period during which the first D premonition effect display ZEC is executed, and a message display urging the player to take action may not be displayed during the stock period (pre-action permitted period) during the period during which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed. With this configuration, when the first D reception period occurs, it is possible to urge the player to obtain detection information for an action by the player before the first D reception period occurs, and thus it is possible to more actively provide a performance (stock reception performance) in which a reception validity determination is made within the first D reception period based on the detection information thus obtained. On the other hand, when the second D reception period occurs, the fact that such a stock reception performance is permitted is kept secret, so that it is possible to add interest to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In this case, the message display that is in a displayed state during the stock period (pre-action permitted period) during which the first D premonition effect display ZEC is executed may also be in a displayed state during at least part of the non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period). With this configuration, even if the player performs an action while the message display is in a displayed state, this action will not necessarily be used for a valid acceptance judgment within the first D acceptance period, so that the tension can be maintained in an optimal manner. During the period during which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed, the message display is not displayed during either the stock period (pre-action permitted period) or the non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period).

In the above-mentioned performance example, as shown in FIG. 244 and FIG. 247, when the stock reception performance is performed in the second D reception period, the second D premonition performance display ZED starts to be displayed, and then the second D post-reception performance starts to be executed without any message display. In contrast, in the above-mentioned modified example regarding the message display, when the stock reception performance is performed in the first D reception period, even if detection information is obtained in the stock period (pre-operation allowable period), it is desirable to not hide the message display in the period before the first D reception period occurs, and to maintain the display state as when no detection information is obtained. In addition, when the stock reception performance is performed in the first D reception period, it is desirable to keep the message display in the display state even at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts to be executed accordingly. With this configuration, in both the case where the first D reception period occurs and the case where the second D reception period occurs, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the stock reception performance is performed (the stock reception performance is successful), and the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, even if the motion of the player is not detected by the motion detection means during the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings (timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235) at which the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed without the motion of the player being detected by the motion detection means during the 1D reception period, which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned presentation example, at least timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are prepared as timings at which the 1D post-reception presentation starts without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period. At timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, "the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period based on the player's action (detection information) detected before the 1D reception period occurs, thereby starting the 1D post-reception presentation (stock reception presentation)," and at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235, "the 1D post-reception presentation starts based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any action by the player, including before the 1D reception period occurs."

In other words, in this case, "the validity of the reception can be determined within the 1D reception period based on the player's actions (detection information) detected before the 1D reception period occurs," which makes it possible to start the execution of the 1D post-reception performance. Furthermore, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails during the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception performance is executed as a rescue based on the arrival of a specified timing (timing tW3), so the player can safely challenge the "stock reception performance."

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the execution times for the 1D post-reception performance are different between when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the stock reception performance being performed within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 236) and when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the timing tW3 arriving without any action by the player being detected within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 235). In other words, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed without any action by the player being detected within the 1D reception period, it becomes possible to suggest which timing the 1D post-reception performance was executed based on. At this time, it is also possible to set either execution time to be longer.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, when a valid reception determination is made based on the detection information at timing tW2a within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 234), the 1D post-reception performance is executed for a time period different from the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on a stock reception performance being performed within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 236), and the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on timing tW3 arriving without detection of a player's action within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 235), making it possible to suggest that the player's action within the 1D reception period has been properly accepted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a specific reception period different from either the first D reception period or the second D reception period can be generated, and even in the specific reception period, there may be a case where a post-reception performance (for example, a specific post-reception performance different from either the first D reception performance or the second D reception performance) is executed based on detection information obtained before the specific reception period (within the execution period of the premonition performance) (stock reception performance), and a case where a post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) is executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detection of a player's action during the specific reception period. The execution time required for the post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) may be the same in the case where a post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) is executed based on the stock reception performance being performed during the specific reception period and the case where a post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) is executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detection of a player's action during the specific reception period. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize at which timing the post-reception performance was executed just by looking at the execution time of the post-reception performance, and the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, the second D post-reception performance is performed for the same duration when the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period (stock reception performance) and when the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period, thereby making it possible to maintain interest in the game.

In contrast, the 1D post-reception performance has a different execution time when it is executed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period (stock reception performance) and when it is executed based on the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period, making it possible to provide different performance characteristics depending on the type of reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, in the premonition presentation that suggests that the player will be given an opportunity to act, there are cases where a premonition presentation sound corresponding to that premonition presentation is output (see FIG. 234) and cases where a premonition presentation sound corresponding to that premonition presentation is not output (see FIG. 237). This is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when giving the player an opportunity to act.

When a specific premonition effect sound (effect sound corresponding to the 1D premonition effect display ZEC) is output before the acceptance period during which the player is given an opportunity to act occurs, as shown in Figs. 234 to 236, there are at least timings tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236 and tW3 shown in Fig. 235 as timings at which the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the action of the player is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period. On the other hand, when no premonition effect sound is output before the acceptance period during which the player is given an opportunity to act occurs, as shown in Figs. 237 to 239, there is no timing corresponding to timing tW3 shown in Fig. 235, and there is at least timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236 as timings at which the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the action of the player is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period. According to this configuration, when the premonition sound is being output, even if the stock reception effect fails as a result of the player's action (the action is detected within the non-stock period), the post-acceptance effect is always executed, so the player can challenge the stock reception effect with a sense of security. Also, when the premonition sound is not being output, if the stock reception effect fails, the player must perform another action within the acceptance period to trigger the post-acceptance effect, so the player can challenge the stock reception effect in a tense atmosphere.

In addition, when no premonition sound is output before the acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act occurs, as shown in Figs. 237 to 239, there may be a case where there is no timing corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in Fig. 235 and at least a timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236 as a timing at which the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period and the corresponding post-acceptance performance is started (second acceptance period), and there may be a case where there is at least a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in Fig. 235 and a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236 as a timing at which the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period and the corresponding post-acceptance performance is started (another acceptance period). With this configuration, when the premonition sound is not output, the player can be challenged to the stock acceptance performance while maintaining a sense of tension and providing a sense of security.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, even if a premonition presentation sound corresponding to the 1D premonition presentation display ZEC is being output and an action by the player is performed and detected within the stock period (first period), this is not used as a trigger to interrupt the 1D premonition presentation display ZEC or the corresponding premonition presentation sound before the 1D reception period occurs. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the detection of the player's action was performed during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period).

As mentioned above, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC may be performed across the timing when the 1D reception period occurs. In this case, the premonition effect sound corresponding to the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is also output across the timing when the 1D reception period occurs. In this case, when the 1D reception period occurs and the premonition effect sound corresponding to the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is output, if an action is performed by the player and detected, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC and the premonition effect sound corresponding thereto may be interrupted within the 1D reception period using this as a trigger. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the stock reception effect is being performed or the reception is being performed within the 1D reception period. In contrast, when the stock reception effect is performed, the premonition effect sound is interrupted at timing tX2 (tX2A) using this as a trigger.

The "stock reception effect" in the performance examples described above with reference to Figures 234 to 247 and in other examples (variations) thereof, as described above, means that when an action is performed by the player within the "premonition effect execution period" before the reception period occurs and this is obtained as detection information, the detection information is stored and the stored detection information is used to provide for "valid reception determination" during the reception period that occurs thereafter. Therefore, "the player's action being performed within the premonition effect execution period and this being obtained as detection information" is technically completely different from "the operation to set the automatic button performance state described above being performed."

For example, in the "stock reception performance", the detection information obtained during the "premonition performance execution period" is checked during the reception period as is, so that the reception is judged to be valid even if no action by the player is detected during the reception period. In contrast, when an operation is performed to set the above-mentioned automatic button performance state, detection information corresponding to the operation is obtained, but the detection information is not retained until the reception period occurs. In other words, when the detection information corresponding to the operation to set the above-mentioned automatic button performance state is obtained, the state of the performance state flag is set to a specific state corresponding to the "automatic button performance state" based on the detection information. Then, each time a reception period occurs, the state of the performance state flag is checked at a predetermined timing within the reception period, making it possible to execute the post-reception performance without the player's action (operation) during the reception period.

Therefore, in order to realize the "stock reception performance" in the performance example described above with reference to Figs. 234 to 247 and other examples (variations), the gaming machine may not have a setting function for the automatic button performance state, or may be a gaming machine that is always controlled to the automatic button performance state. Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the performance example described above with reference to Figs. 234 to 247 and other examples (variations), if the 1D reception period occurs when the automatic button performance state is set by the player's operation, during the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception performance will be started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing between the timings tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 236 and the timing tW3 shown in Fig. 235. That is, in this case, the 1D post-reception performance will be started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without the player's action being detected (without the reception validity determination being made). In contrast, when the automatic button presentation state is not set, the predetermined timing does not function, so the first D post-reception presentation starts to be executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without the player's action being detected (valid reception determination is not made). If the second D reception period occurs when the automatic button presentation state is set by the player's operation, the second D post-reception presentation starts to be executed during the second D reception period based on the arrival of a specific timing later than timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in FIG. 239.

Furthermore, in the examples of the effects described above with reference to Figures 234 to 247 and other examples (variations) thereof, it goes without saying that the actions (operations) required of the player to successfully execute the above-mentioned "stock reception effect" are the same as the actions (operations) required of the player during the corresponding reception period.

Also, in the presentation examples and other examples (variations) thereof described above with reference to Figures 234 to 247, even if the player performs an action more than a predetermined time before the timing when the acceptance period occurs, the above-mentioned "stock acceptance effect" is not executed based on the detection information (in the embodiment, only detection information within the execution period of the corresponding premonition effect is used for the "valid acceptance determination"). In other words, making it possible to realize such a "stock acceptance effect" only when the player is in a situation where he or she can be aware of the acceptance period that is the subject of the action (operation) is important in making the player perform the action (operation) with the awareness of generating a specific post-acceptance effect.

As mentioned above, in the performance examples described above with reference to Figures 234 to 247 and other examples (variations) thereof, even if detection information is obtained within the storage period, no notification that the detection information has been obtained is given within the performance display device 1600. In contrast, when a setting to an automatic button performance state is made, it is self-evident that a notification must be given to the person who set it as to whether or not the setting has been completed.

Also, as mentioned above, in the performance examples described above with reference to Figures 234 to 247 and other examples (variations) thereof, if detection information is obtained within the stock period, the detection information will always be used for "valid reception determination" within the reception period, and a post-reception performance will always occur based on this. On the other hand, if the automatic button performance state is set, it is self-evident that this can be cancelled before the specified timing arrives.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples (such as the first D reception period and the second D reception period), the stock period (first period) occurs first during the period in which the premonition performance is performed, and the non-stock period (second period) occurs later, so that the reception period occurs in a manner connected to this. However, instead of this, the non-stock period (second period) may occur first during the period in which the premonition performance is performed, and the stock period (first period) may occur later, so that the reception period occurs in a manner connected to this. In this case, it is assumed that the player's action is detected across the stock period (first period) and the reception period, but even in such a case, it is desirable to make the reception validity judgment within the reception period based on the detection information obtained in the stock period (first period) (without using the detection information obtained in the reception period). Alternatively, if the player's action is detected across the stock period (first period) and the reception period, the reception validity judgment may be made within the reception period based on both the detection information obtained in the stock period (first period) and the detection information obtained within the reception period. Even in such a case, the performance may be progressed in the manner shown in Figures 243 and 247.

In the above-mentioned examples and other examples (variations), unless there is a specific description that the automatic button presentation state has been set, the pachinko machine 1 is described as being in a state that is not set to the automatic button presentation state or does not have a function related to the automatic button presentation state.

In the above-mentioned presentation example and its other examples (variations), the period during which the 2D premonition presentation display ZED is displayed includes, as shown in Figs. 237 to 239, a stock period (first period) during which, when a player performs a motion, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the reception validity judgment during the 2D reception period, and a non-stock period (second period) during which, even if the player performs a motion and the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity judgment during the 2D reception period. In addition, if the 2D reception period ends without any new detection by the motion detection means after the motion detection means detects the motion during the non-stock period (second period) during which the 2D premonition presentation display ZED is displayed, the 2D post-reception presentation is not executed (see Fig. 238).

In contrast to this, in the above-mentioned performance example and its other examples (variations), the period during which the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed also includes, as shown in Figures 234 to 236, a stock period (first period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and the detection information by the action detection means is used for the reception validity judgment during the 1D reception period, and a non-stock period (second period) during which, even if the player performs an action and the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information by the action detection means is not used for the reception validity judgment during the 1D reception period. Nevertheless, even if the 1D reception period ends without any new detection by the action detection means after the action detection means has been detected during the non-stock period (second period) during which the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed, the 1D post-reception performance is executed (timing tW3 shown in Figure 235). In other words, in this case, even if an action by the player is detected during the period in which the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is being performed, not during the stock period (first period), but during the non-stock period (second period), the 1D post-reception effect can be generated without detecting any new action by the player, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 242 and 243, regardless of whether detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), in the performance progression on the side where the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information within the 1D reception period, a different mode (first disappearance-related display SKD1 or second disappearance-related display SKD2) is made to appear as the disappearance-related display depending on the mode related to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2). In contrast, as shown in FIG. 246 and FIG. 247, in the performance progression on the side where the second D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information within the second D reception period only if detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) out of the stock period (first period) and non-stock period (second period), the same form (second disappearance-related display SKD2) is made to appear as the disappearance-related display regardless of the form related to the second D post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or second D post-reception performance display UGD2-2).

That is, the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information during the 1D reception period, regardless of whether the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), so there is a concern that the player's sense of tension will not be maintained. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed, the disappearance-related display itself is given a performance characteristic for suggesting the degree of expectation, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. In contrast, the 2D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information during the 2D reception period only when the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) out of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), so it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained by the performance characteristic itself. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the second D post-reception performance is executed, the disappearance-related display itself is not given the performance characteristics to suggest the degree of expectation, so after the reception validity determination by the stock reception performance is successful, it is expected to encourage concentration on the first D post-reception performance. Also, when the second D post-reception performance is executed, the disappearance-related display "second disappearance-related display SKD2" corresponding to the high expectation aspect of the first D post-reception performance always appears, so it is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 243, in the performance progression on the side where the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining detection information during the 1D reception period, whether the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), if a reception validity determination is made by the stock reception performance, the model image display and the remaining time display are displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 247, in the performance progression on the side where the 2D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining detection information during the 2D reception period, only if the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) of the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), if a reception validity determination is made by the stock reception performance, the model image display and the remaining time display are not displayed (cannot be seen) at the time when the 2D post-reception performance starts to be executed.

That is, the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information during the 1D reception period, regardless of whether the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), so there is a concern that the player's sense of tension will not be maintained. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even at the time when the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed, the mock image display and the remaining time display are in a state where they are displayed, so that it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility that the "valid reception judgment" has not yet been made, and the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. In contrast, the 2D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information during the 2D reception period only if the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) out of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), so it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained by the performance itself. In this regard, with the above configuration, the mock image display and remaining time display are not displayed (cannot be seen) at the time the 2D post-reception performance begins, making it easier to recognize that the "valid reception determination" has been made properly, which is expected to encourage concentration on the 1D post-reception performance.

The first D reception period and second D reception period in each of the above-mentioned performance examples and modified examples (alternative examples) may be realized by modifying them to the configurations below, or the configurations in the modified examples below (first D reception period, second D reception period) may be further provided as reception periods separate from the above-mentioned first D reception period and second D reception period.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has at least a first D reception period and a second D reception period as reception periods during which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is permitted.

In this regard, when the 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period is executed, as shown in FIG. 242 and FIG. 243, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance related display) is executed in a different manner depending on whether the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2). However, instead of this, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance related display) may be executed in a predetermined manner (the same manner) regardless of whether the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2).

In addition, when the second D reception post-performance corresponding to the second D reception period is executed, as shown in FIG. 246 and FIG. 247, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance related display) is executed in a predetermined manner (the same manner) regardless of whether the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (second D reception post-performance display UGD2-1) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (second D reception post-performance display UGD2-2). However, instead of this, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance related display) may be executed in a different manner depending on whether the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (second D reception post-performance display UGD2-1) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (second D reception post-performance display UGD2-2).

Next, a case where the above-mentioned modified example is applied to the above-mentioned performance example will be described. That is, FIG. 249 is a modified example of "the performance that appears when the first D reception post-performance is executed based on the detection information obtained within the first D reception period, or the first D reception post-performance is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without the reception validity judgment being made within the first D reception period" shown in FIG. 242, and FIG. 250 is a modified example of "the performance that appears when the first D reception post-performance is executed based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period" shown in FIG. 243. Also, FIG. 251 is a modified example of "the performance that appears when the second D reception post-performance is executed based on the detection information obtained within the second D reception period, or the performance that appears when the timing tX3 arrives without the reception validity judgment being made within the second D reception period" shown in FIG. 246, and FIG. 252 is a modified example of "the performance that appears when the second D reception post-performance is executed based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period" shown in FIG. 247. In addition, in this modified example, configurations that are not specifically mentioned are as described above with reference to "Performance examples for the 1st D reception period (Figures 234 to 236, 240 to 243)" and "Performance examples for the 2nd D reception period (Figures 237 to 239, 244 to 247)," and can be similarly applied to each of the above-mentioned other examples that are applicable to "Performance examples for the 1st D reception period" and "Performance examples for the 2nd D reception period."

In the modified example shown in FIG. 249 and FIG. 250, first, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) is executed in the same manner when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a mode with low expectation (probability of the jackpot pattern appearing) based on the detection information obtained during the 1D reception period (see FIG. 249 (e1) to (i1)) and when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a mode with high expectation (probability of the jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 249 (e2) to (i2)). Also, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) is executed in the same manner when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a mode with low expectation (probability of the jackpot pattern appearing) based on the arrival of timing tW3 (see FIG. 249 (e3) to (i3)) and when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a mode with high expectation (probability of the jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 249 (e4) to (i4)). In addition, the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same manner whether the 1st D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on detection information obtained before the 1st D reception period (see FIG. 250 (e5)-(i5)) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 250 (e6)-(i6)). Here, the second extinction-related display SKD2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

In contrast, in the modified example shown in FIG. 251 and FIG. 252, the disappearance EF effect is executed in a different manner when the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period (see FIG. 251 (e1) to (i1)) and when the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) (see FIG. 251 (e2) to (i2)). Also, the disappearance EF effect is executed in a different manner when the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period (see FIG. 252 (e4) to (i4)) and when the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) (see FIG. 252 (e5) to (i5)). Here, when the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) is low (see Fig. 251 (e1)-(i1) and Fig. 252 (e4)-(i4)), the first disappearance related display SKD1 is executed as the disappearance EF performance, and when the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) is high (see Fig. 251 (e2)-(i2) and Fig. 252 (e5)-(i5)), the second disappearance related display SKD2 is executed as the disappearance EF performance.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 251, if the reception validity determination is not made within the second D reception period and timing tX3 arrives, the third disappearance-related display SKD3 is displayed as the disappearance EF performance. However, instead of this, the disappearance EF performance may be displayed in the form that would have appeared if the reception validity determination had been made within the second D reception period (the first disappearance-related display SKD1 or the second disappearance-related display SKD2). With this configuration, even if the reception validity determination is not made within the second D reception period, by checking the form of the disappearance EF performance that is displayed based on the arrival of timing tX3, it becomes possible to recognize in which form (low expectation form or high expectation form) the second D post-reception performance would have been executed if the reception validity determination had been made within the second D reception period.

In addition, in the performance examples shown in Figs. 238 and 246 and the modified example shown in Fig. 251, if the reception validity determination is not made within the 2D reception period and timing tX3 arrives, the 2D post-reception performance is not executed. However, instead of this, even in the performance examples shown in Figs. 238 and 246 and the modified example shown in Fig. 251, the 2D post-reception performance may be executed based on the arrival of timing tX3 without the reception validity determination being made within the 2D reception period, similar to the performance examples shown in Figs. 235 and 242 and the modified example shown in Fig. 249. That is, in this case, only the remaining time shown by the remaining time display (the display area of the gauge image is "0") is different, and otherwise the performance progresses in the manner shown in Figs. 246(e1)-(i1) or Figs. 246(e2)-(i2), or Figs. 251(e1)-(i1) or Figs. 251(e2)-(i2).

[Performance of acceptance period during which multiple operations can be performed]
As illustrated in FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and the variable performance using the decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with the expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body movement (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movable body movement, etc., and the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance allowance period (valid period) during which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance period (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance period (valid period) will not be generated even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. In addition, the acceptance allowance period (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance (post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.) from the acceptance allowance period (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, a reception period in which the acceptance of a player's action (operation) is permitted can be generated, and when a player's action (operation) is accepted during the reception period, a display change (post-acceptance display) occurs according to the type of the acceptance period that has occurred. More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 includes "motion detection means (sensor, etc.) for detecting a player's action (operation)", "detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, a corresponding processing step in a program, etc.) for storing the detection information by the motion detection means", and "acceptance-related performance execution means (peripheral control MPU 1511a, a corresponding processing step in a program, etc.) that can generate an acceptance period and, when an acceptance validity determination is made during the acceptance period that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means, can execute a post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period".

During the reception period, an action target display can be displayed that indicates which is the "target of the player's action." Such an action target display can be displayed, for example, as a replica image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action target display" in this presentation example is displayed as a "replica image display" that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation.

During the acceptance period, a remaining time display can be displayed to indicate the time remaining during which the acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted. Such a remaining time display can be implemented, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this example of the presentation, multiple modes are prepared for at least one of the modes of the frame image and the gauge image (for example, the speed at which the display area of the gauge image is reduced, an indication of the degree of expectation, an indication of the type of operation means, etc.), and the game is executed in one of these modes. Depending on which mode is executed, a different degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear) may be suggested.

In addition, when a reception period occurs, a premonition effect can be executed before this, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to act (suggesting that a reception period will occur). Premonition effects are executed, for example, by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 and outputting a corresponding performance sound.

Note that, as for the fluctuation pattern that generates an acceptance acceptance period (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern" may be provided. As for the fluctuation pattern that generates an acceptance acceptance period (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, it is preferable that it is not included in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern), or it may be included, but the selection rate (occurrence rate) is made low (although this is not necessarily required).

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to operations that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact actions by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation means) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

In this embodiment, various types of acceptance acceptance periods (valid periods) are available, such as different types of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound, different audible BGM output conditions, different numbers of times that operation acceptance is permitted within the acceptance acceptance period (valid period), and whether or not the auto-repeat function is enabled.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with the following special presentation characteristics between multiple acceptance allowance periods, thereby enhancing the presentation characteristics when an acceptance allowance period occurs and maintaining a suitable sense of tension when an acceptance allowance period occurs. It is not necessary to provide all of the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below. For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing by providing only one of the presentation characteristics (any configuration), or it may selectively provide several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it may appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in playing related to the acceptance period is provided.

[Configuration 1-D]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an imitation image display, which is an image display imitating an operating means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword decoration 5001", etc.), is displayed, and an imitation image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display) can be generated. When an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period, an acceptance period execution means is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation, and an acceptance acceptance sound output means is provided that can audibly output an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance is in an acceptable state or will be in an acceptable state when the imitation image display acceptance period occurs. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a "short cycle display acceptance period" during which the periodic changes in the Moji image display can be displayed to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a "long cycle display acceptance period" during which the periodic changes in the Moji image display can be displayed to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed to appear in the predetermined time unit. Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 1-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in presentation quality through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the model image display acceptance period occurs. In addition to the model image display acceptance period during which the model image display is displayed, a further acceptance period during which the model image display is not displayed may be provided, so that different presentation quality may be further suggested depending on whether or not the model image display is displayed.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 1-D" is adopted, the acceptance permission sound may be audibly output during the "short cycle display acceptance period", and the acceptance permission sound may not be audibly output during the "long cycle display acceptance period". With this configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to recognize that he or she has been given an opportunity to operate during the "long cycle display acceptance period" compared to the "short cycle display acceptance period" in which the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, so that the tension caused by the increased possibility of forgetting to operate can be appropriately maintained.

In this case, the acceptance permission sound may be audibly output during the "short cycle display acceptance period", and may or may not be audibly output during the "long cycle display acceptance period". With this configuration, it becomes difficult to determine whether a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period" is occurring just by checking that the acceptance permission sound has been audibly output. This is expected to maintain a good sense of tension not only when the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output, but also when the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 1-D" is adopted, during the "long cycle display reception period", a mode sound that does not appear during the "short cycle display reception period" may be output as the reception permissible sound. With this configuration, it is difficult to determine whether a "short cycle display reception period" or a "long cycle display reception period" is occurring simply by checking whether the reception permissible sound is audibly output. However, if the type (mode sound) is also checked, it becomes possible to easily determine that a "long cycle display reception period" is occurring, and therefore it becomes possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the reception permissible sound is audibly output.

In this case, the same mode sound may be output as the acceptance sound in the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period". With this configuration, even if the type (mode sound) of the acceptance sound is checked when it is audibly output, it is not necessarily easy to recognize whether a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period" is occurring, which is expected to more appropriately maintain tension.

[Configuration 2-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first displays an imitation image display, which is an image display imitating the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", etc.), and can generate an imitation image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display), and is provided with an acceptance period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation acceptance when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operation means.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a "long cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in the predetermined time unit. The "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period" can both occur while some kind of performance sound is being audibly output. Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 2-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in presentation quality through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the model image display acceptance period occurs. In addition to the model image display acceptance period during which the model image display is displayed, a further acceptance period during which the model image display is not displayed may be provided, so that different presentation quality may be suggested depending on whether or not the model image display is displayed.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 2-D" is adopted, during a "short cycle display acceptance period", (all of) the performance sounds that were audible at the time of their generation will not be made inaudible until the end of the acceptance period, but during a "long cycle display acceptance period", (all of) the performance sounds that were audible at the time of their generation may be made inaudible until the end of the acceptance period.

That is, even if a "short cycle display reception period" in which the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a "long cycle display reception period" in which the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, it is difficult to accurately determine whether the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in a predetermined time unit or in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. In this regard, in the "short cycle display reception period", the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is not terminated until the end of the reception period, but in the "long cycle display reception period", if the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence may be terminated until the end of the reception period, it becomes possible to more accurately recognize whether the "short cycle display reception period" or the "long cycle display reception period" is occurring by checking whether the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is terminated.

In this case, in the "short cycle display reception period", the sound effects that were audible at the time of their occurrence will not end before the end of the reception period, but in the "long cycle display reception period", the sound effects that were audible at the time of their occurrence may or may not end before the end of the reception period. With this configuration, even if the sound effects that were audible at the time of their occurrence are not ended before the end of the reception period, it is difficult to recognize whether a "short cycle display reception period" or a "long cycle display reception period" is occurring. Therefore, combined with the fact that the remaining time of the reception period is reduced by the amount of time that the player delays the operation to check whether the sound effects that were audible at the time of their occurrence will end, it is expected that the sense of tension during the reception period will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 3-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first displays an imitation image display, which is an image display imitating the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", etc.), and can generate an imitation image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display), and is provided with an acceptance period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation acceptance when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the replica image display acceptance period may occur while a specific type of effect sound is being audibly output, or may occur after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. As the replica image display acceptance period, at least a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic change in the replica image display can be displayed to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a "long cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic change in the replica image display can be displayed to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed to appear in a predetermined time unit, are provided. Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 3-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" in other configurations. Also, the "specific type of effect sound" in the configuration 3-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-D. Therefore, it may mean the same type of production sound as the "specific type of production sound" in another configuration, or it may mean a different type of production sound from the "specific type of production sound" in another configuration.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in presentation quality through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the model image display acceptance period occurs. In addition to the model image display acceptance period during which the model image display is displayed, a further acceptance period during which the model image display is not displayed may be provided, so that different presentation quality may be further suggested depending on whether or not the model image display is displayed.

In addition, in the above configuration, the imitation image display acceptance period may occur while a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output, or may occur after the specific type of performance sound has been made inaudible, so it is expected that the performance quality will be improved when the imitation image display acceptance period occurs.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-D" is adopted, in the "short cycle display acceptance period", a specific type of effect sound is not made inaudible or inaudible before the occurrence of the "short cycle display acceptance period" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs, but in the "long cycle display acceptance period", a specific type of effect sound may be made inaudible or not made inaudible before the occurrence of the "long cycle display acceptance period" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs. With this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, it becomes easier to recognize whether it is a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period" when an operation opportunity is given, so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given.

For the "short cycle display acceptance period", it is desirable that the state of the specific type of effect sound does not change depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the short cycle display acceptance period occurs. For example, the "short cycle display acceptance period" may be such that the specific type of effect sound is always in an inaudible state before the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs, or such that the specific type of effect sound is always in an audible state at the time when the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs. Alternatively, the "short cycle display acceptance period" may be such that, depending on the type of post-operation display or post-operation output sound when an operation is accepted, the specific type of effect sound is in an inaudible state before the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs (type), or such that the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state at the time when the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs (type).

For the "long-cycle display reception period", for example, at least a "first long-cycle display reception period" and a "second long-cycle display reception period" are prepared as types of the "long-cycle display reception period" in which the post-operation display and post-operation output sound when the operation is received are different. For the "first long-cycle display reception period", the mode of the performance sound does not change according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the first long-cycle display reception period occurs (the reception period occurs (or does not occur) while a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output), and for the "second long-cycle display reception period", the mode of the performance sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the second long-cycle display reception period occurs (there are cases where a specific type of performance sound is made inaudible and the reception period occurs in the inaudible state, and cases where the reception period occurs while a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output). With this configuration, it is expected that the tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner by making it difficult to determine whether a "short-cycle display reception period" or a "long-cycle display reception period" is occurring.

[Configuration 4-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first displays an imitation image display, which is an image display imitating the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", etc.), and can generate an imitation image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display), and is provided with an acceptance period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation acceptance when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation is accepted, the Moji image display acceptance period may be displayed after acceptance in a manner that overlaps the performance pattern (such as a decorative pattern) from the front. The Moji image display acceptance period includes at least a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic changes in the Moji image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a "long cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic changes in the Moji image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in the predetermined time unit. Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 4-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in presentation quality through the length of time required for one periodic change in the replica image display, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when the replica image display acceptance period occurs. Also, with the above configuration, when an operation is accepted during the replica image display acceptance period, the post-acceptance display may be displayed in a manner that appears to overlap the presentation pattern from the front, making it possible to emphasize the post-acceptance display, which is expected to improve presentation quality when an operation is accepted.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 4-D" is adopted, during the short cycle display acceptance period, the post-acceptance display is not performed in a manner that appears to overlap the performance pattern from the front, but is performed behind it, whereas during the long cycle display acceptance period, the post-acceptance display may be performed in a manner that appears to overlap the performance pattern from the front, or may be performed behind the performance pattern. With this configuration, when a short cycle display acceptance period occurs, the post-acceptance display is not emphasized with respect to the performance pattern, and it becomes possible to provide the player with an opportunity to operate under a sense of tension. When a long cycle display acceptance period occurs, the post-acceptance display is sometimes emphasized and sometimes not emphasized, so it becomes possible to provide the player with a certain degree of security while maintaining a good sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given.

In this case, when the post-acceptance display is made in such a manner that it appears to overlap the performance pattern from the front based on the fact that the acceptance was made during the long-cycle display acceptance period, it may be possible to shorten the period until the post-acceptance display is made invisible and the performance pattern becomes easily visible by a predetermined operation by the player. With such a configuration, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game caused by the reduced visibility of the performance pattern when the post-acceptance display is emphasized can be suitably suppressed.

[Configuration 5-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first displays an imitation image display, which is an image display imitating the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", etc.), and can generate an imitation image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display), and is provided with an acceptance period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation acceptance when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation is accepted during the Momo image display acceptance period, there are cases where the disappearance EF display that makes the Momo image display difficult to see is executed in a predetermined manner, and cases where the disappearance EF display is executed in a manner different from the predetermined manner, or is not executed at all. At least the "first Momo image display acceptance period", "second Momo image display acceptance period", and "third Momo image display acceptance period" are prepared as the Momo image display acceptance period, and in the "first Momo image display acceptance period", the periodic change in the Momo image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit (short cycle display acceptance period), and in the "second Momo image display acceptance period" and "third Momo image display acceptance period", the periodic change in the Momo image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in the predetermined time unit (long cycle display acceptance period). Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 5-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in another configuration, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in another configuration. Furthermore, the "first model image display acceptance period", "second model image display acceptance period", and "third model image display acceptance period" in configuration 5-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 5-D. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period (validity period) as the "acceptance period (validity period)" in another configuration, or it may mean a different acceptance period (validity period) from the "acceptance period (validity period)" in another configuration.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in dramatic effect through the length of time required for one periodic change in the imitation image display, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the imitation image display acceptance period occurs. In addition, with the above configuration, when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period, a disappearing EF display that makes the imitation image display difficult to see may be executed in a predetermined manner, or the disappearing EF display may be executed in a manner different from the predetermined manner, or may not be executed at all, so it is possible to add dramatic effect even with such disappearing EF display.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 5-D" is adopted, when an operation is accepted during the "first model image display acceptance period (short cycle display acceptance period)", the post-acceptance display can be executed in one of a number of modes with different degrees of expectation that a predetermined result (jackpot) will be obtained, and the disappearance EF display is executed in the first mode when the post-acceptance display is executed in the mode with the highest expectation among the multiple modes, but when the post-acceptance display is executed in a mode other than the mode with the highest expectation among the multiple modes, the disappearance EF display is executed in a mode other than the first mode, or is not executed at all. When an operation is accepted during the "second model image display acceptance period (long cycle display acceptance period)", the disappearance EF display can be executed in one of a number of modes with different degrees of expectation that a predetermined result (jackpot) will be obtained, and the disappearance EF display can be executed in the first mode when the post-acceptance display is executed in the mode with the highest expectation among the multiple modes. The display after acceptance can be executed in any one of several modes, and the disappearing EF display is executed in the second mode when the display after acceptance is executed in a mode with a high expectation among the above-mentioned multiple modes, but is executed in a mode different from the second mode when the display after acceptance is executed in a mode different from the mode with a high expectation among the above-mentioned multiple modes, or is not executed at all. When an operation is accepted in the "third model image display acceptance period (long cycle display acceptance period)", even if the display after acceptance is executed in any one of the multiple modes with different expectation in which a predetermined result (jackpot) is obtained, the disappearing EF display may be executed in the third mode regardless of which of the multiple modes the display after acceptance is executed in. According to this configuration, in the short cycle display acceptance period in which a periodic change in the model image display appears in a predetermined time unit, the expectation is also suggested by the mode of the disappearing EF display when an operation is accepted (first model image display acceptance period), so that an operation opportunity can be given so that the expectation is not easily recognized and a sense of anxiety is not felt despite the operation. In contrast, during the long cycle display acceptance period in which the periodic changes in the imitation image display are not displayed to occur in predetermined time units, but occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, the state of the disappearance EF display when an operation is accepted may suggest the degree of expectation or may not suggest the degree of expectation (second imitation image display acceptance period, third imitation image display acceptance period). This allows the operation opportunity to be provided so that the player does not feel anxious about not being able to recognize the degree of expectation despite having performed the operation, while also maintaining an appropriate sense of tension when the operation opportunity is provided.

In this case, the "first aspect", "second aspect", "third aspect", "a aspect different from the first aspect", and "a aspect different from the second aspect" as the disappearance EF display may include some of the same aspects (in an appropriate combination) or may all be different aspects. However, the "first aspect" and the "a aspect different from the first aspect" are different from each other, and the "second aspect" and the "a aspect different from the second aspect" are different from each other.

[Configuration 6-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first displays an imitation image display, which is an image display imitating the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", etc.), and can generate an imitation image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display), and is provided with an acceptance period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation acceptance when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operation means.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a first operation means and a second operation means as the operation means, and provides at least a "short cycle display reception period" in which the periodic changes in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a "long cycle display reception period" in which the periodic changes in the image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in the predetermined time unit. In at least one of the "short cycle display reception period" and the "long cycle display reception period", the operation reception of the first operation means and the operation reception of the second operation means are allowed, respectively. Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 6-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in the other configurations, or it may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" in the other configurations. Also, the "first operation means" and the "second operation means" in the configuration 6-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-D. Therefore, the "first operating means" and "second operating means" in other configurations may mean the same operating means, respectively, or the "first operating means" and "second operating means" in other configurations may mean different operating means, respectively.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in presentation quality through the length of time required for one periodic change in the mock image display, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the mock image display acceptance period occurs. In addition, with the above configuration, during at least one of the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period", acceptance of operations for the first operation means and acceptance of operations for the second operation means are each permitted, making it possible to add presentation quality using multiple operation means.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 6-D" is adopted, the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period" may each be configured to permit acceptance of operations on the first operating means and the second operating means.

In this case, during the "short cycle display reception period", only the image display simulating the first operation means among the operation means may be displayed, and during the "long cycle display reception period", only the image display simulating the first operation means among the operation means may be displayed, or both the image display simulating the first operation means and the image display simulating the second operation means may be displayed. In other words, in this case, basically, during the "short cycle display reception period", it is concealed that not only the first operation means but also the second operation means is given an operation opportunity, and during the "long cycle display reception period", it may be possible to recognize that both the first operation means and the second operation means are given an operation opportunity. However, when the player is able to discern that one periodic change in the mock image display takes a predetermined amount of time (the acceptance period is the "short cycle display acceptance period"), he or she will be able to recognize that an operation opportunity is being secretly granted not only to the first operation means, but also to the second operation means, which is expected to improve the presentation when an operation opportunity is granted.

[Configuration 7-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first displays an imitation image display, which is an image display imitating the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", etc.), and can generate an imitation image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display), and is provided with an acceptance period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation acceptance when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operation means.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic changes in the Mosaic image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a "long cycle display acceptance period" in which the periodic changes in the Mosaic image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in the predetermined time unit. In at least one of the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period", operation acceptance can be permitted multiple times. Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 7-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in another configuration, or it may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" in another configuration.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in dramatic effect through the length of time required for one periodic change in the mock image display, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the mock image display acceptance period occurs. In addition, with the above configuration, since operation acceptance is permitted multiple times during at least one of the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period", it is possible to add dramatic effect by allowing operation acceptance multiple times.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 7-D" is adopted, in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the acceptance (operation acceptance) of the player's action (operation) is permitted multiple times regardless of the type of the acceptance period (for example, a continuous tap type), but in the "long cycle display acceptance period", depending on the type of the acceptance period (type of post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.), the acceptance (operation acceptance) of the player's action (operation) may be permitted only once (for example, a single tap type) during the acceptance acceptance period (valid period) until the acceptance acceptance period (valid period) ends (while it is occurring), or the acceptance (operation acceptance) of the player's action (operation) may be permitted multiple times (for example, a continuous tap type) during the acceptance acceptance period (valid period) until the acceptance acceptance period (valid period) ends (while it is occurring). With this configuration, when the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs, it is suggested that the operation acceptance is permitted multiple times (for example, a continuous tap type). In addition, when a "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs, it will be possible to conceal whether or not an operation is being accepted multiple times (for example, whether or not it is a rapid-fire type), allowing for an opportunity to operate in a tense atmosphere.

In this case, even if the acceptance period (valid period) is of a type that allows the acceptance (acceptance of an operation) by the player multiple times (for example, a rapid-fire type), the acceptance period (valid period) may end after only one operation acceptance depending on the result of a lottery (determination) related to the presentation. In short, it is sufficient for the acceptance period (valid period) to be of a type that allows multiple acceptances (patterns).

[Configuration 8-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first displays an imitation image display, which is an image display imitating the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", etc.), and can generate an imitation image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display), and is provided with an acceptance period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation acceptance when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operation means.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a "short cycle display acceptance period" during which the periodic changes in the Mosaic image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a "long cycle display acceptance period" during which the periodic changes in the Mosaic image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in the predetermined time unit. When an operation is accepted on the operation means corresponding to the Mosaic image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that have appeared in the Mosaic image display up until that point are made invisible. Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 8-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in presentation through the length of time required for one periodic change in the mock image display, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the mock image display acceptance period occurs. In addition, with the above configuration, when an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the mock image display during the "short periodic display acceptance period", the periodic changes that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point are hidden, making it difficult to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the mock image display, and favorably maintaining the sense of tension when an operation is accepted.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 8-D" is adopted, in the "short cycle display reception period", when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display up to that point are hidden, but in the "long cycle display reception period", when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display up to that point may be hidden, or may continue to appear in the model image display without being hidden. With this configuration, when the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display up to that point are not hidden but are continued when an operation is accepted, it is possible to suggest that a "long cycle display reception period" has occurred. Also, when the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display up to that point are hidden when an operation is accepted, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether a "short cycle display reception period" or a "long cycle display reception period" has occurred.

In this case, "the periodic change is hidden" may mean "hiding the imitation image display," or the imitation image display may continue to be displayed but the periodic change that had been displayed up until that point may be temporarily terminated and become a still display, or the same periodic change may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started.

[Configuration 9-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first displays an imitation image display, which is an image display imitating the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", etc.), and can generate an imitation image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display), and is provided with an acceptance period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation acceptance when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operation means.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a "short cycle display acceptance period" during which the periodic changes in the Mosaic image display can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time unit, and a "long cycle display acceptance period" during which the periodic changes in the Mosaic image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time without being displayed so as to appear in the predetermined time unit. When an operation is accepted on the operation means corresponding to the Mosaic image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that have appeared in the Mosaic image display up until that point are not hidden but continue. Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 9-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in presentation quality through the length of time required for one periodic change in the mock image display, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when the mock image display acceptance period occurs. Furthermore, with the above configuration, even if an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the mock image display during the "short periodic display acceptance period," the periodic changes that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point are not hidden but continue, so it is expected that it will be possible to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the mock image display even after the operation is accepted.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 9-D" is adopted, in the "short cycle display reception period", when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display up to that point are not hidden but continue, whereas in the "long cycle display reception period", when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display up to that point may be hidden or may continue without being hidden. According to this configuration, when the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display up to that point are hidden when an operation is accepted, it is possible to suggest that a "long cycle display reception period" has occurred. Also, when the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display up to that point are not hidden but continue when an operation is accepted, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether a "short cycle display reception period" or a "long cycle display reception period" has occurred.

In this case, "the periodic change is hidden" may mean "hiding the imitation image display," or the imitation image display may continue to be displayed but the periodic change that had been displayed up until that point may be temporarily terminated and become a still display, or the same periodic change may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started.

[Configuration 10-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance period during which the acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, the acceptance period execution means is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation, and an acceptance sound output means capable of audibly outputting an acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance is in an acceptable state or will be in an acceptable state when the acceptance period occurs. In addition, as an acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" is provided during which the operation acceptance is permitted multiple times until the acceptance period ends.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a "maintained operation allowable period" as a "multiple times allowable period" in which operation acceptance is performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operating means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times in an operated state, and during this "maintained operation allowable period," an acceptance allowable sound is audibly output when the operation occurs.

With this configuration, even if a player has difficulty performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowance period), when a "maintenance operation allowance period" occurs, the acceptance allowance sound is audibly output, making it easier for the player to start operating immediately after the maintenance operation allowance period occurs, allowing the player to perform multiple operations with the remaining time available. Furthermore, since "multiple operations are accepted simply by continuing to maintain the operating means in an operated state," it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed.

As described later, when the "Configuration 10-D" is adopted, the "multiple times permissible period" may be a "maintained operation permissible period" in which the "operation means for which operation acceptance can be permitted multiple times" among the multiple operation means are at least displayed as a mock image display and the operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation of the operation means corresponding to the mock image display, and a "maintained operation non-permissible period" in which the operation means for which operation acceptance can be permitted multiple times among the multiple operation means are at least displayed as a mock image display, but the operation is not accepted multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation of the operation means corresponding to the mock image display. In the "maintained operation permissible period", an acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output when the operation occurs, but in the maintained operation non-permissible period, the acceptance acceptance sound may not be audibly output when the operation occurs. With this configuration, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the "auto repeated tap function" for accepting operations multiple times is enabled, by simply maintaining the operation of the operation means, depending on whether or not the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output.

[Configuration 11-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance acceptance period during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is accepted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance acceptance period, the acceptance period execution means is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Also, as an acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" is prepared in which at least an imitation image display imitating the operation means set as an operation target for which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple times allowable period" may cause a performance sound that is audible at the time of its occurrence to become inaudible until the end of the "multiple times allowable period." In addition, as a "multiple times allowable period," at least a "maintained operation allowable period in which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operating means corresponding to the simulated image display in an operated state" is provided.

With this configuration, if a sound effect that was audible at the time of occurrence is made inaudible while an operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suggest that a multiple operation allowance period is occurring, during which multiple operation acceptances are permitted. Furthermore, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowance period), "simply by continuing to operate the operating means corresponding to the mock image display, multiple operations will be accepted," which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

As described later, when "Configuration 11-D" is adopted, the "multiple times permissible period" may be a "maintained operation permissible period" in which an operation means among the multiple operation means for which operation reception is permissible multiple times is at least displayed as a mock image display and operation reception is performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation means corresponding to the mock image display in an operated state, and a "maintained operation non-permissible period" in which an operation means among the multiple operation means for which operation reception is permissible multiple times is at least displayed as a mock image display, but operation reception is not performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation means corresponding to the mock image display in an operated state. In the "maintained operation permissible period", a sound effect that is audible at the time of occurrence is not made inaudible until the end of the "maintained operation permissible period", but in the "maintained operation non-permissible period", a sound effect that is audible at the time of occurrence may be made inaudible until the end of the maintained operation non-permissible period. With this configuration, when a "multiple times allowed period" occurs, whether or not the effect sound that was audible at the time the "multiple times allowed period" occurs is made inaudible until the end of the "multiple times allowed period" can indicate whether or not the "auto repeat function" that accepts operations multiple times simply by keeping the operating means operated will be enabled.

In this case, the "maintenance operation permitted period" and the "maintenance operation non-permitted period" may occur while the audible output of the effect sound is being reduced in volume (suppressed). In other words, it is sufficient that the effect sound is audible at the time the "multiple permissible period" occurs.

[Configuration 12-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance acceptance period during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is accepted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance acceptance period, the acceptance period execution means is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Also, as an acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" is prepared in which at least an imitation image display imitating the operation means set as an operation target for which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple times allowed period" may occur while the specific type of effect sound is being audibly output, or may occur after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. In addition, as the multiple times allowed period, at least a "maintained operation allowed period in which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operating means corresponding to the simulated image display in an operated state" is provided. Note that the "specific type of effect sound" in the configuration 12-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 12-D. Therefore, it may mean the same effect sound as the "specific type of effect sound" in another configuration, or it may mean a different effect sound from the "specific type of effect sound" in another configuration.

With this configuration, the "multiple times allowed period" can occur either while a specific type of sound effect is being audibly output, or after the specific type of sound effect is made inaudible, improving the performance. Furthermore, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple times allowed period), "simply by continuing to operate the operating means corresponding to the simulated image display, multiple operations will be accepted," which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 12-D" is adopted, the "multiple permissible periods" that may occur while a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output may be divided into a "maintained operation permissible period" during which an operation means among the multiple operation means for which operation acceptance is permissible multiple times is at least displayed as an imitation image display and operation acceptance is performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation means corresponding to the imitation image display in an operated state, and a "maintained operation non-permissible period" during which an operation means among the multiple operation means for which operation acceptance is permissible multiple times is at least displayed as an imitation image display, but operation acceptance is not performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation means corresponding to the imitation image display in an operated state. In the "maintenance operation allowable period", the specific type of effect sound is not made inaudible or not made inaudible before the occurrence of the maintenance operation allowable period according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the maintenance operation allowable period occurs, but in the "maintenance operation non-allowable period", the specific type of effect sound may be made inaudible before the occurrence of the "maintenance operation non-allowable period" according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the "maintenance operation non-allowable period" occurs (when the maintenance operation non-allowable period occurs with the specific type of effect sound in an inaudible state), or may not be made inaudible (when the maintenance operation non-allowable period occurs with the specific type of effect sound being audibly output). With this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the "multiple times allowable period" occurs, it becomes easier to recognize whether this is a "maintenance operation allowable period" or a "maintenance operation non-allowable period", so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when no operation opportunity is given.

Regarding the "maintenance operation allowable period", it is desirable that the state of the specific type of effect sound does not change depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the maintenance operation allowable period occurs. For example, the "maintenance operation allowable period" may be such that the specific type of effect sound is always in an inaudible state before the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, or the specific type of effect sound is always in an audible state at the time when the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs. Alternatively, the "maintenance operation allowable period" may be such that the specific type of effect sound is in an inaudible state before the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs (type) depending on the type of post-operation display or post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted, or the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state at the time when the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs (type).

For the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", for example, at least a "first maintenance operation non-permissible period" and a "second maintenance operation non-permissible period" are prepared as types of the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" in which the post-operation display and post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted are different. For the "first maintenance operation non-permissible period", the mode of the sound effect does not change according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the first maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs (the acceptance period occurs (or does not occur) while a specific type of sound effect is being audibly output), and for the "second maintenance operation non-permissible period", the mode of the sound effect changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the second maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs (there are cases where a specific type of sound effect is made inaudible and the acceptance period occurs in the inaudible state, and cases where the acceptance period occurs while a specific type of sound effect is being audibly output). With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to determine whether a "maintenance operation permissible period" or a "maintenance operation non-permissible period" is occurring.

[Configuration 13-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance acceptance period during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is accepted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance acceptance period, the acceptance period execution means is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Also, as an acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" is prepared in which at least an imitation image display imitating the operation means set as an operation target for which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a first operation means and a second operation means as operation means, and during the acceptance acceptance period, the acceptance of operations for the first operation means and the acceptance of operations for the second operation means may each be accepted. In addition, as the "multiple acceptance period", at least a "maintenance operation acceptance period" is provided in which the operation acceptance is performed multiple times by simply maintaining the operation means corresponding to the mock image display in an operated state. Note that the "first operation means" and "second operation means" in the configuration 13-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-D. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" and "second operation means" in other configurations, or they may mean operation means different from the "first operation means" and "second operation means" in other configurations.

With this configuration, even if a player has difficulty performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowance period), "simply continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the simulated image display will result in multiple operation acceptances," which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game. In addition, during the acceptance allowance period, operation acceptance for the first operation means and operation acceptance for the second operation means are each allowed, making it possible to add a dramatic effect using multiple operation means.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 13-D" is adopted, the "multiple times permissible period" may be divided into a "maintained operation permissible period" during which an operation means among the multiple operation means for which operation acceptance is permissible multiple times is at least displayed as a mock image display and operation acceptance is performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation means corresponding to the mock image display in an operated state, and a "maintained operation non-permissible period" during which an operation means among the multiple operation means for which operation acceptance is permissible multiple times is at least displayed as a mock image display, but operation acceptance is not performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation means corresponding to the mock image display in an operated state. In the "maintenance operation permitted period", both the operation acceptance for the first operation means and the operation acceptance for the second operation means are permitted, but both the imitation image display imitating the first operation means and the imitation image display imitating the second operation means are not displayed, and only one of the imitation image displays can be displayed, whereas in the "maintenance operation non-permitted period", both the operation acceptance for the first operation means and the operation acceptance for the second operation means are permitted, and both the imitation image display imitating the first operation means and the imitation image display imitating the second operation means may be displayed at least in some cases. That is, in this case, basically, in the "maintenance operation permitted period", the fact that the side of the first operation means and the second operation means on which the corresponding imitation image display is not displayed is given an operation opportunity is concealed, and in the "maintenance operation non-permitted period", it may be possible to recognize that the side is given an operation opportunity for both the first operation means and the second operation means. As a result, when it is confirmed that a "maintenance operation permissible period" has occurred as a "multiple operation permissible period," it will be possible to prompt the player to perform an operation on the operating means on the side on which the mock image display is not being displayed, which is expected to improve the presentation.

In this case, when both the operation acceptance for the first operation means and the operation acceptance for the second operation means are permitted during the "maintenance operation non-permission period", it is possible to ensure that only one of the image display imitating the first operation means and the image display imitating the second operation means is not displayed, and both are always displayed. Alternatively, when both the operation acceptance for the first operation means and the operation acceptance for the second operation means are permitted during the "maintenance operation non-permission period", it is possible to ensure that only one of the image display imitating the first operation means and the image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, or that both the image display imitating the first operation means and the image display imitating the second operation means are displayed (depending on, for example, the type of post-acceptance display or post-acceptance output sound).

In this case, if both the first operation means and the second operation means are permitted during the "maintenance operation permitted period", both the first operation means and the second operation means may be permitted multiple times, and if both the first operation means and the second operation means are permitted during the "maintenance operation non-permitted period", one of the first operation means and the second operation means may be permitted multiple times, but the other may be permitted only once. Furthermore, in this case, if the operation means that is not displayed as a model image display and is kept hidden during the "maintenance operation permitted period" (e.g., the second operation means) is permitted multiple times during the "maintenance operation non-permitted period", a decrease in interest in the game due to the auto-repeated function not functioning when the operation means corresponding to the model image display (e.g., the second operation means) is operated is suppressed.

[Configuration 14-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance acceptance period during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is accepted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance acceptance period, the acceptance period execution means is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Also, as an acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance period" is prepared in which at least an imitation image display imitating the operation means set as an operation target for which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides, as a "multiple times permissible period," at least a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation means corresponding to the model image display in an operated state, and in this "maintenance operation permissible period," when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) of the model image display that has been displayed up until that point is changed.

With this configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple times allowed period), "multiple operations are accepted simply by continuing to operate the operating means corresponding to the imitation image display," which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game. In addition, when an operation is accepted, the display mode of the imitation image display that has been displayed up until that point is changed, so that it is possible to appropriately indicate that an operation is being accepted properly simply by continuing to operate the operating means corresponding to the imitation image display.

As described later, when the "configuration 14-D" is adopted, the "multiple times permissible period" may be a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which an operation means that can be permitted to accept an operation multiple times is at least displayed as a model image display and an operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display, and a "maintenance operation non-permissible period" in which an operation means that can be permitted to accept an operation multiple times is at least displayed as a model image display, but an operation is not accepted multiple times simply by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display. In the "maintenance operation permissible period", when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) of the model image display that has been displayed up until that point may be changed, but in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", the display mode (visibility) of the model image display that has been displayed up until that point may not be changed even if an operation is accepted. With this configuration, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", it is suitably suggested that an operation is accepted appropriately simply by maintaining the operation state, and this, together with the activation of the auto-repeated-hit function, is expected to increase the interest in playing. In contrast, during the "maintenance operation non-permitted period," even if an operation is accepted, it is difficult to determine whether the operation has been accepted properly, and it is expected that this will encourage the player to more proactively repeat operations without the auto-hit function being activated.

[Configuration 15-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with: a replica image display, which is an image display imitating an operating means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001"), is displayed; an imitation image display acceptance period during which an operation acceptance is permitted is generated; and when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period, an acceptance period execution means is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation; and an acceptance acceptance sound output means is capable of audibly outputting an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that an operation acceptance is in an acceptable state or will be in an acceptable state when the imitation image display acceptance period occurs. The imitation image display is capable of being displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating an operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the replica image display acceptance period can be classified into a "specific type of replica image display acceptance period" in which only an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation object for which operation acceptance is permitted once is displayed as the replica image display, and a "special type of replica image display acceptance period" in which at least an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation object for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is displayed as the replica image display. In the "specific type of replica image display acceptance period", only an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation object for which operation acceptance is permitted once and an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation object for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times are displayed as the replica image display. When an operation means set as an object to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation acceptance is performed, the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is made non-display based on the fact that the operation acceptance has been performed, and in a "special type model image display acceptance period", when an operation means set as an object to be displayed as a model image display and an operation acceptance is performed, the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is made to continue. Note that the "specific type model image display acceptance period" and the "special type model image display acceptance period" in the configuration 15-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-D. Therefore, it may mean the same mock image display acceptance period as the "specific type of mock image display acceptance period" and "special type of mock image display acceptance period" in other configurations, or it may mean a mock image display acceptance period that is different from the "specific type of mock image display acceptance period" and "special type of mock image display acceptance period" in other configurations.

With this configuration, depending on whether the periodic changes that had been appearing in the model image display until that point have been hidden when an operation is accepted, it is possible to indicate whether a "specific type of model image display acceptance period (one operation acceptance allowed)" or a "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations acceptance allowed)" is occurring.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 15-D" is adopted, when a "special type of model image display reception period" occurs, the reception permission sound may be audibly output or may not be audibly output. When the reception permission sound is audibly output, when an operation means set as an operation object for which operation reception is permitted multiple times during the "special type of model image display reception period" is operated and an operation is received, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display up to that point is hidden, but when the reception permission sound is not audibly output, when an operation means set as an operation object for which operation reception is permitted multiple times during the "special type of model image display reception period" is operated and an operation is received, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display up to that point may be continued without being hidden. With this configuration, when a "special type of model image display reception period" occurs, depending on whether or not the reception permission sound is audibly output, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display up to that point will be hidden when an operation is received.

[Configuration 16-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating an imitation image display reception period during which an imitation image display, which is an image display simulating an operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001"), is displayed and an operation reception is permitted, and is provided with an reception period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation reception when an operation is received during the imitation image display reception period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display simulating an operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the mock image display acceptance period can be classified into a "specific type of mock image display acceptance period" in which only an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted once is displayed as the mock image display, and a "special type of mock image display acceptance period" in which at least an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is displayed as the mock image display. In the "specific type of mock image display acceptance period", only an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted once and When an operation means that is set as a target for displaying a model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the operation acceptance, and in a "special type model image display acceptance period", when an operation means that is set as an operation target that allows operation acceptance multiple times and that is set as a target for displaying a model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is made to be able to continue. And, both the "specific type model image display acceptance period" and the "special type model image display acceptance period" can be generated while the performance sound is being audibly output. Note that the "specific type model image display acceptance period" and the "special type model image display acceptance period" in the configuration 16-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 16-D. Therefore, it may mean the same mock image display acceptance period as the "specific type of mock image display acceptance period" and "special type of mock image display acceptance period" in other configurations, or it may mean a mock image display acceptance period that is different from the "specific type of mock image display acceptance period" and "special type of mock image display acceptance period" in other configurations.

In this configuration, both the "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (one operation acceptance allowed)" and the "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (multiple operations accepted)" can occur while the effect sound is being audibly output, making it possible to provide a dramatic effect that utilizes the effect sound.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 16-D" is adopted, a "special type of imitation image display reception period" may be such that the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is not made inaudible until the end of the "special type of imitation image display reception period" and the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible. Then, when a "special type of imitation image display reception period" occurs and the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is audibly outputted, and an operation is received by operating an operation means that is set as an operation target that is permitted to receive operation multiple times, the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the imitation image display corresponding to the operation means may be made to disappear, or the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the imitation image display corresponding to the operation means may continue without being made to disappear. In contrast, when a "special type of model image display acceptance period" occurs and the effect sound that was audible at the time of the occurrence is made inaudible, if an operation means that is set as an operation target that allows operation acceptance multiple times is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means may be made to continue without being made hidden. With this configuration, when a "special type of model image display acceptance period" occurs, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display will be made hidden when an operation is accepted, depending on whether or not the effect sound that was audible at the time of the occurrence during the "special type of model image display acceptance period" is made inaudible.

[Configuration 17-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating an imitation image display reception period during which an imitation image display, which is an image display simulating an operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001"), is displayed and an operation reception is permitted, and is equipped with an reception period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation reception when an operation is received during the imitation image display reception period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display simulating an operation means.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, the imitation image display acceptance period can be classified into "a type of imitation image display acceptance period that can occur while specific BGM is being audibly output" and "a type of imitation image display acceptance period that cannot occur while specific BGM is being audibly output", and the "type of imitation image display acceptance period that can occur while specific BGM is being audibly output" can be further classified into a "specific type of imitation image display acceptance period" in which only an image display imitating an operating means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted once is displayed as the imitation image display, and a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period" in which at least an image display imitating an operating means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is displayed as the imitation image display. In addition, in the "special type of model image display acceptance period", when an operation means that is set as an operation target that allows operation acceptance once and is the target for displaying the model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is made non-display based on the operation acceptance, and in the "special type of model image display acceptance period", when an operation means that is set as an operation target that allows operation acceptance multiple times and is the target for displaying the model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means can be continued.

With this configuration, when an operation is accepted while a specific BGM is being audibly output, it is difficult to recognize whether a "specific type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed once)" or a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed multiple times)" is occurring, thereby maintaining a good sense of tension, while at the same time, depending on whether the periodic changes that had appeared in the imitation image display up until that point were hidden when the operation was accepted, it is possible to suggest whether a "specific type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed once)" or a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed multiple times)" is occurring.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 17-D" is adopted, the "special type of model image display acceptance period" can be further classified into a "first special type of model image display acceptance period" in which, when an operation means set as an operation target that allows operation acceptance multiple times is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden, and a "second special type of model image display acceptance period" in which the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is not hidden but continues. The "first special type of model image display acceptance period" occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output, regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that ended when the "first special type of model image display acceptance period" occurs, and the "second special type of model image display acceptance period" may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output or while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state, depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that ended when the "second special type of model image display acceptance period" occurs. With this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when a "multiple times allowable period" occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output, it can be used as a basis for determining whether or not this is "a period in which the periodic changes that have appeared up until then are hidden in response to operation acceptance," and therefore it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when no operation opportunity is given.

[Configuration 18-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating an imitation image display reception period during which an imitation image display, which is an image display simulating an operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001"), is displayed and an operation reception is permitted, and is provided with an reception period execution means that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the operation reception when an operation is received during the imitation image display reception period. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display simulating an operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first operation means and a second operation means are provided as operation means, and during the mock image display acceptance period, acceptance of operations for the first operation means and acceptance of operations for the second operation means may each be permitted. The mock-image display acceptance period can be classified into a "specific type of mock-image display acceptance period" in which only an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted once is displayed as the mock-image display, and a "special type of mock-image display acceptance period" in which at least an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is displayed as the mock-image display. In the "specific type of mock-image display acceptance period," when an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted once and is set as a target for display as a mock-image display is operated to accept an operation, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the mock-image display corresponding to the operation means is made non-display based on the operation acceptance. In the "special type of mock-image display acceptance period," when an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times and is set as a target for display as a mock-image display is operated to accept an operation, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the mock-image display corresponding to the operation means can be continued.

With this configuration, depending on whether a "specific type of mock image display acceptance period" or a "special type of mock image display acceptance period" is occurring, it is possible to suggest whether or not the periodic changes that have appeared in the mock image display will be hidden when an operation is accepted. In addition, with the above configuration, since the acceptance of operations for the first operation means and the acceptance of operations for the second operation means are each permitted, it is possible to add dramatic effects using multiple operation means.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 18-D" is adopted, the "special type of model image display acceptance period" can be further classified into a "first special type of model image display acceptance period" in which, when an operation means set as an operation target that allows operation acceptance multiple times is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is terminated, and a "second special type of model image display acceptance period" in which the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is continued without terminating it. In the "first special type of model image display acceptance period", While both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted, but both the mock-up image display imitating the first operation means and the mock-up image display imitating the second operation means are not displayed, and only one of the mock-up image displays can be displayed, in the "second special type mock-up image display reception period", both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted, and it may be possible that both the mock-up image display imitating the first operation means and the mock-up image display imitating the second operation means are displayed. That is, in this case, basically, in the "first special type mock-up image display reception period", the side of the first operation means and the second operation means on which the "corresponding mock-up image display" is not displayed is concealed from the viewer that an operation opportunity is given, and in the "second special type mock-up image display reception period", it may be possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is given to both the first operation means and the second operation means. As a result, when it is confirmed that the "first special type replica image display acceptance period" has occurred, it will be possible to prompt the player to operate the operating means on the side on which the replica image display is not being displayed, which is expected to improve the presentation.

In this case, when both the operation acceptance for the first operation means and the operation acceptance for the second operation means are permitted during the "second special type of imitation image display acceptance period", it is possible to ensure that only one of the imitation image display imitating the first operation means and the imitation image display imitating the second operation means is not displayed, and both are always displayed. Alternatively, when both the operation acceptance for the first operation means and the operation acceptance for the second operation means are permitted during the "second special type of imitation image display acceptance period", it is possible to ensure that only one of the imitation image display imitating the first operation means and the imitation image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, or that both the imitation image display imitating the first operation means and the imitation image display imitating the second operation means are displayed (depending on the type of post-acceptance display or post-acceptance output sound, for example).

[Configuration 19-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance period during which the acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, the acceptance period execution means is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation, and an acceptance sound output means capable of audibly outputting an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance is in an acceptable state or will be in an acceptable state when the acceptance acceptance period occurs. Also, during the acceptance acceptance period, an "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display that may show a periodic change, can be displayed, and at least a "multiple acceptance period" during which the acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is prepared as the acceptance acceptance period.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides, as the "multiple times allowed period", at least a "specific multiple times allowed period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display", and a "special multiple times allowed period" in which at least the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display". In the "specific multiple times allowed period", each time an operation that is allowed multiple times is accepted, the periodic change that has been displayed up until that point in the first periodicity display is hidden. Note that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple times allowed period", and "special multiple times allowed period" in the configuration 19-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 19-D. Therefore, it may mean the same means as the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or it may mean different means from the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations.

With this configuration, during the "specific multiple-times allowed period," it becomes possible to check the number of times that an operation has been accepted by checking the number of times that the periodic change shown in the "first periodicity display" has been hidden.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 19-D" is adopted, in a "specific multiple-times permissible period", an acceptance permission sound is audibly outputted upon occurrence, and each time an operation that is permitted is accepted multiple times, the periodic change that has been present up until that point may be hidden in the "first periodicity display", but the periodic change that has been present up until that point may continue in the "second periodicity display". In addition, in a "special multiple-times permissible period", an acceptance permission sound is not audibly outputted upon occurrence, and each time an operation that is permitted is accepted multiple times, the periodic change that has been present up until that point may continue in both the "third periodicity display" and the "fourth periodicity display". In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest "whether it is possible to recognize whether an operation has been accepted properly" based on the state of the "acceptance period-related periodicity display" when the operation is accepted, through the presence or absence of an audible output of the acceptance permission sound. Furthermore, even if the acceptance permission sound is audibly output (indicating that it is possible to determine whether or not the operation has been accepted properly), if a person mistakenly focuses on the "second periodicity display" instead of the "first periodicity display," it will be difficult to determine whether or not the operation has been accepted properly, and this is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension.

[Configuration 20-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance period during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, it is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Also, during the acceptance period, an "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, can be displayed, and at least a "multiple acceptance period" during which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is prepared as the acceptance period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the "multiple times allowed period", at least a "specific multiple times allowed period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period related periodicity display", and a "special multiple times allowed period" in which at least the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period related periodicity display" are provided. The "specific multiple times allowed period" and the "special multiple times allowed period" can both be generated while the performance sound is being audibly output. Note that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple times allowed period", and "special multiple times allowed period" in the configuration 20-D are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 20-D. Therefore, it may mean the same means as the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or it may mean different means from the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations.

With this configuration, both the "specific multiple-time allowed period" and the "special multiple-time allowed period" can occur while the sound effects are being audibly output, making it possible to provide effects that utilize the sound effects and the "acceptance period-related periodicity display."

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 20-D" is adopted, in the "specific multiple-times permissible period", each time an operation that is permitted multiple times is accepted, the periodic change that has been present up until that point may be hidden in the "first periodicity display", but the periodic change that has been present up until that point may be continued in the "second periodicity display". Also, in the "special multiple-times permissible period", each time an operation that is permitted multiple times is accepted, the periodic change that has been present up until that point may be continued in both the "third periodicity display" and the "fourth periodicity display". And, in the "specific multiple-times permissible period", the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is not made inaudible until the end of the "specific multiple-times permissible period", and in the "special multiple-times permissible period", the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible until the end of the "specific multiple-times permissible period". That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest "whether it is possible to recognize whether or not an operation has been properly accepted" based on the state of the "acceptance period-related periodicity display" at the time the operation is accepted, through whether or not the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible before the end of the acceptance period (validity period). Even if the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is not made inaudible, a person who mistakenly focuses on the "second periodicity display" instead of the "first periodicity display" will find it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted, and this is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 21-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance period during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, it is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Also, during the acceptance period, an "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, can be displayed, and at least a "multiple acceptance period" during which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is prepared as the acceptance period.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, the "multiple times allowed period" may occur while a specific type of sound effect is being audibly output, or may occur after the specific type of sound effect is made inaudible. As the "multiple times allowed period", at least a "specific multiple times allowed period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period related periodicity display", and a "special multiple times allowed period" in which at least the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period related periodicity display" are provided. Note that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific type of sound effect", "specific multiple times allowed period", and "special multiple times allowed period" in configuration 21-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 21-D. Therefore, it may mean the same means as the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific type of sound effect", "specific multiple occurrences allowed period", and "special multiple occurrences allowed period" in other configurations, or it may mean different means from the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific type of sound effect", "specific multiple occurrences allowed period", and "special multiple occurrences allowed period" in other configurations.

With this configuration, when a "multiple occurrence allowance period" occurs, it becomes possible to suggest the type of the multiple occurrence allowance period by checking the output status of a specific type of sound effect and the state of the "acceptance period related periodicity display."

As will be described later, when "Configuration 21-D" is adopted, in a "specific multiple-times permissible period", each time an operation that is permitted multiple times is accepted, the periodic change that has been present up until that point may be hidden in the "first periodicity display", but the periodic change that has been present up until that point may continue in the "second periodicity display". The "specific multiple-times permissible period" occurs while a specific type of production sound is being audibly output, but the "special multiple-times permissible period" may occur either while a specific type of production sound is being audibly output, or while a specific type of production sound is not being audibly output. In other words, in this case, when a "multiple-times permissible period" occurs while a specific type of production sound is not being audibly output, it is suggested that this is a "special multiple-times permissible period", that is, that the state of the "acceptance period-related periodicity display" does not change when an operation is accepted. In contrast, when a "multiple occurrences allowed period" occurs while a specific type of sound effect is being audibly output, it is difficult to recognize whether this is a "specific multiple occurrences allowed period" or a "special multiple occurrences allowed period," so it is possible to encourage the user to pay close attention to whether the appearance of the "acceptance period related periodicity display" changes when an operation is accepted. Also, a person who mistakenly pays attention to the "second periodicity display" instead of the "first periodicity display" may mistakenly believe that a "special multiple occurrences allowed period" is occurring instead of a "specific multiple occurrences allowed period," which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 22-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance period during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, it is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Also, during the acceptance period, an "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, can be displayed, and at least a "multiple acceptance period" during which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is prepared as the acceptance period.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides, as the "multiple-time permissible period", at least a "specific multiple-time permissible period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception-period-related periodicity display", and a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which at least the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception-period-related periodicity display". When a "specific multiple-time permissible period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed are made to differ from each other. Note that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time permissible period", and "special multiple-time permissible period" in the configuration 22-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 22-D. Therefore, it may mean the same means as the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or it may mean different means from the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations.

With this configuration, when a "multiple-time allowed period" occurs, it becomes possible to suggest the type of the "multiple-time allowed period" by checking the mode of the reception period-related periodicity display. It is also expected that the presentation will be improved when a "specific multiple-time allowed period" occurs.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 22-D" is adopted, if a "specific multiple-times allowed period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed are different, but if a "special multiple-times allowed period" occurs, the timing at which the third periodicity display is displayed and the timing at which the fourth periodicity display is displayed may be the same. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether a "specific multiple-times allowed period" or a "special multiple-times allowed period" will occur based on whether there is a difference in the display timing of the two types of periodicity displays as acceptance periods.

[Configuration 23-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance period during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, it is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Also, during the acceptance period, an "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, can be displayed, and at least a "multiple acceptance period" during which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is prepared as the acceptance period.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides, as the "multiple times allowed period", at least a "specific multiple times allowed period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period related periodicity display", and a "special multiple times allowed period" in which at least the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period related periodicity display". When a "specific multiple times allowed period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts is made different from the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts. Note that the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple times allowed period", and "special multiple times allowed period" in the configuration 23-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-D. Therefore, it may mean the same means as the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or it may mean different means from the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations.

With this configuration, when a "multiple-time allowed period" occurs, it becomes possible to suggest the type of "multiple-time allowed period" by checking the state of the "reception period related periodicity display." It is also expected to improve the presentation when a "specific multiple-time allowed period" occurs.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 23-D" is adopted, if a "specific multiple-times allowed period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts is different from the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts, but if a "special multiple-times allowed period" occurs, the timing at which the third periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts may be the same as the timing at which the fourth periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether a "specific multiple-times allowed period" or a "special multiple-times allowed period" will occur based on whether there is a difference in the timing at which the periodic changes start as acceptance periods during which the two types of periodicity displays appear.

[Configuration 24-D]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with an acceptance period execution means capable of generating an acceptance period during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001" etc.) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, it is capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Also, during the acceptance period, an "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, can be displayed, and at least a "multiple acceptance period" during which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is prepared as the acceptance period.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a "specific multiple-times permissible period" in which at least the first and second periodicity indications are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity indication", and a "special multiple-times permissible period" in which at least the third and fourth periodicity indications are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity indication". When the first periodicity indication is displayed upon the occurrence of a "specific multiple-times permissible period", the first periodicity indication is displayed behind a specific indication other than the first periodicity indication. Note that the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple-times permissible period", and "special multiple-times permissible period" in the configuration 24-D are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 24-D. Therefore, it may mean the same means as the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or it may mean different means from the "first periodicity indication", "second periodicity indication", "third periodicity indication", "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" in other configurations.

With this configuration, when a "multiple occurrences allowed period" occurs, the type of the "multiple occurrences allowed period" can be suggested by checking the state of the "reception period related periodicity display." In addition, by affecting the visibility of the first periodicity display at this time, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 24-D" is adopted, when the first periodicity display is displayed upon the occurrence of the "specific multiple-times permitted period", another specific display is displayed, and the first periodicity display starts to be displayed behind the specific display, but the second periodicity display is not displayed behind the specific display, and when the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed upon the occurrence of the "special multiple-times permitted period", neither the third periodicity display nor the fourth periodicity display may be displayed behind another display at the time of starting to display. With this configuration, it becomes possible to suggest whether the "specific multiple-times permitted period" or the "special multiple-times permitted period" is occurring at a relatively early point when the periodicity display starts to be displayed. Moreover, even if the "specific multiple-times permitted period" occurs, if a person mistakenly focuses on the "second periodicity display" instead of the "first periodicity display", there is a possibility that the person may mistakenly recognize that a "special multiple-times permitted period" is occurring because the premonition effect display corresponding to the "second periodicity display" is not displayed, and therefore it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in a good manner.

[Configuration 25-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in any one of a number of display modes with different degrees of expectation, and regardless of which of the multiple display modes the "special image display" is displayed in, a periodic change appears as the "special image display."

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "special image display" is displayed in the first display mode among the above-mentioned multiple display modes, it can be changed to a display mode different from the first display mode, and when the "special image display" is displayed in the second display mode among the above-mentioned multiple display modes, it can be changed to a display mode different from the second display mode. When the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a display mode different from the first display mode, a change occurs in the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display". Note that the "special image display", "first display mode", and "second display mode" in the configuration 25-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-D. Therefore, they may mean the same means as the "special image display", "first display mode", and "second display mode" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean means different from the "special image display", "first display mode", and "second display mode" in other configurations.

With this configuration, when the "special image display" changes from a first display mode to a different display mode, the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" also changes, making it easier to recognize that a change has occurred in the display mode of the "special image display."

As will be described later, when "Configuration 25-D" is employed, when the "special image display" changes from a first display mode to a display mode different from the first display mode, the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" changes, but when the "special image display" changes from a second display mode to a display mode different from the second display mode, there may be cases in which the time required for one periodic change does not change. With this configuration, the ease of recognizing whether or not the "special image display" has changed differs between when the display mode changes from the first display mode and when the display mode changes from the second display mode, which is expected to improve the presentation.

[Configuration 26-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in any one of a number of display modes with different degrees of expectation, and regardless of which of the multiple display modes the "special image display" is displayed in, a periodic change appears as the "special image display."

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display" may be displayed in a predetermined time that is the time required for one periodic change, or in a specific time that is different from the predetermined time, and when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is the specific time, the display mode of the "special image display" can be changed while maintaining the time required for one periodic change at the specific time. Note that the "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" in the configuration 26-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 26-D. Therefore, they may mean the same means as the "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean means different from the "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" in other configurations.

With this configuration, when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is a specific time, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the display mode of the "special image display" has changed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 26-D" is adopted, the display mode of the "special image display" can be changed when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is the specific time, and when the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" may change, and when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is the specified time, the display mode of the special image display may not change. With this configuration, it becomes possible to suggest whether the display mode will change depending on whether the "special image display" displays the time required for one periodic change as the specific time or the specified time. Also, when the "special image display" is displayed for the specific time, the time required for the periodic change may also change if the display mode changes, making it easier to recognize that a change has occurred.

[Configuration 27-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in any one of a number of display modes with different degrees of expectation, and regardless of which of the multiple display modes the "special image display" is displayed in, a periodic change appears as the "special image display."

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display" may display the time required for one periodic change in a predetermined time, or may display the time required for one periodic change in a specific time different from the predetermined time, and when the display mode of the special image display changes, the periodic change that was displayed up until that point is hidden, and then the periodic change of the special image display appears. Note that the "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" in configuration 27-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 27-D. Therefore, they may mean the same means as the "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean means different from the "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" in other configurations.

With this configuration, when the display mode of the special image display changes, the periodic change that was visible until then is hidden, and then the periodic change of the special image display appears. This is expected to draw interest in whether or not there has been a change in the time required for the periodic change when the display mode of the special image display changes.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance allowable period (acceptance period) occurs during which "acceptance validity judgment that the action by the player is an effective action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means" is permitted, a model image display related to the acceptance target (such as a model image of an operation receiving part) is displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game until the post-acceptance display (display change) is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern performance progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of a notice judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance.

The "integrated model image display" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as another example or modified example thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different expectation levels are prepared for the "integrated model image display," and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance allowable period (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance allowable sound may be audibly output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance allowable sound" refers to a sound that, when output of the sound begins, will necessarily cause an acceptance allowable period (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or that the acceptance allowable period (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance allowable sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance allowable period (acceptance period) is being performed.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-D" to "Configuration 26-D" are explained below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be equipped. In other words, when it is desired to obtain an additional effect in addition to any one of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-D" to "Configuration 26-D", it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the corresponding configuration for each configuration described in the specification below.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple acceptance periods (acceptance effects) with different types of post-acceptance displays and post-acceptance output sounds that appear when a bet is accepted (for example, types of expectation-indicating effects such as conversation notices, cut-in notices, and moving object notices as post-acceptance effects). Each acceptance period has its own occurrence condition (for example, a predetermined result is obtained in a judgment such as a jackpot judgment or a performance judgment), and when any one of these occurrence conditions is met, an acceptance period (acceptance effect) of a type corresponding to the occurrence condition that has been met can be generated.

First, among such multiple reception periods (reception performances), the 1st E reception period (1st E reception post performance), the 2nd E reception period (2nd E reception post performance), the 3rd E reception period (3rd E reception post performance), and the 4th E reception period (4th E reception post performance) will be described with reference to Figures 253 to 269. Note that, with reference to Figures 252 and up, each reception period described above may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1st E reception period (1st E reception post performance), the 2nd E reception period (2nd E reception post performance), the 3rd E reception period (3rd E reception post performance), and the 4th E reception period (4th E reception post performance), or may be realized as any one of the 1st E reception period (1st E reception post performance), the 2nd E reception period (2nd E reception post performance), the 3rd E reception period (3rd E reception post performance), and the 4th E reception period (4th E reception post performance). Furthermore, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is only necessary to have the necessary components among the components described below, and it is not necessary to have these components for each of the reception periods described above while referring to Figure 252.

Figure 253 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when "Condition 1E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 1E reception period (1E reception presentation) occurs. Figures 255 to 257 are diagrams showing examples of presentation in a variation pattern in which the 1E reception period (1E reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "first E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the first E fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the first E fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the first E fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 255(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "first E fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 253(a), within the execution period of the variable performance related to the "1E variable pattern", the 1E acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the display after 1E acceptance (sound output after 1E acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing ta2, which is the time when the 1E time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 1E") (the situation shown in FIG. 255(c)).

Here, the 1E reception period in this embodiment functions as a "multiple times allowed period" during which operation reception is allowed multiple times until the 1E reception period ends (until operation reception regarding the post-1E reception display (post-1E reception sound output) is no longer allowed).

That is, as will be described later, during the first E reception period, each time an operation is received, a display change (e.g., a depiction of the first meter rising, etc.) occurs in the background image as a "first E reception post-display", and when a special condition is satisfied as a result of multiple operations being received in this way, the first E reception period ends and a display change (a display suggesting a degree of expectation) different from the previous display change of the background image (a display not suggesting a degree of expectation), that is, a special mode as a "first E reception post-display" (e.g., a depiction of the first meter being full and the first character being revived, etc.) can be displayed. On the other hand, when the special condition is not satisfied during the first E reception period, a predetermined mode as a "first E reception post-display" (e.g., a depiction of the first meter not being full and the first character collapsing, etc.) is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., based on the remaining time of the first E reception period becoming "0" (the first E reception period ends)). When the specified pattern is displayed, it is suggested that the probability (probability) of hitting the jackpot is lower than when the special pattern is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when such a first E reception period is generated, a reception period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, can be displayed in relation to the reception period, and a "first periodicity display SH1" and a "second periodicity display SH2" are displayed as the reception period related periodicity display.

Here, the "first periodic display SH1" in this embodiment means a display in which, when a moving image such as "after a dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254(A), the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254(B)" is considered to be one periodic change, the periodic change can be repeatedly displayed in a form requiring a predetermined period C time. Also, the "second periodic display SH2" in this embodiment means a display in which, when a moving image such as "after a cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254(a), the cat character is sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 254(b) to (d)" is considered to be one periodic change, the periodic change can be repeatedly displayed in a form requiring a predetermined period D time (a time different from the period C time (here, a time longer than the period C time)).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such reception period-related periodicity displays (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2) are displayed to give the player information that serves as a hint as to which type of reception period has occurred. However, the reception period-related periodicity displays (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2) do not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize which type of reception period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these.

For example, when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed upon the occurrence of the first E reception period, the first periodicity display SH1 starts to be displayed in a manner that makes it appear behind the specific display while the specific display is being displayed, but the second periodicity display SH2 is not displayed behind the specific display. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the type of reception period that has occurred is suggested through the visibility of the reception period related periodicity display at the time when the display of such reception period related periodicity display starts.

In this example, as shown in Figures 255(b) to (d), the specific display is a premonition display that indicates that the player will be given an opportunity to operate (the first E reception period will occur). Note that the specific display does not necessarily have to be a premonition display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when the timing ta1 arrives before the occurrence of the 1E reception period, the "1E premonition presentation display ZED" is executed as the premonition presentation display, as shown in Fig. 253(c) and Fig. 255(b). This "1E premonition presentation display ZED" is displayed so as to straddle the timing when the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the reception period related periodicity display (1st periodicity display SH1, 2nd periodicity display SH2) are displayed, as shown in Fig. 253(c) and Fig. 255(c) and (d).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 255(c), the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the first periodic display SH1 start to be displayed in a manner that makes them appear behind the "first E premonition effect display ZED (specific display)" while the "first E premonition effect display ZED (specific display)" is being displayed. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 255(d), the second periodic display SH2 is not displayed in a manner that makes it appear behind the "first E premonition effect display ZED (specific display)", but instead starts to be displayed behind the "first E premonition effect display ZED (specific display)".

In this example, the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1 begin to be displayed at the timing ta2 when the 1st E reception period occurs, but this is not limited to this. The integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1 may begin to be displayed before or after the timing ta2 when the 1st E reception period occurs, or the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1 may be displayed at different timings.

In this pachinko machine 1, the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed at different times. In this example, the first periodicity display SH1 starts to be displayed prior to the second periodicity display SH2, and the second periodicity display SH2 starts to be displayed while the first periodicity display SH1 is being displayed. In addition, since the first periodicity display SH1 in this example starts to change periodically as soon as it starts to be displayed, the timing at which the periodic change starts is also set to be before the timing at which the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH2 starts.

However, the first periodicity display SH1 may be started to be displayed, for example, before timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs, and the periodic change may not be started at the time when the display is started. That is, in this case, the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed in a manner that maintains the state shown in FIG. 254(A). Then, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 may be started based on the arrival of timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs. In this regard, the second periodicity display SH1 may be started to be displayed, including its periodic change, based on the arrival of timing ta2, for example, so that although the timing when the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH1 start to be displayed is different, the timing when the periodic change starts will be the same.

Conversely, the second periodicity display SH2 may be made to start displaying before the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed or the timing at which the first E reception period occurs. In this case, it is desirable that the timing at which the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH2 starts is also before the timing at which the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 starts or the timing ta2 at which the first E reception period occurs. That is, as will be described later, even if an operation is accepted during the first E reception period, the second periodicity display SH2 does not hide (stop) its periodic change (FIGS. 254(a)-(d)) as a trigger while the first E reception period continues, and can be used as a comparison criterion for whether the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 has been hidden (stopped). Therefore, by starting this "periodic change related to the second periodic display SH2" prior to the first periodic display SH1, it becomes easier to determine whether the periodic change of the first periodic display SH1 has been hidden (stopped).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display that may show periodic changes. In the first E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and when the part of the integrated model image display IG that mimics the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 (button model image BMG) is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254 (α), and then displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254 (β)" is taken as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form that requires a predetermined period A time. As a result, in the first E reception period, the integrated model image display IG depicts the "operation receiving part" moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the period A time and the period C time are illustrated as being the same time, but they may be different times.

In this example, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, remaining time display) is started to be displayed at timing ta2 when the 1E reception period occurs, but it may be started to be displayed before timing ta2, or it may be started to be displayed after timing ta2. However, if the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, remaining time display) is started to be displayed before timing ta2 when the 1E reception period occurs, it is desirable that the periodic change not be started until timing ta2 when the 1E reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, the integrated Moji image display IG (button Moji image BMG) will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 254 (α) until timing ta2 arrives.

And, as shown in FIG. 255(c), the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) in this example of performance also starts to be displayed, like the first periodic display SH1, by appearing behind the "1st E premonition performance display ZED (specific display)" while the "1st E premonition performance display ZED (specific display)" is being displayed, and starts to change periodically.

The display range of the 1E premonition effect display ZED is designed to shrink over time, and while the 1E premonition effect display ZED is displayed in this manner, the integrated model image display IG and the 1st periodic display SH1, as well as the 2nd periodic display SH2, which starts to be displayed with a delay, will each progress their periodic changes in the manners described above.

As a result of the display range of the 1E premonition effect display ZED shrinking in this way, when the 1E premonition effect display ZED is made non-display, the visibility of not only the second periodic display SH2 but also the integrated model image display IG and the first periodic display SH1 becomes good as shown in FIG. 255(e). After this, unless an operation is accepted by the player, the integrated model image display IG, the first periodic display SH1, and the second periodic display SH2 will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (period A time, period C time, period D time) as shown in FIG. 255(f)-(h1).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 253, it is assumed that the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made at timing ta2A (the timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) during the 1E acceptance period. That is, as described above, the 1E acceptance period in this embodiment functions as a "multiple acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times, and each time an operation is accepted, a display change (e.g., a depiction of the first meter rising, etc.) occurs in the background image as a "display after 1E acceptance", and when a special condition is satisfied as a result of the operation being accepted multiple times, the 1E acceptance period ends and a display change (a display suggesting the degree of expectation) different from the previous display change of the background image (a display that does not suggest the degree of expectation), that is, a special mode as a "display after 1E acceptance" (e.g., a depiction of the first meter being full and the first character being revived, etc.) can be displayed.

When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2A (the timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the 1E reception period, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, first, the modes shown in FIG. 256(g2) and (h2) will appear in sequence.

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 253, an EF display (performance effect display) EKH is displayed in response to the first operation reception in the first E reception period (operation reception that does not end the reception period). In this performance example, the first aspect EKH1 and the second aspect EKH2 are displayed sequentially as the EF display (performance effect display) EKH, but only either the first aspect EKH1 or the second aspect EKH2 may be displayed.

For ease of explanation, the illustration is omitted in FIG. 256, but as shown in FIG. 253(f), a "first E post-reception display" is displayed in response to the first operation reception during the first E reception period (operation reception that does not end the reception period). The "first E post-reception display" is as described above, and is displayed, for example, as a depiction (background image) of the first meter rising. This "first E post-reception display" is not displayed in front of the integrated model image display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity display SH2, and even if it is displayed in an overlapping position, it is displayed behind them. Although the illustration is omitted, when the first E post-reception display is displayed, a corresponding first E post-reception sound output is also audibly output.

In addition, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253(e), when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is hidden based on this. In this example, the display of the first periodic display SH1 itself continues, but the periodic change is stopped and not advanced, thereby hiding the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1. Therefore, in this example, the first periodic display SH1 shown in FIG. 256(g2) and (h2) is displayed in the same form (form shown in FIG. 254(B)) as the first periodic display SH1 shown in FIG. 255(f), and no progression of the periodic change has occurred from the first periodic display SH1 shown in FIG. 255(f).

In this regard, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253(e), even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the second periodicity display SH2 does not hide its periodic change (period D time) but continues it. Therefore, in this example, the second periodicity display SH2 shown in FIG. 256(g2) and (h2) progresses its periodic change in the same manner as FIG. 255(g1) and (h1) when there is no first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). According to this configuration, when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed during the first E reception period, the periodic change of only the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden when an operation is received, out of the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2.

In addition, in the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, as also shown in Fig. 253(b), when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the periodic change in the part of the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) that mimics the "operation receiving portion" of the operation button 410 is hidden based on this. In this example, the display of the integrated model image display IG itself continues, but the periodic change is stopped and not allowed to progress, thereby hiding the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG). Therefore, in this example, the portion of the integrated model image display IG shown in Figures 256 (g2) and (h2) that mimics the "operation receiving portion" of the operation button 410 (button model image BMG) is displayed in the same form as the portion of the integrated model image display IG shown in Figure 255 (f) that mimics the "operation receiving portion" of the operation button 410 (button model image BMG), and no periodic change has progressed from the form shown in Figure 255 (f).

Also, as shown in Figures 256 (g2) and (h2), the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) in response to the first operation acceptance during the first E acceptance period (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is displayed in front of and overlapping with the first periodicity display SH1 and integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG) in which periodic changes are hidden in response to the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period), making them difficult to see, whereas the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) in response to the first operation acceptance during the first E acceptance period (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is displayed in front of and overlapping with the first periodicity display SH1 and integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG) in which periodic changes are not hidden in response to the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period), making them difficult to see. In this example, the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the second periodicity display SH2, and the second aspect EKH2 of the EF display EKH is displayed in a position that overlaps with the second periodicity display SH2, but is displayed behind the second periodicity display SH2.

The EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) will be hidden as shown in FIG. 253(d) or FIG. 256(i2) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation was accepted. Although not shown, when an operation is accepted again while the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is displayed, so that the acceptance period (first E acceptance period) continues, it is desirable to redisplay the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) in the middle of execution from the initial aspect. In other words, in this case, when an operation is accepted while the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed (see FIG. 256(g2)), the EF display EKH will not progress to the second aspect EKH2, but will be redisplayed from the first aspect EKH1.

In addition, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is executed again as shown in FIG. 253(e) or FIG. 256(i2) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the periodic change was made invisible in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). As shown in FIG. 256(i2), the first periodic display SH1 in this example reexecutes the periodic change by restarting the periodic change from the state shown in FIG. 254(A). Although not shown, when an operation reception that does not end the reception period (first E reception period) is made again while the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is made invisible in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), it is desirable to make the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 be executed again when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing at which the operation reception was made again. In other words, in this case, the time required for the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 to be displayed again after it is hidden is effectively extended.

In addition, the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) will be executed again as shown in FIG. 253(e) or FIG. 256(i2) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the periodic change was made invisible in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). As shown in FIG. 256(i2), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) in this example will re-execute the periodic change by restarting the periodic change from the initial state (the state shown in FIG. 254(α)). Although not shown in the figures, when an operation that does not end the reception period (first E reception period) is received again while the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), it is desirable to execute the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) again when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing at which the operation was received again. In other words, in this case, the time required from when the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is hidden until it is executed again is substantially extended.

For ease of explanation, the illustration is omitted in FIG. 256, but the "1st E post-reception display" in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) will be hidden as shown in FIG. 253(f) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation reception. The "1st E post-reception sound output" will also be made inaudible after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation reception.

The time until the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is hidden, the time until the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is re-executed, the time until the periodic change in the integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG) is re-executed, and the time until the "first E post-reception display" in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is hidden may be different from each other or may be the same.

In addition, even during the period in which the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) are hidden in response to operation reception while the first E reception period continues, the depiction of the gauge image GG decreasing over time may be continuously displayed rather than hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (i2), while the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 continues, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 and the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) are resumed. From then on, unless an operation is received from the player, as shown in FIG. 256 (j2) to (m2), the integrated model image display IG, first periodic display SH1, and second periodic display SH2 will each continue to progress through the periodic changes described above (period A time, period C time, period D time).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 253 assumes that a second operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period) at timing ta2B (the timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 1E acceptance period.

When a second operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period) at timing ta2B (the timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 1E acceptance period, the appearance shown in FIG. 257 (l3) and (m3) will first appear in sequence in the performance display device 1600 in this example, roughly the same as when a first operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period).

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 253, an EF display (performance effect display) EKH is displayed in response to a second operation acceptance during the first E acceptance period (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period). The EF display (performance effect display) EKH sequentially displays the first aspect EKH1 and the second aspect EKH2, similar to the case where a first operation acceptance is made (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period).

Although not shown in FIG. 257 for ease of explanation, as shown in FIG. 253(f), a "1st E post-reception display" is displayed in response to a second operation reception during the 1st E reception period (operation reception that does not end the reception period). The "1st E post-reception display" is generally similar to the case where a first operation reception is performed (operation reception that does not end the reception period), and is displayed, for example, as a depiction (background image) of the first meter rising further.

In the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253(e), even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden based on this, just as when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made. Similarly, for the second periodicity display SH2, as shown in FIG. 253(e), even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, the periodic change (period D time) is not hidden but is continued. Similarly, for the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), as shown in FIG. 253(b), the periodic change in the part modeled on the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 (button model image BMG) is hidden based on the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period).

Also, as shown in FIG. 257 (l3) and (m3), the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) corresponding to the second operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is similar to the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) corresponding to the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period), in that it is displayed in front of and overlaps with the first periodicity display SH1 and integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) in which the periodic change is not hidden, making them difficult to see, whereas it is not displayed in front of and overlaps with the second periodicity display SH2 in which the periodic change is not hidden.

After this, the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is hidden, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is performed again, the periodic change in the integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG) is performed again, and other examples thereof are the same as in the above-mentioned example in response to the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period).

Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (n3), while the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 continues, when the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 and the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) are resumed, from then on, unless an operation is received from the player, as shown in FIG. 257 (n3) and (o3), the integrated model image display IG, first periodic display SH1, and second periodic display SH2 will each continue to progress through the periodic changes described above (period A time, period C time, period D time).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 253 assumes that the third operation is accepted at timing ta2C (the timing shown in FIG. 256 (o3)) within the 1E acceptance period.

The 1E reception period is, as shown in FIG. 253(a), originally intended to continue until timing ta3 arrives if there is no operation reception (that ends the reception period), and to end when timing ta3 arrives. However, in this performance example, it is assumed that a third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) occurs at timing ta2C (the timing shown in FIG. 256(o3)) within the 1E reception period, and based on this, the 1E reception period ends before timing ta3 arrives.

In the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, when a third operation is received (operation reception that ends the reception period), the above-mentioned "special condition" is satisfied, the 1E reception period ends, and a display change (a "post-1E reception display" that indicates the degree of expectation) different from the previous display change of the background image (a "post-1E reception display" that does not indicate the degree of expectation) can be displayed. At this time, the "post-1E reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner that indicates the degree of expectation.

More specifically, at timing ta2C within the 1E reception period (see FIG. 257(o3)), when the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) is performed, there are cases where mode UH1-1 (FIG. 257(p3)-(s3)) with a relatively low expectation as the "1E reception post-display" appears, and cases where mode UH1-2 (FIG. 257(p4)-(s4)) with a higher expectation as the "1E reception post-display" appears. Note that mode UH1-1 (FIG. 257(p3)-(s3)) corresponds to the predetermined mode as the "1E reception post-display" described above, and mode UH1-2 (FIG. 257(p4)-(s4)) corresponds to the special mode as the "1E reception post-display" described above.

In this regard, when the mode UH1-1 with a relatively low expectation appears as the "display after the reception of the first E", the EF display EKH is displayed in a different mode (low expectation mode) from when the mode UH1-2 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "display after the reception of the first E", as shown in Figure 257 (p3) to (r3).

That is, when the relatively low expectancy mode UH1-1 appears as the "display after the first E reception", the first mode EKH1 (see FIG. 257 (p3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. After this, the third mode EKH3 (see FIG. 257 (q3), (r3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the "low expectancy mode of the EF display EKH (corresponding to the "first disappearance EF" in FIG. 253)" based on the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) during the first E reception period is executed as a series of modes (FIG. 257 (p3) to (r3)) in which "the first mode EKH1 and the third mode EKH3 are displayed in sequence", which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively low expectancy mode UH1-1 will appear as the "display after the first E reception".

In contrast, when the relatively high expectation mode UH1-2 appears as the "display after the first E reception", the EF display EKH is displayed in a different mode (high expectation mode) from when the relatively low expectation mode UH1-1 appears as the "display after the first E reception", as shown in Figure 257 (p4) to (r4).

That is, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UH1-2 appears as the "display after the first E reception", the first mode EKH1 (see FIG. 257 (p4)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. After this, the fourth mode EKH4 (see FIG. 257 (q4), (r4)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the "highly anticipated mode of the EF display EKH (corresponding to the "fourth extinction EF" in FIG. 253)" based on the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) during the first E reception period is executed as a series of modes (FIG. 257 (p4) to (r4)) in which the first mode EKH1 and the fourth mode EKH4 are displayed in sequence, and this makes it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UH1-2 will appear as the "display after the first E reception".

In addition, in the "low expectation mode of EF display EKH" and "high expectation mode of EF display EKH" according to this example of performance, during the period in which the first mode EKH1 is displayed (see FIG. 257 (p3) and FIG. 257 (p4)), the same mode as when the EF display EKH is displayed in response to the first or second operation reception in the first E reception period (operation reception that does not end the reception period) (see FIG. 256 (g2) and FIG. 257 (l3)) is displayed, making it difficult to recognize whether the first E reception period is ending or whether the EF display EKH indicates the expectation level. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided, and it is also possible not to display the same mode as when the EF display EKH is displayed in response to the first or second operation reception in the first E reception period (operation reception that does not end the reception period) during the display period of the "low expectation mode of EF display EKH" and "high expectation mode of EF display EKH".

In addition, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as also shown in Fig. 253(e), when a third operation is received (an operation that does not end the reception period), the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden based on this. However, unlike when the first and second operations are received, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the first periodicity display SH1 itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after an operation is accepted (when the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIG. 257 (p3)-(q3) or FIG. 257 (p4)-(q4)), the first periodicity display SH1 is not hidden, and the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed behind the EF display EKH in the aspect shown in FIG. 257 (o3) (in which no progress in periodic change has occurred), and thereafter, the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden (based on the third operation being accepted (operation acceptance that ends the acceptance period)), but it may be hidden from the situation immediately after an operation is accepted.

In addition, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253(e), unlike when the first and second operation receptions are made, when the third operation reception is made (an operation reception that does not end the reception period), the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH2 is made invisible based on this. Here, the periodic change is made invisible by making the second periodicity display SH2 itself invisible. In this example, in the situation immediately after an operation is accepted (the situation in which the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIG. 257 (p3)-(q3) or FIG. 257 (p4)-(q4)), the second periodicity display SH2 is not hidden, and the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed in front of the EF display EKH in the aspect shown in FIG. 257 (o3) (the aspect in which no progress in periodic change has occurred), and thereafter, the second periodicity display SH2 is hidden (based on the third operation being accepted (the operation accepting that ends the acceptance period)), but it may be hidden from the situation immediately after an operation is accepted.

In addition, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 253(b), when a third operation is received (an operation that does not end the reception period), the periodic change of the integrated model image display IG is hidden based on this. However, unlike when the first and second operations are received, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the integrated model image display IG itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after an operation is accepted (when the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIG. 257 (p3) to (q3) or FIG. 257 (p4) to (q4)), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and is displayed behind the EF display EKH in the aspect shown in FIG. 257 (o3) (in which no progress in periodic change has occurred), and thereafter, the integrated model image display IG is hidden (based on the third operation being accepted (operation acceptance that ends the acceptance period)), but it may be hidden from the situation immediately after an operation is accepted.

Here, the "first E post-reception display" is displayed behind the first periodicity display SH1, the second periodicity display SH2, the integrated model image display IG, and the EF display EKH, which makes the "first E post-reception display" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 257 (p3) to (r3) and FIG. 257 (p4) to (r4), the visibility of the "first E post-reception display" gradually improves as the first periodicity display SH1, the second periodicity display SH2, the integrated model image display IG, the EF display EKH, and the like are hidden. Also, as described above, by checking the mode of the EF display EKH even while it is displayed, it is made easy to recognize whether the "first E post-reception display" is displayed in the mode UH1-1 with low expectation or the mode UH1-2 with high expectation.

In addition, during the first E reception period, as shown in FIG. 253, a "first permissible sound" may be audibly output as a reception permissible sound when the first E reception period occurs. In this regard, during the first E reception period, as shown in FIG. 253, a situation may occur in which an operation is received while the "first permissible sound" is being audibly output as a reception permissible sound (timing ta2A), but the audible output of the "first permissible sound" continues without interruption based on the reception of the operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 253, the "first permissible sound" as the reception permissible sound is audibly output before timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the audible output may be started at timing ta2, or may be started after timing ta2.

As shown in FIG. 253, the 1E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM is being audibly output, there is a possibility that the 1E reception period will occur, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game. Note that the "specific BGM" may be the sound of BGM playback output during normal fluctuations, or the sound of BGM playback output across multiple pattern fluctuations (multiple fluctuation patterns). Multiple types of BGM may be prepared as this kind of "specific BGM".

In addition, during the 1E reception period, operations are accepted multiple times (operation acceptance is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) simply by continuing to operate (press) the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated imitation image display IG (button imitation image BMG) (auto-repeated function). With this configuration, operations can be accepted multiple times without the player having to repeatedly operate (press) the operation button 410, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

Here, during the first E acceptance period, if an operation is performed using this "auto rapid-fire function," the next operation is accepted while "first aspect EKH1" is displayed as the EF display EKH (see FIG. 256 (g2), FIG. 257 (l3), etc.). In this case, if an operation is accepted while "first aspect EKH1" is displayed as the EF display EKH, "second aspect EKH2" will not be displayed, and "first aspect EKH1" will be displayed again as the EF display EKH.

For example, when an operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (g2), the situation shown in FIG. 257 (l3) appears based on the operation acceptance, and when an operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (l3), the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p3) or the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p4) appears based on the operation acceptance, and thereafter, depending on whether FIG. 257 (p3) or FIG. 257 (p4) appears, the performance progress shown in FIG. 257 (q3)-(t3) or the performance progress shown in FIG. 257 (q4)-(t4) will be performed. However, in this case, the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1 and the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) will be maintained in a non-display (interrupted) state after the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (g2). Furthermore, the periodic change in the second periodicity display SH2 continues even after an operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (g2), but will be made non-displayable based on the acceptance of an operation that causes the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p3) or the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p4) to appear, just as in the case where an operation is performed without using the "auto rapid-fire function."

Figure 258 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 2E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and a second E reception period (second E reception presentation) occurs. Figures 260 to 262 are diagrams showing presentation examples in a variation pattern in which a second E reception period (second E reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving state), and the "second E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second E fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the second E fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the second E fluctuation pattern) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 260(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second E fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 260(a), within the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "2nd E variable pattern", the 2nd E acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the display after 2nd E acceptance (sound output after 2nd E acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tb2, which is the 2nd E time that has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 2E") (the situation shown in FIG. 260(c)).

Here, the second E reception period in this embodiment, like the first E reception period described above, functions as a "multiple times allowed period" during which operation reception is allowed multiple times until the second E reception period ends (until operation reception for the post-second E reception display (post-second E reception sound output) is no longer allowed).

That is, as will be described later, during the second E reception period, each time an operation is received, a display change (e.g., a depiction of the second meter rising, etc.) occurs in the background image as a "display after second E reception", and when a special condition is met as a result of multiple operations being received in this way, the second E reception period ends and a display change (a display suggesting a degree of expectation) different from the previous display change in the background image (a display not suggesting a degree of expectation), that is, a special mode as a "display after second E reception" (e.g., a depiction of the second meter being full and the second character being revived, etc.) can be displayed. On the other hand, when the special condition is not met within the second E reception period, a predetermined mode as a "display after second E reception" (e.g., a depiction of the second meter not being full and the character collapsing, etc.) is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., based on the remaining time of the second E reception period becoming "0" (the second E reception period ends)). When the specified pattern is displayed, it is suggested that the probability (probability) of hitting the jackpot is lower than when the special pattern is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a second E reception period is generated, it is possible to display a reception period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, and the "third periodicity display SH3" and the "fourth periodicity display SH4" are displayed as the reception period related periodicity display.

Here, the "third periodic display SH3" in this embodiment means a display that can repeatedly appear in a form that requires a predetermined period E time (a time longer than the above-mentioned "periodic C time") when a moving image such as "after a dog character is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 259(A), the dog character is sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 259(B) and (C)" is considered to be one periodic change. Also, the "fourth periodic display SH4" in this embodiment means a display that can repeatedly appear in a form that requires a predetermined period F time (a time different from the period D time and the period E time) when a moving image such as "after a cat character is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 259(a), the cat character is sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 259(b) to (e)" is considered to be one periodic change.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such reception period related periodicity displays (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4) are displayed in order to give the player information that serves as a hint as to which type of reception period has occurred. However, the reception period related periodicity displays (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4) do not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize which type of reception period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. In addition, the third periodicity display SH3 may be displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 may be displayed with a character different from the "cat character" used in the second periodicity display SH2.

When the third periodicity display SH3 is displayed upon the occurrence of the second E reception period, the third periodicity display SH3 does not begin to be displayed in a manner that appears behind other images. Also, when the fourth periodicity display SH4 is displayed, the fourth periodicity display SH4 does not begin to be displayed in a manner that appears behind other images. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the type of reception period that has occurred is suggested through the visibility of the reception period related periodicity display at the time when the display of such reception period related periodicity display begins.

In other words, in this example as well, as shown in Figures 260(b) and (c), a premonition display is executed to indicate that the player will be given an opportunity to operate (the second E reception period will occur).

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of performance, when the timing tb1 arrives before the occurrence of the second E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258(c) and FIG. 260(b), the "second E premonition performance display ZED" is started to be executed as the premonition performance display, as shown in FIG. 258(c) and FIG. 260(b)-(d), this "second E premonition performance display ZED" is displayed so as to straddle the timing when the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the reception period related periodicity display (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4) are displayed. Note that, in this example of performance, the "second E premonition performance display ZED" is executed as the same performance display as the above-mentioned "first E premonition performance display ZED (see FIG. 255(b)-(d))", but it may be executed as a performance display different from the "first E premonition performance display ZED".

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 260(c), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4, which appear in connection with the occurrence of the 2nd E reception period, are all started to be displayed behind the 2nd E premonition effect display ZED while the 2nd E premonition effect display ZED is being displayed, and will not be started to be displayed behind other images.

However, the "integrated mosaic image display IG (button mosaic image BMG)," "third periodicity display SH3," and "fourth periodicity display SH2," which are displayed in connection with the occurrence of the second E reception period, may be displayed only if they do not start to appear behind other images, and for example, they do not necessarily have to start to be displayed behind the "second E premonition effect display ZED." In this sense, the "second E premonition effect display ZED" may be hidden before the timing at which the "integrated mosaic image display IG (button mosaic image BMG)," "third periodicity display SH3," and "fourth periodicity display SH2" are displayed, or the "second E premonition effect display ZED" itself may not be executed when the second E reception period occurs.

In addition, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the third periodicity display SH3 are started to be displayed at timing tb2 when the second E reception period occurs, but this is not limited to this. The integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the third periodicity display SH3 may be started to be displayed before or after timing tb2 when the third E reception period occurs, or the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the third periodicity display SH3 may be displayed at different timings.

In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 are displayed at the same timing. Also, since the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 in this presentation example are both configured to start changing periodically as soon as they are displayed, the timing at which the periodic changes start is also configured to be the same for both.

That is, as will be described later, during the second E reception period, both the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 do not hide (stop) their periodic changes (Figs. 259(A)-(C), 259(a)-(e)) even if an operation is received while the second E reception period continues. Therefore, by displaying the "third periodicity display SH3" and the "fourth periodicity display SH4", which have the same characteristics, at the same time, it becomes easier to determine whether the periodic changes of each other are hidden (interrupted).

Also, in the second E reception period of this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is displayed as an image display that may show periodic changes. In the second E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and when the part of the integrated model image display IG that mimics the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 (button model image BMG) is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259 (α), and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 259 (β) to (δ)", which is a moving image, is a periodic change that repeats in a form that requires a predetermined period B of time. As a result, in the second E reception period, the integrated model image display IG depicts the "operation receiving part" moving up and down within its movable range. However, since the "cycle B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the second E reception period is set to be longer than the "cycle A time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the first E reception period, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly in the second E reception period compared to the first E reception period.

As shown in FIG. 260(d), the display range of the second E premonition effect display ZED is reduced over time, and while the second E premonition effect display ZED is displayed in this manner, the integrated model image display IG, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 each progress their periodic changes in the manners described above. After this, as shown in FIG. 260(e)-(g1), the integrated model image display IG, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 each continue to progress their periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period F time) described above.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made at timing tb2A (the timing shown in FIG. 260(e)) during the second E acceptance period. That is, as described above, the second E acceptance period in this embodiment functions as a "multiple times allowed period" in which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times, and each time an operation is accepted, a display change (e.g., a depiction of the second meter rising, etc.) occurs in the background image as a "display after second E acceptance". When a special condition is satisfied as a result of multiple operation acceptance in this way, the second E acceptance period ends and a display change (a display suggesting a degree of expectation) different from the previous display change of the background image (a display that does not suggest a degree of expectation), that is, a special mode as a "display after second E acceptance" (e.g., a depiction of the second meter being full and a character being revived, etc.) can be displayed.

When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing tb2A (the timing shown in FIG. 260(e)) within the 2E reception period, the performance display device 1600 in this example will first appear in the state shown in FIG. 261(f2).

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 258, even if the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made during the second E acceptance period, this will not trigger a display change that affects the visibility of the integrated mock-up image display IG, the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 (displaying another image in front of any of these displays). Therefore, even if the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made during the second E acceptance period, the EF display (performance effect display) EKH as shown in FIG. 256 (g2) and (h2) will not be displayed.

However, for the sake of convenience, the illustration is omitted in FIG. 261, but even during the 2E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258(f), when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, a corresponding "2E post-reception display" is displayed. The "2E post-reception display" is as described above, and is displayed, for example, as a depiction (background image) of the second meter rising. This "2E post-reception display" is not displayed in front of the integrated model image display IG, the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4, and even if it is displayed in an overlapping position, it is displayed behind them. Also, although the illustration is omitted, when the 2E post-reception display is displayed, a corresponding 2E post-reception sound output is also audibly output.

For ease of explanation, this is not shown in FIG. 261, but the "2nd E post-reception display" in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) will be hidden as shown in FIG. 258(f) once a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation reception. The "2nd E post-reception sound output" will also be made inaudible once a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation reception.

In addition, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, as also shown in FIG. 258(e), the periodic change in the third periodicity display SH3 is not hidden based on this. Therefore, in this example, the third periodicity display SH3 shown in FIG. 261(f2) has an advanced form from the form of the third periodicity display SH3 shown in FIG. 260(e), and is the same form as the third periodicity display SH3 shown in FIG. 260(f1).

Similarly, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258(e), even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the periodic change in the fourth periodic display SH4 is not hidden based on this. Therefore, in this example, the fourth periodic display SH4 shown in FIG. 261(f2) is an advanced form of the fourth periodic display SH4 shown in FIG. 260(e), and is the same form as the fourth periodic display SH4 shown in FIG. 260(f1). According to this configuration, in the second E reception period, unlike the first E reception period described above, when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the periodic changes of both the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 are not hidden.

In addition, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, as also shown in FIG. 258(b), even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is not hidden based on this. Therefore, in this example, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) shown in FIG. 261(f2) has an advanced form from the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) shown in FIG. 260(e), and is the same form as the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) shown in FIG. 260(f1).

In addition, during the second E reception period, the depiction of the gauge image GG decreasing over time continues to be displayed regardless of whether or not an operation has been received while the second E reception period is continuing.

That is, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), third periodic display SH3, and fourth periodic display SH4 do not change in display mode before and after the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), and their periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), third periodic display SH3, and fourth periodic display SH4 continue to progress through the above-mentioned respective periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period F time), as shown in FIG. 261 (f2) to (j2).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 258 assumes that a second operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period) at timing tb2B (the timing shown in FIG. 261 (h2)) within the second E acceptance period.

When a second operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period) at timing tb2B (the timing shown in FIG. 261 (j2)) within the second E acceptance period, the performance display device 1600 in this example will first appear in the state shown in FIG. 262 (i3), roughly the same as when a first operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period).

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 258, even if a second operation is accepted during the second E reception period (an operation that does not end the reception period), this will not trigger a display change that will affect the visibility of the integrated mock-up image display IG, the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 (displaying another image in front of any of these displays). Therefore, even if a second operation is accepted during the second E reception period (an operation that does not end the reception period), the EF display (performance effect display) EKH as shown in FIG. 256 (g2) and (h2) will not be displayed.

However, for ease of explanation, illustration is omitted in FIG. 262, but as shown in FIG. 258(f), when a second operation is accepted during the second E acceptance period (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period), the corresponding "post-second E acceptance display" is displayed. The "post-second E acceptance display" is generally similar to when a first operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period), and is displayed, for example, as a depiction (background image) of the second meter rising further.

In addition, for ease of explanation, the "2nd E post-reception display" in response to a second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is also hidden as shown in FIG. 258(f) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation reception, although this is not shown in FIG. 262.

In the second E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258(e), even when a second operation is received (an operation that does not end the reception period), the periodic change (period E time) in the third periodicity display SH3 is not hidden but continues based on the second operation, as in the case of the first operation reception (an operation that does not end the reception period). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 258(e), even when a second operation is received (an operation that does not end the reception period), the periodic change (period F time) is not hidden but continues. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 258(b), even when a second operation is received (an operation that does not end the reception period), the periodic change (period B time) in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is not hidden but continues.

That is, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), third periodic display SH3, and fourth periodic display SH4 do not change in display mode before and after the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), and their periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), third periodic display SH3, and fourth periodic display SH4 continue to progress through the above-mentioned respective periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period F time), as shown in FIG. 262 (i3) to (l3).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 262 assumes that the third operation is accepted at timing tb2C (the timing shown in FIG. 262 (j3)) within the second E acceptance period.

The 2E reception period is originally, as shown in FIG. 258(a), a period that continues until timing tb3 arrives when there is no operation reception (that ends the reception period), and ends when timing tb3 arrives. However, in this performance example, a third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) is made at timing tb2C (the timing shown in FIG. 262(j3)) within the 2E reception period, and based on this, it is assumed that the 2E reception period ends before timing tb3 arrives.

In the second E reception period according to this embodiment, when a third operation is received (operation reception that ends the reception period), the above-mentioned "special condition" is satisfied, the second E reception period ends, and a display change (a "post-second E reception display" that indicates the degree of expectation) different from the previous display change of the background image (a "post-second E reception display" that does not indicate the degree of expectation) can be displayed. At this time, the "post-second E reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner that indicates the degree of expectation.

More specifically, at timing tb2C within the 2nd E reception period (see FIG. 262 (j3)), when the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) is performed, there are cases where mode UH2-1 (not shown) with a relatively low expectation appears as the "2nd E reception post-display", and cases where mode UH2-2 (FIG. 262 (k4) to (m4)) with a higher expectation appears as the "2nd E reception post-display" than the mode UH2-1 appears. Note that mode UH2-1 (not shown) corresponds to the predetermined mode as the "2nd E reception post-display" described above, and mode UH2-2 (FIG. 262 (k4) to (m4)) corresponds to the special mode as the "2nd E reception post-display" described above.

In this regard, when the "2nd E post-reception display" is displayed based on the third operation reception during the 2nd E reception period (operation reception that ends the reception period), regardless of the mode, the "2nd E post-reception display" is displayed in front of the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 so that they are all behind them, as shown in FIG. 262 (k4).

Furthermore, when the "2nd E post-reception display" is displayed based on the third operation being accepted during the 2nd E reception period, regardless of the mode, the "2nd E post-reception display" is displayed in front of the decorative pattern SZ so that it is also behind the decorative pattern SZ. This configuration allows the "2nd E post-reception display" to be displayed more emphatically, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

According to this configuration, the "second E post-reception display" itself functions as a "disappearing EF display" for the integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, the fourth periodic display SH4, etc., so that even when a third operation is accepted during the second E reception period (operation acceptance that ends the reception period), the EF display EKH will not be displayed based on this.

In this example, when the "2nd E after reception display" corresponding to the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) starts to be displayed (see FIG. 262 (k4)), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 continue to change periodically without being hidden. After this, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 are each hidden (see FIG. 262 (l4)). However, for the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4, when the "2nd E after reception display" corresponding to the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) starts to be displayed (see FIG. 262 (k4)), the display itself or the periodic change may be hidden.

In this example, the "2nd E post-reception display" in response to the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) is made to disappear when a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed, as shown in FIG. 258(f). However, as described above, the "2nd E post-reception display" in response to the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) is displayed in front of not only the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4, but also the decorative pattern SZ, so that they are behind them. This raises concerns that the decorative pattern SZ will be difficult to see, which will decrease interest in the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "2nd E post-reception display" is displayed in response to the third operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period), the player is given an operation opportunity to end the display state of the "2nd E post-reception display", thereby making it possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the decorative pattern SZ being difficult to see.

In this example, in the situation shown in Fig. 262 (k4) and (l4), the integrated Mosaic Image Display IG (button Mosaic Image BMG) is displayed in a position different from the position where it was displayed up until that point. That is, in this case, when the "2nd E post-reception display" and the integrated Mosaic Image Display IG (button Mosaic Image BMG) are both displayed, if an operation is accepted by a specified operation, the "2nd E post-reception display" in that displayed state will be hidden, as shown in Fig. 262 (m4).

In addition, during a second E acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 258, no acceptance permission sound is audibly output when the period occurs. As a result, when an acceptance period occurs in which the acceptance of multiple operations is permitted for a player, it becomes possible to infer the type of acceptance period (first E acceptance period, second E acceptance period, etc.) by checking whether or not an acceptance permission sound has been audibly output.

However, like the first E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258, the second E reception period can occur while specific BGM is being audibly output, so it is difficult to predict whether the first E reception period or the second E reception period will occur, and the presence of multiple sound effects while specific BGM is being audibly output makes it difficult to confirm whether or not a reception-permitted sound has been audibly output, thereby maintaining an ideal sense of tension.

In this regard, the specific BGM that is being audibly output during the second E reception period is configured to end its audible output and become inaudible when a specified condition is met during the second E reception period (when a specified timing arrives), as shown in FIG. 258(h). In contrast, the specific BGM that is being audibly output during the first E reception period is configured to continue its audible output without being ended during the first E reception period, as shown in FIG. 253(h). The type of reception period can be suggested through the status of the audible output of such specific BGM.

In the second E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258(h), the audible output is not terminated when the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG) displayed as an object for which multiple operation reception is permitted is operated (as shown in FIG. 258(h)). This allows the player to operate the operation means (here, "operation button 410") for which multiple operation reception is encouraged without hesitation, without worrying about the impact on the situation regarding the audible output of the specific BGM.

Also, in the second E reception period, unlike the first E reception period described above, even if the operation means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is kept operated (pressed), this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled). With this configuration, the player can infer the type of the reception period by checking whether the auto-repeated function described above is enabled when multiple operation receptions are permitted. It goes without saying that in this case, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the operation means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) during the second E reception period.

Figure 263 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when "Condition 3E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and a 3E reception period (3E reception presentation) occurs. Figures 264 and 265 are diagrams showing examples of presentation in a variation pattern in which a 3E reception period (3E reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "3E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3E fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 3E fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 3E fluctuation pattern) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 264(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3E fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 263(a), within the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "3E variable pattern", the above-mentioned 3E acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance of the display after 3E acceptance (sound output after 3E acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tc2 when the 3E time has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 3E") (the situation shown in FIG. 260(c)).

Here, the 3E reception period in this embodiment differs from the 1E reception period and the 2E reception period described above, and functions as a "one-time permission period" in which operation reception is permitted only once until the 3E reception period ends (until operation reception regarding the post-3E reception display (post-3E reception sound output) is no longer permitted).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a third E reception period occurs, it is possible to display a reception period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, in relation to the third E reception period, and the "fifth periodicity display SH5" is displayed as the reception period related periodicity display.

More specifically, the "fifth periodic display SH5" in this embodiment means a display that can appear repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period E time (a time longer than the above-mentioned "period C time") when a moving image such as "after the dog character is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 259(A), the dog character is sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 259(B) and (C)" is considered as one periodic change. In other words, the "fifth periodic display SH5" displayed in the third E reception period is set to have the same period E time required for its periodic change as the "third periodic display SH3" displayed in the second E reception period. In this performance example, the "fifth periodic display SH5" is displayed as the same image display as the "third periodic display SH3". However, the "fifth periodic display SH5" does not necessarily have to be the same as the "third periodic display SH3", and may be different in some respects, such as, for example, the sizes of the dogs are different from each other, or only one of the dogs has bent ears.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a reception period related periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) is displayed in order to give the player information that serves as a hint as to which type of reception period has occurred. However, the reception period related periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize which type of reception period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. In addition, the fifth periodicity display SH5 may be displayed as a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1 and the third periodicity display SH3.

In this regard, when the fifth periodicity display SH5 is displayed upon the occurrence of the third E reception period, the fifth periodicity display SH5 starts to be displayed in such a way that it appears behind another display that is being displayed. In other words, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the type of reception period that has occurred is suggested through the visibility of the reception period related periodicity display at the time when the display of the reception period related periodicity display starts.

In this example, as shown in Figures 264(b) and (c), a premonition display is used as the other display, indicating that the player will be given an opportunity to operate (the third E reception period will occur). Note that the other display does not necessarily have to be a premonition display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when timing tc1 arrives before the occurrence of the 3E reception period, the "3E premonition performance display ZED" is executed as the premonition performance display, as shown in Fig. 263(c) and Fig. 264(b). This "3E premonition performance display ZED" is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the reception period related periodicity display (5th periodicity display SH5) are displayed, as shown in Fig. 263(c) and Fig. 264(b)-(d). In this example, the "3E premonition display ZED" is executed as the same display as the above-mentioned "1E premonition display ZED (see FIG. 255(b)-(d))" and "2E premonition display ZED (see FIG. 260(b)-(d))", but it may be executed as a different display from the "1E premonition display ZED" and "2E premonition display ZED".

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 264(c), the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 begin to be displayed in a manner that makes them appear behind the "third E premonition effect display ZED" while the "third E premonition effect display ZED" is being displayed.

In this example, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 start to be displayed at the timing tc2 when the 3E reception period occurs, but this is not limited to this. The integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 may start to be displayed before or after the timing tc2 when the 3E reception period occurs, or the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 may be displayed at different times.

In addition, in the 3E reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes may occur. In the 3E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as the operation means that allows one operation reception, and when a moving image in which the part of the integrated model image display IG that mimics the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 (button model image BMG) is "displayed in the form shown in FIG. 259 (α), and then sequentially displayed in each form shown in FIG. 259 (β) to (δ)" is set as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form that requires a predetermined period B time. In other words, the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed in the 3E reception period is set to have the same period B time required for its periodic change as the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed in the 2E reception period. Moreover, in this example, the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed during the 3E reception period is displayed as the same image display as the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed during the 2E reception period. However, the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed during the 3E reception period does not necessarily have to be the same as the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed during the 2E reception period, and for example, they may be different sizes (similar shapes, etc.).

According to this configuration, even during the 3E reception period, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted in the integrated model image display IG moving up and down within its movable range. In addition, since the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 3E reception period is set to be longer than the "period A time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the above-mentioned 1E reception period, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly during the 3E reception period compared to the 1E reception period. In addition, since the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 3E reception period is the same as the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the above-mentioned 2E reception period, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range at the same speed during the 3E reception period as during the 2E reception period.

As shown in FIG. 264(d), the display range of the 3E premonition effect display ZED is reduced over time, and while the 3E premonition effect display ZED is displayed in this manner, the integrated model image display IG and the fifth periodicity display SH5 each progress their periodic changes in the manners described above. After this, as shown in FIG. 264(e)-(g1), the integrated model image display IG and the fifth periodicity display SH5 each continue to progress their periodic changes (period B time, period E time) described above.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 264, it is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) is performed at timing tc2A (the timing shown in FIG. 264(e)) during the 3E reception period. That is, as described above, the 3E reception period according to this embodiment functions as a "one-time allowable period" in which operation reception is permitted only once. Therefore, when the first operation reception is performed during the 3E reception period, the 3E reception period is terminated based on the operation reception, and there are cases where a relatively low expectation mode UH3-1 (FIG. 265(f2) to (i2)) appears as a "3E reception display" corresponding to the operation reception, and cases where a higher expectation mode UH3-2 (FIG. 265(f3) to (i3)) appears as a "3E reception display" than the mode. Although not shown in the figure, when the 3E reception display is displayed, a corresponding 3E reception sound output is also audibly output. The "3E post-reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner that indicates the degree of expectation.

In this regard, when the mode UH3-1, which has a relatively low expectation, appears as the "display after the reception of the 3rd E", and when the mode UH3-2, which has a relatively high expectation, appears as the "display after the reception of the 3rd E", the EF display EKH is displayed in the same manner, as shown in Figures 265 (f2) to (h2) and 265 (f3) to (h3).

That is, whether the mode UH3-1 with a relatively low expectation appears as the "display after reception of 3E" or the mode UH3-2 with a relatively high expectation appears, the first mode EKH1 (see Fig. 265 (f2) and (f3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. Next, the fifth mode EKH5 (see Fig. 265 (g2) to (h2) or Fig. 265 (g3) to (h3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, when the first operation is accepted during the 3E reception period (the operation acceptance that ends the reception period), regardless of the modes UH3-1 and UH3-2 as the "display after reception of 3E", the EF display EKH is executed in a series of modes (Fig. 265 (f2) to (h2) or Fig. 265 (f3) to (h3)) in which "the first mode EKH1 and the fifth mode EKH5 are displayed in sequence" (corresponding to the "3rd extinction EF" in the figure). This makes it difficult to recognize the expectation of a "3rd E post-reception display" even if the EF display EKH is confirmed.

In addition, during the display period of the "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 3E reception period in this performance example, during the period in which the first mode EKH1 is displayed (Fig. 265 (f2) and (f3)), the same mode appears as when an operation is received during the 1E reception period (see Fig. 256 (g2) etc.), making it difficult to recognize during which type of reception period the operation was received. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided, and it is also possible not to display the same mode as when an operation is received during the 1E reception period during the display period of the "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 3E reception period.

In addition, in the third E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 265 (f2) and (f3), even when an operation is received, the periodic change in the fifth periodicity display SH5 is hidden based on this. Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the fifth periodicity display SH5 itself. In this example, in the situation immediately after an operation is accepted (the situation in which the first aspect EKH1 or the fifth aspect EKH5 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIG. 265(f2)-(h2) or FIG. 265(f3)-(h3)), the fifth periodicity display SH5 is not hidden, and is displayed behind the EF display EKH in the manner shown in FIG. 264(e) (an aspect in which no progress in periodic change has occurred), and thereafter, the fifth periodicity display SH5 is hidden (based on the fact that the first operation is accepted (the operation that ends the acceptance period)), but it may be hidden from the situation immediately after an operation is accepted.

In addition, during the 3E reception period according to this embodiment, the periodic change of the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is also hidden based on the first operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) being performed, as also shown in Fig. 263(b). Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after an operation is accepted (when the first aspect EKH1 or the fifth aspect EKH5 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIG. 265(f2)-(h2) or FIG. 265(f2)-(h2)), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is not hidden, and is displayed behind the EF display EKH in the aspect shown in FIG. 264(e) (in which no progress in periodic change has occurred), and thereafter, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is hidden (based on the first operation being accepted (operation acceptance that ends the acceptance period)), but it may be hidden from the situation immediately after an operation is accepted.

Here, the "3E post-reception display" is displayed behind the fifth periodicity display SH5, the integrated model image display IG, and the EF display EKH, which makes the "3E post-reception display" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed. However, as the fifth periodicity display SH5, the integrated model image display IG, the EF display EKH, and the like are made non-display, the visibility of the "3E post-reception display" gradually improves. However, as described above, even if the state of the EF display EKH is confirmed while the EF display EKH is displayed, it is difficult to know whether the "3E post-reception display" is displayed in the low expectation state UH3-1 or the high expectation state UH3-2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 263, during the 3E reception period, the "first permissible sound" may be audibly output as the reception permissible sound when the 3E reception period occurs, as in the 1E reception period. In this regard, during the 3E reception period, as shown in FIG. 263, a situation may occur in which an operation is accepted while the "first permissible sound" is being audibly output as the reception permissible sound (timing tc2A), but the audible output of the "first permissible sound" continues without interruption based on the operation acceptance.

In the example shown in FIG. 263, the "first permissible sound" as the reception permissible sound is audibly output before timing tc2 when the 3E reception period occurs, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the audible output may start at timing tc2, or may start after timing tc2.

As shown in FIG. 263, the 3E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM is being audibly output, there is a possibility that the 3E reception period will occur, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game. As mentioned above, the "specific BGM" can also be audibly output when the 1E reception period (see FIG. 253) or the 2E reception period (see FIG. 258) occurs. However, unlike the 2E reception period, the 3E reception period does not end midway through the 3E reception period.

Figure 268 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when "Condition 4E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 4E reception period (4E reception presentation) occurs. Figures 268 and 269 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which the 4E reception period (4E reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving state), and the "4th E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 4th E fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 4th E fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 4th E fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 268 (a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "4th E fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 266(a), within the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "4E variable pattern", the 4E acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the display after 4E acceptance (sound output after 4E acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing td2, which is the time when 4E time has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 4E") (the situation shown in FIG. 268(c)).

The 4E reception period in this embodiment differs from the 1E reception period and the 2E reception period described above in that it functions as a "one-time acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted only once until the 4E reception period ends (until operation acceptance regarding the post-4E reception display (post-4E reception sound output) is no longer permitted).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a 4E reception period occurs, it is possible to display a reception period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, in relation to the reception period, and the "6th periodicity display SH6" and the "7th periodicity display SH7" are displayed as the reception period related periodicity display.

More specifically, the "sixth periodic display SH6" in this embodiment means a display that can appear repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period E time (a time longer than the above-mentioned "periodic C time") when a moving image such as "after the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259(A), it is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIG. 259(B) and (C)" is considered as one periodic change. In other words, the "sixth periodic display SH6" displayed in the fourth E reception period is set to the same period E time as the "third periodic display SH3" displayed in the second E reception period and the "fifth periodic display SH5" displayed in the third E reception period. In this performance example, the "sixth periodic display SH6" is displayed as the same image display as the "third periodic display SH3" and the "fifth periodic display SH5". However, the "sixth periodicity display SH6" does not necessarily have to be identical to the "third periodicity display SH3" or the "fifth periodicity display SH5" and may differ in only minor ways, such as being different in size or one of the dogs having bent ears.

In addition, the "seventh periodic display SH7" in this embodiment refers to a display in which, when a moving image such as "a cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 267(a), and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 267(b) to (f)" is regarded as a periodic change, the periodic change can appear repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period G time (a time different from period D time, period E time, or period F time).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to give the player information that serves as a hint as to which type of acceptance period has occurred, such acceptance period-related periodicity displays (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display SH7) are displayed. However, the acceptance period-related periodicity displays (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display SH7) do not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize which type of acceptance period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. In addition, the sixth periodicity display SH6 may be displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1, the third periodicity display SH3, the fifth periodicity display SH5, etc., and the seventh periodicity display SH7 may be displayed with a character different from the "cat character" used in the second periodicity display SH2, the fourth periodicity display SH4, etc.

For example, when the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed upon the occurrence of the fourth E reception period, the sixth periodicity display SH6 starts to be displayed in such a way that it appears behind another display while that other display is being displayed, but the seventh periodicity display SH7 is not displayed behind another display. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the type of reception period that has occurred is suggested through the visibility of the reception period related periodicity display at the time when the display of such reception period related periodicity display starts.

In this example, as shown in Figures 268(b) to (d), a premonition display is used as the other display, indicating that the player will be given an opportunity to operate (the 4th E reception period will occur). Note that the other display does not necessarily have to be a premonition display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when timing td1 arrives before the occurrence of the 4E reception period, the "4E premonition performance display ZED" is executed as the premonition performance display, as shown in Fig. 266(c) and Fig. 268(b). This "4E premonition performance display ZED" is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the reception period related periodicity display (6th periodicity display SH6, 7th periodicity display SH7) are displayed, as shown in Fig. 266(c) and Fig. 268(c) and (d). In this example, the "4th E premonition display ZED" is executed as the same display as the above-mentioned "1st E premonition display ZED (see FIG. 255 (b)-(d))," "2nd E premonition display ZED (see FIG. 260 (b)-(d))," and "3rd E premonition display ZED (see FIG. 268 (b)-(d))," but it may be executed as a different display from the "1st E premonition display ZED," "2nd E premonition display ZED," and "3rd E premonition display ZED."

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 268(c), the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 are initially displayed in a manner that makes them appear behind the "fourth E premonition effect display ZED" while the "fourth E premonition effect display ZED" is being displayed. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 268(d), the seventh periodicity display SH7 is not displayed in a manner that makes it appear behind the "fourth E premonition effect display ZED", but rather is initially displayed behind the "fourth E premonition effect display ZED".

In this example, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 begin to be displayed at timing td2 when the 4E reception period occurs, but this is not limited to the above. The integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 may begin to be displayed before or after timing td2 when the 4E reception period occurs, or the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 may be displayed at different timings.

In this pachinko machine 1, the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are displayed at different times. In this example, the sixth periodicity display SH6 starts to be displayed prior to the seventh periodicity display SH7, and the seventh periodicity display SH7 starts to be displayed while the sixth periodicity display SH6 is being displayed. Also, since the sixth periodicity display SH6 in this example starts to change periodically as soon as it starts to be displayed, the timing at which the periodic change starts is also set to be before the timing at which the periodic change of the seventh periodicity display SH7 starts.

However, the sixth periodicity display SH6 may be started to be displayed, for example, before timing td2 when the fourth E reception period occurs, and the periodic change may not be started at the time when the display is started. That is, in this case, the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed in a manner that maintains the state shown in FIG. 259(A). The periodic change in the sixth periodicity display SH6 may be started based on the arrival of timing td2 when the fourth E reception period occurs. In this regard, the seventh periodicity display SH7 may be started to be displayed, including its periodic change, based on the arrival of timing td2, for example, so that although the timing when the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 start to be displayed is different, the timing when the periodic change starts will be the same.

Conversely, the seventh periodicity display SH7 may be made to start displaying before the timing at which the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed or the timing at which the fourth E reception period occurs. In this case, it is also desirable that the timing at which the seventh periodicity display SH7 starts changing is before the timing at which the sixth periodicity display SH6 starts changing or the timing at which the fourth E reception period occurs.

Regarding the relationship of the seventh periodicity display SH7 to the sixth periodicity display SH6, any of the configurations described above may be adopted, but it is preferable that the relationship of the seventh periodicity display SH7 to the sixth periodicity display SH6 be the same as that of the seventh periodicity display SH7 to the sixth periodicity display SH6.

In the 3E reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes may occur. In the 4E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as the operation means for which one operation reception is permitted, and when a moving image in which the part of the integrated model image display IG modeling the "operation receiving portion" of the operation button 410 (button model image BMG) is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259(α), and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 259(β) to (δ)" is set as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a manner requiring a predetermined period B of time. That is, the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed in the 4E reception period is set to the same period B time as the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed in the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period, which is required for the periodic change. Moreover, in this performance example, the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed in the 4E reception period is displayed as the same image display as the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed in the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period. However, the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed in the 4E reception period does not necessarily have to be the same as the "integrated Momo image display IG (button Momo image BMG)" displayed in the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period, and for example, they may be different in size (similar shapes, etc.).

According to this configuration, even during the 4E reception period, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted in the integrated model image display IG moving up and down within its movable range. In addition, since the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 4E reception period is set to be longer than the "period A time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 1E reception period, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly during the 4E reception period compared to the 1E reception period. Note that the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 4E reception period is the same as the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period, so during the 4E reception period, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range at the same speed as during the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period.

And as shown in FIG. 268(c), the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) in this example of performance also starts to be displayed behind the "4th E premonition performance display ZED" while the "4th E premonition performance display ZED" is being displayed, similar to the 6th periodic display SH6, and starts to change periodically.

As shown in Figures 268(b) to (d), the display range of the 4E premonition effect display ZED is reduced over time, and while the 4E premonition effect display ZED is displayed in this manner, the integrated model image display IG and the 6th periodic display SH6, as well as the 7th periodic display SH7, which begins to be displayed with a delay, will each progress their periodic changes in the manners described above.

As a result of the display range of the 4E premonition effect display ZED shrinking in this way, when the 4E premonition effect display ZED is made non-display, the visibility of not only the 7th periodicity display SH7 but also the integrated model image display IG and the 6th periodicity display SH6 becomes good as shown in FIG. 268(e). After this, unless an operation is accepted by the player, the integrated model image display IG, the 6th periodicity display SH6, and the 7th periodicity display SH7 will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period G time) as shown in FIG. 268(f)-(h1).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that ends the reception period) is made at timing td2A (the timing shown in FIG. 268(f)) during the 4E reception period. That is, as described above, the 4E reception period in this embodiment functions as a "one-time allowable period" in which operation reception is permitted only once. Therefore, when the first operation reception is made during the 4E reception period, the 4E reception period is ended based on the fact that the operation reception has been made, and there are cases in which a relatively low expectation mode UH4-1 (FIG. 269(g2)-(j2)) appears as a "4E reception post-display" corresponding to the operation reception, and cases in which a higher expectation mode UH4-2 (FIG. 269(g3)-(j3)) appears as a "4E reception post-display" than the above mode. In addition, although not shown in the figure, when the 4E reception post-display is displayed, a corresponding 4E reception post-sound output is also audibly output. The "4E post-reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner that indicates the degree of expectation.

In this regard, when the mode UH4-1 with a relatively low expectation appears as the "display after the reception of the 4th E", the EF display EKH is displayed in a different mode (low expectation mode) from when the mode UH4-2 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "display after the reception of the 4th E", as shown in Fig. 269 (g2) to (i2).

In other words, when the relatively low expectancy mode UH4-1 appears as the "display after reception of 4E", first the first mode EKH1 (see Fig. 269 (g2)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. Next, the sixth mode EKH6 (see Figs. 269 (h2) and (i2)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the "low expectancy mode of EF display EKH (corresponding to "4th extinction EF" in Fig. 266)" based on the first operation reception during the 4E reception period (operation reception that ends the reception period) is executed as a series of modes (Figs. 269 (g2) to (i2)) in which "the first mode EKH1 and the sixth mode EKH6 are displayed in sequence", thereby making it possible to suggest that the relatively low expectancy mode UH4-1 will appear as the "display after reception of 4E". In this example, the sixth aspect EKH6 (see FIG. 269 (h2), (i2)) is executed in the same aspect as the third aspect EKH3 described above (see FIG. 257 (q3), (r3)), but it may be executed in a different aspect.

In contrast, when the relatively high expectation mode UH4-2 appears as the "display after the reception of the 4th E", the EF display EKH is displayed in a different mode (high expectation mode) from when the relatively low expectation mode UH4-1 appears as the "display after the reception of the 4th E", as shown in Figure 269 (g3) to (j3).

In other words, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UH4-2 appears as the "display after reception of 4E", first the first mode EKH1 (see Fig. 269 (g3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. Next, the seventh mode EKH7 (see Figs. 269 (h3) and (i3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the "high expectation mode of EF display EKH (corresponding to "5th extinction EF" in Fig. 266)" based on the first operation reception during the 4E reception period (operation reception that ends the reception period) is executed as a series of modes (Figs. 269 (g3) to (i3)) in which "the first mode EKH1 and the seventh mode EKH7 are displayed in sequence", thereby making it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UH4-2 will appear as the "display after reception of 4E". In this example, the seventh aspect EKH7 (see Fig. 269 (h3), (i3)) is executed in the same aspect as the above-mentioned fifth aspect EKH5 (see Fig. 265 (g2)-(h2) and Fig. 265 (g3)-(h3)), but it may be executed in a different aspect.

In addition, during the period in which the first mode EKH1 is displayed (Fig. 269 (g2), (g3)) among the display periods of the "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 4E reception period of this performance example, the same mode appears as when an operation is received in the 1E reception period (see Fig. 256 (g2) etc.), making it difficult to recognize in which type of reception period the operation was received. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided, and it is also possible not to display the same mode as when an operation is received in the 1E reception period during the display period of the "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 4E reception period.

In addition, during the 4E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 269 (g2) and (g3), the periodic changes in the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are hidden based on the reception of an operation. Here, the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 themselves are hidden, thereby hiding the periodic changes. In this example, in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation in which the first aspect EKH1 or the sixth aspect EKH6 (or the seventh aspect EKH7) of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIG. 269(g2)-(h2) or FIG. 269(g3)-(h3)), the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are not hidden, and are displayed behind the EF display EKH in the manner shown in FIG. 268(f) (an aspect in which no progress in periodic change has occurred), and thereafter, the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are hidden (based on the fact that the first operation is accepted (the operation that ends the acceptance period) has been accepted), but they may be hidden from the situation immediately after the operation is accepted.

In addition, during the 4E reception period according to this embodiment, the periodic change of the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is also hidden based on the reception of an operation, as shown in Fig. 266(b). Here, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after an operation is accepted (when the first aspect EKH1 or the sixth aspect EKH6 (or the seventh aspect EKH7) of the EF display EKH is displayed) (FIG. 269(g2)-(h2) or FIG. 269(g3)-(h3)), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is not hidden, and is displayed behind the EF display EKH in the aspect shown in FIG. 268(f) (in which no progress in periodic change has occurred). After that, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is hidden (based on the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that ends the acceptance period)), but it may be hidden from the situation immediately after an operation is accepted.

Here, the "4E post-reception display" is displayed behind the sixth periodicity display SH6, the seventh periodicity display SH7, the integrated model image display IG, and the EF display EKH, which makes the "4E post-reception display" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed. However, as the sixth periodicity display SH6, the seventh periodicity display SH7, the integrated model image display IG, the EF display EKH, and the like are hidden, the visibility of the "4E post-reception display" gradually improves. Also, as described above, by checking the mode of the EF display EKH even while it is displayed, it is easy to recognize whether the "4E post-reception display" is displayed in the mode UH4-1 with low expectations or the mode UH4-2 with high expectations.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 266, during the 4E reception period, either the "first permissible sound" or the "second permissible sound" can be (selectively) audibly output as the reception permissible sound when it occurs. For example, when the "second permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound when the 4E reception period occurs, it is desirable to set it so that it suggests a higher expectation (proportion) of a jackpot than when the "first permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. In this regard, during the 4E reception period, as shown in FIG. 266, a situation can occur in which an operation is accepted while either the "first permissible sound" or the "second permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound (timing td2A), but the audible output of the "first permissible sound" or the "second permissible sound" is interrupted based on the operation acceptance.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, the "first permissible sound" as the reception permissible sound is audibly output before timing td2 when the 4E reception period occurs, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the audible output may start at timing td2, or may start after timing td2.

As shown in FIG. 266, the 4E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. In other words, in this case, if the specific BGM becomes inaudible, the 4E reception period may occur, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game. As mentioned above, the "specific BGM" can also be audibly output when the 1E reception period (see FIG. 253), the 2E reception period (see FIG. 258), or the 3E reception period (see FIG. 263) occurs.

Here, among such 1E reception period (see Figs. 253 to 257), 2E reception period (see Figs. 258 to 262), 3E reception period (see Figs. 263 to 265), and 4E reception period (see Figs. 266 to 269), the 1E reception period (see Figs. 253 to 257) may be generated as the 5E reception period (see Fig. 270) or 6E reception period (see Fig. 270) described below instead. Note that, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to have these for each of the reception periods described above while referring to Figs. 269 and up.

Figure 270 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 1E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 5E reception period (5E reception presentation) occurs. Note that, as there are many overlapping parts with the case where the above-mentioned 1E reception period (1E reception presentation) occurs (see Figures 255 to 257), only the differences (changes) will be explained and illustrations will be omitted for the presentation example in the variation pattern in which the 5E reception period (5E reception presentation) occurs.

That is, as described above, the first E reception period can occur as a reception period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted, and an integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) that mimics an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and reception period-related periodicity displays (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2), which are image displays in which periodic changes may appear, are displayed. Then, during the first E reception period, when an operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is operated (without ending the reception period) and an operation is received, based on the operation reception, the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1 are each hidden, and the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH2 are not hidden and continue, as described above.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned 5E reception period, which is a modified example of the 1E reception period, as shown in Figs. 270(b) and (e), even if the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is operated (not to end the reception period) and an operation is received, the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are not hidden based on the operation reception, but are continued. Note that, at timing ta2C, when an operation is received to end the reception period, the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden based on this, as in the case of the 1E reception period.

In other words, in this case, based on the arrival of timing ta2 when the 1E time has elapsed since the start of the varying presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (based on the satisfaction of "condition 1E"), the above-mentioned 5E reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the 5E post-reception display (in this example, the same as the 1E post-reception display)" is permitted occurs (the situation shown in Figure 255 (c)), and even if the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2A (the timing shown in Figure 255 (f)) within the 5E reception period (valid period), none of the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are made hidden, and these periodic changes will continue. Therefore, in this modified example, when the situation shown in FIG. 256 (g2)-(m2)... occurs, it is the same as when the situation shown in FIG. 255 (g1), (h1)... occurs, which means that the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 will continue to progress (continue) in their periodic changes, just like the second periodic display SH2.

Similarly, even if a second operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period) at timing ta2B (the timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) during the 5E acceptance period (valid period), the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 will not be hidden, and will continue to change periodically. Therefore, when the situation shown in FIG. 257 (l3) to (o3) appears in this modified example, it is the same as when the situation shown in FIG. 256 (l2), (m2), etc. appears, that is, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 will continue to change periodically, just like the second periodic display SH2.

Note that, when a first operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) at timing ta2A (the timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the 5E acceptance period (valid period), or when a second operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) at timing ta2B (the timing shown in FIG. 256(k2)), the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is displayed based on the operation acceptance, and a display change (for example, a depiction of the first meter rising) occurs in the background image, etc. as a "display after 5E acceptance (in this example, the same as the display after 1E acceptance)", as in the case of the 1E acceptance period (valid period) described above. Furthermore, when a third operation is accepted (operation acceptance that ends the acceptance period) at timing ta2C (the timing shown in FIG. 257 (o3)) within the 5E acceptance period (valid period), the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden based on that operation acceptance, and the "display after 5E acceptance (in this example, the same as the display after 1E acceptance)" is executed (FIGS. 257 (p3)-(s3), FIG. 257 (p4)-(s4)), which is similar to the case of the 1E acceptance period (valid period) described above.

Figure 271 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 1E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 6E reception period (6E reception presentation) occurs. Note that, as there are many overlapping parts with the case where the above-mentioned 1E reception period (1E reception presentation) occurs (see Figures 255 to 257), only the differences (changes) will be explained and illustrations will be omitted for the presentation example in the variation pattern in which the 6E reception period (6E reception presentation) occurs.

That is, as described above, the first E reception period can occur as a reception period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted, and an integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) that mimics an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and reception period-related periodicity displays (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2), which are image displays in which periodic changes may appear, are displayed. Then, during the first E reception period, when an operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is operated (without ending the reception period) and an operation is received, based on the operation reception, the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1 are each hidden, and the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH2 are not hidden and continue, as described above.

In this regard, in the 6E reception period, which is a modified example of the 1E reception period, as shown in Fig. 271(b) and (e), when the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is operated (without terminating the reception period) and an operation reception is performed, the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are all made non-displayable based on the operation reception. As a method for making these periodic changes non-displayable, for example, a method for making the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 non-displayable in the above-mentioned 1E reception period non-displayable (see Fig. 256(g2), (h2), Fig. 257(l3), (m3), etc.) can be used. That is, in this case, the second periodic display SH2 according to this modified example continues to display itself (display of the character) in the same way as the integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1, but the periodic changes that had been there until then are no longer displayed by not continuing them.

In other words, in this case, based on the arrival of timing ta2 when 1E time has elapsed since the start of the varying presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (based on the satisfaction of "condition 1E"), the above-mentioned 6E reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the 6E post-reception display (in this example, the same as the 1E post-reception display)" is permitted occurs (the situation shown in Figure 255 (c)), and when the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made at timing ta2A (the timing shown in Figure 255 (f)) within the 6E reception period (valid period), based on that operation acceptance, the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are all made invisible. Therefore, in this modified example, when the situation shown in FIG. 256(g2) and (h2) occurs, the periodic changes of not only the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1, but also the second periodic display SH2 are hidden. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 256(g2) and (h2), the second periodic display SH2 is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 255(f), like the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1, and when the situation shown in FIG. 256(i2) occurs, the periodic change starts again. In this example, it starts again from the manner shown in FIG. 254(a).

Similarly, when a second operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period) at timing ta2B (the timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 6E acceptance period (valid period), the periodic changes in the integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 will all be hidden based on that operation acceptance. Therefore, in this modified example, when the situation shown in FIG. 257 (l3) and (m3) occurs, the periodic changes will be hidden not only in the integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1, but also in the second periodic display SH2. More specifically, in the situation shown in Fig. 257(l3) and (m3), the second periodic display SH2 is displayed in the same manner as in Fig. 256(k2), like the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1, and when the situation shown in Fig. 257(n3) is reached, the periodic change starts again. In this example, it starts again from the manner shown in Fig. 254(a).

Note that, when a first operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) at timing ta2A (the timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the 6E acceptance period (valid period), or when a second operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) at timing ta2B (the timing shown in FIG. 256(k2)), the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is displayed based on the operation acceptance, and a display change (for example, a depiction of the first meter rising) occurs in the background image, etc. as a "display after 6E acceptance (in this example, the same as the display after 1E acceptance)", as in the case of the 1E acceptance period (valid period) described above. Furthermore, when a third operation is accepted (operation acceptance that ends the acceptance period) at timing ta2C (the timing shown in FIG. 257 (o3)) within the 6E acceptance period (valid period), the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden based on the operation acceptance, and the "display after 6E acceptance (in this example, the same as the display after 1E acceptance)" is executed (FIGS. 257 (p3)-(s3), FIG. 257 (p4)-(s4)), which is similar to the case of the 1E acceptance period (valid period) described above.

The above-mentioned 5th E reception period (see Figure 270) or 6th E reception period (see Figure 270) may be generated as a reception period separate from the 1st E reception period (see Figures 253 to 257), the 2nd E reception period (see Figures 258 to 262), the 3rd E reception period (see Figures 263 to 265), and the 4th E reception period (see Figures 266 to 269). In this case, the 5th E reception period (see Figure 270) will be generated based on the fact that "Condition 5E" is satisfied as the above-mentioned occurrence condition, and the 6th E reception period (see Figure 270) will be generated based on the fact that "Condition 6E" is satisfied as the above-mentioned occurrence condition. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, with regard to the 1st E reception period (see FIG. 253 to FIG. 257), the 5th E reception period (see FIG. 270), and the 6th E reception period (see FIG. 270), only one of these reception periods may be allowed to occur, or only two of these reception periods may be allowed to occur in response to mutually different occurrence conditions, or all of these reception periods may be allowed to occur in response to mutually different occurrence conditions.

In each reception period (or a part of the reception period) according to the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, a premonition performance display ZED that suggests that the player will soon be given an opportunity to operate, an action target display (integrated model image display IG) that suggests the reception target (such as the operation receiving part), a remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and a reception period-related periodicity display (such as the first periodicity display SH1 to the seventh periodicity display SH7) that is an image display in which periodic changes may appear can be displayed. However, as described above, each of these configurations does not necessarily have to be provided, and only appropriate configurations among these configurations may be provided. Also, as described above, the action target display (model image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated model image display IG" integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a remaining time display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also the case for other reception periods. Furthermore, if there is no configuration for displaying the integrated model image display IG, it is desirable to suggest the target to be operated by the player depending on the mode of the acceptance period related periodicity display (display mode, combination, whether or not it is hidden, etc.).

In addition, the method of hiding the periodic change based on the fact that an operation has been accepted (without ending the acceptance period) within the acceptance period (or a part of the acceptance period) of the above-mentioned performance example or its modified example is not limited to the above-mentioned configurations. For example, the periodic change of the periodic display (acceptance period-related periodic display) and the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) on the layer continues, but a method may be adopted in which a different image (e.g., EF display EKH, etc.) is displayed in front of it to make the periodic display and the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) invisible, or the periodic display and the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) are changed to a periodic change different from the periodic change that has continued until then and displayed (e.g., by changing the periodic time), thereby hiding the periodic change that has continued until then, or the display of the periodic display (acceptance period-related periodic display) and the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) themselves may be terminated.

In addition, after hiding the periodic change based on the acceptance of an operation (that does not end the acceptance period) within the acceptance period (or a part of the acceptance period) in the above-mentioned performance example or its modified example, the method of resuming the periodic change does not necessarily have to restart the periodic change from the beginning, but may be to resume the periodic change from the middle.

In addition, it is not necessary to have a configuration for displaying the EF display EKH based on an operation being accepted (that does not end the acceptance period) within the acceptance period (or a part of the acceptance period) related to the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example. Note that, although this is not a required configuration, even if the EF display EKH is not executed (displayed) when an operation is accepted, it is possible to make the periodic change in the periodic display (periodic display related to acceptance period) and the integrated mock-up image display IG (button mock-up image BMG) invisible to the eye.

During each reception period (or a part of the reception period (e.g., the 2nd E reception period, etc.)) for the above-mentioned performance examples and their modified examples, the premonition performance display ZED may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the second periodicity display SH2, the third periodicity display SH3, the fourth periodicity display SH4, the seventh periodicity display SH7, etc. It is sufficient that it is not displayed in front of the second periodicity display SH2, the third periodicity display SH3, the fourth periodicity display SH4, the seventh periodicity display SH7, etc. During the 2nd E reception period, the premonition performance display ZED does not have any effect in relation to the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4, so the configuration related to the premonition performance display ZED is not essential and it may be configured not to be executed (displayed) itself.

Among the reception periods in the above-mentioned performance examples and their modified examples, in the "multiple acceptance period (or a part of the multiple acceptance period (e.g., the second E acceptance period)") in which operation acceptance is accepted multiple times, the acceptance period is not terminated based on the acceptance of an operation until a specific number of times (the third time) of operation is accepted, but is terminated based on the specific number of times (the third time). However, it is also possible to determine whether or not to terminate the acceptance period based on the acceptance of an operation, and to terminate the acceptance period based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination.

In addition, in the "multiple times allowed period" (or a part of the multiple times allowed period (e.g., the second E reception period)) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times among the reception periods in the above-mentioned performance examples and their modified examples, regardless of whether the "low expectation mode" or the "high expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, the reception period is terminated and the post-reception display is displayed based on the fact that a predetermined condition (e.g., the number of operations, a judgment, etc.) is satisfied by the operation reception. However, the possibility that the predetermined condition (e.g., the number of operations, a judgment, etc.) may be satisfied when the operation is accepted may be limited to the case where the "high expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display. In other words, in this case, when the "low expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, no matter how many operations are accepted during the reception period, the condition for terminating the reception period based on this is not satisfied, and the "low expectation mode" may be executed as the post-reception display based on the arrival of the timing for the acceptance period to end. Alternatively, the reception period may be terminated based on operation reception only when a "specific mode" is executed as the post-reception display, and the reception period may not be terminated based on operation reception when a "specific mode" is not executed as the post-reception display. In other words, in this case, when the time for the reception period to end arrives, no post-reception display will be executed.

Furthermore, among the reception periods in the above-mentioned performance examples and their variations, the "multiple acceptance period (or a part of the multiple acceptance period (e.g., the second E acceptance period)") in which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times does not necessarily have to have a configuration for terminating the reception period based on the operation acceptance. In other words, in this case, operations may be accepted multiple times until the acceptance period ends, but the acceptance period will not end based on this, and will end only based on the arrival of a predetermined timing.

Furthermore, in each reception period in the above-mentioned performance examples and their variations, in a "multiple reception permissible period (or a part of the multiple reception period (e.g., the second E reception period))" in which operation reception is permitted multiple times, a different display change may appear as the post-reception display each time an operation is received.

In addition, each acceptance period in the above-mentioned performance examples and their variations may occur sequentially in any combination within one variation pattern.

In addition, the display after acceptance does not necessarily have to indicate the likelihood of winning the jackpot, and may not indicate the likelihood.

In addition, in each reception period according to the above-mentioned performance examples and their modified examples, when the reception period is ended based on the fact that an operation has been received, a common form (first form EKH1) is displayed as the EF display (performance effect display) EKH first (for example, FIG. 257 (p3), (p4), FIG. 265 (f2), (f3), FIG. 269 (g2), (g3), etc.), and then another form is displayed following this (for example, FIG. 257 (q3)-(r3), (q4)-(r4), FIG. 265 (g2)-(h2), (g3)-(h3), FIG. 269 (h2)-(i2), (h3-(i3), etc.), but it is sufficient to perform the EF display (performance effect display) EKH, and the common form (first form EKH1) may be omitted.

In addition, during the reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example, the display mode of the "special image display" that periodically changes may be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. For example, when an operation is received while the integrated model image display IG (model image display) is displayed, the display mode of the integrated model image display IG may change. In this regard, when the display mode of the integrated model image display IG is changed, the time required for the periodic change may be maintained or the time required for the periodic change may also be changed, thereby providing a performance feature that can appropriately maintain interest in the game. Note that in this example, the integrated model image display IG is changed as the "special image display", but the "special image display" is not limited to the integrated model image display IG, and may be any image display that periodically changes (for example, a periodic display related to the reception period).

Figure 272 is a diagram showing a modified example in which the display mode of the integrated model image display IG is changed (or not changed) based on the acceptance of an operation during the 1E reception period (see Figures 253 to 257). Note that Figure 272 is intended to explain the changes that occur in the display mode of the model image display and the time required for this cyclical change based on the acceptance of an operation, and for convenience, other configurations that have already been explained (such as decorative patterns and post-acceptance displays) are omitted from the illustration. Also, only configurations that differ from the 1E reception period in the above-mentioned performance example will be explained, and the same configurations will not be mentioned.

During the 1E reception period of the above-mentioned performance example, the integrated model image display IG is displayed to change periodically with a "cycle A time" (see Figures 253 and 254). In this regard, during the 1E reception period of this modified example, the integrated model image display IG is displayed to change periodically with a "cycle A1 time" in some cases, and to change periodically with a "cycle A2 time" that is a different time from the "cycle A1 time" in other cases.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 272(a), when the integrated model image display IG is in the display mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image display IGa) during the 1E reception period and is in a state where it is displayed to change periodically with a "cycle A time", if an operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the 1E reception period) for the operation means corresponding to the integrated model image display IG, then a post-acceptance display (not shown) or the like will be displayed based on the operation acceptance.

However, if an operation is accepted during the 1E acceptance period of this modified example (an operation that does not end the 1E acceptance period), in addition to these display changes, the display mode of the integrated model image display IG may also change. That is, during the 1E acceptance period of this modified example, if it is not determined that the predetermined conditions are satisfied when an operation is accepted, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the mode shown in Figs. 272(b) and (c) based on the result of the determination, and if it is determined that the predetermined conditions are satisfied when an operation is accepted, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the mode shown in Figs. 272(d) and (e) based on the result of the determination.

Here, when the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 272(b) and (c) based on the operation reception during the first E reception period according to this modified example, first, as shown in Fig. 272(b), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, whereby the periodic display that had appeared up until that point in the integrated model image display IG is made invisible (not visible). Then, after this, as shown in Fig. 272(c), the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG is made visible again (visible again), which makes it possible to generate interest in whether the time required for the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 272(c), it is assumed that there will be no change in the "display mode" or "time required for periodic display" of the integrated model image display IG, so the integrated model image display IG will remain displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 272(a) (display mode (integrated model image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a)) with a "period A1 hour".

In contrast, even when the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 272(d) and (e) based on the reception of an operation during the first E reception period according to this modified example, a predetermined EF display EKH is first executed as shown in Fig. 272(d) to make the periodic display that had appeared up until that point invisible (not visible). Then, as shown in Fig. 272(e), the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG is made visible again (visible again), which makes it possible to generate interest in whether the time required for the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 272(e), it is assumed that there is a change in both the "display mode" and the "time required for periodic display" of the integrated Momo image display IG, that is, the integrated Momo image display IG is displayed in the "display mode (integrated Momo image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144(d)" and with a "period A2 hours". As explained with reference to FIGS. 144(a)-(d), the integrated Momo image display IGd (FIG. 272(e)) suggests a higher expectation (proportion) of a jackpot than the integrated Momo image display IGc (FIG. 272(c)).

According to this configuration, in the 1E acceptance period (period during which multiple operation acceptances are permitted), when a predetermined condition is satisfied by accepting an operation, this triggers a change in the state (display state, cycle time required for one periodic change) of the integrated model image display IG (model image display), and thereafter, operations can be accepted while maintaining this changed state. In other words, in this case, when the state (display state, cycle time required for one periodic change) of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) changes, it can be expected that there is a (high) expectation of a jackpot being won, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Figures 273 and 274 are diagrams showing modified examples in which the display mode of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) is changed (or not changed) based on the acceptance of an operation during the 2E reception period. Note that Figures 273 and 274 are intended to explain what changes occur in the mode of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) (display mode and the periodic time required for the periodic change) based on the acceptance of an operation, and for convenience, other configurations that have already been explained (decorative patterns, post-acceptance display, etc.) are omitted from the illustration. Also, only configurations that are different from the 2E reception period in the above-mentioned performance example will be explained, and the same configurations will not be mentioned in particular.

In the second E reception period of the above-mentioned performance example, the integrated model image display IG is displayed to change periodically in "cycle B time" (see Figs. 258 and 259). In this regard, in the second E reception period of this modified example, the integrated model image display IG is displayed to change periodically in "cycle B1 time", in "cycle B2 time" which is a time different from the "cycle B1 time", and in "cycle B3 time" which is a time different from both the "cycle B1 time" and the "cycle B2 time". In this example, "cycle A1 time", "cycle A2 time", "cycle B1 time", "cycle B2 time", and "cycle B3 time" are all set as different times.

More specifically, in the second E reception period according to this modified example, the integrated model image display IG may be displayed in the "display mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image display IGa)" with a "period of B1 time", or in the "display mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image display IGb)" with a "period of B2 time".

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 273(a), currently, during the 2E reception period, the integrated model image display IG is in the "display mode (integrated model image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a)" and is displayed to change periodically with a "cycle of B1 hours." In this state, if an operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the 2E reception period) for the operation means corresponding to the integrated model image display IG, a post-acceptance display (not shown) or the like will be displayed based on the operation acceptance.

However, when an operation is accepted during the second E acceptance period of this modified example (when the operation does not end the second E acceptance period), in addition to these display changes, the display mode of the integrated model image display IG may change. That is, during the second E acceptance period of this modified example, if it is not determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation is accepted, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the mode shown in Figs. 273(b) and (c) based on the result of the judgment, and if it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation is accepted, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in either the mode shown in Figs. 273(d) and (e) or the mode shown in Figs. 273(f) and (g) based on the result of the judgment.

In other words, during the second E reception period according to this modified example, there are cases where a first condition is satisfied as the "condition predetermined when an operation is received" and cases where a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the first condition is satisfied as the "condition predetermined when an operation is received", the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in Figs. 273(d) and (e) based on the result of the determination. If it is determined that the second condition is satisfied as the "condition predetermined when an operation is received", the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in Figs. 273(f) and (g) based on the result of the determination.

Here, when the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 273(b) and (c) based on the operation reception during the second E reception period according to this modified example, first, as shown in Fig. 273(b), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, thereby making the periodic display that had appeared up until that point in the integrated model image display IG non-displayed (so that it cannot be seen). Then, after this, as shown in Fig. 273(c), the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG is made to be displayed again (visible again), thereby making it possible to generate interest in whether or not the time required for the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273(c), it is assumed that there will be no change in the "display mode" or "time required for periodic display" of the integrated model image display IG, so the integrated model image display IG will remain displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 273(a) (display mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image display IGa)) with a "period B1 hour".

In contrast, even when the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 273(d) and (e) based on the reception of an operation during the second E reception period according to this modified example, a predetermined EF display EKH is executed as shown in Fig. 273(d) to make the periodic display that had appeared up until that point invisible (not visible). Then, as shown in Fig. 273(e), the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG is made visible again (visible again), which makes it possible to generate interest in whether the time required for the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273(e), it is assumed that there is a change only in the "display mode" of the integrated model image display IG and the "time required for periodic display." In other words, the integrated model image display IG is in the "display mode (integrated model image display IGc) shown in FIG. 144(c)" and is displayed with a "period B1 time."

Also, when the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 273(f) and (g) based on the reception of an operation during the second E reception period according to this modified example, first, as shown in Fig. 273(f), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, and the periodic display that had appeared up until that point in the integrated model image display IG is made invisible (not visible). Then, as shown in Fig. 273(g), the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG is made visible again (visible again), which makes it possible to generate interest in whether the time required for the periodic display in the integrated model image display IG has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273(g), it is assumed that there will be changes in both the "display mode" and the "time required for periodic display" of the integrated model image display IG; that is, the integrated model image display IG will be displayed in the "display mode shown in FIG. 144(d) (integrated model image display IGd)" with a "period B3 hours."

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 274(a), currently, during the 2E reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display) is in the "display mode (integrated model image display IGb) shown in FIG. 144(b)" and is in a state in which it is displayed to change periodically with a "cycle B2 hours." In this state, even when an operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the 2E reception period) for the operation means corresponding to the integrated model image display IG, a post-acceptance display (not shown) or the like will be displayed based on the operation acceptance.

However, in the second E reception period according to this modified example, when the integrated model image display IG is in the "display mode (integrated model image display IGb) shown in FIG. 144(b)" and is displayed to change periodically in "cycle B2 hours", even if an operation is received (an operation reception that does not end the second E reception period), this does not trigger the "conditions predefined when an operation is received (here, the first or second condition)" to be satisfied. Furthermore, when the integrated model image display IG is in the "display mode (integrated model image display IGb) shown in FIG. 144(b)" and is displayed to change periodically in "cycle B2 hours", even if an operation is received (an operation reception that does not end the second E reception period), this does not trigger the periodic display that had appeared up until then in the integrated model image display IG to be hidden (so that it cannot be seen).

Therefore, during the 2E reception period in this modified example, when the integrated model image display IG is in the "display mode (integrated model image display IGb) shown in FIG. 144(b)" and is displayed to change periodically with a "cycle B2 time" (FIG. 274(a)), the integrated model image display IG will continue to be displayed in the mode (display mode and cycle B2 time) shown in FIG. 274(a) regardless of whether an operation is received.

According to this configuration, during the 2E reception period (period during which reception of multiple operations is permitted), when the integrated Momo image display IG is in the "display mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated Momo image display IGb)" and is displayed to change periodically with a "cycle B2 time" (FIG. 274(a)), it is suggested that there is no possibility that the mode of the integrated Momo image display IG will change, which makes it possible to encourage concentration on other performance features such as the post-reception display. In contrast, when the integrated Momo image display IG is in the "display mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated Momo image display IGa)" and is displayed to change periodically with a "cycle B1 time", it is suggested that there is a possibility that the mode of the integrated Momo image display IG will change. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by accepting an operation, this triggers a change in the state of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) (such as the display state and the periodic time required for one periodic change), and thereafter, operations can be accepted while the state remains the same. In other words, in this case, when the state of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) (display state, periodic time required for one periodic change) changes, it can be expected that the probability of a jackpot being won (high) will be suggested, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In particular, during the second E reception period (a period during which reception of multiple operations is permitted), out of the "display mode" and "periodic time required for one periodic change" of the integrated model image display IG, there are cases in which only the "display mode" changes, and cases in which both the "display mode" and the "periodic time required for one periodic change" change, and as a result different expectations are suggested between these cases, it is possible to encourage attention to whether or not the "periodic time" has changed.

In the modified example shown in Figs. 272 to 274, a predetermined EF display EKH is executed to hide the periodic changes in the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG), but the predetermined EF display EKH does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the display of the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) itself may be hidden to hide its periodic changes, or the display of the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) itself may be displayed but displayed statically, or may be displayed with a periodic change different from both before and after the change to hide the periodic changes (before and after the change) in the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG).

In particular, if the special image display (here, the integrated mock image display IG) is displayed in advance (visibly) in the display mode after the change when the periodic change (before and after the change) of the special image display (here, the integrated mock image display IG) has not yet been displayed, the tension can be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the modified examples shown in Fig. 272 and Fig. 273, if the mode of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) does not change, the periodic change may not be hidden, as in the modified example shown in Fig. 274 (Fig. 272(b) and Fig. 273(b), etc. may be omitted).

In addition, in Fig. 272(a) and Fig. 273(a), the special image displays (here, integrated model image displays IG) are displayed in the same display mode (integrated model image displays IGa) but in different cycle times (cycle A1 time, cycle B1 time), but it is also possible to display them in different display modes in addition to the cycle times. Conversely, in Fig. 272(a) and Fig. 273(a), the special image displays (here, integrated model image displays IG) are displayed in different display modes but in the same cycle times. In short, it is sufficient if they are displayed in different modes.

In addition, in Fig. 272(e) and Fig. 273(g), the periodic times of the special image displays (here, integrated model image displays IG) are different from each other, but they may be set to the same periodic times (period A 2 hours, period B 3 hours). In other words, in this case, the special image displays (here, integrated model image displays IG) shown in Fig. 272(e) and Fig. 273(g) will be displayed in the same display mode and with the same periodic times.

Alternatively, although the display mode of the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG) is the same in Fig. 272(e) and Fig. 273(g), they may be displayed in different display modes. That is, in this case, the special image displays (here, integrated model image display IG) shown in Fig. 272(e) and Fig. 273(g) are displayed in different display modes and at different cycle times. In this case, the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG) shown in Fig. 272(e) may be displayed in the same display mode as Fig. 273(e). When using the same display mode, it is desirable to set the cycle A2 time and the cycle B1 time to the same time.

In FIG. 274(a), both the display mode and the periodic time of the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) are set as unique modes different from any other modes, but if the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) is unique, it is possible to obtain a similar effect even if the periodic time is the same as any of the other modes. Also, the mode shown in FIG. 274(a) may suggest a higher expectation than any of the other modes.

Note that "display modes are different" here does not necessarily mean that the form of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is different; for example, the form may be the same but the color may be different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, the effect is realized as a performance in the first E reception period (period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted) and the second E reception period (period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted), but it does not have to be a performance that appears in multiple reception periods. For example, the performance (configuration) realized in Figures 272 to 274 may be made to appear only in either the first E reception period (period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted) or the second E reception period (period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted).

Furthermore, the mode shown in Figure 272 (when the special image display is displayed in the first mode and the display mode changes, both the display mode and the periodic time always change), the mode shown in Figure 273 (when the special image display is displayed in the second mode and the display mode changes, there are both cases where the periodic time does not change and cases where the periodic time changes), and the mode shown in Figure 274 (when the special image display is displayed in the third mode, neither the display mode nor the periodic time changes) do not necessarily have to be realized in response to reception of an operation. For example, during the acceptance period or the execution period of the premonition performance, a predetermined condition (such as a first condition or a second condition) may be satisfied at a specified timing, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the display mode or cycle time of the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) may not be changed (e.g., FIG. 272(c), FIG. 273(c), FIG. 274(b)), and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode or cycle time of the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) may be changed accordingly (e.g., FIG. 272(e), FIG. 273(e), (g)).

Furthermore, the mode shown in Figure 272 (when the special image display is displayed in the first mode and the display mode changes, both the display mode and the periodic time always change), the mode shown in Figure 273 (when the special image display is displayed in the second mode and the display mode changes, there are both cases where the periodic time does not change and cases where the periodic time changes), and the mode shown in Figure 274 (when the special image display is displayed in the third mode, neither the display mode nor the periodic time changes), etc., do not necessarily have to be realized as a performance (configuration) related to the operation. In short, if multiple modes with different expectations are available as a "special image display" that is displayed to change periodically, it is possible to realize the above-mentioned presentation (the mode shown in FIG. 272 (when the special image display is displayed in the first mode and the display mode changes, both the display mode and the periodic time always change), the mode shown in FIG. 273 (when the special image display is displayed in the second mode and the display mode changes, there are both cases where the periodic time does not change and cases where the periodic time changes), and the mode shown in FIG. 274 (when the special image display is displayed in the third mode, neither the display mode nor the periodic time changes).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, a mock image display (here, a button mock image BMG) that is an image display imitating the operation target (operation button 410) is displayed, and a "mock image display acceptance period" during which acceptance of an operation is permitted (for the operation button 410 that has become the target imitated as the button mock image BMG) can be generated. Then, when an operation is accepted during the mock image display acceptance period, at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the fact that the operation has been accepted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, first, as the model image display acceptance period,
A "short cycle display reception period (such as the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), the fifth E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), the sixth E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.))" in which a periodic change in the model image display (here, the button model image BMG) can be displayed in a predetermined time unit (every cycle A hours),
At least a "long cycle display reception period (such as a second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), a third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), a fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266))" will be provided in which the periodic changes in the imitation image display (here, the button imitation image BMG) are not displayed to appear at the above-mentioned specified time units (every cycle A hours), but can be displayed to appear at a time unit (every cycle B hours) longer than the specified time (every cycle A hours).

In addition, in the "short cycle display reception period", the reception permission sound is always audibly output, whereas in the "long cycle display reception period", the reception permission sound may be audibly output (third E reception period, fourth E reception period) or not audibly output (second E reception period). With this configuration, in the "short cycle display reception period", periodic changes (for example, depiction of the up and down movement of the button) are performed at a fast cycle time as the imitation image display (here, the button imitation image BMG) to strongly encourage the player to operate, and the reception permission sound is always audibly output, so that the player's sense of expectation is heightened and it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved. In contrast, in the "long cycle display reception period", it is more difficult for the player to recognize that an operation opportunity has been given compared to the "short cycle display reception period", so that the tension caused by the increased possibility of forgetting to operate can be appropriately maintained.

However, in this case, when a "long cycle display reception period (such as the second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), the third E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.), or the fourth E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.))" occurs, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease because the player is not strongly encouraged to operate as compared to a "short cycle display reception period (such as the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), the fifth E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), or the sixth E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.)). Therefore, in the "long cycle display reception period" according to the above-mentioned example of presentation, a mode sound (second permissible sound) that cannot appear in a "short cycle display reception period" may be output as the permissible reception sound (see FIG. 263), so that interest in the game is expected to be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266))" and the "short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" do not occur simultaneously, and it is not possible to compare whether the "time required for periodic change (cycle time)" that appears is long or short. Therefore, it may be difficult for the player to recognize whether a "long cycle display reception period" or a "short cycle display reception period" is occurring. In this regard, in the above configuration, by checking whether or not the reception permission sound is audibly output and its type (mode sound), it becomes possible to easily recognize that a "long cycle display reception period" is occurring, and therefore it becomes possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the reception permission sound is audibly output.

In particular, in the "long cycle display acceptance period (e.g., the second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258), the third E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 263), the fourth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 266))" according to the above-mentioned presentation example, when a mode sound (second permissible sound) that cannot appear in the "short cycle display acceptance period (e.g., the first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), the fifth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271))" is audibly output as an acceptance permissible sound, the expectation (proportion) of a jackpot being obtained is higher than when a mode sound (first permissible sound) that also appears in the "short cycle display acceptance period" is audibly output, thereby improving interest in the game.

In addition, the imitation image display (here, a button imitation image BMG) in the above-mentioned presentation example is displayed as a moving image that repeatedly depicts the movements that may appear on the operation target (operation receiving portion) (here, a depiction of repeated back and forth movement when pressed), which encourages the player to operate in a natural way. However, the periodic changes in the imitation image display (here, a button imitation image BMG) are not limited to this, and may be, for example, a flashing light display.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266))" and the "short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))," the "periodic changes" that appear in the image display that imitates the operation means (here, the button-imitated image BMG) are all the same (a depiction of repeated reciprocating motion when pressed), and only the time required for the periodic change is different. However, instead of this, not only the time required for the periodic change but also the content of the "periodic change" itself may be different. For example, in the short cycle display reception period, the image display (here, the button-imitated image BMG) may be displayed as a depiction in which the movement amount (stroke) of the operation receiving part that appears when pressed is short compared to the case of the long cycle display reception period. Alternatively, the imitation image display (here, the button imitation image BMG) during the short cycle display acceptance period may be displayed as a moving image that repeatedly depicts movements that may appear in the operation receiving section, while the imitation image display (here, the button imitation image BMG) during the long cycle display acceptance period may be displayed as an image display that repeatedly depicts movements that may appear in the operation receiving section, or as an image display that repeatedly depicts a different depiction (such as a flashing light display) from the depiction of movements that may appear in the operation receiving section.

In addition, during the short cycle display reception period (the first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), the fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), and the sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271)), two types of patterns are prepared for the periodic change in the mock-up image display (here, the button mock-up image BMG), one of which is "a pattern in which the periodic change in the mock-up image display (here, the button mock-up image BMG) is displayed to appear in a predetermined time unit (cycle A time)" and the other is "a pattern in which the periodic change in the mock-up image display (here, the button mock-up image BMG) is displayed to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time (cycle A time)", and these two patterns may be capable of appearing within one short cycle display reception period. With this configuration, even if a short cycle display reception period occurs, the periodic change in the model image display (here, the button model image BMG) may appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time (cycle A time), making it difficult to recognize whether a short cycle display reception period or a long cycle display reception period (a second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), a third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), or a fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266)) is occurring. If a periodic change in the model image display (here, the button model image BMG) occurs in units of time longer than a predetermined time (cycle A time) during the short cycle display reception period, the long time may be the above-mentioned "cycle B time."

In addition, when two types of modes with different cycle times are prepared as periodic changes in the Mosaic image display (here, the button Mosaic image BMG) during the short cycle display reception period (the first E reception period (such as FIG. 253), the fifth E reception period (such as FIG. 270), and the sixth E reception period (such as FIG. 271)), the "mode in which the periodic change in the Mosaic image display (here, the button Mosaic image BMG) is displayed in a predetermined time (cycle A time) unit" appears when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the Mosaic image display (here, the button Mosaic image BMG) is maintained in an operated state, and when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the Mosaic image display (here, the button Mosaic image BMG) is not operated, a "periodic change in the Mosaic image display (here, the button Mosaic image BMG)" may appear as a periodic change slower than the predetermined time (cycle A time). According to this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether a short cycle display reception period or a long cycle display reception period (a second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), a third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), or a fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266)) is occurring only until the player performs an operation, and it becomes easier to recognize after the operation is accepted. Regarding the "periodic change slower than the predetermined time (cycle A time)", an image other than the model image display may be displayed in front of the model image display at a position where it overlaps with the model image display, and the other image may be displayed as a periodic change in the model image display (here, the button model image BMG), thereby making a periodic change slower than the predetermined time (cycle A time) appear. In addition, the "periodic changes" themselves may be different, such as one being a movement period and the other being a blinking period.

In addition, in the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266))" in the above-mentioned performance example, the time required for the periodic change in the mock image display (here, the button mock image BMG) is the same time (cycle B time) for all types of reception periods, but multiple times may be used as the time required for the "periodic change". In this case, however, all of the times will be set to be longer than the specified time (cycle A time) in the "short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))". With this configuration, it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether a short cycle display reception period or a long cycle display reception period is occurring. In this case, the acceptance permission sound may or may not be output when the time of the "periodic change" during the long cycle display acceptance period is a specific time, and the acceptance permission sound may or may not be output when the time of the "periodic change" during the long cycle display acceptance period is not a specific time.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in all reception periods, but the operation opportunity may be given to a different operation means depending on the type of reception period. For example, in the first E reception period (such as FIG. 253), at least an imitation image display (button imitation image BMG) of the operation button 410 is displayed and operation reception to the operation button 410 is permitted multiple times, whereas in the second E reception period (such as FIG. 258), at least an imitation image display (sword decoration image SYG) of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed and operation reception to the operation button 410 is permitted multiple times. Similarly, the targets to which the operation opportunity is given may be set according to the type for the third E reception period to the sixth E reception period.

In addition, during the short-cycle display reception period (the first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), the fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), the sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271)), a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is displayed as a model image display (here, a button model image BMG), whereas during the long-cycle display reception period (the second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), the third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), the fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266)), there may be cases where a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is displayed as a model image display (here, a button model image BMG) (e.g., the third E reception period, the fourth E reception period), and cases where other operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) is displayed as a model image display (sword decoration image SYG) (e.g., the second E reception period). Alternatively, in the long period display reception period, there may be a case where a model image display (here, a button model image BMG) imitating a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is displayed (e.g., the 3rd E reception period, the 4th E reception period), and a case where both a model image display (here, a button model image BMG) imitating a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) and a model image display (sword decoration image SYG) imitating another operation means (e.g., the sword decoration body 5001) are displayed (e.g., the 2nd E reception period). When both a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) and another operation means (e.g., the sword decoration body 5001) are displayed, it is desirable to use the same period time as a periodic change for both of them. In addition, when both an imitation image display (here, a button imitation image BMG) imitating a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) and an imitation image display (sword decoration image SYG) imitating another operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) are displayed, the periodic changes in the imitation image displays may be different from each other (e.g., one is a periodic change by a blinking light display, the other is a depiction of the operation receiving part moving back and forth within its movable range, etc.). In addition, when both a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) and another operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) are displayed during the long period display acceptance period, a predetermined condition is set to be established when the specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) or another operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) is operated, and the acceptance period is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (triggered by the acceptance of the operation). In other words, in this case, if the predetermined condition is not met, the acceptance period will continue without ending, triggered by the acceptance of the operation (satisfaction of the condition), and the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance will be displayed during this period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the 1st E reception period, the 2nd E reception period, the 5th E reception period, and the 6th E reception period do not necessarily have to occur as reception periods in which operation reception is permitted multiple times, but may occur as reception periods in which operation reception is permitted only once.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the "short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" and the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263))" can occur while a performance sound (here, specific BGM) is being audibly output (see FIG. 253, FIG. 258, FIG. 263, FIG. 271, FIG. 271, etc.). In this regard, in the "short cycle display reception period", the performance sound (here, specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is not terminated (made inaudible) until the end of the reception period, but in the "long cycle display reception period", there are cases where the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is terminated (second E reception period) until the end of the reception period.

In other words, even if there are provided, as the mock image display reception period, a "short cycle display reception period (such as the first E reception period (Figure 253, etc.), the fifth E reception period (Figure 270, etc.), the sixth E reception period (Figure 271, etc.))" in which the periodic changes in the mock image display (here, the button mock image BMG) can be displayed to appear in units of a predetermined time (cycle A time), and a "long cycle display reception period (such as the second E reception period (Figure 258, etc.), the third E reception period (Figure 263, etc.))" in which the periodic changes in the mock image display are not displayed to appear in units of a predetermined time, but rather to appear in units of a time longer than the predetermined time (cycle B time), it is actually difficult to accurately determine whether the periodic changes in the mock image display (here, the button mock image BMG) appear in units of a predetermined time or in units of a time longer than the predetermined time. In this regard, in a "short cycle display acceptance period", the sound effect (here, specific background music) that was audible at the time of its occurrence will not end before the acceptance period ends, but in a "long cycle display acceptance period", if the sound effect (here, specific background music) that was audible at the time of its occurrence may end before the acceptance period ends, it becomes possible to more accurately recognize whether a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period" is occurring by checking whether the sound effect that was audible at the time the acceptance period began is ended.

In particular, in the "short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" in the above-mentioned performance example, the performance sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of its occurrence will not be terminated before the end of the reception period, but in the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258) and third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263))", there are cases where the performance sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of its occurrence will not be terminated before the end of the reception period (third E reception period) and cases where it will be terminated (second E reception period). With this configuration, even if the player is paying attention to whether the sound effects (specific BGM) that were audible at the time the reception period began will end, if the sound effects (specific BGM in this case) that were audible at the time the reception period began have not ended by the time the reception period ends, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether a "short cycle display reception period" or a "long cycle display reception period" is occurring. In other words, in this case, the remaining time of the reception period is reduced by the amount of time the player delays the operation to check whether the sound effects (specific BGM) that were audible at the time the reception period began will end, and this is expected to maintain a good sense of tension during the reception period.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of the performance, the "short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" and the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258) and third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263))" may occur while the audible output of the performance sound (here, specific BGM) is fading out (depending on the type of post-reception display, etc.). In short, it is sufficient that some kind of performance sound is made at least audible at the time when the player is given the opportunity to operate.

Furthermore, in the "long-cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258) and third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263))" according to the above-mentioned performance example, in a special type reception period (second E reception period) in which the performance sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence may be terminated before the end of the reception period, even if a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, button simulated image BMG) displayed during the reception period (as an image display that simulates an operation means capable of accepting operations multiple times) is operated, this does not cause the output of the performance sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence to be terminated (e.g., removed from the channel allocation for outputting the specific BGM), and the output of the performance sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is terminated based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that has nothing to do with the operation) (e.g., a predetermined time has passed or a predetermined timing has arrived). With this configuration, no matter how many operations the player performs, it is possible to ensure that the output status of the sound effects (specific background music) that were audible at the time the reception period occurred is not affected, making it difficult to recognize which type of reception period is occurring.

As mentioned above, during a "long-period display reception period (such as the second E reception period (Figure 258) or the third E reception period (Figure 263))," in which a sound effect (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of its occurrence may be terminated before the end of the reception period, in a special type of reception period (the second E reception period), both an imitation image display (here, a button imitation image BMG) that imitates a specific operating means (for example, the operation button 410) and an imitation image display (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates another operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) may be displayed, but it is desirable that operation of either of these operating means does not trigger the termination of the sound effect (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of its occurrence. However, operating one of the operating means will not trigger the termination of the sound effect (specific background music) that was audible at the time of its generation, but operating the other may trigger the termination of the sound effect (specific background music) that was audible at the time of its generation. In this case, the type of reception period may be suggested depending on the object operated, which is expected to encourage players to perform a variety of operations.

Here, "sound effects (such as background music) that are audible at the time the acceptance period begins are not rendered inaudible by the time the acceptance period ends" means that, when there are multiple types of sound effects that are audible at the time the acceptance period begins, at least one of those sound effects is not rendered inaudible by the time the acceptance period ends. Also, "sound effects (such as background music) that are audible at the time the acceptance period begins are rendered inaudible by the time the acceptance period ends" means that, when there are multiple types of sound effects that are audible at the time the acceptance period begins, all of those sound effects are rendered inaudible by the time the acceptance period ends, that is, rendered silent. However, sound effects that start to be output after the timing at which the acceptance period begins may be made in an audible state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the effect, the same effect sound (specific BGM) is audible at the time of occurrence of the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period", but the effect sounds audible at the time of occurrence of the same may be different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the same form of imitation image display imitating the operation target is displayed in the short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271)) and the long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266)), but it is not necessary to display the same form. For example, the long cycle display reception period may be configured to display different forms of imitation image display imitating the operation target depending on its type. Also, in the long cycle display reception period, the imitation image display may be displayed in a special form that cannot appear in the short cycle display reception period, and in this case, when the imitation image display is displayed in that special form, it becomes possible to suggest that a long cycle display reception period will occur. When the model image display is displayed in this special mode, it is desirable to make the expectation (proportion) of a jackpot higher than when a common mode is displayed during the short cycle display acceptance period and the long cycle display acceptance period.

In addition, the imitation image display acceptance period in the above-mentioned presentation example may occur while a specific type of presentation sound (specific BGM) is being audibly output, or may occur after the specific type of presentation sound (specific BGM) has been made inaudible (4E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 266)). This is expected to improve the presentation when the imitation image display acceptance period occurs.

In the above-mentioned example of the presentation, when the 4E reception period (such as FIG. 266) occurs within the mock image display reception period, the specific type of presentation sound (specific BGM) is always made inaudible before the 4E reception period occurs, thereby allowing the 4E reception period (such as FIG. 266) to function as something that can only occur when the specific type of presentation sound (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state. However, instead of (or in addition to) this, during a short cycle display reception period (the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), the fifth E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), the sixth E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.)), "a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is not made inaudible or not made inaudible before the short cycle display reception period occurs" depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the short cycle display reception period occurs, but during a long cycle display reception period (the second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), the third E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.), the fourth E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.)), a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may or may not be made inaudible before the "long cycle display reception period" occurs depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "long cycle display reception period" occurs. With this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when an operation opportunity is given, it becomes easier for the player to recognize whether it is a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period", so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. As mentioned above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the pattern variation is performed based on the result of the determination (type of variation pattern).

When such a configuration is adopted, the "long-cycle display reception period" may, for example, be such that the second E reception period (such as FIG. 258) "may or may not be made inaudible before the second E reception period occurs" depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the second E reception period occurs, and the third E reception period (such as FIG. 258) or the fourth E reception period (such as FIG. 266) "may or may not be made inaudible before the third E reception period or the fourth E reception period occurs" depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the reception period occurs. That is, in this case, the 3E reception period occurs while a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is being audibly output regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 3E reception period occurs, and the 4E reception period occurs while a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is inaudible regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 4E reception period occurs. Note that, during the 2E reception period, even if the form of the specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) changes depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, it goes without saying that the form that appears as the post-reception display is the same.

In this regard, it is important that, for the "short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))", the appearance of the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) does not change according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the short cycle display reception period occurs. In this sense, for the "short cycle display reception period", as in the above-mentioned performance example, the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may always be in an audible state at the time the "short cycle display reception period" occurs, or, alternatively, the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible before the "short cycle display reception period" occurs, and the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may be made to occur only while the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state. Alternatively, the "short cycle display reception period" may include a reception period of a type that can occur only when a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is in an audible state, and a reception period of a type that can occur only when a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state. Even with this configuration, there is no change in which a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state or remains in an audible state depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, during the mock image display acceptance period in the above-mentioned performance example, when an operation is accepted, a post-acceptance display may be made in a manner that makes it appear to overlap the performance pattern (such as the decorative pattern SZ) from the front (see, for example, FIG. 262 (k4)). This makes it possible to emphasize the post-acceptance display, which is expected to improve the performance when an operation is accepted.

In particular, in the above-mentioned performance example, during the "short cycle display acceptance period (first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271))", the post-acceptance display is not performed in a manner that appears to overlap the decorative pattern SZ from the front, but is performed behind it (see FIG. 257, etc.), whereas during the long cycle display acceptance period (second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258), third E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 263), fourth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 266)), the post-acceptance display is performed in a manner that appears to overlap the decorative pattern SZ from the front (second E acceptance period) and is performed behind the decorative pattern SZ (third E acceptance period, fourth E acceptance period) (see FIG. 262 (k4), (l4), FIG. 265, FIG. 269, etc.). With this configuration, when a short cycle display acceptance period occurs, the post-acceptance display is not emphasized relative to the decorative pattern SZ, and the player is given an opportunity to operate under a sense of tension. When a long cycle display acceptance period occurs, the post-acceptance display is sometimes emphasized and sometimes not emphasized, so it is possible to provide the player with a certain degree of security while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension when an opportunity to operate is given.

In the second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258) in the above-mentioned performance example, when an operation that ends the reception period is received, this is used as a trigger for the post-reception display to be performed in a manner that appears to overlap the decorative pattern SZ from the front. However, when an operation that does not end the reception period is received, this may also be used as a trigger for the post-reception display to be performed in a manner that appears to overlap the decorative pattern SZ from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, when a post-reception display is made in a manner that overlaps the decorative pattern SZ from the front based on the fact that the reception was made during the 2E reception period (such as Figure 258), it is possible for the player to perform a specified operation, etc., to shorten the period until the post-reception display is made invisible and the decorative pattern SZ becomes easily visible (see Figures 262 (k4) and (l4)). With this configuration, it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game caused by a decrease in the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ when the post-reception display is emphasized will be suitably suppressed.

Even during the "short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))", the post-reception display may be displayed in a manner that overlaps the decorative pattern SZ from the front, but in this case, it is desirable to make it impossible to shorten the period until the post-reception display is hidden and the decorative pattern SZ becomes easily visible.

In addition, even if the post-reception display is performed in a manner that makes it appear to overlap the decorative pattern SZ from the front during a "long-cycle display reception period (such as the second E reception period (Figure 258, etc.), the third E reception period (Figure 263, etc.), or the fourth E reception period (Figure 266, etc.))," there may be cases where it is possible (for example, the second E reception period) to shorten the period until the post-reception display is hidden and the decorative pattern SZ becomes easily visible, and cases where it is not possible (for example, the third E reception period or the fourth E reception period).

In addition, during the model image display acceptance period in the above-mentioned performance example, when an operation is accepted, the disappearing EF display that makes the model image display (decorative pattern SZ) difficult to see may be executed in a predetermined manner (e.g., Fig. 269 (g2)-(i2) etc.), or the disappearing EF display may be executed in a manner different from the predetermined manner (e.g., Fig. 269 (g3)-(i3) etc.), or may not be executed at all. This makes it possible to add performance elements using the disappearing EF display as well.

In addition, as the Mosaic image display reception period, at least a first E reception period (such as FIG. 253), a third E reception period (such as FIG. 263), and a fourth E reception period (such as FIG. 266) are prepared, and in the first E reception period, the periodic change in the Mosaic image display (here, the button Mosaic image BMG) can be displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time (period A time) (short period display reception period), and in the third E reception period and the fourth E reception period, the periodic change in the Mosaic image display (here, the button Mosaic image BMG) is not displayed so as to appear in a predetermined time (period A time) but can be displayed so as to appear in a time longer than the predetermined time (period B time) (long period display reception period). With this configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in the performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the Mosaic image display (here, the button Mosaic image BMG), so that it is expected that the sense of tension when the Mosaic image display reception period occurs will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, when an operation is accepted during the 1E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), the post-acceptance display can be executed in one of a number of modes (mode UH1-1, mode UH1-2) with different degrees of expectation for a predetermined result (jackpot), and the disappearance EF display is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 257 (p4) to (r4) when the post-acceptance display is executed in the mode with the highest expectation (mode UH1-2) among the above-mentioned multiple modes, but when the post-acceptance display is executed in a mode different from the mode with the highest expectation (mode UH1-1) among the above-mentioned multiple modes, it is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 257 (p3) to (r3) different from the above mode (or it may not be executed). This is also the case during the 5E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270) and the 6E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271). In contrast, when an operation is accepted during the 4E acceptance period (such as FIG. 266), the post-acceptance display can be executed in one of a number of modes (mode UH4-1, mode UH4-2) having different degrees of expectation for a predetermined result (jackpot), and the disappearance EF display is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 269 (g3) to (i3) when the post-acceptance display is executed in the mode with the highest expectation among the above-mentioned multiple modes (mode UH4-2), but when the post-acceptance display is executed in a mode other than the mode with the highest expectation among the above-mentioned multiple modes (mode UH4-1), it is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 269 (g2) to (i2) which is different from the above mode (or it may not be executed). In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the 3E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 263), even if the post-acceptance display can be executed in one of a plurality of modes (mode UH3-1, mode UH3-2) with different degrees of expectation of a predetermined result (jackpot), the disappearing EF display is "executed in one mode (e.g., FIG. 269 (f2)-(h2) or FIG. 269 (f3)-(h3)) regardless of which of the above-mentioned plurality of modes the post-acceptance display is executed in." According to this configuration, during the short cycle display acceptance period in which the periodic change in the model image display appears in a predetermined time unit (cycle A time), the degree of expectation is also suggested by the mode of the disappearing EF display when the operation is accepted, so that an opportunity for operation can be given without feeling uneasy about the degree of expectation being difficult to recognize despite the operation. In contrast, during the long cycle display acceptance period when the periodic changes in the mock image display are not displayed to occur in units of a predetermined time (cycle A time) but occur in units of a time longer than the predetermined time (cycle B time), the state of the disappearing EF display when an operation is accepted may or may not suggest a degree of expectation, making it possible to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when an operation opportunity is granted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the EF display (performance effect display) EKH that appears when the 1E post-reception display is executed in the "low expectation mode UH1-1" based on the operation reception during the 1E reception period (such as FIG. 253) and the EF display (performance effect display) EKH that appears when the 4E post-reception display is executed in the "low expectation mode UH4-1" based on the operation reception during the 4E reception period (such as FIG. 266) are the same (or the EF display may not be executed in either case) (see FIG. 257 (p3) to (r3) and FIG. 269 (g2) to (i2)). In other words, in this case, if the operation reception is executed by randomly repeatedly pressing the button, and the post-reception display is executed in a low expectation mode, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation reception is due to multiple operations or a single operation, and this, combined with the fact that the situation suggests low expectation, is expected to encourage the user to stop randomly repeatedly pressing the button.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the form of the EF display (presentation effect display) EKH that appears regardless of the form of the display after 3E reception based on the operation reception during the 3E reception period (such as FIG. 263) and the form of the EF display (presentation effect display) EKH that appears when the display after 4E reception is executed in the "high expectation form UH4-1" based on the operation reception during the 4E reception period (such as FIG. 266) are made to be the same (see FIG. 265 (f2)-(h2), FIG. 265 (f3)-(h3), and FIG. 269 (g3)-(i3)). In other words, in this case, even if the display after 3E reception is executed in the low expectation form UH3-1 based on the operation reception during the 3E reception period (such as FIG. 263), the form of the EF display (presentation effect display) EKH can give the illusion of high expectation, so it is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the mock image display acceptance period in the above-mentioned performance example, operation acceptance is permitted multiple times in at least one of the "short cycle display acceptance period (first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271))" and the "long cycle display acceptance period (second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258), third E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 263), fourth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 266))".

In particular, the "short cycle display acceptance period (the 1st E acceptance period (e.g., Figure 253), the 5th E acceptance period (e.g., Figure 270), the 6th E acceptance period (e.g., Figure 271))" in the above-mentioned presentation example occurs as a type in which acceptance (operation acceptance) of an action (operation) by the player is permitted multiple times (for example, a rapid-fire press type), regardless of the type of the acceptance period. In contrast, the "long cycle display acceptance period (the second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258), the third E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 263), the fourth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 266))" may occur as a type in which the acceptance (operation acceptance) of the player is permitted only once (for example, a single push type) during the acceptance period until the end of the acceptance period (while the acceptance period is occurring) (the third E acceptance period, the fourth E acceptance period), or as a type in which the acceptance (operation acceptance) of the player is permitted multiple times (for example, a continuous push type) during the acceptance period until the end of the acceptance period (while the acceptance period is occurring) (the second E acceptance period). According to this configuration, when the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs, it is suggested that the operation acceptance is permitted multiple times (for example, it is a continuous push type). In addition, when a "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs, it will be possible to conceal whether or not an operation is being accepted multiple times (for example, whether or not it is a rapid-fire type), allowing for an opportunity to operate in a tense atmosphere.

In this case, even if the acceptance period (valid period) is of a type that allows the acceptance (acceptance of an operation) by the player multiple times (for example, a rapid-fire type), it may be possible (possible) for the acceptance period (valid period) to end with only one acceptance of the operation depending on the result of a lottery (determination) related to the presentation. In short, it is sufficient for the acceptance period (valid period) to be of a type that allows multiple acceptances (patterns).

Note that during the "long-cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266))," during which an operating means that can be accepted multiple times until the end of the reception period is displayed as a mock image display (here, a button mock image BMG) (second E reception period), the mock image display may be displayed as an image display (mode) that is not displayed during the period (third E reception period, fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266)) during which an operating means that can be accepted multiple times until the end of the reception period is not displayed as a mock image display (here, a button mock image BMG). That is, in this case, when a long-cycle display reception period occurs, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not this is a type that is accepted multiple times (for example, a rapid-press type).

Furthermore, during the "long cycle display acceptance period (the second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258), the third E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 263), the fourth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 266))," only the operation means that is permitted to accept (operation acceptance) an action (operation) by the player once is displayed as a model image display (here, a button model image BMG) during the acceptance period (the third E acceptance period, the fourth E acceptance period), and the model image display is not displayed during the short cycle display acceptance period (the first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), the fifth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 272), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 273), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 274), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 275), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 276), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 277), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 278), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 279), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 280), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 281), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 282), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 283), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 284), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 285), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 286), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 287), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 289), the sixth E acceptance period (e During the reception period (e.g., FIG. 271), a mock image display that is not displayed during the short cycle display reception period is displayed as a mock image display corresponding to the same operating means, and the operating means corresponding to the mock image display can be operated only once, and during the reception period (second E reception period) during which an operating means that allows the reception (operation) of a player's action (operation) multiple times (operation reception) is at least displayed as a mock image display, the mock image display that is not displayed during the short cycle display reception period is displayed, and the operating means corresponding to the mock image display can be operated multiple times.

In addition, during the short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271)) in the above-mentioned performance example, the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the operation means that can be operated multiple times and corresponds to the model image display, but during the long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266)), the auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled for the operation means that can be operated multiple times and corresponds to the model image display. With this configuration, until the player starts operation, it is difficult to recognize whether a short cycle display reception period or a long cycle display reception period is occurring, but when the operation state is maintained, it is possible to suggest whether a short cycle display reception period or a long cycle display reception period is occurring based on whether the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled.

In addition, when an operation is accepted for the operation means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the mock image display (here, the button mock image BMG) during the "short cycle display acceptance period (the first E acceptance period (FIG. 253, etc.) or the sixth E acceptance period (FIG. 271, etc.))" according to the above-mentioned performance example, the periodic change that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point is hidden (see FIG. 253(b) and the like). That is, in this case, when an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the mock image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic change that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point is hidden, so that it becomes difficult to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the mock image display, and the sense of tension when an operation is accepted can be appropriately maintained. Note that, in order to obtain such an effect, the fifth E acceptance period (FIG. 270, etc.) is not generated as the "short cycle display acceptance period".

In particular, in this case, during the "short cycle display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) or sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" according to the above-mentioned example of performance, when the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the mock image display (here, button mock image BMG) is operated and an operation is received, the periodic changes that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point are made invisible (see FIG. 253(b) and the like), but during the "long cycle display reception period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258) or third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 272)" according to the above-mentioned example of performance, In the fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), the fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266), when an operation means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the mock image display (here, the button mock image BMG) is operated to receive an operation, the periodic change that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point is hidden (see FIG. 263(b) or FIG. 266(b)), and the periodic change that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point is not hidden but continues (see FIG. 258(b)). With this configuration, when the periodic change that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point is not hidden but continues when an operation is received, it is possible to suggest that a "long-period display reception period" has occurred. Also, when the periodic change that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point is hidden when an operation is received, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether a "short-period display reception period" or a "long-period display reception period" has occurred.

Or, when an operation is accepted for the operation means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the mock image display (here, the button mock image BMG) during the "short cycle display acceptance period (5th E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.))" according to the above-mentioned performance example, the periodic change that has appeared in the mock image display up to that point is not hidden but continues (see Figure 270 (b) and the like). In other words, in this case, even if an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the mock image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic change that has appeared in the mock image display up to that point is not hidden but continues, so that it is expected that the time required for one periodic change in the mock image display can be confirmed even after the operation is accepted. Note that, in order to obtain such an effect, the 1st E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.) or the 6th E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.) is not generated as the "short cycle display acceptance period".

In particular, in this case, in the "short cycle display reception period (5th E reception period (Figure 270, etc.))" according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the mock image display (here, button mock image BMG) is operated and an operation is received, the periodic change that had appeared in the mock image display up until that point is not hidden but continues (see Figure 270 (b), etc.), but in the "long cycle display reception period (2nd E reception period (Figure 258, etc.) and 3rd E reception period (Figure 26 In the fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266), when an operation means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the mock image display (here, the button mock image BMG) is operated to receive an operation, the periodic change that has appeared in the mock image display up until that point is hidden (see FIG. 263(b) or FIG. 266(b)), and the periodic change that has appeared in the mock image display up until that point is not hidden but continues (see FIG. 258(b)). With this configuration, when the periodic change that has appeared in the mock image display up until that point is hidden when an operation is received, it is possible to suggest that a "long-period display reception period" has occurred. Also, when the periodic change that has appeared in the mock image display up until that point is not hidden but continues when an operation is received, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether a "short-period display reception period" or a "long-period display reception period" has occurred.

Note that the above "periodic changes are hidden" may mean that they are hidden by "hiding the model image display," or the model image display may continue to be displayed but the previously occurring periodic changes may be temporarily terminated and become still, or the same periodic changes may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started. In short, it is sufficient that the previously occurring periodic changes (and their progress) are not visible to the player.

In addition, multiple operation means may be provided, and different operation means may be used when terminating the periodic change upon receipt of an operation and when the periodic change is to continue, or the same operation means may be used.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of performance, first, an acceptance allowance period can be generated during which acceptance of an operation on the operation means (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the acceptance allowance period, at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the fact that an operation has been accepted. In addition, as an acceptance allowance period, at least a "multiple acceptance allowance period (such as the first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), the fifth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270), or the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271), or the second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258))" is provided during which at least an imitation image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which acceptance of an operation is permitted multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, as such a "multiple times allowable period", at least a "maintained operation allowable period (such as a 1st E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), a 5th E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), or a 6th E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" is provided as a "multiple times allowable period".

With this configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (the multiple operation allowance period), "simply by continuing to operate the operating means (here, the operating button 410) corresponding to the imitation image display (here, the button imitation image BMG) in an operated state, multiple operations will be accepted," which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, as a "multiple times permissible period", at least one of the multiple operation means for which "operation acceptance can be accepted multiple times" is displayed as a mock image display (here, a button mock image BMG), and an operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation of the operation means corresponding to the mock image display (here, the operation button 410) in a "maintained operation permissible period (first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270), or sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271, etc.)) and a "maintenance operation non-permission period (second E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.))" in which at least an operation means among the multiple operation means for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is displayed as a mock image display (here, a button mock image BMG), but multiple operation acceptance is not performed simply by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the mock image display (here, operation button 410), which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game while maintaining an appropriate level of tension.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation allowable period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), or sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" according to the above-mentioned presentation example, an acceptance allowance sound is audibly output when the period occurs. With this configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowable period), when the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, the acceptance allowance sound is audibly output, making it easier for the player to start operations immediately after the maintenance operation allowable period occurs, and thus allowing multiple operations to be performed with the remaining time available. Furthermore, since "simply by continuing to keep the operation means (here, the operation button 410) in an operated state, multiple operations are accepted," it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of the performance, during the "maintenance operation permissible period (first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270), or sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271))" in which the auto-repeated-hits function is enabled, an acceptance permissible sound is audibly output when the function occurs, but during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258))" in which the auto-repeated-hits function is not enabled, an acceptance permissible sound is not audibly output when the function occurs. Therefore, depending on whether or not an acceptance permissible sound is audibly output, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not the "auto-repeated-hits function", which accepts operations multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operating means in an operated state, is enabled.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the "operation means for which operation acceptance may be permitted multiple times" is at least displayed as a mock-up image display (here, a button mock-up image BMG) in the "maintenance operation permitted period (first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270), or sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271))" and the "maintenance operation not permitted period (second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258))", but they may be different.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation permission period (first E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), sixth E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" according to the above-mentioned presentation example, each time an operation is received, including when the operation state is maintained, a change occurs in the display mode of the imitation image display imitating an operation means for which operation reception is permitted multiple times (the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden), but in the "maintenance operation non-permission period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.))", no change occurs in the display mode even if an operation is received (the periodic change that has appeared until then continues). In other words, in this case, in the "maintenance operation permission period", even if the operation is performed using the "auto-repeated function", it is possible to appropriately suggest that the operation reception is in a state where it is being performed properly, and it is possible to increase interest in the game. However, if multiple operation opportunities are provided solely through such presentation, there is a concern that no sense of tension will be created despite the provision of multiple operation opportunities within a limited time, and as a result, interest in the game will decrease. In this regard, in the "maintenance operation non-permitted period" according to the above-mentioned example, since the display state does not change even if an operation is accepted, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the operation has been accepted properly or not, and it is expected that the sense of tension when multiple operation opportunities are provided within a limited time will be appropriately maintained. Note that, in order to obtain such an effect, the 5E acceptance period (such as FIG. 270) is not generated as a "short cycle display acceptance period".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the "multiple times permissible period" during which at least an imitation image display imitating an operating means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is displayed can be generated while some kind of performance sound (BGM) is being audibly output, but the performance sound (BGM) may be made inaudible (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258)) or not made inaudible (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271)) until the end of the "multiple times permissible period."

With this configuration, if the sound effects (BGM) that were audible at the time the acceptance period occurred while an operation opportunity was given is made inaudible, it is possible to suggest that a "multiple acceptance period" is occurring, during which acceptance of operations is permitted multiple times. Furthermore, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple acceptance period), there are cases where "simply continuing to operate the operating means corresponding to the mock image display in an operated state will result in acceptance of operations multiple times," and this is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, during the "maintenance operation allowable period (first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), fifth E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), sixth E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.))" in which the auto-repeated-hit function is enabled, the performance sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of its occurrence is not made inaudible until the end of the "maintenance operation allowable period", but during the "maintenance operation non-allowable period (second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.))" in which the auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled, the performance sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible until the end of the "maintenance operation non-allowable period". With this configuration, when a "multiple-time allowable period" occurs, it is possible to suggest whether or not the "auto-repeated-hit function" in which operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to keep the operating means in an operated state is enabled, depending on whether or not the performance sound (BGM, etc.) that was audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible until the end of the "multiple-time allowable period".

In addition, in the "maintenance operation non-permitted period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))" according to the above-mentioned performance example, even if a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, the button simulated image BMG) displayed during the reception period (as an image display simulating an operation means capable of receiving operations multiple times) is operated, the output of the performance sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is not terminated (e.g., it is not removed from the channel allocation for outputting the specific BGM). In other words, the output of the performance sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is terminated based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that has nothing to do with the operation) (e.g., the passage of a predetermined time or the arrival of a predetermined timing). With this configuration, no matter how many operations the player performs, it is possible to prevent the output status of the performance sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of the occurrence of the reception period from being affected, and it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type of reception period is occurring.

Here, "effect sounds (such as background music) that are audible at the time the multiple allowable period occurs are not rendered inaudible by the time the multiple allowable period ends" means that, when there are multiple types of effect sounds that are audible at the time the multiple allowable period occurs, at least one of those effect sounds is not rendered inaudible by the time the multiple allowable period ends. Also, "effect sounds (such as background music) that are audible at the time the multiple allowable period occurs are rendered inaudible by the time the multiple allowable period ends" means that, when there are multiple types of effect sounds that are audible at the time the multiple allowable period occurs, all of those effect sounds are rendered inaudible by the time the multiple allowable period ends, that is, rendered silent. However, effect sounds that start to be output after the timing at which the acceptance period occurs may be made in an audible state.

In this case, the "maintenance operation permitted period" and the "maintenance operation non-permitted period" may occur while the audible output of the sound effects (BGM) is at a reduced volume (suppressed). In other words, it is sufficient that the sound effects (BGM, etc.) are audible at the time the "multiple permissible period" occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the effect, the same effect sound (specific BGM) is audible at the time of occurrence during the "maintenance operation permitted period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" when the auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, and the "maintenance operation not permitted period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))" when the auto-rapid tapping function is not enabled, but the effect sounds audible at the time of occurrence may be different from each other.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of the performance, the "multiple permissible period" may occur while a specific type of performance sound (here, specific background music) is being audibly output, or may occur after the specific type of performance sound (here, specific background music) has been made inaudible. More specifically, as a "multiple times permissible period" that may occur while a specific type of sound effect (here, specific BGM) is being audibly output, there are provided a "maintained operation permissible period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" in which an operation means (here, operation button 410) among the multiple operation means for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is at least displayed as a mock image display (here, button mock image BMG) and operation acceptance is performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation of the operation means corresponding to the mock image display, and a "maintained operation non-permissible period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))" in which an operation means (here, operation button 410) among the multiple operation means for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is at least displayed as a mock image display (here, button mock image BMG) but operation acceptance is not performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation of the operation means corresponding to the mock image display.

In this regard, in the "maintenance operation allowable period", the specific type of effect sound (here, the specific BGM) is not made inaudible or inaudible before the occurrence of the maintenance operation allowable period according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the maintenance operation allowable period occurs, but in the "maintenance operation non-allowable period", the specific type of effect sound (here, the specific BGM) may be made inaudible before the occurrence of the "maintenance operation non-allowable period" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "maintenance operation non-allowable period" occurs (when the maintenance operation non-allowable period occurs with the specific type of effect sound inaudible), or may not be made inaudible (when the maintenance operation non-allowable period occurs with the specific type of effect sound being audibly output). According to this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the "multiple times allowable period" occurs, it becomes easier to recognize whether this is a "maintenance operation allowable period" or a "maintenance operation non-allowable period", so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. As mentioned above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the pattern variation is performed based on the result (type of variation pattern).

When such a configuration is adopted, it is important that, for the "maintenance operation permissible period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))", the mode of the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) does not change according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. In this sense, for the "maintenance operation permissible period", as in the above-mentioned performance example, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may always be in an audible state at the time when the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs, or alternatively, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible before the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs, and the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made to occur only while the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state. Alternatively, the "maintenance operation allowable period" may include a type of acceptance period that can occur only when a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is in an audible state, and a type of acceptance period that can occur only when a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state. Even with this configuration, there is no change in which a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state or remains in an audible state depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

It goes without saying that in the "non-permitted maintenance operation period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))", no matter what form the specific type of sound effect (here, specific BGM) takes depending on the type of previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the permissible maintenance operation period occurs, the same form will be displayed as the post-reception display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, at least a "maintenance operation allowable period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" is provided as a "multiple times allowable period" in which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation means (here, operation button 410) corresponding to the model image display (here, button model image BMG) in an operated state, and in the "maintenance operation allowable period", when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) of the model image display that has been displayed up until that point is changed (see FIG. 253(b) and FIG. 271(b)).

With this configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple times allowed period), "simply by continuing to operate the operating means corresponding to the imitation image display, multiple operations will be accepted," which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game. In addition, since the display mode of the imitation image display that has been displayed up until that point is changed when an operation is accepted, it is possible to appropriately indicate that an operation is being accepted properly by simply continuing to operate the operating means corresponding to the imitation image display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the "maintenance operation allowable period" of the "multiple times allowable period", when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) of the model image display that has been displayed until then is changed, but in the "maintenance operation non-allowable period", even if an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) of the model image display that has been displayed until then is not changed. With this configuration, in the "maintenance operation allowable period", it is preferable to suggest that the operation acceptance has been performed properly just by maintaining the operation state, and this, combined with the activation of the auto-repeated-hit function, is expected to increase the interest in playing. In contrast, in the "maintenance operation non-allowable period", even if an operation is accepted, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance has been performed properly, so it is expected that the player himself will be encouraged to perform the operation repeatedly more actively without the auto-repeated-hit function being activated.

In this case, it is desirable that the time required for the periodic change in the mock image display during the "maintenance operation allowable period" be different when the auto-tap function is enabled and operations are accepted compared to when operations are not accepted.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of performance, first, an imitation image display (here, a button imitation image BMG), which is an image display imitation of an operating means (here, the operating button 410), is displayed, and an imitation image display acceptance period during which acceptance of an operation is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted during the imitation image display acceptance period, at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. Also, the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears as an image display imitation of the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the replica image display acceptance period can be classified into a "specific type of replica image display acceptance period (such as the third E acceptance period (FIG. 263, etc.), the fourth E acceptance period (FIG. 266, etc.))" in which only an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted once is displayed as the replica image display, and a "special type of replica image display acceptance period (such as the first E acceptance period (FIG. 253, etc.), the second E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.), the fifth E acceptance period (FIG. 270, etc.), the sixth E acceptance period (FIG. 271, etc.))" in which at least an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is displayed as the replica image display. When an operation means (here, operation button 410) that is set as an operation target that is permitted to be operated once and that is set as an object to be displayed as a mock-up image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the mock-up image display (here, button mock-up image BMG) corresponding to the operation means is made non-display based on the operation acceptance, and in a "special type of mock-up image display acceptance period", when an operation means (here, operation button 410) that is set as an operation target that is permitted to be operated multiple times and that is set as an object to be displayed as a mock-up image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the mock-up image display (here, button mock-up image BMG) corresponding to the operation means can be made to continue.

With this configuration, depending on whether the periodic changes that had been appearing in the model image display are hidden when an operation is accepted, it is possible to indicate whether a "specific type of model image display acceptance period (one operation acceptance allowed)" or a "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations accepted)" is occurring.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example presentation, when a "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, there are cases where the acceptance permission sound is audibly output (first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271)) and cases where the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output (second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258)). Furthermore, when the acceptance permission sound is audibly output (the first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271)), when an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times during the "special type of mock-up image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had appeared up to that point in the mock-up image display are made invisible (see FIG. 253(b) and FIG. 271(b)). However, when the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output (the second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258)), when an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times during the "special type of mock-up image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had appeared up to that point in the mock-up image display are not made invisible but continue (see FIG. 258(b)). According to this configuration, when a "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, depending on whether or not the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, it is possible to suggest whether or not the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display up until then will be hidden when an operation is accepted (whether or not the situation in which an operation has been accepted is properly notified). In other words, in this case, if the acceptance permission sound is not output when a "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, it becomes possible to recognize in advance that multiple operations must be performed in a situation in which it is difficult to recognize that an operation is being accepted, and it becomes possible to play in a tense atmosphere. Note that, in order to obtain such an effect, the fifth E acceptance period (such as FIG. 270) is not generated as a "short cycle display acceptance period".

The operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed multiple times may be the same when ending the periodic change and when the periodic change continues, or may be different.

Also, when only the operating means set as an operating object for which operation reception is permitted only once during the "specific type of imitation image display reception period (single operation)" is displayed as the imitation image display (here, button imitation image BMG), the reception permission sound may or may not be audibly output. However, when only the operating means set as an operating object for which operation reception is permitted only once during the "specific type of imitation image display reception period (single operation)" is displayed as the imitation image display (here, button imitation image BMG), the reception permission sound may be audibly output without fail. In this case, when the reception permission sound is not audibly output, it becomes possible to recognize that multiple operations are permitted, but when the reception permission sound is audibly output, it becomes difficult to recognize whether multiple operations or one operation is permitted.

Alternatively, a 5E reception period (such as FIG. 270) may be generated as a "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)", without the 1E reception period (such as FIG. 253) or the 6E reception period (such as FIG. 271) being generated. In other words, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, when a "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, there are cases where the reception permission sound is audibly output (the 5E reception period (such as FIG. 270)) and cases where the reception permission sound is not audibly output (the 2E reception period (such as FIG. 258)). However, whether the acceptance permission sound is audibly output (the 5th E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 270)) or the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output (the 2nd E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258)), when an operation is accepted by operating an operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is accepted multiple times during the "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (multiple operations)", the periodic changes appearing in the imitation image display based on this will not be hidden, and as a result, the periodic changes appearing in the imitation image display will continue as they are regardless of whether or not an operation is accepted (in a manner that does not end the acceptance period). In this regard, when the reception permission sound is audibly output (the fifth E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.)) at the time of occurrence of the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)", the EF display is displayed based on the fact that the operation has been received (see FIG. 270(d)), whereas when the reception permission sound is not audibly output (the second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)), the EF display (see FIG. 258(d)) is not displayed even if the operation has been received. According to this configuration, when the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, depending on whether the reception permission sound is audibly output, it is possible to suggest whether the EF display corresponding to the reception of the operation is executed (whether the situation in which the operation has been received is properly notified). Note that the "EF display" in this example refers to an image display that is displayed in front of the model image display (on the layer) in a form that overlaps with the display area of the model image display that continues to change periodically regardless of whether the operation has been received. Therefore, when the "EF display" is displayed, the imitation image display, which continues to change periodically, becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to appropriately indicate that operation acceptance is being performed properly. In other words, in this case, when the acceptance permission sound is not output upon the occurrence of a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (multiple operations)", it becomes possible to recognize in advance that multiple operations will need to be performed in a situation where it is difficult to recognize that operations are being accepted, and it becomes possible to play in a tense atmosphere.

Furthermore, the "special type model image display reception period (multiple operations)" in the above-mentioned performance example may include a case where the performance sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is not made inaudible before the end of the "special type model image display reception period (multiple operations)" (see the first E reception period (see FIG. 253(h)), the sixth E reception period (see FIG. 271(h))), or a case where the performance sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible (see the second E reception period (see FIG. 258(h))).

When a "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs and the sound effect that was audible at the time of the occurrence is being audibly output, and an operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is set as an operation target that allows operation reception multiple times is operated to receive the operation, there are two cases: the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden (first E reception period (see FIG. 253(h)), sixth E reception period (see FIG. 271(h))), and the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is continued without being hidden (second E reception period (see FIG. 258(h))). Note that "the case where the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is continued without being hidden" assumes a case where an operation is received during the second E reception period (see FIG. 258(h)) when the sound effect that was audible at the time of the occurrence is in an audible output state before being made inaudible.

In addition, when a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs and the sound effects that were audible at the time of the occurrence are made inaudible, if an operation means that is set as an operation target that allows operation acceptance multiple times is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that had been appearing in the imitation image display corresponding to that operation means is made to continue without being hidden.

According to this configuration, when a "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, if the sound effects that were audible at the time of the occurrence during the "special type of model image display acceptance period" are made inaudible, it is suggested that the periodic changes that had appeared in the model image display until then will not be hidden but will continue when an operation is accepted, but if the sound effects that were audible at the time of the occurrence during the "special type of model image display acceptance period" are still being audibly output, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the periodic changes that had appeared in the model image display until then will be hidden or not.

Alternatively, the fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270) may be generated as a "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)," and the first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) and the sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271) may not be generated. In other words, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" may have a case where the performance sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is not made inaudible (the fifth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 270)) until the end of the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)," and a case where the performance sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible (the second E reception period (see FIG. 258 (h))). In this case, regardless of whether the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence of the "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is made inaudible, when the operation means set as an operation object that allows operation acceptance multiple times during the "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is operated to accept the operation, the periodic change appearing in the model image display based on this is not made invisible, and the periodic change appearing in the model image display will continue as it is, regardless of whether the operation acceptance (in a manner that does not end the acceptance period) is accepted. In this regard, when the "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs and the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is audibly output, when the operation means (here, the operation button 410) set as an operation object that allows operation acceptance multiple times is operated to accept the operation, there are cases where the EF display is displayed based on the acceptance of the operation (see FIG. 270(d)), and cases where the EF display is not displayed even if the operation is accepted (see FIG. 258(d)). Note that "when the EF display is not displayed even when the operation is accepted" here refers to a case where the operation is accepted during the second E acceptance period (see FIG. 258(h)) when the sound effect that was audible at the time of its occurrence is in an audible output state before being made inaudible. Also, when a "special type of mock image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is occurring and the sound effect that was audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible, and an operation is accepted by operating an operating means that is set as an operation target that allows multiple operation acceptances, this will trigger the EF display not to be displayed (see FIG. 258(d)).

According to this configuration, when a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, if the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence during the "special type of imitation image display acceptance period" is made inaudible, it is suggested that the "EF display" will not be displayed when an operation is accepted. However, if an operation is accepted while the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence during the "special type of imitation image display acceptance period" is still being audibly output, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the "EF display" will be displayed when an operation is accepted (whether or not the fact that an operation has been accepted is properly notified). Therefore, when the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence during the "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is made inaudible, it becomes possible to recognize in advance that multiple operations will be required under conditions in which it is difficult to recognize that an operation is being accepted, and it becomes possible to play the game under a sense of tension.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, the same performance sound (specific background music) is audibly output during each reception period, but different performance sounds may be audibly output.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the model image display acceptance period can be classified into "model image display acceptance periods of a type that can occur while specific BGM is being audibly output (e.g., the first E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 253, etc.), the second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258, etc.), the third E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 263, etc.), the sixth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 271, etc.))" and "model image display acceptance periods of a type that cannot occur while specific BGM is being audibly output (e.g., the fourth E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 266, etc.))". The "image display reception period" can be further classified into a "specific type of imitation image display reception period (third E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.))" in which only an image display imitation of an operation means set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted once is displayed as the imitation image display, and a "special type of imitation image display reception period (for example, first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), sixth E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.))" in which at least an image display imitation of an operation means set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted multiple times is displayed as the imitation image display. In a "specific type of model image display reception period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))," when an operation means that is set as an operation target that allows operation reception once and is set as an object to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation reception is performed, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the operation reception being performed (see, for example, FIG. 253(b), FIG. 263(b), FIG. 271(b), etc.), and in a "special type of model image display reception period (e.g., second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))," when an operation means that is set as an operation target that allows operation reception multiple times and is set as an object to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation reception is performed, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means can be continued (see, for example, FIG. 258 to FIG. 262).

With this configuration, when an operation is accepted while a specific BGM is being audibly output, it is difficult to recognize whether a "specific type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed once)" or a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed multiple times)" is occurring, thereby favorably maintaining a sense of tension, while at the same time, depending on whether the periodic changes that had appeared in the imitation image display up until that point have been hidden when the operation is accepted, it is possible to suggest whether a "specific type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed once)" or a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed multiple times)" is occurring.

In addition, the "special type of model image display acceptance period" in the above-mentioned performance example can be further classified into a "first special type of model image display acceptance period (e.g., first E acceptance period (Fig. 253, etc.), sixth E acceptance period (Fig. 271, etc.))" in which, when an operation means set as an operation target that allows operation acceptance multiple times is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden, and a "second special type of model image display acceptance period (second E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))" in which the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is not hidden and continues. The reception period (for example, the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), the sixth E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.)) occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly outputted, regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the "first special type model image display reception period" occurs, and the "second special type model image display reception period (second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.))" may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly outputted or while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state, depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the "second special type model image display reception period" occurs. According to this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when a "multiple times allowable period" occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly outputted, it can be used as a criterion for determining whether or not this is "a period that makes the periodic changes that have appeared up until then in response to operation reception non-display", so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. As mentioned above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the pattern variation is performed based on the result (type of variation pattern).

When such a configuration is adopted, for the "first special type of replica image display reception period (e.g., the first E reception period (Figure 253, etc.), the sixth E reception period (Figure 271, etc.))" in which the periodic changes that had appeared in the replica image display up until that point are hidden when an operation is received, it is important that the mode of the specific type of sound effects (specific BGM) does not change according to the type of previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the first special type of replica image display reception period occurs.

It goes without saying that in the "second special type model image display acceptance period (second E acceptance period (e.g., FIG. 258))", no matter what form the specific type of sound effect (here, specific BGM) takes depending on the type of previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the second special type model image display acceptance period occurs, the same form will be displayed as the post-acceptance display.

Alternatively, the first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) and the sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271) may be generated as a type of replica image display reception period that cannot occur while specific BGM is being audibly output. In other words, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the replica image display reception period can be classified into "a type of replica image display reception period that can occur while specific BGM is being audibly output (e.g., the second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258), the third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263))" and "a type of replica image display reception period that cannot occur while specific BGM is being audibly output (e.g., the first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), the fourth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266), the sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" and "a type of replica image display reception period that cannot occur while specific BGM is being audibly output." The "types of imitation image display reception periods" that may occur during the period can be further classified into a "specific type of imitation image display reception period (third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263))" in which only an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted once is displayed as the imitation image display, and a "special type of imitation image display reception period (e.g., second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))" in which at least an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted multiple times is displayed as the imitation image display. In a "specific type of model image display reception period (third E reception period (e.g., FIG. 263))," when an operation means that is set as an operation target that allows operation reception once and is set as an object to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation is received, the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to that operation means is hidden based on the operation being received (see, for example, FIG. 263(b) and the like), and in a "special type of model image display reception period (e.g., second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))," when an operation means that is set as an operation target that allows operation reception multiple times and is set as an object to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation is received, the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the model image display corresponding to that operation means can be continued (see, for example, FIGS. 258 to 262).

Even with this configuration, when an operation is accepted while a specific BGM is being audibly output, it is difficult to recognize whether a "specific type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed once)" or a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed multiple times)" is occurring, thereby maintaining a good sense of tension, while at the same time, depending on whether the periodic changes that had appeared in the imitation image display up until that point were hidden when the operation was accepted, it is possible to suggest whether a "specific type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed once)" or a "special type of imitation image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed multiple times)" is occurring.

Also in this case, the "special type of model image display reception period (second E reception period (Figure 258, etc.))" may occur while specific BGM is being audibly output or while specific BGM is in an inaudible state, depending on the type of previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "special type of model image display reception period" occurs. And, the "type of model image display reception period that cannot occur while specific BGM is being audibly output (for example, first E reception period (Figure 253, etc.), fourth E reception period (Figure 266, etc.), sixth E reception period (Figure 271, etc.))" may occur while specific BGM is in an inaudible state, regardless of the type of previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the reception period occurs. With this configuration, even if a "multiple allowable periods" occurs while the specific BGM is inaudible, if the player remembers the type of previous variation pattern, they will be able to guess what type the "multiple allowable periods" are, which will encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when they are not given an opportunity to operate.

Alternatively, as a "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)", a second E reception period (such as FIG. 258) and a fifth E reception period (such as FIG. 270) may be generated, and a first E reception period (such as FIG. 253) and a sixth E reception period (such as FIG. 271) may not be generated. In this regard, the second E reception period (such as FIG. 258) of the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" may be generated while a specific BGM is being audibly output or while a specific BGM is in an inaudible state, depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the second E reception period (such as FIG. 258) occurs, whereas the fifth E reception period (such as FIG. 270) of the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" may be configured in either of the following configurations a and b.
a. Regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the relevant acceptance period occurs, it occurs only when the specific BGM is in an audible state.
b. Regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the relevant acceptance period occurs, it occurs only when the specific BGM is in an inaudible state.

Whether the above configurations a or b are adopted, when a "multiple times allowable period" occurs, "periodic changes that have appeared up until then in response to operation reception will not be hidden", making it difficult to recognize whether the operation reception is appropriate when multiple operations are being performed. However, when an operation is received during the 5E reception period (such as FIG. 270), unlike the 2E reception period (such as FIG. 270), an EF display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. Therefore, whether the above configurations a or b are adopted, by remembering the type of the previous variation pattern, the player can recognize in advance whether an EF display corresponding to the operation reception will be displayed (whether a notification is given as to whether the operation reception is appropriate), and can play the game in a tense atmosphere.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of presentation, first, an acceptance allowance period can be generated during which acceptance of operations on the operation means (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during this acceptance allowance period, at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. Also, during the acceptance allowance period, a "reception period related periodicity display", which is an image display that may show periodic changes, can be displayed, and at least a "multiple acceptance period" during which acceptance of operations is accepted multiple times is provided as part of the acceptance allowance period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, as the "multiple times allowed period", at least a "specific multiple times allowed period (first E reception period (Figure 253, etc.))" in which the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are at least displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period related periodicity display", and a "special multiple times allowed period (second E reception period (Figure 258, etc.))" in which the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are at least displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period related periodicity display". In the "specific multiple times allowed period", each time an operation that is allowed multiple times is accepted, the periodic change that has been displayed up until that point in time in the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden.

With this configuration, during the "specific multiple-times allowed period," it becomes possible to check the number of times that an operation has been accepted by checking the number of times that the periodic change shown in the "first periodicity display SH1" has been hidden.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "specific multiple-times allowed period (first E reception period (Figure 253, etc.))" in the above-mentioned performance example, when the period occurs, a reception permission sound is audibly output, and each time an operation that is allowed multiple times (an operation that does not end the reception period) is received, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden in the "first periodicity display SH1", but the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is continued in the "second periodicity display SH2" (see Figure 256 (g2) and Figure 257 (l3)). In addition, in the "special multiple-times allowed period (second E reception period (Figure 258, etc.))", when the period occurs, a reception permission sound is not audibly output, and each time an operation that is allowed multiple times (an operation that does not end the reception period) is received, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is continued in both the "third periodicity display SH3" and the "fourth periodicity display SH4" (see Figure 261 (f2) and Figure 262 (i3)). That is, in this case, the presence or absence of an audible output of the reception permission sound can suggest "whether it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted by checking the state of the reception period-related periodicity display when the operation has been accepted." Also, even if an audible output of the reception permission sound has been made (if it is suggested that it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted), if a person mistakenly focuses on the "second periodicity display SH2" instead of the "first periodicity display SH1," it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted, so it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

However, as for the "specific multiple-times permissible period" in which at least the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period-related periodicity display" as the "multiple-times permissible period", they may occur as the 6E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271) rather than the 1E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253). That is, in this case, each time an operation that is permitted multiple times (an operation that does not end the reception period) is received, the periodic changes that have appeared up until that point are hidden in both the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2, which makes it easy to recognize whether the operation reception has been performed properly. However, in this case, it is preferable that the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 start to be displayed at the same timing (see FIG. 271(e)). It is also preferable that the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1 and the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH2 are performed with the same periodic time.

In addition, during a "specific multiple-times allowed period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) or sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))," when a first operating means (e.g., operation button 410) is operated, an operation is accepted, which serves as a trigger for hiding the periodic changes in the "reception period related periodicity display," and during a "special multiple-times allowed period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258)," when a second operating means different from the first operating means (e.g., sword ornament 5001) is operated, an operation is accepted, but this does not serve as a trigger for changing the periodic changes in the "reception period related periodicity display."

In addition, when a 6E reception period (such as FIG. 271) is generated as a "specific multiple-times allowable period", the time required for one periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 will be the same. In contrast, in a "special multiple-times allowable period (such as the 2E reception period (FIG. 258)), the time required for one periodic change of the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 differs from each other, so that it becomes possible to suggest the type of reception period that is occurring through the relationship of the time required for periodic changes in the "reception period-related periodicity display". Note that, in the 1E reception period (such as FIG. 253), the time required for one periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 may also be the same.

In addition, when a first E reception period (such as FIG. 253) is generated as a "specific multiple-times allowed period", the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed is made different from each other. In contrast, in a "special multiple-times allowed period (second E reception period (such as FIG. 258))", the timing at which the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed are made the same, so that it is possible to suggest the type of reception period that is occurring through the relationship in the display timing of the "reception period-related periodicity display". Note that in a sixth E reception period (such as FIG. 271), the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed may also be made different from each other.

In addition, when the first E reception period (such as FIG. 253) is generated as a "specific multiple-times allowed period", the premonition effect display ZED is performed at the time of its generation, and the premonition effect display ZED is displayed in such a way that only the first periodicity display SH1 of the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 is difficult to see. More specifically, the premonition effect display ZED is displayed in a form overlapping the first periodicity display SH1, but is not displayed in a form overlapping the second periodicity display SH2 (it is not displayed in a position overlapping the second periodicity display SH2, or is displayed behind the second periodicity display SH2). With this configuration, it becomes possible to suggest which of the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 one should focus on to easily recognize whether the operation reception has been performed properly, based on whether it is difficult to see in relation to the premonition effect display ZED.

When a 6E reception period (such as FIG. 271) is generated as a "specific multiple-times allowed period," the premonition effect display ZED is also displayed when the period occurs, but it is desirable that the premonition effect display ZED is displayed in a manner that makes both the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 difficult to see. In other words, in this case, the premonition effect display ZED is displayed in front of and overlapping both the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH1.

In addition, in the "specific multiple-times allowed period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) and sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" in the above-mentioned performance example, each time an operation that is allowed multiple times is received (an operation reception that does not end the reception period), the periodic change that had appeared up until that point is hidden in the "first periodicity display SH1", but the periodic change that had appeared up until that point is continued in the "second periodicity display SH2" (see FIG. 253(e)). In addition, in the "special multiple-times allowed period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))", even if an operation that is allowed multiple times is received (an operation reception that does not end the reception period), the periodic change that had appeared up until that point is not hidden but continues in both the "third periodicity display SH3" and the "fourth periodicity display SH4" (see FIG. 258(e)). In addition, in the "specific multiple-times permissible period (first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) and sixth E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.))," the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is not made inaudible until the end of the "specific multiple-times permissible period" (see FIG. 253(h)), and in the "special multiple-times permissible period (second E reception period)," the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is made inaudible until the end of the "specific multiple-times permissible period" (see FIG. 258(h)). In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest "whether it is possible to recognize whether or not an operation has been properly accepted by checking the mode of the acceptance period-related periodicity display when an operation has been accepted" through whether or not the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is made inaudible until the end of the acceptance period (valid period). In particular, if the "specific multiple-time allowance period" occurs as a 1E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) rather than a 6E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271), even if the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is not made inaudible, a person who mistakenly focuses on the "second periodicity display SH2" instead of the "first periodicity display SH1" will find it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In addition, the "specific multiple permissible period (the first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) and the sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" in the above-mentioned performance examples occurs while a specific type of performance sound (here, a specific BGM) is being audibly output, but the "special multiple permissible period (the second E reception period)" may occur while a specific type of performance sound (here, a specific BGM) is being audibly output, or may occur while a specific type of performance sound (here, a specific BGM) is not being audibly output. That is, in this case, when a "multiple permissible period" occurs while a specific type of sound effect (here, specific BGM) is not being audibly output, it is suggested that this is a "special multiple permissible period (second E acceptance period)", i.e., the appearance of the "acceptance period related periodicity display (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4)" will not change when an operation is accepted. In contrast, when a "multiple permissible period" occurs while a specific type of sound effect (here, specific BGM) is being audibly output, it becomes difficult to recognize whether this is a "specific multiple permissible period" or a "special multiple permissible period", and therefore it is possible to encourage the user to pay close attention to whether the appearance of the "acceptance period related periodicity display" changes when an operation is accepted.

In this regard, in a "specific multiple allowance period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) or sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))," a specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) is not made inaudible or not made inaudible before the specific multiple allowance period occurs according to the type of previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the specific multiple allowance period occurs, but in a "special multiple allowance period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))," a specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) may be made inaudible before the "special multiple allowance period" occurs according to the type of previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "special multiple allowance period" occurs (when a special multiple allowance period occurs with a specific type of effect sound in an inaudible state), or may not be made inaudible (when a special multiple allowance period occurs with a specific type of effect sound being audibly output).

With this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when a "multiple times allowed period" occurs, it will be easier for the player to recognize whether it is a "specific multiple times allowed period" or a "special multiple times allowed period", which will encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. As mentioned above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the pattern variation is performed based on the result of the determination (type of variation pattern).

When adopting such a configuration, it is important that for a "specific multiple allowable period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) or sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))", the mode of the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) does not change according to the type of previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the specific multiple allowable period occurs. In this sense, for the "specific multiple allowable period", as in the above-mentioned performance example, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may always be in an audible state at the time the "specific multiple allowable period" occurs, or alternatively, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible before the "specific multiple allowable period" occurs, and the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made to occur only while the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state. Alternatively, the "specific multiple-time allowable period" may include a type of reception period that can occur only when a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is in an audible state, and a type of reception period that can occur only when a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state. Even with this configuration, there is no change in which a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is in an inaudible state or remains in an audible state depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

It goes without saying that in the "special multiple-time allowed period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))", no matter what form the specific type of sound effect (here, specific BGM) takes depending on the type of previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the special multiple-time allowed period occurs, the same form will be displayed as the post-reception display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of performance, when a "specific multiple-times allowable period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253))" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed are different (see FIG. 253(e)), but when a "special multiple-times allowable period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))" occurs, the timing at which the third periodicity display SH3 is displayed and the timing at which the fourth periodicity display SH4 is displayed are the same (see FIG. 258(e)). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether a "specific multiple-times allowable period" or a "special multiple-times allowable period" will occur, based on whether there is a difference in the display timing of the two types of periodicity displays as the reception period.

In addition, in the 6E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) in the above-mentioned performance example, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed are the same, but the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed may be different from each other. In addition, the 6E reception period may be generated as a "specific multiple-times allowed period" instead of the above-mentioned 1E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253). Even with this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether a "specific multiple-times allowed period" or a "special multiple-times allowed period" will occur as the reception period in which the two types of periodicity displays appear, based on whether there is a difference in their display timing.

The first periodicity display SH1 may be displayed after the second periodicity display SH2, or may be displayed before the second periodicity display SH2. When the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed before the second periodicity display SH2, the periodic change may not start at the time of the first periodicity display SH1 being displayed, but may start at the timing when the second periodicity display is displayed or thereafter. When the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed before the first periodicity display SH1, the periodic change may not start at the time of the first periodicity display SH2 being displayed, but may start at the timing when the first periodicity display is displayed or thereafter. The timing when the periodicity display is displayed means the timing when at least a part of the periodicity display is displayed.

However, when the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed before the first periodicity display SH1, it is preferable to start the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH2 before the first periodicity display is displayed, and to start the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 while the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH2 is being performed. In other words, in this case, during the first E reception period, while the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH2, which is the side where the periodic change is to be hidden, is being performed, the first periodicity display SH1, which is the side where the periodic change is to be hidden, starts to be displayed, so that the second periodicity display SH2 can be used as a criterion for determining whether the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 has become hidden (interrupted).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of the performance, during the reception period in which only the image display imitating the operation means that allows only one operation reception is displayed (the 3rd E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.), the 4th E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.)), there are cases where there is only one periodicity display (the 5th periodicity display SH5) and cases where there are two periodicity displays (the 6th periodicity display SH6, the 7th periodicity display SH7). That is, in this case, when there is only one periodicity display (the 5th periodicity display SH5), it is suggested that only one operation reception is allowed. In contrast, when two periodicity displays (the 6th periodicity display SH6, the 7th periodicity display SH7) are displayed, it is difficult to know whether only one operation reception is allowed or multiple operations are allowed, and it is possible to provide an operation opportunity under tension.

In particular, in the example presentation described above, the time required for one periodic change in the sixth periodic display (period E time) and the time required for one periodic change in the third periodic display (period E time) are set to be the same, making it even more difficult to tell whether an operation is permitted to be accepted only once or multiple times.

However, during the 4E reception period (e.g., FIG. 266), of the 6th periodicity display SH6 and the 7th periodicity display SH7, the 6th periodicity display SH6 undergoes a periodic change with a period E time that may also appear during the 1E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), but the 7th periodicity display SH7 undergoes a periodic change with a period G time that does not appear during the 1E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253).

In the above-mentioned example, the periodic time of the fifth periodic display SH5 and the sixth periodic display SH6 is the same as the periodic time of the third periodic display SH3 (period E time), but the periodic time of the first periodic display SH is shorter than these. The periodic time of this first periodic display SH is set to be shorter than the periodic displays SH4 and SH7, which suggests that a state in which multiple operations are permitted is in place.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of the performance, when a "specific multiple-times permissible period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253))" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and its periodic change starts is different from the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed and its periodic change starts, but when a "special multiple-times permissible period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))" occurs, the timing at which the third periodicity display SH3 is displayed and its periodic change starts is the same as the timing at which the fourth periodicity display SH4 is displayed and its periodic change starts. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether a "specific multiple-times permissible period" or a "special multiple-times permissible period" will occur as the reception period in which the two types of periodicity displays appear, based on whether there is a difference in the timing at which those periodic changes start.

In addition, in the 6E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253) according to the above-mentioned performance example, the timing when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and its periodic change starts is the same as the timing when the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed and its periodic change starts, but the timing when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and its periodic change starts may be different from the timing when the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed and its periodic change starts. In addition, the 6E reception period may be generated as a "specific multiple-times allowed period" instead of the above-mentioned 1E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253). Even with this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether a "specific multiple-times allowed period" or a "special multiple-times allowed period" will occur as the reception period in which the two types of periodicity displays appear, based on whether there is a difference in the timing when the periodic changes start.

The first periodicity display SH1 may be displayed after the second periodicity display SH2 and its periodic change may also start after the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH1, or it may be displayed before the second periodicity display SH2 and its periodic change may also start before the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH1.

The first periodicity display SH1 may be displayed before the second periodicity display SH2, but the periodic change may not start at the time of display, but may start at the timing when the second periodicity display is displayed and the periodic change starts, or thereafter. In other words, in this case, during the first E reception period, the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1, which is the side where the periodic change is hidden, starts while the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH2, which is the side where the periodic change is continued, is being performed, so that the second periodicity display SH2 can be used as a criterion for determining whether the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 has become hidden (interrupted). Note that the timing at which the periodicity display is displayed means the timing at which at least a part of the periodicity display is displayed.

However, there is no essential configuration between the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed or the timing at which the periodic change starts and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed or the timing at which the periodic change starts, and this may be set as appropriate.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed upon the occurrence of a "specific multiple permissible period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))," another display (here, premonition performance display ZED) is being displayed, and the first periodicity display SH1 begins to be displayed behind the other display (here, premonition performance display ZED), but the second periodicity display SH2 is not displayed behind the other display (here, premonition performance display ZED), and when the third periodicity display SH3 and fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed upon the occurrence of a "special multiple permissible period (second E reception period (e.g., FIG. 258))," neither the third periodicity display SH3 nor the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed behind any other display at the time when their display begins. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether a "specific multiple-times allowed period" or a "special multiple-times allowed period" is occurring at a relatively early point when the periodicity display starts to be displayed. Moreover, even if a "specific multiple-times allowed period" occurs, if a person mistakenly focuses on the "second periodicity display SH2" instead of the "first periodicity display SH1", they may mistakenly believe that a "special multiple-times allowed period" is occurring because the "second periodicity display SH2" is not displayed behind any other display at the time when it starts to be displayed, and this is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In the above-mentioned performance example, when a "specific multiple-times allowed period (first E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), sixth E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" occurs, the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed while another display (here, the premonition performance display ZED) that can be displayed in front of and overlaps the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed, but the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed in a manner that is not made difficult to see by the other display (here, the premonition performance display ZED). However, a manner in which it is not made difficult to see by another display means that the second periodicity display SH2 is not displayed behind any other display, and for example, it may be displayed so that its display position does not overlap with the other display.

The second periodic display SH2 changes periodically even when the premonition effect display ZED is displayed. The second periodic display SH2 may start to be displayed before the premonition effect display ZED, or may start to change periodically before the premonition effect display ZED is displayed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the first E reception period, the second E reception period, the third E reception period, and the fourth E reception period may occur sequentially within one variation pattern. It is sufficient that the occurrence conditions (occurrence timing) and the post-reception display are different from each other.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modified example (Figs. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG)" can be displayed in any of a number of display modes with different expectation levels, and no matter which of the multiple display modes it is displayed in, a periodic change appears as the "special image display."

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, when the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed in a first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(a)) among the above-mentioned multiple display modes, it is capable of changing to a display mode different from the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(e)), and when it is displayed in a second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(a)) among the above-mentioned multiple display modes, it is capable of changing to a display mode different from the second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(e) and (g)). When the "special image display" changes from a first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(a)) to a display mode different from the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(e)), a change occurs in the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" (see FIG. 272). However, when the "special image display" changes from a second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(a)) to a display mode different from the second display mode (here, the modes shown in FIG. 273(e) and (g)), there are cases where the time required for one periodic change does not change (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(e)) and cases where the time required for one periodic change changes (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(g)). With this configuration, the "special image display" is expected to improve presentation because the ease of recognition of whether or not a change has occurred differs between when the display mode changes from the first display mode and when the display mode changes from the second display mode.

In addition, whether the "special image display (here, an integrated model image display IG)" is displayed in the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(a)) or the second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(a)), if the display mode changes, it is suggested that there is a high probability of winning the jackpot, which can increase interest in the game.

In particular, according to the above-mentioned modified example (Figs. 272 to 274), when the "special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG)" is displayed in the second display mode (here, the mode shown in Fig. 273(a)), if the display mode changes, there are cases where the time required for one periodic change does not change (here, the mode shown in Fig. 273(e)) and cases where the time required for one periodic change changes (here, the mode shown in Fig. 273(g)), but it is suggested that the expectation level is higher when the time required for one periodic change also changes. In other words, in this case, when the "special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG)" appears in the first display mode (here, the mode shown in Fig. 272(a)) among the above-mentioned multiple display modes (see Fig. 272(a)), if the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change will necessarily change, so that it is expected to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned modified example (Figs. 272 to 274), even if the "special image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" is displayed in the first display mode (here, the mode shown in Fig. 272(a)) or the second display mode (here, the mode shown in Fig. 273(a)), there are cases where the display mode does not change (here, the modes shown in Figs. 272(c) and 273(c)), which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In this case, the special image display will be hidden without changing the display mode when the specified timing arrives.

If there is a change in the time required for the periodic change, the display mode may be changed so that the external shape (shape) of the "special image display" changes, and if there is no change in the time required for the periodic change, the display mode may be changed so that the external shape (shape) of the special image display does not change.

It is desirable for the special image display to be an image display that indicates the expected probability of the pattern change in the execution state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the modified example (Figures 272 to 274) described above, the "special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG)" may be displayed such that the time required for one periodic change is a second time (here, period B2 time) or such that the time required for one periodic change is displayed as a first time (here, period B1 time) which is different from the second time, and when the "special image display" is displayed such that the time required for one periodic change is the first time, the display mode of the "special image display" can be changed, and when the display mode is changed, the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" may change or may not change (see Figure 273), and when the "special image display" is displayed such that the time required for one periodic change is the second time, the display mode of the special image display does not change (see Figure 274). With this configuration, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the display mode is likely to change depending on whether the "special image display" is displayed using the first time (here, cycle B1 time) or the second time (here, cycle B2 time) as the time required for one periodic change. In addition, when the display mode is displayed using the first time (here, cycle B1 time), there are cases where the time required for one periodic change also changes when the display mode changes, and cases where the time does not change, and the degree of expectation differs between these cases, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

The display modes shown in FIG. 273(a) in the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" and the display mode shown in FIG. 274(a) in the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" may be the same as each other if the time required for one periodic change is different.

Furthermore, when the time required for one periodic change is the first time (period B1 time shown in FIG. 273(a)), if the display mode of the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" changes, causing a change in the time required for one periodic change (mode shown in FIG. 273(g)), the changed time may be the second time (period B2 time shown in FIG. 274(a)). In this case, the display mode may also be the same as the display mode shown in FIG. 274(a).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modified example (Figs. 272 to 274), when the time required for one periodic change is the first time (period B1 time shown in Fig. 273(a)) and the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed, its display mode changes in either case, where there is no change in the time required for one periodic change (mode shown in Fig. 273(e)) or where there is a change in said time (mode shown in Fig. 273(g)), and in either case, a high degree of expectation is suggested. In this regard, in the above-mentioned example, the degree of increase in the degree of expectation suggested is greater when there is an additional change in the time required for one periodic change, so that the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained when the display mode of the "special image display" changes.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modified example (Figs. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG)" may be displayed in such a way that the time required for one periodic change is a first time (here, period B1 time) or in such a way that the time required for one periodic change is a third time (here, period B3 time) different from the first time. When the display mode of the special image display changes (see, for example, Figs. 273(e) and (g)), the periodic change that had been displayed up until that point is hidden (see, for example, Fig. 273(d)), and then the periodic change of the special image display is displayed (see, for example, Figs. 273(e) and (g)).

According to this configuration, when the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) changes, the periodic change that had been appearing until then is hidden, and then the periodic change of the special image display appears. Therefore, when the display mode of the special image display changes, it is expected that interest will be attracted as to whether there has been a change in the time required for the periodic change.

In particular, in the modified example shown in FIG. 273, when the display mode of the "special image display" changes, there are cases where the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" changes (see, for example, FIG. 273(e)), and cases where the time does not change (see, for example, FIG. 273(g)). This is expected to maintain interest in the game in an appropriate manner by temporarily hiding the periodic change that was previously displayed (even if there is no change).

For example, when the mode shown in FIG. 273(a) changes to the mode shown in FIG. 273(e), or when the mode shown in FIG. 273(a) changes to the mode shown in FIG. 273(g), a plurality of non-display times (first non-display time, second non-display time) may be prepared as the non-display time from when the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden until the periodic change of the "special image display" starts again. And, even if the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden for either the first non-display time or the second non-display time, it is desirable that there is a possibility that the mode shown in FIG. 273(e) will appear and a possibility that the mode shown in FIG. 273(g) will appear. In this regard, it is more desirable that the expectation of winning will be different between when the periodic change is hidden only for the first non-display time and when the periodic change is hidden only for the second non-display time. In other words, in this case, if the non-display time for the side with high expectation ends, it is expected that the mode with the higher expectation (the mode shown in FIG. 273(g)) will appear, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, even if there is no change from the state shown in FIG. 273(a) (or FIG. 272(a)), if the periodic change that has been appearing until then is temporarily hidden (see FIG. 273(b) (or FIG. 272(b))), it will be possible to suggest whether or not the display state of the "special image display" will change depending on the length of time that the periodic change that has been appearing until then is hidden, making it possible to maintain interest in the game in an appropriate manner.

As mentioned above, "hiding the periodic change" can be achieved by "hiding the special image display" to make it invisible, or by displaying another image in front of and overlapping the "special image display" to make it invisible, or by continuing to display the special image display but temporarily terminating any periodic changes that had been appearing and displaying it statically.

As a method of "restarting the periodic change", the periodic change may be restarted at the same time as the "special image display" is displayed in a visible state again, or the periodic change may be restarted after the "special image display" is displayed in a visible state again, or the periodic change may be restarted using the "special image display" that has interrupted (ended) the periodic change. In this regard, even when changing from one mode (for example, Fig. 273(a)→(e) or Fig. 273(a)→(g), etc.) to another mode, it is desirable to have a case where the time from when the "special image display" is hidden to when the "special image display" is displayed is longer than the time when the "special image display" is displayed (the periodic change is restarted with a delay after the redisplay of the "special image display"), or the time from when the "special image display" is hidden to when the "special image display" is displayed is the same as the time when the periodic change reappears (the redisplay of the "special image display" and the resumption of the periodic change are at the same timing). With this configuration, when the "special image display" changes, there are cases where the display mode after the change and the periodic change can be recognized at the same time, and cases where the display mode after the change can be recognized, but it is not possible to recognize whether the periodic change has changed or not. This makes it possible to appropriately improve the presentation even when the same change in mode occurs.

In the above-mentioned examples of effects (Figures 253 to 274), the timing at which each acceptance period occurs may be during a period in which a reach state is not formed, or during a period in which a reach state is formed.

[Period for accepting applications with special effects]
As illustrated in FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and the variable performance using the decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with the expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body movement (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movable body movement, etc., and the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance allowance period (valid period) during which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance period (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance period (valid period) will not be generated even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. In addition, the acceptance allowance period (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance (post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.) from the acceptance allowance period (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, an acceptance acceptance period can be generated in which acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is permitted, and when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance acceptance period, a post-acceptance change (such as a display change, an acceptance output sound, or light emission for a special effect) can occur according to the type of acceptance acceptance period that has been generated.

In addition, during the acceptance period, an operation-related display can be displayed that can only appear when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is accepted (acceptance acceptance period) or when the operation acceptance is accepted (acceptance acceptance period). Such an operation-related display is often displayed as a mock image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action (operation) is expressed as an image, but is not limited to this, and may be any image display that, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate. The "operation-related display (mock image display)" may have multiple forms with different degrees of expectation, and any of these multiple forms may be selectively displayed.

Moreover, since the "operation-related display" can only appear when the operation reception to the operation unit is permitted (reception permitted period) or when the operation reception is permitted (reception permitted period), it is sufficient that at least when the "operation-related display" is displayed, the reception permitted period necessarily occurs or the display is in a permitted state at the time of its display. Therefore, it is also possible for the reception permitted period to end before the "operation-related display" is hidden while it is displayed.

During the acceptance period, a remaining time display can be displayed to indicate the time remaining during which acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted. Such a remaining time display can be implemented, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time. At least one of the frame image and the gauge image can be implemented in multiple modes (for example, the speed at which the display area of the gauge image is reduced, an indication of the degree of expectation, an indication of the type of operation means, etc.), and the game can be implemented in any of these modes. In this case, a different degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear) can be suggested depending on which mode is implemented.

In addition, when an acceptance allowance period occurs, a premonition effect can be executed before this, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to act (suggesting that an acceptance allowance period will occur). Premonition effects are executed, for example, by displaying effects on the effect display device 1600 and outputting corresponding effect sounds.

Note that, in addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern," a variation pattern that generates an acceptance acceptance period (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment may be provided. Also, in addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern," a variation pattern that generates an acceptance acceptance period (valid period) at a predetermined timing before the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment may be provided.

In addition, including the examples mentioned above and below, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to those that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact action by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "action by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation unit) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

Incidentally, various types of acceptance allowance periods (validity periods) are available in this embodiment, including different types of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound, whether output is present, different audible BGM output status, different number of times operation acceptance is permitted within the acceptance allowance period (validity period), and whether the auto-repeat function or automatic button function is enabled.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with the following special presentation characteristics between multiple acceptance allowance periods, thereby enhancing the presentation characteristics when an acceptance allowance period occurs and maintaining a sense of tension when an acceptance allowance period occurs. It is not necessary to provide all of the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below. For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing by providing only one of the presentation characteristics (any configuration), or it may selectively provide several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it may appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in playing related to the acceptance allowance period is provided.

[Configuration 1-E]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the player does not perform any operation, the same post-acceptance change as when the player performs the operation can be generated (automatic button function). On top of this, a multiple operation allowance period can be generated in which both the operation acceptance for the first operation part (e.g., the operation button 410) and the operation acceptance for the second operation part (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) can be permitted, and when either the operation for the first operation part or the operation for the second operation part is performed during the multiple operation allowance period, a post-acceptance change can be generated according to the type of the side on which the operation is performed. Also, it is possible to display a model image display that imitates the object of operation by the player.

In this regard, during the multiple operation permitted period, even if the acceptance of an operation is permitted, there are cases where a display imitating the operation target is not made. Note that the "first operation unit" and "second operation unit" in configuration 1-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 1-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation units as the "first operation unit" and "second operation unit" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different operation units. They may also mean the same "operation unit" as an operation unit with a different name in other configurations.

This configuration allows the same post-acceptance changes to occur even when no operation is performed by the player as when an operation is performed by the player, and allows a multiple operation acceptance period to occur during which both operation acceptance for the first operation unit and operation acceptance for the second operation unit are permitted, and during this multiple operation acceptance period, even if operation acceptance is permitted, a display imitating the operation target may not be displayed. In other words, in this case, it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed even if some players are unable to understand the complex presentation and therefore unable to operate properly.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 1-E" is adopted, at least a first multiple operation allowance period and a second multiple operation allowance period are prepared as the multiple operation allowance period, and in the first multiple operation allowance period, both the first model image display modeled on the first operation unit and the second model image display modeled on the second operation unit are displayed as the model image display, and in the second multiple operation allowance period, the first model image display is displayed and the second model image display is not displayed. According to this configuration, in the second multiple operation allowance period, it is possible to provide a novel performance in which the fact that only one (the second operation unit) of the two operation units (the first operation unit, the second operation unit) in a state in which operation reception is permitted is concealed, and it is expected that the interest in playing the game will be improved. Note that the "first multiple operation allowance period" and the "second multiple operation allowance period" in the configuration 1-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-E. Therefore, it may mean the same allowable period as the "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "second multiple operation allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different allowable periods. It may also mean the same "allowable period" as an allowable period with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as described below, during the "second multiple operation allowance period", between the first operation unit on the side that is the target of the model image display and the second operation unit on the side that is not the target of the model image display, the automatic reception function (automatic button function) is enabled only for the operation unit on the side that is the target of the model image display, but during the "first multiple operation allowance period", even though both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are the targets of the model image display, the automatic reception function (automatic button function) may not be enabled for either of these operation units. According to this configuration, by enabling the automatic reception function (automatic button function) only for the operation unit on the side that is the target of the model image display during the "second multiple operation allowance period", it can be expected that it will be even more difficult to recognize that the second operation unit was in a situation where it was concealed while being able to accept operations. In contrast, in the "first multiple operation permitted period," even though both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are subject to imitation image display, the automatic reception function (automatic button function) is not enabled for either of these operation units. This increases the difficulty of playing the game even when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are subject to imitation image display, and is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the "second multiple operation allowable period", "a specific type of effect sound is suppressed or inaudible before the second multiple operation allowable period occurs, or is not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the second multiple operation allowable period occurs, but in the first multiple operation allowable period, "a specific type of effect sound is suppressed or inaudible before the first multiple operation allowable period occurs, or is not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the first multiple operation allowable period occurs. With this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, it becomes easier to recognize whether it is the "first multiple operation allowable period" or the "second multiple operation allowable period" when an operation opportunity is given, so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given.

For the "second multiple operation allowable period", it is desirable that the mode of the specific type of sound effect does not change depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the second multiple operation allowable period occurs. For example, the "second multiple operation allowable period" may be such that the specific type of sound effect is always made inaudible before the "second multiple operation allowable period" occurs, or such that the specific type of sound effect is always made audible at the time when the "second multiple operation allowable period" occurs.

In order to make it easier to recognize whether the operation opportunity is given during the "first multiple operation allowance period" or the "second multiple operation allowance period," it is desirable that, for the "first multiple operation allowance period," the same change occurs as a post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted, regardless of the form of the specific type of sound effect that was set according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the "first multiple operation allowable period", when either the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display (one of the post-acceptance changes) is displayed so as to appear to overlap the front side of the performance pattern, whereas in the "second multiple operation allowable period", when the second operation unit on the side that is not the target of the imitation image display is operated, the post-acceptance display (one of the post-acceptance changes) is displayed so as to appear to overlap the front side of the performance pattern, and when the first operation unit on the side that is the target of the imitation image display is operated, the post-acceptance display (one of the post-acceptance changes) may be displayed so as to appear to overlap the rear side of the performance pattern. With this configuration, it is expected that the appearance of the post-acceptance display in response to the operation of the first operation unit on the side that is the target of the imitation image display during the "second multiple operation allowable period" so as to appear to overlap the rear side of the performance pattern will suggest the possibility that there may have been a hidden operation unit that is available for operation.

Also, a third multiple operation allowable period may be allowed to occur (under different occurrence conditions) in addition to the second multiple operation allowable period as an operation allowable period during which it is concealed that only one (the second operation unit) of the two operation units (the first operation unit, the second operation unit) in a state in which operation reception is permitted is in a state in which reception is permitted. Furthermore, while the second multiple operation allowable period always occurs after a specific type of sound effect is suppressed or made inaudible before its occurrence, the third multiple operation allowable period may always occur while a specific type of sound effect is being output in a non-suppressed state.

In this case, also in the "third multiple operation allowance period," as in the "second multiple operation allowance period," a post-acceptance display (one of the post-acceptance changes) may be displayed so that it appears to be superimposed on the front side of the performance pattern when the second operation unit on the side that is not the target of the model image display is operated, and a post-acceptance display (one of the post-acceptance changes) may be displayed so that it appears to be superimposed on the rear side of the performance pattern when the first operation unit on the side that is the target of the model image display is operated.

In addition, for the "first multiple operation permitted period," "second multiple operation permitted period," and "third multiple operation permitted period" in configuration 1-E, it is desirable to display a different post-acceptance display depending on whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated.

In addition, it is desirable to set the "second multiple operation allowable period" and the "third multiple operation allowable period" to have a shorter period during which the state in which operations can be accepted is maintained, compared to the "first multiple operation allowable period". In other words, in this case, the player is required to determine within a limited time (within the effective time) that an operation unit different from the first operation unit (here, the second operation unit) is in a concealed state, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. On the other hand, even if the player is too distracted by whether or not an operation unit different from the first operation unit (here, the second operation unit) is in a concealed state and is unable to perform an operation within the effective time, the automatic button function is enabled, and the same post-acceptance change occurs as when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, so that it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game will be appropriately suppressed. In addition, the "first multiple operation allowable period" is also set to a relatively long period as its effective period, but in exchange for this, the automatic button function is not enabled, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 2-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation allowance period can be generated in which both the operation acceptance for the first operation unit (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) and the operation acceptance for the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) can be accepted, and when either the operation for the first operation unit or the operation for the second operation unit is performed during the multiple operation allowance period, a post-acceptance display according to the type of the operation acceptance can be displayed. Also, a model image display that imitates the object of operation by the player can be displayed, and at least a predetermined multiple operation allowance period is prepared as a type of multiple operation allowance period.

In this regard, during the specified multiple operation allowance period, only one operation reception is allowed for the first operation unit, and multiple operations are allowed for the second operation unit. When an operation is performed on the second operation unit, which may be allowed to receive multiple operations during the specified multiple operation allowance period, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but operation reception for the first operation unit is allowed even while the post-reception display is displayed. When an operation is performed on the first operation unit during the specified multiple operation allowance period while a post-reception display corresponding to an operation performed on the second operation unit is displayed, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-reception display (post-reception display corresponding to an operation performed on the second operation unit) that had been displayed until then is hidden as a result of the operation. Note that the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specified multiple operation allowance period" in configuration 2-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 2-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "first operation unit," "second operation unit," and "predetermined multiple operation allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

According to this configuration, during a specified multiple operation allowance period in which both operation acceptance for the first operation unit and operation acceptance for the second operation unit are permitted, if an operation is performed on the first operation unit while a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation performed on the second operation unit is being displayed, this triggers the display of a post-acceptance display corresponding to that operation, and the post-acceptance display that had been displayed up until that point (the post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation performed on the second operation unit) is hidden. This makes it easier to recognize which of the above operation units the post-acceptance display was displayed in response to, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 2-E" is adopted, at least a first multiple operation allowance period (corresponding to the above-mentioned "predetermined multiple operation allowance period") and the second multiple operation allowance period are provided as types of multiple operation allowance period, and in both the first multiple operation allowance period and the second multiple operation allowance period, when an operation is performed on a second operation unit in which multiple operation reception may be permitted, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but it may also be possible to allow reception of operations on the first operation unit even while the post-reception display is displayed. In this case, if an operation is performed on the first operation unit during the "first multiple operation permitted period" while a post-acceptance display is being displayed in response to an operation being performed on the second operation unit, the post-acceptance display in response to that operation is displayed, and the operation is used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display that had been displayed up until then (the post-acceptance display in response to an operation being performed on the second operation unit), and if an operation is performed on the first operation unit during the "second multiple operation permitted period" while a post-acceptance display in response to an operation being performed on the second operation unit is being displayed, the post-acceptance display in response to that operation is displayed, and the operation is not used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display that had been displayed up until then (the post-acceptance display in response to an operation being performed on the second operation unit).

With this configuration, when the game strategy is changed from "a state in which multiple operations have been performed on the second operation unit" to "operation on the first operation unit," the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance display in response to an operation being performed on the second operation unit) that was displayed until then may be hidden (first multiple operation allowable period) or not hidden (second multiple operation allowable period), which is expected to enhance the presentation when changing the game strategy and maintain a good sense of tension.

The "first multiple operation allowable period" and "second multiple operation allowable period" in configuration 2-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 2-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation allowable period as the "first multiple operation allowable period" and "second multiple operation allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different operation allowable periods. They may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 3-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a multiple operation allowable period can be generated in which both operation acceptance for the first operation unit (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) and operation acceptance for the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) are acceptable, and a first operation-related display can be displayed that can only appear when operation acceptance for the first operation unit is acceptable or when the operation acceptance is acceptable, and a second operation-related display can be displayed that can only appear when operation acceptance for the second operation unit is acceptable or when the operation acceptance is acceptable.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a first multiple operation allowable period and a second multiple operation allowable period as the multiple operation allowable period, and since both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display can be displayed during the first multiple operation allowable period and the second multiple operation allowable period, it is expected that the interest in playing the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" in the configuration 3-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different operation units and operation allowable periods. They may also mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as operation units and operation allowable periods with different names.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-E" is adopted, during the "first multiple operation allowable period", the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are both displayed, and the first operation unit is allowed to accept operations, and the second operation unit is allowed to accept operations. In contrast, during the "second multiple operation allowable period", the first operation unit is allowed to accept operations, and the second operation unit is allowed to accept operations, and the second operation unit is allowed to accept operations, and when an operation is accepted for the second operation unit under this circumstance, the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are both displayed, and the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are allowed to accept operations.

With this configuration, even if an operation allowance period occurs during which the fact that only one (the second operation unit) of the two operation units (the first operation unit, the second operation unit) is in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted is kept secret, the hidden state is released when the player tries to operate the operation unit that is kept secret, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. Note that, as for the "operation-related display", for example, it is often displayed as a mock image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action (operation) is expressed as an image, but it is not limited to this, and as mentioned above, it will suffice if the image display, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate.

[Configuration 4-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a multiple operation allowable period can be generated in which both operation acceptance for the first operation unit (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) and operation acceptance for the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) are acceptable, and a first operation-related display can be displayed that can only appear when operation acceptance for the first operation unit is acceptable or when the operation acceptance is acceptable, and a second operation-related display can be displayed that can only appear when operation acceptance for the second operation unit is acceptable or when the operation acceptance is acceptable.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a specific multiple operation allowance period as a multiple operation allowance period, and in the specific multiple operation allowance period, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, a post-acceptance overlap display is executed in which both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are difficult to see as one of the post-acceptance changes corresponding to the operation. This makes it possible to appropriately suggest to the player that the specific multiple operation allowance period in which both the operation acceptance on the first operation unit and the operation acceptance on the second operation unit are permitted has ended simply by performing an operation on the first operation unit. Note that the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific multiple operation allowance period" in the configuration 4-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-E. Therefore, the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific multiple operation allowance period" in the other configurations may mean the same operation unit and operation allowance period, respectively, or may mean different operation units and operation allowance periods, respectively. It may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permitted period" as the differently named operation unit or operation permitted period.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 4-E" is adopted, a special multiple operation allowance period is prepared as a type of multiple operation allowance period in addition to the specific multiple operation allowance period, and when an operation is accepted on the first operation unit during the special multiple operation allowance period, a special post-acceptance performance display is displayed as a post-acceptance change, indicating the degree of expectation that a predetermined result has been obtained, and a post-acceptance overlapping display is executed in which only the first operation-related display is difficult to see out of the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display, and the post-acceptance overlapping display corresponding to the specific multiple operation allowance period is always executed in the same display mode, but the post-acceptance overlapping display corresponding to the special multiple operation allowance period may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the mode (degree of expectation) of the special post-acceptance performance display.

According to this configuration, during the special multiple operation allowance period, the "post-acceptance overlap display" is an image display different from the special post-acceptance performance display that indicates the degree of expectation that a predetermined result has been obtained, and is displayed to make the operation-related display difficult to see. Of the first and second operation-related displays, the "first operation-related display" may be displayed to be difficult to see, but the "second operation-related display" may not be displayed to be difficult to see. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that the special post-acceptance performance display has appeared as a result of an operation on the "first operation unit" on the side where the "operation-related display" has been made difficult to see. Furthermore, the post-acceptance overlap display corresponding to a specific multiple operation allowance period is always executed in the same display mode, but the post-acceptance overlap display corresponding to a special multiple operation allowance period is displayed in a different display mode depending on the mode (degree of expectation) of the special post-acceptance performance display, so that the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be suitably recognized just by looking at the "post-acceptance overlap display" to confirm which operation was caused. Note that the "special multiple operation allowable period" in configuration 4-E is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation allowable period as the "special multiple operation allowable period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 5-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance can occur. Then, a display imitating an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted is performed.

In this regard, during the operation allowable period for this pachinko machine 1, when the operation unit is kept in an operated state, there are cases where an operation is accepted only once and cases where an operation is accepted multiple times, and it is expected that this variety of presentations will increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 5-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of operation allowable period, and during the specific operation allowable period, at least a specific period first operation unit and a specific period second operation unit may be set as operation units for which multiple operation receptions may be permitted. When the first operation unit is kept in an operated state for the specific period, operation reception is performed multiple times, but even if the second operation unit is kept in an operated state for the specific period, operation reception may not be performed multiple times.

With this configuration, even if an operation unit is one that can accept multiple operations, the so-called auto-repeated tapping function may not be activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Note that the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" in configuration 5-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 5-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different operation units and operation allowable periods. They may also mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as operation units and operation allowable periods with different names.

In this case, a special operation allowable period may be prepared as a type of operation allowable period in addition to the specific operation allowable period, and in the special operation allowable period, at least a special period first operation unit and a special period second operation unit may be set as operation units for which multiple operation receptions may be permitted. Furthermore, even if either the special period first operation unit or the special period second operation unit is kept in an operated state, multiple operation receptions may not be performed.

With this configuration, even if there are multiple operation parts that can accept multiple operations, depending on the type of operation allowable period, the so-called auto-repeated tap function may not be enabled for any of those operation parts, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Note that the "special operation allowable period" in configuration 5-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of configuration 5-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation allowable period as the "special operation allowable period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

When "Configuration 5-E" is adopted, the "special period first operation unit" and the "special period second operation unit" may be provided as the same operation unit as either the "specific period first operation unit" or the "specific period second operation unit." For example, one of the special period first operation unit and the special period second operation unit may be the same as the specific period second operation unit. In addition, the other of the special period first operation unit and the special period second operation unit may be one that is permitted to accept operations even during the specific operation permitted period.

[Configuration 6-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance can be caused. Also, it is possible to display a mock image display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted so that a periodic change appears.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, an operation unit that allows multiple operation receptions is set, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, the periodic change that has appeared in the imitation image display that imitates the operation unit is made invisible or made difficult to see by displaying another image, as one of the post-reception changes. Therefore, while the imitation image display is displayed even after the operation is performed, it is possible to appropriately suggest to the player that the situation is one in which an operation has been received. Note that the "specific operation allowable period" in the configuration 6-E is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation allowable period as the "specific operation allowable period" in the other configurations, or it may mean a different operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

As described later, when the "Configuration 6-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "specific operation allowable period", an operation unit that is allowed to accept multiple operations is set, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, as one of the post-acceptance changes, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the mimicked image display of the operation unit is hidden, or the mimicked image display is hidden; and in the "special operation allowable period", an operation unit that is allowed to accept multiple operations is set, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, the periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the mimicked image display of the operation unit is not hidden, and the periodic change may continue.

According to this configuration, when an operation is performed on an operation unit that is permitted to accept multiple operations, the periodic changes that have appeared in the simulated image display of the operation unit are hidden, or the simulated image display is hidden, or the periodic changes are not hidden and continue, making it difficult to recognize whether the operation is being accepted properly, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. Note that the "special operation allowable period" in configuration 6-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of configuration 6-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation allowable period as the "special operation allowable period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 7-E]
In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance can be caused. Also, it is possible to display an imitation image display that imitates the operation unit.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, the model image display can be displayed to show periodic changes, but there are cases where the periodic changes are displayed to appear in predetermined time units, and cases where the periodic changes are displayed to appear in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, so it is expected that the diverse presentation will increase interest in the game.

As described later, when the "Configuration 7-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as the operation allowable period, and in the "specific operation allowable period", at least operation acceptance for the first operation unit during a specific period in which multiple operation acceptance is allowed, and operation acceptance for the second operation unit during a specific period different from the first operation unit during the specific period are allowed, and in the "special operation allowable period", at least operation acceptance for the first operation unit during a special period in which multiple operation acceptance is allowed, and operation acceptance for the second operation unit during a special period different from the first operation unit during the special period are allowed. In addition, in the "specific operation allowable period", a model image display imitating the first operation unit during the specific period may be displayed so that its periodic change appears in a predetermined time unit, and in the "special operation allowable period", a model image display imitating the first operation unit during the special period may be displayed so that its periodic change appears in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time.

According to such a configuration, the time required for the periodic change varies depending on the type of operation allowable period and the type of operation target, so that it is expected that the diverse presentation will increase the interest in the game. Note that the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation allowable period", and "special operation allowable period" in the configuration 7-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation allowable period", and "special operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

In addition, the specific period first operation part in the "specific operation permitted period" may be the same operation part as the special period second operation part in the "special operation permitted period". However, in this case, even if the specific period first operation part and the special period second operation part are the same operation part, it is preferable to display the image display imitating the specific period first operation part in the "specific operation permitted period" so that its periodic change appears in a predetermined time unit, and to display the image display imitating the special period second operation part in the "special operation permitted period" so that its periodic change appears in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (which may be the same periodic time as the image display imitating the special period first operation part) in the "special operation permitted period". With such a configuration, even if the operation target (operation part) is the same, the time required for the periodic change will differ depending on the type of the "operation permitted period" that has occurred, so that the performance of the "operation permitted period" can be greatly different depending on the type, which is expected to improve the interest in the game.

[Configuration 8-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance may occur. Also, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted (imitation image display means).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period as types of operation allowable periods, and in both the predetermined operation allowable period and the specific operation allowable period, there is an operation part that is the object of display by the imitation image display means and that allows multiple operation receptions. When an operation is performed on the operation part during the predetermined operation allowable period and when an operation is performed on the operation part during the specific operation allowable period, different sounds can be output as the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, and this is expected to improve the interest in playing. Note that the "predetermined operation allowable period" and "specific operation allowable period" in the configuration 8-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation allowable period as the "predetermined operation allowable period" and "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation allowable periods. They may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 8-E" is adopted, during the "predetermined operation allowable period", when an operation is performed on an operation unit that is the object of display by the imitation image display means and that is allowed to accept multiple operations, a post-operation output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes, whereas during the "specific operation allowable period", when an operation is performed on an operation unit that is the object of display by the imitation image display means and that is allowed to accept multiple operations, a post-operation output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes, or a post-operation output sound may not be output.

With this configuration, during the "specific operation allowable period," even if an operation is performed on an operation unit that is the subject of display by the imitation image display means and that is allowable to receive operations multiple times, there are cases where a post-operation output sound is output and cases where a post-operation output sound is not output, making it difficult to recognize whether the operation has been received properly, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 9-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance may occur. Also, it is possible to execute a display imitating an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a specific operation allowable period as a type of operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, there is an operation unit that allows operation acceptance multiple times and can accept operations multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation state, and if the operation unit is continued to be maintained in an operated state, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output at predetermined time intervals, and if multiple operations are performed on the operation unit, the post-operation output sound can be output each time the operation is performed. This is expected to suitably suggest that even if the operation unit is continued to be maintained in an operated state, it is in a situation where operation acceptance is being performed appropriately, as in the case where multiple operations are performed. Note that the "specific operation allowable period" in the configuration 9-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation allowable period as the "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 9-E" is adopted, at least a "specific operation allowable period" and a "special operation allowable period" are prepared as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "specific operation allowable period," there is an operation unit that allows operation reception multiple times and can perform operation reception multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation state, and if the operation unit is continued to be maintained in the operated state, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, may be output every predetermined time, and if multiple operations are performed on the operation unit (for example, at intervals slower than the predetermined time), the post-operation output sound may be output each time the operation is performed. In contrast, in the special operation allowable period, there is an operation unit that allows operation reception multiple times but does not perform operation reception multiple times even if the operation unit is continued to be maintained in the operated state, and even if the operation unit is continued to be maintained in the operated state, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is not output every predetermined time, and even if multiple operations are performed on the operation unit (for example, at intervals slower than the predetermined time), the post-operation output sound may or may not be output when the operation is performed.

According to this configuration, during the special operation allowable period, there are operation parts for which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not activated, and even if the operation part is operated, a post-operation output sound may or may not be output when the operation is performed, making it difficult to know whether the operation has been properly accepted, and is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Note that the "special operation allowable period" in configuration 9-E is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of configuration 9-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation allowable period as the "special operation allowable period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 10-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance can be caused. Also, it is possible to display a mock image display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted so that a periodic change appears.

In this regard, during the operation allowable period of the pachinko machine 1, first, there are cases where the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in a predetermined time unit, and cases where the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. Furthermore, in both cases where the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in a predetermined time unit during the operation allowable period, and where the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time during the operation allowable period, when an operation is performed on an operation unit among the multiple operation units that corresponds to the model image display, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, can be output, which is expected to appropriately indicate that the operation acceptance is being performed.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 10-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "specific operation allowable period," a periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to appear in a predetermined time unit, and when an operation unit corresponding to the imitation image display is operated, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may be output. In contrast, in the "special operation allowable period," a periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to appear in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, and when an operation unit corresponding to the imitation image display is operated, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may be output or the post-operation output sound may not be output.

According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in units of time longer than a predetermined time, there are cases where a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output and cases where the post-operation output sound is not output, so it is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension as to whether the operation was accepted properly. Note that the "specific operation allowable period" and "special operation allowable period" in configuration 10-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 10-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation allowable period as the "specific operation allowable period" and "special operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 11-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this operation allowable period, a post-acceptance change can be caused. Also, it is possible to execute a display imitating an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted. Also, even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, it is possible to execute a process that causes the same post-acceptance change as when the operation is performed (automatic acceptance execution means).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period as types of operation allowable periods. In the "specific operation allowable period," there is an operation unit that is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and that can accept operations multiple times, and when a player operates the operation unit, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output as a specific sound. In contrast, in the special operation allowable period, there is an operation unit that is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and that can accept operations multiple times, and when a player operates the operation unit, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, can be output as a special sound different from the specific sound. Through such a mode of the post-operation output sound, it is possible to suggest whether or not the operation unit is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means, and it is expected that interest in playing the game will be maintained in a good condition. Note that the "specific operation allowable period" and "special operation allowable period" in configuration 11-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 11-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation allowable period as the "specific operation allowable period" and "special operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 11-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "specific operation allowable period," when a player operates an operation unit that is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception can be permitted multiple times, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may be output as a specific sound. In contrast, in the "special operation allowable period," when a player operates an operation unit that is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception can be permitted multiple times, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may be output as a special sound different from the specific sound, or the post-operation output sound itself may not be output. With this configuration, the conditions for outputting the post-operation output sound are different between the specific operation allowable period and the special operation allowable period, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, the "operation unit that is the subject of processing by the automatic reception execution means and for which operation reception may be permitted multiple times" during the specific operation allowable period and the "operation unit that is not the subject of processing by the automatic reception execution means and for which operation reception may be permitted multiple times" during the special operation allowable period may be the same operation unit or different operation units.

Also, for example, the "operation unit that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and for which operation reception can be permitted multiple times" in the special operation allowable period may be set as the operation unit that is the operation target in the specific operation allowable period. However, if the "operation unit that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and for which operation reception can be permitted multiple times" in the special operation allowable period is set as the operation unit that is the operation target in the specific operation allowable period, it is desirable (not a required configuration) to ensure that the post-operation output sound is always output when the operation is performed, or to ensure that the post-operation output sound is not even output when the operation is performed. Regardless of which configuration is adopted (for example, even if the post-operation output sound is not even output when the operation is performed), the conditions for outputting the post-operation output sound are different between the specific operation allowable period and the special operation allowable period, so that it is expected that the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 12-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance can be caused. Also, when the operation allowable period occurs, an acceptance allowable sound can be audibly output, which indicates that the operation acceptance is in an acceptable state or will be in an acceptable state. Also, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is acceptable.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a specific operation allowable period as a type of operation allowable period, and during the specific operation allowable period, at least operation acceptance for the specific period first operation unit and operation acceptance for the specific period second operation unit can be permitted. If an operation is performed on either the specific period first operation unit or the specific period second operation unit while the acceptance allowable sound is being audibly output during the specific operation allowable period, this triggers the acceptance allowable sound to be made inaudible. This makes it possible to appropriately indicate that the operation acceptance is being performed in a situation where it is appropriate, regardless of whether the specific period first operation unit or the specific period second operation unit is operated.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 12-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are provided as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "specific operation allowable period," at least the acceptance of an operation for the first operation unit during a specific period and the acceptance of an operation for the second operation unit during a specific period can be made acceptable, and if either the acceptance of an operation for the first operation unit during a specific period or the acceptance of an operation for the second operation unit during a specific period is made while the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output during the specific operation allowable period, this can be used as a trigger to make the acceptance allowable sound inaudible. In contrast, during the "special operation allowable period", at least the acceptance of operations for the special period first operation unit and the acceptance of operations for the special period second operation unit can be permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the special period second operation unit while the acceptance allowable sound is being audibly output during the special operation allowable period, the acceptance allowable sound is not made inaudible as a result of this, and when an operation is accepted for the special period first operation unit while the acceptance allowable sound is being audibly output during the special operation allowable period, the acceptance allowable sound may be made inaudible as a result of this.

According to such a configuration, the conditions under which the reception allowable sound is made inaudible differ between the specific operation allowable period and the special operation allowable period, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation allowable period", and "special operation allowable period" in the configuration 12-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation allowable period", and "special operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

In this case, the "specific period first operation section" of the specific operation permitted period may be the same as the "special period first operation section" or the "special period second operation section" of the special operation permitted period, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the "specific period second operation section" during the specific operation permitted period may be the same as the "special period first operation section" or the "special period second operation section" during the special operation permitted period, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the special period first operation section (and the special period second operation section) may be one that is permitted to accept operations even during a specific operation permitted period.

[Configuration 13-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance can be caused. Also, when the operation allowable period occurs, an acceptance allowable sound can be audibly output, which indicates that the operation acceptance is in an acceptable state or will be in an acceptable state. Also, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is acceptable.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation allowable period and a predetermined operation allowable period are prepared as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "specific operation allowable period", at least the acceptance of operations for the first operation unit during the specific period and the second operation unit during the specific period can be permitted, and in the "prescribed operation allowable period", at least the acceptance of operations for the first operation unit during the specific period and the second operation unit during the specific period can be permitted. Therefore, although the specific operation allowable period and the predetermined operation allowable period are different types, the performance can progress in a similar manner. Note that the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "prescribed period first operation unit", "prescribed period second operation unit", "specific operation allowable period", and "prescribed operation allowable period" in the configuration 13-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "specific period first operation unit," "specific period second operation unit," "predetermined period first operation unit," "predetermined period second operation unit," "specific operation allowable period," and "predetermined operation allowable period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 13-E" is adopted, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", the acceptance of an operation for the first operation unit for a predetermined period and the acceptance of an operation for the second operation unit for a predetermined period can at least be permitted, and even if an operation is accepted for the first operation unit for a predetermined period and an operation is accepted for the second operation unit for a predetermined period while the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output during the predetermined operation allowable period, the acceptance allowable sound may not be made inaudible as a result. In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable period", the acceptance of an operation for the first operation unit for a specific period and the acceptance of an operation for the second operation unit for a specific period can at least be permitted, and if an operation is accepted for the first operation unit for a specific period while the acceptance allowable sound is audibly output during the specific operation allowable period, the acceptance allowable sound may not be made inaudible as a result. However, if an operation is accepted for the second operation unit for a specific period, the acceptance allowable sound may be made inaudible as a result. With this configuration, the conditions under which the reception allowable sound is made inaudible differ between the predetermined operation allowable period and the specific operation allowable period, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, the "specific period first operation section" of the specific operation allowable period may be the same as the "predetermined period first operation section" or the "predetermined period second operation section" of the predetermined operation allowable period, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the "specific period second operation section" of the specific operation allowable period may be the same as the "predetermined period first operation section" or the "predetermined period second operation section" of the specified operation allowable period, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the first operation unit for a specified period (or the second operation unit for a specified period) may be one that is permitted to accept operations even during a specific operation permitted period.

[Configuration 14-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, when the operation allowable period occurs, an acceptance allowance sound can be audibly output, which indicates that the operation acceptance is permitted or will be permitted.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, when a player operates an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations during the operation allowance period, the post-reception display is displayed in either a case where it appears to be superimposed in front of the performance pattern, or a case where it appears to be superimposed behind the performance pattern. This is expected to increase interest in the game by providing a dramatic effect between the post-reception display and the performance pattern.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 14-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of operation allowable period, and during the specific operation allowable period, both operation reception for the first operation unit and operation reception for the second operation unit among the multiple operation units are allowed, and when the player operates the first operation unit, a post-reception display is displayed so as to be seen superimposed on the front side of the performance pattern, and when the player operates the second operation unit, a post-reception display is displayed so as to be seen superimposed on the back side of the performance pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to select which of the performance patterns or the post-reception display is to be viewed first, depending on whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated, and therefore it is expected that interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" in the configuration 14-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 14-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "first operation unit," "second operation unit," and "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 15-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance can occur. Also, it is possible to execute a premonition effect display that suggests that an operation allowable period will occur. Also, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of operation allowable period, and during the specific operation allowable period, at least the operation reception for the specific period first operation unit and the operation reception for the specific period second operation unit can be permitted. The premonition effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing when the specific operation allowable period occurs, and when an operation is performed on either the specific period first operation unit or the specific period second operation unit while the premonition effect display is displayed during the specific operation allowable period, this triggers the premonition effect display to be made invisible. In other words, in this case, even if an operation is performed on either the specific period first operation unit or the specific period second operation unit while the premonition effect display is displayed, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the operation reception is being performed appropriately.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 15-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are provided as types of operation allowable periods, and during the "specific operation allowable period", at least operation acceptance for the first operation unit during the specific period and operation acceptance for the second operation unit during the specific period can be permitted, and the premonition performance display is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the specific operation allowable period occurs, and if either operation acceptance for the first operation unit during the specific period or operation acceptance for the second operation unit during the specific period is performed while the premonition performance display is displayed during the specific operation allowable period, this may be used as a trigger to cause the premonition performance display to be switched to a hidden state. In contrast, during the "special operation allowable period", at least the acceptance of operations for the special period first operation unit and the acceptance of operations for the special period second operation unit can be permitted, and the premonition effect display is displayed to span the timing when the special operation allowable period occurs, but when an operation is accepted for the special period first operation unit while the premonition effect display is being audibly output during the special operation allowable period, the premonition effect display is not made invisible as a trigger, and when an operation is accepted for the special period second operation unit while the premonition effect display is being displayed during the special operation allowable period, the premonition effect display may be made invisible as a trigger.

According to such a configuration, the conditions for the premonition effect display to be in a non-display state differ between the specific operation allowable period and the special operation allowable period, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner. Note that the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation allowable period", and "special operation allowable period" in the configuration 15-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation allowable period", and "special operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as operation units or operation allowable periods with different names.

In this case, the "specific period first operation section" of the specific operation permitted period may be the same as the "special period first operation section" or the "special period second operation section" of the special operation permitted period, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the "specific period second operation section" during the specific operation permitted period may be the same as the "special period first operation section" or the "special period second operation section" during the special operation permitted period, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the special period first operation section (and the special period second operation section) may be one that is permitted to accept operations even during a specific operation permitted period.

[Configuration 16-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variable display of the performance pattern. Also, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed to the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, it is possible to execute a premonition display that suggests that an operation allowable period will occur. Also, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, the premonition effect display can be executed so as to span the timing when the operation allowable period occurs, and when the player operates an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations during the operation allowable period, the post-reception display can be displayed so that it appears to be superimposed in front of the performance pattern, or so that it appears to be superimposed behind the performance pattern. This is expected to increase interest in the game by providing a dramatic effect between the post-reception display and the performance pattern.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 16-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of operation allowable period, and during the specific operation allowable period, both operation reception for the first operation unit and operation reception for the second operation unit among the multiple operation units are allowed, and when the player operates the first operation unit, a post-reception display is displayed so as to be seen superimposed on the front side of the performance pattern, and when the player operates the second operation unit, a post-reception display is displayed so as to be seen superimposed on the back side of the performance pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to select which of the performance patterns or the post-reception display is to be viewed preferentially depending on whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated, and therefore it is expected that interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" in the configuration 16-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 16-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "first operation unit," "second operation unit," and "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. It may also mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 17-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a post-acceptance display can be generated. Also, a premonition effect display that suggests that an operation allowable period will occur can be executed. A display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of operation allowable period, and during the specific operation allowable period, even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the specific operation allowable period, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is performed (the automatic button function is enabled) when a specific time has passed since the specific operation allowable period occurs, and the premonition effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing when the specific operation allowable period occurs, but is made to disappear before the specific time has passed since the specific operation allowable period occurs. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that while the premonition effect display is displayed, there is no possibility that the automatic button function will be enabled, i.e., that the player is in a situation where he or she can perform operations calmly.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 17-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are provided as types of operation allowable periods, and during a "specific operation allowable period," even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the specific operation allowable period, when a specific amount of time has passed since the specific operation allowable period occurs, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is displayed (the automatic button function is enabled), and the premonition display is executed so as to span the timing when the specific operation allowable period occurs, but may be made to disappear at a timing before the specific amount of time has passed since the specific operation allowable period occurs. In contrast, in a "special operation allowable period", even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the special operation allowable period, once a special time has elapsed since the occurrence of the special operation allowable period, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is displayed (the automatic button function is enabled), and the premonition effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the special operation allowable period occurs, and is still displayed even at the point at which the special time has elapsed since the occurrence of the special operation allowable period. If the special time has elapsed since the occurrence of the special operation allowable period without any operation by the player, the premonition effect display is not hidden but is displayed, and the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit may be started.

According to this configuration, whether or not the premonition display is hidden during the specific operation allowable period and the special operation allowable period differs depending on the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained when an operation allowable period occurs during which the automatic button function is enabled. Note that the "specific operation allowable period" and "special operation allowable period" in configuration 17-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 17-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation allowable period as the "specific operation allowable period" and "special operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation allowable period" as an operation allowable period with a different name.

In this case, the specific time and the special time may be the same time or different times.

[Configuration 18-E]
In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted to the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change occurs after acceptance. Also, a display simulating the operation unit can be executed (simulated image display means).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period as types of operation allowable periods, and in the predetermined operation allowable period, there are operation parts for which multiple operation reception is permitted and which are the subject of display by the imitation image display means. In the specific operation allowable period, there are operation parts for which multiple operation reception is permitted but which are not the subject of display by the imitation image display means, and since it is arranged so that operation reception can be performed multiple times simply by continuing to keep the operation part in an operated state (a so-called auto-repeated tap function), it is expected that the difficulty of playing the game caused by the operation parts to be operated being concealed will be alleviated, and a decrease in interest in playing the game will be suppressed.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 18-E" is employed, during the "predetermined operation allowable period", there is an operation unit that is permitted to receive multiple operations and is the target of display by the mock image display means, and even if the operation unit is maintained in an operated state, it may not receive multiple operations. With such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner not only when the operation unit to be operated is concealed, but also when the operation unit to be operated is not concealed.

In addition, when the "Configuration 18-E" is adopted, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", there may be one or more operation units for which multiple operation receptions are permitted and which are subject to display by the imitation image display means, and the operation may not be accepted multiple times even if the operation unit is kept in an operated state. In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable period", there may be at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit as operation units for which multiple operation receptions are permitted but which are not subject to display by the imitation image display means, and while the first operation unit may be accepted multiple times simply by keeping it in an operated state, the second operation unit may not be accepted multiple times even if it is kept in an operated state.

According to this configuration, even if an operation part that is permitted to receive multiple operations during the "specific operation allowable period" but is not the subject of display by the above-mentioned model image display means may not be enabled as the so-called auto-repeated tapping function, it is expected that the sense of tension will be more appropriately maintained. Note that the "first operation part", "second operation part", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" in the configuration 18-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 18-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation part or operation allowable period as the "first operation part", "second operation part", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation parts or operation allowable periods. They may also mean the same "operation part" or "operation allowable period" as an operation part or operation allowable period with a different name.

In this case, at least one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit (e.g., the second operation unit) may be set as an operation unit that is permitted to receive operations multiple times during the specified operation allowable period and is the target of display by the mock image display means.

[Configuration 19-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation allowable period can be generated during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is accepted to the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a post-acceptance change occurs. Also, a display simulating the operation unit can be executed (simulated image display means). Also, when an operation is accepted to the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "predetermined operation allowable period," there is an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is the target of display by the imitation image display means, and when this operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation can be output. In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable period," there is an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is not the target of display by the imitation image display means, but even if this operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation can be output, so that even if the operation unit to be operated is concealed, it is possible to suggest that the operation has been performed appropriately.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 19-E" is employed, during the "specific operation allowable period", there may be an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is not subject to display by the above-mentioned mock image display means, and when the operation unit is operated, there may be cases where a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation is output and cases where a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation is not output. In other words, in this case, it is difficult to recognize whether or not an operation has been properly accepted when an operation unit in a concealed state is operated, and this is expected to more appropriately create a sense of tension.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 19-E" is adopted, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", there may be one or more operation units for which operation reception is permitted and which are to be displayed by the imitation image display means, and when the operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound may be output. In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable period", there may be at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit as operation units for which operation reception is permitted but which are not to be displayed by the imitation image display means, and when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound may be output, but when an operation is performed on the second operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound may not be output. That is, in this case, in the "specific operation allowable period", a post-acceptance output sound may be output when an operation unit that is not in a concealed state is operated, whereas in the "predetermined operation allowable period", a post-acceptance output sound is output only when an operation is performed on the first operation unit out of the first and second operation units which are in a concealed state. This makes it possible to further conceal the fact that not only the first operation unit but also the second operation unit is in a state in which operation reception is permitted. Note that the "first operation unit," "second operation unit," "predetermined operation allowable period," and "specific operation allowable period" in configuration 19-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 19-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "first operation unit," "second operation unit," "predetermined operation allowable period," and "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

In this case, the post-acceptance output sound may be output in a different manner depending on at least one of the type of operation permitted period and the type of operation part operated by the player.

In addition, at least one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit (e.g., the second operation unit) may be set as an operation unit that is permitted to receive operations and is a target for display by the mock image display means during a specified operation allowable period.

[Configuration 20-E]
In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can execute a variable display of the performance symbols. Also, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation acceptance to the operation unit is performed during the operation allowable period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit (imitation image display means).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "predetermined operation allowable period," there is an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is the target of display by the imitation image display means, and when this operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation can be displayed; in the "specific operation allowable period," there is an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is not the target of display by the imitation image display means, but even if this operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation can be displayed, so that even if the operation unit that is the target of operation is concealed, it is possible to suggest that the operation has been performed appropriately.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 20-E" is employed, during the specific operation allowable period, there may be an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted but which is not subject to display by the model image display means, and when the operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so that it appears to be superimposed on the front side of the performance pattern, or the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so that it appears to be superimposed on the rear side of the performance pattern. With this configuration, during the specific operation allowable period, it is expected that the post-acceptance display when the concealed operation unit is operated will have a dramatic effect on the performance pattern, thereby increasing interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 20-E" is adopted, during the specific operation allowable period, at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit are included as operation units for which operation acceptance is permitted but which are not subject to display by the above-mentioned model image display means, and when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to appear to be superimposed on the rear side of the performance pattern, and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to appear to be superimposed on the front side of the performance pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to select whether the performance pattern or the post-acceptance display is to be viewed first, depending on whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 21-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a multiple operation allowable period can be generated in which both the operation acceptance for the first operation unit and the operation acceptance for the second operation unit can be accepted, and when either the operation for the first operation unit or the operation for the second operation unit is performed during the multiple operation allowable period, a post-acceptance display according to the type of the operation acceptance can be displayed. Also, although it is possible to display an imitation image display that imitates the operation target by the player (imitation image display means), there are cases in which the imitation image display means does not display the operation target even if the operation acceptance is accepted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first multiple operation allowable period and a second multiple operation allowable period are prepared as types of multiple operation allowable periods, and when an operation is performed on the "first operation unit" (where multiple operation receptions may be allowed) during the first multiple operation allowable period, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but operation reception on the "second operation unit" is allowed even while the post-reception display is displayed. Then, when an operation is performed on the "second operation unit" during the first multiple operation allowable period while a post-reception display corresponding to an operation performed on the "first operation unit" is displayed, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-reception display (post-reception display on the first operation unit side) that had been displayed until then can be made invisible as a result of the operation. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that the performance has progressed due to a newly performed operation on the second operation unit side, rather than due to an operation on the first operation unit side that was interrupted midway.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 21-E" is adopted, during the "first multiple operation allowable period", while both a display modeled after the first operation unit and a display modeled after the second operation unit are displayed, both operation reception for the first operation unit and operation reception for the second operation unit may be allowed, and among the first operation unit and the second operation unit, at least the first operation unit may be allowed to accept multiple operations. Also, during the "second multiple operation allowable period", while neither a display modeled after the first operation unit nor a display modeled after the second operation unit is displayed, both operation reception for the first operation unit and operation reception for the second operation unit may be allowed, and among the first operation unit and the second operation unit, at least the first operation unit may be allowed to accept multiple operations. Then, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, which may be permitted to accept multiple operations during the "first multiple operation allowable period", a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but operation acceptance for the second operation unit is permitted even while the post-acceptance display is displayed, and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit while the post-acceptance display is displayed, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance display on the first operation unit side) that has appeared up until that point may be hidden as a result of the operation. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, which may be permitted to accept multiple operations during the "second multiple operation allowable period", a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but operation acceptance for the second operation unit is permitted even while the post-acceptance display is displayed, and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit while the post-acceptance display is displayed, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance display on the first operation unit side) that has appeared up until that point may not be hidden as a result of the operation. With this configuration, when an operation is performed on the second operation unit while a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation on the first operation unit is being displayed, this may trigger a situation where the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation on the first operation unit is not hidden, or where the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation on the first operation unit is not hidden, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation permitted period", and "second multiple operation permitted period" in configuration 21-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 21-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation permitted period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation permitted period", and "second multiple operation permitted period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation permitted period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permitted period" as an operation unit or operation permitted period with a different name.

[Configuration 22-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a multiple operation allowable period can be generated in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit can be allowed. Also, a first operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception for the first operation unit is allowed or when the operation reception is allowed can be displayed. Also, a second operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception for the second operation unit is allowed or when the operation reception is allowed can be displayed.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a first multiple operation allowance period and a second multiple operation allowance period as the multiple operation allowance period, and since both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display can be displayed during the "first multiple operation allowance period," it is expected that smooth operation by the player will be encouraged even in cases where operation reception is permitted for multiple operating units.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 22-E" is adopted, during the "first multiple operation permitted period", the first operation unit or the second operation unit may be accepted while both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are displayed. In contrast, during the "second multiple operation permitted period", the first operation unit or the second operation unit may be accepted while neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed. However, when an operation is accepted for the second operation unit under this condition, the second operation-related display may be displayed, and the first operation unit or the second operation unit may be accepted while the second operation-related display is displayed. With this configuration, the confidentiality regarding the "state in which operation acceptance is permitted" in the second operation unit is eliminated by the operation of the second operation unit, and since the first operation unit or the second operation unit may be accepted while the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that the interest in playing the game will be improved.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 22-E" is employed, during the "second multiple operation permitted period," even if an operation is accepted for the first operation unit, the first operation-related display that can only appear when the state in which acceptance of an operation for the first operation unit is permitted or the state in which acceptance of an operation is permitted may not be displayed. With this configuration, the presentation differs when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit and the second operation unit in a concealed state, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 22-E" is adopted, the second operation-related display that is displayed based on the reception of an operation to the second operation unit during the "second multiple operation permitted period" when neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed may be displayed in a different manner from the second operation-related display that appears when the "first multiple operation permitted period" occurs.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 22-E" is employed, during the "second multiple operation permitted period," if an operation is received on the second operation unit while the second operation-related display is not displayed, the second operation-related display may be displayed but the display suggesting the degree of expectation may not be displayed. In other words, in this case, it is possible to encourage further operation of the second operation unit while the second operation-related display is displayed.

The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation permitted period", and "second multiple operation permitted period" in configuration 22-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 22-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation permitted period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation permitted period", and "second multiple operation permitted period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation permitted period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permitted period" as an operation unit or operation permitted period with a different name.

[Configuration 23-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance may occur. Also, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted (imitation image display means).

In this regard, pachinko machine 1 provides at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period as types of operation allowable periods, and while there are operation parts for which multiple operation reception is allowable during both the "predetermined operation allowable period" and the "specific operation allowable period", different sounds can be output as the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, when an operation is performed on the operation part during the "predetermined operation allowable period" and when an operation is performed on the operation part during the "specific operation allowable period", making it possible to indicate which type of operation allowable period has occurred.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 23-E" is adopted, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", there is one or more operation units that are the object of display by the imitation image display means and that are allowed to accept multiple operations, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes, whereas in the "specific operation allowable period", there is one or more operation units that are not the object of display by the imitation image display means and that are allowed to accept multiple operations, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, there are cases where a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes and cases where a post-acceptance output sound is not output. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation allowable period", when a concealed operation unit is operated, there are cases where a post-acceptance output sound is output and cases where a post-acceptance output sound is not output, so that it is expected that the sense of tension as to whether or not the operation was accepted properly is appropriately maintained.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 23-E" is adopted, during the "specific operation allowable period", at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit are present as operation units that are not subject to display by the model image display means and for which multiple operation receptions are permitted, and when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, a post-operation output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes, but when an operation is performed on the second operation unit, a post-operation output sound may not be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. With this configuration, during the "specific operation allowable period", it is possible to further increase the secrecy regarding the "state in which operation reception is permitted" on the second operation unit, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this case, during the "specific operation allowable period", there may be no operation unit that is the subject of display by the mock image display means and that is allowable for receiving (multiple) operations.

In addition, during the "predetermined operation allowable period", at least the second operation unit is an operation unit that is the subject of display by the mock image display means and is allowable to accept multiple operations, and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes.

In addition, at least one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit (e.g., the second operation unit) may be used as an operation unit that is subject to display by the mock image display means and is permitted to receive multiple operations during the "predetermined operation allowable period."

In addition, when the first operation unit is operated during the specific operation allowable period, there may be cases where a change occurs after acceptance and cases where no change occurs after acceptance. With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension felt when operating the concealed first operation unit during the "specific operation allowable period" will be appropriately maintained.

Note that the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" in configuration 23-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 23-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 24-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance may occur. Also, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted (imitation image display means).

In this regard, during the operation allowance period for the pachinko machine 1, it may be possible to allow multiple operations to be accepted for an operation part that is not the object of display by the imitation image display means, and by allowing the operation part to be kept in an operated state for multiple operations to be accepted, it is expected that the difficulty of playing the game caused by the operation part being concealed will be mitigated, and a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 24-E" is employed, during the operation allowance period, multiple operation receptions may be permitted for an operation unit that is not the target of display by the model image display means, and when the operation unit is maintained in an operated state, there may be cases where the operation is received multiple times and cases where the operation is not received multiple times. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately impart a sense of tension while mitigating the difficulty of playing the game due to the operation unit being concealed.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 24-E" is employed, at least a specific operation allowable period is provided as an operation allowable period, and in the "specific operation allowable period," at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit are included as operation units that are not subject to display by the mock image display means but are allowable to receive multiple operations, and when the first operation unit is maintained in an operated state, multiple operations are not received, and when the second operation unit is maintained in an operated state, multiple operations are received. With this configuration, during the specific operation allowable period, it is possible to increase confidentiality regarding whether multiple operations are allowed for the first operation unit, and it is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension.

The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" in configuration 24-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 24-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 25-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variable display of the performance symbols. Also, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which the operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and when the operation acceptance to the operation unit is performed during the operation allowable period, it is possible to display a post-acceptance display. Also, it is possible to display a display imitating the operation unit.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period are prepared as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "predetermined operation allowable period", there is an operation part for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is not the subject of display by the imitation image display means, and when the operation part is operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the performance pattern, and in the "specific operation allowable period", there is an operation part for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is not the subject of display by the imitation image display means, and when the operation part is operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible superimposed on the front of the performance pattern. This makes it possible to appropriately suggest that the operation has been performed in a situation where even if the operation part to be operated is concealed, and is expected to increase the interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 25-E" is adopted, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", there are at least a first operation unit for a predetermined period and a second operation unit for a predetermined period as operation units for which operation reception is permitted and which are not subject to display by the model image display means, and when the first operation unit is operated for a predetermined period, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the performance pattern, and when the second operation unit is operated for a predetermined period, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the performance pattern. In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable period", there are at least a first operation unit for a specific period and a second operation unit for a specific period as operation units for which operation reception is permitted and which are not subject to display by the model image display means, and when the first operation unit is operated for a specific period, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the performance pattern, and when the second operation unit is operated for a specific period, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible behind the performance pattern. According to this configuration, during the "predetermined operation permitted period", regardless of whether the concealed first operation unit for the specified period or the second operation unit for the specified period is operated, the post-acceptance display is displayed in front of the performance pattern, which can suitably suggest that the operation has been properly accepted. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permitted period", if the concealed second operation unit for the specified period out of the first operation unit for the specified period or the second operation unit for the specified period is operated, the post-acceptance display is displayed behind the performance pattern, which makes it difficult to recognize that the post-acceptance display has been displayed, which suitably creates a sense of tension as to whether the operation has been properly accepted.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 25-E" is adopted, during a "specified operation allowable period", there are operation units for which operation acceptance is allowable and which are subject to display by the imitation image display means, and operation units for which operation acceptance is allowable and which are not subject to display by the imitation image display means, and when an operation unit for which operation acceptance is allowable and which is subject to display by the imitation image display means is operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible behind the performance pattern, and when an operation unit for which operation acceptance is allowable and which is not subject to display by the imitation image display means is operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the performance pattern. In contrast, during a "specific operation allowable period", there is no operation unit for which operation reception is allowable and which is the subject of display by the imitation image display means, but there are at least a specific period first operation unit and a specific period second operation unit as operation units for which operation reception is allowable and which are not the subject of display by the imitation image display means, and when the first operation unit is operated during the specific period, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the performance pattern, and when the second operation unit is operated during the specific period, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible behind the performance pattern. According to this configuration, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", when the operation unit (predetermined period first operation unit) that is the object of display by the imitation image display means is operated, the post-acceptance display is displayed in a manner that is difficult to see without worsening the visibility of the performance pattern, whereas when the concealed operation unit (predetermined period second operation unit) is operated, the post-acceptance display is displayed in a conspicuous manner even if it worsens the visibility of the performance pattern, and thus, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation acceptance was properly performed, instead of being concealed until then. In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable period", even if the concealed operation unit (specific period first operation unit, specific period second operation unit) is operated, if the specific period first operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display is displayed in a manner that is difficult to see without worsening the visibility of the performance pattern, so that not only is it possible to conceal whether the operation acceptance is permitted or not, but it is also possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance was properly performed or not, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Note that the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" in configuration 25-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 25-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 26-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variable display of the performance symbols. Also, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation acceptance to the operation unit is performed during the operation allowable period, a change occurs after acceptance. Also, it is possible to display a display imitating the operation unit.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "predetermined operation allowable period", there is an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is not subject to display by the imitation image display means, and when this operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes, and in the "specific operation allowable period", there is an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is not subject to display by the imitation image display means, and when this operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes. In other words, in this case, when an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and which is not subject to display by the imitation image display means is operated, there are cases where a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes (specific operation allowable period) and cases where it is not output (predetermined operation allowable period), so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 26-E" is adopted, during the "predetermined operation allowable period", at least a first operation unit for a predetermined period and a second operation unit for a predetermined period are present as operation units for which operation acceptance is allowable and which are not subject to display by the imitation image display means, and when either the first operation unit for a predetermined period or the second operation unit for a predetermined period is operated, a post-acceptance change occurs but a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes. In contrast, during the "specific operation allowable period", at least a first operation unit for a specific period and a second operation unit for a specific period are present as operation units for which operation acceptance is allowable and which are not subject to display by the imitation image display means, and when the first operation unit for a specific period is operated, a post-acceptance change occurs but a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes, but when the second operation unit for a specific period is operated, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes. According to this configuration, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", even if either the concealed first operation unit for the predetermined period or the second operation unit for the predetermined period is operated, a post-acceptance change occurs, but the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes, whereas in the "specific operation allowable period", the post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes only when the second operation unit of the concealed first operation unit for the specific period and the second operation unit for the specific period is operated. In other words, in this case, the player can recognize that the post-acceptance output sound is output when an operation is accepted even with a concealed operation unit, so that it is difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance is in a proper state when the first operation unit is operated for the specific period during the "specific operation allowable period" or when an operation is performed during the "predetermined operation allowable period", and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 26-E" is adopted, during a "specified operation allowable period", there are operation units for which operation acceptance is allowable and which are subject to display by the imitation image display means, and operation units for which operation acceptance is allowable and which are not subject to display by the imitation image display means, and when an operation unit for which operation acceptance is allowable and which is subject to display by the imitation image display means is operated, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes, and when an operation unit for which operation acceptance is allowable and which is not subject to display by the imitation image display means is operated, a post-acceptance change occurs but a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the changes. In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable period", there is no operation unit for which operation reception is permitted and which is to be displayed by the imitation image display means, but there are at least a specific period first operation unit and a specific period second operation unit as operation units for which operation reception is permitted and which are not to be displayed by the imitation image display means, and when the first operation unit is operated during the specific period, a post-acceptance change occurs but a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the changes, and when the second operation unit is operated during the specific period, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the changes after acceptance. According to this configuration, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", when a concealed operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance change occurs but a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the changes, so that it is difficult to recognize that an operation has been accepted, and it is therefore difficult to recognize that an operation opportunity has been given to the operation unit. In contrast, in the "specific operation permitted period," when a concealed operation unit is operated, there are cases where a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes (specific period second operation unit) and cases where a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes (specific period first operation unit). Therefore, even if multiple operation units are concealed, when a post-acceptance output sound is output (specific period second operation unit), it is possible to appropriately indicate that an operation opportunity has been secretly granted, and it is expected to avoid a situation in which all players do not realize that a hidden button has been generated. On the other hand, among the "specific period first operation unit" and the "specific period second operation unit," the concealment of the specific period first operation unit can be further enhanced, and it is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, by using the specific-period first operation unit as "an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted and which is not subject to display by the imitation image display means" during the specified operation allowable period, and using the specific-period second operation unit as "an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted and which is subject to display by the imitation image display means" during the specified operation allowable period, it becomes possible to use the presentation during the "specified operation allowable period" as a hint for determining which operation unit is concealed during the "specified operation allowable period".

Note that the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" in configuration 26-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 26-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 27-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance may occur. Also, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted (imitation image display means).

In this regard, during the operation allowance period for the pachinko machine 1, it may be possible to allow multiple operations to be accepted for an operation part that is not the object of display by the above-mentioned model image display means, and by keeping the operation part in an operated state, the operation can be accepted multiple times. This is expected to alleviate the difficulty of playing the game caused by the operation part being concealed, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

As will be described later, during the operation allowance period, multiple operation receptions may be permitted for an operation unit that is not the target of display by the imitation image display means, and it may be possible that simply maintaining the operation unit in an operated state results in multiple operation receptions and no operation receptions. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when operating an operation unit that is not the target of display by the imitation image display means.

As described later, at least a specific operation allowable period is provided as the operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, at least a first operation portion and a second operation portion are provided as operation portions that are not displayed by the model image display means but are allowed to accept multiple operations, and when the first operation portion is continuously maintained in an operated state, the operation is not accepted multiple times, and when the second operation portion is continuously maintained in an operated state, the operation is accepted multiple times. The number of times that the operation can be accepted when only the first operation portion is continuously and repeatedly operated in the specific operation allowable period may be less than the number of times that the operation can be accepted when only the second operation portion is continuously and repeatedly operated in the specific operation allowable period. In other words, in this case, in the specific operation allowable period, the first operation portion on the side on which the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled requires fewer consecutive hits (number of consecutive operations) than the second operation portion on the side on which the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled, and therefore it is expected that the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Here, "an operation is accepted" means, for example, that this triggers a visible change after acceptance (such as a change in display, the output of a sound after acceptance, or a change in the light emitted by a lamp). Therefore, if an operation is detected internally but no visible change occurs after acceptance (even if some processing is performed internally (such as extending the time that the post-acceptance display is maintained)), it cannot be said that "an operation is accepted."

Note that the "specific operation allowable period," "first operation unit," and "second operation unit" in configuration 27-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 27-E. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable period as the "specific operation allowable period," "first operation unit," and "second operation unit" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or operation allowable period. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable period" as an operation unit or operation allowable period with a different name.

[Configuration 28-E]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation allowable period during which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation allowable period, a change after acceptance may occur. Also, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted (imitation image display means).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a predetermined operation allowable period and a specific operation allowable period as types of operation allowable periods, and in the "predetermined operation allowable period," there is an operation part that is allowed to accept multiple operations and is the target of display by the imitation image display means, and when an operation is performed on the operation part, the predetermined operation allowable period can be terminated by the operation. In the "specific operation allowable period," there is an operation part that is allowed to accept multiple operations but is not the target of display by the imitation image display means, and when an operation is performed on the operation part, the specific operation allowable period is not terminated by the operation. With this configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to an operation part that is not the target of display by the imitation image display means, it is possible to cause changes after acceptance many times until the player is convinced that the operation acceptance has been performed properly, and it is expected that anxiety such as whether an operation opportunity has been given or not and whether the operation acceptance has been performed properly can be reduced, even though it is a hidden button.

As will be described later, in the "predetermined operation allowable period", there is one or more operation parts that are permitted to receive multiple operations and are displayed by the imitation image display means, and when an operation is performed on the operation part, the predetermined operation allowable period can be terminated by the operation. In the "specific operation allowable period", there are at least a first operation part and a second operation part that are permitted to receive multiple operations but are not displayed by the imitation image display means, and the specific operation allowable period can be terminated by the operation, regardless of whether the first operation part or the second operation part is operated. With this configuration, unlike a situation where there is an operation part that is displayed by the imitation image display means (predetermined operation allowable period), in a situation where there are multiple hidden buttons (specific operation allowable period), the player can operate various operation parts with confidence without considering the risk of the specific operation allowable period being terminated unintentionally when investigating which operation part is secretly enabled for operation.

As will be described later, the "predetermined operation allowable period" may include both operation units whose operation is triggered to end the predetermined operation allowable period and operation units whose operation is triggered to not end the predetermined operation allowable period.

As will be described later, during the "specific operation allowable period", when the first operation unit is operated, a first side specific operation change corresponding to the operation may occur as one of a plurality of first side aspects, but if the first operation unit is operated again while a "special first side aspect" among the plurality of first side aspects occurs, a first side aspect different from the "special first side aspect" will not occur as a first side specific operation change, and when the second operation unit is operated, a second side specific operation change corresponding to the operation may occur as one of a plurality of second side aspects, but if the second operation unit is operated again while a "special second side aspect" among the plurality of second side aspects occurs, a second side aspect different from the "special second side aspect" will not occur as a second side specific operation change. With this configuration, when the first operation unit is being operated, it is possible to understand that there is no need to operate the first operation unit any more at the time the "special first side aspect" appears, and therefore it becomes possible to transition from the "state of operating the first operation unit" to the "state of operating the second operation unit" with confidence. Furthermore, when the second operating unit is being operated, the user will understand that there is no need to operate the second operating unit any further when the "special second side state" appears, and will be able to transition from the "state of operating the second operating unit" to the "state of operating the first operating unit" with peace of mind.

As will be described later, during the "specific operation allowable period", when the first operation unit is operated, a first side specific operation post-change corresponding to the operation may occur as one of a plurality of first side modes, but if the first operation unit is operated again while a "special first side mode" of the plurality of first side modes is occurring, the "special first side mode" that was in an execution state up until that point is terminated and the "special first side mode" is started again as a first side specific operation post-change, and when the second operation unit is operated, a second side specific operation post-change corresponding to the operation may occur as one of a plurality of second side modes, but if the second operation unit is operated again while a "special second side mode" of the plurality of second side modes is occurring, at least an apparent change may not occur in the "special second side mode" that was in an execution state up until that point. With this configuration, it is possible to repeatedly confirm the "special first side state" when the first operating unit is operated, whereas it is not possible to repeatedly confirm the "special second side state" when the second operating unit is operated. This provides the above-mentioned effect of providing a sense of security, while also providing a favorable sense of tension when the second operating unit is operated.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance allowance period (acceptance period) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit based on the judgment result (jackpot judgment, performance judgment, etc.), an operation-related display related to the acceptance target (for example, a model image display imitating an operation receiving unit, etc.) is displayed, but the operation-related display (for example, a model image display imitating an operation receiving unit, etc.) may be displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern performance progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of a notice judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance.

The "integrated model image display" is as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as another example or modified example thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different expectation levels are prepared for the "integrated model image display", and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance allowable period (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance allowable sound may be audibly output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance allowable sound" refers to a sound that, when output of the sound begins, will necessarily cause an acceptance allowable period (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or that the acceptance allowable period (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance allowable sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance allowable period (acceptance period) is being performed.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types (e.g., conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc.) of post-reception changes (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.) that appear when a ball is accepted. Each reception period has its own occurrence condition, and when any one of these occurrence conditions is met, a reception period of a type corresponding to the occurrence condition that has been met can occur.

Also, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple operation units (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) that are operated by the player. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example is capable of generating an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which not only one operation unit, but several (multiple) operation units are permitted to be in an operation-accepting state.

First, a basic example of the performance when such a multiple operation permitted period occurs will be described with reference to Figs. 275 to 277. However, the configurations described with reference to Figs. 275 to 277 are conceptual to facilitate understanding of the technical features of the present application, and are not essential configurations.

Figure 275 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) occurs during which "operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are acceptable as operation acceptance units and an operation is performed on "operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the acceptance period. Figure 276 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) occurs during which "operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are acceptable as operation acceptance units and an operation is performed on "operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the acceptance period. Figure 277 is a presentation diagram showing an example of the presentation content when the acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) occurs.

Now, as shown in Fig. 275(c) and Fig. 276(c), for example, if a predetermined condition is satisfied at timing T1 within the pattern change, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an acceptance period ("the situation shown in Fig. 277(a)"). As a result, if the player performs an action (operation) within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance change will occur in response to that operation (acceptance of operation).

However, this acceptance period occurs as an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which both "operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are permitted to be in an operation-accepting state, and the performance display device 1600 displays an operation-related display A that prompts an operation on operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and an operation-related display B that prompts an operation on operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) (see Figures 275(d) and (e), Figures 276(d) and (e), Figure 277(a), etc.).

Moreover, during this reception period, operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to receive only one operation, whereas operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations.

Therefore, for example, if an operation is performed on operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001) at timing T2 (see FIG. 275) during the reception period, a post-reception change corresponding to the operation (reception of operation) is caused (see FIG. 275(f) and FIG. 277(b11a), (b11b)), (b12a), (b12b)), and the reception period itself is terminated. Note that in this example, one of the post-reception changes is to display either post-reception display C (corresponding to FIG. 277(b11a) and (b12a), low expectation) or post-reception display D (corresponding to FIG. 277(b11b) and (b12b), high expectation) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

In contrast, for example, if an operation is performed on operation unit B (here, operation button 410) at timing T3 (see FIG. 276) during the reception period, a post-reception change occurs according to the operation (reception of operation) (see FIG. 276(f) and FIG. 277(b11a), (b11b)), (b12a), (b12b)). At this time, in this example, as one of the post-reception changes, post-reception display A1 (first form) is displayed (see FIG. 277(b21)). However, since operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is "allowed to accept multiple operations during the reception period," the reception period does not end based on the first operation.

Next, for example, if a second operation is performed on operation unit B (here, operation button 410) at timing T4 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, a post-reception change is caused in response to that operation (reception of operation) (see FIG. 276(f) and FIG. 277(b22)). At this time, in this example, post-reception display A2 (second state) is displayed as one of the post-reception changes (see FIG. 277(b22)). However, in this example, even when a second operation is performed on operation unit B (here, operation button 410), the reception period is not terminated based on this.

Next, for example, if a third operation is performed on operation unit B (here, operation button 410) at timing T5 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, a post-reception change corresponding to the operation (reception of operation) is caused (see FIG. 276(f) and FIG. 277(b23a), (b23b), (b24a), (b24b)), and the reception period itself is terminated. Note that in this example, as one of the post-reception changes, either post-reception display C (corresponding to FIG. 277(b23a) and (b24a) and showing low expectation) or post-reception display D (corresponding to FIG. 277(b23b) and (b24b) and showing high expectation) is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIG. 277, if you want to defeat an enemy character with just one operation, you can operate operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001), and if you want to defeat an enemy character with multiple operations, you can operate operation unit B (here, the operation button 410).

Note that here, the performance results are the same (success or failure of defeat) when operating operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and when operating operation unit B (here, the operation button 410), but different display results may be displayed, for example, by operating operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) to display a "performance result related to success or failure of defeating the enemy character" and by operating operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) to display a "performance result related to success or failure of leaving (running away) from the battle scene with the enemy character." Also, in this example, the "sword decoration 5001" is used as operation unit A and the "operation button 410" is used as operation unit B, but this may be achieved by using the opposite operation units.

However, in such a multiple operation allowance period, for example, a player may start operating operation unit B (here, operation button 410) that allows multiple operations, but may become anxious when the final result display does not appear, and may switch from "operation on operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" in the middle of the multiple operation allowance period to progress the performance, and there is a problem as to what processing should be performed at this time. Even if the multiple operation allowance period is one in which all of the multiple operation units are prepared as "operation units that are only allowed to accept one operation," for example, if there is no operation by the player during the multiple operation allowance period, there is a problem as to which operation unit the above-mentioned "automatic button function" should be enabled, and there are various other problems, such as whether the so-called auto-repeated-hit function should be enabled in order to increase the interest in the game.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-E" to "Configuration 27-E" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, in order to realize these inventions, it is only necessary to appropriately equip only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to equip all of them. For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (targeted effect), it may be a machine in which an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which several (multiple) operation units are acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state (acceptance period during which only one operation unit is acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state) does not necessarily occur, it may not have an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting multiple operations, it may not have an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting only one operation, or it may not have an automatic button function or an auto-repeated-hit function that is not enabled. Also, with reference to up to FIG. 274, the above-mentioned acceptance periods may not necessarily be equipped, or may be equipped. In other words, for each of the configurations described in the specification below, when it is desired to obtain an additional effect in addition to any one of the above "Configuration 1-E" to "Configuration 27-E," it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the corresponding configuration.

First, among the multiple reception periods, the 1st F reception period, the 2nd F reception period, the 3rd F reception period, the 4th F reception period, and the 5th F reception period will be described with reference to Figs. 278 to 295. Note that the reception periods described above with reference to Figs. 277 to 278 may be prepared as reception periods separate from the 1st F reception period, the 2nd F reception period, the 3rd F reception period, the 4th F reception period, and the 5th F reception period, or may be realized as any one of the 1st F reception period, the 2nd F reception period, the 3rd F reception period, the 4th F reception period, and the 5th F reception period. In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to have these for each reception period described above with reference to Figs. 277 to 278.

Figure 278 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 1F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 1F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 279 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 1F reception period occurs but the player does not perform an operation. Figure 281 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the 1F reception period occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "1st F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1st F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 1st F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 1st F fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "1st F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 278(a), within the execution period of the variable performance related to the "1st F variable pattern", the above-mentioned 1st F acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance of changes after 1st F acceptance (such as displays UA, UB after 1st F acceptance and sound output after 1st F acceptance)" is permitted can occur based on the arrival of timing te2 when 1st F time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 1F") (the situation shown in FIG. 281(b)).

Here, during the 1F reception period in this embodiment, 1F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is permitted to receive only one operation until the 1F reception period ends, and 1F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted to receive multiple operations until the 1F reception period ends (multiple operation permitted period).

In other words, as described above, during such a first F reception period (period allowing multiple operations), it is anticipated that, for example, even if the player starts operating first F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, the player may become anxious when the final result display does not appear, and may attempt to progress the presentation by switching from "operation on first F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on first F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" midway through the first F reception period (period allowing multiple operations).

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates such a first F reception period, it is possible to first execute a premonition display that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given (that the first F reception period will occur).

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when timing te1 arrives before the occurrence of the 1st F reception period, the "1st F premonition presentation display ZFD" is started to be executed as the premonition presentation display, as shown in Figs. 278(d), 279(d), and 281(a). This "1st F premonition presentation display ZFD" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 1st F operation-related displays A and B are displayed, as shown in Figs. 278(d), 279(d), and 281(a) and (b).

That is, in this example, when the 1F reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 278, FIG. 279, and FIG. 281(b) and (c), etc., the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 1F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and the "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 1F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, are displayed. Note that in this example, the timing when the 1F reception period occurs is the same as the timing when the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed across these timings by starting to display them after the timing when the 1st F premonition performance display ZFD is displayed and before the timing when the 1st F reception period occurs. Alternatively, the "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed with a delay to the timing when the 1st F reception period occurs.

Note that in this example, the "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st F operation related display B (button imitation image BMG)" are displayed as a "display simulating 1st F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and a "display simulating 1st F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", respectively, but the display contents are not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 281(b), the "1st F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" begin to be displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the "1st F premonition performance display ZFD" while the "1st F premonition performance display ZFD" is being displayed.

In addition, the "1st F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as images that may undergo periodic changes. That is, as described above, during the 1st F reception period, at least the "1st F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" which is only permitted to receive one operation, and the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which is permitted to receive multiple operations are provided as operation sections that may receive operations by the player.

As for the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," when a moving image in which "the portion (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving portion of the 1F operation portion A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 280(A), and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 280(B) to (D)" is considered to be one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 1F time A.

Furthermore, with regard to the "1F operation-related display B (button imitation image BMG)," when a moving image such as "the part simulating the operation receiving part of the 1F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) (button imitation image BMG) is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 280(a), and then sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 280(b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 1F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 1F reception period, as shown in Figs. 280 and 281, each "operation receiving part" in the "1F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "1F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" appears as a depiction moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the cycle 1F time A and the cycle 1F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, because they are set to a longer time than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed during the 3F reception period described below, during the 1F reception period, the "operation receiving part" is depicted as moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than during the 3F reception period.

When "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing te2 when the 1st F reception period occurs, it is desirable to have the periodic change start after waiting for timing te2 when the 1st F reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in Fig. 280 (A) and (a), respectively, until timing te2 arrives.

In this example, the "1st F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" begin to be displayed behind the "1st F premonition effect display ZFD" while the "1st F premonition effect display ZFD" is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 281(b), and begin to change periodically. Note that the display range of the 1st F premonition effect display ZED is reduced over time, as shown in FIGS. 281(a) and (b). Therefore, the "1st F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" begin to be displayed while the 1st F premonition effect display ZFD is being displayed in this manner.

As a result of the display range of the 1F premonition display ZFD being reduced in this way, when the 1F premonition display ZFD is made invisible, the visibility of the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" becomes good, as shown in FIG. 281(c). The situation shown in FIG. 281(c) functions as an explanation screen (defeat 100 enemies) regarding the operation performance, and when this ends, the performance shown in FIG. 281(d) appears. Note that the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" will continue to progress through the above-mentioned respective periodic changes (period 1F time A, period 1F time B) as shown in FIG. 279(e) and (f), respectively, unless the player accepts the operation.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figs. 278 and 281 assume that the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made to "1F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing te2A (the timing shown in Fig. 281(e)) within the 1F acceptance period. Note that in this example, the operation acceptance is made based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but this is not limiting, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" may be realized by other methods.

In other words, during the 1F reception period in this embodiment, whether or not 100 enemies can be defeated can indicate whether the likelihood of winning a jackpot is high or low, and when an operation is performed on the 1F operation section B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operation receptions, the presentation can progress so that there is a possibility that the number of remaining enemies will decrease each time the operation is performed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "1F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing te2A (the timing shown in FIG. 281(e)) during the 1F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 278(i), (k) and FIG. 281(e), "75 remaining" is displayed as the 1F acceptance post-display UB1, and the 1F acceptance post-output sound B is audibly output. However, for such "1F acceptance post-change B", including the second or subsequent operation described below, a different effect change (e.g., an effect change that changes the light emission state of the effect lamp) from these effect changes (1F acceptance post-display, 1F acceptance post-output sound) may be further performed. Alternatively, such "1F acceptance post-change B" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple effect elements, and may be realized by only one of the effect elements described above (e.g., an effect change that changes the light emission state of the effect lamp).

Furthermore, among the "first F post-reception change B" corresponding to the first operation reception on the "first F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the execution time of the first F post-reception output sound B is set shorter than the time set as the reception period, whereas the execution time of the first F post-reception display UB1 is set longer than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation receptions on the "first F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are performed while the first F post-reception display UB corresponding to the previous operation on the "first F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is displayed.

In this example, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "1st F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing te2B (the timing shown in FIG. 281(f)) during the 1st F reception period. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 278(i), (k) and FIG. 281(f), "65 remaining" is displayed as the 1st F reception post-display UB2, and the 1st F reception post-output sound B is audibly output. Note that here, the same sound is output as the 1st F reception post-output sound B when the "1st F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated for the first time and when the "1st F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated for the second or subsequent time, but different sounds may be output.

In this example, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "1st F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing te2C (the timing shown in FIG. 281(g)) within the 1st F reception period. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 278(i), (k) and 281(g), no new display (mode) appears as the post-1st F reception display UB, and no new sound is audibly output as the post-1st F reception output sound B.

In this example, when the "first F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) during the first F reception period, a new display does not appear as the first F reception post-display UB, and some sound does not newly audibly output as the first F reception post-output sound B. Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "first F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the first F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be displayed as the first F reception post-display UB, or no sound may be newly audibly output as the first F reception post-output sound B. In short, such an event (a new display does not appear as the first F reception post-display UB, and some sound does not newly audibly output as the first F reception post-output sound B despite an operation being performed on the "first F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the first F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as mentioned above, if an operation is performed on "1F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 1F reception period in this way but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound in response to that operation appears (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to just continue operating "1F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". This sense of uneasiness is likely to grow stronger as the remaining time in the 1F reception period decreases.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 278 and 281 are based on the assumption that the player has given up on the "initial game strategy (timing te2A-te2C)" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "1st F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and has switched to a "new game strategy" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "1st F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)", which makes it possible to make the final presentation result appear with just one operation.

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 278(a), (h), and (i), it is assumed that an operation is performed on "1F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing te2D (the timing shown in Fig. 281(h)) within the 1F reception period while the 1F post-reception display UB (here, "65 remaining") is displayed in response to the reception of an operation on "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)."

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "1F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing te2D (the timing shown in FIG. 281(h)) during the 1F reception period, a 1F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the 1F post-reception changes A, the 1F reception period is terminated based on the operation (see FIG. 278(a) and (c)). Also, as shown in FIG. 278(h), (k) and FIG. 281(h), a "1F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "1F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, and a "1F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "1F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed.

When an operation is performed on the "1F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "1F post-reception output sound A" is audibly output as a sound different from the above-mentioned "1F post-reception output sound B." Also, when an operation is performed on the "1F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 1F reception period, the 1F effect display EF is always displayed in the same manner (not indicating the likelihood of receiving a special bonus such as a jackpot, see FIG. 281(h)).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 281(h), the 1F effect display EF in this example begins to be displayed when none of the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and 1F post-acceptance display UB are in a hidden state, and is not only displayed so as to overlap from the front of the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "1F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" on the operated side, but is also displayed so as to overlap from the front of the "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the "1F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" on the non-operated side.

That is, in this case, both the "1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are made difficult to see by the 1F effect display EF corresponding to the operation of the "1F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". In contrast, when an operation is performed on the "1F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 1F reception period, the effect display EF that makes the "1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" difficult to see is not displayed based on this. Also, during the 1F reception period, the "1F post-reception display UB" corresponding to the operation on the "1F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is not displayed overlapping the front side of the "1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" or the "1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" as shown in FIG. 281 (e) to (g).

Therefore, during the 1F reception period, when "1F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, this triggers both "1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" to be difficult to see due to the other image (1F effect display EF), but when "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated, this triggers neither "1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" nor "1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" to be difficult to see. Note that in this example, "1F effect display EF" changes its form so that its display range becomes smaller as time passes.

After this, as shown in Figures 278(h) and 281(i), while the "1st F effect display EF" is displayed, a 1st F post-reception display UA is displayed in response to the operation on the "1st F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". In this example, the 1st F post-reception display UA is displayed as a "set of three decorative patterns", but it may also be displayed as a "set of three decorative patterns not all together". The 1st F post-reception display UA is displayed behind the "1st F effect display EF", and visibility is improved when the "1st F effect display EF" is hidden.

In this example, the "1st F post-reception display UA" is started to be displayed while the "1st F effect display EF" is being displayed, so that the "1st F effect display EF" is displayed across the period in which the "1st F post-reception display UB" is displayed and the "1st F post-reception display UA" is displayed. This, combined with the fact that no effect display is performed when the state of the "1st F post-reception display UB" changes (Fig. 281 (e) and (f)), is expected to favorably suggest that a dramatic effect resulting from operations on different operating parts is emerging.

The "1st F post-reception display UA" may be displayed at the same timing as the "1st F effect display EF". However, even in this case, the "1st F post-reception display UA" will be displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the "1st F effect display EF", and visibility will be improved when the "1st F effect display EF" is hidden.

In addition, in the 1F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 278 and Fig. 281 (e)-(g), when "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated, the periodic changes (see Fig. 280) that have appeared up until then in "1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" based on this are continued without being hidden (termination, interruption, periodic switching, etc.). In other words, in the 1F reception period, the periodic changes in "1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" do not change in their display form before and after operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) for the "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (cycle 1F time A, cycle 1F time B) described above.

In contrast, during the 1F reception period, as shown in Fig. 278 and Fig. 281 (h) and (i), when "1F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the periodic changes in "1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on this. Here, by hiding "1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves, these periodic changes are hidden.

In this example, the gauge image GG is depicted decreasing over time while the 1F reception period is continuing, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

In addition, even if the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which is displayed as the "1st F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" and which allows multiple operation receptions is kept in an operated (pressed) state during the 1st F reception period, this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see FIG. 278(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to receive multiple operations for the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which corresponds to the "1st F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" during the 1st F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 278(c), the 1F reception period is originally intended to continue until the arrival of timing te3 when there is no operation reception (that ends the reception period), and to end based on the arrival of timing te3. In this regard, the 1F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 279, when there is no operation reception that ends the reception period until the arrival of timing te3 during the 1F reception period, the 1F reception period is simply ended based on the arrival of timing te3, and neither the 1F post-reception change A that appears when an operation is performed on the "1F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" nor the 1F post-reception change B that appears when an operation is performed on the "1F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is executed.

When the 1F reception period occurs, the "permission sound C" can be audibly output as a 1F reception permissible sound that indicates that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted (see Fig. 278 and Fig. 279). During the 1F reception period, whether an operation is performed on the "1F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or on the "1F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" while the "permission sound C" is being audibly output, the "permission sound C" is not interrupted by this. However, when the 1F reception period occurs, the reception permissible sound may not necessarily be audibly output. Also, the 1F premonition performance display ZFD may not necessarily be executed. Also, when an operation is received during the 1F reception period, it is sufficient that some kind of post-reception change occurs, and for example, the 1F post-reception display and the 1F post-reception output sound may not necessarily be executed.

Incidentally, the "reception acceptable sound" is different from the sound (premonition performance sound) that is output in response to a premonition performance display. Since the "premonition performance sound" is output in response to a premonition performance display, it is usually output prior to the reception acceptable sound. Therefore, while the form of the "premonition performance sound" as an output sound changes depending on the form of the premonition performance display, the "reception acceptable sound" can be output in a specific (one) form regardless of the form of the premonition performance display.

Figure 282 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 2F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 2F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 283 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 2F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Figures 285 and 286 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the 2F reception period occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "second F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the second F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the second F fluctuation pattern) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 282(a), within the execution period of the variable performance related to the "second F variable pattern", the second F acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of changes after second F acceptance (such as display UA, UB after second F acceptance and sound output after second F acceptance)" is permitted can occur based on the arrival of timing tf2 when the second F time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 2F") (the situation shown in FIG. 285(b)).

Here, in the second F reception period according to this embodiment, as in the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281), the second F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is permitted to receive only one operation until the second F reception period ends, and the second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted to receive multiple operations until the second F reception period ends (multiple operation permitted period). In this example, the "first F operation unit A" used in the first F reception period and the "second F operation unit A" used in the second F reception period are the same operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001), but they may be different operation units. Also, the "first F operation unit B" used in the first F reception period and the "second F operation unit B" used in the second F reception period are the same operation unit (here, the operation button 410), but they may be different operation units.

In other words, during the second F reception period (period allowing multiple operations), like the first F reception period described above, it is anticipated that, for example, even if the player starts operating second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, the player may become anxious when the final result display does not appear, and in the middle of the second F reception period (period allowing multiple operations), the player may switch from "operation on second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on second F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" in an attempt to progress the presentation.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates a second F reception period, it is possible to first execute a premonition display that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given (that the second F reception period will occur).

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when timing tf1 arrives before the occurrence of the second F reception period, the "second F premonition presentation display ZFD" is started to be executed as the premonition presentation display, as shown in Fig. 282(d), Fig. 283(d), and Fig. 285(a). This "second F premonition presentation display ZFD" is displayed so as to straddle the timing when the second F operation related displays A and B are displayed, as shown in Fig. 282(d), Fig. 283(d), and Fig. 285(a) and (b), etc.

That is, in this example, even when the 2nd F reception period occurs, as shown in Figures 282, 283, and 285(b) and (c), the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and the "2nd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted are displayed. Note that in this example, the timing when the 2nd F reception period occurs is the same as the timing when the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed across these timings by starting to display them after the timing when the 2nd F premonition performance display ZFD is displayed and before the timing when the 2nd F reception period occurs. Alternatively, the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed with a delay to the timing when the 2nd F reception period occurs.

Note that in this example, the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation related display B (button imitation image BMG)" are displayed as "a display imitation of the 2nd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "a display imitation of the 2nd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)", respectively, but the display contents are not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 285(b), the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" begin to be displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" while the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" is being displayed.

In addition, the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as images that may undergo periodic changes. That is, as described above, during the 2nd F reception period, at least the "2nd F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" which is only permitted to receive one operation, and the "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" which is permitted to receive multiple operations are provided as operation sections that may receive operations by the player.

As for the "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," when a moving image in which "the portion (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving portion of the 2F operation portion A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(A), and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 284(B) to (D)" is considered to be one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 2F time A.

Furthermore, with regard to the "2F operation-related display B (button imitation image BMG)," when a moving image such as "the part simulating the operation receiving part of the 2F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) (button imitation image BMG) is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 284(a), and then sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 284(b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 2F time B.

According to these configurations, in the 2F reception period, as shown in Figs. 284 to 286, each "operation receiving part" in the "2F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "2F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" appears as a depiction moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the cycle 2F time A and the cycle 2F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since they are set to a longer time than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the 3F reception period described below, in the 2F reception period, as in the 1F reception period described above, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down more slowly within its movable range compared to the 3F reception period. The cycle 2F time A and the cycle 2F time B may be set to the same time as the cycle 1F time A and the cycle 1F time B, respectively.

When "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing tf2 when the 2nd F reception period occurs, it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for timing tf2 when the 2nd F reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in Fig. 284 (A) and (a), respectively, until timing tf2 arrives.

In this example, the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" begin to be displayed behind the "2nd F premonition effect display ZFD" while the "2nd F premonition effect display ZFD" is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 285(b), and begin to change periodically. Note that the display range of the 2nd F premonition effect display ZED is reduced over time, as shown in FIG. 285(a)-(d).

The "2nd F premonition effect display ZFD" in this example is executed by both "mode ZFD-1" which is displayed so as to overlap in front of the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "mode ZFD-2" which is displayed so as to overlap behind them. Therefore, the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed behind the "mode ZFD-1" of the "2nd F premonition effect display ZFD", but are displayed in front of the "mode ZFD-2" of the "2nd F premonition effect display ZFD". Note that mode ZFD-2 does not necessarily have to be provided.

In other words, as shown in Figures 282 to 286, the "2nd F premonition effect display ZFD" in this example starts to be displayed before timing tf2 when the 2nd F reception period occurs, and is not hidden even when timing tf3 arrives when the set time set for the 2nd F reception period has elapsed (timing tf3 when the 2nd F reception period ends without any operation by the player), and can continue to be displayed.

However, after the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" starts to be displayed, the reduction rate of the display area of "mode ZFD-1" is set to be larger than that of "mode ZFD-2". This allows the visibility of "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" to gradually improve even while the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" is (continuously) displayed. Note that the reduction rate of the display area of "mode ZFD-1" may be "100%", and the reduction rate of the display area of "mode ZFD-2" may be "0%".

Incidentally, during the 2nd F reception period in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 285 and 286, "Hero YS" and "Wizard MT" facing off against the BOSS character are each displayed on the performance display device 1600, with "Hero YS" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on "2nd F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and "Wizard MT" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)."

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 2nd F reception period, a presentation is provided in which it is shown whether "based on this one-time operation reception, hero YS can defeat the BOSS character or not," and the result can indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%).

In contrast, when the "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 2nd F reception period, a performance such as "whether or not it is possible to escape (escape) from the BOSS battle" is provided. That is, when the "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 2nd F reception period, the magic value (the area filled in with the "Magic" decorative display) displayed in the lower right of the display screen can be increased, and when the magic value is full, a depiction is performed in which the wizard MT casts a spell and successfully escapes (escapes) from the BOSS battle. When the escape (escape) is successful in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher (it may be "100%) than if it is not successful.

During the 2nd F reception period in this example presentation, at the time of its occurrence, the "2nd F operation-related display A," "2nd F operation-related display B," "Hero YS," "Wizard MT," "BOSS character," etc. are largely covered by the fog represented by the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD," making it impossible to see their entirety (a situation close to concealment). As mentioned above, the fog represented by this "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" continues to be displayed even at timing tf3, when the set time for the 2nd F reception period has elapsed.

However, as mentioned above, the fog displayed by the "2nd F Premonition Display ZFD" reduces in size over time, so the visibility of the "2nd F Operation Related Display A", "2nd F Operation Related Display B", "Hero YS", "Wizard MT", "BOSS Character", etc. will gradually improve.

In particular, in this example, the fog represented by the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" includes the fog represented by the above-mentioned "mode ZFD-1" and the fog represented by the above-mentioned "mode ZFD-2". In this regard, the rate of decrease in the display area of the fog represented by "mode ZFD-1" is set to be greater than the rate of decrease in the display area of the fog represented by "mode ZFD-2", so that during the 2nd F reception period, the fog represented by the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" remains for a long time, while the visibility of the "2nd F operation related display A", "2nd F operation related display B", etc. can be suitably improved.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figs. 282 and 285 assume that the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made to "2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2A (the timing shown in Fig. 285(c)) within the 2F acceptance period. Note that in this example as well, the operation acceptance is made based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but this is not limiting, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" may be realized by other methods.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2A (the timing shown in FIG. 285(c)) within the 2nd F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 282(i), (k) and FIG. 285(c), one of the post-2nd F acceptance changes B is a "depiction of the magic value (the area filled in for the "Magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "0" to "1")" and a "depiction of the wizard MT saving MP" (post-2nd F acceptance display UB1).

In this example, if an operation is performed on "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 2nd F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 282 (k)). That is, in this case, the "wizard MT" is depicted secretly saving MP for the BOSS character, but from the player's perspective, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, the feeling of satisfaction (dramatic effect) when operating is low, which can arouse anxiety, such as "Is it okay to continue performing such operations?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the second F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the second F post-reception display UB (such as a "representation of an increase in magic value (the area filled in around the "Magic" decorative display)" or a "representation of the wizard MT saving MP") when an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the second F reception period is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "second F premonition presentation display ZFD," but is displayed in front of it when they overlap. In this presentation example, the "second F premonition presentation display ZFD" includes "mode ZFD-1" and "mode ZFD-2," and the second F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of either of them. With this configuration, the absence of an audible output sound after acceptance can raise concerns such as "Is it okay to continue with this operation?", while still effectively suggesting that the operation acceptance itself is being carried out properly.

Note that such "change B after reception of the second F" may further include a performance change different from the display UB after reception of the second F (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting state of the performance lamp), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, such "change B after reception of the second F" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized with only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting state of the performance lamp).

In addition, the execution time of the "2nd F post-reception display UB" in response to the reception of an operation on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set to be longer than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the second and subsequent receptions of an operation on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are performed while the 2nd F post-reception display UB in response to the previous operation on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 282, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2B (the timing shown in FIG. 285(d)) during the 2nd F reception period. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 282(i), (k) and FIG. 285(d), one of the 2nd F post-reception changes B is a depiction of the "magic value (the area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "1" to "2")" and a depiction of the "wizard MT further saving MP" (2nd F post-reception display UB2). However, as mentioned above, in this case, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 282(k)).

In this example, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on "2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2C (the timing shown in FIG. 286(e)) within the 2F reception period. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 282(i), (k) and 286(e), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but a new display (mode) does not appear as the 2F post-reception display UB.

In this example, when the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) during the second F reception period, "a new display does not appear as the second F post-reception display UB." Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the second F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be displayed as the second F post-reception display UB. In short, such an event (no new display appears as the second F post-reception display UB despite an operation being performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the second F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as mentioned above, even during the second F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation appears (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to grow stronger as the remaining time of the second F reception period decreases. In particular, during the second F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the second F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes this feeling of uneasiness even more likely.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 282, 285, and 286 are based on the assumption that the player has given up on the "initial game strategy (timing tf2A-tf2C)" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and has switched to a "new game strategy" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "second F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)", which makes it possible to make the final presentation result appear with just one operation.

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figures 282 (a), (h), and (i), it is assumed that an operation is performed on "2F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tf2D within the 2F reception period while a 2F post-reception display UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2" or of the wizard MT further accumulating MP) is being displayed in response to an operation reception on "2F operation part B (here, operation button 410)."

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "second F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tf2D within the second F reception period, a second F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the second F post-reception changes A, first, the second F reception period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 282 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 282 (h), (k) and Fig. 286 (f), (i), a "second F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "second F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "second F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "second F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further, a second F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in Figs. 286(f) and (i), the 2nd F effect display EF in this example begins to be displayed when none of the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" and "2nd F premonition effect display ZFD" are in the hidden state, and is displayed so as to appear to overlap from in front of the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that corresponds to the "2nd F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" on the operating side.

When an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 2nd F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" based on this will not be displayed.

The "2nd F post-reception display UA" in response to the reception of an operation on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 2nd F reception period may show a mode UA-1 (Fig. 286 (f) to (h)) with a relatively high expectation level (proportion of winning a jackpot), or a mode UA-2 (Fig. 286 (i) to (k)) with a lower expectation level (proportion of winning a jackpot) than the mode UA-1. As described above, when the 2nd F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "2nd F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output, but the "2nd F post-reception output sound A" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the expectation level.

In this regard, when a relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 appears as the "second F post-reception display UA", a "second F effect display EF-1" is displayed, which is a different mode from when a relatively lowly anticipated mode UA-2 appears as the "second F post-reception display UA", as shown in FIG. 286(f).

In other words, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 appears as the "2nd F after reception display UA", the 1st mode EF-1 (see FIG. 286(f)) is displayed as the 2nd F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 will appear as the "2nd F after reception display UA".

In contrast, when mode UA-2, which has a relatively low expectation, appears as the "2nd F post-reception display UA", the 2nd F effect display EF is displayed in a different manner from when mode UA-1, which has a relatively high expectation, appears as the "2nd F post-reception display UA", as shown in Figures 286 (i) to (k).

In other words, when the mode UA-2, which has a relatively low expectation, appears as the "2nd F after reception display UA", the 2nd mode EF-2 (see FIG. 286(i)) is displayed as the 2nd F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2, which has a relatively low expectation, will appear as the "2nd F after reception display UA".

Furthermore, during the 2F reception period in this embodiment, the periodic changes of "2F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on the operation of "2F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in Figs. 282 and 286. Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding "2F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves.

In addition, during the 2nd F reception period in this embodiment, the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" is also made invisible based on an operation on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" as shown in Figures 282 and 286. However, the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" is not made invisible as a result of an operation on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

In this example, in the state immediately after the operation is accepted (the state in which the second F effect display EF is displayed) (see FIG. 286(f) and (i)), the "second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "second F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "second F premonition performance display ZFD" are not hidden, and the "second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the second F effect display EF. After this, the "second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "second F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "second F premonition performance display ZFD" are made to be ...

Here, the "2nd F after-reception display UA" is displayed behind the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)", "2nd F effect display EF" and "decorative pattern SZ", which makes the "2nd F after-reception display UA" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed (see Fig. 286 (f) and (i)). However, as the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)", "2nd F effect display EF" and the like are hidden, the visibility of the "2nd F after-reception display UA" gradually improves. Also, as described above, by checking the mode of the 2nd F effect display EF even while it is displayed, it is easy to recognize whether the "2nd F after-reception display UA" is displayed in the mode UA-1 with high expectations or the mode UA-2 with low expectations.

The "2nd Floor Post-Acceptance Display UA" in this example will progress in its display content according to the expectation levels UA-1 and UA-2, as shown in Figures 286 (h) and (k).

In addition, during the second F reception period, as shown in FIG. 282, when the second F reception period occurs, either the "first permissible sound A1" or the "second permissible sound A2" can be (selectively) audibly output as the second F reception permissible sound. For example, when the "first permissible sound A1" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound when the second F reception period occurs, it is desirable to set it so that it suggests that the expectation (proportion) of a jackpot is higher than when the "second permissible sound A2" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound.

In this regard, in the second F reception period, as shown in FIG. 282(j), a situation may occur in which an operation is received while either the "first allowable sound A1" or the "second allowable sound A2" is being audibly output as the reception allowable sound, but when an operation is received for the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," this does not interrupt the audible output of the "first allowable sound A1" or the "second allowable sound A2" (timing tf2A, tf2B, tf2C). However, when an operation is received for the "second F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while either the "first allowable sound A1" or the "second allowable sound A2" is being audibly output as the reception allowable sound, this will interrupt the audible output of the "first allowable sound A1" or the "second allowable sound A2" (timing tf2D).

In addition, during the second F reception period, based on an operation performed on the "second F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden or the second F reception period is terminated. However, when an operation is performed on the "second F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)," no matter how many times the operation is performed, this may not be the trigger for the "second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" to be hidden or the second F reception period to be terminated.

For example, when the magic value (the area filled in for the "Magic" decoration display) accumulates to an increased level as a result of repeated operations on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 2nd F reception period, the game may wait until the timing tf3 at which the 2nd F reception period ends, and perform an effect of casting a spell and leaving based on the arrival of the timing tf3. In this case, even if the magic value (the area filled in for the "Magic" decoration display) accumulates to an increased level, if the game is set in a state where operation acceptance on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is permitted until the arrival of the timing tf3, it becomes possible to select whether or not to perform a one-time attack on the BOSS character while the effect of casting a spell and leaving is confirmed, which can increase the interest in the game. However, in this case, if an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the effect of casting a spell and leaving will not be performed regardless of the result of the effect.

Alternatively, a performance determination may be made prior to generating the second F reception period, and if no special determination result is obtained as a result of the performance determination, a performance may be executed in which it is predetermined that the magic value (the area filled in for the "Magic" decorative display) will not accumulate to an increased level (the reception period will not end) no matter how many times an operation is performed on "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the second F reception period. In this case, when an operation is performed on "second F operation unit A (here, sword decorative body 5001)", the "post-second F reception display UA" may always be the relatively low expectation mode UA-2, or there may be a possibility that the relatively high expectation mode UA-1 will appear. In this regard, if there is a possibility that the relatively highly anticipated pattern UA-1 will appear when an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," it can be expected that the decrease in interest in the game will be effectively suppressed when the magic power value is not accumulated to the maximum level no matter how many times the operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

In addition, in this example, the second-fourth reception display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP) is not displayed behind the "second-fourth reception display ZFD" but is also displayed in front of the "second-fourth reception display UA" (see Figures 286 (f) and (g)). In this example, when mode UA-1 is displayed as the "second-fourth reception display UA", the mode UA-1 is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the second-fourth reception display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP), but when mode UA-2 is displayed as the "second-fourth reception display UA", the mode UA-2 may also be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the second-fourth reception display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP).

In this example, the UB displayed after the second frame is accepted (such as depictions of magic power increasing or the wizard MT saving MP) is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see Figure 285(d) and Figure 286, etc.), but it may also be displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ.

In addition, in this example, the display UB after the second F reception (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP) is not hidden based on the operation of the "second F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the second F reception period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 282(i) and FIG. 285, the display UB after the second F reception (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP) not only continues to be displayed when the "display after the second F reception UA" or the "second F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation of the "second F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" starts to be displayed, but also can continue to be displayed even when the "second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "second F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" or "second F effect display EF" is hidden.

In this case, however, it is desirable, but not essential, to hide the 2nd F after reception display UB (such as depictions of increasing magical power values or the wizard MT saving MP) while the "2nd F after reception display UA" is displayed. This makes it possible to appeal to the viewer that the performance can be advanced by receiving an operation (magic by the wizard) on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," while in fact indicating that the performance has advanced by receiving an operation on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, in the second F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 282, 285, and 286, when the "second F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated, the periodic changes (see Fig. 284) that have appeared up until then in the "second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" based on this are continued without being hidden (ended, interrupted, switched periodically, etc.). In other words, in the second F reception period, the periodic changes in the "second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" do not change in display mode before and after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "second F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is made, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) for the "2F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," the "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (period 2F time A, period 2F time B) described above.

In contrast, during the 2nd F reception period, as shown in Figs. 282 and 286, when "2nd F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the periodic changes in "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on this. Here, by hiding "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves, these periodic changes are hidden.

In this example, the gauge image GG is depicted decreasing over time while the second F reception period is continuing, but this does not necessarily have to be the case.

In addition, even if the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" which is displayed as the "second F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" and which allows multiple operation receptions is kept in an operated (pressed) state during the second F reception period, this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see FIG. 282(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to receive multiple operations for the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" which corresponds to the "second F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" during the second F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 282(c), the second F acceptance period is originally continued until the timing tf3 arrives when there is no operation acceptance (to end the acceptance period), and ends based on the arrival of timing tf3. In this regard, the second F acceptance period occurs as an acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, when there is no operation acceptance to end the acceptance period until the timing tf3 arrives during the second F acceptance period, the same post-acceptance change A as when an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the acceptance period can occur based on the arrival of timing tf3. In other words, in this case, the performance corresponding to the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" which requires multiple operations during the second F acceptance period and does not have the so-called auto-repeated function enabled cannot be enjoyed unless the player operates it himself, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained in a good way.

Note that even if "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the second F reception period and the second F reception period does not end and timing tf3 arrives, the same post-reception change A as when "second F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated during the reception period will occur based on the arrival of timing tf3. In other words, in this case, while the second F post-reception display UB (such as a depiction of increasing magical power or a depiction of the wizard MT saving MP) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and post-reception change A occurs.

Figure 287 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 3F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 3F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 288 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 3F reception period occurs but the player does not perform an operation. Figures 290 and 291 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the 3F reception period occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "3rd F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3rd F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 3rd F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 3rd F fluctuation pattern) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3rd F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 287(a), within the execution period of the variable performance related to the "3F variable pattern", the above-mentioned 3F acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance of changes after 3F acceptance (such as displays UA, UB after 3F acceptance and sound output after 3F acceptance)" is permitted can occur based on the arrival of timing tg2 when 3F time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 3F") (the situation shown in FIG. 291(b)).

Here, the 3F reception period according to this embodiment differs from the above-mentioned 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281) and 2F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) in that both the 3F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 3F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) are allowed to accept multiple operations before the 3F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). Note that in this example, the "3F operation part A" used in the 3F reception period is the same operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001) as the "1F operation part A" used in the 1F reception period and the "2F operation part A" used in the 2F reception period, but they may be different operation parts. Also, the "3F operation unit B" used in the 3F reception period is the same operation unit (here, operation button 410) as the "1F operation unit B" used in the 1F reception period and the "2F operation unit B" used in the 2F reception period, but they may be different operation units.

And, even in such a third F reception period (period in which multiple operations are permitted), just like the first F reception period and second F reception period described above, it is expected that there will be cases in which, for example, after starting to operate third F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, the player will feel uneasy when the final result display does not appear, and in the middle of the third F reception period (period in which multiple operations are permitted), the player will switch from "operation of third F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation of third F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" in an attempt to progress the presentation.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates a 3rd F reception period, it is possible to first execute a premonition display that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given (that the 3rd F reception period will occur).

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when timing tg1 arrives before the occurrence of the 3F reception period, the "3F premonition presentation display ZFD" is started to be executed as the premonition presentation display, as shown in Fig. 287(d), Fig. 288(d), and Fig. 290(a). This "3F premonition presentation display ZFD" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 3F operation-related displays A and B are displayed, as shown in Fig. 287(d), Fig. 288(d), and Fig. 290(a) and (b), etc.

That is, in this example, even when the 3F reception period occurs, as shown in Figures 287, 288, and 290(b) and (c), the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and the "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted are displayed. Note that in this example, the timing when the 3F reception period occurs is the same as the timing when the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed across these timings by starting to display them after the timing when the 3rd F premonition performance display ZFD is displayed and before the timing when the 3rd F reception period occurs. Alternatively, the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed with a delay to the timing when the 3rd F reception period occurs.

Note that in this example, the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation-related display B (button imitation image BMG)" are displayed as "a display imitation of the 3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "a display imitation of the 3F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", respectively, but the display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 290(b), the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" begin to be displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the "3rd F premonition performance display ZFD" while the "3rd F premonition performance display ZFD" is being displayed.

In addition, the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as images that may undergo periodic changes. That is, as described above, during the 3F reception period, at least the "3F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" that allows multiple reception of operations by the player and the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" that allows multiple reception of operations are provided as operation sections that may allow reception of operations by the player.

As for the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," when a moving image such as "the portion (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving portion of the 3F operation portion A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 289(A), and then sequentially displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 289(B)" is considered to be one periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 3F time A.

Furthermore, with regard to the "3F operation-related display B (button imitation image BMG)," when a moving image such as "the part simulating the operation receiving part of the 3F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) (button imitation image BMG) is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 289(a), and then displayed in sequence in each of the forms shown in FIG. 289(b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 3F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 3F reception period, as also shown in Figs. 289 to 291, each "operation receiving portion" in the "3F operation portion A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "3F operation portion B (here, the operation button 410)" appears as a depiction moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the "cycle 3F time A (see Figs. 289 (A) and (B))" is set to a time shorter than the "cycle 1F time A" and "cycle 1F time B" in the above-mentioned 1F reception period, and the "cycle 2F time A", "cycle 2F time B", and "cycle 3F time B (see Figs. 289 (a) to (d))" in the above-mentioned 2F reception period. Therefore, the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" during the 3F reception period depicts the "operation receiving portion" moving up and down within its movable range faster than during the above-mentioned 1F reception period and 2F reception period. In this case, it is desirable to provide the "3F operation section A" corresponding to the "3F operation-related display A" during the 3F reception period as the same operation section (here, the sword ornament 5001) as the "1F operation section A" corresponding to the "1F operation-related display A" during the 1F reception period and the "2F operation section A" corresponding to the "2F operation-related display A" during the 2F reception period, thereby making the time required for the periodic change different from each other even though the mock image displays are intended for the same operation section.

When "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing tg2 when the 3F reception period occurs, it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for timing tg2 when the 3F reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in Fig. 289 (A) and (a), respectively, until timing tg2 arrives.

In this example, the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" begin to be displayed behind the "3F premonition effect display ZFD" while the "3F premonition effect display ZFD" is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 290(b), and begin to change periodically. Note that in this example, the display range of the 3F premonition effect display ZED is reduced over time, as shown in FIG. 290(a)-(e), etc.

The "3F premonition effect display ZFD" in this example is composed only of "modes" that are displayed so as to overlap in front of the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)", and "modes" that are displayed so as to overlap behind them are not executed. As shown in Figures 287 to 291, the "3F premonition effect display ZFD" in this example starts to be displayed before the timing tg2 when the 3F reception period occurs, and is hidden before the timing tg3 when the set time set for the 3F reception period elapses (the timing tg3 when the 3F reception period ends without any operation by the player).

Incidentally, during the 3F reception period in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 290 and 291, "Hero YS" and "Wizard MT" facing off against the BOSS character are each displayed on the performance display device 1600, with "Hero YS" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on "3F Operation Unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and "Wizard MT" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on "3F Operation Unit B (here, operation button 410)."

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 3F reception period, a presentation is provided in which it is shown whether "Hero YS can defeat the BOSS character based on multiple receptions of operations," and the result can indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%).

In contrast, when the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 3F reception period, a performance such as "whether or not it is possible to escape (escape) from the BOSS battle" is provided. That is, when the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 3F reception period, the magic value (the area filled in with the "Magic" decorative display) displayed in the lower right of the display screen can be increased, and when the magic value is full, a depiction is performed in which the wizard MT casts a spell and successfully escapes (escapes) from the BOSS battle. When the escape (escape) is successful in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher (it may be "100%) than if it is not successful.

In the third F reception period according to this example, at the time of its occurrence, the "third F operation-related display A", "third F operation-related display B", "hero YS", "wizard MT", "BOSS character", etc. are largely covered by the lightning represented by the "third F premonition display ZFD", and it is impossible to see their entirety. However, unlike the above-mentioned "second F premonition display ZFD", the lightning represented by the "third F premonition display ZFD" according to this example is made to be in a non-display state before the timing tg3 at which the set time for the third F reception period has elapsed. In addition, since the lightning represented by the "third F premonition display ZFD" is also made to reduce its display area as time passes, the visibility of the "third F operation-related display A", "third F operation-related display B", "hero YS", "wizard MT", "BOSS character", etc. will gradually improve from the stage before the "third F premonition display ZFD" is made to be in a non-display state.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figs. 287 and 290 assume that the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made to "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2A (the timing shown in Fig. 290(c)) within the 3F acceptance period. Note that in this example as well, operation acceptance is made based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but this is not limiting, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" may be realized by other methods.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2A (the timing shown in FIG. 290(c)) within the 3F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 287(i), (k) and FIG. 290(c), one of the post-3F acceptance changes B is a depiction of "magic value (area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (magic value changing from "0" to "1")" and "the wizard MT saving MP" (post-3F acceptance display UB1).

In this example, if an operation is performed on "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period, as in the case of the 2F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 287(k)). That is, in this case, the "wizard MT" is depicted secretly saving MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, the feeling of satisfaction (dramatic effect) when operating is low, which can arouse anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue performing such an operation?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the 3F post-reception display UB (such as a "representation of increasing magic power value" or a "representation of the wizard MT saving MP") when operating "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "3F premonition presentation display ZFD," but is displayed in front of it when they overlap.

Note that such "change B after reception of the 3rd floor" may further include a performance change different from the display UB after reception of the 3rd floor (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting state of the performance lamp), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, such "change B after reception of the 3rd floor" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized with only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting state of the performance lamp).

In addition, the execution time of the "3F post-reception display UB" in response to the reception of an operation on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set to be longer than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the second and subsequent receptions of an operation on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are performed while the 3F post-reception display UB in response to the previous operation on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 287, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2B (the timing shown in FIG. 290(d)) during the 3F reception period. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 287(i), (k) and FIG. 290(d), one of the post-3F reception changes B is a depiction of "magic value (area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (magic value changing from "1" to "2")" and "the wizard MT further saving MP" (post-3F reception display UB2). However, as mentioned above, in this case, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 287(k)).

In this example, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2C (the timing shown in FIG. 290(e)) during the 3F reception period. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 287(i), (k) and 290(e), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but a new display (mode) does not appear as the 3F post-reception display UB.

In this example, when the "3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) during the 3F reception period, "a new display will not appear as the 3F post-reception display UB." Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be displayed as the 3F post-reception display UB. In short, such an event (no new display appears as the 3F post-reception display UB despite an operation being performed on the "3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 3F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation appears (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to grow stronger as the remaining time of the 3F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 3F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", the 3F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes this feeling of uneasiness even more likely.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 287, 290, and 291 are based on the assumption that the player has given up on the "initial game strategy (timing tg2A to tg2C)" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and has switched to a "new game strategy" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" multiple times.

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 287(a), (h), and (i), a situation is assumed in which a 3F post-acceptance display UB2 (here, an illustration of the magic value being set to "2" or of the wizard MT further accumulating MP) is displayed in response to an operation accepted for "3F operation part B (here, operation button 410)," and then the first operation is accepted for "3F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tg2D (the timing shown in Fig. 291(f)) within the 3F acceptance period.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the first operation is accepted for the "3F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tg2D (the timing shown in FIG. 291(f)) during the 3F acceptance period, change A after 3F acceptance can occur, as shown in FIG. 287 and FIG. 291(f).

As an example of such a change A after accepting 3F, as shown in Figs. 287(g)-(k) and 291(f), a "post-3F acceptance output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation on "3F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "3F effect display EF1" is displayed that makes it difficult to see the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "3F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)", and further a post-3F acceptance display UA1 is displayed. Here, the post-3F acceptance display UA1 shows "Hero YS attacking, causing the boss character's HP to decrease to about 75% remaining".

However, as shown in Figures 287(i) and (j), the "3F reception allowable sound that was being audibly output" and the "3F post-reception display UB that was being displayed" when the first operation is performed on the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" are not made inaudible or hidden when the first operation is received on the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," but continue to be executed.

In response to this, as shown in FIG. 287(e), when the first operation is performed on the "3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was in a state of undergoing a periodic change is made invisible when the first operation is received on the "3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)." Note that at this time, although it is made difficult to see by the "3F effect display EF1," the display of the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself continues, and only the periodic change that had been performed up until that point is temporarily terminated. Note that the periodic change that was once terminated in this way is restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Therefore, the "3F effect display EF1" in response to the first acceptance of an operation on the "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed while both the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 291(f), and is displayed so as to appear to overlap from in front of the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that corresponds to the "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that was operated.

When an operation is performed on the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" based on this will not be displayed.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 287(a), (h), and (i), various post-acceptance changes A have occurred in response to the previous acceptance of an operation on "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the post-acceptance display UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2" or a depiction of the wizard MT further saving MP) in response to the acceptance of an operation on "3F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed. In this case, it is assumed that the second and third acceptance of an operation on "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is made at timings tg2E and tg2F (the respective timings shown in Figs. 291(g) and (h)) during the 3F acceptance period.

In this pachinko machine 1, even if the second and third operations are accepted for the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timings tg2E and tg2F (the timings shown in Fig. 291 (g) and (h)) during the 3F acceptance period, change A after acceptance of 3F can occur, as shown in Fig. 287 and Fig. 291 (g) and (h), just as in the case where the first operation is accepted for the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

In particular, the "output sound A1 after accepting 3F" and the "3F effect display EF1" are designed to appear in the same manner when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. The periodic change in the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once terminated at the previous operation acceptance may be maintained in its terminated state at the time when the second and third operations are accepted, or may be resumed by canceling the terminated state. However, when the second and third operations are accepted, this will trigger the end state of the periodic change to occur again. In other words, in this case, the periodic change that was once terminated in this way will be resumed from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second and third operations are accepted.

In this regard, the "3rd F after-acceptance display UA" is basically the same as when the first operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" (3rd F after-acceptance display UA1). However, when the second operation is accepted, "Hero YS attacks, and the boss character's HP decreases to about 50% remaining (3rd F after-acceptance display UA2)" is displayed (see FIG. 291(g)), and when the third operation is accepted, "Hero YS attacks, and the boss character's HP decreases to about 25% remaining (3rd F after-acceptance display UA3)" is displayed (see FIG. 291(h)), and so on, with progress being made in the presentation.

In the third F reception period in this example, the performance (HP reduction of the boss character) as the "third F reception display UA1" is advanced each time an operation is performed on the "third F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, the display may or may not be advanced when an operation is performed on the "third F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", for example, by making the display advance with a predetermined probability based on the result of the judgment. However, when an operation is performed on the "third F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the third F reception period, unlike when an operation is performed on the "third F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", even if the display does not advance, the "third F reception post output sound A1" is audibly output, the "third F effect display EF1" is displayed, and the periodic change in the "third F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is terminated.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 287(a), (h), and (i), various post-acceptance changes A have occurred in response to the third acceptance of an operation on "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the post-acceptance display UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2" or a depiction of the wizard MT further accumulating MP) in response to the acceptance of an operation on "3F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is still being displayed, and a fourth operation is accepted on "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tg2G (see Fig. 291(i)) within the 3F acceptance period.

In this pachinko machine 1, when a fourth operation is accepted for the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tg2G during the 3F acceptance period, a change A after the 3F acceptance may occur. For example, as one of the changes A after the 3F acceptance, the 3F acceptance period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 287 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 287 (h), (k) and Fig. 291 (f), (l), a "3F acceptance post output sound A2" corresponding to the operation for the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "3F effect display EF2" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further a display UA4 after the 3F acceptance is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 291(i), the 3F effect display EF2 in this example begins to be displayed when neither the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" nor the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" is in a hidden state, and is displayed so as to appear to overlap from in front of the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that corresponds to the "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" on the operating side.

When an operation is performed on the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" based on this will not be displayed.

The "3F post-reception display UA4" in response to the fourth operation reception on the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 3F reception period may show a mode UA4-1 (Fig. 291 (i) to (k)) with a relatively high expectation level (proportion of winning a jackpot), or a mode UA4-2 (Fig. 291 (l) to (n)) with a lower expectation level (proportion of winning a jackpot) than the above mode. As described above, when the 3F post-reception display UA4 is displayed, the corresponding "3F post-reception output sound A2" is also audibly output, but the "3F post-reception output sound A2" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the expectation level.

In this regard, when a relatively highly anticipated pattern UA4-1 appears as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4", a "3rd F effect display EF2-1" is displayed, which is a different pattern from when a relatively lowly anticipated pattern UA4-2 appears as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 291(i).

In other words, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UA4-1 appears as the "3rd F after reception display UA", the first mode EF2-1 (see FIG. 291(i)) is displayed as the 3rd F effect display EF2, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UA4-1 will appear as the "3rd F after reception display UA4".

In contrast, when the relatively low expectation mode UA4-2 appears as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4", the "3rd F effect display EF2-2" is displayed, which is a different mode from when the relatively high expectation mode UA4-1 appears as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 291(l).

In other words, when the relatively low expectation mode UA4-2 appears as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4", the second mode EF2-2 (see FIG. 291(l)) is displayed as the 3rd F effect display EF2, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively low expectation mode UA-2 will appear as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4". Note that the 3rd F effect display EF2, both the first mode EF2-1 and the second mode EF2-2, are displayed as image displays different from the 3rd F effect display EF1.

Furthermore, during the 3F reception period in this embodiment, the periodic changes of "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on the fourth reception of operation for "3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in Figs. 287 and 291. Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves.

In this example, in the state immediately after the operation is accepted (the state in which the 3F effect display EF2 is displayed) (see FIG. 291(i) and (l)), the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are not hidden, and the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 3F effect display EF2. After this, the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are made to be made to be hidden based on the fourth operation acceptance for the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" (see FIG. 291(j) and (m)). However, they may be made to be hidden from the state immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "3F reception display UA4" is displayed behind the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "3F effect display EF2", which makes the "3F reception display UA4" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed (see Fig. 291 (i) and (l)). However, the visibility of the "3F reception display UA4" gradually improves as the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "3F effect display EF2" are hidden. Also, as described above, by checking the mode of the "3F effect display EF2" while it is displayed, it is easy to recognize whether the "3F reception display UA4" is displayed in the mode UA4-1 with high expectations or the mode UA4-2 with low expectations.

The "3rd Floor Post-Acceptance Display UA4" in this example will progress in its display content according to the expectation levels UA4-1 and UA4-2, as shown in Figures 291(k) and (n).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 287, during the 3F reception period, either the "first allowable sound B1" or the "second allowable sound B2" may be audibly output (selectively) as the 3F reception allowable sound upon occurrence. For example, when the "first allowable sound B1" is audibly output as the 3F reception allowable sound upon occurrence of the 3F reception period, it is desirable to set it so that it suggests a higher expectation (proportion) of a jackpot being obtained than when the "second allowable sound B2" is audibly output as the reception allowable sound. The first allowable sound B1 may be the same as the above-mentioned "first allowable sound A1" or may be different. The second allowable sound B2 may be the same as the above-mentioned "second allowable sound A2" or may be different. The 3F reception allowable sound does not necessarily have to be output in one of multiple modes (multiple allowable sounds), and may be output in only one mode (one allowable sound).

In this regard, during the 3F reception period, as shown in FIG. 287(j), a situation may occur in which an operation is received while the 3F reception permissible sound is being audibly output, but when an operation is received on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," this is used as a trigger to not interrupt the audible output of the 3F reception permissible sound (timings tg2A, tg2B, tg2C).

In this regard, when an operation is accepted for the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword ornamental body 5001)" while the 3F reception allowance sound is being audibly output, this may serve as a trigger to interrupt the audible output of the 3F reception allowance sound (timing tg2G). However, during the 3F reception period, even if an operation is accepted for the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword ornamental body 5001)" while the 3F reception allowance sound is being audibly output, there are both cases where the audible output of the 3F reception allowance sound is interrupted (timing tg2G) and where the audible output of the 3F reception allowance sound is not interrupted (timings tg2D, tg2E, tg2F), so that it is expected that the sense of tension when an operation is accepted for the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword ornamental body 5001)" during the 3F reception period will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the 3F reception period, based on an operation performed on the "3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden or the 3F reception period is terminated. However, when an operation is performed on the "3F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)," no matter how many times the operation is performed, this may not be the trigger for the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" to be hidden or the 3F reception period to be terminated.

For example, when the magic value (the area filled in with the "magic" decoration display) accumulates to an increased level as a result of repeated operations on the "3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period, the game may wait until the timing tg3 at which the 3F reception period ends, and perform an effect of casting a spell and leaving based on the arrival of the timing tg3. In this case, even if the magic value accumulates to the maximum, if the game is set in a state where operation acceptance on the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is permitted until the arrival of the timing tg3, it becomes possible to challenge the BOSS character to make multiple attacks while the effect of casting a spell and leaving is confirmed, which can increase the interest in the game. However, when the 3F post-reception display UA4 is displayed as a result of performing multiple attacks in this way (when the 3F reception period ends), the effect of casting a spell and leaving will no longer be performed.

Alternatively, a performance judgment may be performed prior to the generation of the 3F reception period, and when no special judgment result is obtained as a result of the performance judgment, a performance may be performed in which it is predetermined that the magic value will not be accumulated to the maximum (the reception period will not end) no matter how many times the "3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated during the 3F reception period. In this case, when the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated for the fourth time, the "3F reception post display UA4" may always show the relatively low expectation mode UA4-2, or it may show the relatively high expectation mode UA4-1. In this regard, if the relatively high expectation mode UA4-1 is shown when the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game when the magic value cannot be accumulated to the maximum no matter how many times the "3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated can be appropriately suppressed.

Also, in this example, the 3F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic power value increasing or the magician MT saving MP) is not displayed behind the "3F premonition display ZFD" or the "3F post-acceptance display UA", but is displayed so as to appear overlapped in front of it (see Figures 291 (f)-(n) etc.). Also, in this example, the 3F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic power value increasing or the magician MT saving MP) is displayed so as to appear overlapped in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see Figures 290 and 291 etc.), but it may also be displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the decorative pattern SZ.

In addition, in this example, the 3F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the wizard MT saving MP) is not hidden based on the operation of the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 3F acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 287(i) and FIG. 291, the 3F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the wizard MT saving MP) not only continues to be displayed at the time when the "3F post-acceptance display UA4" and "3F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation of the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" start to be displayed, but also can continue to be displayed even when the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and "3F effect display EF" are hidden.

In this case, however, it is desirable, but not essential, to hide the 3F post-reception display UB (such as depictions of increasing magical power values or the wizard MT saving MP) while the "3F post-reception display UA4" is displayed. This makes it possible to appeal to the viewer that the performance can be advanced by accepting an operation (magic by the wizard) on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," while in fact indicating that the performance has advanced by accepting an operation on the "3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, in the 3F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 287, 290, and 291, when "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated, the periodic changes (see Fig. 289) that have appeared up until then in "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" based on this are continued without being hidden (terminating, interrupting, switching the period, etc.). In other words, in the 3F reception period, the periodic changes in "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" do not change in their display form before and after operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) for the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (period 3F time A, period 3F time B) described above.

In contrast, during the 3F reception period, as shown in FIG. 287 and FIG. 291, when the "3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the periodic changes in the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on this. Here, in the first to third receptions of operations on the "3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves are not hidden, and their periodic changes are hidden (ended), but in the fourth reception of an operation on the "3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves are hidden, thereby hiding their periodic changes.

In this example, the gauge image GG is depicted decreasing over time while the 3F reception period is continuing, but this does not necessarily have to be the case.

In addition, even if the "3F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which is displayed as the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" and which allows multiple operation receptions is kept in an operated (pressed) state during the 3F reception period, this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see FIG. 287(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to receive multiple operations for the "3F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "3F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" during the 3F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "3F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

However, during the 3F reception period, if the "3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" which is displayed as the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and allows multiple operation receptions is maintained in an operated (pressed) state, operation reception will be performed multiple times (the auto-repeated function is activated and operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (see FIG. 287(a)). In this performance example, it is assumed that the "3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is maintained in an operated (pressed) state from timing tg2D (the situation shown in FIG. 291(f)), and operation reception will be performed at predetermined time intervals (timings tg2E, tg2F, tg2G).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 287(c), the 3F reception period is originally intended to continue until the arrival of timing tg3 when there is no operation reception (to end the reception period), and to end based on the arrival of timing tg3. In this regard, the 3F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 288, when there is no operation reception to end the reception period (here, the fourth operation reception to the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)") until the arrival of timing tg3 during the 3F reception period, the same post-reception change A as when an operation reception to end the reception period by an operation to the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is performed within the reception period (here, the fourth operation reception to the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)") can occur based on the arrival of timing tg3. In other words, in this case, the effects corresponding to "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" which require multiple operations within the 3F reception period and for which the so-called auto-repeated function is not enabled, cannot be enjoyed unless the player operates it themselves, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Note that even if "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 3F reception period and the 3F reception period does not end and timing tg3 arrives, the same post-reception change A as occurs when "3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated during the reception period will occur based on the arrival of timing tg3. In other words, in this case, while the 3F post-reception display UB (such as a depiction of increasing magical power or a depiction of the wizard MT saving MP) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and post-reception change A occurs.

In this example, in the third F reception period, when a predetermined number of operations (here, the fourth time) are performed on the "third F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," an "operation acceptance to end the reception period" is performed and the third F post-reception display UA4 is displayed. Alternatively, a judgment may be made when an operation is performed on the "third F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the third F reception period, and based on the result of the judgment, an "operation acceptance to end the reception period" may be performed and the third F post-reception display UA4 may be displayed, or an "operation acceptance that does not end the reception period" may be performed and one of the third F post-reception displays UA1 to 3 may be displayed. In short, such an event (when an operation is performed on the "third F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the third F reception period, an "operation acceptance to end the reception period" is performed as a trigger) may occur when a predetermined condition is met.

Also, the "3F premonition performance display ZFD" in this example is made invisible before timing tg3 arrives. In this regard, the "3F premonition performance display ZFD" in this example will not be made invisible as a result of an operation being performed on "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" while the "3F premonition performance display ZFD" is displayed. However, with regard to the "3F premonition performance display ZFD", if an operation is performed on "3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" while the "3F premonition performance display ZFD" is displayed, this may either cause the "3F premonition performance display ZFD" to be made invisible as a result, or cause the "3F premonition performance display ZFD" not to be made invisible as a result. For example, while the "3F premonition performance display ZFD" is displayed, if an operation is accepted on the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that ends the 3F reception period, this may be used as a trigger to make the "3F premonition performance display ZFD" invisible; however, if an operation is accepted on the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that does not end the 3F reception period, this may not be used as a trigger to make the "3F premonition performance display ZFD" invisible.

Figures 292 and 293 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 4F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 4F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "4th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 4th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 4th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 4th F fluctuation pattern) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "4th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 292(a), within the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "4th F variable pattern", the above-mentioned 4th F acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance of changes after 4th F acceptance (such as displays UA and UB after 4th F acceptance and sound output after 4th F acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing th2, which is when 4F time has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 4F").

Here, the 4F reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281), 2F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286), and 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291), in that both the 4F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 4F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) are only allowed to accept one operation until the 4F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). Note that in this example, the "4F operation part A" used in the 4F reception period is the same operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001) as the "1F operation part A" used in the 1F reception period, the "2F operation part A" used in the 2F reception period, and the "3F operation part A" used in the 3F reception period, but they may be different operation parts. Also, the "4F operation unit B" used in the 4F reception period is the same operation unit (here, operation button 410) as the "1F operation unit B" used in the 1F reception period, the "2F operation unit B" used in the 2F reception period, and the "3F operation unit B" used in the 3F reception period, but they may be different operation units.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates a 4th F reception period, it is possible to first execute a premonition display that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given (that the 4th F reception period will occur).

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of performance, when the timing th1 arrives before the occurrence of the 4F reception period, as shown in FIG. 292(d) and FIG. 293(d), the "4F premonition performance display" is started as the premonition performance display. As shown in FIG. 292(d) and FIG. 292(d), etc., this "4F premonition performance display" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the timing when the 4F operation related displays A and B are displayed. Although not shown, it is preferable that the "4F premonition performance display" is executed in a manner different from the "1F premonition performance display" and the "2F premonition performance display", etc., and executed in the same manner as the "3F premonition performance display". However, the "4F premonition performance display" may also be executed in a manner different from the "3F premonition performance display".

That is, in this example, even when the 4F reception period occurs, as shown in Figures 292 and 293, the "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 4F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and the "4F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 4F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted are displayed. Note that in this example, the timing when the 4F reception period occurs is the same as the timing when the "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed, but this does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed across these timings by starting to display them after the timing when the 4th F premonition performance display ZFD is displayed and before the timing when the 4th F reception period occurs. Alternatively, the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed with a delay to the timing when the 4th F reception period occurs.

Note that in this example, the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation related display B (button imitation image BMG)" are displayed as "a display imitation of the 4th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "a display imitation of the 4th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)", respectively, but the display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will begin to be displayed so that they appear to overlap behind the "4th F premonition performance display ZFD" while the "4th F premonition performance display ZFD" is being displayed.

In addition, the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as images that may undergo periodic changes. That is, as described above, during the 4th F reception period, at least the "4th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" that is permitted to receive only one operation, and the "4th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" that is permitted to receive only one operation are provided as operation parts that may receive operations by the player.

As for the "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," when a moving image in which "the part (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving part of the 4F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in a first state, and then displayed in succession in several other states" is considered to be one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 4F time A.

Furthermore, with regard to the "4F operation-related display B (button imitation image BMG)," when a moving image in which "the part simulating the operation receiving part of the 4F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) (button imitation image BMG) is displayed in a second form, and then displayed in several other forms in sequence" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 4F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 4F reception period, each "operation receiving part" in the "4F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "4F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" etc. appears as a depiction moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the "periodic 4F time A" and "periodic 4F time B" are set to be longer than the "periodic 3F time A" in the above-mentioned 3F reception period. Therefore, the "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" during the 4F reception period depicts the "operation receiving part" moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than during the above-mentioned 3F reception period. In this case, it is desirable to provide the "4F operation section A" corresponding to the "4F operation related display A" in the 4F reception period as the same operation section (here, the sword decoration 5001) as the "3F operation section A" corresponding to the "3F operation related display A" in the 3F reception period, thereby making the time required for the periodic change different from each other even though the simulated image display is for the same operation section. The period 4F time A may be set to the same time as the period 1F time A and the period 2F time A.

When "4thF operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4thF operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing th2 when the 4thF reception period occurs, it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for timing th2 when the 4thF reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, "4thF operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4thF operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will be displayed in a manner that maintains the above-mentioned "first aspect" and "second aspect", respectively, until timing th2 arrives.

In this example, the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" begin to appear behind the "4th F premonition effect display ZFD" while it is being displayed, and begin to change periodically. Note that in this example, the display range of the 4th F premonition effect display ZED is reduced over time.

The "4th F premonition effect display" in this example is composed only of "modes" that are displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)", and "modes" that are displayed so as to appear to overlap behind them are not executed. As shown in Figures 292 and 293, the "4th F premonition effect display" in this example starts to be displayed before timing th2 when the 4th F reception period occurs, and is made invisible before timing th3 when the set time set for the 4th F reception period elapses (timing th3 when the 4th F reception period ends without any operation by the player).

Although illustration is omitted, for example, when an operation is performed on the "4th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 4th F reception period, a presentation is provided in which "whether or not the hero can defeat the BOSS character based on a single operation reception," and the result may suggest whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). However, it is desirable for the presentation content to be different from that of other reception periods (for example, a different type of BOSS character, etc.).

In response to this, when an operation is performed on the "4F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 4F reception period, a presentation is provided in which "based on a single reception of the operation, it is possible to determine whether or not the wizard can use magic to escape (escape) from the BOSS battle," and the result may suggest whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%).

In the 4F reception period according to this example, at the time of its occurrence, the "4F operation-related display A", "4F operation-related display B", "hero", "wizard", "BOSS character", etc. are largely covered by the "4F premonition performance display", and it is impossible to see their entirety. However, unlike the above-mentioned "2F premonition performance display ZFD", the "4F premonition performance display" according to this example is made to be in a non-display state before timing th3 at which the set time for the 4F reception period has elapsed. In addition, since the "4F premonition performance display" is also made to reduce its display area as time passes, the visibility of the "4F operation-related display A", "4F operation-related display B", "hero", "wizard", "BOSS character", etc. will gradually improve from the stage before the "4F premonition performance display" is made to be in a non-display state.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 292 assumes that an operation is accepted for "4F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing th2A within the 4F acceptance period. Note that in this example as well, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but this is not limiting, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" may be achieved by other methods.

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "4thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing th2A during the 4thF reception period, a change B after 4thF reception occurs. For example, as one of the changes B after 4thF reception, first, the 4thF reception period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 292 (b) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 292 (i) and (k), a "4thF post-reception output sound B" corresponding to the operation on the "4thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, a "4thF effect display EF" is displayed, and further a "4thF post-reception display UB" is displayed.

In this regard, the 4th F effect display EF in this example begins to be displayed when none of the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "4th F premonition display" are in a hidden state, as shown in FIG. 292(g). Moreover, in this example, it is displayed so as to appear to overlap the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "4th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" on the side that is not being operated, from in front of it, making the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" difficult to see.

The "4th F reception post-display UB" in response to the reception of an operation on the "4th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 4th F reception period may show a mode UB-1 with a relatively high expectancy (probability of winning a jackpot), or a mode UB-2 (see FIG. 292(i)) with a lower expectancy (probability of winning a jackpot) than the mode UB-1. As described above, when the 4th F reception post-display UB is displayed, the corresponding "4th F reception post-output sound B" is also audibly output, but the "4th F reception post-output sound B" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the expectancy.

In this regard, when the relatively highly anticipated form UB-1 appears as the "4th F reception post-display UB", the "4th F effect display EF-1" is displayed, which is a different form from when the relatively low-anticipated form UB-2 appears as the "4th F reception post-display UB".

In other words, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UB-1 appears as the "4th F after reception display UB", the first mode EF-1 (see FIG. 292(g)) is displayed as the 4th F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UB-1 will appear as the "4th F after reception display UB".

In contrast, when the mode UB-2, which has a relatively low expectation, appears as the "4th F reception post-display UB", the 4th F effect display EF is displayed in a different mode from when the mode UB-1, which has a relatively high expectation, appears as the "4th F reception post-display UB".

In other words, when the relatively low expectancy mode UB-2 appears as the "4th F reception-after display UB", the second mode EF-2 (see FIG. 292(g)) is displayed as the 4th F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively low expectancy mode UB-2 will appear as the "4th F reception-after display UB".

Furthermore, during the 4F reception period in this embodiment, the periodic changes of "4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on the operation of "4F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. 292. Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding "4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves.

In addition, during the 4F reception period in this embodiment, the "4F premonition display" is also made invisible based on an operation on the "4F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," as shown in FIG. 292.

In this example, in the state immediately after the operation is accepted for the "4F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" (the state in which the 4F effect display EF is displayed), the "4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "4F premonition display" are not hidden, and the "4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 4F effect display EF. Then, the "4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "4F premonition display" are made to be made to be hidden based on the operation for the "4F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". However, they may be made to be hidden from the state immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "4th F reception display UB" is displayed behind the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "4th F effect display EF", which makes the "4th F reception display UB" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed. However, as the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", "4th F effect display EF", etc. are hidden, the visibility of the "4th F reception display UB" gradually improves. Also, as described above, by checking the mode of the 4th F effect display EF while it is displayed, it is easy to recognize whether the "4th F reception display UB" is displayed in the mode UB-1 with high expectations or the mode UB-2 with low expectations.

The "4th floor post-reception display UB" in this example will progress in content depending on the expectation levels UB-1 and UB-2.

In contrast to this, the example shown in FIG. 293 assumes that an operation is accepted for "4thF operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing th2B within the 4thF acceptance period. Note that in this example as well, operation acceptance is based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but this is not limiting, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" may be achieved by other methods.

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "4F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing th2B during the 4F reception period, a 4F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the 4F post-reception changes A, first, the 4F reception period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 293 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 293 (h) and (k), a "4F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "4F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, and a "4F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "4F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further a 4F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In this regard, the 4th F effect display EF in this example begins to be displayed when none of the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)", and "4th F premonition effect display" are in the hidden state, as shown in FIG. 293 (g).

The "4th F post-reception display UA" in response to the reception of an operation on the "4th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 4th F reception period may show mode UA-1, which has a relatively high expectancy (probability of winning a jackpot), or mode UA-2 (see FIG. 293(h)), which has a lower expectancy (probability of winning a jackpot) than the above mode. As described above, when the 4th F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "4th F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output, but the "4th F post-reception output sound A" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the expectancy.

In this regard, when the relatively highly anticipated pattern UA-1 appears as the "4th F post-reception display UA", the "4th F effect display EF-1" is displayed, which is a different pattern from when the relatively low-anticipated pattern UA-2 appears as the "4th F post-reception display UA".

In other words, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 appears as the "4th F after reception display UA", the first mode EF-1 (see FIG. 293(g)) is displayed as the 4th F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 will appear as the "4th F after reception display UA".

In contrast, when the pattern UA-2, which has a relatively low expectation, appears as the "4th F post-reception display UA", the 4th F effect display EF is displayed in a different manner than when the pattern UA-1, which has a relatively high expectation, appears as the "4th F post-reception display UA".

In other words, when the relatively low expectancy mode UA-2 appears as the "4th F after reception display UA", the second mode EF-2 (see FIG. 293(g)) is displayed as the 4th F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively low expectancy mode UA-2 will appear as the "4th F after reception display UA".

As shown in Figures 292(g) and 293(g), during this 4F reception period, when an operation is performed on "4F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" and when an operation is performed on "4F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," the same pattern (pattern UA-1, pattern UA-2) will appear as the 4F effect display EF, but this can be said to be a different configuration from any of the 1F to 3F reception periods described above.

Furthermore, during the 4F reception period in this embodiment, the periodic changes of "4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on the operation of "4F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in FIG. 293. Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding "4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves.

In addition, during the 4F reception period in this embodiment, the "4F premonition performance display" is also made invisible based on an operation on the "4F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," as shown in FIG. 293.

In this example, when the state is immediately after an operation is accepted for the "4F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" (when the 4F effect display EF is displayed), the "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and "4F premonition display EF" are not hidden, and the "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 4F effect display EF. After this, the "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and "4F premonition display EF" are hidden based on the operation for the "4F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, they may be hidden from the state immediately after an operation is accepted.

Here, the "4th F post-reception display UA" is displayed behind the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "4th F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)," and "4th F effect display EF," making the "4th F post-reception display UA" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed. However, as the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "4th F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)," and "4th F effect display EF" are hidden, the visibility of the "4th F post-reception display UA" gradually improves. Also, as described above, by checking the mode of the 4th F effect display EF while it is displayed, it is easy to recognize whether the "4th F post-reception display UA" is displayed in the mode UA-1 with high expectations or the mode UA-2 with low expectations.

The "4th floor post-reception display UA" in this example will progress in content depending on the expectation levels UA-1 and UA-2.

In addition, during the 4F reception period, as shown in Figures 292 and 293, when it occurs, either the "first permissible sound C1" or the "second permissible sound C2" can be (selectively) audibly output as the 4F reception permissible sound. For example, when the "first permissible sound C1" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound when the 4F reception period occurs, it is desirable to set it so that it suggests that the expectation (proportion) of a jackpot is higher than when the "second permissible sound C2" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound.

It is preferable that the "first permissible sound C1" as the 4th F reception permissible sound is a sound that is not audibly output as the 2nd F reception permissible sound or the 3rd F reception permissible sound. In contrast, the "second permissible sound C2" as the 4th F reception permissible sound may be output as the same sound as the "first permissible sound A2" of the 2nd F reception permissible sound. Also, the "second permissible sound C2" as the 4th F reception permissible sound may be output as the same sound as the "second permissible sound B2" of the 3rd F reception permissible sound.

In this regard, during the 4F reception period, as shown in FIG. 292(j) and FIG. 293(j), a situation may occur in which an operation is received while either the "first permissible sound C1" or the "second permissible sound C2" is being audibly output as the reception permissible sound. Regardless of whether an operation is received for the "4F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or the "4F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," this is used as a trigger to interrupt the audible output of the 4F reception permissible sounds (the first permissible sound A1, the second permissible sound A2) (timing th2A, th2B).

Also, as shown in Figures 292 and 293, during the 4F reception period, regardless of whether an operation is received for "4F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" or "4F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," this will trigger the "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" to be hidden or the 4F reception period to end.

Also, as shown in Figures 292 and 293, the 4thF reception period is originally intended to continue until timing th3 arrives when there is no operation reception (that ends the reception period), and to end when timing th3 arrives. In this regard, the 4thF reception period occurs as a reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. More specifically, when there is no operation reception that ends the reception period until timing th3 arrives during the 4thF reception period, a post-reception change A that is the same as when an operation is performed on the "4thF operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the reception period can occur when timing th3 arrives.

Figure 294 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 5F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 5F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "5th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 5th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 5th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 5th F fluctuation pattern) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "5th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 294, within the execution period of the variable performance related to the "5th F variable pattern", the above-mentioned 5th F acceptance period (valid period) can occur, in which "acceptance of changes after 5th F acceptance (such as displays UA and UB after 5th F acceptance and sound output after 5th F acceptance)" is permitted, based on the arrival of timing ti2, which is when 5F time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on the satisfaction of "condition 5F").

Here, the 5F reception period according to this embodiment has a basically similar configuration to the above-mentioned 2F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286). Therefore, during the 5F reception period, the 5F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to receive only one operation until the 5F reception period ends, and the 5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations until the 5F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). It is desirable that the "5F operation unit A" and "5F operation unit B" used during the 5F reception period are the same operation units as the "2F operation unit A" and "2F operation unit B" used during the 2F reception period. However, this is not essential.

In other words, during the 5th F reception period (period allowing multiple operations), just like the 2nd F reception period described above, it is expected that, for example, even if the player starts operating 5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, the player may become anxious when the final result display does not appear, and in the middle of the 5th F reception period (period allowing multiple operations), the player may switch from "operation on 5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 5th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" to advance the performance.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates the 5th F reception period, it is possible to first execute a premonition display that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given (that the 5th F reception period will occur).

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of performance, when the timing ti1 arrives before the occurrence of the 5F reception period, as shown in FIG. 294(a), the "5F premonition performance display" is started to be executed as the premonition performance display, as shown in FIG. 294(d). This "5F premonition performance display" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the timing when the 5F operation related displays A and B are displayed, as shown in FIG. 294(d). The "5F premonition performance display" is executed in a manner (type) different from the "1F premonition performance display" and the "2F premonition performance display". It may also be executed in the same manner as the "3F premonition performance display" and the "4F premonition performance display". However, the "5F premonition performance display" may be executed in the same manner as the "2F premonition performance display", or in a manner different from the "3F premonition performance display".

That is, in this example, even when the 5F reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 294 etc., the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 5F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and the "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 5F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted are displayed. Note that in this example, the timing when the 5F reception period occurs is the same as the timing when the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed, but this does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed across these timings by starting to display them after the timing when the 5th F premonition display is displayed and before the timing when the 5th F reception period occurs. Alternatively, the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed with a delay to the timing when the 5th F reception period occurs.

Note that in this example, the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation related display B (button imitation image BMG)" are displayed as "a display imitation of the 5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "a display imitation of the 5th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)", respectively, but the display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, the "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will begin to be displayed so that they appear to overlap behind the "5F premonition performance display" while the "5F premonition performance display" is being displayed.

In addition, the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as images that may undergo periodic changes. That is, as described above, during the 5th F reception period, at least the "5th F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" which is only permitted to receive one operation, and the "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" which is permitted to receive multiple operations are provided as operation sections that may receive operations by the player.

As for the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," when a moving image in which "the part (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving part of the 5F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in a predetermined manner, and then displayed in several manners in sequence" is considered to be one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 5F time A.

Furthermore, with regard to the "5F operation-related display B (button imitation image BMG)," when a moving image in which "the part simulating the operation receiving part of the 5F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) (button imitation image BMG) is displayed in a specific manner, and then displayed in several manners in sequence" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 5F time B.

According to these configurations, in the 5F reception period, each "operation receiving part" in the "5F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "5F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the cycle 5F time A and the cycle 5F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since they are set to a time longer than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 3F reception period, in the 5F reception period, as in the above-mentioned 2F reception period, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down more slowly within its movable range compared to the 3F reception period. It is preferable to set the cycle 5F time A and the cycle 5F time B to the same time as the cycle 2F time A and the cycle 2F time B, respectively.

When "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing ti2 when the 5F reception period occurs, it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for timing ti2 when the 5F reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will be displayed in a manner that maintains the above-mentioned predetermined mode and specific mode, respectively, until timing ti2 arrives.

In this example as well, "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" begin to be displayed behind the "5F premonition performance display" while it is being displayed, and begin to change periodically. Note that the display range of the 5F premonition performance display is designed to shrink over time.

However, unlike the "2nd F premonition effect display", the "5th F premonition effect display" in this example is composed only of "modes" that are displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)", and "modes" that are displayed so as to appear to overlap behind them are not executed. As shown in FIG. 294, etc., the "5th F premonition effect display" in this example starts to be displayed before timing ti2 when the 5th F reception period occurs, and is made invisible before timing ti3 when the set time set for the 5th F reception period elapses (timing ti3 when the 5th F reception period ends without any operation by the player).

Incidentally, during the 5F reception period in this embodiment, as in the 2F reception period described above, a "hero" and a "wizard" facing off against a BOSS character are displayed on the performance display device 1600, with the "hero" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "wizard" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". However, it is desirable that the performance content be depicted differently from other reception periods, including the 2F reception period (for example, the type of BOSS character is different).

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 5th F reception period, a presentation is provided in which it is shown whether or not the hero can defeat the boss character based on that one-time operation reception, and the result can indicate whether the probability of a big win is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%).

In contrast, when the "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 5F reception period, a performance such as "whether or not you can escape (escape) from the BOSS battle" is provided. That is, when the "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 5F reception period, the magic value (the area filled in with the "Magic" decorative display) displayed in the lower right of the display screen can increase, and when the magic value is full, a depiction is performed in which the wizard casts a spell and successfully escapes (escapes) from the BOSS battle. When the escape (escape) is successful in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher (it may be "100%) than if the escape was not successful.

During the 5th Floor reception period in this example presentation, at the time it occurs, the "5th Floor Operation-Related Display A," "5th Floor Operation-Related Display B," "Hero," "Wizard," "BOSS Character," etc. are largely covered by the "5th Floor Premonition Display," making it impossible to see their entirety.

However, unlike the above-mentioned "2nd F premonition performance display," the "5th F premonition performance display" in this example is made invisible before timing ti3 when the set time for the 5th F reception period has elapsed. Also, since the "5th F premonition performance display" is also made to reduce its display area over time, the visibility of the "5th F operation-related display A," "5th F operation-related display B," "hero," "wizard," "boss character," etc. will gradually improve from the stage before the "5th F premonition performance display" is made invisible.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 294 assumes that the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made for the "5F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing ti2A within the 5F acceptance period. Note that in this example as well, the operation acceptance is made based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but this is not limiting, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" may be realized by other methods.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing ti2A within the 5th F acceptance period, as shown in Figures 294 (i) and (k), one of the post-5th F acceptance changes B is a "depiction of the magic value (the area filled in for the "Magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "0" to "1")" and a "depiction of the wizard MT saving MP" (5th F post-acceptance display UB1). Note that the 5th F post-acceptance display UB1 may be executed in the same manner (same presentation image) as the above-mentioned "2nd F post-acceptance display UB1".

In this example, if an operation is performed on "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 5F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 294 (k)). In other words, in this case, the "wizard" is depicted secretly saving MP for the BOSS character, but from the player's perspective, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, the satisfaction (dramatic effect) when operating is low, which can arouse anxiety, such as "Is it okay to continue performing such operations?".

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, in this performance example, the 5F post-reception display UB (such as a "representation of an increase in magic power value" or a "representation of the wizard MT saving MP") when operating the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5F reception period is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "5F premonition performance display," but is displayed in front of it when they overlap. With this configuration, the post-reception output sound is not audible, which arouses anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue this operation?", while appropriately suggesting that the operation reception itself is in a proper situation.

Note that such "change B after reception of the 5th floor" may further include a different effect change from the display UB after reception of the 5th floor (for example, a change in effect that changes the lighting state of the lighting lamp), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, such "change B after reception of the 5th floor" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple lighting elements, and may be realized with only one of the lighting elements described above (for example, a change in effect that changes the lighting state of the lighting lamp).

In addition, the execution time of the "5th F post-reception display UB" in response to the reception of an operation on the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set to be longer than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the second and subsequent receptions of an operation on the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are performed while the 5th F post-reception display UB in response to the previous operation on the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 294, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing ti2B within the 5th F reception period. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 294(i) and (k), as one of the 5th F post-reception changes B, a "depiction of the magic value (the area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "1" to "2")" and a "depiction of the wizard MT further saving MP" are performed (5th F post-reception display UB2). Note that the 5th F post-reception display UB2 may also be executed in the same manner (same performance image) as the above-mentioned "2nd F post-reception display UB2". However, as described above, in this case, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 294(k)).

In this example, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "5F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing ti2C within the 5F reception period. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in Figs. 294(i) and (k), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but a new display (mode) does not appear as the 5F post-reception display UB.

In this example, when the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) during the 5F reception period, "a new display will not appear as the 5F post-reception display UB." Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be displayed as the 5F post-reception display UB. In short, such an event (no new display appears as the 5F post-reception display UB despite an operation being performed on the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 5F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation appears (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to grow stronger as the remaining time of the 5F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 5F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the 5F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes this feeling of uneasiness even more likely.

In this regard, the presentation example shown in FIG. 294 assumes a case in which the player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timings ti2A to ti2C)" which aims to progress the presentation by operating "5F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and switches to a "new game strategy" which aims to progress the presentation by operating "5F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)", which can make the final presentation result appear with just one operation.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIG. 294, while a 5th F post-acceptance display UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2" or of the wizard MT further accumulating MP) is being displayed in response to an operation accepted on "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," it is assumed that an operation is performed on "5th F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing ti2D within the 5th F acceptance period.

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "5F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing ti2D within the 5F reception period, a 5F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the 5F post-reception changes A, the 5F reception period is ended based on the operation. Also, a "5F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "5F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "5F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "5F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further a 5F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 294, the 5F effect display EF in this example begins to be displayed when neither the "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" nor the "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" is in a hidden state, and is displayed so as to appear to overlap from in front of the "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that corresponds to the "5F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" on the operating side.

When an operation is performed on the "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 5F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will not be displayed based on this.

In addition, as the "5th F reception display UA" according to the operation reception to the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 5th F reception period, there are cases where a mode UA-1 with a relatively high expectation (proportion of winning a jackpot) appears, and cases where a mode UA-2 with a lower expectation (proportion of winning a jackpot) appears (see FIG. 294 (h)). It is preferable that the 5th F reception display UA is not executed in the same mode (same performance image) as the above-mentioned "5th F reception display UA". As described above, when the 5th F reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "5th F reception output sound A" is also audibly output, but the "5th F reception output sound A" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the expectation.

In this regard, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 appears as the "5th F post-reception display UA", and when the relatively low-anticipated mode UA-2 appears as the "5th F post-reception display UA", the same mode is displayed as the "5th F effect display EF". In other words, in this case, even if the mode of the "5th F effect display EF" is confirmed, it will not be possible to recognize the mode as the "5th F post-reception display UA".

In this case, the "5th F effect display EF" may be displayed in the same manner as the mode EF-2 with the lower expectation level of the modes EF-1 and EF-2 of the "2nd F effect display EF". Also, the "5th F effect display EF" may be displayed in the same manner as the mode EF-2 with the lower expectation level of the modes EF-1 and EF-2 of the "3rd F effect display EF", or may be displayed in the same manner as the mode EF-2 with the lower expectation level of the modes EF-1 and EF-2 of the "4th F effect display EF".

Furthermore, during the 5F reception period in this embodiment, the periodic changes of "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on the operation of "5F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in FIG. 294. Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves.

Also, during the 5F reception period in this embodiment, the "5F premonition performance display", although not shown in the figure, is made invisible based on an operation performed on the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the "5F premonition performance display" is displayed. However, the "5F premonition performance display" is not made invisible as a result of an operation performed on the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)".

In this example, if an operation is performed on the "5F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the "5F premonition display" is displayed (not shown), in the state immediately after the operation is accepted (the state in which the 5F effect display EF is displayed), the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)", and "5F premonition display" are not hidden, and the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 5F effect display EF. Then, the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)", and "5F premonition display" are made to be hidden based on the operation on the "5F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, they may be made to be hidden from the state immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "5th F after-reception display UA" is displayed behind the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)," and "5th F effect display EF," making the "5th F after-reception display UA" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed. However, as the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)," and "5th F effect display EF" are hidden, the visibility of the "5th F after-reception display UA" gradually improves. However, as mentioned above, even if the mode of the 5th F effect display EF is confirmed while it is displayed, it is not possible to recognize whether the "5th F after-reception display UA" is displayed in the high expectation mode UA-1 or the low expectation mode UA-2.

In addition, during the 5th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 294, a 5th F reception permission sound may be audibly output upon its occurrence. However, upon the occurrence of the 5th F reception period, only one form of the 5th F reception permission sound may be audibly output, and the expected degree (proportion) of a jackpot being obtained is not indicated.

In this regard, during the 5F reception period, as shown in FIG. 294(j), a situation may occur in which an operation is accepted while the 5F reception allowance sound is being audibly output, but when an operation is accepted for "5F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the audible output of the 5F reception allowance sound is not interrupted (timing ti2A, ti2B, ti2C). Moreover, during the 5F reception period, even when an operation is accepted for "5F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" while the 5F reception period is being audibly output, the audible output of the 5F reception allowance sound is not interrupted (timing ti2D).

In addition, during the 5F reception period, based on an operation performed on the "5F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden, or the 5F reception period is terminated. In contrast, when an operation is performed on the "5F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)," it may not be used as a trigger to hide the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)," or to terminate the 5F reception period, regardless of how many times the operation is performed.

For example, when the magic value (the area filled in with the "magic" decoration display) accumulates to an increased level as a result of repeatedly operating the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5F reception period, the game may wait until the timing ti3 at which the 5F reception period ends, and perform an effect of casting a spell and leaving based on the arrival of the timing ti3. In this case, even if the magic value accumulates to the maximum, if the game is set in a state where operation acceptance for the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is permitted until the arrival of the timing ti3, the game player can select whether or not to perform a one-time attack on the BOSS character while the effect of casting a spell and leaving is confirmed, which can increase the game's interest. However, in this case, if the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the effect of casting a spell and leaving will not be performed regardless of the result of the effect.

Alternatively, a performance judgment may be performed prior to the generation of the 5F reception period, and when no special judgment result is obtained as a result of the performance judgment, a performance may be performed in which it is predetermined that the magic value will not be accumulated to the maximum (the reception period will not end) no matter how many times the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated during the 5F reception period. In this case, when the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the "5F reception post display UA" may always show the relatively low expectation mode UA-2, or it may show the relatively high expectation mode UA-1. In this regard, if the relatively high expectation mode UA-1 is shown when the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game when the magic value cannot be accumulated to the maximum no matter how many times the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, in this example, the 5th F post-reception display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician saving MP) is not displayed behind the "5th F premonition display" but is also displayed in front of the "5th F post-reception display UA" so that it appears to overlap it. In this example, when mode UA-1 is displayed as the "5th F post-reception display UA", the mode UA-1 is displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the 5th F post-reception display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician saving MP), but when mode UA-2 is displayed as the "5th F post-reception display UA", the mode UA-2 may also be displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the 5th F post-reception display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician saving MP).

In this example, the UB displayed after accepting the 5th floor (depictions of increasing magical power, the wizard saving MP, etc.) is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern, but it may also be displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this example, the 5th F after-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician saving MP) is not hidden based on the operation of the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 5th F acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 294(i), the 5th F after-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician saving MP) not only continues to be displayed when the "5th F after-acceptance display UA" or "5th F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation of the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" starts to be displayed, but can also continue to be displayed even when the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" or "5th F effect display EF" is hidden.

In this case, however, it is desirable, though not essential, to hide the 5th F after-reception display UB (such as depictions of increasing magical power values or the wizard saving MP) while the "5th F after-reception display UA" is displayed. This makes it possible to appeal to the viewer that it is possible to progress the performance by accepting an operation (magic by the wizard) on the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," while in fact indicating that the performance has progressed by accepting an operation on the "5th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)."

Also, in the 5F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 294 etc., when "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated, the periodic changes that have appeared up until that point in "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" continue without being hidden (ended, interrupted, switched periodically, etc.). In other words, in the 5F reception period, the periodic changes in "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" do not change in display mode before and after operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is made, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) for the "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," the "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (period 5F time A, period 5F time B) described above.

In contrast, during the 5F reception period, as shown in FIG. 294, when "5F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the periodic changes in "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on this. Here, by hiding "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves, these periodic changes are hidden.

In this example, the gauge image GG is depicted decreasing over time while the 5F reception period is continuing, but this does not necessarily have to be the case.

In addition, even if the "5F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which is displayed as the "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" and which allows multiple operation receptions is kept in an operated (pressed) state during the 5F reception period, this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see FIG. 294(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to receive multiple operations for the "5F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which corresponds to the "5F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" during the 5F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "5F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 294(c), the 5F reception period is originally intended to continue until timing ti3 arrives if there is no operation reception (to end the reception period), and to end based on the arrival of timing ti3. In this regard, the 5F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. Therefore, if there is no operation reception to end the reception period until timing ti3 arrives during the 5F reception period, even if timing ti3 arrives, the same effect as when an operation is performed on "5F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" or "5F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 5F reception period will not be executed.

Incidentally, during the above-mentioned 1F reception period through 5F reception period, operation opportunities are given (operation acceptance is permitted) for two types of operation units, and the performance display device 1600 is configured to perform displays (mock image displays) related to these two types of operation units. However, during the 1F reception period through 5F reception period, it is sufficient that operation opportunities are given (operation acceptance is permitted) for at least two types of operation units, and operation opportunities may be given (operation acceptance is permitted) for three or more types of operation units.

In addition, as the types of such "acceptance period during which an operation opportunity can be given (operation acceptance can be permitted) for at least two types of operation units",
During the occurrence of the reception period, a confidential reception period may be further provided that has a dramatic effect of concealing the fact that an operation opportunity has been granted by preventing any display (simulated image display) related to the operation unit to which an operation opportunity has been granted (operation reception is permitted).

When such a confidential reception period is provided, for example, a reception period may be provided that is separate from the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281) (or instead of the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281)) in which neither "1F operation related display A" nor "1F operation related display B" is displayed during the 1F reception period, but the rest of the configuration is the same. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the post-reception performance contents (post-reception display, premonition performance display, reception permissible sound, etc.) may be executed as different types.

Also, aside from the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) (or instead of the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286)), a reception period may be provided in which neither "second F operation related display A" nor "second F operation related display B" is displayed during the second F reception period, but the rest of the configuration is the same. However, if both reception periods are provided, the post-reception performance contents (post-reception display, premonition performance display, reception permissible sound, etc.) may be executed as different types.

Also, aside from the 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) (or instead of the 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291)), a reception period may be provided in which neither "3F operation related display A" nor "3F operation related display B" is displayed during the 3F reception period, but the rest of the configuration is the same. However, if both reception periods are provided, the post-reception performance contents (post-reception display, premonition performance display, reception permissible sound, etc.) may be executed as different types.

Also, aside from the 4F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293) (or instead of the 4F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293)), a reception period may be provided in which neither "4F operation related display A" nor "4F operation related display B" is displayed during the 4F reception period, but the rest of the configuration is the same. However, if both of these reception periods are provided, the post-reception performance contents (post-reception display, premonition performance display, reception permissible sound, etc.) may be executed as different types.

Also, aside from the 5F reception period (see FIG. 294) (or instead of the 5F reception period (see FIG. 294)), a reception period may be provided in which neither "5F operation related display A" nor "5F operation related display B" is displayed during the 5F reception period, but the rest of the configuration is the same. However, if both of these reception periods are provided, the post-reception performance contents (post-reception display, premonition performance display, reception permission sound, etc.) may be executed as different types.

When such a "reception period during which operation opportunities can be granted (operation reception is permitted) for at least two types of operation units" is generated as a "confidential reception period" with a performance that prevents any of the displays (e.g., two types of mock image displays) related to the two types of operation units from being displayed (performance that conceals the fact that operation opportunities are granted), this may be generated as, for example, the 10F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306) or the 11F reception period (see Figures 307 to 310) described below.

In addition, in order to realize each of the inventions (confidentiality reception periods) described below, it is only necessary to have the necessary configurations among the configurations described below. It is not necessary to have these for each of the reception periods described above while referring to Figure 294, or it is possible to have only the necessary types of those reception periods.

Figure 303 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 10F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 10F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 304 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 10F reception period occurs but the player does not perform an operation. Figures 305 and 306 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the 10F reception period occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "10th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 10th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 10th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 10th F fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "10th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 303(a), within the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "10th F variable pattern", the above-mentioned 10th F acceptance period (valid period) can be generated, in which "acceptance of changes after 10th F acceptance (such as displays UA and UB after 10th F acceptance and sound output after 10th F acceptance)" is permitted, based on the arrival of timing tj2, which is the time when 10th F has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 10F").

Here, in the 10F reception period according to this embodiment, similar to the above-mentioned 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291), both the 10F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are allowed to accept multiple operations before the 10F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). Note that in this example, the "10F operation unit A" used in the 10F reception period is the same operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) as the "1st F operation unit A" used in the 1st F reception period, the "2nd F operation unit A" used in the 2nd F reception period, and the "3rd F operation unit A" used in the 3rd F reception period, but they may be different operation units. In addition, the "10F operation unit B" used in the 10F reception period is the same operation unit (here, operation button 410) as the "1F operation unit B" used in the 1F reception period, the "2F operation unit B" used in the 2F reception period, and the "3F operation unit B" used in the 3F reception period, but they may be different operation units. In addition, during the 10F reception period, it may be possible to further allow operation reception for an operation unit different from either the 10F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) or the 10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410).

However, as shown in Figs. 303(e), (f) and 305(a), the "10F reception period" differs from the above-mentioned "3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291)" in that, when the "10F reception period" occurs, none of the operation-related displays corresponding to the operation units (here, the "operation-related display" corresponding to the above-mentioned 10F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the "operation-related display" corresponding to the above-mentioned 10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)) are displayed. In other words, in this case, the fact that all of the multiple operation units (10F operation unit A, 10F operation unit B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given.

In this regard, in the "10th F reception period" according to this example, when the final result display appears as a result of performing an operation on 10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) which allows multiple operations, a performance is realized which gives the player the sensation that "there must be another operation unit (10th F operation unit A) to which an operation opportunity has been secretly granted." In other words, in this case, it becomes easy to encounter a situation where the operation target is switched from "operation on 10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 10th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" in an attempt to progress the performance.

For example, in the "10F reception period" according to this presentation example, no matter how many times either 10F operation unit A or 10F operation unit B, which allow multiple operations, is operated, the 10F reception period will not end as a result of this, but will only end when timing tj3 arrives, which is when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the 10F reception period. This allows the player to sense the possibility that there may be other operation units that are secretly given operation opportunities, by seeing how the 10F reception period does not end as a result of this, no matter how many times it is operated.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, first, when the "10th F reception period" is generated, as shown in Fig. 303(d) and Fig. 304(d), no premonition display suggesting this is executed at a timing before the occurrence of the 10th F reception period. Also, as shown in Fig. 303(d), Fig. 304(d) and Fig. 305(a), even after the occurrence of the 10th F reception period, basically, the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 10th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is not displayed, and the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed, as described above.

However, in this example, when an operation is performed on the "10th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period, this triggers the display of the 10th F post-reception display UB, as well as the display of the "10th F operation-related display B" (see FIG. 303 (f)). Note that at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 303, it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tj2A, but the "10th F operation-related display B" is not displayed until the timing tj2A arrives (in the situation shown in FIG. 305(a), the "10th F operation-related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when the first operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tj2A, this triggers the display of the 10th F post-acceptance display UB, as well as the display of the "10th F operation-related display B" (in the situation shown in FIG. 305(b) and subsequent pages, the "10th F operation-related display B" is displayed).

According to this configuration, as shown in FIG. 305(a), the fact that both the operation reception for the "10th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the operation reception for the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are permitted can be kept secret at the time when the "10th F reception period" occurs. However, as shown in FIG. 305(b), once an operation is received for the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "10th F reception period", the secret state is released only with respect to the secrecy of the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", so it can be expected that the tension can be appropriately maintained while increasing interest in the game.

In this example, the "10th F operation related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but is displayed as a different display image. Therefore, during the 10th F reception period, a display imitating the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" does not appear. Also, the "10th F operation related display B" may not display a periodic change. Also, it is desirable that the disappearance EF display is not displayed when the "10th F operation related display B" is hidden. However, none of these are essential configurations. For example, even if an operation is accepted for the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "10th F reception period", it is not only not to display a display imitating the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but also not to display the "10th F operation related display B". In other words, in this case, "10th F operation related display B" will no longer appear during the 10th F reception period.

During the 10th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "10th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," one of the "changes A after 10th F reception" corresponding to that operation will be a presentation (display UA after 10th F reception) of "what type of equipment will Hero YS be wearing when he appears," and the result can indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). In this example, the display UA after the 10th floor reception is displayed in one of three ways: "first presentation mode UA1," in which hero YS appears wearing only underwear; "second presentation mode UA2," in which hero YS appears wearing cloth clothing; or "third presentation mode UA3," in which hero YS appears wearing iron armor; "second presentation mode UA2" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "first presentation mode UA1," and "third presentation mode UA3" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "second presentation mode UA2."

In contrast to this, within the 10F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," one of the "post-10F reception changes B" in response to that operation will be a presentation (post-10F reception display UB) of "what type of equipment the wizard MT will appear wearing," and the result can indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). In this presentation example, the display UB after the 10th floor reception is displayed in one of three ways: "first presentation mode UB1," in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick; "second presentation mode UB2," in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod; or "third presentation mode UB3," in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a staff; "second presentation mode UB2" suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than "first presentation mode UB1," and "third presentation mode UB3" suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than "second presentation mode UB2."

In this example, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "10F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the 10F post-reception display UB is displayed, but it is also possible that an operation is performed on the "10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" while the 10F post-reception display UA is displayed. In this case, the 10F post-reception display UB is usually started to be executed in one of the above multiple modes based on the operation reception on the "10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", and the 10F post-reception display UA, which is already in the execution state, does not cause any change or end as a result of this. However, in this case, if the final mode (third performance mode UB3) of the 10F post-reception display UB is displayed, when the operation is performed on the "10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", no visible change (display change) will occur as a result of this.

In this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 305(b) and (c), when the first operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period, the 10th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the "10th F post-reception changes B", is executed as the "first presentation mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, if an operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound will not be audibly output (see FIG. 303 (k)). Therefore, even if the wizard MT is depicted as newly appearing equipped with one of the three types above, this, combined with the secrecy, can arouse anxiety, such as "Is it okay to continue performing this operation?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the post-10th F reception display UB (what type of equipment the wizard MT will appear wearing) when operating the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period is not displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in Figures 305 (b) and (c), but is displayed so that it can be seen in front of it when it overlaps.

In addition, with regard to the "10th F post-reception change B" in response to an operation on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period, including the second or subsequent operation described below, a different performance change from the 10th F post-reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission state of the performance lamp) may be performed. Alternatively, the "10th F post-reception change B" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized so that a similar action and effect can be obtained by only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission state of the performance lamp).

In addition, the execution time of the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" or the "10th F operation-related display B" corresponding to the operation acceptance on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is longer than the time set as the acceptance period (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second or subsequent operation on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed while the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" or the "10th F operation-related display B" corresponding to the previous operation on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 305(c) is appearing). In this example, the timing at which the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" is hidden is the same as the timing at which the "10th F operation-related display B" is hidden.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tj2B within the 10th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 305(c) appears).

In this example, when the second operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period, as shown in Fig. 303(i), (k) and Fig. 305(d)-(f), the 10th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 10th F post-reception changes B, is executed as the "second performance mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod, as shown in Fig. 303(i), (k) and Fig. 305(d)-(f). In this example, the wizard MT (first performance mode UB1), who had been equipped with a stick, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 305(d)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with a rod (second performance mode UB2) (see Fig. 305(e)), but the method of causing the display change as the 10th F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. In this case, as described above, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see Fig. 303(k)). Furthermore, the "10F operation-related display B" that is displayed in response to the first operation of the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" does not change its display mode or state when the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated a second time, and continues to be displayed as it was up until that point.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tj2C within the 10th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 305(f) appears).

In this performance example, when the third operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period, as shown in Fig. 303 (i), (k) and Fig. 305 (g) to (i), the 10th F post-reception display UB as one of the 10th F post-reception changes B is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a staff. In this example, the wizard MT (second performance mode UB2), who had been equipped with a rod until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 305 (g)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with a staff (third performance mode UB3) (see Fig. 305 (h)), but the method of causing the display change as the 10th F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. In this case, as described above, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see Fig. 303 (k)). Furthermore, when the "10F operation-related display B" is displayed in response to the first operation of the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," when the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated a third time, the display mode or state is not changed in response to this, and the display continues as it was up until then.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303, it is assumed that a fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tj2D within the 10th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 305(i) appears).

However, in this example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period, as shown in Figs. 303(i), (k), 305(j) and 306(k), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but no visible change (state) is displayed as the 10th F post-reception display UB (10th F post-reception change B). In other words, in this case, no visible post-reception change occurs before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period, and the performance status before the fourth operation continues as it was. In addition, at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, and the "10th F operation-related display B" continues to be displayed as it was.

In this example, the display UB after 10F reception is changed to a specific state or a new state does not appear depending on how many times the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 10F reception period. Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific state or a new state may not appear. In short, such a display change may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Incidentally, in this example, if the "second performance mode UB2" appears as the display UB after the 10F reception, even if you continue to operate only the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 10F reception period, and if the "third performance mode UB3" appears as the display UB after the 10F reception, even if you continue to operate only the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" or the "second performance mode UB2" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 10F reception period. Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the display UB after the 10F reception. Therefore, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" after the "third operation mode UB3" is displayed, the same situation as the "fourth operation" described above will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 10F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation is displayed (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to gradually grow stronger as the remaining time of the 10F reception period decreases (as the time elapsed since the occurrence of the operation becomes longer). In particular, during the 10F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the 10F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes the player feel even more uneasy.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 303, 305, and 306 are based on the assumption that the player has given up on the "initial game strategy (timing tj2A to tj2D)" which aims to advance the presentation by operating "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and has switched to a "new game strategy" which aims to advance the presentation by operating "10th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" multiple times.

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 303(a), (h), and (i), it is assumed that in a situation (conditions shown in Fig. 306(k)) in which the 10th F post-acceptance display UB3 is displayed in response to an operation accepted for "10th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)," the first operation is made for "10th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tj2E within the 10th F acceptance period.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the first operation is accepted for the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tj2E within the 10th F acceptance period, change A after 10th F acceptance can occur.

As an example of such a 10F post-reception change A, as shown in Figs. 303(h), (k) and 306(l), a "10F post-reception output sound A" is audibly output in response to the first operation of the "10F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and a 10F post-reception display UA is displayed. Here, the 10F post-reception display UA is a "first performance mode UA1" in which hero YS appears wearing only underwear. However, as shown in Figs. 306(l) and (m), the "10F post-reception display UA (what type of equipment hero YS will appear wearing)" is displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, unlike the above-mentioned "10F post-reception display UB".

The "output sound A after 10th F reception" is designed to be output as a sound that will not be output as a result of any operation reception being made to any operation unit during the above-mentioned 1F reception period.

Furthermore, for the "10th F post-reception change A" in response to an operation on the "10th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 10th F reception period, including the second or subsequent operation described below, a different performance change from the 10th F post-reception display UA (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission state of the performance lamp) may be performed. Alternatively, the "10th F post-reception change A" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized so that a similar effect can be obtained with only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission state of the performance lamp).

Note that if an operation is performed on "10F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" during the 10F reception period, the operation will not trigger the display of "10F operation related display A," as opposed to when an operation is performed on "10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" (see FIG. 303(e)).

In addition, in this example of the performance, as shown in Figures 303(i) and 306(l) and (m), the first operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the "10th F post-reception display UB" is displayed. However, the "10th F post-reception display UB" does not become hidden when the first operation is received on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" but continues to be executed.

Here, "Change A after 10F acceptance (display UA after 10F acceptance)" in response to acceptance of an operation on "Operation part A of 10F (here, sword ornament 5001)" is different from "Change B after 10F acceptance (display UB after 10F acceptance)" in that its execution state is terminated in a short period of time within the acceptance period and is put into a non-executing (hidden) state.

Therefore, the second or subsequent operation on the "10th F operation section A (here, operation button 410)" may be performed while the "10th F post-acceptance display UA" corresponding to the previous operation on the "10th F operation section A (here, operation button 410)" is already in a non-executed (hidden) state, and in this case, just as when the first operation on the "10th F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is accepted, the "10th F post-acceptance display UA (what type of equipment will hero YS appear wearing)" will begin to be executed while the 10th F post-acceptance display UA is not displayed.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), it is assumed that a second operation is performed on "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tj2F within the 10th F reception period (a situation in which the performance display shown in FIG. 306(m) appears). Note that in this performance example, it is assumed that each operation from the second onwards on "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is performed while the "10th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the previous operation is displayed.

In this example, when the second operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 10th F reception period, as shown in Fig. 303 (h), (k) and Fig. 306 (n) to (p), the 10th F post-reception display UA, which is one of the 10th F post-reception changes A, is executed as the "second performance mode UA2" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. In this example, the hero YS (first performance mode UA1), who had only worn underwear until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 306 (n)), and then depicted as reappearing wearing cloth clothes (second performance mode UA2) (see Fig. 306 (o)), but the method of causing the display change as the 10th F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, the post-reception output sound is audibly output as described above (see Fig. 303 (k)). Furthermore, even when a second operation is accepted for the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" will not be made invisible as a result, but will continue to be executed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tj2G during the 10th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 306(p) appears).

In this example, when the third operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 10th F reception period, as shown in Fig. 303 (h), (k) and Fig. 306 (q) to (s), the 10th F post-reception display UA, which is one of the 10th F post-reception changes A, is executed as the "third performance mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor, as shown in Fig. 303 (h), (k) and Fig. 306 (q) to (s). In this example, the hero YS (second performance mode UA2), who had been wearing cloth clothes until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 306 (q)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with iron armor (third performance mode UA3) (see Fig. 306 (r)), but the method of causing the display change as the 10th F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, the post-reception output sound is audibly output as described above (see Fig. 303 (k)). Furthermore, even when a third operation is accepted for the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" will not be made invisible as a result, but will continue to be executed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), it is assumed that a fourth operation is performed on "10th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tj2H during the 10th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 306(s) appears).

In this example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 10th F reception period, as shown in Fig. 303 (h), (k) and Fig. 306 (t) to (v), the 10th F post-reception display UA, which is one of the 10th F post-reception changes A, is executed as the "third performance mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. In this example, the hero YS (third performance mode UA3), who had been equipped with iron armor until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 306 (t)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with iron armor (third performance mode UA3) (see Fig. 306 (u)), but the method of causing the display change as the 10th F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, the post-reception output sound is audibly output as described above (see Fig. 303 (k)). Furthermore, even when a fourth operation is accepted for the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" will not be made invisible as a result, but will continue to be executed.

In this case, during the 10F reception period, when a fourth operation is performed on the "10F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "third performance mode UA3" as the 10F post-reception display UA, which had been in execution up until that point, is interrupted, and a performance appears in which the "third performance mode UA3" as the 10F post-reception display UA begins to be executed again.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), it is assumed that the fifth operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tj2I during the 10th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 306(v) appears).

In this example, when the fifth operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 10th F reception period, as shown in Fig. 303 (h), (k) and Fig. 306 (w) to (y), the 10th F post-reception display UA, which is one of the 10th F post-reception changes A, is executed as the "third performance mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. In this example, the hero YS (third performance mode UA3), who had been equipped with iron armor until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 306 (w)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with iron armor (third performance mode UA3) (see Fig. 306 (x)), but the method of causing the display change as the 10th F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, the post-reception output sound is audibly output as described above (see Fig. 303 (k)). Furthermore, even when the fifth operation is accepted for the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "10th F after acceptance display UB" will not be made invisible as a result, but will continue to be executed.

In this case, during the 10F reception period, when a fifth operation is performed on the "10F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "third performance mode UA3" as the 10F post-reception display UA that had been in execution up until that point is interrupted, just as when a fourth operation is performed, and a performance appears in which the "third performance mode UA3" as the 10F post-reception display UA begins to be executed again.

In this example, the display after 10F reception UA is "changed to a specific state" or "the same state appears again" depending on how many times an operation is performed on the "10F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 10F reception period. However, instead of this, a judgment may be made when an operation is performed on the "10F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 10F reception period, and based on the result of this judgment, the display may be "changed to a specific state" or "the same state may appear again." In short, such a display change may occur when each of the predetermined conditions is met.

Incidentally, in this example, if the "second performance mode UA2" appears as the display UA after the 10F reception, the "first performance mode UA1" will not appear as a result of any subsequent operation reception within the 10F reception period, and if the "third performance mode UA3" appears as the display UA after the 10F reception, the "first performance mode UA1" or the "second performance mode UA2" will not appear as a result of any subsequent operation reception within the 10F reception period. Therefore, the "third performance mode UA3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the display UA after the 10F reception. Therefore, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "10F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" after the "third performance mode UA3" is displayed, the same situation as the "fourth operation" or "fifth operation" described above will appear.

The "sound output after 10th F reception" can be the same regardless of the number of times the operation is received. However, it may be audibly output in different ways depending on the "change A after 10th F reception (display UA after 10th F reception)."

Also, in this example presentation, if "10F post-reception change A (10F post-reception display UA)" appears in response to an operation being performed on "10F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" during the 10F reception period, and "10F post-reception change B (10F post-reception display UB)" appears in response to an operation being performed on "10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10F reception period, then regardless of the timing of these operations, the execution state of "10F post-reception change A (10F post-reception display UA)" will end before the execution state of "10F post-reception change B (10F post-reception display UB)" ends.

In addition, during the 10th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 303, no reception permission sound is audibly output when it occurs, and no display is made indicating the remaining time.

In addition, in this performance example, the 10th F post-reception display UA is not displayed in front of the decorative pattern SZ so that it appears to overlap it, but is displayed behind it (see Figures 306 (l)-(y) etc.). In contrast, the 10th F post-reception display UB is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to it.

In addition, even if the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed) during the 10F reception period, this will not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions will not be automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function will not be enabled) (see FIG. 303(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operation receptions for the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)".

However, during the 10F reception period, if the "10F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is continuously operated (pressed), this will result in multiple operation receptions (the auto-repeated function is activated and operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (see FIG. 303(a)).

As shown in FIG. 303(c), the 10F reception period continues until timing tj3 arrives and ends only when timing tj3 arrives. In this regard, the 10F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 304, if no operation is performed during the 10F reception period, the 10F reception period ends without any changes in the display or sound output related to the reception period.

Figure 307 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 11F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 11F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 308 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 11F reception period occurs but the player does not perform an operation. Figures 309 and 310 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the 11F reception period occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "11th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 11th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 11th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 11th F fluctuation pattern) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "11th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 307(a), within the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "11th F variable pattern", the above-mentioned 11th F acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance of changes after 11th F acceptance (displays UA, UB, etc. after 11th F acceptance)" is permitted can occur based on the arrival of timing tk2 when 11th F time has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 11F").

Here, in the 11F reception period according to this embodiment, similar to the above-mentioned 10F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306), both the 11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the 11F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) are allowed to accept multiple operations before the 11F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). Note that in this example, the "11F operation part A" used in the 11F reception period is the same operation part (here, the sword decoration 5001) as the "1st F operation part A" used in the 1st F reception period, the "2nd F operation part A" used in the 2nd F reception period, the "3rd F operation part A" used in the 3rd F reception period, and the "10th F operation part A" used in the 10F reception period, but they may be different operation parts. In addition, the "11F operation unit B" used in the 11F reception period is the same operation unit (here, operation button 410) as the "1F operation unit B" used in the 1F reception period, the "2F operation unit B" used in the 2F reception period, the "3F operation unit B" used in the 3F reception period, and the "10F operation unit B" used in the 10F reception period, but they may be different operation units. In addition, in the 11F reception period, operation reception may be further permitted for an operation unit different from either the 11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) or the 11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410).

Similarly, in the "11th F reception period", as shown in Figs. 307(e), (f) and 309(a), when the "11th F reception period" occurs, none of the operation-related displays corresponding to the operation units (here, the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 11th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)) are displayed. In other words, in this case, the fact that all of the multiple operation units (11th F operation unit A, 11th F operation unit B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given.

The "11th F reception period" according to this example also realizes a performance that, when the final result display appears as a result of operating 11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, can give the player the sensation that "there must be another operation unit (11th F operation unit A) to which an operation opportunity has been secretly granted." In other words, in this case, it becomes easy to encounter a situation where the operation target is switched from "operation on 11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 11th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" in an attempt to progress the performance.

For example, in the "11F reception period" according to this presentation example, no matter how many times either 11F operation unit A or 11F operation unit B, which allow multiple operations, is operated, the 11F reception period will not end as a result of this, but will only end when timing tk3 arrives, which is when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the 11F reception period. This allows the player to sense the possibility that there may be other operation units to which operation opportunities are secretly granted, by seeing how the 11F reception period will not end as a result of this, no matter how many times it is operated.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, first, when the "11th F reception period" is generated, as shown in FIG. 307(d), no premonition display suggesting this is executed at a timing prior to the occurrence of the 11th F reception period. Also, as shown in FIG. 307(d) and FIG. 309(a), even after the occurrence of the 11th F reception period, basically, the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 11th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is not displayed, and the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 11th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed, as described above.

However, in this example as well, just like in the case of the 10F reception period described above, when an operation is performed on the "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 11F reception period, this triggers the display of the 11F post-reception display UB, as well as the display of the "11F operation-related display B" (see FIG. 307(f)). Note that at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tk2A, but the "11th F operation-related display B" is not displayed until the timing tk2A arrives (in the situation shown in FIG. 309(a) , the "11th F operation-related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tk2A, this triggers the display of the 11th F post-acceptance display UB, as well as the display of the "11th F operation-related display B" (in the situation shown in FIG. 309(b) and subsequent pages, the "11th F operation-related display B" is displayed).

According to this configuration, as shown in FIG. 309(a), the fact that both the operation reception for the "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the operation reception for the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are permitted can be kept secret at the time when the "11F reception period" occurs. However, as shown in FIG. 309(b), once an operation is received for the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "11F reception period", the secret state is released only with respect to the secrecy of the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", so it can be expected that the tension can be appropriately maintained while increasing interest in the game.

In this example, the "11F operation related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but is displayed as a different display image. Therefore, during the 11F reception period, a display imitating the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" does not appear. Also, the "11F operation related display B" may not display a periodic change. Also, it is desirable that the disappearance EF display is not displayed when the "11F operation related display B" is hidden. However, none of these are essential configurations. For example, even if an operation is accepted for the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "11F reception period", it is not only not to display a display imitating the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but also not to display the "11F operation related display B". In other words, in this case, "11th F operation related display B" will no longer appear during the 11th F reception period.

During the 11th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," one of the "changes A after 11th F reception" corresponding to that operation will be a presentation (display UA after 11th F reception) of "what type of equipment will Hero YS be wearing when he appears," and the result can indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). In this example, the display UA after the 11th floor reception is displayed in one of the following modes: "first performance mode UA1" in which hero YS appears wearing only underwear; "second performance mode UA2" in which hero YS appears wearing cloth clothing; and "third performance mode UA3" in which hero YS appears wearing iron armor. The "second performance mode UA2" suggests that the probability of a big win is higher than that of the "first performance mode UA1," and the "third performance mode UA3" suggests that the probability of a big win is higher than that of the "second performance mode UA2." As is clear from FIG. 305 and FIG. 309, the display UA after the 10th floor reception and the display UA after the 11th floor reception are executed as different performance contents (image displays).

In contrast to this, during the 11th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "11th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," one of the "post-11th F reception changes B" in response to that operation will be a presentation (post-11th F reception display UB) of "what type of equipment the wizard MT will appear wearing," and the result can indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). In this example, the display UB after the 11th floor reception is displayed in one of the following modes: "first performance mode UB1" in which the magician MT appears equipped with a stick; "second performance mode UB2" in which the magician MT appears equipped with a rod; and "third performance mode UB3" in which the magician MT appears equipped with a staff. The second performance mode UB2 suggests that the probability of a big win is higher than that of the first performance mode UB1, and the third performance mode UB3 suggests that the probability of a big win is higher than that of the second performance mode UB2. As is clear from FIG. 306 and FIG. 310, the display UB after the 10th floor reception and the display UB after the 11th floor reception are executed as different performance contents (image displays).

In this example, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "11F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the 11F post-reception display UB is displayed, but it is also possible that an operation is performed on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" while the 11F post-reception display UA is displayed. In this case, the 11F post-reception display UB is usually started to be executed in one of the above multiple modes based on the operation reception on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", and the 11F post-reception display UA, which is already in the execution state, does not cause any change or end as a result of this. However, in this case, if the final mode (third performance mode UB3) of the 11F post-reception display UB is displayed, when the operation is performed on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", no visible change (display change) will occur as a result of this.

In this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 309(b) and (c), when the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 11th F reception period, the 11th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the "11th F post-reception changes B", is executed as the "first presentation mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, if an operation is performed on "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 11th F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound will not be audibly output (see FIG. 307(k)). Therefore, even if the wizard MT is depicted as newly appearing equipped with one of the three types above, this, combined with the secrecy, can arouse anxiety, such as "Is it okay to continue performing this operation?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 11th F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the post-11th F reception display UB (what type of equipment the wizard MT will appear wearing) when operating the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 11th F reception period is not displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in Figures 309 (b) and (c), but is displayed so that it can be seen in front of it when they overlap.

In addition, with regard to the "11th F post-reception change B" in response to an operation on the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 11th F reception period, including the second or subsequent operation described below, a different performance change from the 11th F post-reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of the performance lamp) may be further performed. Alternatively, the "11th F post-reception change B" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized so that a similar action effect is obtained by only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of the performance lamp).

In addition, the execution time of the "11F post-acceptance display UB" or the "11F operation-related display B" corresponding to the operation acceptance on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is longer than the time set as the acceptance period (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second or subsequent operation on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed while the "11F post-acceptance display UB" or the "11F operation-related display B" corresponding to the previous operation on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 309(c) is appearing). In this example, the timing at which the "11F post-acceptance display UB" is hidden is the same as the timing at which the "11F operation-related display B" is hidden.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on "11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tk2B within the 11F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 309(c) appears).

In this performance example, when the second operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 11th F reception period, as shown in Fig. 307 (i), (k) and Fig. 309 (d) to (f), the 11th F post-reception display UB as one of the 11th F post-reception changes B is executed as the "second performance mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod, as shown in Fig. 307 (i), (k) and Fig. 309 (d) to (f). In this example, the wizard MT (first performance mode UB1), who had been equipped with a stick, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 309 (d)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with a rod (second performance mode UB2) (see Fig. 309 (e)), but the method of causing the display change as the 11th F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. In this case, as described above, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see Fig. 307 (k)). Furthermore, the "11F operation related display B" that is displayed in response to the first operation of the "11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" does not change its display mode or state when the "11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated a second time, and continues to be displayed as it was up until that point.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on "11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tk2C within the 11F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 309(f) appears).

In this example, when the third operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 11th F reception period, as shown in Figs. 307(i), (k) and 309(g)-(i), the 11th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 11th F post-reception changes B, is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a staff. In this example, the wizard MT (second performance mode UB2), who had been equipped with a rod until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 309(g)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with a staff (third performance mode UB3) (see Fig. 309(h)), but the method of causing the display change as the 11th F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. In this case, as described above, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see Fig. 307(k)). In addition, when the third operation is performed on the "11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the "11F operation-related display B" that is displayed in response to the first operation on the "11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" does not change its display mode or state in response to this, and continues to display as it was up until then.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that a fourth operation is performed on "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tk2D within the 11th F reception period (the situation in which the performance display shown in FIG. 309(i) appears).

However, in this example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 11F reception period, as shown in Figures 307(i), (k), 309(j), and 310(k), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but no visible change (state) is displayed as the 11F post-reception display UB (11F post-reception change B). In other words, in this case, no visible post-reception change occurs before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 11F reception period, and the performance status before the fourth operation continues as it was. In addition, at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, and the "11F operation-related display B" continues to be displayed as it was.

In this example, the display UB after 11F reception is changed to a specific state or a new state does not appear depending on how many times the 11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is operated during the 11F reception period. Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the 11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) during the 11F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific state or a new state may not appear. In short, such a display change may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Incidentally, in this example, if the "second performance mode UB2" appears as the 11F post-reception display UB, even if you continue to operate only the "11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 11F reception period, and if the "third performance mode UB3" appears as the 11F post-reception display UB, even if you continue to operate only the "11F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" or the "second performance mode UB2" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 11F reception period. Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 11F post-reception display UB. Therefore, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" after the "third operation mode UB3" is displayed, the same situation as the "fourth operation" described above will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 11F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation is displayed (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to gradually grow stronger as the remaining time of the 11F reception period decreases (as the time elapsed since the occurrence of the period increases). In particular, during the 11F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the 11F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes the player feel even more uneasy.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 307, 309, and 310 are based on the assumption that the player has given up on the "initial game strategy (timing tk2A-tk2D)" which aims to advance the presentation by operating "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and has switched to a "new game strategy" which aims to advance the presentation by operating "11th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" multiple times.

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 307(a), (h), and (i), it is assumed that in a situation (conditions shown in Fig. 310(k)) in which the 11th F post-acceptance display UB3 is displayed in response to an operation accepted for the "11th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)," the first operation is made for the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2E within the 11th F acceptance period.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the first operation is accepted for the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2E within the 11th F acceptance period, change A after 11th F acceptance can occur.

In this example, when the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11th F reception period, as shown in Figures 307 (h), (k) and 310 (l), the 11th F post-reception display UA, which is one of the 11th F post-reception changes A, is executed as the "first performance mode UA1" in which hero YS appears wearing only underwear.

However, when an operation is performed on "11F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" during the 11F reception period, this triggers the display of "11F operation-related display A" in addition to the display of 11F post-reception display UA (see FIG. 307(e)). Also, at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, which means that the same performance is achieved as when an operation is performed on "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)."

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "11F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2E, but the "11F operation related display A" is not displayed until the timing tk2E arrives (in the situations shown in FIG. 309(a) to FIG. 310(k), the "11F operation related display A" is not displayed). In this regard, when the first operation is performed on the "11F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2E, this triggers the display of the 11F post-acceptance display UA, as well as the display of the "11F operation related display A" (in the situations shown in FIG. 310(k) and onwards, the "11F operation related display A" is displayed).

According to this configuration, as shown in FIG. 309(a), the fact that both the operation reception for the "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the operation reception for the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are permitted can be kept secret at the time of occurrence of the "11F reception period". However, as shown in FIG. 309(b), once an operation is received for the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "11F reception period", the confidentiality of the "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is released, and further once an operation is received for the "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the confidentiality of the "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is also released, so that it can be expected that the tension can be appropriately maintained while increasing the interest in the game. The order in which these confidentiality settings are released changes depending on the order in which the operation units are operated; for example, if an operation is accepted for "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" first, the confidentiality of "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is released, and then, in response to an operation being accepted for "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the confidentiality of "11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is further released.

The "11F operation related display A" is not displayed as a display imitating the "11F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" but is displayed as a different display image. Also, the "11F operation related display A" is not displayed in a periodic manner. Also, it is desirable that the disappearance EF display is not displayed when the "11F operation related display A" is made invisible. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "11F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "11F acceptance period", this may be used as a trigger to not display the "11F operation related display A".

However, when "11F operation-related display A" is displayed, it will be displayed as a different display image from "11F operation-related display B." This makes it possible to indicate whether the operation-related display corresponds to "11F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" or "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)."

As described above, in this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 310(l) and (m), when the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 11th F reception period, the 11th F post-reception display UA, which is one of the "11th F post-reception changes A", is executed as the "first presentation mode UA1" in which hero YS appears wearing only underwear.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11th F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound will not be audibly output (see FIG. 307(k)). Therefore, even if Hero YS is depicted newly appearing equipped with one of the three types of equipment, this, combined with the secrecy, can arouse anxiety, such as "Is it okay to continue performing these operations?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11th F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the post-11th F reception display UA (what type of equipment hero YS will appear wearing) when operating the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11th F reception period is not displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ as shown in Figures 310 (l) and (m), but is displayed so that it can be seen in front of it when it overlaps.

In addition, the "11th F post-reception change A" in response to an operation on the "11th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 11th F reception period may also be configured to perform a different performance change from the 11th F post-reception display UA (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of the performance lamp), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, the "11th F post-reception change A" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized so that a similar effect can be obtained with only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of the performance lamp).

The execution time of the "11F post-acceptance display UA" and the "11F operation-related display A" corresponding to the operation acceptance for the "11F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is also longer than the time set as the acceptance period (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second or subsequent operation for the "11F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is performed while the "11F post-acceptance display UA" and the "11F operation-related display A" corresponding to the operation for the "11F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" performed previously, and the "11F post-acceptance display UB" and the "11F operation-related display B" corresponding to the operation for the "11F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 310(m) is displayed). In this example, the timing at which the "11F post-acceptance display UA" is hidden is the same as the timing at which the "11F operation-related display A" is hidden.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on "11F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2F within the 11F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 310(m) appears).

In this example, when the second operation is performed on the "11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11F reception period, as shown in Fig. 307 (h), (k) and Fig. 310 (n) to (p), the 11F post-reception display UA as one of the 11F post-reception changes A is executed as the "second performance mode UA2" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. In this example, the hero YS (first performance mode UA1), who had been wearing only underwear until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 310 (n)), and then depicted as reappearing wearing cloth clothes (second performance mode UA2) (see Fig. 310 (o)), but the method of causing the display change as the 11F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, as described above, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see Fig. 307 (k)). Furthermore, the "11F operation related display A" that is displayed in response to the first operation on the "11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" does not change its display mode or state when the second operation is performed on the "11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and continues to be displayed as it was up until that point.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2G during the 11th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 310(p) appears).

In this example, when the third operation is performed on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11th F reception period, as shown in Fig. 307 (h), (k) and Fig. 309 (q) to (s), the 11th F post-reception display UA, which is one of the 11th F post-reception changes A, is executed as the "third performance mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears wearing iron armor. In this example, the hero YS (second performance mode UA2), who had been wearing cloth clothes until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 310 (q)), and then depicted as reappearing wearing iron armor (third performance mode UA3) (see Fig. 310 (r)), but the method of causing the display change as the 11th F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, as described above, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see Fig. 307 (k)). Furthermore, when a third operation is performed on "11F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)," the "11F operation-related display A," which is displayed in response to the first operation on "11F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)," does not change its display mode or state in response to this, and continues to display as it was up until that point.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that a fourth operation is performed on "11th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2H during the 11th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 310(s) appears).

However, in this example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11F reception period, as shown in Figures 307(h), (k), 310(s) and 310(t), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but no visible change (state) is made in the 11F post-reception display UA (11F post-reception change A). In other words, in this case, no visible post-reception change occurs before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11F reception period, and the performance status before the fourth operation continues as it was. In addition, at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, and the "11F operation-related display A" continues to be displayed as it was before.

In this example, depending on how many times an operation is performed on the "11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11F reception period, the 11F post-reception display UA is "changed to a specific state" or "no new state will appear." Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11F reception period, and based on the result of this determination, the display may be "changed to a specific state" or "no new state will appear." In short, such a display change may occur when a predetermined condition is met.

Incidentally, in this example, if the "second performance mode UA2" appears as the display UA after the 11F reception, even if you continue to operate only the "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "first performance mode UA1" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 11F reception period, and if the "third performance mode UA3" appears as the display UA after the 11F reception, even if you continue to operate only the "11F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "first performance mode UA1" or the "second performance mode UA2" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 11F reception period. Therefore, the "third performance mode UA3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the display UA after the 11F reception. Therefore, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" after the "third performance mode UA3" is displayed, the same situation as the "fourth operation" described above will appear.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 307, when the 11th F reception period occurs, no reception permission sound is audibly output, and no display is made indicating the remaining time.

In addition, during the 11F reception period, even if the "11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" or the "11F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated (pressed), this will not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions will not be automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function will not be activated) (see Fig. 307 (a) and (b)). In this case, if the player wants to have multiple operation receptions for the "11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" or the "11F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 11F reception period, it goes without saying that the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" or the "11F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)".

As shown in FIG. 307(c), the 11F reception period continues until timing tk3 arrives and ends only when timing tk3 arrives. In this regard, the 11F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 308, if no operation is performed during the 11F reception period, the 11F reception period ends without any changes in the display or sound output related to the reception period.

During the 11F reception period, the "sword decoration 5001" is used as the "11F operation part A" and the "operation button 410" is used as the "11F operation part B", but instead, the "operation button 410" may be used as the "11F operation part A" and the "sword decoration 5001" may be used as the "11F operation part B".

Furthermore, when such a confidentiality reception period is provided, the method is not limited to concealing both of the two types of operation units.
For example, instead of the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), a 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296) described below may be generated as a modified version of the 2nd F reception period. Also, instead of the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), a 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298) described below may be generated as a modified version of the 3rd F reception period. Also, instead of the 4th F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), an 8th F reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300) described below may be generated as a modified version of the 4th F reception period. Also, instead of the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), a 9th F reception period (see FIG. 301) described below may be generated as a modified version of the 5th F reception period.

In addition, to realize each of the inventions (confidentiality reception periods) described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and while referring to the drawings up to Figure 294 and Figures 303 to 310, it is not necessary to have these for each of the reception periods described above, or it is possible to have only the necessary types of those reception periods.

Figures 295 and 296 are time charts showing an example of the performance content when "Condition 2F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "6th F reception period" occurs as a modified version of the 2nd F reception period. Note that the performance example in the variation pattern in which the "6th F reception period" occurs is not shown because there is much overlap with the case in which the above-mentioned 2nd F reception period occurs (see Figures 285 and 286), and basically only the differences (changes) from the "2nd F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "6th F reception period", configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as when the "2nd F reception period" occurs.

In other words, in the 6F reception period, just like the 2F reception period described above, the 2F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is only allowed to receive one operation until the 6F reception period ends, while the 2F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations until the 6F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). Also, other examples of "2F operation unit A" and "2F operation unit B" can be appropriately applied in the same manner as in the 2F reception period described above.

However, in the "6th F reception period", when the "6th F reception period" occurs, the "2nd F operation related display A" corresponding to the above-mentioned 2nd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is displayed, but as shown in Fig. 295(f) and Fig. 296(f), the "2nd F operation related display B" corresponding to the above-mentioned 2nd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed, which is different from the above-mentioned "2nd F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286)". In other words, in this case, among the multiple operation parts (2nd F operation part A, 2nd F operation part B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted, the fact that only some of the operation parts are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, which is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to concealment, while maintaining a suitable sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In this regard, the 6F reception period differs from the 2F reception period described above in that "2F operation related display A" is displayed and "2F operation related display B" is not displayed, but the rest of the configuration and presentation content are the same as the 2F reception period described above. Therefore, even if the 6F reception period occurs, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figures 285 and 286.

In other words, the presentation example when the "6th F reception period" occurs differs from the presentation example (2nd F reception period) shown in Figures 285 and 286 in that the "2nd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" is not displayed, but the rest of the content is basically the same, and the other examples that can be applied to the configuration related to the 2nd F reception period can also be similarly applied to the configuration related to the 6th F reception period (configuration other than the 2nd F operation related display B).

Therefore, when the "6th F reception period" occurs, the "2nd F premonition display ZFD" is first displayed so as to straddle the timing when the 2nd F operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in Figures 285 and 295, etc.

Furthermore, the fact that the "2nd F premonition performance display ZFD" is executed by both "mode ZFD-1" and "mode ZFD-2", the manner in which it is displayed relative to the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the conditions under which it is hidden, and the fact that the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes are also as described above in the 2nd F reception period.

In addition, in this example, when the first operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 6th F reception period, this triggers the display of the 2nd F post-reception display UB1, as in the case of the 2nd F reception period described above (see FIG. 285(c)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output. However, in this example, when the "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 6th F reception period, in addition to the display of the 2nd F post-reception display UB1, the operation triggers the display of the "2nd F operation-related display B" (see FIG. 295(f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2A, but the "second F operation related display B" is not displayed until the timing tf2A arrives (in the situation shown in FIG. 285(a) and (b), the "second F operation related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2A, this triggers the display of the "second F operation related display B" (in the situation shown in FIG. 285(c) and subsequent pages, the "second F operation related display B" is displayed).

With this configuration, the fact that the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is in a state in which it is permissible to accept operations can be kept secret at the time the "sixth F reception period" occurs. However, this secret state will be released if an operation is accepted at least once for the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "sixth F reception period", so it can be expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained while also increasing interest in the game.

Here, such a "2nd F operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in Figs. 284 to 286 during the "6th F reception period" as well. However, if the display manner (as shown in Figs. 284 to 286) that should have been displayed when the reception period occurred were to appear in the middle of the "6th F reception period" and on the condition that an operation had been received, there is a concern that the player would have a negative feeling that it had been "intentionally hidden" up until that point, which would in fact decrease his interest in the game.

Therefore, in the "6th F reception period" according to this example, the "2nd F operation related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in Figs. 284 to 286, but the "2nd F operation related display B" is displayed in a manner different from that shown in Figs. 284 to 286. For example, the "2nd F operation related display B" may not be displayed as a display imitating the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but may be displayed as a different display image. Also, the "2nd F operation related display B" may not show periodic changes in its display. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is received for the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "6th F reception period", this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "2nd F operation related display B" from being displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 295 assumes that a second operation is performed on "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2B within the sixth F reception period. In this case, in the sixth F reception period as well, similar to the second F reception period described above (see FIG. 285(d)), second F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the second operation (see FIG. 295(i)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output (see FIG. 295(k)).

In this regard, during the 6th F reception period in this performance example, the display mode of the "2nd F operation related display B" does not change based on the second operation being performed, and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 295(e)).

In the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tf2C during the sixth F reception period. In this case, as in the case of the second F reception period described above (see FIG. 286(e)), during the sixth F reception period, when the third operation is performed, not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but also a new display (mode) does not appear as the second F post-reception display UB, as shown in FIG. 286(e) and FIG. 295(i) and (k). In this example, such an event (no new display appears as the second F post-reception display UB despite the operation being performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the sixth F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 295(a), (h), and (i), while the "2nd F post-acceptance display UB2" and "2nd F operation-related display B" are displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tf2D within the 6th F acceptance period.

Even during the 6F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "2F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tf2D, a 2F post-reception change A occurs. That is, as one of the 2F post-reception changes A, the 6F reception period is terminated based on the operation (see Fig. 295 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 286 (f), (i) and Fig. 295 (h), (k), a "2F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "2F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, and a "2F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "2F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "2F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further a 2F post-reception display UA is displayed.

Also, in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted during the 6F acceptance period (the situation in which the 2F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in Fig. 286(f), (i) and Fig. 295, the "2F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2F operation related display B", and "2F premonition performance display ZFD" are not in the hidden state, and the "2F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to be seen overlapping behind the 2F effect display EF. Then, these "2F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2F operation related display B", and "2F premonition performance display ZFD" are made to be in the hidden state based on the operation of the "2F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" (see Fig. 286(g) and (j)). However, they may be made to be hidden from the situation immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike the case of the "2nd F reception period" described above, the "2nd F operation related display B" that appears when an operation is received during the "6th F reception period" may be made to be hidden at the same timing (under the same conditions) as the 2nd F post-reception display UB2. In other words, in this case, it will be made to be hidden during the period in which the 2nd F post-reception display UA is displayed.

...

Others, such as the "2nd F reception allowable sound", "whether the auto-repeat function is enabled", and "whether the automatic button function is enabled", that are relevant to the 6th F reception period are the same as those in the 2nd F reception period described above. However, it goes without saying that if there is no operation on the "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 6th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 296, the "2nd F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the 6th F reception period.

Note that even if an operation is accepted for the "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 6th F reception period, if this is used as a trigger to prevent the "2nd F operation related display B" from being displayed, the "2nd F operation related display B" will always remain in a hidden state in Figures 284 to 286 and 295 (f), and the performance will proceed with the other configurations remaining the same as in the case of the 2nd F reception period described above.

Figures 297 and 298 are time charts showing an example of the performance content when "Condition 3F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "7th F reception period" occurs as a modified version of the 3rd F reception period. Note that the performance example in the variation pattern in which the "7th F reception period" occurs is not shown because there is much overlap with the case in which the above-mentioned 3rd F reception period occurs (see Figures 290 and 291), and basically only the differences (changes) from the "3rd F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "7th F reception period", configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as when the "3rd F reception period" occurs.

In other words, in the 7F reception period, as in the above-mentioned 3F reception period, both 3F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and 3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are allowed to accept multiple operations before the 7F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). Also, other examples of these "3F operation unit A" and "3F operation unit B" can be applied appropriately in the same way as in the above-mentioned 3F reception period.

However, in the "7th F reception period", when the "7th F reception period" occurs, the "3rd F operation related display A" corresponding to the above-mentioned 3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is displayed, but as shown in Fig. 297(f) and Fig. 298(f), the "3rd F operation related display B" corresponding to the above-mentioned 3rd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed, which is different from the above-mentioned "3rd F reception period (see Figs. 290 and 291)". In other words, in this case, among the multiple operation parts (3rd F operation part A, 3rd F operation part B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted, the fact that only some of the operation parts are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, which is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to concealment, while favorably maintaining the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In this regard, the 7F reception period differs from the 3F reception period described above in that "3F operation related display A" is displayed and "3F operation related display B" is not displayed, but the rest of the configuration and presentation content are the same as the 3F reception period described above. Therefore, even if the 7F reception period occurs, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figures 290 and 291.

In other words, the only difference between the presentation example when the "7th F reception period" occurs and the presentation example (3rd F reception period) shown in Figures 290 and 291 is that the "3rd F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" is not displayed; otherwise the content is basically the same, and the other examples that can be applied to the configuration related to the 3rd F reception period can also be applied to the configuration related to the 7th F reception period (configuration other than the 3rd F operation related display B).

Therefore, when the "7th F reception period" occurs, the "3rd F premonition display ZFD" is first displayed spanning the time when the 3rd F operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in Figures 290 and 291, etc.

Furthermore, the manner in which the "3F Premonition Display ZFD" is displayed relative to the "3F Operation-Related Display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)", the conditions under which it is hidden, and the periodic changes with which the "3F Operation-Related Display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)" is displayed are also as described above for the 3F reception period.

In addition, in this example, when the first operation is performed on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 7F reception period, this triggers the display of the 3F post-reception display UB1, as in the case of the 3F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(c)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output. However, in this example, when the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 7F reception period, in addition to the display of the 3F post-reception display UB1, the operation triggers the display of the "3F operation-related display B" (see FIG. 297(f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2A, but the "3F operation related display B" is not displayed until the timing tg2A arrives (in the situation shown in FIG. 290(a) and (b), the "3F operation related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2A, this triggers the display of the "3F operation related display B" (in the situation shown in FIG. 290(c) and subsequent pages, the "3F operation related display B" is displayed).

With this configuration, the fact that the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is in a state in which it is permissible to accept operations can be kept secret at the time the "7F acceptance period" occurs. However, this secret state will be released if an operation is accepted at "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" even once during the "7F acceptance period", so it can be expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained while also increasing interest in the game.

Here, such a "3rd F operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in Figs. 289 to 291 etc. during the "7th F reception period". However, if the display manner (as shown in Figs. 289 to 291 etc.) that should have been displayed when the reception period occurred were to appear in the middle of the "7th F reception period" and on the condition that an operation had been received, there is a concern that the player would have a negative feeling that it had been "intentionally hidden" up until that point, which would in fact decrease his interest in the game.

Therefore, in the "7th F reception period" according to this example, the "3rd F operation related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in Figs. 289 to 291, etc., but the "3rd F operation related display B" is displayed in a manner different from that shown in Figs. 289 to 291, etc. For example, the "3rd F operation related display B" may not be displayed as a display imitating the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but may be displayed as a different display image. Also, the "3rd F operation related display B" may not show periodic changes in its display. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is received for the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "7th F reception period", this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "3rd F operation related display B" from being displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 297 assumes that a second operation is performed on "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2B within the 7F reception period. In this case, in the 7F reception period as well, similar to the case of the 3F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(d)), 3F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the second operation (see FIG. 297(i)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output (see FIG. 297(k)).

In this regard, during the 7th F reception period in this performance example, the display mode of the "3rd F operation related display B" does not change based on the second operation being performed, and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 297(e)).

In the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tg2C during the 7F reception period. In this case, as in the case of the 3F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(e)), when the third operation is performed during the 7F reception period, not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but also a new display (mode) does not appear as the 3F post-reception display UB, as shown in FIG. 290(e) and FIG. 297(i) and (k). In this example, such an event (no new display appears as the 3F post-reception display UB despite the operation being performed on the "3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 7F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 297(a), (h), and (i), while the "3F post-acceptance display UB2" and "3F operation-related display B" are displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation on "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," it is assumed that an operation is performed on "3F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tg2D within the 7F acceptance period.

Even during the 7th F reception period, when the first operation is received for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tg2D, a change A after the 3rd F reception may occur. That is, as the change A after the 3rd F reception, for example, as shown in Figs. 297(g)-(k) and 291(f), a "3rd F post-reception output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "3rd F effect display EF1" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further a display UA1 after the 3rd F reception is displayed.

In addition, when the first operation is performed, the "3rd F reception permissible sound that was being audibly output," the "3rd F post-reception display UB that was being displayed," the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) that was undergoing a periodic change," and the "3rd F effect display EF1" are the same as in the 3rd F reception period described above.

Furthermore, during the 7th F reception period in this example, the display mode of the "3rd F operation related display B" does not change based on the first reception of an operation to the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 297(e)).

In this example, as shown in Figs. 297(a), (h), and (i), various post-acceptance changes A have occurred in response to the previous operation acceptance for "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the 3F post-acceptance display UB2 in response to the operation acceptance for "3F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed. In this situation, it is assumed that the second and third operation acceptances for "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" have been made at timings tg2E and tg2F (the timings shown in Figs. 291(g) and (h)) during the 7F acceptance period.

Even if the second and third operations are accepted for the "3F operation part A (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timings tg2E and tg2F (the timings shown in Figs. 291(g) and (h)) during the 7F acceptance period, change A after acceptance of the 3F may occur, as shown in Figs. 291(g), (h) and 297, just as in the case where the first operation is accepted for the "3F operation part A (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)".

In particular, the "output sound A1 after accepting 3F" and the "3F effect display EF1" are designed to appear in the same manner when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. The periodic change in the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once terminated at the previous operation acceptance may be maintained in its terminated state at the time when the second and third operations are accepted, or may be resumed by canceling the terminated state. However, when the second and third operations are accepted, this will trigger the end state of the periodic change to occur again. In other words, in this case, the periodic change that was once terminated in this way will be resumed from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second and third operations are accepted.

In this respect, the "3F after-reception display UA" is basically the same as the case where the first operation is accepted for the "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" (3F after-reception display UA1). However, even in the 7F acceptance period in this example, when the second operation is accepted, "the hero YS attacks and the HP of the boss character decreases to about 50% remaining (3F after-reception display UA2)" is displayed (see FIG. 291(g)), and when the third operation is accepted, "the hero YS attacks and the HP of the boss character decreases to about 25% remaining (3F after-reception display UA3)" is displayed (see FIG. 291(h)), and so on, and progress is seen in the presentation. In other words, the presentation as the "3F after-reception display UA" is the same as in the case of the 3F acceptance period described above, and other examples can also be applied as appropriate.

In addition, when the second and third operations are performed, the "3rd F reception permissible sound that was being audibly output," the "3rd F post-reception display UB that was being displayed," the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) that was undergoing a periodic change," and the "3rd F effect display EF1" are the same as in the case of the 3rd F reception period described above.

Furthermore, during the 7th F reception period in this example, the display mode of the "3rd F operation related display B" does not change based on the second or third reception of an operation to the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 297(e)).

In this example, as shown in Figs. 297(a), (h), and (i), a situation is assumed in which post-acceptance changes A have occurred in various places in response to the third acceptance of an operation on "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the 3F post-acceptance display UB2 in response to the acceptance of an operation on "3F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed, and a fourth operation is accepted on "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tg2G (see Fig. 291(i)) within the 7F acceptance period.

When a fourth operation is accepted for the "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tg2G during the 7F acceptance period, a change A after the 3F acceptance may occur. That is, as one of the changes A after the 3F acceptance, the 7F acceptance period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 297 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 291 (i), (l) and Fig. 297 (h), (k), a "3F post-acceptance output sound A" corresponding to the operation for the "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "3F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "3F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further a display UA after the 3F acceptance is displayed.

Also, in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted during the 7F acceptance period (the situation in which the 3F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in Fig. 291(i), (l) and Fig. 297, the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3F operation related display B", and "3F premonition performance display ZFD" are not in the hidden state, and the "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to be seen overlapping behind the 3F effect display EF. Then, these "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3F operation related display B", and "3F premonition performance display ZFD" are made to be in the hidden state based on the operation of the "3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" (see Fig. 291(l) and (m)). However, they may be made to be hidden from the situation immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike the case of the "3rd F reception period" described above, the "3rd F operation related display B" that appears when an operation is received during the "7th F reception period" may be made to be hidden at the same timing (under the same conditions) as the post-3rd F reception display UB2. In other words, in this case, it will be made to be hidden during the period in which the post-3rd F reception display UA4 is displayed.

Furthermore, the "3F operation related display B" that appears during the "7F reception period" and under the condition that an operation has been received may be displayed in the same manner as the 3F post-reception display UB in relation to other display images, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "3F reception period". In other words, in this case, the 3F operation related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "3F premonition performance display ZFD" or "3F effect display EF", but is displayed in front of them when they overlap. It may also be displayed in front of the decorative pattern SZ. When such a configuration is adopted, the 3F operation related display B will be displayed in a manner different from the 3F operation related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "3F premonition performance display ZFD" or "3F effect display EF".

Others, such as the "3F reception allowable sound", "whether the auto-repeat function is enabled", and "whether the automatic button function is enabled" during the 7F reception period are the same as those for the 3F reception period described above. However, it goes without saying that if there is no operation on the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 7F reception period, as shown in FIG. 298, the "3F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the 7F reception period.

Note that even if an operation is accepted for the "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 7F acceptance period, if this is used as a trigger to prevent the "3F operation related display B" from being displayed, the "3F operation related display B" will always remain in a hidden state in Figures 289 to 291 and 297 (f), and the performance will proceed with the other configurations remaining the same as in the case of the 3F acceptance period described above.

Figures 299 and 300 are time charts showing an example of the performance content when "Condition 4F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "8th F reception period" occurs as a modified version of the 4th F reception period. Note that, as there are many overlapping parts with the case where the above-mentioned 4th F reception period occurs (see Figures 292 and 293) regarding the performance example in the variation pattern where the "8th F reception period" occurs, basically, only the differences (changes) from the "4th F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "8th F reception period", configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as when the "4th F reception period" occurs.

In other words, during the 8F reception period, just like the 4F reception period described above, both 4F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and 4F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are only allowed to accept one operation until the 8F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). Also, other examples of "4F operation unit A" and "4F operation unit B" can be applied appropriately in the same way as in the 4F reception period described above.

However, in the "8th F reception period", when the "8th F reception period" occurs, the "4th F operation related display A" corresponding to the above-mentioned 4th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is displayed, but as shown in Fig. 299(f) and Fig. 300(f), the "4th F operation related display B" corresponding to the above-mentioned 4th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed, which is different from the above-mentioned "4th F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293)". In other words, in this case, among the multiple operation parts (4th F operation part A, 4th F operation part B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted, the fact that only some of the operation parts are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, and this can be expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to concealment, while maintaining a suitable sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In this regard, the 8F reception period differs from the 4F reception period described above in that "4F operation related display A" is displayed and "4F operation related display B" is not displayed, but the rest of the configuration and performance content are the same as the 4F reception period described above. Therefore, even if the 8F reception period occurs, the performance will basically progress in the same way as described above when the 4F reception period occurs.

In other words, the only difference between the presentation example when the "8th F reception period" occurs and the presentation example (4th F reception period) shown in Figures 292 and 293 is that the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is not displayed; otherwise the content is basically the same, and the other examples that can be applied to the configuration related to the 4th F reception period can also be applied to the configuration related to the 8th F reception period (configuration other than the 4th F operation-related display B).

However, during the 8F reception period, unlike the 6F reception period and 7F reception period described above, even if an operation is performed on the 4F operation section B during the 8F reception period, this will not trigger the display of the "4F operation related display B."

Other details regarding the "4th F reception allowable sound" and "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled" during the 8th F reception period are the same as those for the 4th F reception period described above.

Figures 301 and 302 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 5F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "9th F reception period" occurs as a modified version of the 5th F reception period. Note that, as there are many overlapping parts with the presentation example in the variation pattern in which the "9th F reception period" occurs, and the above-mentioned 5th F reception period occurs (see Figure 294), basically only the differences (changes) from the "5th F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "9th F reception period", configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as when the "5th F reception period" occurs.

In other words, during the 9thF reception period, just like the 5thF reception period described above, 5thF operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is only allowed to receive one operation until the 9thF reception period ends, while 5thF operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations until the 9thF reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). Also, other examples of "5thF operation unit A" and "5thF operation unit B" can be appropriately applied in the same way as in the 5thF reception period described above.

However, in the "9th F reception period", when the "9th F reception period" occurs, the "5th F operation related display A" corresponding to the above-mentioned 5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is displayed, but as shown in Fig. 301(f) and Fig. 302(f), the "5th F operation related display B" corresponding to the above-mentioned 5th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed, which is different from the above-mentioned "5th F reception period (see Fig. 294)". In other words, in this case, among the multiple operation parts (5th F operation part A, 5th F operation part B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted, the fact that only some of the operation parts are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, and this can be expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to concealment, while maintaining a suitable sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In this regard, the 9th F reception period differs from the 5th F reception period described above in that "5th F operation related display A" is displayed and "5th F operation related display B" is not displayed, but the rest of the configuration and presentation content are the same as the 5th F reception period described above. Therefore, even if the 9th F reception period occurs, the presentation will basically progress with the content (5th F reception period) as described above with reference to FIG. 294.

In other words, the only difference between the presentation example when the "9th F reception period" occurs and the presentation example shown in FIG. 294 (5th F reception period) is that the "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is not displayed; otherwise the content is essentially the same, and the other examples that can be applied to the configuration related to the 5th F reception period can also be similarly applied to the configuration related to the 9th F reception period (configurations other than the 5th F operation-related display B).

Therefore, when the "9th F reception period" occurs, the "5th F premonition display ZFD" is first displayed spanning the time when the 2nd F operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in Figures 301 and 302.

Furthermore, the manner in which the "5F Premonition Display ZFD" is displayed relative to the "5F Operation-Related Display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)", the conditions under which it is hidden, and the fact that the "5F Operation-Related Display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes are also as described above in the 5F reception period.

In addition, in this example, when the first operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 9th F reception period, this triggers the display of the 5th F post-reception display UB1, as in the case of the 5th F reception period described above. At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output. However, in this example, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 9th F reception period, in addition to the display of the 5th F post-reception display UB1, the operation triggers the display of the "5th F operation-related display B" (see FIG. 301(f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing ti2A, but the "5th F operation-related display B" is not displayed until the timing ti2A arrives. In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing ti2A, this triggers the display of the "5th F operation-related display B."

With this configuration, the fact that the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is in a state in which it is permissible to accept operations can be kept secret at the time the "9th F acceptance period" occurs. However, this secret state will be released if an operation is accepted at "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" even once during the "9th F acceptance period", which is expected to increase interest in the game while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension.

Here, such a "5th F operation-related display B" may be displayed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned "5th F reception period" during the "9th F reception period". However, if a display mode that should be displayed when the reception period occurs appears only when the "9th F reception period" is in the middle of the "9th F reception period" and an operation has been received, there is a concern that the player will have a negative feeling that it was "intentionally hidden" up until that point, which may actually decrease his interest in the game.

Therefore, in the "9th F reception period" according to this example, the "5th F operation related display A" is displayed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "5th F reception period", but the "5th F operation related display B" is displayed in a manner different from that shown in Figures 284 to 286. For example, it may not be displayed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "5th F reception period", but may be displayed as a different display image. Also, the display of the "5th F operation related display B" may not show periodic changes. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is received for the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "9th F reception period", this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "5th F operation related display B" from being displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 301 assumes that a second operation is performed on "2nd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing ti2B within the 9th F reception period. In this case, also during the 9th F reception period, similar to the case of the 5th F reception period described above, the 5th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the second operation. At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output.

In this regard, during the 9th F reception period in this example, the display mode of the "5th F operation-related display B" does not change based on the second operation being performed, and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 301(f)).

In the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing ti2C during the 9F reception period. In this case, as in the case of the 5F reception period described above, during the 9F reception period, when the third operation is performed, not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but also a new display (mode) does not appear as the 5F post-reception display UB, as shown in FIG. 301(i) and (k). In this example, such an event (no new display appears as the 5F post-reception display UB despite the fact that the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated during the 9F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 301(a), (h), and (i), while the "5th F post-acceptance display UB2" and "5th F operation-related display B" are displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation on "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," it is assumed that an operation is performed on "5th F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing ti2D within the 9th F acceptance period.

Even during the 9th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing ti2D, a 5th F post-reception change A occurs. That is, as one of the 5th F post-reception changes A, the 9th F reception period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 301 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 301 (h) and (k), a "5th F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "5th F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further a 5th F post-reception display UA is displayed.

Also, in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted during the 9F acceptance period (the situation in which the 5F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in FIG. 301, the "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5F operation related display B", and "5F premonition performance display ZFD" are not hidden, and the "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 5F effect display EF. After this, the "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5F operation related display B", and "5F premonition performance display ZFD" are made to be made to be hidden based on the operation on the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". However, they may be made to be hidden from the situation immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike the case of the "5th F reception period" described above, the "5th F operation-related display B" that appears when an operation is received during the "9th F reception period" may be made invisible at the same timing (under the same conditions) as the 5th F post-reception display UB2. In other words, in this case, it will be made invisible during the period in which the 5th F post-reception display UA is displayed.

Furthermore, the "5F operation-related display B" that appears during the "9F reception period" and under the condition that an operation has been received may be displayed in the same manner as the 5F post-reception display UB in relation to other display images, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "5F reception period". In other words, in this case, the 5F operation-related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "5F premonition performance display ZFD" or "5F effect display EF", but is displayed in front of them when they overlap. It may also be displayed in front of the decorative pattern SZ. When such a configuration is adopted, the 5F operation-related display B will be displayed in a manner different from the 5F operation-related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "5F premonition performance display ZFD" and "5F effect display EF".

Other aspects of the 9th F reception period, such as the "5th F reception allowable sound", "whether the auto-repeat function is enabled", and "whether the automatic button function is enabled", are the same as in the 5th F reception period described above. However, it goes without saying that if there is no operation on the "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 9th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 302, the "5th F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the 9th F reception period. Note that the example shown in FIG. 302 is described as an example of a case where the automatic button function is not enabled.

As shown in FIG. 301, during the 9th F reception period, just like the 5th F reception period described above, even if an operation is performed on either the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the output period of the "5th F reception acceptable sound", the output of the "5th F reception acceptable sound" will not be interrupted as a result of this.

In each reception period in the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example, there is a reception period in which, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, a premonition display that suggests that the player will soon be given an opportunity to operate, an operation-related display (model image display) that suggests the reception target (such as the operation receiving part), and a remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period may be displayed. However, as described above, each of these configurations does not necessarily have to be provided, and only appropriate configurations of these configurations may be provided, or such configurations may be provided only in some reception periods. Also, in this example, the operation-related display (model image display) is displayed as an "integrated model image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

In addition, the method of hiding the periodic change based on the fact that an operation has been accepted within the acceptance period (or a part of the acceptance period) for the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example is not limited to each of the configurations described above. For example, a method may be adopted in which the periodic change of the operation-related display on the layer continues, but a different image (e.g., an effect display, etc.) is displayed in front of it, making the periodic change of the operation-related display invisible, or the operation-related display may be changed to a periodic change different from the one that has continued up until that point and displayed (e.g., by changing the periodic time, etc.) to hide the periodic change that has continued up until that point, or the display of the operation-related display itself may be terminated.

In addition, as a method of resuming the periodic change of the 3F operation-related display A after hiding it based on the fact that an operation has been accepted within the acceptance period (3F acceptance period, 7F acceptance period) in the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example (timing tg2D, tg2E, tg2F, tg2G), the periodic change does not necessarily have to be restarted from the beginning, but may be resumed from the middle of the periodic change.

In the 3F reception period and the 7F reception period, the reception period is not terminated based on the reception of an operation until a specific number of times (the third time) of operations are received for the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," but is terminated based on the reception of a specific number of times (the third time). However, it is also possible to determine whether or not to terminate the reception period based on the reception of an operation, and to terminate the reception period based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination.

In addition, in the 3F reception period and the 7F reception period, regardless of whether the "low expectation mode" or the "high expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, the reception period is terminated and the post-reception display is displayed based on the fact that a predetermined condition (e.g., the number of operations, judgment, etc.) is satisfied by the operation reception to the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, the possibility of the predetermined condition (e.g., the number of operations, judgment, etc.) being satisfied when an operation is received to the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" may be limited to the case where the "high expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display. In other words, in this case, when the "low expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, no matter how many operations are received to the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the reception period, the condition for terminating the reception period based on this is not satisfied, and the "low expectation mode" may be executed as the post-reception display based on the arrival of the timing for the end of the reception period. Alternatively, the reception period may be terminated based on the reception of an operation to the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" only when a "specific mode" is executed as the post-reception display, and the reception period may not be terminated based on the reception of an operation to the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" when a "specific mode" is not executed as the post-reception display. In other words, in this case, when the time for the reception period to end arrives, no post-reception display will be executed.

In addition, each acceptance period in the above-mentioned performance examples and their variations may occur sequentially in any combination within one variation pattern.

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" in response to an operation being accepted during each acceptance period in the above-mentioned presentation examples and their modified examples does not necessarily have to indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as an acceptance period for determining whether or not the probability fluctuation function is enabled during the execution period of the jackpot game, and be executed as the post-acceptance display, or it may occur as a simple acceptance period within a mini-game that has nothing to do with suggesting the likelihood of playing the game, and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Therefore, the acceptance period in the above-mentioned presentation examples and their modified examples does not necessarily have to occur during the period in which the pattern fluctuation is being executed.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide all of the reception periods for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations. Two or more reception periods may be provided in an appropriate combination of the reception periods for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations, or only one reception period may be provided.

During the 4th F reception period and the 8th F reception period, the same post-reception changes (such as a post-reception display) may occur when the "4th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated and when the "4th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated.

The 4th F reception period and the 8th F reception period may be generated as reception periods in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods, a multiple operation acceptance period can be generated in which both an operation acceptance for the first operation unit (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) and an operation acceptance for the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) can be accepted, and when either an operation for the first operation unit or an operation for the second operation unit is performed during the multiple operation acceptance period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed according to the type of operation acceptance. Also, it is possible to display a model image display that imitates the object of operation by the player, and at least a first F acceptance period (see Figures 278 to 281) is prepared as a type of multiple operation acceptance period.

In this regard, during the 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), only one reception of an operation is permitted for the first operation unit (1F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001), and multiple reception of operations is permitted for the second operation unit (1F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410). When an operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, operation button 410) for which multiple reception of operations is permitted during the 1F reception period, a 1F post-reception display UB corresponding to that operation is displayed, but even while the 1F post-reception display UB is displayed, reception of operations for 1F operation unit A is permitted. During the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281), when an operation is performed on the first operation part (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) while the 1F post-reception display UB in response to an operation performed on the second operation part (e.g., the operation button 410) is displayed (timing te2D), the 1F post-reception display UA in response to the operation is displayed, and the operation causes the 1F post-reception display UB (the post-reception display in response to an operation performed on the second operation part (e.g., the operation button 410)) that had been displayed up until that point to be hidden (see Figs. 278(h) and (i) and Figs. 279(g) and (h), etc.).

According to this configuration, during the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281) in which reception of operations to both the first operation unit (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) and the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, if an operation is performed on the first operation unit (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) while the 1F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) is displayed, this triggers the display of the 1F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation, and the 1F post-reception display UB that had been displayed up until then is made non-display. This makes it easier to recognize which of the above operation units the post-reception display was displayed in response to, and is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the "first multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the first F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" in the above-mentioned configuration 2-E and the "second multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))" in the above-mentioned configuration 2-E are provided as types of multiple operation allowance period, and in both the "first multiple operation allowance period" and the "second multiple operation allowance period" in the above-mentioned configuration 2-E, multiple operation reception is allowable. When an operation is performed on a second operation unit (such as the first F operation unit B or the second F operation unit B, both of which are operation button 410, for example) that may be capable of accepting an operation, a post-acceptance display (such as the first F post-acceptance display UB or the second F post-acceptance display UB) corresponding to that operation is displayed (see Figs. 281(e) and (f) and Figs. 285(c) and (d), for example), but while the post-acceptance display is displayed, it is still possible to accept an operation on a first operation unit (such as the first F operation unit A or the second F operation unit A, both of which are sword ornament 5001, for example) that may be capable of accepting an operation.

In this case, during the "first multiple operation permitted period" according to configuration 2-E, when an operation is performed on the first operation part (first F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) while the first F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to an operation performed on the second operation part (first F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410), the first F post-reception display UA in response to the operation is displayed, and the first F post-reception display UB that had been displayed until then is hidden in response to the operation (see FIG. 278(i) and FIG. 281(h)).

In contrast, in the "second multiple operation permitted period" according to configuration 2-E, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) while the second F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to an operation performed on the second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410), the second F post-reception display UA in response to that operation is displayed, and the second F post-reception display UB that had been displayed until that point is not hidden as a result of that operation (see FIG. 282(i) and FIG. 286(f)-(k)).

With this configuration, when the game strategy is changed from "a state in which multiple operations have been performed on the second operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" to "an operation on the first operation unit (e.g., sword decoration 5001)", the post-acceptance display that was displayed up until that point (the post-acceptance display in response to an operation being performed on the second operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)) will be hidden in some cases (first F-A multiple operation allowance period) and not hidden in other cases (first F-B multiple operation allowance period), which is expected to enhance the presentation when changing the game strategy and maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, it is desirable that in the "first multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the first F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" in configuration 2-E above and the "second multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))" in configuration 2-E above, when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (first F operation unit B, second F operation unit B, etc., both of which are operation button 410), the same display (such as an increase in magic power value) appears as the post-reception display (first F post-reception display UB, second F post-reception display UB). In other words, in this case, when the game strategy is changed from "a state in which multiple operations are being performed on the second operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" to "an operation on the first operation unit (e.g., sword decoration 5001)", it becomes difficult to know whether the post-acceptance display (second operation unit (e.g., operation button 410) that was displayed until then will be hidden, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the "second multiple operation allowance period (for example, the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 2-E, the specific type of sound effects (specific BGM) will not be made inaudible (or suppressed) or not made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "second multiple operation allowance period" according to the configuration 2-E occurs, depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "second multiple operation allowance period" according to the configuration 2-E occurs (for example, the specific type of sound effects will always be made inaudible before the reception period begins) In the "first multiple operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 2-E, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "first multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 2-E occurs depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the "first multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 2-E occurs, or may not be made inaudible (or suppressed) (the reception period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when an operation opportunity is given, it becomes easy to recognize whether it is the "first multiple operation allowable period" or the "second multiple operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 2-E, so that it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable to keep the display after reception the same even if the type of sound effect has changed depending on the type of previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the "second multiple operation permitted period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to configuration 2-E, the second F post-reception display UA and the second F effect display EF are displayed behind the post-reception display (second F post-reception display UB) when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (such as the second F operation unit B, e.g., operation button 410). In other words, in this case, it is possible to make the second F post-reception display UA difficult to see until the second F post-reception display UB is made invisible, which makes it possible to impose a disadvantage when changing the game strategy midway.

The reception period in the above-mentioned performance example includes a reception period in which the automatic button function is enabled. During the reception period in which the automatic button function is enabled, if the automatic button function is enabled for the first operation unit (any of the second F operation unit A, the third F operation unit A, the fourth F operation unit A, and the fifth F operation unit A) while a post-reception display in response to an operation on the second operation unit (any of the second F operation unit B, the third F operation unit B, the fourth F operation unit B, and the fifth F operation unit B) is displayed, it is desirable not to use this as a trigger to hide the post-reception display in response to an operation on the second operation unit (any of the second F operation unit B, the third F operation unit B, the fourth F operation unit B, and the fifth F operation unit B).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, it is possible to generate a multiple operation allowance period in which both operation acceptance for the first operation unit (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) and operation acceptance for the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) are acceptable, and it is possible to display an operation-related display that can only appear when operation acceptance for the first operation unit is acceptable or when the operation acceptance is acceptable, and an operation-related display that can only appear when operation acceptance for the second operation unit is acceptable or when the operation acceptance is acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned presentation example, at least the "first multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" in the above-mentioned configuration 3-E and the "second multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" in the above-mentioned configuration 3-E are provided as multiple operation allowance periods, and since the first F operation-related displays A and B and the second F operation-related displays A and B can be displayed in the "first multiple operation allowance period" and "second multiple operation allowance period" in the above-mentioned configuration 3-E, it is expected that interest in playing the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, during the "first multiple operation allowable period (e.g., first F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" of configuration 3-E above, a state is established in which reception of operations for the first operation unit (e.g., sword decoration 5001) is allowable and reception of operations for the second operation unit (e.g., operation button 410) is allowable while a first F operation-related display A corresponding to the first operation unit (e.g., first F operation unit A, e.g., sword decoration 5001) and a first F operation-related display B corresponding to the second operation unit (e.g., first F operation unit B, e.g., operation button 410) are both displayed.
In contrast to this, in the "second multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to the above configuration 3-E, the second F operation related display A corresponding to the first operation unit (the second F operation unit A, e.g., the sword ornament 5001) is displayed, but the operation related display corresponding to the second operation unit (the second F operation unit B, e.g., the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the operation reception for the first operation unit (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) is permitted and the operation reception for the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted. However, when an operation is received for the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) under this circumstance, this is used as a trigger to display the second F operation related display B corresponding to the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410). In other words, in this case, while the second F operation-related displays A and B are both displayed, a transition is made to a state in which acceptance of operations for the first operation unit (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) is permitted and acceptance of operations for the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted.

With this configuration, even if the "second multiple operation permission period (e.g., the 6F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" occurs in the above configuration 3-E, in which only one (the second operation unit) of the two operation units (the first operation unit and the second operation unit) that are in a state in which operation reception is permitted is concealed, the concealed state is eliminated by trying to operate the concealed second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410), so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. Note that the "operation-related display" is often, for example, a mock image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action (operation) is displayed as an image, but is not limited to this, and as mentioned above, it is sufficient that the image display, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate.

In this case, the same image display may be displayed as the operation-related display (first F operation-related display B, second F operation-related display B) corresponding to the second operation section (for example, operation button 410) in the "first multiple operation permitted period (e.g., first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" in the above configuration 3-E and the "second multiple operation permitted period (e.g., sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" in the above configuration 3-E.

In addition, if the second F operation related display B is displayed during the "second multiple operation permitted period (e.g., the sixth F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))" according to the above configuration 3-E, it is desirable that the second F operation related display B is not made to be in a hidden state until the "second multiple operation permitted period" according to the configuration 3-E ends.

In addition, when the "second multiple operation allowable period (for example, the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to the above configuration 3-E occurs, even if an operation is accepted for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) (slightly) before the timing when the "second multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 3-E occurs, the second F operation-related display B may be displayed as a trigger. In other words, in this case, in the "second multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 3-E, as in the "first multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 3-E, from the time when the effective period occurs, while both the operation-related display corresponding to the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation-related display corresponding to the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are displayed, the operation acceptance for the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) or the operation acceptance for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) can be performed.

In addition, if an operation is received for the second operation unit (e.g., operation button 410) (slightly) before the timing when the "second multiple operation allowance period (e.g., 6F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296)" according to configuration 3-E occurs, it is desirable that the second operation-related displays A and B are both displayed until the end of the "second multiple operation allowance period" according to configuration 3-E.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) during the "second multiple operation permitted period (e.g., the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to configuration 3-E, there may be the above-mentioned case where the second operation-related display B is displayed in response to the operation (see Fig. 295(f)), and there may also be cases where the second operation-related display B is not displayed. With such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) during the "second multiple operation permitted period" according to configuration 3-E can be favorably maintained.

Note that, in the "second multiple operation permitted period (e.g., the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" in configuration 3-E above, when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) during the "second multiple operation permitted period (e.g., the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" but this causes the second operation-related display B to not be displayed, this may mean, for example, that the operation on the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) itself is not accepted, thereby preventing the second operation-related display B from being displayed, or that the operation on the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) is accepted, but a predetermined condition is not met, preventing the second operation-related display B from being displayed.

In addition, in the "second multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 3-E, a specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is not made inaudible (or suppressed) or not made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "second multiple operation allowance period" according to the configuration 3-E occurs, depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "second multiple operation allowance period" according to the configuration 3-E occurs (for example, a specific type of sound effect is not necessarily made inaudible). In the "first multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 3-E (for example, the first F acceptance period (see Figs. 278 to 281)), the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "first multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 3-E occurs depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the "first multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 3-E occurs, or may not be made inaudible (or suppressed) (the acceptance period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, it becomes easier to recognize whether it is the "first multiple operation allowable period" or the "second multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 3-E when an operation opportunity is given, so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable to keep the display after reception the same even if the type of sound effect has changed depending on the type of previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, it is possible to generate a multiple operation allowance period in which both operation acceptance for the first operation unit (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) and operation acceptance for the second operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) are acceptable, and it is possible to display an operation-related display that can only appear when operation acceptance for the first operation unit is acceptable or when the operation acceptance is acceptable, and an operation-related display that can only appear when operation acceptance for the second operation unit is acceptable or when the operation acceptance is acceptable.

In this regard, the above-mentioned example of the performance provides at least a "specific multiple operation permitted period (e.g., the first F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 4-E, and a "special multiple operation permitted period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 4-E. Then, when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) during the "special multiple operation permitted period (second F reception period, sixth F reception period)" according to the above-mentioned configuration 4-E, a second F post-acceptance display UA is displayed, indicating the likelihood of a jackpot being obtained, as a change after acceptance, and a second F effect display EF is executed, which makes the second F operation-related display A difficult to see. In this regard, the first F effect display corresponding to the "specific multiple operation permitted period (first F reception period)" in the above configuration 4-E is always executed in the same display mode, but the second F effect display EF corresponding to the "special multiple operation permitted period (second F reception period, sixth F reception period)" in the above configuration 4-E is displayed in a different display mode depending on the mode (modes UA1, UA2) as the second F post-reception display UA.

With this "second F effect display EF", during the "special multiple operation permitted period (for example, the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" of configuration 4-E described above, it is possible to favorably indicate that the appearance of the "operation-related display" is caused by an operation on the "first operation unit" that makes it difficult to see. Also, simply by looking at the state of the "second F effect display EF" to confirm which operation caused it, the likelihood of a jackpot can be favorably recognized.

In addition, in the "specific multiple operation permission period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 4-E, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit (the first F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration 5001), a "first F effect display EF" is executed in which both the first F operation-related displays A and B become difficult to see as one of the post-reception changes according to the operation. This makes it possible to appropriately suggest to the player that the "specific multiple operation permission period" according to the configuration 4-E, in which operation reception on both the first operation unit (the first F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration 5001) and the second operation unit (the second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) can be permitted, has ended with only the operation on the first operation unit (the first F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration 5001) (a situation in which operation reception on the second operation unit is not permitted either).

When the "special multiple operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 4-E is the "second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286)," it is preferable that the "second F effect display EF" is displayed so as to make it difficult to view only the second F operation related display A among the second F operation related displays A and B. Also, when the "special multiple operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 4-E is the "sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296)," when the second operation unit (the second F operation unit, for example, the operation button 410) is operated, this triggers the display of the second F operation related display B. In this regard, when the "second F effect display EF" is displayed in a situation in which the second F operation related display B is displayed, it is preferable that the "second F effect display EF" is displayed so as to make it difficult to view only the second F operation related display A among the second F operation related displays A and B.

The "second F effect display EF" corresponding to the "special multiple operation permitted period (for example, the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" in the above configuration 4-E may be displayed in front of the second F operation related display A at a position where it overlaps with it and not overlap with the second F operation related display B, or it may be displayed behind the second F operation related display B but overlap with it.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, in addition to the ``specific multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))'' in configuration 4-E and the ``special multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the 2nd F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) or the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))'' in configuration 4-E, a ``predetermined multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the 5th F reception period (see Figure 294) or the 9th F reception period (see Figures 301 and 302))'' in configuration 4-E is provided. Then, in the "special multiple operation permitted period" according to configuration 4-E, similar to the "special multiple operation permitted period" according to configuration 4-E, when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit (5F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001), a post-acceptance change is displayed, such as a 5F post-acceptance display UA indicating the degree of expectation, and a 5F effect display EF that makes it difficult to see the 5F operation-related display A.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, the "5th F effect display EF" corresponding to the "predetermined multiple operation permitted period (e.g., the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), or the 9th F reception period (see FIG. 301 and FIG. 302))" in the above-mentioned configuration 4-E is always executed in the same display mode, and the display mode is the same as one of the display modes of the "2nd F effect display EF" corresponding to the "special multiple operation permitted period (e.g., the 2nd F reception period (see FIG. 282 to FIG. 286), or the 6th F reception period (see FIG. 295 and FIG. 296))" in the above-mentioned configuration 4-E.

For example, if mode EF-2, which appears when expectations are low, is made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF", then even if mode EF-2 appears as the "2nd F effect display EF", it will be possible to make the player aware of the possibility that it is being displayed as the "5th F effect display EF", and further, the possibility that mode UA2, which has a high expectation, will appear as the 5th F post-reception display UA. This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when mode EF-2 appears as the "2nd F effect display EF".

Alternatively, if mode EF-1, which appears when there is high expectation, is made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF", it will be possible to make mode EF-1 appear whenever the "5th F effect display EF" is displayed, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change after acceptance may occur. Then, a display is performed that imitates an operation target for which acceptance of operations is acceptable.

In this regard, during the reception period in the above-mentioned presentation example, when the operation unit is kept in an operated state, there are cases where the operation is received only once (when the so-called auto-rapid tapping is not enabled) and cases where the operation is received multiple times (when the so-called auto-rapid tapping is enabled), and it is expected that this diversity of presentations will increase interest in the game.

More specifically, at least a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 to 298))" according to configuration 5-E above is provided as a type of reception period. In the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 5-E above, reception of an operation for a specific period first operation unit (3rd F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) and reception of an operation for a specific period second operation unit (3rd F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) are each allowable as operation units for which reception of operations may be permitted multiple times. In the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 5-E, as shown in Figs. 287(a) and (b) and Figs. 297(a) and (b), if the first operation unit (F3 operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operated state for a specific period, operation acceptance is performed multiple times (the auto-repeated-hit function is enabled), but even if the second operation unit (F3 operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) is kept in an operated state for a specific period, operation acceptance is not performed multiple times (the auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled).

With this configuration, even if an operation unit is capable of accepting multiple operations, the so-called automatic rapid-fire function may not be activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Although not explained in the above-mentioned performance example, in addition to the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 to 298))" in the above-mentioned configuration 5-E, a "special operation allowable period" in the above-mentioned configuration 5-E may be further provided.

For example, in the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281), not only the 1F operation part B (e.g., the operation button 410) but also the 1F operation part A (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) may be provided as an "operation part for which multiple operation receptions can be permitted", and the modified 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281) may be generated as the "special operation permitted period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 5-E. In other words, in this case, in the "special operation permitted period (such as the modified 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 5-E, the operation reception for the special period 1st operation part (the 1F operation part A, e.g., the sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception for the special period 2nd operation part (the 1F operation part B, e.g., the operation button 410) are each permitted multiple times. Furthermore, in the "special operation permitted period (such as the modified 1st F acceptance period (see Figures 278 to 281))" according to configuration 5-E above, even if either the special period first operation unit (1st F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) or the special period second operation unit (1st F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) is kept in an operated state, operation acceptance will not be performed multiple times (the auto-repeated function will not be enabled).

With this configuration, even if there are multiple operation parts that can accept multiple operations, depending on the type of operation allowance period, the so-called auto-repeated tap function may not be enabled for any of those operation parts, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

...

In addition, in the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 7F reception period (see Figures 297 to 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 5-E, "specific types of sound effects are not suppressed or inaudible before the occurrence of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 5-E, or are not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 5-E occurs (for example, the reception period occurs after the specific type of sound effects is always inaudible), but In the "special operation allowable period (such as the modified 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to the configuration 5-E, depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 5-E occurs, there may be a case where the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 5-E occurs, or a case where it is not made inaudible (or suppressed) (when the reception period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state). According to this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, it becomes easier to recognize whether it is the "specific operation allowable period" or the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 5-E when an operation opportunity is given, so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even if the mode of the effect sound has changed depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change after acceptance may occur. Also, it is possible to display a mock image display that imitates an operation target for which acceptance of operations is acceptable, so that a periodic change appears.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, at least the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) and the 7F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 6-E is prepared as a type of reception period. In the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 6-E, an operation part (the 3F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) in which multiple operation receptions are allowed is set, and when an operation is performed on the operation part, the above-mentioned periodic change that has appeared up until that point in the display imitating the operation part (the 3F operation-related display A) is made invisible as one of the post-reception changes, or is made difficult to see by displaying another image. Therefore, even after the operation is performed, the display imitating the target (the 3F operation-related display A) is displayed, while it is possible to appropriately suggest to the player that the situation is one in which an operation has been received.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the following types of reception periods are provided: a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" for the above configuration 6-E, and a "special operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" for the above configuration 6-E. In the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 6-E, there is an operation unit (the third F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) for which multiple operation reception is allowable, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, as one of the post-reception changes, the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the display imitating the operation unit (the third F operation-related display A) is hidden, or the image display of the imitation is hidden; in the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 6-E, there is an operation unit (the first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for which multiple operation reception is allowable, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, the periodic change that had appeared up until that point in the display imitating the operation unit (the first F operation-related display B) is not hidden, and the periodic change continues.

With this configuration, when an operation is performed on an operation unit that is permitted to accept multiple operations, the periodic changes that had been appearing on the display that imitates the operation unit are either hidden or the display that imitates the operation unit is hidden (see Figures 287 and 297), or the periodic changes continue without being hidden (see Figure 278). This makes it difficult to recognize whether the operation is being accepted properly, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

The "special operation allowable period" in the above configuration 6-E may be generated as the above-mentioned "modified 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281)" instead of the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281). As described above, in the modified 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281), the reception of operations for the special period first operation unit (1F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the reception of operations for the special period second operation unit (1F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) are each in a state in which multiple operations are allowed. In this case, it is desirable to make the periodic changes in the 1F operation-related displays A and B continue without being hidden, regardless of whether the special period first operation unit or the special period second operation unit is operated.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the seventh F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" according to configuration 6-E, both operation reception for the specific period first operation unit (third F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration 5001) and operation reception for the specific period second operation unit (third F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) can be permitted, but of these operation units, only the specific period first operation unit (third F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration 5001) is made the display target for the mock image display (third F operation-related display A), and of the specific period first operation unit (third F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration 5001) and the specific period second operation unit (third F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410), at least the specific period first operation unit is allowed to receive operations multiple times. In contrast, in the "special operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 6-E, both operation reception for the special period first operation unit (1st F operation unit A, e.g., the sword ornament 5001) and operation reception for the special period second operation unit (1st F operation unit B, e.g., the operation button 410) are permitted, and both of these operation units are displayed as mock images (1st F operation-related displays A and B), and among the special period first operation unit (1st F operation unit A, e.g., the sword ornament 5001) and the special period second operation unit (1st F operation unit B, e.g., the operation button 410), at least the special period second operation unit is permitted to receive operations multiple times.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit (the third F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) for a specific period during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the seventh F acceptance period (see Figures 297 and 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 6-E, as one of the changes after acceptance, the periodic change that had previously appeared in the display imitating the first operation unit for the specific period (the third F operation-related display A) is made non-display, or the imitated display itself is made non-display. In addition, when an operation is accepted for the special period second operation unit (first F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) during the "special operation permitted period (for example, first F acceptance period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 6-E, the periodic changes that have appeared up until that point in the display imitating the special period second operation unit (first F operation-related display B) are not hidden and the periodic changes continue, but when an operation is accepted for the special period first operation unit (first F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001), the periodic changes that have appeared up until that point in the display imitating the special period first operation unit and the display imitating the special period second operation unit are each hidden, or the image displays of the images are each hidden.

With this configuration, the "displayability of the periodic changes appearing in the mock image display" when the operation unit is operated varies depending on the type of reception period, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the third F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) and the seventh F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 6-E, "the specific type of effect sound is not suppressed or inaudible before the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 6-E occurs, or is not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 6-E occurs (for example, the specific type of effect sound is necessarily made inaudible before the reception period occurs). In the "special operation allowable period (such as the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281) or the modified first F reception period)" of the above configuration 6-E, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "special operation allowable period" of the configuration 6-E occurs, or may not be made inaudible (or suppressed) (the reception period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state) depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the "special operation allowable period" of the configuration 6-E occurs. According to this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, it becomes easier to recognize whether it is the "specific operation allowable period" or the "special operation allowable period" of the above configuration 6-E when an operation opportunity is given, so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable to make the display after reception the same even if the mode of the effect sound has changed depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change after acceptance may occur. It is also possible to display a display that resembles the operation unit.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned presentation examples, the display modeled after the operation unit (operation-related display) can be displayed to show periodic changes, but there are cases where the periodic changes are displayed to appear in predetermined time units (such as the 3F operation-related display A displayed during the 3F reception period and the 7F reception period) and cases where the periodic changes are displayed to appear in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (in the above-mentioned presentation examples, all types of operation-related displays with periodic changes except for the 3F operation-related display A), so it is expected that the diverse presentation will increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least a "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" for the above-mentioned configuration 7-E and a "special operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" for the above-mentioned configuration 7-E are provided as reception periods (operation allowable periods). Furthermore, in the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 7-E, at least operation acceptance for a specific period first operation unit (3F operation unit A, for example, sword decoration 5001) in which multiple operation acceptance is allowable, and operation acceptance for a specific period second operation unit (3F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) different from the specific period first operation unit are allowable, and in the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 7-E, at least operation acceptance for a special period first operation unit (1F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) in which multiple operation acceptance is allowable, and operation acceptance for a special period second operation unit (1F operation unit A, for example, sword decoration 5001) different from the special period first operation unit are allowable. During the "specific operation permitted period" according to configuration 7-E, a display imitating the first operation unit during a specific period (here, the 3F operation-related display A) is displayed so that its periodic changes appear in predetermined time units, and during the "special operation permitted period" according to configuration 7-E, a display imitating the first operation unit during a special period (here, the 1F operation-related display B) is displayed so that its periodic changes appear in time units longer than the predetermined time.

With this configuration, the time required for periodic changes will differ depending on the type of acceptance period and the type of operation target, so it is expected that the diverse presentation will increase interest in the game.

In addition, the first operation unit (3F operation unit A) during a specific period during a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) or the 7F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" in the above configuration 7-E may be the same operation unit as the second operation unit (1F operation unit A) during a special period during a "special operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" in the above configuration 7-E. Also in this case, even if the specific period first operation unit and the special period second operation unit are the same operation unit, during the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) or the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" according to the above configuration 7-E, a display imitating the specific period first operation unit (3rd F operation-related display A) may be displayed so that its periodic changes appear in predetermined time units, and during the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 7-E, a display imitating the special period second operation unit (1st F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) (1st F operation-related display A) may be displayed so that its periodic changes appear in time units longer than the predetermined time (which may be the same periodic time as the 1st F operation-related display B). With this configuration, even if the operation target (operation unit) is the same, the time required for the periodic change will differ depending on the type of "reception period" that has occurred, making it possible to greatly vary the presentation of the "reception period" depending on its type, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the "specific operation permitted period (e.g., the 7th F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above configuration 7-E, for the first operation part (the 3rd F operation part A, e.g., the sword ornament 5001), a display imitating this (the 3rd F operation related display A) is displayed so that its periodic change appears in a predetermined time unit, but for the second operation part (the 3rd F operation part B, e.g., the operation button 410) during the specific period, this display is not displayed, and the above configuration 7-E During such a "special operation permitted period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))", the periodic changes of both the display (1st F operation related display B) modeled on the special period first operation unit (1st F operation unit B, e.g., operation button 410) and the display (1st F operation related display A) modeled on the special period second operation unit (1st F operation unit A, e.g., sword ornament 5001) are displayed in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. With this configuration, when the periodic changes appear for the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to suggest the presence of a concealed operation unit that is in a state in which reception of operations is permitted.

Moreover, the above-mentioned example performance further includes a "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), the 8th F reception period (see Figures 299 and 300), the 9th F reception period (see Figures 301 and 302)), etc.)" according to the above-mentioned configuration 7-E, and during the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 7-E, although periodic changes appear as displays imitating the operation unit (2nd F operation-related display A, 4th F operation-related display A, 5th F operation-related display A) in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there exists an operation unit in which the fact that it is in a state in which operation acceptance is allowed is concealed. That is, in this case, when the periodic change occurs at the above-mentioned specified time, it is suggested that there is an operation unit that is concealed from the fact that it is in a state in which operation reception is permitted, whereas when the periodic change occurs in units of time longer than the above-mentioned specified time, there are cases in which an operation unit that is concealed from the fact that it is in a state in which operation reception is permitted is present (for example, the 6th F reception period, the 8th F reception period, the 9th F reception period, etc.) and cases in which it is not present (for example, the 1st F reception period), which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In the "special operation permitted period (e.g., 1F acceptance period)" according to configuration 7-E, the time required for the periodic change of the display imitating the special period first operation part (1F operation related display B) and the display imitating the special period second operation part (1F operation related display A) may be the same or different.

In the above-mentioned example of the presentation, even if a display modeled after the same operating unit is displayed, the manner in which the display modeled after the operating unit appears as a dynamic display (such as the amount of stroke when moving up and down) may be different depending on whether the periodic change appears at the above-mentioned specified time or at a time interval longer than the specified time.

In addition, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the third F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) or the seventh F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 7-E, "specific types of effect sounds are not suppressed or inaudible before the occurrence of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 7-E, or are not suppressed or inaudible before the occurrence of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 7-E, depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 7-E occurs (for example, In the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 7-E occurs, or may not be made inaudible (or suppressed) (the reception period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state) depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 7-E occurs. According to this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, it becomes easier to recognize whether it is the "specific operation allowable period" or the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 7-E when an operation opportunity is given, so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even if the mode of the effect sound has changed depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

The above-mentioned "modified 1st F reception period" may be applied to the "special operation permitted period (e.g., 1st F reception period)" in configuration 7-E above.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change after acceptance may occur. It is also possible to execute a display that mimics an operation target for which acceptance of operations is acceptable (imitation image display means).

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the following types of reception periods are provided: a "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" for the above-mentioned configuration 8-E, and a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" for the above-mentioned configuration 8-E. In both the "predetermined operation allowable period" and "specific operation allowable period" in configuration 8-E, there is an operation unit (third F operation unit A or first F operation unit B) that is the subject of display by the imitation image display means and that allows multiple operation acceptances. However, when an operation is performed on that operation unit (third F operation unit A) in the "predetermined operation allowable period" in configuration 8-E, and when an operation is performed on that operation unit (first F operation unit B) in the "specific operation allowable period" in configuration 8-E, different sounds can be output as the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, and this is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the third F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) and the seventh F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above configuration 8-E, when an operation is performed on an operation unit (third F operation unit A) that is the object of display by the imitation image display means and that is allowed to accept operations multiple times, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes, whereas in the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 8-E, when an operation is performed on an operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is the object of display by the imitation image display means and that is allowed to accept operations multiple times, a post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes, or a post-acceptance output sound may not be output.

According to this configuration, during the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" of configuration 8-E described above, even if an operation is performed on an operation unit (1st F operation unit B) that is the subject of display by the imitation image display means and for which multiple operation receptions are permitted, there are cases where a post-reception output sound is output and cases where a post-reception output sound is not output. This is expected to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation has been properly received, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Note that, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 8-E, when an operation is performed on an operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is the object of display by the imitation image display means and that is allowable to receive operations multiple times, but this triggers no output of the post-acceptance output sound, it is possible to prevent the post-acceptance output sound from being output by, for example, preventing the operation itself from being accepted on the operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is the object of display by the imitation image display means and that is allowable to receive operations multiple times, or it is possible to prevent the post-acceptance output sound from being output by not satisfying a predetermined condition, even though the operation itself is accepted on the operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is the object of display by the imitation image display means and that is allowable to receive operations multiple times.

In addition, a case where an operation is performed on an operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is the subject of display by the mock image display means and that is permitted to receive operations multiple times during a "specific operation permissible period (e.g., the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" but a post-reception output sound is not output as a result of this operation being performed should desirably be an event that can occur even when a first operation is performed during a "specific operation permissible period (e.g., the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))". It is also desirably that this event can occur regardless of the length of time that has passed since the previous operation was received. Even if a post-reception output sound is not output, some post-reception change may have occurred.

In addition, in the "predetermined operation allowable period" and the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 8-E, the operation units (the third F operation unit A and the first F operation unit B) that are the subject of display by the mock image display means and that are allowable to receive operations multiple times may be the same operation unit or different operation units.

In addition, if the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to configuration 8-E occurs as the "seventh F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298), etc.," when an operation is performed on an operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is the subject of display by the simulated image display means and that is allowable to receive operations multiple times, and a post-reception output sound is always output, it is possible to suggest that there is a concealed operation unit that is in a state in which operation reception is allowable. In contrast, in a "specific operation allowable period" in which no concealed operation unit exists, the post-reception output sound may or may not be output, so that it is expected that the presentation will be enhanced even without a concealment presentation.

In addition, during the "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the third F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) and the seventh F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 8-E, "a specific type of effect sound is not suppressed or inaudible before the occurrence of the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the configuration 8-E, or is not suppressed or inaudible before the occurrence of the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the configuration 8-E (for example, a specific type of effect sound is necessarily inaudible before it is received). In the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" of the above configuration 8-E, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "specific operation allowable period" of the configuration 8-E occurs, or may not be made inaudible (or suppressed) (the reception period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state) depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the "specific operation allowable period" of the configuration 8-E occurs. According to this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, it becomes easier to recognize whether it is the "predetermined operation allowable period" or the "specific operation allowable period" of the above configuration 8-E when an operation opportunity is given, so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable to make the display after reception the same even if the mode of the effect sound has changed depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

The above-mentioned "modified 1F reception period" may be applied to the "specific operation permitted period (e.g., 1F reception period)" in configuration 8-E above.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change may occur after acceptance. It is also possible to execute a display that mimics an operation target for which operation acceptance is acceptable (imitation image display means). It is also possible to execute a display that mimics an operation target for which operation acceptance is acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the types of reception periods are provided, which are the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" in the above-mentioned configuration 9-E, and the "special operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" in the above-mentioned configuration 9-E.

In the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) and the 7F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to configuration 9-E, there is an operation unit (3F operation unit A) in which operation reception is allowed multiple times and which can be performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operation state, and if the operation unit (3F operation unit A) is continuously maintained in an operated state, a post-reception output sound A, which is one of the post-reception changes A, is output at predetermined time intervals, and if multiple operations are performed on the operation unit (e.g., at intervals slower than the predetermined time), a post-reception output sound A is output each time the operation is performed.

In addition, in the "special operation permission period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 9-E, there is an operation unit (1st F operation unit B) for which operation reception is permitted multiple times but which does not receive operations multiple times even if the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) is kept in an operated state, and even if the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) is kept in an operated state, the post-reception output sound B, which is one of the post-reception changes B, is not output at predetermined time intervals, and even if the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) is operated multiple times (e.g., at intervals slower than the predetermined time), the post-reception output sound B may or may not be output when the operation is performed.

According to this configuration, during the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" of configuration 9-E, there is an operation unit (1st F operation unit B) for which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled, and even if the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) is operated, the post-reception output sound B may or may not be output when the operation is performed. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the operation has been properly received, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In addition, the "operation unit (3F operation unit A) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times and which can be performed multiple times by simply continuing to maintain the operated state" in the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) or 7F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" in the above configuration 9-E and the "operation unit (1F operation unit B) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times but which will not be performed multiple times even if the operated state is continued to be maintained" in the "special operation allowable period (e.g., 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" in the above configuration 9-E may be the same operation unit or different operation units.

In addition, the "operation unit (3F operation unit A) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times and in which operation reception can be performed multiple times simply by maintaining the operated state" in the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) or 7F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" in the above configuration 9-E may be set as an operation unit (e.g., 1F operation unit A) that is also the object of operation in the "special operation allowable period (e.g., 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" in the above configuration 9-E.

In addition, the "operation unit (first F operation unit B) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times but which does not receive operations multiple times even if the operated state is maintained" in the "special operation allowable period (e.g., first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" in the above configuration 9-E may be set as an operation unit (e.g., third F operation unit B) that is also the object of operation in the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., third F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) or seventh F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" in the above configuration 9-E.

However, if the "operation unit (first F operation unit B) for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times but which does not accept operation multiple times even if the operated state is maintained" in the "special operation acceptance period" in configuration 9-E above is set as an operation unit (for example, third F operation unit B) that is also subject to operation in the "specific operation acceptance period" in configuration 9-E above, then even though it is the same operation unit, there will be no cases where a post-operation output sound is output when an operation is performed in the "specific operation acceptance period" in configuration 9-E above (see Figure 287 (k) and Figure 297 (k)).

In addition, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the third F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) or the seventh F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 9-E, "specific types of effect sounds are not suppressed or inaudible before the occurrence of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 9-E, or are not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 9-E occurs (for example, specific types of effect sounds are necessarily made inaudible before being received). In the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 9-E (for example, the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281)), the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 9-E occurs, or may not be made inaudible (or suppressed) (the reception period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state) depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 9-E occurs. According to this configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, it becomes easier to recognize whether it is the "specific operation allowable period" or the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 9-E when an operation opportunity is given, so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable to make the display after reception the same even if the mode of the effect sound has changed depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

The above-mentioned "modified 1st F reception period" may be applied to the "special operation permitted period (e.g., 1st F reception period)" in configuration 9-E above.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change after acceptance can occur. Also, it is possible to display a display that mimics an operation target for which acceptance of operations is acceptable, so that a periodic change appears.

In this regard, during the reception periods in the above-mentioned performance examples, first, there are cases where a periodic change in the display imitating an operation target for which operation reception is acceptable is displayed in a predetermined time unit (3F operation-related display A displayed in the 3F reception period, 7F reception period, etc.), and cases where a periodic change in the display imitating the operation target is displayed in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, an operation-related display other than 3F operation-related display A). Furthermore, in both cases where the periodic changes in the display modeled after the operation target are displayed in a predetermined time unit during the reception period (such as the 3F operation-related display A displayed during the 3F reception period or 7F reception period) and where the periodic changes in the reception period are displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time (in the above-mentioned performance examples, an operation-related display other than the 3F operation-related display A), when an operation is performed on one of the multiple operation units that corresponds to the display modeled after the operation target, a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, can be output, which is expected to ideally suggest that the operation has been properly accepted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" in the above-mentioned configuration 10-E and the "special operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" in the above-mentioned configuration 10-E are prepared as types of reception periods. In this regard, in the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" in the above-mentioned configuration 10-E, a periodic change in a display (3rd F operation-related display A) modeled after an operation target is displayed so as to appear in predetermined time units, and when the operation unit (3rd F operation unit A) corresponding to the display (3rd F operation-related display A) is operated, a post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is output. In contrast, in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 10-E, a periodic change in a display simulating an operation target (1st F operation-related display B) is displayed in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, and when an operation unit (1st F operation unit B) corresponding to the display simulating an operation target (1st F operation-related display B) is operated, there are cases where a post-acceptance output sound B, which is one of the post-acceptance changes B, is output (timing te2A, te2B), and cases where the post-acceptance output sound B is not output (timing te2C).

With this configuration, when the periodic change in the display that resembles the object of operation is displayed in units of time longer than a predetermined time, a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may be output, and the post-acceptance output sound may not be output. This is expected to create a good sense of tension about whether the operation was accepted properly.

In this case, the third F operation unit A of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 10-E and the first F operation unit B of the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 10-E may be the same operation unit or different operation units.

In addition, it is desirable to set the validity period for the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281, etc.) longer than that for the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298, etc.).

In the above-mentioned presentation example, when an operation unit (e.g., the first F operation unit B) is operated, a case where a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is not output (e.g., timing te2C) occurs when normal play is being performed, and does not occur when a notification sound is being output based on some abnormality detection. For example, even if an operation unit (e.g., the first F operation unit B) is operated while only "BGM output based on the start of pattern fluctuation" is audibly output, a case where a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is not output (e.g., timing te2C) may occur, and even if an operation unit (e.g., the first F operation unit B) is operated while no sound is being output, a case where a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is not output (e.g., timing te2C) may occur.

In the above-mentioned example, a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permissible can be generated, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this reception period, a post-reception change can occur. Also, a display imitating an operation target for which operation reception is permissible can be displayed so that a periodic change appears. Also, even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a process (automatic button function) can be executed to cause the same post-reception change as when the operation is performed (automatic reception execution means).

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, first, as types of reception periods, at least a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" for the above configuration 11-E and a "special operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" for the above configuration 11-E are prepared.

In the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) or the 7F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above configuration 11-E, there is an operation unit (3F operation unit A) which is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception can be allowed multiple times, and when an operation is performed by the player on the operation unit (3F operation unit A), a post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes A, is output as mode A1 or A2 (see Fig. 287 (k)).

In contrast to this, in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 11-E described above, there is an operation unit (1st F operation unit B) that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means (subject to which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception may be permitted multiple times, and when an operation is performed by the player on this operation unit (1st F operation unit B), the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes B, is output as a sound (post-reception output sound B) different from the above modes A1 and A2 (see Fig. 278 (k)).

With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether or not a player will be subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means (subject to activation of the automatic button function) through the state of the post-reception output sound, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during a "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) or the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" relating to configuration 11-E, if a player operates an operation unit (3rd F operation unit A) that is subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means (subject to which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception may be allowed multiple times, a post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is output (see Figure 287 (k)). However, in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 11-E, if the player operates an operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means (subject to which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception can be allowed multiple times, the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, may be output in a manner different from the above-mentioned manners A1 and A2 (see timing te2A and te2B shown in Fig. 278(k)), or the post-reception output sound itself may not be output (see timing te2C shown in Fig. 278(k)). According to this configuration, the conditions for outputting the post-reception output sound differ between the "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 11-E, and therefore it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, the "operation unit (3F operation unit A) that is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means and that may be permitted to receive operations multiple times" in the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 3F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) or the 7F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" in the above configuration 11-E and the "operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means and that may be permitted to receive operations multiple times" in the "special operation allowable period (e.g., the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" in the above configuration 11-E may be the same operation unit or different operation units.

Furthermore, for example, the "operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and in which operation reception may be permitted multiple times" in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" in the above configuration 11-E may also be set as an operation unit (for example, third F operation unit B) that is also subject to operation in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the third F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) or the seventh F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" in the above configuration 11-E. However, when the "operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is not the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means and that may be permitted to receive operations multiple times" in the "special operation permitted period" according to the above configuration 11-E is set as the operation unit (for example, third F operation unit B) that is also the target of operation in the "specific operation permitted period" according to the above configuration 11-E, it is desirable (not a required configuration) to ensure that the post-reception output sound is always output when the operation is performed, or to ensure that the post-reception output sound is not even output when the operation is performed. Regardless of which configuration is adopted (for example, even if the post-reception output sound is not even output when the operation is performed), the conditions for outputting the post-reception output sound are different between the "specific operation permitted period" and the "special operation permitted period" according to the above configuration 11-E, so that it can be expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change after acceptance can occur. Furthermore, when the acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound can be audibly output, indicating that the state is such that acceptance of operations is acceptable, or that acceptance of operations will be accepted. It is also possible to execute a display that mimics an operation target for which acceptance of operations may be acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the types of reception periods are provided, which are the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 4th F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293) and the 8th F reception period (see Figs. 299 and 300))" in the above-mentioned configuration 12-E, and the "special operation allowable period (e.g., the 2nd F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" in the above-mentioned configuration 12-E.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 4th F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293) and the 8th F reception period (see Figs. 299 and 300))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 12-E, at least the operation reception for the specific period first operation unit (4th F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception for the specific period second operation unit (4th F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) can be allowed, and the configuration 1 During the "specific operation allowable period" according to 2-E, when the reception allowable sound is audibly output, if an operation is accepted for the specific period first operation unit (4F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) or for the specific period second operation unit (4F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410), this triggers the reception allowable sound to be made inaudible (see FIG. 292(k), FIG. 293(k), FIG. 299(k), FIG. 300(k), etc.). Note that the reception allowable sound may be output so as to straddle timing th2 when the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 12-E occurs, or may be output at timing th2 or later.

In contrast to this, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, during the "special operation allowable period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) and the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 12-E, it is possible to at least allow operation reception for the special period first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) and operation reception for the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410), and during the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 12-E, while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, When an operation is accepted for the second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410), the acceptance allowance sound is not made inaudible (timings tf2A, tf2B, and tf2C shown in FIG. 282). Instead, when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) during a special period while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output during the "special operation allowance period" according to configuration 12-E, the acceptance allowance sound is made inaudible (timing tf2D shown in FIG. 282). The acceptance allowance sound may be output across timing tf2 when the "special operation allowance period" according to configuration 12-E occurs, or may be output at timing th2 or later.

According to such a configuration, the conditions under which the reception-permitted sound is made inaudible differ between the "special operation permitted period (e.g., the 2nd F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" in the above configuration 12-E and the "special operation permitted period (e.g., the 2nd F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" in the above configuration 12-E, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, the specific period first operation unit (4F operation unit A) of the "specific operation permitted period" in the above configuration 12-E may be the same as or different from the special period first operation unit (2F operation unit A) of the "special operation permitted period" in the above configuration 12-E.

In addition, the specific period second operation unit (4F operation unit B) of the "specific operation permitted period" in the above configuration 12-E may be the same as the special period first operation unit (2F operation unit A) or the special period second operation unit (2F operation unit B) of the "special operation permitted period" in the above configuration 12-E, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the special period first operation unit (second F operation unit A) and the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B) of the "special operation permitted period" in the above configuration 12-E may be permitted to accept operations even in the "specific operation permitted period" in the above configuration 12-E.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during the "special operation permitted period (for example, the second F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) and the sixth F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))" according to configuration 12-E, of the special period first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) and the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410), the special period first operation unit is subject to activation of the automatic button function, while the special period second operation unit is not subject to activation of the automatic button function. In other words, in this case, with regard to the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) that requires multiple operations, the player will not be able to see the content of the post-reception changes triggered by this unless he or she operates it himself. This makes it possible to simultaneously provide both low-difficulty games (one operation is all that is required, and even if no operation is performed, the changes that occur after the operation is accepted can be confirmed) and high-difficulty games (multiple operations are required, and if no operation is performed, the changes that occur after the operation is accepted cannot be confirmed), which is expected to increase the interest of players from beginners to experts.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during the "special operation permission period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to configuration 12-E, the reception permission sound is made inaudible until the arrival of timing tf3, at which the automatic button function is enabled. This makes it possible to indicate that the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled has not yet arrived while the reception permission sound is being output, enabling the player to enjoy the game with the peace of mind that their own opportunities for operation will not be taken away.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change after acceptance can occur. Furthermore, when the acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound can be audibly output, indicating that the state is such that acceptance of operations is acceptable, or that acceptance of operations will be accepted. It is also possible to execute a display that mimics an operation target for which acceptance of operations may be acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the types of reception periods are provided, which are the "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294) and the 9th F reception period (see FIG. 301 and FIG. 302))" in the above-mentioned configuration 13-E, and the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 2nd F reception period (see FIG. 282 to FIG. 286) and the 6th F reception period (see FIG. 295 and FIG. 296))" in the above-mentioned configuration 13-E.

In the "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294) or the 9th F reception period (see FIG. 301 and FIG. 302))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 13-E, it is possible to at least allow operation reception for the first operation unit (5th F operation unit A, e.g., the sword ornament 5001) for a predetermined period and operation reception for the second operation unit (5th F operation unit B, e.g., the operation button 410) for a predetermined period. In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, in the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the configuration 13-E, even if operation reception for the first operation unit (5th F operation unit A) for a predetermined period or operation reception for the second operation unit (5th F operation unit B) for a predetermined period is performed while the reception allowable sound is being audibly output, the reception allowable sound is not made inaudible as a result of this (see FIG. 294(j), (k) and FIG. 301(j), (k)).

In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) and the sixth F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))" in the above configuration 13-E, it is at least possible to allow operation acceptance for the first operation unit (the second F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) during the specific period and operation acceptance for the second operation unit (the second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) during the specific period. In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, in the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 13-E, if an operation is accepted for the first operation unit (second F operation unit A) during a specific period while the acceptance allowable sound is being audibly output, the acceptance allowable sound is not made inaudible, but if an operation is accepted for the second operation unit (second F operation unit B) during a specific period, the acceptance allowable sound is made inaudible (see Figures 282(j) and (k) and Figures 295(j) and (k)). With this configuration, the conditions for making the acceptance allowable sound inaudible are different between the specified operation allowable period and the specific operation allowable period, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, the "specific period first operation unit" of the "specific operation allowable period" in the above configuration 13-E may be the same as the "predetermined period first operation unit" or the "predetermined period second operation unit" of the "predetermined operation allowable period" in the above configuration 13-E, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the "specific period second operation section" of the "specific operation allowable period" in the above configuration 13-E may be the same as the "predetermined period first operation section" or the "predetermined period second operation section" of the "predetermined operation allowable period" in the above configuration 13-E, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the first operation unit for a specified period (or the second operation unit for a specified period) may be one that is permitted to accept operations even during the "specific operation permitted period" according to configuration 13-E above.

Also, the allowable sound may be output in the same manner during the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) and the sixth F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))" in the above configuration 13-E and the "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the fifth F reception period (see Figure 294) and the ninth F reception period (see Figures 301 and 302))" in the above configuration 13-E.

In particular, it is desirable to have the same appearance as the 5th F effect display F during the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 13-E, and when the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 13-E occurs, there are cases where the effect display is output in a manner that can be output during the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 13-E, and cases where the effect display is output in a manner that cannot be output during the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 13-E.

For example, if mode EF-2, which appears when expectations are low, is made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF (always the same mode)", then even if mode EF-2 appears as the "2nd F effect display EF", it will be possible to make the player aware of the possibility that this is being displayed as the "5th F effect display EF", and further the possibility that mode UA2, which has a high expectation, will appear as the 5th F post-reception display UA. This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when mode EF-2 appears as the "2nd F effect display EF".

Alternatively, if mode EF-1, which appears when there is high expectation, is made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF (always the same mode)", it will be possible to make mode EF-1 appear whenever the "5th F effect display EF" is displayed, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a reception period (operation allowance period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this reception period, a post-reception display can be displayed. Furthermore, when the reception period occurs, a reception allowance sound can be audibly output, indicating that the state is such that operation reception is permitted, or that operation reception will be permitted.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) and the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 14-E is prepared as the reception period, and in the "specific operation allowable period" according to the configuration 14-E, the reception of operations for the first operation unit (the second F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) among the multiple operation units and the second operation unit (the second F operation unit A, for example, the sword decoration 5 001) are both acceptable, and when the player operates the first operation unit (second F operation unit B), the second F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to appear to overlap the decorative pattern SZ in front of it (see Fig. 285(c) and (d) etc.), and when the player operates the second operation unit (second F operation unit A), the second F post-reception display UA is displayed so as to appear to overlap the decorative pattern SZ behind it (see Fig. 286(g) etc.). With this configuration, depending on whether the first operation unit (second F operation unit B) or the second operation unit (second F operation unit A) is operated, it is possible to select which of the decorative pattern SZ or the post-reception display the player would like to see first, and therefore it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) and the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to configuration 14-E, different display modes (UA, UB) appear as the post-reception display when an operation is performed on the first operation unit (second F operation unit B) and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (second F operation unit A). With this configuration, it is possible to forcibly select which post-reception display to view by taking into account not only the visibility of the post-reception display but also the performance content, and thus it is expected to provide higher performance.

Also, in the above-mentioned presentation example, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the second F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) or the sixth F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))" according to configuration 14-E, when the player performs an operation on the first operation unit (second F operation unit B) while the reception allowable sound is being audibly output, the post-reception display is displayed so that it appears to be superimposed on the front of the decorative pattern SZ while the audible output of the reception allowable sound continues. In contrast, when the player performs an operation on the second operation unit (second F operation unit A) while the reception allowable sound is being audibly output, this triggers the reception allowable sound to be made inaudible, and the post-reception display is displayed so that it appears to be superimposed on the back of the decorative pattern SZ. According to this configuration, when the user selects to view the post-acceptance display with priority between the decorative pattern SZ and the post-acceptance display, the audible output of the acceptance sound continues as a compensation, which makes it difficult to recognize that an operation has been accepted, and is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Also, if the audible output of the acceptance sound is interrupted based on the acceptance of an operation to avoid this, the post-acceptance display is made difficult to see by the decorative pattern SZ as a compensation, and in this case too, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In particular, in the above-mentioned presentation example, when the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 14-E is realized as the "sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296)", when the player operates the above-mentioned first operation unit (second F operation unit B) on the side that is not the display target (concealed) of the display simulating the operation target while the reception allowable sound is being audibly output, the post-reception display is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the above-mentioned decorative pattern SZ while the audible output of the reception allowable sound continues. In contrast, when the player operates the above-mentioned second operation unit (second F operation unit A) on the side that is the display target of the display simulating the operation target while the reception allowable sound is being audibly output, the reception allowable sound is made inaudible, and the post-reception display is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the above-mentioned decorative pattern SZ. With this configuration, even if the player operates the first operation unit (second F operation unit B) on the (concealed) side, the audible output of the acceptance permission sound is not interrupted as a result, so that it is possible to add a production element regarding secrecy as to whether or not the operation acceptance was performed properly. However, instead, since the post-acceptance display is displayed so as to be overlapped in front of the decorative pattern SZ, it can be expected to be provided as special information to help determine whether or not the operation acceptance was performed properly when the player operates the first operation unit (second F operation unit B) on the (concealed) side.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change after acceptance may occur. It is also possible to execute a premonition display that suggests that an operation acceptance period will occur. It is also possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which acceptance of operations may be acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the reception period includes the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 4th F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293) and the 8th F reception period (see Figs. 299 and 300))" in the above-mentioned configuration 15-E, and the "special operation allowable period (e.g., the 2nd F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" in the above-mentioned configuration 15-E.

In the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 4th F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293) and the 8th F reception period (see Figs. 299 and 300))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 15-E, it is possible to at least allow operation reception for the first operation unit (4th F operation unit A, e.g., the sword ornament 5001) during the specific period and operation reception for the second operation unit (4th F operation unit B, e.g., the operation button 410) during the specific period, and the premonition performance display is performed during the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 4th F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293) and the 8th F reception period (see Figs. 299 and 300))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 15-E. The premonition display is displayed across timing th2 when the "specific operation allowable period" occurs, and when an operation is received for either the specific period first operation unit (4F operation unit A) or the specific period second operation unit (4F operation unit B) while the premonition display is displayed during the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 15-E, this triggers the premonition display to be made invisible (see FIG. 292(d), FIG. 293(d), FIG. 299(d), FIG. 300(d), etc.).

In contrast, in the "special operation allowable period (e.g., the second F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286) and the sixth F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 15-E, it is possible to at least allow operation reception for the special period first operation unit (the second F operation unit A, e.g., the sword ornament 5001) and operation reception for the special period second operation unit (the second F operation unit B, e.g., the operation button 410), and the premonition effect display is displayed so as to span the timing tf2 at which the "special operation allowable period" according to the said configuration 15-E occurs. In the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 15-E, when an operation is received for the special period first operation unit (second F operation unit A) while the premonition display is being audibly output, the premonition display is not made invisible, but when an operation is received for the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B) while the premonition display is being displayed in the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 15-E, the premonition display is made invisible (see FIG. 282(d) and FIG. 295(d)). With this configuration, the conditions for making the premonition display invisible are different in the "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation allowable period" according to the configuration 15-E, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, the "specific period first operation section" of the "specific operation permitted period" in the above configuration 15-E may be the same as the "special period first operation section" or the "special period second operation section" of the "special operation permitted period" in the above configuration 15-E, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the "specific period second operation section" of the "specific operation permitted period" in the above configuration 15-E may be the same as the "special period first operation section" or the "special period second operation section" of the "special operation permitted period" in the above configuration 15-E, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the "special period first operation unit (or special period second operation unit)" in the above configuration 15-E may be one that is permitted to accept operations even during the "specific operation permitted period" in the above configuration 15-E.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, if the "specific operation permitted period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 15-E is realized as the 8F reception period (see Figs. 299 and 300), even if an operation is performed on the specific period second operation unit (4F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) on the concealed side, the 4F effect display is displayed so as to be seen overlapping from in front of the 4F operation-related display A corresponding to the specific period first operation unit (4F operation unit A, for example, sword decoration 5001), so that it is possible to appropriately indicate that a state has been entered in which reception of operations of the first operation unit (4F operation unit A, for example, sword decoration 5001) is not permitted for the specific period.

In the above-mentioned example, the 4th F premonition performance display may be displayed as the same image display as the 5th F premonition performance display. Also, the 4th F premonition performance display may be displayed as the same image display as the 3rd F premonition performance display.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the decorative pattern SZ. It is also possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. It is also possible to execute a premonition display that suggests that an acceptance period will occur. It is also possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which acceptance of operations is acceptable.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the premonition presentation display can be executed so as to span the timing when the operation allowable period occurs, and when the player operates an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations during the operation allowable period, the post-reception display is displayed so that it appears to be superimposed in front of the decorative pattern SZ (for example, the second F post-reception display UB2 shown in FIG. 286(e)) or so that it appears to be superimposed behind the decorative pattern SZ (for example, the second F post-reception display UA1 shown in FIG. 286(g)). This is expected to provide a dramatic effect between the post-reception display and the decorative pattern SZ, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the specific operation allowable period related to the above-mentioned configuration 16-E (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286), the 5th F reception period (see Figure 294), the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), or the 9th F reception period (see Figures 301 and 302)) is provided as the type of reception period.

In the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 16-E, both the acceptance of an operation for a first operation unit (e.g., when the specific operation allowable period is realized as the second F reception period, it corresponds to "second F operation unit B" and is the operation button 410) among the multiple operation units and the acceptance of an operation for a second operation unit (e.g., when the specific operation allowable period is realized as the second F reception period, it corresponds to "second F operation unit A" and is the sword ornament 5001, etc.) are allowed, and when the player operates the first operation unit (e.g., second F operation unit B), a post-reception display (e.g., second F post-reception display UB) is displayed so as to appear overlapped in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see, for example, FIG. 286(e) and the like), and when the player operates the second operation unit (e.g., second F operation unit A), a post-reception display (e.g., second F post-reception display UA) is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the decorative pattern SZ (see, for example, FIG. 286(g) and the like). With this configuration, it is possible to select whether the player wants to view the decorative pattern SZ or the post-acceptance display first by operating the first operating unit (e.g., second F operating unit B) or the second operating unit (e.g., second F operating unit A), which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, during the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 16-E, different display modes (e.g., second F post-reception displays UA and UB) are displayed as the post-reception display when an operation is performed on the first operation unit (e.g., second F operation unit B, operation button 410) and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (e.g., second F operation unit A, sword ornament 5001, etc.). This configuration is expected to provide higher performance, since it is possible to force the user to choose which post-reception display they want to see, taking into account not only the visibility of the post-reception display but also the performance content.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 16-E, both the acceptance of an operation for the first operation unit (e.g., second F operation unit B, operation button 410) among the multiple operation units and the acceptance of an operation for the second operation unit (e.g., second F operation unit A, sword ornament 5001, etc.) are permitted, and when the player operates the first operation unit (e.g., second F operation unit B, operation button 410) while the premonition presentation display is being displayed, the post-acceptance display is displayed in such a way that the premonition presentation display is not displayed. When the second operation part (e.g., second F operation part A, such as sword decoration 5001) is operated by the player while the premonition effect display is being displayed, the premonition effect display is made invisible, and the post-acceptance display is made to appear to be overlapped behind the decorative pattern SZ (e.g., see Fig. 286(f) and (g)). When the second operation part (e.g., second F operation part A, such as sword decoration 5001) is operated by the player while the premonition effect display is being displayed, the premonition effect display is made invisible, and the post-acceptance display is made to appear to be overlapped behind the decorative pattern SZ (e.g., see Fig. 286(f) and (g)).

According to this configuration, in the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 16-E, when the first operation unit is operated, the premonition display is not hidden, but the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the premonition display from the front, thereby ensuring its visibility. In contrast, when the second operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern SZ from the rear, but this is used as a trigger to hide the premonition display, thereby ensuring its visibility. Since the visibility of the post-acceptance display is ensured through such different methods when the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, it is possible to greatly differ in the presentation of each of them, and it is expected to improve the presentation when prompting the player to select whether to operate the first operation unit or the second operation unit.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is acceptable, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a post-acceptance display can be generated. It is also possible to execute a premonition display that suggests that an acceptance period will occur. It is also possible to execute a display that mimics an operation target for which acceptance of operations is acceptable.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the following types of reception periods are provided: "specific operation permitted period (e.g., 3rd F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291), 4th F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293), 7th F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298), or 8th F reception period (see Figs. 299 and 300))" in the above configuration 17-E; and "special operation permitted period (e.g., 2nd F reception period (see Figs. 282 to 286), 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296))" in the above configuration 17-E.

In the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the third F reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291), the fourth F reception period (see Figs. 292 and 293), the seventh F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298), or the eighth F reception period (see Figs. 299 and 300))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 17-E, even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 17-E, when a specific time (set effective time) has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 17-E, the same post-reception display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is performed (the automatic button function is enabled). In this regard, the premonition effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing when the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 17-E occurs, but is made non-displayed at a timing before the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific operation allowable period.

In contrast, in the "special operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) or the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296))" of configuration 17-E, even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the "special operation allowable period" of configuration 17-E, when a special time (set valid time) has elapsed since the occurrence of the "special operation allowable period" of configuration 17-E, the same post-reception display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is displayed (the automatic button function is enabled). In this regard, the premonition effect display is executed so as to span the timing when the "special operation permitted period" of configuration 17-E occurs, and is also displayed when a special time (set valid time) has passed since the "special operation permitted period" of configuration 17-E occurred; if the special time (set valid time) has passed without the player performing any operation after the "special operation permitted period" of configuration 17-E occurred, the premonition effect display is not hidden but is displayed, and the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is started.

With this configuration, the timing at which the premonition display is hidden differs in relation to the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled between the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 17-E and the "special operation allowable period" according to configuration 17-E, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained when an operation allowable period occurs during which the automatic button function is enabled.

In this case, the "specific time" and the "special time" may be the same time or different times.

The premonition display may be displayed in the same manner when it is displayed in accordance with the "specific operation permitted period" according to configuration 17-E above and when it is displayed in accordance with the "special operation permitted period" according to configuration 17-E above, or may be displayed in different manners.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, in addition to the "specific operation allowable period" and "special operation allowable period" in the above-mentioned configuration 17-E, the type of acceptance period includes a "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 5th F acceptance period (see FIG. 294) and the 9th F acceptance period (see FIG. 301 and FIG. 302))" in the above-mentioned configuration 17-E.

In this regard, in the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294) or the 9th F reception period (see FIG. 301 and FIG. 302))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 17-E, if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 17-E, the same post-reception display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is not performed (the automatic button function is not enabled). In this regard, the premonition effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing when the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 17-E occurs, but the premonition effect display is made non-displayed at a timing (shorter time) before either the specific time or the special time has elapsed since the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 17-E occurs (see FIG. 294(d), FIG. 301(d), FIG. 302(d)).

According to this configuration, when the premonition effect display is made invisible midway through the acceptance period, the automatic button function may or may not be enabled, which is expected to encourage the player to perform an operation quickly. Also, while the premonition effect display is displayed, there are cases in which the acceptance period does not end (the "specific operation permitted period" in configuration 17-E, the "prescribed operation permitted period" in configuration 17-E) and cases in which the acceptance period ends (the "special operation permitted period" in configuration 17-E), but since the automatic button function is always enabled even if the acceptance period ends, the player can enjoy playing with peace of mind.

As mentioned above, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294) and the 9th F reception period (see FIG. 301 and FIG. 302) may be targets for which the automatic button function is enabled. In this case, the time during which the premonition display is displayed is set as the specific time (set valid time), and these reception periods are realized as the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 17-E.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" in the above configuration 18-E and the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))" in the above configuration 18-E are provided as types of reception period.

In addition, during the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))," there is a 1st F operation section B (operation button 410) that is allowed to accept multiple operations and is displayed as a replica image, and even if this operation section is kept in an operated state, it will not accept multiple operations (the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled). In contrast, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))," there is a 10th F operation section A (sword ornament 5001) that is allowed to accept multiple operations but is not displayed as a replica image, and it is possible to accept multiple operations simply by keeping this operation section in an operated state (the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled). This is expected to alleviate the difficulty of playing the game due to the operation section to be operated being concealed, and to suppress a decline in interest in the game. It is also expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner not only when the operation unit to be operated is concealed, but also when the operation unit to be operated is not concealed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, during the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 18-E, there are multiple operation parts, including the "1st F operation part B (operation button 410)," in which multiple operation receptions are allowed and are displayed as mock images, and even if any of the operation parts is kept in an operated state, multiple operation receptions will not be performed (the so-called auto-repeated function will not be enabled).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 18-E, there are at least the "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001))" and the "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))" as operation units for which multiple operation reception is permitted but which are not displayed as mock images. However, while the "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001))" can receive operations multiple times simply by continuing to maintain it in an operated state, the "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))" is not allowed to receive operations multiple times even if it is continued to be maintained in an operated state (see Figs. 303 (a) and (b)).

With this configuration, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", even for operation parts that are allowed to receive multiple operations but are not displayed as mock images, the so-called auto-repeated-tap function may not be activated, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension more appropriately.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example performance, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", when an operation is received for the "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001))", the post-reception display UA is displayed behind the pattern (so as to appear to be overlapped behind the decorative pattern SZ) (see Figure 306, etc.), but when an operation is received for the "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))", the post-reception display UB is displayed in front of the pattern (so as to appear to be overlapped in front of the decorative pattern SZ) (see Figures 305 and 306, etc.). In other words, in this case, when an operation is performed on an operation unit where the fact that an operation opportunity has been given is not concealed, the post-acceptance display in response to the operation acceptance is executed in a manner that is difficult to see, and when an operation is performed on an operation unit where the fact that an operation opportunity has been given is concealed, the post-acceptance display in response to the operation acceptance is executed in a manner that is easy to see, so that no matter which acceptance period occurs, it can be expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained while increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", the "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001))" is allowed to accept multiple operations, and when the "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001))" is operated, the reception output sound is always output (see Fig. 303 (k)). As a result, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", when an operation is performed on the "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001))", it becomes even easier to recognize whether or not an operation has been accepted after an operation has been accepted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", the "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))" is allowed to accept multiple operations, but there is no case where the reception output sound is output when the "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))" is operated (see Fig. 303 (k)). As a result, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", when an operation is performed on the "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))", a performance element that makes it difficult to recognize whether or not an operation has been accepted is included, even after the operation has been accepted, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example presentation, during the "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))," when an operation section (1st F operation section B (operation button 410)) in which multiple operation receptions are permitted and which is displayed as a mock image display is operated, there are cases in which the reception output sound is output and cases in which the reception output sound is not output (see Fig. 278 (k)). As a result, even during the "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))," a slight presentation element that makes it difficult to recognize whether or not an operation has been received is included, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In the above-mentioned performance example, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))," the specific type of performance sound is not suppressed or inaudible before the occurrence of the specific operation allowable period, or is not suppressed or inaudible, depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "specific operation allowable period" occurs. However, in the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))," the specific type of performance sound may be suppressed or inaudible before the occurrence of the "predetermined operation allowable period," or is not suppressed or inaudible, depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "predetermined operation allowable period" occurs. This configuration is the same as the contents described in the above-mentioned "Configuration 3-D," "Configuration 12-D," "Configuration 17-D," "Configuration 1-E" to "Configuration 9-E," and specific examples related thereto, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the above-mentioned alternative examples regarding this configuration can also be applied to the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281) and the 10F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306). For example, even if the state of the sound effect (audible state) changes depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, the state as the post-reception change according to the operation does not change accordingly and remains the same.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" in the above-mentioned configuration 19-E and the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))" in the above-mentioned configuration 19-E are provided as types of reception period.

In addition, during a "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))," there are one or more operation units for which operation reception is permitted and which are displayed as a model image, and when the operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound can be output (see Fig. 278 (k)). In contrast, during a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))," there are at least a "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001))" and a "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))" for which operation reception is permitted but which are not displayed as a model image, and when an operation is performed on the "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001))," a post-acceptance output sound can be output, but when an operation is performed on the "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410)), a post-acceptance output sound is not output. That is, in this case, during a "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))", a post-acceptance output sound may be output when an operation unit that is not in a concealed state is operated, whereas during a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", a post-acceptance output sound is output only when an operation is performed on the first operation unit out of the first and second operation units that are in a concealed state, making it possible to further conceal the fact that not only the first operation unit but also the second operation unit are in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted.

In this case, the post-acceptance output sound may be output in a different manner depending on at least one of the type of operation permitted period and the type of operation part operated by the player.

In this case, it is desirable that when an operation is performed on the "second operation unit (10F operation unit B (operation button 410))" during the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 10F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", a post-acceptance output sound is not output, but a post-acceptance change in response to the operation can occur. However, as shown in Fig. 303(i), even if an operation is performed on the "second operation unit (10F operation unit B (operation button 410))" during the "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 10F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306)), there may be cases where a post-acceptance change (at least in appearance) in response to the operation does not occur (see Fig. 303(i)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example presentation, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))", when an operation section (1st F operation section B (operation button 410)) in which operation reception is permitted and which is displayed as a mock image display is operated, there are cases in which the reception output sound is output and cases in which the reception output sound is not output (see Fig. 278 (k)). As a result, even during the "predetermined operation permissible period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))", a slight presentation element that makes it difficult to recognize whether or not an operation has been received is included, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least a "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" for the above-mentioned configuration 20-E and a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))" for the above-mentioned configuration 20-E are provided as types of reception periods. During the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))", there are operation units for which operation reception is permitted and which are displayed as imitation image displays, and when the operation units are operated, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation can be displayed. During the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", there are operation units for which operation reception is permitted and which are not displayed as imitation image displays, but even when the operation units are operated, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation can be displayed, so that even when the operation unit to be operated is concealed, it is possible to suggest that the operation has been performed appropriately.

In this regard, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", there are at least a "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001))" and a "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))" as operation units for which operation reception is permitted but which are not displayed as a model image display, and when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, a post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed behind the pattern (so as to appear to overlap the rear side of the decorative pattern SZ), and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit, a post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation can be displayed in front of the pattern (so as to appear to overlap the front side of the decorative pattern SZ) (see Figs. 305 and 306, etc.). Depending on whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated, it is possible to select whether the decorative pattern SZ or the post-reception display is to be viewed with priority, and this is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

In addition, during the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))", there are a plurality of operation units for which operation reception is permitted and which are displayed as model image displays, but no matter which of the operation units is operated, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is not displayed behind the pattern (so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ), and the post-reception display corresponding to the operation may be displayed in a position offset from the decorative pattern SZ or behind the pattern (so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ). With this configuration, when an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted and which is displayed as model image displays is operated, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is no longer displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, so that even after the operation is accepted, there is no need to keep the presentation secret, and the game can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a multiple operation allowance period can be generated in which both the operation reception of the first operation unit (first F operation unit B in the first F reception period, and tenth F operation unit B in the tenth F reception period, corresponding to the "operation button 410" here) in the above-mentioned configuration 21-E and the operation reception of the second operation unit (first F operation unit A in the first F reception period, and tenth F operation unit A in the tenth F reception period, corresponding to the "sword decoration 5001" here) in the above-mentioned configuration 21-E can be allowed, and when either the operation of the operation button 410 or the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed during the multiple operation allowance period, a post-acceptance display according to the type of the side on which the operation was accepted can be displayed. Also, although it is possible to display a model image display that imitates the operation target by the player (model image display means), there are cases in which the model image display means does not display the operation target even if the operation acceptance is allowed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a "first multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 21-E and a "second multiple operation allowance period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" according to the above configuration 21-E are provided as types of such multiple operation allowance period. When an operation is performed on the "operation button 410" (where multiple operation reception may be permitted) during the first multiple operation allowance period, a post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed, but even while the post-reception display UB is displayed, reception of operations on the "sword decoration 5001" is permitted (see Fig. 278). Furthermore, if an operation is performed on the "sword decoration 5001" during the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281) while the post-reception display UB corresponding to an operation performed on the "operation button 410" is displayed, the post-reception display UA corresponding to that operation is displayed, and the operation can be used as a trigger to hide the post-reception display UB (the post-reception display on the operation button 410 side) that had been displayed up until that point (see Figs. 281 (h) and (i)), making it possible to appropriately indicate that the performance has progressed due to a new operation on the "sword decoration 5001" side, rather than an operation on the "operation button 410" side that was interrupted midway.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example presentation, during the "first multiple operation allowance period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))", while a display modeled after the "operation button 410" and a display modeled after the "sword decoration 5001" are both displayed, reception of operations for both the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001" are allowed, and of the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001", it may be possible to allow reception of operations multiple times for at least the "operation button 410". Furthermore, in the "second multiple operation permission period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", while neither the display modeled after the "operation button 410" nor the display modeled after the "sword decoration 5001" is displayed, both the reception of operations for the "operation button 410" and the reception of operations for the "sword decoration 5001" are permitted, and among the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001", at least the "operation button 410" is permitted to receive multiple operations.

When an operation is performed on the "operation button 410", which may be permitted to accept multiple operations during the "first multiple operation allowance period (for example, the first F acceptance period (see Figures 278 to 281))", a post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed, but acceptance of operations on the "sword decorative body 5001" is permitted even while the post-acceptance display UB is displayed, and when an operation is performed on the "sword decorative body 5001" while the post-acceptance display UB is displayed, a post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-acceptance display UB (post-acceptance display on the operation button 410 side) that had been displayed until then can be made invisible as a result of the operation. In contrast, when an operation is performed on the "operation button 410" which may be permitted to accept multiple operations during the "second multiple operation allowance period (for example, the 10F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", a post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed, but operation reception on the "sword decorative body 5001" is permitted even while the post-reception display UB is displayed, and when an operation is performed on the "sword decorative body 5001" while the post-reception display UB is displayed, a post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed, but the post-reception display UB (post-reception display on the operation button 410 side) which had appeared until then is not hidden as a result of the operation. According to this configuration, when an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001" while the post-acceptance display UB in response to an operation on the "operation button 410" is displayed, this may trigger a situation where the post-acceptance display UB in response to an operation on the "operation button 410" is hidden, or where the post-acceptance display UB in response to an operation on the "operation button 410" is not hidden, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

The post-acceptance display UB in response to an operation being performed on the "operation button 410" for which multiple operation acceptance may be permitted during the "first multiple operation acceptance period (e.g., the 1st F acceptance period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" and the post-acceptance display UB in response to an operation being performed on the "operation button 410" for which multiple operation acceptance may be permitted during the "second multiple operation acceptance period (e.g., the 10th F acceptance period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" may be displayed as the same image display or as an approximate image display. In other words, in this case, it is expected that the effect will be provided by whether or not a specific type of image display (post-acceptance display UB) is hidden when an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001".

In addition, during the "10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)", if an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001" while the post-reception display UB in response to an operation on the "operation button 410" is displayed, the post-reception display UA in response to that operation may be displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the post-reception display UB.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "operation button 410" and an operation is performed on the "sword decoration 5001" during the "10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)," regardless of the timing of these operations, the post-reception display UB that appears in response to the operation of the "operation button 410" is always displayed at the time when the post-reception display UA that appears in response to the operation of the "sword decoration 5001" is made invisible, and it is desirable to make it invisible at a later timing.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a multiple operation allowance period can be generated in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit (first F operation unit A in the first F reception period, and tenth F operation unit A in the tenth F reception period, corresponding to the "sword ornament 5001" here) in the above-mentioned configuration 22-E and the operation reception for the second operation unit (first F operation unit B in the first F reception period, and tenth F operation unit B in the tenth F reception period, corresponding to the "operation button 410" here) in the above-mentioned configuration 22-E can be allowed. Also, a first operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception for the first operation unit is allowed or when the operation reception is allowed can be displayed, and a second operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception for the second operation unit is allowed or when the operation reception is allowed can be displayed.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least the "first multiple operation allowable period (e.g., the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 22-E and the "second multiple operation allowable period (e.g., the tenth F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" according to the above configuration 22-E as types of multiple operation allowable period.

During the "first multiple operation allowed period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))", while the first operation-related display (first F operation-related display A) and the second operation-related display (first F operation-related display B) are both displayed, if an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001", this operation will be accepted, and if an operation is performed on the "operation button 410", this operation will be accepted. In contrast to this, in a "second multiple operation allowance period (for example, the 10F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", when neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed, if an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001", this operation is accepted, and if an operation is performed on the "operation button 410", this operation can be accepted; however, when an operation is accepted on the "operation button 410" under this circumstance, this triggers the display of the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B), and while the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) is displayed, the state in which not only the acceptance of operations on the "operation button 410" but also the acceptance of operations on the "sword ornament 5001" can continue. With this configuration, the confidentiality of the "state in which operation acceptance is permitted" of the "operation button 410" is eliminated by operating the "operation button 410", and since operation acceptance for the "sword decoration 5001" and operation acceptance for the "operation button 410" can be performed while the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) is displayed, it is expected that interest in the game will be increased.

In the above-mentioned presentation example, in the "second multiple operation permission period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", even if an operation is received for the "sword decoration 5001", the first operation-related display (10th F operation-related display A) which can only appear when the "sword decoration 5001" is in a state in which operation reception is permitted or is in a state in which operation reception is permitted will not be displayed (see Figs. 303 and 306). With this configuration, the presentation differs when an operation is received for the "sword decoration 5001" and the "operation button 410" in a concealed state, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned presentation example, the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) that is displayed based on the operation reception for the "operation button 410" during the "second multiple operation permitted period (for example, the 10F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" when neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed is displayed in a different manner from the second operation-related display (1F operation-related display B) that appears when the "first multiple operation permitted period (for example, the 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" occurs (see Figs. 281 and 305). In other words, in this case, even if the 10F operation-related display B is displayed after the reception period occurs, it is difficult for the player to feel that the "display image that should have been displayed was hidden," as is the case during other reception periods, and this is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned performance example, in the "second multiple operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", if an operation is received for the "operation button 410" while the second operation-related display is not displayed, the second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) may be displayed but the display suggesting the degree of expectation may not be displayed. In other words, in this case, it is possible to encourage further operation of the "operation button 410" while the second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) is displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) or the post-reception display UB is displayed during the "second multiple operation allowable period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", the second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) or the post-reception display UB is not hidden until the end of the "second multiple operation allowable period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", regardless of the timing at which their display began. In particular, in the above-mentioned performance example, the display of the second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) or the post-reception display UB continues even after the end of the "second multiple operation allowable period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306)), making it difficult to recognize when the reception period ended. In this case, depending on the timing of the operation, it is desirable to make the second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) and post-acceptance display UB continue to be displayed for a longer period after the end of the "second multiple operation permitted period (e.g., 10th F acceptance period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" than the period during which they are displayed within the "second multiple operation permitted period (e.g., 10th F acceptance period (see Figs. 303 to 306))".

In the above-mentioned performance example, at least the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 23-E and the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 23-E are prepared as types of reception periods. In addition, in both the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))" and the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", there is an operation part for which multiple operation receptions are allowed, but since a different sound can be output as the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, when an operation is performed on the operation part during the "predetermined operation allowable period" and when an operation is performed on the operation part during the "specific operation allowable period", it becomes possible to suggest which type of operation allowable period has occurred.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, during a "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))", there may be one or more operation units that are displayed as imitation image displays and that are allowable to accept multiple operations, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes, whereas during a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", there may be one or more operation units that are not displayed as imitation image displays and that are allowable to accept multiple operations, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes, or no post-acceptance output sound may be output. With this configuration, during the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))," when a concealed operation unit is operated, a post-reception output sound may or may not be output, which is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension about whether the operation was properly received.

In particular, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", there are at least a first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword ornament 5001)) and a second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410)) that are not displayed as a model image and are permitted to receive operations multiple times. When an operation is performed on the first operation unit, a post-operation output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes, but when an operation is performed on the second operation unit, a post-operation output sound is not output as one of the post-reception changes (see Fig. 303 (k)). With this configuration, during the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", it is possible to further increase the confidentiality of the "state in which operation reception is permitted" in the second operation unit, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this case, it is more desirable to have no operation parts that are displayed as mock images and that are permitted to accept (multiple) operations during the "specific operation permitted period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))".

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, during the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))", at least the second operation unit (first F operation unit B (operation button 410)) is displayed as a mock image and is an operation unit for which multiple operation receptions are allowed, and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit, there are cases where a post-reception output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes, and cases where a post-reception output sound is not output. Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension even during the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281))".

In the above-mentioned example, "when the post-acceptance output sound is output" and "when the post-acceptance output sound is not output" within one acceptance period can both occur when the same operation is performed again after a predetermined time has passed since the previous operation.

In addition, during the reception period according to the above-mentioned example, there are cases where reception of operations is permitted for an operation part that is not displaying a model image, and when the operation part is kept in an operated state, there are cases where the operation is received multiple times (when the auto-tap function is enabled) and cases where the operation is not received multiple times (when the auto-tap function is not enabled). This configuration makes it possible to appropriately impart a sense of tension while mitigating the difficulty of playing the game due to the operation part being concealed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least a "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 24-E is prepared as a type of reception period, and in this "specific operation allowable period", there are at least a first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (operation button 410)) according to the above-mentioned configuration 24-E and a second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (sword decoration 5001)) according to the above-mentioned configuration 24-E as operation units for which no mock image is displayed but multiple operation receptions are allowable, and when the operation button 410 is continuously maintained in an operated state, operations are not accepted multiple times, but when the sword decoration 5001 is continuously maintained in an operated state, operations are accepted multiple times (see Figures 303 (a) and (b), etc.). This configuration makes it possible to improve confidentiality regarding whether multiple operations are permitted for the operation button 410 during a "specific operation permitted period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))," which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the following types of reception periods are provided: a "predetermined operation permitted period (e.g., the 11th F reception period (see Figures 307 to 310), the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), or the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298)) for the above configuration 24-E, and a "specific operation permitted period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))" for the above configuration 24-E.

And, "during a specified operation allowable period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see Figs. 307 to 310), the 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296), or the 7th F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298)), there are one or more operation parts for which a mock image is not displayed but for which multiple operation reception is allowed, and even if the operation part is kept operated, multiple operation reception is not performed (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see Figs. 307, 295, 297, etc.). In contrast, "during a specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 307 to 310), the 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296), or the 7th F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298)), there are one or more operation parts for which a mock image is not displayed but multiple operation reception is allowed, and even if the operation part is kept operated, multiple operation reception is not performed (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see Figs. 307, 295, 297, etc.) During the "10F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306)," at least the first operation unit (10F operation unit A (operation button 410)) and the second operation unit (10F operation unit B (sword decoration 5001)) of configuration 24-E are present as operation units for which no mock image is displayed but multiple operation receptions are permitted, and when the operation button 410 is kept in an operated state, multiple operation receptions are not performed, whereas when the sword decoration 5001 is kept in an operated state, multiple operation receptions are performed (see Figs. 303(a) and (b), etc.). This configuration is expected to better maintain the sense of tension when operating an operation unit where whether or not an operation opportunity has been granted is kept secret.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least a "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., 11th F reception period (see Figures 307 to 310))" in the above-mentioned configuration 25-E and a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))" in the above-mentioned configuration 25-E are provided as types of reception period.

In the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see Figs. 307 to 310))", there are at least the "predetermined period first operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" according to the above configuration 25-E and the "predetermined period second operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" according to the above configuration 25-E as operation units for which reception of operations is permitted and no mock image display is displayed, and when the first operation unit is operated for the predetermined period, the post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to appear to overlap the front side of the decorative pattern SZ, and when the second operation unit is operated for the predetermined period, the post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to appear to overlap the front side of the decorative pattern SZ (see Figs. 309 and 310).

In contrast, during a "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", there are at least a "specific period first operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" according to configuration 25-E above and a "specific period second operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" according to configuration 25-E above as operation units for which operation reception is permitted and no mock image display is displayed, and when the specific period first operation unit is operated, a post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ, and when the specific period second operation unit is operated, a post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern (see Figs. 305 and 306).

According to this configuration, during the "predetermined operation permitted period (e.g., the 11th F reception period (see Figs. 307 to 310))", regardless of whether the concealed first operation unit for the specified period or the second operation unit for the specified period is operated, the post-reception displays UA and UB are displayed superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ, which can suitably suggest that the operation reception is being performed properly. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permitted period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", if the concealed second operation unit for the specified period out of the first operation unit for the specified period and the second operation unit for the specified period is operated, the post-reception display UA is displayed superimposed on the rear side of the decorative pattern SZ, making it difficult to recognize that the post-reception display UA has been displayed, which suitably creates a sense of tension as to whether the operation reception is being performed properly.

Or, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296) or the 7th F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 25-E, there is an operation unit where operation reception is allowed and a replica image is displayed (here, the sword decoration 5001) and an operation unit where operation reception is allowed and a replica image is not displayed (here, the operation button 410), and when an operation unit where operation reception is allowed and a replica image is displayed is operated, a post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ (see Fig. 286(g) etc.), and when an operation unit where operation reception is allowed and a replica image is not displayed is operated, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see Fig. 285(d) etc.).

In contrast, during a "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", there is no operation unit where reception of operations is permitted and where a model image display is displayed, but there are at least the "specific period first operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and the "specific period second operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" according to configuration 25-E described above as operation units where reception of operations is permitted and where a model image display is not performed, and when the specific period first operation unit is operated, the post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ, and when the specific period second operation unit is operated, the post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ.

According to this configuration, during a "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296) or the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298)"), if the operation unit (first operation unit for a specified period) that displays the mock image is operated, the post-acceptance display UA is displayed in a manner that is difficult to see without worsening the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ, whereas if a concealed operation unit (second operation unit for a specified period) is operated, the post-acceptance display UB is displayed in a conspicuous manner even at the expense of worsening the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ. This makes it easier to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted, instead of being concealed until then. In contrast, in a "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", even if a concealed operation unit (specific period first operation unit, specific period second operation unit) is operated, if the specific period first operation unit is operated, the post-reception display UA is displayed in a manner that is difficult to see without worsening the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ. This not only conceals whether or not operation reception is permitted, but also makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been performed appropriately, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

At least one of the "specific period first operation unit" according to the above configuration 25-E and the "specific period second operation unit" according to the above configuration 25-E may be one in which operation acceptance is permitted even during the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 25-E. For example, the specific period first operation unit may be used as an operation unit in which operation acceptance is permitted and no mock image display is performed during the "predetermined operation allowable period," and the specific period second operation unit may be used as an operation unit in which operation acceptance is permitted and no mock image display is performed during the predetermined operation allowable period. Alternatively, all of the multiple operation units in which operation acceptance is permitted and no mock image display is performed during the predetermined operation allowable period may be used as an operation unit in which operation acceptance is permitted and no mock image display is performed during the predetermined operation allowable period.

In addition, during the "predetermined operation permitted period" according to configuration 25-E, it may be possible to permit the reception of operations for an operation unit that is different from both the first operation unit for the specified period and the second operation unit for the specified period. A mock image may be displayed for that operation unit.

Furthermore, in the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 25-E and the "specific operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 25-E, there are operation units for which multiple operations are allowed, and it is preferable that, for operation units for which the above-mentioned auto-repeated-tap function is enabled, the post-acceptance display according to the operation on the operation unit is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ, and, for operation units for which the above-mentioned auto-repeated-tap function is not enabled, the post-acceptance display according to the operation on the operation unit is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the decorative pattern SZ. It is also possible to generate an acceptance period (operation acceptance period) during which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is accepted on the operation unit during this acceptance period, a change occurs after acceptance. It is also possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the following types of operation allowable periods are provided: a "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 11th F reception period (see Figs. 307 to 310))" according to the above configuration 26-E, and a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" according to the above configuration 26-E.

Then, during the "predetermined operation permitted period (for example, the 11F reception period (see Figs. 307 to 310))", there are at least the "predetermined period first operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" according to configuration 26-E above and the "predetermined period second operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" according to configuration 26-E above as operation units for which operation reception is permitted and no mock image is displayed, and when either the predetermined period first operation unit or the predetermined period second operation unit is operated, a post-reception change occurs, but a post-reception output sound is not output as one of the post-reception changes (see Fig. 307(k)).

In contrast, during a "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", there are at least the "specific period first operation unit (here, operation button 410)" according to configuration 26-E above and the "specific period second operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" according to configuration 26-E above as operation units for which operation reception is permitted and no mock image display is displayed, and when the specific period first operation unit is operated, a post-reception change occurs but a post-reception output sound is not output as one of the post-reception changes, but when the specific period second operation unit is operated, a post-reception output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes.

According to this configuration, in the "predetermined operation permitted period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see Figs. 307 to 310))", even if either the concealed predetermined period first operation unit or the predetermined period second operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance change occurs, but the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes, whereas in the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", the post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes only when the specific period second operation unit of the concealed specific period first operation unit and specific period second operation unit is operated. In other words, in this case, the player can recognize that the post-acceptance output sound is output when an operation is accepted even with a concealed operation unit, so that it is expected that when the specific period first operation unit is operated during the "specific operation permitted period" or when an operation is performed during the "predetermined operation permitted period", it is difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance is in an appropriate state, and the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained.

Or, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see Fig. 295, Fig. 296) or the 7th F reception period (see Fig. 297, Fig. 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 26-E, there is an operation part where operation reception is allowed and a replica image is displayed (here, the sword ornament 5001) and an operation part where operation reception is allowed and a replica image is not displayed (here, the operation button 410), and when an operation part where operation reception is allowed and a replica image is displayed is operated, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes according to the operation (see Fig. 295(k) or Fig. 297(k)), and when an operation part where operation reception is allowed and a replica image is not displayed is operated, a post-acceptance change according to the operation occurs, but a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the changes (see Fig. 295(k) or Fig. 297(k)).

In contrast, during a "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", there is no operation unit for which operation reception is permitted and which displays a mock image, but there are at least the "specific period first operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and the "specific period second operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" according to configuration 26-E described above as operation units for which operation reception is permitted and which do not display a mock image, and when the specific period first operation unit is operated, a post-reception change occurs but a post-reception output sound is not output as one of the post-reception changes, and when the specific period second operation unit is operated, a post-reception output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes.

According to such a configuration, in a "predetermined operation allowable period (e.g., the 6th F reception period (see Figs. 295 and 296) or the 7th F reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))," when a concealed operation unit is operated, post-reception changes occur but a post-reception output sound is not output as one of the changes, making it difficult to recognize that an operation has been accepted, and thus making it difficult to recognize that an operation opportunity was given to the operation unit. In contrast, in a "specific operation allowable period (e.g., the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))," when a concealed operation unit is operated, there are cases where a post-reception output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes (specific period second operation unit) and cases where a post-reception output sound is not output as one of the post-reception changes (specific period first operation unit). Therefore, even if multiple operation units are kept secret, when an output sound is output after reception (specific period second operation unit), it is possible to conveniently indicate that an operation opportunity has been secretly granted, and it is expected that a situation in which none of the players realizes that a hidden button has been generated can be avoided. On the other hand, of the "specific period first operation unit" and the "specific period second operation unit," it is possible to further increase the secrecy of the specific period first operation unit, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, by using the "specific period first operation unit" in the above configuration 26-E as the "operation unit in which operation reception is permitted and imitation image display is not performed" during the "predetermined operation allowable period" in the above configuration 26-E, and using the "specific period second operation unit" in the above configuration 26-E as the "operation unit in which operation reception is permitted and imitation image display is performed" during the "predetermined operation allowable period" in the above configuration 26-E, it becomes possible to use the presentation in the "predetermined operation allowable period" as a hint to determine which operation unit is concealed during the "specific operation allowable period".

In addition, when the operation button 410 is operated during a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", there are two cases: at least a visible change after reception occurs, but one of these is that the post-acceptance output sound is not output, and not only is the post-acceptance output sound not output, but no visible change after acceptance occurs either. In other words, in this case, it can be expected that the sense of tension will be further increased when an operation is performed during a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))".

In addition, in the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to configuration 26-E and the "specific operation allowable period" according to configuration 26-E, there are operation units for which multiple operations are allowed, and among these operation units, for operation units for which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation on the operation unit, and for operation units for which the auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled, a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation on the operation unit, which is expected to further increase the sense of tension when operating the concealed operation units.

In addition, during the acceptance period (operation allowance period) in the above-mentioned presentation example, it may be acceptable to accept multiple operations for an operation unit that is not displaying a model image, and if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times (when the auto-tap function is enabled) and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times. This makes it possible to maintain a comfortable sense of tension when operating the operation unit while mitigating to some extent the difficulty of playing the game caused by the operation unit being concealed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least a "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 27-E is prepared as the reception period (operation allowable period), and in this "specific operation allowable period", at least the first operation unit (here, the operation button 410) according to the above-mentioned configuration 27-E and the second operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001) according to the above-mentioned configuration 27-E are present as operation units for which no mock image is displayed but multiple operation receptions are allowed, and when the operation button 410 is kept in an operated state, multiple operations are not received (the auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled), and when the sword decoration 5001 is kept in an operated state, multiple operations are received (the auto-repeated-hit function is enabled) (see Figs. 303(a) and (b)).

The number of times that an operation can be accepted (at least the number of times that causes a visible change after acceptance) when only the operation button 410 is operated repeatedly in a "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))" may be less than the number of times that an operation can be accepted (at least the number of times that causes a visible change after acceptance) when only the sword decoration 5001 is operated repeatedly in a "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))". In other words, in this case, the operation part (operation button 410) on the side where the so-called automatic rapid-fire function is not enabled requires fewer rapid strokes (the number of consecutive operations) than the operation part (sword decoration 5001) on the side where the so-called automatic rapid-fire function is enabled, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))", and this is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned performance examples, "an operation is accepted" means, for example, that this triggers at least a visible change after acceptance (such as a change in the display, the output of a post-acceptance sound, or a change in the lamp's illumination). Therefore, if an operation is detected internally but no visible change after acceptance occurs (even if some internal processing (such as extending the time that the post-acceptance display is maintained) is performed), it cannot be said that "an operation is accepted."

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the following types of reception periods are provided: a "predetermined operation allowable period (such as the third reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) or the seventh reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))" in the above-mentioned configuration 28-E, and a "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))" in the above-mentioned configuration 28-E.

In the "specified operation allowable period (the third reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) or the seventh reception period (see Figures 297 and 298) etc.)", there are one or more operation units where reception of operations is permitted multiple times and where mock images are displayed, and when an operation is performed on one of the operation units, the specified operation allowable period can be terminated in response to that operation (see Figures 287 (a), (c), (e) and Figures 297 (a), (c), (e), etc.). In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. 303 to 306))," there are at least the "first operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001)" according to the above configuration 28-E and the "second operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" according to the above configuration 28-E as operation units that are allowed to receive multiple operations but do not display replica images, but regardless of whether the sword decoration 5001 or the operation button 410 is operated, the specific operation allowable period is not terminated by the operation (see Figs. 303 (a) to (c)). With this configuration, unlike in a situation where there is an operation unit that displays replica images (predetermined operation allowable period), in a situation where there are multiple hidden buttons (specific operation allowable period), the player can operate various operation units with confidence without considering the risk of the specific operation allowable period being terminated unintentionally when investigating which operation unit is secretly enabled for operation.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the "predetermined operation allowable period (the third reception period (see Figs. 287 to 291) or the seventh reception period (see Figs. 297 and 298))" according to the above-mentioned configuration 28-E, there are both operation parts whose operation triggers the end of the predetermined operation allowable period (see Figs. 287(a), (c) and 297(a), (c)), and operation parts whose operation triggers the end of the predetermined operation allowable period (see Figs. 287(b), (c) and 297(b), (c)). Therefore, it can be expected that the sense of tension when operating within a reception period with an operation part that is not concealed will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", when the "first operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, a first side specific post-operation change in response to the operation (corresponding to the 10th F post-reception display UA in the figure, but which may also be a change in the light emission of a lamp, etc.) may occur as one of the multiple first side modes (modes UA1 to UA3), but while a "special first side mode (mode UA3)" occurs among the multiple first side modes, the "first operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001) " is operated again, a first side state (state UA1, UA2) different from the "special first side state (state UA3)" will not newly occur as a first side specific post-operation change, and when the second operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is operated, a second side specific post-operation change according to the operation (corresponding to the 10F post-reception display UB in the figure, but may also be a change in the light emission of a lamp, etc.) may occur as one of the multiple second side states (states UB1 to UB3), but while the "special second side state (state UB3)" occurs among the multiple second side states, When the second operation unit (here, operation button 410) is operated again, a second side mode (mode UB1, UB2) different from the "special second side mode (mode UB3)" does not newly occur as a change after the second side specific operation (see timing tj2D and timing tj2H shown in FIG. 303, and FIGS. 305(i), (j), and 306(s) to (y)). With such a configuration, when the "first operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, at the time when the "special first side mode" appears, the "first operation unit (here, sword decoration Since the user can understand that there is no need to further operate the second operation unit (here, operation button 410), it becomes possible to transition from the "state of operating the first operation unit" to the "state of operating the second operation unit" with confidence. Also, when the "special second side state" appears while the second operation unit (here, operation button 410) is being operated, it becomes possible to transition from the "state of operating the second operation unit" to the "state of operating the first operation unit" with confidence.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, during the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", when the "first operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, a first side specific operation post-change corresponding to the operation (corresponding to the 10th F reception post-display UA in the figure, but it may also be a change in the light emission of a lamp, etc.) may occur as one of the multiple first side modes (modes UA1 to UA3). However, if the "first operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated again while a "special first side mode (mode UA3)" among the multiple first side modes is occurring, the "special first side mode (mode UA3)" that was in the execution state until then is terminated, and the "special first side mode ( When the second operation unit (here, operation button 410) is operated, a second side specific post-operation change corresponding to the operation (corresponding to the 10F post-reception display UB in the figure, but which may also be a change in the light emission of a lamp, etc.) can be caused to occur as one of the plurality of second side modes (modes UB1 to UB3). However, when the second operation unit (here, operation button 410) is operated again while a "special second side mode (mode UB3)" among the plurality of second side modes is occurring, at least no apparent change is caused in the "special second side mode (mode UB3)" that was in the execution state up until that point (see Figs. 305(i) and (j) etc.). With this configuration, when the first operating part (here, the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is possible to restart the "special first side mode (mode UA3)" from the beginning again and repeatedly, whereas when the second operating part (here, the operating button 410) is operated, it is not possible to restart the "special second side mode (mode UB3)" from the beginning again and repeatedly. Therefore, while providing the above-mentioned effect of providing a sense of security, it can also be expected that operating the second operating part (here, the operating button 410) will provide a favorable sense of tension.

The "specific period first operation unit" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operation unit as the "predetermined period first operation unit" or may be a different operation unit from the "predetermined period first operation unit". The "specific period first operation unit" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operation unit as the "predetermined period second operation unit" or may be a different operation unit from the "predetermined period second operation unit". The "specific period second operation unit" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operation unit as the "predetermined period first operation unit" or may be a different operation unit from the "predetermined period first operation unit". The "specific period second operation unit" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operation unit as the "predetermined period second operation unit" or may be a different operation unit from the "predetermined period second operation unit".

In addition, the "predetermined period first operation unit" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operation unit as the "specific period first operation unit" or may be a different operation unit from the "specific period first operation unit". In addition, the "predetermined period first operation unit" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operation unit as the "specific period second operation unit" or may be a different operation unit from the "specific period second operation unit". In addition, the "predetermined period second operation unit" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operation unit as the "specific period first operation unit" or may be a different operation unit from the "specific period first operation unit". In addition, the "predetermined period second operation unit" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operation unit as the "specific period second operation unit" or may be a different operation unit from the "specific period second operation unit".

In addition, during the reception period in the above-mentioned performance example, there are cases where, when the operation unit is operated, a new post-reception display is not displayed and a new post-reception output sound is not output (for example, timing te2C shown in Figure 278, timing tf2C shown in Figures 282 and 295, timing tg2C shown in Figures 287 and 297, timing ti2C shown in Figures 294 and 301, timing tj2D shown in Figures 303, and timing tk2D, tk2H shown in Figure 307), but in this case, the operation reception itself may not be performed, or the operation may be received but a predetermined condition may not be met so that a new post-reception display is not displayed and a new post-reception output sound is not output. Furthermore, if an operation is accepted but the predetermined conditions are not met and the post-acceptance display is not newly displayed and the post-acceptance output sound is not newly output, some kind of post-acceptance change (for example, the time until the post-acceptance display that was displayed at the time of the operation is hidden may be lengthened) other than the new post-acceptance display or the new output of the post-acceptance output sound may be caused.

In the above-mentioned performance example, in the 2nd F reception period (see Fig. 282 to Fig. 286), the 3rd F reception period (see Fig. 287 to Fig. 291), the 4th F reception period (see Fig. 292 and Fig. 293), the 5th F reception period (see Fig. 294), the 6th F reception period (see Fig. 295 and Fig. 296), the 7th F reception period (see Fig. 297 and Fig. 298), the 8th F reception period (see Fig. 299 and Fig. 300), and the 9th F reception period (see Fig. 301 and Fig. 302), when an operation is received while the premonition display is displayed, this may trigger the "display imitating the operation target (operation related display)" and the "premonition display" to be hidden. In this case, in the above-mentioned performance example, the "effect display EF" is displayed first while the "display imitating the operation target (operation related display)" and the "premonition display" are not hidden and are displayed. In this regard, in the above-mentioned example of the effect, the "effect display EF" is displayed in front of the "display simulating the operation target (operation-related display)" to make it difficult to see, but in this case, it may also be displayed in front of the "premonition display" to make it difficult to see. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately suggest that the operation has been properly accepted, while leaving the display of the "display simulating the operation target (operation-related display)" and the "premonition display" even after the operation has been accepted. In this case, the premonition display is not hidden even at the time the post-acceptance display is displayed, and it is preferable that the post-acceptance display is displayed behind the premonition display.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples, during the 2nd F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286), the 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), the 4th F reception period (see Figures 292 and 293), the 5th F reception period (see Figure 294), the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), the 8th F reception period (see Figures 299 and 300), and the 9th F reception period (see Figures 301 and 302), premonition performances are performed. When an operation is accepted while a display is being displayed, and the premonition display and the display simulating the operation target (operation-related display) are made invisible by the operation acceptance, an effect display appears before the premonition display and the operation-related display are made invisible to make the operation-related display difficult to see, but it is desirable that the effect display be displayed in a manner that appears to overlap in front of the premonition display so as to make it difficult to see. Also, in this case, it is desirable that the premonition display is not made invisible even at the time the post-acceptance display is displayed, but is displayed in a manner that appears to overlap in front of the post-acceptance display so as to make it difficult to see.

In addition, in the 3F reception period, 7F reception period, 10F reception period, 11F reception period, etc., an example was described in which an operation was performed on operation unit B (3F operation unit B, 7F operation unit B, 10F operation unit B, 11F operation unit B) during the reception period, and then an operation was performed on operation unit A (3F operation unit A, 7F operation unit A, 10F operation unit A, 11F operation unit A). However, the same is basically true when an operation is performed on operation unit A (3F operation unit A, 7F operation unit A, 10F operation unit A, 11F operation unit A) and then an operation is performed on operation unit B (3F operation unit B, 7F operation unit B, 10F operation unit B, 11F operation unit B).

For example, during the 3F reception period or the 7F reception period, if several operations are performed on operation unit A (3F operation unit A, 7F operation unit A) but the player stops operating operation unit A (3F operation unit A, 7F operation unit A) and starts operating operation unit B (3F operation unit B, 7F operation unit B) at a stage where the condition for the reception period to end has not been met and the reception period is still continuing, then post-reception change B (e.g., 3F post-reception display UB, 7F post-reception display UB) corresponding to the operation will occur in one of the multiple modes described above. However, as described above, post-reception change A (e.g., 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UA) corresponding to the operation on operation unit A (3F operation unit A, 7F operation unit A) is significantly shorter than the set time for the reception period. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the operation is performed on operation unit B (3F operation unit B, 7F operation unit B), post-acceptance change B (e.g., 3F post-acceptance display UB, 7F post-acceptance display UB) may begin to be executed while post-acceptance change A (e.g., 3F post-acceptance display UA, 7F post-acceptance display UA) is continuing, or may begin to be executed after post-acceptance change A (e.g., 3F post-acceptance display UA, 7F post-acceptance display UA) has ended.

In this regard, if a post-reception change B (e.g., 3F post-reception display UB, 7F post-reception display UB) occurs as a result of an operation on operation unit B (3F operation unit B, 7F operation unit B) while a post-reception change A (e.g., 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UA) is continuing, then first, the post-reception change A (e.g., 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UA) will continue without being terminated as a result of the operation on operation unit B (3F operation unit B, 7F operation unit B). At this time, the post-reception display UB will be displayed so as to appear to overlap the front of the post-reception display UA. However, in this case, since no new operation is performed on operation unit A (3F operation unit A, 7F operation unit A), post-reception change A (e.g., 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UA) will be hidden while post-reception change B (e.g., 3F post-reception display UB, 7F post-reception display UB) is being executed. In contrast, if a post-acceptance change B (e.g., the 3rd F post-acceptance display UB, the 7th F post-acceptance display UB) occurs by operating operation unit B (3rd F operation unit B, 7th F operation unit B) after post-acceptance change A (e.g., the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA, the 7th F post-acceptance display UA) has been hidden, the performance will progress in the manner described above when "post-acceptance change B (e.g., the 3rd F post-acceptance display UB, the 7th F post-acceptance display UB) occurs in a situation in which post-acceptance change A (e.g., the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA, the 7th F post-acceptance display UA) has not occurred" (see Figures 287 to 291, 297, 298, etc.).

In addition, for example, if several operations are performed on operation unit A (10F operation unit A, 11F operation unit A) during the 10F reception period or the 11F reception period, but the player stops operating operation unit A (10F operation unit A, 11F operation unit A) and starts operating operation unit B (10F operation unit B, 11F operation unit B) at a stage where the conditions for the end of the reception period have not been met and the period is still continuing, then post-reception change B (for example, 10F post-reception display UB, 11F post-reception display UB) corresponding to that operation will occur in one of the multiple forms described above.

Here, as described above, the period during which the 10F post-reception change A in response to an operation on the 10F operation section A is executed is significantly shorter than the set time for the reception period. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation on the 10F operation section B, the 10F post-reception change B may start to be executed while the 10F post-reception change A is continuing, or may start to be executed after the 10F post-reception change A has ended. In this regard, if the 10F post-reception change B occurs due to an operation on the 10F operation section B while the 10F post-reception change A is continuing, the 10F post-reception change A will continue without being terminated by the operation on the 10F operation section B. At this time, the 10F post-reception display UB will be displayed so as to overlap the 10F post-reception display UA from the front side. In this case, however, because no new operation is performed on 10F operation section A, 10F post-acceptance change A is made inactive while 10F post-acceptance change B is being executed. In contrast, if 10F post-acceptance change B occurs due to an operation on 10F operation section B after 10F post-acceptance change A is made invisible, the presentation will progress in the manner described above when "10F post-acceptance change B occurs in a situation where 10F post-acceptance change A has not occurred" (see Figures 303 to 306, etc.).

On the other hand, as described above, the period during which 11F post-reception change A is executed in response to an operation on 11F operation section A is longer than the set time for the reception period, as is the case with 11F post-reception change B. Therefore, regardless of the timing of the operation on 11F operation section B, 11F post-reception change B will begin to be executed while 11F post-reception change A is continuing. However, even if 11F post-reception change B occurs as a result of an operation on 11F operation section B while 11F post-reception change A is continuing, 11F post-reception change A will continue without being terminated as a result of the operation on 11F operation section B.

The above-mentioned "acceptance period with special effects" is not limited to the acceptance period (operation state) shown in each of the above-mentioned configurations (configuration 1-E to configuration 28-E) and each performance example, but may be prepared as an acceptance period (operation state) with special effects such as those described below to enhance the effects when an acceptance period occurs or to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when an acceptance period occurs. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 1 described below (configurations such as start-up winning, reserved consumption, fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) is as described in the explanation column for the "acceptance period with special effects", so the explanation will be omitted.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to provide all of the features (configurations) described below. For example, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest by providing only one of the features (any configuration). Alternatively, it is possible to selectively provide several configurations that are deemed necessary to obtain further effects. Alternatively, it is possible to appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the features (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that they provide any one configuration that can suppress a decline in gaming interest related to the acceptance period. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the "acceptance period" detailed with reference to Figure 310, and it is possible to provide only a portion of the "acceptance period" to obtain the desired effect.

[Configuration 1-F]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a "concealed operation permitted state" can be generated in which an operation unit is permitted to accept operations but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the "concealed operation permitted state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. At least a first operation unit and a second operation unit are provided as the operation units, and at least a "first concealed operation permitted state" and a "second concealed operation permitted state" are provided as the "concealed operation permitted state". In the "first concealed operation permitted state", at least an operation is accepted for the first operation unit while no replica image is displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. In the "second concealed operation permitted state", at least an operation is accepted for the second operation unit while no replica image is displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the second operation unit, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first concealed operation allowing state", and "second concealed operation allowing state" in the configuration 1-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-F. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or concealed operation allowing state as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first concealed operation allowing state", and "second concealed operation allowing state" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different operation units or concealed operation allowing states. In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit" or "concealed operation allowing state" as the different names "operation unit" and "concealed operation allowing state" in other configurations.

With this configuration, a "first concealed operation permitted state" in which at least the first operation unit is permitted to receive operations while no replica image is displayed, and a "second concealed operation permitted state" in which at least the second operation unit is permitted to receive operations while no replica image is displayed, can occur. This provides direction regarding whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit should be operated, and is expected to more appropriately maintain the sense of tension when a concealed operation permitted state occurs.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 1-F" is employed, in both the "first concealed operation permitted state" and the "second concealed operation permitted state," at least the acceptance of operations for the first operation unit and the acceptance of operations for the second operation unit may be permitted while no mock image is being displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to more appropriately provide the presentation of whether to operate the first operation unit or the second operation unit, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the concealed operation permitted state occurs will be more appropriately maintained.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 1-F" is adopted, in the "first operation concealment permitted state", operation reception for the first operation unit is permitted even while a post-acceptance display in response to operation reception for the second operation unit is displayed, and when an operation is received for the first operation unit, this is triggered to hide the post-acceptance display in response to operation reception for the second operation unit and to display the post-acceptance display in response to operation reception for the first operation unit; and in the "second operation concealment permitted state", operation reception for the first operation unit is permitted even while a post-acceptance display in response to operation reception for the second operation unit is displayed, and when an operation is received for the first operation unit, this is triggered to display the post-acceptance display in response to operation reception for the second operation unit without hiding the post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception. According to this configuration, in a "confidential operation permitted state" in which some operation units are permitted to accept operations but do not display mock images, when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit while a post-acceptance display in response to the operation accepted for the second operation unit is being displayed, this triggers either a state in which the post-acceptance display in response to the operation accepted for the second operation unit is not displayed (first confidential operation permitted state) or a state in which the post-acceptance display in response to the operation accepted for the second operation unit is not displayed (second confidential operation permitted state), which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when operating the first operation unit.

In this case, in both the first operation concealment permission state and the second operation concealment permission state, an operation is permitted to be accepted only once for the first operation unit (while the post-acceptance display in response to the operation acceptance for the second operation unit is being displayed), and it is desirable that when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit, this is used as a trigger to end the operation concealment permission state.

[Configuration 2-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a "secret operation permission state" can be generated in which an operation unit is permitted to accept operations but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the "secret operation permission state", a change can occur after the acceptance (secret operation execution means). Then, as the "secret operation permission state", at least a "first secret operation permission state" and a "second secret operation permission state" are prepared, and in the "second secret operation permission state", there is a specific operation unit in which acceptance of operations is permitted multiple times while no replica image is displayed, and the specific operation unit can accept operations multiple times simply by maintaining it in an operated state (enabling the so-called "auto-repeated-hit function"). Note that the "specific operation unit", "first secret operation permission state", and "second secret operation permission state" in the configuration 2-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-F. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation concealment allowing state as the "specific operation unit,""first operation concealment allowing state," and "second operation concealment allowing state" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different operation units or operation concealment allowing states. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation concealment allowing state" as the "operation unit" or "operation concealment allowing state" with different names in other configurations.

With this configuration, in the "second operation concealment permitted state," multiple operations can be accepted for a specific operation part simply by continuing to maintain the operation state, which is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that multiple operations can be accepted for a specific operation part even when a replica image is not displayed.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-F" is adopted, in the "first operation concealment allowing state", there is one or more operation units that are permitted to accept multiple operations while no imitation image is displayed, and the operation is not accepted multiple times even if the operation unit is kept in an operated state. In the "second operation concealment allowing state", there is one or more operation units that are permitted to accept multiple operations while no imitation image is displayed, and the operation may be accepted multiple times if the operation unit is kept in an operated state. According to this configuration, in the "operation concealment allowing state" in which there is one or more operation units that are permitted to accept multiple operations while no imitation image is displayed, there are at least some cases in which the operation is accepted multiple times if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when operating the operation unit is appropriately maintained.

In this case, in the "second operation concealment permission state", there may be a plurality of operation units that are permitted to accept multiple operations while no mock image is being displayed, and if the operation unit is kept operated, the operation may or may not be accepted multiple times depending on the type of operation unit that is the target of the operation. In other words, in this case, when the second operation concealment permission state occurs, whether or not the auto-tap function is enabled is determined depending on the type of operation target, which is expected to add more fun to the question of which operation means to operate.

[Configuration 3-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a "secret operation permitted state" can be generated in which there is an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the secret operation permitted state, a change can occur after the acceptance. Then, at least a "first secret operation permitted state" and a "second secret operation permitted state" are prepared as the "secret operation permitted state", and in the "second secret operation permitted state", a replica image display that imitates the operation unit that is permitted to accept operations is not displayed while the "second secret operation permitted state" continues, so that it is expected that the tension when an operation opportunity is given to the player can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "operation unit", "first secret operation permitted state", and "second secret operation permitted state" in the configuration 3-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-F. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation concealment allowing state as the "operation unit,""first operation concealment allowing state," and "second operation concealment allowing state" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different operation units or operation concealment allowing states. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation concealment allowing state" as the "operation unit" or "operation concealment allowing state" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 3-F" is employed, in the "first operation concealment permitted state", when a predetermined condition is met, a display of a replica image of an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations in the "first operation concealment permitted state" may be started. With this configuration, even if the replica image display is not displayed when the operation concealment permitted state occurs, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be met and the replica image display will be displayed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In this case, in the "first operation concealment permitted state", when an operation is received for an operation unit that does not display an imitation image, this may be used as a trigger (the above-mentioned predetermined condition is met) to start displaying an imitation image of that operation unit. In other words, in this case, an imitation image of the operation target that was previously kept concealed will start to be displayed in response to the player's operation, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a "secret operation permitted state" can be generated in which there is an operation unit that allows operation reception but does not display a model image, and when an operation is received for the operation unit in the "secret operation permitted state", a post-reception change can occur. Then, when an operation is received for an operation unit that allows operation reception in the "secret operation permitted state", one of the post-reception changes is a case in which a post-reception output sound is output and a case in which the post-reception output sound is not output. This makes it difficult to judge whether the operation reception is appropriate in the "secret operation permitted state", and is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension. The "operation unit" and "secret operation permitted state" in the configuration 4-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-F. Therefore, the "operation unit" and "secret operation permitted state" in the configurations 4-F may mean the same operation unit and secret operation permitted state as the "operation unit" and "secret operation permitted state" in the other configurations, respectively, or may mean different operation units and secret operation permitted states. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "state permitting concealed operation" as the different names "operation unit" and "state permitting concealed operation" for other components.

In this case, as will be described later, when a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "confidential operation permitted state", a model image display simulating an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted in the "confidential operation permitted state" may be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes, or a model image display simulating an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted in the "confidential operation permitted state" may not be displayed. On the other hand, when a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "confidential operation permitted state", a model image display simulating an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted in the "confidential operation permitted state" may not be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes. With this configuration, if a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permitted state," there is no possibility that a replica image display will be displayed. On the other hand, if a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permitted state," there is the possibility that a replica image display will or will not be displayed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 5-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a "secret operation permitted state" can be generated in which there is an operation unit that allows operation reception but does not display a mock image, and when an operation is received for the operation unit in the "secret operation permitted state", a post-reception change can occur. When an operation is received for an operation unit that allows operation reception in the "secret operation permitted state", one of the post-reception changes is when a post-reception output sound is output, and when the post-reception output sound is not output. Then, when an operation is received for an operation unit that allows operation reception in the "secret operation permitted state", a post-reception display can be displayed as one of the post-reception changes, but even if the post-reception display is displayed, the "secret operation permitted state" does not end and continues, and there are cases in which operation reception for the operation unit is permitted even while the post-reception display is displayed, so that it is expected that a sense of tension about how long the secret operation permitted state will continue when the secret operation permitted state occurs is preferably provided. The "operation unit" and "confidential operation allowing state" in the configuration 5-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-F. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit and concealed operation allowing state as the "operation unit" and "confidential operation allowing state" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different operation units and concealed operation allowing states. In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "confidential operation allowing state" as the differently named "operation unit" and "confidential operation allowing state" in other configurations.

As described later, when the "Configuration 5-F" is adopted, a first operation unit and a second operation unit may be prepared as the operation unit. In the "operation concealment permitted state", at least the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit may be permitted while the mock image display is not being performed, and the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit may continue to be permitted even while a post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the first operation unit or the second operation unit is being displayed. In the "operation concealment permitted state" and while a post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the first operation unit or the second operation unit is being displayed, when an operation is received for one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit that is different from the side where the operation reception that triggered the display of the post-acceptance display was performed, a post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes, and the post-acceptance output sound may not be output. In addition, when the post-acceptance output sound is output based on the operation reception to the operation unit on the different side, the post-acceptance display displayed before the operation reception is hidden and a new post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception to the operation unit on the different side may be displayed in response to the operation reception, or the post-acceptance display displayed before the operation reception is continued without being hidden and a new post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception to the operation unit on the different side may be displayed. In contrast, when the post-acceptance output sound is not output based on the operation reception to the operation unit on the different side, the post-acceptance display displayed before the operation reception may not be hidden in response to the operation reception. According to this configuration, when the post-acceptance output sound is not output based on the operation reception to the operation unit on the different side, the post-acceptance display displayed before the operation reception is not hidden in response to the operation reception, so that it is possible to play the game with peace of mind. In contrast, when a post-acceptance output sound is output based on the acceptance of an operation on the operating unit on the different side, the acceptance of the operation can trigger both the post-acceptance display that has been displayed before the operation is accepted to be hidden and the post-acceptance display that has not been hidden, thereby creating an ideal sense of tension.

[Configuration 6-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a "secret operation permitted state" can be generated in which there is an operation unit that is permitted to accept an operation but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is accepted for an operation unit in the "secret operation permitted state", a post-acceptance change can occur. Then, when an operation is accepted for an operation unit that is permitted to accept an operation in the "secret operation permitted state", one of the post-acceptance changes is a case in which a post-acceptance output sound is output and a case in which the post-acceptance output sound is not output. This makes it difficult to judge whether the operation acceptance is appropriate, and is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension. On the other hand, in the "secret operation permitted state", there is a case in which an operation unit that can accept an operation multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the state in which it is operated is configured to have an operation unit that can accept an operation multiple times even though a replica image is not displayed, and is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in playing the game due to the acceptance of multiple operations being permitted for the operation unit. The "operation unit" and "confidential operation allowing state" in the configuration 6-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-F. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit and concealed operation allowing state as the "operation unit" and "confidential operation allowing state" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different operation units and concealed operation allowing states. In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "confidential operation allowing state" as the different names "operation unit" and "confidential operation allowing state" in other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 6-F" is adopted, if a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permitted state", if the operation unit in which the operation acceptance that triggered the post-acceptance change was made is kept in an operated state, there are cases where operation acceptance is performed multiple times and cases where operation acceptance is not performed multiple times. If a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permitted state", operation acceptance may not be performed multiple times even if the operation unit in which the operation acceptance that triggered the post-acceptance change was made is kept in an operated state. According to this configuration, if a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permitted state", operation acceptance will not be performed multiple times even if the operation unit in which the operation acceptance that triggered the post-acceptance change was made is kept in an operated state, so that it is possible to suggest to the player that the auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled and to encourage multiple operations. In contrast, when a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permitted state," if the operation unit that triggered the post-acceptance change is continued to be operated, there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times, so it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be imparted while still allowing the auto-repeated function to be enabled.

[Configuration 7-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which the operation acceptance to the operation unit is allowed can be generated, and when the operation acceptance to the operation unit is made in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. Then, at least a "first operation allowable state" and a "second operation allowable state" are prepared as the operation allowable states, and the "second operation allowable state" does not include an imitation image display section in which an imitation image display is made that imitates the operation unit in which the operation acceptance is allowed, so that it is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given to the player. Note that the "operation unit", "first operation allowable state", and "second operation allowable state" in the configuration 7-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-F. Therefore, the "operation unit", "first operation allowable state", and "second operation allowable state" in the other configurations may mean the same operation unit and operation allowable state, respectively, or may mean different operation units and operation allowable states, respectively. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permitted state" as the different names "operation unit" or "operation permitted state" for other components.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 7-F" is adopted, the "first operation permitted state" includes a concealed section in which no imitation images are displayed that mimic the operation units that are permitted to accept operations, and a imitation image display section in which imitation images are displayed that mimic the operation units that are permitted to accept operations, and the concealed section may end and the imitation image display section may start when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the concealed section. With this configuration, even if a concealed section in which imitation images are not displayed is started (first operation permitted state, second operation permitted state), there is a possibility that the imitation image display section will start thereafter, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in playing the game.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "first operation permitted state", when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the concealed section where no imitation image is being displayed, an image that is the same as or similar to the image (at least a part of it) displayed in the imitation image display section while the "first operation permitted state" continues may be displayed as a post-acceptance display in response to the operation acceptance. With this configuration, even though the "concealed section" is continuing, an image that is the same as or similar to the image (at least a part of it) displayed in the "imitation image display section" that will start thereafter is displayed (in advance), making it possible to suggest that the "imitation image display section" will start later.

[Configuration 8-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to display a model image imitating a predetermined operation unit, and it is possible to generate an operation allowance state in which the operation acceptance for the predetermined operation unit is permitted, and when the operation for the predetermined operation unit is accepted in the operation allowance state, it is possible to display a post-acceptance display. Then, at least a "first operation allowance state" and a "second operation allowance state" are prepared as the operation allowance state, and the "second operation allowance state" does not include a model image display section in which a model image imitating a predetermined operation unit in which operation acceptance is permitted is displayed, and when an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation unit in which a model image is not displayed, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, so that it is expected to suitably give a player a sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given. Note that the "predetermined operation unit", "first operation allowance state", and "second operation allowance state" according to the configuration 8-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-F. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation allowable state as the "predetermined operation unit,""first operation allowable state," and "second operation allowable state" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different operation units or operation allowable states. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation allowable state" as the differently named "operation unit" or "operation allowable state" in other configurations.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 8-F" is adopted, the "first operation permitted state" includes a concealed section in which no imitation images are displayed that mimic the operation units that are permitted to accept operations, and a imitation image display section in which imitation images are displayed that mimic the operation units that are permitted to accept operations, and the concealed section may end and the imitation image display section may start when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the concealed section. With this configuration, even if a concealed section in which imitation images are not displayed is started (first operation permitted state, second operation permitted state), there is a possibility that the imitation image display section will start thereafter, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in playing the game.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "first operation permitted state," the same post-acceptance display may be executed when an operation is accepted for the specified operation unit in the concealed section and when an operation is accepted for the specified operation unit in the simulated image display section. This configuration prevents a decrease in interest in the game when the player does not realize that an operation is accepted for the specified operation unit in the concealed section.

[Configuration 9-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a concealed operation permission state can be generated in which there is an operation unit that allows operation reception but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is received on the operation unit in the concealed operation permission state, a post-reception display can be displayed. Then, at least a "first concealed operation permission state" and a "second concealed operation permission state" are prepared as concealed operation permission states, and different post-reception displays are displayed when an operation is received on a predetermined operation unit in the "first concealed operation permission state" and when an operation is received on a predetermined operation unit in the "second concealed operation permission state". This is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given to a player while a replica image display is not displayed. Note that the "predetermined operation unit", the "first concealed operation permission state", and the "second concealed operation permission state" in the configuration 9-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-F. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation concealment allowing state as the "predetermined operation unit,""first operation concealment allowing state," and "second operation concealment allowing state" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different operation units or operation concealment allowing states. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation concealment allowing state" as the "operation unit" or "operation concealment allowing state" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 9-F" is employed, if the "first operation concealment permitted state" occurs, a model image display imitating a specified operation unit is displayed when a specified time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "first operation concealment permitted state", but if the "second operation concealment permitted state" occurs, the model image display may not be displayed as a result of the passage of time, regardless of how much time has passed. With this configuration, when the operation concealment permitted state occurs, there are two cases in which the model image display is displayed as time passes (when the automatic concealment release function is enabled) and the model image display is not displayed (when the automatic concealment release function is not enabled), so it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed while a sense of tension is suitably imparted.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "first operation concealment permitted state", a replica image display for that specific operation unit may be displayed as a trigger, but when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "second operation concealment permitted state", a replica image display for that specific operation unit may not be displayed as a trigger. With this configuration, in the "first operation concealment permitted state", a replica image display may be displayed as a trigger for an operation by the player without waiting for a specific time to pass, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

[Configuration 10-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a concealed operation permission state can be generated in which an operation unit is permitted to accept an operation but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the concealed operation permission state, a display after acceptance can be displayed. Since at least a "first concealed operation permission state" and a "second concealed operation permission state" are prepared as the concealed operation permission states, it is expected that a sense of tension is preferably provided when an operation opportunity is given to a player while a replica image display is not displayed. Furthermore, since the replica image display is displayed in the first position and in the second position, it is difficult for a person who is looking at only one of the first position and the second position to recognize whether or not a replica image display is being displayed, and it is expected that a sense of tension is preferably maintained. Note that the "operation unit", "first concealed operation permission state", and "second concealed operation permission state" according to the configuration 10-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-F. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or operation concealment allowing state as the "operation unit,""first operation concealment allowing state," and "second operation concealment allowing state" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different operation units or operation concealment allowing states. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation concealment allowing state" as the "operation unit" or "operation concealment allowing state" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 10-F" is employed, if a "first concealed operation permitted state" occurs, a model image display imitating a specified operation unit is displayed when a specified time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "first concealed operation permitted state", but if a "second concealed operation permitted state" occurs, the model image display may not be displayed regardless of how much time has passed. With this configuration, when a concealed operation permitted state occurs, there are two cases where a model image display is displayed over time (when the automatic concealment release function is enabled) and where a model image display is not displayed (when the automatic concealment release function is not enabled), so it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed while a sense of tension is suitably imparted.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "first operation concealment permitted state", a replica image display for that specific operation unit may be displayed as a trigger, but when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "second operation concealment permitted state", a replica image display for that specific operation unit may not be displayed as a trigger. With this configuration, in the "first operation concealment permitted state", a replica image display may be displayed as a trigger for an operation by the player without waiting for a specific time to pass, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

[Configuration 11-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a "secret operation permitted state" can be generated in which an operation unit is permitted to accept operations but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the "secret operation permitted state", a change can occur after acceptance. In addition, in the "secret operation permitted state", there is an operation unit in which acceptance of operations is permitted multiple times while no replica image is displayed, and if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, there is a possibility that an operation will be accepted multiple times. This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in playing due to the acceptance of operations being permitted multiple times for the operation unit even though no replica image is displayed. Note that the "operation unit" and "secret operation permitted state" in the configuration 11-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-F. Therefore, the "operation unit" and "secret operation permitted state" in the other configurations may mean the same operation unit and secret operation permitted state, respectively, or may mean different operation units and secret operation permitted states, respectively. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "state permitting concealed operation" as the different names "operation unit" and "state permitting concealed operation" for other components.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 11-F" is adopted, at least a "first concealed operation permitted state" and a "second concealed operation permitted state" are prepared as concealed operation permitted states, and when the "first concealed operation permitted state" occurs, a model image display modeling the operation unit is displayed when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the "first concealed operation permitted state." However, when the "second concealed operation permitted state" occurs, the model image display may not be displayed when time has passed, regardless of how much time has passed. According to this configuration, when the concealed operation permitted state occurs, there are two cases where the model image display is displayed over time (when the automatic concealment release function is enabled) and where the model image display is not displayed (when the automatic concealment release function is not enabled), so that it is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game while providing a good sense of tension.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "first operation concealment allowing state", there is one or more operation parts that are permitted to accept multiple operations while no imitation image is displayed, and multiple operations will not be accepted even if the operation part is kept in an operated state, but in the "second operation concealment allowing state", there is one or more operation parts that are permitted to accept multiple operations while no imitation image is displayed, and multiple operations may be accepted if the operation part is kept in an operated state. With this configuration, when the operation concealment allowing state occurs, the auto rapid-fire function may or may not be enabled, so it is expected that the auto rapid-fire function can be provided to the player while maintaining a suitable sense of tension.

[Configuration 12-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a replica image display imitating a predetermined operation unit can be displayed, and an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted for the predetermined operation unit in the operation allowable state, a change can occur after acceptance. Also, when the operation allowable state occurs, an operation-related sound can be output. In addition, as the operation allowable state, there are a case where an "operation disclosure allowable state" in which operation acceptance for the predetermined operation unit is permitted and the replica image display is performed is generated, and a case where an "operation concealment allowable state" in which operation acceptance for the predetermined operation unit is permitted but the replica image display is not performed is generated, and the operation-related sound can be output when at least the "operation disclosure allowable state" of the "operation disclosure allowable state" and the "operation concealment allowable state" occurs, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given can be suitably alleviated. The "predetermined operation unit", "operation disclosure permitted state", and "operation concealment permitted state" in the configuration 12-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation permit state" as the "predetermined operation unit", "operation disclosure permitted state", and "operation concealment permitted state" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different "operation unit" and "operation permit state". In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation permit state" as the "operation unit" and "operation permit state" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 12-F" is adopted, at least a "first concealed operation permitted state" and a "second concealed operation permitted state" are prepared as the concealed operation permitted states. When the "first concealed operation permitted state" occurs, a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence, and the "first concealed operation permitted state" is terminated by displaying an imitation image display that imitates a predetermined operation unit, and the state transitions to the above-mentioned "disclosed operation permitted state". However, when the "second concealed operation permitted state" occurs, the state may not transition to the above-mentioned "disclosed operation permitted state" when the "second concealed operation permitted state" is terminated as time passes. According to this configuration, when the concealed operation permitted state occurs, there are both cases where the state transitions to the "disclosed operation permitted state" as time passes (first concealed operation permitted state) and where the state does not transition to the "disclosed operation permitted state" (second concealed operation permitted state), so that it is possible to appropriately impart a sense of tension while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game due to concealed operations.

In this case, as will be described later, the "operation disclosure permitted state" may occur following the end of the operation concealment permitted state, or may occur under conditions unrelated to the operation concealment permitted state. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether operation acceptance was permitted before the "operation disclosure permitted state" occurred (whether the operation concealment permitted state had occurred), which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 13-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and further, even when the post-acceptance display is not displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. Then, after a "specific operation allowable state" can be generated as the operation allowable state, in the "specific operation allowable state", a switch can be made from a "second background operation section" in which operation acceptance is allowed while the second background image is displayed as the background image to a "first background operation section" in which operation acceptance is allowed while the first background image is displayed as the background image, and this is expected to improve the interest in playing. Note that the "operation unit", "specific operation allowable state", "first background image", and "second background image" in the configuration 13-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background image" as the "operation unit", "specific operation permitted state", "first background image", and "second background image" respectively according to other configurations, or it may mean a different "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background image" respectively. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background image" as the "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background image" with different names according to other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 13-F" is adopted, in the "specific operation permitted state", when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "second background operation section", the background is changed from the second background image to a background image different from the second background image (changing to a different background image, replacing it), and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. However, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "first background operation state", the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed without changing the background from the first background image (changing to a different background image, replacing it, etc.). According to such a configuration, in the specific operation permitted state, whether or not a background change occurs differs between when an operation is accepted in the first background operation section and when an operation is accepted in the second background operation section, so that even when the same post-acceptance display is displayed, it is possible to provide a difference in presentation, which is expected to improve the interest in the game.

[Configuration 14-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and further, even when the post-acceptance display is not displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. Then, after a "specific operation allowable state" can be generated as an operation allowable state, in the "specific operation allowable state", a background change (changing to a different background image, replacing, etc.) can occur while the state in which operation acceptance is allowed continues, so that it is expected to improve the interest in playing. Note that the "operation unit" and the "specific operation allowable state" in the configuration 14-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 14-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable state" as the "operation unit" and "specific operation allowable state" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different "operation unit" and "operation allowable state". In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permitted state" as the different names "operation unit" or "operation permitted state" for other components.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 14-F" is employed, in the "specific operation permitted state", multiple operation receptions are permitted for a specific operation unit, and when an operation is received for a specific operation unit in the "specific operation permitted state", a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without a background change, but it is also possible for the background to change while the post-reception display is being displayed. With this configuration, even when multiple operations are being performed for a specific operation unit, a background change may occur while the post-reception display is being displayed, so that differences in presentation will appear as multiple operations are being performed, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this case, as will be described later, if a post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation accepted for a specific operation unit in a "specific operation permitted state" and a background change occurs while the "specific operation permitted state" continues, the post-acceptance display may be made invisible when the background change occurs. With this configuration, if a background change occurs while the "specific operation permitted state" continues, the post-acceptance display in response to an operation accepted for a specific operation unit that is permitted to be operated multiple times is made invisible, which can appropriately create a sense of tension.

In this case, if a background change occurs while a post-acceptance display in response to an operation accepted for a specific operation unit is being displayed in the "specific operation permitted state", the post-acceptance display may be hidden when the background change occurs, or may not be hidden (continue) when the background change occurs. With this configuration, when a background change occurs while the "specific operation permitted state" is continuing, the post-acceptance display in response to an operation accepted for a specific operation unit that is permitted to be operated multiple times may be hidden, or may continue without being hidden. Therefore, when a background change occurs in the "specific operation permitted state", it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate more on the presentation content, and it is expected to increase the interest in the game compared to the conventional valid period in which only operations are performed.

[Configuration 15-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance change can be generated. Also, as one of the post-acceptance changes, a post-acceptance display can be displayed even in a state in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed, and when the post-acceptance display is displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display. Also, when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. And, since at least a "predetermined operation allowable state" and a "specific operation allowable state" are prepared as the operation allowable state, and in the "specific operation allowable state", a background change (such as changing to a different background image or replacing it) can occur while the operation acceptance is allowed, it is expected to improve the interest in playing in the state in which operation acceptance is allowed. Note that the "operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable state", and "specific operation allowable state" in the configuration 15-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" of other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" with different names of other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 15-F" is employed, in the "predetermined operation permitted state," background changes may not occur while the state in which operation acceptance is permitted continues. With this configuration, in an operation permitted state in which operation acceptance is permitted, there will be cases in which the background changes and cases in which the background does not change, which is expected to increase interest in playing when in the operation permitted state.

In this case, as will be described later, in both the "predetermined operation permitted state" and the "specific operation permitted state", operation acceptance for the specific operation unit is permitted multiple times, and when an operation is accepted for the specific operation unit in the "predetermined operation permitted state", a post-acceptance output sound may not be output as one of the post-acceptance changes while the "predetermined operation permitted state" continues, but when an operation is accepted for the specific operation unit in the "specific operation permitted state", a post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes while the "specific operation permitted state" continues. With this configuration, it is expected that whether or not a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes will suggest whether or not a background change will occur within the operation permitted state.

In this case, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in a "specific operation permitted state", there may be cases where a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes while the "specific operation permitted state" continues, and cases where it is not output. With this configuration, even if a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes, there is a possibility that a background change will occur within the operation permitted state, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 16-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, even in a state in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed, and when the operation unit in which multiple operation acceptance is permitted in the operation allowable state is kept in an operated state, operation acceptance can be performed multiple times. And, since at least a "predetermined operation allowable state" and a "specific operation allowable state" are prepared as the operation allowable state, and in the "specific operation allowable state", a background change can occur while the operation acceptance is permitted, it is expected to improve the interest in playing in the state in which operation acceptance is permitted. Note that the "operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable state", and "specific operation allowable state" in the configuration 16-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 16-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" of other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" with different names of other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 16-F" is employed, in the "predetermined operation permitted state," background changes may not occur while the state in which operation acceptance is permitted continues. With this configuration, in an operation permitted state in which operation acceptance is permitted, there will be cases in which the background changes and cases in which the background does not change, which is expected to increase interest in playing when in the operation permitted state.

In this case, as will be described later, in a "predetermined operation permitted state" there may be one or more operation units for which multiple operation reception is permitted, and if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, multiple operation reception may be possible, whereas in a "specific operation permitted state" there may be one or more operation units for which multiple operation reception is permitted, and multiple operation reception may not be possible even if the operation unit is kept in an operated state. With this configuration, it is expected that whether or not a background change will occur within the operation permitted state will be indicated based on whether or not the so-called auto-tap function is enabled.

[Configuration 17-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, even in a situation in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. Then, at least a "predetermined operation allowable state" and a "specific operation allowable state" are prepared as the operation allowable state, and in the "specific operation allowable state", a background change can occur while the operation acceptance is allowed, so that it is expected to improve the interest in playing in the state in which operation acceptance is allowed. Note that the "operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable state", and "specific operation allowable state" in the configuration 17-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 17-F. Therefore, the "operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable state", and "specific operation allowable state" in the other configurations may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable state", respectively, or may mean different "operation unit" and "operation allowable state". In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permitted state" as the different names "operation unit" or "operation permitted state" for other components.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 17-F" is employed, in the "predetermined operation permitted state," background changes may not occur while the state in which operation acceptance is permitted continues. With this configuration, in an operation permitted state in which operation acceptance is permitted, there will be cases in which the background changes and cases in which the background does not change, which is expected to increase interest in playing when in the operation permitted state.

In this case, as described later, at least a "predetermined operation unit" and a "specific operation unit" are prepared as operation units, and in the "predetermined operation permitted state", even while a post-acceptance display in response to operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is displayed, acceptance of an operation for the "predetermined operation unit" is permitted. When an operation is accepted for the "predetermined operation unit", this may be used as a trigger to display a post-acceptance display in response to operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" without hiding it, while continuing the display. In contrast, in the "specific operation permitted state", even while a post-acceptance display in response to operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is displayed, acceptance of an operation for the "predetermined operation unit" is permitted. When an operation is accepted for the "predetermined operation unit", this may be used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display in response to operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" and display the post-acceptance display in response to operation acceptance for the "predetermined operation unit". With this configuration, depending on whether or not a background change occurs in the operation permitted state, it is expected that when an operation is accepted for a "predetermined operation unit," this will serve as a trigger to suggest whether or not to hide the post-acceptance display in response to the operation accepted for a "specific operation unit."

[Configuration 18-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and in the operation allowable state, the specific light-emitting unit can be made to emit light. Then, after the "specific operation allowable state" is made to be generated as the operation allowable state, in the "specific operation allowable state", switching can occur from the "second light-emitting operation section" in which operation acceptance on the operation unit is allowed while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the second light-emitting state to the "first light-emitting operation section" in which operation acceptance on the operation unit is allowed while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the first light-emitting state, so that it is expected to improve the interest in playing in the state in which operation acceptance is allowed. Note that the "operation unit", "specific light-emitting unit", "first light-emitting state", "second light-emitting state", and "specific operation allowable state" in the configuration 18-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 18-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "light-emitting mode", and "operation permitted state" as the "operation unit", "specific light-emitting unit", "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", and "specific operation permitted state" of other configurations, respectively, or it may mean different "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "light-emitting mode", and "operation permitted state". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "light-emitting mode", and "operation permitted state" as the "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "light-emitting mode", and "operation permitted state" of other names of other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 18-F" is adopted, in the "specific operation permitted state", when an operation is accepted for the specific operation unit during the "second light-emitting operation section", the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit is changed from the "second light-emitting state" to a "light-emitting state different from the second light-emitting state" to display a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance, but when an operation is accepted for the specific operation unit during the "first light-emitting operation section", the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit may be changed from the "first light-emitting state" to display a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permitted state", whether the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit changes when the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed is determined depending on whether the operation is accepted during the "first light-emitting operation section" or the "second light-emitting operation section", so that it is expected to increase the interest in playing when in the "specific operation permitted state".

[Configuration 19-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and in the operation allowable state, the specific light-emitting unit can be made to emit light. Then, as the operation allowable state, a "specific operation allowable state" can be generated, and in the "specific operation allowable state", a change in the light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting unit can occur while the operation acceptance is allowed, so that it is expected to improve the interest in playing in the state in which operation acceptance is allowed. Note that the "operation unit", "specific light-emitting unit", and "specific operation allowable state" in the configuration 19-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 19-F. Therefore, the "operation unit", "specific light-emitting unit", and "specific operation allowable state" in the other configurations may mean the same "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", and "operation allowable state", respectively, or may mean different "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", and "operation allowable state", respectively. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation unit,""light-emittingunit," and "operation permitted state" as other names for other components, such as "operation unit,""light-emittingunit," and "operation permitted state."

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 19-F" is adopted, in the "specific operation permission state", the reception of an operation to a specific operation unit is permitted multiple times, and when an operation to a specific operation unit is received in the "specific operation permission state", a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception may be displayed without changing the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit. In addition, in the specific operation permission state, even in a situation in which the "post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception to a specific operation unit" is displayed, a change in the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit (a change to a different light-emitting state) may occur. According to this configuration, even in a situation in which multiple operations are being performed on a specific operation unit, a change in the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit may occur while the post-reception display is displayed, so that differences in presentation will appear during multiple operations, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

In this case, when a change occurs in the light emission state of the specific light-emitting unit while a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance for the specific operation unit is displayed in the "specific operation permitted state", the post-acceptance display may be hidden when the change occurs, or may not be hidden when the change occurs (continue). With this configuration, when a change occurs in the light emission state of the specific light-emitting unit while the "specific operation permitted state" continues, there are both cases where the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance for the specific operation unit that is permitted to be operated multiple times is hidden, and where the post-acceptance display continues without being hidden. Therefore, when a change occurs in the light emission state of the specific light-emitting unit in the "specific operation permitted state", it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate more on the presentation content, and it is expected to improve the interest in the game compared to the conventional effective period in which only the operation is performed.

[Configuration 20-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, even when the post-acceptance display is not displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. Then, as the operation allowable state, a "specific operation allowable state" can be generated, and in the "specific operation allowable state", a switch can be made from a "first background operation section" in which operation acceptance is permitted while a first background image is displayed as a background image to a "second background operation section" in which operation acceptance is permitted while a second background image is displayed as a background image, so that it is expected to improve the interest in playing in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted. Note that the "operation unit", "specific operation allowable state", "first background operation section", and "second background operation section" in the configuration 20-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 20-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background operation section" as the "operation unit", "specific operation permitted state", "first background operation section", and "second background operation section" respectively according to other configurations, or it may mean a different "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background operation section". It may also mean the same "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background operation section" as the "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background operation section" with different names according to other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 20-F" is employed, in the "specific operation permitted state", when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit during the "second background operation interval", the background is changed from the second background image to a background image different from the second background image, and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. However, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit during the "first background operation interval", the background is not changed from the first background image, and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permitted state", whether or not a background change occurs differs between when an operation is accepted during the "first background operation interval" and when an operation is accepted during the "second background operation interval", so that even when the same post-acceptance display is displayed, it is possible to provide a difference in presentation, which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

[Configuration 21-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, even when the post-acceptance display is not displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. Then, after a "specific operation allowable state" can be generated as the operation allowable state, in the "specific operation allowable state", a switch can be made from a "first background operation section" in which operation acceptance is permitted while a first background image is displayed as the background image to a "second background operation section" in which operation acceptance is permitted while a second background image is displayed as the background image, and at least a "specific operation section" is prepared as the operation unit, and the specific operation section can be made to be capable of accepting multiple operations in the "specific operation allowable state", so that it can be expected to provide a suitable sense of tension when a specific operation allowable state occurs while improving the interest in playing in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted. In addition, the "specific operation unit", "specific operation permitted state", "first background operation section", and "second background operation section" in the configuration 21-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 21-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background operation section" as the "specific operation unit", "specific operation permitted state", "first background operation section", and "second background operation section" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background operation section". In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background operation section" as the "operation unit", "operation permitted state", and "background operation section" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 21-F" is employed, the switch from the "first background operation section" to the "second background operation section" may be executed based on the passage of a predetermined amount of time from the occurrence of the "first background operation section." With this configuration, in the "specific operation permitted state," the dramatic element of waiting for the timing at which the background image is switched before operating is added, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in a "specific operation permitted state", a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed for a predetermined period of time without changing the background regardless of whether it is in the "first background operation interval" or the "second background operation interval". With this configuration, even when a "specific operation permitted state" occurs, it is possible to operate the specific operation unit as appropriate, regardless of the conditions for the background change, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this case, as will be described later, when a post-acceptance display is made in response to an operation received on a specific operation unit in the "first background operation section", the post-acceptance display may be executed for the above-mentioned predetermined time, or may be hidden before the predetermined time has elapsed (triggered by the arrival of a predetermined timing due to the passage of time), but when a post-acceptance display is made in response to an operation received on a specific operation unit in the second background operation section, the post-acceptance display may be executed for a predetermined time while the specific operation permission state continues (not hidden due to the arrival of a predetermined timing due to the passage of time). According to this configuration, in the "first background operation section", both "the post-acceptance display in response to an operation received on a specific operation unit is hidden due to the passage of time before the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display of the post-acceptance display" and "the post-acceptance display is not hidden due to the passage of time before the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display of the post-acceptance display" occur, so that it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained while improving the interest in the game.

[Configuration 22-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, in the operation allowable state, the specific light-emitting unit can be made to emit light. Then, as the operation allowable state, a "specific operation allowable state" can be generated, and in the "specific operation allowable state", a switch can be made from a "first light-emitting operation section" in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is allowed while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in a first light-emitting state to a "second light-emitting operation section" in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is allowed while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in a second light-emitting state. This is expected to improve the interest in playing in the state in which operation acceptance is allowed. Note that the "operation unit", "specific light-emitting unit", "specific operation allowable state", "first light-emitting operation section", and "second light-emitting operation section" in the configuration 22-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 22-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "operation permitted state", and "light-emitting operation section" as the "operation unit", "specific light-emitting unit", "specific operation permitted state", "first light-emitting operation section", and "second light-emitting operation section" according to other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "operation permitted state", and "light-emitting operation section". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "operation permitted state", and "light-emitting operation section" as the "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "operation permitted state", and "light-emitting operation section" with different names according to other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 22-F" is adopted, in the "specific operation permitted state", when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit during the "second light-emitting operation section", the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit is changed from the second light-emitting state to a light-emitting state different from the second light-emitting state to display a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance, but when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit during the "first light-emitting operation section", the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit may be changed from the first light-emitting state to display a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permitted state", whether or not the light-emitting state changes is different between when an operation is accepted during the "first light-emitting operation section" and when an operation is accepted during the "second light-emitting operation section", so that even when the same post-acceptance display is displayed, it is possible to provide a difference in presentation, which is expected to improve the interest in the game.

[Configuration 23-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, in the operation allowable state, the specific light-emitting unit can be made to emit light. Then, after the "specific operation allowable state" is made to be generated as the operation allowable state, in the "specific operation allowable state", a switch can be made from a "first light-emitting operation section" in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is permitted while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in a first light-emitting state to a "second light-emitting operation section" in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is permitted while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in a second light-emitting state, and at least a "specific operation unit" is provided as the operation unit, and the "specific operation unit" can be made to be capable of accepting multiple operations in the "specific operation allowable state". Therefore, it is expected that the tension when the specific operation allowable state occurs can be suitably provided while improving the interest in playing in the state in which operation acceptance is permitted. In addition, the "specific operation unit", "specific light-emitting unit", "specific operation permitted state", "first light-emitting operation section", and "second light-emitting operation section" in the configuration 23-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "operation permitted state", and "light-emitting operation section" as the "specific operation unit", "specific light-emitting unit", "specific operation permitted state", "first light-emitting operation section", and "second light-emitting operation section" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "operation permitted state", and "light-emitting operation section". In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "operation permitted state", and "light-emitting operation section" as the "operation unit", "light-emitting unit", "operation permitted state", and "light-emitting operation section" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 23-F" is employed, the switch from the "first light-emitting operation section" to the "second light-emitting operation section" may be executed based on the passage of a predetermined amount of time from the occurrence of the "first light-emitting operation section." With this configuration, in the "specific operation permitted state," the dramatic element of waiting for the timing at which the light-emitting state is switched before operating is added, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in a "specific operation permitted state", a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed for a predetermined period of time without changing the light emission state regardless of whether the state is the "first light emission operation section" or the "second light emission operation section". With this configuration, even when a "specific operation permitted state" occurs, it is possible to operate the specific operation unit as appropriate regardless of the conditions for the change in the light emission state, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this case, as will be described later, when a post-acceptance display is made in response to the acceptance of an operation to a specific operation unit in the "first light-emitting operation section", the post-acceptance display may be executed for the above-mentioned predetermined time while the specific operation permitted state continues, or may be made non-displayed before the predetermined time has elapsed while the specific operation permitted state continues (triggered by the arrival of a predetermined timing due to the passage of time), whereas when a post-acceptance display is made in response to the acceptance of an operation to a specific operation unit in the second light-emitting operation section, the post-acceptance display may be executed for the predetermined time while the specific operation permitted state continues (without being made non-displayed due to the arrival of a predetermined timing due to the passage of time). With this configuration, in the "first light-emitting operation section," the post-acceptance display in response to an operation accepted at a specific operation unit will either be "displayed as a trigger for time elapse before a predetermined time has elapsed since the post-acceptance display began to be displayed," or "not be hidden as a trigger for time elapse before a predetermined time has elapsed since the post-acceptance display began to be displayed," which is expected to increase interest in the game while maintaining a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 24-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which the operation acceptance for the predetermined operation unit is allowed can be generated, and when the operation acceptance for the predetermined operation unit is made in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, at least a "specific operation allowable state" is prepared as the operation allowable state, and in the "specific operation allowable state", a model image display imitating the predetermined operation unit in which the operation acceptance is allowed can be displayed, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the model image display is made non-display, so that it is expected that the tension in the state in which the operation acceptance is allowed can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "predetermined operation unit" and the "specific operation allowable state" according to the configuration 24-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 24-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation allowable state" as the "predetermined operation unit" and the "specific operation allowable state" according to other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different "operation unit" and "operation allowable state". In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permitted state" as the different names "operation unit" or "operation permitted state" for other components.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 24-F" is employed, the "specific operation permitted state" includes a "mock image display section" in which a mock image that mimics a specific operation unit is displayed, and a "concealed (non-display) section" in which a mock image that mimics a specific operation unit is not displayed, and the mock image display section may end and the concealed section may start when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the mock image display section. With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension when in the "specific operation permitted state" will be appropriately maintained.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "specific operation permitted state", the same post-acceptance display may be executed when an operation is accepted at a specified operation unit in the imitation image display section and when an operation is accepted at a specified operation unit in the concealed section. With this configuration, even if the section moves from the imitation image display section to the concealed section, the same post-acceptance display appears, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game and maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 25-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which the operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when the operation acceptance to the operation unit is made in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, after the "specific operation allowable state" is made to be generated as the operation allowable state, the imitation image display can be displayed in the "specific operation allowable state", but when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the imitation image display is made non-displayed, and at least a specific operation unit is prepared as the operation unit, and the specific operation unit is made to be able to accept multiple operations in the "specific operation allowable state", so that it is expected that the sense of tension in the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted can be suitably maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit" and the "specific operation allowable state" in the configuration 25-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation permissible state" as the "specific operation unit" and "specific operation permissible state" of another configuration, respectively, or may mean a different "operation unit" and "operation permissible state." Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit" and "operation permissible state" with different names of the other configuration.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 25-F" is employed, the mock image display may be made non-displayable when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation permitted state" in the "specific operation permitted state." This configuration is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the "specific operation permitted state."

In this case, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "specific operation permitted state", a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed for a predetermined period of time, regardless of whether the operation acceptance is accepted while a replica image display is being displayed or while a replica image display is not being displayed. With this configuration, the post-acceptance display continues to be displayed for a predetermined period of time regardless of the display status of the replica image display, which is expected to maintain tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

However, in this case, while a post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation accepted by a specific operation unit in a "specific operation permitted state", if "hiding of the model image display" is not performed triggered by the lapse of a predetermined time after the occurrence of the "specific operation permitted state", the post-acceptance display may be displayed for a predetermined time, but if "hiding of the model image display" is performed triggered by the lapse of a predetermined time after the occurrence of the "specific operation permitted state", the post-acceptance display may not be continuously displayed for a predetermined time, but may be hidden in accordance with the timing at which the model image display is hidden (triggered by the lapse of the above-mentioned predetermined time). With this configuration, at the timing at which the model image display is switched from a displayed state to a hidden state, the post-acceptance display in the displayed state is not continuously displayed for a predetermined time but is hidden before that, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension while the post-acceptance display is displayed.

[Configuration 26-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which the operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted to the operation unit in the "operation allowable state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, at least a "predetermined operation unit" and a "specific operation unit" are prepared as the operation allowable state, and a "specific operation allowable state" can be generated as the operation allowable state. In the "specific operation allowable state", when an operation is accepted to the "predetermined operation unit", a predetermined post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, and when an operation is accepted to the "specific operation unit", a specific post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, and the predetermined time from when the predetermined post-acceptance display is displayed to when it is hidden is different from the specific time from when the specific post-acceptance display is displayed to when it is hidden, so that it is expected to improve the interest in playing in the "specific operation allowable state". Note that the "predetermined operation unit", "specific operation unit", and "specific operation allowable state" according to the configuration 26-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 26-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "predetermined operation unit", "specific operation unit", and "specific operation permissible state" of other configurations, respectively, or may mean different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" with different names of other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 26-F" is employed, in the "specific operation permitted state", at least a predetermined imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" and a specific imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation permitted state", this may be used as a trigger to cause both the predetermined imitation image display and the specific imitation image display to be hidden. With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension when in the "specific operation permitted state" will be appropriately maintained.

In this case, the "specific operation permitted state" may continue even after the predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation permitted state" and both the predetermined model image display and the specific model image display are hidden. With this configuration, both the predetermined model image display and the specific model image display are hidden while the "specific operation permitted state" continues, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 26-F" is adopted, if a specific post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation acceptance for a "specific operation unit" while a specific model image display and a specific model image display are displayed in a "specific operation permitted state", the specific post-acceptance display may be displayed for the specific time unless the predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation permitted state" between the display of the specific post-acceptance display and the passage of the specific time, but may be made to be hidden when the predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation permitted state" between the display of the specific post-acceptance display and the passage of the specific time. In contrast, if a specific post-acceptance display in response to an operation acceptance for a specific operation unit is displayed while a specific model image display and a specific model image display are displayed in a "specific operation permitted state", the specific post-acceptance display may be made to be displayed for the specific time without being made to be hidden by the elapse of the predetermined time since the occurrence of the "specific operation permitted state". With this configuration, when the predetermined post-reception display appears, the user can enjoy the contents of the post-reception display with a sense of security, whereas when the specific post-reception display appears, the user must check the contents of the post-reception display while being aware of the timing at which the predetermined model image display and the specific model image display are hidden, which is expected to provide a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 27-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance change can be caused. Also, when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. Then, at least a "specific operation unit" is prepared as the operation unit, and at least a "predetermined operation allowable state" and a "specific operation allowable state" are prepared as the operation allowable states, and the imitation image display can be displayed in both the "predetermined operation allowable state" and the "specific operation allowable state", and the imitation image display displayed in the "specific operation allowable state" can be made invisible when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the "specific operation allowable state", so that it is expected that the tension in the "specific operation allowable state" can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable state", and "specific operation allowable state" in the configuration 27-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 27-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "specific operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" of other configurations, respectively, or may mean different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" with different names of other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 27-F" is employed, in a "predetermined operation permitted state", the imitation image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "predetermined operation permitted state" continues, but in a "specific operation permitted state", the imitation image display may be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "specific operation permitted state" continues. With this configuration, in the operation permitted state, there will be both cases where the imitation image display is changed from a displayed state to a hidden state and cases where the imitation image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state, so that a sense of tension can be provided in an ideal manner.

In this case, both the "predetermined operation permitted state" and the "specific operation permitted state" permit the acceptance of operations to the "specific operation unit" multiple times, and when an operation is accepted to the "specific operation unit" in the "predetermined operation permitted state", a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes while the "predetermined operation permitted state" continues, and when an operation is accepted to the "specific operation unit" while the imitation image display is in a display state in the "specific operation permitted state", a post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes while the "specific operation permitted state" continues. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the imitation image display will be changed from a display state to a non-display state in the operation permitted state based on whether or not a post-acceptance output sound is output, which is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In this case, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "specific operation permitted state", a post-acceptance output sound may or may not be output as one of the post-acceptance changes while the "specific operation permitted state" continues. With this configuration, even if a post-acceptance output sound is not output, there is a possibility that the mock image display will be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 28-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a change can occur after acceptance. Then, at least a "predetermined operation allowable state" and a "specific operation allowable state" are prepared as the operation allowable state, and in both the "predetermined operation allowable state" and the "specific operation allowable state", the imitation image display can be displayed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the "specific operation allowable state", the imitation image display can be made invisible, so that it is expected that the sense of tension in the "specific operation allowable state" can be appropriately maintained. Also, in the "predetermined operation allowable state", at least a predetermined operation unit is prepared as an operation unit in which acceptance of operations multiple times is allowed, and when the predetermined operation unit is kept in an operated state, the operation acceptance can be made multiple times, so that it is expected that the interest in playing in the "predetermined operation allowable state" can be improved. The "predetermined operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "particular operation permissible state" in the configuration 28-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 28-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation permissible state" as the "predetermined operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "particular operation permissible state" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different "operation unit" and "operation permissible state". In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit" and "operation permissible state" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 28-F" is employed, in a "predetermined operation permitted state", the imitation image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "predetermined operation permitted state" continues, but in a "specific operation permitted state", the imitation image display may be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "specific operation permitted state" continues. With this configuration, in the operation permitted state, there are both cases where the imitation image display is changed from a displayed state to a hidden state and cases where the imitation image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the operation permitted state.

In this case, as will be described later, in a "specific operation permission state", there may be one or more operation parts that are permitted to accept multiple operations when the imitation image display is in a display state, and multiple operations will not be accepted even if the operation part is kept in an operated state (the auto-tap function is enabled), whereas in a "predetermined operation permission state", there may be one or more operation parts that are permitted to accept multiple operations, and multiple operations may be accepted if the operation part is kept in an operated state (the auto-tap function is enabled). With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the imitation image display will be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state based on whether the auto-tap function is enabled, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In this case, in the "predetermined operation permitted state", there may be multiple operation parts that are permitted to accept multiple operations, and if the operation part is kept in an operated state, the operation may or may not be accepted multiple times depending on the type of operation part that is the target of the operation. With this configuration, even if the auto-hit function is not enabled, the model image display may not change from a displayed state to a hidden state, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

[Configuration 29-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which the operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is allowed can be generated, and when the operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is made in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, at least a "predetermined operation allowable state" and a "specific operation allowable state" are prepared as the operation allowable state, and in both the "predetermined operation allowable state" and the "specific operation allowable state", the imitation image display can be made invisible when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the "specific operation allowable state", so that it is expected that the sense of tension in the "specific operation allowable state" can be favorably maintained. Also, a specific operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit is prepared, and in the "predetermined operation allowable state", both the operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit and the operation acceptance to the specific operation unit are allowed, and the operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit can be allowed even while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance to the specific operation unit is displayed, so that it is expected that the interest in playing in the predetermined operation allowable state can be improved. The "predetermined operation unit", "specific operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" in the configuration 29-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 29-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "predetermined operation unit", "specific operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit" or "operation permissible state" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 29-F" is employed, in a "predetermined operation permitted state", the imitation image display will not be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "predetermined operation permitted state" continues, but in a "specific operation permitted state", the imitation image display may be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "specific operation permitted state" continues. With this configuration, in the operation permitted state, there are both cases where the imitation image display is changed from a displayed state to a hidden state and cases where the imitation image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when in the operation permitted state will be appropriately maintained.

In this case, as described later, in the "specific operation allowable state", both the operation reception for the specific operation unit and the operation reception for the specific operation unit are allowed, and the operation reception for the specific operation unit is allowed even while a post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the specific operation unit is displayed. When an operation is received for the specific operation unit while a post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the specific operation unit is displayed, this may be used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the specific operation unit and start displaying the post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the specific operation unit. In contrast, in the "specific operation allowable state", both the operation reception for the specific operation unit and the operation reception for the specific operation unit are allowed, and the operation reception for the specific operation unit is allowed even while a post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the specific operation unit is displayed. When an operation is received for the specific operation unit while a post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the specific operation unit is displayed, this may be used as a trigger to start displaying the post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the specific operation unit without hiding the post-acceptance display in response to the operation reception for the specific operation unit. With this configuration, in the operation permitted state, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit while the post-acceptance display in response to the operation accepted for the specific operation unit is displayed, this triggers both the case where the post-acceptance display in response to the operation accepted for the specific operation unit is hidden and the case where it is not hidden, which is expected to provide an ideal sense of tension when operating the specific operation unit.

[Configuration 30-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a change can occur after acceptance, and at least a "specific operation allowable state" and a "special operation allowable state" are prepared as the operation allowable state. Then, in the "specific operation allowable state", a model image display can be displayed, and in the "special operation allowable state", a model image display cannot be displayed, but in the "specific operation allowable state", when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the model image display can be made invisible, so that it is expected to favorably maintain the tension in the "specific operation allowable state". In the "special operation allowable state", at least a predetermined operation unit is prepared as an operation unit in which multiple operation acceptances are permitted, and when the predetermined operation unit is kept in an operated state, operation acceptance can be made multiple times, so that it is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in playing when a "special operation allowable state" in which a model image display cannot be displayed occurs. The "predetermined operation unit,""predetermined operation permissible state," and "special operation permissible state" of the configuration 30-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 30-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation permissible state" as the "predetermined operation unit,""predetermined operation permissible state," and "special operation permissible state" of other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different "operation unit" and "operation permissible state." In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit" and "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit" and "operation permissible state" of other configurations with different names.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 30-F" is employed, the mock image display may be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "specific operation permitted state" continues. This configuration is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the "specific operation permitted state".

In this case, in the "specific operation permitted state", there may be one or more operation units that are permitted to accept multiple operations when the model image display is in a displayed state, and the operation may not be accepted multiple times even if the operation unit is kept in an operated state. In contrast, in the "special operation permitted state", there may be one or more operation units that are permitted to accept multiple operations when the model image display is in a hidden state, and the operation may be accepted multiple times if the operation unit is kept in an operated state. In the "specific operation permitted state" where the model image display can be displayed, the auto-hit function is not enabled, whereas in the "special operation permitted state" where the model image display cannot be displayed, the auto-hit function is enabled, which is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in playing due to the model image display not being displayed.

[Configuration 31-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to execute a model image display imitating a predetermined operation unit, and it is possible to generate a "non-display operation allowable state" including a "non-display operation section" in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is permitted while the model image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit in the "non-display operation allowable state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display. Also, it is possible to display a post-acceptance display even in a situation in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed, and when the post-acceptance display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image display that is displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display. In this regard, since the background can change while the state in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is permitted continues in the "non-display operation allowable state", it is expected to improve the interest in playing when in the "non-display operation allowable state". Note that the "prescribed operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "non-display operation allowable state" in the configuration 31-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 31-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "predetermined operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "hidden operation permitted state" of other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state". It may also mean the same "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" with different names of other configurations.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 31-F" is adopted, in the "hidden operation permitted state", there may or may not be a background change, and if a background change occurs while a state in which operation acceptance for a specified operation unit is permitted continues in the "hidden operation permitted state", the "hidden operation interval" ends while the "hidden operation permitted state" continues, and a transition is made to a "display operation interval" in which operation acceptance for the specified operation unit is permitted while the mock image display is displayed. That is, in this case, the "hidden operation permitted state" should more accurately be referred to as a "hidden interval inclusion permitted state". In contrast, if no background change occurs while the state in which operation reception to a specific operation unit is permitted continues in the "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section inclusion permitted state)", the "non-display operation section" may continue without ending until the "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section inclusion permitted state)" is ended, or the "non-display operation section" may end while the "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section inclusion permitted state)" continues and transition to the "display operation section" may occur. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not a "display operation section" will appear in the "non-display section inclusion permitted state" based on whether or not the background changes, which is expected to improve interest in the game. Furthermore, even if the background does not change, the possibility of the "display operation section" appearing remains, so that interest in the game is expected to be maintained in a good condition.

[Configuration 32-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to execute a model image display imitating a predetermined operation unit, and it is possible to generate a "non-display operation allowable state" including a "non-display operation section" in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is permitted while the model image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit in the "non-display operation allowable state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display. Also, it is possible to display a post-acceptance display even in a situation in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed, and when the post-acceptance display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image display that is displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display. In this regard, since at least a "first non-display operation allowable state" and a "second non-display operation allowable state" are prepared as the "non-display operation allowable state", and the background can change while the state in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is permitted continues in the "first non-display operation allowable state", it is expected to improve the interest in playing in the "non-display operation allowable state". In addition, the "predetermined operation unit", "non-display operation section", "non-display operation permitted state", "first non-display operation permitted state", and "second non-display operation permitted state" in the configuration 32-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 32-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit", "non-display operation section", "non-display operation permitted state", "first non-display operation permitted state", and "second non-display operation permitted state" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different "operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "operation permitted state". In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "operation permitted state" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 32-F" is adopted, in the "second non-display operation permitted state", while the state in which the operation reception to the predetermined operation unit is permitted continues, the "first non-display operation permitted state" and the "second non-display operation permitted state" in the "non-display operation permitted state" each include a display operation section in which the operation reception to the predetermined operation unit is permitted while the mock image display is displayed, and in the "first non-display operation permitted state", when the "non-display operation section" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "first non-display operation permitted state" continues and transitions to a "display operation section", and in the "second non-display operation permitted state", when the "non-display operation section" continues for a second time shorter than the first time, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "second non-display operation permitted state" continues and transitions to a "display operation section". That is, in this case, the "non-display operation permitted state" should be more accurately referred to as a "non-display section inclusion permitted state". With this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "first non-display operation permitted state (first non-display section included state)" and the "second non-display operation permitted state (second non-display section included state)," which is expected to favorably maintain the tension felt when in the "non-display operation permitted state." On the other hand, since these non-display operation permitted states can be indicated by the presence or absence of a change in the background, it is expected to favorably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 33-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to execute a model image display imitating a predetermined operation unit, and it is possible to generate a "non-display operation allowable state" including a "non-display operation section" in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is allowable while the model image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit in the "non-display operation allowable state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display, and it is possible to display a premonition effect display suggesting in advance that operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit will be in an allowable state. In this regard, in the "non-display operation allowable state", since the premonition effect display may not be displayed when the "non-display operation allowable state" occurs, it is possible to provide a sense of tension when the non-display operation allowable state occurs. Note that the "prescribed operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "non-display operation allowable state" in the configuration 33-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 33-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "predetermined operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "hidden operation permitted state" of other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" with different names of other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 33-F" is adopted, when the "hidden operation permissible state" occurs, there are cases where the premonition display is displayed and cases where the premonition display is not displayed, and the "hidden operation permissible state" may include both a "hidden operation section" in which the reception of operations to a specific operation unit is permissible while the imitation image display is not displayed and a "display operation section" in which the reception of operations to a specific operation unit is permissible while the imitation image display is displayed, and cases where the "display operation section" is not included and the "hidden operation section" is included. When the "hidden operation permissible state" does not include the "display operation section" but includes the "hidden operation section", the premonition display is not displayed when the "hidden operation permissible state" occurs, and when the "hidden operation permissible state" includes the "hidden operation section" and the "display operation section", there are cases where the premonition display is displayed and cases where the premonition display is not displayed when the "hidden operation permissible state" occurs. In other words, in this case, the above-mentioned "hidden operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as a "hidden section inclusive permissible state". According to this configuration, when a "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section included permitted state)" that does not include a "display operation section" occurs, the premonition effect display is not executed, so that it is possible to preferably maintain the secrecy of the state in which operation acceptance is permitted from the player. In contrast, when a "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section included permitted state)" that includes a "display operation section" occurs, the premonition effect display may or may not be executed, so that the presentation level regarding the secrecy of the state in which operation acceptance is permitted from the player is varied, and it is expected that a presentation that feels like training will be provided in a natural way so that even beginners can easily notice the highly confidential "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section included permitted state)".

[Configuration 34-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display imitating a predetermined operation unit can be executed, a "non-display operation allowable state" including a "non-display operation section" in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is allowable while the model image display is not displayed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit in the "non-display operation allowable state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and a premonition effect display suggesting in advance that operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit will be allowed can be displayed. Then, at least a "first non-display operation allowable state" and a "second non-display operation allowable state" are prepared as the "non-display operation allowable state", and in the "first non-display operation allowable state", a premonition effect display is not displayed when the "first non-display operation allowable state" occurs, so that a sense of tension can be suitably provided when the "non-display operation allowable state" occurs. Note that the "prescribed operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "non-display operation allowable state" according to the configuration 34-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 34-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "predetermined operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "hidden operation permitted state" of other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" with different names of other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 34-F" is adopted, in the "second non-hidden operation permitted state", a premonition display is displayed when the "second non-hidden operation permitted state" occurs, and both the "first non-hidden operation permitted state" and the "second non-hidden operation permitted state" include a "display operation section" in which the reception of an operation to a predetermined operation unit is permitted while a mock image display is being displayed, and in the "first non-hidden operation permitted state", if the "non-hidden operation section" continues for a first time, the "non-hidden operation section" ends while the "first non-hidden operation permitted state" continues and transitions to a "display operation section", and in the "second non-hidden operation permitted state", if the "non-hidden operation section" continues for a second time that is shorter than the first time, the "non-hidden operation section" ends while the "second non-hidden operation permitted state" continues and transitions to a "display operation section". That is, in this case, the "non-hidden operation permitted state" should be more accurately referred to as a "non-hidden section inclusive permitted state". With this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "first non-display operation permitted state (first non-display section included state)" and the "second non-display operation permitted state (second non-display section included state)," which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the "non-display operation permitted state." On the other hand, since these non-display operation permitted states can be indicated by the presence or absence of the execution of the premonition display, it is expected to favorably suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 35-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display imitating a predetermined operation unit can be executed, a non-display operation allowable state including a non-display operation section in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is allowable while the model image display is not displayed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit in the non-display operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and an acceptance allowance sound can be output which indicates that the operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit has become an allowable state or that the operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit has become an allowable state. In this regard, in the "non-display operation allowable state", the acceptance allowance sound may not be output when the "non-display operation allowable state" occurs, so that a sense of tension can be appropriately provided when the non-display operation allowable state occurs. Note that the "predetermined operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "non-display operation allowable state" in the configuration 35-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 35-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "predetermined operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "hidden operation permitted state" of other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "operation unit", "hidden operation section", and "operation permitted state" with different names of other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 35-F" is adopted, in the "non-display operation permitted state", the acceptance permission sound may be output when the "non-display operation permitted state" occurs, and the acceptance permission sound may not be output. In addition, the "non-display operation permitted state" may include both a "non-display operation section" in which the acceptance of an operation to a specific operation unit is permitted while the model image display is not displayed, and a "display operation section" in which the acceptance of an operation to a specific operation unit is permitted while the model image display is displayed, or may not include a "display operation section" but includes a "non-display operation section". When the "non-display operation permitted state" does not include a "display operation section" but includes a "non-display operation section", the acceptance permission sound may not be output when the "non-display operation permitted state" occurs, and when the "non-display operation permitted state" includes a "non-display operation section" and a "display operation section", the acceptance permission sound may be output when the "non-display operation permitted state" occurs, or may not be output. In other words, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permitted state" should be more accurately referred to as a "non-display section inclusive acceptance state". According to this configuration, when a "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section included permitted state)" that does not include a "display operation section" occurs, the reception permission sound is not output, so that it is possible to preferably maintain the secrecy of the state in which operation reception is permitted from the player. In contrast, when a "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section included permitted state)" that includes a "display operation section" occurs, there are both cases in which the reception permission sound is output and cases in which the reception permission sound is not output, so that the level of presentation regarding the secrecy of the state in which operation reception is permitted from the player is made more diverse, and it is expected that a presentation that feels like training will be provided in a natural way so that even beginners can easily notice the highly secret "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section included permitted state)".

[Configuration 36-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to execute a model image display imitating a predetermined operation unit, and it is possible to generate a "non-display operation allowable state" including a "non-display operation section" in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is allowable while the model image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit in the "non-display operation allowable state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display. Also, it is possible to output an acceptance acceptance sound that suggests that the operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit has become an allowable state or that the operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit has become an allowable state. Then, at least a "first non-display operation allowable state" and a "second non-display operation allowable state" are prepared as the "non-display operation allowable state", and in the "first non-display operation allowable state", the acceptance acceptance sound corresponding to the "first non-display operation allowable state" is not output, so that it is possible to provide a suitable sense of tension when the "non-display operation allowable state" occurs. In addition, the "predetermined operation unit", "non-display operation section", "first non-display operation permitted state", and "second non-display operation permitted state" in the configuration 36-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 36-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit", "non-display operation section", "first non-display operation permitted state", and "second non-display operation permitted state" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different "operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "operation permitted state". In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "operation unit", "non-display operation section", and "operation permitted state" with different names in other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "configuration 36-F" is adopted, in the "second non-display operation permitted state", an acceptance permission sound corresponding to the "second non-display operation permitted state" can be output, and both the "first non-display operation permitted state" and the "second non-display operation permitted state" include a "display operation section" in which the operation acceptance for the predetermined operation unit is permitted while the mock image display is being displayed, and in the "first non-display operation permitted state", when the "non-display operation section" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "first non-display operation permitted state" continues and transitions to the "display operation section", and in the "second non-display operation permitted state", when the "non-display operation section" continues for a second time shorter than the first time, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "second non-display operation permitted state" continues and transitions to the "display operation section". That is, in this case, the "non-display operation permitted state" should be more accurately referred to as a "non-display section inclusive acceptance state". With this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "first non-display operation permitted state (first non-display section included permitted state)" and the "second non-display operation permitted state (second non-display section included permitted state)," which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the "non-display operation permitted state." On the other hand, these non-display operation permitted states can be indicated by the presence or absence of the output of the acceptance permission sound, which is expected to favorably suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 37-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a replica image display imitating a predetermined operation unit can be executed, and a "display operation allowable state" including a "display operation section" in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is permitted while the replica image display is being displayed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit in the "display operation allowable state", a display after acceptance can be displayed. Then, at least a "first display operation allowable state" and a "second display operation allowable state" are prepared as the "display operation allowable state", and in the "second display operation allowable state", the replica image display can be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes, so that a sense of tension can be suitably provided when the "display operation allowable state" occurs. Note that the "predetermined operation unit", "display operation section", "first display operation allowable state", and "second display operation allowable state" in the configuration 37-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 37-F. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation unit", "display operation section", and "operation permissible state" as the "predetermined operation unit", "display operation section", "first display operation permissible state", and "second display operation permissible state" according to other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different "operation unit", "display operation section", and "operation permissible state". Also, it may mean the same "operation unit", "display operation section", and "operation permissible state" as the "operation unit", "display operation section", and "operation permissible state" with different names according to other configurations.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 37-F" is adopted, in the "first display operation allowable state", the mock image display can be displayed only in one display mode, and both the "first display operation allowable state" and the "second display operation allowable state" include a "non-display operation section" in which the mock image display is not displayed and operation reception for a predetermined operation unit is allowable. In the "first display operation allowable state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "first display operation allowable state" continues and transitions to a "display operation section". In the "second display operation allowable state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a second time that is shorter than the first time, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "second display operation allowable state" continues and transitions to a "display operation section". In other words, in this case, the "display operation allowable state" should be more accurately referred to as a "display section inclusion allowable state". With this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "first display operation permitted state (first display section included allowed state)" and the "second display operation permitted state (second display section included allowed state)," which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the "display operation permitted state." On the other hand, since these display operation permitted states can be suggested through the display mode of the mock image display, it is expected to favorably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 38-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to execute a model image display imitating a predetermined operation unit, and it is possible to generate a "non-display section inclusion allowable state" including a "non-display operation section" in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is acceptable while the model image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit in the "non-display section inclusion allowable state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, at least a "first non-display section inclusion allowable state" and a "second non-display section inclusion allowable state" are prepared as the "non-display section inclusion allowable state", and both the "first non-display section inclusion allowable state" and the "second non-display section inclusion allowable state" include both a "display operation section" in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is acceptable while the model image display is displayed, and a "non-display operation section", so that it is possible to provide a sense of tension when the "non-display section inclusion allowable state" occurs. In addition, the "predetermined operation unit", "display operation section", "non-display operation section", "first non-display section inclusion permitted state", and "second non-display section inclusion permitted state" according to the configuration 38-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 38-F. Therefore, they may mean the same "operation unit", "display operation section", "non-display operation section", "first non-display section inclusion permitted state", and "second non-display section inclusion permitted state" according to other configurations, respectively, or may mean different "operation unit", "display operation section", "non-display operation section", and "operation permitted state". In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit", "display operation section", "non-display operation section", and "operation permitted state" as the "operation unit" with a different name, "display operation section", and "operation permitted state" according to other configurations, respectively.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 38-F" is adopted, a specific operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit may be further prepared, and in the "first non-display section inclusion permitted state" and the "second non-display section inclusion permitted state", both the predetermined operation unit and the specific operation unit may be permitted to accept operations. With such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension when in the "first non-display section inclusion permitted state" and the "second non-display section inclusion permitted state" will be more appropriately maintained.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "first non-display section inclusion permitted state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section" can be terminated while the "first non-display section inclusion permitted state" is continuing and can transition to a "display operation section", and if an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "non-display operation section", this can be used as a trigger to output a post-acceptance output sound; and in the "second non-display section inclusion permitted state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a second time that is shorter than the first time, the "non-display operation section" can be terminated while the "second non-display section inclusion permitted state" is continuing and can transition to a "display operation section", and if an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "non-display operation section", this can be used as a trigger to not output a post-acceptance output sound. With this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "first non-display section inclusion permitted state" and the "second non-display section inclusion permitted state," which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the "non-display section inclusion permitted state." On the other hand, these non-display section inclusion permitted states can be indicated by the presence or absence of a post-acceptance output sound when an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "non-display operation section," which is expected to favorably suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 39-F]
Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to execute a replica image display imitating a predetermined operation unit, and it is possible to generate a "non-display operation allowable state" including a "non-display operation section" in which operation acceptance to the predetermined operation unit is permitted while the replica image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit in the "non-display operation allowable state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. And, as the "non-display operation allowable state", at least a "first non-display operation allowable state" and a "second non-display operation allowable state" are prepared, and in the "first non-display operation allowable state", when no operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is accepted to the predetermined operation unit is not displayed, so that a sense of tension can be suitably provided when the non-display operation allowable state occurs.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 39-F" is adopted, in the "second non-display operation permitted state", even if no operation is accepted for a specific operation unit, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is accepted for the specific operation unit can be displayed, and both the "first non-display operation permitted state" and the "second non-display operation permitted state" include a "display operation section" in which an operation acceptance for the specific operation unit is accepted while a mock image display is being displayed, and in the "first non-display operation permitted state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "first non-display operation permitted state" continues and transitions to a "display operation section", and in the "second non-display operation permitted state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a second time that is shorter than the first time, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "second non-display operation permitted state" continues and transitions to a "display operation section". In other words, in this case, the "non-display operation permitted state" should be more accurately referred to as a "non-display section inclusive acceptance state". According to this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "first non-display operation permitted state (first non-display section included state)" and the "second non-display operation permitted state (second non-display section included state)," which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the "non-display operation permitted state." On the other hand, the types of non-display operation permitted states can suggest whether or not the automatic button function will be enabled, which is expected to favorably suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related display (such as a model image display modeled after an operation receiving unit) related to the occurrence of the acceptance allowance period is displayed, but the operation-related display may be displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display during both the acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) that occurs when the pattern performance progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) that occurs as a result of a notice judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is desirable to display it during both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance.

Note that such operation-related displays are as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as other examples or modified examples thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as operation-related displays, and they are similarly designed to be displayed in one of these modes. However, such operation-related displays do not necessarily have to be displayed as integrated model image displays integrated with the peripheral decoration image.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related sound (such as an acceptance allowance sound) related to the occurrence of the acceptance allowance period may be audibly output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptance allowance sound" refers to a sound that, when the output of the sound starts, will necessarily cause an acceptance allowance period (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or a sound that is already occurring. In other words, the "acceptance allowance sound" suggests that an operation acceptance state has been entered, or will be entered, and can be said to be a sound that is not output under circumstances in which a performance that has no relation to the acceptance allowance period (acceptance period) is being performed.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple acceptance allowable periods (operation allowable states) with different types (e.g., conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc.) of post-acceptance changes (e.g., post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.) that appear when an acceptance is made. Each acceptance allowable period (operation allowable state) has a respective occurrence condition, and when any one of these occurrence conditions is met, an acceptance allowable period (operation allowable state) of a type corresponding to the occurrence condition that has been met can occur.

Also, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple operation units (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) that are operated by the player. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example is capable of generating an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which not only one operation unit, but several (multiple) operation units are permitted to be in an operation-accepting state.

The basic presentation examples when such a multiple operation permitted period occurs are as described with reference to Figs. 275 to 277. The configurations described with reference to Figs. 275 to 277 are conceptual to facilitate understanding of some of the technical features contained in pachinko machine 1, and as mentioned above, are not essential configurations.

In addition, during such a multiple operation allowance period, for example, a player may start operating operation unit B (here, operation button 410) which allows multiple operations, but may become anxious when the final result display does not appear, and may switch from "operation on operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" in the middle of the multiple operation allowance period to progress the performance. In this case, there is a problem as to what processing should be performed. Also, even if the multiple operation allowance period is one in which all of the multiple operation units are prepared as "operation units which are only allowed to accept one operation," for example, if there is no operation by the player during the multiple operation allowance period, there are various problems such as the problem of which operation unit the above-mentioned "automatic button function" should be enabled for, and further the problem of whether the so-called auto-repeated-hit function should be enabled in order to increase the interest in the game.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 including the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-F" to "Configuration 39-F" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, when realizing these inventions, it is only necessary to select and partially include only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired action and effect from each of the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to include all of them. For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (target action and effect), it may be a machine in which the acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which several (multiple) operation units are acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state (acceptance period during which only one operation unit is acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state) does not necessarily occur, it may not have an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting multiple operations, it may not have an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting only one operation, or it may not have an automatic button function or an auto-repeated function that is not enabled. Also, with reference to FIG. 310, it is not necessary to include each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods, or it may be a machine in which only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired action and effect are appropriately selected and partially included from each of the configurations. In other words, for each of the configurations described in the specification below, when it is desired to obtain an additional effect in addition to any one of the above "Configuration 1-F" to "Configuration 39-F," it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the corresponding configuration.

First, with reference to Figs. 311 to 351, among the multiple reception periods, the 12F reception period, the 13F reception period, the 14F reception period, the 15F reception period, the 16F reception period, and the 17F reception period, as well as modified examples of these reception periods, will be described. Note that the reception periods described above with reference to Figs. 310 to 316 may be prepared as reception periods separate from the 12F reception period, the 13F reception period, the 14F reception period, the 15F reception period, the 16F reception period, and the 17F reception period, or may be realized as any of the 12F reception period, the 13F reception period, the 14F reception period, the 15F reception period, the 16F reception period, and the 17F reception period. For example, the 10F reception period shown in Figs. 303 to 306 may be realized as the 14F reception period described later. Furthermore, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary components among the components described below, and it is not necessary to have these components for each of the reception periods described above while referring to Figure 310.

Figure 311 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 12F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 12F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 312 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 12F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "12th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 12th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 12th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 12th F fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "12th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 311, within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "12th F variation pattern", the above-mentioned 12th F acceptance period (operation permissible state) in which "acceptance of changes after 12th F acceptance (such as displays UA, UB after 12th F acceptance and sound output after 12th F acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tl2, which is when 12F time has elapsed since the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on the satisfaction of "condition 12F").

Here, during the 12F reception period in this embodiment, the 12F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to receive only one operation until the 12F reception period ends, and the 12F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations until the 12F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period).

In other words, during the 12F reception period (period allowing multiple operations), for example, a player may start operating 12F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, but may become anxious when the final result display does not appear, and may switch from "operation on 12F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 12F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" midway through the 12F reception period (period allowing multiple operations) in order to progress the presentation.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates a 12th F reception period, it is possible to first execute a premonition display that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given (that the 12th F reception period will occur).

Although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, when a specific timing (not shown) arrives before the occurrence of the 12th F reception period, the "12th F premonition presentation display" begins to be executed as the premonition presentation display. This "12th F premonition presentation display" may be displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 12th F operation-related displays A and B are displayed.

That is, in this example, when the 12F reception period occurs, the "12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 12F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and the "12F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" which can only appear when the operation reception for the 12F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted are displayed. Note that in this example, the timing when the 12F reception period occurs is the same as the timing when the "12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed, but this does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed across these timings by starting to display them after the timing when the 12th F premonition performance display is displayed and before the timing when the 12th F reception period occurs. Alternatively, the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed with a delay to the timing when the 12th F reception period occurs.

Note that in this example, the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation-related display B (button imitation image BMG)" are displayed as a "display simulating the 12th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and a "display simulating the 12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", respectively, but the display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the "12th F premonition performance display" while the "12th F premonition performance display" is being displayed. However, the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" do not necessarily have to be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the "12th F premonition performance display", as long as they are visible at the time when the 12th F reception period occurs.

In addition, the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as images that may undergo periodic changes. That is, as described above, during the 12th F reception period, at least the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" which is only permitted to receive one operation, and the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which is permitted to receive multiple operations are provided as operation sections that may receive operations by the player.

Here, as a method of displaying "12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which periodic changes may occur, for example, the modes shown in Fig. 284 (A) to (D) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which "the portion (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving portion of "12F operation portion A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 284 (A), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 284 (B) to (D)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will appear repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 12F time A.

Also, as a method of displaying the "12F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" as an image display in which a periodic change can occur, for example, the modes shown in Fig. 284(a) to (d) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which "the portion (button model image BMG) modeled after the operation receiving portion of the 12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 284(a), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 284(b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will repeatedly appear in a form requiring a predetermined period of 12F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 12F reception period, each "operation receiving part" in the "12F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "12F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the periodic 12F time A and the periodic 12F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, because they are set to a longer time than the "periodic 13F time A" displayed during the 13F reception period described below, during the 12F reception period, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than during the 13F reception period.

In the 12F reception period according to this embodiment, the 12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 12F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG) are made invisible when the timing tl3 at which the 12F reception period ends arrives, if no operation is performed by the player, as shown in Figs. 312(f) and (g).

When "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing tl2 when the 12th F reception period occurs, it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for timing tl2 when the 12th F reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in Fig. 284 (A) and (a), for example, until timing tl2 arrives.

In this example, the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" begin to be displayed behind the "12th F premonition performance display" while the "12th F premonition performance display" is being displayed, and begin to change periodically. Note that the 12th F premonition performance display may have its display range reduced over time, as in the 2nd F premonition performance display ZFD shown in Figures 285(a)-(d).

The "12th F premonition display" in this example may also be executed by both "mode ZFD-1" that is displayed so as to overlap the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" in front of them, and "mode ZFD-2" that is displayed so as to overlap the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" in the same manner as the 2nd F premonition display ZFD shown in Figs. 285(a) to (d). In other words, in this case, the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed behind the "mode ZFD-1" of the "12th F premonition display", but are displayed in front of the "mode ZFD-2" of the "12th F premonition display". Note that mode ZFD-2 may not necessarily be provided.

In this configuration, as shown in Figures 282 to 286, the "12th F premonition effect display" starts to be displayed before timing tl2 when the 12th F reception period occurs, and is not hidden even when timing tl3 arrives when the set time set for the 12th F reception period has elapsed (timing tl3 when the 12th F reception period ends without any operation by the player), and can continue to be displayed.

In this regard, the reduction rate of the display area of "Aspect ZFD-1" of the "12th F Premonition Performance Display" may be set to be greater than that of "Aspect ZFD-2" after the display of the "12th F Premonition Performance Display" begins. This allows the visibility of the "12th F Operation-Related Display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)" and the "12th F Operation-Related Display B (Button Pattern Image BMG)" to be gradually improved even while the display of the "12th F Premonition Performance Display" is (continuously) being performed. The reduction rate of the display area of "Aspect ZFD-1" may be "100%", and the reduction rate of the display area of "Aspect ZFD-2" may be "0%".

Incidentally, the 12F reception period in this embodiment occurs while the first background image HK1 is being displayed as a "background image" on the performance display device 1600, and no background change occurs from the first background image HK1 while the 12F reception period continues. The first background image HK1 need only be one in which no background change occurs from the first background image HK1 while the 12F reception period continues, and it does not necessarily have to be one that is displayed before the 12F reception period occurs. For example, it may be one that is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the 12F reception period occurs.

The term "background image" refers to an image that can be displayed even in a situation where the post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation acceptance during the acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) is not displayed on the performance display device 1600, and that is displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. The "background image" may be one in which the display changes periodically, or one in which only one display appears without changing. Therefore, "background change" means that such a display pattern switches to another display pattern, and if it changes periodically, it means that the periodic change switches to another periodic change.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, a specific light-emitting section (not shown) capable of emitting light in one of a plurality of light-emitting modes is provided on the game board 5. During the 12F reception period, the specific light-emitting section emits light in a first light-emitting mode among the plurality of light-emitting modes, and the specific light-emitting section does not change from the first light-emitting mode to another light-emitting mode while the 12F reception period continues. The first light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting section may be one that does not change from the first light-emitting mode to another light-emitting mode while the 12F reception period continues, and may not necessarily be executed before the 12F reception period occurs. For example, it may be one that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light-emitting mode that occurs when the 12F reception period occurs.

Note that a "light emission mode" refers to a light emission pattern, and may be one in which the light emission changes periodically, or one in which the light emission does not change and only one light emission appears. Therefore, a "change in the light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and in the case of a periodic change, it means that the periodic change switches to another periodic change. In addition, a "non-light emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes."

In addition, in the 12F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 312, if no operation is performed by the player, the first background image HK1 continues to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 and the first light emission mode continues to be executed in the specific light emission unit even after the 12F reception period ends. However, a background change may occur from the first background image HK1 when the 12F reception period ends. Also, the first light emission mode may change to a different light emission mode when the 12F reception period ends.

In contrast to this, the example shown in FIG. 311 assumes that the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made to the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tl2A within the 12th F acceptance period. In this example, the operation acceptance is made based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but this is not limiting, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" may be realized by other methods.

Here, illustrations of the performance contents related to the 12th F reception period are omitted, but they may be realized, for example, as the performance shown in Figures 285 and 286. Below, a case where the performance contents related to the 12th F reception period are realized as the performance shown in Figures 285 and 286 is explained, but some of the performance contents will be omitted as they have already been explained with reference to Figures 285 and 286. Also, if both the 2nd F reception period and the 12th F reception period are prepared for the pachinko machine 1, the performances for each will be realized as different performance contents.

In other words, in this case, when the first operation is accepted for the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tl2A within the 12th F acceptance period, as shown in Figures 311 (i) and (k) and 285 (c), one of the post-12th F acceptance changes B will be a "depiction of the magic value (the area filled in for the "Magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "0" to "1")" and a "depiction of the wizard MT saving MP" (post-12th F acceptance display UB1).

In this example, if an operation is performed on "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 12th F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 311 (k)). In other words, in this case, the "wizard MT" is depicted secretly saving MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, the satisfaction (dramatic effect) of the operation is low, which can arouse anxiety, such as "Is it okay to continue performing such operations?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 12th F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the 12th F post-reception display UB (such as a "representation of an increase in magic value (the area filled in around the "Magic" decorative display)" or a "representation of the wizard MT saving MP") when operating the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 12th F reception period is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "12th F premonition presentation display," but is displayed in front of it when they overlap. In this presentation example, the "12th F premonition presentation display" includes "mode ZFD-1" and "mode ZFD-2," and the 12th F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of either of them. With this configuration, the absence of an audible output sound after acceptance can raise concerns such as "Is it okay to continue with this operation?", while still effectively suggesting that the operation acceptance itself is being carried out properly.

Note that such "change B after 12F reception" may further include a performance change different from the 12F reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, such "change B after 12F reception" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized with only one of the performance elements described above.

In addition, the execution time of the "12th F post-acceptance display UB" in response to an operation acceptance on the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set to be longer than the time set as the acceptance period. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation acceptances on the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are performed while the 12th F post-acceptance display UB in response to the previous operation on the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 311, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tl2B (the timing shown in FIG. 285(d)) during the 12th F reception period. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 311(i), (k) and FIG. 285(d), one of the 12th F post-reception changes B is a depiction of "the magic value (the area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "1" to "2")" and "the wizard MT further saving MP" (12th F post-reception display UB2). However, as mentioned above, in this case, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 311(k)).

In this example, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tl2C (the timing shown in FIG. 286(e)) during the 12th F reception period. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 311(i), (k) and 286(e), not only is the post-reception output sound not audible, but a new display (mode) does not appear as the 12th F post-reception display UB (no change in display).

In this example, when the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) during the 12F reception period, "no new display appears as the 12F post-reception display UB (no change in display)". Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 12F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, no new display may be displayed as the 12F post-reception display UB (no change in display). In short, such an event (no new display appears as the 12F post-reception display UB despite an operation being performed on the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 12F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 12F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation appears (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to grow stronger as the remaining time of the 12F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 12F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the 12F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes the player feel even more uneasy.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 311, 285, and 286 are based on the assumption that the player has given up on the "initial game strategy (timing tl2A-tl2C)" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and has switched to a "new game strategy" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "12th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)", which can bring about the final presentation result with just one operation.

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 311(a), (h), and (i), it is assumed that an operation is performed on "12th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tl2D within the 12th F reception period while a 12th F post-reception display UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2" or of the wizard MT further accumulating MP) is being displayed in response to an operation received on "12th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)."

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tl2D during the 12th F reception period, a 12th F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the 12th F post-reception changes A, the 12th F reception period is terminated based on the operation (see Fig. 311 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 311 (h) and (k) and Fig. 286 (f) and (i), a "12th F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, and a "12th F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further a 12th F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in Figs. 286(f) and (i), the 12th F effect display EF in this example begins to be displayed when none of the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" and "12th F premonition display" are in the hidden state, and is displayed so as to appear to overlap from in front of the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that corresponds to the "12th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" on the operating side.

When an operation is performed on the "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 12F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will not be displayed based on this.

The "12th F post-acceptance display UA" in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "12th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 12th F acceptance period may show a mode UA-1 (Fig. 286 (f)-(h)) with a relatively high expectation level (proportion of winning a jackpot), or a mode UA-2 (Fig. 286 (i)-(k)) with a lower expectation level (proportion of winning a jackpot) than the above mode. As described above, when the 12th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed, the corresponding "12th F post-acceptance output sound A" is also audibly output, but the "12th F post-acceptance output sound A" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the expectation level.

In this regard, when a relatively highly anticipated pattern UA-1 appears as the "12th F post-reception display UA", a "12th F effect display EF-1" is displayed, which is a different pattern from when a relatively lowly anticipated pattern UA-2 appears as the "12th F post-reception display UA", as shown in FIG. 286(f).

In other words, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 appears as the "12th F post-reception display UA", the first mode EF-1 (see FIG. 286(f)) is displayed as the 12th F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 will appear as the "12th F post-reception display UA".

In contrast, when mode UA-2, which has a relatively low expectation, appears as the "12th F post-reception display UA", the 12th F effect display EF is displayed in a different manner from when mode UA-1, which has a relatively high expectation, appears as the "12th F post-reception display UA", as shown in Figures 286 (i) to (k).

In other words, when the relatively low expectation mode UA-2 appears as the "12th F post-reception display UA", the second effect mode EF-2 (see FIG. 286(i)) is displayed as the 12th F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively low expectation mode UA-2 will appear as the "12th F post-reception display UA".

Furthermore, during the 12F reception period according to this embodiment, the periodic changes of "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on the operation of "12F operation part A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in Figs. 311 and 286. Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves.

In addition, during the 12F reception period in this embodiment, the "12F premonition performance display" is also made invisible based on an operation on the "12F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," as shown in FIG. 286. However, the "12F premonition performance display" is not made invisible as a result of an operation on the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

In this example, in the state immediately after the operation is accepted (the state in which the 12F effect display EF is displayed) (see FIG. 286(f) and (i)), the "12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)", and "12F premonition display" are not hidden, and the "12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 12F effect display EF. After this, the "12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)", and "12F premonition display" are made to be ...

Here, the "12th F post-reception display UA" is displayed behind the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)," "12th F effect display EF," and "decorative pattern SZ," making the "12th F post-reception display UA" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed (see Figures 286 (f) and (i)). However, as the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)," "12th F effect display EF," and the like are made non-display, the visibility of the "12th F post-reception display UA" gradually improves. Also, as mentioned above, by checking the state of the 12th F effect display EF while it is being displayed, it is easy to recognize whether the "12th F post-reception display UA" is being displayed in the state UA-1, which has a high expectation, or the state UA-2, which has a low expectation.

The "12th floor post-reception display UA" in this example will progress in content depending on the expectation level states UA-1 and UA-2, as shown in Figures 286 (h) and (k).

In addition, during the 12F reception period in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 311(d) (omitted from FIGS. 285 and 286), the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is not switched to another background image (background change) during the 12F reception period as a result of an operation on "12F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," nor is it switched to another background image (background change) during the 12F reception period as a result of an operation on "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

However, instead of this, during the 12F reception period, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is not switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on "12F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 12F reception period, but may be switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on "12F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the 12F reception period. Furthermore, during the 12F reception period, there may be both cases where the background image is switched to another (background change) in response to an operation on "12F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and cases where it is not switched to (background change).

In this regard, during the 12F reception period according to this embodiment, the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting unit (here, the first light emission mode) may be switched (light emission changed) to another light emission mode (here, light emission mode P) in response to an operation on "12F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 12F reception period (timing tl2D), but will not be switched (light emission changed) to another light emission mode in response to an operation on "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 12F reception period (timings tl2A to tl2C).

However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 311(e), the light emission mode of a specific light-emitting unit (here, the first light emission mode) may be switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, light emission mode P) triggered by an operation on "12F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" during the 12F reception period, or may not be switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, light emission mode P), but may not be switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, light emission mode P) triggered by an operation on "12F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 12F reception period.

In addition, in the 12F reception period, as shown in FIG. 311(j), a 12F operation-related sound a is output in connection with the occurrence. The 12F operation-related sound a in this example is output as the above-mentioned "reception-permissible sound", and may be selectively audibly output as either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2". For example, when the "first permissible sound a1" is audibly output as the 12F operation-related sound a upon the occurrence of the 12F reception period, it is desirable to set it so that it suggests that the expectation (proportion) of a jackpot is higher than when the "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 12F operation-related sound a.

Incidentally, during the 12F reception period, when an operation is received for the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" while either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is being audibly output as the 12F operation-related sound a, the audible output of the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is not interrupted. However, when an operation is received for the "12F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is being audibly output as the 12F operation-related sound a, the audible output of the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" may be interrupted.

In addition, during the 12F reception period, the "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden or the 12F reception period is terminated based on an operation performed on the "12F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, when an operation is performed on the "12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", no matter how many times the operation is performed, this may not be used as a trigger to hide the "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" or terminate the 12F reception period.

For example, when the magic value (the area filled in for the "Magic" decoration display) accumulates to an increased level as a result of repeated operations on the "12th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 12th F reception period, the game may wait until the timing tl3 at which the 12th F reception period ends, and perform an effect of casting a spell and leaving based on the arrival of the timing tl3. In this case, even if the magic value (the area filled in for the "Magic" decoration display) accumulates to an increased level, if the game is set in a state where operation acceptance on the "12th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is permitted until the arrival of the timing tl3, the game player can select whether or not to perform a one-time attack on the BOSS character while the effect of casting a spell and leaving is confirmed, which can increase the game's interest. However, in this case, if an operation is performed on the "12th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the effect of casting a spell and leaving will not be performed regardless of the result of the effect.

Alternatively, a performance determination may be made prior to generating the 12th F reception period, and if no special determination result is obtained as a result of the performance determination, a performance may be executed in which it is predetermined that the magic value (the area filled in for the "Magic" decorative display) will not accumulate to an increased level (the reception period will not end) no matter how many times an operation is performed on "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 12th F reception period. In this case, when an operation is performed on "12th F operation unit A (here, sword decorative body 5001)", the "post-12th F reception display UA" may always be displayed as pattern UA-2, which has a relatively low expectation, or there may be a possibility that pattern UA-1, which has a relatively high expectation, will appear. In this regard, if there is a possibility that the relatively highly anticipated pattern UA-1 will appear when an operation is performed on the "12th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," it can be expected that the decrease in interest in the game will be effectively suppressed when the magic power value is not accumulated to the maximum level no matter how many times the operation is performed on the "12th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

In addition, in this example, the 12th F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP) is not displayed behind the "12th F premonition display" but is also displayed in front of the "12th F post-acceptance display UA" (see Figures 286 (f) and (g)). In this example, when mode UA-1 is displayed as the "12th F post-acceptance display UA", the mode UA-1 is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the 12th F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP), but when mode UA-2 is displayed as the "12th F post-acceptance display UA", the mode UA-2 may also be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the 12th F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP).

In this example, the UB displayed after the 12th floor reception (such as depictions of increasing magic power value and the wizard MT saving MP) is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see Figure 285(d) and Figure 286, etc.), but it may also be displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ.

In addition, in this example of the presentation, the UB displayed after the 12th F reception (such as depictions of the magic power value increasing or the wizard MT saving MP) is not made to be hidden based on the operation performed on the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 12th F reception period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 311(i) and FIG. 285, the 12th F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic power value increasing or the wizard MT saving MP) not only continues to be displayed when the "12th F post-acceptance display UA" or "12th F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation on the "12th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" begins to be displayed, but can also continue to be displayed even when the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" or "12th F effect display EF" are hidden.

In this case, however, the 12th F post-reception display UB (such as a depiction of the magic power value increasing or the wizard MT saving MP) may be made invisible while the "12th F post-reception display UA" is displayed. This makes it possible to appeal to the viewer that the performance can be advanced by accepting an operation (magic by the wizard) on the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," while in fact conveniently suggesting that the performance has advanced by accepting an operation on the "12th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, in the 12F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 311, 285, and 286, when the "12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated, the periodic changes (see Fig. 284) that have appeared up until then in the "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" based on this are continued without being hidden (terminating, interrupting, switching the period, etc.). In other words, in the 12F reception period, the periodic changes in the "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" do not change in display mode before and after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) for the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (period 2F time A, period 2F time B) described above.

In contrast, during the 12F reception period, as shown in Fig. 311 and Fig. 286, when "12F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the periodic changes in "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on this. Here, by hiding "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves, these periodic changes are hidden.

In this example, the gauge image GG is depicted decreasing over time while the 12F reception period is continuing, but this does not necessarily have to be the case.

In addition, even if the "12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which is displayed as the "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" and allows multiple operation receptions is kept in an operated (pressed) state during the 12F reception period, this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see FIG. 311(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to receive multiple operations for the "12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "12F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" during the 12F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

Also, the 12F reception period is originally intended to continue until timing tl3 arrives when there is no operation reception (that would end the reception period), as shown in Figures 311(c) and 312(c), and to end when timing tl3 arrives.

In this regard, the 12F reception period may be generated as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. In other words, in this case, if no operation is accepted to end the reception period in the 12F reception period until the timing tl3 arrives, the same post-reception change A (post-reception display, post-reception output sound, change in the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting unit, etc.) as when an operation is performed on the "12F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the reception period may occur based on the arrival of timing tl3. In this case, the performance corresponding to the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" which requires multiple operations during the 12F reception period and does not have the so-called auto-repeated function enabled cannot be enjoyed unless the player operates it himself, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained in a good way.

In this case, even if "12F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 12F reception period and the 12F reception period does not end and timing tl3 arrives, the same post-reception change A as when "12F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is operated during the reception period may occur based on the arrival of timing tl3. In other words, in this case, while the 12F post-reception display UB (such as a depiction of an increasing magic value or a depiction of the wizard MT saving MP) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and post-reception change A (such as a post-reception display, a post-reception output sound, or a change in the light emission mode of a specific light-emitting unit) occurs.

Figure 313 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 13F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 13F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 314 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 12F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "13th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 13th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 13th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 13th F fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "13th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 313, within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "13th F variation pattern", the above-mentioned 13th F acceptance period (operation permissible state) in which "acceptance of changes after 13th F acceptance (such as displays UA and UB after 13th F acceptance and sound output after 13th F acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tm2, which is the time when 13th F has elapsed since the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on the satisfaction of "condition 13F").

Here, the 13F reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 12F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312), and both the 13F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 13F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) are allowed to accept multiple operations until the 13F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). In this example, the "13F operation part A" used in the 13F reception period is the same operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001) as the "12F operation part A" used in the 12F reception period, but they may be different operation parts. Also, the "13F operation part B" used in the 13F reception period is the same operation part (here, the operation button 410) as the "12F operation part B" used in the 12F reception period, but they may be different operation parts.

And even in such a 13F reception period (period in which multiple operations are permitted), just like the above-mentioned 12F reception period, it is expected that there will be cases in which, for example, after starting to operate 13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, the player will feel anxious when the final result display does not appear, and in the middle of the 13F reception period (period in which multiple operations are permitted), the player will switch from "operation of 13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation of 13F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" to advance the performance.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates a 13th F reception period, it is possible to first execute a premonition display that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given (that the 13th F reception period will occur).

Although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, when a specific timing (not shown) arrives before the occurrence of the 13F reception period, the "13F premonition presentation display" is executed as the premonition presentation display. This "13F premonition presentation display" may be displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 13F operation-related displays A and B are displayed.

That is, in this example, even when the 13F reception period occurs, the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" which can only appear when the 13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is in a state where operation reception is permitted or when this operation reception is permitted, and the "13F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" which can only appear when the 13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is in a state where operation reception is permitted or when this operation reception is permitted are displayed. Note that in this example, the timing when the 13F reception period occurs is the same as the timing when the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed, but this does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed across these timings by starting to display them after the timing when the 13F premonition performance display is displayed and before the timing when the 13F reception period occurs. Alternatively, the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed with a delay to the timing when the 13F reception period occurs.

Note that in this example, the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button imitation image BMG)" are displayed as a "display simulating the 13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and a "display simulating the 13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", respectively, but the display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will begin to be displayed so that they appear to overlap behind the "13F premonition performance display" while the "13F premonition performance display" is being displayed.

In addition, the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as images that may undergo periodic changes. That is, as described above, during the 13F reception period, at least the "13F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" that allows multiple reception of operations by the player and the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" that allows multiple reception of operations are provided as operation sections that may allow reception of operations by the player.

Here, as a method of displaying "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which a periodic change may occur, for example, the manner shown in Fig. 289(A) and (B) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which "the portion (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving portion of 13F operation portion A (here, sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 289(A), and then sequentially displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 289(B)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will appear repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 13F time A.

Also, as a method of displaying the "13F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" as an image display in which a periodic change can occur, for example, the modes shown in Fig. 289(a) to (d) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which "the portion (button model image BMG) modeled after the operation receiving portion of the 13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 289(a), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 289(b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will repeatedly appear in a form requiring a predetermined period of 13F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 13F reception period, each "operation receiving part" in the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "13F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" appears as a depiction moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the "period 13F time A" is set to a time shorter than the "period 12F time A" and "period 12F time B" in the above-mentioned 12F reception period, and the "period 13F time B" in the 13F reception period. Therefore, the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" during the 13F reception period depicts the "operation receiving part" moving up and down within its movable range more quickly than during the above-mentioned 12F reception period. In this case, it is desirable to provide the "13F operation section A" corresponding to the "13F operation-related display A" during the 13F reception period as the same operation section (here, the sword ornament 5001) as the "12F operation section A" corresponding to the "12F operation-related display A" during the 12F reception period, so that, even though the simulated image displays are for the same operation section, the times required for their periodic changes are different from each other.

In the 13F reception period according to this embodiment, the 13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 13F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG) are made invisible when the timing tm3 at which the 13F reception period ends arrives, if no operation is performed by the player, as shown in Figs. 314(f) and (g).

When "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing tm2 when the 13F reception period occurs, it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for timing tm2 when the 13F reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in Fig. 289 (A) and (a), respectively, until timing tm2 arrives.

In this example, the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" begin to appear behind the "13F premonition performance display" while the "13F premonition performance display" is being displayed, and begin to change periodically. Note that in this example, the 13F premonition performance display may be configured to have its display range reduced over time, like the 3F premonition performance display ZFD shown in Figures 290(a)-(e).

The "13F premonition effect display" in this example is composed only of "modes" that are displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)", and "modes" that are displayed so as to appear to overlap behind them are not executed. The "13F premonition effect display" in this example starts to be displayed before timing tm2 when the 13F reception period occurs, and is made invisible before timing tm3 when the set time set for the 13F reception period elapses (timing tm3 when the 13F reception period ends without any operation by the player).

The 13F reception period in this embodiment, like the 12F reception period described above, occurs while the first background image HK1 is being displayed as the "background image" on the performance display device 1600, and no background change occurs from the first background image HK1 while the 13F reception period continues. The first background image HK1 need only be one that does not cause a background change from the first background image HK1 while the 13F reception period continues, and it does not necessarily have to be one that is displayed before the 13F reception period occurs. For example, it may be one that is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the 13F reception period occurs.

Note that a "background image" is an image that can be displayed even in a situation where a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation acceptance during the acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) is not being displayed on the performance display device 1600, and that is displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. Also, a "background image" may be one in which the display changes periodically, or one in which only one display appears without changing. Therefore, "background change" means that such a display pattern switches to another display pattern, and if it changes periodically, it means that the periodic change switches to another periodic change.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light-emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light-emitting modes. During the 13F reception period, the specific light-emitting section emits light in the first light-emitting mode among the plurality of light-emitting modes. However, as will be described later, even during the 13F reception period, when an operation is received on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting section is changed as a result of this. This first light-emitting mode may be emitted before the 13F reception period occurs, or may not be emitted at all. For example, it may be something that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light-emitting mode that occurs when the 13F reception period occurs, as long as it appears at the time when the 13F reception period occurs.

Note that a "light emission mode" refers to a light emission pattern, and may be one in which the light emission changes periodically, or one in which the light emission does not change and only one light emission appears. Therefore, a "change in the light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and in the case of a periodic change, it means that the periodic change switches to another periodic change. In addition, a "non-light emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes."

In addition, during the 13F reception period in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 314, if no operation is performed by the player, the first background image HK1 continues to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 and the first light emission mode continues to be executed in the specific light emission unit even after the 13F reception period has ended. However, a background change may occur from the first background image HK1 when the 13F reception period ends. Also, the first light emission mode may change to a different light emission mode when the 13F reception period ends.

In contrast to this, the example shown in FIG. 313 assumes that the first operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is made to "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tm2A within the 13F acceptance period. In this example, the operation acceptance is made based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but this is not limiting, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" may be realized by other methods.

Here, illustrations of the performance contents related to the 13F reception period are omitted, but they may be realized, for example, as the performance shown in Figures 290 and 291. Below, a case where the performance contents related to the 13F reception period are realized as the performance shown in Figures 290 and 291 will be explained, but some of the performance contents will be omitted as they have already been explained with reference to Figures 290 and 290. Also, if both the 3F reception period and the 13F reception period are prepared for the pachinko machine 1, the performances for each will be realized as different performance contents.

In this case, when the first operation is accepted for the "13th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tm2A within the 13th F acceptance period, as shown in Figures 313(i) and (k) and 290(c), one of the post-13th F acceptance changes B is a depiction of the "magic value (the area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "0" to "1")" and a "depiction of the wizard MT saving MP" (post-13th F acceptance display UB1).

In this example, if an operation is performed on "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period, as in the case of the 12F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 313(k)). That is, in this case, the "wizard MT" is depicted secretly saving MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, the satisfaction (presentational quality) of the operation is low, which can arouse anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue performing such an operation?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the 13F post-reception display UB (such as a "representation of increasing magic power value" or a "representation of the wizard MT saving MP") when operating "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "13F premonition presentation display," but is displayed in front of it when they overlap.

Note that such "change B after reception of the 13th floor" may further include a performance change different from the display UB after reception of the 13th floor (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, such "change B after reception of the 13th floor" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized with only one of the performance elements described above.

In addition, the execution time of the "13F post-reception display UB" in response to the reception of an operation on "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set to be longer than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the second and subsequent receptions of an operation on "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are performed while the 13F post-reception display UB in response to the previous operation on "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is displayed. In contrast, the execution time of the "13F post-reception display UA" in response to the reception of an operation on "13F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is set to be shorter than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, during the 13F reception period, the second and subsequent receptions of operations to the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" may be performed while the 13F post-reception display UA corresponding to the previous operation to the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, or may be performed while the 13F post-reception display UA is not displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 313, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tm2B (when the performance display shown in FIG. 290(d) appears) during the 13F reception period. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 313(i), (k) and FIG. 290(d), one of the 13F post-reception changes B is a depiction of "magic value (area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (magic value changing from "1" to "2")" and "the wizard MT further saving MP" (13F post-reception display UB2). However, as mentioned above, in this case, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 313(k)).

In this example, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tm2C during the 13F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 290(e) appears). However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 313(i), (k) and 290(e), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but a new display (mode) does not appear as the 13F post-reception display UB (no change in display).

In this example, when the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) during the 13F reception period, "no new display appears as the 13F post-reception display UB (no change in display)". Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, no new display (no change in display) may be made as the 13F post-reception display UB. In short, such an event (no new display appears as the 13F post-reception display UB despite an operation being performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 13F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation appears (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to grow stronger as the remaining time of the 13F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 13F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the 13F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes the player feel even more uneasy.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 313, 290, and 291 are based on the assumption that the player has given up on the "initial game strategy (timing tm2A to tm2C)" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and has switched to a "new game strategy" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "13F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" multiple times.

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 313(a), (h), and (i), a situation is assumed in which a 13F post-acceptance display UB2 (here, an illustration of the magic value being set to "2" or an illustration of the wizard MT further accumulating MP) is displayed in response to an operation acceptance for "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," and then the first operation acceptance for "13F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is made at timing tm2D within the 13F acceptance period (a situation in which the performance display shown in Fig. 313(f) is displayed).

In this pachinko machine 1, when the first operation is accepted for the "13th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tm2D within the 13th F acceptance period, change A after the 13th F acceptance can occur, as shown in Figures 313 and 291 (f).

As an example of such a 13F post-acceptance change A, as shown in Figs. 313(h), (k) and 291(f), a "13F post-acceptance output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "13F effect display EF1" is displayed that makes it difficult to see the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting section is changed from the "first light emission mode" to the "light emission mode Q1," and a 13F post-acceptance display UA1 is displayed. Here, as the 13F post-acceptance display UA1, "Hero YS attacks, and the HP of the BOSS character decreases to about 75% remaining" is depicted.

However, as shown in FIG. 313(i), the "13F post-acceptance display UB that was in a displayed state when the first operation was performed on the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is not made invisible when the first operation is received on the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" but continues to be executed. Furthermore, even if the "13F operation-related sound" is in an audible state when the first operation is performed on the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", this will not be made inaudible when the operation is performed.

In response to this, as shown in FIG. 313(f), when the first operation is performed on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was in a state of undergoing a periodic change is made invisible when the first operation is received on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)." Note that at this time, although it is made difficult to see by the "13F effect display EF1," the display of the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself continues, and only the periodic change that had been performed up until that point is temporarily terminated. Note that the periodic change that was once terminated in this way is restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Therefore, the "13F effect display EF1" corresponding to the first operation received on the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed while both the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are displayed, as shown in FIG. 291(f), and is displayed so as to appear to overlap from in front of the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that was operated.

When an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will not be displayed based on this.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 313(a), (h), and (i), various post-acceptance changes A have occurred in response to the previous operation acceptance for "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the 13F post-acceptance display UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2" or a depiction of the wizard MT further saving MP) in response to the operation acceptance for "13F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed. In this case, it is assumed that the second and third operations are accepted for "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timings tm2E and tm2F (the respective timings shown in Figs. 291(g) and (h)) during the 13F acceptance period.

In this pachinko machine 1, even if the second and third operations are accepted for the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timings tm2E and tm2F during the 13F acceptance period (situations in which the performance display shown in Fig. 291 (f) and (g) appears), change A after acceptance of the 13F can occur, as shown in Fig. 313 and Figs. 291 (g) and (h), in the same way as when the first operation is accepted for the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

In particular, the "output sound A1 after 13F acceptance", the "13F effect display EF1", and the "light emission mode Q1" in the specific light-emitting section are designed to appear in the same manner when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. The periodic change in the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once terminated at the previous operation acceptance may be maintained in its terminated state at the time when the second and third operations are accepted, or may be resumed by canceling the terminated state, but when the second and third operations are accepted, this will trigger the end of the periodic change to occur again. In other words, in this case, the periodic change that was once terminated in this way will be resumed from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second and third operations are accepted. In addition, when the "13F post-acceptance output sound A1", "13F effect display EF1", and "light-emitting mode Q1" corresponding to the operation acceptance at the previous operation are in an execution state, the "13F post-acceptance output sound A1", "13F effect display EF1", and "light-emitting mode Q1" corresponding to the operation acceptance at the previous operation are stopped in response to a new operation acceptance, and the "13F post-acceptance output sound A1", "13F effect display EF1", and "light-emitting mode Q1" are each newly executed. The "light-emitting mode Q1" is set to return to the original light-emitting mode (here, the first light-emitting mode) after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In this regard, the "13F post-acceptance display UA" is basically the same as the first operation acceptance (13F post-acceptance display UA1) for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, when the second operation acceptance is made, a "depiction of hero YS attacking and the boss character's HP decreasing to about 50% remaining (13F post-acceptance display UA2)" is displayed (see FIG. 291(g)), and when the third operation acceptance is made, a "depiction of hero YS attacking and the boss character's HP decreasing to about 25% remaining (13F post-acceptance display UA3)" is displayed (see FIG. 291(h)), and so on, with progress being made in the presentation.

In the 13F reception period in this example, the performance (HP reduction of the BOSS character) as the "13F reception post display UA1" is advanced each time an operation is performed on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, the display may or may not be advanced when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", for example, by making the display advance with a predetermined probability based on the result of the judgment (although other methods are also possible). However, when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 13F reception period, unlike when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", even if the display does not advance, the "13F reception post output sound A1" is audibly output, the "13F effect display EF1" is displayed, and the periodic change in the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is terminated.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 311(a), (h), and (i), various post-acceptance changes A have occurred in response to the third acceptance of an operation on "13F operation element A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the 13F post-acceptance display UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2" or a depiction of the wizard MT further accumulating MP) in response to the acceptance of an operation on "13F operation element B (here, the operation button 410)" is still being displayed. In this situation, it is assumed that a fourth operation is accepted on "13F operation element A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tm2G (see Fig. 291(i)) within the 13F acceptance period.

In this pachinko machine 1, when a fourth operation is accepted for the "13F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tm2G within the 13F acceptance period, a change after 13F acceptance A may occur. For example, as one of the changes after 13F acceptance A, first, the 13F acceptance period is ended based on the operation (see Figures 311 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Figures 311 (h), (k) and Figures 291 (f), (l), a "13F post-acceptance output sound A2" corresponding to the operation on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "13F effect display EF2" is displayed that makes it difficult to see the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and further, the light emission mode that had been displayed up until that point in the specific light-emitting section (here, the light emission mode Q1) is ended and appears as "light emission mode Q2," and a 13F post-acceptance display UA4 is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 291(i), the 13F effect display EF2 in this example begins to be displayed when neither the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" nor the "13F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" is in a hidden state, and is displayed so as to appear to overlap from in front of the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that corresponds to the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" on the operating side.

When an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will not be displayed based on this.

...

In this regard, when a relatively highly anticipated pattern UA4-1 appears as the "13th F post-reception display UA4", a "13th F effect display EF2-1" is displayed, which is a different pattern from when a relatively lowly anticipated pattern UA4-2 appears as the "13th F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 291(i).

In other words, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UA4-1 appears as the "13th F post-reception display UA", the first mode EF2-1 (see FIG. 291(i)) is displayed as the 13th F effect display EF2, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UA4-1 will appear as the "13th F post-reception display UA4".

In contrast, when the "13th F post-reception display UA4" shows a relatively low expectation pattern UA4-2, as shown in FIG. 291(l), the "13th F effect display EF2-2" is displayed, which is a different pattern from when the "13th F post-reception display UA4" shows a relatively high expectation pattern UA4-1.

In other words, when the relatively low expectation mode UA4-2 appears as the "13F post-reception display UA4", the second mode EF2-2 (see FIG. 291(l)) is displayed as the 13F effect display EF2, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively low expectation mode UA-2 will appear as the "13F post-reception display UA4". Note that the 13F effect display EF2, both the first mode EF2-1 and the second mode EF2-2, are displayed as image displays different from the 13F effect display EF1.

Furthermore, during the 13F reception period according to this embodiment, the periodic changes of "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on the fourth reception of operation for "13F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in Figs. 313 and 291. Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves.

In this example, in the state immediately after the operation is accepted (the state in which the 13F effect display EF2 is displayed) (see FIG. 291(i) and (l)), the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are not hidden, and the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 13F effect display EF2. After this, the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are made to be ...

Here, the "13F post-reception display UA4" is displayed behind the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "13F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)," and "13F effect display EF2," making the "13F post-reception display UA4" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed (see Figures 291 (i) and (l)). However, as the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "13F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)," "13F effect display EF2," and the like are made non-display, the visibility of the "13F post-reception display UA4" gradually improves. Also, as mentioned above, by checking the state in which the "13th F effect display EF2" is displayed, it is easy to recognize whether the "13th F post-reception display UA4" is displayed in the state UA4-1 with high expectations or the state UA4-2 with low expectations.

The "13th floor post-reception display UA4" in this example will progress in content depending on the expectation levels UA4-1 and UA4-2, as shown in Figures 291(k) and (n).

In addition, during the 13F reception period in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 313(d) (omitted from FIGS. 290 and 291), the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is not switched to another background image (background change) during the 13F reception period as a result of an operation on "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," nor is it switched to another background image (background change) during the 13F reception period as a result of an operation on "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

However, instead of this, during the 13F reception period, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is not switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period, but may be switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on "13F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the 13F reception period. Furthermore, during the 13F reception period, there may be both cases where the background image is switched to another (background change) in response to an operation on "13F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" (for example, an operation at timing tm2G) and cases where it is not switched (background change) (for example, each operation at timing tm2D to tm2F).

In this regard, during the 13F reception period according to this embodiment, the light emission mode of a specific light-emitting unit can be switched (light emission changed) to another light emission mode (here, light emission modes Q1 and Q2) during the 13F reception period as a trigger for operation of "13F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)," as shown in FIG. 313(e), but is not switched (light emission changed) to another light emission mode during the 13F reception period as a trigger for operation of "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)."

In addition, in the 13F reception period, as shown in FIG. 313(j), the 13F operation-related sound a is output in connection with the occurrence. The 13F operation-related sound a in this example is output as the above-mentioned "reception-permitted sound", and may be selectively audibly output as either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2". For example, when the "first permissible sound a1" is audibly output as the 13F operation-related sound a upon the occurrence of the 13F reception period, it is desirable to set it so that it suggests that the expectation (proportion) of a jackpot is higher than when the "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 13F operation-related sound a. In addition, the "first allowable sound a1" which is a form of the 13F operation-related sound a is output as the same sound as the "first allowable sound a1" which is a form of the 12F operation-related sound a described above, and the "second allowable sound a2" which is a form of the 13F operation-related sound a is output as a sound different from the "second allowable sound a2" which is a form of the 12F operation-related sound a described above. However, the "second allowable sound a2" which is a form of the 13F operation-related sound a may also be output as the same sound as the "second allowable sound a2" which is a form of the 12F operation-related sound a described above. In addition, the 13F reception allowable sound does not necessarily have to be output in one of the multiple forms (multiple allowable sounds), and may be output in only one form (one allowable sound).

In this regard, during the 13F reception period, a situation may occur in which an operation is received while the 13F operation-related sound a is being audibly output, but regardless of whether an operation is received for the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," the audible output of the 13F operation-related sound a is not interrupted by this reception.

In addition, during the 13F reception period, based on an operation performed on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden or the 13F reception period is terminated. However, when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)," no matter how many times the operation is performed, this may not be used as a trigger to cause the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" to be hidden or the 13F reception period to be terminated.

For example, when the magic value (area filled in with the "magic" decoration display) is maximized as a result of repeatedly operating the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period, the game may wait until the timing tm3 at which the 13F reception period ends, and perform an effect of casting a spell and leaving based on the arrival of the timing tm3. In this case, even if the magic value is maximized, if the game is set in a state where operation acceptance for the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is permitted until the arrival of the timing tm3, it becomes possible to challenge the BOSS character to make multiple attacks while the effect of casting a spell and leaving is confirmed, which can increase the interest in the game. However, when the 13F post-reception display UA4 is displayed as a result of performing multiple attacks in this way (when the 13F reception period ends), the effect of casting a spell and leaving will no longer be performed.

Alternatively, an effect determination may be made prior to generating the 13F reception period, and if no special determination result is obtained as a result of the effect determination, an effect may be executed in which it is predetermined that the magic value will not accumulate to its maximum (the reception period will not end) no matter how many times an operation is performed on "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period. In this case, when a fourth operation is performed on "13F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)," the "post-13F reception display UA4" may always show pattern UA4-2, which has a relatively low expectation, or there may be a possibility that pattern UA4-1, which has a relatively high expectation, will appear. In this regard, if there is a possibility that the relatively highly anticipated pattern UA4-1 will appear when an operation is performed on the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," it can be expected that the decrease in interest in the game will be effectively suppressed when the magic power value is not accumulated to the maximum level no matter how many times the operation is performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

Also, in this example, the 13F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP) is not displayed behind the "13F premonition display" or the "13F post-acceptance display UA", but is displayed so as to appear overlapped in front of it (see Figures 291 (f)-(n) etc.). Also, in this example, the 13F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic value increasing or the magician MT saving MP) is displayed so as to appear overlapped in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see Figures 290 and 291 etc.), but it may also be displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the decorative pattern SZ.

In addition, in this example of the presentation, the UB displayed after the 13th F reception (such as depictions of the magic power value increasing or the wizard MT saving MP) is not made to be hidden based on the operation performed on the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 13th F reception period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 313(i) and FIG. 291, the 13F post-acceptance display UB (such as a depiction of the magic power value increasing or the wizard MT saving MP) not only continues to be displayed when the "13F post-acceptance display UA4" or "13F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation on the "13F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" begins to be displayed, but can also continue to be displayed even when the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "13F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" or "13F effect display EF" is hidden.

In this case, however, it is desirable, but not essential, to hide the 13th F post-reception display UB (such as depictions of increasing magical power values or the wizard MT saving MP) while the "13th F post-reception display UA4" is displayed. This makes it possible to appeal to the viewer that the performance can be advanced by accepting an operation (magic by the wizard) on the "13th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," while in fact indicating that the performance has advanced by accepting an operation on the "13th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, in the 13F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 313, 290, and 291, when the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated, the periodic changes (see Fig. 289) that have appeared up until then in the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" based on this are continued without being hidden (terminating, interrupting, switching the period, etc.). In other words, in the 13F reception period, the periodic changes in the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" do not change in display mode before and after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted (an operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) for the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (period 13F time A, period 13F time B) described above.

In contrast, during the 13F reception period, as shown in Figures 313 and 291, when the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the periodic changes in the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are hidden based on this. Here, when the first to third operations are accepted for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)" themselves are not hidden, and their periodic changes are hidden (ended); however, when the fourth operation is accepted for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)" themselves are hidden, thereby hiding their periodic changes.

In this example, the gauge image GG is depicted decreasing over time while the 13F reception period is continuing, but this does not necessarily have to be the case.

In addition, even if the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which is displayed as the "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" and allows multiple operation receptions is kept in an operated (pressed) state during the 13F reception period, this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see FIG. 313(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to receive multiple operations for the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "13F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" during the 13F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

However, during the 13F reception period, if the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" which is displayed as the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and allows multiple operation receptions is kept in an operated (pressed) state, operation reception will be performed multiple times (the auto-repeated function is activated and operation reception is automatically repeated every predetermined time) (see FIG. 313(a)). In this performance example, it is assumed that the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is kept in an operated (pressed) state from timing tm2D (the situation shown in FIG. 291(f)), and operation reception will be performed every predetermined time (timing tm2E, tm2F, tm2G).

Also, the 13F reception period is originally intended to continue until timing tm3 arrives if there is no operation reception (that would end the reception period), as shown in Figures 313(c) and 314(c), and to end when timing tm3 arrives.

In this regard, the 13F reception period may be generated as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. In other words, in this case, if the operation reception (here, the fourth operation reception for the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)") that ends the reception period is not performed until the timing tm3 arrives in the 13F reception period, the same post-reception change A as when the operation reception (here, the fourth operation reception for the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)") that ends the reception period by operating the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the reception period may occur based on the arrival of the timing tm3. In this case, the performance corresponding to the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" that requires multiple operations during the 13F reception period and does not have the so-called auto-repeated function enabled cannot be enjoyed unless the player operates it himself, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained in a good way.

In this case, even if "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 13F reception period and the 13F reception period does not end and timing tm3 arrives, the same post-reception change A as when "13F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is operated during the reception period will occur based on the arrival of timing tm3. In other words, in this case, while the 13F post-reception display UB (such as a depiction of an increasing magic value or a depiction of the wizard MT saving MP) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and post-reception change A (such as a post-reception display, a post-reception output sound, or a change in the light emission mode of a specific light-emitting unit) occurs.

In this example, in the 13F reception period, when a predetermined number of operations (here, the fourth time) are performed on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," "operation acceptance to end the reception period" is performed and the 13F post-reception display UA4 is displayed. Alternatively, a judgment may be made when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 13F reception period, and based on the result of the judgment, "operation acceptance to end the reception period" may be performed and the 13F post-reception display UA4 may be displayed, or "operation acceptance that does not end the reception period" may be performed and one of the 13F post-reception displays UA1 to 3 may be displayed. In short, such an event (when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 13F reception period, "operation acceptance to end the reception period" is performed as a trigger) may occur when a predetermined condition is met.

Also, the "13F premonition performance display" in this example is made invisible before timing tm3 arrives. In this regard, the "13F premonition performance display" in this example will not be made invisible as a result of an operation being performed on "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" while the "13F premonition performance display" is displayed. However, with regard to the "13F premonition performance display", if an operation is performed on "13F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" while the "13F premonition performance display" is displayed, this may be a trigger for the "13F premonition performance display" to be made invisible, or it may not be made invisible as a trigger for this. For example, while the "13F premonition performance display" is displayed, if an operation is accepted on the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that ends the 13F reception period, this may be used as a trigger to make the "13F premonition performance display" invisible; however, if an operation is accepted on the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that does not end the 13F reception period, this may not be used as a trigger to make the "13F premonition performance display" invisible.

Figure 315 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 14F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 14F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 316 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 14F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Figures 317 and 318 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the 14F reception period occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win state or time-saving state), and the "14th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 14th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 14th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 14th F fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "14th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), within the execution period of the variable performance related to the "14th F variable pattern", the above-mentioned 14th F acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance of changes after 14th F acceptance (such as displays UA and UB after 14th F acceptance and sound output after 14th F acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tn2 when 14F time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 14F").

Here, in the 14F reception period according to this embodiment, similar to the above-mentioned 13F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314), both the 14F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 14F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) are allowed to accept multiple operations before the 14F reception period ends (multiple operation allowed period). Note that in this example, the "14F operation part A" used in the 14F reception period is the same operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001) as the "12F operation part A" used in the 12F reception period and the "13F operation part A" used in the 13F reception period, but they may be different operation parts. In addition, the "14F operation unit B" used in the 14F reception period is the same operation unit (here, operation button 410) as the "12F operation unit B" used in the 12F reception period and the "13F operation unit B" used in the 13F reception period, but they may be different operation units. In addition, in the 14F reception period, operation reception may be further permitted for an operation unit different from either the 14F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) or the 14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410).

However, as shown in Figs. 315(f), (g) and 317(a), the "14th F reception period" differs from the above-mentioned "13th F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314)" in that, when the "14th F reception period" occurs, none of the operation-related displays corresponding to the operation units (here, the "operation-related display" corresponding to the above-mentioned 14th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the "operation-related display" corresponding to the above-mentioned 14th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)) are displayed. In other words, in this case, the fact that all of the multiple operation units (14th F operation unit A, 14th F operation unit B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given.

In this regard, in the "14th F reception period" according to this example, when the final result display appears as a result of operating 14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) which allows multiple operations, or when a situation occurs where the performance does not progress easily, a performance is realized which can make the player feel as if "there must be another operation unit (14th F operation unit A) that is secretly given an operation opportunity." In other words, in this case, it is easy to cause a situation where the operation target is switched from "operation on 14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 14th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" in order to progress the performance.

In addition, in the "14th F reception period" according to this presentation example, no matter how many times either 14F operation part A or 14F operation part B, which allow multiple operations, is operated, the 14F reception period will not end as a result of this, but will only end when timing tn3 arrives, which is when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the 14F reception period. This allows the player to sense the possibility that there may be other operation parts that are secretly given operation opportunities, by seeing how the 14F reception period will not end as a result of this, no matter how many times it is operated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, first, when the "14th F reception period" is generated, no premonition display is executed prior to the occurrence of the 14th F reception period, which indicates that a state in which operation reception is permitted will occur. Also, as shown in Figures 315, 316, 317(a), etc., even after the 14th F reception period has occurred, basically, the "operation-related display (model image display)" corresponding to the 14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is not displayed, and the "operation-related display (model image display)" corresponding to the 14th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed.

In addition, in this example, when an operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14th F reception period, this triggers the display of the 14th F post-reception display UB. However, at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output.

The 14F reception period in this embodiment, like the 12F reception period and 13F reception period described above, occurs while the first background image HK1 is being displayed as the "background image" on the performance display device 1600, and no background change occurs from the first background image HK1 while the 14F reception period continues. The first background image HK1 only needs to be one in which no background change occurs from the first background image HK1 while the 14F reception period continues, and it does not necessarily have to be one that is displayed before the 14F reception period occurs. For example, it may be one that is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the 14F reception period occurs.

Note that a "background image" is an image that can be displayed even in a situation where a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation acceptance during the acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) is not being displayed on the performance display device 1600, and that is displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. Also, a "background image" may be one in which the display changes periodically, or one in which only one display appears without changing. Therefore, "background change" means that such a display pattern switches to another display pattern, and if it changes periodically, it means that the periodic change switches to another periodic change.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light-emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light-emitting modes. During the 14F reception period, the specific light-emitting section emits light in a first light-emitting mode among the plurality of light-emitting modes, and the specific light-emitting section does not change from the first light-emitting mode to another light-emitting mode while the 14F reception period continues. The first light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting section may not necessarily be executed before the 14F reception period occurs, as long as the first light-emitting mode does not change to another light-emitting mode while the 14F reception period continues. For example, it may appear (be executed) due to a change in the light-emitting mode that occurs when the 14F reception period occurs.

Note that a "light emission mode" refers to a light emission pattern, and may be one in which the light emission changes periodically, or one in which the light emission does not change and only one light emission appears. Therefore, a "change in the light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and in the case of a periodic change, it means that the periodic change switches to another periodic change. In addition, a "non-light emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes."

In addition, during the 14F reception period in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 316, if no operation is performed by the player, the first background image HK1 continues to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 and the first light emission mode continues to be executed in the specific light emission unit even after the 14F reception period has ended. However, a background change may occur from the first background image HK1 when the 14F reception period ends. Also, the first light emission mode may change to a different light emission mode when the 14F reception period ends.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 315 and 317 assume that, while concealing the fact that both operation acceptance for "14F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and operation acceptance for "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are permitted, the first operation is performed for "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tn2A. When the first operation is performed for "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tn2A, this triggers the above-mentioned 14F post-acceptance display UB to be displayed.

Here, during the 14th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," one of the "post-14th F reception changes A" in response to that operation will be a presentation (post-14th F reception display UA) of "what type of equipment will Hero YS be wearing when he appears," and the result can indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). In this example of presentation, the display UA after the 14th floor reception is displayed in one of three ways: "first presentation mode UA1," in which hero YS appears wearing only underwear; "second presentation mode UA2," in which hero YS appears wearing cloth clothing; or "third presentation mode UA3," in which hero YS appears wearing iron armor; "second presentation mode UA2" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "first presentation mode UA1," and "third presentation mode UA3" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "second presentation mode UA2."

In contrast, during the 14F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "14F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," a presentation (post-14F reception display UB) such as "what type of equipment the wizard MT will appear wearing" appears as one of the "post-14F reception changes B" corresponding to the operation. For example, the result may suggest whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). In this presentation example, the display UB after the 14th floor reception is displayed in one of three ways: "first presentation mode UB1," in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick; "second presentation mode UB2," in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod; or "third presentation mode UB3," in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a staff; "second presentation mode UB2" suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than "first presentation mode UB1," and "third presentation mode UB3" suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than "second presentation mode UB2."

In this example, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "14F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the 14F post-reception display UB is displayed, but it is also possible that an operation is performed on the "14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" while the 14F post-reception display UA is displayed. In this case, the 14F post-reception display UB is usually started to be executed in one of the above multiple modes based on the operation reception on the "14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", and the 14F post-reception display UA, which is already in the execution state, does not cause any change or end as a result of this. However, in this case, if the final mode (third performance mode UB3) of the 14F post-reception display UB is displayed, when the operation is performed on the "14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", no visible change (display change) will occur as a result of this.

In this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 317(b) and (c), when the first operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14th F reception period, the 14th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the "14th F post-reception changes B", is executed as the "first presentation mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, if an operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14th F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound will not be audibly output (see FIG. 315(k)). Therefore, even if the wizard MT is depicted as newly appearing equipped with one of the three types above, this, combined with the secrecy, can arouse anxiety, such as "Is it okay to continue performing this operation?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14th F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the post-14th F reception display UB (what type of equipment the wizard MT will appear wearing) when operating the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14th F reception period is not displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in Figures 317 (b) and (c), but is displayed so that it can be seen in front of it when it overlaps.

The "14F post-reception change B" in response to an operation on the "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14F reception period may further include a performance change different from the 14F post-reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, the "14F post-reception change B" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized so that a similar action and effect can be obtained by only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit).

In addition, the execution time of the "14th F post-reception display UB" in response to the reception of an operation on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set to be longer than the time set as the reception period (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second or subsequent operation on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed while the "14th F post-reception display UB" in response to the previous operation on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 317(c) appears).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tn2B within the 14th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 317(c) appears).

In this example, when the second operation is performed on the "14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 14F reception period, as shown in Fig. 315(i), (k) and Fig. 317(d)-(f), the 14F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 14F post-reception changes B, is executed as the "second performance mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod, as shown in Fig. 315(i), (k) and Fig. 317(d)-(f). In this example, the wizard MT (first performance mode UB1), who had been equipped with a stick, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 317(d)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with a rod (second performance mode UB2) (see Fig. 317(e)). However, the method of causing the display change as the 14F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. As mentioned above, even in this case, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see Fig. 315(k)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tn2C within the 14th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 317(f) appears).

In this example, when the third operation is performed on the "14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 14F reception period, as shown in Fig. 315(i), (k) and Fig. 317(g)-(i), the 14F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 14F post-reception changes B, is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a staff. In this example, the wizard MT (second performance mode UB2), who had been equipped with a rod until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 317(g)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with a staff (third performance mode UB3) (see Fig. 317(h)), but the method of causing the display change as the 14F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. As mentioned above, even in this case, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see Fig. 315(k)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315, it is assumed that a fourth operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tn2D within the 14th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 317(i) appears).

However, in this example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14th F reception period, not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but no visible change (state) is made as the 14th F post-reception display UB (14th F post-reception change B) as shown in Figures 315(i), (k), 317(j) and 318(k). In other words, in this case, no visible post-reception change occurs before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14th F reception period, and the performance situation before the fourth operation continues as it was. In addition, at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output.

In this example, the display UB after 14F reception is changed to a specific state or a new state does not appear depending on how many times the 14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is operated during the 14F reception period. Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the 14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) during the 14F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific state or a new state may not appear. In short, such a display change may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Incidentally, in this example, if the "second performance mode UB2" appears as the 14F post-reception display UB, even if you continue to operate only the "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 14F reception period, and if the "third performance mode UB3" appears as the 14F post-reception display UB, even if you continue to operate only the "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" or the "second performance mode UB2" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 14F reception period. Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 14F post-reception display UB. Therefore, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" after the "third operation mode UB3" is displayed, the same situation as the "fourth operation" described above will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 14F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation is displayed (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to gradually grow stronger as the remaining time of the 14F reception period decreases (as the time elapsed since the occurrence of the period increases). In particular, during the 14F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the 14F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes the player feel even more uneasy.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 315, 317, and 318 are based on the assumption that the player has given up on the "initial game strategy (timing tn2A to tn2D)" which aims to advance the presentation by operating "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and has switched to a "new game strategy" which aims to advance the presentation by operating "14th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" multiple times.

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figures 315(a), (h), and (i), it is assumed that a first operation is performed on "14F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tn2E within the 14F reception period while the 14F post-reception display UB3 is displayed in response to the reception of an operation on "14F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" (the situation shown in Figure 318(k)).

In this pachinko machine 1, if the first operation is accepted for the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tn2E within the 14th F acceptance period, change A after 14th F acceptance can occur.

As an example of such a 14F post-acceptance change A, as shown in Figs. 315(h), (k) and 318(l), a "14F post-acceptance output sound A" is audibly output in response to the first operation of the "14F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and a 14F post-acceptance display UA is displayed. Here, the 14F post-acceptance display UA is a "first performance mode UA1" in which hero YS appears wearing only underwear. However, as shown in Figs. 318(l) and (m), the "14F post-acceptance display UA (what type of equipment hero YS will appear wearing)" is displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, unlike the above-mentioned "14F post-acceptance display UB".

In this example, the "output sound A after 14th F reception" is output as a sound that will not be output as a result of any operation reception being made to any operation unit during the 12th F reception period or 13th F reception period described above.

Furthermore, for the "14F post-reception change A" in response to an operation on the "14F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 14F reception period, including the second or subsequent operation described below, a performance change different from the 14F post-reception display UA (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit) may be further performed. Alternatively, the "14F post-reception change A" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized so that a similar action and effect can be obtained with only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit).

In addition, in this example of the performance, as shown in Figures 315(i) and 318(l) and (m), the first operation is performed on the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the "14th F post-reception display UB" is displayed. However, the "14th F post-reception display UB" does not become hidden when the first operation is received on the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" but continues to be executed.

Here, "14F post-acceptance change A (14F post-acceptance display UA)" in response to the acceptance of an operation on "14F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is different from "14F post-acceptance change B (14F post-acceptance display UB)" in that its execution state is terminated in a short period of time within the acceptance period and is put into a non-executing (hidden) state.

Therefore, the second or subsequent operation on the "14th F operation section A (here, operation button 410)" may be performed while the "14th F post-acceptance display UA" corresponding to the previous operation on the "14th F operation section A (here, operation button 410)" is already in a non-executed (hidden) state, and in this case, just as when the first operation on the "14th F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is accepted, the "14th F post-acceptance display UA (what type of equipment will hero YS appear wearing)" will begin to be executed while the 14th F post-acceptance display UA is not displayed.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 315(h), it is assumed that a second operation is performed on "14th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tn2F within the 14th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 318(m) appears). Note that in this performance example, it is assumed that each operation from the second onwards on "14th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is performed while the "14th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the previous operation is displayed.

In this example, when the second operation is performed on the "14F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 14F reception period, as shown in Fig. 315 (h), (k) and Fig. 318 (n) to (p), the 14F post-reception display UA as one of the 14F post-reception changes A is executed as the "second performance mode UA2" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. In this example, the hero YS (first performance mode UA1), who had only worn underwear until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 318 (n)), and then depicted as reappearing wearing cloth clothes (second performance mode UA2) (see Fig. 318 (o)), but the method of causing the display change as the 14F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, the post-reception output sound is audibly output as described above (see Fig. 315 (k)). Furthermore, even when a second operation is accepted for the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "14th F post-acceptance display UB" will not be made invisible as a result, but will continue to be executed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315(h), it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tn2G within the 14th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 318(p) appears).

In this example, when the third operation is performed on the "14F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 14F reception period, as shown in Fig. 315 (h), (k) and Fig. 318 (q) to (s), the 14F post-reception display UA, which is one of the 14F post-reception changes A, is executed as the "third performance mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor, as shown in Fig. 315 (h), (k) and Fig. 318 (q) to (s). In this example, the hero YS (second performance mode UA2), who had been wearing cloth clothes until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 318 (q)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with iron armor (third performance mode UA3) (see Fig. 318 (r)), but the method of causing the display change as the 14F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, the post-reception output sound is audibly output as described above (see Fig. 315 (k)). Furthermore, even when a third operation is accepted for the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "14th F post-acceptance display UB" will not be made invisible as a result, but will continue to be executed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315(h), it is assumed that a fourth operation is performed on the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tn2H during the 14th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 318(s) appears).

In this example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "14F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 14F reception period, as shown in Fig. 315 (h), (k) and Fig. 318 (t) to (v), the 14F post-reception display UA, which is one of the 14F post-reception changes A, is executed as the "third performance mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. In this example, the hero YS (third performance mode UA3), who had been equipped with iron armor until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 318 (t)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with iron armor (third performance mode UA3) (see Fig. 318 (u)), but the method of causing the display change as the 14F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, the post-reception output sound is audibly output as described above (see Fig. 315 (k)). Furthermore, even when a fourth operation is accepted for the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "14th F post-acceptance display UB" will not be made invisible as a result, but will continue to be executed.

In this case, during the 14F reception period, when a fourth operation is performed on the "14F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "third performance mode UA3" as the post-14F reception display UA that had been in execution until then is interrupted, and a performance appears in which the "third performance mode UA3" as the post-14F reception display UA begins to be executed again.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315(h), it is assumed that the fifth operation is performed on the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tn2I during the 14th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 318(v) appears).

In this example, when the fifth operation is performed on the "14F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 14F reception period, as shown in Fig. 315 (h), (k) and Fig. 318 (w) to (y), the 14F post-reception display UA, which is one of the 14F post-reception changes A, is executed as the "third performance mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. In this example, the hero YS (third performance mode UA3), who had been equipped with iron armor until then, is depicted as moving off the display screen once (see Fig. 318 (w)), and then depicted as reappearing equipped with iron armor (third performance mode UA3) (see Fig. 318 (x)), but the method of causing the display change as the 14F post-reception display UA is not limited to this. In this case, the post-reception output sound is audibly output as described above (see Fig. 315 (k)). Furthermore, even when the fifth operation is accepted for the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "14th F post-acceptance display UB" will not be made invisible as a result, but will continue to be executed.

In this case, during the 14F reception period, when a fifth operation is performed on the "14F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the "third performance mode UA3" as the post-14F reception display UA that had been in execution up until that point will be interrupted, just as it would be if a fourth operation were performed, and a performance will appear in which the "third performance mode UA3" as the post-14F reception display UA begins to be executed again.

In this example, the display after 14F reception UA is "changed to a specific state" or "the same state appears again" depending on how many times an operation is performed on "14F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 14F reception period. However, instead of this, a judgment may be made when an operation is performed on "14F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 14F reception period, and based on the result of this judgment, the display may be "changed to a specific state" or "the same state may appear again." In short, such a display change may occur when each of the predetermined conditions is met.

Incidentally, in this example, if the "second performance mode UA2" appears as the display UA after the 14F reception, the "first performance mode UA1" will not appear if an operation is subsequently accepted within the 14F reception period, and if the "third performance mode UA3" appears as the display UA after the 14F reception, the "first performance mode UA1" or the "second performance mode UA2" will not appear if an operation is subsequently accepted within the 14F reception period. Therefore, the "third performance mode UA3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the display UA after the 14F reception. Therefore, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "14F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" after the "third performance mode UA3" is displayed, the same situation as the "fourth operation" or "fifth operation" described above will appear.

The "14th F reception post-output sound" can be output in the same manner regardless of the number of times the operation is accepted. However, it may be audibly output in different manners depending on the manner of the "14th F reception post-change A (14th F reception post-display UA)."

Also, in this example presentation, if "14F post-reception change A (14F post-reception display UA)" appears in response to an operation being performed on "14F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" during the 14F reception period, and "14F post-reception change B (14F post-reception display UB)" appears in response to an operation being performed on "14F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14F reception period, then regardless of the timing of these operations, the execution state of "14F post-reception change A (14F post-reception display UA)" will end before the execution state of "14F post-reception change B (14F post-reception display UB)" ends.

In addition, during the 14F reception period in this embodiment, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is not switched to another background image (background change) during the 14F reception period as a result of an operation on "14F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," as shown in FIG. 315(d), FIG. 317, and FIG. 318, nor is it switched to another background image (background change) during the 14F reception period as a result of an operation on "14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

However, instead of this, during the 14F reception period, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is not switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14F reception period, but may be switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on "14F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the 14F reception period. Furthermore, during the 14F reception period, there may be both cases where the background image is switched to another (background change) in response to an operation on "14F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" (for example, an operation at timing tn2G) and cases where it is not switched (background change) (for example, each operation at timings tn2D to tn2F).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 315(e), during the 14F reception period in this embodiment, the light emission mode of a specific light-emitting unit (here, the first light emission mode) may be switched (light emission changed) to another light emission mode (here, light emission modes A, B, C) triggered by an operation on "14F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" during the 14F reception period (timings tn2E, tn2F, tn2G) or may not be switched (light emission changed) to another light emission mode (for example, operations at timings tn2H, tn2I). However, during the 14F reception period, the light emission mode is not switched (light emission changed) to another light emission mode triggered by an operation on "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)".

However, during the 14F reception period (see FIG. 315) in this embodiment, if the operation on the "14F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" does not trigger a switch to a different light emission mode (light emission change) (for example, operations at timings tn2H and tn2I), the light emission mode that had been displayed up until then (here, light emission mode C) will be re-output from the beginning.

In contrast, during the 13F reception period (see FIG. 313) according to this embodiment, if the operation on the "13F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" does not trigger a switch to a different light emission mode (light emission change) (for example, operations at timings tm2D, tn2E, and tn2F), the process of re-outputting the previously displayed light emission mode (here, the first light emission mode) from the beginning is not performed as described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, even during the 14F reception period (see FIG. 315), if the operation on the "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is not triggered by switching to another light emission mode (light emission change) (for example, operations at timings tn2A, tn2B, tn2C, and tn2D), the process of re-outputting the light emission mode that had been displayed up until then (here, the first light emission mode) is not performed from the beginning. This is also true when the "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 13F reception period (see FIG. 313).

In addition, during the 14th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 315(j), no operation-related sound associated with its occurrence is output, and no display is made indicating the remaining time.

In addition, in this performance example, the 14th F post-reception display UA is not displayed in front of the decorative pattern SZ so that it appears to overlap it, but is displayed behind it (see Figures 318 (l)-(y) etc.). In contrast, the 14th F post-reception display UB is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to it.

In addition, in this example, the 14th floor post-reception display UB is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ. However, instead of this, it may be displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ.

Also, in this example presentation, the 14th F post-reception display UB is not made to be hidden based on an operation performed on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 14th F reception period. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figures 315(i) and 318, the 14th F post-reception display UB can continue to be displayed at the point when the "14th F post-reception display UA4" begins to be displayed in response to an operation on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

In this case, however, it is desirable, but not essential, to make the 14th F post-reception display UB invisible while the "14th F post-reception display UA4" is displayed. This makes it possible to appeal to the viewer that it is possible to progress the performance by accepting an operation (magic by the wizard) on the "14th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," while in fact preferably suggesting that the performance has progressed by accepting an operation on the "14th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, even if the "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed) during the 14F reception period, this will not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions will not be automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function will not be enabled) (see FIG. 315(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operation receptions for the "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "14F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)".

However, during the 14F reception period, if the "14F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is continuously operated (pressed), this will result in multiple operation receptions (the auto-repeated function is activated and operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (see FIG. 315(a)).

As shown in FIG. 315(c), the 14F reception period continues until timing tn3 arrives and ends only when timing tn3 arrives. In this regard, the 14F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 316, if no operation is performed during the 14F reception period, the 14F reception period ends without any changes in the display or sound output related to the reception period.

In this example, during the 14F reception period, the final display mode UA3 appears as the 14F post-reception display UA when a predetermined number of operations (here, the third time) are performed on the "14F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)." Alternatively, a judgment may be made when an operation is performed on the "14F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 14F reception period, and based on the result of this judgment, an "operation acceptance to display the final display mode UA3" is performed, and the final display mode UA3 is displayed.

Figure 319 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 15F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 15F reception period occurs, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 320 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 15F reception period occurs but the player does not perform an operation. Figure 321 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the 15F reception period occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "15th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 15th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 15th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 15th F fluctuation pattern) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "15th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 319(a), within the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "15th F variable pattern", the above-mentioned 15th F acceptance period (valid period) can be generated, in which "acceptance of changes after 15th F acceptance (such as displays UA and UB after 15th F acceptance and sound output after 15th F acceptance)" is permitted, based on the arrival of timing to2, at which 15F time has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 15F").

Here, in the 15F reception period according to this embodiment, the 15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is allowed to receive only one operation until the 15F reception period ends, and the 15F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations until the 15F reception period ends. Note that in this example, the "15F operation part A" used in the 15F reception period is the same operation part (here, the sword decoration 5001) as the "12F operation part A" used in the 12F reception period, the "13F operation part A" used in the 13F reception period, and the "14F operation part A" used in the 14F reception period, but they may be different operation parts. In addition, the "15F operation unit B" used in the 15F reception period is the same operation unit (here, operation button 410) as the "12F operation unit B" used in the 12F reception period, the "13F operation unit B" used in the 13F reception period, and the "14F operation unit B" used in the 14F reception period, but they may be different operation units. In addition, in the 15F reception period, operation reception may be further permitted for an operation unit different from either the 15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) or the 15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410).

In other words, during the 15F reception period, for example, a player may start operating 15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, but may become anxious when the final result display does not appear, and may switch from "operation of 15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation of 15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" midway through the 15F reception period (period during which multiple operations are allowed) in order to progress the presentation.

Also, in the "15th F reception period", as in the above-mentioned "14th F reception period", as shown in Figs. 319(f), (g) and 321(a), when the "15th F reception period" occurs, none of the operation-related displays corresponding to the operation units (here, the "operation-related display" corresponding to the above-mentioned 15th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the "operation-related display" corresponding to the above-mentioned 15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)) are displayed. In other words, in this case, even in the "15th F reception period", the fact that all of the multiple operation units (15th F operation unit A, 15th F operation unit B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, and this is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given.

In this regard, in the "15th F reception period" according to this example, as in the above-mentioned "14th F reception period," when the final result display appears as a result of operating the 15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) which allows multiple operations, or when a situation appears where the performance is not progressing well, a performance is realized which can make the player feel as if "there must be another operation unit (15th F operation unit A) that is secretly given an operation opportunity." In other words, in this case, it is easy to occur that the operation target is switched from "operation on the 15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on the 15th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" in order to progress the performance.

In addition, during the "15th F reception period" in this example, no matter how many times 15th F operation section B, which allows multiple operations, is operated, the 15th F reception period will not end as a result.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, similar to the above-mentioned "14th F reception period," when the "15th F reception period" occurs, no premonition display is executed prior to the occurrence of the 15th F reception period, which indicates that a state in which operation reception is permitted will occur. Also, as shown in Figures 319, 320, 321(a), etc., even after the occurrence of the 15th F reception period, basically, the "operation-related display (model image display)" corresponding to the 15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is not displayed, and the "operation-related display (model image display)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed.

In addition, in this example, when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15th F reception period, this triggers the display of the 15th F post-reception display UB. However, at this time, there are cases where the 15th F post-reception output sound B is audibly output and cases where it is not audibly output.

During the 15F reception period according to this embodiment, the second background image HK2, which is different from the above-mentioned "first background image HK1", is displayed as a "background image" in the performance display device 1600, and no background change occurs from the second background image HK2 while the 15F reception period continues. The second background image HK2 may be one that does not necessarily change from the second background image HK2 while the 15F reception period continues, and may not necessarily be displayed before the 15F reception period occurs. For example, it may be one that is displayed at the time the 15F reception period occurs, such as one that is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the 15F reception period occurs. Although the second background image HK2 according to this example is displayed as an image different from the first background image HK1, they have in common the fact that they depict mountain scenery, making it difficult to recognize which background image is displayed at a glance. However, the form of the second background image HK2 is not necessarily limited to such a form, and may be different.

The term "background image" refers to an image that can be displayed even in a situation where the post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation acceptance during the acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) is not displayed on the performance display device 1600, and that is displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. The "background image" may be one in which the display changes periodically, or one in which only one display appears without changing. Therefore, "background change" means that such a display pattern switches to another display pattern, and if it changes periodically, it means that the periodic change switches to another periodic change.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, a specific light-emitting unit (not shown) capable of emitting light in one of a plurality of light-emitting modes is provided on the game board 5. During the 15F reception period, the specific light-emitting unit emits light in a second light-emitting mode that is different from the above-mentioned "first light-emitting mode" among the above-mentioned plurality of light-emitting modes, and during the duration of the 15F reception period, the specific light-emitting unit does not change from the second light-emitting mode to another light-emitting mode. The second light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting unit may be one that does not change from the first light-emitting mode to another light-emitting mode during the duration of the 15F reception period, and may not necessarily be executed before the 15F reception period occurs. For example, it may be one that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light-emitting mode that occurs when the 15F reception period occurs, or one that appears at the time the 15F reception period occurs.

Note that a "light emission mode" refers to a light emission pattern, and may be one in which the light emission changes periodically, or one in which the light emission does not change and only one light emission appears. Therefore, a "change in the light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and in the case of a periodic change, it means that the periodic change switches to another periodic change. Also, a "non-light emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes." In this case, the "non-light emission mode" may be either the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode.

In addition, in the 15F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 320, if no operation is performed by the player, the second background image HK2 continues to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 and the second light emission mode continues to be executed in the specific light emission unit even after the 15F reception period ends. However, when the 15F reception period ends, a background change may occur from the second background image HK2 (e.g., a change from the second background image HK2 to the first background image HK1, etc.). Also, when the 15F reception period ends, the second light emission mode may change to another light emission mode (e.g., the first light emission mode, etc.).

Here, in this example of the presentation, the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emission mode" also appear during the 12F reception period, the 13F reception period, and the 14F reception period, while the "second background image HK2" and the "second light emission mode" do not appear during the 12F reception period, the 13F reception period, and the 14F reception period.

According to this configuration, it can be said that the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emission mode" are basically (except for the 14F reception period) also appear when the image display (operation-related display) modeled after the sword decoration 5001 is displayed. Therefore, when the 14F reception period occurs, even though the image display (operation-related display) modeled after the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed, it can be expected that the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emission mode" suggest to some extent the possibility that the state is one in which operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 (and further, operation reception for the operation button 410) is permitted.

However, the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emission mode" can appear even when the state is not "a state in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted (and further, a state in which operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted)" or when a determination result that such a state will be reached has not even been obtained (for example, within a fluctuation pattern in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted), so they only do not deny the possibility that a state in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 (and further, operation acceptance for the operation button 410) is permitted, and are not intended to have a significant adverse effect on the confidentiality of the above-mentioned "14th F acceptance period".

In contrast, the "second background image HK2" and the "second light-emitting mode" cannot appear when the image display (operation-related display) imitating the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (when the "second background image HK2" and the "second light-emitting mode" are displayed, the image display (operation-related display) imitating the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed). In other words, in this case, the "second background image HK2" and the "second light-emitting mode" are less related to the image display imitating the sword decoration 5001 than the "first background image HK1" and the "first light-emitting mode", so the "15th F reception period" is expected to function as a reception period (operation-permitted state) with even stronger confidentiality in terms of the state in which operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 (and further, operation reception for the operation button 410) is permitted compared to the above-mentioned "14th F reception period".

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 319 and 321 assume that, while concealing the fact that both operation acceptance for "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and operation acceptance for "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are permitted, the first operation is performed for "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing to 2A. When the first operation is performed for "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing to 2A, this triggers the above-mentioned 15F post-acceptance display UB to be displayed.

Here, during the 15F reception period, when an operation is performed on "15F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)," the following "post-15F reception change A" corresponding to that operation appear: "the background image that was displayed until then (in this example, the second background image HK2) is changed to a different background image (in this example, the third background image HK3)," "the light emission mode that was displayed until then is changed to a different light emission mode (in this example, the third light emission mode)," "a post-15F reception display UA (in this example, summoned beast SJ, etc.) is displayed," and "a 15F operation-related display A corresponding to 15F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001) (here, a modeled image display of sword decoration 5001), and a 15F operation-related display B corresponding to 15F operation section B (here, operation button 410) (here, a modeled image display of operation button 410) are displayed." In this case, for example, multiple patterns may be prepared as the "15th F reception post-display UA (in this example, summoned beast SJ, etc.)" and depending on which pattern appears, it may be possible to indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). However, as the "15th F reception post-change A", only one of the above-mentioned presentation characteristics may be prepared, and only that prepared presentation characteristic may appear.

In any case, during the 15F reception period in this example presentation, when an operation is performed on "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," this not only triggers the end of the 15F reception period, but also the occurrence of a reception period of a different type (operation permitted state) from the 15F reception period, and during this different type of reception period (operation permitted state), while 15F operation-related display A (a model image display that mimics the sword decoration 5001) and 15F operation-related display B (a model image display that mimics the operation button 410) are respectively displayed, operation reception on both "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are permitted. In addition, during the different types of acceptance period (operation permitted state), for example, if an operation is accepted for "15F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)", a post-acceptance change will occur that is different from the "15F post-acceptance change A" that appears when an operation is accepted for "15F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the above 15F acceptance period.

In contrast, during the 15F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," one of the "changes B after 15F reception" in response to that operation is a presentation (post-15F reception display UB) in which "the wizard MT appears holding a wand surrounded by any one of multiple forms of 'aura'." Depending on which form of 'aura' it is, it may be possible to suggest whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be '100%' or '0%). In this example of presentation, the display UB after the 15th floor reception is displayed in one of three ways: "first presentation mode UB1," in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a weak aura; "second presentation mode UB2," in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura; or "third presentation mode UB3," in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a strong aura; "second presentation mode UB2" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "first presentation mode UB1," and "third presentation mode UB3" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "second presentation mode UB2."

As will be described later, this example assumes that the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed during the 15F reception period, and an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)." However, as will be described later, during the 15F reception period, unlike the above-mentioned 14F reception period, the 15F post-reception display UB is made invisible upon reception of an operation on the 15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001).

In this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 321 (b) and (c), when the first operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15th F reception period, the 15th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the "15th F post-reception changes B", is executed as the "first presentation mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a weak aura.

In this regard, in this example, if an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15th F reception period, the corresponding 15th F post-reception output sound B is audibly output (see FIG. 319 (k)). Therefore, during the 15th F reception period, it is easier to recognize that the operation reception of the operation button 410 has been properly performed, compared to when the operation button 410 is operated during the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, or 14th F reception period, and this can reduce feelings of anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue performing this operation?".

Therefore, when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15th F reception period, the post-15th F reception display UB (which aura the wizard MT will appear holding) will not be displayed in front of the decorative pattern SZ, as is the case during the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, and 14th F reception period (see Figure 321). Note that "is not displayed in a manner that is visible in front of the decorative pattern SZ" may mean "during the 15F reception period, both the 15F post-reception display UB and the decorative pattern SZ are displayed, but the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed outside the area in which the decorative pattern SZ can be displayed (displayed in an area where there is no possibility of overlap)," or it may mean "during the 15F reception period, both the 15F post-reception display UB and the decorative pattern SZ are displayed, but the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ," or it may mean "during the 15F reception period, the decorative pattern SZ is not displayed, and the 15F post-reception display UB can be displayed."

The "15F post-reception change B" in response to an operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15F reception period may further include a performance change different from the 15F post-reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, the "15F post-reception change B" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized so that a similar action and effect can be obtained with only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit).

The execution time of the "15F post-reception display UB" corresponding to the operation reception on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is shorter than the time set for the reception period, unlike the 12F reception period, the 13F reception period, and the 14F reception period (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second or subsequent operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" may be performed while the "15F post-reception display UB" corresponding to the previous operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 321(c) is displayed), or while the "15F post-reception display UB" corresponding to the previous operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is hidden (not shown).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 319, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2B within the 15th F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 321(c) appears).

In this example, when the second operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15th F reception period, as shown in Figs. 319(i), (k) and 321(d)-(f), the 15th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 15th F post-reception changes B, is executed as the "second performance mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura. In this example, the wizard MT (first performance mode UB1), who had been holding a staff surrounded by a weak aura, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 321(d)), and then reappearing holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura (second performance mode UB2) (see Fig. 321(e)), but the method of causing the display change as the 15th F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. In this case, too, a 15F post-reception output sound B is audibly output in response to an operation being performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15F reception period (see FIG. 319(k)). This 15F post-reception output sound B may be output as the same sound regardless of how many times the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 15F reception period, or may be output as a different sound.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 319, it is assumed that a third operation is performed on "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2C within the 15F reception period (when the performance display shown in FIG. 321(f) appears).

In this example, when the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated a third time during the 15th F reception period, as shown in Figs. 319(i), (k) and 321(g)-(i), the 15th F reception post-display UB, which is one of the 15th F reception post-changes B, is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a powerful aura. In this example, the wizard MT (second performance mode UB2), who had been holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 321(g)), and then reappearing holding a staff surrounded by a powerful aura (third performance mode UB3) (see Fig. 321(h)). However, the method of causing the display change as the 15th F reception post-display UB is not limited to this. In this case, too, a 15F post-reception output sound B is audibly output in response to an operation being performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15F reception period (see FIG. 319(k)). This 15F post-reception output sound B may be output as the same sound regardless of how many times the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 15F reception period, or may be output as a different sound.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 319, it is assumed that a fourth operation is performed on "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2D within the 15th F reception period (a situation in which the performance display shown in FIG. 321(i) appears).

However, in this performance example, when a fourth operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15th F reception period, not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but no visible change (state) is made in the 15th F post-reception display UB (15th F post-reception change B), as shown in Figures 319(i), (k) and 321(j). In other words, in this case, no visible post-reception change occurs before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15th F reception period, and the performance situation before the fourth operation continues as it was. In addition, at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output.

Incidentally, during the 15F reception period, if the 15F post-reception change B (third performance mode UB3) in response to the third operation is displayed and then hidden over time, and then a fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the third performance mode UB3 is displayed again as the 15F post-reception display UB (15F post-reception change B) (a visible change (mode) occurs), but even in this case, the post-reception output sound may not be audibly output.

In this example, the display UB after 15F reception is changed to a specific state or a new state does not appear depending on how many times the 15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is operated during the 15F reception period. Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the 15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) during the 15F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific state or a new state may not appear. In short, such a display change may occur when a predetermined condition is met.

Incidentally, in this example, if the "second performance mode UB2" appears as the 15F post-reception display UB, even if you continue to operate only the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 15F reception period, and if the "third performance mode UB3" appears as the 15F post-reception display UB, even if you continue to operate only the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" or the "second performance mode UB2" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the 15F reception period. Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 15F post-reception display UB. Therefore, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" after the "third operation mode UB3" is displayed, the same situation as the "fourth operation" described above will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 15F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation appears (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to become stronger as the remaining time of the 15F reception period decreases (the longer the elapsed time since the occurrence). In particular, during the 15F reception period, even if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", there are cases where the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, which makes this feeling of uneasiness even more likely.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 319 and 321 are based on the assumption that the player has given up on the "initial game strategy (timing to 2A to 2D)" which aims to progress the presentation by operating "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and has switched to a "new game strategy" which aims to progress the presentation by operating "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)".

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figures 319(a), (h), and (i), it is assumed that, in a situation (as shown in Figure 321(j)) in which the 15F post-acceptance display UB3 is displayed in response to an operation accepted for "15F operation part B (here, operation button 410)," an operation is made for "15F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2E within the 15F acceptance period.

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2E during the 15th F reception period, a change A after the 15th F reception occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the 15th F reception, the 15th F reception period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 319 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 319 (h), (k) and Fig. 321 (k), a "15th F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, and a "15th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed.

In this example, the summoned beast SJ appears as the "15th F reception post-display UA" in response to the reception of an operation on the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 15th F reception period, but such a 15th F reception post-display UA (summoned beast SJ) may appear in a state where the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) is relatively high, or in a state where the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) is lower than that state. As described above, when the 15th F reception post-display UA is displayed, the corresponding "15th F reception post-output sound A" is also audibly output, but the "15th F reception post-output sound A" may also be audibly output in a state that suggests the expectation level.

In addition, during the 15F reception period in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 319(i) and FIG. 321(j) and (k), when the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to the operation reception for the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)," if an operation is received for the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," this triggers the 15F post-reception display UB to be made invisible.

Furthermore, during the 15F reception period in this embodiment, the background image (here, the second background image HK2) is switched (background changed) to another background image (here, the third background image HK3) in response to an operation on "15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 15F reception period, as shown in Fig. 319(d) and Fig. 321. The third background image HK3 in this example is depicted as a desert landscape, as shown in Fig. 321(k) and the like. Note that during the 15F reception period, the background image is not switched (background changed) to another background image in response to an operation on "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

Furthermore, during the 15F reception period in this embodiment, the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting unit (here, the second light emission mode) is also switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, the third light emission mode) in response to an operation on "15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 15F reception period, as shown in FIG. 319(e). Note that during the 15F reception period, the light emission mode is not switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode in response to an operation on "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 319 (f), (g) and 321 (k), when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 15th F acceptance period, this can trigger the generation of a acceptance period (a new acceptance period after operation) of a different type (e.g., a different change after acceptance) from the 15th F acceptance period. During the reception period for the different type (the new reception period after the operation), not only are both "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" that were permitted for operation reception during the above 15F reception period permitted for operation reception still permitted, but both 15F operation-related display A (here, a model image display of the sword decoration 5001) associated with "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and 15F operation-related display B (here, a model image display of the operation button 410) associated with "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are displayed.

The "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "15thF operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as images that may undergo periodic changes. In other words, during the above-mentioned different types of acceptance period (the new acceptance period after the operation), at least the "15thF operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that allows only one operation acceptance, and the "15thF operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" that allows multiple operations acceptance are prepared as operation sections that may accept operations by the player.

Here, as a method of displaying "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which periodic changes may occur, for example, the modes shown in Fig. 284 (A) to (D) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which "the portion (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving portion of "15F operation portion A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 284 (A), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 284 (B) to (D)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will appear repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 15F time A.

Also, as a method of displaying the "15F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" as an image display in which a periodic change can occur, for example, the modes shown in Fig. 284(a) to (d) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which "the portion (button model image BMG) modeled after the operation receiving portion of the 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 284(a), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 284(b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will repeatedly appear in a form requiring a predetermined period of 15F time B.

According to these configurations, in the above-mentioned different type of reception period (new reception period after operation), each "operation receiving part" in the "15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "15F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the cycle 15F time A and the cycle 15F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since they are set to a longer time than the "cycle 13F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 13F reception period, in the above-mentioned different type of reception period (new reception period after operation), the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 13F reception period.

Then, in the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), as shown in Figures 321 (l) and (m), when an operation is received for "15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception, and when an operation is received for "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception.

However, in this case, when an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," no change in the light emission occurs, whereas when an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)," both a change in the light emission occurs and no change in the light emission may occur. Also, with regard to the background image, regardless of whether an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" or "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the background image itself is not replaced with a different background image (the background is changed); however, when an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)," both a change in the aspect of the background image (for example, a change such as making the background image darker or brighter) and no change in the aspect of the background image (for example, a change such as making the background image darker or brighter) may occur. Note that when an operation is received for the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," this does not trigger a change in the appearance of the background image (for example, the background image is not made darker or brighter).

In this example, it is assumed that during the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is permitted to receive an operation only once, and the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is permitted to receive an operation multiple times, but this is not limited to the above. However, if the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is permitted to receive an operation multiple times during the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), it is desirable to not enable the above-mentioned auto-repeated-tap function.

In addition, during the 15F reception period, as shown in FIG. 319(j), no operation-related sound (reception permission sound) related to its occurrence is output, and no display indicating the remaining time is made. In contrast, during the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), both the 15F operation-related display A (here, a display of an imitation of the sword ornament 5001) and the 15F operation-related display B (here, a display of an imitation of the operation button 410) are displayed, so that the 15F operation-related sound a related to its occurrence is output. However, the display indicating the remaining time may not be displayed during the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation).

In addition, in this performance example, the 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see FIG. 321 (k) etc.). In contrast, as mentioned above, the 15th F post-reception display UB is not displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ due to its relationship with the decorative pattern SZ. This makes it possible to appropriately indicate whether or not a new reception period has occurred.

Also, in this example of presentation, the 15th F post-reception display UB is made to be hidden based on the operation performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 15th F reception period. That is, in this case, as shown in Figures 319(i) and 321, the 15th F post-reception display UB can be made to be hidden at the point in time when the "15th F post-reception display UA" begins to be displayed in response to the operation on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, even if the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed) during the 15F reception period, this will not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions will not be automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function will not be enabled) (see FIG. 319(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operations received on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)".

Furthermore, the 15F reception period is originally intended to continue until timing to3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 320(c), and to end when timing to3 arrives. In this regard, the 15F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 320, if no operation is performed during the 15F reception period, the 15F reception period will end without any changes being made to the display, sound output, or other aspects related to the reception period.

However, the 15F reception period only needs to occur as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. For example, when the 15F reception period ends at timing to3, a background change from the second background image HK2 may occur in a manner different from when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 15F reception period, or a light emission change from the second light emission manner may occur in a manner different from when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 15F reception period.

Furthermore, when such a confidential reception period is provided, the method of concealment is not limited to this. For example, the 15F reception period may be one in which a "section in which operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section)" is included within the reception period (operation-permitted state), and the confidentiality may be released partway through the reception period (operation-permitted state) (first modified example), or the confidentiality may be revealed partway through the reception period (operation-permitted state) (second modified example).

Below, we will explain a modified version of the 15F reception period, but in order to realize the 15F reception period according to such a modified version, it is sufficient to have only those components, of the components described below, that are necessary to obtain the desired effect.

Figures 322 to 324 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 15F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, and instead of the above-mentioned 15F reception period (Figures 319 to 321), a "15F reception period relating to the first modified example" occurs, in which confidentiality is released midway through the reception period (operation permitted state). More specifically, Fig. 322 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", Fig. 323 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", and Fig. 324 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" occurs and the player does not perform an operation. Also, Fig. 325 and Fig. 326 are diagrams showing presentation examples when the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" occurs. In addition, among the configurations related to the "15F reception period for the first modified example," configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as those in the case where the above-mentioned "15F reception period" occurs, including the application of the other examples.

In other words, in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", like the 15F reception period described above (Figs. 319 to 321), 15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is only allowed to receive one operation before the 15F reception period ends, and 15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations before the 15F reception period ends. Also, these other examples of "15F operation unit A" and "15F operation unit B" can be appropriately applied in the same way as the 15F reception period described above.

In this regard, as with the above-mentioned 15F reception period (Figs. 319 to 321), at the time when the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" occurs, as shown in Fig. 325(a), the operation-related display corresponding to the above-mentioned 15F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation-related display corresponding to the above-mentioned 15F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) are not displayed, thereby concealing the fact that there are operation parts in a state in which operation reception is permitted.

Furthermore, in this "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" in the "15F reception period in the first modified example," the "second background image HK2" is displayed as the background image described above, and the "second light emission mode" appears as the light emission mode in the specific light-emitting section described above, which is also the same as in the 15F reception period described above (Figures 319 to 321).

However, as shown in Figures 324(c) and 325(b), in the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example", when a specific timing toX (which may be a predetermined timing, such as the timing when a specific amount of time has passed since the reception period began) occurs within the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example" without any operation being performed by the player, this triggers the end of the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the start of the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)".

More specifically, when a specific timing toX arrives, this triggers the display of the "15F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the "15F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the 15F operation part B (here, the operation button 410). Note that here, the "15F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed in the first aspect A1 of the "15F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," and the "15F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" is displayed in the first aspect B1 of the "15F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" (see Figs. 324(f) and (g) and Fig. 325(b)).

In addition, the first aspect A1 of the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the first aspect B1 of the "15th F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" in this modified example are also displayed as image displays that may show periodic changes.

Here, as a method of displaying the first aspect A1 of the "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which a periodic change may occur, for example, the aspects shown in Fig. 284 (A) to (D) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which the part (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving part of the "15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed in the aspect shown in Fig. 284 (A), and then sequentially displayed in each of the aspects shown in Fig. 284 (B) to (D)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will repeatedly appear in a form requiring a predetermined period of 15F time A.

As a method of displaying the first aspect B1 of the "15F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" as an image display in which a periodic change can occur, for example, the aspects shown in Fig. 284(a) to (d) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which "the part (button model image BMG) modeled on the operation receiving part of the 15F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the aspect shown in Fig. 284(a), and then displayed in each of the aspects shown in Fig. 284(b) to (d) in sequence" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will repeatedly appear in a form requiring a predetermined period of 15F time B.

According to these configurations, in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", each "operation receiving part" in the "15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "15F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the cycle 15F time A and the cycle 15F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since they are set to a longer time than the "cycle 13F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 13F reception period, in the above-mentioned different type reception period (new reception period after the operation), the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 13F reception period.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the first modified example", when the specific timing toX arrives, this triggers a background change from the "second background image HK2" to another background image (here, the "first background image HK1"), and the specific light-emitting section also changes from the "second light-emitting mode" to another light-emitting mode (here, the "first light-emitting mode").

That is, as described above, in this example, the appearance of the "second background image HK2" or the above-mentioned "second light-emitting mode" in the specific light-emitting section means that the image display imitating the sword ornament 5001 (here, the 15th F operation-related display A) is not being displayed (however, this is not a required configuration). Therefore, when the specific timing toX arrives and the image display imitating the sword ornament 5001 (here, the 15th F operation-related display A) is displayed, the appearance of the "second background image HK2" or the above-mentioned "second light-emitting mode" in the specific light-emitting section ends.

In the "15th floor reception period for the first modified example" of this performance example, as shown in Figs. 325(a) and (b), when the specific timing toX arrives, this triggers a change in the background from the "background image depicting mountains and rivers (second background image HK2)" that had been displayed until then to a "background image depicting mountains (first background image HK1)."

Then, when timing to3 arrives without the player performing any operation after the start of the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)," the "15thF reception period for the first modified example" ends, and both the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "15thF operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are hidden, as shown in Figures 324(c), (f), (g) and 325(c).

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) that appeared in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" and the light emission mode in the specific light-emitting section (here, the first light emission mode) are continued even after the arrival of timing to3. Alternatively, the arrival of timing to3 may be used as a trigger to return to the background image (here, the second background image HK2) that appeared in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the light emission mode in the specific light-emitting section (here, the second light emission mode).

In contrast, Figure 322 and Figures 325(a), (d) to (l) show examples of a performance in which, during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", an operation is started on 15F operation section B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations within the "section (non-display section, first section) where operation-related displays are not displayed", but the player becomes anxious when the final result display does not appear, and attempts to progress the performance by switching from "operation on 15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 15F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" midway through the "section (non-display section, first section) where operation-related displays are not displayed".

Here, within the "15th floor reception period according to the first modified example", the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" basically has the same presentation as the above-mentioned "15th floor reception period (Figures 319 to 321)".

For example, in the "section (non-display section, first section)" in this "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which operation-related displays are not displayed, similar to the above-mentioned "14F reception period" and "15F reception period", when the final result display appears as a result of performing an operation on the 15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) which allows multiple operations, or when a situation occurs in which the performance does not progress easily, a performance that can make the player feel that "there must be another operation unit (the 15F operation unit A) that is secretly given an operation opportunity" is realized. In other words, in this case, it is easy to occur that the operation target is switched from "operation on the 15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" to "operation on the 15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" to advance the performance.

In addition, the "15F reception period for the first modified example" in this performance example is also designed so that no matter how many times 15F operation unit B, which allows multiple operations, is operated, the 15F reception period will not end as a result of this.

In addition, in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", like the "14F reception period" and "15F reception period" described above, when the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" occurs, no premonition display is executed that suggests this (that a state in which operation reception is permitted will occur) at a timing prior to the occurrence of the 15F reception period.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "section (non-display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example," this also triggers the display of the 15F post-reception display UB. However, at this time, there are cases where the 15F post-reception output sound B is audibly output and cases where it is not audibly output.

Incidentally, during the "section in which operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period for the first modified example", a second background image HK2 different from the above-mentioned "first background image HK1" is displayed as the "background image" on the performance display device 1600, and no background change occurs from the second background image HK2 while the "section in which operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" continues.

However, as will be described later, in the "section (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which the operation-related display is not displayed, the 15F operation-related display A corresponding to the 15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is not displayed, but for the 15F operation-related display B corresponding to the 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410), the 15F operation-related display B itself or a display similar thereto can be displayed when an operation is received for the 15F operation section B (however, since this is not a required configuration, the section may be one in which the 15F operation-related display B itself or a display similar thereto cannot be displayed). Therefore, the "section (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in this performance example means, more strictly, a section in which at least the 15F operation-related display A of the 15F operation-related display A and the 15F operation-related display B is not displayed. Or, it could be said to mean a section in which neither 15F operation-related display A nor 15F operation-related display B (or a display similar thereto) is displayed, at least unless the player performs an operation.

Here, the second background image HK2 may be one that does not undergo background change during the "section (non-display section, first section) in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which the operation-related display is not displayed, and may not necessarily be displayed before the occurrence of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example". For example, it may be one that is displayed at the time of occurrence of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", such as one that is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the "section (non-display section, first section) in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which the operation-related display is not displayed occurs. The second background image HK2 according to this example is displayed as an image different from the first background image HK1, but they have in common the fact that they depict mountain scenery, making it difficult to recognize which background image is displayed at a glance. However, the aspect of the second background image HK2 is not necessarily limited to such an aspect, and may be different.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, a specific light-emitting unit (not shown) capable of emitting light in one of a plurality of light-emitting modes is provided on the game board 5. In the "section (non-display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", the specific light-emitting unit emits light in a second light-emitting mode different from the "first light-emitting mode" among the plurality of light-emitting modes, and the specific light-emitting unit does not change from the second light-emitting mode to another light-emitting mode while the "section (non-display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" continues. The second light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting unit may be such that it does not change from the second light-emitting mode to another light-emitting mode while the "section (non-display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" continues, and may not necessarily be executed before the occurrence of the "section (non-display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example". For example, it may be something that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 15F reception period occurs, as long as it appears at the time the 15F reception period occurs.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 322 and FIG. 325(a), (d)-(l), it is assumed that the first operation is performed on "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2A while concealing that both operation reception on "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and operation reception on "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are permitted (in a section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)). When the first operation is performed on "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2A, this triggers the display of the 15F post-reception display UB.

Here, during the "15F reception period for the first variant", when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the following may appear as "15F post-reception change A" in response to that operation: "changing the previously displayed background image to another background image (in this example, the third background image HK3)", "changing the previously displayed light emission mode (in this example, the second light emission mode) to another light emission mode (in this example, the third light emission mode)", "displaying a 15F post-reception display UA (in this example, a summoned beast SJ, etc.)", and "displaying a 15F operation-related display A (here, a model image display of the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the 15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), and a 15F operation-related display B (here, a model image display of the operation button 410) corresponding to the 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". In this case, for example, multiple patterns may be prepared as the "15th F reception post-display UA (in this example, summoned beast SJ, etc.)" and depending on which pattern appears, it may be possible to indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). However, as the "15th F reception post-change A", only one of the above-mentioned presentation characteristics may be prepared, and only that prepared presentation characteristic may appear.

In any case, during the "15F reception period for the first modified example", when an operation is performed on "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", not only does this trigger the end of the "15F reception period for the first modified example", but also generates a reception period of a different type (operation permitted state) from the "15F reception period for the first modified example", and during this different type of reception period (operation permitted state), while 15F operation-related display A (a model image display of the sword decoration 5001) and 15F operation-related display B (a model image display of the operation button 410) are respectively displayed, reception of operations on both "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is permitted. In addition, during the different type acceptance period (operation permitted state), for example, if an operation is accepted for the "15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", a post-acceptance change will occur that is different from the "15F post-acceptance change A" that appears when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the above-mentioned "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example".

In contrast to this, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example", when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", as one of the "post-15th F reception changes B" in response to that operation, a presentation (post-15th F reception display UB) appears in which the wizard MT appears holding a wand surrounded by any one of multiple forms of "aura". Depending on which form of "aura" it is, it may be possible to suggest whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). In this example of presentation, the display UB after the 15th floor reception is displayed in one of three ways: "first presentation mode UB1," in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a weak aura; "second presentation mode UB2," in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura; or "third presentation mode UB3," in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a strong aura; "second presentation mode UB2" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "first presentation mode UB1," and "third presentation mode UB3" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "second presentation mode UB2."

As will be described later, in this performance example, when the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed during the "15F reception period for the first variant," if an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," unlike the case of the 14F reception period described above, the 15F post-reception display UB is made invisible upon reception of the operation on the 15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001).

In this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 325 (d) and (e), when the first operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period for the first modified example," the 15F post-reception display UB, which is one of the "15F post-reception changes B," is executed as the "first presentation mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a weak aura.

In this regard, in this example, if an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "section (non-display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example," the corresponding post-reception output sound B is audibly output (see FIG. 322 (k)).

Moreover, in this example, as described above, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example," the reception of the operation triggers the display of the first aspect B1 of the 15F operation-related display B itself (scheduled to be displayed) in the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)," or a display similar to this. Note that in this example, as shown in Figures 325(d) and (e), an approximation image KG with the inside of its outline filled in is displayed without periodic change as a display similar to the first aspect B1 of the 15F operation-related display B.

According to this configuration, during the "15F reception period for the first modified example", the image (in this performance example, an image similar to this) displayed in the "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" appears in advance within the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)", which is expected to ideally indicate that when a predetermined time has passed (when a specific timing toX arrives), the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" will end and the "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" will begin.

In addition, in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example," it is easier to recognize that the operation reception of the operation button 410 has been properly performed, compared to when the operation button 410 is operated in the 12F reception period, the 13F reception period, or the 14F reception period, and therefore anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue this operation?" can be suppressed.

Therefore, with regard to the 15F post-reception display UB (which aura the wizard MT will appear holding as the wand) when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F reception period for the first variant", unlike the 12F reception period, 13F reception period, and 14F reception period, it will not be displayed in a manner that is visible in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see Figures 325 and 326). In addition, "not displayed in a manner that can be seen in front of the decorative pattern SZ" may mean "both the 15F post-reception display UB and the decorative pattern SZ are displayed during the '15F reception period according to the first modified example', but the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed outside the area in which the decorative pattern SZ can be displayed (displayed in an area where there is no possibility of overlapping)" or it may mean "both the 15F post-reception display UB and the decorative pattern SZ are displayed during the '15F reception period according to the first modified example', but the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ" or it may mean "during the '15F reception period according to the first modified example', the decorative pattern SZ is not displayed, and the 15F post-reception display UB can be displayed."

The "15F post-reception change B" in response to an operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" may further include a performance change different from the 15F post-reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, the "15F post-reception change B" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized so that a similar action and effect can be obtained by only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit).

Furthermore, the execution time of the "15F post-reception display UB" or "approximate image KG" in response to the operation reception on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is shorter than the time set as the reception period, unlike the 12F reception period, the 13F reception period, and the 14F reception period (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second or subsequent operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" may be performed while the "15F post-reception display UB" or "approximate image KG" in response to the previous operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 321(e) is displayed), or while the "15F post-reception display UB" or "approximate image KG" in response to the previous operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is hidden (not shown).

The examples shown in Figure 322 and Figures 325(a), (d) to (l) assume that a second operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2B (a situation in which the performance display shown in Figure 325(e) is displayed) within the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example."

In this performance example, when the second operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section (non-display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example," as shown in Figs. 322(i), (k) and 325(f)-(h), the 15F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 15F post-reception changes B, is executed as the "second performance mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura. In this example, the wizard MT (first performance mode UB1), who had been holding a staff surrounded by a weak aura, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 325(f)), and then reappearing holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura (second performance mode UB2) (see Fig. 325(g)), but the method of causing the display change as the 15F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. In this case as well, post-acceptance output sound B is audibly output in response to an operation being performed on "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example" (see FIG. 322(k)). This post-acceptance output sound B may be output as the same sound regardless of how many times "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example", or may be output as a different sound.

In this example, the "approximate image KG" displayed at timing to2B (the situation in which the performance display shown in FIG. 325(e) appears) will not undergo any display change as a result of a second operation being performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". However, if the "approximate image KG" is made invisible within the "15th F reception period for the first variant" and then an operation is performed again on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", the reception of that operation will trigger the "approximate image KG" to be displayed again.

The examples shown in Figure 322 and Figures 325(a), (d) to (l) assume that a third operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2C (when the performance display shown in Figure 325(h) is displayed) within the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example."

In this performance example, when the third operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section (non-display section, first section) in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which the operation-related display is not displayed," the 15F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 15F post-reception changes B, is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a strong aura, as shown in Figs. 322(i), (k) and 325(i) to (k). In this example, the wizard MT (second performance mode UB2), who had been holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 325(i)), and then reappearing holding a staff surrounded by a strong aura (third performance mode UB3) (see Fig. 325(j)), but the method of causing the display change as the 15F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. In this case as well, post-acceptance output sound B is audibly output in response to an operation being performed on "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example" (see FIG. 322(k)). This post-acceptance output sound B may be output as the same sound regardless of how many times "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 15F acceptance period, or may be output as a different sound.

In this example, the "approximate image KG" that was displayed at timing to2C (the situation in which the display shown in FIG. 325(h) appears) does not undergo any display change as a result of the third operation being performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)."

The examples shown in Figure 322 and Figures 325(a), (d) to (l) assume that a fourth operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2D (when the performance display shown in Figure 325(k) is displayed) within the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example."

However, in this performance example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section (non-display section, first section) where the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but no apparent change (mode) appears as the 15F post-reception display UB (15F post-reception change B) as shown in Figures 322 (i) and (k) and 325 (l). In other words, in this case, there is no apparent post-reception change before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section (non-display section, first section) where the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", and the performance situation before the fourth operation is continued as it was. In addition, at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output.

Incidentally, in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", when the 15F post-reception change B (third performance mode UB3) in response to the third operation is displayed and then hidden over time, if a fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", the third performance mode UB3 is displayed again as the 15F post-reception display UB (15F post-reception change B) (a visible change (mode) occurs), but even in this case, the post-reception output sound may not be audibly output.

In this example, the display after 15F reception UB is changed to a specific state or a new state does not appear depending on how many times the 15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is operated during the 15F reception period according to the first modification. Alternatively, a determination may be made when the 15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is operated during the section (non-display section, first section) during which the operation-related display is not displayed during the 15F reception period according to the first modification, and the display may be changed to a specific state or a new state may not appear based on the result of the determination. In short, such a display change may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

By the way, in this performance example, if the "second performance mode UB2" appears as the display UB after the 15F reception, even if you continue to operate only the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the "15F reception period for the first modified example." If the "third performance mode UB3" appears as the display UB after the 15F reception, even if you continue to operate only the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" or the "second performance mode UB2" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the "15F reception period for the first modified example." Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the display UB after the 15F reception. Therefore, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" after the "third operation mode UB3" is displayed, the same situation as the "fourth operation" described above will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even in the "15F reception period according to the first modification," if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound in response to the operation is displayed (no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)." This feeling of uneasiness is likely to become stronger as the remaining time of the "15F reception period according to the first modification" decreases (as the time elapsed since the occurrence of the period becomes longer). In particular, in the "15F reception period according to the first modification," there are cases in which the post-reception output sound is not audibly output even if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," making this feeling of uneasiness even more likely.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figure 322 and Figures 325 (a), (d) to (l) are based on the assumption that the player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timings to2A to to2D)" which aims to progress the presentation by operating "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times before timing toX arrives, and switches to a "new game strategy" which aims to progress the presentation by operating "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)".

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 322(a), (h), and (i), in a situation where a 15F post-acceptance display UB3 is displayed in response to an operation accepted for "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" (the situation shown in Fig. 325(l)), it is assumed that an operation is performed for "15F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2E within the "section (non-display section, first section) in the "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example where operation-related displays are not displayed" (non-display section).

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2E in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example," a change A after the 15F reception occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the 15F reception, first, the 15F reception period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 322 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 322 (h), (k) and Fig. 326 (r), a "15F reception post output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, and a "15F reception post display UA" corresponding to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed.

In this example, the summoned beast SJ appears as the "15th F reception display UA" in response to the reception of an operation on the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example", but such a 15th F reception display UA (summoned beast SJ) may appear in a state where the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) is relatively high, or in a state where the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) is lower than that state. Also, as described above, when the 15th F reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "15th F reception output sound A" is also audibly output, but the "15th F reception output sound A" may also be audibly output in a state that suggests the expectation level.

In addition, during the "15F reception period for the first modified example", as shown in Figures 322(i), 325(l), and 326(r), when a 15F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to an operation reception for "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", if an operation is received for "15F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)", this triggers the 15F post-reception display UB to be hidden.

Furthermore, in the "section (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example" where operation-related displays are not displayed, the background image (here, the second background image HK2) is switched (background changed) to another background image (here, the third background image HK3) in response to an operation on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" as shown in Figs. 322(d), 325(l), and 326(r). Note that in the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example", the background image is not switched (background changed) to another background image in response to an operation on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

Furthermore, in the "section (non-display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting unit (here, the second light emission mode) is also switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, the third light emission mode) in response to an operation on the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" as shown in FIG. 322(e). Note that in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", the light emission mode is not switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode in response to an operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)".

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 322 (f), (g) and 326 (r), when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the "15th F acceptance period relating to the first modified example", this can trigger the generation of a acceptance period (a new acceptance period after operation) of a different type (e.g., a different change after acceptance) from the 15th F acceptance period. During the reception period for the different type (the new reception period after the operation), not only are both "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" that were permitted to receive operations during the "15F reception period for the first modified example" permitted to receive operations, but also 15F operation-related display A (here, a model image display of the sword decoration 5001) related to "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and 15F operation-related display B (here, a model image display of the operation button 410) related to "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are both displayed.

However, during such different types of reception periods (new reception periods after the operation), the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" will be displayed in the second aspect A2 (a different aspect from the above-mentioned first aspect A1) of the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," and the "15thF operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" will be displayed in the second aspect B2 (a different aspect from the above-mentioned first aspect B1) of the "15thF operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" (see, for example, Figures 322(f) and (g) and Figure 326(r)).

In addition, the second aspect A2 of the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the second aspect B2 of the "15th F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" in this modified example are also displayed as image displays that may show periodic changes.

Here, as a method of displaying the second aspect A2 of the "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which a periodic change may occur, for example, the aspects shown in Fig. 284 (A) to (D) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which the part (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving part of the "15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed in the aspect shown in Fig. 284 (A), and then sequentially displayed in each of the aspects shown in Fig. 284 (B) to (D)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will repeatedly appear in a form requiring a predetermined period of 15F time A.

Also, as a method of displaying the second aspect B2 of the "15F operation-related display B (button-simulated image BMG)" as an image display in which a periodic change can occur, for example, the aspects shown in Fig. 284(a) to (d) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which "the part (button-simulated image BMG) simulating the operation receiving part of the 15F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the aspect shown in Fig. 284(a), and then sequentially displayed in each of the aspects shown in Fig. 284(b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will repeatedly appear in a form requiring a predetermined period of 15F time B.

According to these configurations, even in a different type of reception period (a new reception period after the operation), each "operation receiving part" in the "15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "15F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the cycle 15F time A and the cycle 15F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since they are set to a longer time than the "cycle 13F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 13F reception period, in the above-mentioned different type of reception period (a new reception period after the operation), the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 13F reception period.

In addition, in this example, the cycle time is the same for the first aspect A1 and the second aspect A2 of the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", but it may be different, and the cycle time is the same for the first aspect B1 and the second aspect B2 of the "15th F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)", but it may be different. In other words, the difference between the first aspect A1 and the second aspect A2 of the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the difference between the first aspect B1 and the second aspect B2 of the "15th F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)" may be, for example, only a difference in display position within the performance display device 1600, or a difference in size in addition to this. In short, it is sufficient that the difference in appearance can be recognized when the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" or the "15th F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)" is displayed in the first aspect and when it is displayed in the second aspect.

Then, in the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), as shown in Figures 326 (s) and (t), when an operation is received for "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception, and when an operation is received for "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception.

However, in this case, when an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," no change in the light emission occurs, whereas when an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)," both a change in the light emission occurs and no change in the light emission may occur. Also, with regard to the background image, regardless of whether an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" or "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the background image itself is not replaced with a different background image (the background is changed); however, when an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)," both a change in the aspect of the background image (for example, a change such as making the background image darker or brighter) and no change in the aspect of the background image (for example, a change such as making the background image darker or brighter) may occur. Note that when an operation is received for the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," this does not trigger a change in the appearance of the background image (for example, making the background image darker or brighter).

In this example, it is assumed that during the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is permitted to receive an operation only once, and the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is permitted to receive an operation multiple times, but this is not limited to the above. However, if the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is permitted to receive an operation multiple times during the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), it is desirable to not enable the above-mentioned auto-repeated-tap function.

On the other hand, the examples shown in Figure 323, Figures 325(a), (d)-(h), and Figures 326(m)-(q) are examples in which operations are accepted for the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timings to2a and to2b in the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)", but the above-mentioned timing toX is assumed to arrive while the "second performance mode UB2" is being displayed as the above-mentioned 15th F post-acceptance display UB in response to the second operation acceptance.

The contents of the performance when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timings to2a and to2b in the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" have been described with reference to Figs. 325(a), (b) to (h) in the examples shown in Figs. 322 and 325(a), (d) to (l), and therefore will not be described here.

In this case, in the examples shown in Fig. 323 and Fig. 325(a), (d)-(h), and Fig. 326(m)-(q), when the 15th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (the situation shown in Fig. 325(h)), the arrival of timing toX triggers the end of the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example" and the start of the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)."

When the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" is started in this way, first, as shown in Figs. 323(f), (g) and 326(m), the arrival of a specific timing toX triggers the display of the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the "15th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the 15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410). Note that here, the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed in the first aspect A1 of the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," and the "15th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is displayed in the first aspect B1 of the "15th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)."

Also, as shown in Figures 323(d) and 326(m), when timing toX arrives, the background image changes from the "second background image HK2 (here, a display depicting mountains and rivers as shown in Figure 325(l))" to the "first background image HK1 (here, a display depicting mountains as shown in Figure 326(m))". The "first background image HK1" thus appeared will be continuously displayed as long as it is within the "section (display section, second section) in which the operation-related display is displayed".

As shown in FIG. 323(e), when the timing toX arrives, the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting unit changes from the "second light-emitting mode" to the "first light-emitting mode." The "first light-emitting mode" of the specific light-emitting unit thus appeared is then continuously executed while the "interval in which the operation-related display is displayed (display interval, second interval)" is in effect.

However, the first aspect A1 of the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," the first aspect B1 of the "15thF operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)," the "first background image HK1," and the "first light emission aspect" of the specific light-emitting section have been described above with reference to FIG. 325(b), so further details will be omitted.

In addition, in this performance example, if the specific timing toX arrives while the 15th F post-reception display UB2 or the approximate image KG is displayed, these displays will continue to be displayed even after the start of the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" (see Figures 323 (i) and 326 (m)), and will be hidden when their display time (execution time) has elapsed. Although not shown in the figures, it goes without saying that if the specific timing toX arrives while the 15th F post-reception display UB2 or the approximate image KG is not displayed, the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" will begin without the 15th F post-reception display UB2 or the approximate image KG being displayed.

The examples shown in Figure 323, Figure 325 (a), (d)-(h), and Figure 326 (m)-(q) assume that a third operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2c (the situation in which the performance display shown in Figure 326 (m) appears) within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example".

In this example, when the third operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", as shown in Fig. 323(i), (k) and Fig. 326(n) to (p), the 15th F post-acceptance display UB, which is one of the 15th F post-acceptance changes B, is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a powerful aura, and the post-acceptance output sound B is audibly output (see Fig. 323(k)). The contents of these effects are the same as those when the third operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" (see Fig. 325(i) to (k)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this case, the "approximate image KG" that was displayed at timing to2c (when the effect display shown in FIG. 326(m) appears) does not undergo any display change as a result of an operation being performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)."

However, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", unlike when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)", the 15F post-acceptance change B occurs while the first aspect A1 of the "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the first aspect B1 of the "15F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are displayed, and while the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emission aspect" are appearing (see Figs. 323(d)-(g), (i) and Figs. 326(n)-(q)).

The examples shown in Figure 323, Figures 325(a), (d)-(h), and Figures 326(m)-(q) assume that a fourth operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2d (the situation in which the performance display shown in Figure 326(p) appears) within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example".

However, in this example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" in the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example," not only is the post-reception output sound not audible, but no visible change (mode) appears as the 15F post-reception display UB (15F post-reception change B), as shown in Figures 323(i) and (k) and 326(q). The content of this performance is the same as when the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" (see Figure 325(l)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

However, as mentioned above, even in the "15F reception period according to the first modification," if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound in response to the operation is displayed (no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)." This feeling of uneasiness is likely to become stronger as the remaining time of the "15F reception period according to the first modification" decreases (as the time elapsed since the occurrence of the period becomes longer). In particular, in the "15F reception period according to the first modification," there are cases in which the post-reception output sound is not audibly output even if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," making this feeling of uneasiness even more likely.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figure 323, Figure 325 (a), (d)-(h), and Figure 326 (m)-(q) are based on the assumption that the player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timings to2a-to2d)" of aiming to advance the presentation by operating "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" and switches to a "new game strategy" of aiming to advance the presentation by operating "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)".

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 323(a), (h), and (i), in a situation where a 15F post-acceptance display UB3 is displayed in response to an operation accepted for "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" (the situation shown in Fig. 326(q)), it is assumed that an operation is performed for "15F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2e within the "section (display section, second section) in which an operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example."

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2e within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", it is basically the same as when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2E within the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", and the performance content shown in FIG. 326(r) will appear in response to the reception of the operation.

In this case, as one of the post-15F reception changes A, first, the 15F reception period ends based on the operation (see Fig. 323 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 323 (h), (k) and Fig. 326 (r), the "post-15F reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is audibly output, and the "post-15F reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is displayed, as described above.

Also, as shown in Figs. 323(f) and (g) and Figs. 326(q) and (r), upon receipt of an operation at timing to2e, the first aspect A1 of the "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the first aspect B1 of the "15F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are hidden, and the second aspect A2 of the "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the second aspect B2 of the "15F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 323(d) and 326(q) and (r), upon receipt of an operation at timing to2e, the background image is changed from the "first background image HK1" to the "third background image HK3 (here, a display depicting the desert as shown in Figure 326(r))."

Also, as shown in Figure 323 (e) and Figures 326 (q) and (r), the light emission state of the specific light-emitting element changes from the "first light emission state" to the "third light emission state" upon receipt of an operation at timing to2e.

Also, as shown in Figures 323(i) and 326(q) and (r), the reception of an operation at timing to2e triggers the display UB after reception of the 15th F and the approximate image KG to be made invisible.

In this case too, the operation acceptance at timing to2e triggers the occurrence of an acceptance period (a new acceptance period after the operation) of a different type from the 15F acceptance period (e.g., a different change after acceptance); however, this acceptance period (a new acceptance period after the operation) is as described when an operation is performed on the "15F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2E in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)," so a detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, even in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", as shown in FIG. 324(j), at any timing before or after the timing toX at which the operation-related image is displayed, no operation-related sound (reception permission sound) related to the occurrence is output, and no display indicating the remaining time is made. In contrast, in the above-mentioned different type of reception period (new reception period after the operation), the 15F operation-related sound a related to the occurrence is output. However, the display indicating the remaining time may not be displayed even in the different type of reception period (new reception period after the operation).

In addition, in this performance example, the 15F post-reception display UA is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see FIG. 326(r) and the like). In contrast, as described above, the 15F post-reception display UB is not displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. However, instead of this, the 15F post-reception display UB may be displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in the "section (non-display section, first section) where the operation-related display is not displayed" during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", but to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in the "section (display section, second section) where the operation-related display is displayed".

Also, in this example of presentation, the 15F post-reception display UB is made to be hidden based on the operation performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example." In other words, in this case, as shown in Figures 322(i), 323(i), 325, and 326, the 15F post-reception display UB can be made to be hidden at the point when the "15F post-reception display UA" begins to be displayed in response to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, even if the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed) during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see Fig. 322(b) and Fig. 323(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operation receptions for the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)".

Furthermore, the 15F reception period is originally intended to continue until the arrival of timing to3, as shown in FIG. 324(c), and to end based on the arrival of timing to3. In this regard, the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 324, when no operation is performed during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" ends without any changes being made to the display, sound output, or other aspects related to the reception period.

However, the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" only needs to occur as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. For example, when the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" ends at timing to3, a background change from the first background image HK1 may occur in a manner different from when an operation is received for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", or a light emission change from the first light emission mode may occur in a manner different from when an operation is received for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example".

Figures 327 to 331 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 15F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, and instead of the above-mentioned 15F reception period (Figures 319 to 321), a "15F reception period relating to the second modified example" occurs, in which confidentiality becomes apparent midway through the reception period (operation permitted state). More specifically, Fig. 327 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", Fig. 328 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)" in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", and Fig. 329 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" occurs and the player does not perform an operation. Also, Fig. 330 and Fig. 331 are diagrams showing examples of presentations when the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" occurs. In addition, among the configurations related to the "15F reception period for the second modified example," configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as those in the case where the above-mentioned "15F reception period" occurs, including the application of the other examples.

That is, in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", like the above-mentioned 15F reception period (Figs. 319 to 321) and the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example (Figs. 322 to 326)", the 15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to receive only one operation until the end of the 15F reception period, and the 15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations until the end of the 15F reception period. In addition, these other examples of the "15F operation unit A" and the "15F operation unit B" can be appropriately applied in the same way as the above-mentioned 15F reception period and the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example".

In this regard, the "15F reception period for the second modified example", like the "15F reception period for the first modified example (FIGS. 322 to 326)" described above, includes both a "section in which the operation-related display is displayed" and a "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed", and confidentiality is apparent in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed".

In addition, in this "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed" in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", the "second background image HK2" is displayed as the background image described above, and the "second light emission mode" appears as the light emission mode in the specific light-emitting section described above, similarly to the above-mentioned 15F reception period (Figs. 319 to 321) and the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example (Figs. 322 to 326)".

However, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example", the order in which the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed" and the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed" occur is reversed from that in the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example (Figures 322 to 326)" described above.

That is, during the "15F reception period for the second modified example", at the time of occurrence, as shown in Figures 329(c), (f), (g) and 330(a), a "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and a "15F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are displayed. In this case, the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed in the first aspect A1 of the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," and the "15thF operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is displayed in the first aspect B1 of the "15thF operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" (see Figs. 329(f) and (g) and Fig. 330(a)).

Note that the first aspect A1 of the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the first aspect B1 of the "15thF operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" in this modified example are the same as those displayed during the "15thF reception period in the first modified example," so a description of them will be omitted.

In this regard, as shown in Figs. 329(c), (f), (g) and 330(a), in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", when a specific timing toY (for example, a predetermined timing such as a timing when a specific time has passed since the reception period occurred) arrives within the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" without any operation being performed by the player, this triggers the end of the "period in which the operation-related display is displayed (display period, first period)" and the start of the "period in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display period, second period)". In other words, in this case, the "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "15F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are hidden, and thus, although the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" itself continues, it is concealed that there is an operation section in a state in which operation reception is permitted.

During the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" until the specific timing toY arrives during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," the "first background image HK1" is displayed as the background image, and the "first light-emitting mode" appears in the specific light-emitting section (see FIG. 330(a)). However, when the specific timing toY arrives (when the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)" begins), this triggers a background change from the "first background image HK1" to a different background image (here, the "second background image HK2"), and the specific light-emitting section also changes from the "first light-emitting mode" to a different light-emitting mode (here, the "second light-emitting mode"). In this example of the presentation, as shown in Figures 330(a) and (b), when the specific timing toY arrives, this triggers a change in the background from the previously displayed "background image depicting a mountain (first background image HK1)" to a "background image depicting a mountain and a river (second background image HK2)."

Note that the "first background image HK1" and the "first light-emitting mode" of the specific light-emitting section, and the "second background image HK2" and the "second light-emitting mode" of the specific light-emitting section are as explained above in the "15F reception period" and "15F reception period for the first modified example", so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Then, when timing to3 arrives without the player performing any operation after the start of the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)," the "15F reception period for the second modified example" ends, as shown in Figures 329(c), (f), and (g).

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, the background image (here, the second background image HK2) that appeared in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)" and the light emission mode in the specific light-emitting section (here, the second light emission mode) are continued even after the arrival of timing to3. Alternatively, the arrival of timing to3 may be used as a trigger to return to the background image (here, the first background image HK1) that appeared in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" and the light emission mode in the specific light-emitting section (here, the first light emission mode).

In contrast, Figure 327 and Figures 330(a), (c) to (k) show examples of a performance in which, during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," an operation is started on 15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations within the "section (display section, first section) in which operation-related displays are displayed," but the player begins to feel uneasy when the final result display does not appear, and attempts to progress the performance by switching from "operation on 15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" midway through the "section (display section, first section) in which operation-related displays are displayed."

Here, the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" is also designed so that no matter how many times the 15F operation unit B, which allows multiple operations, is operated, the 15F reception period will not end as a result of this.

In addition, in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", like the "14F reception period" and "15F reception period" described above, when the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" occurs, no premonition display is executed that suggests this (that a state in which operation reception is permitted will occur) at a timing prior to the occurrence of the 15F reception period.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," this also triggers the display of the 15F post-reception display UB. However, at this time, there are cases where the 15F post-reception output sound B is audibly output and cases where it is not audibly output.

Incidentally, during the "section (display section, first section) in which an operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period for the second modified example", the above-mentioned "first background image HK1" is displayed as the "background image" on the performance display device 1600, and no background change occurs from the first background image HK1 while the "section (display section, first section) in which an operation-related display is displayed" continues.

Here, the first background image HK1 may be one that does not undergo background change from the first background image HK1 during the duration of the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", and may not necessarily be displayed before the occurrence of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example". For example, it may be one that is displayed at the time of occurrence of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", such as one that is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" occurs. The first background image HK1 according to this example is displayed as an image different from the second background image HK2, but they have in common the fact that they depict mountain scenery, making it difficult to recognize which background image is displayed at a glance. However, the form of the first background image HK1 is not necessarily limited to such a form, and may be different.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light-emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light-emitting modes. In the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", the specific light-emitting section emits light in the "first light-emitting mode" of the plurality of light-emitting modes, and the specific light-emitting section does not change from the first light-emitting mode to another light-emitting mode while the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" continues. The first light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting section only needs to be such that the first light-emitting mode does not change to another light-emitting mode while the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" continues, and may not necessarily be executed before the occurrence of the "section (non-display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example". For example, it may be something that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 15F reception period occurs, as long as it appears at the time the 15F reception period occurs.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figure 327 and Figures 330 (a), (c) to (k) suggest that both operation acceptance for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and operation acceptance for "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are permitted (in the section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed), and assume that the first operation is performed for "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2A. When the first operation is performed for "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2A, this triggers the display of the above-mentioned 15F post-acceptance display UB.

Here, during the "15F reception period according to the second variant", when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the following may appear as "15F post-reception change A" in response to that operation: "changing the previously displayed background image to another background image (in this example, the third background image HK3)", "changing the previously displayed light emission mode to another light emission mode (in this example, the third light emission mode)", "displaying a 15F post-reception display UA (in this example, a summoned beast SJ, etc.)", and "displaying a 15F operation-related display A corresponding to the 15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) (here, a modeled image display of the sword decoration 5001), and a 15F operation-related display B corresponding to the 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) (here, a modeled image display of the operation button 410)". In this case, for example, multiple patterns may be prepared as the "15th F reception post-display UA (in this example, summoned beast SJ, etc.)" and depending on which pattern appears, it may be possible to indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). However, as the "15th F reception post-change A", only one of the above-mentioned presentation characteristics may be prepared, and only that prepared presentation characteristic may appear.

In any case, during the "15F reception period for the second modified example", when an operation is performed on "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", not only does this trigger the end of the "15F reception period for the second modified example", but also generates a reception period of a different type (operation permitted state) from the "15F reception period for the second modified example", and during this different type of reception period (operation permitted state), while 15F operation-related display A (a model image display of the sword decoration 5001) and 15F operation-related display B (a model image display of the operation button 410) are respectively displayed, reception of operations on both "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are permitted. In addition, during the different type of acceptance period (operation permitted state), for example, if an operation is accepted for the "15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", a post-acceptance change will occur that is different from the "15F post-acceptance change A" that appears when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the above-mentioned "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example".

In contrast to this, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example", when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", as one of the "post-15th F reception changes B" in response to that operation, a presentation (post-15th F reception display UB) appears in which the wizard MT appears holding a wand surrounded by any one of multiple forms of "aura". Depending on which form of "aura" it is, it may be possible to suggest whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%). In this example of presentation, the display UB after the 15th floor reception is displayed in one of three ways: "first presentation mode UB1," in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a weak aura; "second presentation mode UB2," in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura; or "third presentation mode UB3," in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a strong aura; "second presentation mode UB2" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "first presentation mode UB1," and "third presentation mode UB3" suggests that there is a higher probability of a jackpot than "second presentation mode UB2."

As will be described later, when the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," if an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)," unlike the case of the above-mentioned 14F reception period, the 15F post-reception display UB is made invisible upon reception of the operation on the 15F operation section A (here, the sword ornamentation 5001).

In this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 330 (c) and (d), when a first operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" in the "section (display section, first section) in which operation-related displays are displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," the 15F post-reception display UB, which is one of the "15F post-reception changes B," is executed as the "first presentation mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a weak aura.

In this regard, in this example, if an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example," the corresponding post-reception output sound B is audibly output (see FIG. 327(k)).

According to this configuration, in the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", it is easier to recognize that the operation reception of the operation button 410 has been properly performed, compared to when the operation button 410 is operated in the 12F reception period, the 13F reception period, or the 14F reception period, and therefore it is possible to suppress feelings of anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue this operation?".

Therefore, when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example", the 15th F post-reception display UB (which aura the wizard MT will appear holding) will not be displayed in a manner visible in front of the decorative pattern SZ, unlike the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, and 14th F reception period (see Figures 330 and 331).

The meaning of "not being displayed in a manner that is visible in front of the decorative pattern SZ" is as explained in the "15F reception period for the first modified example" above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Also, the method of realizing the "15F post-reception change B" in response to an operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F reception period for the second modified example" and the execution time of the "15F post-reception display UB" in response to the reception of an operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are as explained in the "15F reception period for the first modified example" above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The examples shown in Figure 327 and Figures 330(a), (c) to (k) assume that a second operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2B (the situation in which the performance display shown in Figure 330(d) appears) within the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example."

In this performance example, when the second operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," as shown in Figs. 327(i), (k) and 330(e)-(g), the 15F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 15F post-reception changes B, is executed as the "second performance mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura. In this example, the wizard MT (first performance mode UB1), who had been holding a staff surrounded by a weak aura, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 330(e)), and then reappearing holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura (second performance mode UB2) (see Fig. 330(f)), but the method of causing the display change as the 15F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. In this case as well, post-acceptance output sound B is audibly output in response to an operation being performed on "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example" (see FIG. 327(k)). This post-acceptance output sound B may be output as the same sound regardless of how many times "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example", or may be output as a different sound.

The examples shown in Figure 327 and Figures 330(a), (c) to (k) assume that a third operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2C (the situation in which the performance display shown in Figure 330(g) appears) within the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example."

In this performance example, when the third operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," as shown in Fig. 327(i), (k) and Fig. 330(h) to (j), the 15F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 15F post-reception changes B, is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a strong aura. In this example, the wizard MT (second performance mode UB2), who had been holding a staff surrounded by a medium aura, is depicted as moving off the display screen (see Fig. 330(h)), and then reappearing holding a staff surrounded by a strong aura (third performance mode UB3) (see Fig. 330(i)), but the method of causing the display change as the 15F post-reception display UB is not limited to this. In this case as well, post-acceptance output sound B is audibly output in response to an operation being performed on "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example" (see FIG. 327(k)). This post-acceptance output sound B may be output as the same sound regardless of how many times "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 15F acceptance period, or may be output as a different sound.

The examples shown in Figure 327 and Figures 330(a), (c) to (k) assume that a fourth operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2D (the situation in which the performance display shown in Figure 330(j) appears) within the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example."

However, in this performance example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but no apparent change (mode) appears as the 15F post-reception display UB (15F post-reception change B) as shown in Figures 327(i) and (k) and 330(k). In other words, in this case, there is no apparent post-reception change before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section (display section, first section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", and the performance situation before the fourth operation is continued as it was. In addition, at this time, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output.

Incidentally, in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", when the 15F post-reception change B (third performance mode UB3) in response to the third operation is displayed and then hidden over time, if a fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", the third performance mode UB3 is displayed again as the 15F post-reception display UB (15F post-reception change B) (a visible change (mode) occurs), but even in this case, the post-reception output sound may not be audibly output.

In this example, the display after 15F reception UB is changed to a specific state or a new state does not appear depending on how many times the 15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is operated during the 15F reception period according to the second modification. Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the 15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) during the period in which the operation-related display is displayed (display period, first period) of the 15F reception period according to the second modification, and the display may be changed to a specific state or a new state may not appear based on the result of the determination. In short, such a display change may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

By the way, in this performance example, if the "second performance mode UB2" appears as the display UB after the 15F reception, even if you continue to operate only the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the "15F reception period for the second modified example." If the "third performance mode UB3" appears as the display UB after the 15F reception, even if you continue to operate only the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," the "first performance mode UB1" or the "second performance mode UB2" will not appear as a result of the operation being accepted within the "15F reception period for the second modified example." Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the display UB after the 15F reception. Therefore, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" after the "third operation mode UB3" is displayed, the same situation as the "fourth operation" described above will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even in the "15F reception period according to the second modification," if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation is displayed (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)." This feeling of uneasiness is likely to become stronger as the remaining time of the "15F reception period according to the second modification" decreases (as the time elapsed since the occurrence of the period becomes longer). In particular, in the "15F reception period according to the second modification," there are cases in which the post-reception output sound is not audibly output even if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," so this feeling of uneasiness is even more likely to occur.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figure 327 and Figures 330 (a), (c) to (k) are based on the assumption that the player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timings to2A to to2D)" which aims to progress the presentation by operating "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times before timing toY arrives, and switches to a "new game strategy" which aims to progress the presentation by operating "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)".

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figures 327(a), (h), and (i), in a situation where a 15F post-acceptance display UB3 is displayed in response to an operation accepted for "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" (the situation shown in Figure 330(k)), it is assumed that an operation is performed for "15F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2E within the "section (display section, first section) in which an operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example."

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2E in the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," a change A after the 15F reception occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the 15F reception, first, the 15F reception period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 327 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 327 (h), (k) and Fig. 331 (r), a "15F reception post output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, and a "15F reception post display UA" corresponding to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed.

In this example, the summoned beast SJ appears as the "15th F reception display UA" in response to the reception of an operation on the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example." However, such a 15th F reception display UA (summoned beast SJ) may appear in a state where the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) is relatively high, or in a state where the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) is lower than that state. Also, as described above, when the 15th F reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "15th F reception output sound A" is also audibly output, but the "15th F reception output sound A" may also be audibly output in a state that suggests the expectation level.

In addition, during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," as shown in Figures 327(i), 330(k), and 331(p), while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to the reception of an operation on "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," when an operation is received on "15F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)," this triggers the 15F post-reception display UB to be made invisible.

Furthermore, in the "section (display section, first section) in which operation-related displays are displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is switched (background changed) to another background image (here, the third background image HK3) in response to an operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" as shown in Figures 327(d), 330(k), and 331(p). Note that in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", the background image is not switched (background changed) to another background image in response to an operation on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

Furthermore, in the "section (display section, first section) in which an operation-related display is displayed" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting unit (here, the first light emission mode) is also switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, the third light emission mode) in response to an operation on the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" as shown in FIG. 327(e). Note that in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", the light emission mode is not switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode in response to an operation on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)".

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 327 (f), (g) and 331 (p), when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the "15F acceptance period relating to the second modified example", this can trigger the generation of a acceptance period (a new acceptance period after operation) of a different type (e.g., a different change after acceptance) from the 15F acceptance period. During the reception period for the different type (the new reception period after the operation), not only are both "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" that were permitted to receive operations during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" permitted to receive operations, but also 15F operation-related display A (here, a model image display of the sword decoration 5001) related to "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and 15F operation-related display B (here, a model image display of the operation button 410) related to "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are both displayed.

However, during such different types of reception periods (new reception periods after the operation), the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" will be displayed in the second aspect A2 (a different aspect from the above-mentioned first aspect A1) of the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," and the "15thF operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" will be displayed in the second aspect B2 (a different aspect from the above-mentioned first aspect B1) of the "15thF operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" (see, for example, Figures 327(f) and (g) and Figure 331(p)).

Note that explanations of the second aspect A2 of the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the second aspect B2 of the "15th F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" in this modified example, as well as the relationship between the first and second aspects and other examples, are the same as those displayed in the "15th F reception period in the first modified example", and therefore will be omitted.

Then, in the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), as shown in Figures 331 (q) and (r), when an operation is received for "15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception, and when an operation is received for "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception.

However, in this case, when an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," no change in the light emission occurs, whereas when an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)," both a change in the light emission occurs and no change in the light emission may occur. Also, with regard to the background image, regardless of whether an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" or "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," the background image itself is not replaced with a different background image (the background is changed); however, when an operation is accepted for "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)," both a change in the aspect of the background image (for example, a change such as making the background image darker or brighter) and no change in the aspect of the background image (for example, a change such as making the background image darker or brighter) may occur. Note that when an operation is received for the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," this does not trigger a change in the appearance of the background image (for example, making the background image darker or brighter).

In this example, it is assumed that during the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is permitted to receive an operation only once, and the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is permitted to receive an operation multiple times, but this is not limited to the above. However, if the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is permitted to receive an operation multiple times during the reception period of the different type (the new reception period after the operation), it is desirable to not enable the above-mentioned auto-repeated-tap function.

On the other hand, the examples shown in Figure 328, Figure 330 (a), (c)-(g), and Figure 331 (l)-(o) are examples in which operations are accepted for the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timings to2a and to2b within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)", and the above-mentioned timing toY is assumed to occur while the "second performance mode UB2" is being displayed as the above-mentioned 15th F post-acceptance display UB in response to the second operation acceptance.

The contents of the performance when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timings to2a and to2b within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" have been explained with reference to Figs. 330(a), (c) to (g) in the examples shown in Figs. 327 and 330(a), (c) to (k), so an explanation will be omitted here.

In this case, in the examples shown in Fig. 328, Fig. 330(a), (c)-(g), and Fig. 331(l)-(o), when the 15th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (the situation shown in Fig. 330(g)), the arrival of timing toY triggers the end of the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example" and the start of the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)."

When the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)" starts in this manner, first, as shown in Figures 328(f), (g) and 331(l), the arrival of a specific timing toY triggers the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 15thF operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the "15thF operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the 15thF operation section B (here, the operation button 410) to be hidden.

Also, as shown in FIG. 328(d) and FIG. 321(l), when timing toY arrives, the background image changes from the "first background image HK1 (here, a display depicting a mountain as shown in FIG. 330(g))" to the "second background image HK2 (here, a display depicting a mountain and a river as shown in FIG. 331(l))". The "second background image HK2" thus appeared will be continuously displayed as long as it is within the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)".

As shown in FIG. 328(e), when timing toY arrives, the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting unit changes from the "first light-emitting mode" to the "second light-emitting mode." The "second light-emitting mode" of the specific light-emitting unit thus appeared is then continuously executed while in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)."

In addition, in this example of the performance, if a specific timing toY arrives while the 15th floor post-reception display UB2 is being displayed, the arrival of the specific timing toY triggers the 15th floor post-reception display UB2 to be made invisible (see Figures 328(i) and 331(l)), thereby making it invisible before the predetermined display time (execution time) has elapsed.

With this configuration, even though the "15th floor reception period for the second variant" itself is still ongoing, it is possible to make it appear as if the "15th floor reception period for the second variant" has ended, which is expected to create a good sense of tension.

The examples shown in Figure 328, Figures 330(a), (c)-(g), and Figures 331(l)-(o) assume that a third operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2c (when the performance display shown in Figure 331(l) is displayed) within the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example."

In this example, when the third operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)", as shown in Figs. 328(i), (k) and 331(m), (n), the 15th F post-acceptance display UB, which is one of the 15th F post-acceptance changes B, is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears holding a staff surrounded by a powerful aura, and the post-acceptance output sound B is audibly output (see Fig. 328(k)). The contents of these effects are the same as those when the third operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" (see Figs. 330(i), (j)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

However, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)", unlike when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)", the 15F post-acceptance change B occurs while the "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "15F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are not displayed, and while the "second background image HK2" and the "second light emission mode" are displayed (see Figs. 328(d)-(g), (i) and Figs. 331(m), (n)).

The examples shown in Figure 328, Figures 330(a), (c)-(g), and Figures 331(l)-(o) assume that a fourth operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2d (when the performance display shown in Figure 331(n) is displayed) within the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example."

However, in this example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" in the "section (non-display section, second section) in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" where the operation-related display is not displayed, not only is the post-reception output sound not audible, but no visible change (pattern) is displayed as the 15F post-reception display UB (15F post-reception change B), as shown in Figs. 328(i) and (k) and 331(o). The content of this performance is the same as when the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" in the "section (display section, first section) where the operation-related display is displayed" (see Fig. 330(k)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

However, as mentioned above, even in the "15F reception period according to the second modification," if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation is displayed (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)." This feeling of uneasiness is likely to become stronger as the remaining time of the "15F reception period according to the second modification" decreases (as the time elapsed since the occurrence of the period becomes longer). In particular, in the "15F reception period according to the second modification," there are cases in which the post-reception output sound is not audibly output even if an operation is performed on the "15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," so this feeling of uneasiness is even more likely to occur.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figure 328, Figure 330(a), (c)-(g), and Figure 331(l)-(o) are based on the assumption that the player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timings to2a-to2d)" of aiming to advance the presentation by operating "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times during the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, second section)" and switches to a "new game strategy" of aiming to advance the presentation by operating "15F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, second section)".

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figures 328(a), (h), and (i), it is assumed that, in a situation (as shown in Figure 331(o)) in which a 15F post-acceptance display UB3 is displayed in response to an operation accepted for "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," an operation is performed for "15F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2e within the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, second section)" of the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example."

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2e in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", it is basically the same as when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2E in the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", and the performance content shown in FIG. 331 (p) will appear in response to the reception of the operation.

That is, in this case, as one of the post-15F reception changes A, first, the 15F reception period is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 328 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 328 (h), (k) and Fig. 331 (p), the "post-15F reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is audibly output, and the "post-15F reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is displayed, as described above.

Also, as shown in Figures 328(f) and (g) and Figures 331(o) and (p), upon receipt of an operation at timing to2e, the second aspect A2 of the "15F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the second aspect B2 of the "15F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 328(d) and 331(o) and (p), upon receipt of an operation at timing to2e, the background image is changed from the "second background image HK2" to the "third background image HK3 (here, a display depicting the desert as shown in Figure 331(p))."

Also, as shown in Figure 328 (e) and Figures 331 (o) and (p), the light emission state of the specific light-emitting element changes from the "second light emission state" to the "third light emission state" upon receipt of an operation at timing to2e.

Also, as shown in Figure 328 (i) and Figures 331 (o) and (p), the reception of the operation at timing to2e triggers the display UB after reception of the 15th F to be hidden.

In this case too, the operation acceptance at timing to2e triggers the occurrence of an acceptance period (a new acceptance period after the operation) of a different type from the 15F acceptance period (e.g., a different change after acceptance); however, this acceptance period (a new acceptance period after the operation) is as described when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2E within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)," so a detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, even in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", as shown in FIG. 329(j), at any timing before or after the timing toY at which the operation-related image is displayed, no operation-related sound (reception permission sound) related to the occurrence is output, and no display indicating the remaining time is made. In contrast, in the above-mentioned different type of reception period (new reception period after the operation), the 15F operation-related sound a related to the occurrence is output. However, the display indicating the remaining time may not be displayed even in the different type of reception period (new reception period after the operation).

In addition, in this performance example, the 15F post-reception display UA is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see FIG. 331 (p) and the like). In contrast, as described above, the 15F post-reception display UB is not displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. However, instead of this, the 15F post-reception display UB may be displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in the "section (non-display section, second section) where the operation-related display is not displayed" during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", but to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in the "section (display section, first section) where the operation-related display is displayed".

Also, in this example of presentation, the 15F post-reception display UB is made to be hidden based on the operation performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example." In other words, in this case, as shown in Figures 327(i), 328(i), 330, and 331, the 15F post-reception display UB can be made to be hidden at the point when the "15F post-reception display UA" begins to be displayed in response to the operation on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, even if the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed) during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see Figures 327(b) and 328(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operation receptions for the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "15F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)".

Furthermore, the 15F reception period is originally intended to continue until the arrival of timing to3, as shown in FIG. 329(c), and to end based on the arrival of timing to3. In this regard, the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" occurs as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 329, when no operation is performed during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" ends without any changes being made to the display, sound output, or other aspects related to the reception period.

However, the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" only needs to occur as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. For example, when the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" ends at timing to3, a background change from the second background image HK1 may occur in a manner different from when an operation is received for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", or a light emission change from the second light emission mode may occur in a manner different from when an operation is received for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example".

Figures 332 to 336 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when the "Condition 16F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 16F reception period occurs. More specifically, Figure 332 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when an operation is accepted for the "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" during the 16F reception period, Figure 333 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when an operation is accepted for the "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" during the 16F reception period, and Figure 334 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 16F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Also, Figures 335 and 336 are diagrams showing an example of the presentation content when the 16F reception period occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "16th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 16th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 16th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 16th F fluctuation pattern) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "16th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 334, within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "16th F variation pattern", the above-mentioned 16th F acceptance period (operation permissible state) can be generated, in which "acceptance of changes after 16th F acceptance (such as displays UA, UB after 16th F acceptance and sound output after 16th F acceptance)" is permitted, based on the arrival of timing tp2 when 16F time has elapsed since the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on the satisfaction of "condition 16F").

Here, during the 16F reception period in this embodiment, the 16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to receive only one operation until the 16F reception period ends, and the 16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations until the 16F reception period ends.

In other words, during the 16F reception period, for example, a player may start operating 16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, but may become anxious when the final result display does not appear, and may switch from "operation of 16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation of 16F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" midway through the 16F reception period in order to progress the presentation.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates the 16th F reception period, it is possible to first execute a premonition display that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given (that the 16th F reception period will occur).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a specific timing arrives before the occurrence of the 16F reception period, the "16F premonition display ZFD" is executed as the premonition display, as shown in FIG. 335(a). Note that the "16F premonition display ZFD" according to this example is displayed so as to straddle the timing when the 16F operation-related displays A and B are displayed, but it may be made to disappear before the 16F operation-related displays A and B are displayed.

In other words, in this example of presentation, when the 16F reception period occurs, the "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed, which can only appear when the operation reception for the 16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and the "16F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is displayed, which can only appear when the operation reception for the 16F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, the 16F reception period according to this example of performance, like the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example," at the time of occurrence, as shown in Figs. 332(c) to 334(c) and 335(b), does not display an image display (operation-related display) that imitates the above-mentioned 16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) or an image display (operation-related display) that imitates the above-mentioned 16F operation part B (here, the operation button 410), and an "operation-related display" that conceals the fact that there are operation parts in a state in which operation reception is permitted is not displayed. On the other hand, when a specific timing tpX (which may be a predetermined timing, such as a timing when a specific amount of time has passed since the start of the reception period) arrives within the 16F reception period without any operation being performed by the player, this triggers the end of the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the start of a "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)."

However, the 16F reception period in this example is set to a shorter time as the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" (the time from when the reception period begins until the non-display section ends and concealment is removed) than in the "15F reception period in the first modified example" described above.

Furthermore, during the 16F reception period in this performance example, unlike the above-mentioned "15F reception period in the first modified example," the background image displayed is not the above-mentioned "second background image HK2," but the above-mentioned "first background image HK1," and the light emission pattern in the specific light-emitting section is not the above-mentioned "second light emission pattern," but the above-mentioned "first light emission pattern."

With this configuration, during the 16F reception period, confidentiality is provided regarding the state in which operation reception is permitted, but the confidentiality is realized with a relatively loose performance, so that the player becomes "accustomed" to the confidential presentation. In other words, in this case, even if a presentation with more complex and stronger confidentiality is provided, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game will not decrease, and it becomes possible to expand the range of presentations.

Incidentally, in the 16F reception period in this example of performance, as shown in Figures 334 (f) and (g), when a specific timing tpX arrives, this triggers the display of a "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), and a "16F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410).

Here, "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are also displayed as image displays that may show periodic changes.

Here, as a method of displaying the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" displayed during the 16F reception period as an image display in which periodic changes may occur, for example, the modes shown in Fig. 284 (A) to (D) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which the part (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving part of the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 284 (A), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 284 (B) to (D)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will repeatedly appear in a form that requires a predetermined period of 16F time A.

Also, as a method of displaying the "16F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" as an image display in which a periodic change can occur, for example, the modes shown in Fig. 284(a) to (d) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which "the portion (button model image BMG) modeled after the operation receiving portion of the 16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 284(a), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 284(b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will repeatedly appear in a form requiring a predetermined period of 16F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 16F reception period, each "operation receiving part" in the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "16F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the periodic 16F time A and the periodic 16F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since they are set to a longer time than the "periodic 13F time A" displayed during the above-mentioned 13F reception period, during the above-mentioned different type reception period (the new reception period after the operation), the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than during the above-mentioned 13F reception period.

Furthermore, in the 16F reception period, as shown in Figures 334 (d) and (e), even if the specific timing tpX arrives, this does not trigger a background change of the "first background image HK1" to a different background image, nor does the specific light-emitting section cause the "first light-emitting mode" to emit light in a different light-emitting mode.

Then, if timing tp3 arrives without the player performing any operation after the start of the "interval in which the operation-related display is displayed (display interval, second interval)," then the 16F reception period ends, as shown in FIG. 334(c), and both the "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are hidden.

Here, Figure 332, Figure 335 (a)-(c), and Figure 336 (g1)-(l1) show examples of a performance in which, during the 16F reception period, an operation is started on 16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations within the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)", but the player becomes anxious when the final result display does not appear, and attempts to progress the performance by switching from "operation on 16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 16F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" midway through the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)".

That is, even in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 16F reception period, similar to the above-mentioned "14F reception period" and "15F reception period", when the final result display appears as a result of performing an operation on the 16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) which allows multiple operations, or when a situation occurs where the performance does not progress easily, a performance that can make the player feel that "there must be another operation unit (the 16F operation unit A) that is secretly given an operation opportunity" is realized. That is, in this case, it is easy to occur that the operation target is switched from "operation on the 16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" to "operation on the 16F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" to advance the performance.

In addition, the 16F reception period in this example is also designed so that no matter how many times 16F operation unit B, which allows multiple operations, is operated, the 16F reception period will not end as a result of this.

However, unlike the above-mentioned "14th F reception period" and "15th F reception period," in the 16th F reception period, a 16th F premonition display ZFD is executed to indicate that (a state in which operation reception is permitted will occur) before the 16th F reception period occurs in order to generate the 16th F reception period.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "section (non-display section, first section) where operation-related display is not displayed" of the 16F reception period, this triggers the display of the 16F post-reception display UB. However, at this time, there are no cases where the 16F post-reception output sound B is audibly output, and it is always set not to be audibly output.

In addition, in the 16F reception period, the first background image HK1 is displayed in both the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)". However, this first background image HK1 may be one that does not undergo background changes while the 16F reception period continues, and may be one that is displayed before the 16F reception period occurs, or one that is not displayed. For example, it may be one that is displayed at the time when the 16F reception period occurs, such as one that is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 16F reception period occurs. In addition, in the 16F reception period, the "first background image HK1" is displayed as such a background image, but instead of this, it may be displayed as a fourth background image that is different from any of the first background image HK1, the second background image HK2, and the third background image HK3.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, a specific light-emitting section (not shown) capable of emitting light in one of a plurality of light-emitting modes is provided on the game board 5. Then, in both the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" during the 16F reception period, the specific light-emitting section emits light in the "first light-emitting mode" among the plurality of light-emitting modes, and during the duration of the 16F reception period, the specific light-emitting section does not change from the first light-emitting mode to another light-emitting mode. This first light-emitting mode may be any mode that does not cause a change in light emission during the duration of the 16F reception period, and may be one that is emitted before the occurrence of the 16F reception period, or one that is not emitted. For example, it may be one that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light-emitting mode that occurs when the 16F reception period occurs, and may be one that appears at the time of the occurrence of the 16F reception period. In addition, during the 16F reception period, the "first light emission mode" appears as this type of light emission mode, but instead, a fourth light emission mode that is different from the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode may appear.

In this regard, in the examples shown in Fig. 332, Fig. 335(a)-(c), and Fig. 336(g1)-(l1), it is assumed that the first operation is performed on "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tp2A while concealing the fact that both operation acceptance for "16F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and operation acceptance for "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are permitted (in a section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)). When the first operation is performed on "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tp2A, this may serve as a trigger to cause the above-mentioned 16F post-acceptance change B.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "16th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tp2A (the situation shown in FIG. 335(b)) within the 16th F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 332(i), (k) and FIG. 335(c), one of the post-16th F acceptance changes B is a depiction of the "magic value (the area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "0" to "1")" and a "depiction of the wizard MT saving MP" (post-16th F acceptance display UB1).

Incidentally, during the 16th F reception period in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 335 and 336, "Hero YS" and "Wizard MT" facing off against the BOSS character are each displayed on the performance display device 1600, with "Hero YS" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on "16th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and "Wizard MT" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on "16th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)."

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the "16th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 16th F reception period, a presentation such as "whether or not Hero YS can defeat the BOSS character" is provided, and the result can indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%).

In contrast, when the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 16F reception period, a performance such as "whether or not you can escape (escape) from the BOSS battle" is provided. That is, when the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 16F reception period, the magic value (the area filled in with the "Magic" decorative display) displayed in the lower right of the display screen can be increased, and when the magic value is full, a depiction is performed in which the wizard MT casts a spell and successfully escapes (escapes) from the BOSS battle. When the escape (escape) is successful in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher (it may be "100%) than if it is not successful.

In addition, in this example, during the 16F reception period, the 16F premonition effect display ZFD is in an execution state throughout the entire "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)," but the execution state of this 16F premonition effect display ZFD is not terminated as a result of an operation (operation reception) being performed on the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)." Therefore, at timing tp2A (the situation shown in FIG. 335(b)), the 16F premonition effect display ZFD will progress in display with predetermined content, regardless of whether or not an operation is performed on the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)."

In addition, in this example, if an operation is performed on the "16th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 16th F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 332 (k)). In other words, in this case, the "wizard MT" is depicted secretly saving MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, the satisfaction (performance) of the operation is low, which can arouse anxiety, such as "Is it okay to continue performing such operations?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 16F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the 16F post-reception display UB (such as a "representation of increasing magic power value" or a "representation of the wizard MT saving MP") when operating the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 16F reception period is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "16F premonition presentation display ZFD," but is displayed in front of it when they overlap.

Note that such "change B after 16F reception" may further include a performance change different from the 16F reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, such "change B after 16F reception" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized with only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit).

In addition, the execution time of the "16F post-acceptance display UB" in response to an operation acceptance on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set to be longer than the time set as the acceptance period. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation acceptances on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are performed while the 16F post-acceptance display UB in response to the previous operation on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is displayed.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figure 332, Figures 335 (a)-(c), and Figures 336 (g1)-(l1) are based on the assumption that, while it is concealed that both operation acceptance for "16F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and operation acceptance for "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are permitted (in a section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)), the player gives up on the "initial game strategy" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and switches to a "new game strategy" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "16F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)".

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 332(a), (h), (i) and 335(c), it is assumed that an operation is accepted for "16F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" while a 16F post-acceptance display UB1 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "1" or a depiction of the wizard MT saving MP) is displayed in response to an operation accepted for "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tp2B (the situation shown in Fig. 335(c)) in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)".

During this 16F reception period, as shown in Fig. 332 and Fig. 336 (g1), (j1), if an operation is received for the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2B (the situation shown in Fig. 335 (c)) within the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)", this may trigger a 16F post-reception change A.

For example, as one of the post-16F acceptance changes A, first, the 16F acceptance period ends based on the operation (see Fig. 332 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 332 (h), (k) and Fig. 336 (g1), (j1), a "post-16F acceptance output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output, a "16F effect display EF" is displayed, the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting section is changed from the "first light emission mode" to the "light emission mode X", and a post-16F acceptance display UA is performed, which is a "depiction of hero YS attacking and the BOSS character being struck by the sword".

In this regard, the 16F effect display EF in this example is originally intended to be displayed when neither the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" nor the "16F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are in a hidden state, and in this case, it is displayed so as to appear to overlap from in front of the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that corresponds to the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" on the operating side.

However, as described above, this example assumes that an operation is received for "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within "a section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)", so the 16F effect display EF will be displayed in response to an operation being received for "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are not displayed (not displayed), as shown in Figs. 336 (g1) and (j1).

When an operation is performed on the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 16F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "16F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will not be displayed based on this.

Also, during the 16F reception period, unlike the 15F reception period and its modified examples described above, as shown in FIG. 332(i), even if an operation is received for the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the "16F reception post-display UB" is displayed, this does not cause the "16F reception post-display UB" to become hidden, but rather continues to be in its execution state. In other words, in this case, the 16F reception post-display UB will continue to be in its execution state for a predetermined time, regardless of whether an operation is performed for the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2B (the situation shown in FIG. 335(c)).

Furthermore, if an operation is accepted for the "16F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tp2B (the situation shown in FIG. 335(c)) within the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)", this triggers the 16F premonition performance display ZFD to be made non-displayed. However, in this example, at the point when the 16F post-acceptance change (post-operation performance) A begins, the display state of the 16F premonition performance display ZFD is maintained (see FIG. 336(g1), (j1)), and it is made non-displayed a short time later from that point (for example, after a predetermined time has passed since the timing when the operation was accepted) (see FIG. 336(h1), (k1)). That is, in this case, it becomes possible to confirm which aspect of the premonition display has appeared even after the operation has been accepted and the 16F post-acceptance change (post-operation performance) A has begun, so the player can operate without worrying about losing information (the 16F premonition display not being displayed). Note that when an operation is accepted for the "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the 16F premonition display ZFD is hidden a little later than the start of the 16F post-acceptance change (post-operation performance) A, but it goes without saying that the time until it is hidden is shorter than when the operation is not accepted.

In addition, the "16F reception post-display UA" in response to the operation reception of the "16F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 16F reception period may be a mode UA-1 (see FIG. 336 (g1)-(i1)) with a relatively high expectation (proportion of winning a jackpot), or a mode UA-2 (see FIG. 336 (j1)-(l1)) with a lower expectation (proportion of winning a jackpot) than the mode UA-1. As described above, when the 16F reception post-display UA is displayed, the corresponding "16F reception post-output sound A" is audibly output, and the specific light-emitting unit displays "light-emitting mode X." The "16F reception post-output sound A" and "light-emitting mode X" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the expectation.

In this regard, when the "16th F effect display EF" shows a relatively highly anticipated pattern UA-1 as the "16th F post-reception display UA", a "16th F effect display EF-1" is displayed, which is a different pattern from when the "16th F post-reception display UA" shows a relatively lowly anticipated pattern UA-2, as shown in Figures 336 (g1) and (g2).

In other words, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 appears as the "16th F post-reception display UA", the first mode EF-1 (see FIG. 336 (g1)) is displayed as the 16th F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UA-1 will appear as the "16th F post-reception display UA".

In contrast, when a relatively low expectation pattern UA-2 appears as the "16th F post-reception display UA", as shown in FIG. 336 (j1), a "16th F effect display EF-2" is displayed, which is a different pattern from when a relatively high expectation pattern UA-1 appears as the "16th F post-reception display UA".

In other words, when the relatively low expectancy mode UA-2 appears as the "16th F reception-after display UA", the second mode EF-2 (see FIG. 336 (j1)) is displayed as the 16th F effect display EF, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively low expectancy mode UA-2 will appear as the "16th F reception-after display UA".

Here, the "16F post-acceptance display UA" is displayed behind both the "16F effect display EF" and the "16F premonition display ZFD", which makes the "16F post-acceptance display UA" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed (see FIG. 336 (g1), (j1)). However, as the "16F effect display EF" and the "16F premonition display ZFD" are hidden, the visibility of the "16F post-acceptance display UA" gradually improves. Also, as described above, by checking the mode of the "16F effect display EF" even while it is displayed, it is easy to recognize whether the "16F post-acceptance display UA" is displayed in the mode UA-1 with high expectations or the mode UA-2 with low expectations.

The "16th Floor Post-Acceptance Display UA" in this example will progress in its display content according to the expectation level aspects UA-1 and UA-2, as shown in Figure 336 (h1), (i1) or (k1), (l2).

On the other hand, the examples shown in Figures 333, 335(a)-(f), and 326(g2)-(l2) are examples in which operations are accepted for the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timings tp2a and tp2b in the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 16F acceptance period, but the above-mentioned timing tpX is assumed to arrive while the "second performance mode UB2" is being displayed as the post-16F acceptance display UB in response to the second acceptance of the operation.

Here, the performance content (see FIG. 335(a)-(c)) when the first operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tp2a in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 16F reception period is the same as when the first operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at the above timing tp2A (see FIG. 332), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIG. 333 and FIG. 335(c) and (d), it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tp2b (when the aspect shown in FIG. 335(c) appears) during the 16F reception period. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 333(i), (k) and FIG. 335(d), as one of the 16F post-reception changes B, a "depiction of the magic value (the area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "1" to "2")" and a "depiction of the wizard MT further saving MP" are performed (second performance aspect UB2 as the 16F post-reception display UB). However, as described above, in this case, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 333(k)).

In this example, as shown in Figures 333 and 335(d) and (e), when the 16F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (the situation shown in Figure 335(d)), the arrival of timing tpX triggers the end of the "section in which operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 16F reception period, and the start of the "section in which operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)."

In this regard, in the 16F reception period, when the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" starts in this manner, first, as shown in Figures 333(f), (g) and 335(e), the arrival of a specific timing tpX triggers the display of the "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the "16F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the 16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410).

However, during the 16F reception period, unlike the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" described above, as shown in Figures 333(d) and 335(e), the arrival of timing tpX does not result in a change in the background image or in the light emission state of a specific light-emitting element.

In addition, in this performance example, even if the specific timing tpX arrives while the 16F post-reception display UB is being displayed, this does not cause the 16F post-reception display UB to become hidden, but rather it continues to be displayed even after the start of the "interval in which operation-related displays are displayed (display interval, second interval)" (see Figures 333(i) and 335(e)), and it is hidden when its display time (execution time) has elapsed. Although not shown in the figures, if the specific timing tpX arrives while the 16F post-reception display UB2 is not being displayed, it goes without saying that the "interval in which operation-related displays are displayed (display interval, second interval)" will begin without the 16F post-reception display UB being displayed.

The examples shown in Fig. 333, Fig. 335(a)-(f), and Fig. 326(g2)-(l2) assume that a third operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tp2c (a situation in which the performance display shown in Fig. 335(e) appears) within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the 16F reception period. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in Figs. 333(i), (k) and 335(e), (f), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but a new display (mode) does not appear as the 16F post-reception display UB.

In this example, when the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) during the 16F reception period, "a new display does not appear as the 16F post-reception display UB." Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 16F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be displayed as the 16F post-reception display UB. In short, such an event (no new display appears as the 16F post-reception display UB despite an operation being performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 16F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 16F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation appears (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to grow stronger as the remaining time of the 16F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 16F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the 16F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes this feeling of uneasiness even more likely.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 333, 335(a)-(f), and 326(g2)-(l2) are based on the assumption that the player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timing tp2a-tp2c)" of aiming to advance the presentation by operating "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", and switches to a "new game strategy" of aiming to advance the presentation by operating "16F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)".

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 333(a), (h), and (i), a 16F post-acceptance display UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2" or the wizard MT further saving MP, etc.) is displayed in response to an operation acceptance for the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," and while the "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are displayed, it is assumed that an operation is accepted for the "16F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2d (a situation in which the performance display shown in Fig. 335(f) appears) within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the 16F acceptance period.

During this 16F reception period, as shown in Fig. 333 and Fig. 336 (g2), (j2), if an operation is received for the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2d (the situation in which the performance display shown in Fig. 335 (f) appears) within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", this will also trigger a 16F post-reception change A.

This change A after 16F acceptance is basically as described above with reference to Fig. 336 (g1)-(l1) as the effect content when an operation is accepted for the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2B (when the effect display shown in Fig. 335(c) is appearing) within the "section in which operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 16F acceptance period.

However, in this example, unlike the case of timing tp2B, at the time when an operation is accepted for the "16F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tp2d, the 16F post-acceptance display UB is displayed in the "second performance mode UB2" as the 16F post-acceptance display UB. Therefore, the 16F post-acceptance display UB will continue to be displayed as the "second performance mode UB2" even after the above-mentioned 16F post-acceptance change A has started. Note that, as shown in Figures 335 and 336, when the 16F post-acceptance display UB overlaps with another image on the display screen, regardless of its mode UB1 or UB2, it is displayed so that whichever image appears to overlap it appears to be overlapped in front.

In addition, in this example, unlike the case of timing tp2B, the 16F premonition display ZFD is already in a hidden state at the time when the operation is accepted for the "16F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2d. Therefore, the 16F premonition display ZFD is not in a displayed state at the time when the 16F post-acceptance change A starts. However, even if the operation is accepted for the "16F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", if the 16F premonition display ZFD is in a displayed state at the time when the operation is accepted, it is the same as the case of timing tp2B. In other words, the 16F premonition display ZFD will continue to be in a displayed state even after the 16F post-acceptance change A starts, and will then be made hidden as a result of the above-mentioned operation acceptance.

Also, in this example, unlike the case of timing tp2B, at the time when an operation is accepted for "16F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2d, "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are both displayed. Therefore, as shown in Figures 336 (g2) and (j2), the "16F effect display EF" in response to an operation being accepted for "16F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2d is displayed so as to appear to overlap with the front side of "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" while "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are both displayed. In this case, the 16th F post-acceptance display UA will be displayed behind both the "16th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16th F effect display EF," as shown in Figures 336 (g2) and (j2).

Then, after the "16th F effect display EF" is displayed, the "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16th F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are made invisible as the performance progresses (see Fig. 336 (h2) and (k2)).

Other than that, the details of the presentation of the post-acceptance change A in the examples shown in Figure 333, Figure 335(a)-(f), and Figure 326(g2)-(l2) have been described above with reference to Figure 332 and Figure 336(g1)-(l1) in explaining the examples shown in Figure 332, Figure 335(a)-(c), and Figure 336(g1)-(l1), so a detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, during the 16F reception period, the 16F post-reception display UA is displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ (see FIG. 336 (h1), (h2), etc.). In contrast, the 16F post-reception display UB is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to it. These display relationships do not change and are the same in both the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)."

In addition, in this example, the 16F post-acceptance display UB is not hidden based on the operation of the "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 16F acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 336, the 16F post-acceptance display UB not only continues to be displayed at the time when the "16F post-acceptance display UA" or the "16F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation of the "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" starts to be displayed, but can also continue to be displayed even when the "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "16F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" or the "16F effect display EF" is hidden.

In this case, however, the 16th F post-reception display UB may be made invisible while the "16th F post-reception display UA" is displayed. This makes it possible to appeal to the viewer that the performance can be advanced by accepting an operation (magic by the wizard) on the "16th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," while in fact conveniently suggesting that the performance has advanced by accepting an operation on the "16th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, even if the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed) during the 16F reception period, this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see Figures 332(b) and 333(b)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operation receptions for the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 16F reception period, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 334(c), the 16F reception period is originally continued until the timing tp3 arrives, and ends when the timing tp3 arrives. In this regard, the 16F reception period occurs as a reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 334, when no operation is performed during the 16F reception period, the arrival of timing tp3 triggers the occurrence of the 16F post-reception change A, which is the same as when an operation is accepted for the "16F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 16F reception period. However, in this case, the arrival of timing tp3 does not trigger the occurrence of the 16F post-reception change B, which is the same as when an operation is accepted for the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

In addition, in the 16F reception period, as shown in FIG. 334(j), a 16F operation-related sound a is output in connection with the occurrence of the 16F reception period. The 16F operation-related sound a in this example is output as the above-mentioned "reception-permissible sound", and may be selectively audibly output as either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2". For example, when the "first permissible sound a1" is audibly output as the 16F operation-related sound a upon the occurrence of the 16F reception period, it is desirable to set it so that it suggests a higher expectation (proportion) of a jackpot being obtained than when the "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 16F operation-related sound a.

Incidentally, during the 16F reception period, when an operation is received for the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" while either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is being audibly output as the 16F operation-related sound a, the audible output of the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is not interrupted. However, when an operation is received for the "16F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is being audibly output as the 16F operation-related sound a, the audible output of the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" may be interrupted.

In addition, in the 16F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 333 and FIG. 335(f), when the "16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated, the periodic changes that have appeared up until then in the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" continue without being hidden (terminating, interrupting, switching the period, etc.). In other words, in the 16F reception period, the periodic changes in the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" do not change in display mode before and after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period) for the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," the "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (period 16F time A, period 16F time B) described above.

In contrast, during the 16F reception period, as shown in Figs. 333 and 336, when "16F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the periodic changes in "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on this. Here, by hiding "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves, these periodic changes are hidden.

Figures 337 to 341 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when "Condition 17F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 17F reception period occurs. More specifically, Figure 337 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when an operation is accepted for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" during the 17F reception period, Figure 338 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when an operation is accepted for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" during the 17F reception period, and Figure 339 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the 17F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Also, Figures 340 and 341 are diagrams showing an example of the presentation content when the 17F reception period occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure win or time-saving), and the "17th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 17th F fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 17th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 17th F fluctuation pattern) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "17th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 339, within the execution period of the fluctuation performance related to the "17th F fluctuation pattern", the above-mentioned 17th F acceptance period (operation permissible state) can be generated, in which "acceptance of changes after 17th F acceptance (such as displays UA and UB after 17th F acceptance and sound output after 17th F acceptance)" is permitted, based on the arrival of timing tq2, which is the time when 17th F has elapsed since the fluctuation performance of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on the satisfaction of "condition 17F").

Here, during the 17F reception period in this embodiment, the 17F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is only allowed to receive operations multiple times until the 17F reception period ends, and the 17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is also allowed to receive operations multiple times until the 17F reception period ends.

In other words, during the 17F reception period (period allowing multiple operations), for example, a player may start operating 16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, but may become anxious when the final result display does not appear, and may switch from "operation on 17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 17F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" midway through the 17F reception period (period allowing multiple operations) in order to progress the presentation.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates the 17th F reception period, it is possible to first execute a premonition display that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given (that the 17th F reception period will occur).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a specific timing arrives before the occurrence of the 17F reception period, the "17F premonition display ZFD" is executed as the premonition display, as shown in FIG. 340(a). Note that the "17F premonition display ZFD" according to this example is displayed so as to straddle the timing when the 17F operation-related displays A and B are displayed, but it may be made to disappear before the 17F operation-related displays A and B are displayed.

As will be described later, the "17F premonition performance display ZFD" in this performance example has the same performance content as the premonition performance display (16F premonition performance display ZFD) corresponding to the above-mentioned 16F reception period, making it difficult to recognize whether the 16F reception period or the 17F reception period will occur. However, the 16F premonition performance display ZFD and the 17F premonition performance display ZFD do not necessarily have to be the same performance display, and may be different performance displays.

In other words, in this example of presentation, when the 17F reception period occurs, the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed, which can only appear when the operation reception for the 17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and the "17F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is displayed, which can only appear when the operation reception for the 17F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, the 17F reception period in this example of performance, like the "15F reception period in the first modified example" and "16F reception period" described above, does not display an image (operation-related display) that imitates the 17F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) or an image (operation-related display) that imitates the 17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) at the time of occurrence, as shown in Figures 337(c) to 339(c) and 340(b), thereby concealing the fact that there is an operation unit in a state in which operation reception is permitted. While the player is in a "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)," when a specific timing tpY (which may be a predetermined timing, such as a timing when a specific time has passed since the start of the reception period) arrives within the 17F reception period without any operation being performed by the player, this triggers the end of the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the start of a "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)." The time until the specific timing tpX arrives in the 16F reception period and the time until the specific timing tpY arrives in the 17F reception period may be the same.

However, the 17F reception period in this example is set to a shorter time (the time from when the reception period begins until the non-display period ends and concealment is removed) as the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" than in the "15F reception period in the first modified example" described above.

Furthermore, during the 17F reception period in this example, unlike the above-mentioned "15F reception period in the first modified example," the background image displayed is not the above-mentioned "second background image HK2," but the above-mentioned "first background image HK1," and the light emission pattern in the specific light-emitting section is not the above-mentioned "second light emission pattern," but the above-mentioned "first light emission pattern."

With this configuration, during the 17F reception period, confidentiality is provided regarding the state in which operation reception is permitted, but the confidentiality is realized with a relatively loose performance, so that the player becomes "accustomed" to the confidential presentation. In other words, in this case, even if a presentation with more complex and stronger confidentiality is provided, it is expected that the player's interest in the game will not decrease, and it becomes possible to expand the range of presentations.

Incidentally, in the 17F reception period in this example, as shown in Fig. 339(f) and (g), when the specific timing tqX arrives, this triggers the display of the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the above 17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the above 17F operation part B (here, the operation button 410). However, the "time from the occurrence of the 17F reception period until the arrival of the specific timing tqX" is set to be shorter than the above-mentioned "time from the occurrence of the 16F reception period until the arrival of the specific timing tpX".

Here, "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are also displayed as image displays that may show periodic changes.

Here, as a method of displaying the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" displayed during the 17F reception period as an image display in which periodic changes may occur, for example, the manner shown in Fig. 289(A) and (B) may be adopted. That is, in this case, when a moving image in which the part (sword decoration image SYG) modeled on the operation receiving part of the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 289(A) and then in the manner shown in Fig. 289(B)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will appear repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 17F time A.

As a method of displaying the "17F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" as an image display that may show periodic changes, the modes shown in Figs. 289(a) to (d) may be adopted, for example. In other words, in this case, when a moving image in which "the portion (button model image BMG) modeled after the operation receiving portion of the 17F operation section B (here, operation button 410) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 289(a), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Figs. 289(b) to (d)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change will appear repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 17F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 17F reception period, each "operation receiving part" in the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "17F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" appears as a depiction moving up and down within its movable range. In this example, the period 17F time A is set to the same time as the "period 13F time A" displayed during the above-mentioned 13F reception period, but it may be set to a different time. However, since the period 17F time A is set to a time shorter than the above-mentioned period 12F times A and B, period 15F times A and B, period 16F times A and B, and period 17F time B, during the 17F reception period, the "sword decoration image SYG" represented as the "operation receiving part" is depicted as quickly moving up and down within its movable range.

Furthermore, in the 17F reception period, as shown in Figures 339(d) and (e), even if the specific timing tqX arrives, this does not trigger a background change of the "first background image HK1" to a different background image, nor does the specific light-emitting section cause the "first light-emitting mode" to emit light in a different light-emitting mode.

Then, when timing tq3 arrives without the player performing any operation after the start of the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)," the 17F reception period ends, and both the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are hidden, as shown in FIG. 339(c).

Here, Figure 337, Figure 340 (a)-(c), and Figure 341 (g1)-(m1) show examples of a performance in which, during the 17F reception period, an operation is started on 16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations within the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)", but the player becomes anxious when the final result display does not appear, and attempts to progress the performance by switching from "operation on 17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on 17F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" midway through the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)".

That is, even in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" in the 17F reception period, similar to the above-mentioned "14F reception period", "15F reception period", and "16F reception period", when the final result display appears as a result of performing an operation on the 17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) which allows multiple operations, or when a situation occurs where the performance does not progress easily, a performance that can make the player feel that "there must be another operation unit (the 17F operation unit A) that is secretly given an operation opportunity" is realized. That is, in this case, it is easy to occur that the operation target is switched from "operation on the 17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" to "operation on the 17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" to advance the performance.

In addition, the 17F reception period in this example is also designed so that no matter how many times 17F operation unit B, which allows multiple operations, is operated, the 17F reception period will not end as a result of this.

However, unlike the above-mentioned "14th F reception period" and "15th F reception period," the 17th F reception period generates a 17th F premonition display ZFD, which indicates that a state in which operation reception is permitted will occur, at a timing prior to the occurrence of the 17th F reception period.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "section (non-display section, first section) where operation-related display is not displayed" of the 17F reception period, this triggers the display of the 17F post-reception display UB. However, at this time, there are no cases where the 17F post-reception output sound B is audibly output, and it is always set not to be audibly output.

In addition, in the 17F reception period, the first background image HK1 is displayed in both the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)". However, this first background image HK1 may be one that does not undergo background changes while the 17F reception period continues, and may be one that is displayed before the occurrence of the 17F reception period, or one that is not displayed. For example, it may be one that is displayed at the time of the occurrence of the 17F reception period, such as one that is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 17F reception period occurs. In addition, in the 17F reception period, the "first background image HK1" is displayed as such a background image, but instead of this, it may be displayed as a fifth background image that is different from any of the first background image HK1, the second background image HK2, the third background image HK3, and the fourth background image.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, a specific light-emitting section (not shown) capable of emitting light in one of a plurality of light-emitting modes is provided on the game board 5. Then, in both the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" during the 17F reception period, the specific light-emitting section emits light in the "first light-emitting mode" among the plurality of light-emitting modes. However, as will be described later, even during the 17F reception period, when an operation is received for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", a change occurs as a result of this. This first light-emitting mode may be one that is emitted before the 17F reception period occurs, or one that is not emitted. For example, it may be one that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light-emitting mode that occurs when the 17F reception period occurs, as long as it appears at the time when the 17F reception period occurs. In addition, during the 17F reception period, the "first light emission mode" appears as this type of light emission mode, but instead, a fifth light emission mode that is different from the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, the third light emission mode, and the fourth light emission mode may appear.

In this regard, in the examples shown in Fig. 337, Fig. 340(a)-(c), and Fig. 341(g1)-(m1), it is assumed that the first operation is performed on "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tq2A while concealing the fact that both operation acceptance for "17F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and operation acceptance for "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are permitted (in a section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)). When the first operation is performed on "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tq2A, this may trigger the above-mentioned 17F post-acceptance change B.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tq2A (the situation shown in FIG. 340(b)) within the 17F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 337(i), (k) and FIG. 340(c), one of the post-17F acceptance changes B is a depiction of "magic value (area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (magic value changing from "0" to "1")" and "the wizard MT saving MP" (post-17F acceptance display UB1).

Incidentally, during the 17th F reception period in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 340 and 341, "Hero YS" and "Wizard MT" facing off against the BOSS character are each displayed on the performance display device 1600, with "Hero YS" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on "17th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and "Wizard MT" being used as a character that acts in response to operations on "17th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)."

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 17th F reception period, a presentation such as "whether or not Hero YS can defeat the BOSS character" is provided, and the result can indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high or low (which may be "100%" or "0%).

In contrast, when the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 17F reception period, a performance such as "whether or not you can escape (escape) from the BOSS battle" is provided. That is, when the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 17F reception period, the magic value (the area filled in with the "Magic" decorative display) displayed in the lower right of the display screen can be increased, and when the magic value is full, a depiction is performed in which the wizard MT casts a spell and successfully escapes (escapes) from the BOSS battle. When the escape (escape) is successful in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher (it may be "100%) than if it is not successful.

In addition, in this example, during the 17F reception period, the 17F premonition effect display ZFD is in an execution state throughout the entire "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)," but the execution state of this 17F premonition effect display ZFD is not terminated as a result of an operation (operation reception) being performed on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)." Therefore, at timing tq2A (the situation shown in FIG. 340(b)), the 17F premonition effect display ZFD will progress in display with predetermined content, regardless of whether or not an operation is performed on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)."

In addition, in this example, if an operation is performed on "17th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 17th F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 337 (k)). In other words, in this case, the "wizard MT" is depicted secretly saving MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, the satisfaction (dramatic effect) when operating is low, which can arouse anxiety, such as "Is it okay to continue performing such operations?".

However, if the response (presentation) when operating "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 17F reception period is too low, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this presentation example, the 17F post-reception display UB (such as a "representation of increasing magic power value" or a "representation of the wizard MT saving MP") when operating "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 17F reception period is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "17F premonition presentation display ZFD," but is displayed in front of it when they overlap.

Note that such "change B after 17F reception" may further include a performance change different from the 17F reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit), including the second or subsequent operation described below. Alternatively, such "change B after 17F reception" does not necessarily have to be performed with multiple performance elements, and may be realized with only one of the performance elements described above (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light-emitting unit).

In addition, the execution time of the "17F post-reception display UB" in response to the reception of an operation on "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set to be longer than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the second and subsequent receptions of an operation on "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are performed while the 17F post-reception display UB in response to the previous operation on "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is displayed. In contrast, the execution time of the "17F post-reception display UA" in response to the reception of an operation on "17F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is set to be shorter than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, during the 17F reception period, the second and subsequent receptions of operations on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" may occur while the 17F post-reception display UA corresponding to the previous operation on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, or may occur while the 17F post-reception display UA is not displayed.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figure 337, Figures 340(a)-(c), and Figures 341(g1)-(m1) are based on the assumption that, while it is concealed that both operation acceptance for "17F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" and operation acceptance for "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are permitted (in a section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)), the player gives up on the "initial game strategy" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times, and switches to a "new game strategy" of aiming to progress the presentation by operating "17F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)".

In other words, in this example, as shown in Figs. 337(a), (h), (i) and 340(c), it is assumed that an operation is accepted for "17F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" while a 17F post-acceptance display UB1 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "1" or a depiction of the wizard MT saving MP) is displayed in response to an operation accepted for "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tq2B (the situation shown in Fig. 340(c)) in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)".

During this 17F reception period, as shown in Fig. 337 and Fig. 341 (g1), if an operation is received for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2B (the situation shown in Fig. 340 (c)) in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)", this may trigger a 17F post-reception change A.

As an example of such a 17F post-acceptance change A, as shown in Fig. 337(h), (k) and Fig. 341(g1), a "17F post-acceptance output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "17F effect display EF1" is displayed that makes it difficult to see the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting section is changed from the "first light emission mode" to the "light emission mode Y1," and a 17F post-acceptance display UA1 is displayed. Here, as the 17F post-acceptance display UA1, "hero YS attacks, and the HP of the boss character decreases to about 75% remaining" is depicted.

However, this example assumes that an operation is accepted for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2B (the situation shown in FIG. 340(c)) in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)", so as shown in FIG. 337(f) and FIG. 340(c), at the time when the operation is accepted, the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is not displayed but is not displayed. Therefore, in the change A after the 17F acceptance according to this example, as shown in FIG. 341(g1), the "17F effect display EF1" corresponding to the operation acceptance for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed while the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are not displayed (not displayed).

When an operation is performed on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 17F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will not be displayed based on this.

Also, during the 17F reception period, unlike the above-mentioned 16F reception period, even if an operation is accepted for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2B (the situation shown in FIG. 340(c)) in the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)", this will not trigger the 17F premonition performance display ZFD to be in a non-display state. In other words, in this case, the 17F premonition performance display ZFD will continue in its displayed state for a predetermined execution time, regardless of whether or not an operation is accepted for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" or the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" while the 17F premonition performance display ZFD is in a displayed state.

In addition, unlike the above-mentioned 15F reception period and its modified example, in the 17F reception period, as shown in FIG. 337(i), even if an operation is accepted for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the "17F reception post-display UB" is displayed, the "17F reception post-display UB" continues to be in an execution state without being made invisible. That is, in this case, the 17F reception post-display UB continues to be in an execution state for a predetermined time regardless of whether an operation is made for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2B (the situation shown in FIG. 340(c)). Also, even if the "17F operation-related sound" is in an audible output state when the first operation is made for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the operation does not make it inaudible.

Here, the "17th F post-reception display UA" is displayed behind both the "17th F effect display EF" and the "17th F premonition performance display ZFD", making the "17th F post-reception display UA" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed (see FIG. 341 (g1)). As the "17th F post-reception display UA" and "17th F effect display EF" and "17th F premonition performance display ZFD" are made non-display, the visibility of the "17th F post-reception display UA" gradually improves. However, during the 17F reception period, multiple operations are permitted for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," so there is a disadvantage in that the remaining time decreases if you wait for the "17F effect display EF" and "17F premonition display ZFD" to be hidden. This creates a conflict as to whether or not to continue operating the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" in a situation with poor visibility, which is expected to create a good sense of tension.

Here, the 17th F post-reception display UB is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of any of the "17th F post-reception display UA," "17th F premonition display ZFD," and "17th F effect display EF."

In this example, as shown in Figures 337(a), (h), and (i), a post-acceptance change A (such as a 17F post-acceptance display UA) has occurred in response to the previous operation acceptance for "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," and a 17F post-acceptance display UB1 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "1" or a depiction of the wizard MT saving MP) in response to the operation acceptance for "17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is still being displayed. First, It is assumed that timing tqX arrives, which ends the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and starts the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", and then, at timings tq2C and tq2D (the timings shown in FIG. 341 (h1) and (i1)) within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", the second and third operations are received for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)".

Here, when timing tqX arrives, this triggers the display of "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)." However, in this example, timing tqX arrives when the situation shown in FIG. 341 (g1) is occurring, that is, when the 17F post-acceptance display UA, the 17F post-acceptance display UB, the 17F effect display EF, and the 17F premonition performance display ZFD are being displayed. Therefore, "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" will start to be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the 17F post-acceptance display UB, the 17F effect display EF, and the 17F premonition performance display ZFD. That is, in this case, while the 17F effect display EF is being displayed, the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," which had been hidden up until that point, begins to be displayed. Considering that the 17F effect display EF is originally intended to make the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" less visible when it is displayed and to make it invisible as well, it is realized as a configuration with a function opposite to this original function, which is expected to broaden the range of effects, such as making it possible to use the 17F effect display EF as a substitute for a premonition effect display.

And as mentioned above, in this example of performance, even if the second and third operations are accepted for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timings tq2C and tq2D (see FIG. 337) within the 17F acceptance period, change A after acceptance of the 17F can occur, as shown in FIG. 337 and FIG. 341 (h1), (i1), just as when the first operation is accepted for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

Here, the "output sound A1 after 17F reception", the "17F effect display EF1", and the "light emission mode Y1" in the specific light-emitting section may appear in the same manner when the first operation is received and when the second or third operation is received. When the "output sound A1 after 17F reception", the "17F effect display EF1", and the "light emission mode Y1" corresponding to the operation reception at the previous operation are in an execution state, the "output sound A1 after 17F reception", the "17F effect display EF1", and the "light emission mode Y1" corresponding to the operation reception at the previous operation are stopped in response to a new operation reception, and the "output sound A1 after 17F reception", the "17F effect display EF1", and the "light emission mode Y1" are newly executed again. The "light emission mode Y1" is returned to the original light emission mode (here, the first light emission mode) after a predetermined time has elapsed.

However, as described above, in the examples shown in Figure 337, Figures 340(a)-(c), and Figures 341(g1)-(m1), the second and subsequent operation acceptances for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" are made within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" after the arrival of timing tqX, unlike the first operation acceptance described above.

In this case, the second operation acceptance (timing tq2C) for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" in this performance example is made as the first operation acceptance since the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" begins to be displayed, that is, it is made while the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is being displayed with the above-mentioned periodic change. In this regard, in this performance example, when the second operation acceptance is made for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2C (the situation in which the performance display shown in FIG. 341 appears), this is the trigger for the periodic change of the "17F operation-related display A (here, the sword decoration image SYG)" that had been displayed with the above-mentioned periodic change to be hidden. At this time, although it is made difficult to see by the "17th F effect display EF1", the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself continues to be displayed, and only the cyclical changes that had been taking place up until that point are temporarily terminated. Note that the cyclical changes that were temporarily terminated in this way will be restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In contrast, at the time when the third operation is accepted (timing tq2D) for the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" in this example, the periodic change in the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was temporarily terminated at the previous (second) operation acceptance may maintain its terminated state, or may be resumed after the terminated state is cancelled, but when the third operation is accepted, this will trigger the end state of the periodic change to occur again. In other words, in this case, the periodic change that was temporarily terminated in this way will be resumed from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the third operation was accepted, based on that point in time.

The "17th F post-acceptance display UA" is basically the same as the 17th F post-acceptance display UA1 when the first operation is accepted for the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, when the second operation is accepted, a "depiction of hero YS attacking and the boss character's HP decreasing to about 50% remaining (17th F post-acceptance display UA2)" is displayed (see FIG. 341 (h1)), and when the third operation is accepted, a "depiction of hero YS attacking and the boss character's HP decreasing to about 25% remaining (17th F post-acceptance display UA3)" is displayed (see FIG. 341 (i1)), and so on, with progress being made in the presentation.

In this example, during the 17F reception period, each time an operation is performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the performance (HP reduction of the BOSS character) as the "17F post-reception display UA1" is advanced. However, the display may or may not be advanced when an operation is performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," for example, by advancing the display with a predetermined probability based on the result of the judgment (although other methods are also possible). However, when an operation is performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 17F reception period, unlike when an operation is performed on the "17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)," even if the display does not advance, the "17F post-reception output sound A1" is audibly output, the "17F effect display EF1" is displayed, and the periodic change in the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is terminated. In addition, during the 17F reception period, in the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", the 17F reception period may end, the "17F post-reception output sound A2", the "17F effect display EF2", and the "light-emitting mode Y2" may be executed, and the final mode UA4 of the 17F post-reception display UA may appear, triggered by an operation on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". However, during the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)", the 17F reception period may not end, the "17F post-reception output sound A2", the "17F effect display EF2", and the "light-emitting mode Y2" may not appear, and the final mode UA4 of the 17F post-reception display UA may not appear, triggered by an operation on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this example, as shown in Figs. 337(a), (h), and (i), a post-acceptance change A has occurred in response to the third acceptance of an operation on "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the 17F post-acceptance display UB1 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "1" or a depiction of the wizard MT saving MP) in response to the acceptance of an operation on "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed, and a fourth operation is accepted on "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2E within the 17F acceptance period (a situation in which the performance display shown in Fig. 341(i1) is displayed).

In this pachinko machine 1, when a fourth operation is accepted for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2E within the 17F acceptance period, a change A after the 17F acceptance may occur. For example, as one of the changes A after the 17F acceptance, first, the 17F acceptance period is ended based on the operation (see Figures 337 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Figures 337(h), (k) and Figures 341(j1), (l1), a "17F post-acceptance output sound A2" corresponding to the operation on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "17F effect display EF2" is displayed that makes it difficult to see the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and further, the light emission mode that had been displayed up until that point in the specific light-emitting section (here, the light emission mode Y1) is terminated and appears as "light emission mode Y2," and a 17F post-acceptance display UA4 is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in Fig. 341 (j1) and (j2), the 17F effect display EF2 in this example begins to be displayed when neither the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" nor the "17F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" is in a hidden state, and is displayed so as to appear to overlap from in front of the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that corresponds to the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" on the operating side.

When an operation is performed on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 17F reception period, the effect display EF that makes it difficult to view the "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" will not be displayed based on this.

In addition, the "17F reception post-display UA4" in response to the fourth operation reception on the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 17F reception period may show a mode UA4-1 (Fig. 341 (j1), (k1)) with a relatively high expectation (proportion of winning a jackpot), or a mode UA4-2 (Fig. 341 (l1), (m1)) with a lower expectation (proportion of winning a jackpot) than the above mode. As described above, when the 17F reception post-display UA4 is displayed, the corresponding "17F reception post-output sound A2" is audibly output and the light-emitting mode Y2 appears in the specific light-emitting unit, but the "17F reception post-output sound A2" and "light-emitting mode Y2" may also be executed in a manner that suggests the expectation.

In this regard, when a relatively highly anticipated pattern UA4-1 appears as the "17th F post-reception display UA4", a "17th F effect display EF2-1" is displayed, which is a different pattern from when a relatively lowly anticipated pattern UA4-2 appears as the "17th F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 341 (i1).

In other words, when the relatively highly anticipated mode UA4-1 appears as the "17th F post-reception display UA", the first mode EF2-1 (see FIG. 341 (j1)) is displayed as the 17th F effect display EF2, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively highly anticipated mode UA4-1 will appear as the "17th F post-reception display UA4".

In contrast, when the "17th F post-reception display UA4" shows a relatively low expectation pattern UA4-2, as shown in FIG. 341 (l1), the "17th F effect display EF2-2" is displayed, which is a different pattern from when the "17th F post-reception display UA4" shows a relatively high expectation pattern UA4-1.

In other words, when the relatively low expectation mode UA4-2 appears as the "17F post-reception display UA4", the second mode EF2-2 (see FIG. 341 (l1)) is displayed as the 17F effect display EF2, which makes it possible to suggest that the relatively low expectation mode UA-2 will appear as the "17F post-reception display UA4". Note that the 17F effect display EF2, both the first mode EF2-1 and the second mode EF2-2, are displayed as different image displays from the 17F effect display EF1.

Furthermore, during the 17F reception period according to this embodiment, the periodic changes of "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden based on the fourth reception of operation for "17F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in Fig. 337 and Fig. 341 (j1) to (m1). Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves.

In this example, in the state immediately after the operation is accepted (the state in which the 17F effect display EF2 is displayed) (see FIG. 341 (j1) and (l1)), the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are not hidden, and the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 17F effect display EF2. After this, the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are made to be ...

Here, the "13F post-reception display UA4" is displayed behind the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "13F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)," and "13F effect display EF2," making the "13F post-reception display UA4" difficult to see immediately after it is displayed (see Figures 291 (i) and (l)). However, as the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," "13F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)," "13F effect display EF2," and the like are made non-display, the visibility of the "13F post-reception display UA4" gradually improves. Also, as mentioned above, by checking the state in which the "13th F effect display EF2" is displayed, it is easy to recognize whether the "13th F post-reception display UA4" is displayed in the state UA4-1 with high expectations or the state UA4-2 with low expectations.

The "17th floor post-reception display UA4" in this example will progress in content depending on the expectation levels UA4-1 and UA4-2.

In addition, during the 17F reception period in this embodiment, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is not switched to another background image (background change) during the 17F reception period as a result of an operation on "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," as shown in FIG. 337(d), nor is it switched to another background image (background change) during the 17F reception period as a result of an operation on "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

However, instead of this, during the 17F reception period, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is not switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 17F reception period, but may be switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on "17F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the 17F reception period. Furthermore, during the 17F reception period, there may be both cases where the background image is switched to another (background change) in response to an operation on "17F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" (for example, the operation at timing tq2E) and cases where it is not switched (background change) (for example, each operation at timing tq2B to tq2D).

In this regard, during the 17F reception period in this embodiment, the light emission mode of a specific light-emitting unit can be switched (light emission changed) to another light emission mode (here, light emission mode Y1, Y2) during the 17F reception period as a trigger for operation of "17F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)," as shown in FIG. 337(e), but it is not switched (light emission changed) to another light emission mode during the 17F reception period as a trigger for operation of "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)."

On the other hand, the examples shown in Figures 338, 340(a)-(f), and 341(g2)-(m2) are examples in which operations are accepted for the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timings tq2a and tq2b in the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 17F acceptance period, but the above-mentioned timing tqX is assumed to arrive while the "second performance mode UB2" is being displayed as the 17F post-acceptance display UB in response to the second acceptance of the operation.

Here, the performance content (see Figures 340(a)-(c)) when the first operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tq2a in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 17F reception period is the same as when the first operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tq2A (see Figure 338) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIG. 338 and FIG. 340(c) and (d), it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tq2b (when the aspect shown in FIG. 340(c) appears) during the 17F reception period. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 338(i), (k) and FIG. 340(d), as one of the 17F post-reception changes B, a "depiction of the magic value (the area filled in for the "magic" decorative display) increasing (the magic value changing from "1" to "2")" and a "depiction of the wizard MT further saving MP" are performed (second performance aspect UB2 as the 17F post-reception display UB). However, as described above, in this case, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 338(k)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 338 and FIG. 340(d) and (e), when the 17th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 340(d)), the arrival of timing tqX triggers the end of the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 17th F reception period, and the start of the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)."

In this regard, in the 17F reception period, when the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" starts in this manner, first, as shown in Figures 338(f), (g) and 340(e), the arrival of a specific timing tqX triggers the display of the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the "17F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410).

However, during the 17F reception period, unlike the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" described above, as shown in Figures 338(d) and 340(e), the arrival of timing tqX does not result in a change in the background image or in the light emission state of the specific light-emitting element.

In addition, in this performance example, even if the specific timing tqX arrives while the 17F post-reception display UB is being displayed, this does not cause the 17F post-reception display UB to be hidden, but rather it continues to be displayed even after the start of the "interval in which operation-related displays are displayed (display interval, second interval)" (see Figures 338(i) and 340(e)), and it is hidden when the display time (execution time) has elapsed. Although not shown in the figures, if the specific timing tqX arrives while the 17F post-reception display UB2 is not being displayed, it goes without saying that the "interval in which operation-related displays are displayed (display interval, second interval)" will start without the 17F post-reception display UB being displayed.

The examples shown in Fig. 338, Fig. 340(a)-(f), and Fig. 341(g2)-(m2) assume that a third operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tq2c (a situation in which the performance display shown in Fig. 340(e) appears) within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the 17F reception period. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in Figs. 338(i), (k) and 340(e), (f), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but a new display (mode) does not appear as the 17F post-reception display UB.

In this example, when the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) during the 17F reception period, "a new display does not appear as the 17F post-reception display UB." Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 17F reception period, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be displayed as the 17F post-reception display UB. In short, such an event (no new display appears as the 17F post-reception display UB despite an operation being performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 17F reception period) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 17F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" but no post-reception display or post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation appears (no display change or sound output corresponding to the operation), the player will feel uneasy, wondering if it is okay to continue operating the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". This feeling of uneasiness is likely to grow stronger as the remaining time of the 17F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 17F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", the 17F post-reception display UB may be displayed, but the post-reception output sound will not be audibly output, which makes this feeling of uneasiness even more likely.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 338, 340(a)-(f), and 341(g2)-(m2) are based on the assumption that the player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timing tq2a-tq2c)" of aiming to advance the presentation by operating "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" multiple times within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", and switches to a "new game strategy" of aiming to advance the presentation by operating "17F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)".

That is, in this example, as shown in Figs. 338(a), (h), and (i), a 17F post-acceptance display UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2" or a depiction of the wizard MT further accumulating MP) is displayed in response to an operation acceptance on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," and while the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are each displayed, at timing tq2d (Fig. 335) within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the 17F acceptance period, It is assumed that the first operation is received for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2e (when the performance display shown in FIG. 341(g2) appears), timing tq2f (when the performance display shown in FIG. 341(h2) appears), and timing tq2g (when the performance display shown in FIG. 341(i2) appears) within the same section (display section, second section), respectively.

As shown in Figures 338 and 341 (g2), during this 17F reception period, if an operation is received for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at each of the above-mentioned timings tq2d to tq2g within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", this will also trigger the 17F post-reception change A.

These 17F post-acceptance changes A are basically as described above with reference to Figure 341 (g1) to (m1) as the performance content when an operation is accepted for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at each timing tq2B to tq2E in the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 17F acceptance period.

However, in this example, unlike the case of timing tq2B, at the time when an operation is accepted for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2d, the 17F post-acceptance display UB is displayed in the "second performance mode UB2" as the 17F post-acceptance display UB. Therefore, the 17F post-acceptance display UB will continue to be displayed as the "second performance mode UB2" even after the above-mentioned 17F post-acceptance change A has begun. Note that, as shown in Figures 340 and 341, when the 17F post-acceptance display UB overlaps with another image on the display screen, regardless of its mode UB1 or UB2, it is displayed so that whichever image appears to overlap it appears to be overlapped in front.

Also, in this example, unlike the case of timing tq2B, the 17F premonition display ZFD is already in a hidden state at the time when the operation is accepted for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2d. Therefore, the 17F premonition display ZFD is not in a displayed state at the time when the 17F post-acceptance change A starts. However, even if the operation is accepted for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", if the 17F premonition display ZFD is in a displayed state at the time when the operation is accepted, it is the same as the case of timing tq2B. In other words, the 17F premonition display ZFD will continue to be in a displayed state even after the 17F post-acceptance change A starts, and will then be made hidden as a result of the above-mentioned operation acceptance.

Also, in this example, unlike the case of timing tq2B, at the time when an operation is accepted for "17F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2d, "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are both displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 341 (g2), the "17F effect display EF" in response to an operation being accepted for "17F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2d is displayed so as to appear to overlap with the front side of "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" while "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are each displayed with the above-mentioned periodic changes. In this case, the 17th F post-acceptance display UA will be displayed behind both the "17th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17th F effect display EF," as shown in FIG. 341 (g2).

Therefore, unlike the case where the first operation is received for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2B (see FIG. 337), when the first operation is received for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2d (see FIG. 338), this triggers the periodic change of the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was displayed with the above-mentioned periodic change until then to be hidden. At this time, although it is made difficult to see by the "17F effect display EF1", the display of the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself continues, and only the periodic change that was being performed until then is temporarily terminated. As described above, the periodic change that was once terminated in this way is resumed from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Then, at timing tq2e (see FIG. 338), when a second operation is accepted for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the periodic change in the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was temporarily terminated at the previous (first) operation acceptance may be made to maintain its terminated state, or may be made to resume with the terminated state canceled, but when the second operation is accepted, this will serve as a trigger to cause the end state of the periodic change to occur again. In other words, in this case, the periodic change that was temporarily terminated in this way will be resumed from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second operation was accepted, based on that point in time.

In addition, during the 17F reception period, the 17F post-reception display UA is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ (see FIG. 341 (j1), (l1), (j2), (l2), etc.). In contrast, the 17F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to it. These display relationships do not change and are the same in both the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)."

In addition, in this example, the 17F post-reception display UB is not hidden based on the operation of the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 17F reception period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 341, etc., the 17F post-reception display UB not only continues to be displayed at the time when the "17F post-reception display UA" or the "17F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation of the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" starts to be displayed, but can also continue to be displayed even when the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "17F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" or the "17F effect display EF" is hidden.

In this case, however, it is desirable, but not essential, to hide the 17th F post-reception display UB (such as depictions of increasing magical power values or the wizard MT saving MP) while the "17th F post-reception display UA4" is displayed. This makes it possible to appeal to the viewer that the performance can be advanced by accepting an operation (magic by the wizard) on the "17th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)," while in fact indicating that the performance has advanced by accepting an operation on the "17th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)."

In addition, in the 17F reception period, as shown in FIG. 339(j) and the like, a 17F operation-related sound a is output in connection with the occurrence of the 17F reception period. The 17F operation-related sound a in this example is output as the above-mentioned "reception-permitted sound", and may be selectively audibly output as either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2". For example, when the "first permissible sound a1" is audibly output as the 17F operation-related sound a upon the occurrence of the 17F reception period, it is desirable to set it so that it suggests that the expectation (proportion) of a jackpot is higher than when the "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 17F operation-related sound a. In addition, the "first allowable sound a1" which is a form of the 17F operation-related sound a is output as the same sound as the "first allowable sound a1" which is a form of the 16F operation-related sound a described above, and the "second allowable sound a2" which is a form of the 17F operation-related sound a is output as a sound different from the "second allowable sound a2" which is a form of the 16F operation-related sound a described above. However, the "second allowable sound a2" which is a form of the 17F operation-related sound a may also be output as the same sound as the "second allowable sound a2" which is a form of the 16F operation-related sound a described above. In addition, the 17F reception allowable sound does not necessarily have to be output in one of the multiple forms (multiple allowable sounds), and may be output in only one form (one allowable sound).

Incidentally, during the 17F reception period, while either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is being audibly output as the 17F operation-related sound a, even if an operation is received for either the "16F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," this will not interrupt the audible output of the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2."

In addition, in the 17F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 338 and FIG. 340(f), when the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated, the periodic changes that have appeared up until then in the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)" continue without being hidden (terminating, interrupting, switching periods, etc.). In other words, in the 17F reception period, the periodic changes in the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)" do not change in display mode before and after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period) for the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation-related display B (button pattern image BMG)" will continue to progress through their respective periodic changes (period 17F time A, period 17F time B) described above.

In contrast, during the 17F reception period, as shown in Figures 333 and 336, when the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the periodic changes in the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation related display B (button pattern image BMG)" are hidden based on this. Here, when the first to third operations are accepted for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)" themselves are not hidden, and their periodic changes are hidden (ended); however, when the fourth operation is accepted for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation-related display B (button-like image BMG)" themselves are hidden, thereby hiding their periodic changes.

In this example, the gauge image GG is depicted decreasing over time while the 17F reception period is continuing, but this does not necessarily have to be the case.

In addition, during the 17F reception period, the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden or the 17F reception period is terminated based on an operation performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, when an operation is performed on the "17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", no matter how many times the operation is performed, this may not be used as a trigger to hide the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" or terminate the 17F reception period.

For example, when the magic value (area filled in for the "magic" decoration display) is maximized as a result of repeated operations on the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 17F reception period, the game may wait until the timing tq3 at which the 17F reception period ends, and perform an effect of casting a spell and leaving based on the arrival of the timing tq3. In this case, even if the magic value is maximized, if the game is set in a state where operation acceptance on the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is permitted until the arrival of the timing tq3, it becomes possible to challenge the BOSS character to make multiple attacks while the effect of casting a spell and leaving is confirmed, which can increase the interest in the game. However, when the 17F post-reception display UA4 is displayed as a result of performing multiple attacks in this way (when the 17F reception period ends), the effect of casting a spell and leaving will no longer be performed.

Alternatively, an effect determination may be made prior to generating the 17F reception period, and if no special determination result is obtained as a result of the effect determination, an effect may be executed in which it is predetermined that the magic value will not accumulate to its maximum (the reception period will not end) no matter how many times an operation is performed on "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 17F reception period. In this case, when a fourth operation is performed on "17F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)," the "post-17F reception display UA4" may always show pattern UA4-2, which has a relatively low expectation, or may show pattern UA4-1, which has a relatively high expectation. In this regard, if there is a possibility that the relatively highly anticipated pattern UA4-1 will appear when an operation is performed on the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," it can be expected that a decrease in interest in the game will be effectively suppressed when the magic power value is not accumulated to the maximum level no matter how many times the operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)."

In addition, even if the "17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which is displayed as the "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" and allows multiple operation receptions is kept in an operated (pressed) state during the 17F reception period, this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see Fig. 337(b) and Fig. 338(b)). In this case, if the player wants to receive multiple operations for the "17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "17F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" during the 17F reception period, it goes without saying that the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

However, during the 17F reception period, if the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" which is displayed as the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and allows multiple operation receptions is kept in an operated (pressed) state, operation reception is performed multiple times (the auto-repeated function is activated and operation reception is automatically repeated every predetermined time) (see Fig. 337(a) and Fig. 338(a)). In this performance example, it is assumed that the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is kept in an operated (pressed) state from timing tq2B (when the performance display shown in Fig. 340(c) appears) or timing tq2d (when the performance display shown in Fig. 340(f) appears), and operation reception is performed every predetermined time (timing tq2C, tq2D, tq2E, or timing tq2e, tq2f, tq2g).

Also, the 17F reception period is originally intended to continue until timing tq3 arrives if there is no operation reception (that would end the reception period), as shown in FIG. 339(c), and to end when timing tq3 arrives.

In this regard, the 17F reception period may be generated as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. In other words, in this case, if the operation reception (here, the fourth operation reception for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)") that ends the reception period is not performed until the timing tq3 arrives in the 17F reception period, the same post-reception change A as when the operation reception (here, the fourth operation reception for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)") that ends the reception period by operating the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the reception period can occur based on the arrival of timing tq3. In this case, the performance corresponding to the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" that requires multiple operations during the 17F reception period and does not have the so-called auto-repeated function enabled cannot be enjoyed unless the player operates it himself, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained in a good way.

In this case, even if "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 17F reception period and the 17F reception period does not end and timing tq3 arrives, the same post-reception change A as when "17F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is operated during the reception period will occur based on the arrival of timing tq3. In other words, in this case, while the 17F post-reception display UB (such as a depiction of an increasing magic value or a depiction of the wizard MT saving MP) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and post-reception change A (such as a post-reception display, a post-reception output sound, or a change in the light emission mode of a specific light-emitting unit) occurs.

In this example, in the 17F reception period, when a predetermined number of operations (here, the fourth time) are performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," "operation acceptance to end the reception period" is performed and the 17F post-reception display UA4 is displayed. Alternatively, a judgment may be made when an operation is performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 17F reception period, and based on the result of the judgment, "operation acceptance to end the reception period" may be performed and the 17F post-reception display UA4 may be displayed, or "operation acceptance that does not end the reception period" may be performed and one of the 17F post-reception displays UA1 to 3 may be displayed. In short, such an event (when an operation is performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 17F reception period, "operation acceptance to end the reception period" is performed as a trigger) may occur when a predetermined condition is met.

Also, the "17F premonition performance display" in this example is made invisible before timing tq3 arrives. In this regard, the "17F premonition performance display" in this example will not be made invisible as a result of an operation being performed on "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" while the "17F premonition performance display" is displayed. However, with regard to the "17F premonition performance display", if an operation is performed on "17F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" while the "17F premonition performance display" is displayed, this may be a trigger for the "17F premonition performance display" to be made invisible, or it may not be made invisible as a trigger for this. For example, while the "17F premonition performance display" is displayed, if an operation is accepted on the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that ends the 17F reception period, this may be used as a trigger to make the "17F premonition performance display" invisible; however, if an operation is accepted on the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that does not end the 17F reception period, this may not be used as a trigger to make the "17F premonition performance display" invisible.

The "17th F premonition display" may be displayed continuously until timing tq3 of the 17th F reception period arrives.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned 12th F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312), 13th F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314), 16th F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), and 17th F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341), a method was adopted in which both types of operation units are displayed as mock images, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, the 12th F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312) may be generated as a "12th F reception period according to a modified example (see Figs. 342 and 343)" as described below. The 13th F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314) may be generated as a "13th F reception period according to a modified example (see Figs. 344 and 345)" as described below. The 16th F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336) may be generated as a "16th F reception period according to a modified example (see Figs. 346 to 348)" as described below. The 17th F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341) may be generated as a "17th F reception period according to a modified example (see Figs. 349 to 351)" as described below.

Figures 342 and 343 are time charts showing an example of the performance content when "Condition 12F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and a "12th F reception period (12th F reception period according to the modified example)" occurs as a modified example of the 12th F reception period. Note that, as there are many overlapping parts with the case where the above-mentioned 12th F reception period occurs (see Figures 285 and 286), illustrations of the performance example in the variation pattern in which the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs will be omitted, and basically, only the differences (changes) from the above-mentioned "12th F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", the configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as when the above-mentioned "12th F reception period" occurs.

In other words, in the "12F reception period according to the modified example", like the 12F reception period described above, 12F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is only allowed to receive one operation until the "12F reception period according to the modified example" ends, and 12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations until the "12F reception period according to the modified example" ends (multiple operation allowed period). Also, these other examples of "12F operation unit A" and "12F operation unit B" can be appropriately applied in the same way as the 12F reception period described above.

However, in the "12F reception period according to the modified example", when the "12F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the "12F operation related display A" corresponding to the 12F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is displayed, but as shown in FIG. 343(g) and the like, the "12F operation related display B" corresponding to the 12F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed, which is different from the above-mentioned "12F reception period (see FIG. 311 and FIG. 312)". In other words, in this case, among the multiple operation parts (12F operation part A, 12F operation part B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted, the fact that only some of the operation parts are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, and this can be expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to concealment, while maintaining a suitable sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In this regard, the "12F reception period according to the modified example" differs from the 12F reception period described above in that the "12F operation-related display A" is displayed and the "12F operation-related display B" is not displayed, but the rest of the configuration and presentation content are the same as the 12F reception period described above. Therefore, even when the "12F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the presentation will basically progress as described above with reference to Figures 311 and 312, and further Figures 284 to 286.

In other words, when compared with the presentation example (12th F reception period) shown in Figures 311 and 312, and even Figures 284 to 286 when the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the only difference is that the "12th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is not displayed; otherwise the content is basically the same, and other examples applicable to the configuration related to the 12th F reception period can be similarly applied to the configuration related to the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" (configuration other than the 12th F operation-related display B).

Therefore, when the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the corresponding premonition display is first displayed so that it overlaps the timing when the 12th F operation-related display A is displayed.

Furthermore, the fact that this premonition display is executed by both "Mode ZFD-1" and "Mode ZFD-2", the manner in which it is displayed relative to "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the conditions under which it is hidden, and the fact that "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes are also as described above in the 12th F reception period.

In addition, in this example, when the first operation is performed on the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", this triggers the display of the 12th F post-reception display UB1, as in the case of the 12th F reception period described above (see FIG. 311(i)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output. However, in this example, when the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", in addition to the display of the 12th F post-reception display UB1, the operation triggers the display of the "12th F operation-related display B" (see FIG. 342(g)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 342, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tl2A, but the "12th F operation related display B" is not displayed until the timing tl2A arrives (in the situation shown in FIG. 285(a) and (b), the "12th F operation related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tl2A, this triggers the display of the "12th F operation related display B" (in the situation shown in FIG. 285(c) and subsequent pages, the "12th F operation related display B" is displayed).

With this configuration, the fact that the state in which acceptance of operations to "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is permitted can be kept secret at the time when the "12th F acceptance period for the modified example" occurs. However, this secret state will be released if an operation is accepted to "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" even once during the "12th F acceptance period for the modified example", so it can be expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained while also increasing interest in the game.

Here, such a "12th F operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in Figures 284 to 286 etc. during the "12th F reception period according to the modified example". However, if the display manner (the manner shown in Figures 284 to 286 etc.) that should have been displayed when the reception period occurred were to appear in the middle of the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" and on the condition that an operation had been received, there is a concern that the player will have a negative feeling that it had been "intentionally hidden" up until that point, which may in fact decrease his interest in the game.

Therefore, in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example," the "12th F operation-related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in Figs. 284 to 286, etc., but the "12th F operation-related display B" is displayed in a manner different from that shown in Figs. 284 to 286, etc. For example, the "12th F operation-related display B" may not be displayed as a display imitating the "12th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," but may be displayed as a different display image. In addition, the "12th F operation-related display B" may not display a periodic change. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is received for the "12th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "12th F reception period according to the modified example," this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "12th F operation-related display B" from being displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 342 assumes that a second operation is performed on the "12th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tl2B within the "12th F reception period according to the modified example." In this case, in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example," similarly to the 12th F reception period described above (see FIG. 311(i)), the 12th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the second operation (see FIG. 342(i)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output (see FIG. 342(k)).

In this regard, during the "12th F reception period for the modified example" of this performance example, the display mode of the "12th F operation-related display B" does not change based on the second operation being performed, and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 342 (g)).

In the example shown in FIG. 342, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "12th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tl2C in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example". In this case, in the 12th F reception period according to the modified example, as in the above-mentioned 12th F reception period, when the third operation is performed, not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but also a new display (mode) does not appear as the 12th F post-reception display UB, as shown in FIG. 342(i) and (k). In this example, such an event (no new display appears as the 12th F post-reception display UB despite the operation being performed on the "12th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 12th F reception period according to the modified example) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 342(a), (g), and (i), while the "12th F post-acceptance display UB2" and "12th F operation-related display B" are displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "12th F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tl2D within the "12th F acceptance period for the modified example."

Even in the "12F reception period according to the modified example", when an operation is performed on the "12F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tl2D, a 12F post-reception change A occurs. That is, as one of the 12F post-reception changes A, first, the 12F reception period according to the modified example is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 342 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 286 (f), (i) and Fig. 342 (h), (k), a "12F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "12F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "12F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "12F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, the "light emission mode in the specific light emission part" changes, and further a 12F post-reception display UA is displayed.

... However, it may be possible to hide this immediately after an operation has been accepted.

However, unlike the case of the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" where the "12th F operation-related display B" appears under the condition that an operation has been received, it may be made to be hidden at the same timing (under the same conditions) as the post-12th F reception display UB2, unlike the case of the "12th F reception period" described above. In other words, in this case, it will be made to be hidden during the period in which the post-12th F reception display UA is displayed.

...

Others, such as the "12th F reception allowable sound", "whether the auto-repeated function is enabled", and "whether the automatic button function is enabled" related to the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", are the same as those in the 12th F reception period described above. However, it goes without saying that if there is no operation on the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", then as shown in FIG. 343, the "12th F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the "12th F reception period according to the modified example".

As mentioned above, during the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", even if an operation is received for the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "12th F operation-related display B" from being displayed. In this case, in Figures 284 to 286 and Figure 342 (g), the "12th F operation-related display B" will always remain in a hidden state, and the performance will progress with the other configurations remaining the same as in the 12th F reception period described above.

In addition, in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example," the "12th F operation-related display B" is made invisible when an operation is received for the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," but it may be realized so that it is not made invisible when an operation is received for the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

Figures 344 and 345 are time charts showing an example of the performance content when "Condition 13F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "13F reception period (13F reception period according to the modified example)" occurs as a modified example of the 13F reception period. Note that, as there are many overlapping parts with the case where the above-mentioned 13F reception period occurs (see Figures 290 and 291), illustrations of the performance example in the variation pattern in which the "13F reception period according to the modified example" occurs will be omitted, and basically, only the differences (changes) from the above-mentioned "13F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "13F reception period according to the modified example", the configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as when the above-mentioned "13F reception period" occurs.

In other words, in the "13F reception period according to the modified example", as in the 13F reception period described above, both 13F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and 13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are permitted to accept multiple operations before the "13F reception period according to the modified example" ends (multiple operation permitted period). Furthermore, the alternative examples of "13F operation unit A" and "13F operation unit B" can be appropriately applied in the same manner as in the 13F reception period described above.

However, in the "13F reception period according to the modified example", when the "13F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the "13F operation related display A" corresponding to the 13F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed, but the "13F operation related display B" corresponding to the 13F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed, as shown in Fig. 344(g) and Fig. 345(g), etc., which is different from the above-mentioned "13F reception period". In other words, in this case, among the multiple operation parts (13F operation part A, 13F operation part B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted, the fact that only some of the operation parts are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, and this can be expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to concealment, while maintaining a suitable sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In this regard, the "13F reception period according to the modified example" differs from the 13F reception period described above in that the "13F operation-related display A" is displayed and the "13F operation-related display B" is not displayed, but the rest of the configuration and presentation content are the same as the 13F reception period described above. Therefore, even when the "13F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the presentation will basically progress as described above with reference to Figures 313 and 314, and further Figures 289 to 291.

In other words, when the presentation example when the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs is compared with the presentation example (13th F reception period) shown in Figures 313 and 314, and further Figures 290 and 291, the only difference is that the "13th F operation related display B (button model image BMG)" is not displayed, but the other contents are basically the same, and the other examples applicable to the configuration related to the 13th F reception period can be similarly applied to the configuration related to the 13th F reception period according to the modified example (configuration other than the 13th F operation related display B).

Therefore, when the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the "13th F premonition display ZFD" is first displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 13th F operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in Figures 290 and 291, etc.

Furthermore, the manner in which the "13F Premonition Display ZFD" is displayed relative to the "13F Operation-Related Display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)", the conditions under which it is hidden, and the periodic changes with which the "13F Operation-Related Display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)" is displayed are also as described above in the 13F reception period.

In addition, in this example, when the first operation is performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "13F reception period according to the modified example," this triggers the display of the 13F post-reception display UB1, as in the case of the 13F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(c)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output. However, in this example, when the "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 13F reception period according to the modified example, in addition to the display of the 13F post-reception display UB1, the operation triggers the display of the "13F operation-related display B" (see FIG. 344(g)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 344, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tm2A, but the "13F operation-related display B" is not displayed until the timing tg2A arrives (in the situation shown in FIG. 290(a) and (b), the "13F operation-related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2A, this triggers the display of the "13F operation-related display B" (in the situation shown in FIG. 290(c) and subsequent pages, the "13F operation-related display B" is displayed).

With this configuration, the fact that the state in which operation acceptance is permitted for "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" can be kept secret at the time when the "13F acceptance period for the modified example" occurs. However, this secret state will be released if an operation is accepted for "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" even once during the "13F acceptance period for the modified example", so it can be expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained while also increasing interest in the game.

Here, such a "13th F operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in Figs. 289 to 291 etc. during the "13th F reception period according to the modified example". However, if the display manner (as shown in Figs. 289 to 291 etc.) that should have been displayed when the reception period occurred were to appear in the middle of the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" and on the condition that an operation had been received, there is a concern that the player will have a negative feeling that it had been "intentionally hidden" up until that point, which may in fact decrease his interest in the game.

Therefore, in the "13F reception period according to the modified example" according to this performance example, the "13F operation related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in Figs. 289 to 291, etc., but the "13F operation related display B" is displayed in a manner different from the manner shown in Figs. 289 to 291, etc. For example, the "13F operation related display B" may not be displayed as a display imitating the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but may be displayed as a different display image. In addition, the "13F operation related display B" may not show periodic changes. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "13F reception period according to the modified example", this may be used as a trigger to not display the "13F operation related display B".

The example shown in FIG. 344 assumes that a second operation is performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tm2B within the "13F reception period according to the modified example." In this case, in the 13F reception period according to the modified example, similarly to the 13F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(d)), the 13F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the second operation (see FIG. 344(i)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output (see FIG. 344(k)).

In this regard, during the "13th F reception period for the modified example" of this performance example, the display mode of the "13th F operation-related display B" does not change based on the second operation being performed, and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 344 (e)).

In the example shown in FIG. 344, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tm2C in the "13F reception period according to the modified example". In this case, in the "13F reception period according to the modified example", as in the case of the above-mentioned 13F reception period (see FIG. 290(e)), when the third operation is performed, not only is the post-reception output sound not audible, but also a new display (mode) does not appear as the 13F post-reception display UB, as shown in FIG. 290(e) and FIG. 344(i) and (k). In this example, such an event (no new display appears as the 13F post-reception display UB despite the operation being performed on the "13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "13F reception period according to the modified example") may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 344(a), (g), and (i), while the "13F post-acceptance display UB2" and "13F operation-related display B" are displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation on "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," it is assumed that an operation is performed on "13F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tm2D within the "13F acceptance period for the modified example."

Even in the 13F reception period according to the modified example, when the first operation is received for the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tm2D, a 13F post-reception change A can occur. That is, as shown in FIG. 344(h)-(k) and FIG. 291(f), for example, as the 13F post-reception change A, a "13F post-reception output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation for the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "13F effect display EF1" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, the light emission state of the specific light-emitting part changes, and further a 13F post-reception display UA1 is displayed.

In addition, when the first operation is performed, the "13th F reception permissible sound that was being audibly output," the "13th F post-reception display UB that was being displayed," the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) that was undergoing periodic change," and the "13th F effect display EF1" are the same as in the 13th F reception period described above.

Furthermore, during the "13th F reception period for the modified example" of this presentation example, the display mode of the "13th F operation-related display B" does not change based on the first operation reception being made for the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 344 (g)).

In this example, as shown in Figs. 344(a), (e), (h), and (i), various post-acceptance changes A have occurred in response to the previous operation acceptance for "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the 13F post-acceptance display UB2 in response to the operation acceptance for "13F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed. In this situation, it is assumed that the second and third operations are accepted for "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timings tm2E and tm2F (the timings shown in Figs. 291(g) and (h)) during the 13F acceptance period according to the modified example.

Even if the second and third operations are accepted for the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timings tm2E and tm2F (situations in which the performance displays shown in Figs. 291(f) and (g) appear) during the 13F acceptance period in the modified example, change A after acceptance of 13F can occur, as shown in Figs. 291(g), (h) and 344, just as when the first operation is accepted for the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

In particular, the "output sound A1 after 13F acceptance", the "13F effect display EF1", and the "change in the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting unit" are designed to appear in the same manner when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. The periodic change in the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once terminated at the previous operation acceptance may be maintained in its terminated state at the time when the second and third operations are accepted, or may be resumed by canceling the terminated state, but when the second and third operations are accepted, this will trigger the end state of the periodic change to occur again. In other words, in this case, the periodic change that was once terminated in this way will be resumed from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second and third operations are accepted.

In this respect, the "13F post-acceptance display UA" is basically the same as the first operation acceptance (13F post-acceptance display UA1) for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, even in the "13F acceptance period according to the modified example", when the second operation acceptance is made, "the hero YS attacks and the boss character's HP decreases to about 50% remaining (13F post-acceptance display UA2)" is displayed (see FIG. 291(g)), and when the third operation acceptance is made, "the hero YS attacks and the boss character's HP decreases to about 25% remaining (13F post-acceptance display UA3)" is displayed (see FIG. 291(h)), and so on, with the progress being seen in the presentation. In other words, the presentation as the "13F post-acceptance display UA" is the same as that of the 13F acceptance period described above, and other examples can also be applied as appropriate.

In addition, when the second and third operations are performed, the "13F reception allowable sound that was being audibly output", the "13F post-reception display UB that was being displayed", the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) that was undergoing periodic changes", the "13F effect display EF1", the "light emission state of the specific light-emitting section", etc. are the same as in the 13F reception period described above.

Furthermore, during the 13F reception period in the modified example of this performance example, the display mode of the "13F operation related display B" does not change based on the second or third reception of an operation to the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 344 (g)).

In this example, as shown in Figs. 344(a), (e), (f), (h), and (i), a situation is assumed in which post-acceptance changes A have occurred in various places in response to the third acceptance of an operation on "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the 13F post-acceptance display UB2 in response to the acceptance of an operation on "13F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is still being displayed, and a fourth operation is accepted on "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tm2G (see Fig. 291(i)) within the 13F acceptance period according to the modified example.

When a fourth operation is accepted for the "13F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tm2G within the "13F acceptance period for the modified example", a change after 13F acceptance A may occur. That is, as one of the changes after 13F acceptance A, first, the "13F acceptance period for the modified example" is ended based on that operation (see Figures 344 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Figures 291(i), (l) and Figures 344(h), (k), a "13F post-acceptance output sound A" corresponding to an operation on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "13F effect display EF" is displayed that makes it difficult to see the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting section changes, and further a 13F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

Also, in the state immediately after the operation is accepted during the "13F acceptance period according to the modified example" (the state in which the 13F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in Fig. 291(i) and (l), the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "13F operation related display B", and "13F premonition performance display ZFD" are not hidden, and the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 13F effect display EF. After this, the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "13F operation related display B", and "13F premonition performance display ZFD" are made to be made to be hidden based on the operation of the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" (see Fig. 291(l) and (m)). However, they may be made to be hidden from the state immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike the case of the "13F reception period according to the modified example," the "13F operation-related display B," which appears when an operation is received during the "13F reception period according to the modified example," may be made to be hidden at the same timing (under the same conditions) as the 13F post-reception display UB2. In other words, in this case, it will be made to be hidden during the period in which the 13F post-reception display UA4 is displayed.

Furthermore, the "13F operation-related display B" that appears during the "13F reception period according to the modified example" and under the condition that an operation has been received may be displayed in the same manner as the 13F post-reception display UB in relation to other display images, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "13F reception period". In other words, in this case, the 13F operation-related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "13F premonition performance display ZFD" or "13F effect display EF", but is displayed in front of them when they overlap. It may also be displayed in front of the decorative pattern SZ. When such a configuration is adopted, the 13F operation-related display B is displayed in a manner different from the 13F operation-related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "13F premonition performance display ZFD" or "13F effect display EF".

Others, such as the "13F reception allowable sound", "whether the auto-repeated function is enabled", and "whether the automatic button function is enabled" related to the "13F reception period according to the modified example", are the same as those in the 13F reception period described above. However, it goes without saying that if there is no operation on the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "13F reception period according to the modified example", then as shown in FIG. 345, the "13F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the "13F reception period according to the modified example".

As mentioned above, even if an operation is accepted for the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "13F acceptance period according to the modified example," this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "13F operation-related display B" from being displayed. In this case, the "13F operation-related display B" will always remain hidden in Figures 289 to 291 and 344 (g), and the performance will progress with the other configurations remaining the same as in the case of the 13F acceptance period described above.

In addition, in the "13F reception period according to the modified example," the "13F operation-related display B" is hidden when an operation is received (an operation that satisfies the conditions for ending the reception period) for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," but it may be realized so that it is not hidden when an operation is received for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

Figures 346 to 348 are time charts showing an example of the performance content when "Condition 16F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and a "16F reception period (16F reception period according to the modified example)" occurs as a modified example of the 16F reception period. Note that, as there are many overlapping parts with the case where the above-mentioned 16F reception period occurs (see Figures 335 and 336), illustrations of the performance example in the variation pattern where the "16F reception period according to the modified example" occurs are omitted, and basically, only the differences (changes) from the above-mentioned "16F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "16F reception period according to the modified example", the configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as when the above-mentioned "16F reception period" occurs.

In other words, in the "16F reception period for the modified example", like the 16F reception period described above, the 16F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is only allowed to receive one operation until the "16F reception period for the modified example" ends, and the 16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive multiple operations until the "16F reception period for the modified example" ends (multiple operation allowed period). Also, these other examples of "16F operation unit A" and "16F operation unit B" can be appropriately applied in the same way as the 16F reception period described above.

Similarly, during the "16F reception period for the modified example" from the occurrence of the "16F reception period for the modified example" until the arrival of timing tpX, neither the "16F operation-related display A" corresponding to the 16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) nor the "16F operation-related display B" corresponding to the 16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

However, in the "16F reception period according to the modified example", when timing tpX in the "16F reception period according to the modified example" arrives, although "16F operation related display A" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 348(g) and the like, "16F operation related display B" is not displayed, which is different from the above-mentioned "16F reception period (see FIG. 333 and FIG. 334)". In other words, in this case, of the multiple operation units (16F operation unit A, 16F operation unit B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted, the fact that only some of the operation units are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, and this is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to concealment, while maintaining a suitable sense of tension during the reception period.

In this regard, the "16F reception period according to the modified example" differs from the 16F reception period described above in that after timing tpX arrives, "16F operation-related display A" is displayed and "16F operation-related display B" is not displayed, but the rest of the configuration and presentation content are the same as the 16F reception period described above. Therefore, even when the "16F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the presentation will basically progress as described above with reference to Figures 332 to 336.

In other words, the presentation example when the "16F reception period according to the modified example" occurs differs from the presentation example (16F reception period) shown in Figures 332 to 336 in that the "16F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is not displayed, but the rest of the content is basically the same, and other examples that can be applied to the configuration related to the 16F reception period can be similarly applied to the configuration related to the "16F reception period according to the modified example" (configuration other than the 16F operation-related display B).

Therefore, when a "16th F reception period relating to the modified example" occurs, the corresponding 16th F premonition display ZFD is first displayed so that it spans the time when the 16th F operation-related display A is displayed.

Furthermore, the manner in which this 16F premonition display ZFD is displayed relative to the "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)," the conditions under which it is hidden, and the fact that the "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes are also as described above in the 16F reception period.

Also, in this performance example, when the first operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the "16F reception period for the modified example", regardless of whether the timing of this operation reception is in a "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or a "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", this triggers the display of the 16F post-reception display UB1, just as in the case of the 17F reception period described above (see Figures 332 (i) and 333 (i)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output. However, in this performance example, when an operation is performed on the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "16F reception period for the modified example," regardless of whether the timing of this operation reception is in a "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or a "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)," in addition to the 16F post-reception display UB1 being displayed, the "16F operation-related display B" is displayed in response to the operation (see Figures 346(g) and 347(g)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 346, it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tp2c within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", but the "16F operation-related display B" is not displayed until the timing tp2c arrives. In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tp2c, this triggers the display of the "16F operation-related display B".

With this configuration, the fact that the state in which acceptance of operations to the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is permitted is concealed at the time when the timing tpX of the "16F acceptance period according to the modified example" arrives (the time when the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" begins). However, this concealed state is released if an operation is accepted to the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" even once during the "16F acceptance period according to the modified example", so it can be expected that the excitement of playing the game will be increased while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension.

Here, such a "16th F operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner described in the "16th F reception period" described above, even during the "16th F reception period according to the modified example". However, if a display mode that should be displayed when timing tpX arrives appears after timing tpX and on the condition that an operation has been received, there is a concern that the player will have a negative feeling that it was "intentionally hidden" up until that point, which may in turn decrease his or her interest in the game.

Therefore, in the "16F reception period according to the modified example" according to this performance example, the "16F operation related display A" is displayed in the manner described in the "16F reception period" described above, but the "16F operation related display B" is displayed in a manner different from that described in the "16F reception period" described above. For example, the "16F operation related display B" may not be displayed as a display imitating the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" but may be displayed as a different display image. In addition, the "16F operation related display B" may not display a periodic change. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "16F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "16F reception period according to the modified example", this may be used as a trigger to not display the "16F operation related display B".

In the example shown in FIG. 346, although it is not shown, even if a second operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section (display section, second section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "16F reception period according to the modified example," the 16F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the second operation, just as in the case of the 16F reception period described above. At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output.

In this regard, during the "16th F reception period for the modified example" of this performance example, the display mode of the "16th F operation-related display B" will not change based on the second operation being performed, and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point will continue.

In the example shown in FIG. 346, although illustration is omitted, even if a third operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the "16F reception period according to the modified example," not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but also a new display (mode) does not appear as the 16F post-reception display UB, as in the case of the 16F reception period described above. Even in this example, such an event (no new display appears as the 16F post-reception display UB despite the fact that an operation is performed on the "16F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 16F reception period according to the modified example) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 346(a), (g), and (i), while the "16F post-acceptance display UB" and "16F operation-related display B" are displayed in response to the operation acceptance to "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," it is assumed that an operation is performed to "16F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tp2d within the "section (display section, second section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "16F acceptance period according to the modified example."

Even in the "16F reception period according to the modified example", when an operation is performed on the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2d, a 16F post-reception change A occurs. That is, as one of the 16F post-reception changes A, first, the 16F reception period according to the modified example is ended based on the operation (see Fig. 346 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 336 (g2), (j2) and Fig. 346 (h), (k), a "16F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "16F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, the "light emission mode in the specific light-emitting part" changes, and further a 16F post-reception display UA is displayed.

Also, in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted during the "16F acceptance period according to the modified example" (the situation in which the 16F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in Fig. 336 (g2) and (j2), the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16F operation related display B" are not hidden, and the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 16F effect display EF. After this, the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16F operation related display B" are made to be ...

However, unlike the case of the "16F reception period according to the modified example," the "16F operation-related display B," which appears under the condition that an operation has been received during the "16F reception period" described above, may be made to be hidden at the same timing (under the same conditions) as the post-16F reception display UB2. In other words, in this case, it will be made to be hidden during the period in which the post-16F reception display UA is displayed.

...

Others, such as the "16F reception allowable sound", "whether the auto-repeat function is enabled", and "whether the automatic button function is enabled" related to the "16F reception period according to the modified example", are the same as those in the 16F reception period described above. However, it goes without saying that if there is no operation on the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "16F reception period according to the modified example", then as shown in FIG. 348, the "16F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the "16F reception period according to the modified example".

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "16F reception period according to the modified example," as shown in FIG. 347, the reception of the operation triggers the display of the "16F operation-related display B" in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)." Note that the "16F operation-related display B" displayed in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" has the same form as when it is displayed in the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)." In other words, in this case, the "16F operation-related display B" is displayed in advance of the "16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" before the timing tpX arrives, which is expected to increase the interest in the game. However, after this, if an operation is received for the 16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) while the "16F operation-related display B" is displayed, this will trigger the "16F operation-related display B" to be hidden, regardless of whether the timing of the operation reception is in a "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or a "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)."

As mentioned above, even if an operation is accepted for the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "16F acceptance period according to the modified example," this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "16F operation-related display B" from being displayed. In this case, in the example shown in Figures 332 to 336, the "16F operation-related display B" will always remain hidden, and the performance will progress with the other configurations remaining the same as in the case of the 16F acceptance period described above.

In addition, in the "16th F reception period according to the modified example," the "16th F operation-related display B" is made invisible when an operation is received for the "16th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," but it may be realized so that it is not made invisible when an operation is received for the "16th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

Figures 349 to 351 are time charts showing an example of the performance content when "Condition 17F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "17F reception period (17F reception period according to the modified example)" occurs as a modified example of the 17F reception period. Note that the performance example in the variation pattern in which the "17F reception period according to the modified example" occurs is omitted from illustration because there is much overlap with the case in which the above-mentioned 17F reception period occurs (see Figures 340 and 341), and basically only the differences (changes) from the above-mentioned "17F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "17F reception period according to the modified example", the configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as when the above-mentioned "17F reception period" occurs.

In other words, in the "17F reception period according to the modified example", as in the 17F reception period described above, both 17F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and 17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are permitted to accept multiple operations before the "17F reception period according to the modified example" ends (multiple operation permitted period). Also, the alternative examples of "17F operation unit A" and "17F operation unit B" can be appropriately applied in the same manner as in the 17F reception period described above.

Similarly, during the "17F reception period for the modified example" from the occurrence of the "17F reception period for the modified example" until the arrival of timing tqX, neither the "17F operation-related display A" corresponding to the 17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) nor the "17F operation-related display B" corresponding to the 17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

However, in the "17F reception period according to the modified example", when timing tqX in the "17F reception period according to the modified example" arrives, the "17F operation-related display A" is displayed, but the "17F operation-related display B" is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 351(g) and the like, in that respect, it differs from the above-mentioned "17F reception period (FIGS. 337 and 338)". In other words, in this case, of the multiple operation units (17F operation unit A, 17F operation unit B) in a state in which operation reception is permitted, the fact that only some of the operation units are in a "state in which operation reception is permitted" is concealed, and this is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to concealment, while favorably maintaining the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In this regard, the "17F reception period according to the modified example" differs from the 17F reception period described above in that after timing tqX arrives, "17F operation-related display A" is displayed and "17F operation-related display B" is not displayed, but the rest of the configuration and presentation content are the same as the 17F reception period described above. Therefore, even when the "17F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the presentation will basically progress as described above with reference to Figures 337 to 341.

In other words, the presentation example when the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs differs from the presentation example (17th F reception period) shown in Figures 337 to 341 in that the "17th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is not displayed, but the rest of the content is basically the same, and the other examples applicable to the configuration related to the 17th F reception period can be similarly applied to the configuration related to the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" (configuration other than the 17th F operation-related display B).

Therefore, when a "17th F reception period for the modified example" occurs, the corresponding 17th F premonition display ZFD is first displayed so as to straddle the timing when the 17th F operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in Figures 340 and 341, etc.

Furthermore, as described above in the 17F reception period, the manner in which the "17F Premonition Display ZFD" will be displayed relative to the "17F Operation-Related Display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)", the conditions under which it will be hidden, and the periodic changes with which the "17F Operation-Related Display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)" will be displayed, etc.

In addition, in this performance example, when the first operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "17F reception period for the modified example," regardless of whether the timing of this operation reception is in a "section in which operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or a "section in which operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)," this triggers the display of the 17F post-reception display UB1, just as in the case of the 17F reception period described above (see Figures 337 (i) and 338 (i)). At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output. However, in this example, when an operation is performed on the "17th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "17th F reception period according to the modified example," regardless of whether the timing of the reception of this operation is in a "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or a "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)," in addition to the 17th F post-reception display UB1 being displayed, the "17th F operation-related display B" is displayed in response to the operation (see FIG. 349(g) and FIG. 350(g)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 349, it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tq2c within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", but the "17F operation-related display B" is not displayed until the arrival of this timing tq2c. In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tq2c, this triggers the display of the "17F operation-related display B".

With this configuration, the fact that the state in which acceptance of operations to the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is permitted can be kept secret at the time when the timing tpX of the "17F acceptance period according to the modified example" arrives (the time when the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" begins). However, this secret state is released if an operation is accepted to the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" even once during the "17F acceptance period according to the modified example", so it can be expected that the excitement of playing the game will be increased while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension.

Here, such a "17thF operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner described in the "17thF reception period" described above, even during the "17thF reception period according to the modified example". However, if a display mode that should be displayed at the arrival of timing tqX appears after timing tqX and on the condition that an operation has been received, there is a concern that the player will have a negative feeling that it was "intentionally hidden" up until that point, which may in turn decrease his or her interest in the game.

Therefore, in the "17F reception period according to the modified example," the "17F operation-related display A" is displayed in the manner described in the "17F reception period" described above, but the "17F operation-related display B" is displayed in a manner different from that described in the "17F reception period" described above. For example, the "17F operation-related display B" may not be displayed as a display imitating the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)," but may be displayed as a different display image. In addition, the "17F operation-related display B" may not display a periodic change. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "17F reception period according to the modified example," the "17F operation-related display B" may not be displayed as a result of this.

In the example shown in FIG. 349, although not shown, when a second operation is performed on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the "17F reception period according to the modified example," the 17F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the second operation, just as in the case of the 17F reception period described above. At this time, the post-reception output sound is also not audibly output.

In this regard, during the "17th F reception period for the modified example" of this performance example, the display mode of the "17th F operation-related display B" will not change based on the second operation being performed, and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point will continue.

In the example shown in FIG. 349, although illustration is omitted, even if a third operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" of the "17F reception period according to the modified example," not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but also a new display (mode) does not appear as the 17F post-reception display UB, as in the case of the 17F reception period described above. Even in this example, such an event (no new display appears as the 17F post-reception display UB despite the fact that an operation is performed on the "17F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 17F reception period according to the modified example) may occur when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 349(a), (g), and (i), while the "17F post-acceptance display UB" and "17F operation-related display B" are displayed in response to the operation acceptance of "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," it is assumed that a first operation is performed on "17F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2d within the "section (display section, second section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" of the "17F acceptance period according to the modified example."

Even in the "17F reception period according to the modified example," when the first operation is performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2d, a 17F post-reception change A occurs. That is, as shown in FIG. 340 (g2) and FIG. 349 (h) and (k), a "17F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, a "17F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to see the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, the "light emission mode in the specific light-emitting section" changes, and further a 17F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In addition, when the first operation is performed, the "17th F reception permissible sound that was being audibly output," the "17th F post-reception display UB that was being displayed," the "17th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) that was undergoing a periodic change," and the "17th F effect display EF1" are the same as in the 17th F reception period described above.

Furthermore, during the "17th F reception period for the modified example" of this presentation example, the display mode of the "17th F operation-related display B" does not change based on the first reception of an operation to the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 349 (g)).

In this example, as shown in Figs. 349(a), (e), (h), and (i), various post-acceptance changes A have occurred in response to the previous operation acceptance for "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the 17F post-acceptance display UB in response to the operation acceptance for "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed. In this situation, it is assumed that the second and third operation acceptances for "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" have been made at timings tq2e and tq2f (situations in which the performance displays shown in Figs. 341(g2) and (h2) appear) within the "17F acceptance period for the modified example."

Even if the second and third operations are accepted for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timings tq2e and tq2f (situations in which the performance display shown in Fig. 341 (g2) and (h2) appears) during the "17F acceptance period for the modified example," change A after acceptance of the 17F can occur, as shown in Fig. 341 (h2), (i2) and Fig. 349, just as when the first operation is accepted for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

In particular, the "17th F post-acceptance output sound A1" and the "17th F effect display EF1" are designed to appear in the same manner when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. The periodic change in the "17th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once terminated at the previous operation acceptance may be maintained in its terminated state at the time when the second and third operations are accepted, or may be resumed by canceling the terminated state. However, when the second and third operations are accepted, this will trigger the end state of the periodic change to occur again. In other words, in this case, the periodic change that was once terminated in this way will be resumed from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second and third operations are accepted.

In this respect, the "17th F post-acceptance display UA" is basically the same as the first operation acceptance (17th F post-acceptance display UA1) for the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". However, even in the "17th F acceptance period according to the modified example", when the second operation acceptance is made, "the hero YS attacks and the boss character's HP decreases to about 50% remaining (17th F post-acceptance display UA2)" is displayed (see FIG. 341 (h2)), and when the third operation acceptance is made, "the hero YS attacks and the boss character's HP decreases to about 25% remaining (17th F post-acceptance display UA3)" is displayed (see FIG. 341 (i2)), and so on, with the progress being seen in the presentation. In other words, the presentation as the "17th F post-acceptance display UA" is the same as that of the 17th F acceptance period described above, and other examples can also be applied as appropriate.

In addition, when the second and third operations are performed, the "17F reception allowable sound that was being audibly output", the "17F post-reception display UB that was being displayed", the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) that was undergoing periodic changes", the "17F effect display EF1", the "light emission state of the specific light-emitting section", etc. are the same as in the 17F reception period described above.

Furthermore, during the 17F reception period in the modified example of this performance example, the display mode of the "17F operation related display B" does not change based on the second or third reception of an operation to the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and the display mode that had been displayed up until that point continues (see FIG. 349(g)).

In this example, as shown in Figs. 349(a), (e), (f), (h), and (i), a situation is assumed in which post-acceptance changes A have occurred in various places in response to the third acceptance of an operation on "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)," and a 17F post-acceptance display UB in response to an operation acceptance on "17F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is still displayed, and a fourth operation is accepted on "17F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2g (a situation in which the performance display shown in Fig. 341(i2) appears) within the "17F acceptance period for the modified example."

When the fourth operation is accepted for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2G in the "17F acceptance period according to the modified example", a change A after the 17F acceptance may occur. That is, as one of the changes A after the 17F acceptance, the "17F acceptance period according to the modified example" is terminated based on the operation (see Fig. 349 (a) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 341 (j2), (l2) and Fig. 349 (h), (k), a "17F post-acceptance output sound A" corresponding to the operation for the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is audibly output, and a "17F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed, and further a display UA after the 17F acceptance is displayed.

Also, in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted during the "17F acceptance period according to the modified example" (the situation in which the 17F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in Fig. 341 (j2) and (l2), the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation related display B" are not hidden, and the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the 17F effect display EF. After this, the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation related display B" are made to be ...

However, unlike the case of the "17F reception period according to the modified example," the "17F operation-related display B," which appears under the condition that an operation has been received during the "17F reception period," may be made to be hidden at the same timing (under the same conditions) as the 17F post-reception display UB. In other words, in this case, the 17F post-reception display UA4 will be made to be hidden during the period in which it is displayed.

...

Others, such as the "17F reception allowable sound", "whether the auto-repeated function is enabled", and "whether the automatic button function is enabled" related to the "17F reception period according to the modified example", are the same as those in the 17F reception period described above. However, it goes without saying that if there is no operation on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "17F reception period according to the modified example", then as shown in FIG. 351, the "17F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the "17F reception period according to the modified example".

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "17F reception period according to the modified example," as shown in FIG. 350, the reception of the operation triggers the display of the "17F operation-related display B" in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)." Note that the "17F operation-related display B" displayed in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" has the same form as when it is displayed in the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)." In other words, in this case, the "17F operation-related display B" is displayed in advance of the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" before the timing tqX arrives, which is expected to increase the interest in the game. However, thereafter, if a fourth operation (operation acceptance that satisfies the conditions for ending the acceptance period) is accepted for the 17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) while the "17F operation-related display B" is displayed, this will trigger the "17F operation-related display B" to be hidden, regardless of whether the timing of the operation acceptance is in the "section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)."

As mentioned above, even if an operation is accepted for the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "17F acceptance period for the modified example," this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "17F operation-related display B" from being displayed. In this case, in the example shown in Figures 337 to 341, the "17F operation-related display B" will always remain hidden, and the performance will progress with the other configurations remaining the same as in the 17F acceptance period described above.

In addition, in the "17F reception period according to the modified example," the "17F operation-related display B" is made invisible when an operation is received (an operation that satisfies the conditions for ending the reception period) for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)." However, it may be realized so that the display B is not made invisible when an operation is received for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)."

According to the above-mentioned configurations relating to the "16th F reception period (or a modified version thereof)" and the "17th F reception period (or a modified version thereof)," no matter when the operation reception to the "operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is made during the reception period, the post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is made difficult to see. In this regard, depending on whether the operation reception to the "operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is made during the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)," the post-reception display UA may be "made difficult to see by the premonition performance display ZFD" or "made difficult to see by the operation-related display A," which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the first background image HK1 that can be displayed in a modified version of the 15F reception period is displayed during the 12F reception period (or a modified version thereof), the 13F reception period (or a modified version thereof), the 14F reception period, the 16F reception period (or a modified version thereof), and the 17F reception period (or a modified version thereof), but the first background image HK1 that can be displayed in a modified version of the 15F reception period may be displayed during any part of these reception periods (including only one of them).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the first light emission mode that may appear in a modified version of the 15F reception period is executed in the 12F reception period (or a modified version thereof), the 13F reception period (or a modified version thereof), the 14F reception period, the 16F reception period (or a modified version thereof), and the 17F reception period (or a modified version thereof), but the first light emission mode that may appear in a modified version of the 15F reception period may be executed in any part of those reception periods (including only one of them).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the above-mentioned "third background image HK3" that may appear in relation to the 15F reception period (or a modified version thereof) may be realized as the same background image as the above-mentioned "first background image HK1."
When the configuration of such a different example is applied to the first modified example of the 15F reception period, for example, when an operation is received for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2E (a timing within a section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)) shown in FIG. 322, the background image is switched (replaced) to another background image as a result, whereas when an operation is received for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2e (a timing within a section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)) shown in FIG. 323, the background image is not switched (replaced) to another background image as a result, so that even if the same post-reception display is generated, the impact is significantly different, and it becomes possible to add interest in at what timing during the reception period the operation is performed.
Furthermore, even when the configuration according to such a different example is applied to the second modified example of the 15F reception period, for example, when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2E shown in FIG. 327 (timing within the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)), the background image is not switched (replaced) to another background image as a result, whereas when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing to2e shown in FIG. 328 (timing within the section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, second section)), the background image is switched (replaced) to another background image as a result, so that even if the same post-reception display is generated, the impact will be significantly different, and it will be interesting to consider at what timing during the reception period the operation will be performed.

In this case, however, a first and second aspect of the first background image HK1 (for example, a first aspect in which the first background image HK1 is displayed brightly, and a second aspect in which the first background image HK1 is displayed darkly) may be prepared, and the "first background image HK1" in the above-mentioned example may be displayed in place of the "first aspect of the first background image HK1," and the "third background image HK3" in the above-mentioned example may be displayed in place of the "second aspect of the first background image HK1." With this configuration, even if the background image as the first background image HK1 is not switched, it is possible to show a change in the aspect as the first background image HK1.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, the "light emission mode" refers to a light emission pattern, as described above, and may be one in which the light emission changes periodically, or one in which only one light emission appears without changing. Therefore, a "change in the light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and if it changes periodically, it means that the periodic change switches to another periodic change. Also, a "non-light emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes".

Furthermore, the 12F reception period, 13F reception period, 14F reception period, 15F reception period, 16F reception period, and 17F reception period in each of the above-mentioned performance examples all generate different post-reception changes (different types of post-reception changes), but the post-reception changes in response to operation reception for operation unit A (sword decoration 5001) and the post-reception changes in response to operation reception for operation unit B (operation button 410) do not necessarily have to be different. For example, the post-reception changes in response to operation reception for operation unit A (sword decoration 5001) are different from each other, but the post-reception changes in response to operation reception for operation unit B (operation button 410) may be realized as being the same.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the 14F reception period is generated as a period during which multiple operation receptions are permitted for the 14F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001), but it may also be generated as a period during which only one operation reception is permitted for the 14F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001). In this case, the 14F reception period will end when an operation is received for the 14F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the operation-related sound a corresponds to the above-mentioned reception-permitted sound, and may be output so as to span the reception period from before the start of the reception period. It is sufficient that the sound is audible at least within the reception period.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example," if the similar image KG is displayed as the same image, the image in the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" will be displayed in advance as is in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)," and the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" will start with that display remaining. However, in this case, the 15F operation-related display A will not be displayed in advance in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)," but will be displayed with a delay at the start of the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)."

In addition, in the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example", when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section)", the reception of the operation is used as a trigger to start displaying the "first aspect B1 (or an image display KG similar thereto) of the 15F operation-related display B to be displayed in the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section)" in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section)", but the first aspect B1 (or an image display similar thereto) may not be displayed. That is, in this case, in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", not only the operation-related display (model image display) corresponding to the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" cannot be displayed, but also the operation-related display (model image display) corresponding to the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" cannot be displayed.

In addition, in the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, 16th F reception period, and 17th F reception period and their variations in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the operation-related displays A and B, the operation-related sound a, and the post-reception output sounds A and B may be the same or different displays.

Also, in the 12F reception period, 13F reception period, 14F reception period, 15F reception period, 16F reception period, and 17F reception period in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, and in their modified examples, the number of operation parts that are allowed to accept operations does not necessarily have to be two (multiple). For example, only operation acceptance for operation part A (sword decoration 5001) may be allowed. Or, in the 12F reception period, 13F reception period, 14F reception period, 15F reception period, 16F reception period, and 17F reception period in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, and in their modified examples, the number of operation parts that are allowed to accept operations may be three or more.

In addition, the above-mentioned "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" and "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" may further include a third period that is different from the first and second periods.

For example, the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" and "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" may be realized as a single reception period (15F reception period according to the third modified example) that is a combination of them. As for such a "15F reception period according to the third modified example", for example, timing to3 (see Fig. 324, etc.) at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" may be set as timing toY (see Fig. 329, etc.) within the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)". In other words, in this case, during the "15F reception period according to the third modified example", the period from the occurrence of the "15F reception period according to the third modified example" until the arrival of timing to3 (timing toY) when a predetermined time has elapsed functions as the same presentation section as the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 323 to 326)", and when timing to3 (timing toY) arrives, this triggers the same change (see Figure 329, etc.) as when timing toY arrives within the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)", and thereafter functions as a "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section)" of the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)". Conversely, as for such a "15F reception period for the third modified example", timing to3 (see Figures 327 to 329) which is a predetermined time after the occurrence of the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" may be set as timing toX (see Figures 322 to 324) within the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 336)". That is, in this case, during the "15F reception period according to the third modified example", the period from the occurrence of the "15F reception period according to the third modified example" until the arrival of timing to3 (timing to2X) when a predetermined time has elapsed functions as the same presentation section as the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see FIG. 329)", and when timing to3 (timing toX) arrives, this triggers the same change (see FIG. 324, etc.) as when timing toX arrives within the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see FIG. 322 to FIG. 326)", and thereafter functions as the "section (display section) in which the operation-related display is displayed" within the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see FIG. 322 to FIG. 326)".

In addition, the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, 16th F reception period, and 17th F reception period and their variations in each of the above-mentioned performance examples may occur in different fluctuation patterns, or only an appropriate combination may occur within one fluctuation pattern, or all fluctuation patterns may occur within one fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the 12th F premonition performance display ZFD, the 13th F premonition performance display ZFD, the 16th F premonition performance display ZFD, and the 17th F premonition performance display ZFD may be realized as different premonition performance displays, or may all be realized as the same premonition performance display.

In addition, during the 15F reception period, when an operation is received on the operation button 410 during the 15F reception period, a specific change other than the display of the 15F reception display UB occurs as the 15F reception change B in response to the operation reception, and the specific change may not end (return to the state before the change) when an operation is received on the sword ornament 5001.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, "Hero YS" and "Wizard MT" do not necessarily have to be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, the background image "third background image HK3" may be prepared as the same background image as the "first background image HK1." In addition, the "third light-emitting mode" among the light-emitting modes of the specific light-emitting section may be set as the same light-emitting mode as the "first light-emitting mode."

In addition, for the "15th F reception period for the first modified example" and the "15th F reception period for the second modified example" in the above-mentioned performance example, for example, the mock image display may be displayed throughout the entire period from timing to2 to to3, or the mock image display may not be displayed.

In addition, for the "15F reception period for the first modified example" and the "15F reception period for the second modified example" in the above-mentioned performance example, for example, only one background image may be displayed over the entire period from timing to2 to to3, or only one light emission pattern may be displayed in the specific light-emitting section.

In addition, in the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", when either one of the predetermined "first condition" and "second condition" is met, the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" is terminated, and when the "first condition" is met, the model image display (sword decoration 5001) is displayed and a different type of operation permitted state (a reception period in which post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 are different) occurs, but when the "second condition" is met, the model image display (sword decoration 5001) is not displayed and a different type of operation permitted state (a reception period in which post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 are different) does not occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 1-F]) according to the above-mentioned example of performance, it is possible to generate a "confidential operation permitted state" in which an operation unit is permitted to accept operations but does not display imitation images, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the "confidential operation permitted state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. At least the sword decoration 5001 (first operation unit) and the operation button 410 (second operation unit) are provided as the operation unit, and at least a "14th F acceptance period (second concealed operation permitted state)" and a "15th F acceptance period (first concealed operation permitted state)" are provided as the "confidential operation permitted state", and in the "15th F acceptance period", acceptance of operations for at least the sword decoration 5001 is performed while imitation images of the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410, etc. are not displayed. It is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, the corresponding 15F post-acceptance display UA can be displayed; during the "14th F acceptance period", while no imitation images of the sword decoration 5001 or operation button 410 are displayed, acceptance of an operation for at least the operation button 410 is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the corresponding 14F post-acceptance display UB can be displayed (see Figures 315 to 321).

With this configuration, a "15th F reception period" can occur in which operation reception is permitted for at least the sword decoration 5001 while no replica image is being displayed, and a "14th F reception period" can occur in which operation reception is permitted for at least the operation button 410 while no replica image is being displayed. This provides a sense of direction regarding which of the sword decoration 5001 or the operation button 410 should be operated, and is expected to more appropriately maintain the sense of tension when a state in which concealed operation is permitted occurs.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, during both the "15th F reception period" and the "14th F reception period", while the replica image is not being displayed, at least the reception of operations on the sword decoration 5001 and the reception of operations on the operation button 410 are each permitted. With this configuration, the performance regarding which of the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410 should be operated is more appropriately provided, and it is expected that the sense of tension when a state in which concealed operation is permitted will be more appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, during the above-mentioned "15th F reception period," as shown in FIG. 319, even while the 15th F post-reception display UB in response to the reception of an operation to the operation button 410 is displayed, the reception of an operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, and when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001, this is triggered (timing to 2E) to make the 15th F post-reception display UB in response to the reception of an operation to the operation button 410 invisible, and to display the 15th F post-reception display UA in response to the reception of an operation to the sword decorative body 5001. In contrast, in the above-mentioned "14th F reception period", as shown in Fig. 315, even while the 14th F reception display UB in response to the reception of an operation to the operation button 410 is displayed, the reception of an operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, and when an operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is received, this is used as a trigger (timing tn2E to tn2l) to display the 14th F reception display UA in response to the operation reception without hiding the 14th F reception display UB in response to the operation reception to the operation button 410. Note that such a "configuration in which the 14th F reception display UB is not hidden" is also the same when the 14th F reception period is realized as the above-mentioned "period in which the reception of an operation to the 14th F operation unit A (the sword decorative body 5001) is permitted only once." According to this configuration, in a "confidential operation permitted state" in which an operation section is permitted to receive operations but does not display a mock image, when an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 while the post-acceptance display UB in response to the operation received for the operation button 410 is displayed, this triggers a case in which the post-acceptance display UB in response to the operation received for the operation button 410 is hidden, and a case in which the post-acceptance display UB in response to the operation received for the operation button 410 is not hidden, which is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when performing operations on the sword ornament 5001.

In this case, during both the 14th and 15th F reception periods, operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted only once (while the post-reception display UB in response to operation reception for the operation button 410 is displayed), and it is desirable to realize that when an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001, this marks the end of the reception period.

Furthermore, during the above-mentioned "15F reception period," as shown in FIG. 319, when an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 while the 15F post-reception display UB is being displayed in response to the operation reception for the operation button 410 (timing to2E), not only is the 15F post-reception display UB hidden, but the background image (here, the second background image HK2) that was displayed so as to be visible behind the 15F post-reception display UB is also hidden. This configuration makes it possible to appropriately indicate that the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 has been properly received, thereby reducing confidentiality.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "14th F reception period," as shown in FIG. 315, even if an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 while the 14th F reception display UB is being displayed in response to the operation reception for the operation button 410, the 14th F reception display UB is not hidden but continues, and the background image that was displayed so as to be visible behind the 14th F reception display UB is also not hidden but continues. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize that the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 has been properly received, thereby maintaining confidentiality.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period", when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410, the output sound B after the 15th F reception corresponding to the operation acceptance is output, but even if an operation is accepted on the sword ornament 5001 while the output sound B after the 15th F reception is in an audible state, the output sound B after the 15th F reception may not be terminated as a result of this. In other words, in this case, although the "display UB after the 15th F reception" corresponding to the operation acceptance on the operation button 410 is made invisible as a result of the operation acceptance on the sword ornament 5001, the "output sound B after the 15th F reception" corresponding to the operation acceptance on the operation button 410 is not terminated as a result of the operation acceptance on the sword ornament 5001, so that the relaxation of confidentiality regarding whether the operation acceptance on the sword ornament 5001 has been properly accepted can be made ambiguous, and it can be expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period," as shown in FIG. 319, when an operation is received on the operation button 410, the 15th F post-reception output sound B corresponding to the operation reception may or may not be output, which makes it possible to make the secrecy regarding whether or not the operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 has been properly received ambiguous, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "14th F reception period," as shown in FIG. 315, even if an operation is received for the operation button 410, the 14th F post-reception display UB is simply displayed, and no post-reception output sound corresponding to the operation reception is output. This makes it difficult to recognize that the operation reception for the operation button 410 has been properly received, thereby maintaining confidentiality.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 2-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, a "secret operation permitted state" can be generated in which an operation unit is permitted to accept operations but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the "secret operation permitted state", a change can occur after acceptance. And, as the "secret operation permitted state", at least a "15th F acceptance period (first secret operation permitted state)" and a "14th F acceptance period (second secret operation permitted state)" are prepared, and in the "14th F acceptance period", there is a sword decoration 5001 (specific operation unit) in which multiple operation acceptances are permitted while no replica image is being displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 can accept operations multiple times simply by continuing to keep it in an operated state (activation of the so-called "auto-repeated-hit function").

With this configuration, during the "14th F reception period," multiple operations can be accepted for the sword decoration 5001 simply by maintaining it in an operated state, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game due to the fact that multiple operations can be accepted for the sword decoration 5001 even when a replica image is not displayed.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example performance, during the "15th F reception period", as shown in FIG. 319, there are multiple operation parts for which multiple operation reception is permitted even when no replica image is displayed, and multiple operations will not be accepted even if the operation parts (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) are kept in an operated state, and during the "14th F reception period", as shown in FIG. 315, there are multiple operation parts for which multiple operation reception is permitted even when no replica image is displayed, and multiple operations will be accepted (at least there are cases in which multiple operations will be accepted) if the operation parts (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) are kept in an operated state. According to this configuration, in a "secrecy-permitted state" in which there are one or more operation units that are permitted to accept multiple operations while no mock image is being displayed, if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, there are at least some cases in which the operation will be accepted multiple times, which is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension when operating the operation unit.

In particular, in the "14th F reception period" according to the above-mentioned example, as shown in FIG. 315, there are multiple operation parts that allow multiple operation receptions while no mock image is displayed, and if the operation parts are kept operated, depending on the type of operation part that is the target of the operation (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410), there are cases where the operation is received multiple times (sword decoration 5001) and cases where the operation is not received multiple times (operation button 410). In other words, in this case, when the "14th F reception period" occurs, whether or not the auto-repeated function is enabled is determined depending on the type of operation target, so it is expected that the fun of choosing which operation part to operate will be added.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period", as shown in FIG. 319, there are multiple operation parts that allow multiple operation receptions while the model image is not displayed, and no matter which of these operation parts (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) is kept in an operated state, multiple operation receptions will not be performed, so it is expected that the tension in the "15th F reception period" will be appropriately maintained. "Note that, if such a configuration is adopted for the 15th F reception period", instead of preventing the auto-rapid-hit function from functioning, a configuration that further relaxes the confidentiality compared to the "14th F reception period" will be adopted, which is desirable (but not essential) to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the auto-rapid-hit function not being enabled.

Furthermore, the sword ornament 5001 for which the auto-hit function is enabled during the "14th F reception period" outputs post-acceptance output sound A in response to operation reception, as shown in FIG. 315, but the operation button 410 for which the auto-hit function is not enabled during the "14th F reception period" does not output post-acceptance output sound in response to operation reception. In contrast, during the "15th F reception period", as shown in FIG. 319, even operation parts (sword ornament 5001, operation button 410) for which the auto-hit function is not enabled can output post-acceptance output sounds A and B in response to operation reception, which is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in playing due to the auto-hit function not being enabled.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period," as shown in FIG. 319, a post-reception output sound may or may not be output in response to reception of an operation for an operation unit for which the auto-repeated-tap function is not enabled. This makes it possible to make the secrecy regarding whether or not an operation has been properly accepted ambiguous, and is expected to maintain a suitable sense of tension.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 3-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example can generate a "confidential operation permitted state" in which an operation unit is permitted to accept operations but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the concealed operation permitted state, a change can occur after acceptance. In addition, at least the "15th F acceptance period (first concealed operation permitted state)" and the "14th F acceptance period (second concealed operation permitted state)" are provided as the "confidential operation permitted state," and during the "14th F acceptance period," a replica image display that imitates an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations is not displayed while the "14th F acceptance period" is continuing, so that it is expected that the tension when the player is given an opportunity to operate can be appropriately maintained.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example presentation, as shown in FIG. 319, during the "15th F reception period", when a predetermined condition is met, a display of a replica image of an operation unit that is permitted to receive operations during the "15th F reception period" is started. With this configuration, even if the replica image display is not displayed when the operation concealment permission state occurs, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be met and the replica image display will be displayed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In particular, in the "15th F reception period" in the above-mentioned presentation example, as shown in FIG. 319, when an operation is received for an operation unit that does not display a replica image, the display of a replica image of that operation unit is initiated (the above-mentioned specified condition is met), so that the player's operation can reveal a replica image of the operation target that was previously concealed, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

The "15th F reception period" may not end when the above-mentioned "predetermined condition" is met, or may end and generate another reception period.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, in both the "15th F reception period" and the "14th F reception period", while no imitation image display is being performed, at least the reception of operations for the sword decoration 5001 and the reception of operations for the operation button 410 are each permitted, and in the "15th F reception period", when an operation is performed for the sword decoration 5001, this is used as a trigger to display an imitation image of the sword decoration 5001 (15th F operation-related display A) and an imitation image of the operation button 410 (15th F operation-related display B), respectively. However, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, neither the image display of the sword decoration 5001 nor the image display of the operation button 410 is started, and in the "14th F acceptance period", regardless of whether an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 or the operation button 410, neither the image display of the sword decoration 5001 nor the image display of the operation button 410 is started. In other words, in this case, when an operation is accepted under a confidential situation, there are cases where the image display of the sword decoration 5001 (15th F operation-related display A) and the image display of the operation button 410 (15th F operation-related display B) are each executed, and cases where neither are executed, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, it is desirable that the model image display of the sword decoration 5001 among the model image displays can be displayed in any one of a number of ways. During all (or part of) the 12th F reception period, the 13th F reception period, the 16th F reception period (or variations thereof), and the 17th F reception period (or variations thereof), it is desirable that the model image display of the sword decoration 5001 can be selectively displayed in any one of a number of ways.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 during the "15th F acceptance period" according to the above-mentioned example performance, and this triggers the start of the execution of the mock-up image display of the sword decoration 5001 and the mock-up image display of the operation button 410, it is desirable to display only the "predetermined state (one state)" of the above-mentioned multiple states as the mock-up image display.

Furthermore, when the model image display imitating the sword ornament 5001 and the model image display imitating the operation button 410 are displayed in the modified examples (first and second modified examples) of the "15th floor reception period" in the above-mentioned performance example, it is desirable to display only the "predetermined form (one form)" of the multiple forms as the model image display.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period" according to the above-mentioned example, even if no operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 for a predetermined period of time, the display of a model image of the sword decoration 5001 and the display of a model image of the operation button 410 may each be started. In this case, too, it is desirable to display only a "predetermined mode (one mode)" of the above-mentioned multiple modes as the model image display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 4-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, a "confidential operation permitted state (e.g., 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.)" can be generated in which there is an operation unit that allows operation reception but does not display a model image, and when an operation is received for the above operation unit in the "confidential operation permitted state", a post-reception change can occur. Furthermore, when an operation is received for an operation unit that allows operation reception in the "confidential operation permitted state", one of the post-reception changes is when a post-reception output sound is output (e.g., see FIG. 315, FIG. 319, etc.) and when the post-reception output sound is not output (e.g., see FIG. 315, FIG. 319, etc.). This makes it difficult to determine whether the operation reception is appropriate in the "confidential operation permitted state", and is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example presentation, when a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "confidential operation permitted state (e.g., the 14th F acceptance period, the 15th F acceptance period, etc.)", it may be possible that one of the post-acceptance changes is a case in which an imitation image display modeled after the operation units for which operation acceptance is permitted in the "confidential operation permitted state" is displayed (e.g., see timing to2E shown in Figure 319), and that one of the post-acceptance changes is a case in which an imitation image display modeled after the operation units for which operation acceptance is permitted in the "confidential operation permitted state" is not displayed (e.g., see timings tn2E to tn2l shown in Figure 315, and timings to2A to to2C shown in Figure 319). In contrast, when a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "confidential operation permitted state (e.g., the 14th F acceptance period, the 15th F acceptance period, etc.)," a mock image display imitating an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted in the "confidential operation permitted state" is not displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes (see, for example, timings tn2A to tn2D shown in FIG. 315 and timing to2D shown in FIG. 319). With this configuration, when a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "confidential operation permitted state," there is no possibility of a mock image display being displayed, whereas when a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "confidential operation permitted state," there is a possibility that a mock image display will be displayed or will not be displayed, so that it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner even after an operation is accepted in the "confidential operation permitted state."

When a replica image display of an operation part (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) for which operation acceptance is permitted in the "operation concealment permitted state" is displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes (see, for example, timing to2E shown in FIG. 319), the "operation concealment permitted state" may be terminated in response to the operation acceptance that triggered the display of the replica image display, or the "operation concealment permitted state" may be continued without being terminated. Incidentally, in the 15F acceptance period according to the above-mentioned performance example, the operation acceptance that triggered the display of the replica image (see, for example, timing to2E shown in FIG. 319) is used as a trigger to generate a different type of acceptance period (operation permitted state) that causes a post-acceptance change different from the "15F acceptance period".

More specifically, in the operation concealment permitted state in the above-mentioned performance example (e.g., the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.), while the replica image is not being displayed, it is permitted to accept operations at least for the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410. In addition, in the "operation concealment permitted state (e.g., the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.)," when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 or the operation button 410 and a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes, not only the image display imitating the operation unit on the side where the operation was received as one of the post-acceptance changes, but also the "image display imitating the sword decoration 5001" and the "image display imitating the operation button 410" are started to be displayed (see, for example, timing to2E shown in FIG. 319), and in the case where neither the "image display imitating the sword decoration 5001" nor the "image display imitating the operation button 410" is displayed (see, for example, timing to3E shown in FIG. 315 and timing to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 319), and if a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes when an operation is accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 or the operation button 410 in the "confidential operation permitted state (e.g., the 14th F acceptance period, the 15th F acceptance period, etc.)," then neither a "modeled image display of the sword decorative body 5001" nor a "modeled image display of the operation button 410" will be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes (e.g., see timing tn2A to tn2D shown in FIG. 315 and timing to2D shown in FIG. 319). With this configuration, if a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permitted state", there is no possibility that a replica image display will be displayed. On the other hand, if a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permitted state", there is the possibility that a replica image display will or will not be displayed. This is expected to maintain a good sense of tension even after an operation is accepted in the "operation concealment permitted state".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned example of performance, at least one of the "image display simulating the sword decoration 5001" and the "image display simulating the operation button 410" among the mimicked image displays can be displayed in one of multiple forms, but when the "image display simulating the sword decoration 5001" and the "image display simulating the operation button 410" can each be started to be executed upon receipt of an operation, it is desirable to display only a form (one form) that has been determined in advance as the mimicked image display.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 5-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example can generate an "operation concealment permitted state (e.g., 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.)" in which an operation section allows operation reception but does not display a replica image, and in this "operation concealment permitted state," at least "operation reception for the sword decoration 5001" and "operation reception for the operation button 410" are each permitted while no replica image is being displayed. Then, when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 while in the "operation concealment permitted state" and a post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception for the operation button 410 is displayed, a post-reception output sound A is output as one of the post-reception changes (see, for example, timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315 and timing to2E shown in FIG. 319). In this regard, when the post-acceptance output sound A is output based on the operation acceptance for the sword ornamental body 5001, there are two cases: the post-acceptance display UB displayed before the operation acceptance is made invisible and the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance for the sword ornamental body 5001 is newly displayed (such as timing to2E shown in FIG. 319), and the post-acceptance display UB displayed before the operation acceptance is continued without being made invisible and the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance for the sword ornamental body 5001 is newly displayed (such as timing tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315). In this regard, during the 14F acceptance period, even when the 14F post-acceptance display UA is displayed, the operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted, but even if the operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is made under this circumstance, the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to this is not output. According to this configuration, when a post-acceptance output sound is not output based on an operation received on an operation unit different from the operation unit that triggered the generation of the "post-acceptance display" in a displayed state, the post-acceptance display that has been displayed before the operation reception is not hidden as a result of the operation reception, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In contrast, when a post-acceptance output sound is output based on an operation received on an operation unit on the different side, the post-acceptance display that has been displayed before the operation reception is hidden as a result of the operation reception, and the post-acceptance display is not hidden as a result of the operation reception, so that a sense of tension can be suitably imparted.

Moreover, in the operation secrecy-permitted state according to the above-mentioned performance example (e.g., the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.), when an operation is received at the operation unit on the different side and the post-reception display UB that has been displayed before the operation is received is made invisible (such as timing to2E shown in FIG. 319), the background image (here, the second background image HK2) that was displayed so as to be visible behind the post-reception display UB (here, the 15th F post-reception display UB) is also made invisible, so that the confidentiality regarding whether or not the operation has been received appropriately can be alleviated.

Furthermore, in the operation secrecy-permitted state according to the above-mentioned performance example (for example, the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.), when an operation is received at the operation unit on the different side and the post-reception display UB that has been displayed before the operation is received is not hidden but continues (such as timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315), the background image (here, the first background image HK1) that was displayed so as to be visible behind the post-reception display is also not hidden but continues, making it difficult to recognize whether the operation has been received properly, thereby maintaining confidentiality.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 6-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to generate a "confidential operation permitted state (e.g., 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.)" in which an operation unit is permitted to accept operations but does not display model images, and when an operation is accepted for an operation unit in the "confidential operation permitted state", a post-acceptance change can occur. Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations in the "confidential operation permitted state", one of the post-acceptance changes is when a post-acceptance output sound is output (e.g., see FIG. 315, FIG. 319, etc.) and when the post-acceptance output sound is not output (e.g., see FIG. 315, FIG. 319, etc.). This makes it difficult to determine whether the operation has been accepted properly, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. On the other hand, in the "operation concealment permitted state," there may be an operation unit that can accept operations multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state (see, for example, FIG. 315), so it is expected that this will suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the operation unit being allowed to accept multiple operations even when a mock image is not being displayed.

Moreover, in the case where a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the operation concealment permitting state according to the above-mentioned performance examples (for example, the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.), if the operation unit where the operation reception that triggered the post-acceptance change was made is continued to be operated, there are cases where the operation will be accepted multiple times (see, for example, timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315) and cases where the operation will not be accepted multiple times (see, for example, timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 319). In the case where a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permitting state" (see, for example, timings tn2A to tn2D shown in FIG. 315 and timing to2D shown in FIG. 319), even if the operation unit where the operation reception that triggered the post-acceptance change was made is continued to be operated, there are cases where the operation will not be accepted multiple times. According to this configuration, when a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in an "operation secrecy permitted state (e.g., the 14th F acceptance period, the 15th F acceptance period, etc.)" (see, for example, timings tn2A to tn2D shown in FIG. 315 and timing to2D shown in FIG. 319), even if the operation unit where the operation acceptance that triggered the post-acceptance change was made is continued to be operated, the operation will not be accepted multiple times, so it is possible to suggest to the player that the auto rapid-fire function will not be enabled and to encourage multiple operations. In contrast, when a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in a "state in which concealed operation is permitted (e.g., the 14th F acceptance period, the 15th F acceptance period, etc.)," if the operation unit that triggered the post-acceptance change is continued to be operated, there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times (see, for example, timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315) and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times (see, for example, timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 319), so it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be imparted while still enabling the auto-repeated function.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, in a state where concealed operation is permitted (e.g., the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.), while a mock image is not being displayed, at least the reception of operations for the operation button 410 and the reception of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are each permitted, and when an operation is received for the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 in the concealed operation permitted state (e.g., the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.), a post-reception output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes when an operation is received for the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 in the concealed operation permitted state (e.g., see timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315 and timings to2A to to2c shown in FIG. 319), if the operation unit where the operation reception that triggered the post-reception change was made is kept in an operated state, the operation reception will be repeated multiple times (e.g., the operation will be received multiple times at timings tn 319) and when the operation is not accepted multiple times (see timings to2A to to2c in FIG. 319). In cases where a post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in a concealed operation state (see, for example, timings tn2A to tn2D in FIG. 315 and timing to2D in FIG. 319), the operation is not accepted multiple times even if the operation unit where the operation that triggered the post-acceptance change was accepted is kept in the operated state. This is expected to suggest to the player that the auto-hit function will not be activated and encourage multiple operations, or to provide a suitable sense of tension while allowing the auto-hit function to be activated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 7-F]) according to the above-mentioned presentation example, an operation allowable state (acceptance period) in which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted to the operation unit in this operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. In addition, at least the "15F acceptance period (first operation allowable state) according to the first modified example" and the "14F acceptance period (second operation allowable state)" are prepared as operation allowable states, and the "14F acceptance period (see Figures 315 to 318)" does not include a model image display section in which a model image of the operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted is displayed, so that it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately provided to the player when an operation opportunity is given to the player.

Moreover, the "15thF reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example includes a "section (non-display section, first section) in which a mock-up image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation is permitted is not displayed" and a "section (display section, second section) in which a mock-up image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation is permitted is displayed" and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the "section (non-display section, first section) in which a mock-up image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation is permitted is not displayed", the section (non-display section, first section) ends and a "section (display section, second section) in which a mock-up image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation is permitted is displayed" begins. With this configuration, even if operation reception is permitted when the imitation image display (operation-related display) that mimics the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed (15F reception period, 14F reception period in the first modified example), there is a possibility that a "period (display period, second period) in which the imitation image display (operation-related display) that mimics the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is displayed" will start (15F reception period in the first modified example), which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in playing the game.

In particular, in the "15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" of this performance example, when an operation is received on the operation button 410 within the "section (non-display section, first section) in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed," an image that is the same as or similar to (at least a part of) the image displayed within the "section (display section, second section) in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is displayed" can be displayed while the "15th F reception period for the first modified example" is continuing (corresponding to the "approximate image KG" shown in Figures 325 and 326 in the above-mentioned performance example). With this configuration, even though the "period in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations is not displayed (non-display period, first period)" continues, an image that is the same as or similar to the image (at least a part of it) displayed in the "period in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations is displayed (display period, second period)" that starts afterwards is displayed, so it is possible to suggest that the "period in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations is displayed (display period, second period)" will soon start.

In addition, it is desirable that an image that is the same as or similar to the image (at least a part of it) displayed within the above-mentioned "section (display section, second section) in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation section for which operation acceptance is permitted is displayed" (corresponding to the "approximate image KG" shown in Figures 325 and 326 in the above-mentioned performance example) is made invisible when a predetermined time has elapsed since an operation was accepted on the operation button 410. In this case, if the "predetermined time" is set to a time shorter than the duration (set time) of the "section (non-display section, first section) in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted is not displayed," the above-mentioned "same or similar image (corresponding to the "approximate image KG" shown in Figures 325 and 326 in the above-mentioned performance example)" can be hidden before the transition to the "section (display section, second section) in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted is displayed," making it possible to appropriately create a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)", when an operation is received on the operation button 410 within the "section (non-display section, first section) in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) that imitates an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed", the above-mentioned "same or similar image (corresponding to the "approximate image KG" shown in Figs. 325 and 326 in the above-mentioned performance example)" is displayed as the above-mentioned post-reception display UB in response to the operation reception so that the second background image HK2 that has been displayed since the start of the "section (non-display section, first section) in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) that imitates an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed" can be seen behind it. When an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 in a "period in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) simulating an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted is displayed (display period, second period)," a post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed so that the third background image HK3 that has been displayed since the start of the "period in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) simulating an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted is displayed (display period, second period)" is displayed, so that even though it is one acceptance period, it is possible to make the performance when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 look significantly different between a "period in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) simulating an operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted is displayed (display period, second period)."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the "section (non-display section, first section) in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation part for which operation acceptance is permitted is not displayed" will continue for a predetermined period of time and then end, regardless of whether the above-mentioned "same or similar image (corresponding to the "approximate image KG" shown in Figures 325 and 326 in the above-mentioned performance example)" is displayed, and the "section (display section, second section) in which an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation part for which operation acceptance is permitted is displayed" will begin.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 8-F]) according to the above-mentioned example performance, it is possible to display an imitation image that imitates the sword decoration 5001 (specified operation unit), and it is possible to generate an operation permissible state in which acceptance of operations on the sword decoration 5001 is permitted, and when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted in this operation permissible state, it is possible to display a post-acceptance display UA. As operation permission states, at least the "15F reception period (first operation permission state) according to the first modified example" and the "14F reception period (second operation permission state)" are prepared, and the "14F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" does not include a section in which an imitation image of the sword decoration 5001 for which operation acceptance is permitted is displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 for which an imitation image is not displayed, the 14F post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, which is expected to provide the player with a suitable sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given.

Moreover, the "15thF reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example includes a "section (non-display section, first section) in which a mock-up image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation is permitted is not displayed" and a "section (display section, second section) in which a mock-up image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation is permitted is displayed" and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the "section (non-display section, first section) in which a mock-up image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation is permitted is not displayed", the section (non-display section, first section) ends and a "section (display section, second section) in which a mock-up image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation is permitted is displayed" begins. With this configuration, even if operation reception is permitted when the imitation image display (operation-related display) that mimics the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed (15F reception period, 14F reception period in the first modified example), there is a possibility that a "period (display period, second period) in which the imitation image display (operation-related display) that mimics the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is displayed" will start (15F reception period in the first modified example), which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, the same post-reception display UA is executed when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 in the "section (non-display section, first section) where an imitation image display (operation-related display) of an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed" and when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 in the "section (display section, second section) where an imitation image display (operation-related display) of an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is displayed", so that a decrease in interest in the game when a player does not realize that an operation is permitted for the sword decorative body 5001 in the "section (non-display section, first section) where an imitation image display (operation-related display) of an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed" is suppressed.

As described above, in the "15F reception period for the first variant example (see Figures 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example, if an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 in "a section (non-display section, first section) where an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation acceptance is permitted is not displayed" (see timing to2E shown in Figure 322), the background image that had been displayed up until then (here, the second background image HK2) is replaced with another background image (here, the third background image HK3) and the 15F post-reception display UA is displayed; however, if an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 in "a section (display section, second section) where an imitation image display (operation-related display) modeled after an operation acceptance is permitted is displayed", the background image that had been displayed up until then (here, the first background image HK1) may be replaced with another background image and the post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed. In this case, however, the background image that was displayed up until that point (here, the first background image HK1) is not replaced with another background image, but the display mode of the background image (here, the first background image HK1) may be changed (for example, the color or brightness may be changed). Also, the third background image HK3 may be realized as the same background image as the first background image HK3.

In the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example, the background image and light emission state are different between the "section where the imitation image display (operation-related display) of the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and the "section where the imitation image display (operation-related display) of the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is displayed (display section, second section)", but they do not necessarily have to be different and may be the same.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 9-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, a concealed operation permission state can be generated in which there is an operation unit that allows operation reception but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is received on the above operation unit in the concealed operation permission state, a post-reception display can be displayed. And, as the concealed operation permission state, at least the "15F reception period (first concealed operation permission state) according to the first modified example" and the "14F reception period (second concealed operation permission state)" are prepared, and a different post-reception display UA is displayed when an operation is received on the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation unit) during the "15F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) according to the first modified example" and when an operation is received on the sword decoration 5001 during the "14F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)". This is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given to the player while the replica image display is not displayed.

Moreover, when the "15F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) according to the first modified example" occurs, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence, a model image display modeled after the sword ornament 5001 is displayed as a trigger for the predetermined time to elapse, but when the "14F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)" occurs, the model image display is not displayed as a trigger for the time to elapse during the "14F reception period" no matter how much time has elapsed. With this configuration, when a concealment-permitted operation state (the 15F reception period, the 14F reception period according to the first modified example) occurs, there are cases in which the model image display is displayed (when the automatic concealment release function is enabled) within the permissible state as time passes, and cases in which the model image display is not displayed (when the automatic concealment release function is not enabled), so that it is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension while suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 during the "15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" in the above-mentioned performance example, a model image of the sword decoration 5001 appears as a trigger, but during the "14th F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)", even if an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, the model image of the sword decoration 5001 does not appear as a trigger. With this configuration, during the "15th F reception period for the first modified example", as shown in Figs. 322 and 324, the model image can be displayed as a trigger for the player's operation without waiting for a predetermined time to pass (timing toX), which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the "15th floor reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, reception of operations on the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410 is at least permitted, and when the timing toX arrives when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence, at least an imitation image display imitating the sword decoration 5001 and an imitation image display imitating the operation button 410 are displayed, so that it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game can be effectively prevented while multiple operation targets are kept secret.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during both the "15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" and the "14th F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)", reception of operations on the sword decoration 5001 and reception of operations on the operation button 410 are at least permitted, and when an operation is received on the sword decoration 5001 during the "15th F reception period for the first modified example", this triggers the appearance of not only an image imitating the sword decoration 5001 but also at least an image imitating the operation button 410, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, when an imitation image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed based on the arrival of timing toX when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" (see Figure 324), and when an imitation image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed based on the reception of an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 within the "15th F reception period for the first modified example" (see Figure 322), the post-reception display that appears when an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received while the imitation image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed is different. In other words, in this case, if an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 within the period from timing toX to timing to3 shown in FIG. 324, a different display will appear after acceptance than if an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 within the period from timing to2E to timing to3 shown in FIG. 322, which is expected to broaden the range of gaming strategies and increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, when an operation is accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 while an imitation image display of the sword decorative body 5001 is being displayed based on the arrival of timing toX, which is a predetermined time after the occurrence of the "15thF acceptance period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)," (when the operation is accepted within the period from timing toX to to3 shown in Figure 324), a corresponding post-acceptance display may be made without replacing the background image (here, the first background image HK1) with another background image. On the other hand, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 while a model image of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed based on the acceptance of the operation for the sword decoration 5001 during the "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example" (when the operation is accepted within the period from timing to2E to to3 shown in FIG. 322 or timing to2e to to3 shown in FIG. 323), the background image (here, the third background image HK3) may be replaced with another background image and a corresponding post-acceptance display may be performed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to add an element of playing during the acceptance period, and an improvement in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be expected. Alternatively, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 while a model image of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed based on the acceptance of an operation for the sword decoration 5001 during the "15F acceptance period (see Figs. 322 to 326) according to the first modified example" (when an operation is accepted within the period from timing to2E to to3 shown in Fig. 322 or timing to2e to to3 shown in Fig. 323), the background image (here, the third background image HK3) may be replaced with another background image and a corresponding post-acceptance display may be performed, or the background image (here, the third background image HK3) may not be replaced with another background image and a corresponding post-acceptance display may be performed. In this case, the mode of the post-acceptance display may be different depending on whether the background image is replaced or not. With this configuration, it is possible to add more elements of playing during the acceptance period, and it is expected that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 will improve.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 10-F]) according to this embodiment, a concealed operation permission state can be generated in which there is an operation unit that allows operation acceptance but does not display a replica image, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in this concealed operation permission state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. And, since at least a "15F acceptance period (first concealed operation permission state) according to the first modified example" and a "14F acceptance period (second concealed operation permission state)" are provided as concealed operation permission states, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately provided when an operation opportunity is given to the player while no replica image display is being displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 326 and other figures, the mock image display is sometimes displayed in the first position (see FIG. 326(m) and other figures) and sometimes displayed in the second position (see FIG. 326(r) and other figures). This makes it difficult for someone looking at only one of the first and second positions to recognize whether or not the mock image display is being displayed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Moreover, when the "15th F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) according to the first modified example" occurs, a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence (when timing toX arrives), and this triggers the display of a model image of the sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation unit). However, when the "14th F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)" occurs, the model image display is not displayed as a result of the passage of time, no matter how much time has passed. With this configuration, when a state in which operation concealment is permitted (the 15th F reception period, the 14th F reception period according to the first modified example) occurs, there are cases in which the model image display is displayed as time passes (when the automatic concealment release function is enabled) and cases in which the model image display is not displayed (when the automatic concealment release function is not enabled), so that it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed while a sense of tension is suitably imparted.

In this case, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 during the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)", a model image display of the sword decoration 5001 appears as a trigger, but when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 during the "14th F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)", a model image display of the sword decoration 5001 does not appear as a trigger. With this configuration, during the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example", a model image display can be displayed as a trigger for the player's operation without waiting for the passage of a specified time (the arrival of timing toX), which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, the position of the model image display is different between the case where the model image display of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed because a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the "15F reception period (see Figures 322 to 326)" (the arrival of timing toX) and the case where the model image display of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed because an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received during the "15F reception period of the first modification." Therefore, even if the model image display is displayed based on the satisfaction of predetermined conditions (first condition, second condition) within the same reception period, if the position of gaze is incorrect, it is difficult to notice that the model image display has been displayed, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner. In this case, it is desirable to make not only the position where the model image display is displayed but also the size at which the model image display is displayed different. In addition, if the display position of the model image display is different, it is desirable to have different presentation contents for the post-acceptance display when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 11-F]) according to this embodiment, a "confidential operation permitted state" can be generated in which an operation unit is permitted to accept operations but does not display replica images, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the "confidential operation permitted state," a change can occur after acceptance. In the "confidential operation permitted state," there is an operation unit in which acceptance of operations multiple times is permitted even when replica images are not displayed, and there are cases in which operation acceptance is performed multiple times if the operation unit is kept in an operated state (see, for example, FIG. 315, etc.). This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in playing the game due to acceptance of operations multiple times for the operation unit being permitted even when replica images are not displayed.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least a "15F reception period for the first modified example (first operation concealment permitted state)" and a "14F reception period (second operation concealment permitted state)" are prepared as operation concealment permitted states, and when a "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" occurs, a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence (when timing toX arrives), and a model image display (operation-related display) modeled after the operation unit is displayed as a trigger; however, when a "14F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" occurs, no matter how much time has passed since the occurrence, a model image display will not be displayed as a trigger. With this configuration, when a state where concealment of operation is permitted (such as the 15th F reception period or the 14th F reception period in the first modified example) occurs, there will be cases where the model image display is displayed within that concealment of operation permitting state as time passes (when the automatic concealment release function is enabled) and cases where the model image display is not displayed (when the automatic concealment release function is not enabled), which is expected to provide an appropriate sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)", there is one or more operation parts for which multiple operation reception is permitted without the imitation image being displayed (here, operation button 410), and even if the operation part is kept in an operated state, the auto-repeated-hit function is not activated and multiple operations are not accepted (see Figures 322 to 324, etc.). In contrast, during the "14th floor reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", there is one or more operation parts for which multiple operation reception is permitted without the imitation image being displayed (the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410), and if the operation part is kept in an operated state, the auto-repeated-hit function is activated and multiple operations can be accepted (when the sword decoration 5001 is kept in an operated state). With this configuration, when a state allowing concealed operation occurs (the 15th F reception period and the 14th F reception period in the first modified example), the auto rapid-fire function will either be enabled or disabled, so it is expected that the auto rapid-fire function will be provided to the player while still maintaining a comfortable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned presentation example, even if an operation is accepted after concealment is released (after timing toX has arrived) during the "15F acceptance period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)," (see Figure 323, etc.), the same post-acceptance display is executed as in the case where an operation is accepted before concealment is released (before timing toX has arrived) during the "15F acceptance period for the first modified example" (see Figure 322, etc.), so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when an operation cannot be made before timing toX arrives.

In addition, different post-reception displays may be executed depending on whether the operation is received after decryption in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" (after timing toX has arrived) (see Figure 323, etc.) or whether the operation is received before decryption in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" (before timing toX has arrived) (see Figure 322, etc.).

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" in the above-mentioned presentation example, there are multiple operation parts (sword decoration 5001 and operation button 410) that are permitted to receive multiple operations while no model image is being displayed, and if these operation parts are kept operated, depending on the type of operation part that is the target of the operation, there are cases where the operation is received multiple times (in this example, sword decoration 5001) and cases where the operation is not received multiple times (in this example, operation button 410), so that it is expected that the auto-repeated-hit function will be provided to the player within one reception period while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, a "13th F reception period (specific operation permitted state)" or a "13th F reception period according to a modified example (specific operation permitted state)" can occur, and in the "13th F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314)" or the "13th F reception period according to a modified example (see Figures 344 and 345)", there is an operation unit (in this example, the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410) that allows operation reception multiple times and displays a mock image, and if the operation unit is kept operated, the auto-repeated function is activated and operation reception can be performed multiple times (when the sword decoration 5001 is operated). In contrast, when the "15F reception period (see Figures 322 to 326) according to the first modified example" occurs, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence (when the timing toX arrives) and the imitation image display is displayed, there is one or more operation units (in this example, operation button 410) that are permitted to receive operations multiple times, but even if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, the auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled and the operation is not received multiple times. In other words, in this case, even if a imitation image display that imitates an operation object (operation unit) that is permitted to receive operations multiple times is displayed, there are both cases where the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled when the operation object is maintained in an operating state and cases where the auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when the imitation image display that imitates an operation object (operation unit) that is permitted to receive operations multiple times is displayed will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, if an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 (prescribed operation unit) for which the auto-hit function is enabled during the "14th floor acceptance period (see Figs. 315 to 318)", a post-acceptance output sound A corresponding to the operation acceptance is output, but if an operation is accepted for an operation button 410 for which the auto-hit function is not enabled, a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is not output. However, in the "15th floor acceptance period of the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)", even if an operation is accepted for an operation button 410 for which the auto-hit function is not enabled, a post-acceptance output sound B corresponding to the operation acceptance can be output, so that it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the auto-hit function is enabled or not, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example, there are cases where post-reception output sound B is output in response to reception of an operation for an operation button 410 for which the auto-repeat function is not enabled (for example, timing to 2A to 2C, etc.) and cases where it is not output (for example, timing to 2D, etc.), which also makes it difficult to know whether the auto-repeat function is enabled or not, and is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 12-F]) according to this embodiment can display an imitation image display modeled after the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation unit), and can generate an operation permissible state in which acceptance of an operation is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in this operation permissible state, it can cause a post-acceptance change A. In addition, when the operation permissible state occurs, it is possible to output an operation-related sound a (acceptance permissible sound). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the operation permitted state may be an "operation disclosure permitted state (e.g., the 12th F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312))" in which the acceptance of operations on the sword decoration 5001 is permitted and a model image is displayed, or an "operation concealment permitted state (e.g., the 14th F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)" or the 15th F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) according to the first modified example)) in which an interval is included in which the acceptance of operations on the sword decoration 5001 is permitted but a model image is not displayed. As for the operation-related sound a, it is possible to output when at least the "operation disclosure permitted state" of the "operation disclosure permitted state" and the "operation concealment permitted state" occurs, and it is expected that the sense of tension when an operation opportunity is given will be suitably alleviated.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least a first operation concealment permission state (e.g., a "15F reception period" or a "section (non-display section, first section) of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which operation-related displays are not displayed) and a second operation concealment permission state (e.g., a 14F reception period) are provided as the "operation concealment permission state", and, for example, when the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" occurs, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence (when timing toX arrives), an image display modeled after the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, thereby ending the "section (first operation concealment permission state) in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326) in which operation-related displays are not displayed," and However, if a "14th F reception period (second concealed operation permitted state)" occurs, the "14th F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)" ends with the passage of time, and the "operation-related display is displayed in a section (operation disclosure permitted state)". With this configuration, when an "operation concealed state" occurs, there are cases where the "operation disclosure permitted state" is subsequently transferred to the "operation disclosure permitted state" over time (15th F reception period according to the first modified example) and cases where the "operation disclosure permitted state" is not transferred to (14th F reception period), so that it is possible to appropriately impart a sense of tension while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game due to concealed operation.

In addition, in the above configuration, the "operation disclosure permitted state" can be said to occur following the end of the "section (non-display section, first section) in the "15F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) in which the operation-related display is not displayed") in the "15F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) in the first modified example," and also occurs under conditions unrelated to the operation confidentiality permitted state (for example, the 12F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312)). Therefore, since it is difficult to recognize whether operation reception was permitted before the "operation disclosure permitted state" occurs (whether the operation confidentiality permitted state occurred), it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

The "operation disclosure permitted state" can also be realized as a reception period that occurs following the end of the "15th F reception period (see Figures 319 to 321)" (reception period that occurs at timing to2E shown in Figure 319) instead of the "section (display section, second section) in which operation-related display is displayed" of the "15th F reception period (see Figures 322 to 326) according to the first modified example."

It is also desirable that operation-related sound a can be output in both cases where an "operation disclosure permitted state" occurs following the end of an "operation concealment permitted state" (e.g., timing to2E shown in FIG. 319, timing to2E shown in FIG. 322, timing to2e shown in FIG. 323, etc.), and where an "operation disclosure permitted state" occurs under conditions unrelated to the "operation concealment permitted state" (timing tl2 shown in FIG. 312, timing tm2 shown in FIG. 314, etc.). In this case, however, the form of operation-related sound a may be different. For example, when an "operation disclosure permitted state" occurs under conditions unrelated to the "operation concealment permitted state" (such as timing tl2 shown in FIG. 312 or timing tm2 shown in FIG. 314), multiple modes of operation-related sound a are prepared, and the operation-related sound a is audibly output in any one of those modes; however, when an "operation disclosure permitted state" occurs following the termination of the "operation concealment permitted state" (such as timing to2E shown in FIG. 319, timing to2E shown in FIG. 322, or timing to2e shown in FIG. 323), only a special mode that cannot be output when an "operation disclosure permitted state" occurs under conditions unrelated to the "operation concealment permitted state" (such as timing tl2 shown in FIG. 312 or timing tm2 shown in FIG. 314) may be audibly output as the operation-related sound a.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, after the first operation concealment permitted state (e.g., the "section (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which the operation-related display is not displayed) occurs, the first operation concealment permitted state (e.g., the "section (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which the operation-related display is not displayed) ends and the operation disclosure permitted state (e.g., the "section (display section, second section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which the operation-related display is displayed) is entered based on the passage of a predetermined time from the occurrence (e.g., as shown in FIG. 322 and FIG. 323). 24) and the first operation concealment allowance state (for example, the "section (non-display section, first section) in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which the operation-related display is not displayed) is ended based on the operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation unit) in the "section (non-display section, first section) in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example"), and the operation disclosure allowance state (section after timing to2a) is transitioned to (for example, see timing to2a shown in FIG. 323). With this configuration, multiple conditions are prepared for transitioning from one reception period (first operation concealment allowance state) to the "operation disclosure allowance state", which creates a variety of presentations and is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In this case, when the first operation concealment permitted state (e.g., the "section (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which operation-related display is not displayed) ends and transitions to an operation disclosure permitted state (e.g., the "section (display section, second section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which operation-related display is displayed) based on the passage of a predetermined time from the occurrence (see, for example, timing toX shown in Figures 322 and 324), When the first operation concealment permitted state (for example, the "section (non-display section, first section) in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example in which operation-related display is not displayed)" ends and the above-mentioned operation disclosure permitted state (the section after timing to2a) is entered based on the reception of an operation on the sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation section) (for example, see timing to2a shown in FIG. 323), it is desirable (however, not essential) to make the type of "operation disclosure permitted state" to be entered (post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is accepted on the sword ornament 5001) different in order to appropriately maintain a sense of tension within the first operation concealment permitted state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of a first operation concealment permitted state (e.g., a "section (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which operation-related display is not displayed) and the first operation concealment permitted state is terminated and transitioned to the above-mentioned operation disclosure permitted state (e.g., a "section (display section, second section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" in which operation-related display is displayed) (see, for example, the timing toX shown in FIG. 324), the operation disclosure permitted state occurs. When the first operation concealment permitted state is ended based on the acceptance of an operation on the sword ornament 5001 in the first operation concealment permitted state (for example, the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example"), the operation-related sound a is not output, and when the first operation concealment permitted state is ended and transitioned to the operation disclosure permitted state (for example, the section after timing to2E) (for example, see timing to2E shown in FIG. 322), the operation-related sound a is output when the operation disclosure permitted state occurs. In other words, in this case, the presence or absence of output of the operation-related sound a differs depending on the conditions for transitioning from the "first operation concealment permitted state" to the "operation disclosure permitted state", so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 13-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation allowance state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowance state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and even when the post-acceptance display is not displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when it is displayed. In this regard, after the "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example (specific operation allowance state)" can be generated as the operation allowance state, in the "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)", as shown in Fig. 324, a switch can be made from the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toX)" in which operation acceptance is allowed while the second background image HK2 is displayed as the background image to the "back background operation section (timing toX to to3)" in which operation acceptance is allowed while the third background image HK3 is displayed as the background image, so that it is expected to improve the interest in playing.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, the model image display is not displayed in the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toX)" shown in FIG. 324, and the model image display is displayed in the "second background operation section (timing toX to to3)" shown in FIG. 324, but this configuration is not necessarily required, and for example, the model image display may be displayed throughout the entire section from timing to2 to to3, or the model image display may not be displayed. This is true not only for the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" but also for the "15F reception period according to the second modified example", and for example, the model image display may be displayed throughout the entire section from timing to2 to to3, or the model image display may not be displayed.

Here, in the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example, as shown in Fig. 322, when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 during the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toX)" (timing to2E), the background is changed (changing to another background image, replacing) from the second background image HK2 to a third background image HK3 having a different background depiction from the second background image HK2, and the 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 323, when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 during the "second background operation section (timing toX to to3)" (timing to2e), the 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception may be displayed without changing the background (changing to another background image, replacing, etc.) from the first background image HK1 to another background image having a different background depiction. That is, in this case, the "third background image HK3" in the above-mentioned example of presentation is prepared as a background image with the same background depiction as the "first background image HK1." With this configuration, in the "15F reception period of the first modified example," whether or not the background image that had been displayed until then is hidden and a completely different background image appears differs between the cases where an operation is received in the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toX)" and the "second background operation section (timing toX to to3)." Therefore, even if the same 15F post-reception display UA is displayed, it is possible to have a large difference in presentation, which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the method of changing the background (changing to or replacing with another background image) from the previously displayed background image to a background image with a different background depiction from the previously displayed background image may, for example, be to display the different background image in front of the previously displayed background image (front layer) to make the previously displayed background image invisible, or to make the previously displayed background image hidden behind it (back layer) by making it invisible, or to reveal the different background image, or to use other methods.

In addition, even if the third background image HK3 is realized as the same background image as the first background image HK1, the first background image HK1 and the third background image HK3 may have different display modes (brightness, color scheme, etc.). This is because if the mode remains within the range of "using the background image that was previously displayed and changing it," it cannot be said that "the background image has been replaced with another background image."

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example, at least reception of an operation for the sword decoration 5001 and reception of an operation for the operation button 410 are permitted. In this regard, in the "post background operation section (timing toX to to3)", when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to display the 15F post reception display UA in response to the operation reception without replacing the first background image HK1 with a background image whose background depiction is different from that of the first background image HK1, as described above, but in the above-mentioned performance example, as shown in Fig. 323, even when an operation is received for the operation button 410, the 15F post reception display UB in response to the operation reception is displayed without replacing the first background image HK1 with a background image whose background depiction is different from that of the first background image HK1. In contrast, in the "first background operation section (timing to2 to X)," when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, the second background image HK2 is replaced with a third background image HK3 having a different background depiction from the second background image HK2, and a 15F post-acceptance display UA is displayed in response to the operation acceptance. However, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the second background image HK2 is not replaced with a background image having a different background depiction from the second background image HK2, and a 15F post-acceptance display UB is displayed in response to the operation acceptance. With this configuration, the background image when an operation is accepted can have a common part (operation button 410) and a different part (sword decoration 5001) in the performance of the "first background operation section (timing to2 to X)" and the "second background operation section (timing toX to 3)," so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game within a range in which the performance of one acceptance period (the 15F acceptance period in the first modified example) is appropriately maintained.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment ([Configuration 14-F]), an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and further, a background image that can be displayed even when the post-acceptance display is not displayed and that is displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed can be displayed. Then, after the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (specific operation allowable state)" can be generated as an operation allowable state, during the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)," while the state in which operation acceptance is allowed continues, a "change (changing to a different background image, replacing, etc.)" can occur from the first background image HK1 that has been displayed up until then to a "different background image (here, the third background image HK3) with a different background depiction," which is expected to increase the interest in playing.

Moreover, during the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)", operation reception for the operation button 410 is permitted multiple times, and when an operation is received for the operation button 410 during the "15F reception period for the second modified example", as shown in Figure 328, the first background image HK1 that had been displayed until then is not replaced with another background image (here, the third background image HK3), but there are cases in which the conditions for replacing the other background image (here, the third background image HK3) are met while the post-15F reception display UB is displayed (see, for example, timing toY). With this configuration, while multiple operations are being performed on the operation button 410, there are cases where the conditions for replacing the first background image HK1 that was displayed until then with another background image (here, the third background image HK3) are met (see, for example, FIG. 328, etc.), and cases where the conditions for replacing with the other background image are not met (for example, when the timing toY does not arrive while the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed, and the timing toY arrives after the 15th F post-reception display UB has become invisible). As a result, differences in the presentation will appear as multiple operations are performed, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, if the 15F reception display UB in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410 is displayed and the "15F reception period for the second modified example" continues, and a timing toY arrives at which the first background image HK1 that has been displayed until then is replaced with a third background image HK3 with a different background depiction, the 15F reception display UB can be made invisible based on the arrival of the timing toY, as shown in Fig. 328. With this configuration, if a background change occurs while the "15F reception period for the second modified example" continues, the 15F reception display UB in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410, which is allowed to be operated multiple times, is made invisible, so that a sense of tension can be appropriately imparted.

In this case, if a background change occurs while the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to the operation reception to the operation button 410 during the "15th F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)," the 15th F post-reception display UB may be made invisible when the background change occurs, or may not be made invisible (continue to be invisible) when the background change occurs. For example, as mentioned above, the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" may be generated as a single reception period combined with the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)". In this case, if timing to3 arrives while the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" is continuing, the same phenomenon (timing to3 = timing toX) will occur as when timing toX of the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" arrives. However, as shown in Figure 323, even if timing toX arrives at which a background change occurs while the 15F post-reception display UB remains displayed, it is clear that this does not serve as a trigger for the 15F post-reception display UB to be hidden. As a method of such combination, as described above, when timing to3 arrives while the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" is still continuing, the same phenomenon (timing to3 = timing toY) occurs as when timing toY of the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" arrives, so that the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" and the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" can be generated as a single combined reception period.However, even in such a case, the configuration is similar, with only the order being reversed. That is, according to these configurations, when a background change occurs while the "operation permitted state" continues, there are cases where the 15F post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance for the operation button 410 that is permitted to be operated multiple times is hidden, and cases where the 15F post-acceptance display UB is not hidden and continues. Therefore, when a background change occurs within the "operation permitted state", it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate more on the presentation content, and it is expected that interest in the game will be increased compared to the conventional validity period in which only operation is required.

Furthermore, during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)", if a background change occurs while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410, the 15F post-reception display UB may be hidden when the background change occurs (see timing to2E shown in Fig. 322, etc.) or may not be hidden when the background change occurs (see timing toX shown in Fig. 323, etc.). This makes it possible to encourage the player to concentrate more on the presentation content when a background change occurs during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", and is expected to increase interest in the game compared to the conventional valid period in which only operation is required.

In the configuration of the above-mentioned example of the performance, the 15th F post-acceptance display UB in response to the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 is displayed for a predetermined time, and if a background change occurs within the predetermined time, it may be hidden before the predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, even if the 15F post-reception display UB in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410 is hidden based on the arrival of timing toY within a predetermined set time (predetermined time) as shown in Figs. 330(c) to (k) and 331(l) to (n) (see Fig. 331(l)), when the operation reception of the operation button 410 is performed again thereafter, the number of times the operation has been received up to that point is carried over (even if the display UB after the 15F reception is hidden, the operation reception up to that point is valid for the operation button 410, and the operation reception of the operation button 410 is also allowed to continue), and a display mode corresponding to that (here, the display UB3 after the 15F reception) is displayed, which makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)," as shown in Fig. 329, there is at least a first background operation section (a section from timing to2 to toY) in which reception of operations is permitted while the first background image HK1 is displayed, and a second background operation section (a section from timing toY to to3) in which reception of operations is permitted while the second background image HK2 is displayed. When an operation is received on the operation button 410 in the first background operation section (a section from timing to2 to toY), a 15F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without changing the background from the first background image HK1, but while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed, there are cases in which the background image is replaced from the first background operation section (a section from timing to2 to toY) to the second background operation section (a section from timing toY to to3).

And when the time arrives for the background image to be replaced from the first background operation section (the section from timing to2 to toY) to the second background operation section (the section from timing toY to to3) while the 15F post-reception display UB is being displayed, this triggers the display UB to be hidden, so that the sense of tension during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" can be optimally maintained.

In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 323 (the 15F reception period according to the first modified example (see FIG. 322 to FIG. 326)), when there is a transition from the "background section from timing to2 to toX" to the "background section from timing toX to to3", even if timing toX arrives at which a background change occurs while the 15F post-reception display UB in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410 is being displayed, the 15F post-reception display UB is not made invisible as a result of this.

In other words, in this case, as described above, it is possible to improve the presentation by generating a single reception period that combines the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" and the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)."

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, if the "15th floor reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" and the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" are generated as a single reception period combined, the following can be said.

In other words, within this combined reception period, there will be provided "timing to X at which the 15thF post-reception display UB that has been displayed until then is not hidden" and "timing to Y at which the 15thF post-reception display UB that has been displayed until then is hidden" as timings at which the background will change over time. In this regard, in the period until the "timing toX at which the previously displayed 15F post-reception display UB is not hidden" arrives (timing to2 to toX shown in FIG. 324, or timing toY to to3 (= in the case of toX) shown in FIG. 329), if the sword decorative body 5001 is operated, the previously displayed second background image HK2 can be replaced with another background image (here, the third background image HK3) and the 15F post-reception display UA can be displayed, but in the period until the "timing toY at which the previously displayed 15F post-reception display UB is not hidden" arrives (timing toX to to3 (= in the case of toY) shown in FIG. 324, or timing to2 to toY shown in FIG. 329), if the sword decorative body 5001 is operated, the previously displayed first background image HK1 will not be replaced with another background image (in the case of an example in which the third background image HK3 is prepared as a background image with the same background depiction as the first background image HK1).

With this configuration, the presentation of the background image change during one reception period can be varied depending on the type of control unit and the type of section, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 15-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permissible state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance change can occur. As one of the post-acceptance changes, a background image can be displayed even in a situation in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed, and when the post-acceptance display is displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be visible behind the post-acceptance display. Also, when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permissible state, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. As operation permission states, at least the "14th F reception period (predetermined operation permission state)" and the "15th F reception period for the first modified example, or the 15th F reception period for the second modified example (specific operation permission state)" are provided, and in the "15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" and the "15th F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)," background switching (changing to a different background image, replacement, etc.) can occur while the operation permission state continues, which is expected to increase interest in playing in states where operation permission is permitted.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", background switching does not occur while the state in which operation reception is permitted continues. With this configuration, in an operation-permitted state in which operation reception is permitted, background switching may or may not occur, which is expected to increase interest in the game when in the operation-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, multiple operation receptions are permitted for the operation button 410 during both the "14F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" and the "15F reception period for the second modified example (or the "15F reception period for the first modified example")," and when an operation is received for the operation button 410 during the "14F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)," a post-reception output sound is not output as one of the post-reception changes B while the "14F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" continues, and when an operation is received for the operation button 410 during the "15F reception period for the second modified example (or the "15F reception period for the first modified example")," a post-reception output sound B can be output as one of the post-reception changes B while the "15F reception period for the second modified example (or the "15F reception period for the first modified example")" continues (see Figures 322 to 326, or Figures 327 to 331). With this configuration, whether or not a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes B is expected to indicate whether or not a background switch will occur within the operation permitted state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned presentation example, when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 during the "15F acceptance period of the second modified example (or the "15F acceptance period of the first modified example")," there are cases where the post-acceptance output sound B is output as one of the post-acceptance changes B while the "15F acceptance period of the second modified example (or the "15F acceptance period of the first modified example")" continues (see, for example, timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 322 and timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 327) and cases where it is not output (see, for example, timings to2D shown in FIG. 322 and timings to2D shown in FIG. 327). With this configuration, even if the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes B, there is a possibility that the background will be switched within the operation permitted state, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained and a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, there is at least a first background operation section (the section from timing to2 to toY shown in Fig. 329) in which operation reception is permitted while the first background image HK1 is displayed, and a second background operation section (the section from timing toY to to3 shown in Fig. 329) in which operation reception is permitted while the second background image HK2 is displayed, and the 15F post-reception display UB in response to an operation performed on the operation button 410 during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example" is displayed for a predetermined time (predetermined time), and if a background change occurs based on the passage of time within the predetermined time (based on the arrival of timing toY), it is made to be hidden before the predetermined time has passed (see timing toY shown in Fig. 328), so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 16-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation permissible state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, even in a situation in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed, a background image can be displayed so that it can be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed, and when an operation unit in which multiple operation acceptance is permitted is kept operated in the operation permissible state, operation acceptance can be performed multiple times (the auto-repeated-hit function can be enabled). Furthermore, at least the "14th F reception period (predetermined operation permitted state)" and the "15th F reception period of the first modified example, or the 15th F reception period of the second modified example (specific operation permitted state)" are provided as operation permitted states, and in the "15th F reception period of the first modified example, or the 15th F reception period of the second modified example (specific operation permitted state)", background switching can occur while the operation reception permitted state continues, which is expected to increase interest in playing in states where operation reception is permitted.

Moreover, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, background switching does not occur while the state in which operation reception is permitted continues. With this configuration, in an operation-permitted state in which operation reception is permitted, background switching may or may not occur, which is expected to increase interest in playing when in the operation-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned performance example, there are one or more operation parts (here, the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410) that are acceptable for accepting multiple operations, and if the operation part is continued to be maintained in an operated state, the auto-repeated function is activated and multiple operations can be accepted (when the sword decoration 5001 is operated), but in the "15th F reception period (see Figures 322 to 326) of the first modified example, or the 15th F reception period (see Figures 327 to 331) of the above-mentioned performance example, there are one or more operation parts (here, the operation button 410) that are acceptable for accepting multiple operations, and even if the operation part is continued to be maintained in an operated state, multiple operations will not be accepted (see Figures 322 and 323). With this configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a background change will occur within the operation permission state based on whether or not the so-called auto-tap function is enabled, which is expected to enhance the dramatic effect when operating.

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned example of the performance, the 14th F reception display UA in response to the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the auto-hit function is enabled is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in Fig. 318, while the 14th F reception display UB in response to the operation reception for the operation button 410 on the side where the auto-hit function is not enabled is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in Figs. 317 and 318. In other words, in this case, the auto-hit function is not enabled for the operation button 410, but the 14th F reception display UB in response to the operation reception is displayed in priority over the 14th F reception display UA that may appear when the auto-hit function is enabled, so that it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game due to the auto-hit function not being enabled will be suppressed.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 17-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation acceptance state in which operation acceptance is accepted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in this operation acceptance state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, even when the post-acceptance display is not displayed, a background image can be displayed so that it can be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. As operation acceptance states, at least the "14th F acceptance period (predetermined operation acceptance state)" and the "15th F acceptance period according to the first modification, or the 15th F acceptance period according to the second modification (specific operation acceptance state)" are prepared, and in the "15th F acceptance period according to the first modification, or the 15th F acceptance period according to the second modification (specific operation acceptance state)," background switching can occur while the operation acceptance acceptance state continues, so that it is expected to improve the interest in playing in the operation acceptance acceptance state.

Moreover, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, background switching does not occur while the state in which operation reception is permitted continues. With this configuration, in an operation-permitted state in which operation reception is permitted, background switching may or may not occur, which is expected to increase interest in playing when in the operation-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least a "sword decoration 5001 (prescribed operation unit)" and an "operation button 410 (specific operation unit)" are prepared as operation units, and during the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", while the 14th F post-reception display B in response to the operation reception to the "operation button 410" is displayed, the operation reception to the "sword decoration 5001" is permitted, and when an operation is received for the "sword decoration 5001", this is triggered by the 14th F post-reception display UB in response to the operation reception to the "operation button 410" being continued without being hidden, while the 15th F post-reception display UA in response to the operation reception to the "sword decoration 5001" is displayed (see timings tn2E to tn2I shown in Figure 315). In contrast, in the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326) or the 15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, even while the 15F reception display UB in response to the operation reception for the "operation button 410" is displayed, the operation reception for the "sword decoration 5001" is permitted, and when the operation reception for the "sword decoration 5001" is performed, this is triggered to make the 15F reception display UB in response to the operation reception for the "operation button 410" invisible, and the 15F reception display UA in response to the operation reception for the "sword decoration 5001" is displayed (see timing to2E shown in Fig. 322 and timing to2E shown in Fig. 327). With this configuration, depending on whether or not background switching occurs in the operation permitted state, it is expected that when the operation reception for the "sword decoration 5001" is performed, this is triggered to suggest whether or not to make the reception display UB in response to the operation reception for the "operation button 410" invisible.

In addition, in the "15th F reception period (see Figs. 319 to 321)" of the above-mentioned performance example, or the "15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)", or the "15th F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", when an operation is received on the operation button 410, this may trigger the display UB after 15th F reception to be displayed and the output sound B after 15th F reception to be audibly output (for example, at the timing to2A shown in Fig. 319 or at the timing to3A shown in Fig. 326). 22, or timing to2c shown in FIG. 328), if an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while the display UB after the 15th F reception is displayed and the sound B after the 15th F reception is audibly output, this is used as a trigger to make the "display UB after the 15th F reception" that is displayed invisible, but the sound B after the 15th F reception that is audible may be continued without terminating. In other words, in this case, it becomes unclear whether the operation for the "sword ornament 5001" was accepted properly, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 18-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation acceptance state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation acceptance state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and in the operation acceptance state, the specific light-emitting unit can be made to emit light. Then, the "15F acceptance period (specific operation acceptance state) according to the first modified example" can be generated as the operation acceptance state, and in the "15F acceptance period (see Figs. 322 to 326) according to the first modified example", as shown in Fig. 324, a switch can be made from the "second light-emitting operation section (section from timing to2 to toX)" in which the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is accepted while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the second light-emitting state to the "first light-emitting operation section (section from timing toX to to3)" in which the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is accepted while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the first light-emitting state, and therefore it is expected that the interest in playing in the state in which operation acceptance is accepted can be improved.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Fig. 322 to Fig. 326)", when an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation unit) during the "second light-emitting operation section (section from timing to2 to toX)", the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit is changed from the "second light-emitting state" to a "light-emitting state different from the second light-emitting state (here, the third light-emitting state)" as shown in Fig. 322, and a 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed (see timing to2E), but when an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 during the "first light-emitting operation section (section from timing toX to to3)", the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit may be changed from the "first light-emitting state" to display a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception as shown in Fig. 323 (see timing to2e). That is, in this case, the "third light-emitting state" of the specific light-emitting unit is set to the same light-emitting state as the "first light-emitting state". According to this configuration, during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", whether the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is performed in the "first light-emitting operation section (section from timing toX to to3)" or the "second light-emitting operation section (section from timing to2 to toX)" determines whether the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting section changes when the 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, which is expected to increase interest in the game during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example".

As described above, either the first light-emitting mode or the second light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting unit may be a non-light-emitting mode.

In addition, in the "15F reception period (see Fig. 322 to Fig. 326) according to the first modified example," at least the reception of operations on the sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation unit) and the reception of operations on the operation button 410 (specific operation unit) are permitted. In this regard, in the "first light-emitting operation section (section from timing toX to to3)," when an operation is received on the sword ornament 5001 (see timing to2e shown in Fig. 323), the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit is not changed from the first light-emitting state, and the display after 15F reception UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, and when an operation is received on the operation button 410 (see timing to2c shown in Fig. 323), the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit is not changed from the first light-emitting state, and the display after 15F reception UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. In other words, in this case, the "third light-emitting state" of the specific light-emitting unit is set to the same light-emitting state as the "first light-emitting state."

In contrast, in the second light-emitting operation section (section from timing to2 to toX), when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 (see timing to2E shown in FIG. 322), the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting part is changed from the second light-emitting state to a light-emitting state different from the second light-emitting state (here, the third background image HK3) and the 15F post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, but when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (see timing to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 322), the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting part is not changed from the second light-emitting state and the 15F post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed.

With this configuration, even during a single reception period (the 15F reception period in the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)), the light emission state of a specific light-emitting unit may or may not change depending on the type of operation target, and even when operations are performed on the same type, depending on the section in which the operation was performed, etc., making it possible to make it unclear whether the operation reception on the operation unit was appropriate, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In addition, among the reception periods according to the above-mentioned performance examples, in the reception periods of the type in which the light emission state of the specific light-emitting section does not change (during the reception period) according to the passage of time since the occurrence of the reception period (12F reception period, 13F reception period, 14F reception period, 16F reception period, 17F reception period, and variations thereof), it is desirable to use the timing of the reception of an operation on the sword decoration 5001 during the reception period as a trigger to cause a change from the light emission state that had appeared up until that point in time in the specific light-emitting section (a change to a different light emission state). With this configuration, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game due to the light emission state not changing during the reception period will be suppressed.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment ([Configuration 19-F]), an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in this operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and in the operation allowable state, a specific light-emitting unit can be made to emit light. Then, as the operation allowable state, a "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example (specific operation allowable state)" can be generated, and during this "15F acceptance period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)," the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit can change while the state in which operation acceptance is permitted continues, so that it is expected to increase interest in playing in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted.

Moreover, in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example, reception of operations to the operation button 410 (specific operation unit) is permitted multiple times, and when an operation is received to the operation button 410 during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", the light emission state of the specific light-emitting unit is not changed and a post-15F reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. Also, during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example", even in a situation in which the "post-15F reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception to the operation button 410" is displayed in this way, there are cases in which a change in the light emission state of the specific light-emitting unit occurs (a different light emission state) (for example, timing to2E shown in Fig. 322 or timing toX shown in Fig. 323). With this configuration, even when multiple operations are being performed on the operation button 410, the light emission state of the specific light-emitting section may change while the 15th F post-acceptance display UB is being displayed, which is expected to result in differences in the presentation as multiple operations are performed, increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, if a change occurs in the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting section while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to the operation reception to the operation button 410 during the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)", the 15F post-reception display UB may be made invisible when the change occurs (see timing to2E shown in Figure 322) or may continue to be invisible when the change occurs (see timing toX shown in Figure 323). With this configuration, if a change occurs in the light emission state of the specific light-emitting section while the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" is continuing, the 15F post-reception display UB in response to the reception of an operation on the operation button 410, which is permitted to be operated multiple times, will either be hidden or the 15F post-reception display UB will continue without being hidden. Therefore, when a change occurs in the light emission state of the specific light-emitting section during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)," it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate more on the presentation content, which is expected to increase the interest in the game compared to the conventional valid period during which only operation is required.

As mentioned above, the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" may be generated as a single reception period combined with the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)". If the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" is generated as a single combined reception period, then if timing toY arrives over time without any operation by the player while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed, the 15F post-reception display UB will be made invisible when a change occurs in the light emission state of the specific light-emitting section. In other words, in this case, within the combined reception period, the 15F post-reception display UB may be hidden when a change occurs in the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting section as a result of the passage of time (see timing to Y shown in FIG. 328), or it may continue to be hidden when such a change occurs (see timing to X shown in FIG. 323). In either case, however, since the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting section changes over time, the player will need to concentrate even more on viewing the presentation content, which is expected to increase interest in the game compared to the conventional validity period in which the player simply operates the device.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example, there is at least a first light-emitting operation section (a section from timing toX to to3) in which reception of operations is permitted while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in a first light-emitting state, and a second light-emitting operation section (a section from timing to2 to toX) in which reception of operations is permitted while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in a second light-emitting state, and when an operation is received on the operation button 410 in the first light-emitting operation section (a section from timing toX to to3), a 15F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without changing the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit from the first light-emitting state, but since the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit may change while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed, it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, during the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example, if a change occurs in the light emission state of the specific light-emitting section while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410, the 15F post-reception display UB may be made invisible, which is expected to maintain the sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, if the "15th floor reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" and the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" are generated as a single reception period combined, the following can be said.

In other words, within this combined reception period, "timing to X at which the 15thF post-reception display UB that has been displayed until then is not hidden" and "timing to Y at which the 15thF post-reception display UB that has been displayed until then is hidden" are provided as timings at which the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting section changes over time. In this regard, in the section until the arrival of "timing toX at which the previously displayed 15F post-reception display UB is not hidden" (timings to2 to toX shown in FIG. 324, or timings toY to to3 (= in the case of toX) shown in FIG. 329), if the sword decorative body 5001 is operated, the previously displayed second light-emitting mode can be replaced with another light-emitting mode (here, the third light-emitting mode) and the 15F post-reception display UA can be displayed, but in the section until the arrival of "timing toY at which the previously displayed 15F post-reception display UB is not hidden" (timings toX to to3 (= in the case of toY) shown in FIG. 324, or timings to2 to toY shown in FIG. 329), if the sword decorative body 5001 is operated, the previously displayed light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting part (here, the first light-emitting mode) will not be changed to another background image (in the case of an example in which the third light-emitting mode is prepared as the same light-emitting mode as the first light-emitting mode).

With this configuration, the dramatic effect of changes in the light emission state of a specific light-emitting element during one reception period can be varied depending on the type of operation element and the type of section, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 20-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation allowance state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowance state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, a background image that can be displayed even when the post-acceptance display is not displayed, and that is displayed so as to be seen behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed, can be displayed. Then, as an operation allowance state, a "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (specific operation allowance state)" can be generated, and in the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)," a switch can occur from a "first background operation section (timing to2 to toY)" in which operation acceptance is permitted while the first background image HK1 is displayed as the background image to a "second background operation section (timing toY to to3)" in which operation acceptance is permitted while the second background image HK2 is displayed as the background image, and therefore it is expected that an increase in the interest in playing in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be achieved.

Moreover, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 during the "second background operation section (timing to Y to to 3)", the background is changed from the second background image HK2 to a background image different from the second background image HK2 (here, the third background image HK3) and the 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, but when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 during the "first background operation section (timing to 2 to Y)", the 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without switching from the first background image HK1 to a different background image (in the case of an example in which the third background image HK3 is prepared as the same background image as the first background image HK1). With this configuration, during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example," whether or not a background switch occurs will differ between when an operation is received in the "first background operation section (timing to2 to Y)" and when an operation is received in the "second background operation section (timing to Y to 3)." This means that even when the same post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to provide a difference in presentation, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, at least reception of operations for the sword decoration 5001 and reception of operations for the operation button 410 are permitted, and in the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toY)," when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001, a 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without changing the background from the first background image HK1 (in the case of an example in which the third background image HK3 is prepared as the same background image as the first background image HK1), and when an operation is received for the operation button 410, the first background image In the "second background operation section (timing toY to to3)", when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, the background is changed from the second background image HK2 to a background image different from the second background image HK2 (here, the third background image HK3) and the 15F post-acceptance display UA in response to the operation acceptance is displayed, but when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the 15F post-acceptance display UB in response to the operation acceptance is displayed without switching from the second background image HK2 to another background image. With this configuration, the background image when an operation is accepted can have a common part (operation button 410) and a different part (sword decoration 5001) in the presentation when the operation is accepted during the "first background operation period (timing to2 to Y)" and the "second background operation period (timing to Y to 3)," making it possible to increase interest in the game within a range that appropriately maintains the presentation as one acceptance period (the 15F acceptance period in the second modified example).

As described above, when the 15th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed in response to the operation acceptance without switching from the first background image HK1 to another background image, the display mode (brightness, color scheme, etc.) of the first background image HK1 may be changed.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 21-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation permissible state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, a background image can be displayed even in a situation in which the post-acceptance display is not being displayed, and when the post-acceptance display is displayed, a background image can be displayed so as to be visible behind the post-acceptance display. In addition, the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (specific operation permitted state)" can be generated as an operation permitted state, and in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", a switch can occur from the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toY)" in which operation reception is permitted while the first background image HK1 is displayed as the background image to the "second background operation section (timing toY to to3)" in which operation reception is permitted while the second background image HK2 is displayed as the background image. At least an "operation button 410 (specific operation section)" is provided as the operation section, and the operation button 410 can be made to be capable of accepting multiple operations during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (specific operation permitted state)". This is expected to increase the interest in playing in a state in which operation reception is permitted, while providing a suitable sense of tension when the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (specific operation permitted state)" occurs.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the switch from the "first background operation section (timing 2 to Y)" to the "second background operation section (timing Y to 3)" is executed based on the passage of a predetermined amount of time from the occurrence of the "first background operation section (timing 2 to Y)" (the arrival of timing Y). With this configuration, during the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)", a presentation element is added in which the player waits for the timing at which the background image is switched before making an operation, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 during the "15th floor acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, the 15th floor post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed for a predetermined time without changing the background, regardless of whether it is the "first background operation period (timing to 2 to Y)" or the "second background operation period (timing to Y to 3)" (see Fig. 328). With this configuration, even if the "15th floor acceptance period according to the second modified example" occurs, the operation button 410 can be operated appropriately regardless of the conditions for background switching, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the 15F post-reception display UB is performed in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410 in the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toY)" of the above-mentioned performance example, the 15F post-reception display UB may be executed for the above-mentioned predetermined time as shown in FIG. 328, or may be hidden before the predetermined time has elapsed (triggered by the arrival of timing toY due to the passage of time), but when the 15F post-reception display UB is performed in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410 in the "second background operation section (timing toY to to3)," the 15F post-reception display UB is executed for the predetermined time (not hidden due to the arrival of a predetermined timing due to the passage of time). In other words, in this case, even if timing to3 arrives, the 15F post-reception display UB will not be hidden due to this. According to this configuration, in the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toY)," the 15F post-reception display UB in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410 will either be "displayed as a trigger of time passing before a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the 15F post-reception display UB started," or "not be hidden as a trigger of time passing before a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the 15F post-reception display UB started." This is expected to increase interest in the game while maintaining a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the "second background operation section (timing toY to to3)" of the above-mentioned example, when a special condition (acceptance of an operation on the sword decoration 5001) is met, the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" ends and a background change occurs; at this time, if the display UB after 15F reception was in a displayed state, it is made to be hidden based on the special condition (acceptance of an operation on the sword decoration 5001) being met (see timing to2e shown in Figure 328). With this configuration, the display UB after 15F reception is sometimes hidden and sometimes not hidden when a background change occurs, making it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 22-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation acceptance state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation acceptance state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, in the operation acceptance state, the specific light-emitting unit can be made to emit light. Then, as the operation acceptance state, the "15F acceptance period (specific operation acceptance state) according to the second modified example" can be generated, and in the "15F acceptance period (see Figs. 327 to 331) according to the second modified example," a switch can occur from the "first light-emitting operation section (timing to2 to toY)" in which the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is accepted while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the first light-emitting state to the "second light-emitting operation section (timing toY to to3)" in which the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is accepted while the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the second light-emitting state. This is expected to increase the interest in playing in the state in which operation acceptance is accepted.

Moreover, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 during the "second light-emitting operation section (timing toY to to3)" (see timing to2e shown in Figure 328), the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting section is changed to display the 15F post-reception display UA in response to the operation reception, but when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 during the "first light-emitting operation section (timing to2 to toY)" (see timing to2E shown in Figure 327), the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting section is not changed and the 15F post-reception display UA in response to the operation reception is displayed (in the case of an example in which the third light-emitting state is prepared as the same light-emitting state as the first light-emitting state). With this configuration, during the "15F reception period of the second modified example", whether or not a change occurs in the light emission state will differ between when an operation is received during the "first light-emitting operation section (timing to2 to toY)" and when an operation is received during the "15F reception period of the second modified example (specific operation permitted state)". Therefore, even when the same post-reception display (15F post-reception display UA) is displayed, it is possible to provide a difference in presentation, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, at least reception of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 and reception of operations for the operation button 410 are permitted. Then, in the "first light-emitting operation section (timing to2 to toY)", when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 (see timing to2E shown in Figure 327), a 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without changing the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit from the first light-emitting state, and when an operation is received for the operation button 410, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without changing the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit from the first light-emitting state (in the case of an example in which the third light-emitting state is prepared as the same light-emitting state as the first light-emitting state). In contrast, in the "second light-emitting operation section (timing toY to to3)," when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 (see timing to2e shown in FIG. 328), the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit is changed from the second light-emitting state to a light-emitting state different from the second light-emitting state (here, the third light-emitting state) and the 15F post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. However, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit is not changed from the second light-emitting state and the 15F post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. With this configuration, even during one acceptance period (the 15F acceptance period according to the second modified example), the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting unit may or may not change depending on the type of operation target, and even when the same type of operation is performed, it is possible to make it unclear whether the operation acceptance for the operation unit was performed properly, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, among the reception periods according to the above-mentioned performance examples, in the reception periods of the type in which the light emission state of the specific light-emitting section does not change (during the reception period) according to the passage of time since the occurrence of the reception period (12F reception period, 13F reception period, 14F reception period, 16F reception period, 17F reception period, and variations thereof), it is desirable to use the timing of the reception of an operation on the sword decoration 5001 during the reception period as a trigger to cause a change from the light emission state that had appeared up until that point in time in the specific light-emitting section (a change to a different light emission state). With this configuration, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game due to the light emission state not changing during the reception period will be suppressed.

In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 23-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permissible state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Also, a specific light-emitting unit can be made to emit light in the operation permissible state. Then, as an operation permission state, the "15F reception period (specific operation permission state) according to the second modified example" can be generated, and in the "15F reception period (see Figs. 327 to 331) according to the second modified example, a switch can occur from the "first light-emitting operation section (timing to2 to toY)" in which the specific light-emitting section is emitting light in a first light-emitting state and operation reception for the operation section is permitted to the "second light-emitting operation section (timing toY to to3)" in which operation reception for the operation section is permitted to the specific light-emitting section is emitting light in a second light-emitting state, and at least the "operation button 410 (specific operation section)" is provided as the operation section, and the "operation button 410" is configured to be able to accept operation reception multiple times during the "15F reception period (specific operation permission state) according to the second modified example." This is expected to increase the interest in playing in a state in which operation reception is permitted, while providing a suitable sense of tension when the "15F reception period (specific operation permission state) according to the second modified example" occurs.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the transition from the "first light-emitting operation section (timing to2 to Y)" to the "second light-emitting operation section (timing to Y to 3)" is executed based on the passage of a predetermined amount of time (arrival of timing to Y) from the occurrence of the "first light-emitting operation section (timing to2 to Y)," as shown in FIG. 329. With this configuration, in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see FIG. 327 to FIG. 331)," a presentation element is added in which the player waits for the timing at which the light-emitting mode is switched before operating, which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 during the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, the 15F post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed for a predetermined time without changing the light emission state regardless of whether it is the "first light emission operation section (timing to 2 to Y)" or the "second light emission operation section (timing to Y to 3)". With this configuration, even if the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example" occurs, the operation button 410 can be appropriately operated regardless of the conditions related to the change in the light emission state, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, when a 15F post-reception display UB is performed in response to the reception of an operation on the operation button 410 in the "first light-emitting operation section (timing to2 to toY)", the 15F post-reception display UB may be executed for the above-mentioned specified time while the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" continues, or may be made invisible before the specified time has elapsed while the "15F reception period for the second modified example" continues (triggered by the arrival of timing toY due to the passage of time); however, when a 15F post-reception display UB is performed in response to the reception of an operation on the operation button 410 in the "second light-emitting operation section (timing toY to to3)", the 15F post-reception display UB is executed for the specified time while the "15F reception period for the second modified example" continues (without being made invisible due to the arrival of a specified timing due to the passage of time). With this configuration, in the "first light-emitting operation section (timing to2 to toY)," the 15F post-reception display UB in response to the operation reception of the operation button 410 will either be "displayed as a trigger for time elapse before a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the 15F post-reception display UB started," or "not be hidden as a trigger for time elapse before a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the 15F post-reception display UB started." This is expected to increase interest in the game while maintaining a good sense of tension.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 24-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation allowance state can be generated in which operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation unit) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in this operation allowance state, a post-acceptance display UA can be displayed. Then, at least the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (specific operation allowance state)" is prepared as an operation allowance state, and during the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)," a model image display of the sword decoration 5001 for which operation acceptance is permitted can be displayed, but when a predetermined condition is met, the model image display is made non-display, so that it is expected that the sense of tension in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be appropriately maintained.

Moreover, the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example includes a "display section (timing to2 to Y)" in which an imitation image of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and a "non-display section (timing toY to 3)" in which an imitation image of the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the "display section (timing to2 to Y)" (when timing to Y arrives), the "display section (timing to2 to Y)" ends and the above-mentioned "non-display section (timing toY to 3)" begins. With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension during the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" will be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, in the "15th floor reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, the same post-reception display (15th floor post-reception display) is executed when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 in the "display section (timing to 2 to Y)" and when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 in the "non-display section (timing to Y to 3)". With this configuration, even if the "display section (timing to 2 to Y)" is shifted to the "non-display section (timing to Y to 3)", the same post-reception display appears, so it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game when the "display section (timing to 2 to Y)" ends.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period (see Figs. 327 to 331) of the above-mentioned performance example, if any one of the first and second conditions is satisfied in the above-mentioned "display section (timing to2 to toY)", the "15F reception period (see Figs. 327 to 331) of the second modified example" is terminated. If the second condition is satisfied, the model image display is not displayed (the type of display after reception when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 is different) and another reception period does not occur, but if the first condition is satisfied, the model image display is displayed (the type of display after reception when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 is different) and another reception period may occur. For example, the first condition can be set as "one operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001", and the second condition can be set as "a specific number of operations acceptance for the operation button 410" or "a special judgment result is obtained in the judgment according to the operation acceptance for the operation button 410". However, the first and second conditions may be determined in advance, and may not necessarily use, for example, the sword ornament 5001 or the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, depending on the type of "previously executed fluctuation pattern (previous fluctuation pattern)" that has ended at the time when the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" occurs, there may be cases where a specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound) is suppressed or made inaudible before the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" occurs, and cases where a specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound) is not suppressed or made inaudible before the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" occurs. In contrast, among the reception periods according to the above-mentioned performance examples, in the 12F reception period, 13F reception period, 14F reception period, 16F reception period, 17F reception period, and their modified examples, the above-mentioned "specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound)" may be suppressed or inaudible or not before the occurrence timing according to the type of "previously executed variation pattern (previous variation pattern)". According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when an operation opportunity is given, it becomes easy to recognize whether or not the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" will occur based on the output status of the "specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound)", so that it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. In this case, during the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)," it is desirable for the display after reception to remain the same even if the type of sound effect has changed depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 25-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance to the operation unit is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted to the operation unit in this operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, at least the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (specific operation allowable state)" is prepared as an operation allowable state, and in the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", a model image display can be displayed, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the model image display is made non-displayed, and at least an operation button 410 (specific operation unit) is prepared as the operation unit, and the operation button 410 (specific operation unit) is made to be capable of accepting multiple operations in the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example", so that it is expected that the sense of tension in the state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 during the "15th F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", the 15th F post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed for a predetermined time regardless of whether the operation acceptance is made when the replica image display is being displayed (timings to2 to toY) or when the replica image display is not being displayed (timings toY to to3). With this configuration, the 15th F post-acceptance display UB continues to be displayed for a predetermined time regardless of the display status of the replica image display, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game while maintaining a sense of tension.

However, in the above-mentioned performance example, while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 during the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)", if the "non-display of the imitation image display" is not performed triggered by the lapse of a predetermined time after the occurrence of the "15F reception period for the second modified example", the 15F post-reception display UB can be displayed for a predetermined time, but if the "non-display of the imitation image display" is performed triggered by the lapse of a predetermined time after the occurrence of the "specific operation permissible state", the 15F post-reception display UB is not displayed continuously for the predetermined time, but is hidden in accordance with the timing (here, timing toY) at which the non-display of the imitation image display is performed (triggered by the lapse of the above-mentioned predetermined time) (see timing toY shown in Figure 328). With this configuration, at the timing when the mock image display is switched from a display state to a non-display state (here, timing toY), the 15th F post-reception display UB, which is in a display state, is not displayed continuously for a predetermined time but is hidden before that, so it is expected that the sense of tension while the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 26-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation permissible state can be generated in which acceptance of an operation to the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is accepted to the operation unit in this "operation permissible state," a post-acceptance display can be displayed. As the operation unit, at least the "sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation unit)" and the "operation button 410 (specific operation unit)" are prepared, and as the operation permission state, the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (specific operation permission state)" can be generated. During the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", when an operation is received for the "sword ornament 5001", a 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed (see Fig. 327(h) for example), and when an operation is received for the "operation button 410", a 15F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed (see Fig. 327(i) for example). Since the "time from when the 15F post-reception display UA is displayed until it is hidden" is different from the "time from when the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed until it is hidden", it is expected that the sense of tension after the operation is received will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Moreover, in the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, as shown in Figs. 329(f) and (g), at least the "image display modeled after the sword decoration 5001" and the "image display modeled after the operation button 410" can be displayed, and when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example" (when timing toY arrives), both the "image display modeled after the sword decoration 5001" and the "image display modeled after the operation button 410" are made invisible. With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension during the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example" will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" in the above-mentioned performance example may be continued even after the "image display modeled after the sword decoration 5001" and the "image display modeled after the operation button 410" are both hidden, triggered by the passage of a predetermined amount of time from the occurrence of the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example" (the arrival of timing toY). With this configuration, the "image display modeled after the sword decoration 5001" and the "image display modeled after the operation button 410" are both hidden while the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example" continues, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, when the "image display imitating the sword ornament 5001" and the "image display imitating the operation button 410" are displayed and the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to the operation reception of the "operation button 410", the 15F post-reception display UB can be displayed for the above-mentioned display time (set time) unless the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the "15F reception period for the second modified example" occurred during the period from when the 15F post-reception display UB was displayed until the display time (set time) has elapsed (if timing toY has not arrived), but when the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the "15F reception period for the second modified example" occurred during the period from when the 15F post-reception display UB was displayed until the display time (set time) has elapsed, the display is made non-displayed using this as a trigger (see timing toY shown in Fig. 328(i)).

In contrast to this, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, when a "model image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001" and a "model image display modeled after the operation button 410" are displayed and a 15F post-reception display UA is displayed in response to reception of an operation on the "sword decorative body 5001," the 15F post-reception display UA is not made invisible when the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "15F reception period for the second modified example" (when timing toY has arrived), but is made to be displayed for a predetermined display time (set time) (see timing toY shown in Figure 327 (h)). With this configuration, when the 15F post-reception display UA appears, the user can enjoy the contents of the 15F post-reception display UA with a sense of security, whereas when the 15F post-reception display UB appears, the user must check the contents of the post-reception display while being conscious of the passage of time (timing toY), which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension.

Furthermore, if an operation is accepted at the operation unit while neither the "image display modeled after the sword ornament 5001" nor the "image display modeled after the operation button 410" is being displayed during the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance display in response to that operation acceptance will not be hidden based on the elapsed time since the occurrence of the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example," but will be displayed for the display time (set time) in accordance with the type of post-acceptance display, regardless of the type of operation unit (sword ornament 5001, operation button 410) at which the operation was accepted. In other words, in this case, when an operation is successfully accepted during the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example" during which confidentiality makes it difficult to accept an operation, the post-acceptance display according to the operation acceptance is displayed as a special performance bonus for such successful operation acceptance, and is not terminated prematurely based on the amount of time that has elapsed since the occurrence of the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example", thereby improving the interest in the game.

As mentioned above, for the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" in the above-mentioned performance example, "a specific type of performance sound may be suppressed or inaudible before the occurrence of the "15F reception period for the second modified example," or may not be suppressed or inaudible," depending on the type of previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "15F reception period for the second modified example" occurs. In this case, even if the mode of the performance sound changes depending on the type of previous fluctuation pattern, it is desirable that the post-reception display be the same as when there was no change.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 27-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation permissible state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance change can be caused. Also, when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permissible state, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. Then, at least an "operation button 410 (specific operation unit)" is prepared as the operation unit, and at least a "12th F acceptance period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its modified example (see Figures 342 and 343)" and a "15th F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" are prepared as the operation permissible states, and then the "12th F acceptance period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its modified example (see Figures 342 and 343)" and the "15th F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" are prepared as the operation permissible states. In both "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327-331)", the mock image display can be displayed, and in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327-331)", the mock image display can be made to disappear when a certain condition is met during the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327-331)", which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension (see Figs. 329 (h) and (i)).

Moreover, in the "12th F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312) or its modified example (see Figs. 342 and 343)" of the above-mentioned performance example, the model image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "12th F reception period or its modified example" is continuing, but in the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", the model image display can be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example" is continuing. With this configuration, in the operation permitted state (reception period), both cases occur where the model image display is changed from a displayed state to a hidden state and where the model image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state, so that a sense of tension can be provided in an ideal manner.

Furthermore, in the "12th F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312) or its modified example (see Figs. 342 and 343)" and the "15th F reception period relating to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" in the above-mentioned performance example, multiple operation receptions are permitted for the "operation button 410 (specific operation unit)." When an operation is received for the "operation button 410" during the "12th F reception period or its modified example," while the "12th F reception period or its modified example" is continuing, Although the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes B of 12F (see FIG. 311, FIG. 342, etc.), when an operation is accepted for the "operation button 410" while the model image display is in a display state during the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see FIG. 327 to FIG. 331)," the post-acceptance output sound B of 15F can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes B of 15F while the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example" continues (see FIG. 327, FIG. 328, etc.). With this configuration, whether or not the post-acceptance output sound is output can suggest whether or not the model image display will be changed from a display state to a non-display state during the operation permitted state, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 during the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", there are cases where the post-15F acceptance output sound B is output as one of the above-mentioned post-15F acceptance changes B while the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example" continues (see, for example, timings to2A, to2B, to2C, etc. shown in Fig. 327) and cases where it is not output (see, for example, timing to2D, etc. shown in Fig. 327). With this configuration, even if the post-acceptance output sound is not output, there is a possibility that the mock image display will be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Note that in the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, even if an operation is received on the operation button 410 while the model image display is in a non-display state, the post-15th F reception output sound B may or may not be output as one of the post-15th F reception changes B while the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example" continues. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that there is a possibility that the model image display may change from a displayed state to a non-displayed state, even if a post-reception output sound is not output.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, during the "12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its modified example (see Figures 342 and 343)", "a specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound) is not put into a suppressed or inaudible state, or is not put into a suppressed or inaudible state before the 12th F reception period or its modified example occurs", depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 12th F reception period or its modified example occurs; however, during the "15th F reception period relating to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)", "a specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound) is put into a suppressed or inaudible state, or is not put into a suppressed or inaudible state before the 15th F reception period relating to the second modified example occurs", depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 15th F reception period relating to the second modified example occurs. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the mock image display will be hidden midway through the reception period through a specific type of sound effect (e.g., BGM sound effect) and the type of previous change pattern, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In this case, even if the type of sound effect changes depending on the type of previous change pattern, it is desirable that the display after reception be the same as when there was no change.

Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 28-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation permissible state in which operation acceptance is permitted can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation section in this operation permissible state, a change can occur after acceptance. At least the "13F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314) or its variations (see Figures 344 and 345)" and the "15F reception period related to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" are prepared as operation-permitting states, and the mock image display can be displayed in all of the "13F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314) or its variations (see Figures 344 and 345)" and the "15F reception period related to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)", and the mock image display can be made non-displayable when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the "15F reception period related to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)", so that a sense of tension can be expected to be maintained in an appropriate manner (see Figure 329). Furthermore, in the "13F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314) or its modified examples (see Figs. 344 and 345)", at least the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation unit) is prepared as an operation unit that allows multiple operation reception, and by continuing to maintain the sword decoration 5001 in an operated state, multiple operation reception can be performed, which is expected to increase interest in the game in the "13F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314) or its modified examples (see Figs. 344 and 345)".

Moreover, in the "13th F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314) or its modified examples (see Figs. 344 and 345)" of the above-mentioned performance example, the model image display is not changed from a display state to a non-display state during the continuation of the "13th F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314) or its modified examples (see Figs. 344 and 345)", but in the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", the model image display can be changed from a display state to a non-display state during the continuation of the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)". With this configuration, in the operation permitted state, there are both cases where the model image display is changed from a display state to a non-display state and cases where the model image display is not changed from a display state to a non-display state, so that it is expected that the sense of tension during the operation permitted state is appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, there is one or more operation parts that are permitted to accept multiple operations when the model image display is in a display state (here, the operation button 410), and even if the operation part is kept in an operated state, the operation is not accepted multiple times (the auto-repeated tap function is activated), but in the "13F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314) or its modified example (see Figs. 344 and 345)", there is one or more operation parts that are permitted to accept multiple operations (here, the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410), and if the operation part is kept in an operated state, the operation can be accepted multiple times (the auto-repeated tap function is activated) (here, the sword decoration 5001). With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the model image display will be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state based on whether the auto-repeated tap function is activated, so it is expected that the decline in interest in the game will be suppressed.

In particular, in the "13th F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314) or its modified example (see Figs. 344 and 345)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, there are multiple operation parts (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) that are permitted to receive operations multiple times, and if the operation parts are kept in an operated state, depending on the type of operation part that is the target of the operation (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410), there are cases where the operation is received multiple times (sword decoration 5001) and cases where the operation is not received multiple times (operation button 410). With this configuration, even if the auto-hit function is not enabled, there are cases where the model image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state, so it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In the above-mentioned example, the "sword decoration 5001" and the "operation button 410" are prepared as operation parts that allow multiple operation reception during the "13th floor reception period (see Fig. 313, Fig. 314) or its modified version (see Fig. 344, Fig. 345)" and the "17th floor reception period (see Fig. 337 to Fig. 341) or its modified version (see Fig. 349 to Fig. 351)", and the "sword decoration 5001" is set as the target for which the auto-hit function is enabled and the "operation button 410" is set as the target for which the auto-hit function is not enabled, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "sword decoration 5001" may be set as the target for which the auto-hit function is not enabled and the "operation button 410" may be set as the target for which the auto-hit function is enabled. Also, both the "sword decoration 5001" and the "operation button 410" may be set as the target for which the auto-hit function is enabled.

In the above-mentioned example, only the "operation button 410" is prepared as the operation unit that allows multiple operation reception during the "15F reception period (see Figs. 327 to 331) according to the second modified example", but an operation unit different from the "operation button 410" may be prepared as the "operation unit that allows multiple operation reception". The operation unit different from the "operation button 410" may be the "sword decoration 5001", or may be an operation unit different from the "sword decoration 5001". However, if multiple operation units are provided as operation units that allow multiple operation reception during the "15F reception period (see Figs. 327 to 331) according to the second modified example", the auto-repeated function will not be enabled for any of those operation units (even if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, multiple operation reception will not be performed).

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, there are one or more operation parts for which reception of operations is permitted multiple times even after the model image display is changed from a displayed state to a hidden state, and operations are not received multiple times even if the operation part is kept in an operated state. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that there is a high possibility that the model image display will be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state when the auto-hit function is not enabled.

Furthermore, in the "13th F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314) or its modified example (see Figures 344 and 345)" of the above-mentioned performance example, "a specific type of performance sound (BGM performance sound) is not put into a suppressed or inaudible state, or is not put into a suppressed or inaudible state before the 13th F reception period or its modified example occurs" depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 13th F reception period or its modified example occurs, but in the "15th F reception period relating to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" it may be "a specific type of performance sound is put into a suppressed or inaudible state, or is not put into a suppressed or inaudible state before the 15th F reception period relating to the second modified example occurs" depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 15th F reception period relating to the second modified example occurs. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the mock image display will be hidden midway through the reception period through a specific type of sound effect (e.g., BGM sound effect) and the type of previous change pattern, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In this case, even if the type of sound effect changes depending on the type of previous change pattern, it is desirable that the display after reception be the same as when there was no change.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 29-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible state in which acceptance of operations on the sword decoration 5001 (specified operation unit) is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the sword decoration 5001 in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. At least the "12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its variations (see Figures 342 and 343)" and the "15th F reception period related to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" are prepared as operation-permitting states, and a mock image display can be displayed in all of the "12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its variations (see Figures 342 and 343)" and the "15th F reception period related to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)", and the mock image display can be made non-displayable when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the "15th F reception period related to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)", so that it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner. In addition, an operation button 410 (specific operation unit) different from the sword decoration 5001 is prepared, and during the "12th F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312) or its modified examples (see Figs. 342 and 343)", both operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 and operation reception for the operation button 410 are permitted, and operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 can be permitted even while the post-reception display UB corresponding to operation reception for the operation button 410 is displayed, so that it is expected to increase interest in the game during the "12th F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312) or its modified examples (see Figs. 342 and 343)".

Moreover, in the "12th F reception period (see Figs. 311 and 312) or its modified examples (see Figs. 342 and 343)" of the above-mentioned performance example, the model image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "12th F reception period or its modified examples" is continuing, but in the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)," the model image display can be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example" is continuing. With this configuration, in the operation permitted state, there are both cases where the model image display is changed from a displayed state to a hidden state and cases where the model image display is not changed from a displayed state to a hidden state, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when in the operation permitted state is appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, both operation reception for the sword decorative body 5001 and operation reception for the operation button 410 are acceptable, and operation reception for the sword decorative body 5001 is acceptable even while the 15F post-reception display UB in response to the operation reception for the operation button 410 is displayed, and when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed, this is used as a trigger to make the 15F post-reception display UB invisible and to start displaying the 15F post-reception display UA in response to the operation reception for the sword decorative body 5001 (see, for example, timing to2E shown in Figure 327). In contrast to this, in the "12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its modified examples (see Figures 342 and 343)", both the reception of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 and the reception of operations for the operation button 410 are permitted, and the reception of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted even while the 12th F post-reception display UB in response to the reception of operations for the operation button 410 is displayed. When an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 while the 12th F post-reception display UB is displayed, this is used as a trigger to start displaying the 15th F post-reception display UA in response to the reception of operations for the sword decorative body 5001, without hiding the 12th F post-reception display UB. With this configuration, in the operation permitted state, when an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 while the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to the operation received for the operation button 410, this will trigger either a case where the 15th F post-reception display UB is hidden or a case where it is not hidden, which is expected to provide an ideal sense of tension when performing an operation on the sword ornament 5001.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, even while the model image display is in a hidden state, both the reception of operations for the sword decoration 5001 and the reception of operations for the operation button 410 are permitted, and the reception of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted even while the 15F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception for the operation button 410 is displayed. When an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed, this triggers the display of the 15F post-reception display UA to begin and the 15F post-reception display UB to be made invisible (see timing to2e shown in Fig. 328). With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the reception of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is in an appropriate situation even while the model image display is in a hidden state.

Furthermore, in the "15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, when an operation is received on the operation button 410, this triggers the display UB after reception of 15F to be displayed and the output sound B after reception of 15F to be audibly output. If an operation is received on the sword decoration 5001 while the display UB after reception of 15F is displayed and the output sound B after reception of 15F is being audibly output, this triggers the display of the "display UB after reception of 15F" that is displayed to be hidden, but the audible "output sound B after reception of 15F" may continue without terminating. In other words, in this case, it becomes unclear whether the operation on the "sword decoration 5001" has been properly received, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment ([Configuration 30-F]), an operation allowable state in which operation acceptance is allowed can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation allowable state, a change can occur after acceptance, and at least a "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (specific operation allowable state)" and a "14F acceptance period (special operation allowable state)" are prepared as operation allowable states. Then, in the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", a model image display can be displayed, but in the "14F acceptance period (see Figs. 315 to 318)", the model image display can be made invisible when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)", so that it can be expected that the sense of tension in the "15F acceptance period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" can be maintained in an appropriate manner. Furthermore, during the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", at least the sword decoration 5001 is provided as an operation part that allows multiple operations to be accepted, and by continuing to maintain the sword decoration 5001 in an operated state, multiple operations can be accepted. This is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game when the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" occurs, during which the model image display cannot be displayed.

Moreover, in the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, the mock image display can be changed from a displayed state to a hidden state while the "15th floor reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)" is continuing, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period for the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned performance example, there is one or more operation parts (here, operation button 410) that are permitted to receive multiple operations when the imitation image display is in a displayed state, and operations are not accepted multiple times (auto-repeated function is enabled) even if the operation part is kept in an operated state. In contrast, in the "14th F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)" there is one or more operation parts (here, sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) that are permitted to receive multiple operations when the imitation image display is in a hidden state, and operations are accepted multiple times if the operation part is kept in an operated state (here, when sword decoration 5001 is kept in an operated state). With this configuration, during the "15th F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)," the auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled during the "section in which the model image display is displayed (see timings to2 to toY shown in Figure 329)," whereas the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled during the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)," in which the model image display is not displayed, and this is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing due to the model image display not being displayed.

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned performance example, there are multiple operation parts (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) that are permitted to receive multiple operations while no mock image is being displayed, and there are cases where multiple operations are received when the operation part is kept in an operated state (sword decoration 5001) and cases where multiple operations are not received even when the operation part is kept in an operated state (operation button 410), so it is expected that the sense of tension when operating the operation parts will be appropriately maintained.

In particular, in the "14th F reception period" according to the above-mentioned example, as shown in FIG. 315, there are multiple operation parts that allow multiple operation receptions while the model image is not displayed, and if the operation parts are kept operated, depending on the type of operation part that is the target of the operation (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410), there are cases where the operation is received multiple times (sword decoration 5001) and cases where the operation is not received multiple times (operation button 410). In other words, in this case, when the "14th F reception period" occurs, whether or not the auto-repeated function is enabled is determined depending on the type of operation target, so it is expected that the fun of choosing which operation part to operate will be added.

In the above-mentioned example, the "sword decoration 5001" and the "operation button 410" are prepared as operation parts that allow multiple operation reception during the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", and the "sword decoration 5001" is set as the target for which the auto-hit function is enabled, and the "operation button 410" is set as the target for which the auto-hit function is not enabled, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "sword decoration 5001" may be set as the target for which the auto-hit function is not enabled, and the "operation button 410" may be set as the target for which the auto-hit function is enabled. Also, both the "sword decoration 5001" and the "operation button 410" may be set as the target for which the auto-hit function is enabled.

In the above-mentioned example, only the "operation button 410" is prepared as the operation unit that allows multiple operation reception during the "15F reception period (see Figs. 327 to 331) according to the second modified example", but an operation unit different from the "operation button 410" may be prepared as the "operation unit that allows multiple operation reception". The operation unit different from the "operation button 410" may be the "sword decoration 5001", or may be an operation unit different from the "sword decoration 5001". However, if multiple operation units are provided as operation units that allow multiple operation reception during the "15F reception period (see Figs. 327 to 331) according to the second modified example", the auto-repeated function will not be enabled for any of those operation units (even if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, multiple operation reception will not be performed).

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see Figs. 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned performance example, "a specific type of performance sound (BGM performance sound) is not suppressed or inaudible before the 14th F reception period occurs, or is not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the 14th F reception period occurs, but in the "15th F reception period (see Figs. 319 to 321)", "the 15th F reception period according to the first modification (see Figs. 322 to 326)", or "the 15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figs. 327 to 331)", "a specific type of performance sound is suppressed or inaudible before the reception period occurs, or is not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the reception period occurs. In this case, even if the mode of the performance sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable to make the post-reception display the same as when it did not change.

Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 31-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a model image display that models the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation unit). In this regard, it is possible to generate a "non-display operation permitted state" that includes a "non-display operation section" in which operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted while the model image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in the "non-display operation permitted state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display UA. In addition, it is possible to display a background image display that is displayed even in a situation in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed, and is displayed so as to be visible behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. In this regard, in the above-mentioned "non-display operation permitted state", since there are at least cases in which background switching occurs over time while the state in which operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted continues (for example, see FIG. 324, etc.), it is expected to improve the interest in playing when in the "non-display operation permitted state".

Moreover, in the "hidden operation permitted state" of the above-mentioned performance example, depending on the time that has passed since the occurrence of the "hidden operation permitted state", there are cases where background switching occurs within the "hidden operation permitted state" and cases where background switching does not occur. In other words, in the above-mentioned performance example, when background switching occurs over time while the "hidden operation permitted state" continues to be in a state where operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted (for example, "the 15th F acceptance period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)"), as shown in Fig. 324, while the "hidden operation permitted state" continues, the "hidden operation section (timing to2 to toX)" ends and the model image display is displayed, and the state transitions to the "display operation section (timing toX to to3)" in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted. In other words, in this case, the above-mentioned "hidden operation permitted state" should be more accurately referred to as a "hidden section inclusive permitted state".

In contrast, if the background does not change while the state in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is acceptable continues in the "non-display operation acceptance state (non-display section inclusive acceptance state)", the above-mentioned "non-display operation section" continues without ending until the "non-display operation acceptance state (non-display section inclusive acceptance state)" ends (for example, in the 14th F acceptance period (see Figures 315 to 318) and in the "non-display operation acceptance state (non-display section inclusive acceptance state)" continues and the above-mentioned "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX)" ends and the "display operation section (timing In this case, the game may transition to "tpX-tp3" (for example, the 16th reception period (see Figs. 332-336) or its modified form (see Figs. 346-348)). With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not a "display operation section" will appear in the "non-display section inclusion permitted state" by whether or not the background will be switched, which is expected to increase interest in the game. Even if the background is not switched, the possibility of the "display operation section" appearing remains, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the "non-display operation allowable period" of the above-mentioned presentation example, if the background changes over time while the state in which operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted continues (for example, "the 15th F acceptance period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)"), the non-display operation section (timings to2 to toX) ends when the background changes, and a transition is made to the display operation section (timings toX to to3) in which operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted while the model image display is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest through the background change that the state in which operation acceptance was permitted was already in place from within the section prior to the timing in which the background was changed, and it is expected that the player will become accustomed to the "operation presentation in a state of secrecy" and that a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed.

In addition, when the background does not change while a state in which acceptance of operations to the sword ornament 5001 is permitted continues during the "non-hidden operation permissible period" in the above-mentioned performance example, the case in which the non-hidden operation section continues without ending partway through the "non-hidden operation permissible period" and the case in which the non-hidden operation section ends and transitions to the displayed operation section occur are types of non-hidden operation permissible periods with different occurrence conditions and post-acceptance displays (for example, the "14th F acceptance period (see Figures 315 to 318)" as the second non-hidden operation permissible period, and the "16th F acceptance period (see Figures 332 to 336) or a modified version thereof (see Figures 346 to 348)" as the third non-hidden operation permissible period). Furthermore, if a background change occurs during the "non-display operation allowable period" in the above-mentioned example while the state in which operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted continues, it is set to a non-display operation allowable period of a different type from any of the above types (the "15F acceptance period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" as the first non-display operation allowable period).

As another method for changing to a different background image, the different background image may be displayed behind the already displayed background image (back layer) in a hidden (unseen) form, and the previously hidden background image may be revealed by erasing the already displayed background image.

Furthermore, in the "non-display operation allowable period" of the above-mentioned performance example, when a background change occurs while a state in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted continues (for example, the "15th F acceptance period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)"), the second background image HK2 can be displayed in the non-display operation section (timings to2 to toX) and the first background image HK1 can be displayed in the display operation section (timings toX to to3) (see Figure 324, etc.), and operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 in the non-display operation section (timings to2 to toX). This operation acceptance triggers a background change (timing to2E shown in FIG. 322), but if an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in the display operation section (timings toX to to3), this operation acceptance triggers no background change (timing to2e shown in FIG. 323, when the third background image HK3 is prepared as the same background image as the first background image HK1), which improves the presentation when the user realizes that operation acceptance is permitted in the non-display operation section (timings to2 to toX) and the operation is successfully accepted.

However, even if the third background image HK3 is realized as the same background image as the first background image HK1, the first background image HK1 and the third background image HK3 may have different display modes (brightness, color scheme, etc.). This is because if the mode remains within the range of "using the background image that was displayed until then and changing it," it cannot be said that "the background image has been replaced with a different background image (data)."

In contrast to this, in the "16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336) and its modified examples (see Figures 346 to 348)", even if an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 in either the non-display operation section or the display operation section, there is no background change triggered by this, and in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", there is no background change triggered by the reception of an operation for the sword decorative body 5001, so it is expected that the sense of tension when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 in the non-display operation section or the display operation section will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 32-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a replica image display modeled after the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation unit), and it is possible to generate a "non-display operation permitted state" that includes a "non-display operation section" in which acceptance of operations on the sword decoration 5001 is permitted while the replica image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted on the sword decoration 5001 in the "non-display operation permitted state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display. Also, it is possible to display a background image display that is displayed even in a situation in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed, and that is displayed so as to be visible behind the post-acceptance display when the post-acceptance display is displayed. In this regard, at least the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first non-display operation permitted state)" and the "16F reception period or a modified example thereof (second non-display operation permitted state)" are prepared as the "non-display operation permitted state", and during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)", the background can be switched over time while the state in which reception of operations to the sword decoration 5001 is permitted continues, which is expected to increase interest in the game in the "non-display operation permitted state".

Moreover, in the "16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336) or its modified example (see Figures 346 to 348)" of the above-mentioned performance example, background switching does not occur while the state in which reception of operations to the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable continues, and both the "15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" and the "16th F reception period or its modified example" include a display operation section in which reception of operations to the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable while the above-mentioned model image display is displayed. That is, in the "15F reception period according to the first modification", when the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to toX)" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to toX)" ends and transitions to the "display operation section (timing toX to to3)" while the "15F reception period according to the first modification (see FIG. 322 to FIG. 326)" continues, and in the "16F reception period or its modification", when the "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX)" continues for a second time shorter than the first time, the "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX)" ends and transitions to the "display operation section (timing tpX to tp3)" while the "16F reception period or its modification" continues. That is, in this case, the "non-display operation permitted state" should be more accurately called a "non-display section inclusion permitted state". With this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first non-display section inclusion permitted state)" and the "16F reception period or its modified example (second non-display section inclusion permitted state)," so it is expected that the tension in the "non-display operation permitted state" will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, since these non-display operation permitted states can be indicated by the presence or absence of background switching, it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be favorably suppressed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the "15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001, there are at least some cases where the background changes as a result of the operation reception. In contrast, in the "16th F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336) or its modified example (see Figs. 346 to 348)" of the above-mentioned presentation example, even if an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 in either the non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX) or the display operation section (timing tpX to tp3), this does not cause a background change, so it can be expected that the game hand raising during the "non-display section inclusion permitted state" will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)", the image display simulating the sword decoration 5001 can only be displayed in one form (a predetermined form) after the non-display operation section (timings to2 to toX) has continued for a first hour. In contrast, in the "16th F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336) or its modified example (see Figs. 346 to 348)", the image display simulating the sword decoration 5001 can be displayed in one of multiple forms (e.g., multiple color schemes with different degrees of expectation) after the non-display operation section (timings tp2 to tpX) has continued for a second hour that is shorter than the first hour, so that the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained as the second hour passes.

When the specific color scheme is the "lowest expectation mode" among the above-mentioned "multiple modes (multiple color schemes)," it is desirable to use the specific color scheme as one mode (predetermined mode) used in the "15th floor reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)." In other words, in this case, it is expected that the decline in interest in the game will be suppressed when a model image display is displayed with the specific color scheme.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, a "14th F reception period (3rd non-display operation allowable period)" is further prepared as a "non-display operation allowable period", and this "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" does not include a display operation section in which the sword decoration 5001 is in an allowable state of operation reception while the model image display of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and background switching does not occur over time while the state in which operation reception of the sword decoration 5001 is allowable continues. In other words, in this case, when a non-display operation section appears and a background switching does not occur, there is a case where the section then transitions to a display operation section, or the reception period ends without transitioning to a display operation section, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the "16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336) or its modified example (see Figs. 346 to 348)" of the above-mentioned performance example, "a specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound) is not suppressed or inaudible before the 16F reception period or its modified example occurs, or is not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 16F reception period or its modified example occurs, but in the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)," "a specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound) is suppressed or inaudible before the 15F reception period according to the first modified example occurs, or is not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 15F reception period according to the first modified example occurs. In this case, even if the mode of the performance sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, it is desirable to make the post-reception display the same as when it did not change.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 33-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a model image display that models the sword decoration 5001, and to generate a "non-display operation permitted state" that includes a "non-display operation section" in which operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted while the model image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in the "non-display operation permitted state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display UA, and to display a premonition display that suggests in advance that operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 will be permitted. In this regard, in the "non-display operation permitted state", the premonition display may not be displayed when the "non-display operation permitted state" occurs, so that it is possible to provide a sense of tension when the non-display operation permitted state occurs.

Moreover, in the "non-display operation permitted state" of the above-mentioned performance example, there are cases where it includes both a "non-display operation section" in which an imitation image display of the sword decorative body 5001 is not displayed and operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, and a "display operation section" in which an imitation image display of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed and operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, and cases where it does not include a "display operation section" but does include a "non-display operation section." And when the "non-display operation permitted state" does not include a "display operation section" but does include a "non-display operation section" (14th F acceptance period (see Figures 315 to 318)), the premonition display is not displayed when the "non-display operation permitted state" occurs. In contrast, when the "non-display operation permitted state" includes a "non-display operation section" and a "display operation section" (such as the 15F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) according to the first modified example or the 15F reception period (see Figs. 327 to 331) according to the second modified example, the 16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), the 17F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341) or modified examples thereof (Figs. 346 to 351)), the precursor effect display is displayed when the "non-display operation permitted state" occurs (the 16F reception period, the 17F reception period or modified examples thereof) and the precursor effect display is not displayed (the 15F reception period according to the first modified example or the 15F reception period according to the second modified example). That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permitted state" should be more accurately referred to as a "non-display section inclusion permitted state". According to this configuration, when the "14th F reception period (non-display section inclusive permitted state)" that does not include the "display operation section" occurs, the premonition effect display is not executed, so that it is possible to appropriately maintain the secrecy of the state in which operation reception is permitted from the player. On the other hand, when the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example or the 15th F reception period according to the second modified example, the 16th F reception period, the 17th F reception period, or modified examples thereof (non-display section inclusive permitted state)" that includes the "display operation section" occurs, there are both cases where the premonition effect display is executed and where the premonition effect display is not executed, so that the performance level regarding the secrecy of the state in which operation reception is permitted from the player is made diverse, and it is expected that a performance that is as if it were training to easily notice the highly secret "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section inclusive permitted state)" even for beginners is provided in a natural way.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance examples, the non-display operation allowable period which includes both a non-display operation section and a display operation section and in which a premonition display display is displayed (the 16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), the 17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341) or their modified examples (Figures 346 to 351)) and the non-display operation allowable period which includes both a non-display operation section and a display operation section and in which a premonition display display is not displayed (the 15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326) or the 15th F reception period for the second modified example (see Figures 327 to 331)) are operation allowable periods (reception periods) of different types in terms of occurrence conditions and post-reception display UA, and further, the non-display operation allowable period which does not include a display operation section but includes a non-display operation section (the 14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)) is provided as an operation allowable period (reception period) of a different type from any of the above types. Therefore, even if a "non-display operation section" appears, the type of operation permitted period (acceptance period) can be suggested through the presentation elements of whether or not a premonition display is shown and whether or not a "display operation section" exists.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, when a premonition display is executed when the non-display operation allowable period occurs during the "non-display operation allowable period" that includes the "non-display operation section" and the "display operation section" (such as the 16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), the 17F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341), or their modified versions (Figs. 346 to 351)), it is desirable that the time of the non-display operation section is shorter than when the premonition display is not executed (the 15F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) in the first modified version, or the 15F reception period (see Figs. 327 to 331) in the second modified version). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when there is a delay in recognizing that the "operation reception is permitted state" has been entered due to the premonition display not being executed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned presentation example, it is possible to generate a "display operation allowable period (for example, the 12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its modified examples (see Figures 342 and 343), or the 13th F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314) or its modified examples (see Figures 344 and 345))" which does not include a "non-display operation section" but does include a "display operation section", and when the display operation allowable period occurs, a premonition display can be displayed (see Figures 285 and 290, etc.). In other words, in this case, when the premonition display is displayed, there is a possibility that a "non-display operation section" will not be included, which can increase the interest in the game.

However, if a "display operation allowable period" occurs that does not include a "non-display operation section" but does include a "display operation section," it is not necessary for the premonition display to be displayed when that period occurs, and it may be possible for the premonition display to be displayed and not to be displayed.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 34-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a replica image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001, and it is possible to generate a "non-display operation permissible state" that includes a "non-display operation section" in which acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permissible while the replica image display is not being displayed, and when an operation is accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 in the "non-display operation permissible state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display UA, and it is possible to display a premonition display that suggests in advance that acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 will be permissible. As the "non-hidden operation permitted state", at least the "first non-hidden operation permitted state (the 15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326) or the 15F reception period according to the second modified example (see Figs. 327 to 331))" and the "second non-hidden operation permitted state (the 16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), the 17F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341) or modified examples thereof (Figs. 346 to 351)) are prepared, and in the "first non-hidden operation permitted state (the 15F reception period according to the first modified example or the 15F reception period according to the second modified example)", the premonition display is not displayed when the "first non-hidden operation permitted state" occurs, so that it is possible to provide a suitable sense of tension when the "non-hidden operation permitted state" occurs.

Moreover, in the "second non-display operation permitted state (16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), 17F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341) or modified versions thereof (Figs. 346 to 351))" of the above-mentioned performance example, a premonition display is displayed when the "second non-display operation permitted state (16F reception period, 17F reception period or modified version thereof)" occurs, and a premonition display is displayed when the "first non-display operation permitted state (15F reception period for the first modified version (see Figs. 322 to 326))" and the "second non-display operation permitted state (16F reception period, 17F reception period or modified version thereof)" occur. ") includes a "display operation section" in which an imitation image display of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, and in the "first non-display operation permitted state (15F reception period according to the first modified example)", when the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to toY)" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to toY)" ends while the "first non-display operation permitted state (15F reception period according to the first modified example)" continues, and a transition is made to a "display operation section (timing toY to to3)". In the "second non-display operation permitted state", when the "non-display operation section" continues for a second time period shorter than the first time period, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "second non-display operation permitted state (16F reception period, 17F reception period, or a modified version thereof)" continues, and transitions to the "display operation section". That is, in this case, the "non-display operation permitted state" should be more accurately called a "non-display section inclusion permitted state". With this configuration, the "first non-display section inclusion permitted state (15F reception period according to the first modified version)" is completed. Since the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "second non-display section inclusion permitted state (16F reception period, 17F reception period, or a variation thereof)" and the "second non-display section inclusion permitted state (16F reception period, 17F reception period, or a variation thereof)," it is expected that the sense of tension when in the "non-display operation permitted state (non-display section inclusion permitted state)" will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, since these non-display operation permitted states (non-display section inclusion permitted states) can be indicated by the presence or absence of the execution of the premonition display, it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be favorably suppressed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, during the 15F reception period (see Fig. 322 to Fig. 326) according to the first modified example, the image display imitating the sword decoration 5001 can be displayed only in one form (predetermined form) after the non-display operation section (timing to2 to toX) has continued for a first time. In contrast, during the 16F reception period (see Fig. 332 to Fig. 336) or the 17F reception period (see Fig. 337 to Fig. 341) or their modified examples (Fig. 346 to Fig. 351), the image display imitating the sword decoration 5001 can be displayed in one of multiple forms (for example, multiple color schemes with different expectations) after the non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX, timing tq2 to tqX) has continued for a second time shorter than the first time, so that the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained as the second time passes.

When the specific color scheme is the "lowest expectation mode" among the above-mentioned "multiple modes (multiple color schemes)," it is desirable to use the specific color scheme as one mode (predetermined mode) used in the "15th floor reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)." In other words, in this case, it is expected that the decline in interest in the game will be suppressed when a model image display is displayed with the specific color scheme.

In the above-mentioned performance example, in the 15F reception period (first non-display operation allowable period) according to the first modified example, operation reception is allowed for multiple operation parts including the sword decoration 5001, and multiple operation reception is allowed for at least one operation part (operation button 410) among the multiple operation parts, so that even if the operation part (operation button 410) for which multiple operation reception is allowed is kept in an operated state, operation reception is not performed multiple times. In contrast, in the 17F reception period or its modified example (second non-display operation allowable period), operation reception is allowed for multiple operation parts including the sword decoration 5001, and multiple operation reception is allowed for at least one operation part (here, the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410) among the multiple operation parts, so that if the operation part for which multiple operation reception is allowed is kept in an operated state, operation reception can be performed multiple times (when the sword decoration 5001 is kept in an operated state). With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the auto-hit function will be activated depending on whether or not a premonition display has been performed, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the 17F reception period or its variant (second non-display operation allowable period) of the above-mentioned performance example, there are multiple operation parts that are allowable to receive operations multiple times (here, the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410), and if these operation parts are kept operated, depending on the type of operation part that is the target of the operation (the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410), there are cases where the operation is received multiple times (the sword decoration 5001) and cases where the operation is not received multiple times (the operation button 410), which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the "17th F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341) or its modified examples (Figs. 349 to 351)" of the above-mentioned performance example, "a specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound) is not suppressed or inaudible before the 17th F reception period or its modified examples occurs, or is not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 17th F reception period or its modified examples occurs, but in the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)," "a specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM performance sound) is suppressed or inaudible before the 15th F reception period according to the first modified example occurs, or is not suppressed or inaudible" according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 15th F reception period according to the first modified example occurs. In this case, even if the mode of the performance sound changes according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, it is desirable to make the post-reception display the same as when it did not change.

Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment ([Configuration 35-F]), it is possible to execute a model image display of the sword decoration 5001, and to generate a "non-display operation permitted state" including a non-display operation section in which operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted while the model image display is not displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in the "non-display operation permitted state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display UA, and it is possible to output an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 has entered an acceptable state, or that the operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 has entered an acceptable state. In this regard, in the "non-display operation permitted state", the acceptance acceptance sound may not be output when the "non-display operation permitted state" occurs, so that it is possible to provide a suitable sense of tension when the "non-display operation permitted state" occurs.

Moreover, in the "non-display operation permitted state" of the above-mentioned performance example, there are cases where it includes both a "non-display operation section" in which an imitation image display of the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed and operations can be accepted for the sword decoration 5001, and a "display operation section" in which an imitation image display of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed and operations can be accepted for the sword decoration 5001 (such as the 15th F reception period (see Figures 322 to 326) in the first modified example, the 16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), the 17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341) or modified examples thereof (Figures 346 to 351)), and cases where it does not include a "display operation section" but does include a "non-display operation section" (such as the 14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)). In addition, when the "non-display operation allowable state" does not include the "display operation section" but includes the "non-display operation section" (14th F reception period), the reception allowable sound is not output when the "non-display operation allowable state" occurs, and when the "non-display operation allowable state" includes the "non-display operation section" and the "display operation section", the reception allowable sound is output when the "non-display operation allowable state" occurs (16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, or modified versions thereof) and the reception allowable sound is not output (15th F reception period according to the first modified version). That is, in this case, the "non-display operation allowable state" should be more accurately called the "non-display section inclusion allowable state". According to this configuration, when the "14th F reception period (non-display section inclusion allowable state)" that does not include the "display operation section" occurs, the reception allowable sound is not output, so that the secrecy of the state in which operation reception is allowed from the player can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the "15F reception period, 16F reception period, 17F reception period or a modification thereof (non-display interval inclusive permissible state) according to the first modified example" which includes a "display operation interval" occurs, the reception permissible sound may or may not be output, providing a variety of levels of secrecy to the player as to the state in which operation reception is permitted. This is expected to provide a natural presentation that is like training to help even beginners easily notice the highly confidential "non-display operation permissible state (non-display interval inclusive permissible state)."

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, the non-display operation allowable period which includes both a "non-display operation section" and a "display operation section" and in which a reception allowable sound is output (the 16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), the 17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341) or variations thereof (Figures 346 to 351)), and the non-display operation allowable period which includes both a "non-display operation section" and a "display operation section" and in which a reception allowable sound is not output (the 15th F reception period (see Figures 322 to 326)) are non-display operation allowable periods of different types (first non-display operation allowable period, second non-display operation allowable period) in which the post-reception display UA according to the occurrence condition and the operation reception on the sword ornamental body 5001 is different, and the non-display operation allowable period which does not include a "display operation section" but includes a "non-display operation section" (the 14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)) is further provided as a third non-display operation allowable period of a different type from any of the above types. Therefore, even if a "non-display operation section" appears, it will be possible to suggest the type of operation permitted period (reception period) through the presentation elements of whether or not there is a reception permission sound and whether or not there is a "display operation section."

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, when an operation allowance period in which a reception allowance sound is output when the non-display operation allowance period occurs (the 16th F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), the 17th F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341), or their modified examples (Figs. 346 to 351)) occurs among the non-display operation allowance periods that include a "non-display operation section" and a "display operation section", the time of the "non-display operation section" is made shorter than that of the 15th F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) in the first modified example in which the reception allowance sound is not output (the time from timing to2 to toX). In other words, in this case, when the reception allowance sound is output, the secrecy regarding the operation is released relatively early, so that it is expected that a performance that is as if it were training to make it easier for even beginners to notice the highly secret "non-display operation allowance state (non-display section included allowance state)" is provided in a natural way.

In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 36-F]) according to this embodiment is capable of executing a replica image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001 (predetermined operation unit), and is capable of generating a "non-display operation permitted state" including a "non-display operation section" in which acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted while the replica image display is not being displayed, and when an operation is accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 in the "non-display operation permitted state," a post-acceptance display UA can be displayed. Also, it is capable of outputting an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 has become permitted, or that acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 has become permitted. As the "non-display operation permitted state", at least the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first non-display operation permitted state)" and the "17F reception period or a modified example thereof (second non-display operation permitted state)" are prepared, and during the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)", the reception permitted sound corresponding to the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" is not output, which makes it possible to provide an ideal sense of tension when the "non-display operation permitted state" occurs.

Moreover, in the "17F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341) or its modified examples (see Figs. 349 to 351)", a reception permission sound corresponding to the "17F reception period or its modified examples" can be output, and both the "15F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) in the first modified example" and the "17F reception period or its modified examples" include a "display operation section" in which the sword ornament 5001 is displayed and the sword ornament 5001 is in a state in which reception of operations thereon is permitted, and in the "15F reception period in the first modified example", a "non-display operation section (timings to2 to toX When the "non-display operation section (timings to2 to toX)" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section (timings toX to to3)" ends while the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" continues, and transitions to the "display operation section (timings toX to to3)"; and when the "non-display operation section (timings tq2 to tqX)" continues for a second time shorter than the first time in the "17F reception period or modified example", the "non-display operation section (timings tp2 to tpX)" ends while the "17F reception period or modified example" continues, and transitions to the "display operation section (timings tqX to tq3)". That is, in this case, the "non-display operation permitted state" should be more accurately called a "non-display section inclusion permitted state". With this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first non-display section inclusive permitted state)" and the "17F reception period or its modified example (second non-display section inclusive permitted state)," so it is expected that the tension in the "non-display operation permitted state" will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, since these non-display operation permitted states can be indicated by the presence or absence of the output of the reception permitted sound, it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be favorably suppressed.

Furthermore, in the "15th floor reception period for the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned performance example, reception of operations is permitted for multiple operation parts including the sword decoration 5001, and reception of operations multiple times is permitted for at least one operation part (operation button 410) among the multiple operation parts. Even if the operation part (operation button 410) for which reception of operations multiple times is permitted is kept in an operated state, the operation will not be received multiple times (although the auto-repeated function is not enabled), but in the "17th floor reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326)," reception of operations is permitted for multiple operation parts including the sword decoration 5001, and reception of operations multiple times is permitted for at least one operation part (operation button 410) among the multiple operation parts. In the "Acceptance Period (see Figs. 337-341) or its modified examples (see Figs. 349-351)," acceptance of operations is permitted for multiple operation parts including the sword decoration 5001, and acceptance of operations multiple times is permitted for at least one of the multiple operation parts (here, the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410), and when the operation part for which acceptance of operations multiple times is permitted is kept in an operated state, the operation can be accepted multiple times (when the sword decoration 5001 is kept in an operated state). With this configuration, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility that the auto-repeated-hit function will be enabled depending on whether or not an acceptance permission sound has been audibly output, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the 17F reception period or its variant (second non-display operation allowable period) of the above-mentioned performance example, there are multiple operation parts that are allowable to receive operations multiple times (here, the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410), and if these operation parts are kept in an operated state, depending on the type of operation part that is the target of the operation (the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410), there are cases where the operation is received multiple times (the sword decoration 5001) and cases where the operation is not received multiple times (the operation button 410), which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, a 14th F reception period (third non-display operation allowable period) is further provided as a non-display operation allowable period, and this 14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318) does not include a display operation section in which an imitation image display of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed and operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is allowable, and therefore the acceptance allowable sound is not output. However, even during the 14F reception period (third non-display operation allowable period), there are multiple operation parts that allow multiple operation reception (here, the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410), and if these operation parts are kept in an operated state, depending on the type of operation part that is the target of the operation (the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410), there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times (the sword decoration 5001) and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times (the operation button 410). This makes it possible to suggest the possibility that the auto-repeated function may be enabled even when the acceptance allowance sound is not audibly output, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 37-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute an imitation image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001, and while the imitation image display is being displayed, it is possible to generate a "display operation permissible state" which includes a "display operation section" in which acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permissible, and when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted in this "display operation permissible state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display UA. As the "display operation permitted state", at least the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first display operation permitted state)" and the "16F reception period, 17F reception period, or modified examples thereof (second display operation permitted state)" are prepared, and in the "16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), 17F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341), or modified examples thereof (Figs. 346 to 351)", the model image display of the sword ornament 5001 can be displayed in one of multiple display modes, which makes it possible to provide an ideal sense of tension when the "display operation permitted state" occurs.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 37-F" is adopted, during the "15F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)", the model image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001 can only be displayed in one display mode, and the "15F reception period for the first modified example" and the "16F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), the 17F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341), or their modified examples (Figures 346 to 351)" all include a "non-display operation section" in which the model image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001 is not displayed and operation reception for the sword decorative body 5001 is acceptable, and during the "15F reception period for the first modified example", the "non-display operation section (timings to2 to toX)" continues for a first hour. When the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to toX)" is terminated and shifted to the "display operation section (timing toX to to3)" while the "15F reception period according to the first modification" continues, and when the "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX or timing tq2 to tqX)" continues for a second time shorter than the first time in the "16F reception period, 17F reception period, or a modification thereof", the "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX or timing tq2 to tqX)" is terminated and shifted to the "display operation section (timing tpX to tp3 or timing tqX to tq3)" while the "16F reception period, 17F reception period, or a modification thereof" continues. That is, in this case, the "display operation permitted state" should be more accurately called a "display section inclusion permitted state". With this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first display section inclusive permitted state)" and the "16F reception period, 17F reception period, or modified examples thereof (second display section inclusive permitted state)," so it is expected that the sense of tension when in the "display operation permitted state" will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, these display operation permitted states can be suggested through the display mode of the model image display that imitates the sword decoration 5001, so it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be favorably suppressed.

In the above-mentioned example, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)" in which the "non-display operation period" is set to be relatively long, the "display operation period" may also be set to be longer than that in the "16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, or modified examples thereof."

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 38-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute an imitation image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001 (predetermined operation unit), and it is possible to generate a "non-display section inclusion allowance state" that includes a "non-display operation section" in which acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is acceptable while the imitation image display is not being displayed, and when an operation is accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 in the "non-display section inclusion allowance state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display UA. As the "non-display section inclusion permitted state", at least the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first non-display section inclusion permitted state)" and the "16F reception period, 17F reception period, or modified versions thereof (second non-display section inclusion permitted state)" are prepared, and the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first display operation permitted state)" and the "16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), 17F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341), or modified versions thereof (Figs. 346 to 351)" all include both the "display operation section" in which an imitation image display of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed and operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted, and the "non-display operation section", so that it is possible to provide a sense of tension when the "non-display section inclusion permitted state" occurs.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned example performance, an operation button 410 (specific operation unit) different from the sword decoration 5001 is further prepared, and during the "15F reception period of the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)" and the "16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), 17F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341), or modified versions thereof (Figs. 346 to 351)", both the reception of operations to the sword decoration 5001 and the reception of operations to the operation button 410 are permitted. With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension during the "15F reception period of the first modified example", "the 16F reception period, the 17F reception period, or modified versions thereof" will be more appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, in the "15th F reception period for the first modified example (see Figures 322 to 326)", if the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to toX)" continues for the first hour, the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to toX)" can end while the "15th F reception period for the first modified example" is continuing, and a transition can be made to the "display operation section (timing toX to to3)", and if an operation is received on the operation button 410 in the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to toX)", this can be used as a trigger to output post-reception output sound B (see Figures 322 (k) and 323 (k) etc.). In contrast to this, in the "16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336), the 17F reception period (see Figs. 337 to 341) or their modified examples (Figs. 346 to 351)", if the "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX or timing tq2 to tqX)" continues for a second time period shorter than the first time period, the "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX or timing tq2 to tqX)" ends while the "16F reception period, the 17F reception period, or their modified examples" is continuing, and a transition to the "display operation section (timing tpX to tp3 or timing tqX to tq3)" is possible, and when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 in the "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX or timing tq2 to tqX)", this is used as a trigger to prevent the post-acceptance output sound from being output. According to this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "15F reception period according to the first modified example" and the "16F reception period, 17F reception period, or modified examples thereof," so it is expected that the tension when in the "non-display section inclusion permitted state" will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, these non-display section inclusion permitted states can be indicated by the presence or absence of a post-acceptance output sound when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410 in the "non-display operation section," so it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be favorably suppressed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned presentation example, in the "15th F reception period (see Fig. 322 to Fig. 326) according to the first modified example," even if an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the display operation section (timing to2 to toX), the post-acceptance output sound B can be output (see Fig. 323 (k) and the like), and in the "16th F reception period (see Fig. 332 to Fig. 336), the 17th F reception period (see Fig. 337 to Fig. 341), or modified examples thereof (Fig. 346 to Fig. 351)," even if an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the display operation section (timing tpX to tp3 or timing tqX to tq3), the post-acceptance output sound is not output. That is, in this case, the non-display section inclusion allowance state can be indicated by the presence or absence of the post-acceptance output sound when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the "display operation section," and thus it is expected that the decline in interest in the game can be appropriately suppressed.

As mentioned above, during the 15F reception period (see Figs. 319 to 321) and its modified examples (Figs. 322 to 331), when an operation is received on the operation button 410, this may trigger the output of the 15F post-reception output sound B, or the output sound B may not be output after the 15F is received. However, it goes without saying that this is not due to the occurrence of some abnormal condition, but rather is a phenomenon that occurs when no abnormal condition is occurring.

In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 39-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute an imitation image display modeled after the sword decorative body 5001 (predetermined operation section), and it is possible to generate a "non-display operation permitted state" that includes a "non-display operation section" in which it is permissible to accept operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the imitation image display is not being displayed, and when an operation is accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 in the "non-display operation permitted state", it is possible to display a post-acceptance display UA. As the "non-display operation permitted state", at least the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first non-display operation permitted state)" and the "16F reception period or its modified example (second non-display operation permitted state)" are prepared, and in the 15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326), if no operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001, the same post-reception display as when an operation is received for the sword decorative body 5001 is not displayed, which makes it possible to provide a sense of tension when the non-display operation permitted state occurs (see Figs. 324 (h) and (i)).

Moreover, in the "16th F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336) or its modified example (see Figs. 346 to 348)" of the above-mentioned performance example, even if no operation is received for the sword ornament 5001, it is possible to display the same 16th F post-reception display UA as when an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 (see Fig. 334 (h)). Both the "15th F reception period (see Figs. 322 to 326) in the first modified example" and the "16th F reception period or its modified example" include a "display operation section" in which an image display of the sword ornament 500 is displayed and operation reception for the sword ornament 500 is permitted, and the "15th F reception period in the first modified example" and the "16th F reception period in the first modified example" include a "display operation section" in which an image display of the sword ornament 500 is displayed and operation reception for the sword ornament 500 is permitted. In the "15F reception period according to the first modification", when the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to tpX)" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section (timing to2 to tpX)" ends and transitions to the "display operation section (timing toX to tp3)" while the "15F reception period according to the first modification" continues, and in the "16F reception period or a modification thereof", when the "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX)" continues for a second time shorter than the first time, the "non-display operation section (timing tp2 to tpX)" ends and transitions to the "display operation section (timing tpX to tp3)" while the "16F reception period or a modification thereof" continues. That is, in this case, the "non-display operation permitted state" should be more accurately called a "non-display section inclusion permitted state". According to this configuration, the time required for the "non-display operation section" to end and transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (first non-display section inclusive state)" and the "16F reception period or its modified example (second non-display section inclusive state)," so it is expected that the tension in the "non-display operation permitted state" will be appropriately maintained. On the other hand, it is possible to suggest whether or not the automatic button function will be enabled through the time required to transition to the "display operation section," so it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be appropriately suppressed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the type of non-display operation allowable period in which the non-display operation section ends at the first time may be only the "15F reception period according to the first modified example (see Figs. 322 to 326)". In contrast, the type of non-display operation allowable period in which the non-display operation section ends at the second time may be the "16F reception period (see Figs. 332 to 336) or its modified example (see Figs. 346 to 348)" as well as a "third non-display operation allowable state". In this regard, in the "third non-display operation permitted state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for the second time period, which is shorter than the first time period, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "third non-display operation permitted state" is continuing and transitions to the "display operation section". If no operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the "third non-display operation permitted state", the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed. Even if the time required to transition to the "display operation section" is the "second time", there will be both cases where the automatic button function is enabled and cases where it is not enabled, and it is expected that tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, it is desirable to make the post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display UA) in response to the acceptance of an operation on the sword ornament 5001 different for the "15F acceptance period for the first modified example (during the first non-display operation permitted state)", "16F acceptance period or its modified example (during the second non-display operation permitted state)", and "third non-display operation permitted state".

[Acceptance period having at least one of configurations 1G to 33G]
As illustrated in FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and the variable performance using the decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with the expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body movement (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movable body movement, etc., and the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance permission state (valid period) does not occur even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. In addition, the acceptance permission state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance (post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.) from the acceptance permission state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, a state of acceptance that allows the acceptance of an action (operation) by a player can be generated, and when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within this state of acceptance, a post-acceptance change (such as a display change, an acceptance output sound, or light emission for a special effect) can occur according to the type of the state of acceptance that has been generated.

In addition, in the reception-permitted state, an operation-related display can be displayed that can only appear when the operation reception for the operation unit is permitted (reception-permitted period) or when the operation reception is permitted (reception-permitted period). Such an operation-related display is often displayed as a mock-image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action (operation) is expressed as an image, but this is not limited to this, and it can be any image display that, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate. The "operation-related display (mock-image display)" can have multiple forms with different expectations (for example, multiple color schemes such as white and red), and any of these multiple forms can be selectively displayed.

Furthermore, since an "operation-related display" can only appear when the operation reception to the operation unit is permitted (reception permitted period) or when the operation reception is permitted (reception permitted period), it is sufficient that at least when the "operation-related display" is displayed, the reception permitted state always occurs or the operation is in a permitted state at the time of its display. Therefore, while the "operation-related display" is displayed, the reception permitted state may end before it is hidden. Furthermore, multiple types of image displays may be prepared as such "operation-related displays," and both of these image displays may be displayed in the reception permitted state.

In addition, in the acceptance-permitted state, a remaining time display can be displayed to indicate the time remaining for which acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted. Such a remaining time display can be implemented, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time. At least one of the frame image and the gauge image can be implemented in multiple modes (for example, the rate at which the display area of the gauge image is reduced, an indication of the degree of expectation, an indication of the type of operation means, etc.), and the game can be implemented in any of these modes. In this case, a different degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear) can be suggested depending on which mode is implemented.

In addition, when the acceptance-permitting state occurs, a premonition effect can be executed before this, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to act (suggesting that the acceptance-permitting state will occur). Premonition effects are executed, for example, by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 and outputting a corresponding performance sound.

Note that, in addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern," a variation pattern that generates an acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment may be provided. Also, in addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern," a variation pattern that generates an acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing before the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment may be provided.

In addition, including the examples mentioned above and below, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to those that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact action by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "action by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. Essentially, the "operation means" is anything that has one or more reception means (operation units) that receive actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

Incidentally, various types of acceptance allowance states (valid periods) are available in this embodiment, such as different types of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound, whether output is present, different audible BGM output status, different number of times operation acceptance is permitted within the acceptance allowance state (valid period), and whether the auto-repeat function or automatic button function is enabled.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with the following special presentation characteristics between multiple reception-permitting states, thereby enhancing the presentation characteristics when a reception-permitting state occurs and maintaining a suitable sense of tension when a reception-permitting state occurs. It is not necessary to provide all of the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below. For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing by providing only one of the presentation characteristics (any configuration), or it may selectively provide several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it may appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that they have any one configuration that can suppress a decrease in interest in playing related to the reception-permitting state.

[Configuration 1-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which the operation acceptance to a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is allowed can be generated, and when an operation to the specific operation unit is accepted in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed. In this regard, when the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance to the specific operation unit is displayed and a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the post-acceptance display is output, if a specific condition is established while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display is made invisible in response to the establishment of the specific condition. Therefore, for example, if a situation occurs in which a player wants to see another presentation display rather than the post-acceptance display, but the other presentation display is made difficult to see by the post-acceptance display, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game at that time will be suppressed. Note that the "specific operation unit" and "specific condition" in the configuration 1-G are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-G. Therefore, the "specific operation unit" and "specific condition" in the configurations 1-G may mean the same operation unit and the same condition as the "specific operation unit" and "specific condition" in the other configurations, respectively, or may mean a different operation unit and a different condition. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "condition" as the operation unit or condition with different names for other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit" in the operation permitted state, a corresponding post-acceptance output sound may be output when a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is made, or the post-acceptance output sound may not be output. If the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is output when the post-acceptance display is made, if the "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, the post-acceptance display is made invisible in response to the establishment of the "specific condition." However, if the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is not output when the post-acceptance display is made, if the "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, the post-acceptance display may be made continuously displayed without being made invisible in response to the establishment of the "specific condition." With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the post-acceptance display is output when the post-acceptance display is made, and whether the post-acceptance display is made invisible in response to the establishment of the "specific condition," which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly when a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the post-acceptance display is output when the post-acceptance display is made, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display is made invisible when the "specific condition" is met; however, if a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the post-acceptance display is not output when the post-acceptance display is made, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display may continue to be displayed rather than being made invisible when the "specific condition" is met, or the post-acceptance display may be made invisible when the "specific condition" is met. According to this configuration, if a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the post-acceptance display is output when the post-acceptance display is displayed, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display can be made to be in a hidden state without fail in response to the "specific condition" being met. On the other hand, if a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the post-acceptance display is not output when the post-acceptance display is displayed, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, whether or not the post-acceptance display will be made to be in a hidden state in response to the "specific condition" being met can be kept secret, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

The "post-acceptance display" in which the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is output when the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is made, and the "post-acceptance display" in which the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is not output when the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is made, and further the "post-acceptance display" which is made to be in a non-display state when a specific condition is met when the post-acceptance output sound is not output, and the "post-acceptance display" which is not made to be in a non-display state when a specific condition is met when the post-acceptance output sound is not output, may all be different presentation displays. However, these "post-acceptance displays" may all be displayed as the same "post-acceptance display", and in this case, even though they are the same presentation display (post-acceptance display), it is possible to suggest through the presence or absence of output of the post-acceptance output sound that the display will be made to be in a non-display state or not made to be in a non-display state when a specific condition is met, which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

[Configuration 2-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which the operation acceptance to a specific operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410) is allowed can be generated, and an imitation image display imitating the specific operation unit can be executed, and when an operation acceptance to the specific operation unit is made in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed. In this regard, in the operation allowable state, there are cases where the imitation image display imitating the specific operation unit is displayed and cases where the imitation image display imitating the specific operation unit is not displayed, and when a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation acceptance to the specific operation unit is displayed while the imitation image display imitating the specific operation unit is displayed, if a specific condition is established while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display is made to be in a non-display state upon the establishment of the specific condition. For example, if a situation occurs in which a different performance display is difficult to see due to the post-acceptance display, even though a player wants to see another performance display rather than the post-acceptance display, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game at that time will be suppressed. The "specific operation unit" and "specific condition" in the configuration 2-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-G. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit and the same condition as the "specific operation unit" and "specific condition" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean a different operation unit and a different condition. They may also mean the same "operation unit" and "condition" as an operation unit or condition with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, if the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "specific operation unit" while the above-mentioned model image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is displayed, if a "specific condition" is established while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the establishment of the "specific condition" is the trigger for the post-acceptance display to be hidden. However, if the above-mentioned model image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is not displayed and the post-acceptance display is displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "specific operation unit" while the above-mentioned model image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is not displayed, if a "specific condition" is established while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the establishment of the "specific condition" is the trigger for the post-acceptance display to be continuously displayed instead of being hidden. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the post-acceptance display will be hidden when the "specific condition" is established, based on whether the above-mentioned model image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is displayed when an operation is accepted on the "specific operation unit", and it is expected to improve the interest in the game.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly when a post-acceptance display responsive to acceptance of an operation to the "specific operation unit" is displayed while the imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is being displayed, if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, the satisfaction of the specific condition is triggered by the post-acceptance display being made invisible; however, when a post-acceptance display responsive to acceptance of an operation to the "specific operation unit" is displayed while the imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is not being displayed, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, the satisfaction of the "specific condition" is triggered by the post-acceptance display being made invisible, and there may be both cases where the post-acceptance display is made invisible, responsive to the satisfaction of the "specific condition". According to this configuration, if the imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is displayed when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit", if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, the post-acceptance display can be made invisible without fail in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition". On the other hand, if the imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is not displayed when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit", if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, it becomes possible to keep secret whether or not the post-acceptance display will be made invisible in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition", which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

The "post-acceptance display" corresponding to the acceptance of an operation on the "specific operation unit" while the model image display of the "specific operation unit" is displayed, the "post-acceptance display" corresponding to the acceptance of an operation on the "specific operation unit" while the model image display of the "specific operation unit" is not displayed, and the "post-acceptance display" that is made invisible when the "specific condition" is met when the model image display of the "specific operation unit" is not displayed, and the "post-acceptance display" that is not made invisible when the "specific condition" is met when the model image display of the "specific operation unit" is not displayed may all be different presentation displays. However, all of these "post-acceptance displays" may be displayed as the same "post-acceptance display", and in this case, it is possible to suggest through the presence or absence of the model image display that the display will be made invisible or not made invisible when the specific condition is met, even though it is the same presentation display (post-acceptance display), which is expected to improve the interest in the game.

[Configuration 3-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when a player operates the operation means and an operation acceptance is made that makes the operation a valid operation, the post-acceptance display can be displayed based on the operation acceptance, and there are cases where the post-acceptance display is displayed even when no operation acceptance is made, and cases where the post-acceptance display is not displayed if no operation acceptance is made. In this regard, when the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the operation acceptance under conditions where the post-acceptance display is not displayed if no operation acceptance is made, if a specific condition is established while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display can be made invisible in response to the establishment of the specific condition. Therefore, for example, if a situation occurs where a player wants to see a different presentation display rather than the post-acceptance display, but the other presentation display is made difficult to see by the post-acceptance display, it is expected that the decline in interest in the game at that time will be suppressed. Note that the "operation means" and "specific condition" in the configuration 3-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation part and the same condition as the "operation means" and "specific condition" in another configuration, respectively, or it may mean a different operation part and a different condition. Also, it may mean the same "operation part" and "condition" as the operation part and condition with different names in another configuration, or multiple operation parts may be prepared as the "operation means" to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" having those operation parts as a whole may have the configuration described in the above configuration 3-G.

In this case, as will be described later, when the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the acceptance of an operation under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted, if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the satisfaction of the "specific condition" may be triggered to make the post-acceptance display invisible. In this regard, when the post-acceptance display is displayed without an operation being accepted under conditions in which the post-acceptance display can be displayed even without an operation being accepted, even if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the satisfaction of the "specific condition" may not be triggered to make the post-acceptance display invisible. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the so-called automatic button function is enabled and the post-acceptance display is being executed by satisfying a "specific condition" after the post-acceptance display starts to be executed, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in a suitable manner even after the operation is accepted.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly under conditions where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted, if the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the acceptance of an operation, if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display may be triggered by the satisfaction of the specific condition to continue to be displayed rather than being hidden, or the post-acceptance display may be triggered by the satisfaction of the specific condition to be hidden. In this regard, if the post-acceptance display is displayed without an operation being accepted, even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display may not be triggered by the satisfaction of the "specific condition" to be hidden. According to this configuration, when the post-acceptance display is displayed by the so-called automatic button function, even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the "post-acceptance display displayed by the automatic button function" is not hidden in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition." However, when the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the acceptance of an operation under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (conditions in which the automatic button function is not enabled), if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, it becomes possible to keep secret whether or not the post-acceptance display is hidden in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition," which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 4-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in a situation where operation acceptance based on the operation of the operation means is permitted multiple times, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be executed each time the operation is accepted. In this regard, in a situation where operation acceptance based on the operation of the operation means is permitted multiple times, there are cases where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times just by maintaining the operation means in an operated state, and cases where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operation means is maintained in an operated state. Also, in a condition where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operation means is maintained in an operated state, if a "specific condition" is established while the post-acceptance display is being executed, the post-acceptance display can be made non-displayed in response to the establishment of the "specific condition". For example, if a situation occurs where a player wants to see another performance display rather than the post-acceptance display, but the other performance display is difficult to see due to the post-acceptance display, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game at that time will be suppressed. The "operation means" and "specific condition" in the configuration 4-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-G. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit and the same condition as the "operation means" and "specific condition" in other configurations, respectively, or they may mean different operation units and different conditions. They may also mean the same "operation unit" and "condition" as operation units and conditions with different names in other configurations, or multiple operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" having these operation units as a whole may have the configuration described in the above configuration 4-G.

In this case, as will be described later, under conditions where the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is kept in an operated state, if the post-acceptance display is executed based on the operation acceptance based on the operation of the operating means, if a "specific condition" is established while the post-acceptance display is being executed, the post-acceptance display may be made invisible in response to the establishment of the "specific condition." However, under conditions where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means in an operated state, if the post-acceptance display is executed based on the operation of the operating means in a state where the "specific condition" is established while the post-acceptance display is being executed, the post-acceptance display may not be made invisible in response to the establishment of the "specific condition." With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled and the post-acceptance display is being executed by establishing the "specific condition" after the post-acceptance display has started to be executed, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner even after the operation is accepted.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly under conditions where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is maintained in an operated state, if the post-acceptance display is executed based on the acceptance of an operation based on an operation on the operating means, if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is being executed, the post-acceptance display may be triggered by the satisfaction of the "specific condition" to continue to be displayed without being hidden, or the post-acceptance display may be triggered by the satisfaction of the "specific condition". In this regard, under conditions where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means in an operated state, if the post-acceptance display is executed based on the operating means being maintained in an operated state, even if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is being executed, the post-acceptance display may not be triggered by the satisfaction of the "specific condition". According to this configuration, when the post-acceptance display is displayed by the so-called auto-tap function, even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the "post-acceptance display displayed by the auto-tap function" is not hidden due to the "specific condition" being met. On the other hand, when the post-acceptance display is displayed based on an operation being accepted under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is kept in an operated state (conditions in which the auto-tap function is not enabled), if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, whether or not the post-acceptance display is hidden due to the "specific condition" being met can be kept secret, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 5-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation acceptance to the operation means is permitted, a replica image display imitating the operation means can be displayed, and when the operation acceptance to the operation means is made, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed. In this regard, the replica image display can be displayed so as to show a periodic change, and there are cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a "predetermined time" unit and cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a "time longer than the predetermined time" unit. When the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed so as to appear in the "time longer than the predetermined time" unit, an operation is accepted to the operation means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, if a "specific condition" is established while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display can be made non-displayed in response to the establishment of the "specific condition". Therefore, for example, if a situation occurs in which a different performance display is difficult to see due to the post-acceptance display, despite the desire to see another performance display rather than the post-acceptance display, it is expected that a decrease in the interest in the game at that time will be suppressed. The "operation means", "specific condition", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 5-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-G. Therefore, the "operation means", "specific condition", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same operation unit, the same condition, and time, respectively, or may mean a different operation unit, a different condition, and time. In addition, they may mean the same "operation unit", "condition", and "time" as the operation unit, condition, and time with different names in other configurations, or multiple operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" having those operation units as a whole may have the configuration described in the configuration 5-G.

In this case, as will be described later, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in units of the above-mentioned "longer than the specified time", if an operation is accepted on the operating means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display may be made invisible in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition". However, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in units of the above-mentioned "specified time", if an operation is accepted on the operating means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, even if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display may not be made invisible in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition". With this configuration, it is possible to suggest what periodic changes the model image display was displaying by satisfying the "specific condition" even after the post-acceptance display has started to be executed, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner even after the operation is accepted.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly when a periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed so as to appear in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and an operation is accepted on the operating means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display may be continuously displayed without being hidden in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition," or the post-acceptance display may be hidden in response to the satisfaction of the specific condition. In this regard, when a periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed so as to appear in units of "a predetermined time," and an operation is accepted on the operating means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, even if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display may not be hidden in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition." According to this configuration, if an operation is accepted when the imitation image display is displayed in a relatively fast periodic change and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display will not be hidden in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed. On the other hand, if an operation is accepted when the imitation image display is displayed in a relatively slow periodic change and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, it becomes possible to keep secret whether or not the post-acceptance display will be hidden in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition," which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 6-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the acceptance of an operation by the player is permitted, a model image display imitating the operation target can be displayed, and when the operation by the player is accepted, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance can be displayed. In this regard, the post-acceptance display can be displayed as one of a plurality of post-acceptance displays including a "first post-acceptance display" and a "second post-acceptance display", and when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "second post-acceptance display", if a "specific condition" is established while the "second post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "second post-acceptance display" can be made to be in a non-display state upon the establishment of the "specific condition". Therefore, for example, if a situation occurs in which a player wants to see a different performance display than the "second post-acceptance display", but the other performance display is difficult to see due to the "second post-acceptance display", it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game at that time will be suppressed. The "specific condition", "first post-acceptance display", and "second post-acceptance display" in the configuration 6-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-G. Therefore, they may mean the same condition and post-acceptance display as the "specific condition", "first post-acceptance display", and "second post-acceptance display" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different conditions and post-acceptance displays. They may also mean the same "condition" and "post-acceptance display" as the condition and post-acceptance display with a different name in other configurations. In addition, multiple operation units may be prepared as objects of operation by the player, and the operation objects as a whole may have the configuration described in the above configuration 6-G.

In this case, as described below, when the post-acceptance display is displayed as the "second post-acceptance display", if a "specific condition" is met while the "second post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "second post-acceptance display" may be made invisible in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition", but when the post-acceptance display is displayed as the "first post-acceptance display", even if a "specific condition" is met while the "first post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "first post-acceptance display" may not be made invisible in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition". With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the post-acceptance display can be made invisible by fulfilling a "specific condition" after the post-acceptance display has started to be executed, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly when the post-reception display is displayed as a "second post-reception display", if a "specific condition" is met while the "second post-reception display" is displayed, the "second post-reception display" may be continuously displayed without being hidden in response to the "specific condition" being met, or the "second post-reception display" may be hidden in response to the "specific condition" being met. In this regard, when the post-reception display is displayed as a "first post-reception display", even if a "specific condition" is met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, the "first post-reception display" may not be hidden in response to the "specific condition" being met. With this configuration, even if a "specific condition" is met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, the "first post-reception display" will not be hidden in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition." However, if a "specific condition" is met while the "second post-reception display" is displayed, whether or not the "second post-reception display" will be hidden in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition" can be kept secret, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 7-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the acceptance of an operation by a player is permitted, a model image display imitating the operation target can be displayed, and when the operation by the player is accepted, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance can be displayed. In this regard, the post-acceptance display can be displayed as one of a plurality of post-acceptance displays including a "first post-acceptance display" and a "second post-acceptance display", and when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "first post-acceptance display", if a "specific condition" is established while the "first post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "first post-acceptance display" is made to be in a non-display state upon the establishment of the "specific condition". For example, if a situation occurs in which a player wants to see a different performance display than the "first post-acceptance display", but the other performance display is difficult to see due to the "first post-acceptance display", it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game at that time will be suppressed. The "specific condition", "first post-acceptance display", and "second post-acceptance display" in the configuration 7-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-G. Therefore, they may mean the same condition and post-acceptance display as the "specific condition", "first post-acceptance display", and "second post-acceptance display" in other configurations, respectively, or may mean different conditions and post-acceptance displays. They may also mean the same "condition" and "post-acceptance display" as the condition and post-acceptance display with a different name in other configurations. In addition, multiple operation units may be prepared as objects of operation by the player, and the operation objects as a whole may have the configuration described in the above configuration 7-G.

In this case, as described below, when the post-acceptance display is displayed as the "first post-acceptance display", if a "specific condition" is met while the "first post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "first post-acceptance display" is made invisible in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition", but when the post-acceptance display is displayed as the "second post-acceptance display", even if a "specific condition" is met while the "second post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "second post-acceptance display" may not be made invisible in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition". With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the post-acceptance display can be made invisible by fulfilling a "specific condition" after the post-acceptance display has started to be executed, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly when the post-reception display is displayed as the "first post-reception display", if a "specific condition" is met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, the "first post-reception display" may be made to be always hidden in response to the "specific condition" being met. In this regard, when the post-reception display is displayed as the "second post-reception display", if a "specific condition" is met while the "second post-reception display" is displayed, the "second post-reception display" may be made to continue being displayed without being hidden in response to the "specific condition" being met, and the "second post-reception display" may be made to be hidden in response to the "specific condition" being met. With this configuration, if a "specific condition" is met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, the "first post-reception display" will always be hidden in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition," whereas if a "specific condition" is met while the "second post-reception display" is displayed, whether or not the "second post-reception display" will be hidden in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition" can be kept secret, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 8-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an operation is permitted for the operating means, when the operating means is operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance of the operation can be displayed, and a model image display modeled after the operating means can be displayed, and when the model image display is made invisible, a "disappearing effect display" can be displayed as an image display different from the model image display, which makes the model image display difficult to see until the model image display is made invisible, and the model image display may continue to be displayed without being made invisible at the time when the post-acceptance display starts to be displayed. However, in this case, if the model image display continues to be displayed after the operation is accepted, there is a concern that not only the post-acceptance display but also the model image display may make other effect displays difficult to see. In this regard, when a "specific condition" is established while the model image display and the post-reception display are displayed, the model image display and the post-reception display may be made invisible in response to the establishment of the "specific condition," and when the model image display is made invisible, there are two cases in which a "disappearing effect display" is displayed as an image display different from the model image display, and in which the "disappearing effect display" is not displayed as an image display different from the model image display. This is expected to favorably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned concerns while favorably maintaining the sense of tension. Note that the "specific condition" and "disappearing effect display" in the configuration 8-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-G. Therefore, the "specific condition" and "disappearing effect display" in the configurations 8-G may mean the same condition and disappearing effect display as the "specific condition" and "disappearing effect display" in the other configurations, respectively, or may mean different conditions and disappearing effect displays. In addition, it may mean the same "condition" or "disappearance display" as a condition with a different name related to another configuration, or as a condition for a disappearance display, or multiple operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" that is to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" as a whole having these operation units may have the configuration described in configuration 8-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, when a "specific condition" is met while the model image display and the post-reception display are being displayed, the model image display and the post-reception display may be made invisible in response to the "specific condition" being met, or the model image display and the post-reception display may not be made invisible in response to the "specific condition" being met. With this configuration, whether or not the model image display and the post-reception display are made invisible in response to the "specific condition" being met is kept secret, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly, even if a "specific condition" is met while the Moji image display and the post-reception display are displayed, the Moji image display and the post-reception display are not made invisible in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition," and when the Moji image display is then made invisible (due to another condition such as the passage of time), either a "disappearance effect display" as an image display separate from the Moji image display is displayed, or the "disappearance effect display" as an image display separate from the Moji image display is not displayed; however, when the Moji image display and the post-reception display are made invisible in response to the fulfillment of a "specific condition" while they are displayed, it is possible to prevent the "disappearance effect display" as an image display separate from the Moji image display. With this configuration, when the "disappearing effect display" is not displayed when the model image display and post-reception display are made invisible, this can mean that the model image display and post-reception display are made invisible when the "specific condition" is met, or that the model image display and post-reception display are made invisible without being triggered by the "specific condition," which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

[Configuration 9-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation allowable state can be generated in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times, and when an operation is received to the "specific operation unit" in the multiple operation allowable state, a post-reception display according to the operation reception can be displayed, and a replica image display imitating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed. In this regard, the replica image display can be displayed in any of a plurality of color schemes including the "first color scheme" and the "second color scheme", and in the multiple operation allowable state, even if the replica image display is displayed in either the "first color scheme" or the "second color scheme", the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so that it is expected that the interest in playing the game can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit", "specific condition", "first color scheme", and "second color scheme" in the configuration 9-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-G. Therefore, the "specific operation unit", "specific condition", "first color scheme", and "second color scheme" may mean the same operation unit, condition, and color scheme as those in other configurations, or may mean different operation units, conditions, and color schemes. Also, the "specific operation unit", "condition", and "color scheme" may mean the same operation unit, condition, and color scheme with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as described later, in the multiple operation permitted state, there are cases where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means in an operated state, and cases where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operation means is maintained in an operated state. In the multiple operation permitted state, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, but when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", there are cases where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, and cases where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. With this configuration, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the so-called auto-tap function is always enabled, whereas when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", whether the so-called auto-tap function is enabled or not is concealed, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 10-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation allowable state can be generated in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times, and when an operation is received to the "specific operation unit" in the multiple operation allowable state, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and a specific reception allowable sound can be output, which indicates that the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" has become an allowable state, or that the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" has become an allowable state. In this regard, when the multiple operation allowable state occurs, there are cases where the "specific reception allowable sound" is output and cases where the "specific reception allowable sound" is not output, and in the multiple operation allowable state, in either case of the case where the "specific reception allowable sound" is output and the case where the "specific reception allowable sound" is not output, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so that it is expected that the interest in playing the game can be favorably maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit" and the "specific reception allowable sound" in the configuration 10-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit and reception acceptable sound as the "specific operation unit" and "specific reception acceptable sound" in other configurations, respectively, or it may mean a different operation unit and reception acceptable sound. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" and "reception acceptable sound" as the operation unit and reception acceptable sound with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as described later, when a "specific reception allowance sound" is output when a multiple operation allowance state occurs, the post-reception display may be executed multiple times in the multiple operation allowance state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. In addition, when a "specific reception allowance sound" is not output when a multiple operation allowance state occurs, both the post-reception display may be executed multiple times in the multiple operation allowance state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, and the post-reception display may not be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. According to this configuration, when a "specific reception allowance sound" is output, the so-called auto-tap function is always enabled, whereas when a "specific reception allowance sound" is not output, whether or not the so-called auto-tap function is enabled is kept secret, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 11-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation allowable state can be generated in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times, and when an operation is received to the "specific operation unit" in the multiple operation allowable state, a post-reception display according to the operation reception can be displayed. As the multiple operation allowable state, a "multiple end allowable state" that may be ended based on the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" before the set time has elapsed, and a "multiple continuation allowable state" that continues until the set time has elapsed regardless of the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" are prepared. Regardless of whether the "multiple end allowable state" or the "multiple continuation allowable state" occurs as the multiple operation allowable state, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so that it is expected that the interest in playing the game can be favorably maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit" in the configuration 11-G is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit as the "specific operation unit" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation unit. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation unit" as the operation unit of another configuration with a different name.

In this case, as described later, when the above-mentioned "multiple termination permitted state" occurs as the multiple operation permitted state, the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times in the multiple operation permitted state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. Also, when the above-mentioned "multiple continuation permitted state" occurs as the multiple operation permitted state, both the case where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times in the multiple operation permitted state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state and the case where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state may occur. According to this configuration, in the "multiple termination permitted state" that may be terminated midway due to the player's operation, the so-called auto-repeated tap function is always enabled, whereas in the "multiple continuation permitted state" that is not terminated midway due to the player's operation, whether the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled is concealed, so that it is expected that the sense of tension is appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 12-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation permissible state can be generated in which acceptance of operations for the "specific operation unit" is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit" in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of operations for the "specific operation unit" is permitted, a mock image display imitating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and a premonition display can be executed which gives advance indication that acceptance of operations for the "specific operation unit" is permitted, and when the operation permissible state occurs, there are cases in which the premonition display is executed and cases in which the premonition display is not executed. In this regard, the operation allowable state may occur as a "single operation allowable state" in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed only once, or as a "multiple operation allowable state" in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times, the mock image display may be displayed so as to show a periodic change, and in the "single operation allowable state", the periodic change may be displayed so as to show in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", and in the "multiple operation allowable state", the periodic change may be displayed so as to show in units of "a predetermined time", and in either case where the premonition effect display is executed when the "multiple operation allowable state" occurs or where the premonition effect display is not executed, the post-reception display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit", "predetermined time", and "time longer than a predetermined time" in the configuration 12-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or time as a "specific operation unit," a "predetermined time," or a "time longer than a predetermined time" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation unit or time. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "time" as an operation unit or time with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, the imitation image display may be displayed so that its periodic changes occur in "predetermined time" units in the "multiple operation permitted state", or in "longer than the predetermined time" units. With this configuration, when the imitation image display is displayed so that its periodic changes occur in "longer than the predetermined time" units, it is possible to conceal whether the "single operation permitted state" or the "multiple operation permitted state" is occurring, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly when the premonition display is executed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state in the "multiple operation permitted state". In addition, when the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, both the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times in the "multiple operation permitted state" simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, and the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. According to this configuration, when the premonition display is displayed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, the so-called auto-repeated tap function is always enabled, whereas when the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, whether the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled or not is concealed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even if the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times when the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state. With this configuration, even if the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is possible to suggest that the so-called auto-repeated-hit function will not be activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, even if the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, if the post-acceptance display according to the operation acceptance is under a condition where it is not displayed based on the establishment of a "specific condition", the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times when the "specific operation unit" is kept in an operated state. With this configuration, if the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, and the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is not enabled, there is a possibility that the post-acceptance display will not be displayed based on the establishment of a "specific condition", so that interest in the game can be maintained in an optimal manner.

[Configuration 13-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation allowable state can be generated in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times, and when the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is performed in the multiple operation allowable state, a post-reception display according to the operation reception can be displayed, and when the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed, a model image display imitating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and a premonition effect display that suggests in advance that the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed can be executed, and the model image display may be displayed when the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed, or may not be displayed when the operation reception is allowed, and when the multiple operation allowable state occurs, the premonition effect display may be executed or may not be executed. In this regard, in either case of the premonition effect display being executed when the multiple operation allowable state occurs or the premonition effect display not being executed when the multiple operation allowable state occurs, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so that it is expected that the interest in playing the game can be maintained in a good condition. The "specific operation unit" in the configuration 13-G is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit as the "specific operation unit" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation unit. It may also mean the same "operation unit" as an operation unit with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as described later, if the premonition display is executed when the multiple operation permitted state occurs, the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the multiple operation permitted state. Also, if the premonition display is not executed when the multiple operation permitted state occurs, both the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the multiple operation permitted state, and the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the operated state. According to this configuration, when the premonition display is displayed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, the so-called auto-repeated tap function is always enabled, whereas when the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, whether the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled or not is kept secret, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even if the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, if the imitation image display is not displayed in the multiple operation permitted state, the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. With this configuration, even if the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is activated when the imitation image display is not displayed, which is expected to maintain tension in an optimal manner and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Even if the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, if the post-acceptance display according to the operation acceptance is not displayed based on the establishment of a "specific condition", the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times when the "specific operation unit" is kept in an operated state. With this configuration, if the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permitted state" occurs, and the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, there is a possibility that the post-acceptance display will not be displayed based on the establishment of a "specific condition", so that interest in the game can be maintained in an optimal manner.

[Configuration 14-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation permissible state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on the "specific operation unit" is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the "specific operation unit" in the operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of operations on the "specific operation unit" is permitted, an imitation image display modeled after the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and in the operation permissible state, there are cases where a "specific message display" is displayed and cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed. In this regard, the operation allowable state may occur as a "single operation allowable state" in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed only once, or as a "multiple operation allowable state" in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times. The mock image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears, and in the "single operation allowable state", the periodic change can be displayed so that it appears in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", while in the "multiple operation allowable state", the periodic change can be displayed so that it appears in units of "a predetermined time", so that the player can be appropriately prompted to perform an operation. Note that the "specific operation unit", "specific message display", "predetermined time", and "time longer than a predetermined time" in the configuration 14-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 14-G. Therefore, the "specific operation unit", "specific message display", "predetermined time", and "time longer than a predetermined time" in the other configurations may mean the same operation unit, message display, and time, or may mean a different operation unit, message display, and time. In addition, the terms "operation unit,""messagedisplay," and "time" may be the same as the different names for the operation unit, message display, and time for other components.

In this case, as described below, in the "multiple operation permitted state", the mock image display may be displayed so that the periodic change occurs in "predetermined time" units, or in "longer than the predetermined time" units. With this configuration, when the periodic change in the mock image display occurs in "longer than the predetermined time" units, it is possible to conceal whether the "single operation permitted state" or the "multiple operation permitted state" is occurring, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the "multiple operation permitted state," there may be cases where the "specific message display" is displayed and cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly when the "specific message display" is displayed in the "multiple operation permitted state", the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the "multiple operation permitted state". In addition, when the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple operation permitted state", both the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the operated state in the "multiple operation permitted state" and the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the operated state. According to this configuration, when the "specific message display" is displayed in the "multiple operation permitted state", it preferably suggests that the so-called auto-tap function is enabled, but when the "specific message display" is not displayed, it is possible to conceal whether the so-called auto-tap function is enabled, which is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, even if a "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple operation permitted state", if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units, the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. With this configuration, even if a "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple operation permitted state", when the periodic change in the model image display appears in "predetermined time" units, the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 15-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a multiple operation allowable state can be generated in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times, and when an operation is received to the "specific operation unit" in the multiple operation allowable state, a post-reception display according to the operation reception can be displayed, and when the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed, an imitation image display imitating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and in the multiple operation allowable state, there are cases where a "specific message display" is displayed and cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed. In this regard, in the multiple operation allowable state, in either case where a "specific message display" is displayed or where a "specific message display" is not displayed, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so that it is expected that the interest in playing the game can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit" and the "specific message display" in the configuration 15-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit or message display as a "specific operation unit" or a "specific message display" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different operation unit or message display. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "message display" as an operation unit or message display with a different name according to another configuration.

In this case, as described later, the mock image display may be displayed when the operation reception for the "specific operation unit" is permitted, or may not be displayed when the operation reception is permitted. In addition, when the "specific message display" is displayed in the multiple operation permitted state, the post-reception display may be executed multiple times in the multiple operation permitted state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. In addition, when the "specific message display" is not displayed in the multiple operation permitted state, the post-reception display may be executed multiple times in the multiple operation permitted state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, or the post-reception display may not be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. According to this configuration, when the "specific message display" is displayed in the "multiple operation permitted state", it preferably suggests that the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled, but when the "specific message display" is not displayed, it is possible to conceal whether the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled, so that it is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained.

In addition, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the multiple operation permitted state, when the imitation image display is not displayed in the multiple operation permitted state, the post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. With this configuration, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple operation permitted state", when the imitation image display is not displayed, the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 16-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation allowance state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on the "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times, and when an operation is accepted on the "specific operation unit" in the multiple operation allowance state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of an operation on the "specific operation unit" is allowed, a model image display simulating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and when the model image display is made invisible, a "disappearance effect display" can be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display, which makes the model image display difficult to view until the model image display is made invisible. In this regard, in the multiple operation state, there are cases where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, and cases where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state. In either case, when the model image display displayed in the multiple operation state is made invisible, a "disappearing effect display" as an image display different from the model image display can be displayed, so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit" and the "disappearing effect display" in the configuration 16-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 16-G. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or display as the "specific operation unit" and the "disappearing effect display" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation units or displays. They may also mean the same "operation unit" and "display" as the operation unit or display with a different name in the other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation permitted state in which the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, when the model image display is made invisible, a "disappearance effect display" may be made to be able to be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display. Also, in a multiple operation permitted state in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state, there may be both a case in which the "disappearance effect display" may be made to be able to be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display when the model image display is made invisible, and a case in which the "disappearance effect display" may not be made to be able to be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display. According to this configuration, in a state in which the so-called auto-tap function is enabled and multiple operations are permitted, the "disappearing effect display" can be displayed, whereas in a state in which the so-called auto-tap function is not enabled and multiple operations are permitted, whether or not the "disappearing effect display" can be displayed is kept secret. This increases the need to check the appearance (color scheme, etc.) of the imitation image display before the visibility of the imitation image display is deteriorated by the "disappearing effect display," which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 17-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation permissible state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation means in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, a model image display simulating the operation means can be displayed, and when the model image display is made invisible, a "disappearance effect display" can be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display, which makes the model image display difficult to view until the model image display is made invisible. In this regard, the operation means is capable of emitting light in any one of a plurality of modes including a "first light emitting mode" and a "second light emitting mode", the model image display is capable of being displayed so as to cause a periodic change to occur in an operation permitted state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to occur in "predetermined time" units and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to occur in "times longer than the predetermined time" units. In either case, that is, a case in which the operation means emits light in the "first light emitting mode" and the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to occur in "times longer than the predetermined time" units, or a case in which the operation means emits light in the "second light emitting mode" and the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to occur in "times longer than the predetermined time" units, when the model image display is made non-displayable, a "disappearance effect display" can be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a suitable manner. In addition, the "disappearance display", "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 17-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 17-G. Therefore, they may mean the same display, light-emitting mode, and time as the "disappearance display", "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different displays, light-emitting modes, and times. In addition, they may mean the same "display", "light-emitting mode", and "time" as the display, light-emitting mode, and time of a different name in other configurations, or they may be provided as the "operation means" to be operated by the player by providing multiple operation units, and the "operation means" having those operation units as a whole may have the configuration described in the configuration 17-G.

In this case, as described later, when the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode" and the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", there may be two cases: when the model image display is made invisible, an operation permission state of a type in which a "disappearance display" as an image display different from the model image display may be displayed, and when the model image display is made invisible, an operation permission state of a type in which a disappearance display as an image display different from the model image display may not be displayed. Also, when the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode" and the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", there may always be a situation in which an operation permission state of a type in which a "disappearance display" as an image display different from the model image display may be displayed, when the model image display is made invisible. According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time", if the operating means is emitting light in the "second light emission mode", an operation permission state of a type in which the "disappearing performance display" may be displayed is always occurring, but if the operating means is emitting light in the "first light emission mode", it is concealed whether an operation permission state of a type in which the "disappearing performance display" may be displayed or an operation permission state of a type in which the "disappearing performance display" may not be displayed is occurring. This increases the need to check the mode (color scheme, etc.) of the model image display before the visibility of the model image display is deteriorated by the "disappearing performance display", and is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even if the operating means is emitting light in the "first light emitting mode", when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units, it may be possible to ensure that a type of operation permission state in which a "disappearing effect display" may be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display is always occurring when the model image display is made invisible. With this configuration, even if the operating means is emitting light in the "first light emitting mode", it may be possible to recognize that a type of operation permission state in which a "disappearing effect display" may be displayed has occurred by checking the periodic change in the model image display, which is expected to maintain an interest in the game.

[Configuration 18-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation permissible state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, and when an operation on the operation means is accepted in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, a model image display modeled after the operation means can be displayed, and the operation means can be made to emit light in any of a plurality of modes including a "first light-emitting mode" and a "second light-emitting mode". In this regard, the model image display can be displayed in one of a plurality of color schemes in an operation permitted state so that a periodic change appears, and the periodic change may be displayed in a "predetermined time" unit or in a "time longer than the predetermined time" unit. When the model image display is displayed in a "time longer than the predetermined time" unit, the operation means emits light in a "first light-emitting mode" or in a "second light-emitting mode" depending on which of the plurality of color schemes the model image display is displayed in, so that it is expected to favorably maintain the interest in the game. Note that the "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 18-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 18-G. Therefore, the "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same light-emitting mode or time, or may mean different light-emitting modes or times. In addition, it may mean a different light-emitting mode with a different name for another configuration, or a "light-emitting mode" that is the same as time, or "time," or multiple operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" that is to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" as a whole having these operation units may have the configuration described in configuration 18-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the operation means may emit light in a "first light emission mode" or in a "second light emission mode", depending on which of the above-mentioned multiple color schemes the model image display is displayed in. Also, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time", the model image display is displayed in one of the above-mentioned multiple color schemes, but the operation means may emit light in the "first light emission mode" but not in the "second light emission mode". With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner, since the color scheme of the model image display cannot necessarily be confirmed just by looking at the light emission mode of the operation means.

[Configuration 19-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on the operation means is allowed, and when an operation on the operation means is accepted in this operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of operations on the operation means is accepted, a mock image display imitating the operation means can be displayed, and an acceptance allowance sound can be output which indicates that the operation means is in a state in which operations are allowed, or which suggests that the operation means is in a state in which operations are allowed. In this regard, the operation means is capable of emitting light in any of a plurality of modes including a "first light-emitting mode" and a "second light-emitting mode", the imitation image display is capable of displaying a periodic change in the operation-permitted state, and the periodic change may be displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units or in "longer than the predetermined time" units. When the operation-permitted state occurs, in either case of the periodic change of the imitation image display being displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units or the periodic change being displayed to appear in "longer than the predetermined time", the acceptance permission sound can be output, so that it is expected that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained. Note that the "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 19-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 19-G. Therefore, it may mean the same light emission mode or time as the "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", "predetermined time", or "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different light emission mode or time. Also, it may mean the same "light emission mode" or "time" as the light emission mode or time with a different name in other configurations, or a plurality of operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" having these operation units may have the configuration described in configuration 19-G as a whole.

In this case, as described below, if the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", the reception permission sound may be always output when the operation permission state occurs. Also, if the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", it may be possible that the reception permission sound is output when the operation permission state occurs and that the reception permission sound is not output. According to this configuration, when the reception permission sound is output, there are both cases where the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of "predetermined time" and where it is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", so that the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

When the reception permission sound is not output, the periodic change in the model image display may not be displayed in units of a "predetermined time". The operation means may not emit light in the "second light emission mode". With this configuration, when the reception permission sound is not output, in a situation where it is difficult to recognize that the reception of operations has become permitted, the player can concentrate only on the reception of operations without worrying about various presentation modes, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. In this case, when at least one of the conditions that the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of a "predetermined time" or the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode" is satisfied, the reception permission sound will always be output when the operation permission state occurs, so that it is less likely to forget to operate when the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of a "predetermined time" or when the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode".

[Configuration 20-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which operation is allowed for the operation means can be generated, and when an operation is accepted for the operation means in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when the operation acceptance for the operation means is accepted, a model image display simulating the operation means can be displayed, and the operation means can be made to emit light in any of a plurality of modes including a "first light-emitting mode" and a "second light-emitting mode". In this regard, the model image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the operation allowable state, and there are cases where the periodic change is displayed so that it appears in "predetermined time" units and cases where the periodic change is displayed so that it appears in "times longer than the predetermined time", and in the operation allowable state, the model image display can be made to be in a non-display state while the operation acceptance for the operation means is accepted, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when in the operation allowable state can be appropriately maintained. In addition, the "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 20-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 20-G. Therefore, they may mean the same light-emitting mode or time as the "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different light-emitting modes or times. In addition, they may mean the same "light-emitting mode" or "time" as the light-emitting mode or time with a different name in other configurations, or a plurality of operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" having these operation units may have the configuration described in the configuration 20-G as a whole.

In this case, as will be described later, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", the model image display may not be made invisible while operation acceptance on the operating means is permitted in the operation permitted state. Also, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "times longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", in the operation permitted state, there may be both cases where the model image display is made invisible while operation acceptance on the operating means is permitted, and cases where the model image display is not made invisible. According to this configuration, when the operating means is emitting light in the "first light emission mode," if the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change occurs in "predetermined time" units, the imitation image display will not be hidden while operations to the operating means are permitted. However, when the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change occurs in "times longer than the predetermined time," whether or not the imitation image display will be hidden while operations to the operating means are permitted is kept secret, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when operations to the operating means are permitted.

As will be described later, in this case, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the operating means emits light in the "second light emission mode", the model image display may not be made invisible while operations on the operating means are permitted in the operation permitted state. With this configuration, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", by checking the light emission mode of the operating means, it may be possible to recognize that the model image display will not be made invisible while operations on the operating means are permitted, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

[Configuration 21-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation permissible state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation means in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, a model image display modeling the operation means can be displayed, and the operation means can be made to emit light in any of a plurality of modes including a "first light-emitting mode" and a "second light-emitting mode", and the model image display can be displayed so as to show a periodic change, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in a predetermined time unit and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. In this regard, when the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode" in the operation permitted state, the mock image display is configured to display the periodic change in "predetermined time" units in the operation permitted state, to display the periodic change in "longer than the predetermined time" units in the operation permitted state, and to not display the mock image in the operation permitted state, so that it is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension. Note that the "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 21-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 21-G. Therefore, they may mean the same light emission mode or time as the "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different light emission modes or times. In addition, it may mean a different light-emitting mode with a different name for another configuration, or a "light-emitting mode" that is the same as time, or "time," or multiple operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" that is to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" as a whole having these operation units may have the configuration described in configuration 21-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, when the operating means emits light in the "second light emission mode" in the operation permitted state, the model image display may be displayed so that the periodic changes appear in "predetermined time" units in the operation permitted state, or may be displayed so that the periodic changes appear in "longer than the predetermined time" units in the operation permitted state, and it may be configured so that there is no case where the model image display is not displayed in the operation permitted state. With this configuration, when the operating means emits light in the "second light emission mode", the mode in which the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed is kept secret, but the model image display itself is always displayed, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

As will be described later, in this case, the operating means may be capable of emitting light in any one of a plurality of modes including the "first light emitting mode", the "second light emitting mode", and the "third light emitting mode". When the operating means emits light in the "third light emitting mode" in the operation permitted state, the model image display may be capable of displaying periodic changes in "longer than a predetermined time" units in the operation permitted state, without either the case where the model image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in "predetermined time" units in the operation permitted state or the case where the model image display is not displayed in the operation permitted state. With this configuration, when the operating means emits light in the "third light emitting mode", it is possible to suggest that the model image display will be displayed so that periodic changes appear in "longer than a predetermined time" units in the operation permitted state, which is expected to more appropriately maintain interest in the game.

As will be described later, even if the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time" in the operation permitted state, depending on the type of the operation permitted state (the display after acceptance differs depending on the type of operation permitted state), the operation means may only emit light in the first light emission mode. With this configuration, depending on the type of operation permitted state, the operation means only emits light in the first light emission mode, and it is concealed whether the imitation image display will be displayed and, when it is displayed, what periodic change it will have, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 22-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation permissible state can be generated in which acceptance of an operation on the operating means is permitted, and when an operation on the operating means is accepted in the operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of an operation on the operating means is accepted, a model image display simulating the operating means can be displayed, and a premonition display indicating in advance that operation on the operating means is accepted can be executed, and when an operation permissible state occurs, the premonition display may or may not be executed, the operating means is capable of emitting light in any of a plurality of modes including a "first light-emitting mode" and a "second light-emitting mode" in the operation permissible state, and the model image display can be displayed so as to cause a periodic change to appear in the operation permissible state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in "times longer than the predetermined time" units. In this regard, the premonition effect display can be displayed across the timing when the operation allowable state occurs, whether the periodic change of the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", or the periodic change of the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than the predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", so that it is expected to favorably maintain the interest in the game. Note that the "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 22-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 22-G. Therefore, the "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in the other configurations may mean the same light emission mode or time, or may mean a different light emission mode or time. In addition, it may mean a different light-emitting mode with a different name for another configuration, or a "light-emitting mode" that is the same as time, or "time," or a plurality of operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" that is to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" as a whole having these operation units may have the configuration described in configuration 22-G above.

In this case, as described later, in an operation permitting state in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to appear in units of a "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in a "first light emission mode", when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, the premonition display may not be made to be in a non-display state as a trigger. Also, in an operation permitting state in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to appear in units of a "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in a "first light emission mode", when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, the premonition display may be made to be in a non-display state as a trigger. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest through the periodic change in the imitation image display whether or not the premonition display is made to be in a non-display state as a trigger when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, and therefore it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition when selecting whether to accept an operation while the premonition display is displayed, or to accept an operation after the premonition display is made non-display.

As will be described later, in this case, in particular, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and an operation permitted state occurs in which the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", the premonition display may always be executed. Also, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and an operation permitted state occurs in which the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", both the premonition display may be executed and the premonition display may not be executed. With this configuration, when the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", both the premonition display may be executed and the premonition display may not be executed, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in a good manner. However, even when the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", the premonition display is always executed, so it is expected that the player is less likely to forget to operate the game, and the interest in the game will be maintained in a good manner.

In addition, the same pattern may be made to appear as the premonition display in an operation permitted state in which the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change occurs in units of a "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in a "first light emission pattern," and in which the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change occurs in units of a "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in a first light emission pattern. This configuration is expected to make it difficult to recognize which operation permitted state will occur, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

[Configuration 23-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation means in this operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, a mock image display imitating the operation means can be displayed, and a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind other image displays, and in the operation allowable state, the operation means can emit light in any of a plurality of modes including a "first light-emitting mode" and a "second light-emitting mode", and the mock image display can be displayed so as to cause a periodic change to appear in the operation allowable state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in "times longer than the predetermined time" units. In this regard, when the periodic change of the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light-emitting mode", while the operation of the operating means is permitted, the image display as the background image may be changed to an image display different from the image display that was displayed up until that point, so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than a predetermined time" in the configuration 23-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-G. Therefore, they may mean the same light-emitting mode or time as the "first light-emitting mode", "second light-emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than a predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different light-emitting modes or times. In addition, it may mean a different light-emitting mode with a different name for another configuration, or a "light-emitting mode" that is the same as time, or "time," or multiple operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" that is operated by the player, and the "operation means" as a whole having these operation units may have the configuration described in configuration 23-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, when the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change occurs in units of a predetermined time and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", the image display as the background image may not be changed to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed while operation acceptance on the operation means is permitted. Also, when the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change occurs in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", while operation acceptance on the operation means is permitted, there may be both a case where the image display as the background image is changed to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed, and a case where the image display as the background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed. According to this configuration, when light is emitted in the "first light emission mode," while operation acceptance to the operating means is permitted, whether or not the image display as the background image will change to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed is kept secret; however, if the periodic change in the simulated image display appears at predetermined time intervals, it is possible to recognize that the image display as the background image will not change to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed, and therefore it is possible to encourage operation acceptance without being aware of the possibility that such a background change may occur (without waiting for the timing for the background change to arrive).

As will be described later, in this case, even if the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode", the image display as the background image may not be changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then while operation acceptance to the operation means is permitted. According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", whether or not the image display as the background image will be changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then while operation acceptance to the operation means is permitted is concealed, but in this case, when the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode", it is possible to recognize that the image display as the background image will not be changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then, so that it is possible to encourage operation acceptance without being aware of the possibility of such a background change occurring (without waiting for the timing for the background change to occur).

In addition, when a "specific image display" is displayed as the background image and an operation permission state occurs, the periodic change in the imitation image display may be displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means may emit light in a "first light emission mode," or the periodic change in the imitation image display may be displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means may emit light in a "second light emission mode." With this configuration, when a "specific image display" is displayed as the background image, while operation acceptance on the operation means is permitted, there is a possibility that the image display as the background image will be changed to an image display different from the image display that was displayed up until that point (specific image display), but by checking the light emission mode of the operation means, it is possible to appropriately indicate whether or not this is possible.

[Configuration 24-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation permissible state in which the acceptance of an operation to the operating means is permitted can be generated, and when an operation to the operating means is accepted in the operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display in accordance with the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when the acceptance of an operation to the operating means is accepted, a model image display imitating the operating means can be displayed, and when the model image display is made invisible, a "disappearance effect display" can be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display, which makes the model image display difficult to see until the model image display is made invisible, and the model image display can be displayed in the operation permissible state so as to cause a periodic change to appear in any of a plurality of color schemes including a "first color scheme" and a "second color scheme", and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In this regard, in either case where the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" or where the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the model image display is made to be in a non-display state, a disappearance effect display as an image display different from the model image display can be displayed, so that it is expected that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained. Note that the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than a predetermined time" in the configuration 24-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 24-G. Therefore, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than a predetermined time" in the other configurations may mean the same color scheme or time, or may mean different color schemes or times. In addition, it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color schemes or times with different names associated with other configurations, or multiple operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" that is to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" as a whole having these operation units may have the configuration described in configuration 24-G above.

In this case, as described below, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and its periodic change is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time", there may be both a case where an operation permission state of a type that may cause a "disappearance effect display" to be displayed as an image display different from the model image display when the model image display is made invisible occurs, and a case where an operation permission state of a type that may not cause a "disappearance effect display" to be displayed as an image display different from the model image display occurs when the model image display is made invisible occurs. Also, when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and its periodic change is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time", there may always be a case where an operation permission state of a type that may cause a "disappearance effect display" to be displayed as an image display different from the model image display occurs when the model image display is made invisible. According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", if the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", an operation permission state of a type in which the "disappearing performance display" may be displayed is always occurring, but if the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", whether an operation permission state of a type in which the "disappearing performance display" may be displayed or an operation permission state of a type in which the "disappearing performance display" may not be displayed is occurring is concealed, so that it becomes possible to suggest whether the visibility of the aspect of the model image display (such as the color scheme) will be deteriorated by the "disappearing performance display" before the visibility of the model image display is deteriorated by the "disappearing performance display", which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even if the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", when the Moji image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in "predetermined time" units, it may be configured so that when the Moji image display is made invisible, a type of operation permission state in which a "disappearing effect display" may be displayed as an image display separate from the Moji image display is always occurring. With this configuration, even if the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", it may be possible to recognize that a type of operation permission state in which a "disappearing effect display" may be displayed has occurred by checking the periodic changes in the Moji image display, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

[Configuration 25-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, and when an operation on the operation means is accepted in this operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of operations on the operation means is accepted, a mock image display simulating the operation means can be displayed, and an acceptance acceptance sound can be output which indicates that the operation means is in a state in which operations are permitted, or that the operation means is in a state in which operations are permitted, and the mock image display can be displayed in the operation allowable state so as to cause a periodic change to appear in any of a number of color schemes including a "first color scheme" and a "second color scheme", and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in units of "times longer than a predetermined time". In this regard, when the operation permission state occurs, in either case of the case where the periodic change of the model image display is displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time" or the case where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of "longer than the predetermined time", the reception permission sound can be output, so that it is expected that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained. Note that the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 25-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-G. Therefore, they may mean the same color scheme or time as the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different color schemes or times. In addition, they may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time with a different name in other configurations, or a plurality of operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" having those operation units as a whole may have the configuration described in the configuration 25-G.

In this case, as described below, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units and the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the reception permission sound may be always output when an operation permission state occurs. Also, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in "times longer than a predetermined time" units and the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", there may be both cases where the reception permission sound is output when an operation permission state occurs and cases where the reception permission sound is not output. With this configuration, when the reception permission sound is output, there are both cases where the periodic change in the mock image display occurs in "predetermined time" units and cases where it is displayed to occur in "times longer than a predetermined time", so that the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

When the reception permission sound is not output, the periodic change in the model image display may not be displayed in a "predetermined time" unit. The model image display may not be displayed in the "second color scheme". With this configuration, when the reception permission sound is not output, in a situation where it is difficult to recognize that operation reception has become permitted, the player can concentrate only on the operation reception without worrying about various presentation modes, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game. In this case, when at least one of the conditions that the periodic change in the model image display appears in a "predetermined time" unit or the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" is satisfied, the reception permission sound is always output when an operation permission state occurs, so that it is less likely to forget to perform an operation when the periodic change in the model image display appears in a "predetermined time" unit or when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme".

[Configuration 26-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which the operation acceptance to the operation means is allowed can be generated, and when the operation acceptance to the operation means is made in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display according to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when the operation acceptance to the operation means is allowed, an imitation image display simulating the operation means can be displayed, and the imitation image display can be displayed so as to show a periodic change in one of a plurality of color schemes including a "first color scheme" and a "second color scheme" in the operation allowable state, and there are cases in which the cyclical change is displayed so as to appear in "predetermined time" units, and cases in which the cyclical change is displayed so as to appear in "times longer than the predetermined time". In this regard, since the imitation image display can be made invisible in the operation allowable state while the operation acceptance to the operation means is allowed, it is expected that the sense of tension when in the operation allowable state can be appropriately maintained. The "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 26-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 26-G. Therefore, they may mean the same color scheme or time as the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different color schemes or times. They may also mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as a differently named color scheme or time in other configurations, or a plurality of operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" having these operation units as a whole may have the configuration described in the configuration 26-G.

In this case, as will be described later, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" and the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the mock image display may not be made invisible while operation acceptance on the operation means is permitted in the operation permitted state. Also, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "times longer than a predetermined time" and the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", in the operation permitted state, there may be both cases where the mock image display is made invisible while operation acceptance on the operation means is permitted, and cases where the mock image display is not made invisible. According to this configuration, when the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme," if the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time," the mock image display will not be hidden while operations to the operating means are permitted to be accepted; however, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "times longer than a predetermined time," whether or not the mock image display will be hidden while operations to the operating means are permitted to be accepted is kept secret, which is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension when operations to the operating means are permitted to be accepted.

As will be described later, in this case, even if the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the replica image display emits light in the "second color scheme", the replica image display may not be made invisible while operations on the operation means are permitted in the operation permitted state. With this configuration, even if the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", by checking the color scheme of the replica image display, it may be possible to recognize that the replica image display will not be made invisible while operations on the operation means are permitted, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

[Configuration 27-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation permissible state can be generated in which the acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation means in this operation permissible state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when the acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, a mock image display simulating the operation means can be displayed, and a premonition display can be executed which suggests in advance that the acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, and when an operation permissible state occurs, there are cases where the premonition display is executed and cases where the premonition display is not executed, and the mock image display can be displayed in the operation permissible state so as to cause a periodic change to appear in any of a plurality of color schemes including a "first color scheme" and a "second color scheme", and there are cases where the periodic change is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units and cases where the periodic change is displayed to appear in "times longer than a predetermined time" units. In this regard, the premonition effect display can be displayed across the timing when the operation allowable state occurs, whether the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed in "predetermined time" units, or the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed in "longer than the predetermined time" units, so that it is expected to favorably maintain the interest in the game. Note that the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 27-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 27-G. Therefore, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in the other configurations may mean the same color scheme and time, or may mean different color schemes and times. In addition, it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color schemes or times with different names associated with other configurations, or multiple operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" that is to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" as a whole having these operation units may have the configuration described in configuration 27-G above.

In this case, as described later, in an operation-permitting state in which the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change appears in units of a "predetermined time" and the imitation image display is displayed in a "first color scheme", if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, the premonition display may not be made invisible as a result. Also, in an operation-permitting state in which the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change appears in units of a "time longer than a predetermined time" and the imitation image display is displayed in a "first color scheme", if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, the premonition display may be made invisible as a result. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest through the periodic change in the imitation image display whether or not the premonition display is made invisible as a result of an operation being accepted while the premonition display is displayed, and therefore it is expected that the interest in playing the game will be maintained in a good condition when selecting whether an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, or whether an operation is accepted after the premonition display is made invisible.

As will be described later, in this case, in particular, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and an operation permitted state occurs in which the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the premonition display may always be executed. Also, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and an operation permitted state occurs in which the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", both the premonition display may be executed and the premonition display may not be executed. With this configuration, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", both the premonition display may be executed and the premonition display may not be executed, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in a favorable manner. However, even when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", the premonition display is always executed, so it is expected that the player is less likely to forget to operate, and the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, the same appearance may be made as the premonition display in an operation permitted state in which the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of a "predetermined time" and the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", and in an operation permitted state in which the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of a "time longer than a predetermined time" and the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme". With such a configuration, it is expected that tension will be maintained in an optimal manner by making it difficult to recognize which operation permitted state will occur.

[Configuration 28-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on the operating means is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operating means in this operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when acceptance of operations on the operating means is permitted, a mock image display imitating the operating means can be displayed, and a background image can be displayed so as to be seen behind other image displays, and the mock image display can be displayed in the operation allowable state so as to cause a periodic change to appear in any of a number of color schemes including a "first color scheme" and a "second color scheme", and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in "time units longer than a predetermined time". In this regard, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the image display as the background image may be changed to an image display different from the image display that was displayed until then while the operation acceptance to the operation means is permitted, so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than a predetermined time" in the configuration 28-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 28-G. Therefore, they may mean the same color scheme or time as the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than a predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different color schemes or times. In addition, they may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time with a different name in other configurations, or a plurality of operation units may be prepared as the "operation means" to be operated by the player, and the "operation means" having those operation units as a whole may have the configuration described in the configuration 28-G.

In this case, as will be described later, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" and the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the image display as the background image may not be changed to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed while operation acceptance on the operation means is permitted. Also, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", while operation acceptance on the operation means is permitted, there may be both a case where the image display as the background image is changed to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed and a case where the image display as the background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed. According to this configuration, when the imitation image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", while operation acceptance to the operating means is permitted, it is difficult to recognize whether the image display as the background image will change to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed. However, when the imitation image display is made to change periodically at a predetermined time interval, it is possible to recognize that the image display as the background image will not change to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed, and therefore it is possible to encourage operation acceptance without being aware of the possibility that such a background change may occur (without waiting for the timing for the background change to arrive).

As will be described later, in this case, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", the image display as the background image may not be changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then while operation acceptance to the operation means is permitted. According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is difficult to recognize whether the image display as the background image will be changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then while operation acceptance to the operation means is permitted. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", it is possible to recognize that the image display as the background image will not be changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then, so that it is possible to encourage operation acceptance without being aware of the possibility of such a background change occurring (without waiting for the timing for the background change to occur).

In addition, when a "specific image display" is displayed as the background image and an operation permitted state occurs, the periodic change in the model image display may be displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the model image display may be displayed in a "first color scheme", or the periodic change in the model image display may be displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the model image display may be displayed in a "second color scheme". With this configuration, when a "specific image display" is displayed as the background image, while operation acceptance on the operating means is permitted, there is a possibility that the image display as the background image may be changed to an image display different from the image display that was displayed up until that point (specific image display), but by checking the light emission state of the operating means, it is possible to appropriately indicate whether or not this is possible.

[Configuration 29-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation allowance state can be generated in which acceptance of operations on a "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times, and when an operation is accepted on the "specific operation unit" in the multiple operation allowance state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and an imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and in the multiple operation allowance state, the imitation image display may be displayed so that a periodic change appears in "predetermined time" units, may be displayed so that the periodic change appears in "times longer than a predetermined time", or may not be displayed so that the periodic change appears. In this regard, the multiple operation allowable state may occur as a "first type of multiple operation allowable state" in which the multiple operation allowable state may be terminated when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit" and may occur as a "second type of multiple operation allowable state" in which the multiple operation allowable state may not be terminated when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit", so that it is expected that the sense of tension during the multiple operation allowable state is preferably maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit", "predetermined time", "time longer than the predetermined time", "first type of multiple operation allowable state", and "second type of multiple operation allowable state" in the configuration 29-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 29-G. Therefore, the "specific operation unit", "predetermined time", "time longer than the predetermined time", "first type of multiple operation allowable state", and "second type of multiple operation allowable state" in the other configurations may mean the same operation unit, time, and operation allowable state, or may mean a different operation unit, time, and operation allowable state. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit,""time," and "operation permitted state" as the operation unit, time, and operation permitted state of other configurations with different names.

In this case, as will be described later, if the imitation image display is not displayed so as to cause a periodic change to occur, the multiple operation permitted state will not occur as a "first type of multiple operation permitted state" but will always occur as a "second type of multiple operation permitted state." With this configuration, if the imitation image display is not displayed so as to cause a periodic change to occur, it is possible to recognize that the multiple operation permitted state will not end no matter how many operations are performed, so it is expected that games can be provided without the tension of "having to operate multiple times to end the multiple operation permitted state."

In addition, when the mock image display is displayed so that a periodic change in the mock image display appears, it is difficult to recognize whether the multiple operation permission state is a "first type of multiple operation permission state" or a "second type of multiple operation permission state," which is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, even if the model image display is displayed to show periodic changes, if the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the multiple operation permitted state may always occur as a "second type of multiple operation permitted state" without occurring as a "first type of multiple operation permitted state". With this configuration, if the model image display is displayed to show periodic changes in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is possible to recognize that no matter how many operations are performed, the multiple operation permitted state will not end, and it is expected that games will be provided without the tension of "having to operate multiple times to end the multiple operation permitted state".

[Configuration 30-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation allowable state can be generated in which the operation reception to the "specific operation unit" is allowed multiple times, and when an operation is received to the "specific operation unit" in the multiple operation allowable state, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and a model image display modeled after the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and the model image display may be displayed in a manner that causes a periodic change to appear in the multiple operation allowable state, or may not be displayed in a manner that causes the periodic change to appear. In this regard, in the multiple operation allowable state, since there are cases in which the post-reception display is displayed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, and cases in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the specific operation unit is maintained in an operated state, it is expected that the sense of tension when in the multiple operation allowable state can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit" and the like in the configuration 30-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 30-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation unit as the "specific operation unit" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation unit. Also, it may mean the same "operation unit" as an operation unit with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation permitted state in which the model image display is not displayed to show periodic changes, the post-acceptance display may be made to be displayed multiple times simply by keeping the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. With this configuration, when the model image display is not displayed to show periodic changes, the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is always enabled, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension while suppressing a decline in interest in the game when the display is not made.

In addition, in a "multiple operation permitted state" in which the imitation image display is displayed to show periodic changes, there may be both cases in which the post-acceptance display is displayed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, and cases in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state. With this configuration, when the imitation image display is displayed to show periodic changes, it is difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto-repeated-tap function is enabled, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, among the "multiple operation permitted states" in which the model image display is displayed so as to show periodic changes, in the "multiple operation permitted states" in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is kept in an operated state, the model image display may be displayed so that the periodic changes appear in a longer time unit than in the "multiple operation permitted states" in which the post-acceptance display is always executed multiple times simply by keeping the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. With this configuration, since it is necessary to take time to determine whether the periodic changes are fast or slow, it becomes possible to make it impossible to immediately recognize whether the so-called auto-tap function is enabled or not after the model image display is displayed. This makes it possible to encourage the user to try out the auto-tap function until it is possible to determine whether the periodic changes are fast or slow, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 31-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state can be generated in which the acceptance of an operation to a "specific operation unit" is permitted, and when an operation to the "specific operation unit" is accepted in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when the acceptance of an operation to the "specific operation unit" is accepted, an imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and the operation allowable state can be generated as a "single operation allowable state" in which the acceptance of an operation to the "specific operation unit" is accepted only once, or as a "multiple operation allowable state" in which the acceptance of an operation to the "specific operation unit" is accepted multiple times, and the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in any of a number of color schemes including the "specific color scheme" in the operation allowable state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In this regard, when the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change appears in units of "predetermined time", the operation allowable state can occur as a "multiple operation allowable state", and when the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change appears in units of "longer than the predetermined time", the operation allowable state can occur as a "single operation allowable state", which can improve the interest in the game. Note that the "specific operation unit", "specific color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 31-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 31-G. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit, color scheme, and time as the "specific operation unit", "specific color scheme", "predetermined time", and "longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation units, color schemes, and times. They may also mean the same "operation unit", "color scheme", and "time" as the operation unit, color scheme, and time with different names in the other configurations.

In this case, as described later, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", the operation permitted state may not occur as a "single operation permitted state" but may always occur as a "multiple operation permitted state". Also, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the operation permitted state may occur both as a "single operation permitted state" and as a "multiple operation permitted state". According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", it is possible to recognize that the operation permitted state will occur as a "multiple operation permitted state", so that it is possible to encourage multiple operations from a relatively early stage. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is difficult to recognize whether the operation permitted state will occur as a "single operation permitted state" or a "multiple operation permitted state", so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time", the model image display can be displayed in a "specific color scheme", but when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", if the model image display is displayed in a "specific color scheme", the operation permitted state may not occur as a "multiple operation permitted state" but may always occur as a "single operation permitted state". In other words, as described above, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is basically difficult to recognize whether the operation permitted state occurs as a "single operation permitted state" or a "multiple operation permitted state". However, in this case, when the model image display is displayed in a "specific color scheme," the "single operation permitted state" always occurs, which is the opposite of when the model image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in "predetermined time" units (where multiple operation permitted state always occurs), and this is expected to add a touch of directorial interest and maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 32-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the acceptance of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted, a mock image display imitating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and an acceptance permission sound can be outputted which indicates that the "specific operation unit" is in a state in which an operation is permitted, or that the "specific operation unit" is in a state in which an operation is permitted. The operation permission state may occur as a "single operation permission state" in which the acceptance of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted only once, or as a "multiple operation permission state" in which the acceptance of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times. The imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the operation permitted state, and the periodic change may be displayed so as to appear in "predetermined time" units, or the periodic change may be displayed so as to appear in "times longer than the predetermined time", and when the imitation image display is displayed so as to appear in "predetermined time" units, the operation permitted state can occur as a "multiple operation permitted state", and when the imitation image display is displayed so as to appear in "times longer than the predetermined time", the operation permitted state can occur as a "single operation permitted state". In this regard, when the operation permitted state occurs, in either case of the case where the imitation image display is displayed so as to appear in "predetermined time" units, or the case where the imitation image display is displayed so as to appear in "times longer than the predetermined time", since the acceptance permission sound can be output, it can be expected that interest in the game can be favorably maintained. The "specific operation unit", "specific color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the specified time" in the configuration 32-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 31-G. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or time as the "specific operation unit", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the specified time" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or time. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "time" as an operation unit with a different name or time in other configurations.

In this case, as described later, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", the operation permitted state may not occur as a "single operation permitted state" but may always occur as a "multiple operation permitted state". Also, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the operation permitted state may occur both as a "single operation permitted state" and as a "multiple operation permitted state". According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", it is possible to recognize that the operation permitted state will occur as a "multiple operation permitted state", so that it is possible to encourage multiple operations from a relatively early stage. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is difficult to recognize whether the operation permitted state will occur as a "single operation permitted state" or a "multiple operation permitted state", so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time", the reception permission sound can be output in a "specific manner", but when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the reception permission sound is output in a "specific manner", the operation permission state may not occur as a "multiple operation permission state" but may always occur as a "single operation permission state". In other words, as described above, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is basically difficult to recognize whether the operation permission state occurs in a "single operation permission state" or a "multiple operation permission state". However, in this case, when the reception permission sound is output in a "specific manner", the "single operation permission state" always occurs, which is the opposite of when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" (where the multiple operation permission state always occurs), so that it is expected to add a sense of directorial interest and maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 33-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation allowable state in which the acceptance of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted can be generated, and when an operation for the "specific operation unit" is accepted in the operation allowable state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed, and when the operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is accepted, a mock image display imitating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and a premonition display suggesting in advance that the operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is accepted can be displayed. The operation allowable state may occur as a "one-time operation allowable state" in which the operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is accepted only once, or as a "one-time operation allowable state" in which the operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is accepted once. In some cases, the operation is permitted multiple times, and the replica image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the operation permitting state, and the periodic change may be displayed so that it appears in a "predetermined time" unit, or the periodic change may be displayed so that it appears in a "time longer than the predetermined time" unit. When the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed so that it appears in a "predetermined time" unit, the operation permitting state can occur as a "multiple operation permitting state," and when the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed so that it appears in a "time longer than the predetermined time" unit, the operation permitting state can occur as a "single operation permitting state." In this regard, when the operation permitting state occurs, in either case of the case where the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed so that it appears in a "predetermined time" unit, or the case where it is displayed so that it appears in a "time longer than the predetermined time," the premonition effect display can be displayed, and therefore it can be expected that interest in the game can be favorably maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the specified time" in the configuration 33-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 33-G. Therefore, they may mean the same operation unit or time as the "specific operation unit", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the specified time" in other configurations, or they may mean a different operation unit or time. They may also mean the same "operation unit" or "time" as an operation unit with a different name or time in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", the operation permitted state may not occur as a "single operation permitted state" but may always occur as a "multiple operation permitted state". Also, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the operation permitted state may occur both as a "single operation permitted state" and as a "multiple operation permitted state". According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", it is possible to recognize that the operation permitted state will occur as a "multiple operation permitted state", so that it is possible to encourage multiple operations from a relatively early stage. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is difficult to recognize whether the operation permitted state will occur as a "single operation permitted state" or a "multiple operation permitted state", so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of a "predetermined time", the premonition display can be displayed in a "specific manner", but when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of a "longer than a predetermined time", the operation allowance state may not occur as a "multiple operation allowance state" and may always occur as a "single operation allowance state". In other words, as described above, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of a "longer than a predetermined time", it is basically difficult to recognize whether the operation allowance state occurs as a "single operation allowance state" or a "multiple operation allowance state". However, in this case, when the premonition display is displayed in a "specific manner", the "single operation allowance state" always occurs, which is the opposite of when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of a "predetermined time" (where the multiple operation allowance state always occurs), so that it is expected to add a sense of excitement in terms of presentation and maintain a good sense of tension.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related display related to the occurrence of the acceptance allowance period (for example, a model image display modeled on the operation receiving unit, or an image displayed with the occurrence of a valid period (ally character, enemy character, etc.)) is displayed. For example, the model image display may be displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) that occurs when the pattern performance progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) that occurs as a result of a notice judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance.

Note that such operation-related displays are as described with reference to Figures 144 to 160, or as other examples or modified examples thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as operation-related displays, and they are similarly designed to be displayed in one of these modes. However, such model image displays do not necessarily have to be displayed as integrated model image displays integrated with the peripheral decoration image.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related sound (such as an acceptance allowance sound) related to the occurrence of the acceptance allowance period may be audibly output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptance allowance sound" refers to a sound that, when the output of the sound starts, will necessarily cause an acceptance allowance period (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or a sound that is already in a state where an acceptance allowance period (acceptance period) has occurred. In other words, the "acceptance allowance sound" suggests that an operation acceptance state has been entered, or will be entered, and can be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the acceptance allowance period (acceptance period) is being performed.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple acceptance allowable periods (operation allowable states) with different types (e.g., conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc.) of post-acceptance changes (e.g., post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.) that appear when an acceptance is made. Each acceptance allowable period (operation allowable state) has a respective occurrence condition, and when any one of these occurrence conditions is met, an acceptance allowable period (operation allowable state) of a type corresponding to the occurrence condition that has been met can occur.

Also, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple operation units (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) that receive operation by the player. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example is capable of generating an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which not only one operation unit, but several (multiple) operation units are permitted to be in an operation acceptance state. However, this configuration is not essential.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 including the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-G" to "Configuration 33-G" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, when realizing these inventions, it is only necessary to select and partially include only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired action and effect from each of the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to include all of them. For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (target action and effect), it may be a machine in which the acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which several (multiple) operation units are acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state (acceptance period during which only one operation unit is acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state) does not necessarily occur, it may not have an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting multiple operations, it may not have an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting only one operation, or it may not have an automatic button function or an auto-repeated function that is not enabled. Also, with reference to FIG. 351, it is not necessary to include each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods, or it may be a machine in which only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired action and effect are appropriately selected and partially included from each of the configurations. In other words, for each of the configurations described in the specification below, when it is desired to obtain an additional effect in addition to any one of the above "Configuration 1-G" to "Configuration 33-G," it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the corresponding configuration.

First, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "1G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 352 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "1G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 1G" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 353 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "1G reception permitted state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Figure 354 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "1G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "first G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "first G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the first G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the first G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "first G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 352(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "first G variable pattern", the first G reception permissible state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 354(b)) in which "operation acceptance to the first G operation unit regarding changes after first G acceptance (display after first G acceptance, sound output after first G acceptance, etc.)" is accepted based on the arrival of timing tGa2 when the first G time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 1G").

Here, in the first G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "first G operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and only one operation reception is permitted until the first G reception permission state is ended.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates such a 1G reception permission state, it is first possible to execute a "1G premonition display" that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when timing tGa1 arrives before the occurrence of the 1st G reception permission state, as shown in FIG. 352(f) and FIG. 354(a), a specific premonition display ZET is executed as the above-mentioned "1st G premonition presentation display." This "1st G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 1st G operation-related display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 352(c), (f) and FIG. 354(a), (b).

That is, in this presentation example, when the first G reception allowable state occurs, as shown in FIG. 352(g) and FIG. 354(b), (c), etc., the state is such that reception of operations to the first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, or as the first G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted, at least an imitation image display MG-G1 that imitates the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the first G operation unit) is displayed. Note that in this presentation example, the timing at which the first G reception allowable state occurs and the timing at which the "first G operation-related display" is displayed are the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "first G operation-related display" may be displayed after the timing at which the "first G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing at which the first G reception allowable state occurs, so that it is displayed in a manner that spans the timing. Alternatively, the "first G operation related display" may start to be displayed with a delay from the timing when the first G reception permission state occurs.

Here, the "imitation image display" that imitates the object of operation by the player is capable of being displayed as an "image display that may show periodic changes" when the player is given the opportunity to operate, and various modes are available for the manner in which it is displayed depending on the type of acceptance permission state.

For example, the "mock image display" can be displayed as an image with different forms, color schemes, and periodic changes depending on the type of operation object to which an operation opportunity is given. Even if the operation object to which an operation opportunity is given is the same, multiple color schemes may be prepared for the color scheme, and multiple times may be prepared for the time required for the periodic change.

In this regard, the "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the 1G reception permission state is always designed to use a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme, and is displayed in this "predetermined color scheme."

The "imitation image display MG-G1" corresponding to the first G reception state is a periodic change in which, when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)," the periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 1G time. This period of 1G time is set as a longer time (longer cycle) than the "period of 5G time," "period of 7G time," and "period of 8G time" displayed in the fifth G reception state, seventh G reception state, and eighth G reception state, which will be described later, so that in the first G reception state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the fifth G reception state, seventh G reception state, and eighth G reception state, which will be described later.

When the "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the first G reception permissible state is started to be displayed before the timing tGa2 at which the first G reception permissible state occurs, it is desirable to have the periodic change not start until the timing tGa2. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the first G reception permissible state is displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until the timing tGa2 arrives.

In addition, in the first G reception permitted state in this example, the above-mentioned "first G operation related display" includes, as shown in Figs. 354(b) and (c), a mock image display MG-G1, as well as a message display (here, message display MS-G1 displayed as "Press!") related to the reception of operations on the first G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

In this example, the "first G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1)" corresponding to the first G reception-permitted state begins to be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the specific premonition display ZET, which is displayed as a "first G premonition performance display," as shown in FIG. 354(b). Note that the display range of the specific premonition display ZET (the range that makes the first G operation-related display difficult to see) is reduced over time.

As a result of the display range of the first G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) shrinking in this way, when the first G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) is hidden, the entire picture of the "first G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1)" becomes clearly visible, and in this situation, it becomes possible for operations to be accepted on the first G operation unit (here, operation button 410). However, the first G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) may be made to continue to be displayed for the entire period from when the first G acceptance-permitting state occurs until it ends.

However, in the examples shown in Figures 352 and 354, it is assumed that an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the first G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed at timing tGa2A in the first G acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 354 (b)).

In this regard, the first G reception permission state in this example is such that when an operation is received on the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" while the first G premonition display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed, this triggers the first G premonition display (specific premonition display ZET) to be put into a non-display state. Note that in this example, as shown in FIG. 352(f), when an operation is received on the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" while the first G premonition display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed, this triggers the first G premonition display (specific premonition display ZET) to be put into a non-display state immediately, but the first G premonition display (specific premonition display ZET) may be put into a non-display state at a later timing, such as the timing when the model image display MG is put into a non-display state, which will be described later.

Therefore, when an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGa2A (presentation status shown in FIG. 354(b)) within the first G acceptance allowance state, as shown in FIG. 352 and FIG. 354(c), the first G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET) is made invisible in response to the operation acceptance, and a "change after first G acceptance (presentation after first G acceptance)" occurs in response to the operation acceptance.

When the first G reception permission state according to this example occurs, an ally character according to the type of the first G reception permission state (here, an ally character YS-G1 equipped with a sword) and an enemy character according to the type of the first G reception permission state (here, an enemy character BOSS-G1 depicted as a goblin) are displayed. That is, the "change after first G reception (performance after first G reception)" corresponding to the first G reception permission state can suggest whether the expectation of a big hit is high or low depending on whether the enemy character BOSS-G1 can be defeated, and when an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)," the performance can progress to one in which the "ally character YS-G1" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G1."

For example, as for such a "change after 1st G reception (performance after 1st G reception)", first, in response to the reception of an operation on the 1st G operation unit (operation button 410), the 1st G reception permission state is terminated (see Fig. 352 (b) and (c)), and the mock image display MG-G1 and the message display MS-G1 are made invisible (see Fig. 352 (g) and Fig. 354 (c) and (d)). Also, as shown in Fig. 352 (j) and (m) and Fig. 354 (c), a "sound output after 1st G reception" in response to the reception of an operation on the "1st G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "display after 1st G reception UG1" in response to the reception of an operation on the "1st G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

However, in this example, a predetermined waiting time is set between when an operation is accepted in the first G reception allowing state and when the model image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 are made invisible as a result of this. Therefore, although the model image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 are made invisible as a result of an operation being accepted in the first G reception allowing state, they are not made invisible immediately after the operation is accepted, but can continue to be displayed for the predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, for example, in other reception-permitting states described below, a disappearing EF display that makes it difficult to see the model image display MG or the message display MS may be displayed before they are hidden. However, when an operation is accepted in the first G reception-permitting state, a disappearing EF display that makes it difficult to see the model image display MG-G1 or the message display MS-G1 is not displayed before they are hidden. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted in the first G reception-permitting state and the "first G post-reception display UG1" corresponding to the operation acceptance starts to be displayed, the model image display MG and the message display MS are in a state where they can be easily seen, as shown in FIG. 354(c), and the model image display MG continues to change periodically.

Here, the "first G post-acceptance display UG1" first depicts "ally character YS-G1" swinging his sword down to attack "enemy character BOSS-G1", as shown in Figure 354(c). Next, as shown in Figure 354(d), the "enemy character BOSS-G1" is depicted receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G1". Next, as shown in Figure 354(e), a result is displayed as to whether or not "enemy character BOSS-G1" was defeated. In the example shown in FIG. 354(e), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G1" being defeated appears, suggesting high expectations, but the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G1" not being defeated (a depiction suggesting low expectations) appears depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G1" being defeated always appears.

As described above, when the "first G post-reception display UG1" is displayed in this manner, a "first G post-reception output sound" is audibly output in response to the reception of an operation on the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," as shown in Figures 352 (j) and (m).

However, with regard to the above-mentioned "first G reception output sound", even if one mode (for example, the mode shown in Fig. 354 (c) to (e)) is displayed as the "first G reception display UG1", there are both cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception. That is, in this case, even if the same mode (for example, a depiction of defeating the enemy character BOSS-G1) is executed as the "first G reception display UG1", there are cases where the "first G reception output sound" is audibly output and cases where the "first G reception output sound" is not audibly output. Therefore, when an operation is performed without looking at the game board side performance display device 1600, it is not possible to determine whether the operation reception is in a proper state, and the tension after the operation reception can be appropriately maintained. In this example, whether or not the "first G reception output sound" is audibly output is determined by a lottery such as a performance judgment, but the method of realizing this is not limited to this. However, "when an audible output is made based on operation acceptance" and "when an audible output is not made based on operation acceptance" both refer to situations where the game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and a configuration in which the "output sound after 1st G acceptance" is not audibly output when some kind of abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing goes against the intent of the technical concept and should be eliminated.

However, when such a post-acceptance display is displayed, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease if other effects or background images unrelated to the acceptance status are made difficult to see, or if the post-acceptance display appears in a form different from what the player desires.

Therefore, in the first G reception permission state according to this embodiment, if a specific condition is met while the "first G reception post-display UG1" corresponding to the first G reception permission state is displayed, this triggers the "first G reception post-display UG1" to be put into a non-display state. With this configuration, if the "first G reception post-display UG1" is displayed but the player does not want this to happen, the "first G reception post-display UG1" can be put into a non-display state, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In order to achieve the objective of "hiding the display when the player does not want it to be displayed", it is desirable to set the above-mentioned "specific condition" for hiding the display during the execution of not only the "first G post-acceptance display UG1" but also the "post-acceptance display" as a "condition that can be established in relation to the player's action". In this case, for example, the condition may be a condition that is satisfied based on the detection (operation acceptance) of an operation on the operation means (which may be an operation (action) on the operation means that triggered the execution of the post-acceptance display, or an operation (action) on an operation means different from the operation means that triggered the execution of the post-acceptance display), a condition that is satisfied based on the detection of the player's action and the determination that the action is a predetermined action (for example, the action of putting hands together), a condition that is satisfied based on a lottery (performance judgment) being performed due to some operation or action by the player and a predetermined result being obtained in this lottery (performance judgment), etc. Or, a condition that is satisfied based on the player performing some action (operation) in a predetermined game (mini-game) or the like, and the predetermined condition being satisfied.

In this presentation example, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 352(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGa2B (presentation status shown in Figure 354(c)) during the period when the "1st G acceptance display UG1" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is met at timing tGa2B (the performance status shown in FIG. 354(c)), the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the non-display of the "1st G post-acceptance display UG1" as shown in FIG. 352(g), (i), (l) and FIG. 354(f). At this time, a "specific display SK" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is displayed, and a "specific sound" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is audibly output.

In this example, the "specific display SK" is displayed in a mode such as "The button performance was ended midway" (see FIG. 354(f)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and multiple modes may be prepared and the display may be made in any of those modes. Also, unlike the "sound output after first G reception," the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGa2B (the performance status shown in FIG. 354(c)). The "specific sound" may also be prepared in multiple modes and may be audibly output in any of those modes. The "specific sound" and the "sound output after first G reception" are audibly output as sounds in different modes.

As described above, in the first G reception permission state of this embodiment, a predetermined waiting time is set between the reception of an operation to the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and the moment when the model image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 are hidden. In this regard, this performance example assumes that the specific condition is met at timing tGa2B (performance situation shown in FIG. 354) when the model image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 have not yet been hidden and are still in a displayed state.

In other words, in this case, the model image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 are not displayed when the specific condition is met, as shown in Figures 352(g) and 354(f), without waiting for the specified waiting time to elapse. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly end the display state of not only the "first G reception post-display UG1", but also the model image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In this example, while the first G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGa3 at which the first G reception permission state ends is reached is depicted decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 353(c), the first G reception allowing state is originally continued until the timing tGa3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and is terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGa3. In this regard, the first G reception allowing state occurs as a reception allowing state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 353, when there is no operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" until the timing tGa3 arrives in the first G reception allowing state, the first G reception allowing state is simply terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGa3, and the first G post-reception change (first G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed to the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is not executed.

The first G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is provided so that it can emit light in one of a number of color schemes, including the "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and the "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, when the first G reception allowance state occurs, as shown in FIG. 352(e) and FIG. 353(e), the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the object of operation can emit light only in the "first light-emitting mode". This "first light-emitting mode" continues until the arrival of timing tGa3 at which the first G reception allowance state ends when no operation is accepted in the first G reception allowance state (see FIG. 353(e)), but when an operation is accepted in the first G reception allowance state, this triggers the non-emission state (see FIG. 352(e)).

In addition, when the first G reception permissible state occurs, an "permissible sound A (normal mode)" can be audibly output as a first G reception permissible sound indicating that operation reception is permitted or will be permitted (see Figs. 352 and 353). In this regard, in the first G reception permissible state, as shown in Fig. 352(k), even if an operation is received on the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the reception permissible sound (first G reception permissible sound) is being audibly output, this will not be used as a trigger to interrupt the reception permissible sound, and even if a specific condition is met, this will not be used as a trigger to interrupt the reception permissible sound.

Incidentally, the "reception acceptable sound" is different from the sound (premonition performance sound) that is output in response to a premonition performance display. Since the "premonition performance sound" is output in response to a premonition performance display, it is usually output prior to the reception acceptable sound. Therefore, while the form of the "premonition performance sound" as an output sound changes depending on the form of the premonition performance display, the "reception acceptable sound" can be output in a specific (one) form regardless of the form of the premonition performance display.

As described above, with regard to the "first G reception post-output sound", when the first mode (e.g., the mode shown in Fig. 354 (c) to (e)) is displayed as the "first G reception post-display UG1", there are cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception. However, when the second mode (e.g., a mode suggesting low expectation) is displayed as the "first G reception post-display UG1", an audible output may always be made based on the operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410). With this configuration, depending on which mode is displayed as the "first G reception post-display UG1", there are cases where the "first G reception post-output sound" is always audibly output and cases where the "first G reception post-output sound" is not always audibly output, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when an operation is received will be more appropriately maintained. The "first G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which aspect is displayed as the "first G post-reception display UG1," or it may be audibly output as the same sound regardless of which aspect is displayed.

In addition, when the first G reception permission state occurs, the reception permission sound may not necessarily be audibly output. Also, the first G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) and message display MS-G1 may not necessarily be executed. Also, when an operation is accepted in the first G reception permission state, it is sufficient if some post-acceptance change occurs, and for example, the "first G post-acceptance display UG1" and the "first G post-acceptance output sound" may not necessarily be executed.

As described above, when the first G reception allowing state occurs, if a specific condition is met while the "first G reception post display UG1" corresponding to the first G reception allowing state is displayed, this triggers the "first G reception post display UG1" to be hidden. In this regard, when a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the first G reception allowing state, this may be used as a trigger to cause the model image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 to be hidden. With this configuration, if the player does not want the button effects themselves, it is possible to make the various displays related to the button effects invisible, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, however, the model image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 may be hidden, but the state in which operation is permitted for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" may continue. With this configuration, various displays related to the button effects are hidden, but the state in which operation is permitted continues, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

Note that when a specific condition is met in a state where no operation has yet been accepted in the 1G acceptance permitted state, and various displays related to the button performance (mock image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) are made invisible as a result of this, when an operation is accepted for the "1G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the "1G post-acceptance display UG1" will be displayed as a result of this acceptance of operation. However, in this case, the "1G post-acceptance output sound" may not be audibly output. With this configuration, when the various displays related to the button effects (mock image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) are hidden due to the establishment of a specific condition, the state in which acceptance of operations to the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is permitted continues, but even if an operation is accepted while in this hidden state, the "first G post-acceptance output sound" is not audibly output, and the "first G post-acceptance display UG1" is merely displayed without any sound triggered by such operation acceptance being audibly output (the performance is reduced), which encourages careful consideration as to whether or not to establish the specific condition and creates an ideal sense of tension.

In addition, when a specific condition is met in a state where no operation has yet been accepted in the first G reception-permitted state, and various displays related to the button performance (mock image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) are hidden as a result of this, an operation is accepted on the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," and when the specific condition is met again while the "first G post-reception display UG1" is being displayed as a result of this operation acceptance, this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "first G post-reception display UG1" from being hidden. With this configuration, when the specific condition is met again, this does not cause the "first G post-reception display UG1" to be hidden as a result, which encourages further deliberation as to whether or not to satisfy the specific condition, and can appropriately create a sense of tension.

Here, the above-mentioned first G reception permission state (see Figures 352 to 354) may instead be generated as a "first G reception permission state according to a modified example" described below.

Figures 355 and 356 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 1G" as the occurrence condition and the player performs an operation. Figure 357 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs and the player does not perform an operation. Figures 358 and 359 are diagrams showing an example of the presentation content when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs. Note that, as a pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state" and the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" described below may be generated as reception permission states of different types. However, in this case, the occurrence conditions thereof are set as different conditions. In this case, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound may also be executed as different types (modes).

The "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" is basically the same as the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state", and occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled, as shown in FIG. 357. However, as shown in FIG. 357, it differs from the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state" in that a "section in which the model image display MG-G1 is not displayed (non-display section)" appears midway through the valid period (operation permission state) (timing Xg in the figure).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 357, when the timing Xg in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" arrives, this triggers the model image display MG-G1 to be put into a non-display state, but at this time, the background of the "background image display" is changed (the first background image HK-G1 is replaced by the second background image HK-G2). However, at this time, the disappearance EF display is not displayed as the model image display MG-G1 is put into a non-display state.

Below, we will explain in detail what happens when an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in this "first G acceptance state according to the modified example," but configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as those in the above-mentioned "first G acceptance state (Figures 352 to 354)" (including other examples).

That is, as shown in FIG. 355(c), the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs based on the arrival of timing tGa2 (based on the satisfaction of "condition 1G"), similar to the above-described "first G reception permission state (FIGS. 352 to 354)," and is similar to the above-described "first G reception permission state (FIGS. 352 to 354)" in that the "first G operation unit" for which reception of an operation is permitted is set as the above-described operation button 410, and that reception of that operation is permitted only once.

Similarly, in pachinko machine 1, when generating such a "first G reception permission state according to the modified example," it is first possible to execute a "first G premonition effect display" that suggests to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when the timing tGa1 arrives before the occurrence of the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example," a specific premonition display ZET is started to be executed as the above-mentioned "first G premonition presentation display," as shown in FIG. 355(f) and FIG. 358(a). This "first G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the first G operation-related display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 355(c), (f) and FIG. 358(a), (b).

In other words, in this presentation example, when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, as shown in Figure 355 (g) and Figures 358 (b) and (c), the state becomes one in which reception of operations to the first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, or at least a model image display MG-G1 modeling the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the first G operation unit) is displayed as a first G operation-related display that can only appear when reception of such operations is permitted.

In this regard, the "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" is always colored in a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" just like the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state," and is displayed in this "predetermined color scheme."

In addition, when the "imitation image display MG-G1" corresponding to the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" is a periodic change in which a moving image of a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)," the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 1G time. This period of 1G time is set as a longer time (longer cycle) than the "period of 5G time," "period of 7G time," and "period of 8G time" displayed in the fifth G reception permission state, seventh G reception permission state, and eighth G reception permission state described below, so in the first G reception permission state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the fifth G reception permission state, seventh G reception permission state, and eighth G reception permission state described below.

Also, in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example," as shown in Figs. 358(b) and (c), the above-mentioned "first G operation-related display" includes, in addition to the mock image display MG-G1, a message display (here, the message display MS-G1 displayed as "Press!") related to the reception of operations on the first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), etc.

In this example, the "first G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1)" corresponding to the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" begins to be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the specific premonition display ZET while the specific premonition display ZET is displayed as the "first G premonition performance display," as shown in FIG. 358(b). Note that the display range of the specific premonition display ZET (the range that makes the first G operation-related display difficult to see) is reduced over time.

As a result of the display range of the first G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) shrinking in this way, when the first G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is hidden, the entirety of the "first G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1)" becomes clearly visible, and in this situation, it becomes possible to accept operations to the first G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

As described above, in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example," a "period in which the model image display MG-G1 is displayed (display period)" and a "period in which the model image display MG-G1 is not displayed (non-display period)" appear in sequence. In this regard, when an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "period in which the model image display MG-G1 is displayed (display period)" of the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example," and a specific condition is satisfied while the "first G post-reception display UG1" corresponding to the operation acceptance is being displayed, the content of the change (and further, another example thereof) that occurs as a result of this has been described above with reference to Figures 352 and 354, and therefore will not be described here.

The examples shown in Fig. 355 and Fig. 358(c) and (d) are based on the assumption that no operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G1 is displayed" in the "first G acceptance permission state according to the modified example". In other words, the examples shown in Fig. 355 and Fig. 358(c) and (d) are based on the assumption that, after the state transition from the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G1 is displayed" to the "section (non-display section) in which the model image display MG-G1 is not displayed" based on the arrival of the timing Xg, an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" while the first G premonition display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed at timing tGa2a (the performance situation shown in Fig. 358(d)) in the "section (non-display section) in which the model image display MG-G1 is not displayed".

In this example, as shown in FIG. 355 and FIG. 358(c) and (d), in the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G1 is displayed", the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as the "background image display". However, when the timing Xg arrives, a background change occurs and the "background image display" changes from the first background image HK-G1 to the second background image HK-G2. Also, in this example, when the timing Xg arrives, not only is the model image display MG-G1 made invisible, but the message display MS-G1 is also made invisible. However, as described above, at this time, the disappearance EF display that accompanies the model image display MG-G1 being made invisible is not displayed.

In this regard, the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" is also configured such that when an operation is received on the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the first G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed, this is the trigger for changing the first G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) to a non-display state.

Therefore, when an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGa2a (presentation status shown in FIG. 358(d)) in the "first G acceptance permitting state according to the modified example," as shown in FIG. 355 and FIG. 359(e), the first G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET) is made invisible in response to the operation acceptance, and a "change after first G acceptance (presentation after first G acceptance)" occurs in response to the operation acceptance.

In other words, the "change after 1st G reception (performance after 1st G reception)" corresponding to the "1st G reception permission state according to the modified example" can also indicate whether the expectation of a jackpot is high or low depending on whether the enemy character BOSS-G1 can be defeated, and when an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "1st G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," this can serve as a trigger for the performance to progress so that the "ally character YS-G1" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G1."

For example, in such a "change after 1st G reception (performance after 1st G reception)," first, the "1st G reception allowing state according to the modified example" is terminated in response to the reception of an operation on the 1st G operation unit (operation button 410) (see Figs. 355(b) and (c)). Also, as shown in Figs. 355(j) and (m) and 359(e), a "1st G reception post output sound" in response to the reception of an operation on the "1st G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "1st G reception post display UG1" in response to the reception of an operation on the "1st G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

Here, the "first G post-acceptance display UG1" first shows "ally character YS-G1" swinging his sword down to attack "enemy character BOSS-G1", as shown in Figure 359(e). Next, as shown in Figure 359(f), the "enemy character BOSS-G1" is shown receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G1". Next, as shown in Figure 359(g), a result is displayed as to whether or not "enemy character BOSS-G1" was defeated. In the example shown in FIG. 359(e), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G1" being defeated appears, suggesting high expectations, but the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G1" not being defeated (a depiction suggesting low expectations) appears depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G1" being defeated always appears.

As described above, when the "first G post-reception display UG1" is displayed in this manner, a "first G post-reception output sound" is audibly output in response to the reception of an operation on the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," as shown in Figures 355(j) and (m).

However, with regard to the above-mentioned "first G reception output sound", even if one mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 359 (e) to (g)) is displayed as the "first G reception display UG1", there are both cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception. That is, in this case, even though the same mode (for example, a depiction of defeating the enemy character BOSS-G1) is executed as the "first G reception display UG1", there are cases where the "first G reception output sound" is audibly output and cases where the "first G reception output sound" is not audibly output. Therefore, when an operation is performed without looking at the game board side performance display device 1600, it is difficult to determine whether the operation reception is in a proper state, and the tension after the operation reception can be appropriately maintained. In this example, whether or not the "first G reception output sound" is audibly output is determined by a lottery such as a performance judgment, but the method of realizing this is not limited to this. However, "when an audible output is made based on operation acceptance" and "when an audible output is not made based on operation acceptance" both refer to situations where the game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and a configuration in which the "output sound after 1st G acceptance" is not audibly output when some kind of abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing goes against the intent of the technical concept and should be eliminated.

As mentioned above, when a specific condition is met while the "first G reception post-display UG1" corresponding to the "first G reception post-display state according to the modified example" is displayed, this triggers the "first G reception post-display UG1" to be made invisible, as described above.

In the presentation example shown in Figure 355 and Figures 359(e) and (h), the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 355(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGa2b (presentation situation shown in Figure 359(e)) during the period when the "1st G post-acceptance display UG1" is displayed in response to an operation accepted within the "section (non-display section) where the model image display MG-G1 is not displayed."

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is met at timing tGa2b (the performance status shown in FIG. 359(e)), as shown in FIG. 355(i) and FIG. 359(h), the "first G reception post-display UG1" is made invisible in response to the specific condition being met. Also, as shown in FIG. 355(d) and FIG. 359(h), the second background image HK-G2 that had been displayed as the "background image display" is changed to the first background image HK-G1 (the background image that was displayed before timing Xg arrived). Also, at this time, as shown in FIG. 355(i), (l) and FIG. 359(h), a "specific display SK" is displayed in response to the specific condition being met, and a "specific sound" in response to the specific condition being met is audibly output.

In this example, the "specific display SK" is also displayed in a mode such as "The button performance was ended midway" (see FIG. 359(h)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and multiple modes may be prepared and the display may be made in any of those modes. Also, unlike the "sound output after first G reception," the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGa2b (the performance status shown in FIG. 359(e)). The "specific sound" may also be prepared in multiple modes and may be audibly output in any of those modes. The "specific sound" and the "sound output after first G reception" are audibly output as sounds in different modes.

In this example, while the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGa3 at which the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" ends is displayed decreasing over time, but this display does not necessarily have to be performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 357(c), the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" is originally continued until the timing tGa3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and is terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGa3. In this regard, the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 357, when there is no operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" until the timing tGa3 arrives in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example," the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" is merely terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGa3, and the first G post-reception change (first G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed to the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is not executed.

The "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" can also occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays.

Also, when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the object of operation is made to be able to emit light in the "first light emission mode" as shown in FIG. 355(e) and FIG. 357(e). When no operation is received in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example", this "first light emission mode" continues until the timing tGa3 at which the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" ends (see FIG. 357(e)), but when an operation is received in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example", this triggers the non-emission state (see FIG. 355(e)). That is, in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example", when the timing Xg arrives, the "model image display MG-G1" is made invisible, but even after the timing Xg arrives, the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the object of operation continues to emit light in the "first light emission mode".

In addition, even when the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example" occurs, the "permissible sound A (normal mode)" can be audibly output as the first G reception permissible sound indicating that the operation reception is in a permissible state or that the operation reception will be in a permissible state (see Figures 355 and 357). Even in the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example", as shown in Figure 355 (k), even if an operation is received on the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the reception permissible sound (first G reception permissible sound) is being audibly output, this will not be used as a trigger to interrupt the reception permissible sound, and even if a specific condition is met, this will not be used as a trigger to interrupt the reception permissible sound.

As described above, with regard to the "first G reception post-output sound", when the first mode (e.g., the mode shown in Fig. 359 (e) to (g)) is displayed as the "first G reception post-display UG1", there are cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception. However, when the second mode (e.g., a mode suggesting low expectation) is displayed as the "first G reception post-display UG1", an audible output may always be made based on the operation reception to the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410). With this configuration, depending on which mode is displayed as the "first G reception post-display UG1", there are cases where the "first G reception post-output sound" is always audibly output and cases where the "first G reception post-output sound" is not always audibly output, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when an operation is received will be more appropriately maintained. The "first G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which aspect is displayed as the "first G post-reception display UG1," or it may be audibly output as the same sound regardless of which aspect is displayed.

In addition, when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, the reception permission sound may not necessarily be audibly output. Also, the first G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) and message display MS-G1 may not necessarily be executed. Also, when an operation is accepted in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example", it is sufficient if some post-acceptance change occurs, and for example, the "first G post-acceptance display UG1" and the "first G post-acceptance output sound" may not necessarily be executed.

As described above, when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, if a specific condition is met while the "first G reception post-display UG1" corresponding to the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" is displayed, this triggers the "first G reception post-display UG1" to be hidden. In this regard, when a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has been received yet in the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G1 is displayed" of the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example", this may be used as a trigger to make the model image display MG-G1 and the message display MS-G1 invisible. With this configuration, if the player does not want the button effects themselves, it is possible to make the various displays related to the button effects invisible, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, however, the model image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 may be hidden, but the state in which operation is permitted for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" may continue. With this configuration, various displays related to the button effects are hidden, but the state in which operation is permitted continues, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

Note that when a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the "section (display section) in which the imitation image display MG-G1 is displayed" of the "first G reception permitted state according to the modified example," and various displays related to the button performance (imitation image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) are made invisible as a result of this, when an operation is accepted for the "first G operation section (here, operation button 410)," the "post-first G reception display UG1" will be displayed as a result of this operation acceptance. However, at this time, the "post-first G reception output sound" may not be audibly output. With this configuration, when the various displays related to the button effects (mock image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) are hidden due to the establishment of a specific condition, the state in which acceptance of operations to the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is permitted continues, but even if an operation is accepted while in this hidden state, the "first G post-acceptance output sound" is not audibly output, and the "first G post-acceptance display UG1" is merely displayed without any sound triggered by such operation acceptance being audibly output (the performance is reduced), which encourages careful consideration as to whether or not to establish the specific condition, and ideally creates a sense of tension.

In addition, when a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the "first G reception allowing state according to the modified example", this may trigger various displays related to the button performance (mock image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) to be hidden, and under these circumstances an operation is accepted on the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", which triggers the display of the "first G post-reception display UG1", and when a specific condition is met again while the "first G post-reception display UG1" is displayed, this may trigger the "first G post-reception display UG1" to not be hidden. That is, in this case, if a specific condition is met while the "first G reception post-display UG1" is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the "section (non-display section) where the model image display MG-G1 is not displayed" of the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example", this triggers the "first G reception post-display UG1" to be made non-displayed. However, if a non-display section is created early by meeting a specific condition in the "section (display section) where the model image display MG-G1 is displayed" of the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example", even if a specific condition is met while the "first G reception post-display UG1" is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the non-display section created early, this will not be the trigger for the "first G reception post-display UG1" to be made non-displayed. This makes it possible to encourage further deliberation as to whether or not to satisfy a specific condition, and to appropriately create a sense of tension.

As described above, when an operation is accepted at the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G1 is displayed" in the "first G acceptance state according to the modified example," and a specific condition is satisfied while the "first G post-acceptance display UG1" in response to the operation acceptance is being displayed, the contents of the change (and further examples thereof) that occurs as a result of this are as described above with reference to Figures 352 and 354, etc.

However, in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example", an operation is received at the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G1 is displayed", and while the "first G post-reception display UG1" in response to the operation reception is being displayed, timing Xg (the timing of transition from the display section to the non-display section) may arrive without a specific condition being satisfied, and Figure 356 and Figures 358 (b), (i) to (k) show examples of the presentation in this case.

That is, first, the performance progression shown in Figures 358(a), (b), (i), and (j) in the "first G reception permitted state according to the modified example" is the same as the performance progression shown in Figures 354(a) to (d) in the "first G reception permitted state" described above, and is as described above, so we will not explain it here.

In this regard, in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example", if a specific condition is not met from the appearance of the presentation status shown in FIG. 358(i) (a presentation status in which an operation is received from the first G operation unit in the display section, and the "first G reception post-display UG1" in response to the operation reception is displayed) until the arrival of timing Xg (the timing of transition from the display section to the non-display section), the arrival of timing Xg is used as a trigger to make the "first G reception post-display UG1" non-display, as shown in FIG. 356(j) and FIG. 358(k).

In other words, when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, even if an operation is received on the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" before timing Xg arrives and the "first G reception post-display UG1" is displayed in response to the operation reception, the arrival of timing Xg will subsequently trigger a background change (background replacement from the first background image HK-G1 to the second background image HK-G2). Then, the arrival of timing Xg at which the background change occurs will trigger the "first G reception post-display UG1" which is in the middle of being displayed to be hidden (see FIG. 358(k)). However, it goes without saying that the specific display SK and specific sound described above will not be executed at this time.

According to this configuration, in the "first G reception permitted state according to the modified example", the time (display time) until the "first G reception display UG1" corresponding to the operation reception is hidden varies depending on the timing of the operation reception within the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G1 is displayed", so that the user can be aware of the possibility that the "first G reception display UG1" has been hidden due to the establishment of a specific condition, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In the above example, when the "1st G reception permitted state" or the "1st G reception permitted state according to a modified example" occurs, the "message display MS-G1" is displayed as an operation-related display when operation reception is permitted, but the "message display MS-G1" may not be displayed.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "2nd G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 360 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "2nd G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 2G" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 361 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "2nd G reception permitted state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Figure 362 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "2nd G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "second G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "second G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the second G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the second G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 360(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "second G variable pattern", the above-mentioned second G reception permissible state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 362(b)) in which "operation acceptance to the second G operation unit regarding changes after second G acceptance (display after second G acceptance, sound output after second G acceptance, etc.)" is accepted based on the arrival of timing tGb2 when the second G time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 2G").

Here, in the second G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "second G operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and only one operation reception is permitted until the second G reception permission state is ended.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates such a second-game acceptance permission state, it is first possible to execute a "second-game premonition display" that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when the timing tGb1 arrives before the occurrence of the second G reception permission state, the "specific premonition display ZET" described above as the "second G premonition presentation display" begins to be executed as shown in Fig. 360(f) and Fig. 362(a). This "second G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the second G operation related display is displayed, as shown in Figs. 360(c), (f) and 362(a), (b).

That is, in this presentation example, when the second G reception allowable state occurs, as shown in FIG. 360(g) and FIG. 362(b), (c), etc., the second G operation section (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to receive operations, or at least a model image display MG-G2 that models the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the second G operation section) is displayed as a second G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception is allowed. Note that, in this presentation example, the timing when the second G reception allowable state occurs and the timing when the "second G operation-related display" is displayed are the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "second G operation-related display" may be displayed after the timing when the "second G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing when the second G reception allowable state occurs, so that it is displayed in a manner that spans the timing. Alternatively, the "2nd G operation related display" may start to be displayed with a delay from the timing when the 2nd G reception permission state occurs.

In this regard, the "mock image display MG-G2" corresponding to the second G reception permission state uses one of multiple color schemes including a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and when it is displayed in a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)", it will be displayed in the same manner as the "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the first G reception permission state described above.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-G2" corresponding to the second G reception allowing state is such that, when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 2G time. This period of 2G time is set as a longer time (longer cycle) than the "period of 5G time," "period of 7G time," and "period of 8G time" displayed in the fifth G reception allowing state, seventh G reception allowing state, and eighth G reception allowing state described below, so that in the first G reception allowing state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the fifth G reception allowing state, seventh G reception allowing state, and eighth G reception allowing state described below. The period of 2G time may be the same time as the period of 1G time described above.

When the "mock image display MG-G2" corresponding to the second G reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGb2 at which the second G reception permission state occurs, it is desirable to have the periodic change not start until the timing tGb2. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-G2" corresponding to the second G reception permission state is displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until the timing tGb2 arrives.

In addition, in the second G reception permitted state in this example, the above-mentioned "second G operation related display" includes, as shown in Figs. 362(b) and (c), a mock image display MG-G2, as well as a message display (here, message display MS-G2 displayed as "One hit!") related to the reception of operations on the second G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

In this example, the "second G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G2, message display MS-G2)" corresponding to the second G reception permitted state begins to be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the specific premonition display ZET, while the specific premonition display ZET is displayed as a "second G premonition performance display," as shown in FIG. 362(b). Note that, as mentioned above, the display range of the specific premonition display ZET (the range that makes the second G operation-related display difficult to see) is reduced over time.

As a result of the display range of the second G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) shrinking in this way, when the second G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) is hidden, the entire picture of the "second G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G2, message display MS-G2)" becomes clearly visible, and in this situation, it becomes possible for operations to be accepted on the second G operation unit (here, operation button 410). However, the second G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) may be made to continue to be displayed for the entire period from when the second G acceptance-permitting state occurs until it ends.

However, in the examples shown in Figures 360 and 362, it is assumed that an operation is accepted for the "second G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the second G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed at timing tGb2A (performance status shown in Figure 362 (b)) in the second G acceptance acceptance state.

In this regard, the second G reception permission state in this example is such that when an operation is received on the "second G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" while the second G premonition display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed, the second G premonition display display (specific premonition display ZET) is made invisible. Note that in this example, as shown in FIG. 360(f), when an operation is received on the "second G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" while the second G premonition display display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed, the second G premonition display display (specific premonition display ZET) is made invisible immediately; however, the second G premonition display display (specific premonition display ZET) may be made invisible at a later timing, such as when the "mock image display MG is made invisible" described below.

Therefore, when an operation is accepted for the "second G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGb2A (presentation status shown in FIG. 360(b)) within the second G acceptance allowance state, as shown in FIG. 360 and FIG. 362(c), the second G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is made invisible in response to the operation acceptance, and a "change after second G acceptance (presentation after second G acceptance)" occurs in response to the operation acceptance.

Here, when the second G reception allowable state according to this example occurs, an ally character according to the type of the second G reception allowable state (here, an ally character YS-G2 equipped with an axe) and an enemy character according to the type of the second G reception allowable state (here, an enemy character BOSS-G2 depicted as a worm) are displayed. That is, in the "change after second G reception (performance after second G reception)" corresponding to the second G reception allowable state, whether the expectation of a big hit is high or low can be suggested depending on whether the enemy character BOSS-G2 can be defeated, and when an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "second G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)," the performance can progress so that the "ally character YS-G2" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G2" as a trigger.

For example, as for such a "change after second G reception (performance after second G reception)", first, in response to the reception of an operation on the second G operation unit (operation button 410), the second G reception permission state is terminated (see FIG. 360(b) and (c)), and the mock image display MG-G2 and message display MS-G2 are made invisible (see FIG. 360(g) and FIG. 362(c) to (e)). Also, as shown in FIG. 360(j), (m) and FIG. 362(c), a "sound output after second G reception" in response to the reception of an operation on the "second G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "display after second G reception UG2" in response to the reception of an operation on the "second G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

However, in this example, a predetermined waiting time is set between when an operation is accepted in the second G reception allowing state and when the model image display MG-G2 and the message display MS-G2 are made invisible as a result of this. Therefore, although the model image display MG-G2 and the message display MS-G2 are made invisible as a result of an operation being accepted in the second G reception allowing state, they are not made invisible immediately after the operation is accepted, but can continue to be displayed for the predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, in the second G reception permitted state, the second G disappearance EF display EF-G2 is displayed to make the model image display MG and message display MS less visible until they are hidden. In other words, in this case, the model image display MG and message display MS are hidden while the second G disappearance EF display EF-G2 is displayed, as shown in Figures 360(g) and (h).

Here, as the "2nd G reception post-display UG2", first, as shown in FIG. 362(c), a depiction is made of "ally character YS-G2" swinging down his sword to attack "enemy character BOSS-G2". Next, as shown in FIG. 362(d), a depiction is made of "enemy character BOSS-G2" receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G2". Next, as shown in FIG. 362(e), a result display is made as to whether or not "enemy character BOSS-G2" was defeated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 362(e), a depiction appears in which "enemy character BOSS-G2" was defeated, suggesting high expectations, but the result display may also show a depiction of "enemy character BOSS-G2" not being defeated (a depiction suggesting low expectations) depending on the results of the jackpot determination and performance determination.

As described above, when the "2nd G post-reception display UG2" is displayed in this manner, a "2nd G post-reception output sound" is audibly output in response to the reception of an operation on the "2nd G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," as shown in Figures 360(j) and (m).

In this respect, the above-mentioned "output sound after second G reception" is different from the above-mentioned "output sound after first G reception" in that when one mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 362(c)-(e)) is displayed as the "display UG2 after second G reception", there are never both cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the "second G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and where an audible output is made based on the operation reception, and an audible output is always made based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the second G operation unit (here, operation button 410), and an audible output is made based on the operation reception" refers only to a situation where a game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and does not refer to a configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

As mentioned above, in the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state" and "first G reception permission state according to a modified example," if a specific condition is met while the corresponding "first G reception post-display UG1" is displayed, this triggers the "first G reception post-display UG1" to be switched to a non-display state.

In this example of presentation, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 360(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGb2B (presentation situation shown in Figure 362(c)) during the period when the "2nd G post-acceptance display UG2" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is met at timing tGb2B (presentation status shown in FIG. 362(c)), the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly output as shown in FIG. 360(l). However, even if the specific condition is met at timing tGb2B (presentation status shown in FIG. 362(c)), the "second G reception display UG2" is not hidden as a result of the specific condition being met, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 360(g), (i) and FIG. 362(d). In other words, in this case, the "second G reception display UG2" progresses in the same manner (as shown in FIG. 362(c) to (e)) as when the specific condition is not met during the period in which the "second G reception display UG2" is being executed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGb2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 362(c)). However, when the specific condition is met at timing tGb2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 362(c)), it may be possible to prevent the specific sound from being audibly output.

In this example, while the second G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGb3 at which the second G reception permission state ends is reached is depicted decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 361(c), the second G reception permission state is originally continued until the timing tGb3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the "second G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and is terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGb3. In this regard, the second G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 361, when there is no operation reception to the "second G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" until the timing tGb3 arrives in the second G reception permission state, not only is the second G reception permission state terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGb3, but the second G post-reception change (second G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed to the "second G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is started to be executed.

The example shown in FIG. 361 assumes that the above-mentioned "specific condition" is met at timing tGb3a during the time when the "2nd G post-reception display UG2" is displayed among the changes after 2nd G reception that are thus initiated by the automatic button function.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the specific condition is met at timing tGb3a, the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly output as shown in FIG. 361(l). However, even if the specific condition is met at timing tGb3a, the "2nd G reception post-display UG2" is not hidden as a result of the specific condition being met, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 361(g), (i), and (l). In other words, in this case, the "2nd G reception post-display UG2" progresses in the same manner as when the specific condition is not met during the period in which the "2nd G reception post-display UG2" is being executed (see FIG. 361(j)).

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGb3a, but it may be prevented from being audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGb3a.

The second G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays. However, it may also be possible for this state to occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is configured to be capable of emitting light in one of a number of color schemes including a "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, when the second G reception allowance state occurs, as shown in FIG. 360(e) and FIG. 361(e), the "second G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the object of operation may emit light in either the "first light-emitting mode" or the "second light-emitting mode". Note that in this example, whether the "first light-emitting mode" or the "second light-emitting mode" is to be emitted is determined by a lottery such as a performance judgment (such as the expectation of a jackpot), but the method of realizing this is not limited to this. If no operation is accepted in the second G reception permission state, these lights will continue to be emitted until the timing tGb3 at which the second G reception permission state ends (see FIG. 361(e)), but if an operation is accepted in the second G reception permission state, this will trigger a transition to a non-illuminating state (see FIG. 360(e)).

In addition, when the second G reception permissible state occurs, one of a plurality of modes (sounds) including "permissible sound A (normal mode)" and "permissible sound B (specific mode)" can be audibly output as the second G reception permissible sound indicating that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted (see FIG. 360(k) and FIG. 361(k), etc.). For example, the "permissible sound A (normal mode)" may be audibly output when the imitation image display MG-G2 is displayed in a predetermined color scheme, and the "permissible sound B (specific mode)" may be audibly output when the imitation image display MG-G2 is displayed in a specific color scheme. In this regard, in the second G reception permissible state, as shown in FIG. 360(k), if an operation is received on the "second G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the reception permissible sound (second G reception permissible sound) is being audibly output, this is used as an opportunity to interrupt the reception permissible sound. However, in this example, even if a specific condition is met while the reception-permitted sound (second G reception-permitted sound) is being audibly output, this will not cause the reception-permitted sound to be interrupted.

As described above, when the second G reception permission state occurs, even if a specific condition is met while the "second G reception post-display UG2" corresponding to the second G reception permission state is displayed, this does not trigger the "second G reception post-display UG2" to be hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the second G reception permission state, this does not trigger the model image display MG-G2 or message display MS-G2 to be hidden.

In this example, the 2nd G disappearance EF display EF-G2 corresponding to the 2nd G reception permitted state is displayed starting from the situation shown in FIG. 362(d) with a delay after the change after reception, but it may be displayed starting from the situation shown in FIG. 362(c).

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "3G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 363 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "3G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 3G" as the occurrence condition and the player performs an operation. Figure 364 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "3G reception permitted state" occurs and the player does not perform an operation. Figure 365 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "3G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "3rd G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "3rd G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 3rd G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 3rd G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3rd G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 363(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "3G variable pattern", the above-mentioned 3G reception permissible state (valid period) in which "operation acceptance to the 3G operation unit regarding changes after 3G acceptance (display after 3G acceptance, sound output after 3G acceptance, etc.)" is accepted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tGc2 when the 3G time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 3G") (the situation shown in FIG. 365(b)).

Here, in the 3G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "3G operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and only one operation reception is permitted until the 3G reception permission state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 3G reception permission state occurs, as shown in Figures 363 (f) and 365 (a), no premonition display is executed to suggest to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 1, when a 3G reception permission state occurs, as shown in Figure 363 (g) and Figures 365 (b) and (c), etc., an imitation image display that imitates the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 3G operation section) is not displayed.

In addition, when the 3G reception permission state in this example occurs, not only will the mock image not be displayed, but messages related to operation reception will also not be displayed.

However, in this example, when a 3G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 365(b), an ally character according to the type of the 3G reception permission state (here, ally character YS-G3 equipped with a spear) and an enemy character according to the type of the 3G reception permission state (here, enemy character BOSS-G3 depicted as a ghost) are displayed, and while these are displayed, operations can be accepted using the 3G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

In other words, in the "change after 3G reception (performance after 3G reception)" corresponding to the 3G reception allowable state, whether the expectation of winning is high or low can be suggested depending on "whether or not the enemy character BOSS-G3 can be defeated." When an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the "3G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)," this can trigger the performance to progress so that the "ally character YS-G3" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G3." Note that in this example, the ally character YS-G3 and the enemy character BOSS-G3 are displayed when operation acceptance is permitted in the 3G reception allowable state, but the ally character YS-G3 and the enemy character BOSS-G3 may be displayed as one of the "change after 3G reception (display after 3G reception UG3 described later)" when an operation acceptance is performed in the 3G reception allowable state.

For example, as for such a "change after 3G reception (post-3G reception performance)," first, the 3G reception permission state is terminated in response to the reception of an operation on the 3G operation unit (operation button 410) (see Figs. 363(b) and (c)). Also, as shown in Figs. 363(j) and (m) and 365(c), a "post-3G reception output sound" in response to the reception of an operation on the "3G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "post-3G reception display UG3" in response to the reception of an operation on the "3G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

Here, the "3rd G post-acceptance display UG3" first shows "ally character YS-G3" swinging his sword down to attack "enemy character BOSS-G3", as shown in Figure 365(c). Next, as shown in Figure 365(d), the "enemy character BOSS-G3" is shown receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G3". Next, as shown in Figure 365(e), a result is displayed as to whether or not "enemy character BOSS-G3" was defeated. In the example shown in FIG. 365(e), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G3" being defeated appears, suggesting high expectations, but the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G3" not being defeated (a depiction suggesting low expectations) appears depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G3" being defeated always appears.

As described above, when the "3rd G post-reception display UG3" is displayed in this manner, a "3rd G post-reception output sound" is audibly output in response to the reception of an operation on the "3rd G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," as shown in Figures 363(j) and (m).

In this respect, the above-mentioned "output sound after 3G reception" is different from the above-mentioned "output sound after 1G reception" in that when one mode (for example, the mode shown in Fig. 365 (c) to (e)) is displayed as the "3G reception display UG3", there are never both cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the "3G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and where an audible output is made based on the operation reception, and an audible output is always made based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the 3G operation unit (here, operation button 410), and an audible output is made based on the operation reception" refers only to a situation where a game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and does not refer to a configuration when some abnormality occurs or when the abnormality processing is continuing.

However, when such a post-acceptance display is displayed, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease if other effects or background images unrelated to the acceptance status are made difficult to see, or if the post-acceptance display appears in a form different from what the player desires.

Therefore, in the 3G reception permission state according to this embodiment, if a specific condition is met while the "3G reception post-display UG3" corresponding to the 3G reception permission state is displayed, this triggers the "3G reception post-display UG3" to be hidden. With this configuration, if the "3G reception post-display UG3" is displayed but the player does not want this, the "3G reception post-display UG3" can be made hidden, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this presentation example, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 363(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGc2B (presentation status shown in Figure 365(c)) during the period when the "3rd G acceptance display UG3" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is met at timing tGc2B (the performance status shown in FIG. 365(c)), the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the non-display of the "3rd G post-acceptance display UG3" as shown in FIG. 364(i), (l) and FIG. 365(f). At this time, a "specific display SK" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is displayed, and a "specific sound" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is audibly output.

In this example, the "specific display SK" is displayed in a mode such as "The button performance was ended midway" (see FIG. 365(f)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and multiple modes may be prepared and the display may be made in any of those modes. Also, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGc2B (the performance status shown in FIG. 365(c)). The "specific sound" may also be prepared in multiple modes and may be audibly output in any of those modes. The "specific sound" and the "sound output after 3G reception" are audibly output as sounds of different modes.

In addition, in this example, while the 3G reception permission state continues, the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGc3 at which the 3G reception permission state ends is reached is not depicted decreasing over time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 364(c), the 3G reception permission state is originally continued until the timing tGc3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the "3G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and is terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGc3. In this regard, the 3G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 364, when there is no operation reception to the "3G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" until the timing tGc3 arrives in the 3G reception permission state, the 3G reception permission state is simply terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGc3, and the post-3G reception change (post-3G reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed to the "3G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is not executed.

The 3G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays. However, it may also be possible to make it occur when the second background image HK-G2 is displayed instead of the first background image HK-G1.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is provided so that it can emit light in one of a number of color schemes, including the "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and the "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, in the 3G reception allowance state, even though a mock image display of the operation target is not displayed, the "3G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the operation target can emit light in the "first light-emitting mode" as shown in Fig. 363(e) and Fig. 364(e). When no operation is accepted in the 3G reception allowance state, this "first light-emitting mode" continues until the timing tGc3 at which the 3G reception allowance state ends arrives (see Fig. 364(e)), but when an operation is accepted in the 3G reception allowance state, this triggers the non-illumination state (see Fig. 363(e)).

In addition, when the 3G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 363(k), a reception permission sound is not output, which indicates that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted.

In addition, when the 3G reception is permitted, the disappearance EF display will not be displayed when an operation is received or when the validity period ends.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "4th G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 366 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "4th G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 4G" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 367 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "4th G reception permitted state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Figure 368 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "4th G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "4th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "4th G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 4th G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 4th G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "4th G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 366(c), during the execution period of the variation performance related to the "4th G variation pattern", the above-mentioned 4th G reception permissible state (valid period) in which "operation acceptance to the 4th G operation unit regarding changes after 4th G acceptance (such as display after 4th G acceptance)" is accepted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tGd2 when the 4th G time has elapsed since the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 4G") (the situation shown in FIG. 368(b)).

Here, in the 4G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "4G operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and only one operation reception is permitted until the 4G reception permission state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 4th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in Figures 366 (f) and 368 (a), no premonition display is executed to suggest to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 1, when the 4th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in Figure 366 (g) and Figures 368 (b) and (c), etc., an imitation image display that imitates the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 4th G operation section) is not displayed.

In addition, when the 4G reception permission state in this example occurs, not only will the mock image not be displayed, but messages related to operation reception will also not be displayed.

However, in this example, when the 4G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 368(b), an ally character according to the type of the 4G reception permission state (here, the ally character YS-G1 equipped with a sword) and an enemy character according to the type of the 4G reception permission state (here, the enemy character BOSS-G1 depicted as a goblin) are displayed, and while these are displayed, operations can be accepted using the 4G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

That is, the "display after 4th G reception" corresponding to the 4th G reception allowable state has the same content as the "display after 1st G reception" corresponding to the 1st G reception allowable state described above, and can suggest whether the expectation of winning is high or low depending on whether the enemy character BOSS-G1 can be defeated. More specifically, when an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "4th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", this can be used as a trigger to progress the performance so that the "ally character YS-G1" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G1". Note that in this example, the ally character YS-G1 and the enemy character BOSS-G1 are displayed when operation reception is allowed in the 4th G reception allowable state, but the ally character YS-G1 and the enemy character BOSS-G1 may be displayed as one of the "changes after 4th G reception (display after 4th G reception UG4 described later)" when an operation reception is performed in the 4th G reception allowable state.

For example, as for such a "change after 4th G reception (performance after 4th G reception)," first, the 4th G reception permission state is terminated in response to the reception of an operation to the 4th G operation unit (operation button 410) (see Figs. 366(b) and (c)). Also, as shown in Figs. 366(j) and 368(c), the "4th G reception post display UG4" starts to be displayed in response to the reception of an operation to the "4th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

Here, the "display after fourth G reception UG4" is the same as the "display after first G reception UG1" described above. Therefore, as the "display after fourth G reception UG4", first, as shown in FIG. 368(c), a depiction is displayed of "ally character YS-G1" swinging his sword down to attack "enemy character BOSS-G1". Next, as shown in FIG. 368(d), a depiction is displayed of "enemy character BOSS-G1" receiving damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G1". Next, as shown in FIG. 368(e), a result display is displayed as to whether or not "enemy character BOSS-G1" was defeated. In the example shown in FIG. 368(e), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G1" being defeated appears, suggesting high expectations, but the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G1" not being defeated (a depiction suggesting low expectations) appears depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G1" being defeated always appears.

However, in this example of the "change after 4th G reception (performance after 4th G reception)," the "4th G post-reception display UG4" is executed with the same content as the above-mentioned "1st G post-reception display UG1," just as in the above-mentioned "1st G reception permitted state." However, unlike the above-mentioned "1st G reception permitted state," the "post-reception output sound" in response to the operation reception on the "4th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not audibly output at all.

As mentioned above, in the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state", "first G reception permission state according to a modified example", and "third G reception permission state", if a specific condition is met while the corresponding "post-reception display" is displayed, this triggers the "post-reception display" to be hidden.

In this example of presentation, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 366(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGd2B (presentation status shown in Figure 368(c)) during the period in which the "4th G acceptance display UG4" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the specific condition is met at timing tGd2B (presentation status shown in FIG. 368(c)), the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly output as shown in FIG. 366(l). However, even if the specific condition is met at timing tGd2B (presentation status shown in FIG. 368(c)), the "4th G reception post-display UG4" is not turned off as a result of the specific condition being met, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 366(i), (l) and FIG. 368(d). In other words, in this case, the "4th G reception post-display UG4" will progress in the same manner (as shown in FIG. 368(c) to (e)) as when the specific condition is not met during the period in which the "4th G reception post-display UG4" is being executed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGd2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 368(c)), but it may also be configured so that when the specific condition is met at timing tGd2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 366(c)), this may or may not result in an audible output.

In addition, in this example, while the 4G reception permission state continues, the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGd3 at which the 4G reception permission state ends is reached is not depicted decreasing over time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 367(c), the 4th G reception permission state is originally continued until the timing tGd3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the "4th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and is terminated based on the arrival of timing tGd3. In this regard, the 4th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 367, when there is no operation reception to the "4th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" until the timing tGd3 arrives in the 4th G reception permission state, the 4th G reception permission state is simply terminated based on the arrival of timing tGd3, and the 4th G post-reception change (4th G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed to the "4th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not executed.

The fourth G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays. However, it may also be possible to make it occur when a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2 is displayed, instead of the first background image HK-G1.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is provided so that it can emit light in one of a number of color schemes, including the "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and the "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, in the 4G reception-permitted state, even though a mock image display of the operation target is not displayed, the "4G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the operation target can emit light in the "first light-emitting mode" as shown in Fig. 366(e) and Fig. 367(e). When no operation is accepted in the 4G reception-permitted state, this "first light-emitting mode" continues until the timing tGd3 at which the 4G reception-permitted state ends (see Fig. 367(e)), but when an operation is accepted in the 4G reception-permitted state, this triggers the non-illuminating state (see Fig. 366(e)).

In addition, when the 4G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 366(k), no reception permission sound is output, which indicates that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted.

In addition, when the 4G reception is permitted, the disappearance EF display will not be displayed when an operation is received or when the validity period ends.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "5th G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 369 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "5th G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 5G" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 370 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "5th G reception permitted state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Figure 371 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "5th G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "5th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "5th G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 5th G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 5th G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "5th G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 369(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "5th G variable pattern", the above-mentioned 5th G reception allowable state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 371(b)) based on the arrival of timing tGe2 when the 5th G time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 5G"), in which "operation acceptance to the 5th G operation unit regarding changes after 5th G acceptance (display after 5th G acceptance, sound output after 5th G acceptance, etc.)" is accepted (based on the satisfaction of "condition 5G").

Here, in the fifth G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "fifth G operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and only one operation reception is permitted until the fifth G reception permission state is ended.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates such a 5th G reception permission state, it is first possible to execute a "5th G premonition display" that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when the timing tGe1 arrives before the occurrence of the 5th G reception permission state, the "specific premonition display ZET" described above as the "5th G premonition presentation display" begins to be executed as shown in Fig. 369(f) and Fig. 371(a). This "5th G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 5th G operation-related display is displayed, as shown in Figs. 369(c), (f) and 371(a), (b).

That is, in this presentation example, when the 5G reception allowable state occurs, as shown in FIG. 369(g) and FIG. 371(b), (c), etc., the reception of operations to the 5G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, or at least a replica image display MG-G5 that mimics the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 5G operation unit) is displayed as a 5G operation-related display that can only appear when the reception of operations is permitted. Note that, in this presentation example, the timing at which the 5G reception allowable state occurs and the timing at which the "5G operation-related display" is displayed are the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "5G operation-related display" may be displayed after the timing at which the "5G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing at which the 5G reception allowable state occurs, so that it is displayed in a manner that spans the timing. Alternatively, the "5th G operation related display" may start to be displayed with a delay from the timing when the 5th G reception permission state occurs.

In this regard, the "mock image display MG-G5" corresponding to the 5th G reception permission state uses one of multiple color schemes including a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and when it is displayed in a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)", it will be displayed in the same manner as the "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the above-mentioned 1st G reception permission state.

However, in the "imitation image display MG-G5" corresponding to the 5th G reception allowable state, when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 5G time. This period of 5G time is set as a shorter time (short cycle) than the "period of 1G time" and "period of 2G time" displayed in the above-mentioned 1st G reception allowable state and 2nd G reception allowable state, etc., so in the 5th G reception allowable state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving more quickly through its movable range than in the above-mentioned 1st G reception allowable state and 2nd G reception allowable state, etc. The moving images in "Mock Image Display MG-G5" do not have to be simply fast-forwarded versions of the moving images in "Mock Image Display MG-G1" and "Mock Image Display MG-G2", but may be a different moving image from these that depicts the operation receiving portion periodically moving within its movable range.

When the "mock image display MG-G5" corresponding to the 5th G reception allowable state is started to be displayed before the timing tGe2 at which the 5th G reception allowable state occurs, it is desirable to have the periodic change not start until the timing tGe2. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-G5" corresponding to the 5th G reception allowable state is displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until the timing tGe2 arrives.

In addition, in the 5G reception permission state according to this example, the above-mentioned "5G operation-related display" includes, as shown in Figs. 371(b) and (c), a mock image display MG-G5, as well as a message display (here, message display MS-G5 displayed as "Press hot!") related to the reception of operations on the 5G operation unit (here, operation button 410), etc.

In this example, the "5thG operation-related display (mock image display MG-G5, message display MS-G5)" corresponding to the 5thG reception permission state begins to be displayed as a "5thG premonition performance display" so as to appear superimposed behind the specific premonition display ZET, while the specific premonition display ZET is displayed, as shown in FIG. 371(b). Note that, as mentioned above, the display range of the specific premonition display ZET (the range that makes the 5thG operation-related display difficult to see) is reduced over time.

As a result of the display range of the 5G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) shrinking in this way, when the 5G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) is hidden, the entirety of the "5G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G5, message display MS-G5)" becomes clearly visible, and in this situation, it becomes possible to accept operations to the 5G operation unit (here, operation button 410). However, the 5G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) may be made to continue to be displayed for the entire period from when the 5G reception-permitting state occurs until it ends.

However, in the examples shown in Figures 369 and 371, it is assumed that an operation is accepted for the "5th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the 5th G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed at timing tGe2A in the 5th G acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 369 (b)).

In this regard, in the 5G reception permitted state in this example, even if an operation is received on the "5G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the 5G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed, this will not cause the 5G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) to go into a hidden state, but will remain displayed for a predetermined period of time (the same display period as when no operation is received).

Therefore, when an operation is accepted for the "5th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGe2A (presentation status shown in FIG. 369(b)) within the 5th G acceptance allowance state, as shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 371(c), the 5th G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is not hidden in response to the operation acceptance, but is left continuously displayed, and a "change after 5th G acceptance (presentation after 5th G acceptance)" occurs in response to the operation acceptance.

When the fifth G reception allowable state according to this example occurs, an ally character according to the type of the fifth G reception allowable state (here, the ally character YS-G5 equipped with a hammer) and an enemy character according to the type of the fifth G reception allowable state (here, the enemy character BOSS-G5 depicted as a lizardman) are displayed. That is, the "change after fifth G reception (performance after fifth G reception)" corresponding to the fifth G reception allowable state suggests whether the expectation of a big hit is high or low depending on whether the enemy character BOSS-G5 can be defeated, and when an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "fifth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)," the performance can progress to one in which the "ally character YS-G5" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G5."

For example, as for such a "change after 5th G reception (performance after 5th G reception)", first, in response to the reception of an operation on the 5th G operation unit (operation button 410), the 5th G reception permission state is terminated (see Fig. 369 (b) and (c)), and the mock image display MG-G5 and message display MS-G5 are made invisible (see Fig. 369 (g) and Fig. 371 (c) to (e)). Also, as shown in Fig. 369 (j), (m) and Fig. 371 (c), a "sound output after 5th G reception" in response to the reception of an operation on the "5th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "display after 5th G reception UG5" in response to the reception of an operation on the "5th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is started to be displayed.

However, in this example, a predetermined waiting time is set between when an operation is accepted in the 5G reception permitted state and when the model image display MG-G5 and message display MS-G5 are made invisible as a result of this. Therefore, although the model image display MG-G5 and message display MS-G5 are made invisible as a result of an operation being accepted in the 5G reception permitted state, they are not made invisible immediately after the operation is accepted, but can continue to be displayed for the predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, in the 5th G reception permitted state, the 5th G disappearance EF display EF-G5 is displayed to make the model image display MG and message display MS less visible until they are hidden. In other words, in this case, the model image display MG and message display MS are hidden while the 5th G disappearance EF display EF-G5 is displayed, as shown in Figures 369 (g) and (h).

In this example, the 5th G disappearance EF display EF-G5, which corresponds to the 5th G reception-permitted state, is displayed as the same image display as the 2nd G disappearance EF display EF-G2, which corresponds to the 2nd G reception-permitted state, but they may be displayed as different images.

Here, as the "5th G reception post-display UG5", first, as shown in FIG. 371(c), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G5" swinging down a hammer to attack "enemy character BOSS-G5". Next, as shown in FIG. 371(d), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G5" receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G5". Next, as shown in FIG. 371(e), a result display is shown as to whether or not "enemy character BOSS-G5" was defeated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 371(e), a depiction appears in which "enemy character BOSS-G5" was defeated, suggesting high expectations, but the result display may also show a depiction of "enemy character BOSS-G5" not being defeated (a depiction suggesting low expectations) depending on the results of the jackpot determination and performance determination.

As described above, when the "5th G post-reception display UG5" is displayed in this manner, as shown in Figures 369 (j) and (m), a "5th G post-reception output sound" is audibly output in response to the reception of an operation on the "5th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

In this respect, the above-mentioned "output sound after 5th G reception" is different from the above-mentioned "output sound after 1st G reception" in that when one mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 371 (c) to (e)) is displayed as the "5th G reception display UG5", there are never both cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the "5th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and where an audible output is made based on the operation reception, and an audible output is always made based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the 5th G operation unit (here, operation button 410), and an audible output is made based on the operation reception" refers only to a situation where a game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and does not refer to a configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

As mentioned above, in the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state", "first G reception permission state according to a modified example", "third G reception permission state", etc., if a specific condition is met while the corresponding "post-reception display" is displayed, this triggers the "post-reception display" to be hidden.

In this presentation example, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 369(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGe2B (presentation situation shown in Figure 371(c)) during the period when the "5th G acceptance display UG5" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGe2B (presentation status shown in FIG. 371(c)), the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly output as shown in FIG. 369(l). However, even if the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGe2B (presentation status shown in FIG. 371(c)), the "5th G reception post-display UG5" is not hidden as a result of the specific condition being satisfied, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being satisfied is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 369(g), (i), (l) and FIG. 371(d). In other words, in this case, the "5th G reception post-display UG5" will progress in presentation in the same manner (as shown in FIG. 371(c) to (e)) as when the specific condition is not satisfied during the period in which the "5th G reception post-display UG5" is being executed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGe2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 371(c)), but it may be configured so that when the specific condition is met at timing tGe2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 371(c)), this may or may not be the trigger for the specific sound to be audibly output.

In this example, while the 5th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGe3 at which the 5th G reception permission state ends is displayed decreasing over time, but this display does not necessarily have to be performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 370(c), the 5th G reception permission state is originally continued until the timing tGe3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the "5th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and is terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGe3. In this regard, the 5th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 370, when there is no operation reception to the "5th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" until the timing tGe3 arrives in the 5th G reception permission state, not only is the 5th G reception permission state terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGe3, but also the 5th G post-reception change (5th G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed to the "5th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is started to be executed.

The example shown in FIG. 370 assumes that the above-mentioned "specific condition" is met at timing tGe3a during the time when "5th G reception post-display UG5" is displayed among the 5th G reception post-changes initiated by the automatic button function in this way.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the specific condition is met at timing tGe3a, the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly output as shown in FIG. 370(l). However, even if the specific condition is met at timing tGe3a, the "5th G post-reception display UG5" is not hidden as a result of the specific condition being met, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 361(g), (i), and (l). In other words, in this case, the "5th G post-reception display UG5" progresses in the same manner as if the specific condition was not met during the period in which the "5th G post-reception display UG5" is being executed (see FIG. 370(j)).

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGe3a, but it may be configured so that when the specific condition is met at timing tGe3a, this may or may not be the trigger for the specific sound to be audibly output.

The fifth G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays. However, it may also be possible for this state to occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is provided so that it can emit light in one of a number of color schemes, including the "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and the "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, when the 5G reception allowable state occurs, even though the model image display MG-G5 is displayed in one of a number of color schemes, including the predetermined color scheme and the specific color scheme, the light-emitting mode of the "5G operation unit (operation button 410)" is capable of emitting light in the "first light-emitting mode" but not in the "second light-emitting mode", as shown in Fig. 369(e) and Fig. 370(e). When no operation is accepted in the 5G reception allowable state, the light emission continues until the timing tGe3 at which the 5G reception allowable state ends (see Fig. 370(e)), but when an operation is accepted in the 5G reception allowable state, the light emission is switched to a non-illuminating state (see Fig. 369(e)).

In addition, when the 5G reception permissible state occurs, either "permissible sound A (normal mode)" or "permissible sound B (specific mode)" can be audibly output as the 5G reception permissible sound indicating that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted (see, for example, FIG. 369(k) or FIG. 370(k)). For example, the "permissible sound A (normal mode)" may be audibly output when the imitation image display MG-G5 is displayed in a specified color scheme, and the "permissible sound B (specific mode)" may be audibly output when the imitation image display MG-G5 is displayed in a specified color scheme. In this regard, in the 5G reception permissible state, as shown in FIG. 369(k), even if an operation is received on the "5G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the reception permissible sound (5G reception permissible sound) is being audibly output, this is used as a trigger to prevent the reception permissible sound from being interrupted. In this example, even if a specific condition is met while the reception permissible sound (5th G reception permissible sound) is being audibly output, this will not be used as a trigger to interrupt the reception permissible sound.Similarly, in this example, as shown in FIG. 369(f), even if a specific condition is met while the 5th G premonition performance display is being displayed, this will not be used as a trigger to cause the 5th G premonition performance display to be hidden.

In this example, when the model image display is displayed in a specific color scheme in the 5G reception-permitted state, the reception-permitted sound is audibly output in the same manner (permitted sound B) as when the model image display is displayed in a specific color scheme in the 2G reception-permitted state. However, instead of this, a sound (a sound different from either permitted sound A or permitted sound B) that is not used as the 2G reception-permitted sound may be audibly output.

As mentioned above, when the 5th G reception permission state occurs, even if a specific condition is met while the "5th G reception post-display UG5" corresponding to the 5th G reception permission state is displayed, the "5th G reception post-display UG5" is not hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the 5th G reception permission state, the mock image display MG-G5 and message display MS-G5 are not hidden.

In this example, the 5th G disappearance EF display EF-G5, which corresponds to the 5th G reception permitted state, is displayed starting from the situation shown in FIG. 371(d) with a delay after the change after reception, but it may also be displayed starting from the situation shown in FIG. 371(c).

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "6th G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 372 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "6th G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 6G" as the occurrence condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figures 373 and 374 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the "6th G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "6th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "6th G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 6th G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 6th G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "6th G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 372(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "6th G variable pattern", the 6th G reception permissible state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 373(b)) in which "operation acceptance to the 6th G operation unit regarding changes after 6th G acceptance (display after 6th G acceptance, sound output after 6th G acceptance, etc.)" is accepted based on the arrival of timing tGf2 when the 6th G time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 6G").

Here, in the sixth G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "sixth G operation section" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the sixth G reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of performance, as shown in Figures 372(f) and 373(a), when the 6th G reception-permitted state occurs, the premonition display that suggests in advance that operation reception is permitted is not executed.

In this case, when the 6th G reception allowable state occurs, as shown in FIG. 372(g) and FIG. 373(b), (c), etc., the operation reception for the 6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is allowed while the premonition display display is not displayed, or the imitation image display MG-G6 that imitates the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6th G operation unit) is displayed as the 6th G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception is allowed. In this performance example, the timing when the 6th G reception allowable state occurs and the timing when the "6th G operation-related display" is displayed are the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "6th G operation-related display" may be displayed before the timing when the 6th G reception allowable state occurs, so as to straddle the timing. Or, the "6th G operation-related display" may be displayed after the timing when the 6th G reception allowable state occurs.

Here, the "Mock image display MG-G6" corresponding to the 6th G reception permission state is always displayed in a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and is displayed in this "predetermined color scheme."

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-G6" corresponding to the 6G reception permission state is a periodic change in which, when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)," the periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 6G time. This period of 6G time is set as a longer time (longer cycle) than the "period of 5G time," "period of 7G time," and "period of 8G time" displayed in the above-mentioned 5G reception permission state, the 7th reception permission state described below, and the 8th reception permission state described below, so in the 6G reception permission state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 5G reception permission state, the 7th reception permission state described below, and the 8th reception permission state described below.

When the "mock image display MG-G6" corresponding to the 6th G reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGf2 at which the 6th G reception permission state occurs, it is desirable to have the periodic change not start until the timing tGf2. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-G6" corresponding to the 6th G reception permission state will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until the timing tGf2 arrives.

In addition, in the 6th G reception permission state according to this example, the "6th G operation related display" includes, as shown in Figs. 373(b) and (c), a mock image display MG-G6, as well as a message display (here, message display MS-G6 displayed as "Attack!") related to the reception of operations on the 6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

Here, in the sixth G reception permission state according to this example, an ally character (here, ally character YS-G6) according to the type of the sixth G reception permission state and an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-G6 depicted as a giant bat) according to the type of the sixth G reception permission state are displayed. That is, when an operation is performed on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "sixth G reception permission state", it can be suggested whether the expectation of a big win is high or low depending on "whether or not ally character YS-G6 can defeat enemy character BOSS-G6 based on multiple operation receptions", and each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the performance can progress so that "ally character YS-G6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-G6".

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 372 and 373 assume that the first operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGf2A in the 6th G acceptance permitted state (the performance situation shown in Figure 373 (b)).

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGf2A (presentation status shown in FIG. 373(b)) within the 6th G acceptance permitted state, a "change after 6th G acceptance (presentation after 6th G acceptance)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 372 and FIG. 373(c).

More specifically, when a first operation is accepted for the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGf2A in the 6G acceptance state (the presentation status shown in FIG. 373(b)), as shown in FIG. 372(j) and (m) and FIG. 373(c) and (d), a "6G post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the first operation accepted for the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after the 6G acceptance, and a "6G post-acceptance display UG6" corresponding to the first operation accepted for the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the above-mentioned "6th G acceptance display UG6" is displayed as the above-mentioned "6th G acceptance display UG6", as shown in Figs. 373(c) and (d). First, as shown in Fig. 373(c), "ally character YS-G6" is depicted attacking "enemy character BOSS-G6" with fire magic (for the first time). Next, as shown in Fig. 373(d), "enemy character BOSS-G6" is depicted as receiving damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G6" and losing its HP. In other words, in the "6th G acceptance display UG6", when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-G6" becomes 0 due to the attack of "ally character YS-G6", it means that "enemy character BOSS-G6" has been defeated, which suggests high expectations.

In addition, the "sound output after 6th G reception" is always audibly output when the "display after 6th G reception UG6" is displayed in the manner UG6a shown in Figures 373(c) and (d).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 372(b), it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGf2B (presentation status shown in FIG. 373(d)) in the 6G reception permitted state. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 372(j) and (m) and FIG. 374(e) and (f), as a change after 6G reception, a "6G post-reception output sound" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "6G post-reception display UG6" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" starts to be displayed.

In this example, when a second operation is received on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "sixth G reception post-display UG6" displays the mode UG6b shown in Figs. 374(e) and (f), and first, as shown in Fig. 374(e), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G6" with fire-based magic (for the second time). Next, as shown in Fig. 374(f), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G6" receiving damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G6," further reducing its HP.

The "sound output after 6th G reception" is always audibly output even when the "display after 6th G reception UG6" is displayed in the manner UG6b shown in Figures 374(e) and (f).

In this example, as shown in Fig. 372(b), it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGf2C in the 6th G reception allowance state (presentation situation shown in Fig. 373(f)). When the third operation is performed, as the above-mentioned "change after 6th G reception (presentation after 6th G reception)", first, the 6th G reception allowance state is ended (see Figs. 372(b) and (c)), and the model image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 are made invisible (see Figs. 372(g) and Figs. 374(g) and (h)). Also, as shown in Figures 372(j), (m) and 374(g), a "sixth G post-reception output sound" is audibly output in response to the third reception of an operation on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," and a "sixth G post-reception display UG6" in response to the third reception of an operation on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

However, in this example, a predetermined waiting time is set between when an operation is accepted in the 6G reception permitted state and when the model image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 are made invisible as a result. Therefore, although the model image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 are made invisible as a result of an operation being accepted in the 6G reception permitted state, they are not made invisible immediately after the operation is accepted, but can continue to be displayed for a predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, as described above, in other reception-permitting states, the disappearance EF display that makes it difficult to see the model image display MG or the message display MS may be displayed before they are hidden, but when an operation is accepted in the 6G reception-permitting state, the disappearance EF display that makes it difficult to see the model image display MG-G6 or the message display MS-G6 is not displayed before they are hidden. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted in the 6G reception-permitting state and the "6G post-reception display UG6" corresponding to the operation acceptance starts to be displayed, the model image display MG and the message display MS are in a state where they can be easily seen, as shown in FIG. 374(g), and the model image display MG continues to change periodically.

Here, when a third operation is accepted for the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the above-mentioned "sixth G acceptance post-display UG6" is displayed in the form UG6c shown in Fig. 374(g)-(i). First, as shown in Fig. 374(g), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G6" with fire magic (for the third time). Next, as shown in Fig. 374(h), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G6" receiving damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G6" and reducing its HP to 0. Next, as shown in Fig. 374(i), a result display is shown as to whether or not "enemy character BOSS-G6" was defeated. In the example shown in FIG. 374(i), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G6" being defeated appears, suggesting high expectations, but the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G6" not being defeated (a depiction suggesting low expectations) appears depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G6" being defeated always appears.

In this regard, when the "6th G reception post-output sound" is displayed in the mode UG6c (specific mode) shown in Fig. 374 (g) to (i), there are both cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception to the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception. That is, in this case, even though the same mode UG6c is executed as the "6th G reception post-output sound UG6", there are cases where the "6th G reception post-output sound" is audibly output and cases where the "6th G reception post-output sound" is not audibly output. Therefore, when an operation is performed without looking at the game board side performance display device 1600, it is not possible to determine that the operation reception is in a proper state, and the tension after the operation reception can be appropriately maintained. In this example, whether or not the "6th G reception post-output sound" is audibly output is determined by a lottery such as a performance judgment, but the method of realizing this is not limited to this. However, "when an audible output is made based on operation acceptance" and "when an audible output is not made based on operation acceptance" both refer to situations where the game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and a configuration in which the "sound output after acceptance of 6th G" is not audibly output when some kind of abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing goes against the intent of the technical concept and should be eliminated.

In this example, the "6th G reception post display UG6" is displayed in different modes UG6a to UG6c depending on how many times the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated in the 6th G reception allowable state, but it is not necessary to make a different mode (image display) appear every time an operation is performed on the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 6th G reception allowable state. For example, when an operation is performed on the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 6th G reception allowable state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed may appear, or no new change may occur from the previous mode (image display) that is already displayed. Whether a mode different from when the previous operation was performed appears, that is, which mode appears when the current operation is performed, may be determined (drawn) based on the results of a jackpot determination, a performance determination, etc., but the method of realizing this is not limited to this.

The "sound output after receipt of the sixth G" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on whether the "sixth G reception display UG6" is displayed in one of the modes UG6a to UG6c, or may be audibly output as the same sound regardless of whether the "sixth G reception display UG6" is displayed in one of the modes UG6a to UG6c.

However, when such a post-acceptance display is displayed, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease if other effects or background images unrelated to the acceptance status are made difficult to see, or if the post-acceptance display appears in a form different from what the player desires.

Therefore, in the 6th G reception permission state according to this embodiment, if a specific condition is met while the "6th G reception post-display UG6" corresponding to the 6th G reception permission state is displayed, this triggers the "6th G reception post-display UG6" to be put into a non-display state. With this configuration, if the player does not wish for the "6th G reception post-display UG6" to be displayed, the "6th G reception post-display UG6" can be put into a non-display state, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this example of presentation, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 372(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGf2D (presentation situation shown in Figure 354(g)) during the period when the "6th G acceptance display UG6" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is met at timing tGf2D (the performance status shown in FIG. 354(g)), as shown in FIG. 372(g), (i), (l) and FIG. 374(j), the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the display of the "6th G post-acceptance display UG6" to be hidden. Also, at this time, a "specific display SK" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is displayed, and a "specific sound" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is audibly output.

In this example, the "specific display SK" is displayed in a mode such as "The button performance was ended midway" (see FIG. 374(j)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and multiple modes may be prepared and the display may be made in any of those modes. Also, unlike the "sound output after the 6th G reception" above, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGf2D (the performance status shown in FIG. 354(g)). The "specific sound" may also be prepared in multiple modes and may be audibly output in any of those modes. The "specific sound" and the "sound output after the 6th G reception" are audibly output as sounds in different modes.

As described above, in the 6th G reception permission state in this embodiment, a predetermined waiting time is set between the reception of an operation to the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and the moment when the model image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 are hidden. In this regard, this performance example assumes that the specific condition is met at timing tGf2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 354(g)) when the model image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 have not yet been hidden and are still in a displayed state.

In other words, in this case, the model image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 are not displayed when the specific condition is met, as shown in Figures 372(g) and 374(f), without waiting for the specified waiting time to elapse. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly end the display state of not only the "6th G reception post-display UG6", but also the model image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In this example, while the 6th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGf3 at which the 6th G reception permission state ends is displayed decreasing over time, but this display does not necessarily have to be performed.

Also, the 6th G reception permission state is originally continued until the timing tGf3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and is terminated based on the arrival of timing tGf3. In this regard, the 6th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, when there is no operation reception to the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" until the arrival of timing tGf3 in the 6th G reception permission state, the 6th G reception permission state is simply terminated based on the arrival of timing tGf3, and the 6th G post-reception change (6th G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed to the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not executed.

In addition, in the 6G reception permission state, even if the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed), this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see Figures 372 (b) and (c)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operations received on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 6G reception permission state, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

The sixth G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is provided so that it can emit light in one of a number of color schemes, including a "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, when the 6G reception allowable state occurs, as shown in FIG. 372(e), the "6G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the object of operation can emit light only in the "first light-emitting mode". This "first light-emitting mode" continues until the timing tGf3 at which the 6G reception allowable state ends when no operation is accepted in the 6G reception allowable state, but when an operation is accepted in the 6G reception allowable state, this triggers the non-illuminating state (see FIG. 372(e)).

In addition, when the 6G reception permission state occurs, there is no audible output of a reception permission sound that indicates that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted.

As described above, when the 6th G reception permission state occurs, if a specific condition is met while the "6th G reception display UG6" corresponding to the 6th G reception permission state is displayed, this triggers the "6th G reception display UG6" to be hidden. Therefore, not only when the mode UG6c shown in Fig. 374(g)-(i) is displayed as the "6th G reception display UG6", but also when a specific condition is met while the mode UG6a shown in Fig. 373(c) and (d) or the mode UG6b shown in Fig. 374(e) and (f) is displayed, this triggers the "6th G reception display UG6", the model image display MG-G6, the message display MS-G6, etc. to be hidden. At this time, the state in which operation reception is permitted for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" (6th G reception permission state) is not terminated but continues.

Also, when a specific condition is met in the 6th G reception permission state where no operation has been received yet (no operation has been received even once), this may be used as a trigger to make the model image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 invisible. With this configuration, if the player does not want the button effects themselves, it is possible to make the various displays related to the button effects invisible, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, however, the model image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 may be hidden, but the state in which operation is permitted for the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" may continue. With this configuration, various displays related to the button effects are hidden, but the state in which operation is permitted continues, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

When a specific condition is met within the 6G reception permission state, and this triggers various displays related to the button performance (mock image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6, 6G post-reception display UG6) to be hidden, and an operation is accepted on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the "6G post-reception display UG6" will be displayed in response to this operation acceptance. However, in this case, it is also possible not to audibly output the "6G post-reception output sound." According to this configuration, when the various displays related to the button effects (mock image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6, 6th G post-reception display UG6) are made invisible when a specific condition is met, the state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" continues, but even if an operation is accepted while in this invisible state, the "6th G post-reception output sound" is not audibly output, and the "6th G post-reception display UG6 (mode UG6a, mode UG6b, mode UG6c, etc.)" is merely displayed (the performance is reduced) without any sound triggered by such operation acceptance being audibly output, which encourages careful consideration as to whether or not to meet the specific condition, and creates an ideal sense of tension.

In addition, when a specific condition is met in a 6G reception-permitted state in which no operation has yet been received, and various displays related to the button performance (mock image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6, 6G post-reception display UG6) are hidden as a result of this, an operation is received on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and the "6G post-reception display UG6" is displayed as a result of this operation reception, when a specific condition is met again while the "6G post-reception display UG6" is being displayed, this may be used as a trigger to prevent the "6G post-reception display UG6 (mode UG6a, mode UG6b, mode UG6c, etc.)" from being hidden. With this configuration, when a specific condition is met again, this is used as a trigger to prevent the "6G post-reception display UG6" from being hidden, which encourages further deliberation as to whether or not to meet the specific condition, thereby favorably creating a sense of tension.

In addition, in the 6G reception permission state according to this example, the final state UG6c appears as the "6G post-reception display UG6" when the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time). Alternatively, a determination may be made when an operation is performed on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 6G reception permission state, and based on the result of the determination, an "operation reception to display the final state UG6c" may be made, and the final state UG6c may be displayed.

In addition, the sixth G reception permission state in this example is generated as a valid period that may be terminated when an operation is received from the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," but it may also be generated as a valid period that is not terminated when the operation is received. For example, when the final state (such as a red lamp lighting up) appears as a change after reception, the final state (such as a red lamp lighting up) may appear every time an operation is received thereafter, and the valid period itself may not be terminated.

In addition, in this example, in the 6th G reception permission state, the mock image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 can continue to be displayed even after the 6th G reception permission state ends, but they may be made invisible when the 6th G reception permission state ends, so that they do not continue to be displayed.

In addition, in this example, in the 6th G reception permitted state, the model image display MG-G6 is displayed, but the model image display MG-G6 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In addition, in this example, in the 6th G reception permitted state, the message display MS-G6 is displayed, but the message display MS-G6 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In addition, in the 6G reception permissible state in this example, when the 6G reception permissible state occurs, a reception permissible sound that indicates that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted is not audibly output, but instead, a 6G reception permissible sound corresponding to the 6G reception permissible state may be audibly output. In this case, it is preferable that the 6G reception permissible sound is not audibly output in the above-mentioned "permissible sound B (specific mode)" but is audibly output in the above-mentioned "permissible sound A (normal mode)".

In this case, even if an operation is accepted at the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the 6G reception permissible sound (permissible sound A (normal mode)) is being audibly output, it is desirable to continue the audible output of the 6G reception permissible sound rather than using this as a trigger to terminate the audible output.

Here, the 6th G reception permission state (see Figures 372 to 374) may instead be generated as a "6th G reception permission state according to a modified example" described below.

Figure 375 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "6th G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 6G" as the occurrence condition and the player performs an operation. Figures 376 and 377 are diagrams showing an example of the presentation when the "6th G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs. Note that the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to generate the above-mentioned "6th G reception permission state" and the "6th G reception permission state according to the modified example" described below as reception permission states of different types. However, in this case, the occurrence conditions for these are set as different conditions. In this case, the post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc. may also be executed as different types (modes).

The "sixth G reception permitted state according to the modified example" is basically the same as the "sixth G reception permitted state" described above, and although not shown in the figures, it occurs as a reception permitted state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. However, as shown in FIG. 375, it differs from the "sixth G reception permitted state" described above in that a "section in which the model image display MG-G6 is not displayed (non-display section)" appears midway through the valid period (operation permitted state) (timing Yg in the figure).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 375, when the timing Yg in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" arrives, this triggers the model image display MG-G6 to be put into a non-display state, but at this time, the background of the "background image display" is changed (the first background image HK-G1 is replaced by the second background image HK-G2). However, at this time, the disappearance EF display is not displayed as the model image display MG-G6 is put into a non-display state.

The following describes in detail the case where an operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in such a "6th G acceptance state according to a modified example," but configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as those in the above-mentioned "6th G acceptance state (Figures 372 to 374)" (including other examples).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 375(c), the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs when timing tGf2 arrives (when "condition 6G" is satisfied), similar to the above-described "sixth G reception permission state (FIGS. 372 to 374)," and is similar to the above-described "sixth G reception permission state (FIGS. 372 to 374)" in that the "sixth G operation unit" for which reception of operation is permitted is set as the above-described operation button 410 and that reception of that operation is permitted multiple times.

Similarly, even if the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, the premonition display that gives advance indication to the player that an operation opportunity will be given will not be executed.

That is, in this case, even when the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, as shown in FIG. 375(g) and FIG. 376(b), (c), etc., the operation reception for the sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is permitted while the premonition display display is not displayed, or as the sixth G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted, a model image display MG-G6 modeling the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the sixth G operation unit) is displayed. Note that in this performance example, the timing when the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs and the timing when the "sixth G operation-related display" is displayed are the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "sixth G operation-related display" may be displayed before the timing when the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, spanning that timing. Alternatively, the "6th G operation related display" may be displayed with a delay from the timing when the "6th G reception permitted state according to the modified example" occurs.

Here, the "mock image display MG-G6" corresponding to the sixth G reception permission state in the modified example is always displayed in a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and is displayed in this "predetermined color scheme."

In addition, when the moving image of the part modeled after the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation, "is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α), and then displayed in each manner shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ) in sequence," is considered as one periodic change in the "imitation image display MG-G6" corresponding to the "sixth G reception allowing state according to the modified example," the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 6G time. This period of 6G time is set as a longer time (longer cycle) than the "period of 5G time," "period of 7G time," and "period of 8G time" displayed in the above-mentioned fifth G reception allowing state, the below-mentioned seventh G reception allowing state, and the below-mentioned eighth G reception allowing state, so in the "sixth G reception allowing state according to the modified example," the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned fifth G reception allowing state, the below-mentioned seventh G reception allowing state, and the below-mentioned eighth G reception allowing state.

Also, in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example", as shown in Figs. 376(b) and (c), the above-mentioned "sixth G operation-related display" includes, in addition to the mock image display MG-G6, a message display (here, the message display MS-G6 displayed as "Attack!") related to the reception of operations on the sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), etc. are displayed.

In this example, too, an ally character (here, ally character YS-G6) according to the type of "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" and an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-G6 depicted as a giant bat) according to the type of "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" are displayed. That is, even in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example", when an operation is performed on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", it is possible to indicate whether the expectation of a big win is high or low depending on "whether or not ally character YS-G6 can defeat enemy character BOSS-G6 based on multiple operation receptions", and each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the performance can progress so that "ally character YS-G6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-G6".

As described above, in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example," a "period in which the model image display MG-G6 is displayed (display period)" and a "period in which the model image display MG-G6 is not displayed (non-display period)" appear in sequence. In this regard, when an operation is accepted for the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "period in which the model image display MG-G6 is displayed (display period)" of the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example," and a specific condition is satisfied while the "sixth G post-reception display UG6" corresponding to the operation acceptance is being displayed, the content of the change (and further examples thereof) that occurs as a result of this has been described above with reference to Figures 372 to 374, and therefore will not be described here.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 375 to 377 are intended to cover a case where, after an operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G6 is displayed" and the "section (non-display section) in which the model image display MG-G6 is not displayed" of the "6th G acceptance permission state according to the modified example," a specific condition is met while the "6th G post-acceptance display UG6" in response to the operation acceptance is being displayed.

In this example, as shown in Figures 375 to 377, in the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G6 is displayed", the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as the "background image display". However, when the timing Yg arrives, a background change occurs and the "background image display" changes from the first background image HK-G1 to the second background image HK-G2. Also, in this example, when the timing Yg arrives, not only is the model image display MG-G6 made invisible, but the message display MS-G6 is also made invisible. However, as described above, at this time, the disappearance EF display that accompanies the model image display MG-G6 being made invisible is not displayed.

In this regard, this performance example also assumes that the first operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGfa (performance situation shown in FIG. 376(b)) in the "6th G acceptance permitted state according to the modified example", and if the first operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGf2a (performance situation shown in FIG. 373(b)), a "6th G post-acceptance change (6th G post-acceptance performance)" will occur in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 375 and FIG. 376(c) and (d).

More specifically, when a first operation is accepted for the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGf2a (presentation status shown in FIG. 376(b)) in the "6G acceptance permission state according to the modified example", as shown in FIGS. 375(j) and (m) and 376(c) and (d), a "6G acceptance post output sound" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after the 6G acceptance, and a "6G acceptance post display UG6" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the above-mentioned "6th G acceptance display UG6" is displayed as the above-mentioned "6th G acceptance display UG6", as shown in Figs. 376(c) and (d). First, as shown in Fig. 376(c), the "ally character YS-G6" is depicted attacking the "enemy character BOSS-G6" with fire magic (for the first time). Next, as shown in Fig. 376(d), the "enemy character BOSS-G6" is depicted as receiving damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G6" and losing its HP. In other words, in the "6th G acceptance display UG6", when the HP of the "enemy character BOSS-G6" becomes 0 due to the attack of the "ally character YS-G6", it means that the "enemy character BOSS-G6" has been defeated, which suggests high expectations.

In addition, the "sound output after 6th G reception" is always audibly output when the "display after 6th G reception UG6" is displayed in the manner UG6a shown in Figures 376(c) and (d).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 375(b), it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGf2b (presentation status shown in FIG. 376(d)) in the "6G reception permission state according to the modified example". When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 375(j), (m) and FIG. 377(e), as a change after 6G reception, a "6G post-reception output sound" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "6G post-reception display UG6" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" starts to be displayed.

In this example as well, when a second operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "6th G post-acceptance display UG6" first depicts "ally character YS-G6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G6" with fire magic (for the second time) as shown in FIG. 377(e) (mode UG6b). Then, in the above-mentioned "6th G acceptance permitted state (FIGS. 372 to 374)," as shown in FIG. 374(f), a depiction would normally be displayed in which "enemy character BOSS-G6" receives damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G6" and its HP further decreases (mode UG6b).

However, in this example, it is assumed that the timing Yg described above occurs while the "6th G post-reception display UG6" is being displayed in the above-mentioned manner UG6b, and the transition occurs from the "section in which the model image display MG-G6 is displayed (display section)" to the "section in which the model image display MG-G6 is not displayed (non-display section)" (see Figures 375 and 377).

In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 375(g) and FIG. 377(f), (j), the arrival of timing Yg triggers the model image display MG-G6 to be hidden, and the "6th G reception display UG6 (here, mode UG6b)" that was displayed until then is hidden. Also, at this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 375(d) and FIG. 377(f), the arrival of timing Yg triggers a background change from the first background image HK-G1 to the second background image HK-G2. Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 375(j) and FIG. 377(f), the arrival of timing Yg triggers displays related to the button effects (message display MS-G6, ally character YS-G6, enemy character BOSS-G6, etc.) to be hidden.

However, as described above, when the mock image display MG-G6 is thus made invisible, the state in which acceptance of operations (acceptance of operations to cause a change after the sixth G reception (the display after the sixth G reception UG6)) to the "sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is permitted continues.

The "sound output after 6th G reception" is always audibly output even when the "sixth G reception display UG6" is displayed in mode UG6b shown in FIG. 377(e). In this regard, in this performance example, the "sound output after 6th G reception" (mode UG6b in this case) ends its display state when the timing Yg arrives, but the "sound output after 6th G reception" continues its output state without ending when the timing Yg arrives.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 375(b), it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGf2c (presentation status shown in FIG. 377(f)) in the "6G reception permission state (non-display section) according to the modified example". When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 375(j), (m) and FIG. 377(g), as the above-mentioned "change after 6G reception (post-6G reception presentation)", a "post-6G reception output sound" corresponding to the third reception of the operation on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "post-6G reception display UG6" corresponding to the third reception of the operation on the "6G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is started to be displayed.

In this regard, the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs as a valid period that is not terminated as a result of receiving an operation on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)." Therefore, even if the "final state" appears as a change after reception, the "final state" will only appear thereafter each time an operation is received, and this will not cause the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" to be terminated.

In this example, when a third operation is received on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "display after sixth G reception UG6" displays the mode UG6c shown in Figures 377(g) and (h), and first, as shown in Figure 377(g), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G6" with fire magic (for the third time). Next, as shown in Figure 377(h), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G6" taking damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G6" and reducing its HP to 0. In the example shown in FIG. 377(h), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G6" being defeated (a depiction of HP being reduced to 0) appears, suggesting a high expectation level; however, the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G6" not being defeated (a depiction of HP remaining) appears (indicating a low expectation level) depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G6" being defeated may always appear. In this sense, the mode UG6c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final mode."

In this regard, with regard to the above-mentioned "sound output after 6G reception", when the above-mentioned "display after 6G reception UG6" is displayed in the mode UG6c (specific mode) shown in Fig. 377 (g) and (h), there are both cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception to the "6G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception. That is, in this case, even though the same mode UG6c is executed as the "display after 6G reception UG6", there are cases where the "sound output after 6G reception" is audibly output and cases where the "sound output after 6G reception" is not audibly output. Therefore, when an operation is performed without looking at the game board side performance display device 1600, it is not possible to determine that the operation reception is in a proper state, and the sense of tension after the operation reception can be appropriately maintained. In this example, whether or not the "sound output after 6G reception" is audibly output is determined by a lottery such as a performance judgment, but the method of realizing this is not limited to this. However, "when an audible output is made based on operation acceptance" and "when an audible output is not made based on operation acceptance" both refer to situations where the game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and a configuration in which the "sound output after acceptance of 6th G" is not audibly output when some kind of abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing goes against the intent of the technical concept and should be eliminated.

In this example, the "6th G reception post display UG6" is displayed in different modes UG6a to UG6c depending on how many times the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated in the "6th G reception permission state according to the modified example", but it is not necessary to make a different mode (image display) appear every time an operation is performed on the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 6th G reception permission state. For example, when an operation is performed on the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 6th G reception permission state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed may appear, or no new change may occur from the previous mode (image display) that is already displayed. Whether a mode different from when the previous operation was performed appears, that is, which mode appears when the current operation is performed, may be determined (drawn) based on the results of a jackpot determination, a performance determination, etc., but the method of realizing this is not limited to this.

The "sound output after receipt of the sixth G" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on whether the "sixth G reception display UG6" is displayed in one of the modes UG6a to UG6c, or may be audibly output as the same sound regardless of whether the "sixth G reception display UG6" is displayed in one of the modes UG6a to UG6c.

As described above, the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" is also configured to, when a specific condition is met while the "sixth G reception post-display UG6" corresponding to the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" is displayed, turn the "sixth G reception post-display UG6" into a non-display state. Therefore, not only when the mode UG6c shown in Figs. 377(g) and (h) is displayed as the "sixth G reception post-display UG6", but also when a specific condition is met while the mode UG6a shown in Figs. 376(c) and (d) or the mode UG6b shown in Fig. 377(e) is displayed, the "sixth G reception post-display UG6", the model image display MG-G6, the message display MS-G6, etc. are turned into a non-display state. At this time, the state in which operation reception is permitted for the "sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" (sixth G reception permission state) is not terminated but continues.

In the presentation examples shown in Figures 375 and 377, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 375(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGf2d (presentation status shown in Figure 377(g)) during the period when the "6th G post-acceptance display UG6 (here, mode UG6c)" is displayed in response to the operation acceptance within the "section (non-display section) where the model image display MG-G6 is not displayed."

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is met at timing tGf2d (presentation status shown in FIG. 377(g)), as shown in FIG. 375(i) and FIG. 377(j), the "6th G reception post-display UG6 (here, mode UG6c)" is made invisible in response to the specific condition being met. Also, as shown in FIG. 375(d) and FIG. 377(j), the second background image HK-G2 that had been displayed as the "background image display" is changed to the first background image HK-G1 (the background image that was displayed before timing Yg arrived) (the background change is the opposite of timing Yg). Also, at this time, as shown in FIG. 375(i), (l) and FIG. 377(j), a "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met is displayed, and a "specific sound" corresponding to the specific condition being met is audibly output.

In this example, the "specific display SK" is also displayed in a mode such as "The button performance was ended midway" (see FIG. 377(j)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and multiple modes may be prepared and the display may be made in any of those modes. Also, unlike the "sound output after the 6th G reception" above, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGf2d (the performance status shown in FIG. 377(g)). The "specific sound" may also be prepared in multiple modes and may be audibly output in any of those modes. The "specific sound" and the "sound output after the 6th G reception" are audibly output as sounds in different modes.

In this example, while the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGf3 at which the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" ends is displayed decreasing over time, but this display does not necessarily have to be performed.

Also, the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" is originally continued until the timing tGf3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the "sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and is terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGf3. In this regard, the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. Therefore, when there is no operation reception to the "sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" until the timing tGf3 arrives in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example", the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" is merely terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGf3, and the post-sixth G reception change (post-sixth G reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed to the "sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is not executed.

Also, in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example", even if the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed), this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see Figs. 375 (b) and (c)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operation receptions for the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example", the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)".

The "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" can also occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays.

Also, when the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, as shown in FIG. 375(e), the "sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the object of operation can only emit light in the "first light emission mode". This "first light emission mode" continues until the timing tGf3 at which the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" ends when no operation is received in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example", but when a specific condition is met, this triggers the non-emission state (see FIG. 375(e)). That is, in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example", when the timing Yg arrives, the "model image display MG-G6" is made invisible, but even after the timing Yg arrives, the "sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the object of operation continues to emit light in the "first light emission mode". However, when a specific condition is met, the sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410) will continue to be allowed to accept operations even after that point, but will be put into a non-illuminating state as a result.

As described above, when the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, if a specific condition is met while the "sixth G reception post-display UG6" corresponding to the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example" is displayed, this triggers the "sixth G reception post-display UG6" to be made invisible. In this regard, when a specific condition is met in the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G6 is displayed" of the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example", this may be used as a trigger to transition to the state shown in FIG. 377(j). In other words, in this case, the model image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 that had been displayed up until that point are made invisible, and when a specific condition is met while the "sixth G reception post-display UG6" is displayed, this triggers the "sixth G reception post-display UG6" to be made invisible. With this configuration, if a player does not want to see the button effects themselves, the various displays related to the button effects can be hidden, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, however, the model image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 may be hidden, but the state in which operation is permitted for the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" may continue. With this configuration, various displays related to the button effects are hidden, but the state in which operation is permitted continues, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

Note that when a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the "section (display section) in which the model image display MG-G6 is displayed" of the "sixth G reception permitted state according to the modified example," and this triggers various displays related to the button performance (model image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6) to be hidden, and when an operation is accepted on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" under these circumstances, the "sixth G post-reception display UG6" will be displayed in response to the acceptance of that operation. However, at this time, the "sixth G post-reception output sound" may not be audibly output. With this configuration, when the various displays related to the button effects (mock image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6) are hidden due to the establishment of a specific condition, the state in which acceptance of operations to the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is permitted continues, but even if an operation is accepted while in this hidden state, the "6th G post-acceptance output sound" is not audibly output, and the "6th G post-acceptance display UG6" is merely displayed without any sound triggered by such operation acceptance being audibly output (the performance is reduced), which encourages careful consideration as to whether or not to establish the specific condition and creates an ideal sense of tension.

In addition, when a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the "sixth G reception allowing state according to the modified example", this may trigger various displays related to the button performance (mock image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6) to be hidden, and when an operation is accepted on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" under these circumstances, this triggers the display of the "sixth G post-reception display UG6", and when a specific condition is met again while the "sixth G post-reception display UG6" is displayed, this may trigger the "sixth G post-reception display UG6" to not be hidden. That is, in this case, if a specific condition is met while the "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the "section (non-display section) where the model image display MG-G6 is not displayed" of the "6th G reception permitting state according to the modified example", this triggers the "6th G post-reception display UG6" to be made non-displayed. However, if a non-display section is created early by meeting a specific condition in the "section (display section) where the model image display MG-G6 is displayed" of the "6th G reception permitting state according to the modified example", even if a specific condition is met while the "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the non-display section created early, this will not be the trigger for the "6th G post-reception display UG6" to be made non-displayed. This encourages further deliberation as to whether or not to satisfy the specific condition, and can appropriately create a sense of tension.

In addition, in this example, in the 6th G reception permitted state, the message display MS-G6 is displayed, but the message display MS-G6 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "7th G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 378 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "7th G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 7G" as the occurrence condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figures 379 and 380 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the "7th G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "7th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "7th G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 7th G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 7th G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "7th G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 378(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "7th G variable pattern", the above-mentioned 7th G reception permission state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 379(b)) in which "operation acceptance to the 7th G operation unit regarding changes after 7th G acceptance (display after 7th G acceptance, sound output after 7th G acceptance, etc.)" is accepted based on the arrival of timing tGg2 when the 7th G time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 7G").

Here, in the seventh G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "seventh G operation section" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the seventh G reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates such a 7th G reception permission state, it is first possible to execute a "7th G premonition display" that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when the timing tGg1 arrives before the occurrence of the 7th G reception permission state, the "specific premonition display ZET" described above as the "7th G premonition presentation display" begins to be executed as shown in Fig. 378(f) and Fig. 379(a). This "2nd G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 7th G operation-related display is displayed, as shown in Figs. 378(c), (f) and 379(a), (b).

That is, in this presentation example, when the 7th G reception allowable state occurs, as shown in FIG. 378(g) and FIG. 379(b), (c), etc., the state is such that reception of operations to the 7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, or at least a replica image display MG-G7 that mimics the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 7th G operation unit) is displayed as the 7th G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted. Note that, in this presentation example, the timing at which the 7th G reception allowable state occurs and the timing at which the "7th G operation-related display" is displayed are the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "7th G operation-related display" may be displayed after the timing at which the "7th G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing at which the 7th G reception allowable state occurs, so that it is displayed in a manner that spans the timing. Alternatively, the "7th G operation related display" may start to be displayed with a delay from the timing when the 7th G reception permission state occurs.

In this regard, the "mock image display MG-G7" corresponding to the seventh G reception permission state uses one of multiple color schemes including a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and when it is displayed in a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)", it will be displayed in the same manner as the "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the first G reception permission state described above.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-G7" corresponding to the 7th G reception allowable state is such that, when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 7G time. This period of 7G time is set as a shorter time (short cycle) than the "period of 1G time," "period of 2G time," and "period of 6G time" displayed in the above-mentioned 1st G reception allowable state, 2nd G reception allowable state, 6th G reception allowable state, etc., so that in the 7th G reception allowable state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving more quickly through its movable range than in the above-mentioned 1st G reception allowable state, 2nd G reception allowable state, 6th G reception allowable state, etc. The moving images in "Mock Image Display MG-G7" do not have to be simply fast-forwarded versions of the moving images in "Mock Image Display MG-G1", "Mock Image Display MG-G2", and "Mock Image Display MG-G6", but may be different moving images that depict the operation receiving portion periodically moving within its movable range.

When the "mock image display MG-G7" corresponding to the 7th G reception allowable state is started to be displayed before the timing tGg2 at which the 7th G reception allowable state occurs, it is desirable to have the periodic change not start until the timing tGg2. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-G7" corresponding to the 7th G reception allowable state will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until the timing tGg2 arrives.

In addition, in the 7th G reception permission state according to this example, the above-mentioned "7th G operation related display" includes, as shown in Figs. 379(b) and (c), a mock image display MG-G7, as well as a message display (here, a message display MS-G7 displayed as "Flame!") related to the reception of operations for the 7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

In this example, the "7th G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G7, message display MS-G7)" corresponding to the 7th G reception permission state begins to be displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the specific premonition display ZET while the specific premonition display ZET is displayed as the "7th G premonition performance display" as shown in FIG. 379(b). Note that, as mentioned above, the display range of the specific premonition display ZET (the range that makes the 7th G operation-related display difficult to see) is reduced over time.

As a result of the display range of the 7th G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) shrinking in this way, when the 7th G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) is hidden, the entirety of the "7th G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G7, message display MS-G7)" becomes clearly visible, and in this situation, it becomes possible for operations to be accepted on the 7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410). However, the 7th G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) may be made to continue to be displayed for the entire period from when the 7th G acceptance-permitting state occurs until it ends.

In addition, in the seventh G reception permission state according to this example, an ally character (here, the ally character YS-G7) according to the type of the seventh G reception permission state and an enemy character (here, the enemy character BOSS-G7 depicted as a golem) according to the type of the seventh G reception permission state are displayed. That is, when an operation is performed on the "seventh G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "seventh G reception permission state", it can be suggested whether the expectation of a big win is high or low depending on "whether the ally character YS-G7 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-G7 based on multiple operation receptions", and each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "seventh G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the performance can progress so that the "ally character YS-G7" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G7".

In the example shown in Figures 378 and 379, it is assumed that at timing tGg2A in the 7G reception permission state (the performance situation shown in Figure 379 (b)), the first operation is received on the "7G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the 7G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed.

In this regard, in the 7th G reception permitted state in this example, even if an operation is received on the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the 7th G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed, this will not cause the 7th G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) to go into a hidden state, but will remain displayed for a predetermined period of time (the same display period as when no operation is received).

Therefore, when the first operation is accepted for the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGg2A in the 7th G acceptance allowance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 379(b)), as shown in FIG. 378(f), (g) and FIG. 379(c), the 7th G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is not hidden in response to the operation acceptance, but is left continuously displayed, and a "7th G post-acceptance change (7th G post-acceptance performance)" occurs in response to the operation acceptance.

More specifically, when the first operation is accepted for the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGg2A in the "7th G reception permitted state" (the presentation status shown in FIG. 379(b)), as shown in FIG. 378(j) and (m) and FIG. 379(c) and (d), a "7th G post-reception output sound" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after the 7th G acceptance, and a "7th G post-reception display UG7" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the above-mentioned "7th G acceptance display UG7" is displayed in the form UG7a shown in Fig. 379(c) and (d). First, as shown in Fig. 379(c), the "ally character YS-G7" is depicted attacking the "enemy character BOSS-G7" with ice magic (for the first time). Next, as shown in Fig. 379(d), the "enemy character BOSS-G7" is depicted receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G7" and losing its HP. In other words, in the "7th G acceptance display UG7", when the HP of the "enemy character BOSS-G7" becomes 0 due to the attack of the "ally character YS-G7", it means that the "enemy character BOSS-G7" has been defeated, which suggests high expectations.

In addition, the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception display UG7" is displayed in the manner UG7a shown in Figures 379 (c) and (d).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 378(b), it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "7G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGg2b (the performance status shown in FIG. 379(d)) in the "7G reception allowance state". When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 378(j), (m) and FIG. 380(e), (f), as a change after the 7G reception, a "7G reception post output sound" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "7G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and the "7G reception post display UG7" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "7G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" starts to be displayed. At this time, as described above, the 8G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is not made invisible in response to the operation reception.

In this example, when a second operation is received on the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "7th G reception post-display UG7" is displayed in the form UG7b shown in Figs. 380(e) and (f), and first, as shown in Fig. 380(e), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G7" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G7" with ice-based magic (for the second time). Next, as shown in Fig. 380(f), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G7" receiving damage from the attack (second time) by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G7," further reducing its HP.

The "seventh G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output even when the "seventh G post-reception display UG7" is displayed in the manner UG7b shown in Figures 380(e) and (f).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 378(b), it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGg2C in the 7th G reception allowance state (presentation situation shown in FIG. 380(f)). When the third operation is performed, as the above-mentioned "change after 7th G reception (presentation after 7th G reception)", first the 7th G reception allowance state is ended (see FIG. 378(b) and (c)), and the mock image display MG-G7 and message display MS-G7 are made invisible (see FIG. 378(g) and FIG. 380(g)-(i)). Also, as shown in Figures 378(j), (m) and 380(g), a "7th G post-reception output sound" is audibly output in response to the third reception of an operation on the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," and a "7th G post-reception display UG7" in response to the third reception of an operation on the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

However, in this example, a predetermined waiting time is set between when an operation is accepted in the 7G reception-permitted state and when the model image display MG-G7 and message display MS-G7 are made invisible as a result of this. Therefore, although the model image display MG-G7 and message display MS-G7 are made invisible as a result of an operation being accepted in the 7G reception-permitted state, they are not made invisible immediately after the operation is accepted, but can continue to be displayed for a predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, in the 7th G reception permitted state, the 7th G disappearance EF display EF-G7 is displayed to make the model image display MG and message display MS less visible until they are hidden. In other words, in this case, the model image display MG and message display MS are hidden while the 7th G disappearance EF display EF-G7 is displayed, as shown in Figures 378 (g) and (h).

Here, when a third operation is accepted for the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the above-mentioned "7th G acceptance post display UG7" is displayed in the form UG7c shown in Fig. 380(g)-(i). First, as shown in Fig. 380(g), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G7" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G7" with ice magic (for the third time). Next, as shown in Fig. 380(h), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G7" receiving damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G7" and reducing its HP to 0. Next, as shown in Fig. 380(i), a result display is displayed as to whether or not "enemy character BOSS-G7" was defeated. In the example shown in FIG. 380(i), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G7" being defeated appears, suggesting high expectations, but the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G7" not being defeated (a depiction suggesting low expectations) appears depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G7" being defeated always appears.

The "seventh G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output even when the "seventh G post-reception display UG7" is displayed in the manner UG7c shown in Figures 380(g) to (i).

In other words, when one form (for example, any of the multiple forms that can appear as the 7th G reception display UG8) is displayed as the 7th G reception display UG8, there are no cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the 7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410) and no cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception, and an audible output is always made based on the operation reception. Note that "there are no cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the 7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410), and an audible output is made based on the operation reception" refers only to a situation where a game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and does not refer to a configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

In this example, the "7th G reception post display UG7" is displayed in different modes UG7a to UG7c depending on how many times the "7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated in the 7th G reception allowable state, but it is not necessary to make a different mode (image display) appear every time an operation is performed on the "7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 7th G reception allowable state. For example, when an operation is performed on the "7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 7th G reception allowable state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed may appear, or no new change may occur from the previous mode (image display) already displayed. Whether a mode different from when the previous operation was performed appears, that is, which mode appears when the current operation is performed, may be determined (drawn) based on the results of a jackpot determination, a performance determination, etc., but the method of realizing this is not limited to this.

However, for the "7th G reception post-display UG7" corresponding to the 7th G reception permission state, mode UG7c is set as the "final mode", and as shown in Figs. 378(c) and (j), when an "operation reception" that causes mode UG7c to be displayed is performed, this is the trigger that ends the 7th G reception permission state.

The above-mentioned "sound output after reception of the seventh G" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on whether the above-mentioned "display after reception of the seventh G UG7" is displayed in one of the modes UG7a to UG7c, or may be audibly output as the same sound regardless of whether the display is displayed in one of the modes UG7a to UG7c.

As mentioned above, in the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state", "first G reception permission state according to a modified example", "sixth G reception permission state" and "sixth G reception permission state according to a modified example", if a specific condition is met while the corresponding "post-reception display" is displayed, this triggers the "post-reception display" to be hidden.

In this example of presentation, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 378(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGg2D (presentation situation shown in Figure 380(g)) during the period when the "7th G acceptance display UG7" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGg2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 380(g)), the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly output as shown in FIG. 378(l). However, even if the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGg2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 380(g)), the satisfaction of the specific condition does not cause the "7th G reception display UG7 (regardless of form)", the model image display MG-G7, or the message display MS-G7 to be hidden, as shown in FIG. 378(g), (i), and FIG. 380(h), nor does the "specific display SK" corresponding to the satisfaction of the specific condition be displayed. In other words, in this case, the "7th G reception display UG7" will progress in the same form (form shown in FIG. 380(g)-(i)) as when the specific condition is not satisfied during the period in which the "7th G reception display UG7" is being executed. In addition, in the 7th G reception permission state, regardless of the timing tGg2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 380(g)), even if the above specific condition is met at any timing within the 7th G reception permission state, this will not cause the "7th G post-reception display UG7 (regardless of state)", model image display MG-G7, or message display MS-G7 to be hidden, and the "specific display SK" in response to the specific condition being met will not be displayed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGg2D (the performance status shown in FIG. 380(g)), but it may be configured so that, regardless of the timing at which the specific condition is met within the 7th G reception-permitting state, this may or may not be the trigger for the specific sound to be audibly output.

In this example, while the 7th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGg3 at which the 7th G reception permission state ends is displayed decreasing over time, but this display does not necessarily have to be performed.

In addition, the 7th G reception permission state, which is not shown in the figure, is originally continued until the timing tGg3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and is terminated based on the arrival of timing tGg3. In this regard, the 7th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, when there is no operation reception to the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" until the arrival of timing tGb3 in the 7th G reception permission state, not only is the 7th G reception permission state terminated based on the arrival of timing tGg3, but the 7th G post-reception change (7th G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed to the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is started to be executed.

Here, it is possible that the above-mentioned "specific condition" is met at a specific timing while the "7th G post-reception display UG7" is being displayed, among the changes after the 7th G reception that have been initiated by the automatic button function in this way.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is met at such a predetermined timing, this triggers the audible output of the above-mentioned "specific sound." However, even if the specific condition is met at the predetermined timing, the "7th G post-reception display UG7 (regardless of form)" is not made invisible as a result of the specific condition being met, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the "7th G post-reception display UG7" will progress in the same manner as if the specific condition had not been met during the period in which the "7th G post-reception display UG7" is being executed.

In addition, in the 7th G reception permitted state, by simply continuing to operate (press) the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," multiple operations are accepted (the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, which automatically repeats operation acceptance at predetermined time intervals) (see Figures 378 (b) and (c)). Therefore, the player can have multiple operations accepted without having to repeatedly operate (press) the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

The seventh G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays. However, it may also be possible for this state to occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is capable of emitting light in one of a number of color schemes, including a "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, when the 7G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 378(e), the "7G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the object of operation may emit light in either the "first light-emitting mode" or the "second light-emitting mode". Note that in this example, whether the "first light-emitting mode" or the "second light-emitting mode" is to be emitted is determined by a lottery such as a performance judgment (such as the expectation of a jackpot), but the method of realizing this is not limited to this. If no operation is accepted in the 7G reception permission state, these lights will continue to be emitted until the timing tGg3 arrives, when the 7G reception permission state ends. However, when an "operation is accepted" that ends the 7G reception permission state, this will trigger the lights to go non-illuminating (see Figures 378 (c) and (e)).

In addition, when the 7G reception permissible state occurs, one of multiple modes (sounds) including "permissible sound A (normal mode)" and "permissible sound B (specific mode)" can be audibly output as the 7G reception permissible sound indicating that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted (see FIG. 378(k) and the like). For example, the "permissible sound A (normal mode)" may be audibly output when the imitation image display MG-G7 is displayed in a specified color scheme, and the "permissible sound B (specific mode)" may be audibly output when the imitation image display MG-G7 is displayed in a specified color scheme. In this regard, in the 7G reception permissible state, as shown in FIG. 378(k), even if an operation is accepted for the "7G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the reception permissible sound (7G reception permissible sound) is being audibly output, this does not cause the reception permissible sound to be interrupted. Furthermore, even if certain conditions are met while the reception allowance sound (7G reception allowance sound) is being audibly output, this will not cause the reception allowance sound to be interrupted.

As described above, when the 7th G reception permission state occurs, even if a specific condition is met while the "7th G reception post-display UG7" corresponding to the 7th G reception permission state is displayed, the "7th G reception post-display UG7" is not hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the 7th G reception permission state, the mock image display MG-G7 and message display MS-G7 are not hidden.

In this example, the 7th G disappearance EF display EF-G7 corresponding to the 7th G reception-permitted state is displayed starting from the state shown in FIG. 380(h) with a delay after the change after reception, but it may be displayed starting from the state shown in FIG. 380(g). The 7th G disappearance EF display EF-G7 may be the same image display as the disappearance EF display EF displayed in other reception-permitted states, or it may be a different image display.

In addition, in this example, in the seventh G reception permission state, the mock image display MG-G7 and message display MS-G7 can continue to be displayed even after the seventh G reception permission state ends, but they may be made invisible when the seventh G reception permission state ends, so that they do not continue to be displayed.

In addition, in this example, in the 7th G reception permitted state, the message display MS-G7 is displayed, but the message display MS-G7 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

The seventh G reception permission state in this example may be one that is always terminated midway when triggered by an operation by the player, or it may or may not be terminated midway based on the results of a performance judgment or the like. In short, it is sufficient as long as it can be terminated midway when triggered by an operation by the player.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating an "8th G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 381 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "8th G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 8G" as the occurrence condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figures 382 and 383 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the "8th G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "8th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "8th G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 8th G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 8th G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "8th G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 381(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "8th G variable pattern", the above-mentioned 8th G reception permissible state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 382(b)) based on the arrival of timing tGh2 when the 8th G time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 8G"), in which "operation acceptance to the 8th G operation unit regarding changes after 8th G acceptance (display after 8th G acceptance, sound output after 8th G acceptance, etc.)" is accepted (based on the satisfaction of "condition 8G").

Here, in the 8G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "8G operation section" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the 8G reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 generates such an 8th G reception permission state, it is first possible to execute an "8th G premonition display" that indicates to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when the timing tGh1 arrives before the occurrence of the 8th G reception permission state, the "specific premonition display ZET" described above as the "8th G premonition presentation display" is started to be executed as shown in Fig. 381(f) and Fig. 382(a). This "8th G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 8th G operation-related display is displayed as shown in Figs. 381(c), (f) and 382(a), (b).

That is, in this presentation example, when the 8G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 381(g) and FIG. 382(b), (c), etc., the state is such that reception of operations to the 8G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, or at least an imitation image display MG-G8 that imitates the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 8G operation unit) is displayed as the 8G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted. Note that, in this presentation example, the timing at which the 8G reception permission state occurs and the timing at which the "8G operation-related display" is displayed are the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "8G operation-related display" may be displayed after the timing at which the "8G premonition presentation display (specific premonition display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing at which the 8G reception permission state occurs, so that it is displayed in a manner that spans the timing. Alternatively, the "8th G operation related display" may start to be displayed with a delay from the timing when the 8th G reception permission state occurs.

In this regard, the "mock image display MG-G8" corresponding to the 8th G reception permission state uses one of multiple color schemes including a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and when it is displayed in a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)", it will be displayed in the same manner as the "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the 1st G reception permission state described above.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-G8" corresponding to the 8G reception allowable state is such that, when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 8G time. This period of 8G time is set as a shorter time (short cycle) than the "period of 1G time," "period of 2G time," and "period of 6G time" displayed in the above-mentioned 1G reception allowable state, 2G reception allowable state, 6G reception allowable state, etc., so that in the 8G reception allowable state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving more quickly through its movable range than in the above-mentioned 1G reception allowable state, 2G reception allowable state, 6G reception allowable state, etc. The moving images in "Mock Image Display MG-G8" do not have to be simply fast-forwarded versions of the moving images in "Mock Image Display MG-G1", "Mock Image Display MG-G2", and "Mock Image Display MG-G6", but may be different moving images that depict the operation receiving portion periodically moving within its movable range.

When the "mock image display MG-G8" corresponding to the 8G reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGh2 at which the 8G reception permission state occurs, it is desirable to have the periodic change not start until the timing tGh2. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-G8" corresponding to the 8G reception permission state will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until the timing tGh2 arrives.

In addition, in the 8G reception permission state according to this example, as the "8G operation-related display" as shown in Figs. 381(b) and (c), in addition to the mock image display MG-G8, a message display (here, message display MS-G8 displayed as "Flatter!") related to the reception of operations for the 8G operation unit (here, operation button 410) is displayed. Note that in this example, the message display MS-G8 is displayed as the same image display as the above-mentioned message display MS-G7, but they may be displayed as different images.

In this example, the "8th G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G8, message display MS-G8)" corresponding to the 8th G reception permission state begins to be displayed so as to appear overlapped behind the specific premonition display ZET while the specific premonition display ZET is displayed as the "8th G premonition performance display" as shown in FIG. 382(b). Note that, as mentioned above, the display range of the specific premonition display ZET (the range that makes the 7th G operation-related display difficult to see) is reduced over time.

As a result of the display range of the 8G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) shrinking in this way, when the 8G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) is hidden, the entirety of the "8G operation-related display (mock image display MG-G8, message display MS-G8)" becomes clearly visible, and in this situation, it becomes possible for operations to be accepted on the 8G operation unit (here, operation button 410). However, the 8G premonition effect display (specific premonition display ZET) may be made to continue to be displayed for the entire period from when the 8G acceptance-permitting state occurs until it ends.

In addition, in the 8G reception permission state according to this example, an ally character (here, ally character YS-G8) according to the type of the 8G reception permission state and an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-G8 depicted as an ogre) according to the type of the 8G reception permission state are displayed. In other words, when an operation is performed on the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "8G reception permission state", it can be suggested whether the expectation of a big hit is high or low depending on "whether or not ally character YS-G8 can defeat enemy character BOSS-G8 based on multiple operation receptions", and each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the performance can progress so that "ally character YS-G8" attacks "enemy character BOSS-G8".

In the example shown in Figures 381 and 382, it is assumed that at timing tGh2A in the 8G reception permission state (the performance situation shown in Figure 382 (b)), the first operation is received on the "8G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" while the 8G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed.

In this regard, in the 8G reception permitted state in this example, even if an operation is received on the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the 8G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is displayed, this will not cause the 8G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) to go into a hidden state, but will remain displayed for a predetermined period of time (the same display period as when no operation is received).

Therefore, when the first operation is accepted for the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGh2A (presentation status shown in FIG. 382(b)) within the 8G acceptance allowance state, as shown in FIG. 381(f), (g) and FIG. 382(c), the 8G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is not hidden in response to the operation acceptance, but is left continuously displayed, and an "8G post-acceptance change (8G post-acceptance performance)" occurs in response to the operation acceptance.

More specifically, when the first operation is accepted for the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGh2A in the "8G acceptance state" (the presentation status shown in FIG. 379(b)), as shown in FIG. 381(j) and (m) and FIG. 382(c) and (d), a change after 8G acceptance occurs in which an "8G post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and an "8G post-acceptance display UG8" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "8th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the above-mentioned "8th G acceptance display UG8" is displayed in the form UG8a shown in Figs. 382(c) and (d). First, as shown in Fig. 382(c), the "ally character YS-G8" is depicted attacking the "enemy character BOSS-G8" with water-based magic (for the first time). Next, as shown in Fig. 382(d), the "enemy character BOSS-G8" is depicted receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G8" and losing its HP. In other words, in the "8th G acceptance display UG8", when the HP of the "enemy character BOSS-G8" becomes 0 due to the attack of the "ally character YS-G8", it means that the "enemy character BOSS-G8" has been defeated, which suggests high expectations.

In addition, the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed in the manner UG8a shown in Figures 382 (c) and (d).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 381(b), it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "8G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGh2B (the performance status shown in FIG. 382(d)) in the "8G reception allowance state". When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 381(j), (m) and FIG. 383(e), (f), as a change after 8G reception, an "8G reception post output sound" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "8G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and the "8G reception post display UG8" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "8G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" starts to be displayed. At this time, as described above, the 8G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is not made invisible in response to the operation reception.

In this example, when a second operation is received on the "8th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "8th G reception post-display UG8" is displayed in the form UG8b shown in Figs. 383(e) and (f), and first, as shown in Fig. 383(e), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G8" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G8" with water-based magic (for the second time). Next, as shown in Fig. 383(f), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G8" receiving damage from the attack (second time) by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G8," further reducing its HP.

The "8th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output even when the "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed in the manner UG8b shown in Figures 383(e) and (f).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 381(b), it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "8G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGh2C (the performance status shown in FIG. 383(f)) in the 8G reception allowance state. When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 381(j), (m) and FIG. 383(g), as the above-mentioned "change after 8G reception (performance after 8G reception)", an "output sound after 8G reception" corresponding to the third operation reception on the "8G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and the "display after 8G reception UG8" corresponding to the third operation reception on the "8G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" starts to be displayed. At this time, as described above, the 8G premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) is not made invisible in response to the operation reception.

In this regard, the "8th G reception permission state" occurs as a valid period that is not terminated as a result of operation reception to the "8th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)." Therefore, even if the "final state" appears as a change after reception, the "final state" will simply appear each time an operation is received thereafter, and this will not cause the 8th G reception permission state to end. Furthermore, this will not cause the mock image display MG-G8 or message display MS-G8 to be made invisible.

In this example, when a third operation is received on the "8th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "8th G reception post-display UG8" is displayed in the form UG8c shown in Figures 383(g) and (h), and first, as shown in Figure 383(g), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G8" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G8" with water-based magic (for the third time). Next, as shown in Figure 383(h), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G8" taking damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G8" and reducing its HP to 0. In the example shown in FIG. 383(h), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G8" being defeated (a depiction of HP being reduced to 0) appears, suggesting a high expectation level; however, the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G8" not being defeated (a depiction of HP remaining) appears (indicating a low expectation level) depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G8" being defeated may always appear. In this sense, the mode UG8c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final mode."

The "8th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output even when the "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed in the manner UG8c shown in Figures 383(g) and (h).

In other words, when one form (for example, any of the multiple forms that can appear as the 8th G reception display UG8) is displayed as the 8th G reception display UG8, there are no cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the 8th G operation unit (here, operation button 410) and no cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception, and an audible output is always made based on the operation reception. Note that "there are no cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the 8th G operation unit (here, operation button 410), and an audible output is made based on the operation reception" refers only to a situation where a game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and does not refer to a configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

In this example, the "8th G reception post display UG8" is displayed in different modes UG8a to UG8c depending on how many times the "8th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated in the 8th G reception allowable state, but it is not necessary to make a different mode (image display) appear every time an operation is performed on the "8th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 8th G reception allowable state. For example, when an operation is performed on the "8th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 8th G reception allowable state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed may appear, or no new change may occur from the previous mode (image display) that is already displayed. Whether a mode different from when the previous operation was performed appears, that is, which mode appears when the current operation is performed, may be determined (drawn) based on the results of a jackpot determination, a performance determination, etc., but the method of realizing this is not limited to this.

The above-mentioned "8th G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which of the modes UG8a to UG8c the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed in, or it may be audibly output as the same sound regardless of which of the modes UG8a to UG8c it is displayed in.

In this example, when timing tGh3 arrives, this triggers the end of the 8G reception permission state, and the model image display MG-G8 and message display MS-G8 are hidden. However, a predetermined waiting time is set between the arrival of timing tGh3 and the time when the model image display MG-G8 and message display MS-G8 are hidden. The model image display MG-G8 and message display MS-G8 are not hidden in response to an operation being accepted in the 8G reception permission state.

In this regard, when the 8th G reception permission state is ended, the 8th G disappearance EF display EF-G8 is displayed to make the model image display MG and message display MS less visible until they are hidden. That is, in this case, the model image display MG and message display MS are hidden while the 8th G disappearance EF display EF-G8 is displayed, as shown in Figures 381 (g) and (h).

As mentioned above, in the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state", "first G reception permission state according to a modified example", "sixth G reception permission state" and "sixth G reception permission state according to a modified example", if a specific condition is met while the corresponding "post-reception display" is displayed, this triggers the "post-reception display" to be hidden.

In this example of presentation, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted on the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 381(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGh2D (presentation situation shown in Figure 383(g)) during the period when the "8th G acceptance display UG8" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the specific condition is met at timing tGh2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 383(g)), the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly output as shown in FIG. 381(l). However, even if the specific condition is met at timing tGh2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 383(g)), the "8th G reception post-display UG8 (regardless of form)", the model image display MG-G8, and the message display MS-G8 are not hidden as a result of the specific condition being met, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 381(g), (i) and FIG. 383(h). In other words, in this case, the "8th G reception post-display UG8 (regardless of form)" will progress in the same form (the form shown in FIG. 383(g) and (h)) as when the specific condition is not met during the period in which the "8th G reception post-display UG8" is being executed. In addition, in the 8th G reception permission state, regardless of the timing tGh2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 383(g)), even if the above specific condition is met at any timing within the 8th G reception permission state, this will not cause the "8th G post-reception display UG8 (regardless of state)", model image display MG-G8, or message display MS-G8 to be hidden, and the "specific display SK" in response to the specific condition being met will not be displayed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGh2D (the performance status shown in FIG. 383(g)), but it may be configured so that, regardless of the timing at which the specific condition is met within the 8G reception-permitting state, this may or may not be the trigger for the specific sound to be audibly output.

In this example, while the 8G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGh3 at which the 8G reception permission state ends is reached is depicted decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

The 8G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, although illustration is omitted, if no operation is accepted on the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 8G reception permission state until timing tGh3 arrives, not only will the 8G reception permission state end based on the arrival of timing tGh3, but the 8G post-reception change (8G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is made on the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" will also begin to be executed.

Here, it is possible that the above-mentioned "specific condition" is met at a specific timing while the "8th G post-reception display UG8" is being displayed, among the changes after the 8th G reception that have been initiated by the automatic button function in this way.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the specific condition is met at such a predetermined timing, this triggers the audible output of the above-mentioned "specific sound." However, even if the specific condition is met at the predetermined timing, the "8th G post-reception display UG8 (regardless of form)" is not made invisible as a result of the specific condition being met, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the "8th G post-reception display UG8" will progress in the same manner as if the specific condition had not been met during the period in which the "8th G post-reception display UG8" is being executed.

In addition, in the 8G reception permitted state, by simply continuing to operate (press) the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," multiple operations are accepted (the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, which automatically repeats operation acceptance at predetermined time intervals) (see Figures 381 (b) and (c)). Therefore, the player can have multiple operations accepted without having to repeatedly operate (press) the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

The 8G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays. However, it may also be possible for this state to occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is provided so that it can emit light in one of a number of color schemes, including the "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and the "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, when the 8G reception allowance state occurs, as shown in FIG. 381(e), the "8G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the object of operation can emit light in both the "first light-emitting mode" and the "second light-emitting mode". In this example, whether the "first light-emitting mode" or the "second light-emitting mode" is to be emitted is determined by a lottery such as a performance judgment (such as a jackpot expectation rate), but the method of realizing this is not limited to this. When no operation is accepted in the 8G reception allowance state, these lights continue to be emitted until the timing tGh3 at which the 8G reception allowance state ends arrives.

In addition, when the 8G reception permissible state occurs, one of multiple modes (sounds) including "permissible sound A (normal mode)" and "permissible sound B (specific mode)" can be audibly output as the 8G reception permissible sound indicating that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted (see FIG. 381(k) and the like). For example, the "permissible sound A (normal mode)" may be audibly output when the imitation image display MG-G8 is displayed in a specified color scheme, and the "permissible sound B (specific mode)" may be audibly output when the imitation image display MG-G8 is displayed in a specified color scheme. In this regard, in the 8G reception permissible state, as shown in FIG. 381(k), even if an operation is accepted for the "8G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the reception permissible sound (8G reception permissible sound) is being audibly output, this does not cause the reception permissible sound to be interrupted. Furthermore, even if certain conditions are met while the reception allowance sound (8G reception allowance sound) is being audibly output, this will not cause the reception allowance sound to be interrupted.

As mentioned above, when the 8G reception permission state occurs, even if a specific condition is met while the "8G reception post-display UG8" corresponding to the 8G reception permission state is displayed, the "8G reception post-display UG8" is not hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the 8G reception permission state, the mock image display MG-G8 and message display MS-G8 are not hidden.

In addition, in this example, in the 8G reception permission state, the mock image display MG-G8 and message display MS-G8 can continue to be displayed even after the 8G reception permission state ends, but they may be made invisible when the 8G reception permission state ends, so that they do not continue to be displayed.

In addition, in this example, in the 8G reception permitted state, the message display MS-G8 is displayed, but the message display MS-G8 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "9th G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 384 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "9th G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 9G" as the occurrence condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figures 385 and 386 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the "9th G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "9th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "9th G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 9th G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 9th G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "9th G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 384(c), during the execution period of the change performance related to the "9th G change pattern", the above-mentioned 9th G reception permission state (valid period) in which "acceptance of operations to the 9th G operation unit regarding changes after 9th G reception (such as display after 9th G reception)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tGi2 when the 9th G time has elapsed since the change performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 9G") (the situation shown in FIG. 385(b)).

Here, in the 9th G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "9th G operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the 9th G reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 9th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in Figures 384 (f) and 385 (a), no premonition display is executed to suggest to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 1, when the 9th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in Figure 384 (g) and Figures 385 (b) and (c), etc., an imitation image display that imitates the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 9th G operation section) is not displayed.

In addition, when the 9th G reception permission state in this example occurs, not only will the mock image not be displayed, but messages related to operation reception will also not be displayed.

However, in this example, when the 9th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 385(b), an ally character corresponding to the type of the 9th G reception permission state (here, ally character YS-G9) and an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 9th G reception permission state (here, enemy character BOSS-G9 depicted as a shadow) are displayed, and while these are being displayed, operations can be accepted using the 9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

That is, when an operation is performed on the "ninth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "ninth G reception permitted state", the expectation of a big win can be suggested based on "whether the ally character YS-G9 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-G9 based on multiple operation receptions", and each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "ninth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", this can be used as a trigger to progress the performance so that the "ally character YS-G9" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G9". Note that in this example, the ally character YS-G9 and the enemy character BOSS-G9 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the ninth G reception permitted state, but the ally character YS-G9 and the enemy character BOSS-G9 may be displayed as one of the "changes after ninth G reception (later-described after ninth G reception display UG9)" when an operation is received in the ninth G reception permitted state.

In the example shown in Figures 384 and 385, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGi2A in the 9th G acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 385 (b)).

In this regard, when the first operation is accepted for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGi2A in the "9th G reception permitted state" (the presentation status shown in FIG. 385(b)), as shown in FIG. 384(j) and (m) and FIG. 385(c) and (d), as a change after the 9th G reception, a "9th G post-reception output sound" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "9th G post-reception display UG9" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "ninth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the above-mentioned "ninth G acceptance display UG9" is displayed in the form UG9a shown in Figs. 385(c) and (d). First, as shown in Fig. 385(c), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G9" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G9" with light-based magic (first time). Next, as shown in Fig. 385(d), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G9" receiving damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G9" and losing its HP. In other words, in the "ninth G acceptance display UG9", when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-G9" becomes 0 due to the attack of "ally character YS-G9", it means that "enemy character BOSS-G9" has been defeated, which suggests high expectations.

In addition, the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception display UG9" is displayed in the manner UG9a shown in Figures 385 (c) and (d).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 384(b), it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGi2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 385(d)) in the "9th G reception permitted state." When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 384(j), (m) and FIG. 385(e), (f), a "9th G post-reception output sound" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after the 9th G reception, and a "9th G post-reception display UG9" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

In this example, when a second operation is accepted for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "9th G post-acceptance display UG9" is displayed in the form UG9b shown in Figs. 386(e) and (f), and first, as shown in Fig. 386(e), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G9" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G9" with light-based magic (for the second time). Next, as shown in Fig. 386(f), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G9" receiving damage from the attack (second time) by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G9," further reducing its HP.

The "9th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output even when the "9th G post-reception display UG9" is displayed in the manner UG9b shown in Figures 386(e) and (f).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 384(b), it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGi2C (presentation status shown in FIG. 386(f)) in the 9th G reception permitted state. When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 384(j), (m) and FIG. 386(g), as the above-mentioned "change after 9th G reception (presentation after 9th G reception)", a "9th G post-reception output sound" corresponding to the third operation reception on the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "9th G post-reception display UG9" corresponding to the third operation reception on the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is started to be displayed.

In this regard, the "ninth G reception permission state" occurs as a valid period that is not terminated as a result of receiving an operation on the "ninth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)." Therefore, even if the "final state" appears as a change after reception, the "final state" will simply appear each time an operation is received thereafter, and the ninth G reception permission state will not be terminated as a result of this.

In this example, when a third operation is received on the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception display UG9" displays the form UG9c shown in Figures 386(g) and (h), and first, as shown in Figure 386(g), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G9" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G9" with light-based magic (for the third time). Next, as shown in Figure 386(h), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G9" taking damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G9," reducing its HP to 0. In the example shown in FIG. 386(h), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G9" being defeated (a depiction of HP being reduced to 0) appears, suggesting a high expectation level; however, the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G9" not being defeated (a depiction of HP remaining) appears (indicating a low expectation level) depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G9" being defeated may always appear. In this sense, the mode UG9c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final mode."

The "9th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output even when the "9th G post-reception display UG9" is displayed in the manner UG9c shown in Figures 386(g) and (h).

In other words, when one form (for example, any of the multiple forms that can appear as the 9th G reception display UG9) is displayed as the "9th G reception display UG9," there are never both cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception, and an audible output is always made based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the 9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410), and an audible output is made based on the operation reception" refers only to a situation where a game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and does not refer to a configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

In this example, the "9th G reception post display UG9" is displayed in different modes UG9a to UG9c depending on how many times the "9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated in the 9th G reception allowable state, but it is not necessary to make a different mode (image display) appear every time an operation is performed on the "9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 9th G reception allowable state. For example, when an operation is performed on the "9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 9th G reception allowable state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed may appear, or no new change may occur from the previous mode (image display) already displayed. Whether a mode different from when the previous operation was performed appears, that is, which mode appears when the current operation is performed, may be determined (drawn) based on the results of a jackpot determination, a performance determination, etc., but the method of realizing this is not limited to this.

The above-mentioned "9th G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which of the modes UG9a to UG9c the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception display UG9" is displayed in, or may be audibly output as the same sound regardless of which of the modes UG9a to UG9c it is displayed in.

In this example, when timing tGi3 arrives, this triggers the end of the 9th G reception permission state.

As mentioned above, in the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state", "first G reception permission state according to a modified example", "sixth G reception permission state" and "sixth G reception permission state according to a modified example", if a specific condition is met while the corresponding "post-reception display" is displayed, this triggers the "post-reception display" to be hidden.

In this example of presentation, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 384(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGi2D (presentation situation shown in Figure 386(g)) during the period when the "9th G acceptance display UG9" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGi2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 386(g)), the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly output as shown in FIG. 384(l). However, even if the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGi2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 386(g)), the "9th G reception post-display UG9 (regardless of form)" is not made invisible as a result of the specific condition being satisfied, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being satisfied is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 384(i), (l) and FIG. 386(h). In other words, in this case, the "9th G reception post-display UG9" will be performed in the same manner (as shown in FIG. 386(g) and (h)) as when the specific condition is not satisfied during the period in which the "9th G reception post-display UG9" is being executed. In addition, in the 9th G reception permission state, regardless of the timing tGi2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 386(g)), even if the above-mentioned specific condition is met at any timing within the 9th G reception permission state, this will not cause the "9th G post-reception display UG9 (regardless of state)" to be hidden, nor will the "specific display SK" be displayed in response to the specific condition being met.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGi2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 386(g)). However, when the specific condition is met at timing tGi2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 386(g)), it may or may not be audibly output.

In addition, in this example, while the 9th G reception permission state continues, the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGi3 at which the 9th G reception permission state ends is reached is not depicted decreasing over time.

As shown in FIG. 384(c), the 9th G reception permission state continues until timing tGi3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and ends when timing tGi3 arrives. In this regard, the 9th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, when there is no operation reception for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 9th G reception permission state until timing tGi3 arrives, the 9th G reception permission state is simply ended when timing tGi3 arrives, and the 9th G post-reception change (9th G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed on the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not executed.

In addition, in the 9th G reception permitted state, by simply continuing to operate (press) the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," multiple operations are accepted (the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, which automatically repeats operation acceptance at predetermined time intervals) (see Figures 384 (b) and (c)). Therefore, the player can have multiple operations accepted without having to repeatedly operate (press) the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

The 9th G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays. However, it may also be possible for this state to occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is capable of emitting light in one of a number of color schemes, including a "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, in the 9G reception-permitting state, even though a model image display of the operation target is not displayed, the "9G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the operation target is capable of emitting light in the "first light-emitting mode", as shown in FIG. 384(e). This "first light-emitting mode" is configured to continue until the timing tGi3 arrives at which the 9G reception-permitting state ends.

In addition, when the 9G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 384(k), no reception permission sound is output, which indicates that the state is in which operation reception is permitted or that the state will become in which operation reception is permitted.

In addition, in the 9th G reception permitted state, the disappearance EF display will not be displayed when an operation is received or when the validity period ends.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "10th G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 387 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "10th G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 10G" as the occurrence condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figures 385 and 386 are diagrams showing examples of presentation when the "10th G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "10th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "10th G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 10th G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 10th G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "10th G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 387(c), during the execution period of the variation performance related to the "10th G variation pattern", the above-mentioned 10th G reception permission state (valid period) in which "operation acceptance to the 10th G operation unit regarding changes after 10th G acceptance (such as display after 10th G acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tGj2 when the 10th G time has elapsed since the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 10G") (the situation shown in FIG. 388(b)).

Here, in the 10G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "10G operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the 10G reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 10th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in Figures 387 (f) and 388 (a), no premonition display is executed to suggest to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 1, when the 10th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in Figures 387 (g) and 388 (b) and (c), etc., an imitation image display of the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 10th G operation section) is not displayed.

In addition, when the 10G reception permission state in this example occurs, not only will the mock image not be displayed, but messages related to operation reception will also not be displayed.

However, in this example, when the 10th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 387(b), an ally character corresponding to the type of the 10th G reception permission state (here, ally character YS-G10) and an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 10th G reception permission state (here, enemy character BOSS-G10 depicted as a ghost tree) are displayed, and while these are displayed, operations can be accepted using the 10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

In other words, when an operation is performed on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "10th G reception permitted state", it can be suggested whether the likelihood of a jackpot being obtained is high or low depending on "whether or not ally character YS-G10 can defeat enemy character BOSS-G10 based on multiple operation receptions", and each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", this can serve as a trigger for the presentation to progress so that "ally character YS-G10" attacks "enemy character BOSS-G10". In this example, the ally character YS-G10 and the enemy character BOSS-G10 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the 10th G reception permitted state, but the ally character YS-G10 and the enemy character BOSS-G10 may be displayed as one of the "changes after 10th G reception (display UG10 after 10th G reception described below)" when an operation is received in the 10th G reception permitted state.

In the example shown in Figures 387 and 388, it is assumed that the first operation is received for the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGj2A in the 10th G reception permitted state (the performance situation shown in Figure 388 (b)).

In this regard, when the first operation is accepted for the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGj2A in the "10th G reception permitted state" (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 388(b)), as shown in FIG. 387(j) and (m) and FIG. 388(c) and (d), the "10th G post-reception display UG10" corresponding to the first operation accepted for the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed as a change after the 10th G acceptance.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "10th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above-mentioned "10th G acceptance display UG10" is displayed as the mode UG10a shown in Fig. 388(c) and (d). First, as shown in Fig. 388(c), the "ally character YS-G10" is depicted attacking the "enemy character BOSS-G10" with lightning magic (for the first time). Next, as shown in Fig. 388(d), the "enemy character BOSS-G10" is depicted receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G10" and losing its HP. In other words, in the "10th G acceptance display UG10", when the HP of the "enemy character BOSS-G10" becomes 0 due to the attack of the "ally character YS-G10", it means that the "enemy character BOSS-G10" has been defeated, which suggests high expectations.

However, in this example, the post-acceptance output sound in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not audibly output regardless of the manner in which the "10th G post-acceptance display UG10" is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 387(b), it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGj2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 388(d)) in the "10th G reception permitted state." When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 387(j), (m) and FIG. 388(e), (f), a "10th G post-reception output sound" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after the 10th G reception, and a "10th G post-reception display UG10" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is started to be displayed.

In this example, when a second operation is received on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "display after 10th G reception UG10" is displayed in the form UG10b shown in Figs. 389(e) and (f), and first, as shown in Fig. 389(e), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G10" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G10" with lightning-based magic (for the second time). Next, as shown in Fig. 389(f), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G10" receiving damage from the attack (second time) by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G10," further reducing its HP.

However, as described above, the post-acceptance output sound in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not audibly output even when the above-mentioned "10th G post-acceptance display UG10" is displayed in mode UG10b.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 387(b), it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGj2C (presentation status shown in FIG. 389(f)) in the 10th G reception permitted state. When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 387(j), (m) and FIG. 389(g), as the above-mentioned "change after 10th G reception (presentation after 10th G reception)", a "10th G post-reception output sound" corresponding to the third operation reception on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "10th G post-reception display UG10" corresponding to the third operation reception on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is started to be displayed.

In this regard, the "10th G reception permission state" occurs as a valid period that is not terminated as a result of receiving an operation on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)." Therefore, even if the "final state" appears as a change after reception, the "final state" will simply appear each time an operation is received thereafter, and the 10th G reception permission state will not be terminated as a result of this.

In this example, when a third operation is received on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "display after 10th G reception UG10" displays the pattern UG10c shown in Figures 389(g) and (h), and first, as shown in Figure 389(g), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G10" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G10" (for the third time) with lightning-based magic. Next, as shown in Figure 389(h), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G10" taking damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G10," reducing its HP to 0. In the example shown in FIG. 389(h), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G10" being defeated (a depiction of HP being reduced to 0) appears, suggesting a high expectation level; however, the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G10" not being defeated (a depiction of HP remaining) appears (indicating a low expectation level) depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G10" being defeated may always appear. In this sense, the mode UG10c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final mode."

However, as described above, the post-acceptance output sound in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not audibly output even when the above-mentioned "10th G post-acceptance display UG10" is displayed in mode UG10c.

In this example, the "10th G reception post display UG10" is displayed in different modes UG10a to UG10c depending on how many times the "10th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated in the 10th G reception allowable state. However, it is not necessary to make a different mode (image display) appear every time an operation is performed on the "10th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 10th G reception allowable state. For example, when an operation is performed on the "10th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 10th G reception allowable state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed may appear, or no new change may occur from the previous mode (image display) already displayed. Whether a mode different from when the previous operation was performed appears, that is, which mode appears when the current operation is performed, may be determined (drawn) based on the results of a jackpot determination, a performance determination, etc., but the method of realizing this is not limited to this.

In this example, when timing tGj3 arrives, this triggers the end of the 10G reception permission state.

As mentioned above, in the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state", "first G reception permission state according to a modified example", "sixth G reception permission state" and "sixth G reception permission state according to a modified example", if a specific condition is met while the corresponding "post-reception display" is displayed, this triggers the "post-reception display" to be hidden.

In this example of presentation, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 387(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGj2D (presentation situation shown in Figure 389(g)) during the period when the "10th G acceptance display UG10" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGj2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 389(g)), the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly output as shown in FIG. 387(l). However, even if the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGj2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 389(g)), the "10th G reception post-display UG10 (regardless of form)" is not made invisible as a result of the specific condition being satisfied, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being satisfied is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 387(i), (l) and FIG. 389(h). In other words, in this case, the "10th G reception post-display UG10" will be performed in the same manner (as shown in FIG. 389(g) and (h)) as when the specific condition is not satisfied during the period in which the "10th G reception post-display UG10" is being executed. In addition, in the 10th G reception permission state, regardless of the timing tGj2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 389(g)), even if the above-mentioned specific condition is met at any timing within the 10th G reception permission state, this will not cause the "10th G post-reception display UG10 (regardless of state)" to be hidden, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met will not be displayed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGj2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 389(g)). However, when the specific condition is met at timing tGj2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 389(g)), it may or may not be audibly output.

In addition, in this example, while the 10th G reception permission state continues, the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGj3 at which the 10th G reception permission state ends is reached is not depicted decreasing over time.

As shown in FIG. 387(c), the 10th G reception permission state continues until timing tGj3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and ends when timing tGj3 arrives. In this regard, the 10th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, when there is no operation reception for the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 10th G reception permission state until timing tGj3 arrives, the 10th G reception permission state is simply ended when timing tGj3 arrives, and the 10th G post-reception change (10th G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed on the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not executed.

In addition, in the 10G reception permission state, even if the "10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed), this does not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions are not automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function is not enabled) (see Figures 387 (b) and (c)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operations received on the "10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 10G reception permission state, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

The 10G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays. However, it may also be possible for this state to occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is capable of emitting light in one of a number of color schemes including a "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, in the 10G reception permission state, even though a model image display of the operation target is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 387(e), the "10G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" which is the operation target is capable of emitting light in the "first light-emitting mode". This "first light-emitting mode" is configured to continue until the timing tGj3 arrives at which the 10G reception permission state ends.

In addition, when the 10G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 387(k), a reception permission sound is not output, which indicates that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted.

In addition, in the 10G reception permitted state, the disappearance EF display will not be displayed when an operation is received or when the validity period ends.

The post-acceptance display corresponding to the 10G acceptance state may be realized as the same display as the post-acceptance display corresponding to the 6G acceptance state described above. That is, in this case, when the 10G acceptance state occurs, the same ally character as in the 6G acceptance state (ally character YS-G6 shown in FIG. 373) is displayed as the ally character according to the type of the 10G acceptance state, and the same enemy character as in the 10G acceptance state (enemy character BOSS-G6 shown in FIG. 373) is displayed as the enemy character according to the type of the 10G acceptance state, and while these displays are being executed, operation acceptance can be performed on the 10G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

In this configuration, the "display after 10G reception" corresponding to the 10G reception permission state has the same content as the "display after 6G reception" corresponding to the 6G reception permission state described above, and can indicate whether the likelihood of winning is high or low depending on whether the enemy character BOSS-G6 can be defeated. More specifically, when an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," this can trigger the performance to progress so that the "ally character YS-G6" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G6." In this example, the ally character YS-G6 and the enemy character BOSS-G6 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the 10th G reception permitted state, but the ally character YS-G6 and the enemy character BOSS-G6 may be displayed as one of the "changes after 10th G reception (display after 10th G reception UG10)" when an operation is received in the 10th G reception permitted state.

The "more specific display change contents that occur when an operation is accepted in the 10th G reception permission state" according to this modified example and the configuration of the other examples have been described above with reference to Figures 372 to 374, so a description thereof will be omitted here. However, in the "change after 10th G reception" according to this example, the "post-10th G reception display UG10" is executed with the same contents as the above-mentioned "post-6th G reception display UG6" as in the above-mentioned "6th G reception permission state", but the "post-reception output sound" in response to the operation acceptance of the "10th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not audibly output, unlike in the above-mentioned "6th G reception permission state".

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating an "11th G reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 390 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "11th G reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 11G" as the occurrence condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figures 391 and 392 are diagrams showing an example of the presentation when the "11th G reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "11th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "11th G fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 11th G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 11th G fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "11th G fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 390(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "11th G variable pattern", the above-mentioned 11th G reception permission state (valid period) in which "operation acceptance to the 11th G operation unit regarding changes after 11th G acceptance (such as display after 11th G acceptance and sound output after 11th G acceptance)" is permitted can be generated based on the arrival of timing tGk2 when the 11th G time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 11G") (the situation shown in FIG. 391(b)).

Here, in the 11G reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "11G operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the 11G reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such an 11th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in Figures 390 (f) and 391 (a), no premonition display is executed to suggest to the player that an operation opportunity will be given to the player.

However, in this example, when the 11G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 390(g) and FIG. 391(b), (c), etc., the operation reception for the 11G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is permitted, or as the 11G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted, at least the imitation image display MG-G11 that imitates the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 11G operation unit) is displayed. Note that in this example, the timing when the 11G reception permission state occurs and the timing when the "11G operation-related display" is displayed are the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "11G operation-related display" may be displayed before the timing when the 11G reception permission state occurs, so as to straddle the timing. Or, the "11G operation-related display" may be displayed after the timing when the 11G reception permission state occurs.

In this regard, the "mock image display MG-G11" corresponding to the 11th G reception permission state is always colored in a "predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and in this case is displayed in the same manner as the "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the above-mentioned 1st G reception permission state.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-G11" corresponding to the 11G reception permission state is a periodic change in which, when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)," the periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 11G time. This period of 11G time is set as a longer time (longer cycle) than the "period of 5G time," "period of 7G time," and "period of 8G time" displayed in the above-mentioned 5G reception permission state, 7th reception permission state, and 8th reception permission state, so in the 11G reception permission state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 5G reception permission state, 7th reception permission state, and 8th reception permission state.

When the "mock image display MG-G11" corresponding to the 11th G reception permission state is started to be displayed prior to timing tGk2 when the 11th G reception permission state occurs, it is desirable to have the periodic change not start until timing tGk2. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-G11" corresponding to the 11th G reception permission state will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until timing tGk2 arrives.

In addition, in the 11th G reception permission state according to this example, the above-mentioned "11th G operation-related display" includes, as shown in Figs. 391(b) and (c), a mock image display MG-G11, as well as a message display (here, message display MS-G11 displayed as "Meteorite!") related to the reception of operations on the 11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

In this example, when the 11th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 391(b), an ally character corresponding to the type of the 11th G reception permission state (here, ally character YS-G11) and an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 11th G reception permission state (here, enemy character BOSS-G11 depicted as a demon) are displayed, and while these are displayed, operations can be accepted using the 11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410).

In other words, when an operation is performed on the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the "11th G reception permitted state", it can be suggested whether the likelihood of a jackpot being obtained is high or low depending on "whether or not the ally character YS-G11 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-G11 based on multiple operation receptions", and each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", this can serve as a trigger for the presentation to progress so that the "ally character YS-G11" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G11". In this example, the ally character YS-G11 and the enemy character BOSS-G11 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the 11th G reception permitted state, but when an operation is received in the 11th G reception permitted state, the ally character YS-G11 and the enemy character BOSS-G11 may be displayed as one of the "changes after 11th G reception (display UG11 after 11th G reception, described below)."

In the example shown in Figures 390 and 391, it is assumed that the first operation is received for the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGk2A in the 11th G reception permitted state (the performance situation shown in Figure 391 (b)).

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGk2A (presentation status shown in FIG. 391(b)) within the 11th G acceptance permitted state, an "11th G post-acceptance change (11th G post-acceptance presentation)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 390 and FIG. 391(c).

More specifically, when the first operation is accepted for the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGk2A in the 11G acceptance state (the performance status shown in FIG. 391(b)), as shown in FIG. 390(j), (m) and FIG. 391(c), (d), a change after the 11G acceptance is made in which an "11G post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and an "11G post-acceptance display UG11" corresponding to the first operation acceptance for the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above-mentioned "11th G acceptance display UG11" is displayed as the mode UG11a shown in Fig. 391(c) and (d). First, as shown in Fig. 391(c), the "ally character YS-G11" is depicted attacking the "enemy character BOSS-G11" with a meteor-type magic (for the first time). Next, as shown in Fig. 391(d), the "enemy character BOSS-G11" is depicted receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G11" and losing its HP. In other words, in the "11th G acceptance display UG11", when the HP of the "enemy character BOSS-G11" becomes 0 due to the attack of the "ally character YS-G11", it means that the "enemy character BOSS-G11" has been defeated, which suggests high expectations.

In addition, the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed in the manner UG11a shown in Figures 391 (c) and (d).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 390(b), it is assumed that a second operation is performed on the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGk2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 391(d)) in the "11th G reception permitted state." When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 390(j), (m) and FIG. 392(e), (f), as a change after the 11th G reception, an "11th G post-reception output sound" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and an "11th G post-reception display UG11" corresponding to the second operation reception on the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" starts to be displayed.

In this example, when a second operation is received on the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed in the form UG11b shown in Fig. 392(e) and (f), and first, as shown in Fig. 392(e), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G11" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G11" (for the second time) with a meteor-type magic. Next, as shown in Fig. 392(f), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G11" receiving damage from the attack (for the second time) by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G11," further reducing its HP.

In addition, the "11th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output even when the "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed in the manner UG11b shown in Figures 392(e) and (f).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 390(b), it is assumed that a third operation is performed on the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGk2C (presentation status shown in FIG. 392(f)) in the 11G reception allowance state. When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 390(j), (m) and FIG. 392(g), as the above-mentioned "change after 11G reception (presentation after 11G reception)", an "output sound after 11G reception" corresponding to the third operation reception on the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and an "after 11G reception display UG11" corresponding to the third operation reception on the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is started to be displayed.

In this regard, the "11th G reception permission state" occurs as a valid period that is not terminated as a result of operation reception to the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)." Therefore, even if the "final state" appears as a change after reception, the "final state" will simply appear each time an operation is received thereafter, and this will not cause the 11th G reception permission state to end. Furthermore, this will not cause the model image display MG-G11 or message display MS-G11 to be made invisible.

In this example, when a third operation is received on the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the above-mentioned "11th G reception post-display UG11" displays the pattern UG11c shown in Figures 392(g) and (h), and first, as shown in Figure 392(g), a depiction is shown of "ally character YS-G11" attacking "enemy character BOSS-G11" (for the third time) with a meteor-type magic. Next, as shown in Figure 392(h), a depiction is shown of "enemy character BOSS-G11" taking damage from the attack by the above-mentioned "ally character YS-G11," reducing its HP to 0. In the example shown in FIG. 392(h), a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G11" being defeated (a depiction of HP being reduced to 0) appears, suggesting a high expectation level; however, the result display may be such that a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G11" not being defeated (a depiction of HP remaining) appears (indicating a low expectation level) depending on the results of the jackpot determination or performance determination, or a depiction of the "enemy character BOSS-G11" being defeated may always appear. In this sense, the mode UG11c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final mode."

The "11th G post-reception output sound" is always audibly output even when the "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed in the manner UG11c shown in Figures 392(g) and (h).

In other words, when one form (for example, any of the multiple forms that can appear as the 11th G reception display UG11) is displayed as the 11th G reception display UG11, there are no cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the 11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410) and no cases where an audible output is made based on the operation reception, and an audible output is always made based on the operation reception. Note that "there are no cases where an audible output is not made based on the operation reception to the 11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410), and an audible output is made based on the operation reception" refers only to a situation where a game or presentation is being played in a normal state (the same state), and does not refer to a configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

In this example, the "11th G reception post display UG11" is displayed in different modes UG11a to UG11c depending on how many times the "11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated in the 11th G reception allowable state, but it is not necessary to make a different mode (image display) appear every time an operation is performed on the "11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 11th G reception allowable state. For example, when an operation is performed on the "11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 11th G reception allowable state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed may appear, or no new change may occur from the previous mode (image display) already displayed. Whether a mode different from when the previous operation was performed appears, that is, which mode appears when the current operation is performed, may be determined (drawn) based on the results of a jackpot determination, a performance determination, etc., but the method of realizing this is not limited to this.

The "11th G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on whether the "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed in one of the modes UG11a to UG11c, or may be audibly output as the same sound regardless of whether the "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed in one of the modes UG11a to UG11c.

In this example, when timing tGk3 arrives, this triggers the end of the 11th G reception permission state, and the model image display MG-G11 and message display MS-G11 are hidden. However, a predetermined waiting time is set between the arrival of timing tGk3 and the time when the model image display MG-G11 and message display MS-G11 are hidden. Therefore, in the 11th G reception permission state, the model image display MG-G11 and message display MS-G11 are not hidden in response to an operation being accepted.

In this regard, when the 8th G reception permission state is ended, the 11th G disappearance EF display EF-G11 is displayed to make the model image display MG and message display MS less visible until they are hidden. That is, in this case, the model image display MG and message display MS are hidden while the 11th G disappearance EF display EF-G11 is displayed, as shown in Figures 392 (g) and (h).

As mentioned above, in the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state", "first G reception permission state according to a modified example", "sixth G reception permission state" and "sixth G reception permission state according to a modified example", if a specific condition is met while the corresponding "post-reception display" is displayed, this triggers the "post-reception display" to be hidden.

In this example of presentation, the "conditions that can be met in relation to the player's actions (specific conditions)" are met when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in Figures 390(a) and (j), it is assumed that the specific conditions are met at timing tGk2D (presentation situation shown in Figure 392(g)) during the period when the "11th G post-acceptance display UG11" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the specific condition is met at timing tGk2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 392(g)), this triggers the audible output of the above-mentioned "specific sound," as shown in FIG. 390(l). However, even if the specific condition is met at timing tGk2D (presentation status shown in FIG. 392(g)), the fulfillment of the specific condition does not cause the "11th G post-reception display UG11 (irrespective of state)," model image display MG-G11, or message display MS-G11 to be hidden, as shown in FIG. 391(g), (i), and FIG. 392(h), and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is not displayed. That is, in this case, the "11th G post-reception display UG11 (regardless of mode)" will proceed in the same manner (as shown in FIG. 392(g) and (h)) as when the specific condition is not met during the period in which the "11th G post-reception display UG11" is being executed. Note that in the 11th G reception-permitted state, regardless of the timing tGk2D (the performance status shown in FIG. 392(g)), even if the specific condition is met at any timing within the 11th G reception-permitted state, this will not cause the "11th G post-reception display UG11 (regardless of mode)", the model image display MG-G11, or the message display MS-G11 to be hidden, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition being met will not be displayed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is met at timing tGk2D (the performance status shown in FIG. 392 (g)), but it may be configured so that, regardless of the timing at which the specific condition is met within the 11G reception-permitting state, the specific sound is either audibly output or not audibly output. Alternatively, it may be configured so that, regardless of the timing at which the specific condition is met within the 11G reception-permitting state, the specific sound is not audibly output.

In this example, while the 11th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGk3 at which the 11th G reception permission state ends is displayed decreasing over time, but this display does not necessarily have to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 390(c), the 11G reception permission state continues until timing tGk3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and ends when timing tGk3 arrives. In this regard, the 11G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, when there is no operation reception for the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 11G reception permission state until timing tGk3 arrives, the 11G reception permission state is simply ended when timing tGk3 arrives, and the 11G post-reception change (11G post-reception performance) that appears when an operation is performed on the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is not executed.

In the 11G reception permission state, even if the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is kept operated (pressed), this will not result in multiple operation receptions (operation receptions will not be automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto-repeated function will not be enabled) (see Figures 390 (b) and (c)). In this case, it goes without saying that if the player wants to have multiple operations received on the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 11G reception permission state, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

The 11th G reception permission state can occur when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to appear overlapped behind other image displays. However, it may also be possible for this state to occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed.

As described above, the "operation button 410" is capable of emitting light in one of a number of color schemes, including a "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red. In this regard, in the 11G reception-permitting state, even though a model image display of the operation target is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 390(e), the "11G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" that is the operation target can emit light in the "first light-emitting mode". This "first light-emitting mode" is configured to continue until the timing tGk3 arrives, at which the 11G reception-permitting state ends.

In addition, when the 11G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 390(k), a reception permission sound is not output, which indicates that the operation reception is permitted or will be permitted.

As described above, when the 11G reception permission state occurs, even if a specific condition is met while the "11G post-reception display UG11" corresponding to the 11G reception permission state is displayed, the "11G post-reception display UG11" is not hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has yet been accepted in the 11G reception permission state, the mock image display MG-G11 and message display MS-G11 are not hidden.

In addition, in this example, in the 11th G reception permission state, the mock image display MG-G11 and message display MS-G11 can continue to be displayed even after the 11th G reception permission state ends, but they may be made invisible when the 11th G reception permission state ends, so that they do not continue to be displayed.

In addition, in this example, in the 11th G reception permission state, the message display MS-G11 is displayed, but the message display MS-G11 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Here, the 11th G reception permission state (see Figures 390 to 392) may instead be generated as the "11th G reception permission state according to a modified example" described below.

Figure 393 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "11th G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 11G" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. In other words, the "11th G reception permission state according to the modified example" is basically the same as the above-mentioned "11th G reception permission state". However, as shown in Figure 393, it differs from the above-mentioned "11th G reception permission state" in that the disappearance EF display that makes it difficult to see the model image display MG-G11 when it is made invisible upon the end of its validity period (operation permission state) is not displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to generate the above-mentioned "11th G reception permission state" and the "11th G reception permission state according to the modified example" as reception permission states of different types. In this case, however, the conditions for generating these states will be set as different conditions. In this case, the post-reception display, post-reception output sound, and the like may also be executed as different types (modes) from each other.

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the ally character YS and the enemy character BOSS are displayed when operation acceptance is permitted, but the ally character YS and the enemy character BOSS may also be made to appear as one of the post-acceptance changes (post-acceptance displays) in response to an operation being accepted in an acceptance-permitted state.

In addition, the "5G period time," "7G period time," and "8G period time" displayed in the 5G reception permission state, 7th reception permission state, and 8th reception permission state described above may be set to the same time.

In addition, the "period 1G time," "period 2G time," "period 6G time," and "period 11G time" displayed in the above-mentioned first G reception permission state, second reception permission state, sixth reception permission state, and eleventh reception permission state may be set to the same time.

However, "5G period", "7G period", and "8G period" are set as times shorter than the specified time, and "1G period", "2G period", "6G period", and "11G period" are set as times longer than the specified time.

In any of the above-mentioned reception permission states, the specific display SK may not be displayed when a specific condition is met.

The above-mentioned acceptance allowable states are assumed to occur within different fluctuation patterns, but they may occur within the same fluctuation pattern, or may occur in a state where no fluctuation pattern is being executed, such as a jackpot state.

In addition, the above-mentioned "first G operation unit" may be a specific operation unit different from the "operation button 410."

In addition, when the above-mentioned second G reception permission state occurs, the "operation button 410" can be illuminated in any of a plurality of modes including the "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white and the "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red (for example, any of the first light-emitting mode and the second light-emitting mode). However, instead of this, it may be illuminated in any of a plurality of modes including the "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white, the "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)" based on red, and the "third light-emitting mode (third color scheme)" based on gold (for example, any of the first light-emitting mode, the second light-emitting mode, and the third light-emitting mode). However, in this case, in the above-mentioned second G reception permission state, the model image display MG-G2 will be displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the predetermined color scheme, the specific color scheme, and the special color scheme (for example, any of the predetermined color scheme, the specific color scheme, and the special color scheme).

The above-mentioned "third G operation unit" may be an operation unit different from the above-mentioned "first G operation unit." The above-mentioned "third G operation unit" may be a specific operation unit different from the "operation button 410."

The above-mentioned "fourth G operation unit" may be a specific operation unit different from the "operation button 410."

The above-mentioned "5G operation unit" does not emit light in the above-mentioned "second light emission mode (second color scheme)", but may be capable of emitting light in any of a plurality of modes including the above-mentioned "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" and the above-mentioned "third light emission mode (third color scheme)" (for example, either the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode).

In addition, the above-mentioned first G reception permission state to fifth G reception permission state are states in which operation reception is permitted only once, but they may be states in which operation reception is permitted multiple times.

In addition, the 6G reception permission state to the 11G reception permission state described above can occur as reception permission states in which operation reception is permitted multiple times, but it is also possible to make it possible for them to occur as reception permission states in which operation reception is permitted only once.

The above-mentioned "sixth G operation unit" may be a specific operation unit different from the "operation button 410". The above-mentioned "sixth G operation unit" may be an operation unit different from the above-mentioned "first G operation unit".

In addition, when the above-mentioned 7G reception permission state occurs, the "operation button 410" can only emit light in the "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" based on white. However, instead of this, it may be possible to have the operation button 410 emit light in any of a plurality of modes including the above-mentioned "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" and the above-mentioned "third light-emitting mode (third color scheme)" (for example, either the first light-emitting mode or the third light-emitting mode) without emitting light in the above-mentioned "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)".

In addition, the above-mentioned "7th G operation unit" may be an operation unit different from the above-mentioned "3rd G operation unit."

In addition, the above-mentioned "10G operation unit" may be a specific operation unit different from the "operation button 410."

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" in response to the operation acceptance during each acceptance period (operation-permitted state) in the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example does not necessarily have to indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as an acceptance period for determining whether the probability fluctuation function is enabled during the execution period of the jackpot game and be executed as the post-acceptance display, or it may occur as an acceptance period in a simple mini-game that has nothing to do with the expectation suggestion regarding the game and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Or, it may occur based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during various interval periods, etc., and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Therefore, the acceptance period in the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example does not necessarily have to occur during the period in which the pattern fluctuation is being executed. In addition, even if it is displayed as a post-acceptance display that does not indicate such expectation, multiple modes may be prepared for the post-acceptance display and it may be displayed in any of the multiple modes.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, if the post-reception display is not made invisible as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, the BGM performance sound will not be newly output as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, but if the post-reception display is made invisible as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, the BGM performance sound may be newly output as a trigger for the specific condition to be met. However, in this case, if the post-reception display is not made invisible as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, the BGM performance sound will not be newly output as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, but it is more preferable that if the post-reception display is made invisible as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, there are both cases where the BGM performance sound is newly output as a trigger for the specific condition to be met and cases where the BGM performance sound is not newly output as a trigger for the specific condition to be met.

In addition, in the first G reception allowable state according to the above-mentioned performance example, the first G reception allowable state according to the modified example, the sixth G reception allowable state, and the sixth G reception allowable state according to the modified example, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied in a state in which operation reception is permitted (reception allowable state), the state in which operation reception is permitted (reception allowable state) is not terminated as a result of this, and the state in which operation reception is permitted (reception allowable state) continues even after the post-reception display, etc. is made invisible as a result of the satisfaction of the specific condition. Therefore, even after the post-reception display, etc. is made invisible as a result of the satisfaction of the specific condition, when an operation is received again in the continued reception allowable state, this triggers the post-reception display to be executed again. However, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied again while the post-reception display executed again in this way is displayed, this may be used as a trigger to prevent the post-reception display from being made invisible. With this configuration, the post-reception display can be made invisible only once as a result of the satisfaction of the specific condition, so that it is expected that the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, when the specific condition is satisfied again while the re-executed post-acceptance display is being displayed, it may be possible for this to trigger both a case where the post-acceptance display is not hidden and a case where the post-acceptance display is hidden. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game caused by the post-acceptance display not being able to be hidden due to the satisfaction of the specific condition.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, if the post-acceptance display is not made invisible as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, the BGM performance sound may not be newly output as a trigger for the specific condition to be met. In contrast, if the post-acceptance display is made invisible as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, there may be both cases where the BGM performance sound is newly output as a trigger for the specific condition to be met and where the BGM performance sound is not newly output. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the post-acceptance display is made invisible as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, and to appropriately impart a sense of expectation for a new performance. In addition, even if the post-acceptance display is made invisible as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, it is not necessarily the case that the BGM performance sound will be newly audibly output as a trigger for this, so it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the post-acceptance display has been made invisible as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the second G reception allowable state, the fifth G reception allowable state, the seventh G reception allowable state, and the eighth G reception allowable state, the operating means may emit light in a "third light emission state" that is different from both the "first light emission state" and the "second light emission state."

In addition, the mock image display can be displayed in the same form (or similar form) when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time". However, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the mock image display may at least be displayed in the first form and in the second form, and when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time", it may be displayed in the first form (or similar form) but not in the second form. The mock image display may be capable of being displayed in a first form (or a similar form) in, for example, the second G reception permitted state, the fifth G reception permitted state, the seventh G reception permitted state, the eighth G reception permitted state, the eleventh G reception permitted state, the eleventh G reception permitted state according to a modified example, etc., and may be capable of being displayed in a second form (or a similar form) in, for example, the first G reception permitted state, the first G reception permitted state according to a modified example, the sixth G reception permitted state, the sixth G reception permitted state according to a modified example, etc.

In addition, the premonition display can be displayed in the same manner (specific premonition display ZET) when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time". However, it is also possible to provide a premonition display manner that can appear when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" but cannot appear when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time". Note that the "longer than a predetermined time" may be provided as multiple time periods.

Unlike color schemes or light emission, periodic changes in the imitation image display are a phenomenon that occurs over time, so it takes a relatively long time to distinguish whether they are long or short. What's more, it can be said to be difficult to distinguish with certainty whether the periodic change currently appearing in the imitation image display is long or short (because not both long and short cycles are displayed). On the other hand, however, if the player is able to distinguish between them, they will be able to enjoy their value as a new source of information, and so it is possible to provide new dramatic effects through this difficulty in distinguishing between them and their value as an information source.

In addition, this pachinko machine 1 is provided with all of the above-mentioned 1G reception permission state to 11G reception permission state, but it is not necessary to provide all of these reception permission states. Rather, it is desirable to provide only some of these reception permission states in an appropriate combination, taking into account the desired action and effect. By providing them in the "appropriate combinations" described separately in the configurations below, excellent action and effects can be achieved. Note that in each of the configurations below, examples of combinations of reception permission states that should be provided to achieve the action and effect are given, but the combinations are not limited to the examples, and combinations that are not exemplified may be used as long as the desired action and effect is achieved. In addition, other reception permission states that are unrelated to the desired action and effect may be provided as appropriate, as long as they do not have a negative effect on achieving the desired action and effect.

For example, if the first configuration G1 includes the first G reception allowable state (or the first G reception allowable state according to the modified example, the sixth G reception allowable state, or the sixth G reception allowable state according to the modified example) among the reception allowable states described above, then in the first G reception allowable state (or the first G reception allowable state according to the modified example, the sixth G reception allowable state, or the sixth G reception allowable state according to the modified example), a reception allowable state can be generated in which reception of an operation for a specific operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is received for the specific operation unit in the reception allowable state, a first G post-reception display UG1 (or a sixth G post-reception display UG6) corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed (see FIG. 352, FIG. 355, FIG. 372, or FIG. 375). In this regard, in the first G reception allowing state (or the first G reception allowing state according to the modified example, the sixth G reception allowing state, or the sixth G reception allowing state according to the modified example), when the first G reception post-display UG1 (or the sixth G reception post-display UG6) is displayed in response to the operation reception at a specific operation unit and a first G reception post-output sound (sixth G reception post-output sound) corresponding to the first G reception post-display UG1 (or the sixth G reception post-display UG6) is output, if a specific condition is met while the first G reception post-display UG1 (or the sixth G reception post-display UG6) is displayed, the first G reception post-display UG1 (or the sixth G reception post-display UG6) is made to be hidden in response to the specific condition being met (see Figures 352, 355, or 366). In other words, in this case, even if a situation occurs in which a player would prefer to see a different display rather than the first G reception display UG1 (or the sixth G reception display UG6), but the first G reception display UG1 (or the sixth G reception display UG6) makes it difficult to see the other display, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game at that time will be suppressed.

In addition, the first configuration G1 according to the above-mentioned performance example further includes a 4G reception allowable state (or a 10G reception allowable state) among the above-mentioned reception allowable states. In this case, in the above-mentioned 1G reception allowable state (or the 1G reception allowable state according to the modified example, the 6G reception allowable state, or the 6G reception allowable state according to the modified example), when an operation is accepted at a specific operation unit, a corresponding 1G post-acceptance output sound (6G post-acceptance output sound) can be output when a 1G post-acceptance display UG1 (or a 6G post-acceptance display UG6) corresponding to the operation acceptance is performed (see FIG. 352, FIG. 355, or FIG. 372), but in the above-mentioned 4G reception allowable state (or the 10G reception allowable state), a corresponding post-acceptance output sound is not output (see FIG. 366 or FIG. 387).

That is, in this case, when the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception on the specific operation unit is performed and the corresponding post-reception output sound is output (1G reception permission state, 1G reception permission state according to the modified example, 6G reception permission state, or 6G reception permission state according to the modified example), if the "specific condition" is established while the post-reception display is displayed, the establishment of the "specific condition" is a trigger for the post-reception display to be made invisible. However, when the corresponding post-reception output sound is not output when the post-reception display is performed (4G reception permission state or 10G reception permission state), if the "specific condition" is established while the post-reception display is displayed, the establishment of the "specific condition" is a trigger for the post-reception display to be made invisible and to be continuously displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the post-reception display will be made invisible when the "specific condition" is established, based on whether the corresponding post-reception output sound is output when the post-reception display is performed, and it is expected to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the first configuration G1 of the above-mentioned performance example, if the corresponding post-reception output sound is output when the post-reception display is performed (first G reception permissible state, first G reception permissible state of the modified example, sixth G reception permissible state, or sixth G reception permissible state of the modified example), if a "specific condition" is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will always be made invisible in response to the "specific condition" being met (see Figure 352, Figure 355, Figure 372, or Figure 375). In contrast, in the case where the post-acceptance display is performed and the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is not output, if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, there are two cases: the post-acceptance display is not made invisible but is continuously displayed as a trigger of the "specific condition" being satisfied (fourth G reception permitted state or tenth G reception permitted state), and the post-acceptance display is made invisible as a trigger of the "specific condition" being satisfied (first G reception permitted state, first G reception permitted state according to the modified example, sixth G reception permitted state, or sixth G reception permitted state according to the modified example). That is, as described above, in the first G reception permitted state, the first G reception permitted state according to the modified example, sixth G reception permitted state, or sixth G reception permitted state according to the modified example, there are two cases where the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance for the specific operation unit is audibly output and is not audibly output, as shown in FIG. 352(m), FIG. 355(m), FIG. 372(m), FIG. 375(m), and the like. However, the method for realizing the first configuration G1 is not limited to this.

According to this configuration, if a corresponding post-acceptance output sound is output when the post-acceptance display is made, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, the post-acceptance display can be made to be in a hidden state without fail in response to the "specific condition" being met. On the other hand, if a corresponding post-acceptance output sound is not output when the post-acceptance display is made, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, it becomes difficult to know whether or not to make the post-acceptance display in a hidden state in response to the "specific condition" being met, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the first configuration G1 of the above-mentioned performance example, a post-acceptance display is displayed in response to the operation acceptance on a specific operation unit, and when a specific condition is met while the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is being output (first G acceptance acceptance state, first G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example, sixth G acceptance acceptance state, or sixth G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example), the post-acceptance display is made invisible even if a predetermined display time remains (timing tGa2B shown in FIG. 352(j), timing tGa2b shown in FIG. 355(j), timing tGf2D shown in FIG. 372(j), timing tGf2d shown in FIG. 375(j)), but the post-acceptance output sound is not terminated midway and is output only for the predetermined output time (timing tGa2B shown in FIG. 352(m), timing tGa2b shown in FIG. 355(m), timing tGf2D shown in FIG. 372(m), timing tGf2d shown in FIG. 375(m)). With this configuration, the post-acceptance output sound continues without being terminated even if the specific condition is met, so this unbalanced presentation situation can effectively suggest that the post-acceptance display has been hidden due to the specific condition being met.

Furthermore, in the first configuration G1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in the reception permissible state (the first G reception permissible state, the first G reception permissible state according to the modified example, the sixth G reception permissible state, or the sixth G reception permissible state according to the modified example) in which the post-reception display is made invisible when a specific condition is met, even if the same mode (one mode) is displayed as the post-reception display, there are both cases in which the corresponding post-reception output sound is audibly output and cases in which the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner (see FIG. 352(m), FIG. 355(m), FIG. 372(m), FIG. 375(m), etc.).

In particular, in the first configuration G1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in the reception permissible state (1G reception permissible state, 1G reception permissible state according to the modified example, 6G reception permissible state, or 6G reception permissible state according to the modified example) in which the post-reception display is made non-display in response to the establishment of a specific condition, when a predetermined mode (corresponding to the above-mentioned "second mode" in the 1G reception permissible state or the 1G reception permissible state according to the modified example) is displayed as the post-reception display, the corresponding post-reception output sound is always audibly output, but when a specific mode (corresponding to the above-mentioned "first mode (e.g., the mode shown in Figures 354(c) to (e))" in the 1G reception permissible state or the 1G reception permissible state according to the modified example) is displayed as the post-reception display, there are both cases in which the corresponding post-reception output sound is audibly output and cases in which the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (in the 6G reception permissible state or the 6G reception permissible state according to the modified example, see Figures 372(m), 375(m), etc.). With this configuration, depending on which aspect is displayed as the "post-acceptance display," there will be cases where the "post-acceptance output sound" is always audibly output, and cases where the "post-acceptance output sound" is not necessarily audibly output, which is expected to better maintain the sense of tension when an operation is accepted.

In addition, in the first configuration G1 of the above-mentioned performance example, in a reception permissible state (4G reception permissible state or 10G reception permissible state) in which the post-reception display is made invisible when a specific condition is met, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not audibly output regardless of which form appears as the post-reception display. This makes it possible to ideally indicate that the post-reception display will be made invisible when a specific condition is met.

In the first configuration G1 of the above-mentioned performance example, it is assumed that operation acceptance is permitted for the same operation unit (specific operation unit) in both the acceptance acceptance state in which the post-acceptance display is made invisible when a specific condition is met (the first G acceptance acceptance state, the first G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example, the sixth G acceptance acceptance state, or the sixth G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example) and the acceptance acceptance state in which the post-acceptance display is not made invisible when a specific condition is met (the fourth G acceptance acceptance state or the tenth G acceptance acceptance state).

When the first configuration G1 is adopted, the 4G reception permission state (or the 10G reception permission state) may occur as a reception permission state in which a mock image display that mimics a specific operation unit is displayed.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned first configuration G1, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned first configuration G1 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the second configuration G2 is configured to include, among the above-mentioned reception allowable states, a first G reception allowable state (or a first G reception allowable state, a sixth G reception allowable state, or a sixth G reception allowable state according to a modified example) in which a model image display simulating a specific operation unit is displayed, and a fourth G reception allowable state (or a tenth G reception allowable state) in which a model image display simulating the specific operation unit is not displayed, then in the pachinko machine 1, if an operation is accepted for the specific operation unit while the model image display simulating the specific operation unit is displayed (in the first G reception allowable state or the first G reception allowable state according to a modified example) and a post-acceptance display corresponding to this is displayed, then if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display will be made invisible in response to the specific condition being met (see, for example, Figure 352 (j) or Figure 355 (j)). This is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game in the event that, for example, a situation occurs in which a player would prefer to see a different display rather than the post-acceptance display, but the post-acceptance display makes it difficult to see the other display.

In contrast, when the above-mentioned model image display simulating the specific operation unit is not displayed (in the 4G reception permission state or the 10G reception permission state), if a post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation received for the specific operation unit, even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display will not be hidden in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition", and the post-acceptance display may continue to be displayed (see FIG. 366(j) or FIG. 387(j), etc.). With this configuration, whether or not the above-mentioned model image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is displayed when an operation is received for the "specific operation unit" can suggest whether the post-acceptance display will be hidden in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition", which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As mentioned above, the "1st G reception permission state" may be generated as a reception permission state in which the mock image display is not displayed. Therefore, if a "sixth G reception allowable state" is prepared as a reception allowable state in which a model image display simulating the "specific operation unit" that is the object of operation is displayed, and a "first G reception allowable state" and a "fourth G reception allowable state (or tenth G reception allowable state)" are prepared as reception allowable states in which a model image display simulating the "specific operation unit" that is the object of operation is not displayed, then in the second configuration G2 according to the above-mentioned performance example, particularly in the case where a post-reception display in response to operation reception for the specific operation unit is displayed while the model image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is not displayed, if a "specific condition" is established while the post-reception display is displayed, there will be both a case where the post-reception display is not hidden but continues to be displayed in response to the establishment of the "specific condition" (fourth G reception allowable state or tenth G reception allowable state), and a case where the post-reception display is hidden in response to the establishment of the "specific condition" (first G reception allowable state).

According to this configuration, if the imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is displayed when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit", if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, the post-acceptance display can be made to be in a hidden state without fail in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition". On the other hand, if the imitation image display simulating the "specific operation unit" is not displayed when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit", if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, the satisfaction of the "specific condition" makes it difficult to recognize whether or not to make the post-acceptance display in a hidden state, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

However, such an effect can be obtained by using the "first G reception permissible state" in the modified example or the "sixth G reception permissible state in the modified example" instead of generating the "first G reception permissible state" as a reception permissible state in which the imitation image display is not displayed. That is, in the "first G reception permissible state in the modified example" and the "sixth G reception permissible state in the modified example", there are both sections in which the imitation image display of the "specific operation unit" is displayed and sections in which the imitation image display of the "specific operation unit" is not displayed, and no matter which of these sections an operation is received, the corresponding post-reception display is made invisible when a specific condition is met. Even with this configuration, if a post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation accepted on a specific operation unit while the imitation image display simulating a "specific operation unit" is not displayed, and if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, there are two cases where the post-acceptance display is not hidden but continues to be displayed in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" (fourth G acceptance state, or tenth G acceptance state), and the post-acceptance display is hidden in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" (first G acceptance state according to the modified example, sixth G acceptance state according to the modified example).

In the second configuration G2 of the above-mentioned performance example, the "post-acceptance display" in response to an operation being accepted for the "specific operation unit" while the imitation image display that mimics the "specific operation unit" is displayed, and the "post-acceptance display" in response to an operation being accepted for the "specific operation unit" while the imitation image display that mimics the "specific operation unit" is not displayed, and further the "post-acceptance display" that is made invisible when a "specific condition" is met when the imitation image display that mimics the "specific operation unit" is not displayed, and the "post-acceptance display" that is not made invisible when a "specific condition" is met when the imitation image display that mimics the "specific operation unit" is not displayed may all be different performance displays. However, these "post-acceptance displays" may all be displayed as the same "post-acceptance display." In this case, even though they are the same presentation display (post-acceptance display), it will be possible to indicate through the presence or absence of a mock image display whether or not the display will be hidden when a specific condition is met, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the second configuration G2 of the above-mentioned performance example, if a specific condition is met while both the post-acceptance display and the imitation image display are displayed, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the post-acceptance display and the imitation image display to be hidden. With this configuration, not only is the post-acceptance display in response to the operation acceptance hidden, but various displays related to the operation are also hidden, making it possible to more appropriately ensure visibility of other performance displays.

In addition, to realize the second configuration G2, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted, it is sufficient that the second configuration G2 described above can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the third configuration G3 is provided with the first G reception allowance state (or the first G reception allowance state according to the modified example, the sixth G reception allowance state, and the sixth G reception allowance state according to the modified example), the second G reception allowance state (or the seventh G reception allowance state, the eighth G reception allowance state), and the fourth G reception allowance state (or the tenth G reception allowance state), then in the pachinko machine 1, when the player operates the operation means and an operation acceptance is made that makes the operation a valid operation, the operation acceptance is notified. The post-acceptance display can be displayed based on this, and there are cases in which the post-acceptance display is displayed even when no operation is accepted (the second G acceptance allowable state (or the seventh G acceptance allowable state, the eighth G acceptance allowable state) in which the automatic button function can be enabled), and cases in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless operation is accepted (the first G acceptance allowable state in which the automatic button function is not enabled, the first G acceptance allowable state according to the modified example, the sixth G acceptance allowable state, the sixth G acceptance allowable state according to the modified example, the fourth G acceptance allowable state, the tenth G acceptance allowable state, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (such as the first G acceptance allowance state in which the automatic button function is not enabled, the first G acceptance allowance state according to the modified example, the sixth G acceptance allowance state, the sixth G acceptance allowance state according to the modified example, the fourth G acceptance allowance state, and the tenth G acceptance allowance state), if the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the operation being accepted, and a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, the post-acceptance display can be made invisible in response to the specific condition being met (see FIG. 352(j), FIG. 355(j), FIG. 372(j), FIG. 375(j), etc.). For example, if a situation occurs in which a player would prefer to see a different presentation display rather than the post-acceptance display, but the other presentation display is made difficult to see by the post-acceptance display, it is expected that the decline in interest in the game at that time will be suppressed.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, when the post-acceptance display is displayed without accepting any operation under conditions (the second G acceptance allowable state, the seventh G acceptance allowable state, and the eighth G acceptance allowable state in which the automatic button function can be enabled), the post-acceptance display is not hidden when the "specific condition" is met, even if the "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed (see FIG. 360(j), FIG. 378(j), FIG. 381(j), etc.). With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether the so-called automatic button function is enabled and the post-acceptance display is being executed by meeting the "specific condition" after the post-acceptance display has started to be executed, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner even after the operation is accepted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, particularly under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (such as the first G acceptance state in which the automatic button function is not enabled, the first G acceptance state according to the modified example, the sixth G acceptance state, the sixth G acceptance state according to the modified example, the fourth G acceptance state, and the tenth G acceptance state), if the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the fact that an operation has been accepted, then if a specific condition is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, the post-acceptance display is not made invisible but continues to be displayed in response to the satisfaction of the specific condition (see Figures 366(j), 387(j)), and the post-acceptance display is made invisible in response to the satisfaction of the specific condition (see Figures 352(j), 355(j), 372(j), 375(j), etc.). In addition, when the post-acceptance display is displayed without receiving an operation (when the automatic button function is enabled), even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display is not hidden due to the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 361(j)). According to this configuration, when the post-acceptance display is displayed by the so-called automatic button function, even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the "post-acceptance display displayed by the automatic button function" is not hidden due to the "specific condition" being met. In contrast, when the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the operation being received under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is received (conditions in which the automatic button function is not enabled), if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not to hide the post-acceptance display due to the "specific condition" being met, so that it is expected that a sense of tension is preferably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (in a reception-permitting state in which the automatic button is not enabled), even if the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the operation being accepted, if the post-acceptance display is executed in a "mode different from the specific mode (predetermined mode)", the post-acceptance display may not be made invisible even if a specific condition is established while the post-acceptance display is displayed. As a method for realizing such a configuration, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3 may be provided with a 1G reception-permitting state (or a 1G reception-permitting state according to a modified example), a 4G reception-permitting state, and an 11G reception-permitting state as reception-permitting states in which the automatic button is not enabled, and a 2G reception-permitting state as reception-permitting states in which the automatic button is enabled. Alternatively, including the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3 described below, a sixth G reception allowable state (or a sixth G reception allowable state according to a modified example) may be prepared in place of the first G reception allowable state (or a first G reception allowable state according to a modified example), and a tenth G reception allowable state may be prepared in place of the fourth G reception allowable state. Also, the eleventh G reception allowable state may be an eleventh G reception allowable state according to a modified example.

In other words, in this case, the situation in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted corresponds to the "1G acceptance state (or the 1G acceptance state according to the modified example), the 4G acceptance state, and the 11G acceptance state)."

In this regard, as described above, when an operation is accepted in the 1G reception allowing state (or the 1G reception allowing state according to the modified example) and when an operation is accepted in the 4G reception allowing state, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation acceptance is executed in the same content (specific mode shown in FIG. 354 and FIG. 368). Therefore, when the post-reception display is executed in a "specific mode", this corresponds to a case where an operation is accepted in the 1G reception allowing state (or the 1G reception allowing state according to the modified example) and this triggers the post-reception display to be executed in the mode (specific mode) shown in FIG. 354, and a case where an operation is accepted in the 4G reception allowing state and this triggers the post-reception display to be executed in the mode (specific mode) shown in FIG. 368.

In contrast, when the post-acceptance display is executed in a "mode different from the specific mode (predetermined mode)," this corresponds to a case where an operation is accepted in the 11G acceptance-permitting state, and this triggers the above-mentioned post-acceptance display to be executed in the mode shown in Figures 391 and 392.

According to this configuration, in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (in an acceptance-permitted state in which the automatic button is not enabled), even if the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the operation being accepted, if the post-acceptance display is executed in a mode (predetermined mode) different from the specific mode (11G acceptance-permitted state), the post-acceptance display will not be hidden even if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed (see FIG. 390).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, when the post-acceptance display is executed in the "specific mode (FIGS. 354, 368)" in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (in a state where the automatic button is not enabled), if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed in the "specific mode", the post-acceptance display may be continuously displayed without being hidden in response to the specific condition being satisfied (see FIG. 366), or the post-acceptance display may be hidden in response to the specific condition being satisfied (see FIG. 352). According to this configuration, when the post-acceptance display is executed in the specific mode based on the operation being accepted in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (in a state where the automatic button is not enabled), it is difficult to recognize whether the post-acceptance display is hidden in response to the specific condition being satisfied, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in a good manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, the operation means operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In implementing the third configuration G3, the fourth G reception-permitted state (or the tenth G reception-permitted state) may occur as a reception-permitted state in which a mock image display that mimics a specific operation unit is displayed.

In addition, to realize the above third configuration G3, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned third configuration G3 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the fourth configuration G4 is provided with the 6G reception allowable state (or the 6G reception allowable state according to the modified example), the 7G reception allowable state (or the 8G reception allowable state), and the 11G reception allowable state (or the 11G reception allowable state according to the modified example) among the above-mentioned reception allowable states, then in a situation in which operation reception based on operation of the operation means is allowed multiple times in the pachinko machine 1, there will be cases in which the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means in an operated state (7G reception allowable state in which the auto-repeated hit function is enabled, 8G reception allowable state), and cases in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operation means is maintained in an operated state (6G reception allowable state in which the auto-repeated hit function is not enabled, the 6G reception allowable state according to the modified example, the 11G reception allowable state, and the 11G reception allowable state according to the modified example). In this case, under conditions where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is kept in an operated state (in an acceptance-permitted state where the auto-repeat function is not enabled), if the post-acceptance display is executed based on the acceptance of an operation based on an operation on the operating means, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is being executed, the post-acceptance display can be made invisible in response to the establishment of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 372(j) and FIG. 375(j)). This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game in the event that, for example, a situation occurs in which a different presentation display is difficult to see due to the post-acceptance display, even though the player would prefer to see the other presentation display rather than the post-acceptance display.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth configuration G4, under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operation means is maintained in an operated state (in an acceptance-permitting state in which the auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled), if the post-acceptance display is executed based on an operation being accepted based on an operation on the operation means, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is being executed, the post-acceptance display may be made invisible in response to the establishment of the "specific condition" (see Figures 372 (j) and 375 (j)), but under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means in an operated state (in an acceptance-permitting state in which the auto-repeated-hit function is enabled), if the post-acceptance display is executed based on the operation of the operation means in an operated state, even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is being executed, the post-acceptance display is not made invisible in response to the establishment of the "specific condition" (see Figures 378 (j) and 381 (j)). With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether the so-called auto-tap function is enabled and the post-acceptance display is being executed by establishing a "specific condition" after the post-acceptance display has begun to be executed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension even after the operation has been accepted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned fourth configuration G4, particularly under conditions in which the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is maintained in an operated state (in an acceptance-permitting state in which the auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled), if the post-acceptance display is executed based on an operation being accepted based on an operation on the operating means, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is being executed, then there are two cases in which the post-acceptance display is not made hidden but continues to be displayed in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" (see Figure 390 (j)), and the post-acceptance display is made hidden in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" (see Figure 372 (j) or Figure 375 (j)). According to this configuration, when the post-acceptance display is displayed by the so-called auto-tap function, even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the "post-acceptance display displayed by the auto-tap function" is not hidden due to the "specific condition" being met. On the other hand, when the post-acceptance display is displayed based on an operation being accepted under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is kept in an operated state (conditions in which the auto-tap function is not enabled), if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, it becomes difficult to know whether or not to hide the post-acceptance display due to the "specific condition" being met, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

As described above, the 10G post-reception display corresponding to the 10G reception-permitting state may be executed in the same content (special mode) as the 6G post-reception display corresponding to the 6G reception-permitting state. In this regard, if the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth configuration G4 further includes a "10G reception-permitting state" in which the 10G post-reception display is executed in the special mode (same content as the 6G post-reception display), even if the operation means is kept in an operated state and the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (in a reception-permitting state in which the auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled), even if the post-reception display is executed based on the acceptance of an operation on the operation means, if the post-reception display is displayed in a mode (11G post-reception display) different from the special mode (6G post-reception display or 10G post-reception display), the post-reception display will not be made invisible due to the specific condition being satisfied, even if a specific condition is satisfied while the post-reception display is displayed (see FIG. 390(j)). According to this configuration, in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (in an acceptance-permitting state where the auto-tap function is not enabled), if the post-acceptance display is executed in a mode (predetermined mode) different from the special mode (6th G post-acceptance display or 10th G post-acceptance display) based on the operation being accepted, it is preferably suggested that the post-acceptance display will be hidden when a specific condition is met, which allows for strategic consideration of how the game will progress.

In contrast, in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is kept in an operated state (in a state where the auto-tap function is not enabled), if the post-acceptance display is displayed in the special mode (the 6th G post-acceptance display or the 10th G post-acceptance display), if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, there are two cases where the post-acceptance display is not hidden but continues to be displayed as a trigger for the specific condition to be met (see FIG. 387(j)), and where the post-acceptance display is hidden as a trigger for the specific condition to be met (see FIG. 372(j)). According to this configuration, in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (in a state where the auto-tap function is not enabled), if the post-acceptance display is executed in the special mode (the 6th G post-acceptance display or the 10th G post-acceptance display) based on the acceptance of the operation, it is difficult to recognize whether the post-acceptance display is hidden as a trigger for the specific condition to be met, and therefore it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in a good manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth configuration G4, the operation means operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

To realize the fourth configuration G4, the 10G reception permission state may occur as a reception permission state in which a mock image display that mimics a specific operation unit is displayed.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned fourth configuration G4, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned fourth configuration G4 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the fifth configuration G5 is provided with the first G reception allowance state (or the first G reception allowance state in a modified example), the second G reception allowance state, and the fifth G reception allowance state among the above-mentioned reception allowance states, then in the pachinko machine 1, the imitation image display representing the object to be operated can be displayed so as to show periodic changes, and there are cases in which the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time" (see Figure 369 (g)), and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in units of "time longer than the predetermined time" (see Figures 352 (g) and 360 (g)). Furthermore, when the periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed to occur in units of the above-mentioned "longer than a specified time", if an operation is received from the operating means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, then if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display can be made invisible upon the satisfaction of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 352(j)). Therefore, for example, if a situation arises in which a different presentation display is made difficult to see by the post-acceptance display despite the player wishing to see the other presentation display rather than the post-acceptance display, then it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth configuration G5, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to appear in the above-mentioned "longer than the predetermined time" units, if an operation is accepted on the operation means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display may be made invisible in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 352(j)). However, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to appear in the above-mentioned "predetermined time" units, if an operation is accepted on the operation means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, even if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display is not made invisible in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 369(j)). With this configuration, it is possible to suggest what periodic change the model image display was displayed with by satisfying the "specific condition" even after the post-acceptance display has started to be executed, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in a suitable manner even after the operation acceptance is performed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth configuration G5, in particular, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to appear in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", if an operation is accepted on the operation means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display is not made invisible but continues to be displayed in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 360(j)), and the post-acceptance display is made invisible in response to the satisfaction of the specific condition (see FIG. 352(j)). In contrast, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to appear in units of "a predetermined time", if an operation is accepted on the operation means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, even if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display is not made invisible in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 369(j)). According to this configuration, if an operation is accepted when the imitation image display is displayed in a relatively fast periodic change and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display will not be hidden in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition" even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed. On the other hand, if an operation is accepted when the imitation image display is displayed in a relatively slow periodic change and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, it becomes difficult to know whether or not to hide the post-acceptance display in response to the satisfaction of the "specific condition," which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the fifth configuration G5, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to occur in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the model image display may not be hidden but may continue to be displayed (or may be displayed in a different manner) at the time when the post-acceptance display in response to the acceptance of an operation on the operating means is displayed (first G acceptance state, first G acceptance state relating to the modified example, second G acceptance state). In this regard, when a periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "a time longer than a specified time", and an operation is accepted on the operating means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display and the model image display are being displayed, then there are two cases in which the satisfaction of the "specific condition" triggers the post-acceptance display and the model image display to continue being displayed without being hidden (see Figures 360 (g) and (j)), and the satisfaction of the "specific condition" triggers the post-acceptance display and the model image display to both be hidden (see Figures 352 (g) and (j)). In contrast, when a periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units, and an operation is accepted on the operating means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, even if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display and the mock image display are displayed, neither the post-acceptance display nor the mock image display will be made invisible as a result of the "specific condition" being satisfied (see Figures 369 (g) and (j)). According to this configuration, if an operation is accepted when the model image display is displayed in a relatively fast periodic change and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed, even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display and the model image display are displayed, the satisfaction of the "specific condition" will not cause either the post-acceptance display or the model image display to be hidden. On the other hand, if an operation is accepted when the model image display is displayed in a relatively slow periodic change and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed, if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display and the model image display corresponding to the operation are displayed, the satisfaction of the "specific condition" will make it difficult to recognize whether or not to hide both the post-acceptance display and the model image display, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

As described above, the 4th G reception-permitted display UG4 corresponding to the 4th G reception-permitted state is executed in the same content (special mode) as the 1st G reception-permitted display UG1 corresponding to the 1st G reception-permitted state. In this regard, if the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth configuration G5 is further provided with a "4th G reception-permitted state", even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the post-reception display is displayed in a predetermined mode (2nd G reception-permitted display UG2) different from the special mode (1st G reception-permitted display UG1, 4th G reception-permitted display UG4), even if a specific condition is satisfied while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will not be made invisible in response to the satisfaction of the specific condition (see FIG. 360(j)). On the other hand, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the post-reception display may be displayed in the special mode based on the acceptance of an operation. In this regard, if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is being displayed in the special mode, there are two cases where the post-acceptance display is not hidden but continues to be displayed in response to the specific condition being met (see FIG. 366(j)), and there are also cases where the post-acceptance display is hidden in response to the specific condition being met (see FIG. 352(j)). This is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the post-acceptance display is displayed in the special mode.

To realize the fifth configuration G5, a mock-up image of the operation target may be displayed in the fourth G reception permission state. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock-up image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

The fifth configuration G5 can also be realized by providing a sixth G reception allowable state (or a sixth G reception allowable state according to a modified example) instead of the first G reception allowable state (or a first G reception allowable state according to a modified example), and providing a seventh G reception allowable state (or an eighth G reception allowable state) instead of the fifth G reception allowable state. In this case, if the tenth G reception allowable state display corresponding to the tenth G reception allowable state is executed with the same content (special mode) as the sixth G reception allowable state display corresponding to the sixth G reception allowable state, it is also possible to provide a tenth G reception allowable state instead of the fourth G reception allowable state. In this case, in the tenth G reception allowable state, a model image display modeled after the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to appear in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth configuration G5, the operation means operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the fifth configuration G5, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted, it is sufficient that the fifth configuration G5 described above can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the sixth configuration G6 is provided with a first G reception allowance state (or a first G reception allowance state according to a modified example), a second G reception allowance state, and a fourth G reception allowance state among the above-mentioned reception allowance states, then in the pachinko machine 1, the post-reception display can be displayed as any of a number of post-reception displays including a "predetermined post-reception display (second G post-reception display UG2)" and a "special post-reception display (first G post-reception display UG1, fourth G post-reception display UG4)." When the post-reception display is displayed as a "special post-reception display," if a "specific condition" is met while the "special post-reception display" is displayed, the "special post-reception display" can be made invisible in response to the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 352 (j)). This is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game in the event that, for example, a situation occurs in which a player would prefer to see a different display rather than a "special post-reception display" but the "special post-reception display" makes it difficult to see the other display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "special post-acceptance display", if a "specific condition" is met while the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "special post-acceptance display" may be made invisible upon the establishment of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 352(j)). However, when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "predetermined post-acceptance display", even if a "specific condition" is met while the "predetermined post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "predetermined post-acceptance display" is not made invisible upon the establishment of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 360(j)). With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the post-acceptance display can be made invisible by establishing a "specific condition" after the post-acceptance display has started to be executed, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, particularly when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "special post-acceptance display (first G post-acceptance display UG1, fourth G post-acceptance display UG4)," if a "specific condition" is met while the "special post-acceptance display" is being displayed, the "special post-acceptance display" is not hidden but continues to be displayed as a trigger of the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 366(j)), and the "special post-acceptance display" is not hidden as a trigger of the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 352(j)). In this regard, even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-acceptance display is a "predetermined post-acceptance display," the "predetermined post-acceptance display" is not hidden as a trigger of the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 360(j)), so that it is expected to suggest whether the "post-acceptance display" will be hidden when the "specific condition" is met while maintaining a sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "special post-acceptance display (first G post-acceptance display UG1, fourth G post-acceptance display UG4)," the "special post-acceptance display" can be displayed for a predetermined time (predetermined time). In this regard, if the first G acceptance allowance state according to the modified example is provided, the "special post-acceptance display" may be displayed for the above-mentioned predetermined time (predetermined time) even if the "specific condition" is not met while the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed, or may be hidden after maintaining the display state for a time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, when timing Xg arrives while the display is displayed, see FIG. 356(j)). This is expected to maintain a sense of tension while the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, when the "special post-reception display" is displayed so that the display state can be continued for the predetermined time (predetermined time) (for the fourth G post-reception display UG4 in which timing Xg does not exist, or when the time from when the special post-reception display starts to be displayed until timing Xg arrives is longer than the predetermined time (predetermined time), or when it is within the period after timing Xg arrives), if a specific condition is met while the "special post-reception display" is displayed, the "special post-reception display" is not hidden but continues to be displayed in response to the specific condition being met (see FIG. 366 (j)). In addition, when the specific condition is satisfied, the "special post-acceptance display" is hidden (see FIG. 355(j)). However, when the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed so that it remains displayed for a period shorter than the predetermined period (predetermined period) (as shown in FIG. 356(j), where the period from when the special post-acceptance display starts to be displayed until the timing Xg arrives is shorter than the predetermined period (predetermined period)), if a specific condition is satisfied while the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "special post-acceptance display" is always hidden when the specific condition is satisfied. This is expected to maintain the excitement of the game when the timing Xg is likely to arrive soon, while maintaining the sense of tension when the specific condition is satisfied.

To realize the sixth configuration G6, a mock-up image of the operation target may be displayed in the fourth G reception permission state. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock-up image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

The sixth configuration G6 can also be realized by providing a sixth G reception allowable state (or a sixth G reception allowable state according to a modified example) instead of the first G reception allowable state (or a first G reception allowable state according to a modified example), and providing a seventh G reception allowable state (or an eighth G reception allowable state) instead of the second G reception allowable state. In this case, if the 10th G reception after display corresponding to the 10th G reception allowable state is executed as the same content (special mode) as the 6th G reception after display corresponding to the 6th G reception allowable state, it is also possible to provide a tenth G reception allowable state instead of the fourth G reception allowable state. In this case, in the tenth G reception allowable state, a model image display modeled after the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to appear in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, the operation means operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the sixth configuration G6, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted, it is sufficient that the sixth configuration G6 described above can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the seventh configuration G7 includes the first G reception allowable state (or the first G reception allowable state according to the modified example), the third G reception allowable state, and the fourth G reception allowable state among the above-mentioned reception allowable states, the reception display in the pachinko machine 1 can be displayed as one of a number of reception display including the "specific reception display (third G reception display UG3)" and the "special reception display (first G reception display UG1, fourth G reception display UG4)." When the reception display is displayed as the "specific reception display," if a "specific condition" is met while the "specific reception display" is being displayed, the "specific reception display" is made invisible in response to the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 363(j)). This is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game when a situation occurs in which, for example, a player wants to see a different performance display than the "specific reception display," but the "specific reception display" makes it difficult to see the other performance display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "specific post-acceptance display", if a "specific condition" is met while the "specific post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "specific post-acceptance display" is made invisible in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 363(j)). However, when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "special post-acceptance display", if a "specific condition" is met while the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "special post-acceptance display" may be made invisible in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition" (see FIG. 352(j)). With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the post-acceptance display can be made invisible by fulfilling a "specific condition" after the post-acceptance display has started to be executed, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, particularly when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "special post-acceptance display (first G post-acceptance display UG1, fourth G post-acceptance display UG4)," if a "specific condition" is met while the "special post-acceptance display" is being displayed, the "special post-acceptance display" is not hidden but continues to be displayed as a trigger of the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 366(j)), and the "special post-acceptance display" is made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be a made to be ... a made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be a made to be made to be a made to be made to be made to be a made to

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, when the post-acceptance display is displayed as a "special post-acceptance display (first G post-acceptance display UG1, fourth G post-acceptance display UG4)," the "special post-acceptance display" can be displayed for a predetermined time (predetermined time). In this regard, if the first G acceptance allowance state according to the modified example is provided, the "special post-acceptance display" may be displayed for the above-mentioned predetermined time (predetermined time) even if the "specific condition" is not met while the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed, or may be hidden after maintaining the display state for a time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, when timing Xg arrives while the display is displayed, see FIG. 356(j)). This is expected to maintain a sense of tension while the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, in a situation where the "special post-reception display" is displayed so that the display state can continue for the predetermined time (predetermined time) (such as the fourth G post-reception display UG4 where timing Xg does not exist, or when the time from when the special post-reception display starts to be displayed until timing Xg arrives is longer than the predetermined time (predetermined time), or when it is within the period after timing Xg arrives), if a specific condition is met while the "special post-reception display" is displayed, the "special post-reception display" will not be hidden but will continue to be displayed in response to the specific condition being met (see FIG. 366 (j)). In addition, when the specific condition is satisfied, the "special post-acceptance display" is hidden (see FIG. 355(j)). However, when the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed so that it remains displayed for a period shorter than the predetermined period (predetermined period) (as shown in FIG. 356(j), where the period from when the special post-acceptance display starts to be displayed until the timing Xg arrives is shorter than the predetermined period (predetermined period)), if a specific condition is satisfied while the "special post-acceptance display" is displayed, the "special post-acceptance display" is always hidden when the specific condition is satisfied. This is expected to maintain the excitement of the game when the timing Xg is likely to arrive soon, while maintaining the sense of tension when the specific condition is satisfied.

To realize the seventh configuration G7, a mock image display of the operation target may be displayed in the third G reception permission state. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

To realize the seventh configuration G7, a mock-up image of the operation target may be displayed in the fourth G reception permission state. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock-up image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

The seventh configuration G7 can also be realized by providing a sixth G reception allowing state (or a sixth G reception allowing state according to a modified example) instead of the first G reception allowing state (or a first G reception allowing state according to a modified example). In this case, if the 10th G reception post-display corresponding to the 10th G reception allowing state is executed with the same content (special mode) as the 6th G reception post-display corresponding to the 6th G reception allowing state, it is also possible to provide a tenth G reception allowing state instead of the fourth G reception allowing state. In this case, in the tenth G reception allowing state, a model image display modeled after the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, the periodic change in the model image display will be displayed to appear in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, the operation means operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the seventh configuration G7, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted, it is sufficient that the seventh configuration G7 described above can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the eighth configuration G8 includes the first G reception allowable state (or the first G reception allowable state according to the modified example), the second G reception allowable state, and the eleventh G reception allowable state according to the modified example among the above-mentioned reception allowable states, then in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reproduced image display" that mimics the operation means is made invisible, a "disappearing effect display (disappearing EF display)" can be displayed as an image display separate from the "reproduced image display" that makes the "reproduced image display" difficult to see until the "reproduced image display" is made invisible, and the "reproduced image display" may continue to be displayed without being made invisible at the time when the post-acceptance display begins to be displayed. However, in this case, if the "reproduced image display" continues to be displayed even after the operation is accepted, there is a concern that not only the post-acceptance display according to the operation acceptance, but also the "reproduced image display" may make other effect displays difficult to see.

In this regard, in the eighth configuration G8, when a "specific condition" is met while the Moji image display and the post-reception display are being displayed, the Moji image display and the post-reception display may be made invisible in response to the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 352 (g) and (j)). When the Moji image display is made invisible, a "disappearance effect display" may be displayed as an image display separate from the Moji image display (see FIG. 360 (g) and (h)), or the "disappearance effect display" may not be displayed as an image display separate from the Moji image display (see FIG. 352 (g) and (h) and FIG. 393 (g) and (h)). This is expected to favorably prevent the above-mentioned concerns from arising while favorably maintaining a sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighth configuration G8, when a "specific condition" is met while the model image display and the post-reception display are being displayed, the model image display and the post-reception display are either turned off in response to the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 352(g) and (j)), or the model image display and the post-reception display are not turned off in response to the "specific condition" being met (see FIG. 360(g) and (j) and FIG. 393(g) and (j)). With this configuration, it is difficult to recognize whether the model image display and the post-reception display are turned off in response to the "specific condition" being met, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighth configuration G8, even if a "specific condition" is met while the Momo image display and the post-reception display are displayed, the Momo image display and the post-reception display are not made invisible in response to the fulfillment of the "specific condition", and when the Momo image display is subsequently made invisible (due to another condition such as the passage of time), there are both cases where a "disappearing effect display" is displayed as an image display separate from the Momo image display (see FIG. 360 (g), (i), (j)), and where the "disappearing effect display" is not displayed as an image display separate from the Momo image display (see FIG. 393 (g), (i), (j)). In contrast, when the Momo image display and the post-reception display are made invisible in response to the fulfillment of a "specific condition" while they are displayed, the "disappearing effect display" is not displayed as an image display separate from the Momo image display (see FIG. 352 (g), (i), (j)). With this configuration, when the "disappearance effect display" is not displayed when the model image display and post-reception display are made invisible, this can mean that the model image display and post-reception display are made invisible because a "specific condition" has been met, or that the model image display and post-reception display are made invisible because of a different condition that is not triggered by a "specific condition." This makes it difficult to guess the type of reception-permitted state, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

If the eighth configuration G8 further includes a fourth G reception allowance state, the first G post-reception display UG1 (see FIG. 354) corresponding to the first G reception allowance state and the fourth G post-reception display UG4 (see FIG. 368) corresponding to the fourth G reception allowance state are executed as the same post-reception display (specific post-reception display). In other words, in this case, the post-reception display according to the operation reception can be displayed as any one of a plurality of post-reception displays including a specific post-reception display (the first G post-reception display UG1 or the fourth G post-reception display UG4) and a special post-reception display (either the second G post-reception display UG2 or the eleventh G post-reception display UG11). However, when the post-reception display is displayed as a specific post-reception display (first G post-reception display UG1 or fourth G post-reception display UG4), if a specific condition is met, this may trigger the display to be hidden (see FIG. 352(j)), or it may not be hidden (see FIG. 366(j)). However, when the post-reception display is displayed as a special post-reception display (either second G post-reception display UG2 or eleventh G post-reception display UG11), even if a specific condition is met, this will not trigger the display to be hidden (see FIG. 360(j) or FIG. 393(j)). With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately suggest whether the post-reception display will be hidden due to the fulfillment of a specific condition while maintaining a sense of tension when it is displayed.

Furthermore, if the above eighth configuration G8 is further provided with a third G reception allowance state, then when an operation is received in the reception allowance state, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed as any one of a number of post-reception displays including a specific post-reception display (the first G post-reception display UG1 or the fourth G post-reception display UG4), a special post-reception display (either the second G post-reception display UG2 or the eleventh G post-reception display UG11), and a specified post-reception display (the third G post-reception display UG3). That is, in this case, when the post-reception display is displayed as a specific post-reception display (first G post-reception display UG1 or fourth G post-reception display UG4), if a specific condition is met, this may trigger the display to be hidden (see FIG. 352(j)), or it may not be hidden (see FIG. 366(j)). However, when the post-reception display is displayed as a special post-reception display (either second G post-reception display UG2 or eleventh G post-reception display UG11), even if a specific condition is met, this will not trigger the display to be hidden (see FIG. 360(j) or FIG. 393(j)). Instead, when the post-reception display is displayed as a predetermined post-reception display (third G post-reception display UG3), if a specific condition is met, this will always trigger the display to be hidden (see FIG. 363(j)). This configuration makes it possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the post-acceptance display is displayed, while suggesting that the post-acceptance display will be hidden when a specific condition is met, or suggesting that the post-acceptance display will not be hidden even when a specific condition is met.

To realize the eighth configuration G8, a mock image display of the operation target may be displayed in the third G reception permission state. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

To realize the eighth configuration G8, a mock image display of the operation target may be displayed in the fourth G reception permission state. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

The eighth configuration G8 can also be realized by providing a sixth G reception allowing state (or a sixth G reception allowing state according to a modified example) instead of the first G reception allowing state (or a first G reception allowing state according to a modified example). In this case, if the tenth G reception post-display corresponding to the tenth G reception allowing state is executed with the same content (special mode) as the sixth G reception post-display corresponding to the sixth G reception allowing state, it is also possible to provide a tenth G reception allowing state instead of the fourth G reception allowing state. In this case, in the tenth G reception allowing state, a model image display modeled after the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, the periodic change in the model image display will be displayed to appear in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighth configuration G8, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned eighth configuration G8, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned eighth configuration G8 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the ninth configuration G9 is provided with the sixth G reception allowance state (or the sixth G reception allowance state according to the modified example), the seventh G reception allowance state (or the eighth G reception allowance state), and the eleventh G reception allowance state (the eleventh G reception allowance state according to the modified example) among the multiple reception allowance states described above, then the pachinko machine 1 will display a mock image of a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" in any one of a number of color schemes including a "first color scheme" and a "second color scheme". In a multiple reception allowance state in which reception of operations is permitted multiple times, there are cases in which the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means in an operated state (see, for example, Figures 378(b) and (c) and Figures 381(b) and (c)), and cases in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operation means is maintained in an operated state (see, for example, Figures 372(b) and (c), Figures 375(b) and (c), Figures 390(b) and (c)). In this regard, when the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red))," the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times by simply maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 378(b), (c), (g) and Figs. 381(b), (c), (g) and the like). However, when the mock image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white))," the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times by simply maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 378(b), (c), (g) and the like). There are two cases: when the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times by simply keeping the "specific operation unit" in the operated state (see Figs. 378(b), (c), (g) and Fig. 381(b), (c), (g) etc.), and when the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times by simply keeping the "specific operation unit" in the operated state (see Figs. 372(b), (c), (g) and Figs. 375(b), (c), (g) and Fig. 390(b), (c), (g) etc.). With this configuration, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the so-called auto-repeated-hits function is always enabled, whereas when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", it becomes difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto-repeated-hits function is enabled or not. This is expected to maintain a good sense of tension while providing the auto-repeated-hits function.

The ninth configuration G9 may also include a ninth G reception permission state G9. In a pachinko machine 1 having such a ninth configuration G9, if a mock image display of a "specific operation unit" is not displayed in a multiple reception permission state in which reception of operations to a "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times, it becomes difficult to recognize that reception of operations to the "specific operation unit" is permitted. Instead, simply by maintaining the specific operation unit in an operated state, the post-reception display will be executed multiple times, which is expected to suitably suppress a decline in interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the ninth configuration G9, when an operation is accepted at the "specific operation unit" while the model image display is being displayed in the "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and a specific condition is met while the corresponding post-acceptance display is being displayed, there are two cases in which this triggers the post-acceptance display to be made invisible (see Figures 372 (g) and (j) and Figures 375 (g) and (j)), and there are also cases in which this triggers the post-acceptance display to not be made invisible (see Figures 378 (g) and (j), Figures 381 (g) and (j), Figures 390 (g) and (j), etc.). In this regard, when the imitation image display is displayed in the above-mentioned "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state under the condition that if a specific condition is satisfied while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display is turned into a hidden state as a trigger, the post-reception display will not be executed multiple times (see Figs. 372(b), (g), and (j) and Figs. 375(b), (g), and (j)). However, when the imitation image display is displayed in the above-mentioned "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the specific operation unit is maintained in an operated state under the condition that if a specific condition is satisfied while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will not be turned into a hidden state as a trigger, there are both cases where the post-reception display is executed multiple times (see Figs. 378(b), (g), and (j) and Figs. 381(b), (g), and (j)) and where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (Figs. 390(b), (g), and (j)). With this configuration, in a multiple reception permitted state in which the mock image display is displayed in the above-mentioned "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)," when the auto-repeated tap function is enabled, the post-reception display is not necessarily hidden even if a specific condition is met, whereas when the auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, it becomes difficult to tell whether the post-reception display will be hidden when a specific condition is met, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the ninth configuration G9, even if the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", when a specific message display (such as "rapid hits" as shown in FIG. 379 or FIG. 382) is performed, the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so that it is possible to suggest that the auto rapid hit function is enabled while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the ninth configuration G9, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above ninth configuration G9, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned ninth configuration G9 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the tenth configuration G10 is configured to include the 6th G reception allowable state (or the 6th G reception allowable state in a modified example), the 7th G reception allowable state (or the 8th G reception allowable state), the 9th G reception allowable state, and the 11th G reception allowable state (the 11th G reception allowable state in a modified example) among the multiple reception allowable states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when a multiple reception allowable state occurs in which reception of an operation for a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" is allowed multiple times, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of outputting a specific reception allowable sound indicating that reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" has entered an allowable state, or that reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" has entered an allowable state. In this regard, when a multiple reception permission state occurs, there are cases where a "specific reception permission sound" is output (see FIG. 378(k) or FIG. 381(k) etc.) and cases where a "specific reception permission sound" is not output (see FIG. 372(k), FIG. 375(k), FIG. 384(k), FIG. 390(k) etc.). In the multiple reception permission state, in either case where a "specific reception permission sound" is output or where a "specific reception permission sound" is not output, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see FIG. 378(b) and (k), FIG. 381(b) and (k), FIG. 384(b) and (k)), so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, if a "specific reception permission sound" is output when a multiple reception permission state occurs, the post-reception display is executed multiple times in the multiple reception permission state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 378(b) and (k) and Figs. 381(b) and (k)). In contrast, if a "specific reception permission sound" is not output when a multiple reception permission state occurs, there are two cases: a case where the post-reception display is executed multiple times in the multiple reception permission state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 384(b) and (k)), and a case where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 372(b) and (k), Figs. 375(b) and (k), Figs. 390(b) and (k), etc.). With this configuration, when a "specific reception allowance sound" is output, the so-called auto-repeated tap function is always enabled, whereas when a "specific reception allowance sound" is not output, it becomes difficult to determine whether the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled or not, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, if a specific reception permission sound is not output when a multiple reception permission state occurs, when an operation is accepted on the "specific operation unit" in the multiple reception permission state, and a specific condition is met while a corresponding post-reception display is displayed, this may trigger the post-reception display to be hidden (see Figs. 372(j), (k) and Figs. 375(j), (k)). In this regard, if a specific reception permission sound is not output when a multiple reception permission state occurs, and a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed, this may trigger the post-reception display to be hidden, and if the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception display will not be executed multiple times (see Figs. 372(b), (j), (k) and Figs. 375(b), (j), (k)). However, when a specific acceptance permission sound is not output when a multiple acceptance permission state occurs, and the specific operation unit is maintained in an operated state under conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not made invisible even if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, there are both cases in which the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times (see Fig. 384 (b) and (k)) and cases in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times (see Fig. 390 (b) and (k)). With this configuration, in a multiple acceptance permission state in which a specific acceptance permission sound is not output, when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the post-acceptance display is not necessarily made invisible even if a specific condition is met, whereas when the auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled, it is difficult to recognize whether the post-acceptance display will be made invisible when a specific condition is met, so that it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above tenth configuration G10, if a specific reception permission sound is output when a multiple reception permission state occurs, the post-reception display is executed multiple times in the multiple reception permission state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 378(b) and (k) and Figs. 381(b) and (k)). However, if a specific reception permission sound is not output when a multiple reception permission state occurs, there are two cases in which the post-reception display is executed multiple times in the multiple reception permission state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 384(b) and (k)), and there are also cases in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 390(b) and (k)). Therefore, when a specific reception permission sound is output, it is suitably suggested that the auto-repeated-hit function is enabled, while when a specific reception permission sound is not output, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, if a specific reception permission sound is not output when a multiple reception permission state occurs, when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit" in the multiple reception permission state, and a specific condition is satisfied while a corresponding post-reception display is displayed, this may trigger the post-reception display to be hidden (see Fig. 372 (j), (k) and Fig. 375 (j), (k)). In this regard, when a specific reception permission sound is not output when a multiple reception permission state occurs, and a specific condition is satisfied while the post-reception display is displayed, this may trigger the post-reception display to be hidden, and when the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception display will not be executed multiple times (see Fig. 372 (b), (j), (k) and Fig. 375 (b), (j), (k)). However, when a specific reception permission sound is not output when a multiple reception permission state occurs, and the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state under conditions in which the post-reception display is not hidden even if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display is executed multiple times (see Fig. 384 (b), (j), (k)), and the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (see Fig. 390 (b), (j), (k)). With this configuration, in a multiple reception permission state in which a specific reception permission sound is not output, the post-reception display is not necessarily hidden even if a specific condition is met when the auto-repeated tap function is enabled, whereas when the auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, it is difficult to recognize whether the post-reception display will be hidden when a specific condition is met, and therefore it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, even if a specific acceptance permission sound is not output, when a specific message display (such as "rapid hits" as shown in FIG. 379 or FIG. 382) is performed, the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so that it is possible to suggest that the auto rapid hit function is enabled while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension.

To realize the tenth configuration G10, a mock image display of the operation target may be displayed in the ninth G reception permission state. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

In order to realize the tenth configuration G10, in the tenth G reception permission state, a mock image display that mimics the operation target may be displayed. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above tenth configuration G10, it is not necessary to have multiple types of reception-allowed states. For example, even if there is a reception-allowed state for one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples), it is sufficient that the above-mentioned tenth configuration G10 can be displayed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 11th configuration G11 is configured to include the 6th G reception allowance state (or the 6th G reception allowance state according to the modified example), the 7th G reception allowance state, the 8th G reception allowance state (or the 9th G reception allowance state), and the 11th G reception allowance state (the 11th G reception allowance state according to the modified example) among the multiple reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, the "specific operation (e.g., operation button 410)" will be set to a multiple reception allowance state in which reception of an operation is permitted multiple times before the set time (validity period) has elapsed. A "multiple termination permitted state (8th G reception permitted state)" that may be terminated based on the reception of an operation to the "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" and a "multiple continuation permitted state (6th G reception permitted state (or 6th G reception permitted state according to a modified example), 8th G reception permitted state (or 9th G reception permitted state), 11th G reception permitted state (11th G reception permitted state according to a modified example), etc.)" that continues until a set time (validity period) has elapsed regardless of the presence or absence of an operation reception to the "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" are prepared. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if either the "multiple termination permitted state" or the "multiple continuation permitted state" occurs as the multiple reception permitted state, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" in an operated state, so that it is expected that the interest in playing the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11, when the "multiple termination allowance state" occurs as the multiple reception allowance state, the post-reception display is executed multiple times in the multiple reception allowance state by simply maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Fig. 378 (b) and (c)). In addition, when the "multiple continuation allowance state" occurs as the multiple reception allowance state, there are two cases: the post-reception display is executed multiple times in the multiple reception allowance state by simply maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Fig. 381 (b) and (c) and Fig. 384 (b) and (c)), and the post-reception display is not executed multiple times by simply maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Fig. 372 (b) and (c), Fig. 375 (b) and (c), Fig. 390 (b) and (c), Fig. 393 (b) and (c)). With this configuration, in a "multiple termination permitted state" that can be terminated midway due to a player's operation, the so-called auto rapid-fire function is always enabled, whereas in a "multiple continuation permitted state" that cannot be terminated midway due to a player's operation, it becomes difficult to tell whether the so-called auto rapid-fire function is enabled or not, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11, when a "multiple continuation permitted state" occurs as a multiple reception permitted state, if an operation is accepted for the specific operation unit in the multiple continuation permitted state, and the corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed while the "specific condition" is satisfied, the post-acceptance display may be made invisible as a trigger. In this regard, when the specific operation unit is maintained in an operated state under a condition in which the post-acceptance display is made invisible as a trigger when a specific condition is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the "multiple continuation permitted state", the post-acceptance display will not be executed multiple times (see FIG. 372(j) and FIG. 375(j)), but under a condition in which the post-acceptance display is not made invisible as a trigger even if a specific condition is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the "multiple continuation permitted state", the post-acceptance display will not be made invisible as a trigger. When a specific operation unit is maintained in an operated state, there are cases where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times (see Figs. 381(b) and (c) and Figs. 384(b) and (c)) and cases where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times (see Figs. 390(b) and (c) and Figs. 393(b) and (c)). This is expected to favorably suggest that the post-acceptance display will not be hidden even if a specific condition is met when the auto-tap function is enabled, while favorably maintaining the sense of tension when the auto-tap function is not enabled.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11, even if a state allowing multiple continuations occurs, when a "specific message display (such as "rapid hits" as shown in FIG. 382)" is performed, the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so it is possible to appropriately maintain tension while suggesting that the auto rapid hit function is enabled.

The "specific message display" that indicates that the auto-tap function is enabled does not have to be the same as the message display that is displayed in the state where multiple terminations are permitted, and may be, for example, a message display that cannot be displayed in the state where multiple terminations are permitted.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11 may further include a 3G reception permission state. In other words, in this case, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a specific premonition display ZET as a premonition performance display, and the specific premonition display ZET may be executed across the occurrence of a "single reception permission state (3G reception permission state)" in which only one operation is permitted for the specific operation unit, or across the occurrence of a "multiple reception permission state (7th G reception permission state, 8th G reception permission state)" in which multiple operations are permitted for the specific operation unit. In this regard, in the "single reception permitted state", when an operation is received on a specific operation unit while the specific premonition display ZET is displayed, this triggers the specific premonition display ZET to be made invisible (see FIG. 360(f)). However, in the "multiple reception permitted state", regardless of whether the multiple reception permitted state occurs as a "multiple termination permitted state" or a "multiple continuation permitted state", the specific premonition display ZET is not made invisible as a trigger for receiving an operation on a specific operation unit (see FIG. 378(f) and FIG. 381(f)). Therefore, even if the same pattern appears as the premonition performance display, it is possible to preferably indicate whether the operation reception is permitted only once or multiple times.

However, the "multiple acceptance permitted state" that occurs while a specific premonition display ZET is being executed as a premonition performance display may be only one of the "multiple termination permitted state" and the "multiple continuation permitted state."

To realize the 11th configuration G11, a mock image display of the operation target may be displayed in the 9th G reception permission state. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above 11th configuration G11, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 11th configuration G11 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 12th configuration G12 is configured to include the 2nd G reception allowable state, the 6th G reception allowable state (or the 6th G reception allowable state according to a modified example), the 8th G reception allowable state (or the 7th G reception allowable state), the 9th G reception allowable state, and the 11th G reception allowable state (the 11th G reception allowable state according to a modified example) among the reception allowable states described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display an imitation image display modeled after a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" and can execute a premonition display that suggests in advance that operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is permitted, and when the reception allowable state occurs, the premonition display may or may not be executed, and the reception allowable state may occur as a "single reception allowable state" in which operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is permitted only once, or as a "multiple reception allowable state" in which operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, the mosaic image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears, and in the "single reception permitted state", the periodic change can be displayed so that it appears in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" (see FIG. 360(g)), and in the "multiple reception permitted state", the periodic change can be displayed so that it appears in units of "predetermined time" (see FIG. 378(g) and FIG. 381(g)). In either case where the premonition display is executed or not executed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see FIG. 378(b) and (c), FIG. 381(b) and (c), FIG. 384(b) and (c)), so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, in the "multiple reception permitted state", the display of the model image is displayed so that its periodic change appears in units of "predetermined time" (see Figs. 378(g) and 381(g)), and in units of "longer than the predetermined time" (see Figs. 372(g), 375(g), 390(g), and 393(g)). With this configuration, when the periodic change of the model image display is displayed so that it appears in units of "longer than the predetermined time", it becomes difficult to recognize whether the "single reception permitted state" or the "multiple reception permitted state" is occurring, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, in particular, when the premonition display is executed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, the post-reception display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the "multiple reception permitted state" (see Fig. 378 (g) and Fig. 381 (g)). In addition, when the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, there are two cases: the post-reception display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the "multiple reception permitted state" (see Fig. 384 (b) and (c)), and the post-reception display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the "multiple reception permitted state" (see Fig. 372 (g), Fig. 375 (g), Fig. 390 (g), Fig. 393 (g)). With this configuration, if the premonition display is displayed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, the so-called auto-hit rapid-fire function is always enabled, whereas if the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, the so-called auto-hit rapid-fire function may or may not be enabled, so it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained even while the so-called auto-hit rapid-fire function is implemented.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, even if the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the post-reception display is not executed multiple times when the "specific operation unit" is kept in an operated state (see Fig. 372 (g), Fig. 375 (g), Fig. 390 (g), Fig. 393 (g)). With this configuration, even if the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is possible to suggest that the so-called auto-repeated-hit function will not be activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, if the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, the periodic change in the model image display is not displayed in a predetermined time unit. In other words, in this case, when the periodic change in the model image display appears in a predetermined time unit, it is suggested that the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled, which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the 12th configuration G12, if the premonition effect display is not executed when a multiple reception allowance state occurs (the 6th G reception allowance state (or the 6th G reception allowance state according to the modified example), the 9th G reception allowance state, the 11th G reception allowance state (the 11th G reception allowance state according to the modified example)), if an operation is accepted at a specific operation unit in the multiple reception allowance state and a post-reception display corresponding to this is displayed and a specific condition is met, this may serve as a trigger to cause the post-reception display to be hidden. In this regard, when the specific operation unit is operated under the condition that the post-acceptance display is hidden when a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the multiple acceptance allowance state that occurred without the premonition display being executed, the post-acceptance display will not be executed multiple times (see Figs. 372(b), (c), 375(b), (c), etc.). However, when the specific operation unit is operated under the condition that the post-acceptance display is hidden even if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the multiple acceptance allowance state that occurred without the premonition display being executed, the post-acceptance display will not be executed multiple times (see Figs. 384(b) and (c)) and the post-acceptance display will not be executed multiple times (see Figs. 390(g), 393(g)). This allows the tension to be appropriately maintained.

In regards to the mock image display, in the "one-time acceptance state" where only one operation acceptance is permitted, the periodic change may not be displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units, but may be displayed to always appear in "times longer than the predetermined time" units.

In order to realize the 12th configuration G12, in the 9th G reception permission state, a mock image display that mimics the operation target may be displayed. In this case, however, the periodic change in the mock image display will be displayed in units of "a period longer than a predetermined period of time."

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned twelfth configuration G12, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned twelfth configuration G12 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 13th configuration G13 is configured to include the 6th G reception allowable state (or the 6th G reception allowable state according to a modified example), the 8th G reception allowable state (or the 7th G reception allowable state), the 9th G reception allowable state, and the 11th G reception allowable state (the 11th G reception allowable state according to a modified example) among the reception allowable states described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a model image display modeled after a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" and can execute a premonition display that suggests in advance that reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted, and the model image display may be displayed when reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted and may not be displayed when the operation reception is permitted, and when a "multiple reception allowable state" occurs in which reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times, the premonition display may be executed and may not be executed. In this regard, in either case where the premonition display is executed when a multiple reception allowance state occurs, or where the premonition display is not executed when a multiple reception allowance state occurs, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figures 378(b), (c), 381(g), (c), 384(g), (c)), which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above 13th configuration G13, if the premonition display is executed when a "multiple reception allowable state" occurs in which multiple receptions of operations to the "specific operation unit" are allowed, the post-reception display is executed multiple times in the multiple reception allowable state by simply maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figures 378 (b) and (c), 381 (g) and (c)), but if the premonition display is not executed when the multiple reception allowable state occurs, there are both cases in which the post-reception display is executed multiple times in the multiple reception allowable state by simply maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figures 384 (b) and (c)), and cases in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times by simply maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figures 372 (b) and (c), 375 (b) and (c), 390 (b) and (c), 393 (b) and (c)). With this configuration, if the premonition display is displayed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, the so-called auto-hit rapid-fire function is always enabled, whereas if the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, the so-called auto-hit rapid-fire function may or may not be enabled, so it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained even while the so-called auto-hit rapid-fire function is implemented.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirteenth configuration G13, even if the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, if the model image display is not displayed in the multiple reception permitted state, the post-reception display is executed multiple times simply by keeping the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 384 (b) and (c)). With this configuration, even if the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is activated when the model image display is not displayed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirteenth configuration G13, even if the premonition display is not executed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, when the post-reception display according to the operation reception is under a condition in which it is not displayed based on the establishment of a "specific condition", the post-reception display is not executed multiple times when the "specific operation unit" is kept in an operated state (see Figs. 372(b) and (c), Fig. 375(b) and (c)). According to such a configuration, when the premonition display is not displayed when the "multiple reception permitted state" occurs, if the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not activated, there is a possibility that the post-reception display will not be displayed based on the establishment of a "specific condition", so that interest in the game can be maintained in a good condition.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 13th configuration G13, if the premonition effect display is not executed when a multiple reception allowance state occurs (the 6th G reception allowance state (or the 6th G reception allowance state according to the modified example), the 9th G reception allowance state, the 11th G reception allowance state (the 11th G reception allowance state according to the modified example)), if an operation is accepted on the "specific operation unit" in the multiple reception allowance state and a post-reception display corresponding to this is displayed and a specific condition is met, this may serve as a trigger for the post-reception display to be made invisible. In this regard, when the specific operation unit is operated under the condition that if a specific condition is met while a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation being accepted in a multiple acceptance permitted state that occurs without the premonition display being executed is displayed and the post-acceptance display is made invisible as a result of the establishment of the specific condition, the post-acceptance display will not be made invisible as a result of the establishment of the specific condition while a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation being accepted in a multiple acceptance permitted state that occurs without the premonition display being executed is displayed, the post-acceptance display will not be made invisible as a result of the establishment of the specific condition while the post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation being accepted in a multiple acceptance permitted state that occurs without the premonition display being executed and the specific operation unit is operated under the condition that the post-acceptance display will not be made invisible as a result of the establishment of the specific condition while the post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation being accepted in a multiple acceptance permitted state that occurs without the premonition display being executed and the specific operation unit is maintained in the state in which both the post-acceptance display will be made invisible as a result of the establishment of the specific condition and the post-acceptance display will be made invisible as a result of the establishment of the specific condition. This allows the sense of tension to be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirteenth configuration G13, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above thirteenth configuration G13, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned thirteenth configuration G13 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 14th configuration G14 is configured to include, among the above-mentioned reception allowance states, the 2nd G reception allowance state, the 6th G reception allowance state (or the 6th G reception allowance state according to the modified example), the 8th G reception allowance state (or the 7th G reception allowance state), the 9th G reception allowance state, and the 11th G reception allowance state (the 11th G reception allowance state according to the modified example), then in the pachinko machine 1, in the reception allowance state, there are cases where a "specific message display (for example, "Rapid Hits" as shown in Figures 379 and 382)" is displayed, and cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the reception allowable state may be generated as a “single reception allowable state” in which reception of an operation to a “specific operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410)” is permitted only once (the second G reception allowable state), or as a “multiple reception allowable state” in which reception of an operation to a “specific operation unit” is permitted multiple times (the sixth G reception allowable state (or the sixth G reception allowable state according to the modified example), the eighth G reception allowable state (or the seventh G reception allowable state), the ninth G reception allowable state, and the eleventh G reception allowable state). There are two types of reception allowance states (11G reception allowance state according to a modified example), and the mock image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears. In the "single reception allowance state," the periodic change can be displayed so that it appears in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" (see FIG. 360(g)), and in the "multiple reception allowance state," the periodic change can be displayed so that it appears in units of "predetermined time" (see FIG. 378(g), FIG. 381(g)), which makes it possible to prompt the player to perform operations in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, in the "multiple reception permitted state", the mock image display according to the above 14th configuration G14 is configured so that the periodic change appears in units of "predetermined time" (see Figs. 378(g) and 381(g)), and also appears in units of "longer than the predetermined time" (see Figs. 372(g), 375(g), 390(g), and 393(g)). With this configuration, when the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of "longer than the predetermined time", it is difficult to recognize whether the "single reception permitted state" or the "multiple reception permitted state" is occurring, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 14th configuration G14, in the "multiple reception permitted state" in which the reception of operations to the "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times, there are cases where the "specific message display" is displayed (see Figs. 379 and 382) and cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed (see Figs. 373, 376, 385, and 391). The "specific message display" cannot be displayed in the "single reception permitted state" in which the reception of operations to the "specific operation unit" is permitted only once (see Fig. 362). With this configuration, when the "specific message display" is displayed, it is possible to appropriately suggest that the reception of operations to the "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times, so that it is expected that interest in playing the game will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 14th configuration G14, when a "specific message display" is displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state", the post-reception display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the "multiple reception permitted state" (see Figs. 378 and 379, and Figs. 381 and 382). In addition, when a "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state", there are two cases: the post-reception display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the "multiple reception permitted state" (see Fig. 384), and the post-reception display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the "multiple reception permitted state" (see Figs. 372, 375, 390, and 393). With this configuration, when the "specific message display" is displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state," it appropriately suggests that the so-called auto-repeated tap function will be enabled, but when the "specific message display" is not displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto-repeated tap function will be enabled, which is expected to appropriately maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in order to realize the 14th configuration G14, in the 9th G reception allowable state, a model image display imitating the operation target may be displayed. In this case, in the 9th G reception allowable state, the "specific message display" is not displayed, but if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to appear in "predetermined time" units, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple reception allowable state", if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so as to appear in "predetermined time" units, the post-reception display will be executed multiple times just by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. According to this configuration, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple reception allowable state", when the periodic change in the model image display appears in "predetermined time" units, the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, so that it is expected to maintain a sense of tension and suppress a decline in interest in the game. This modified version of the 9th G reception permission state (wherein a "specific message display" is not displayed, but a periodic change in the mock image display appears in "predetermined time" units) may be prepared in place of the 9th G reception permission state described above, or may be prepared separately from the 9th G reception permission state described above, as a reception permission state that occurs under different conditions than the 9th G reception permission state described above.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 14th configuration G14, if a specific message display (such as "Rapid Hits" as shown in Figures 379 and 382) is not displayed in the multiple reception allowing state, when an operation is accepted at a specific operation unit in the multiple reception allowing state and a post-acceptance display corresponding to this is displayed, if the above-mentioned "specific condition" is met, this may trigger the post-acceptance display to be made invisible (sixth G reception allowing state (or sixth G reception allowing state according to a modified example)). In this regard, when a specific operation unit is operated under conditions where a specific condition is met while a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation being accepted in a multiple-acceptance permitted state in which a "specific message display" is not displayed and the post-acceptance display is made invisible as a result of the establishment of a specific condition, the post-acceptance display will not be executed multiple times (see Figs. 372(b) and (c) and Figs. 375(b) and (c)). However, when a specific operation unit is operated under conditions where a specific condition is met while a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation being accepted in a multiple-acceptance permitted state in which a specific message display is not displayed and the post-acceptance display is made invisible as a result of the establishment of a specific condition, there are both cases where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times (see Figs. 384(b) and (c)) and where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times (see Figs. 390(b) and (c) and Figs. 393(b) and (c)). This is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in order to realize the 14th configuration G14, in a state where reception is permitted once, the mock image display will not be displayed so that the periodic change appears in the predetermined time unit, but will be displayed so that it appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 14th configuration G14, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 14th configuration G14, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 14th configuration G14 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 15th configuration G15 includes the 6th G reception allowable state (or the 6th G reception allowable state according to the modified example), the 8th G reception allowable state (or the 7th G reception allowable state), the 9th G reception allowable state, and the 11th G reception allowable state (the 11th G reception allowable state according to the modified example) among the reception allowable states described above, in the pachinko machine 1, in the multiple reception allowable state in which the reception of the operation of the "specific operation unit (e.g., the operation button 410)" is permitted multiple times, there are cases in which a "specific message display (e.g., "random hits" as shown in FIG. 379 and FIG. 382)" is displayed and cases in which the "specific message display" is not displayed. In this regard, in the multiple reception allowable state, in either case in which the "specific message display" is displayed or the "specific message display" is not displayed, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times (the so-called auto-repeated hit function can be enabled) simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, so that it is expected that the interest in playing the game can be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifteenth configuration G15, the mosaic image display is arranged so that it is displayed when operation acceptance for the "specific operation unit" is permitted (sixth G acceptance state (or sixth G acceptance state according to the modified example), eighth G acceptance state (or seventh G acceptance state), eleventh G acceptance state (eleventh G acceptance state according to the modified example)) and is not displayed when the operation acceptance is permitted (ninth G acceptance state). In addition, when a "specific message display (for example, "random hit" as shown in FIG. 379 or FIG. 382)" is displayed in the multiple acceptance state (e.g., eighth G acceptance state (or seventh G acceptance state)), the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times in the multiple acceptance state simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see FIG. 378 (b), (c), FIG. 381 (b), (c)). In addition, when the "specific message display" is not displayed in the multiple reception permitted state, there are two cases: the post-reception display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in the multiple reception permitted state (see Figs. 384(b) and (c)), and the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is maintained in the operated state (see Figs. 372(b) and (c), Figs. 375(b) and (c), Figs. 390(b) and (c), and Figs. 393(b) and (c)). With this configuration, when the "specific message display" is displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state", it appropriately suggests that the so-called auto-tap function is enabled, but when the "specific message display" is not displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto-tap function is enabled, so that it is expected that the sense of tension is appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifteenth configuration G15, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the multiple reception allowing state, when the model image display is not displayed in the multiple reception allowing state, the post-reception display is executed multiple times simply by keeping the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Fig. 384 (b), (c), (g)). With this configuration, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple reception allowing state", when the model image display is not displayed, the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the 15th configuration G15, if a "specific message display (such as "Rapid Hits" as shown in Figures 379 and 382)" is not displayed in the multiple reception allowing state, when an operation is accepted at a specific operation unit in the multiple reception allowing state and the post-acceptance display corresponding to this is displayed, if the above-mentioned "specific condition" is met, this may trigger the post-acceptance display to be hidden (sixth G reception allowing state (or sixth G reception allowing state relating to the modified example)). In this regard, when a specific operation unit is operated under conditions in which a specific condition is met while a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation being accepted in a multiple-acceptance permitted state in which a "specific message display" is not displayed and the post-acceptance display is made invisible as a result of the establishment of the specific condition, the post-acceptance display will not be executed multiple times (see Figs. 372(b) and (c) and Figs. 375(b) and (c)). However, when a specific operation unit is operated under conditions in which a specific condition is met while a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation being accepted in a multiple-acceptance permitted state in which a "specific message display" is not displayed and the post-acceptance display is not made invisible as a result of the establishment of the specific condition, there are both cases in which the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times (see Figs. 384(b) and (c)) and cases in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times (see Figs. 390(b) and (c) and Figs. 393(b) and (c)). This is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifteenth configuration G15, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 15th configuration G15, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 15th configuration G15 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 16th configuration G16 is provided with the 6th G reception allowable state (or the 6th G reception allowable state in a modified example), the 8th G reception allowable state (or the 7th G reception allowable state), and the 11th G reception allowable state among the reception allowable states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation for a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" is permitted, a model image display modeled after the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and when the model image display is made invisible, a "disappearance EF display (disappearance performance display)" can be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display, which makes the model image display difficult to view until the model image display is made invisible. In this regard, in a multiple operation state in which the reception of operations to a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" is permitted multiple times, there are cases in which the post-reception display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (8G reception permitted state (or 7G reception permitted state)), and cases in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state (6G reception permitted state (or 6G reception permitted state according to a modified example), 11G reception permitted state). In either case, when the model image display that was displayed in the multiple operation state is made invisible, a "disappearance effect display" can be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display (see FIG. 378(h), FIG. 381(h), FIG. 390(h), etc.), so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 16th configuration G16, in a multiple reception allowance state (8th G reception allowance state (or 7th G reception allowance state)) in which the post-reception display is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state, when the model image display is made invisible, a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" can be displayed as an image display different from the model image display (see FIG. 378(h) or FIG. 381(h)). In addition, in a multiple reception allowance state in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state, when the model image display is made invisible, there are both cases in which a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" can be displayed as an image display different from the model image display (see FIG. 390(h) and the like) and cases in which a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" can not be displayed as an image display different from the model image display (see FIG. 372(h) and FIG. 375(h)). According to this configuration, in a multiple reception acceptance state in which the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" can be displayed, whereas in a multiple reception acceptance state in which the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled, it is difficult to recognize whether the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" can be displayed. Therefore, when the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" is not displayed, it definitely suggests that the reception acceptance state in which the auto-hit function is not enabled, while when the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" is displayed, it is possible to be aware that the auto-hit function may have been enabled (even if the auto-hit function is not available), and it is expected that the tension when using the auto-hit function will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 16th configuration G16, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation part, but may be prepared as multiple operation parts including the specific operation part.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 16th configuration G16, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 16th configuration G16 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 17th configuration G17 is provided with the first G reception allowance state (or the first G reception allowance state according to the modified example, or the 11th G reception allowance state according to the modified example), the second G reception allowance state, and the fifth G reception allowance state among the reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, a model image display modeling the operation means can be displayed, and when the model image display is made invisible, a "disappearance EF display (disappearance performance display)" can be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display, which makes the model image display difficult to see until the model image display is made invisible, and the operation means is arranged to be capable of emitting light in any of a plurality of color schemes including a "first light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "second light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on red)". In this regard, the mock-up image display can be displayed so as to show a periodic change in the reception-permitted state, and there are cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of a "predetermined time" (see FIG. 369(g)), and cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of a "time longer than a predetermined time" (see FIG. 352(g), FIG. 355(g), FIG. 360(g), FIG. 393(g)). When the operation means emits light in a "first light-emitting mode (e.g., a color scheme with a white base)" based on white and the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed so as to appear in units of a "time longer than a predetermined time" (see FIG. 352(g), 355(g), 360(g), 393(g)) or when the operating means is illuminated in the "second light emitting mode (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" and the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (see FIG. 360(g)), when the model image display is made non-displayable, a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" can be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display (see FIG. 360(h)), which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 17th configuration G17, when the operating means is emitting light in the "first light emitting mode" and the periodic change in the Mokku image display is displayed to occur for a period of time longer than a predetermined time (see Figs. 352(e) and (g), Figs. 355(e) and (g), Figs. 360(e) and (g), Figs. 393(e) and (g)), there are two cases: a reception allowance state of a type (second G reception allowance state) in which a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" as an image display separate from the Mokku image display may be displayed when the Mokku image display is made non-displayable, and a reception allowance state of a type (first G reception allowance state (or first G reception allowance state according to the modified example, or eleventh G reception allowance state according to the modified example)) in which a disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display) as an image display separate from the Mokku image display may not be displayed when the Mokku image display is made non-displayable. Furthermore, when the operating means is emitting light in the "second light emitting mode" and the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur for a period of time longer than a predetermined time (see Figures 360 (e) and (g)), a type of reception allowance state (second G reception allowance state) in which there is a possibility that a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" will be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display when the model image display is made invisible is always occurring. According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time", if the operating means is emitting light in the "second light emission mode", a state in which the type of acceptance permitting state in which the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" may be displayed is always occurring. However, if the operating means is emitting light in the "first light emission mode", it becomes difficult to recognize whether a state in which the type of acceptance permitting state in which the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" may be displayed or a state in which the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" may not be displayed is occurring. Therefore, it becomes more necessary to check the mode (color scheme, etc.) of the model image display before the visibility of the model image display is deteriorated by the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)", and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 17th configuration G17, even if the operating means is emitting light in the "first light emitting mode", when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units, when the model image display is made invisible, a type of acceptance permission state (5G acceptance permission state) in which a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" as an image display different from the model image display is likely to be displayed is always generated (see Fig. 369 (e) and (g)). With this configuration, even if the operating means is emitting light in the "first light emitting mode", by checking the periodic change in the model image display, it is possible to recognize that a type of acceptance permission state in which a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" is likely to be displayed has occurred, which is expected to maintain the interest in playing the game.

The type of reception-permitting state refers to the type of post-reception display, of which there are multiple types, and even if there is only one type, the post-reception display corresponding to the reception-permitting state may be executed in one of multiple modes (high expectation mode, low expectation mode, etc.). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above 17th configuration G17, when the post-reception display is executed in the high expectation mode, the disappearance display is displayed, but even if the disappearance display is not displayed when the post-reception display is executed in the low expectation mode, it can be said that "there is always a situation in which a type of reception-permitting state in which a 'disappearing EF display (disappearing display)' as an image display different from the mock image display may be displayed" is occurring.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 17th configuration G17, as shown in Figs. 352(e), (g), 355(e), (g), 360(e), (g), 369(e), (g), etc., the light emission in the operation means is terminated based on the acceptance of an operation, but the model image display is not made invisible at the time of termination, but is made visible. In such a configuration, even if the model image display is not made invisible at the time of acceptance of an operation, it is possible to recognize whether the operation acceptance is being carried out appropriately by checking the light emission state in the operation means.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 17th configuration G17, the "disappearance EF display (disappearance performance display)" may be displayed as the same image display when an operation is accepted while the operating means is emitting light in the first light-emitting mode and the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the operating means is emitting light in the second light-emitting mode and the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (for example, see Figures 360(e), (h) and 362(d)). With this configuration, once an operation is accepted, it becomes difficult to recognize in which light-emitting mode the operating means was emitting light, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 17th configuration G17, the "disappearance EF display (disappearance performance display)" is,
When an operation is accepted while the operation means is emitting light in a first light emitting manner and the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed to occur in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", and when the operation means is emitting light in a second light emitting manner and the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed to occur in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", the same image display is displayed (for example, see Figs. 360(e) and (h) and Fig. 362(d)),
When an operation is accepted while the operation means is emitting light in a first light-emitting manner and the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (see Figs. 390(e) and (h) and 392(h)), and when an operation is accepted while the operation means is emitting light in a second light-emitting manner and the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (see, for example, Figs. 360(e) and (h) and 362(d)), a different image display is displayed,
According to such a configuration, it becomes even more difficult to recognize in which light emission mode the operating means is emitting light, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Note that "when an operation is accepted while the operating means is emitting light in a first light emitting state and the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time"" and "when the operating means is emitting light in a second light emitting state and the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time"" may refer to situations in which different types of acceptance permission states are occurring. Furthermore, in this case, the "disappearance EF display (disappearance performance display)" may be displayed as the same image display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 17th configuration G17, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be prepared as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 17th configuration G17, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 17th configuration G17 can be displayed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 18th configuration G18 is provided with a second G reception allowance state and a fifth G reception allowance state among the reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is allowed, a mock image display imitating the operation means can be displayed, and the operation means can emit light in any of a number of modes including a "first light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "second light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on red)." In this regard, the model image display can be displayed in one of a number of color schemes in the reception permission state so that a periodic change appears, and there are cases where the periodic change appears in "predetermined time" units (5G reception permission state) and cases where the periodic change appears in "times longer than the predetermined time" units (2G reception permission state). When the model image display is displayed so that a periodic change appears in "times longer than the predetermined time", the operating means can emit light in either a "first light emission mode" or a "second light emission mode" depending on which of the multiple color schemes the model image display is displayed in (see Figures 360 (e) and (g)), which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 18th configuration G18, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (second G reception allowable state), the operation means may emit light in the "first light emission mode" or in the "second light emission mode" depending on which of the above-mentioned multiple color schemes the model image display is displayed in (see Figs. 360(e) and (g)). In contrast, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" (fifth G reception allowable state), the operation means can emit light in the "first light emission mode", but will not emit light in the "second light emission mode" regardless of which of the above-mentioned multiple color schemes the model image display is displayed in (see Figs. 369(e) and (g)). With this configuration, when the user checks the operating means and the "second light emission mode" appears, it becomes easy to recognize that the periodic change in the model image display is not occurring in "predetermined time" units, making it easier to guess the type of acceptance permission state, which is expected to maintain the user's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 18th configuration G18, the light emission in the operation means may be terminated based on the acceptance of an operation. In this regard, since the model image display is not made invisible at the time of termination but is made visible (see, for example, Figs. 360(e) and (g) and Fig. 369(e) and (g)), even if the model image display is made to continue to be displayed after the operation is accepted, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been accepted appropriately.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 18th configuration G18, the premonition display indicating that the reception-permitting state will occur can be executed so as to span the timing when the reception-permitting state occurs, and when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (2G reception-permitting state), if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, this triggers the premonition display to be hidden (see FIG. 360(f)). However, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (5G reception-permitting state), even if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, this triggers the premonition display to be hidden (see FIG. 369(f)), so that the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed while the premonition display display continues to be displayed. In other words, in this case, when the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units (5G reception permissible state), if operation reception is performed at a relatively early stage after the reception permissible state occurs, the time for which the post-reception display is difficult to see due to the premonition display will be extended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance in which it is beneficial to determine in what time unit the periodic change in the imitation image display occurs, and when this occurs in a "predetermined time", to have operation reception occur at a relatively late stage, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the 18th configuration G18, when the periodic change in the Moji image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception allowable state) and when the periodic change in the Moji image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (5th G reception allowable state), the premonition effect display can be displayed in the same manner (specific premonition display ZET) (see Figures 360 (f) and 369 (f)), making it difficult to recognize which periodic change is appearing in the Moji image display, and making it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 18th configuration G18, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 18th configuration G18, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 18th configuration G18 can be displayed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 19th configuration G19 includes the first G reception allowance state, the second G reception allowance state, the fifth G reception allowance state, the sixth G reception allowance state (or the sixth G reception allowance state according to a modified example), and the eleventh G reception allowance state among the reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, an imitation image display modeling the operation means can be displayed, and a reception allowance sound can be output indicating that the operation means is in a state in which operation is permitted, or that the operation means is in a state in which operation is permitted, and the operation means can emit light in any of a number of modes including a "first light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "second light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on red)." In this regard, the model image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the acceptance permission state, and the periodic change can be displayed so that it appears in "predetermined time" units (see FIG. 369(g)), or the periodic change can be displayed so that it appears in "times longer than the predetermined time" units (see FIG. 352(g), FIG. 360(g), FIG. 372(g), FIG. 375(g), FIG. 390(g)). When the acceptance permission state occurs, in either case where the periodic change in the model image display is displayed so that it appears in "predetermined time" units, or the periodic change is displayed so that it appears in "times longer than the predetermined time", an acceptance permission sound can be output (see FIG. 352(g), FIG. 360(k), FIG. 369(k)), and it can be expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 19th configuration G19, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", a reception permission sound is always output when a reception permission state occurs (see Figs. 369(e), (g), (k)). In addition, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", there are both cases where a reception permission sound is output when a reception permission state occurs (see Figs. 352(e), (g), (k) and Figs. 360(e), (g), (k)) and where a reception permission sound is not output (see Figs. 372(g), 375(g), and 390(g)). With this configuration, when the acceptance sound is output, the periodic change in the mock image display will occur either in units of a "predetermined time" or in units of a "longer than the predetermined time," making it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 19th configuration G19, when the acceptance permission sound is not output, the periodic change in the model image display is not displayed in "predetermined time" units, and the operating means is not illuminated in the "second light emission mode" (see Figs. 372(e) and (g), Figs. 375(e) and (g), Fig. 390(e) and (g)). With this configuration, when the acceptance permission sound is not output, it is difficult to recognize that acceptance of operations has become permitted, and the player can concentrate only on the acceptance of operations without worrying about various presentation modes, which is expected to maintain the interest in playing the game. In this case, if at least one of the conditions is met, that is, the periodic change in the imitation image display occurs in "predetermined time" units or the operating means emits light in the "second light emission mode," the reception permission sound will always be output when the reception permission state occurs, so that forgetting to operate the device is less likely to occur when the periodic change in the imitation image display occurs in "predetermined time" units or when the operating means emits light in the "second light emission mode."

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 19th configuration G19, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units and the operating means emits light in the first light-emitting mode (5th G reception permission state), even if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound is not terminated midway (see Figures 369 (e), (g), and (k)). In this regard, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission mode, there are both cases where the operation acceptance while the reception permission sound is being output is triggered by this to terminate the game (see FIG. 360(e), (g), (k)) and cases where the game is not terminated (see FIG. 352(e), (g), (k)). Therefore, even when the operation means emits light in the first light emission mode, when the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of "predetermined time", it can be suitably suggested that the game will not be terminated even if the operation acceptance is made while the reception permission sound is being output. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it becomes difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance is triggered by this to terminate the game when the operation acceptance is made while the reception permission sound is being output, so it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained because it becomes difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance is made properly.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 19th configuration G19, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the second light emission mode, if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this is sure to trigger an interruption (see Fig. 360 (e) and (k)). In other words, in this case, even if the periodic change in the model image display occurs in units of "longer than a predetermined time", if the operation means emits light in the second light emission mode, it is possible to suitably suggest that if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this will trigger an interruption.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 19th configuration G19, the light emission in the operation means may be terminated based on the acceptance of an operation. In this regard, since the model image display is not made invisible at the time of termination but is made visible (see, for example, Figs. 352(e) and (g), 360(e) and (g), and 369(e) and (g)), even if the model image display is made to continue to be displayed after the operation is accepted, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been accepted appropriately.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 19th configuration G19, the premonition effect display indicating that a reception-permitting state will occur can be executed so as to span the timing when the reception-permitting state occurs (first G reception-permitting state, second G reception-permitting state, fifth G reception-permitting state). In this regard, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light-emitting mode, even if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, the premonition effect display is not made to be in a non-display state as a result (see Figs. 369(e), (f), (g)); and when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light-emitting mode, the premonition effect display is made to be in a non-display state as a result of an operation being accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed (see Figs. 352(e), (f), (g) and Figs. 360(e), (f), (g)). With this configuration, even if the operating means is illuminated in the first illumination mode, it is possible to suggest in which mode the periodic change in the mock image display appears, based on whether or not the display is made invisible when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is being displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 19th configuration G19, the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the operating means emits light in the second light emission mode, if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, this triggers the display to be hidden (see Figures 360 (e), (f), and (g)). Therefore, when the operating means emits light in the second light emission mode, it is possible to suggest that the premonition display will be hidden upon acceptance of an operation, without having to confirm the periodic change in the model image display.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 19th configuration G19, the premonition performance display can be displayed in the same manner (specific premonition display ZET) when the periodic changes in the replica image display are displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light-emitting mode, and when the periodic changes in the replica image display are displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light-emitting mode (see Figures 352 (f), 360 (f), and 369 (f)).Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize which periodic change is appearing in the replica image display, and the sense of tension can be maintained in an optimal manner. However, as a mode of premonition display, a mode may be further provided in which the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission mode, but cannot occur when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission mode.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 19th configuration G19, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 19th configuration G19, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 19th configuration G19 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 20th configuration G20 is configured to include the first G reception allowance state, the second G reception allowance state, and the fifth G reception allowance state according to the modified example among the reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, a mock image display imitating the operation means can be displayed, and the operation means can emit light in any of a number of modes including a "first light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "second light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on red)." In this regard, the mock image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the reception-permitted state, and there are cases where the periodic change is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (5G reception-permitted state) and cases where the periodic change is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (1G reception-permitted state and 2G reception-permitted state according to modified examples). In the reception-permitted state, the mock image display can be made invisible while reception of operations on the operating means is permitted (see FIGS. 355(c) and (g)), which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the reception-permitted state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 20th configuration G20, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode" (5th G reception allowable state), the model image display is not made invisible while the operation reception to the operation means continues to be permitted in the reception allowable state (see Fig. 370 (c) and (g)). In addition, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode" (1st G reception allowable state and 2nd G reception allowable state according to the modified example), in the reception allowable state, the model image display is made invisible while the operation reception to the operation means is permitted (see Fig. 355 (c) and (g)), and the model image display is not made invisible (see Fig. 361 (c) and (g)). According to this configuration, when the operating means is illuminated in the "first light emission mode," if the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time," the imitation image display will not be hidden while operations on the operating means are permitted; however, when the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to occur in units of "times longer than the predetermined time," it becomes difficult to recognize whether the imitation image display will be hidden while operations on the operating means are permitted, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when operations on the operating means are permitted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 20th configuration G20, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode" (second G reception-permitting state), the model image display will not be made invisible while operation reception to the operation means is permitted in the reception-permitting state. With this configuration, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", by checking the light emission mode of the operation means, it may be possible to recognize that the model image display will not be made invisible while operation reception to the operation means is permitted, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twentieth configuration G20, the light emission in the operation means may be terminated based on the acceptance of an operation. In this regard, since the model image display is not made invisible at the time of termination but is made visible (see, for example, Figs. 360(e) and (g) and Fig. 369(e) and (g)), even if the model image display is made to continue to be displayed after the operation is accepted, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been accepted appropriately.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 20th configuration G20, the premonition display suggesting that the reception-permitting state will occur can be executed so as to span the timing when the reception-permitting state occurs. In this regard, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light-emitting mode, even if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, the premonition display is not made invisible (see Fig. 369 (e), (f), (g)); when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than the predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light-emitting mode, the premonition display is made invisible when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed (see Fig. 356 (e), (f), (g) and Fig. 360 (e), (f), (g)). With this configuration, even if the operating means is illuminated in the first illumination mode, it is possible to suggest in which mode the periodic change in the mock image display appears, based on whether or not the display is made invisible when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is being displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twentieth configuration G20, the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the operation means emits light in the second light emission mode, if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this triggers the display to be hidden (see Figures 360 (e), (f), and (g)). Therefore, when the operation means emits light in the second light emission mode, it is possible to suggest that the premonition effect display will be hidden upon acceptance of an operation, without having to confirm the periodic change in the model image display.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 20th configuration G20, the premonition performance display can be displayed in the same manner (specific premonition display ZET) when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light-emitting mode, and when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light-emitting mode (see Figures 355 (f), 360 (f), and 369 (f)).This makes it difficult to recognize which periodic change is appearing in the model image display, and makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner. However, as a mode of premonition display, a mode may be further provided in which the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission mode, but cannot occur when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission mode.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the 20th configuration G20 described above, when in the acceptance-permitted state, while the acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, the model image display is made invisible (see Figs. 355 (c) and (g)), the light emission mode of the operation means is made to continue without terminating, so that it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game caused by the model image display being made invisible can be suppressed.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twentieth configuration G20, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 20th configuration G20, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 20th configuration G20 can be displayed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 21st configuration G21 is provided with the second G reception allowance state, the fifth G reception allowance state, and the ninth G reception allowance state (or the third G reception allowance state) among the reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is allowed, a model image display imitating the operation means can be displayed, and the operation means can emit light in any of a number of modes including a "first light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "second light emission mode (e.g., a color scheme based on red)." In this regard, the mock image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears, and there are cases where the periodic change appears in "predetermined time" units (5G reception-permitted state) and cases where the periodic change appears in "longer than a predetermined time" units (2G reception-permitted state). When the operating means emits light in the "first light-emitting mode" in the reception-permitted state, the mock image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in "predetermined time" units in the reception-permitted state (see FIGS. 369(e) and (g)), cases where the periodic change appears in "longer than a predetermined time" units in the reception-permitted state (see FIGS. 360(e) and (g)), and cases where the mock image display is not displayed in the reception-permitted state (see FIGS. 384(e) and (g) and FIGS. 363(e) and (g)). This is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

As described above, in the second G reception allowing state and the fifth G reception allowing state, the operating means may emit light in a "third light emission mode" different from both the "first light emission mode" and the "second light emission mode". That is, in this case, in the second G reception allowing state, the operating means emits light in any of a plurality of modes including the "first light emission mode", the "second light emission mode", and the "third light emission mode", and in the fifth G reception allowing state, the operating means emits light in any of a plurality of modes including the "first light emission mode" and the "third light emission mode" (excluding the second light emission mode). In a pachinko machine 1 having such a 21st configuration G21, when the operating means emits light in the "third light emission mode" in the reception allowing state, the model image display may be displayed so that the periodic changes appear in "predetermined time" units in the reception allowing state (5G reception allowing state), or may be displayed so that the periodic changes appear in "longer than predetermined time" units in the reception allowing state (2G reception allowing state). Since there is no case where the model image display is not displayed in the reception allowing state, when the operating means emits light in the "third light emission mode", it is difficult to recognize in which mode the periodic changes in the model image display will be displayed, but the model image display itself is always displayed, which is expected to maintain the interest in playing the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-first configuration G21, when the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode" in the reception-permitting state, the model image display does not display periodic changes in the reception-permitting state in "predetermined time" units, nor does it display periodic changes in the reception-permitting state in "longer than the predetermined time" units (see Fig. 360 (e) and (g)). With this configuration, when the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode", it can be suggested that the model image display will display periodic changes in the reception-permitting state in "longer than the predetermined time" units, which can be useful in predicting the type of reception-permitting state without checking the "length of the periodic change", which is difficult to distinguish.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-first configuration G21 may further include, for example, a first reception-permitting state. In such a configuration, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in a time period longer than a predetermined time in the reception-permitting state, depending on the type of the reception-permitting state (the display after reception differs depending on the type of reception-permitting state), the operation means will only emit light in the first light-emitting state (see Fig. 352 (e) and (g)). In other words, in this case, depending on the type of reception-permitting state, the operation means will only emit light in the first light-emitting state, making it difficult to recognize whether the model image display is displayed or, when it is displayed, what periodic change it will have, and therefore it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-first configuration G21, the light emission in the operation means may be terminated based on the acceptance of an operation. In this regard, since the model image display is not made invisible at the time of termination but is made visible (see, for example, Figs. 360(e) and (g) and Fig. 369(e) and (g)), even if the model image display is made to continue to be displayed after the operation is accepted, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been accepted appropriately.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 21st configuration G21, the premonition display suggesting that the reception-permitting state will occur can be executed so as to span the timing when the reception-permitting state occurs. In this regard, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light-emitting mode (5G reception-permitting state), even if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, the premonition display is not made invisible (see FIG. 369(f)), and when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than the predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light-emitting mode (1G reception-permitting state, 2G reception-permitting state), the premonition display is made invisible when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed (see FIG. 352(f), FIG. 360(f)). With this configuration, even if it is not possible to distinguish in what manner the periodic change in the mock image display was being performed, it is possible to recognize this by checking whether the premonition display was made invisible as a result of receiving an operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 21st configuration G21, when the operation means emits light in the third light emission mode (2nd G reception allowable state, 5th G reception allowable state), if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this may cause the premonition effect display to be hidden (see FIG. 360(f)) or not hidden (see FIG. 369(f)). However, when the operation means emits light in the second light emission mode (2nd G reception allowable state), the premonition effect display is always hidden (see FIG. 360(f)) in response to the operation acceptance. Therefore, even without checking the "length or shortness of the periodic change" which is difficult to distinguish, it is possible to predict the type of reception allowable state by simply checking the light emission mode of the operation means.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 21st configuration G21, the premonition effect display can be displayed in the same manner (specific premonition display ZET) when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (see Fig. 352 (f), Fig. 360 (f), Fig. 369 (f)), so that it becomes difficult to recognize which periodic change will appear in the model image display, and the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained. However, as the premonition effect display manner, a manner may be further provided that can appear when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission manner, but cannot appear when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 21st configuration G21, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 21st configuration G21, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 21st configuration G21 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 22nd configuration G22 includes the 2nd G reception allowance state, the 5th G reception allowance state, and the 11th G reception allowance state, among the reception allowance states described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception allowance state occurs, the premonition display may or may not be executed. The operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is capable of emitting light in one of a plurality of modes including a "first light-emitting mode (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" and a "second light-emitting mode (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" in the reception allowance state, and the simulated image display imitating the operation means is capable of being displayed so that a periodic change appears in the reception allowance state, and the periodic change may be displayed so that it appears in "predetermined time" units, or the periodic change may be displayed so that it appears in "times longer than the predetermined time" units. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the 22nd configuration G22, the premonition effect display can be displayed across the timing when the acceptance acceptance state occurs, whether the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode" (see Figures 369(e), (f), (g)), or the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode" (see Figures 360(e), (f), (g)), and therefore it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 22nd configuration G22, in a reception permissible state (5G reception permissible state) in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this is a trigger to prevent the premonition effect display from being made to go into a non-display state (see Fig. 369 (e), (f), (g)). In addition, in a reception permissible state (2G reception permissible state) in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this is a trigger to prevent the premonition effect display from being made to go into a non-display state (see Fig. 360 (e), (f), (g)). With this configuration, if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, it is possible to indicate through the periodic change in the mock image display whether or not the premonition display will be hidden as a result of this. This is expected to maintain the interest in the game when choosing whether to accept an operation while the premonition display is displayed, or to accept an operation after the premonition display is hidden.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 22nd configuration G22, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode" and an acceptance permission state occurs (5th G acceptance permission state), the premonition display is always executed. In addition, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", both the premonition display is executed (2nd G acceptance permission state) and the premonition display is not executed (11th G acceptance permission state). With this configuration, when the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", both the premonition display is executed and the premonition display is not executed, so it can be expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner. However, even if the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode," if the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in "predetermined time" units, the premonition display will always be executed, so it is expected that the player will be less likely to forget to operate the device, and will be able to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, the same pattern (specific premonition display ZET) can appear as the premonition performance display in a reception permission state (5G reception permission state) in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission pattern," and in a reception permission state (2G reception permission state) in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission pattern. This configuration is expected to make it difficult to recognize which reception permission state will occur, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

When the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the second light emission mode, in a state in which operation is permitted (second G operation permitted state), the premonition display is always executed, but if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, this triggers the premonition display to go into a non-display state, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game due to the premonition display impeding visibility of the operation-related effects.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-second configuration G22, the light emission in the operation means may be terminated based on the acceptance of an operation. In this regard, since the model image display is not hidden but is displayed at the time of termination (see, for example, Figs. 360(e) and (g) and Fig. 369(e) and (g)), it is possible to appropriately indicate that the operation acceptance has been performed properly even if the model image display is made to continue to be displayed after the operation acceptance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22, the 11th G acceptance permission state may be modified to "an acceptance permission state in which the acceptance permission sound can be output, but in which the output of the acceptance permission sound is not terminated even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output". In such a configuration, when an acceptance permission state (5th G acceptance permission state) occurs in which the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode, the acceptance will not be terminated even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output (see Fig. 369 (e), (g), (k)). In contrast, when a reception permission state occurs in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur for a period longer than a predetermined time and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode (second G reception permission state, modified eleventh G reception permission state), if an operation is received while the reception permission sound is being output, this may trigger a termination (see FIG. 360(k)), or it may not be terminated (modified eleventh G reception permission state). In other words, in this case, it is possible to appropriately suggest in what manner the periodic change in the model image display appeared when the reception permission sound is terminated, while making it difficult to recognize in what manner the periodic change in the model image display appeared when the reception permission sound is not terminated, which is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 22nd configuration G22, the 1G reception allowable state may be modified to a reception allowable state in which the premonition display is not executed, and then provided in place of the 11G reception allowable state. Even with this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as when the 11G reception allowable state is modified to "a reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound can be output, but in which the output of the reception allowable sound is not terminated halfway even if an operation is accepted while the reception allowable sound is being output."

Alternatively, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 22nd configuration G22, the 1st G acceptance state may be provided without being transformed into an acceptance state in which the premonition effect display is not executed. In such a configuration, when an acceptance state (5th G acceptance state) occurs in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units and the operation means emits light in the first light emission manner, even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance sound is being output, this will not be terminated midway (see Fig. 369 (e), (g), (k)). In contrast, when a reception allowance state occurs in which the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed to occur in units of "longer than a specified time" and the operating means emits light in the first light-emitting manner (1st G reception allowance state, 2nd G reception allowance state, 11th G reception allowance state), there are cases in which a reception allowance sound is output (1st G reception allowance state, 2nd G reception allowance state) and cases in which the reception allowance sound is not output (11th G reception allowance state).If an operation is accepted while the reception allowance sound is being output, this may trigger a mid-termination (similar to the premonition performance display being mid-termination) (see Figure 360 (k)), or cases in which it is not mid-termination (even though the premonition performance display is mid-termination) (see Figure 352 (k)). That is, in this case, when the premonition display is terminated and the reception permission sound is also terminated, it is possible to appropriately suggest the manner in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appeared, while when the premonition display is terminated but the reception permission sound is not terminated, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appeared, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Alternatively, when the acceptance acceptance state occurs, the acceptance acceptance sound may not necessarily be audibly output. For example, in a pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22, the 1st G acceptance acceptance state may be transformed into an acceptance acceptance state in which the premonition performance display is not executed, and both the 1st G acceptance acceptance state and the above-mentioned 11th G acceptance acceptance state may be provided.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 23rd configuration G23 is provided with the first G reception permission state according to the modified example (or the sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example), the second G reception permission state, and the fifth G reception permission state among the above-mentioned reception permission states, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means is permitted, a simulated image display imitating the operation means (e.g., operation button 410) can be displayed, and a background image that is displayed so as to be visible behind other image displays can be displayed, and in the reception permission state, the operation means emits a "first light emission mode (e.g., white The image display can be illuminated in one of a number of modes, including a "first light-emitting mode (e.g., a red-based color scheme)" and a "second light-emitting mode (e.g., a red-based color scheme)," and the model image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the reception-permitting state, and there are cases where the periodic change appears in a "predetermined time" unit (the fifth G reception-permitting state) and cases where the periodic change appears in a "longer than predetermined time" unit (the first G reception-permitting state according to the modified example (or the sixth G reception-permitting state according to the modified example) or the second G reception-permitting state). In this regard, when the model image display is displayed so that a periodic change appears in a "longer than predetermined time" unit and the operating means is illuminated in the "first light-emitting mode," while the operation reception of the operating means is permitted, the image display as the background image may be changed to an image display different from the image display that was displayed up until that point (see FIG. 355(d) and FIG. 375(d), etc.), and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 23rd configuration G23, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of a predetermined time and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode" (5th G reception permitted state), the image display as the background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display that was displayed until then while operation reception to the operation means is permitted (see Fig. 369 (d), (e), (g)). In contrast, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", while operation reception to the operation means is permitted, there are both cases where the image display as the background image is changed to an image display different from the image display that was displayed until then (see Fig. 355 (d), (e), (g) and Fig. 375 (d), (e), (g)), and where the image display as the background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display that was displayed until then (see Fig. 360 (d), (e), (g)). With this configuration, when light is emitted in the "first light emission mode," it is difficult to recognize whether the image display as the background image will change to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed while operation acceptance on the operating means is permitted. However, when the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in "predetermined time" units, it is easy to recognize that the image display as the background image will not change to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed, so it is possible to encourage operation acceptance without being aware of the possibility that such a background change may occur (without waiting for the timing for the background change to arrive).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 23rd configuration G23, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode" (second G reception permission state), the image display as the background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then while operation reception to the operation means is permitted (see Fig. 360 (d), (e), (g)). According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is difficult to recognize whether the image display as the background image will be changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then while operation reception to the operation means is permitted, but at that time, when the operation means emits light in the "second light emission mode", it is possible to recognize that the image display as the background image will not be changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then, so that it is possible to encourage operation reception without being aware of the possibility of such a background change occurring (without waiting for the timing for the background change to occur).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23, when a "specific image display (first background image HK-G1)" is displayed as the background image and an acceptance permission state occurs, there are two cases in which the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in a "first light emission mode" (see Figures 355 (d), (e), (g) and Figures 360 (d), (e), (g)), and the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in a "second light emission mode" (see Figures 360 (d), (e), (g)). According to this configuration, when the "specific image display (first background image HK-G1)" is displayed as the background image, while operation reception to the operating means is permitted, there is a possibility that the image display as the background image will be changed to an image display different from the image display (specific image display) that was displayed up until that point, but by checking the illumination state of the operating means, it is possible to appropriately indicate whether or not this is possible.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23, the acceptance allowance state in which no background change occurs may be configured to appear when an image display that cannot be displayed in an acceptance allowance state in which a background change occurs appears as the background image. Also, the acceptance allowance state in which no background change occurs may be configured to appear when an image display that cannot be displayed in an acceptance allowance state in which a background change occurs appears as the background image (for example, the fifth acceptance allowance state), and when an image display that can be displayed even in an acceptance allowance state in which a background change occurs (first background image HK-G1) appears as the background image (for example, the second acceptance allowance state).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-third configuration G23, the light emission in the operation means may be terminated based on the acceptance of an operation. In this regard, since the model image display is not made invisible at the time of termination but is made visible (see, for example, Figs. 360(e) and (g) and Fig. 369(e) and (g)), even if the model image display is made to continue to be displayed after the operation is accepted, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been accepted appropriately.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23, the premonition display suggesting that the reception-permitting state will occur may be executable to span the timing when the reception-permitting state occurs. In this regard, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light-emitting mode (for example, the fifth reception-permitting state), even if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, the premonition display is not made invisible as a result. In contrast, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light-emitting mode (for example, the second reception-permitting state), the premonition display is made invisible as a result of an operation being accepted while the premonition display is displayed. In this configuration, if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is being displayed, the periodic change in the mock image display can indicate whether or not the premonition display will be hidden as a result. This is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game when choosing whether to accept an operation while the premonition display is being displayed, or to accept an operation after the premonition display is hidden.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23, when a reception permissible state (2G reception permissible state) occurs in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the second light emission mode, the premonition effect display is always executed, but if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this triggers the premonition effect display to be made invisible, which is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the premonition effect obstructing the visibility of the operation-related effects.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23, the same pattern (specific premonition display ZET) can appear as the premonition performance display in a reception permission state (5th G reception permission state) in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission pattern", and in a reception permission state (2nd G reception permission state) in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission pattern. This configuration is expected to make it difficult to recognize which reception permission state will occur, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation part, but may be prepared as multiple operation parts including the specific operation part.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 24th configuration G24 is provided with the first G reception allowance state (or the first G reception allowance state according to the modified example, or the 11th G reception allowance state according to the modified example), the second G reception allowance state, and the fifth G reception allowance state among the reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, a model image display that imitates the operation means can be displayed, and when the model image display is made invisible, the model image display is difficult to view until it is made invisible. In addition, a "disappearance EF display (disappearance performance display)" can be displayed as an image display separate from the mock image display, and the mock image display can be displayed in a state in which acceptance is permitted so as to cause a periodic change to occur in any of a plurality of color schemes including a "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white))" and a "second color scheme (specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red))," and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to occur in "time units longer than the predetermined time." In this regard, whether the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (see Figures 352(g), 355(g), 360(g), and 393(g)), or whether the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (see Figure 360(g)), when the model image display is made non-displayable, a disappearance effect display can be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display (see Figure 360(h)), which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 24th configuration G24, when the Momo image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed so as to occur in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" (see Figures 352 (g), 355 (g), 360 (g), and 393 (g)), there are two cases: a reception allowance state of a type (2G reception allowance state) has occurred in which there is a possibility that a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" will be displayed as an image display separate from the Momo image display when the Momo image display is made non-displayable, and a reception allowance state of a type (1G reception allowance state (or 1G reception allowance state according to the modified example, or 11G reception allowance state according to the modified example)) in which there is no possibility that a disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display) will be displayed as an image display separate from the Momo image display when the Momo image display is made non-displayable. Furthermore, when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and its periodic change is displayed in units of "longer than a specified time" (see FIG. 360 (g)), when the model image display is made invisible, a type of reception allowance state (second G reception allowance state) in which there is a possibility that a "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" will be displayed as an image display separate from the model image display is always generated. According to this configuration, when the periodic change of the model image display is displayed so as to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", if the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", a state in which the type of acceptance permitting state in which the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" may be displayed is always occurring. However, if the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", it becomes difficult to recognize whether a state in which the type of acceptance permitting state in which the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" may be displayed or a state in which the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" may not be displayed is occurring. Therefore, it becomes more necessary to check the aspect of the model image display (color scheme, etc.) before the visibility of the model image display is deteriorated by the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)", and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fourth configuration G24, even if the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", when the Moji image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in "predetermined time" units, when the Moji image display is made invisible, a state of acceptance for a type in which a "disappearing effect display" may be displayed as an image display separate from the Moji image display is always occurring (see FIG. 369 (g)). With this configuration, even if the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", by checking the periodic changes in the Moji image display, it may be possible to recognize that a state of acceptance for a type in which a "disappearing EF display (disappearing effect display)" may be displayed is occurring, which is expected to maintain a favorable interest in the game.

The type of reception-permitting state refers to the type of post-reception display, of which there are multiple types, and even if there is only one type, the post-reception display corresponding to the reception-permitting state may be executed in one of multiple modes (high expectation mode, low expectation mode, etc.). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 24th configuration G24, when the post-reception display is executed in the high expectation mode, the disappearance performance display is displayed, but even if the disappearance performance display is not displayed when the post-reception display is executed in the low expectation mode, it can be said that "there is always a situation in which a type of reception-permitting state in which a 'disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)' as an image display different from the mock image display may be displayed" is occurring.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 24th configuration G24, the "disappearance EF display (disappearance performance display)" may be configured to be displayed as the same image display when an operation is accepted while the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change of the Moji image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the Moji image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic change of the Moji image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (for example, see Figures 360 (g) and (h) and 362 (d)). With this configuration, once an operation is accepted, it becomes difficult to recognize in which color scheme the Moji image display was, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 24th configuration G24, the "disappearance EF display (disappearance performance display)" is,
When an operation is accepted while the mock image display is being displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change in the mock image display is being displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", and when the mock image display is being displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic change in the mock image display is being displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the same image display is displayed (for example, see Figs. 360(g) and (h) and Fig. 362(d)),
When an operation is accepted while the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (see Figs. 390(g) and (h) and 392(h)), and when an operation is accepted while the mock image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (see, for example, Figs. 360(g) and (h) and 362(d)), a different image display is displayed,
According to such a configuration, it becomes even more difficult to recognize in which light emission mode the operating means is emitting light, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Note that "when an operation is accepted when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time"" and "when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time"" may refer to situations in which different types of acceptance allowance states are occurring. Furthermore, in this case, the "disappearing EF display (disappearing performance display)" may be displayed as the same image display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 24th configuration G24, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be prepared as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 24th configuration G24, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 24th configuration G24 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 25th configuration G25 is provided with the first G reception allowance state, the second G reception allowance state, the fifth G reception allowance state, the sixth G reception allowance state (or the sixth G reception allowance state according to a modified example), and the eleventh G reception allowance state among the reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, a mock image display imitating the operation means can be displayed, and the operation means can be brought into a state in which operation is permitted, or the operation means can be brought into a state in which operation is permitted. An acceptance permission sound can be output to indicate that operation is permitted, and the mock image display can be displayed in the acceptance permission state so as to show periodic changes in any of a number of color schemes including a "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white))" and a "second color scheme (specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red))," and the periodic changes may be displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units or may be displayed to appear in "times longer than the predetermined time" units. In this regard, when an acceptance permission state occurs, whether the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" (see FIG. 369(g)) or in units of "longer than the predetermined time" (see FIG. 352(g), FIG. 360(g), FIG. 372(g), FIG. 375(g), FIG. 390(g)), an acceptance permission sound can be output (see FIG. 352(g), FIG. 360(k), FIG. 369(k)), which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 25th configuration G25, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" and the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", a reception permission sound is always output when a reception permission state occurs (see Figs. 369(g) and (k)). When the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", there are both cases where a reception permission sound is output when a reception permission state occurs (see Figs. 352(g) and (k) and Figs. 360(g) and (k)) and where a reception permission sound is not output (see Figs. 372(g), 375(g), and 390(g)). With this configuration, when the acceptance sound is output, the periodic change in the mock image display will occur either in units of a "predetermined time" or in units of a "longer than the predetermined time," making it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 25th configuration G25, when the acceptance permission sound is not output, the periodic change in the model image display is not displayed in "predetermined time" units (see Fig. 372(g), Fig. 375(g), Fig. 390(g)). Also, the model image display is not displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" (see Fig. 372(g), Fig. 375(g), Fig. 390(g)). With this configuration, when the acceptance permission sound is not output, it is difficult to recognize that operation acceptance has become permitted, and the player can concentrate only on the acceptance of operations without worrying about various presentation modes, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game. In this case, if at least one of the conditions is met, that is, the periodic change in the mock image display occurs in "predetermined time" units or the mock image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", the reception permission sound will always be output when the reception permission state occurs, so that forgetting to operate the device is less likely to occur when the periodic change in the mock image display occurs in "predetermined time" units or when the mock image display is displayed in the "second color scheme".

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 25th configuration G25, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and its periodic change is displayed in "predetermined time" units (5th G reception permission state), even if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound is not terminated midway (see Figures 369 (g) and (k)). In this regard, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change appears in units of "longer than a predetermined time", there are both cases where the game is terminated midway when an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output (see Fig. 360 (g) and (k)) and cases where the game is not terminated midway (see Fig. 352 (g) and (k)). Therefore, even when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", when the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of "predetermined time", it can be suitably suggested that the game will not be terminated midway even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it becomes difficult to recognize whether the game is terminated midway when an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, so it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained because it becomes difficult to recognize whether the operation has been accepted properly.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 25th configuration G25, when the replica image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, this is triggered to always end the reception permission sound midway (see Figures 360 (g) and (k)). In other words, in this case, even if the periodic change in the replica image display occurs in units of "longer than a predetermined time", if the replica image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)", it is possible to suitably indicate that if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, this is triggered to end the reception permission sound midway.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 25th configuration G25, the premonition effect display indicating that a reception-permitting state will occur can be executed so as to span the timing when the reception-permitting state occurs (first G reception-permitting state, second G reception-permitting state, fifth G reception-permitting state). In this regard, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and its periodic change is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units, even if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this is not used as a trigger to turn the premonition effect display into a hidden state (see Figs. 369(f) and (g)), and when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and its periodic change is displayed to appear in "times longer than the predetermined time", if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this is used as a trigger to turn the premonition effect display into a hidden state (see Figs. 352(f) and (g) and Figs. 360(f) and (g)). With this configuration, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)," it is possible to suggest in what form the periodic change in the model image display has occurred based on whether or not the display is made invisible when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is being displayed.

As mentioned above, when the second G reception allowable state occurs, the Mo image display may be displayed in any of a number of modes including a predetermined color scheme, a specific color scheme, and a special color scheme (for example, any of a predetermined color scheme, a specific color scheme, and a special color scheme), and in this case, the special color scheme is used only in the second G reception allowable state among the reception allowable states described above. In this regard, when the configuration according to the modified example is adopted as the pachinko machine 1 according to the 25th configuration G25, when the Mo image display is displayed in the "third color scheme (special color scheme)", if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this will always trigger the display to be hidden, so that when the Mo image display is displayed in the "third color scheme (special color scheme)", it will be possible to quickly recognize that the premonition effect display will be hidden as a result of an operation acceptance, without having to check the periodic change of the Mo image display.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 25th configuration G25, the premonition performance display can be displayed in the same manner (specific premonition display ZET) when the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and its periodic changes are displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and when the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and its periodic changes are displayed to appear in units of "times longer than a predetermined time" (see Figures 352 (f), 360 (f), and 369 (f)).Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize which periodic change is appearing in the Moji image display, and the sense of tension can be maintained in an optimal manner. However, as a mode of premonition display, it is also possible to provide a mode that can appear when the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", but cannot appear when the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 25th configuration G25, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation part, but may be prepared as multiple operation parts including the specific operation part.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 25th configuration G25, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 25th configuration G25 can be displayed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 26th configuration G26 is provided with a first G reception allowance state, a second G reception allowance state, and a fifth G reception allowance state according to a modified example among the reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, a model image display modeling the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be displayed, and in the reception allowance state, the model image display can be displayed so as to show periodic changes in any of a number of color schemes including a "first color scheme (a predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white))" and a "second color scheme (a specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red))," and there are cases in which the periodic changes are displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed to appear in "time units longer than the predetermined time." In this regard, in the acceptance state, the mock image display may be hidden while acceptance of operations on the operating means is permitted (see Fig. 355 (c) and (g)), which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the acceptance state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 26th configuration G26, when the periodic change in the Mo image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the Mo image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" (5th G reception allowable state), in the reception allowable state, the Mo image display is not made invisible while reception of operations on the operation means is permitted (see Figs. 370(c) and (g)). In addition, when the periodic change in the Mo image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the Mo image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" (1st G reception allowable state and 2nd G reception allowable state according to the modified example), in the reception allowable state, there are both cases where the Mo image display is made invisible while reception of operations on the operation means is permitted (see Figs. 355(c) and (g)), and where the Mo image display is not made invisible (see Figs. 361(c) and (g)). According to this configuration, when the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", if the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time", the mock image display will not be hidden while operations on the operating means are permitted; however, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "times longer than a predetermined time", it becomes difficult to recognize whether the mock image display will be hidden while operations on the operating means are permitted, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when operations on the operating means are permitted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 26th configuration G26, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)", the model image display will not be hidden while operation acceptance is permitted for the operation means in the acceptance permitted state. With this configuration, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", by checking the color scheme of the model image display, it may be possible to recognize that the model image display will not be hidden while operation acceptance is permitted for the operation means, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 26th configuration G26, the premonition display indicating that a reception-permitting state will occur can be executed so as to span the timing when the reception-permitting state occurs. In this regard, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units, even if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, the premonition display is not made invisible (see Fig. 369 (f) and (g)), and when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to appear in "times longer than the predetermined time", the premonition display is made invisible when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed (see Fig. 356 (f) and (g) and Fig. 360 (f) and (g)). With this configuration, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)," it is possible to suggest in what form the periodic change in the model image display has occurred based on whether or not the display is made invisible when an operation is accepted while the premonition display is being displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 26th configuration G26, when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time", if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this triggers the display to be hidden (see Figures 360 (f) and (g)). Therefore, when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)", it is possible to suggest that the premonition effect display will be hidden upon acceptance of an operation, even without checking the periodic change (which may take time to check or may be difficult to reliably distinguish between the length and shortness of the periodic change).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 26th configuration G26, the premonition effect display can be displayed in the same manner (specific premonition display ZET) when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units, and when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to appear in "longer than predetermined time" units (see Fig. 355 (f), Fig. 360 (f), Fig. 369 (f)). This makes it difficult to recognize which periodic change will appear in the model image display, and makes it possible to maintain a good sense of tension. However, as a mode of the premonition effect display, a mode may be further provided that can appear when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to appear in "longer than predetermined time" units, but cannot appear when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 26th configuration G26, when in the acceptance-permitted state, while the acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted, the model image display is made invisible (see Figs. 355 (c) and (g)), the light emission mode of the operation means is made to continue without terminating, so that it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game caused by the model image display being made invisible is suppressed.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 26th configuration G26, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the above-mentioned 26th configuration G26, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 26th configuration G26 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 27th configuration G27 includes the 2nd G reception allowable state, the 5th G reception allowable state, and the 11th G reception allowable state (or the 1st G reception allowable state in which the premonition effect display is not executed) among the reception allowable states described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception allowable state occurs, the premonition effect display may be executed or not executed. When the reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, a model image display modeling the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be displayed, and the model image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in any of a plurality of color schemes including a "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white))" and a "second color scheme (specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red))" in the reception allowable state, and the periodic change may be displayed so that it appears in "predetermined time" units or the periodic change may be displayed so that it appears in "time longer than the predetermined time" units. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the 22nd configuration G22, whether the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic changes are displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units, or the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic changes are displayed to occur in "times longer than the predetermined time", the premonition effect display can be displayed across the timing when the acceptance acceptance state occurs, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 27th configuration G27, in the reception-permitting state in which the periodic change in the Moji image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)," if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this triggers the premonition effect display to be made invisible (see Figs. 369(e), (f), (g)). In addition, in the reception-permitting state in which the periodic change in the Moji image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)," if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this triggers the premonition effect display to be made invisible (see Figs. 360(e), (f), (g)). With this configuration, if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, it is possible to indicate through the periodic change in the mock image display whether or not the premonition display will be hidden as a result of this. This is expected to maintain the interest in the game when choosing whether to accept an operation while the premonition display is displayed, or to accept an operation after the premonition display is hidden.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 27th configuration G27, when the periodic change in the Moji image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" and the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and an acceptance allowance state occurs (5th G acceptance allowance state), the premonition effect display is always executed. In addition, when the periodic change in the Moji image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the acceptance allowance state occurs in which the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", both the premonition effect display is executed (2nd G acceptance allowance state) and the premonition effect display is not executed (11th G acceptance allowance state). According to this configuration, when the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", both the premonition effect display is executed and the premonition effect display is not executed, so that it can be expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner. However, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)," if the model image display is displayed so that periodic changes occur in "predetermined time" units, the premonition display will always be executed, making it unlikely for the player to forget to operate the device, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, the same form of premonition display (specific premonition display ZET) can appear in the reception permission state (5G reception permission state) in which the periodic change in the Moji image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" and the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and in the reception permission state in which the periodic change in the Moji image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". This configuration is expected to make it difficult to recognize which form of reception permission state will occur, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

When the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a specified time" and an acceptance permission state (second G acceptance permission state) occurs in which the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)," the premonition effect display is always executed, but if an operation is accepted while the premonition effect display is displayed, this triggers the premonition effect display to be made invisible, which is expected to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the premonition effect blocking the visibility of the operation-related effects.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 27th configuration G27, the 11thG acceptance permission state may be modified to "an acceptance permission state in which the acceptance permission sound can be output, but in which the output of the acceptance permission sound is not terminated even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output". In such a configuration, when an acceptance permission state (5thG acceptance permission state) occurs in which the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in "predetermined time" units, the operation is not terminated even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output (see Figs. 369 (e), (g), (k)). In contrast, when an acceptance permission state occurs in which the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (2G acceptance permission state, modified 11G acceptance permission state), if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this may trigger termination (see FIG. 360(k)), or it may not be terminated (modified 11G acceptance permission state). That is, in this case, it is possible to appropriately suggest in what manner the periodic change in the model image display appeared when the acceptance permission sound is terminated, while making it difficult to recognize in what manner the periodic change in the model image display appeared when the acceptance permission sound is not terminated, which is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 27th configuration G27, the 1G reception permission state may be modified to a reception permission state in which the premonition display is not executed, and then provided in place of the 11G reception permission state. Even with this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as when the 11G reception permission state is modified to "a reception permission state in which the reception permission sound can be output, but in which the output of the reception permission sound is not terminated halfway even if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output."

Alternatively, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 27th configuration G27, the 1st G acceptance state may be provided without being transformed into an acceptance state in which the premonition effect display is not executed. In such a configuration, when an acceptance state (5th G acceptance state) occurs in which the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in "predetermined time" units, even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance sound is being output, this will not be terminated midway (see Fig. 369 (e), (g), (k)). In contrast, when an acceptance permission state occurs in which the mock image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and its periodic changes are displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (1st G acceptance permission state, 2nd G acceptance permission state, 11th G acceptance permission state), there are cases in which an acceptance permission sound is output (1st G acceptance permission state, 2nd G acceptance permission state) and cases in which the acceptance permission sound is not output (11th G acceptance permission state).If an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this may trigger an abrupt termination (similar to the premonition performance display being abruptly terminated) (see Figure 360 (k)), or cases in which it is not abruptly terminated (even though the premonition performance display is abruptly terminated) (see Figure 352 (k)). That is, in this case, when the premonition display is terminated and the reception permission sound is also terminated, it is possible to appropriately suggest the manner in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appeared, while when the premonition display is terminated but the reception permission sound is not terminated, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appeared, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Alternatively, when the acceptance acceptance state occurs, the acceptance acceptance sound may not necessarily be audibly output. For example, in a pachinko machine 1 according to the 27th configuration G27, the 1st G acceptance acceptance state may be transformed into an acceptance acceptance state in which the premonition performance display is not executed, and both the 1st G acceptance acceptance state and the 11th G acceptance acceptance state may be provided.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 27th configuration G27, the operation means operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 27th configuration G27, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 27th configuration G27 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 28th configuration G28 is provided with a first G reception allowance state according to a modified example (or a sixth G reception allowance state according to a modified example), a second G reception allowance state, and a fifth G reception allowance state among the reception allowance states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, a model image display modeling the operation means can be displayed, and a background image that is displayed so as to be seen behind other image displays can be displayed, and in the reception allowance state, the model image display can be displayed so as to show periodic changes in any of a number of color schemes including a "first color scheme (a predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white))" and a "second color scheme (a specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red))," and there are cases in which the periodic changes are displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed to appear in "time units longer than the predetermined time." In this regard, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change occurs in units of "longer than a predetermined time", while operation acceptance via the operating means is permitted, the image display as the background image may be changed to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed (see Figure 355 (d), Figure 375 (d), etc.), which is expected to maintain interest in the game in a favorable manner.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 28th configuration G28, when the periodic change in the Moji image display is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units and the Moji image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" (5th G reception allowance state), while operation reception to the operating means is allowed, the image display as the background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display that had been displayed up until that point (see Figures 369 (d), (e), (g)). In contrast to this, when the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed to occur in units of "a time longer than a specified time" and the imitation image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (specified color scheme)", while operation acceptance via the operating means is permitted, there are both cases in which the image display as the background image is changed to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed (see Figures 355(d), (e), (g) and Figures 375(d), (e), (g)), and cases in which the image display as the background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed (see Figures 360(d), (e), (g)). According to this configuration, when the imitation image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)," it is difficult to recognize whether the image display as the background image will change to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed while operation acceptance on the operating means is permitted. However, when the imitation image display is made to change periodically in "predetermined time" units, it is possible to recognize that the image display as the background image will not change to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed, and therefore it is possible to encourage operation acceptance without being aware of the possibility that such a background change may occur (without waiting for the timing for the background change to arrive).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 28th configuration G28, even if the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)", the image display as the background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then while operation acceptance to the operation means is permitted (see Fig. 360 (d), (e), (g)). According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is difficult to recognize whether the image display as the background image is changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then while operation acceptance to the operation means is permitted, but at that time, when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)", it is possible to recognize that the image display as the background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display displayed up until then, so that it is possible to encourage operation acceptance without being aware of the possibility of such a background change occurring (without waiting for the timing for the background change to occur).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 28th configuration G28, when a "specific image display (first background image HK-G1)" is displayed as the background image and an acceptance permission state occurs, there are two cases where the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" (see Figures 355 (d), (e), (g) and Figures 360 (d), (e), (g)), and where the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specified color scheme)" (see Figures 360 (d), (e), (g)). According to this configuration, when the "specific image display (first background image HK-G1)" is displayed as the background image, while operation reception to the operating means is permitted, there is a possibility that the image display as the background image will be changed to an image display different from the image display (specific image display) that was displayed up until that point, but by checking the state of the mock image display, it is possible to appropriately indicate whether or not this is possible.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 28th configuration G28, the acceptance allowance state in which no background change occurs may be configured to appear when an image display that cannot be displayed in an acceptance allowance state in which a background change occurs appears as the background image. Also, the acceptance allowance state in which no background change occurs may be configured to appear when an image display that cannot be displayed in an acceptance allowance state in which a background change occurs appears as the background image (for example, the fifth acceptance allowance state), and when an image display that can be displayed even in an acceptance allowance state in which a background change occurs (first background image HK-G1) appears as the background image (for example, the second acceptance allowance state).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 28th configuration G28, the light emission in the operation means may be terminated based on the acceptance of an operation. In this regard, since the model image display is not made invisible at the time of termination but is made visible (see, for example, Figs. 360(e) and (g) and Fig. 369(e) and (g)), even if the model image display is made to continue to be displayed after the operation is accepted, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been accepted appropriately.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 28th configuration G28, the premonition display suggesting that the reception-permitting state will occur may be executable to span the timing when the reception-permitting state occurs. In this regard, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to appear in "predetermined time" units (5G reception-permitting state), even if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is displayed, the premonition display is not made invisible as a result. In contrast, when the model image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed to appear in "longer than predetermined time" units (for example, the second reception-permitting state), the premonition display is made invisible as a result of an operation being accepted while the premonition display is displayed. In this configuration, if an operation is accepted while the premonition display is being displayed, the periodic change in the mock image display can indicate whether or not the premonition display will be hidden as a result. This is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game when choosing whether to accept an operation while the premonition display is being displayed, or to accept an operation after the premonition display is hidden.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned 28th configuration G28, when the model image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed so as to occur in units of "longer than a specified time" (second reception-permitted state), the premonition effect display is always executed, but if an operation is received while the premonition effect display is displayed, this triggers the premonition effect display to be made invisible, which is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the premonition effect obstructing the visibility of the operation-related effects.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 28th configuration G28, when the Mo image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic changes are displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (5G reception allowable state), and when the Mo image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic changes are displayed to appear in units of "longer than the predetermined time" (2nd reception allowable state), the same type of premonition performance display (specific premonition display ZET) can appear. This configuration makes it difficult to recognize which type of reception allowable state will occur, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 28th configuration G28, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation part, but may be prepared as multiple operation parts including the specific operation part.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 28th configuration G28, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 28th configuration G28 can be displayed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 29th configuration G29 includes the 7th G reception allowable state, the 9th G reception allowable state, and the 11th G reception allowable state among the reception allowable states described above, the pachinko machine 1 can generate a multiple reception allowable state in which reception of an operation to a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" is allowed multiple times, and when an operation to a "specific operation unit" is received in the multiple reception allowable state, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed. Also, the pachinko machine 1 can display a model image display that models the "specific operation unit", and in the multiple reception allowable state, the model image display may be displayed so that a periodic change appears in "predetermined time" units (7th G reception allowable state), may be displayed so that the periodic change appears in "times longer than the predetermined time" units (11th G reception allowable state), or may not be displayed so that the periodic change appears (9th G reception allowable state). In this regard, the multiple reception allowance state may occur as a "first type of multiple reception allowance state" in which the multiple reception allowance state may be terminated when an operation is received for a "specific operation unit" (see FIGS. 378(b) and (c)), or as a "second type of multiple reception allowance state" in which the multiple reception allowance state may not be terminated when an operation is received for a "specific operation unit" (see FIGS. 384(b) and (c) and FIGS. 390(b) and (c)). This is expected to maintain a sense of tension when in the multiple reception allowance state.

In the 9G reception permission state according to the above-mentioned example, the imitation image display itself is not displayed when operation reception is permitted, thereby realizing a "reception permission state in which periodic changes are not displayed to appear." However, instead of this, the imitation image display may be displayed, but in such a way that periodic changes are not displayed (static display), thereby realizing a "reception permission state in which periodic changes are not displayed to appear."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 29th configuration G29, when the model image display is not displayed so as to show a periodic change (9th G reception-permitted state), the multiple reception-permitted state does not occur as the above-mentioned "first type of multiple operation-permitted state (possibility of being terminated before the set time has elapsed)" but always occurs as the "second type of multiple operation-permitted state (possibility of being terminated before the set time has elapsed)". With this configuration, when the model image display is not displayed so as to show a periodic change, it is possible to recognize that the multiple reception-permitted state will not end no matter how many operations are performed, so it is expected that the game will be provided without the tension of "having to operate multiple times until the multiple reception-permitted state ends".

In addition, when the mock image display is displayed so that a periodic change in the mock image display appears, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the multiple reception permission state is a "first type multiple reception permission state" or a "second type multiple reception permission state," which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Even if the model image display is displayed to show periodic changes, if the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the multiple acceptance allowance state may always occur as a "second type of multiple operation allowance state (no possibility of being terminated before the set time has elapsed)" rather than as a "first type of multiple operation allowance state (no possibility of being terminated before the set time has elapsed)". With this configuration, if the model image display is displayed to show periodic changes in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is possible to recognize that the multiple acceptance allowance state will not end no matter how many operations are performed, so it is expected that the game will be provided without the tension of "having to operate multiple times until the multiple acceptance allowance state ends".

In addition, when the periodic change is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units, there is at least a possibility that the multiple reception permission state occurs as a "first type of multiple operation permission state (possibility of being terminated before the set time has elapsed)" (see Fig. 378 (b) and (c)). In this regard, if the pachinko machine 1 according to the above 28th configuration G28 is further provided with an 8G reception permission state, the multiple reception permission state will occur in both a "first type of multiple operation permission state (possibility of being terminated before the set time has elapsed)" and a "second type of multiple operation permission state (no possibility of being terminated before the set time has elapsed)", and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 29th configuration G29, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 29th configuration G29, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 29th configuration G29 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 30th configuration G30 includes the 7th G reception allowable state (or the 8th G reception allowable state), the 9th G reception allowable state, and the 11th G reception allowable state among the reception allowable states described above, the pachinko machine 1 can generate a multiple reception allowable state in which reception of an operation to a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" is allowed multiple times, and when an operation to a "specific operation unit" is received in the multiple reception allowable state, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed. Also, the pachinko machine 1 can display a model image display that imitates the "specific operation unit", and in the multiple reception allowable state, the model image display may be displayed so that a periodic change appears (7th G reception allowable state, 8th G reception allowable state, 11th G reception allowable state) or may not be displayed so that the periodic change appears (9th G reception allowable state). In this regard, the multiple reception permitted state is designed so that there are cases where the post-reception display is displayed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 378(b) and (c), 381(b) and (c), and 384(b) and (c)), and cases where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the specific operation unit is maintained in an operated state (see Figs. 390(b) and (c)), and so it is expected that the sense of tension when in the multiple reception permitted state will be appropriately maintained.

In the 9G reception permission state according to the above-mentioned example, the imitation image display itself is not displayed when operation reception is permitted, thereby realizing a "reception permission state in which periodic changes are not displayed to appear." However, instead of this, the imitation image display may be displayed, but in such a way that periodic changes are not displayed (static display), thereby realizing a "reception permission state in which periodic changes are not displayed to appear."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 30th configuration G30, when the model image display is not displayed in a way that causes a periodic change to occur (the 9th G reception-permitted state), the post-reception display is always displayed multiple times simply by keeping the "specific operation unit" in an operated state. With this configuration, when the model image display is not displayed in a way that causes a periodic change to occur, the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is always activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension while suppressing a decline in interest in the game when the display is not performed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 30th configuration G30, in the "multiple reception permitted state" in which the model image display is displayed to show periodic changes, there are two cases in which the post-reception display is displayed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" in an operated state (see Figs. 378(b) and (c) and Figs. 381(b) and (c)), and there are also cases in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state (see Figs. 390(b) and (c)). With this configuration, when the model image display is displayed to show periodic changes, it is difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 30th configuration G30, among the "multiple reception allowable states" in which the model image display is displayed so as to show periodic changes, the "multiple reception allowable states (11th G reception allowable states)" in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is kept in an operated state are displayed so that the periodic changes in the model image display appear in longer time units than the "multiple reception allowable states (7th G reception allowable states, 8th G reception allowable states)" in which the post-reception display is always executed multiple times even if the "specific operation unit" is kept in an operated state (see Fig. 378 (g), Fig. 381 (g), Fig. 390 (g)). According to such a configuration, since it is necessary to take time to determine whether the periodic changes are fast or slow, it becomes possible to make it impossible to immediately recognize whether the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled or not after the model image display is displayed. This will encourage players to try out the auto-tap function until they can determine whether the periodic changes are fast or slow, which is expected to help maintain an appropriate level of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 30th configuration G30, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in short (predetermined) time units (7th G reception permitted state, 8th G reception permitted state), the so-called auto rapid-fire function is always activated, which increases the importance of determining whether the periodic change is fast or slow, and is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 30th configuration G30, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, to realize the 30th configuration G30, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted, it is sufficient that the 30th configuration G30 described above can be displayed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 31st configuration G31 is provided with the 2nd G reception allowable state, the 8th G reception allowable state (or the 7th G reception allowable state), and the 11th G reception allowable state among the reception allowable states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation for a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" is permitted, a model image display modeling the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and the reception allowable state may occur as a "single reception allowable state" in which reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted only once (2nd G reception allowable state), or as a "multiple reception allowable state" in which reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times (8th G reception allowable state, 11th G reception allowable state), and the model image display may be displayed in a "specific color scheme (e.g., red as the base color)" in the reception allowable state. The periodic change can be displayed in any of a number of color schemes, including a color scheme that is "a color scheme that is set as "a predetermined color scheme," and there are cases where the periodic change is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units and cases where the periodic change is displayed to occur in "longer than a predetermined time" units. In this regard, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units, the reception permission state can occur as the above-mentioned "multiple reception permission state" (see Fig. 381 (b), (c), (g)), and when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in "longer than a predetermined time" units, the reception permission state can occur as the above-mentioned "single reception permission state" (see Fig. 360 (b), (c), (g)), which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (8th G reception allowable state), the reception allowable state does not occur as the above-mentioned "single reception allowable state" but always occurs as the "multiple reception allowable state" (see Fig. 381 (b) and (g)). In addition, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception allowable state, 11th G reception allowable state), the reception allowable state occurs either as the above-mentioned "single reception allowable state" (see Fig. 360 (b) and (g)) or as the "multiple reception allowable state" (see Fig. 390 (b) and (g)). According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", it is possible to recognize that the reception allowable state occurs as the "multiple reception allowable state", so it is possible to encourage the user to perform multiple operations from a relatively early stage. In contrast, if the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in units of "longer than a specified time," it will be difficult to tell whether the reception permission state is a "single reception permission state" or a "multiple reception permission state," which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in "predetermined time" units, the model image display is not displayed in a "specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme with a red base color)." In other words, in this case, when the model image display is displayed in a "specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme with a red base color)," it becomes possible to recognize that the reception permission state has occurred as the above-mentioned "one-time reception permission state" without checking the periodic change in the model image display, and therefore interest in the game can be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the Moji image display is displayed in a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)", the periodic change in the Moji image display may be displayed in units of "predetermined time" (8th G reception allowed state) or in units of "longer than the predetermined time", and the so-called auto rapid-fire function may be enabled (2nd G reception allowed state) or not enabled (11th G reception allowed state), so that the sense of tension can be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" (when a multiple reception allowance state occurs), the model image display can be displayed in a "specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme with a red base color)" (see FIG. 381(g)). In this regard, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (when it is difficult to recognize whether a single reception allowance state or a multiple reception allowance state occurs), if the model image display is displayed in a "specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme with a red base color)" (see FIG. 360(g)), the reception allowance state does not occur as the "multiple reception allowance state" but always occurs as the "single reception allowance state". That is, as mentioned above, when the imitation image display is displayed so that the periodic change occurs in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is basically difficult to recognize whether the reception permission state is a "single reception permission state" or a "multiple reception permission state". However, in this case, when the imitation image display is displayed in a "specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" (which can also be used in the multiple reception permission state), the "multiple reception permission state" never occurs and the "single reception permission state" always occurs, which is expected to add a dramatic interest and maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", a message related to the operation reception for the "specific operation unit" is always displayed (such as "random hit" shown in Figs. 382(c) and (d)), but when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", a message related to the operation reception for the specific operation unit may be displayed (such as "one hit" shown in Figs. 362(c) and (d) or "meteorite" shown in Figs. 391(c) and (d)) or the message may not be displayed. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by further providing a first G reception allowance state as the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, and by preventing the above message display in the first G reception allowance state (by modifying so as not to display "push" shown in Figs. 354(b) and (c)). With this configuration, when no message is displayed, it is possible to preferably indicate that only one operation is permitted (this always occurs as a state where one operation is permitted), and it is also possible to ensure that a message is displayed when multiple operations are permitted, which is expected to reduce the likelihood of forgetting to perform an operation or delaying the start of an operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the message is displayed in a state where the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the state where the reception is permitted may occur either as the "multiple reception permitted state" (see Figures 390 to 392) or as the "single reception permitted state" (see Figures 360 to 362), so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, the message display ("meteorite" shown in Fig. 391 (c) and (d)) displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state" in which the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" is in a manner that is not displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state" in which the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" (see Fig. 382 (c) and (d)), so that the length of the periodic change in the replica image display can be inferred through the manner of this message.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, in the "multiple reception permitted state (8th G reception permitted state)" in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time", the message display may be displayed in one of a number of different modes. However, in this case, it is preferable that none of these modes is displayed as the message display in the "multiple reception permitted state (11th G reception permitted state)" in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 31st configuration G31, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 31st configuration G31, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 31st configuration G31 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 32nd configuration G32 is provided with a 2G reception allowable state, an 8G reception allowable state (or a 7G reception allowable state), and an 11G reception allowable state among the reception allowable states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation for a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" is permitted, a mock image display modeling the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and a reception allowable sound can be output indicating that the "specific operation unit" has entered a state in which operation is permitted, or that the "specific operation unit" has entered a state in which operation is permitted, and the reception allowable state can occur as a "single reception allowable state" in which reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted only once (2G reception allowable state), or as a "multiple reception allowable state" in which reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times (8G reception allowable state, 11G reception allowable state). In addition, the mock image display can be displayed so that periodic changes occur in the reception allowance state, and there are cases where the periodic changes are displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" (8th G reception allowance state) and cases where the periodic changes are displayed to occur in units of "times longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception allowance state, 11th G reception allowance state).When the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time", the reception allowance state can occur as a "multiple reception allowance state" (see Figures 381 (b) to (c) and (g)), and when the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed to occur in units of "times longer than a predetermined time", the reception allowance state can occur as the above-mentioned "single reception allowance state" (see Figures 360 (b) to (c) and (g)). In this regard, when an acceptance permission state occurs, whether the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of a "predetermined time" or in units of a "longer time than the predetermined time," an acceptance permission sound can be output, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, when the periodic change in the Mochi image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (8th G reception allowable state), the reception allowable state does not occur as a "single reception allowable state" but always occurs as a "multiple reception allowable state" (see Figs. 381(b), (c), (g)). In addition, when the periodic change in the Mochi image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception allowable state, 11th G reception allowable state), the reception allowable state may occur as a "single reception allowable state" (see Figs. 360(b), (c), (g)) or as a "multiple reception allowable state" (see Figs. 390(b), (c), (g)). With this configuration, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time", it is possible to recognize that the reception permission state will occur as a "multiple reception permission state", and it is therefore possible to encourage multiple operations from a relatively early stage. In contrast, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is difficult to recognize whether the reception permission state will occur as a "single reception permission state" or a "multiple reception permission state", which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (when the multiple reception allowance state occurs), the reception allowance sound can be output in a "specific mode (e.g., specific mode B)" (see FIG. 381(k)). In this regard, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (when it is difficult to recognize whether the single reception allowance state or the multiple reception allowance state occurs), if the reception allowance sound is output in a "specific mode (e.g., specific mode B)" (see FIG. 360(k)), the reception allowance state does not occur as the "multiple reception allowance state" but always occurs as the "single reception allowance state". In other words, as described above, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is basically difficult to recognize whether the reception allowance state occurs as a "single reception allowance state" or a "multiple reception allowance state". However, in this case, when the reception permission sound is output in a "specific manner" (which can also be used in the multiple reception permission state), the "multiple reception permission state" never occurs, and the "single reception permission state" always occurs, which is expected to add a touch of dramaturgy and maintain a good sense of tension.

In the above-mentioned "11th G reception allowable state," the reception allowable sound itself is not output, thereby realizing a configuration in which the reception allowable sound is not output in a "specific manner." However, instead, the reception allowable sound may be output, but only in a manner different from the "specific manner," thereby realizing the configuration.

In addition, in both the above-mentioned "2G reception allowable state" and "8G reception allowable state (or 7G reception allowable state)," the reception allowable sound can be output in either normal mode A or specific mode B. However, the reception allowable sound related to the "2G reception allowable state" and the "8G reception allowable state (or 7G reception allowable state)" that is common (the same) to each other may be only specific mode B, and the normal modes may be output as different sounds. Alternatively, the reception allowable sound related to the "2G reception allowable state" and the "8G reception allowable state (or 7G reception allowable state)" that is common (the same) to each other may be only normal mode A, and the specific modes may be output as different sounds. With this configuration, depending on which reception allowable sound is output, there are cases where it is possible to recognize whether the "single reception allowable state" or the "multiple reception allowable state" is occurring, and cases where it is difficult to recognize whether the "single reception allowable state" or the "multiple reception allowable state" is occurring, so that the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", a message related to the operation reception for the "specific operation unit" is always displayed (such as "random hit" shown in Figs. 382(c) and (d)), but when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", a message related to the operation reception for the specific operation unit may be displayed (such as "one hit" shown in Figs. 362(c) and (d) or "meteorite" shown in Figs. 391(c) and (d)) or the message may not be displayed. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by further providing a first G reception allowance state as the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, and by preventing the above message display in the first G reception allowance state (by modifying so as not to display "push" shown in Figs. 354(b) and (c)). With this configuration, when no message is displayed, it is possible to preferably indicate that only one operation is permitted (this always occurs as a state where one operation is permitted), and it is also possible to ensure that a message is displayed when multiple operations are permitted, which is expected to reduce the likelihood of forgetting to perform an operation or delaying the start of an operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, when the message is displayed in a state where the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the state where the reception is permitted may occur either as the "multiple reception permitted state" (see Figures 390 to 392) or as the "single reception permitted state" (see Figures 360 to 362), so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, the message display ("meteorite" shown in Fig. 391 (c) and (d)) displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state" in which the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" is in a manner that is not displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state" in which the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" (see Fig. 382 (c) and (d)), so that the length of the periodic change in the replica image display can be inferred through the manner of this message.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, in the "multiple reception permitted state (8th G reception permitted state)" in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time", the message display may be displayed in one of multiple modes. However, in this case, it is preferable that none of these modes is displayed as the message display displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state (11th G reception permitted state)" in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation unit, but may be provided as multiple operation units including the specific operation unit.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 32nd configuration G32, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types shown as examples) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 32nd configuration G32 can be expressed when an operation is received.

For example, if the 33rd configuration G33 is provided with a 2nd G reception allowable state, an 8th G reception allowable state (or a 7th G reception allowable state), and an 11th G reception allowable state among the reception allowable states described above, then in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation for a "specific operation unit (e.g., operation button 410)" is permitted, a model image display imitating the "specific operation unit" can be displayed, and a premonition display can be displayed which gives advance indication that reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted, and the reception allowable state can occur as a "single reception allowable state" in which reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted only once (2nd G reception allowable state), or as a "multiple reception allowable state" in which reception of an operation for the "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times (8th G reception allowable state, 11th G reception allowable state). Furthermore, the mock image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the reception permission state, and there are cases where the periodic change appears in units of a "predetermined time" (8G reception permission state) and cases where the periodic change appears in units of a "time longer than a predetermined time" (2G reception permission state, 11G reception permission state). When the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed so as to appear in units of a "predetermined time", the reception permission state can occur as a "multiple reception permission state" (see Figures 381 (b), (c), and (g)). When the periodic change is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the acceptance permission state can occur as a "single acceptance permission state" (see Figures 360 (b), (c), and (g)). In this regard, when the acceptance permission state occurs, whether the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" or in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is possible to expect that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner, since the premonition display can be displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (8th G reception allowable state), the reception allowable state does not occur as a "single reception allowable state" but always occurs as a "multiple reception allowable state" (see Fig. 381 (b), (c), (g)). In addition, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception allowable state, 11th G reception allowable state), the reception allowable state occurs either as a "single reception allowable state" (see Fig. 360 (b) and (c)) or as a "multiple reception allowable state" (see Fig. 390 (b) and (c)). According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time", it is possible to recognize that the reception allowable state occurs as a "multiple reception allowable state", so it is possible to encourage multiple operations from a relatively early stage. In contrast, if the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in units of "longer than a specified time," it will be difficult to tell whether the reception permission state is a "single reception permission state" or a "multiple reception permission state," which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, when the periodic change in the Momo image display is displayed to appear in units of "predetermined time" (when the multiple reception allowable state occurs), the premonition effect display can be displayed in a "specific manner (specific premonition display ZET)" (see FIG. 381(f)). In this regard, when the periodic change in the Momo image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time" (when it is difficult to recognize whether the single reception allowable state or the multiple reception allowable state occurs), if the premonition effect display is displayed in a "specific manner (specific premonition display ZET)" (see FIG. 360(f)), the reception allowable state does not occur as the above-mentioned "multiple reception allowable state", but always occurs as the above-mentioned "single reception allowable state". In other words, as described above, when the periodic change in the Momo image display is displayed to appear in units of "longer than a predetermined time", it is basically difficult to recognize whether the reception allowable state occurs as a "single reception allowable state" or a "multiple reception allowable state". However, in this case, when the premonition display is displayed in a "specific mode (specific premonition display ZET)," the "multiple reception permitted state" never occurs, and the "single reception permitted state" always occurs, which is expected to add a touch of artistic interest and maintain a good sense of tension.

In the above-mentioned "11th G reception permission state," the premonition display itself is not displayed, thereby realizing a configuration in which the premonition display is not output in a "specific manner (specific premonition display ZET)." Alternatively, the premonition display may be displayed, but the configuration may be realized by making it possible to display it only in a manner different from the "specific manner (specific premonition display ZET)."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of a "predetermined time", a message related to the operation reception for the "specific operation unit" is always displayed (such as "random hit" shown in Figs. 382(c) and (d)), but when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of a "longer than predetermined time", a message related to the operation reception for the specific operation unit may be displayed (such as "one hit" shown in Figs. 362(c) and (d) or "meteorite" shown in Figs. 391(c) and (d)) or the message may not be displayed. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by further providing a first G reception allowance state as the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, and by preventing the above message display in the first G reception allowance state (by modifying so as not to display "push" shown in Figs. 354(b) and (c)). With this configuration, when no message is displayed, it is possible to preferably indicate that only one operation is permitted (this always occurs as a state where one operation is permitted), and it is also possible to ensure that a message is displayed when multiple operations are permitted, which is expected to reduce the likelihood of forgetting to perform an operation or delaying the start of an operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, when the message is displayed in a state where the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the state where the reception is permitted may occur either as the "multiple reception permitted state" (see Figures 390 to 392) or as the "single reception permitted state" (see Figures 360 to 362), so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, the message display ("meteorite" shown in Fig. 391 (c) and (d)) displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state" in which the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" is in a manner that is not displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state" in which the periodic change in the replica image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time" (see Fig. 382 (c) and (d)), so that the length of the periodic change in the replica image display can be inferred through the manner of this message.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, in the "multiple reception permitted state (8th G reception permitted state)" in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time", the message display may be displayed in one of multiple modes. However, in this case, it is preferable that none of these modes is displayed as the message display displayed in the "multiple reception permitted state (11th G reception permitted state)" in which the periodic change in the model image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 33rd configuration G33, the operation means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operation part, but may be prepared as multiple operation parts including the specific operation part.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 33rd configuration G33, it is not necessary to have a state in which multiple types of reception are permitted. For example, even if there is a state in which only one type (or a number of types less than the number of types exemplified) is permitted to be received, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 33rd configuration G33 can be expressed when an operation is received.

Although the present invention has been described above using several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In the reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, the method of not displaying the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is accepted on the operation unit (not causing the same post-acceptance change) when no operation is accepted on the operation unit may be to "not generate the performance related to the reception period itself", or to "not display the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is accepted (does not cause the same post-acceptance change), but may display a post-acceptance display different from when an operation is accepted (may cause a different post-acceptance change)".

If multiple operation sections that are permitted to accept operations are prepared during the reception period for the above-mentioned performance example, those operation sections may be provided as different operation units, or may be provided as different parts within a single operation unit.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example presentation, the display simulating the operation part may be an image display in which the part is at least represented as an image, and parts other than the operation part may also be represented within the same image display.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, depending on the type of acceptance period, when the acceptance period occurs, the acceptance permission sound may be output in one of multiple modes with different expectation levels (expectation level for the granting of a bonus such as a jackpot), but in the acceptance period of the type in which the acceptance permission sound is output in such a manner, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the acceptance permission sound may be made inaudible (this is not a required configuration). In other words, in this case, if an operation is performed early after the acceptance period occurs, there is a risk that the expectation level information provided by the acceptance permission sound will not be recognized early, so it is expected that careless playing such as repeated operation will be suppressed before the acceptance period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, depending on the type of the acceptance period, the acceptance allowance sound may always be output in the same manner when the acceptance period occurs, but in the acceptance period of the type in which the acceptance allowance sound is output in such a manner, when a specific operation unit is operated while the acceptance allowance sound is being output, the acceptance allowance sound may be made inaudible, or the acceptance allowance sound may not be made inaudible (this is not a required configuration). In other words, in this case, if the acceptance allowance sound is not made inaudible, it is possible to recognize that the acceptance allowance sound was not a type of acceptance allowance sound that suggests the degree of expectation when it is operated early by mistake, and therefore it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, when the acceptance allowance sound is made inaudible, since it is not a type of acceptance allowance sound that suggests the degree of expectation in the first place, there is no disadvantage to operating early, but the player will be aware of the possibility that it was a type of acceptance allowance sound that suggests the degree of expectation, so it is expected that even if it is such a type of acceptance allowance sound, the player will be suppressed from playing the above-mentioned careless game.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the automatic effect function, a display such as "Auto button setting in progress" may be displayed, but this display is not necessarily required. In particular, when a pachinko machine 1 is realized as one that is not set to the automatic effect mode, but is always in a state where the automatic effect function can be enabled and does not have a process such as "setting to effect state" installed, it is desirable not to display a display such as "Auto button setting in progress." In a pachinko machine 1 that does not have a process such as "setting to effect state" installed, an effective period during which the automatic effect function is performed and an effective period during which the automatic effect function is not performed may be generated according to the type of operation acceptance effect that is permitted to be operated by the player.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "operation-related display (e.g., a mock image display, etc.)" can only appear when the operation reception to the operation unit is permitted (reception permitted period) or when the operation reception is permitted (reception permitted period), so at least when the "operation-related display" is displayed, the reception permitted period must occur or the display must be in a permitted state at the time of its display. Therefore, it may be possible for the reception permitted period to end before the "operation-related display" is hidden while it is displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, the "imitation image" may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and does not necessarily have to be an image that imitates the operating means that is the target of operation, such as an arrow image that points downward and moves up and down.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of presentation, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to those that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact action by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "action by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation unit) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

In addition, when the automatic performance function is adopted in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation reception within the operation valid period may be set to any timing within the operation valid period. In order to provide the player with an operation opportunity in a favorable manner, it is desirable that the operation reception is automatically generated (automatically accepted) when no operation is detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after more than half of the operation valid period has elapsed, and that the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation acceptance. In this sense, it is most desirable that the operation reception is automatically generated (automatically accepted) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period becomes one frame, and that the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation acceptance. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples regarding the automatic performance function, if the bar display is not hidden but is maintained even after the valid period has ended, it is desirable to execute a performance that changes the state of the operating means to be operated in accordance with the timing at which the valid period ends (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). This is expected to prevent players from misunderstanding that the validity period is still in effect, even if the bar display is not hidden but is instead kept on display.

In each of the above examples of effects, when "period," "time," or "state" is mentioned, it may be the smallest unit of control, such as the period, time, or state of one frame.

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" in response to the operation acceptance during each acceptance period (operation-permitted state) in the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example does not necessarily have to indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as an acceptance period for determining whether the probability fluctuation function is enabled during the execution period of the jackpot game and be executed as the post-acceptance display, or it may occur as an acceptance period in a simple mini-game that has nothing to do with the expectation suggestion regarding the game and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Or, it may occur based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during various interval periods, etc., and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Therefore, the acceptance period in the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example does not necessarily have to occur during the period in which the pattern fluctuation is being executed. In addition, even if it is displayed as a post-acceptance display that does not indicate such expectation, multiple modes may be prepared for the post-acceptance display and it may be displayed in any of the multiple modes.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, the effects sounds such as "BGM effect sound" and "BMG playback sound" refer to sounds whose audible output can be initiated based on the start winning, and which can be output so that the audible state can be maintained across multiple pattern changes.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, "when the third background image HK3 is prepared as the same background image as the first background image HK1" means that the first background image HK1 and the third background image HK3 are displayed using the same data, and in this sense, it can be said that the "third background image HK3" no longer exists. In other words, the "first background image HK1" is displayed in place of the "third background image HK3" (or the "first background image HK1" is left displayed).

The model image representing the operation receiving portion that receives the operation and the border decoration image that decorates the border of the image may be prepared separately as image data, and the image data may be combined to display as an integrated model image.

In the example shown in FIG. 144, when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means, there are two cases: a "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed (FIG. 144(a) and (c)), and a "special button imitation image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIG. 144(b) and (d)). However, when the "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed (FIG. 144(a) and (c)), an operation opportunity may be given to the first operation means (first operation receiving section), and when the "special button imitation image BMGb" is displayed (FIG. 144(b) and (d)), an operation opportunity may be given to a second operation means (second operation receiving section) different from the first operation means (first operation receiving section).

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the components (operation means) prepared as the object of operation may be realized as those requiring a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as a button), those requiring an insertion/removal operation (such as a sword decoration), or those requiring a player action such as non-contact or touching (such as a proximity sensor).

The peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decoration that is actually provided on the periphery of the "operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given," but it is sufficient if at least a part of it does not imitate the peripheral decoration, and there may be a part that imitates the peripheral decoration.

The second effective period during which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is displayed in a "display mode that features the movement of the gauge image GG" and the effective period during which the gauge image itself is not displayed are not limited to a specific set time, but may continue indefinitely unless a specific condition unrelated to the passage of time is met.

If the specific image TG is displayed within the validity period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

The "automatic reception performance" described in FIG. 144 and subsequent figures may employ any of the implementation methods for the "automatic reception performance" exemplified earlier. When the automatic reception performance is performed, any of the implementation methods described above may be employed for how the model image and gauge image are displayed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception performance occurs, depending on the type of performance state when the performance occurs, or the type of the reception performance (post-operation performance) itself, or the conditions under which the reception performance occurs, there are cases where the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is executed even if there is no operation by the player during the valid period (the "automatic performance function" is enabled), and cases where the post-operation performance is not executed if there is no operation by the player during the valid period (the "automatic performance function" is not enabled). The timing at which the automatic performance function is enabled may be a predetermined timing during the valid period, may be the timing at which the valid period ends, or may be the timing a little while after the valid period ends.

The reception period (operation permission state) exemplified in each of the above-mentioned performance examples (for example, reception periods D, E and reception periods F, G shown in Fig. 194 to Fig. 199) does not necessarily have to occur within the performance pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment). For example, it may occur (based on the establishment of a predetermined condition) during a period when the pattern change is not being performed (for example, a period when a jackpot game is being performed or various interval periods) rather than during a period when the pattern change is being performed. In this case, "x seconds after the start of the change" shown in Fig. 190 may be applied to a pattern change of y seconds that is shorter than x seconds, and the timing of "x seconds after the start of the change" may arrive after the pattern change of y seconds has ended, and the reception period D may be generated at that timing. According to this configuration, the reception period D occurs after the pattern change is stopped with the reserve at "0", so that a player who is about to stop playing can be held back. In this sense, it may be set as "x seconds after the change stops" rather than "x seconds after the change starts".

In addition, the acceptance periods exemplified in the above-mentioned examples (e.g., acceptance periods D and E and acceptance periods F and G shown in Figures 194 to 199) do not necessarily have to have the end condition of the acceptance period set to "the passage of a predetermined time value", and the acceptance period may end when a predetermined end condition is met (e.g., when 10 game balls are received in the large prize opening).

At the timing shown in FIG. 228(b), the action target display (mock image display) and remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) may be in a hidden state and cannot be seen, as shown in FIG. 212(a).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance effect image, etc.) can be used in common (can be executed in the same performance mode) for multiple reception periods with different types of post-reception performance (conversation announcement in which the expectation level is suggested depending on which conversation appears, movement performance in which the expectation level is suggested depending on whether the movable body moves or not, cut-in announcement in which the expectation level is suggested depending on which mode the cut-in display appears, etc.), thereby making it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) is in a proper state (a state in which the reception period has ended). In other words, since the post-reception performance differs depending on the type of reception period, it is difficult to recognize when looking at the performance content whether it is being performed within the reception period or is being performed as a result of the reception period having ended. In this regard, by preparing a disappearance EF performance that can appear in a common (same) performance mode when the reception period ends, regardless of the type of reception period, it becomes possible to appropriately indicate that the operation reception (operation reception) has been properly performed and the post-reception performance is being executed. However, as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), there may be cases where a disappearance EF performance (such as a disappearance effect image) that is common to multiple types of post-acceptance performance is executed, and for example, a dedicated disappearance EF performance that can be executed only when a specific type of post-acceptance performance occurs may be prepared.

In addition, each reception period (e.g., the first E reception period, the second E reception period, the third E reception period, the fourth E reception period, the fifth E reception period, and the sixth E reception period, etc.) for each of the above-mentioned performance examples and their variations may include those that occur within the decorative pattern change period and those that do not occur within the decorative pattern change period.

The first periodicity display SH1 and the third periodicity display SH3 described above may be displayed as "periodic changes in the simulated image display imitating the operation means" displayed during the reception period. In other words, in this case, the first periodicity display SH1 and the third periodicity display SH3 are synonymous with the simulated image display (button simulated image BMGa).

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the BGM sound effect refers to a sound that can be audibly output across multiple pattern changes, for example.

The configurations described in each of the above examples are for when the game is being played normally, and not for when some abnormal condition occurs.

The acceptance permission state in each of the above-mentioned examples of performance does not have to occur based on a judgment, for example, it may occur due to the passage of time, and the display after acceptance does not have to indicate the result of the judgment, for example, a mini-game during a jackpot.

The word "mo" used in explaining each of the above examples is synonymous with "mo" (model).

The above-mentioned "multiple operation permitted state" may be a state in which the selection target (e.g., character, etc.) changes each time an operation is performed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of performance, variations, notes, etc., the items described as "desirable" are merely descriptions of the additional effects that may be obtained when the same configuration is provided, and it goes without saying that the same configuration does not necessarily have to be provided.

In other words, in the embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, but this is not limited to this, and the invention may also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case too, the same effects can be achieved.

Claims (1)

A determination means for making a determination;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judging means;
a replica image display means for displaying a replica image of an object to be operated when the acceptance of the operation by the player is permitted,
A gaming machine that, when an operation by a player is accepted, displays a post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance,
The post-acceptance display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of post-acceptance displays including a first post-acceptance display and a second post-acceptance display,
the first post-reception display and the second post-reception display are displayed as images different from each other,
When the post-reception display is displayed as the second post-reception display, if a specific condition is satisfied while the second post-reception display is displayed, the second post-reception display can be made to be in a hidden state based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, but when the post-reception display is displayed as the first post-reception display, even if the specific condition is satisfied while the first post-reception display is displayed, the first post-reception display is not made to be in a hidden state based on the satisfaction of the specific condition,
When the first post-reception display is not made to be in a non-display state based on the establishment of the specific condition, a specific type of effect sound will not be newly output when the specific condition is established. However, when the second post-reception display is made to be in a non-display state based on the establishment of the specific condition, there are cases where the specific type of effect sound will be newly output when the specific condition is established, and cases where the specific type of effect sound will not be newly output.
the specific condition is set as one condition that may be established when an operation or action other than an operation for displaying either the first post-reception display or the second post-reception display is performed,
moreover,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific condition is satisfied, a special sound different from the specific type of performance sound can be output based on the specific condition being satisfied, regardless of whether the first post-acceptance display is not made invisible based on the specific condition being satisfied or the second post-acceptance display is made invisible as a result of the specific condition being satisfied.

Images